From 2672e8db9e22184c81f3025a33c0c88e3de67b8a Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Thu, 31 Mar 2022 17:40:17 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 01/15] Larry's edits to Matthew (#2373) Co-authored-by: lrsallee Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2373 --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 405 ++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------- 1 file changed, 186 insertions(+), 219 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 21df2297a1..31149a2647 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -2048,52 +2048,46 @@ MAT 22 1 z8vz figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: To rebuke the religious lea MAT 22 1 bc6y αὐτοῖς 1 to them Alternate translation: “to the people” MAT 22 2 xps3 ὡμοιώθη ἡ Βασιλεία τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 The kingdom of the heavens is like This is the beginning of a parable. See how you translated this in [13:24](../13/24.md). MAT 22 3 wur1 figs-activepassive τοὺς κεκλημένους 1 those who had been invited If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the people the king had invited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 22 4 l896 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues telling a parable. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 22 4 c7x4 figs-activepassive δούλους λέγων, εἴπατε τοῖς κεκλημένοις 1 servants, saying, ‘Tell those who have been invited If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “servants, saying, ‘Tell those whom I have invited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 22 4 arqx figs-quotations δούλους λέγων, εἴπατε τοῖς κεκλημένοις 1 servants, saying, ‘Tell those who have been invited You can state this direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “servants, ordering them to tell those whom he invited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MAT 22 4 iq6y ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Alternate translation: “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” MAT 22 4 xu4t figs-activepassive οἱ ταῦροί μου καὶ τὰ σιτιστὰ τεθυμένα 1 My oxen and fattened calves have been killed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “My servants have killed my oxen and my fattened calves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 22 4 ro9h figs-explicit οἱ ταῦροί μου καὶ τὰ σιτιστὰ τεθυμένα 1 My oxen and fattened calves have been killed It is implied that the animals are cooked and ready to eat. Alternate translation: “My servants have killed and cooked my oxen and my fattened calves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 22 4 c48a οἱ ταῦροί μου καὶ τὰ σιτιστὰ 1 My oxen and fattened calves Alternate translation: “My best oxen and calves for eating” -MAT 22 5 e4fl figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues telling a parable. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 22 5 zu4c οἱ δὲ ἀμελήσαντες 1 But they, having paid no attention Alternate translation: “But the guests the king invited, ignoring the invitation” -MAT 22 7 la7s figs-explicit ἀπώλεσεν τοὺς φονεῖς ἐκείνους 1 he killed those murderers It is implied that the king’s soldiers killed the **murderers**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 22 8 u2ax figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues telling a parable. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 22 7 la7s figs-explicit ἀπώλεσεν τοὺς φονεῖς ἐκείνους 1 he killed those murderers It is implied that it was the king’s soldiers who killed the **murderers**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 22 8 k98u figs-activepassive οἱ…κεκλημένοι 1 those who had been invited If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom I invited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 22 9 p48s τὰς διεξόδους τῶν ὁδῶν 1 the crossings of the roads “the crossroads” or “where the main roads of the city cross.” The king is sending the servants to the place where they are most likely to find people. +MAT 22 9 p48s τὰς διεξόδους τῶν ὁδῶν 1 the crossings of the roads The king is sending the servants to the place where they are most likely to find people. Alternate translation: “the crossroads” or “where the main roads of the city cross” MAT 22 10 uva7 πονηρούς τε καὶ ἀγαθούς 1 both evil and good Alternate translation: “both the good people and the bad people” MAT 22 10 c6ph figs-activepassive καὶ ἐπλήσθη ὁ γάμος ἀνακειμένων 1 and the wedding hall was filled with those reclining at table If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “So the guests filled the wedding hall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 22 10 fy3a ὁ γάμος 1 the wedding hall a large room -MAT 22 11 s8ga figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues telling a parable. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 22 12 c7iy figs-rquestion πῶς εἰσῆλθες ὧδε μὴ ἔχων ἔνδυμα γάμου? 1 how did you come in here, not having wedding clothes? The king uses a question to scold the guest. Alternate translation: “you are not wearing proper clothes for a wedding. You should not be here.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 22 10 fy3a ὁ γάμος 1 the wedding hall A **wedding hall** was a large room where weddings were performed. +MAT 22 12 c7iy figs-rquestion πῶς εἰσῆλθες ὧδε μὴ ἔχων ἔνδυμα γάμου? 1 how did you come in here, not having wedding clothes? The king uses a question to scold the guest. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “you are not wearing proper clothes for a wedding. You should not be here.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 22 12 w7vb ὁ…ἐφιμώθη 1 he was speechless Alternate translation: “the man was silent” -MAT 22 13 wt88 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus concludes his parable about a marriage feast. MAT 22 13 jmp4 δήσαντες αὐτοῦ πόδας καὶ χεῖρας 1 Having bound him foot and hand Alternate translation: “After you have tied him up so that he cannot move his hands or feet” MAT 22 13 rpy8 figs-metonymy τὸ σκότος τὸ ἐξώτερον 1 the outer darkness Here, **outer darkness** is a metonym for the place where God sends those who reject them. This is a place that is completely separated from God forever. See how you translated this in [8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “the dark place away from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 22 13 s9ge translate-symaction ὁ κλαυθμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων 1 the weeping and the grinding of teeth Here, **the grinding of teeth** is symbolic action, representing extreme sadness and suffering. See how you translated this in [8:12](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “weeping and expressing their extreme suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) MAT 22 14 hy3a figs-activepassive πολλοὶ γάρ εἰσιν κλητοὶ, ὀλίγοι δὲ ἐκλεκτοί 1 For many are called, but few are chosen If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For God invites many people, but he only chooses a few” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 22 14 yz5f γάρ 1 For This marks a transition. Jesus has ended the parable and will now explain the point of the parable. +MAT 22 14 yz5f γάρ 1 For Here, **For** marks a transition. Jesus has ended the parable and will now explain the point of the parable. MAT 22 15 y826 0 Connecting Statement: This begins an account of the religious leaders trying to trap Jesus with several difficult questions. Here the Pharisees ask him about paying taxes to Caesar. MAT 22 15 u2mj ὅπως αὐτὸν παγιδεύσωσιν ἐν λόγῳ 1 how they might entrap him in his words Alternate translation: “how they could cause Jesus to say something wrong so they could arrest him” MAT 22 16 eae4 figs-explicit τοὺς μαθητὰς αὐτῶν…τῶν Ἡρῳδιανῶν 1 their disciples … the Herodians The **disciples** of the Pharisees supported paying taxes only to Jewish authorities. The **Herodians** supported paying taxes to the Roman authorities. It is implied that the Pharisees believed that no matter what Jesus said, he would offend one of these groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 22 16 rf66 translate-names Ἡρῳδιανῶν 1 Herodians These were officials and followers of the Jewish king Herod. He was friends with Roman authorities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -MAT 22 16 t2qa οὐ γὰρ βλέπεις εἰς πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων 1 for you do not look at the face of men Alternate translation: “you do not show special honor to anyone” or “you do not consider anyone more important than anyone else” +MAT 22 16 rf66 translate-names Ἡρῳδιανῶν 1 Herodians The **Herodians** were officials and followers of the Jewish king Herod. He was friends with Roman authorities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MAT 22 16 t2qa οὐ…βλέπεις εἰς πρόσωπον ἀνθρώπων 2 for you do not look at the face of men Alternate translation: “you do not show special honor to anyone” or “you do not consider anyone more important than anyone else” MAT 22 17 a9by figs-explicit δοῦναι κῆνσον Καίσαρι 1 to give a poll tax to Caesar People did not pay taxes directly to **Caesar** but to one of his **tax** collectors. Alternate translation: “to pay the taxes that Caesar requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 22 18 a2ti figs-rquestion τί με πειράζετε, ὑποκριταί? 1 Why are you testing me, you hypocrites? Jesus uses a question to scold those who were trying to trap him. Alternate translation: “Do not test me, you hypocrites!” or “I know that you hypocrites are only trying to test me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 22 19 cie7 translate-bmoney δηνάριον 1 a denarius This was a Roman coin worth one day’s wages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) +MAT 22 18 a2ti figs-rquestion τί με πειράζετε, ὑποκριταί? 1 Why are you testing me, you hypocrites? Jesus uses a question to scold those who were trying to trap him. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Do not test me, you hypocrites!” or “I know that you hypocrites are only trying to test me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 22 19 cie7 translate-bmoney δηνάριον 1 a denarius The **denarius** was a Roman coin worth one day’s wages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) MAT 22 20 ue7j αὐτοῖς 1 to them Here, **them** refers to the Herodians and the disciples of the Pharisees. -MAT 22 20 dr3d figs-rquestion τίνος ἡ εἰκὼν αὕτη καὶ ἡ ἐπιγραφή? 1 Whose image and name inscription is this? Jesus uses a question to get the people to think deeply about what he is saying. Alternate translation: “Tell me whose image and name you see on this coin.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 22 20 dr3d figs-rquestion τίνος ἡ εἰκὼν αὕτη καὶ ἡ ἐπιγραφή? 1 Whose image and name inscription is this? Jesus uses a question to get the people to think deeply about what he is saying. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Tell me whose image and name you see on this coin.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 22 21 yd84 figs-ellipsis Καίσαρος 1 Caesar’s You can make clear the understood information in their response. Alternate translation: “The coin has Caesar’s image and name on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 22 21 i6g5 τὰ Καίσαρος 1 the things of Caesar Alternate translation: “the things that belong to Caesar” MAT 22 21 l3dh τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the things of God’s Alternate translation: “the things that belong to God” MAT 22 23 wqg2 0 Connecting Statement: The Sadducees try to trap Jesus by asking him a difficult question about marriage and the resurrection of the dead. -MAT 22 24 xl5f figs-quotesinquotes Διδάσκαλε, Μωϋσῆς εἶπεν, ἐάν τις ἀποθάνῃ 1 Teacher, Moses said, ‘If someone may have died The religious leaders were asking Jesus about what **Moses** had written in the scriptures. If your language does not allow quotes within quotes, you could state this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “Teacher, Moses said that if a man dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +MAT 22 24 xl5f figs-quotesinquotes Διδάσκαλε, Μωϋσῆς εἶπεν, ἐάν τις ἀποθάνῃ 1 Teacher, Moses said, ‘If someone may have died The religious leaders were asking Jesus about what **Moses** had written in the Scriptures. If your language does not allow quotes within quotes, you could state this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “Teacher, Moses said that if a man dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MAT 22 24 u7dm ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ…τὴν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ…τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὐτοῦ 1 his brother … his wife … for his brother Here, **his** refers to the dead man. -MAT 22 25 kjf5 0 Connecting Statement: The Sadducees continue asking Jesus a question. -MAT 22 25 ag5z translate-ordinal ὁ πρῶτος 1 the first “the oldest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -MAT 22 26 r6bq translate-ordinal ὁ δεύτερος…ὁ τρίτος…τῶν ἑπτά 1 the second … the third … the seventh “the next oldest … the next oldest … the youngest” or “his oldest younger brother … that brother’s oldest younger brother … the youngest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +MAT 22 25 ag5z translate-ordinal ὁ πρῶτος 1 the first Alternate translation: “the oldest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +MAT 22 26 r6bq translate-ordinal ὁ δεύτερος…ὁ τρίτος…τῶν ἑπτά 1 the second … the third … the seventh Alternate translation: “the next oldest … the next oldest … the youngest” or “his oldest younger brother … that brother’s oldest younger brother … the youngest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) MAT 22 27 t7md ὕστερον…πάντων 1 last of all Alternate translation: “after every brother had died” -MAT 22 28 wbd1 οὖν 1 Therefore Here the Sadducees shift from the story about the seven brothers to their actual question. +MAT 22 28 wbd1 οὖν 1 Therefore The Sadducees use the word **Therefore** to shift from the story about the seven brothers to their actual question. MAT 22 28 s743 ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει 1 in the resurrection Alternate translation: “when dead people come back to life” MAT 22 29 p1ae figs-explicit πλανᾶσθε 1 You have been led astray It is implied that Jesus means that they are mistaken about what they think about the resurrection. Alternate translation: “You are mistaken about the resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 22 29 xkvg figs-activepassive πλανᾶσθε 1 You have been led astray If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “You are mistaken” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2102,55 +2096,51 @@ MAT 22 30 ygr1 ἐν…τῇ ἀναστάσει 1 in the resurrection Alternat MAT 22 30 uaj9 οὔτε γαμοῦσιν 1 they neither marry Alternate translation: “people do not marry” MAT 22 30 qkv1 figs-activepassive οὔτε γαμίζονται 1 nor are given in marriage If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “nor will people give their children in marriage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 22 31 nx66 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus begins asking a question to show that people who have died will live again. -MAT 22 31 b9sy figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑμῖν ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ λέγοντος 1 have you not read what was spoken to you by God, saying This is the first part of a rhetorical question that continues into the next verse. Jesus scolds the Sadducees by asking a question. He is not looking for an answer. Alternate translation: “I know you have read what was spoken to you by God. You know that he said,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 22 31 b9sy figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑμῖν ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ λέγοντος 1 have you not read what was spoken to you by God, saying This is the first part of a rhetorical question that continues into the next verse. Jesus scolds the Sadducees by asking a question. He is not looking for an answer. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I know you have read what was spoken to you by God. You know that he said,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 22 31 ljj7 figs-activepassive τὸ ῥηθὲν ὑμῖν ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 what was spoken to you by God If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what God spoke to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 22 32 zb7a 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus finishes asking the question he began in verse 31. -MAT 22 32 qcq3 figs-rquestion ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ? 1 I am the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob’? This is the end of the question that begins with the words **have you not read** in verse 31. Jesus asks this question to remind the religious leaders of what they know from scripture. “I know you have read it, but you do not seem to understand what … Jacob.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 22 32 qcq3 figs-rquestion ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ? 1 I am the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob’? This is the end of the question that begins with the words **have you not read** in verse 31. Jesus asks this question to remind the religious leaders of what they know from scripture. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I know you have read it, but you do not seem to understand what God meant when he said he was the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 22 32 zwbp figs-quotations ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ Θεὸς Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰσαὰκ, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς Ἰακώβ? 1 I am the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob’? You can translate this direct quotation as an indirect quotation. “God, who said to Moses that he is the God of Abraham, the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MAT 22 32 t7lv figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων 1 of the dead, but of the living You can state these nominal adjectives as adjectives. Alternate translation: “of dead people, but he is the God of living people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 22 32 t7lv figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων 1 of the dead, but of the living If your language does not use the nominal adjectives **dead** and **living**, you can express them as adjectives. Alternate translation: “of dead people, but he is the God of living people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 22 34 jnd7 0 Connecting Statement: A Pharisee who was an expert in the law tries to trap Jesus by asking him a difficult question about the greatest commandment. -MAT 22 35 ud5r νομικὸς 1 a lawyer “an expert in the law.” This is a Pharisee who had special skill in understanding the law of Moses. -MAT 22 37 vng8 0 General Information: Jesus quotes a verse from Deuteronomy as the greatest commandment. +MAT 22 35 ud5r νομικὸς 1 a lawyer This is a Pharisee who had special skill in understanding the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “an expert in the law” +MAT 22 37 vng8 ἀγαπήσεις Κύριον τὸν Θεόν σου ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ καρδίᾳ σου, καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ψυχῇ σου, καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ διανοίᾳ σου 1 General Information: Jesus quotes a verse from Deuteronomy as the greatest commandment. MAT 22 37 xl3e figs-doublet ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ καρδίᾳ σου, καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ψυχῇ σου, καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ διανοίᾳ σου 1 with all your heart, and with all your soul, and with all your mind These three phrases are used together to mean “completely” or “earnestly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) MAT 22 37 g0mt figs-metonymy ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ καρδίᾳ σου, καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ψυχῇ σου, καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ διανοίᾳ σου 1 with all your heart, and with all your soul, and with all your mind Here, **heart** and **soul** are metonyms for a person’s inner being. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 22 38 q8j3 figs-doublet ἡ μεγάλη καὶ πρώτη ἐντολή 1 the great and first commandment Here, **great** and **first** mean the same thing. They emphasize that this is the most important commandment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -MAT 22 39 xk1k 0 General Information: Jesus quotes a verse from Leviticus as the second greatest commandment. +MAT 22 38 q8j3 figs-doublet ἡ μεγάλη καὶ πρώτη ἐντολή 1 the great and first commandment Here, **great** and **first** mean the same thing. They emphasize that this is the most important **commandment**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +MAT 22 39 xk1k ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν 1 General Information: Jesus quotes a verse from Leviticus as the second greatest commandment. MAT 22 39 yx7v τὸν πλησίον σου 1 your neighbor Here, **neighbor** means more than just those who live nearby. Jesus means a person must **love** all people. -MAT 22 40 wpr8 figs-metonymy ἐν ταύταις ταῖς δυσὶν ἐντολαῖς, ὅλος ὁ νόμος κρέμαται καὶ οἱ προφῆται 1 On these two commandments hang the whole law and the prophets Here the phrase **the whole law and the prophets** refers to all of scripture. Alternate translation: “Everything that Moses and the prophets wrote in the scriptures is based on these two commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 22 40 wpr8 figs-metonymy ἐν ταύταις ταῖς δυσὶν ἐντολαῖς, ὅλος ὁ νόμος κρέμαται καὶ οἱ προφῆται 1 On these two commandments hang the whole law and the prophets Here the phrase **the whole law and the prophets** refers to all of Scripture. Alternate translation: “Everything that Moses and the prophets wrote in the scriptures is based on these two commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 22 41 r9ca 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus asks the Pharisees a difficult question in order to stop their attempts to trap him. -MAT 22 41 pj4a δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story when Jesus asks the religious leaders a question. +MAT 22 41 pj4a δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story when Jesus asks the religious leaders a question. MAT 22 42 xlf8 υἱός 1 son Here, **son** means “descendant.” MAT 22 42 xhwj figs-ellipsis τοῦ Δαυείδ 1 Of David In this reply, it is understood that they are saying whose son the Christ will be. Alternate translation: “He is the son of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 22 43 dpp5 0 General Information: Jesus quotes from the Psalms to show that the Christ is more than just “the son of David.” -MAT 22 43 cu3h figs-rquestion πῶς οὖν Δαυεὶδ ἐν Πνεύματι καλεῖ Κύριον αὐτὸν 1 How then does David in the Spirit call him Lord, saying Jesus begins to ask a question to make the religious leaders think deeply about the Psalm he is about to quote. The question continues into the next verse. Alternate translation: “Then, tell me why David in the Spirit calls him Lord, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 22 43 yu5m Δαυεὶδ ἐν Πνεύματι 1 David in the Spirit “David, whom the Holy Spirit is inspiring.” This means the Holy Spirit is influencing what David says. +MAT 22 43 dpp5 0 General Information: In verses 43-44, Jesus quotes from the Psalms to show that the Christ is more than just “the son of David.” +MAT 22 43 cu3h figs-rquestion πῶς οὖν Δαυεὶδ ἐν Πνεύματι καλεῖ Κύριον αὐτὸν 1 How then does David in the Spirit call him Lord, saying Jesus begins to ask a question to make the religious leaders think deeply about the Psalm he is about to quote. The question continues into the next verse. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Then, tell me why David in the Spirit calls him Lord, saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 22 43 yu5m Δαυεὶδ ἐν Πνεύματι 1 David in the Spirit This means the Holy Spirit is influencing what David says. Alternate translation: “David, whom the Holy Spirit is inspiring” MAT 22 43 dn9y καλεῖ…αὐτὸν 1 does … call him Here, **him** refers to the Christ, who is also the descendant of David. MAT 22 44 wy85 εἶπεν Κύριος 1 The Lord said Here, **Lord** refers to God the Father. MAT 22 44 k3f7 τῷ Κυρίῳ μου 1 to my Lord Here, **Lord** refers to the Christ. Also, **my** refers to David. This means the Christ is superior to David, because he is David’s “Lord.” MAT 22 44 dz2a translate-symaction κάθου ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 Sit at my right hand To sit at the **right hand** of God is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “Sit in the place of honor beside me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) MAT 22 44 e59n figs-idiom ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 until I put your enemies under your feet This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies” or “until I make your enemies bow down before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 22 45 l962 0 General Information: This is the end of the part of the story that began in [19:1](../19/01.md), that tells of Jesus ministering in Judea. -MAT 22 45 e2wd 0 Connecting Statement: This is the end of the account of the religious leaders trying to trap Jesus with several difficult questions. -MAT 22 45 d8gl figs-rquestion εἰ οὖν Δαυεὶδ καλεῖ αὐτὸν, Κύριον, πῶς υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ἐστιν? 1 If David therefore calls him ‘Lord,’ how is he his son? Jesus uses a question to make the religious leaders think deeply about what he is saying. Alternate translation: “David calls him ‘Lord,’ so the Christ has to be more than just a descendant of David.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 22 45 d8gl figs-rquestion εἰ οὖν Δαυεὶδ καλεῖ αὐτὸν, Κύριον, πῶς υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ἐστιν? 1 If David therefore calls him ‘Lord,’ how is he his son? Jesus uses a question to make the religious leaders think deeply about what he is saying. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “David calls him ‘Lord,’ so the Christ has to be more than just a descendant of David.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 22 45 x9uh εἰ οὖν Δαυεὶδ καλεῖ αὐτὸν, Κύριον, 1 If David therefore calls him ‘Lord,’ **David** referred to Jesus as **Lord** because Jesus was not only a descendant of David, but he was also superior to him. MAT 22 46 n3hw figs-metonymy ἀποκριθῆναι αὐτῷ λόγον 1 to answer him a word Here, **word** refers to what people say. Alternate translation: “to answer him anything” or “to answer him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 22 46 c1f2 figs-explicit ἐπερωτῆσαι αὐτὸν οὐκέτι 1 to question him any longer It is implied that no one asked him the kind of questions that were intended to make him say something wrong so the religious leaders could arrest him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 23 intro m99i 0 # Matthew 23 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Hypocrites

Jesus calls the Pharisees hypocrites many times ([Matthew 23:13](../mat/23/13.md)) and carefully tells what he means by doing that. The Pharisees made rules that no one could actually obey, and then they persuaded the ordinary people that they were guilty because they could not obey the rules. Also, the Pharisees obeyed their own rules instead of obeying God’s original commands in the law of Moses.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Name calling

In most cultures, it is wrong to insult people. The Pharisees took many of the words in this chapter as insults. Jesus called them “hypocrites,” “blind guides,” “fools,” and “serpents” ([Matthew 23:16-17](./16.md)). Jesus uses these words say that God would surely punish them because they were doing wrong.

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “He who is greatest among you will be your servant” ([Matthew 23:11-12](./11.md)). -MAT 23 1 skq4 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that runs through [25:46](../25/46.md), where Jesus teaches about salvation and the final judgment. Here he begins to warn the people about the scribes and Pharisees. +MAT 23 1 skq4 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that continues to [25:46](../25/46.md), where Jesus teaches about salvation and the final judgment. Here he begins to warn the people about the scribes and Pharisees. MAT 23 2 dnu3 figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τῆς Μωϋσέως καθέδρας ἐκάθισαν 1 sit in Moses’ seat Here, **seat** represents the authority to rule and make judgments. Alternate translation: “have authority as Moses had” or “have authority to say what the law of Moses means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 23 3 q336 πάντα οὖν ὅσα ἐὰν…ποιήσατε, καὶ τηρεῖτε 1 Therefore whatever … do and observe these things Alternate translation: “all the things … do them and observe them” or “everything … do it and observe it” +MAT 23 3 q336 πάντα…ὅσα ἐὰν…ποιήσατε, καὶ τηρεῖτε 1 Therefore whatever … do and observe these things Alternate translation: “all the things … do them and observe them” or “everything … do it and observe it” MAT 23 4 xce6 figs-metaphor δεσμεύουσιν δὲ φορτία βαρέα καὶ δυσβάστακτα, καὶ ἐπιτιθέασιν ἐπὶ τοὺς ὤμους τῶν ἀνθρώπων; αὐτοὶ δὲ τῷ δακτύλῳ αὐτῶν οὐ θέλουσιν κινῆσαι αὐτά 1 They tie up heavy burdens that are difficult to carry, and then they put them on people’s shoulders. But they themselves will not move a finger to carry themThey tie up loads that are heavy and difficult to carry, and they put them on people’s shoulders. But they themselves are not willing to lift their finger to move them Here, **bind heavy burdens … put them on people’s shoulders** is a metaphor for the religious leaders making many difficult rules and making the people obey them. Alternate translation: “they make you obey many rules that are difficult to follow, but they do not lift a finger to help” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 23 4 xtr1 figs-idiom δεσμεύουσιν δὲ φορτία βαρέα καὶ δυσβάστακτα, καὶ ἐπιτιθέασιν ἐπὶ τοὺς ὤμους τῶν ἀνθρώπων; αὐτοὶ δὲ τῷ δακτύλῳ αὐτῶν οὐ θέλουσιν κινῆσαι αὐτά 1 And they tie up loads, heavy and difficult to carry, and they put them on the shoulders of men, but they themselves are not willing with their finger to move them Here, **will not move a finger** is an idiom that means the religious leaders will not help the people. Alternate translation: “they make you obey many rules that are difficult to follow. But they do nothing at all to help the people follow the rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 23 5 nw4y figs-activepassive πάντα δὲ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν, ποιοῦσιν πρὸς τὸ θεαθῆναι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 They do all their deeds to be seen by people If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “They do all their deeds so that people can see what they do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 23 5 ln6j figs-explicit πλατύνουσι γὰρ τὰ φυλακτήρια αὐτῶν καὶ μεγαλύνουσι τὰ κράσπεδα 1 For they make their phylacteries wide, and they enlarge the edges of their garments Both of these are things the Pharisees do to appear as if they honor God more than other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 23 5 gcv7 φυλακτήρια 1 phylacteries small leather boxes containing paper with scripture written on it +MAT 23 5 ln6j figs-explicit πλατύνουσι γὰρ τὰ φυλακτήρια αὐτῶν καὶ μεγαλύνουσι τὰ κράσπεδα 1 For they make their phylacteries wide, and they enlarge the edges of their garments Both of these actions are things the Pharisees do to appear as if they honor God more than other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 23 5 gcv7 φυλακτήρια 1 phylacteries The **phylacteries** were small leather boxes containing paper with scripture written on it. MAT 23 5 h2qj μεγαλύνουσι τὰ κράσπεδα 1 they enlarge the edges of their garments The Pharisees made the tassels on the bottom of their robes especially long to show their devotion to God. -MAT 23 6 i6ec 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues speaking to the crowds and disciples about the Pharisees. -MAT 23 6 arf1 τὴν πρωτοκλισίαν…τὰς πρωτοκαθεδρίας 1 the chief places … the chief seats Both of these are the places where the most important people sit. -MAT 23 7 cp2m ταῖς ἀγοραῖς 1 the marketplaces large, open-air areas where people buy and sell items +MAT 23 6 arf1 τὴν πρωτοκλισίαν…τὰς πρωτοκαθεδρίας 1 the chief places … the chief seats Both of these places are the places where the most important people sit. +MAT 23 7 cp2m ταῖς ἀγοραῖς 1 the marketplaces The **marketplace** was a large, open-air area where people bought and sold items. MAT 23 7 cbe8 figs-activepassive καλεῖσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων, Ῥαββεί 1 to be called ‘Rabbi’ by people. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for people to call them ‘Rabbi.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 23 8 uk5v figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς δὲ μὴ κληθῆτε 1 But you must not be called If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But you must not let anyone call you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 23 8 ru2b figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 you All occurrences of “you” are plural and refer to all of Jesus’ followers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +MAT 23 8 ru2b figs-you ὑμεῖς…ὑμῶν…ὑμεῖς 1 you All occurrences of **you** and **your** are plural and refer to all of Jesus’ followers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 23 8 s5du ὑμεῖς ἀδελφοί ἐστε 1 you are brothers Here, **brothers** means “fellow believers.” MAT 23 9 l33f figs-hyperbole Πατέρα μὴ καλέσητε ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς; 1 you should not call any of you on the earth ‘father,’ Jesus is using hyperbole to tell his hearers that they must not allow even the most important people to be more important to them than God is. Alternate translation: “do not call any man on earth your father” or “do not say that any man on earth is your father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 23 9 any8 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ ὁ οὐράνιος 1 heavenly Father **Father** here is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -2164,7 +2154,7 @@ MAT 23 12 uz88 figs-activepassive ὑψωθήσεται 1 will be exalted If you MAT 23 13 ts6z figs-metaphor 0 General Information: Jesus speaks of the **kingdom of the heavens** as if it were a house, the door into which the Pharisees have shut from the outside so that neither they nor anyone else can enter the house. If you do not keep the metaphor of the house, be sure to change all instances of “shut” and “enter.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 23 13 qjt2 figs-metonymy 0 General Information: The words **kingdom of the heavens**, which refer to God, who lives in heaven, occur only in Matthew, try to use your language’s word for “heaven” in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 23 13 aw49 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus begins to rebuke the religious leaders because of their hypocrisy. -MAT 23 13 i9dq οὐαὶ δὲ ὑμῖν 1 But woe to you “But how terrible it will be for you!” See how you translated this in [11:21](../11/21.md). +MAT 23 13 i9dq οὐαὶ δὲ ὑμῖν 1 But woe to you See how you translated this in [11:21](../11/21.md). Alternate translation: “But how terrible it will be for you” MAT 23 13 j4sd figs-metonymy κλείετε τὴν Βασιλείαν τῶν Οὐρανῶν ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων; ὑμεῖς γὰρ οὐκ εἰσέρχεσθε, οὐδὲ τοὺς εἰσερχομένους ἀφίετε εἰσελθεῖν 1 you shut the kingdom of the heavens in front of men. For you do not enter in, nor do you permit those entering to enter The phrase **the kingdom of the heavens** refers to God ruling over his people. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** is found only in the book of Matthew. If possible, use **heavens** in your translation. Alternate translation: “You prevent people from accepting God, who lives in heaven, as king, but you do not accept him as king, and you make it impossible for those about to accept him as king to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 23 13 xtjf figs-metaphor κλείετε τὴν Βασιλείαν τῶν Οὐρανῶν ἔμπροσθεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων; ὑμεῖς γὰρ οὐκ εἰσέρχεσθε, οὐδὲ τοὺς εἰσερχομένους ἀφίετε εἰσελθεῖν 1 you shut the kingdom of the heavens in front of men. For you do not enter in, nor do you permit those entering to enter Jesus is speaking of the **kingdom of the heavens** as if it were a house, the door into which the Pharisees have shut from the outside so that neither they nor anyone else can enter the house. Alternate translation: “You make it impossible for people to enter the kingdom of heaven, but you do not enter it, and neither do you allow those about to enter to do so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 23 15 e4a8 figs-idiom περιάγετε τὴν θάλασσαν καὶ τὴν ξηρὰν 1 you go over the sea and the dry land This is an idiom that means they go to distant places. Alternate translation: “you travel great distances” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2175,38 +2165,38 @@ MAT 23 16 r5k3 figs-metaphor ὁδηγοὶ τυφλοὶ 1 you blind guides The MAT 23 16 qgh8 ἐν τῷ ναῷ, οὐδέν ἐστιν 1 by the temple, it is nothing Alternate translation: “by the temple does not have to keep his oath” MAT 23 16 lni3 ὀφείλει 1 he is obligated Alternate translation: “he is obligated by his oath” MAT 23 17 s7a8 figs-metaphor μωροὶ καὶ τυφλοί! 1 You fools and blind men! The Jewish leaders were spiritually **blind**. Although they thought of themselves as teachers, they were unable to understand God’s truth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 23 17 f9zd figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ μείζων ἐστίν, ὁ χρυσὸς ἢ ὁ ναὸς ὁ ἁγιάσας τὸν χρυσόν? 1 For which is greater, the gold or the temple that has made the gold holy? Jesus uses this question to rebuke the Pharisees because they treated the **gold** as if it were more important than the **temple**. Alternate translation: “The temple that has dedicated the gold to God is more important than the gold!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 23 17 f9zd figs-rquestion τίς γὰρ μείζων ἐστίν, ὁ χρυσὸς ἢ ὁ ναὸς ὁ ἁγιάσας τὸν χρυσόν? 1 For which is greater, the gold or the temple that has made the gold holy? Jesus uses this question to rebuke the Pharisees because they treated the **gold** as if it were more important than the **temple**. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “The temple that has dedicated the gold to God is more important than the gold!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 23 17 j6d5 ὁ ναὸς ὁ ἁγιάσας τὸν χρυσόν 1 the temple that has made the gold holy Alternate translation: “the temple that makes the gold belong to God alone” -MAT 23 18 lr61 figs-ellipsis καί 1 And The understood information can be made clear. Alternate translation: “And you also say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 23 18 lr61 figs-ellipsis καί 1 And You can make the understood information explicit. Alternate translation: “And you also say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 23 18 d331 οὐδέν ἐστιν 1 it is nothing Alternate translation: “He does not have to do what he has sworn to do” or “He does not have to keep his oath” -MAT 23 18 ngd2 τῷ δώρῳ 1 the gift This is an animal or grain that a person would bring to God by putting it on God’s altar. +MAT 23 18 ngd2 τῷ δώρῳ 1 the gift This **gift** was an animal or grain that a person would bring to God by putting it on God’s altar. MAT 23 18 zg72 ὀφείλει 1 he is obligated Alternate translation: “he is obligated by his oath” MAT 23 19 y6hk figs-metaphor τυφλοί 1 blind men The Jewish leaders were spiritually **blind**. Although they thought of themselves as teachers, they were unable to understand God’s truth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 23 19 g7qr figs-rquestion τί γὰρ μεῖζον, τὸ δῶρον, ἢ τὸ θυσιαστήριον τὸ ἁγιάζον τὸ δῶρον? 1 For which is greater, the gift or the altar that makes the gift holy? Jesus uses this question to rebuke the Pharisees for treating the **gift** as if it were more important than the **altar**. Alternate translation: “The altar that makes the gift holy is greater than the gift!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 23 19 g7qr figs-rquestion τί γὰρ μεῖζον, τὸ δῶρον, ἢ τὸ θυσιαστήριον τὸ ἁγιάζον τὸ δῶρον? 1 For which is greater, the gift or the altar that makes the gift holy? Jesus uses this question to rebuke the Pharisees for treating the **gift** as if it were more important than the **altar**. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “The altar that makes the gift holy is greater than the gift!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 23 19 gt4d τὸ θυσιαστήριον τὸ ἁγιάζον τὸ δῶρον 1 the altar that makes the gift holy Alternate translation: “the altar that makes the gift special to God” MAT 23 20 x4q4 ἐν πᾶσι τοῖς ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ 1 by everything that is on it Alternate translation: “by all the gifts that people have placed on it” -MAT 23 21 m21b τῷ κατοικοῦντι αὐτόν 1 the one inhabiting it God the Father -MAT 23 22 ejw9 τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ 1 the one sitting on it God the Father -MAT 23 23 lg3r οὐαὶ ὑμῖν…ὑποκριταί! 1 Woe to you … hypocrites! “How terrible it will be for you … hypocrites!” See how you translated this in [11:21](../11/21.md). +MAT 23 21 m21b τῷ κατοικοῦντι αὐτόν 1 the one inhabiting it This refers to God the Father. +MAT 23 22 ejw9 τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ 1 the one sitting on it As in the previous verse, this refers to God the Father. +MAT 23 23 lg3r οὐαὶ ὑμῖν…ὑποκριταί! 1 Woe to you … hypocrites! See how you translated this in [11:21](../11/21.md). Alternate translation: “How terrible it will be for you” MAT 23 23 n94y translate-unknown τὸ ἡδύοσμον, καὶ τὸ ἄνηθον, καὶ τὸ κύμινον 1 the mint and the dill and the cumin These are various leaves and seeds people used to make food taste good. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 23 23 hga6 ἀφήκατε 1 you have neglected Alternate translation: “you have not obeyed” MAT 23 23 c8bb τὰ βαρύτερα 1 the weightier matters Alternate translation: “the more important matters” MAT 23 23 m32j ταῦτα δὲ ἔδει ποιῆσαι 1 But it was necessary to do these Alternate translation: “But you ought to have obeyed these more important laws” -MAT 23 23 nn6q figs-doublenegatives κἀκεῖνα μὴ ἀφιέναι 1 and not to neglect those You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “while also obeying the less important laws” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +MAT 23 23 nn6q figs-doublenegatives κἀκεῖνα μὴ ἀφιέναι 1 and not to neglect those If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … neglect**, you can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “while also obeying the less important laws” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) MAT 23 24 y84y figs-metaphor ὁδηγοὶ τυφλοί! 1 You blind guides Jesus uses this metaphor to describe the Pharisees. Jesus means that the Pharisees do not understand God’s commands or how to please him. Therefore, they cannot teach others how to please God. See how you translated this metaphor in [15:14](../15/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 23 24 l7fh figs-metaphor οἱ διϋλίζοντες τὸν κώνωπα τὴν δὲ κάμηλον καταπίνοντες! 1 you who are straining out the gnat but swallowing the camel! Being careful to follow the less important laws and ignoring the more important laws is as foolish as being careful not to swallow the smallest unclean animal but eating the meat of the largest unclean animal. Alternate translation: “you are as foolish as a person who strains out a gnat that falls into his drink but swallows a camel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 23 24 g87t figs-hyperbole οἱ διϋλίζοντες τὸν κώνωπα τὴν δὲ κάμηλον καταπίνοντες 1 you who are straining out the gnat but swallowing the camel Jesus understands that it is impossible for a man to swallow a **camel**. He is exaggerating in order to emphasize how foolish the scribes and Pharisees are to ignore the most important laws. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 23 24 xgoa figs-hyperbole οἱ διϋλίζοντες τὸν κώνωπα τὴν δὲ κάμηλον καταπίνοντες! 1 you who are straining out the gnat but swallowing the camel! It is not possible for a person to swallow a camel. Jesus is exaggerating to emphasize how the Pharisees and scribes are ignoring thing that should be obvious to them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) MAT 23 24 sn3z οἱ διϋλίζοντες τὸν κώνωπα 1 you who are straining out the gnat This means to pour a liquid through a cloth to remove a **gnat** from a drink. -MAT 23 24 whk2 κώνωπα 1 gnat a small flying insect -MAT 23 25 ns27 οὐαὶ ὑμῖν…ὑποκριταί! 1 Woe to you … hypocrites! “How terrible it will be for you … hypocrites!” See how you translated this in [11:21](../11/21.md). +MAT 23 24 whk2 κώνωπα 1 gnat A **gnat** is a small flying insect. +MAT 23 25 ns27 οὐαὶ ὑμῖν…ὑποκριταί! 1 Woe to you … hypocrites! See how you translated this in [11:21](../11/21.md). Alternate translation: “How terrible it will be for you” MAT 23 25 ru45 figs-metaphor ὅτι καθαρίζετε τὸ ἔξωθεν τοῦ ποτηρίου καὶ τῆς παροψίδος, ἔσωθεν δὲ γέμουσιν ἐξ ἁρπαγῆς καὶ ἀκρασίας 1 For you clean the outside of the cup and of the plate, but inside they are full of greed and self-indulgence This is a metaphor that means the scribes and Pharisees appear pure on the **outside** to others, but on the **inside** they are wicked. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 23 25 tz8h γέμουσιν ἐξ ἁρπαγῆς καὶ ἀκρασίας 1 they are full of greed and self-indulgence Alternate translation: “they want what others have, and they act in the interest of the self” MAT 23 26 lb5j figs-metaphor Φαρισαῖε τυφλέ! 1 You blind Pharisee! The Pharisees were spiritually blind. Although they thought of themselves as teachers, they were unable to understand God’s truth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 23 26 f9p8 figs-metaphor καθάρισον πρῶτον τὸ ἐντὸς τοῦ ποτηρίου καὶ τῆς παροψίδος, ἵνα γένηται καὶ τὸ ἐκτὸς αὐτῶν καθαρόν 1 Clean first the inside of the cup and of the plate, so that the outside of it may become clean also This is a metaphor that means that if they would become pure in their inner being, then the result is that they would be pure on the **outside** as well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 23 27 kry1 figs-simile παρομοιάζετε τάφοις κεκονιαμένοις…ἀκαθαρσίας 1 you are like whitewashed tombs … uncleanness This is a simile that means the scribes and Pharisees may appear to be pure on the outside, but they are wicked on the inside. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MAT 23 27 ta1f figs-explicit τάφοις κεκονιαμένοις 1 whitewashed tombs “tombs that someone has painted white.” The Jews would paint **tombs** white so that people would easily see them and avoid touching them. Touching a tomb would make a person ceremonially unclean. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 23 29 tse6 figs-nominaladj τῶν δικαίων 1 of the righteous You can state this nominal adjective as an adjective. Alternate translation: “of the righteous people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 23 27 ta1f figs-explicit τάφοις κεκονιαμένοις 1 whitewashed tombs The Jews would paint **tombs** white so that people would easily see them and avoid touching them. Touching a tomb would make a person ceremonially unclean. Alternate translation: “tombs that someone has painted white” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 23 29 tse6 figs-nominaladj τῶν δικαίων 1 of the righteous If your language does not use the nominal adjective **righteous**, you can express it as an adjective. Alternate translation: “of the righteous people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 23 30 kkf2 ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 in the days of our fathers Alternate translation: “during the time of our forefathers” MAT 23 30 nq82 οὐκ ἂν ἤμεθα κοινωνοὶ αὐτῶν 1 we would not have been partners with them Alternate translation: “we would not have joined with them” MAT 23 30 x99m figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ αἵματι τῶν προφητῶν 1 in the blood of the prophets Here, **blood** is associated with the killing of the prophets. Alternate translation: “in the killing of the prophets” or “in the murder of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2215,8 +2205,7 @@ MAT 23 32 bpz8 figs-metaphor καὶ ὑμεῖς πληρώσατε τὸ μέ MAT 23 33 va5c figs-doublet ὄφεις, γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν 1 You serpents, you offspring of vipers Here, **serpents** and **vipers** both refer to poisonous snakes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) MAT 23 33 cfj3 figs-metaphor ὄφεις, γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν 1 You serpents, you offspring of vipers Here, **serpents** and **vipers** are dangerous creatures and often symbols of evil. Alternate translation: “You are as evil as dangerous and poisonous snakes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 23 33 blv6 γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν 1 you offspring of vipers Here, **offspring** means “having the characteristic of.” See how you translated a similar phrase in [3:7](../03/07.md). -MAT 23 33 vi6c figs-rquestion πῶς φύγητε ἀπὸ τῆς κρίσεως τῆς Γεέννης? 1 how might you escape from the judgment of hell? Jesus uses this question as a rebuke. Alternate translation: “there is no way for you to escape the judgment of hell!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 23 34 an97 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues to rebuke the religious leaders because of their hypocrisy. +MAT 23 33 vi6c figs-rquestion πῶς φύγητε ἀπὸ τῆς κρίσεως τῆς Γεέννης? 1 how might you escape from the judgment of hell? Jesus uses this question as a rebuke. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “there is no way for you to escape the judgment of hell!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 23 34 rq8c ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω πρὸς ὑμᾶς προφήτας, καὶ σοφοὺς, καὶ γραμματεῖς 1 I am sending to you prophets and wise men and scribes Sometimes the present tense is used to show that someone will do something very soon. Alternate translation: “I will send prophets, wise men, and scribes to you” MAT 23 35 l7ya figs-idiom ἔλθῃ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς πᾶν αἷμα δίκαιον ἐκχυννόμενον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 might come upon you all the righteous blood being shed on the earth The phrase **come upon you** is an idiom that means to receive punishment. Alternate translation: “God will punish you for all the righteous blood being shed on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 23 35 h5n7 figs-metonymy ἔλθῃ ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς πᾶν αἷμα δίκαιον ἐκχυννόμενον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 might come upon you all the righteous blood being shed on the earth To shed **blood** is a metonym meaning to kill people, so “righteous blood that being shed on the earth” represents **righteous** people who are being killed. Alternate translation: “God will punish you for the murders of all the righteous people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2224,23 +2213,23 @@ MAT 23 35 b3a7 figs-metonymy ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος…ἕως τοῦ MAT 23 35 z95g figs-merism Ἂβελ…Ζαχαρίου 1 of … Abel … of Zechariah **Abel** was the first righteous victim of murder, and **Zechariah**, who was murdered by Jews in the temple, was probably thought to be the last. These two men represent all the righteous people who have been murdered. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) MAT 23 35 cbq9 Ζαχαρίου 1 of Zechariah This **Zechariah** was not the father of John the Baptist. MAT 23 35 s11l ὃν ἐφονεύσατε 1 whom you killed Jesus does not mean the people to whom he is speaking actually **killed** Zechariah. He means their ancestors did. -MAT 23 36 ut4l ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you “I tell you the truth.” This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. +MAT 23 36 ut4l ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. Alternate translation: “I tell you the truth” MAT 23 37 w23t 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus mourns over the people of Jerusalem because they reject every messenger that God sends to them. MAT 23 37 vne9 figs-apostrophe Ἰερουσαλὴμ, Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Jerusalem, Jerusalem Jesus speaks as if he were talking only to the city of Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-apostrophe]]) MAT 23 37 xuj1 figs-metonymy Ἰερουσαλὴμ, Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 Jerusalem, Jerusalem Jesus speaks to the people of Jerusalem as though they were the city itself. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 23 37 tz4r figs-activepassive τοὺς ἀπεσταλμένους πρὸς αὐτήν 1 those who have been sent to you If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom God sends to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 23 37 t9y7 figs-metaphor τὰ τέκνα σου 1 your children Jesus is speaking to Jerusalem as if it is a woman and the people are her **children**. Alternate translation: “your people” or “your inhabitants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 23 37 xv4t figs-simile ὃν τρόπον ὄρνις ἐπισυνάγει τὰ νοσσία αὐτῆς ὑπὸ τὰς πτέρυγας 1 just as a hen gathers her chicks under her wings This is a simile that emphasizes Jesus’ love for the people and how he wanted to take care of them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -MAT 23 37 as8p translate-unknown ὄρνις 1 a hen a female chicken. You can translate with any bird that protects her children under her wing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 23 37 as8p translate-unknown ὄρνις 1 a hen A **hen** is a female chicken. You can translate this with any bird that protects her children under her wing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 23 38 r6ss ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν ἔρημος 1 your house is left to you desolate Alternate translation: “God will leave your house, and it will be empty” MAT 23 38 ck2z figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν 1 your house This could refer to: (1) the city of Jerusalem. (2) the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 23 39 i14n λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν 1 For I say to you This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. +MAT 23 39 i14n λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν 1 For I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. MAT 23 39 ig61 figs-metonymy εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι Κυρίου! 1 Blessed is the one coming in the name of the Lord! Here, **in the name** means “in the power” or “as a representative.” See how you translated this in [21:9](../21/09.md). Alternate translation: “He who comes in the power of the Lord is blessed” or “He who comes as the representative of the Lord will be blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 24 intro h2a2 0 # Matthew 24 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter, Jesus begins to prophesy about the future from that time until he returns as king of everything. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The end of the age”

In this chapter, Jesus gives an answer to his disciples when they ask how they will know when he will come again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])

### The example of Noah

In the time of Noah, God sent a great flood to punish people for their sins. He warned them many times about this coming flood, but it actually began suddenly. In this chapter, Jesus draws a comparison between that flood and the last days. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Let”

The ULT uses this word to begin several commands of Jesus, such as “let those who are in Judea flee to the mountains” (24:16), “let him who is on the housetop not go down to take anything out of his house” (24:17), and “let him who is in the field not return to take his cloak” (24:18). There are many different ways to form a command. Translators must select the most natural ways in their own languages. MAT 24 1 dh7u 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus begins to describe events that will happen before he comes again during the end times. MAT 24 1 ke79 figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 from the temple It is implied that Jesus was not in the **temple** itself. He was in the courtyard around the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 24 2 mh5y figs-rquestion οὐ βλέπετε ταῦτα πάντα? 1 Do you not see all these things? Jesus uses a question to make the disciples think deeply about what he will tell them. Alternate translation: “Let me tell you something about all these buildings.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 24 2 fnv8 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you “I tell you the truth.” This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. +MAT 24 2 mh5y figs-rquestion οὐ βλέπετε ταῦτα πάντα? 1 Do you not see all these things? Jesus uses a question to make the disciples think deeply about what he will tell them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Let me tell you something about all these buildings.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 24 2 fnv8 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. Alternate translation: “I tell you the truth” MAT 24 2 l45q figs-explicit οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ καταλυθήσεται 1 certainly stone upon stone may not be left here, that will not be torn down It is implied that enemy soldiers will tear down the stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 24 2 ecdz figs-activepassive οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ ὧδε λίθος ἐπὶ λίθον, ὃς οὐ καταλυθήσεται 1 certainly stone upon stone may not be left here, that will not be torn down If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the enemy soldiers come, they will tear down every stone in these buildings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 24 3 e1is figs-explicit τί τὸ σημεῖον τῆς σῆς παρουσίας, καὶ συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος? 1 what will be the sign of your coming and of the end of the age? Here, **your coming** refers to when Jesus will come in power, establishing God’s reign on earth and bringing this **age** to an end. Alternate translation: “what will be the sign that you are about to come and that the world is about to end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2250,13 +2239,13 @@ MAT 24 5 twh8 figs-metaphor πολλοὺς πλανήσουσιν 1 will lead m MAT 24 6 hdz3 figs-activepassive ὁρᾶτε, μὴ θροεῖσθε 1 See that you are not troubled If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Do not let these things trouble you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 24 7 ygf2 figs-parallelism ἐγερθήσεται γὰρ ἔθνος ἐπὶ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 For nation will rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom Both of these mean the same thing. Jesus is emphasizing that people everywhere will fight each other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 24 7 xuow figs-metonymy ἐγερθήσεται γὰρ ἔθνος ἐπὶ ἔθνος, καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν 1 For nation will rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom, Here, **nation** and **kingdom** represent the people within them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 24 8 q4gl figs-metaphor ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων 1 are the beginning of birth pains This refers to the **pains** a woman feels before giving **birth** to a child. This metaphor means these wars, famines, and earthquakes are just the **beginning** of the events that will lead to the end of the age. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 24 8 q4gl figs-metaphor ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων 1 are the beginning of birth pains Here, **birth pains** refers to the **pains** a woman feels before giving **birth** to a child. This metaphor means these wars, famines, and earthquakes are just the **beginning** of the events that will lead to the end of the age. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 24 9 u5e6 παραδώσουσιν ὑμᾶς εἰς θλῖψιν, καὶ ἀποκτενοῦσιν ὑμᾶς 1 they will deliver you up to tribulation and will kill you Alternate translation: “people will give you over to the authorities, who will make you suffer and will kill you.” MAT 24 9 uw1i figs-metonymy ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 you will be hated by all the nations Here, **nations** is a metonym, referring to the people of nations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 24 9 nsh3 figs-activepassive ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 you will be hated by all the nations If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “People from every nation will hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 24 9 u2bd figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 for the sake of my name Here, **name** refers to the complete person. Alternate translation: “because you believe in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 24 11 mi2e figs-idiom ἐγερθήσονται 1 will be raised up Here, **be raised up** is an idiom for “become established.” Alternate translation: “will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 24 11 tjb3 figs-metaphor καὶ πλανήσουσιν πολλούς 1 and will lead many astray Here, **lead … astray** is a metaphor for persuading someone to believe something that is not true. Alternate translation: “and will deceive many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 24 11 tjb3 figs-metaphor καὶ πλανήσουσιν πολλούς 1 and will lead many astray Here, **will lead many astray** is a metaphor for persuading someone to believe something that is not true. Alternate translation: “and will deceive many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 24 12 w4af figs-abstractnouns τὸ πληθυνθῆναι τὴν ἀνομίαν 1 lawlessness will be increased If your readers would misunderstand the abstract noun **lawlessness**, you can express it with the phrase “disobeying the law.” Alternate translation: “disobeying the law will increase” or “people will disobey God’s law more and more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 24 12 bu9b figs-idiom ψυγήσεται ἡ ἀγάπη τῶν πολλῶν 1 the love of many will grow cold This could mean: (1) many people will no longer love other people. (2) many people will no longer love God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 24 13 v3ex figs-activepassive ὁ…ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, οὗτος σωθήσεται 1 the one who has endured to the end, he will be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will save the person who endures to the end” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2274,9 +2263,8 @@ MAT 24 19 f533 ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις 1 in those day MAT 24 20 u4jb ἵνα μὴ γένηται ἡ φυγὴ ὑμῶν 1 so that your flight may not occur Alternate translation: “so that you will not have to flee” or “so that you will not have to run away” MAT 24 20 m6mx χειμῶνος 1 in winter Alternate translation: “in the cold season” MAT 24 22 vd3z figs-doublenegatives εἰ μὴ ἐκολοβώθησαν αἱ ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι, οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα σάρξ 1 unless those days had been shortened, no flesh would have been saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “If God does not shorten that time of suffering, everyone will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -MAT 24 22 r9qw figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 flesh “people.” Here, “flesh” is poetic way of referring to human beings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +MAT 24 22 r9qw figs-synecdoche σάρξ 1 flesh Here, “flesh” is poetic way of referring to human beings. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 24 22 p6m8 figs-activepassive κολοβωθήσονται αἱ ἡμέραι ἐκεῖναι 1 those days will be shortened If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will shorten the time of suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 24 23 avv5 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues speaking to his disciples. MAT 24 23 avm2 μὴ πιστεύσητε 1 you may not believe it Alternate translation: “do not believe the false things they have said to you” MAT 24 24 n744 figs-metaphor ὥστε πλανῆσαι εἰ δυνατὸν καὶ τοὺς ἐκλεκτούς 1 so as to lead astray, if possible, even the elect Here, **lead astray** is a metaphor for persuading someone to believe something that is not true. You can translate this as two sentences. Alternate translation: “so as to deceive, if possible, even the elect” or “so as to deceive people. If possible, they would even deceive the elect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 24 26 fmx1 figs-quotations ἐὰν…εἴπωσιν ὑμῖν, ἰδοὺ, ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ ἐστίν, μὴ ἐξέλθητε 1 if they might say to you, ‘Behold, he is in the wilderness,’ you may not go out there You can state this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “if someone tells you that the Christ is in the wilderness, do not go out there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -2285,7 +2273,7 @@ MAT 24 26 n2pt ἐν τοῖς ταμείοις 1 he is in the inner rooms Alte MAT 24 27 j1w1 figs-simile ὥσπερ…ἡ ἀστραπὴ ἐξέρχεται ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν καὶ φαίνεται ἕως δυσμῶν, οὕτως ἔσται ἡ παρουσία 1 just as the lightning comes out from the east and shines as far as the west, in the same way will be the coming This means that the Son of Man will come very quickly and will be easy to see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 24 27 za8b figs-123person τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 of the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 24 28 mu35 writing-proverbs ὅπου ἐὰν ᾖ τὸ πτῶμα, ἐκεῖ συναχθήσονται οἱ ἀετοί 1 Wherever the corpse is, there the vultures will be gathered This is probably a proverb that the people of Jesus’ time understood. This could mean: (1) when the Son of Man comes, everyone will see him and know that he has come. (2) wherever spiritually dead people are, false prophets will be there to tell them lies. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) -MAT 24 28 ivl8 οἱ ἀετοί 1 the vultures birds that eat the bodies of dead or dying creatures +MAT 24 28 ivl8 οἱ ἀετοί 1 the vultures A **vulture** is a large bird that eats the bodies of dead or dying creatures. MAT 24 29 zmm6 εὐθέως…μετὰ τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν ἡμερῶν ἐκείνων, ὁ ἥλιος 1 immediately after the tribulation of those days the sun Alternate translation: “as soon as the tribulation of those days has finished, the sun” MAT 24 29 l15m τὴν θλῖψιν τῶν ἡμερῶν ἐκείνων 1 the tribulation of those days Alternate translation: “that time of suffering” MAT 24 29 zuk4 figs-activepassive ὁ ἥλιος σκοτισθήσεται 1 the sun will be darkened If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will make the sun dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2295,12 +2283,12 @@ MAT 24 30 tld8 figs-metonymy πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ 1 all the tribes Here MAT 24 31 fl54 ἀποστελεῖ τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ μετὰ σάλπιγγος μεγάλης 1 he will send his angels with a great sound of a trumpet Alternate translation: “he will have a trumpet sounded and send his angels” or “he will have an angel blow a trumpet, and he will send his angels” MAT 24 31 rlb4 figs-123person ἀποστελεῖ…αὐτοῦ 1 he will send his Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 24 31 wi28 ἐπισυνάξουσιν 1 they will gather together Alternate translation: “his angels will gather up” -MAT 24 31 iq8c τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 his elect These are the people whom the Son of Man has chosen. +MAT 24 31 iq8c τοὺς ἐκλεκτοὺς αὐτοῦ 1 his elect The **elect** are the people whom the Son of Man has chosen. MAT 24 31 ibw7 figs-parallelism ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων, ἀπ’ ἄκρων οὐρανῶν ἕως ἄκρων αὐτῶν 1 from the four winds, from the ends of the sky as far as the ends of it Both of these mean the same thing, and emphasize how far the angels will go to gather the elect. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 24 31 wp9t figs-idiom ἐκ τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων, ἀπ’ ἄκρων οὐρανῶν ἕως ἄκρων αὐτῶν 1 from the four winds, from the ends of the sky as far as the ends of it These phrases are idioms that mean “from everywhere.” Alternate translation: “from all over the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 24 33 cu5a figs-123person ἐγγύς ἐστιν 1 he is near Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “the time for me to come is near” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 24 33 cfz8 figs-metaphor ἐπὶ θύραις 1 at the gates “close to the gates.” Jesus uses the imagery of a king or important official getting close to the gates of a walled city. It is a metaphor meaning the time for Jesus to come is soon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 24 34 j8np ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you “I tell you the truth.” This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. +MAT 24 33 cfz8 figs-metaphor ἐπὶ θύραις 1 at the gates Jesus uses the imagery of a king or important official getting close to the gates of a walled city. It is a metaphor meaning the time for Jesus to come is soon. Alternate translation: “close to the gates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 24 34 j8np ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. Alternate translation: “I tell you the truth” MAT 24 34 gld5 figs-euphemism οὐ μὴ παρέλθῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη 1 this generation may certainly not pass away Here, **pass away** is a polite way of saying “die.” Alternate translation: “this generation will not all die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MAT 24 34 y73t ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη 1 this generation This could refer to: (1) the people alive when Jesus was speaking. (2) all people alive when these things Jesus has just described happen. Try to translate so that both interpretations are possible. MAT 24 34 fb4k ἕως ἂν πάντα ταῦτα γένηται 1 until all these things may have happened Alternate translation: “until God causes all these things to happen” @@ -2309,14 +2297,14 @@ MAT 24 35 i8vv figs-synecdoche ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ παρελ MAT 24 35 e6bf figs-metonymy οἱ…λόγοι μου οὐ μὴ παρέλθωσιν 1 my words words may certainly not pass away Here, **words** refers to what Jesus has said. Alternate translation: “what I say will always be true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 24 36 q4pj figs-metonymy τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης καὶ ὥρας 1 that day and hour Here, **day** and **hour** refer to the exact time that the Son of Man will return. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 24 36 wq5r οὐδὲ ὁ Υἱός 1 nor the Son Alternate translation: “not even the Son” -MAT 24 36 p5vu guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱός 1 Son This is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 24 36 f4s2 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 Father This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 24 36 p5vu guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱός 1 Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 24 36 f4s2 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 24 37 hf51 ὥσπερ γὰρ αἱ ἡμέραι τοῦ Νῶε, οὕτως ἔσται ἡ παρουσία τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 For just as the days of Noah were, thus will be the coming of the Son of Man Alternate translation: “For at the time when the Son of Man comes, it will be like the time of Noah.” MAT 24 37 cpn8 figs-123person τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 of the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 24 39 ffa6 καὶ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν 1 and they did not know You can translate this as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “and the people did not realize anything was happening” MAT 24 39 ah5v ἦρεν ἅπαντας; οὕτως ἔσται καὶ ἡ παρουσία τοῦ Υἱοῦ τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 took them all away—thus also will be the coming of the Son of Man You can translate this as a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “too them all away. This is how it will be when the Son of Man comes” MAT 24 40 ksk6 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus begins to tell his disciples to be ready for his return. -MAT 24 40 hth3 τότε 1 Then This is when the Son of Man comes. +MAT 24 40 hth3 τότε 1 Then This refers to the time when the Son of Man comes. MAT 24 40 gt4l figs-activepassive εἷς παραλαμβάνεται, καὶ εἷς ἀφίεται 1 one is taken, and one is left This could mean: (1) the Son of Man will take one away to heaven and will leave the other on earth for punishment. (2) the angels will take one away for punishment and leave the other for blessing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 24 42 j83i οὖν 1 Therefore Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true,” MAT 24 42 s6ir γρηγορεῖτε 1 be alert Alternate translation: “pay attention” @@ -2325,11 +2313,9 @@ MAT 24 43 ki5s figs-metaphor ὁ κλέπτης 1 the thief Jesus is saying he w MAT 24 43 zs23 ἐγρηγόρησεν ἂν 1 he would have been alert Alternate translation: “he would have guarded his house” MAT 24 43 lg7i figs-activepassive οὐκ ἂν εἴασεν διορυχθῆναι τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ 1 would not have allowed his house to be broken into If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “would not have allowed anyone to get into his house to steal things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 24 44 gd17 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 24 45 jua3 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues his proverb of a master and servants to illustrate that his disciples should be prepared for his return. -MAT 24 45 f92d figs-rquestion τίς ἄρα ἐστὶν ὁ πιστὸς δοῦλος καὶ φρόνιμος, ὃν κατέστησεν ὁ κύριος ἐπὶ τῆς οἰκετείας αὐτοῦ, τοῦ δοῦναι αὐτοῖς τὴν τροφὴν ἐν καιρῷ? 1 Who then is the faithful and wise slave whom his master has appointed over his household to give them their food at the proper time? Jesus uses this question to make his disciples think. Alternate translation: “So who is the faithful and wise servant? He is the one whom his has appointed over his household to give them their food at the proper time.” or “Be like the faithful and wise servant, whom his has appointed over his household to give them their food at the proper time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 24 45 f92d figs-rquestion τίς ἄρα ἐστὶν ὁ πιστὸς δοῦλος καὶ φρόνιμος, ὃν κατέστησεν ὁ κύριος ἐπὶ τῆς οἰκετείας αὐτοῦ, τοῦ δοῦναι αὐτοῖς τὴν τροφὴν ἐν καιρῷ? 1 Who then is the faithful and wise slave whom his master has appointed over his household to give them their food at the proper time? Jesus uses this question to make his disciples think. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So who is the faithful and wise servant? He is the one whom his has appointed over his household to give them their food at the proper time.” or “Be like the faithful and wise servant, whom his has appointed over his household to give them their food at the proper time.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 24 45 lf8d τοῦ δοῦναι αὐτοῖς τὴν τροφὴν 1 to give them their food Alternate translation: “to give the people in the master’s home their food” -MAT 24 47 lin7 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you “I tell you the truth.” This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. -MAT 24 48 ek9x writing-proverbs 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus concludes his proverb of a master and servants to illustrate that his disciples should be prepared for his return. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) +MAT 24 47 lin7 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. Alternate translation: “I tell you the truth” MAT 24 48 f9ft figs-metonymy εἴπῃ…ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὐτοῦ 1 might say in his heart Here, **heart** refers to the mind. Alternate translation: “might think in his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 24 48 per6 figs-activepassive χρονίζει μου ὁ κύριος 1 My master is delaying If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “My master is slow to return” or “My master will not return for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 24 50 bz5k figs-parallelism ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ᾗ οὐ προσδοκᾷ, καὶ ἐν ὥρᾳ ᾗ οὐ γινώσκει 1 on a day that he does not expect and at an hour that he does not know Both of these statements mean the same thing. They emphasize that the master will come when the servant is not expecting him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -2342,22 +2328,20 @@ MAT 25 1 pg5i figs-metonymy ὁμοιωθήσεται ἡ Βασιλεία τῶ MAT 25 1 uhj1 λαμπάδας 1 lamps This could could refer to: (1) oil **lamps**. (2) torches made by putting cloth around the end of a stick and wetting the cloth with oil. MAT 25 2 c8nf πέντε…ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 five of them Alternate translation: “five of the virgins” MAT 25 3 b37a οὐκ ἔλαβον μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν ἔλαιον 1 did not take oil with themselves Alternate translation: “took with them only the oil in their lamps” -MAT 25 5 r458 δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Jesus starts to tell a new part of the story. +MAT 25 5 r458 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Jesus starts to tell a new part of the story. MAT 25 5 pvh4 figs-activepassive χρονίζοντος…τοῦ νυμφίου 1 while the bridegroom was delaying If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “while the bridegroom was taking a long time to arrive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 25 5 qf4b ἐνύσταξαν πᾶσαι 1 they all became sleepy Alternate translation: “all ten virgins became sleepy” MAT 25 6 ufp2 κραυγὴ γέγονεν 1 there was a cry Alternate translation: “someone shouted” -MAT 25 7 a3mz figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues telling a parable. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 25 7 ni6u ἐκόσμησαν τὰς λαμπάδας ἑαυτῶν 1 trimmed their lamps Alternate translation: “adjusted their lamps so they would burn brightly” -MAT 25 8 tsh4 figs-nominaladj αἱ…μωραὶ ταῖς φρονίμοις εἶπον 1 the foolish said to the wise You can state these nominal adjectives as adjectives. Alternate translation: “the foolish virgins said to the wise virgins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 25 8 tsh4 figs-nominaladj αἱ…μωραὶ ταῖς φρονίμοις εἶπον 1 the foolish said to the wise If your language does not use the nominal adjectives **foolish** and **wise**, you can express them as adjectives. Alternate translation: “the foolish virgins said to the wise virgins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 25 8 i1r7 figs-idiom αἱ λαμπάδες ἡμῶν σβέννυνται 1 our lamps are going out This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the fire in our lamps is about to burn out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 25 10 q6q9 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus concludes the parable about the ten virgins. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 25 10 rfh6 ἀπερχομένων δὲ αὐτῶν 1 But while they were going away Alternate translation: “But while the five foolish virgins went away” -MAT 25 10 jej8 figs-ellipsis ἀγοράσαι 1 to buy You can state the understood information clearly. Alternate translation: “to buy more oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 25 10 t229 αἱ ἕτοιμοι 1 the prepared These are the virgins who had extra oil. +MAT 25 10 jej8 figs-ellipsis ἀγοράσαι 1 to buy You can state the understood information explicitly. Alternate translation: “to buy more oil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 25 10 t229 αἱ ἕτοιμοι 1 the prepared This phrase refers to the virgins who had extra oil. MAT 25 10 g29i figs-activepassive ἐκλείσθη ἡ θύρα 1 the door was shut If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the servants shut the door” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 25 11 e5pz figs-explicit ἄνοιξον ἡμῖν 1 open for us You can state this implicit information explicitly. Alternate translation: “open the door for us so we can come inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 25 12 z5u1 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you “I tell you the truth.” This adds emphasis to what the master says next. -MAT 25 12 h4a8 οὐκ οἶδα ὑμᾶς 1 I do not know you “I do not know who you are.” This is the end of the parable. +MAT 25 12 z5u1 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you This adds emphasis to what the master says next. Alternate translation: “I tell you the truth” +MAT 25 12 h4a8 οὐκ οἶδα ὑμᾶς 1 I do not know you Alternate translation: “I do not know who you are” MAT 25 13 hn7w figs-metonymy οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν ἡμέραν, οὐδὲ τὴν ὥραν 1 you do not know the day nor the hour Here, **day** and **hour** refer to an exact time. Alternate translation: “you do not know the exact time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 25 13 xfdj figs-explicit οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν ἡμέραν, οὐδὲ τὴν ὥραν 1 you do not know the day nor the hour You can state the implied information explicitly. Alternate translation: “you do not know the exact time when the Son of Man will return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 25 14 cn21 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus tells a parable about faithful and unfaithful servants to illustrate that his disciples should remain faithful during his absence and be prepared for his return. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) @@ -2365,36 +2349,30 @@ MAT 25 14 zqi2 ὥσπερ 1 it is like The word **it** here refers to the king MAT 25 14 wv71 ἀποδημῶν 1 going to another country Alternate translation: “was ready to go to another country” or “was to go soon to another country” MAT 25 14 vhw1 παρέδωκεν αὐτοῖς τὰ ὑπάρχοντα αὐτοῦ 1 handed over to them his possessions Alternate translation: “put them in charge of his wealth” MAT 25 14 fmb3 τὰ ὑπάρχοντα αὐτοῦ 1 his possessions Alternate translation: “his property” or “his wealth” -MAT 25 15 i81u translate-bmoney πέντε τάλαντα 1 five talents “five talents of gold.” Avoid translating this into modern money. A **talent** of gold was worth twenty years’ wages. The parable is contrasting the relative amounts of five, two, and one, as well as the large amount of wealth involved. Alternate translation: “five bags of gold” or “five bags of gold, each worth 20 years’ wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) +MAT 25 15 i81u translate-bmoney πέντε τάλαντα 1 five talents Avoid translating this into modern money. A **talent** of gold was worth twenty years’ wages. The parable is contrasting the relative amounts of five, two, and one, as well as the large amount of wealth involved. Alternate translation: “five bags of gold” or “five bags of gold, each worth 20 years’ wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) MAT 25 15 vyj2 figs-ellipsis ᾧ δὲ δύο, ᾧ δὲ ἕν 1 and to one, two, and to one, one The word **talents** is understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and to another he gave two talents of gold, and to another he gave one talent of gold” or “and to another he gave two bags of gold, and to another he gave one bag of gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 25 15 d87u figs-explicit κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν 1 according to his own ability You can state the implicit information explicitly. Alternate translation: “according to each servant’s skill in managing wealth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 25 16 qkr2 ἐκέρδησεν ἄλλα πέντε τάλαντα 1 gained another five talents Alternate translation: “out of his investments, he earned another five talents” -MAT 25 17 m2l8 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues telling a parable about the servants and the talents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 25 17 u4vs ἐκέρδησεν ἄλλα δύο 1 gained another two Alternate translation: “earned another two talents” -MAT 25 19 ik5q figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues telling the parable about the servants and the talents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) -MAT 25 19 vc9p δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Jesus starts to tell a new part of the story. +MAT 25 19 vc9p δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Jesus starts to tell a new part of the story. MAT 25 20 adz4 πέντε τάλαντα ἐκέρδησα 1 I gained five talents Alternate translation: “I have earned five more talents” MAT 25 20 ttf7 translate-bmoney τάλαντα 1 talents A “talent” was worth twenty years’ wages. Avoid translating this into modern money. See how you translated this in [25:15](../25/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) -MAT 25 21 l5mg εὖ 1 Well done “You have done well” or “You have done right.” Your culture might have an expression that a master (or someone in authority) would use to show that he approves of what his servant (or someone under him) has done. +MAT 25 21 l5mg εὖ 1 Well done Your culture might have an expression that a master (or someone in authority) would use to show that he approves of what his servant (or someone under him) has done. Alternate translation: “You have done well” or “You have done right” MAT 25 21 d2s9 figs-idiom εἴσελθε εἰς τὴν χαρὰν τοῦ κυρίου σου 1 Enter into the joy of your master The phrase **Enter into the joy** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “Come and be happy with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 25 21 u9od figs-123person εἴσελθε εἰς τὴν χαρὰν τοῦ κυρίου σου 1 Enter into the joy of your master The master is speaking about himself in the third person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 25 22 yhi1 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues telling the parable about the servants and the talents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 25 22 n2xc δύο τάλαντα ἐκέρδησα 1 I have gained two talents Alternate translation: “I have earned two more talents” -MAT 25 23 hsb6 εὖ 1 Well done “You have done well” or “You have done right.” Your culture might have an expression that a master (or someone in authority) would use to show that he approves of what his servant (or someone under him) has done. See how you translated this in [25:21](../25/21.md). +MAT 25 23 hsb6 εὖ 1 Well done Your culture might have an expression that a master (or someone in authority) would use to show that he approves of what his servant (or someone under him) has done. See how you translated this in [25:21](../25/21.md). Alternate translation: “You have done well” or “You have done right” MAT 25 23 plv7 figs-idiom εἴσελθε εἰς τὴν χαρὰν τοῦ κυρίου σου 1 Enter into the joy of your master The phrase **Enter into the joy** is an idiom. See how you translated this in [25:21](../25/21.md). Alternate translation: “Come and be happy with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 25 23 b5k7 figs-123person εἴσελθε εἰς τὴν χαρὰν τοῦ κυρίου σου 1 Enter into the joy of your master The master is speaking about himself in the third person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 25 24 ial6 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues telling the parable about the servants and the talents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 25 24 m8an figs-parallelism θερίζων ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπειρας, καὶ συνάγων ὅθεν οὐ διεσκόρπισας 1 reaping where you did not sow, and gathering where you did not scatter The words **reaping where you did not sow** and **gathering where you did not scatter** mean the same thing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 25 24 xj4e figs-metaphor θερίζων ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπειρας, καὶ συνάγων ὅθεν οὐ διεσκόρπισας 1 reaping where you did not sow, and gathering where you did not scatter This refers to a farmer who gathers crops that other people have planted. The servant uses this metaphor to accuse the master of taking what rightfully belongs to others. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 25 24 au9f οὐ διεσκόρπισας 1 you did not scatter “you did not scatter seed.” This refers to sowing seed by gently throwing handfuls of it onto the soil. +MAT 25 24 au9f οὐ διεσκόρπισας 1 you did not scatter This refers to sowing seed by gently throwing handfuls of it onto the soil. Alternate translation: “you did not scatter seed” MAT 25 25 wl5c ἴδε, ἔχεις τὸ σόν 1 Behold, you have what is yours Alternate translation: “Look, here is what is yours” -MAT 25 26 hj83 figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues telling a parable about the servants and the talents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) MAT 25 26 l3jz πονηρὲ δοῦλε καὶ ὀκνηρέ! ᾔδεις 1 You wicked and lazy slave, you have known Alternate translation: “You are a wicked slave who does not want to work. You knew” MAT 25 26 he3h figs-parallelism θερίζω ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπειρα, καὶ συνάγω ὅθεν οὐ διεσκόρπισα 1 I reap where I did not sow and harvest where I did not scatter The words **reap where I did not sow** and **harvest where I did not scatter** mean the same thing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 25 26 xtaj figs-metaphor θερίζω ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπειρα, καὶ συνάγω ὅθεν οὐ διεσκόρπισα 1 I reap where I did not sow and harvest where I did not scatter This refers to a farmer who gathers crops that people who work for him have planted. See how you translated this in [25:24](../25/24.md), where the servant uses these words to accuse the farmer. The readers should understand that the farmer is acknowledging that he does indeed gather what others have planted but is saying that he is right to do so. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 25 27 rhg9 figs-ellipsis ἐκομισάμην ἂν τὸ ἐμὸν 1 I would have received back my money You can state the understood information clearly. Alternate translation: “I would have received back my own money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 25 27 n7jd τόκῳ 1 interest payment from the banker for the temporary use of the master’s money -MAT 25 28 qm6x figs-parables 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus concludes the parable about the servants and the talents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parables]]) +MAT 25 27 rhg9 figs-ellipsis ἐκομισάμην ἂν τὸ ἐμὸν 1 I would have received back my money You can state the understood information explicitly. Alternate translation: “I would have received back my own money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 25 27 n7jd τόκῳ 1 interest This **interest** was a payment from the banker for the temporary use of the master’s money. MAT 25 28 paw8 ἄρατε…τὸ τάλαντον 1 take away the talent The master is speaking to other servants. MAT 25 28 b1ge translate-bmoney τὸ τάλαντον 1 the talent A **talent** was worth twenty years’ wages. Avoid translating this into modern money. See how you translated this in [25:15](../25/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) MAT 25 29 e5py figs-explicit τῷ…ἔχοντι 1 to the one having It is implied that the person who has something also uses it wisely. Alternate translation: “to the one who uses well what he has” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2412,81 +2390,77 @@ MAT 25 32 nk18 figs-simile ὥσπερ ὁ ποιμὴν ἀφορίζει τὰ MAT 25 33 pbq9 figs-metaphor καὶ στήσει τὰ μὲν πρόβατα ἐκ δεξιῶν αὐτοῦ, τὰ δὲ ἐρίφια ἐξ εὐωνύμων 1 And he will place the sheep on his right, but the goats on his left This is a metaphor that means the Son of Man will separate all people. He will put the righteous people at his right side, and he will put the sinners at his left side. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 25 34 t8pp figs-123person ὁ Βασιλεὺς…αὐτοῦ 1 the King … his Here, “the King” is another title for the Son of Man. Jesus was referring to himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “I, the King, … my right hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 25 34 ze81 figs-activepassive δεῦτε οἱ εὐλογημένοι τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 Come, you who have been blessed by my Father If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Come, you whom my Father has blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 25 34 h2k9 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 my Father This is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 25 34 h2k9 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 25 34 b57r figs-activepassive κληρονομήσατε τὴν ἡτοιμασμένην ὑμῖν βασιλείαν 1 inherit the kingdom prepared for you If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “inherit the kingdom that God has made ready for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 25 34 yj1p figs-metonymy κληρονομήσατε τὴν ἡτοιμασμένην ὑμῖν βασιλείαν 1 inherit the kingdom prepared for you Here, **kingdom** refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “receive the blessings of God’s rule that he has planned to give you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 25 34 cdi8 ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 from the foundation of the world Alternate translation: “since he first created the world” -MAT 25 37 yh3p figs-nominaladj οἱ δίκαιοι 1 the righteous You can state this as an adjective. Alternate translation: “the righteous people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 25 37 cs5d figs-ellipsis ἢ διψῶντα 1 Or thirsty You can state the understood information clearly. Alternate translation: “Or when did we see you thirsty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 25 38 h52x figs-ellipsis ἢ γυμνὸν 1 Or naked This is the end of a series of questions that begins in verse 37. You can state the understood information clearly. Alternate translation: “Or when did we see you naked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 25 40 m6mi figs-123person ὁ Βασιλεὺς 1 the King This is another title for the Son of Man. Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 25 37 yh3p figs-nominaladj οἱ δίκαιοι 1 the righteous If your language does not use the nominal adjective **righteous**, you can express it as an adjective. Alternate translation: “the righteous people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 25 37 cs5d figs-ellipsis ἢ διψῶντα 1 Or thirsty You can state the understood information explicitly. Alternate translation: “Or when did we see you thirsty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 25 38 h52x figs-ellipsis ἢ γυμνὸν καὶ περιεβάλομεν? 1 Or naked This is the end of a series of questions that begins in verse 37. You can state the understood information clearly. Alternate translation: “Or when did we see you naked and give you clothing?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 25 40 m6mi figs-123person ὁ Βασιλεὺς 1 the King Here, **the King** is another title for the Son of Man. Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 25 40 i2aq ἐρεῖ αὐτοῖς 1 will say to them Alternate translation: “will say to those at his right hand” -MAT 25 40 mhe2 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you “I tell you the truth.” This emphasizes what the King says next. +MAT 25 40 mhe2 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you This emphasizes what the King says next. Alternate translation: “I tell you the truth” MAT 25 40 acs3 ἑνὶ…τῶν ἐλαχίστων 1 for one of the least Alternate translation: “for one of the least important” MAT 25 40 nh4y figs-gendernotations τούτων τῶν ἀδελφῶν μου 1 of these brothers of mine Here, **brothers** refers to anyone, male or female, who obeys the King. Alternate translation: “my brothers and sisters here” or “these who are like my brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) MAT 25 40 k4hb ἐμοὶ ἐποιήσατε 1 you did it for me Alternate translation: “I consider that you did it for me” -MAT 25 41 z1nh figs-123person τότε ἐρεῖ καὶ 1 Then he also will say “Then the King also will.” Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +MAT 25 41 z1nh figs-123person τότε ἐρεῖ καὶ 1 Then he also will say Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “Then the King also will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 25 41 pr8n κατηραμένοι 1 you cursed Alternate translation: “you people whom God has cursed” MAT 25 41 hqf5 figs-activepassive τὸ πῦρ τὸ αἰώνιον, τὸ ἡτοιμασμένον 1 the everlasting fire that has been prepared If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the everlasting fire that God has prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 25 41 g51u τοῖς ἀγγέλοις αὐτοῦ 1 his angels Satan's helpers MAT 25 43 g6ec figs-ellipsis γυμνὸς καὶ οὐ περιεβάλετέ με 1 naked, and you did not clothe me The words **I was** preceding **naked** are understood. Alternate translation: “I was naked, but you did not give me clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 25 43 tq4x figs-ellipsis ἀσθενὴς καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ 1 sick and in prison The words “I was” preceding **sick** are understood. Alternate translation: “I was sick and in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 25 44 f3dc 0 General Information: This is the end of the part of the story that began in [23:1](../23/01.md), where Jesus teaches about salvation and the final judgment. -MAT 25 44 zyc5 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus finishes telling his disciples how he will judge people when he returns at the end time. MAT 25 44 hiy6 ἀποκριθήσονται καὶ αὐτοὶ 1 they will also answer Alternate translation: “those on his left will also answer” MAT 25 45 nm2e ἑνὶ τούτων τῶν ἐλαχίστων 1 for one of the least of these Alternate translation: “for any of the least important ones of my people” MAT 25 45 whu5 οὐδὲ ἐμοὶ ἐποιήσατε. 1 you did not do it for me Alternate translation: “I consider that you did not do it for me” or “I was really the one whom you did not help” MAT 25 46 m6me καὶ ἀπελεύσονται οὗτοι εἰς κόλασιν αἰώνιον 1 And these will go away into everlasting punishment Alternate translation: “And the King will send these to a place where they will receive punishment that never ends” -MAT 25 46 nj72 figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ δίκαιοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 but the righteous into everlasting life The understood information can be made clear. Alternate translation: “but the King will send the righteous to the place where they will live forever with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 25 46 kq5b figs-nominaladj οἱ…δίκαιοι 1 the righteous You can state this nominative adjective as an adjective. Alternate translation: “the righteous people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 25 46 nj72 figs-ellipsis οἱ δὲ δίκαιοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 but the righteous into everlasting life You can state the understood information explicitly. Alternate translation: “but the King will send the righteous to the place where they will live forever with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 25 46 kq5b figs-nominaladj οἱ…δίκαιοι 1 the righteous If your language does not use nominative adjective **righteous**, you can express it as an adjective. Alternate translation: “the righteous people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) MAT 26 intro mtq8 0 # Matthew 26 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 26:31, which is words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sheep

Sheep are a common image used in Scripture to refer to the people of Israel. In [Matthew 26:31](../mat/26/31.md), however, Jesus used the words “the sheep” to refer to his disciples and to say that they would run away when he was arrested.

### Passover

The Passover festival was when the Jews would celebrate the day God killed the firstborn sons of the Egyptians but “passed over” the Israelites and let them live.

### The eating of the body and blood

[Matthew 26:26-28](./26.md) describes Jesus’ last meal with his followers. At this time, Jesus told them that what they were eating and drinking were his body and his blood. Nearly all Christian churches celebrate “the Lord’s Supper,” the “Eucharist”, or “Holy Communion” to remember this meal.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Judas’ kiss for Jesus

[Matthew 26:49](../mat/26/49.md) describes how Judas kissed Jesus so the soldiers would know whom to arrest. The Jews would kiss each other when they greeted each other.

### “I am able to destroy the temple of God”

Two men accused Jesus of saying that he could destroy the temple in Jerusalem and then rebuild it “in three days” ([Matthew 26:61](../mat/26/61.md)). They were accusing him of insulting God by claiming that God had given him the authority to destroy the temple and the power to rebuild it. What Jesus actually said was that if the Jewish authorities were to destroy this temple, he would certainly raise it up in three days ([John 2:19](../jhn/02/19.md)). MAT 26 1 t5mz 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story that tells of Jesus’ crucifixion, death, and resurrection. Here he tells his disciples how he will suffer and die. -MAT 26 1 i35c καὶ ἐγένετο ὅτε 1 And it happened that when “And after” or “Then, after.” This phrase shifts the story from Jesus’ teachings to what happened next. -MAT 26 1 xiv4 πάντας τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 all these words This refers to all that Jesus taught starting in [24:3](../24/03.md). +MAT 26 1 i35c καὶ ἐγένετο ὅτε 1 And it happened that when This phrase shifts the story from Jesus’ teachings to what happened next. Alternate translation: “And after” or “Then, after” +MAT 26 1 xiv4 πάντας τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 all these words The phrase **these words** refers to all that Jesus taught starting in [24:3](../24/03.md). MAT 26 2 g4lh figs-activepassive ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται εἰς τὸ σταυρωθῆναι 1 the Son of Man is being delivered up to be crucified If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “some men will take the Son of Man to other people who will crucify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 26 2 r9px figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -MAT 26 3 wew3 writing-background 0 Connecting Statement: These verses give background information about the Jewish leaders’ plot to arrest and kill Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MAT 26 3 wew3 writing-background 0 Connecting Statement: Verses 3-5 give background information about the Jewish leaders’ plot to arrest and kill Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 26 3 eps8 figs-activepassive συνήχθησαν 1 were gathered together If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “came together” or “met together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 26 4 hi4x δόλῳ 1 stealthily Alternate translation: “secretly” -MAT 26 5 u4fh figs-ellipsis μὴ ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ 1 Not during the festival It may be helpful to your readers to state What the leaders did not want to do during the festival. Alternate translation: “We should not kill Jesus during the festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 26 5 s9p7 ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ 1 the festival This is the yearly Passover festival. +MAT 26 5 u4fh figs-ellipsis μὴ ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ 1 Not during the festival It may be helpful to your readers to state what the leaders did not want to do during the festival. Alternate translation: “We should not kill Jesus during the festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 26 5 s9p7 ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ 1 the festival Here, **festival** refers to the yearly Passover festival. MAT 26 6 v2up 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of a woman pouring expensive oil on Jesus before his death. -MAT 26 6 zq3j δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. -MAT 26 6 hg3s figs-explicit Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ 1 of Simon the leper It is implied that this is a man whom Jesus had healed from leprosy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 26 7 ukb9 ἀνακειμένου 1 and he was reclining at table “and Jesus was lying on his side.” You can use your language’s word for the position people usually are in when they eat. +MAT 26 6 zq3j δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. +MAT 26 6 hg3s figs-explicit Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ 1 of Simon the leper It is implied that this **Simon** is a man whom Jesus had healed from leprosy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 26 7 ukb9 ἀνακειμένου 1 and he was reclining at table You can use your language’s word for the position people usually are in when they eat. Alternate translation: “and Jesus was lying on his side” MAT 26 7 yxf8 προσῆλθεν αὐτῷ γυνὴ 1 a woman came to him Alternate translation: “a woman came to Jesus” -MAT 26 7 bhs8 translate-unknown ἀλάβαστρον 1 an alabaster jar This is a costly container made of soft stone. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -MAT 26 7 yu67 μύρου βαρυτίμου 1 of very expensive ointment oil that has a pleasing smell +MAT 26 7 bhs8 translate-unknown ἀλάβαστρον 1 an alabaster jar This **alabaster jar** was a costly container made of soft stone. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 26 7 yu67 μύρου βαρυτίμου 1 of very expensive ointment This refers to oil that has a pleasing smell. MAT 26 7 ea5e κατέχεεν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὐτοῦ 1 she poured it upon his head The woman did this to honor Jesus. -MAT 26 8 vit4 figs-rquestion εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη? 1 For what is this waste? The disciples ask this question out of their anger over the woman’s actions. Alternate translation: “This woman has done a bad thing by wasting this ointment!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 26 8 vit4 figs-rquestion εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια αὕτη? 1 For what is this waste? The disciples ask this question out of their anger over the woman’s actions. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “This woman has done a bad thing by wasting this ointment!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 26 9 y83e figs-activepassive ἐδύνατο γὰρ τοῦτο πραθῆναι πολλοῦ καὶ δοθῆναι 1 For this was able to have been sold for a large amount and to be given If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For she could have sold this for a large amount of money and given the money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 26 9 f76h figs-nominaladj πτωχοῖς 1 to the poor You can state **the poor** as an adjective. Alternate translation: “to poor people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 26 10 pfv1 figs-rquestion τί κόπους παρέχετε τῇ γυναικί? 1 Why are you causing trouble for this woman? Jesus asks this question as a rebuke of his disciples. Alternate translation: “You should not be troubling this woman!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 26 9 f76h figs-nominaladj πτωχοῖς 1 to the poor If your language does not use the nominal adjective **the poor**, you can express it as an adjective. Alternate translation: “to poor people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 26 10 pfv1 figs-rquestion τί κόπους παρέχετε τῇ γυναικί? 1 Why are you causing trouble for this woman? Jesus asks this question as a rebuke of his disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not be troubling this woman!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 26 10 fg3v figs-you παρέχετε 1 are you causing Here, **you** is plural and refers to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 26 11 wsp9 figs-nominaladj τοὺς πτωχοὺς 1 the poor You can state this as an adjective. Alternate translation: “poor people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 26 12 vk5w τὸ μύρον 1 ointment This is oil that has a pleasing smell. See how you translated this in [26:7](../26/07.md). -MAT 26 13 xs1w ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you “I tell you the truth.” This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. +MAT 26 11 wsp9 figs-nominaladj τοὺς πτωχοὺς 1 the poor If your language does not use the nominal adjective **poor**, you can express it as an adjective. Alternate translation: “poor people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +MAT 26 12 vk5w τὸ μύρον 1 ointment This **ointment** was oil that had a pleasing smell. See how you translated this in [26:7](../26/07.md). +MAT 26 13 xs1w ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. Alternate translation: “I tell you the truth” MAT 26 13 g45l figs-activepassive ὅπου ἐὰν κηρυχθῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦτο 1 wherever this good news may be preached If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “wherever people preach this good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 26 13 s12m figs-activepassive λαληθήσεται καὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν αὕτη εἰς μνημόσυνον αὐτῆς 1 what she has done will also be spoken of in memory of her If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they will remember what this woman has done and will tell others about her” or “people will remember what this woman has done and will tell others about her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 26 14 i3dy 0 Connecting Statement: Judas Iscariot agrees to help the Jewish leaders arrest and kill Jesus. MAT 26 15 es4b κἀγὼ ὑμῖν παραδώσω αὐτόν 1 and I will betray him to you Alternate translation: “and I will bring Jesus to you” -MAT 26 15 x7zx τριάκοντα ἀργύρια 1 thirty pieces of silver Since these words are the same as those in an Old Testament prophecy, keep this form instead of changing it to modern money. -MAT 26 15 lyl7 translate-numbers τριάκοντα ἀργύρια 1 30 pieces of silver “thirty pieces of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +MAT 26 15 x7zx τριάκοντα ἀργύρια 1 thirty pieces of silver Since these words are the same as those in an Old Testament prophecy, keep this form instead of changing it to modern money. Alternate translation: “thirty pieces of silver” MAT 26 16 w1e4 ἵνα αὐτὸν παραδῷ 1 in order that he might betray him Alternate translation: “so that he would give him over to them” MAT 26 17 e7wc 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus celebrating the Passover with his disciples. -MAT 26 17 f3s2 δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. +MAT 26 17 f3s2 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. MAT 26 18 hc78 figs-quotesinquotes ὁ δὲ εἶπεν, ὑπάγετε εἰς τὴν πόλιν πρὸς τὸν δεῖνα καὶ εἴπατε αὐτῷ, ὁ διδάσκαλος λέγει, ὁ καιρός μου ἐγγύς ἐστιν; πρὸς σὲ ποιῶ τὸ Πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαθητῶν μου. 1 But he said, “Go into the city to such a man and say to him, ‘The Teacher says, “My time is near. I am doing the Passover at your house with my disciples.”’” This has quotations within quotations. You can state some of the direct quotations as indirect quotations. Alternate translation: “But he told his disciples to go into the city to a certain man and tell him that the Teacher says to him, ‘My time is at hand. I will keep the Passover at your house with my disciples.’” or “But he told his disciples to go into the city to a certain man and say to him that the Teacher’s time is at hand and he will keep the Passover with his disciples at that man’s house.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MAT 26 18 r4tg ὁ καιρός μου 1 My time This could refer to: (1) the time that Jesus told them about. (2) the time God has set for Jesus. MAT 26 18 a4i5 figs-idiom ἐγγύς ἐστιν 1 is near This could mean: (1) it “is near.” (2) it “has come.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 26 18 j9pz ποιῶ τὸ Πάσχα 1 I am doing the Passover Alternate translation: “I am eat the Passover meal” or “I am celebrating the Passover by eating the special meal” -MAT 26 20 bga4 ἀνέκειτο 1 he reclined at table Use the word for the position people in your culture usually are in when they eat. -MAT 26 21 ehx6 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you “I tell you the truth.” This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. +MAT 26 20 bga4 ἀνέκειτο 1 he reclined at table Translate **reclining** with the word for the position people in your culture usually are in when they eat. +MAT 26 21 ehx6 ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. Alternate translation: “I tell you the truth” MAT 26 22 n12r figs-rquestion μήτι ἐγώ εἰμι, Κύριε? 1 Surely not I, Lord? “I am surely not the one, am I, Lord?” This could be: (1) a rhetorical question since the apostles were sure they would not betray Jesus. Alternate translation: “Lord, I would never betray you!” (2) a sincere question since Jesus’ statement probably troubled and confused them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 26 24 n7dw figs-123person ὁ μὲν Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 The Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 26 24 x2n9 figs-euphemism ὑπάγει 1 will depart Here, **depart** is a polite way to refer to dying. Alternate translation: “will go to his death” or “will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MAT 26 24 vix3 figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 just as it is written about him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as the prophets wrote about him in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 26 24 hai5 figs-activepassive τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ ἐκείνῳ δι’ οὗ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται 1 to that man by whom the Son of Man is betrayed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “to the man who betrays the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 26 25 vpq1 figs-rquestion μήτι ἐγώ εἰμι, Ῥαββεί? 1 Surely it is not I, Rabbi? “Rabbi, am I the one who will betray you?” Judas may be using a rhetorical question to deny that he is the one who will betray Jesus. Alternate translation: “Rabbi, surely I am not the one who will betray you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 26 25 vpq1 figs-rquestion μήτι ἐγώ εἰμι, Ῥαββεί? 1 Surely it is not I, Rabbi? Judas may be using a rhetorical question to deny that he is the one who will betray Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Rabbi, surely I am not the one who will betray you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 26 25 y9lk figs-idiom σὺ εἶπας 1 You have said it yourself This is an idiom that Jesus uses to mean “yes” without being completely clear about what he means. Alternate translation: “You are saying it” or “You are admitting it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 26 26 qh16 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus institutes the Lord’s Supper as he celebrates the Passover with his disciples. MAT 26 26 mr5u λαβὼν…εὐλογήσας ἔκλασεν 1 having taken … having blessed it … he broke it See how you translated these words in [14:19](../14/19.md). @@ -2496,51 +2470,50 @@ MAT 26 27 a9me πίετε ἐξ αὐτοῦ 1 Drink from it Alternate translat MAT 26 28 l55a τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν τὸ αἷμά μου 1 For this is my blood Alternate translation: “For this wine is my blood” MAT 26 28 ct81 τὸ αἷμά…τῆς διαθήκης 1 blood of the covenant Alternate translation: “blood that shows that the covenant is in effect” or “blood that makes the covenant possible” MAT 26 28 bms3 figs-activepassive ἐκχυννόμενον 1 is being poured out If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “will soon flow out of my body” or “will flow out of my wounds when I die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 26 29 l556 λέγω…ὑμῖν 1 I say to you This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. +MAT 26 29 l556 λέγω…ὑμῖν 1 I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. MAT 26 29 h85b figs-idiom τοῦ γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου 1 fruit of the vine This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 26 29 q8zs figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 in the kingdom of my Father Here, **kingdom** refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “when my Father establishes his rule on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 26 29 m9vq guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 of my Father This is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 26 30 nzy2 0 General Information: In verse 31, Jesus quotes the prophet Zechariah to show that in order to fulfill prophecy, all of his disciples will leave him. -MAT 26 30 nkw2 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues to teach his disciples as they walk to the Mount of Olives. -MAT 26 30 ed5k καὶ ὑμνήσαντες 1 And having sung a hymn a song of praise to God +MAT 26 29 m9vq guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 of my Father **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 26 30 ed5k καὶ ὑμνήσαντες 1 And having sung a hymn A **hymn** is a song of praise to God. MAT 26 31 v8yl σκανδαλισθήσεσθε ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 will be caused to stumble in me Alternate translation: “will leave me” +MAT 26 31 nzy2 πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα, καὶ διασκορπισθήσονται τὰ πρόβατα τῆς ποίμνης 1 General Information: In this verse, Jesus quotes the prophet Zechariah to show that in order to fulfill prophecy, all of his disciples will leave him. MAT 26 31 iap6 figs-activepassive γέγραπται γάρ 1 for it is written If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for the prophet Zechariah wrote long ago in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 26 31 u1t5 figs-explicit πατάξω 1 I will strike Here, **I** refers to God. It is implied that God will cause or allow people to harm and kill Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 26 31 mc1e figs-metaphor τὸν ποιμένα…τὰ πρόβατα τῆς ποίμνης 1 the shepherd … the sheep of the flock These are metaphors that refer to Jesus and the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 26 31 rvk1 figs-activepassive διασκορπισθήσονται τὰ πρόβατα τῆς ποίμνης 1 the sheep of the flock will be scattered If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they will scatter all the sheep of the flock” or “the sheep of the flock will run off in all directions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 26 32 pj2u figs-idiom μετὰ…τὸ ἐγερθῆναί με 1 after I am raised up Here to be **raised up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 26 32 xuyz figs-activepassive μετὰ…τὸ ἐγερθῆναί 1 after I am raised up If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after God raises me up” or “after God brings me back to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 26 33 m2un σκανδαλισθήσονται 1 will be caused to stumble See how you translated this in [26:31](../26/31.md). -MAT 26 34 sf9x ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι 1 Truly I say to you “I tell you the truth.” This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. +MAT 26 33 m2un σκανδαλισθήσονται 1 will be caused to stumble See how you translated this phrase in [26:31](../26/31.md). +MAT 26 34 sf9x ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι 1 Truly I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. Alternate translation: “I tell you the truth” MAT 26 34 ui4y figs-metonymy πρὶν ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι 1 before the rooster crows A **rooster** often **crows** about the time the sun comes up, so the hearers might have understood these words as a metonym for the sun coming up. However, the actual crowing of a rooster is an important part of the story later on, so keep the word **rooster** in the translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 26 34 lx5i ἀλέκτορα 1 the rooster a male chicken, a bird that calls out loudly around the time the sun comes up -MAT 26 34 h66w φωνῆσαι 1 crows This is the common English word for what a rooster does to make his loud call. +MAT 26 34 lx5i ἀλέκτορα 1 the rooster A **rooster** is a male chicken, a bird that calls out loudly around the time the sun comes up. +MAT 26 34 h66w φωνῆσαι 1 crows Here, **crows** is the common English word for what a rooster does when it calls out loudly. MAT 26 34 b2rh τρὶς ἀπαρνήσῃ με 1 you will deny me three times Alternate translation: “you will say three times that you are not my follower” MAT 26 36 lm3n 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus praying in Gethsemane. MAT 26 37 ny4m ἤρξατο λυπεῖσθαι 1 he began to be grieved Alternate translation: “he became very sad” MAT 26 38 gf7k figs-synecdoche περίλυπός ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου 1 My soul is deeply sorrowful Here, **soul** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “I am very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 26 38 c43t figs-idiom ἕως θανάτου 1 to the point of death This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “and I feel as if I could even die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 26 39 kcz4 figs-idiom ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ 1 he fell on his face He purposely lay face down on the ground to pray. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 26 39 nuv7 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ μου 1 My Father This is an important title for God that shows the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 26 39 nuv7 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ μου 1 My Father **Father** is an important title for God that shows the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 26 39 f254 figs-metaphor παρελθέτω ἀπ’ ἐμοῦ τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο 1 let this cup pass away from me Jesus speaks of the work that he must do, including dying on the cross, as if it were a bitter liquid that God has commanded him to drink from a cup. The word **cup** is an important word in the New Testament, so try to use an equivalent for that in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 26 39 i7rr figs-metonymy τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο 1 this cup Here, **cup** is a metonym that stands for the cup and the contents within it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 26 39 bcn2 figs-metaphor τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο 1 this cup The contents in the cup are a metaphor for the suffering that Jesus will have to endure. Jesus is asking the Father if it is possible for him not to have to experience the death and suffering that Jesus knows will soon happen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 26 39 bcn2 figs-metaphor τὸ ποτήριον τοῦτο 1 this cup The contents in the **cup** are a metaphor for the suffering that Jesus will have to endure. Jesus is asking the Father if it is possible for him not to have to experience the death and suffering that Jesus knows will soon happen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 26 39 k5in figs-ellipsis πλὴν οὐχ ὡς ἐγὼ θέλω, ἀλλ’ ὡς σύ 1 Yet, not as I will, but as you This can be expressed as a full sentence. Alternate translation: “But do not do what I want; instead, do what you want” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 26 40 ev7s figs-you λέγει τῷ Πέτρῳ, οὕτως οὐκ ἰσχύσατε…γρηγορῆσαι 1 he says to Peter, “So, were you not able to watch Jesus is speaking to Peter, but the **you** is plural, referring to Peter, James, and John. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 26 40 c11a figs-rquestion οὕτως οὐκ ἰσχύσατε μίαν ὥραν γρηγορῆσαι μετ’ ἐμοῦ? 1 So, were you not able to watch with me for one hour? Jesus uses a question to scold Peter, James, and John. Alternate translation: “I am disappointed that you could not stay awake with me for one hour!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 26 40 c11a figs-rquestion οὕτως οὐκ ἰσχύσατε μίαν ὥραν γρηγορῆσαι μετ’ ἐμοῦ? 1 So, were you not able to watch with me for one hour? Jesus uses a question to scold Peter, James, and John. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am disappointed that you could not stay awake with me for one hour!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 26 41 buv4 figs-abstractnouns μὴ εἰσέλθητε εἰς πειρασμόν 1 you might not enter into temptation If your readers would misunderstand the abstract noun **temptation**, you can express it as a verb. Alternate translation: “no one tempts you to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 26 41 ny5w figs-metonymy τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής 1 The spirit indeed is willing, but the flesh is weak Here, **spirit** is a metonym that stands for a person’s desires to do good. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 26 41 xlig figs-synecdoche τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής 1 The spirit indeed is willing, but the flesh is weak **Flesh** stands for the needs and desires of a person’s body. Jesus means that the disciples may have the desire to do what God wants, but as humans they are weak and often fail. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 26 42 pz9l ἀπελθὼν 1 having gone away Alternate translation: “after Jesus went away” -MAT 26 42 tqp8 translate-ordinal ἐκ δευτέρου 1 a second time The first time is described in [26:39](../26/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -MAT 26 42 ch7t guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ μου 1 My Father This is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 26 42 b6cn figs-metaphor εἰ οὐ δύναται τοῦτο παρελθεῖν, ἐὰν μὴ αὐτὸ πίω 1 if this is not able to pass away unless I may drink it “if the only way this can pass away is if I drink it.” Jesus speaks of the work that he must do as if it were a bitter liquid that God has commanded him to **drink**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 26 42 tqp8 translate-ordinal ἐκ δευτέρου 1 a second time The first **time** is described in [26:39](../26/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +MAT 26 42 ch7t guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ μου 1 My Father **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 26 42 b6cn figs-metaphor εἰ οὐ δύναται τοῦτο παρελθεῖν, ἐὰν μὴ αὐτὸ πίω 1 if this is not able to pass away unless I may drink it Jesus speaks of the work that he must do as if it were a bitter liquid that God has commanded him to **drink**. Alternate translation: “if the only way this can pass away is if I drink it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 26 42 td6g figs-metaphor εἰ…τοῦτο 1 if this Here, **this** refers to the cup and the contents within it, a metaphor for suffering, as in [26:39](../26/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -MAT 26 42 i135 figs-metaphor ἐὰν μὴ αὐτὸ πίω 1 unless I may drink it “unless I drink from it” or “unless I drink from this cup of suffering.” Here, **it** refers to the cup and the contents within it, a metaphor for suffering, as in [26:39](../26/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 26 42 i135 figs-metaphor ἐὰν μὴ αὐτὸ πίω 1 unless I may drink it Here, **it** refers to the cup and the contents within it, a metaphor for suffering, as in [26:39](../26/39.md). Alternate translation: “unless I drink from it” or “unless I drink from this cup of suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 26 42 xsk1 figs-activepassive γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου 1 let your will be done If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “may what you want happen” or “do what you want to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 26 43 lts9 figs-idiom ἦσαν…αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφθαλμοὶ βεβαρημένοι 1 their eyes were weighed down This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “they were very sleepy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 26 44 v3i9 translate-ordinal ἐκ τρίτου 1 a third time The first time is described in [26:39](../26/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -MAT 26 45 vvp9 figs-rquestion καθεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε? 1 Are you still sleeping and taking your rest? Jesus uses a question to scold the disciples for going to sleep. Alternate translation: “I am disappointed that you are still sleeping and resting!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 26 44 v3i9 translate-ordinal ἐκ τρίτου 1 a third time The first **time** is described in [26:39](../26/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +MAT 26 45 vvp9 figs-rquestion καθεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσθε? 1 Are you still sleeping and taking your rest? Jesus uses a question to scold the disciples for going to sleep. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am disappointed that you are still sleeping and resting!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 26 45 rw3r figs-idiom ἤγγικεν ἡ ὥρα 1 the hour has approached This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the time has come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 26 45 g9hi figs-activepassive ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται 1 the Son of Man is being betrayed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone is betraying the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 26 45 ell4 figs-123person ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) @@ -2548,43 +2521,43 @@ MAT 26 45 g9eb figs-metonymy παραδίδοται εἰς χεῖρας ἁμ MAT 26 45 yx8v ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Alternate translation: “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” MAT 26 47 hsv7 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of when Judas betrayed Jesus and the religious leaders arrested him. MAT 26 47 rlp9 καὶ ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος 1 And as he is still speaking Alternate translation: “And while Jesus was still speaking” -MAT 26 47 e26h ξύλων 1 clubs large pieces of hard wood for hitting people +MAT 26 47 e26h ξύλων 1 clubs A club is a large piece of hard wood for hitting people. MAT 26 48 qb4y writing-background δὲ 1 Now Here, **Now** is used to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew tells background information about Judas and the signal he planned to use to betray Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 26 48 gw8m figs-quotations λέγων, ὃν ἂν φιλήσω, αὐτός ἐστιν; κρατήσατε αὐτόν. 1 saying, “Whomever I may kiss is him. Seize him.” You can state this direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “saying that whomever he kissed was the one they should seize.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MAT 26 48 m23z ὃν ἂν φιλήσω 1 Whomever I may kiss Alternate translation: “The one I kiss” or “The man whom I kiss” -MAT 26 48 nr34 φιλήσω 1 I may kiss This was a respectful way to greet one’s teacher. +MAT 26 48 nr34 φιλήσω 1 I may kiss This action was a respectful way to greet one’s teacher. MAT 26 49 uig8 προσελθὼν τῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 having come up to Jesus Alternate translation: “when Judas came up to Jesus” -MAT 26 49 cyb7 κατεφίλησεν αὐτόν 1 he kissed him “he met him with a kiss.” Good friends would kiss each other on the cheek, but a disciple would probably kiss his master on the hand to show respect. No one knows for sure how Judas **kissed** Jesus. +MAT 26 49 cyb7 κατεφίλησεν αὐτόν 1 he kissed him Good friends would kiss each other on the cheek, but a disciple would probably kiss his master on the hand to show respect. No one knows for sure how Judas **kissed** Jesus. Alternate translation: “he met him with a kiss” MAT 26 50 w3d6 ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας 1 they laid hands Here, **they** refers to the people with clubs and swords that came with Judas and the religious leaders. MAT 26 50 vmd1 ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τὸν Ἰησοῦν, καὶ ἐκράτησαν αὐτόν 1 they laid hands on Jesus, and seized him Alternate translation: “they grabbed Jesus, and arrested him” MAT 26 51 vm6s καὶ ἰδοὺ 1 And behold The word **behold** here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows. MAT 26 52 tj6n figs-metonymy οἱ λαβόντες μάχαιραν 1 those who have taken up a sword The word **sword** is a metonym for the act of killing someone with a sword. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 26 52 gzbc figs-explicit οἱ λαβόντες μάχαιραν 1 those who have taken up a sword You can state the implied information explicitly. Alternate translation: “who pick up a sword to kill others” or “who want to kill other people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 26 52 w357 μάχαιραν, ἐν μαχαίρῃ ἀπολοῦνται 1 a sword will perish by the sword Alternate translation: “a sword will die by means of the sword” or “a sword—it is with the sword that someone will kill them” -MAT 26 53 kgx8 figs-rquestion ἢ δοκεῖς ὅτι οὐ δύναμαι παρακαλέσαι τὸν Πατέρα μου, καὶ παραστήσει μοι ἄρτι πλείω δώδεκα λεγιῶνας ἀγγέλων? 1 Or do you think that I am not able to call upon my Father, and he would send me more than 12 legions of angels at once? Jesus uses a question to remind the person with the sword that Jesus could stop those who are arresting him. Alternate translation: “Surely you know that I could upon my Father, and he would send me more than 12 legions of angels at once.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 26 53 kgx8 figs-rquestion ἢ δοκεῖς ὅτι οὐ δύναμαι παρακαλέσαι τὸν Πατέρα μου, καὶ παραστήσει μοι ἄρτι πλείω δώδεκα λεγιῶνας ἀγγέλων? 1 Or do you think that I am not able to call upon my Father, and he would send me more than 12 legions of angels at once? Jesus uses a question to remind the person with the sword that Jesus could stop those who are arresting him. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you know that I could upon my Father, and he would send me more than 12 legions of angels at once.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 26 53 eb7i figs-you δοκεῖς 1 do you think Here, **you** is singular and refers to the person with the sword. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 26 53 g3zq guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα μου 1 my Father This is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 26 53 g3zq guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 26 53 tfw8 translate-numbers πλείω δώδεκα λεγιῶνας ἀγγέλων 1 more than 12 legions of angels The word **legion** is a military term that refers to a group of about 6,000 soldiers. Jesus means God would send enough angels to easily stop those who are arresting Jesus. The exact number of angels is not important. Alternate translation: “more than 12 really large groups of angels” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -MAT 26 54 teq5 figs-rquestion πῶς οὖν πληρωθῶσιν αἱ Γραφαὶ, ὅτι οὕτως δεῖ γενέσθαι? 1 How then would the scriptures be fulfilled, that this must happen? Jesus uses a question to explain why he is letting these people arrest him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 26 54 teq5 figs-rquestion πῶς οὖν πληρωθῶσιν αἱ Γραφαὶ, ὅτι οὕτως δεῖ γενέσθαι? 1 How then would the scriptures be fulfilled, that this must happen? Jesus uses a question to explain why he is letting these people arrest him. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “This must happen so that the Scriptures will be fulfilled.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 26 54 xqpr figs-activepassive πῶς οὖν πληρωθῶσιν αἱ Γραφαὶ, ὅτι οὕτως δεῖ γενέσθαι? 1 How then would the scriptures be fulfilled, that this must happen? If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But if I did that, I would not be able to fulfill what God said in the scriptures must happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 26 55 yf4p figs-rquestion ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθατε μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων συνλαβεῖν με? 1 Have you come out with swords and clubs to seize me, as against a robber? Jesus is using this question to point out the wrong actions of those arresting him. Alternate translation: “You know that I am not a robber, so it is wrong for you to come out to me bringing swords and clubs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 26 55 q9vq ξύλων 1 clubs large pieces of hard wood for hitting people +MAT 26 55 yf4p figs-rquestion ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλθατε μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων συνλαβεῖν με? 1 Have you come out with swords and clubs to seize me, as against a robber? Jesus is using this question to point out the wrong actions of those arresting him. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You know that I am not a robber, so it is wrong for you to come out to me bringing swords and clubs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 26 55 q9vq ξύλων 1 clubs A club is a large piece of hard wood for hitting people. MAT 26 55 e8dq figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple It is implied that Jesus was not in the actual **temple**. He was in the courtyard around the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 26 56 ygn7 figs-activepassive πληρωθῶσιν αἱ Γραφαὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 the writings of the prophets might be fulfilled If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I would fulfill all that the prophets wrote in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 26 56 i2jp ἀφέντες αὐτὸν 1 having left him If your language has a word that means they left him when they should have stayed with him, use it here. +MAT 26 56 i2jp ἀφέντες αὐτὸν 1 having left him If your language has a word that means they **left him** when they should have stayed with him, use it here. MAT 26 57 f6nj 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus’ trial before the council of Jewish religious leaders. MAT 26 58 jui3 ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἠκολούθει αὐτῷ 1 But Peter was following him Alternate translation: “But Peter followed Jesus” -MAT 26 58 isd4 τῆς αὐλῆς τοῦ ἀρχιερέως 1 the courtyard of the high priest an open area near the high priest’s house +MAT 26 58 isd4 τῆς αὐλῆς τοῦ ἀρχιερέως 1 the courtyard of the high priest This **courtyard** was an open area near the high priest’s house. MAT 26 58 v8th καὶ εἰσελθὼν ἔσω 1 And having entered inside Alternate translation: “And after Peter went inside” -MAT 26 59 i8jw δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. +MAT 26 59 i8jw δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. MAT 26 59 jwz5 αὐτὸν θανατώσωσιν 1 they might put him to death Here, **they** refers to the chief priests and the members of the council. MAT 26 59 u6v9 αὐτὸν θανατώσωσιν 1 they might put him to death Alternate translation: “they might have a reason to execute him” MAT 26 60 m6n5 προσελθόντες δύο 1 two, having come forward Alternate translation: “two men who had come forward” or “two witnesses who came forward” MAT 26 61 a8lf writing-quotations εἶπον, οὗτος ἔφη, δύναμαι καταλῦσαι τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν οἰκοδομῆσαι. 1 said, “This man said, ‘I am able to destroy the temple of God and to rebuild it in three days.’” If your language does not allow quotes within quotes you can rewrite it as a single quote. Alternate translation: “This man said that he is able to destroy the temple of God and to rebuild it in three days.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) MAT 26 61 i5n4 οὗτος ἔφη 1 This man said Alternate translation: “This man Jesus said” -MAT 26 61 mbq1 διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν 1 in three days “within three days,” before the sun goes down three times, not “after three days,” after the sun has gone down the third time +MAT 26 61 mbq1 διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν 1 in three days This phrase means “within three days,” before the sun goes down three times, not “after three days,” after the sun has gone down the third time. MAT 26 62 v6j9 τί οὗτοί σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν? 1 What is it that they are testifying against you? The chief priest is not asking Jesus for information about what the witnesses said. He is asking Jesus to prove what the witnesses said is wrong. Alternate translation: “What is your response to what the witnesses are testifying against you?” -MAT 26 63 mm28 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son of God This is an important title that describes the relationship between the Christ and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 26 63 mm28 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son of God **Son of God** is an important title that describes the relationship between the Christ and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 26 63 lry9 τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 the living God Here, **living** contrasts the **God** of Israel to all the false gods and idols that people worshiped. Only the God of Israel is alive and has power to act. See how you translated this in [16:16](../16/16.md). MAT 26 64 gi6v figs-idiom σὺ εἶπας 1 You have said it yourself This is an idiom that Jesus uses to mean “yes” without being completely clear about what he means. Alternate translation: “You are saying it” or “You are admitting it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 26 64 zu47 figs-you πλὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀπ’ ἄρτι ὄψεσθε 1 But I say to you, from now on you will see Here, **you** is plural. Jesus is speaking to the high priest and to the other persons there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -2595,18 +2568,18 @@ MAT 26 64 lcxc translate-symaction καθήμενον ἐκ δεξιῶν τῆ MAT 26 64 urp9 ἐρχόμενον ἐπὶ τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 coming on the clouds of heaven Alternate translation: “riding to earth on the clouds of heaven” MAT 26 65 srg6 translate-symaction ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς διέρρηξεν τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ 1 the high priest tore his robe Tearing clothing was a sign of anger and sadness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) MAT 26 65 qq51 figs-explicit ἐβλασφήμησεν 1 He has spoken blasphemy The reason the high priest called Jesus’ statement **blasphemy** is probably that he understood Jesus’ words in [26:64](../26/64.md) as a claim to be equal with God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 26 65 t68t figs-rquestion τί ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρτύρων? 1 Why do we still have need of witnesses? The high priest uses this question to emphasize that he and the members of the council do not need to hear from any more witnesses. Alternate translation: “We do not need to hear from any more witnesses!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 26 65 t68t figs-rquestion τί ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρτύρων? 1 Why do we still have need of witnesses? The high priest uses this question to emphasize that he and the members of the council do not need to hear from any more witnesses. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “We do not need to hear from any more witnesses!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 26 65 wh4h figs-you νῦν ἠκούσατε 1 now you have heard Here, **you** is plural and refers to the members of the council. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 26 67 adc2 τότε ἐνέπτυσαν 1 Then they spit This could mean: (1) some of the men spit. (2) the soldiers spit. -MAT 26 67 g1c2 ἐνέπτυσαν εἰς τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ 1 they spit in his face This was done as an insult. +MAT 26 67 g1c2 ἐνέπτυσαν εἰς τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ 1 they spit in his face This action was done as an insult. MAT 26 68 f2bj προφήτευσον ἡμῖν 1 Prophesy to us Here, **Prophesy to us** means to tell by means of God’s power. It does not mean to tell what will happen in the future. MAT 26 68 b5xe figs-irony Χριστέ 1 Christ Those hitting Jesus do not really think he is the **Christ**. They call him this to mock him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) MAT 26 69 bsb3 0 General Information: These events happen at the same time as Jesus’ trial before the religious leaders. MAT 26 69 h5ts 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of how Peter denies three times that he knows Jesus, as Jesus said he would do. -MAT 26 69 y21l δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. +MAT 26 69 y21l δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. MAT 26 70 sp1t οὐκ οἶδα τί λέγεις 1 I do not know what you are talking about Peter was able to understand what the servant girl was saying. He used these words to deny that he had been with Jesus. MAT 26 71 ief5 ἐξελθόντα δὲ 1 But when he had gone out Alternate translation: “But when Peter went out” -MAT 26 71 gyw8 τὸν πυλῶνα 1 the gateway opening in the wall around a courtyard +MAT 26 71 gyw8 τὸν πυλῶνα 1 the gateway This **gateway** was an opening in the wall around a courtyard. MAT 26 71 s7c4 λέγει τοῖς ἐκεῖ 1 says to those there Alternate translation: “said to the people who were sitting there” MAT 26 72 e5xl καὶ πάλιν ἠρνήσατο μετὰ ὅρκου, ὅτι οὐκ οἶδα τὸν ἄνθρωπον. 1 And he again denied it with an oath, “I do not know the man!” Alternate translation: “And he denied it again by swearing, ‘I do not know the man!’” MAT 26 73 hde3 ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 one of them Alternate translation: “one of those who were with Jesus” @@ -2616,45 +2589,43 @@ MAT 26 74 w87b ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησεν 1 a rooster crowed A **rooster MAT 26 75 nx3j figs-quotations καὶ ἐμνήσθη ὁ Πέτρος τοῦ ῥήματος Ἰησοῦ εἰρηκότος, ὅτι πρὶν ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι, τρὶς ἀπαρνήσῃ με 1 And Peter remembered the words of Jesus that he had said, “Before the rooster crows you will deny me three times.” You can state this direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Peter remembered that Jesus told him that before the rooster crowed, he would deny Jesus three times.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) MAT 27 intro deu4 0 # Matthew 27 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Delivered him to Pilate the governor”

The Jewish leaders needed to get permission from Pontius Pilate, the Roman governor, before they could kill Jesus. This was because Roman law did not allow them to kill Jesus themselves. Pilate wanted to set Jesus free, but they wanted him to free a very bad prisoner named Barabbas.

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Matthew 27:60](../mat/27/60.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Sarcasm

The soldiers said, “Hail, King of the Jews!” ([Matthew 27:29](../mat/27/29.md)) to mock Jesus. They did not think that he was the king of the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) MAT 27 1 hvr4 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus’ trial before Pilate. -MAT 27 1 qe1s δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. +MAT 27 1 qe1s δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. MAT 27 1 cm46 figs-explicit συμβούλιον ἔλαβον…κατὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ, ὥστε θανατῶσαι αὐτόν 1 took counsel against Jesus so as to put him to death The Jewish leaders were planning how they could convince the Roman leaders to kill Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 27 3 vzf9 figs-events 0 General Information: This event happened after Jesus’ trial in front of the council of Jewish religious leaders, but we do not know if it happened before or during Jesus’ trial before Pilate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) -MAT 27 3 bk8i 0 Connecting Statement: The author has stopped telling the story of Jesus’ trial so he can tell the story of how Judas killed himself. -MAT 27 3 qm12 τότε ἰδὼν Ἰούδας ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν 1 Then Judas, who had betrayed him, having seen If your language has a way of showing that a new story is starting, you may want to use that here. +MAT 27 3 qm12 τότε ἰδὼν Ἰούδας ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν 1 Then Judas, who had betrayed him, having seen The author has stopped telling the story of Jesus’ trial so he can tell the story of how Judas killed himself. If your language has a way of showing that a new story is starting, you may want to use that here. MAT 27 3 v9vj figs-activepassive ὅτι κατεκρίθη 1 that he was condemned If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the Jewish leaders had condemned Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 27 3 pe4n τὰ τριάκοντα ἀργύρια 1 the 30 pieces of silver This was the money that the chief priests had given Judas to betray Jesus. See how you translated it in [26:15](../26/15.md). MAT 27 4 f6u8 figs-idiom αἷμα ἀθῷον 1 innocent blood This is an idiom that refers to the death of an **innocent** person. Alternate translation: “a person who does not deserve to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 27 4 mf6b figs-rquestion τί πρὸς ἡμᾶς? 1 What is that to us? The Jewish leaders use this question to emphasize that they do not care about what Judas said. Alternate translation: “That is not our problem!” or “That is your problem!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 27 4 mf6b figs-rquestion τί πρὸς ἡμᾶς? 1 What is that to us? The Jewish leaders use this question to emphasize that they do not care about what Judas said. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “That is not our problem!” or “That is your problem!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 27 5 tuh4 ῥίψας τὰ ἀργύρια εἰς τὸν ναὸν 1 having thrown down the pieces of silver in the temple This could mean: (1) he threw **the pieces of silver** while in the **temple** courtyard. (2) he was standing in the temple courtyard, and he threw **the pieces of silver** into the **temple**. MAT 27 6 r5r9 οὐκ ἔξεστιν βαλεῖν αὐτὰ 1 It is not lawful to put this Alternate translation: “Our laws do not allow us to put this” MAT 27 6 ce2x βαλεῖν αὐτὰ 1 to put this Alternate translation: “to put this silver” -MAT 27 6 gtp3 figs-explicit τὸν κορβανᾶν 1 the treasury This is the place they kept the money they used to provide for things needed for the temple and the priests. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 27 6 gtp3 figs-explicit τὸν κορβανᾶν 1 the treasury The **treasury** was the place they kept the money they used to provide for things needed for the temple and the priests. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 27 6 j2l8 figs-idiom τιμὴ αἵματός 1 the price of blood This is an idiom that means money paid to a person who helped kill someone. Alternate translation: “money paid for a man to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 27 7 mtg6 τὸν Ἀγρὸν τοῦ Κεραμέως 1 the field of the potter This was a **field** that was bought to bury strangers who died in Jerusalem. MAT 27 8 nts8 figs-activepassive ἐκλήθη ὁ ἀγρὸς ἐκεῖνος 1 that field has been called If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “people call that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 27 8 ag2n ἕως τῆς σήμερον 1 to this day This means to the time that Matthew is writing this book. -MAT 27 9 g1gc 0 General Information: The author quotes Old Testament scripture to show that Judas’ suicide was a fulfillment of prophecy. +MAT 27 8 ag2n ἕως τῆς σήμερον 1 to this day Here, **this day** refers to the time when Matthew is writing this book. +MAT 27 9 g1gc καὶ ἔλαβον τὰ τριάκοντα ἀργύρια, τὴν τιμὴν τοῦ τετιμημένου, ὃν ἐτιμήσαντο ἀπὸ υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 General Information: The author quotes Old Testament scripture to show that Judas’ suicide was a fulfillment of prophecy. MAT 27 9 rj3u figs-activepassive τότε ἐπληρώθη τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ Ἰερεμίου τοῦ προφήτου 1 Then what had been spoken by Jeremiah the prophet was fulfilled If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “This fulfilled what the prophet Jeremiah spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 27 9 t1dj figs-activepassive τὴν τιμὴν τοῦ τετιμημένου, ὃν ἐτιμήσαντο ἀπὸ υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 the price of the one whose price had been set by the sons of Israel If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the price the people of Israel set on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 27 9 d7l7 figs-metonymy υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 the sons of Israel This refers to those among the people of **Israel** who paid to kill Jesus. Alternate translation: “some of the people of Israel” or “the leaders of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 27 10 c2ch συνέταξέν μοι 1 had directed me Here, **me** refers to Jeremiah. -MAT 27 11 pjc5 0 Connecting Statement: This continues the story of Jesus’ trial before Pilate, which began in [27:2](../27/02.md). -MAT 27 11 we3a δὲ 1 Now If your language has a way of continuing a story after a break from the main story line, you may want to use it here. +MAT 27 11 pjc5 δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: This continues the story of Jesus’ trial before Pilate, which began in [27:2](../27/02.md). If your language has a way of continuing a story after a break from the main story line, you may want to use it here. MAT 27 11 a2e7 τοῦ ἡγεμόνος 1 the governor Alternate translation: “Pilate” MAT 27 11 a6cm figs-explicit αὐτῷ σὺ λέγεις 1 It is as you say This could mean: (1) Jesus implied that he is the King of the Jews. Alternate translation: “Yes, as you said, I am” or “Yes. It is as you said” (2) Jesus was saying that Pilate, not Jesus, was the one calling him the King of the Jews. Alternate translation: “You yourself have said so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 27 12 vl3a figs-activepassive καὶ ἐν τῷ κατηγορεῖσθαι αὐτὸν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 And when he was accused by the chief priests and the elders If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when the chief priests and elders accused him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 27 13 wn2r figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀκούεις πόσα σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν? 1 Do you not hear everything they are bringing against you? Pilate asks this question because he is surprised that Jesus remains silent. Alternate translation: “I am surprised that you do not answer these people who accuse you of doing bad things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 27 14 hbm8 οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ πρὸς οὐδὲ ἓν ῥῆμα, ὥστε θαυμάζειν τὸν ἡγεμόνα λίαν 1 he did not answer him not even to one word, so as to amaze the governor greatly “he did not say even one word; this greatly amazed the governor.” This is an emphatic way of saying that Jesus was completely silent. -MAT 27 15 jjp8 writing-background δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line so Matthew can give information to help the reader understand what happens beginning in [27:17](../27/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -MAT 27 15 p1ha ἑορτὴν 1 the festival This is the festival for the Passover celebration. +MAT 27 13 wn2r figs-rquestion οὐκ ἀκούεις πόσα σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν? 1 Do you not hear everything they are bringing against you? Pilate asks this question because he is surprised that Jesus remains silent. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am surprised that you do not answer these people who accuse you of doing bad things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 27 14 hbm8 οὐκ ἀπεκρίθη αὐτῷ πρὸς οὐδὲ ἓν ῥῆμα, ὥστε θαυμάζειν τὸν ἡγεμόνα λίαν 1 he did not answer him not even to one word, so as to amaze the governor greatly This is an emphatic way of saying that Jesus was completely silent. Alternate translation: “he did not say even one word; this greatly amazed the governor” +MAT 27 15 jjp8 writing-background δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line so Matthew can give information to help the reader understand what happens beginning in [27:17](../27/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MAT 27 15 p1ha ἑορτὴν 1 the festival This is the **festival** of the Passover celebration. MAT 27 15 pfk6 figs-activepassive ἕνα τῷ ὄχλῳ δέσμιον, ὃν ἤθελον 1 to the crowd one prisoner whom they chose If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “one prisoner whom the crowd would choose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 27 16 q2iu εἶχον…δέσμιον ἐπίσημον 1 they were holding a notorious prisoner Alternate translation: “there was a notorious prisoner” -MAT 27 16 svr2 ἐπίσημον 1 notorious well known for doing something bad +MAT 27 16 svr2 ἐπίσημον 1 notorious A **notorious** person is someone who is well known for doing something bad. MAT 27 17 d8hv figs-activepassive συνηγμένων…αὐτῶν 1 when they were gathered together If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the crowd gathered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 27 17 wrl3 figs-activepassive τὸν λεγόμενον Χριστόν 1 who is called Christ If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whom some people call the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 27 18 jq3c παρέδωκαν αὐτόν 1 they had handed him over to him “the Jewish leaders had brought Jesus to him.” They had done this so that Pilate would judge Jesus. +MAT 27 18 jq3c παρέδωκαν αὐτόν 1 they had handed him over to him They had done this so that Pilate would judge Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders had brought Jesus to him” MAT 27 19 t3mx καθημένου δὲ αὐτοῦ 1 But while he was sitting Alternate translation: “But while Pilate was sitting” -MAT 27 19 s5pc καθημένου…αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 while he was sitting on the judgment seat “while he was sitting on the judge’s seat.” This is where a judge would sit while making a decision. +MAT 27 19 s5pc καθημένου…αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 while he was sitting on the judgment seat The **judgment seat** was the place where a judge would sit while making a decision. Alternate translation: “while he was sitting on the judge’s seat” MAT 27 19 w4i8 ἀπέστειλεν 1 sent word Alternate translation: “sent a message” MAT 27 19 an95 πολλὰ…ἔπαθον σήμερον 1 I have suffered much today Alternate translation: “I have been very upset today” MAT 27 20 ax1i writing-background δὲ 1 Now Here, **now** is used to mark a break in the main story line. Matthew tells background information about why the crowd chose Barabbas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -2663,19 +2634,18 @@ MAT 27 21 x6vf εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 1 said to them Alternate translation: MAT 27 22 zl85 figs-activepassive τὸν λεγόμενον Χριστόν 1 who is called Christ If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whom some people call the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 27 23 m5jm ἐποίησεν 1 did he do Alternate translation: “has Jesus done” MAT 27 23 nb7p οἱ…ἔκραζον 1 they cried out Alternate translation: “the crowd cried out” -MAT 27 24 yj8t translate-symaction ἀπενίψατο τὰς χεῖρας ἀπέναντι τοῦ ὄχλου 1 washed his hands in front of the crowd Pilate does this as a sign that he is not responsible for Jesus’ death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +MAT 27 24 yj8t translate-symaction ἀπενίψατο τὰς χεῖρας ἀπέναντι τοῦ ὄχλου 1 washed his hands in front of the crowd Pilate does this action as a sign that he is not responsible for Jesus’ death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) MAT 27 24 u1fe figs-metonymy τοῦ αἵματος 1 the blood Here, **blood** refers to a person’s death. Alternate translation: “the death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 27 24 de8w ὑμεῖς ὄψεσθε 1 See to it yourselves Alternate translation: “This is your responsibility” MAT 27 25 n5k1 figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα αὐτοῦ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ τέκνα ἡμῶν 1 His blood be on us and our children Here, **blood** is a metonym that stands for a person’s death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 27 25 k1cb figs-idiom τὸ αἷμα αὐτοῦ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ τέκνα ἡμῶν 1 His blood be on us and on our children The phrase **be on us and our children** is an idiom that means they accept the responsibility of what is happening. Alternate translation: “Yes! We and our descendants will be responsible for executing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 27 26 yb5y τότε ἀπέλυσεν αὐτοῖς τὸν Βαραββᾶν 1 Then he released Barabbas to them Alternate translation: “Then Pilate released Barabbas to the crowd” MAT 27 26 m63d figs-explicit τὸν δὲ Ἰησοῦν φραγελλώσας, παρέδωκεν ἵνα σταυρωθῇ 1 but having scourged Jesus, he handed him over so that he would be crucified It is implied that Pilate ordered his soldiers to scourge Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 27 26 n421 figs-metaphor τὸν δὲ Ἰησοῦν φραγελλώσας, παρέδωκεν ἵνα σταυρωθῇ 1 but having scourged Jesus, he handed him over so that he would be crucified It is implied that Pilate ordered his soldiers to scourge Jesus. Handing Jesus over to be crucified is a metaphor for ordering his soldiers to crucify Jesus. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to scourge Jesus and to crucify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 27 26 n421 figs-metaphor τὸν δὲ Ἰησοῦν φραγελλώσας, παρέδωκεν ἵνα σταυρωθῇ 1 but having scourged Jesus, he handed him over so that he would be crucified Handing Jesus over to be crucified is a metaphor for ordering his soldiers to crucify Jesus. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to scourge Jesus and to crucify him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 27 26 y3kf τὸν…Ἰησοῦν φραγελλώσας 2 having scourged Jesus Alternate translation: “having beaten Jesus with a whip” or “having whipped Jesus” MAT 27 27 zz45 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus’ crucifixion and death. MAT 27 27 bn22 ὅλην τὴν σπεῖραν 1 the whole company of soldiers Alternate translation: “the entire group of soldiers” MAT 27 28 nx81 καὶ ἐκδύσαντες αὐτὸν 1 And having stripped him Alternate translation: “And having pulled off his clothes” -MAT 27 28 qsz5 κοκκίνην 1 scarlet bright red MAT 27 29 yw94 στέφανον ἐξ ἀκανθῶν 1 a crown of thorns Alternate translation: “a crown made of thorny branches” or “a crown made of branches with thorns on them” MAT 27 29 dlz7 κάλαμον ἐν τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 1 a staff in his right hand They gave Jesus a stick to hold to represent a scepter that a king holds. They did this to mock Jesus. MAT 27 29 qf8j figs-irony χαῖρε, ὁ Βασιλεῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Hail, King of the Jews They were saying this to mock Jesus. They were calling Jesus **King of the Jews**, but they did not really believe he was a king. And yet what they were saying was true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) @@ -2686,26 +2656,24 @@ MAT 27 32 ies4 εὗρον ἄνθρωπον 1 they found a man Alternate trans MAT 27 32 sfj2 τοῦτον ἠγγάρευσαν ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ 1 whom they forced so that he would carry his cross Alternate translation: “whom the soldiers forced to go with them so that he could carry Jesus’ cross” MAT 27 33 j6hb figs-activepassive τόπον λεγόμενον Γολγοθᾶ 1 a place called Golgotha If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “a place that people called Golgotha” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 27 34 f11j figs-activepassive πιεῖν οἶνον μετὰ χολῆς μεμιγμένον 1 wine to drink mixed with gall If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “wine, which they had mixed with gall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 27 34 e2uk χολῆς 1 gall the bitter, yellow liquid that bodies use in digestion -MAT 27 35 a1y1 figs-explicit τὰ ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ 1 his garments These were the clothes Jesus had been wearing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 27 34 e2uk χολῆς 1 gall This **gall** was a bitter, yellow liquid that bodies use in digestion. MAT 27 37 j4s4 τὴν αἰτίαν αὐτοῦ 1 the charge against him Alternate translation: “a written explanation of why he was being crucified” MAT 27 38 zq4b figs-activepassive τότε σταυροῦνται σὺν αὐτῷ δύο λῃσταί 1 Then two robbers are being crucified with him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Then the soldiers crucified two robbers with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 27 39 d4fm translate-symaction κινοῦντες τὰς κεφαλὰς αὐτῶν 1 shaking their heads They did this to make fun of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) MAT 27 40 t23i figs-explicit εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ κατάβηθι ἀπὸ τοῦ σταυροῦ 1 If you are the Son of God, come down from the cross They did not believe that Jesus is **the Son of God**, so they wanted him to prove it if it was true. Alternate translation: “If you are the Son of God, prove it by coming down from the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 27 40 b5lw guidelines-sonofgodprinciples υἱὸς…τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son of God This is an important title for the Christ that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 27 40 b5lw guidelines-sonofgodprinciples υἱὸς…τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for the Christ that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 27 42 ff4d figs-irony ἄλλους ἔσωσεν, ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύναται σῶσαι 1 He saved others; he is not able to save himself This could mean: (1) the Jewish leaders do not believe that Jesus **saved others** or that he can **save himself**. (2) they believe he did save others but are laughing at him because now he cannot **save himself**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) MAT 27 42 j6l7 figs-irony Βασιλεὺς Ἰσραήλ ἐστιν, 1 He is the King of Israel! The leaders are mocking Jesus. They call him **King of Israel**, but they do not really believe he is king. Alternate translation: “He says that he is the King of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) -MAT 27 43 w46n 0 Connecting Statement: The Jewish leaders continue mocking Jesus. MAT 27 43 cl97 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν γὰρ, ὅτι Θεοῦ εἰμι Υἱός. 1 For he said, ‘I am the Son of God.’ This is a quotation within a quotation. You can state this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “For Jesus even said that he is the Son of God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -MAT 27 43 uw85 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ…Υἱός 1 the Son of God This is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 27 43 uw85 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ…Υἱός 1 the Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 27 44 e26y figs-activepassive οἱ λῃσταὶ, οἱ συνσταυρωθέντες σὺν αὐτῷ 1 the robbers who were crucified with him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the robbers that the soldiers crucified with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 27 45 e7z4 δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. +MAT 27 45 e7z4 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. MAT 27 45 s2l7 ἀπὸ…ἕκτης ὥρας…ἕως ὥρας ἐνάτης 1 from the sixth hour … until the ninth hour Alternate translation: “from about noon … for three hours” or “from about twelve o’clock midday … until about three o’clock in the afternoon” MAT 27 45 pi8e figs-abstractnouns σκότος ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν 1 darkness happened over all the land If your readers would misunderstand the abstract noun **darkness**, you can express it as a verb. Alternate translation: “it became dark over the whole land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) MAT 27 46 qyp7 ἀνεβόησεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 Jesus cried out Alternate translation: “Jesus called out” or “Jesus shouted” MAT 27 46 xub2 translate-transliterate Ἐλωῒ, Ἐλωῒ, λεμὰ σαβαχθάνει 1 Eli, Eli, lama sabachthani These words are what Jesus cried out in his own language. Translators usually leave these words as is. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) MAT 27 48 jm37 εἷς ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 one of them This could refer to: (1) one of the soldiers. (2) one of those who stood by and watched. -MAT 27 48 bsy1 σπόγγον 1 a sponge This is a sea animal that is harvested and used to take up and hold liquids. These liquids can later be pushed out. +MAT 27 48 bsy1 σπόγγον 1 a sponge A **sponge** is a sea animal that is harvested and used to take up and hold liquids. These liquids can later be pushed out. MAT 27 48 ny3e ἐπότιζεν αὐτόν 1 gave it to him to drink Alternate translation: “gave it to Jesus” MAT 27 50 fj1v figs-euphemism ἀφῆκεν τὸ πνεῦμα 1 released his spirit Here, **spirit** refers to that which gives life to a person. This phrase is a way of saying that Jesus died. Alternate translation: “he died, giving his spirit over to God” or “he breathed his last breath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MAT 27 51 w1wq 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of the events that happened when Jesus died. @@ -2715,38 +2683,38 @@ MAT 27 52 a1cu figs-activepassive καὶ τὰ μνημεῖα ἀνεῴχθη MAT 27 52 kj3r figs-idiom πολλὰ σώματα τῶν κεκοιμημένων ἁγίων ἠγέρθη 1 many of the bodies of the saints who had fallen asleep were raised Here to be **raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “God put life back into the dead bodies of many godly people who had fallen asleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 27 52 hgn1 figs-euphemism κεκοιμημένων 1 who had fallen asleep This is a polite way of referring to dying. Alternate translation: “who had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) MAT 27 53 q2x5 καὶ ἐξελθόντες ἐκ τῶν μνημείων μετὰ τὴν ἔγερσιν αὐτοῦ, εἰσῆλθον εἰς τὴν ἁγίαν πόλιν καὶ ἐνεφανίσθησαν πολλοῖς 1 And having come out from the tombs after his resurrection, they entered into the holy city and appeared to many The order of the events that Matthew describes (beginning with the words “The tombs were opened” in verse 52) is unclear. After the earthquake when Jesus died and the **tombs** were opened (1) the saints came back to life, and then, after Jesus came back to life, the saints entered Jerusalem, where many people saw them. (2) Jesus came back to life, and then the saints came back to life and entered the city, where many people saw them. -MAT 27 54 f6rz δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. -MAT 27 54 vv2g figs-explicit οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ τηροῦντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 those with him watching Jesus “those who were guarding Jesus.” This refers to the other soldiers who were guarding Jesus with the centurion. Alternate translation: “the other soldiers with him who were guarding Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 27 54 gw6n guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Υἱὸς 1 the Son of God This is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 27 54 f6rz δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. +MAT 27 54 vv2g figs-explicit οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ τηροῦντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 those with him watching Jesus This refers to the other soldiers who were guarding Jesus with the centurion. Alternate translation: “the other soldiers with him who were guarding Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 27 54 gw6n guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Θεοῦ Υἱὸς 1 the Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus that describes his relationship to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 27 56 ud33 ἡ μήτηρ τῶν υἱῶν Ζεβεδαίου 1 the mother of the sons of Zebedee Alternate translation: “the mother of James and John” or “the wife of Zebedee” MAT 27 57 wm5z 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus’ burial. -MAT 27 57 sy9y translate-names Ἁριμαθαίας 1 Arimathea This is the name of a city in Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +MAT 27 57 sy9y translate-names Ἁριμαθαίας 1 Arimathea **Arimathea** is the name of a city in Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 27 58 c69n figs-activepassive τότε ὁ Πειλᾶτος ἐκέλευσεν ἀποδοθῆναι 1 Then Pilate commanded it to be given to him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Then Pilate ordered the soldiers to give the body of Jesus to Joseph” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 27 59 kj7u σινδόνι καθαρᾷ 1 in a clean linen cloth in a clean, fine, costly cloth MAT 27 60 hvs8 figs-explicit ὃ ἐλατόμησεν ἐν τῇ πέτρᾳ 1 that he had cut into the rock It is implied that Joseph had workers who **cut** the tomb **into the rock**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 27 60 lt4k figs-explicit καὶ προσκυλίσας λίθον μέγαν 1 And having rolled a large stone against Most likely Joseph had other people there to help him roll the **stone**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 27 61 ihr8 ἀπέναντι τοῦ τάφου 1 opposite the tomb Alternate translation: “across from the tomb” -MAT 27 62 qj59 τὴν παρασκευήν 1 the Preparation This is the day that people got everything ready for the Sabbath. +MAT 27 62 qj59 τὴν παρασκευήν 1 the Preparation The **Preparation** is the day that people got everything ready for the Sabbath. MAT 27 62 j57n συνήχθησαν…πρὸς Πειλᾶτον 1 were gathered together with Pilate Alternate translation: “met with Pilate” MAT 27 63 sc6y ἐκεῖνος ὁ πλάνος…ἔτι ζῶν 1 that deceiver, yet living Alternate translation: “Jesus, the deceiver, when he was alive” MAT 27 63 ri5s figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν…μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἐγείρομαι. 1 said, ‘After three days I am being raised up.’ This has a quotation within a quotation. You can state this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he said that after three days he will rise again.” or “he said that after three day he would rise again.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MAT 27 64 b8n2 figs-activepassive κέλευσον…ἀσφαλισθῆναι τὸν τάφον 1 command the tomb to be made secure If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “command your soldiers to guard the tomb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 27 64 hbh8 translate-ordinal τῆς τρίτης ἡμέρας 1 the third day (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +MAT 27 64 hbh8 translate-ordinal τῆς τρίτης ἡμέρας 1 the third day The word **third** is the ordinal form of three. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) MAT 27 64 pwc8 ἐλθόντες οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ, κλέψωσιν αὐτὸν 1 his disciples, having come, might steal him Alternate translation: “his disciples may come and steal his body” MAT 27 64 t78s figs-quotesinquotes εἴπωσιν τῷ λαῷ, ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν; καὶ 1 might say to the people, ‘He has been raised up from the dead,’ and This has a quotation within a quotation. You can state this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “might tell the people that he has been raised from the dead, and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -MAT 27 64 c7bf ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 from the dead “from among all those who have died.” This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again. -MAT 27 64 u5tg figs-ellipsis καὶ ἔσται ἡ ἐσχάτη πλάνη χείρων τῆς πρώτης 1 and the last deception will be worse than the first You can state the understood information clearly. Alternate translation: “and if they deceive people by saying that, it will be worse than the way he deceived people before when he said that he was the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 27 65 dkq9 κουστωδίαν 1 a guard This consisted of four to sixteen Roman soldiers. +MAT 27 64 c7bf ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 from the dead This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again. Alternate translation: “from among all those who have died” +MAT 27 64 u5tg figs-ellipsis καὶ ἔσται ἡ ἐσχάτη πλάνη χείρων τῆς πρώτης 1 and the last deception will be worse than the first You can state the understood information explicitly. Alternate translation: “and if they deceive people by saying that, it will be worse than the way he deceived people before when he said that he was the Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 27 65 dkq9 κουστωδίαν 1 a guard This **guard** consisted of four to sixteen Roman soldiers. MAT 27 66 pk1q σφραγίσαντες τὸν λίθον 1 having sealed the stone This could mean: (1) they put a cord around **the stone** and attached it to the rock wall on either side of the entrance to the tomb. (2) they put seals between **the stone** and the wall. MAT 27 66 e8uf μετὰ τῆς κουστωδίας 1 with the guard Alternate translation: “and having told the soldiers to stand where they could keep people from tampering with the tomb” MAT 28 intro psw9 0 # Matthew 28 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The tomb

The tomb in which Jesus was buried ([Matthew 28:1](../mat/28/01.md)) was the kind of tomb in which wealthy Jewish families buried their dead. It was an actual room cut into a rock. It had a flat place on one side where they could place the body after they had put oil and spices on it and wrapped it in cloth. Then they would roll a large rock in front of the tomb so no one could see inside or enter.

### “Make disciples”

The last two verses ([Matthew 28:19-20](../mat/28/19.md)) are commonly known as “The Great Commission” because they contain a very important command given to all Christians. Christians are to “make disciples” by going to people, sharing the gospel with them and training them to live as Christians.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### An angel of the Lord

Matthew, Mark, Luke, and John all wrote about angels in white clothing with the women at Jesus’ tomb. Two of the authors called them men, but that is only because the angels looked human. Two of the authors wrote about two angels, but the other two authors wrote about only one of them. It is best to translate each of these passages as it appears in the ULT without trying to make the passages all say exactly the same thing. (See: [Matthew 28:1-2](../mat/28/01.md) and [Mark 16:5](../mrk/16/05.md) and [Luke 24:4](../luk/24/04.md) and [John 20:12](../jhn/20/12.md)) MAT 28 1 anr1 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of the resurrection of Jesus from the dead. MAT 28 1 qkn8 ὀψὲ δὲ Σαββάτων, τῇ ἐπιφωσκούσῃ εἰς μίαν σαββάτων 1 Now late on the Sabbath, as it is dawning toward the first day of the week Alternate translation: “Now after the Sabbath ended, as the sun came up on Sunday morning” -MAT 28 1 gs43 δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. -MAT 28 1 zu2b ἡ ἄλλη Μαρία 1 the other Mary “the other woman named Mary.” This is **Mary** the mother of James and Joseph ([27:56](../27/56.md)). +MAT 28 1 gs43 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. +MAT 28 1 zu2b ἡ ἄλλη Μαρία 1 the other Mary This is **Mary** the mother of James and Joseph ([27:56](../27/56.md)). Alternate translation: “the other woman named Mary” MAT 28 2 j25i ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows. Your language may have a way of doing this. MAT 28 2 l4s2 σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας; ἄγγελος γὰρ Κυρίου καταβὰς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ καὶ προσελθὼν, ἀπεκύλισε τὸν λίθον 1 a great earthquake happened, for an angel of the Lord, having descended from heaven and having come near, rolled away the stone This could mean: (1) the **earthquake happened** because the **angel** came down and **rolled away the stone**. (2) all these events happened at the same time. -MAT 28 2 s43v σεισμὸς…μέγας 1 a great earthquake a sudden and violent shaking of the ground +MAT 28 2 s43v σεισμὸς…μέγας 1 a great earthquake An **earthquake** is a sudden and violent shaking of the ground. MAT 28 3 vfh4 ἡ εἰδέα αὐτοῦ 1 his appearance Alternate translation: “the angel’s appearance” MAT 28 3 p12y figs-simile ἦν…ὡς ἀστραπὴ 1 was like lightning This is a simile that emphasizes how bright in appearance the angel was. Alternate translation: “was bright like lightning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) MAT 28 3 i4hp figs-ellipsis τὸ ἔνδυμα αὐτοῦ λευκὸν ὡς χιών 1 his clothing white like snow The verb “was” from the previous phrase can be repeated. Alternate translation: “his clothing was white like snow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -2756,24 +2724,23 @@ MAT 28 5 q8dd ταῖς γυναιξίν 1 to the women Alternate translation: MAT 28 5 tbd8 figs-activepassive τὸν ἐσταυρωμένον 1 who has been crucified If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “whom the people and the soldiers crucified” or “whom they had crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 28 7 sp2a figs-quotesinquotes εἴπατε τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν; καὶ ἰδοὺ, προάγει ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν; ἐκεῖ αὐτὸν ὄψεσθε. 1 tell his disciples, ‘He has been raised up from the dead. And behold, he is going ahead of you to Galilee. There you will see him.’ This is a quotation within a quotation. You can state this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “tell his disciples that he has risen from the dead and that Jesus has gone ahead of you to Galilee where you will see him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MAT 28 7 r5cw ἠγέρθη 1 He has been raised up Alternate translation: “He has come back to life” -MAT 28 7 a1ir ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. -MAT 28 7 ljb2 figs-you προάγει ὑμᾶς…αὐτὸν ὄψεσθε 1 he is going ahead of you … you will see him Here, **you** is plural. It refers to the women and the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 28 7 hf9i figs-you εἶπον ὑμῖν 1 I have told you Here, **you** is plural and refers to the women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +MAT 28 7 a1ir ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 from the dead This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. +MAT 28 7 ljb2 figs-you ὑμᾶς…ὄψεσθε…ὑμῖν 1 he is going ahead of you … you will see him Here, all occurrences of **you** are plural. It refers to the women and the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 28 8 j2sv καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι ταχὺ 1 And having quickly left Alternate translation: “And after Mary Magdalene and the other woman named Mary quickly left” MAT 28 9 s393 ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows. Your language may have a way of doing this. MAT 28 9 n5sz χαίρετε 1 Greetings This is an ordinary greeting, much like “Hello” in English. MAT 28 9 nmg1 ἐκράτησαν αὐτοῦ τοὺς πόδας 1 took hold of his feet Alternate translation: “got down on their knees and held onto his feet” -MAT 28 10 etk6 τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου 1 my brothers This refers to Jesus’ disciples. +MAT 28 10 etk6 τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου 1 my brothers Here, **my brothers** refers to Jesus’ disciples. MAT 28 11 u1ae 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of the reaction of the Jewish religious leaders when they heard of Jesus’ resurrection. -MAT 28 11 ktu5 δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. -MAT 28 11 mu4l αὐτῶν 1 They Here this refers to Mary Magdalene and the other Mary. -MAT 28 11 rnr3 ἰδού 1 behold This marks the beginning of another event in the larger story. It may involve different people than the previous events. Your language may have a way of doing this. -MAT 28 12 ht82 συμβούλιόν τε λαβόντες 1 discussed the matter with them “decided on a plan among themselves.” The priests and elders decided to give the money to the soldiers. -MAT 28 13 kn8i writing-quotations εἴπατε ὅτι, οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ…ἐλθόντες…ἡμῶν κοιμωμένων. 1 Say, ‘His disciples came … while we were sleeping.’ If your language does not allow quotations within quotations you may translate this as a single quote. Alternate translation: “Tell others that Jesus’ disciples came … while you were sleeping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +MAT 28 11 ktu5 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. +MAT 28 11 mu4l αὐτῶν 1 They Here, **they** refers to Mary Magdalene and the other Mary. +MAT 28 11 rnr3 ἰδού 1 behold Here, **behold** marks the beginning of another event in the larger story. It may involve different people than the previous events. Your language may have a way of doing this. +MAT 28 12 ht82 συμβούλιόν τε λαβόντες 1 discussed the matter with them The priests and elders decided to give the money to the soldiers. Alternate translation: “decided on a plan among themselves” +MAT 28 13 kn8i writing-quotations εἴπατε ὅτι, οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ…ἐλθόντες…ἡμῶν κοιμωμένων. 1 Say, ‘His disciples came … while we were sleeping.’ If your language does not use quotations within quotations you may translate this as a single quote. Alternate translation: “Tell others that Jesus’ disciples came … while you were sleeping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) MAT 28 14 n8xy καὶ ἐὰν ἀκουσθῇ τοῦτο ἐπὶ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος 1 If this report reaches the governor Alternate translation: “If the governor hears that you were asleep when Jesus’ disciples took his body” MAT 28 14 u13q τοῦ ἡγεμόνος 1 the governor Alternate translation: “Pilate” ([27:2](../27/02.md)) MAT 28 14 x57k ἡμεῖς πείσομεν καὶ ὑμᾶς ἀμερίμνους ποιήσομεν 1 we will persuade him and keep you out of trouble Alternate translation: “do not worry. We will talk to him so that he does not punish you.” -MAT 28 15 yu3c figs-activepassive ἐποίησαν ὡς ἐδιδάχθησαν 1 did as they had been instructed You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “did what the priests had told them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 28 15 yu3c figs-activepassive ἐποίησαν ὡς ἐδιδάχθησαν 1 did as they had been instructed If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “did what the priests had told them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 28 15 cp7r ὁ λόγος οὗτος παρὰ Ἰουδαίοις μέχρι τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας 1 This report spread widely among the Jews and continues even today Alternate translation: “Many Jews heard this report and continue to tell others about it even today” MAT 28 15 vp3a μέχρι τῆς σήμερον ἡμέρας 1 even until today This refers to the time Matthew wrote the book. MAT 28 16 h1ln 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus meeting with his disciples after his resurrection. @@ -2783,6 +2750,6 @@ MAT 28 18 v37p figs-activepassive ἐδόθη μοι πᾶσα ἐξουσία 1 MAT 28 18 sm35 figs-merism ἐν οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 1 in heaven and on earth Here, **heaven** and **earth** are used together to mean everyone and everything in heaven and earth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) MAT 28 19 yz6q figs-metonymy πάντα τὰ ἔθνη 1 of all the nations Here, **nations** refers to the people. Alternate translation: “of all the people in every nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 28 19 l5b5 figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα 1 into the name Here, **name** refers to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -MAT 28 19 kwa3 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς…τοῦ Υἱοῦ 1 the Father … the Son These are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -MAT 28 20 mz6f ἰδοὺ 1 See Alternate translation: “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” +MAT 28 19 kwa3 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς…τοῦ Υἱοῦ 1 the Father … the Son **Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +MAT 28 20 mz6f ἰδοὺ 1 See Alternate translation: “look” or “listen” or “pay attention to what I am about to tell you” MAT 28 20 si8z ἕως τῆς συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος 1 even to the end of the age Alternate translation: “until the end of this age” or “until the end of the world” From bb6ee92bbe91ae76137c7b9a61f0f4d6a40bc349 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Thu, 31 Mar 2022 18:20:56 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 02/15] Corrected format of Acts notes (#2374) Co-authored-by: Larry Sallee Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2374 --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 50 ++++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ 1 file changed, 25 insertions(+), 25 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 8e459a3949..152dd83bbe 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -ACT front intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Acts

1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)
2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)
3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)
4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)
5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)
6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)

### What is the book of Acts about?

The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”

### Who wrote the book of Acts?

The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the church?

The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.

### The kingdom of God

The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts

“to the same”

The phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.

“in/to/into the temple”

Luke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?

The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.

First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets \[ \]. The ULT and UST put them in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you put these verses in footnotes. These verses are:

* Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’”
* Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.”
* Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.”
* Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”

Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are:

* Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.”
* Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”).
* Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.”
* Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -ACT 1 intro vyg9 0 # Acts 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Ascension

This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]])

### Baptism

Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in [1:5](../01/05.md). In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers figuratively to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in [2:4](../02/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])

### “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God”

Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in [1:3](../01/03.md), he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse.

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Long sentence

As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the end of [1:3](../01/03.md). ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

### The details of the death of Judas

There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death.

It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it.

But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in [1:18](../01/18.md) that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you can let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.

### The 12 disciples

There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts.

All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known.

Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in [1:13](../01/13.md) instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible. +ACT front intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the book of Acts

1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)
2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)
3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)
4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)
5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)
6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)

### What is the book of Acts about?

The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”

### Who wrote the book of Acts?

The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.

Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What is the church?

The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.

### The kingdom of God

The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts

“to the same”

The phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.

“in/to/into the temple”

Luke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.

### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?

The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.

First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets \[ \]. The ULT and UST put them in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you put these verses in footnotes. These verses are:

* Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’”
* Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.”
* Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.”
* Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”

Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are:

* Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.”
* Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”).
* Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.”
* Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +ACT 1 intro vyg9 0 # Acts 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Ascension

This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]])

### Baptism

Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in [1:5](../01/05.md). In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers figuratively to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in [2:4](../02/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])

### “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God”

Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in [1:3](../01/03.md), he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse.

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Long sentence

As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the end of [1:3](../01/03.md). ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

### The details of the death of Judas

There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death.

It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it.

But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in [1:18](../01/18.md) that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you can let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.

### The 12 disciples

There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts.

All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known.

Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in [1:13](../01/13.md) instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible. ACT 1 1 q9ep figs-explicit τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην 1 I made the first account Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by **the first account** he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 1 a000 ὦ Θεόφιλε 1 O Theophilus Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence. ACT 1 1 ryj5 translate-names Θεόφιλε 1 Theophilus **Theophilus** is the name of a man. It means “friend of God.” It may be his actual name, or it may describe what this man was like. Most translations treat it as his name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -143,7 +143,7 @@ ACT 1 26 r84c writing-pronouns ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς 1 the ACT 1 26 a074 translate-unknown ἔδωκαν κλήρους αὐτοῖς 1 they cast lots for them The term **lots** describes objects with various markings on different sides that were used, most likely by dropping them on the ground, to select between possibilities. The belief was that God would control which way these objects fell and so guide the selection process. Alternate translation: “they threw marked objects on the ground, trusting that God would use these to guide them whether to choose Joseph or Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 1 26 w4ph figs-idiom ἔπεσεν ὁ κλῆρος ἐπὶ Μαθθίαν 1 the lot fell to Matthias This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “the lot selected Matthias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 26 fk4x figs-activepassive συνκατεψηφίσθη 1 he was chosen If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers chose him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 2 intro x8fr 0 # Acts 02 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pentecost

The events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years.

### Tongues

The word “tongues” has two meanings in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them.

### Last days

In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])

### The prophecy of Joel

In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:17–18). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peter’s statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

### Baptize

In this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1-11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])

### Wonders and signs

These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43.

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You killed” (2:23)

The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this.

### Long sentences

There is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

### Poetry

The quotations from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]]. +ACT 2 intro x8fr 0 # Acts 2 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35.

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the material that is quoted in 2:31.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pentecost

The events described in this chapter took place on the day of Pentecost. That was a festival that the Jews observed each year 50 days after Passover. It was a harvest festival that celebrated the first produce from the fields. That produce was known as “firstfruits.” Many people believe that the church began to exist when the Holy Spirit came to live inside believers on this particular day of Pentecost. Those believers were the “firstfruits” of all those who would become part of the church down through the years.

### Tongues

The word “tongues” has two meanings in this chapter. In 2:3, Luke describes what came down from heaven as “tongues as if of fire.” A “tongue of fire” means a “flame of fire” (as in Isaiah 5:24, for example), so this means “something like flames of fire.” In 2:4, Luke uses the word “tongues” in the different sense of “languages” to describe the languages that the people spoke after the Holy Spirit filled them.

### Last days

In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy from Joel that describes something that will happen in the “last days.” Some scholars understand the “last days” to mean a time in the future just before Jesus returns. Other scholars understand the “last days” to mean the entire time from when Jesus first came to when he will return. Translators should be careful not to let how they understand this issue affect how they translate this expression where it occurs in 2:17. It may be best not to say more about this than ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lastday]])

### The prophecy of Joel

In 2:17–21, Peter quotes a prophecy of Joel about what would happen in the “last days.” Some of the things that prophecy describes did happen on the day of Pentecost, for example, the pouring out of the Spirit (2:17–18). Some other things did not happen, at least not literally, for example, the sun turning to darkness (2:20). Depending on how scholars understand the “last days,” they may say either that these other things await a literal future fulfillment or that they were fulfilled in some spiritual sense on the day of Pentecost. Once again it may be best not to say any more than ULT does and to allow preachers and teachers of the Bible to interpret and explain the meaning of Peter’s statement in 2:16, “this is what was spoken through the prophet Joel.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

### Baptize

In this chapter, the word “baptize” refers to water baptism as an expression of faith in Jesus for the forgiveness of sins. That is how Luke uses the term in 2:38 and 2:41. Jesus did promise the disciples in 1:5 that they would be baptized in the Holy Spirit, and the events that Luke describes in 2:1-11 are the fulfillment of that promise. But Luke does not use the word “baptize” to describe those events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])

### Wonders and signs

These words refer to things that only God could do that showed that Jesus was who the disciples said he was. See the notes to this expression in 2:43.

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “You killed” (2:23)

The Romans were the ones who killed Jesus, but they killed him because the Jews captured him, brought him to the Romans, and urged the Romans to kill him. For this reason Peter tells the people in the crowd on the day of Pentecost that they were guilty of killing Jesus. See the note to this phrase in 2:23 for suggestions about how to make clear in your translation what Peter means when he says this.

### Long sentences

There is a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:9 to the end of 2:11. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 2:44 to the end of 2:47. Once again it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

### Poetry

The quotations from the Old Testament in 2:17–21, 25–28, and 34–35 are poetry. For advice about how to represent this literary form in your translation, see: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-poetry]]. ACT 2 1 i4sa writing-newevent καὶ ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 And when the day of Pentecost was completely filled Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 2 1 a076 figs-idiom ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 when the day of Pentecost was completely filled This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “when the day of Pentecost had come” or, if your language does not speak of days “coming,” “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 2 1 a425 figs-activepassive ἐν τῷ συνπληροῦσθαι τὴν ἡμέραν τῆς Πεντηκοστῆς 1 when the day of Pentecost was completely filled Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to use an active form of the verb “fill” in place of the passive form of that verb here. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -386,7 +386,7 @@ ACT 2 46 a195 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελό ACT 2 47 z6ig figs-hyperbole αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν 1 praising God and having favor with the whole people Luke says **the whole people** as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 2 47 kc42 figs-activepassive τοὺς σῳζομένους 1 those who were being saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 47 a196 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “to their Christian fellowship” -ACT 3 intro hpd9 0 # Acts 03 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The covenant God made with Abraham

This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews in fulfillment of the covenant that God made with Abraham.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Servant”

Twice in this chapter Peter uses the word “Servant” as a title to mean “Messiah” (3:13, 3:26). He and other believers use the word in the same sense twice in chapter 4 as well (4:27, 4:30). The word takes on this meaning by allusion to the book of Isaiah, where Isaiah uses it to mean the person whom God has chosen for the special purpose of bringing salvation. In your translation, indicate in some way that “Servant” is a Messianic title. Jesus was not a servant of God in the more ordinary sense, in which the believers apply it to themselves in 4:29, for example. Jesus was fully the Son of God, sent to earth on a special mission. If you would not be able to make this clear by using the word “Servant,” you may wish to use the word “Messiah” instead.

### “You killed” (3:15)

For the same reasons as when he was speaking on the day of Pentecost (2:23), Peter tells people in this chapter that they were guilty of killing Jesus. But he also tells them that they are the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus’ followers to invite them to repent (3:26). For further information and suggestions for how to make clear in your translation what Peter means, see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to chapter 2 and the notes to this phrase in 2:23 and 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “the Lord our God” (3:22)

In [3:22](../03/22.md), some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God,” and still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +ACT 3 intro hpd9 0 # Acts 3 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The covenant God made with Abraham

This chapter explains that Jesus came to the Jews in fulfillment of the covenant that God made with Abraham.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Servant”

Twice in this chapter Peter uses the word “Servant” as a title to mean “Messiah” (3:13, 3:26). He and other believers use the word in the same sense twice in chapter 4 as well (4:27, 4:30). The word takes on this meaning by allusion to the book of Isaiah, where Isaiah uses it to mean the person whom God has chosen for the special purpose of bringing salvation. In your translation, indicate in some way that “Servant” is a Messianic title. Jesus was not a servant of God in the more ordinary sense, in which the believers apply it to themselves in 4:29, for example. Jesus was fully the Son of God, sent to earth on a special mission. If you would not be able to make this clear by using the word “Servant,” you may wish to use the word “Messiah” instead.

### “You killed” (3:15)

For the same reasons as when he was speaking on the day of Pentecost (2:23), Peter tells people in this chapter that they were guilty of killing Jesus. But he also tells them that they are the first ones to whom God has sent Jesus’ followers to invite them to repent (3:26). For further information and suggestions for how to make clear in your translation what Peter means, see the discussion of this phrase in the General Notes to chapter 2 and the notes to this phrase in 2:23 and 3:15. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])

## Important textual issues in this chapter

### “the Lord our God” (3:22)

In [3:22](../03/22.md), some ancient manuscripts read “the Lord our God.” ULT follows that reading. Other ancient manuscripts read “the Lord your God,” and still other ancient manuscripts read simply “the Lord God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the reading that it has. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to use the reading of ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 3 1 b5rm grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information that will help readers understand what happens next. You can translate it with a word or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) ACT 3 1 br7i figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 to the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “to the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 3 1 a198 τὴν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this time in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon” @@ -499,7 +499,7 @@ ACT 3 26 b7tz figs-idiom ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα ACT 3 26 z5q6 τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ 1 his Servant See the discussion of the term **Servant** in the General Notes to this chapter, and see how you translated that term in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “his Messiah” ACT 3 26 x8ss figs-metaphor τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 by turning each of you from your wickedness Here, **turning** someone **from** something figuratively means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:19](../03/19.md). Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 26 a248 figs-abstractnouns τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 by turning each of you from your wickedness If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wickedness** with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 4 intro pv3a 0 # Acts 04 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Unity

The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.

### “Signs and wonders”

This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11)

The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “no other name” (4:12)

“There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” figuratively represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear. +ACT 4 intro pv3a 0 # Acts 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Unity

The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.

### “Signs and wonders”

This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11)

The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “no other name” (4:12)

“There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” figuratively represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear. ACT 4 1 abc4 writing-pronouns λαλούντων…αὐτῶν 1 as they were speaking The pronoun **they** refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 4 1 ew3l figs-explicit ὁ στρατηγὸς τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 the captain of the temple The temple had its own guards, and this man was their commanding officer. Alternate translation: “the commander of the temple guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 1 a253 translate-names οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι 1 the Sadducees **Sadducees** is the name of a group of Jewish priests. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -672,7 +672,7 @@ ACT 4 36 a328 translate-names Λευείτης 1 a Levite The name **Levite** de ACT 4 36 a329 translate-names Κύπριος 1 Cyprus **Cyprus** is the name of an island. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 4 37 a330 ὑπάρχοντος αὐτῷ 1 that was to him See how you translated the similar expression in [4:32](../04/32.md). Alternate translation: “that he owned” ACT 4 37 gtv5 translate-symaction ἔθηκεν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 laid it at the feet of the apostles See how you translated the similar expression in [4:35](../04/35.md). Alternate translation: “presented it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 5 intro k2uh 0 # Acts 05 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit?” (5:3)

No one knows for sure whether Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold (5:1-10), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan. When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers.

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Long sentences

Acts 5:36 consists of a single long sentence. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 5:38 to nearly the end of 5:39. In this case as well it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. +ACT 5 intro k2uh 0 # Acts 5 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Why has Satan filled your heart for you to lie to the Holy Spirit?” (5:3)

No one knows for sure whether Ananias and Sapphira were truly Christians when they decided to lie about the land that they sold (5:1-10), because Luke does not say. However, Peter knew that they lied to the believers, and he knew that they had listened to and obeyed Satan. When they lied to the believers, they also lied to the Holy Spirit. This is because the Holy Spirit lives inside believers.

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Long sentences

Acts 5:36 consists of a single long sentence. ULT represents all of it as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.

There is also a long sentence that goes from the beginning of 5:38 to nearly the end of 5:39. In this case as well it may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does. ACT 5 1 v27a writing-participants ἀνὴρ δέ τις 1 Now a certain man Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 5 1 ysl9 translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias **Ananias** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 5 1 a332 writing-participants σὺν Σαπφείρῃ τῇ γυναικὶ αὐτοῦ 1 with Sapphira his wife Luke uses this phrase to introduce another new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -826,7 +826,7 @@ ACT 5 36 juz1 figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἐπείθοντο αὐτῷ 1 as m ACT 5 36 a411 figs-activepassive διελύθησαν 1 were dispersed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “dispersed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 36 rzg5 καὶ ἐγένοντο εἰς οὐδέν 1 and they came to nothing Alternate translation: “and their plans did not succeed” ACT 5 37 f33y figs-nominaladj μετὰ τοῦτον 1 After this one Gamaliel is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Theudas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could use a pronoun or this man’s name. Alternate translation: “After him” or “After Theudas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 5 37 a412 translate-names Ἰούδας ὁ Γαλιλαῖος 1 Judas the Galilean **Judas** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name in [1:13](../01/13.md) and [1:16](../01/16.md). (Those verses describe two other men with this name, not the same Judas as here.) **Galilean** is the name for someone who is from the region of Galilee. See how you translated that name in [1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 5 37 a412 translate-names Ἰούδας ὁ Γαλιλαῖος 1 Judas the Galilean **Judas** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name in [1:13](../01/13.md) and [1:16](../01/16.md). (Those verses describe two other men with this name, not the same Judas as here.) **Galilean** is the name for someone who is from the region of Galilee. See how you translated that name in [1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 5 37 a413 figs-metaphor ἀνέστη 1 rose up As in [5:36](../05/36.md), **rose up** here figuratively means that Judas rebelled against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “rebelled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 5 37 p56f figs-idiom ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῆς ἀπογραφῆς 1 in the days of the census Gamaliel is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at the time of the census” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 37 kz4s figs-idiom ἀπέστησε λαὸν ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ 1 drew away people after him Here, **drew away** is an idiom that means Judas persuaded people to rebel with him against the Roman government. Alternate translation: “persuaded people to join him in rebellion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -854,7 +854,7 @@ ACT 5 41 lk82 figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος 1 for the Name ACT 5 42 jj94 writing-endofstory τε 1 And Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened after this story as a result of the events within the story itself. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 5 42 kyp6 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 42 x424 figs-litotes οὐκ ἐπαύοντο, διδάσκοντες καὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι 1 they did not cease teaching and proclaiming the gospel Luke is expressing a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “they continued to teach and to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 6 intro z5r5 0 # Acts 06 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The distribution to the widows

The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “His face was like the face of an angel”

No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this. +ACT 6 intro z5r5 0 # Acts 6 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The distribution to the widows

The believers in Jerusalem gave food every day to women whose husbands had died. All of them had been raised as Jews, but some of them spoke Hebrew and had lived mostly in Judea, while others spoke Greek and may have lived in Gentile areas. Those who gave out the food gave it to the Hebrew-speaking widows but not equally to the Greek-speaking widows. To please God, the church leaders appointed Greek-speaking men to make sure the Greek-speaking widows received their share of the food. One of these Greek-speaking men was Stephen.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “His face was like the face of an angel”

No one knows for sure what it was about Stephen’s face that was like the face of an angel, because Luke does not tell us. A note to this phrase offers one suggestion, which you may choose to follow. However, you might also decide to say only what the ULT says about this. ACT 6 1 f8br writing-newevent ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 Now in those days Luke uses this time reference to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 6 1 cg5t figs-idiom ἐν…ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in those days Luke is using the term **days** idiomatically to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “at that same time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 6 1 e7vb translate-names τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν 1 of the Hellenists **Hellenists** was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -901,7 +901,7 @@ ACT 6 11 ren5 figs-explicit ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας 1 t ACT 6 11 s2cl figs-exclusive ἀκηκόαμεν 1 We have heard The men are using the word **We** to refer only to themselves, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 6 11 x747 figs-metonymy λαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα 1 speaking blasphemous words The men are using the term **words** figuratively to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 11 dgxi translate-names Μωϋσῆν 1 Moses **Moses** is the name of a man. God gave him the law to give to Israel. See how you translated his name in [3:22](../03/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 6 12 tqk9 writing-pronouns συνεκίνησάν 1 They…stirred up In this verse and the next one, the word "they" continues to refer back to the opponents of Stephen who are named in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +ACT 6 12 tqk9 writing-pronouns συνεκίνησάν 1 They…stirred up In this verse and the next one, the word “they” continues to refer back to the opponents of Stephen who are named in [6:9](../06/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 6 12 l251 figs-metaphor συνεκίνησάν τε τὸν λαὸν, καὶ τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ τοὺς γραμματεῖς 1 They also stirred up the people, the elders, and the scribes Luke says figuratively that Stephen’s opponents **stirred up** these other groups to mean that they said things to make them very upset with Stephen. Alternate translation: “They also said things that made the people, the elders, and the scribes very upset with Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 6 12 dkbj translate-names Συνέδριον 1 Sanhedrin **Sanhedrin** is the name of the Jewish ruling council. See how you translated it in [4:14](../04/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 13 zv6s figs-doublenegatives οὐ παύεται λαλῶν 1 does not stop speaking If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **stop**. Alternate translation: “continually speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) @@ -909,9 +909,9 @@ ACT 6 13 ju6w figs-metonymy λαλῶν ῥήματα 1 speaking words The men a ACT 6 13 o3j2 figs-metonymy τοῦ τόπου τοῦ ἁγίου 1 the holy place The men are describing the temple in Jerusalem figuratively by referring to it by something associated with it, that it is a **holy place**. Alternate translation: “the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 14 c5l9 translate-names ὁ Ναζωραῖος 1 the Nazarene The word **Nazarene** describes someone who comes from the city of Nazareth. See how you translated it in [2:23](../02/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 14 uok4 figs-explicit τὸν τόπον τοῦτον 1 this place By **this place**, the false witnesses mean the temple, which they described as “the holy place” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 6 14 vak4 figs-metonymy τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς 1 the customs that Moses handed down to us The phrase **handed down** is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 6 14 vak4 figs-metonymy τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς 1 the customs that Moses handed down to us The phrase **handed down** is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 15 k8rw figs-simile εἶδον τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου 1 saw his face as the face of an angel Luke offers this comparison but he does not say specifically in what way Stephen’s face was like **the face of an angel**. However, this may mean that his face was shining brightly, since descriptions of angels in the Bible often say they were shining brightly. So you might choose to say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “saw that his face was shining brightly, like the face of an angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -ACT 7 intro p9h4 0 # Acts 07 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42-43 and 49-50.

It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Stephen said”

Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them.

### “Full of the Holy Spirit”

The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say.

### Foreshadowing

When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul, also known as Paul, here, even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Paul is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Implied information

Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” ([Acts 7:9](../act/07/09.md)), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Metonymy

Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Background knowledge

The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was telling them about. They knew what Moses had written in the Book of Genesis. If the Book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to understand what Stephen said. +ACT 7 intro p9h4 0 # Acts 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42-43 and 49-50.

It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Stephen said”

Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them.

### “Full of the Holy Spirit”

The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say.

### Foreshadowing

When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul, also known as Paul, here, even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Paul is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Implied information

Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” ([Acts 7:9](../act/07/09.md)), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Metonymy

Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Background knowledge

The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was telling them about. They knew what Moses had written in the Book of Genesis. If the Book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to understand what Stephen said. ACT 7 1 pt4h figs-you 0 General Information: The word “our” includes both Steven, the Jewish council to whom he spoke, and the entire audience. The word “your” is singular refers to Abraham. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 7 1 hy9r 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story about Stephen, which began in [Acts 6:8](../06/08.md), continues. Stephen begins his response to the high priest and the council by talking about things that happened in Israel’s history. Most of this history comes from Moses’ writings. ACT 7 2 abc7 ὁ δὲ ἔφη 1 Then he said Stephen is speaking. @@ -1059,7 +1059,7 @@ ACT 7 59 k2el δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου 1 receive my spirit Alterna ACT 7 60 u86q translate-symaction θεὶς δὲ τὰ γόνατα 1 But having knelt down on his knees This is an act of submission to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 7 60 tvf8 figs-litotes μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 do not hold this sin against them You can state this in a positive way. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 7 60 r9vi figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 he fell asleep Here to fall asleep is a euphemism for dying. Alternate translation: “died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -ACT 8 intro q9d9 0 # Acts 08 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33.

The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “So there began.”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Receiving the Holy Spirit

In this chapter for the first time Luke speaks of people receiving the Holy Spirit ([Acts 8:15-19](../08/15.md)). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.

### Proclaimed

This chapter more than any other in the Book of Acts speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something. +ACT 8 intro q9d9 0 # Acts 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33.

The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “So there began.”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Receiving the Holy Spirit

In this chapter for the first time Luke speaks of people receiving the Holy Spirit ([Acts 8:15-19](../08/15.md)). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.

### Proclaimed

This chapter more than any other in the Book of Acts speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something. ACT 8 1 tp9e translate-versebridge 0 General Information: It may be helpful to your audience to move these parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 8 1 a7uc 0 Connecting Statement: The story shifts from Stephen to Saul in these verses. ACT 8 1 ez88 writing-background ἐγένετο…ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, τὴν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις. πάντες δὲ διεσπάρησαν κατὰ τὰς χώρας τῆς Ἰουδαίας καὶ Σαμαρείας, πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 there began on that day a great persecution against the church that was in Jerusalem, and they all were scattered throughout the regions of Judea and Samaria, except the apostles This part of verse 1 is background information about the persecution that began after Stephen’s death. This explains why Saul was persecuting the believers in verse 3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -1085,10 +1085,10 @@ ACT 8 9 jm7n writing-background 0 General Information: Simon is introduced to t ACT 8 9 bed1 writing-participants ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων 1 But … a certain man named Simon This is a way of introducing a new person into the story. Your language may use different wording to introduce a new person into the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 8 9 cx7a τῇ πόλει 1 the city “the city in Samaria” ([Acts 8:5](../08/05.md)) ACT 8 10 kb9b writing-background 0 General Information: Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse continues to give the beginning of the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 8 10 evt7 figs-hyperbole προσεῖχον πάντες 1 they all … were paying attention The word **all** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “many of the Samaritans … were paying attention” or “the Samaritans in the city … were paying attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 8 10 evt7 figs-hyperbole προσεῖχον πάντες 1 they all … were paying attention The word **all** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “many of the Samaritans … were paying attention” or “the Samaritans in the city … were paying attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 8 10 ibl1 figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 from least to greatest These two phrases refer to everyone from one extreme to the other. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 8 10 j3d8 οὗτός ἐστιν ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη 1 This man is the power of God which is called Great People were saying that Simon was the divine power known as “The Great Power.” -ACT 8 10 yw5v ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη 1 the power of God which is called Great Possible meanings are (1) the powerful representative of God or (2) God or (3) the most powerful man or (4) and angel. Since the term is unclear, it may be best to simply translate it as “the Great power of God” . +ACT 8 10 yw5v ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη 1 the power of God which is called Great Possible meanings are (1) the powerful representative of God or (2) God or (3) the most powerful man or (4) and angel. Since the term is unclear, it may be best to simply translate it as “the Great power of God”. ACT 8 11 pxj8 writing-background 0 General Information: Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse ends the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 8 12 yiw3 0 Connecting Statement: These verses give more information about Simon and some of the Samaritans coming to believe in Jesus. ACT 8 12 vsy8 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 they were baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized them” or “Philip baptized the new believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1157,7 +1157,7 @@ ACT 8 39 xp52 οὐκ εἶδεν αὐτὸν οὐκέτι ὁ εὐνοῦχ ACT 8 40 r1x7 Φίλιππος…εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον 1 Philip was found at Azotus There was no indication of Philip’s traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He just suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. ACT 8 40 arh5 διερχόμενος 1 passed through Philip preached in the area around the town of Azotus. ACT 8 40 zfn6 τὰς πόλεις πάσας 1 to all the cities Alternate translation: “to all the cities in that region” -ACT 9 intro jm6x 0 # Acts 09 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The Way”

No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.

### “Letters for the synagogues in Damascus”

The “letters” Paul asked for were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### What Saul saw when he met Jesus

It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here. +ACT 9 intro jm6x 0 # Acts 9 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The Way”

No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.

### “Letters for the synagogues in Damascus”

The “letters” Paul asked for were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### What Saul saw when he met Jesus

It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here. ACT 9 1 r4n5 writing-background 0 General Information: These verses give background information telling us what Saul has been doing since the stoning of Stephen. Here the word “him” refers to the high priest and “he” refers to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 9 1 yt9e 0 Connecting Statement: The story shifts back to Saul and his salvation. ACT 9 1 anb6 figs-abstractnouns ἔτι ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς τοὺς μαθητὰς 1 still speaking threats even of murder against the disciples The noun **murder** can be translated as a verb. Alternate translation: “still speaking threats, even to murder the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1273,7 +1273,7 @@ ACT 10 intro ym7z 0 # Acts 10 General Notes

## Special concepts in thi ACT 10 1 m1vx writing-background 0 General Information: These verses give background information about Cornelius. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 10 1 nfy5 0 Connecting Statement: This is the beginning of the part of the story about Cornelius. ACT 10 1 wtb9 writing-participants ἀνὴρ δέ τις 1 Now there was a certain man This was a way of introducing a new person to this part of the historical account. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 10 1 x476 ὀνόματι Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἐκ Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς 1 named Cornelius, a centurion from the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’ “whose name was Cornelius. He was an officer in charge of 100 soldiers from the Italian section of the Roman army. +ACT 10 1 x476 ὀνόματι Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἐκ Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς 1 named Cornelius, a centurion from the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’ Alternate translation: “whose name was Cornelius. He was an officer in charge of 100 soldiers from the Italian section of the Roman army” ACT 10 1 abcd Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς 1 the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’ Alternate translation: “the Italian Regiment” ACT 10 2 s6rh εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 devout and fearing God Alternate translation: “believing in God and seeking to honor and worship God in his life” ACT 10 2 n8i3 φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 fearing God The word **fearing** here has the sense of deep respect and awe. @@ -1419,7 +1419,7 @@ ACT 11 11 b2qv ἰδοὺ 1 behold This word alerts us to the new people in the ACT 11 11 k44j ἐξαυτῆς 1 right away Alternate translation: “immediately” or “at that exact moment” ACT 11 11 qwn5 figs-activepassive ἀπεσταλμένοι 1 having been sent If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone had sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 11 12 lf6m μηδὲν διακρίναντα 1 not making any distinction Alternate translation: “not being concerned that they were Gentiles” -ACT 11 12 cf8x ἦλθον…σὺν ἐμοὶ 1 went with me went with me to Caesarea” +ACT 11 12 cf8x ἦλθον…σὺν ἐμοὶ 1 went with me Alternate translation: “went with me to Caesarea” ACT 11 12 xrc6 οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι 1 these six brothers Alternate translation: “these six Jewish believers” ACT 11 12 w6ia εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός 1 into the house of the man This refers to the house of Cornelius. ACT 11 13 few6 Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον 1 Simon, who is called Peter “Simon, who is also called Peter.” See how you translated the same phrase in [Acts 10:32](../10/32.md). @@ -1522,7 +1522,7 @@ ACT 12 11 hw63 ἐξείλατό με 1 delivered me Alternate translation: “ ACT 12 11 p739 figs-synecdoche πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 from all the expectations of the Jewish people Here “the people of the Jews” probably referred mainly to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “from all that the Jewish leaders thought would happen to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 12 12 tfh3 συνιδών 1 having realized this He became aware that God had rescued him. ACT 12 12 ux4v figs-activepassive Ἰωάννου, τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου 1 of John, who was called Mark John was also called Mark. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “John, whom people also called Mark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 12 13 x5fg 0 General Information: Here the words “she” and “her” all refer to the servant girl Rhoda. Here the words they” and “They” refer to the people who were inside praying ([Acts 12:12](../12/12.md)). +ACT 12 13 x5fg 0 General Information: Here the words “she” and “her” all refer to the servant girl Rhoda. Here the words “they” and “They” refer to the people who were inside praying ([Acts 12:12](../12/12.md)). ACT 12 13 pfn7 κρούσαντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he knocked “when Peter knocked.” Tapping on the door was a normal Jewish custom to let others know you wish to visit them. You may need to change this to fit your culture. ACT 12 13 c634 τὴν θύραν τοῦ πυλῶνος 1 at the door of the gate Alternate translation: “at the outer door” or “at the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard” ACT 12 13 khq1 προσῆλθε…ὑπακοῦσαι 1 came to answer Alternate translation: “came to the gate to ask who was knocking” @@ -1678,7 +1678,7 @@ ACT 13 27 psk5 τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες 1 did not recognize this o ACT 13 27 ri1f figs-metonymy τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν 1 the voices of the prophets Here the word **voices** represents the message of the prophets. Alternate translation: “the writings of the prophets” or “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 27 m4tz figs-activepassive τὰς…ἀναγινωσκομένας 2 that are read If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which someone reads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 27 rle6 τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν…ἐπλήρωσαν 1 they fulfilled the voices of the prophets Alternate translation: “they actually did just what the prophets said that they would do” -ACT 13 28 v3hw 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem. The word him” here refers to Jesus. +ACT 13 28 v3hw 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem. The word “him” here refers to Jesus. ACT 13 28 y9j6 μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου εὑρόντες 1 they found no reason for death Alternate translation: “they did not find any reason why anyone should kill Jesus” ACT 13 28 d4xm ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον 1 they asked Pilate The word **asked** here is a strong word meaning to demand, beg or plead for. ACT 13 29 sq1j ὡς δὲ ἐτέλεσαν πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα 1 And when they had completed all that had been written about him Alternate translation: “And when they did to Jesus all the things that the prophets said would happen to him” @@ -1836,7 +1836,7 @@ ACT 14 20 aqx3 εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν 1 he entered into ACT 14 20 e2y9 ἐξῆλθεν σὺν τῷ Βαρναβᾷ εἰς Δέρβην 1 he went with Barnabas to Derbe Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas went to the city of Derbe” ACT 14 21 wv7e figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the words “they” and “They” refer to Paul. Here the word “We” includes Paul, Barnabas, and the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 14 21 ykt4 τὴν πόλιν ἐκείνην 1 in that city “in Derbe” ([Acts 14:20](../14/20.md)) -ACT 14 22 ek9l figs-synecdoche ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν 1 They were strengthening the souls of the disciples Here, **souls** refers to the disciples. This emphasizes their inner thoughts and beliefs. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to believe the message about Jesus” or “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to grow strong in their relationship with Jesus (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 14 22 ek9l figs-synecdoche ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν 1 They were strengthening the souls of the disciples Here, **souls** refers to the disciples. This emphasizes their inner thoughts and beliefs. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to believe the message about Jesus” or “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to grow strong in their relationship with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 14 22 zkd2 παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει 1 and encouraging them to continue in the faith Alternate translation: “and encouraging the believers to keep trusting in Jesus” ACT 14 22 d9ic writing-quotations καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 and saying, “It is necessary for us to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions.” Some version translate this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “and saying that we must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) ACT 14 22 wu1c figs-exclusive δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν 1 It is necessary for us to enter Paul includes his hearers, so the word **us** is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -2140,7 +2140,7 @@ ACT 17 16 we78 figs-synecdoche παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτ ACT 17 17 q8px διελέγετο 1 he reasoned “he debated” or “he discussed.” This means that there is interaction from the listeners rather than only his preaching. They are talking with him as well. ACT 17 17 jkj8 τοῖς σεβομένοις 1 those who were worshiping This refers to Gentiles (non-Jews) who give praise to God and follow him but do not obey all of the Jewish laws. ACT 17 17 ec14 ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 in the marketplace “in the public square.” This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. -ACT 17 18 ru6a 0 General Information: Here the words “him,” “He, “and “he” refer to Paul. +ACT 17 18 ru6a 0 General Information: Here the words “him,” “He,” and “he” refer to Paul. ACT 17 18 l7le translate-names τῶν Ἐπικουρίων καὶ Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων 1 of the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers These people believed all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 18 f976 translate-names Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων 1 Stoic philosophers These people believed freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 18 dnj8 τινες ἔλεγον 1 some said Alternate translation: “some of the Stoic philosophers said” @@ -2259,7 +2259,7 @@ ACT 18 22 r26z ἀναβὰς 1 having gone up He traveled to the city of Jerus ACT 18 22 q9j6 figs-metonymy ἀσπασάμενος τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 greeted the church Here, **church** refers to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “greeted the members of the church of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 22 n3rh κατέβη 1 he went down The phrase **went down** is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. ACT 18 23 pww5 ἐξῆλθεν 1 he departed Alternate translation: “Paul went away” or “Paul left” -ACT 18 23 h65j figs-metaphor καὶ ποιήσας χρόνον τινὰ 1 And having spent some time there This speaks about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. Alternate translation: And after staying there for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 18 23 h65j figs-metaphor καὶ ποιήσας χρόνον τινὰ 1 And having spent some time there This speaks about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after staying there for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 24 a7p9 writing-background 0 General Information: Apollos is introduced to the story. Verses 24 and 25 give background information about him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 18 24 muc2 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells what happens in Ephesus with Priscilla and Aquila. ACT 18 24 xqy7 δέ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. @@ -2437,7 +2437,7 @@ ACT 20 12 jkj5 τὸν παῖδα 1 the boy This refers to Eutychus ([Acts 20: ACT 20 12 abx0 figs-litotes οὐ μετρίως 1 not moderately This is a way of saying that they were greatly comforted. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 20 13 dja7 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The words “he,” “himself,” and “him” refer to Paul. Here the word “we” refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 20 13 awt9 0 Connecting Statement: The writer Luke, Paul, and his other companions continue their travels; however, Paul goes separately for part of the trip. -ACT 20 13 w4ew figs-rpronouns ἡμεῖς…προελθόντες 1 we, having gone ahead The word **we** here refers to Luke and his traveling companions, and not to Paul. Paul did travel on the ship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +ACT 20 13 w4ew figs-rpronouns ἡμεῖς…προελθόντες 1 we, having gone ahead The word **we** here refers to Luke and his traveling companions, and not to Paul. Paul did travel on the ship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 20 13 q4yz translate-names τὴν Ἆσσον 1 Assos Assos is a town located directly below present day Behram in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 13 nq2q figs-rpronouns ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν 1 ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν Here, **himself** is used to emphasize that this is what Paul wanted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 20 13 p8y7 πεζεύειν 1 to go on foot Alternate translation: “to walk” @@ -2506,7 +2506,7 @@ ACT 20 36 u3uc translate-symaction θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ… ACT 20 37 pb4r ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου 1 having fallen upon Paul’s neck Alternate translation: “having embraced Paul” or “putting their arms around him” ACT 20 37 sze4 κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 they were kissing him **Kissing** someone on the cheek is an expression of brotherly or friendly love in the Middle East. ACT 20 38 bs3s figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 they were never going to see his face again The word **face** here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “they would not see him anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.

The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “They are all determined to keep the law”

The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.

### Nazarite vow
The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../act/21/23.md)).

### Gentiles in the temple

The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. +ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.

The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “They are all determined to keep the law”

The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.

### Nazarite vow

The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../act/21/23.md)).

### Gentiles in the temple

The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. ACT 21 1 s3h3 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 21 1 i6f8 0 Connecting Statement: The writer Luke, Paul, and his companions continue their travels. ACT 21 1 zz5h εὐθυδρομήσαντες ἤλθομεν εἰς τὴν Κῶ 1 having run a straight course, we came to Cos Alternate translation: “we went straight to the city of Cos” or “we went directly to the city of Cos” @@ -2901,7 +2901,7 @@ ACT 25 13 ukd3 ἀσπασάμενοι τὸν Φῆστον 1 paid their respe ACT 25 14 x8jf figs-activepassive ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος 1 There is a certain man who has been left behind by Felix, a prisoner If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “When Felix left office, he left a man in prison here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 25 14 z7yw Φήλικος 1 Felix Felix was the Roman governor of the area who resided in Caesarea. See how you translated this name in [Acts 23:24](../23/24.md). ACT 25 15 b6hx figs-metaphor περὶ οὗ…ἐνεφάνισαν 1 brought charges concerning him To charge someone in court is spoken of as if it were an object that a person brings to court. Alternate translation: “spoke to me against this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 25 15 hyp5 figs-abstractnouns αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην 1 requesting a judgment against him The abstract noun “judgment” can be expressed as a verb. Alternate translation: “asking me to judge him” or “requesting that I judge him to be guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 25 15 hyp5 figs-abstractnouns αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην 1 requesting a judgment against him The abstract noun “judgment” can be expressed as a verb. Alternate translation: “asking me to judge him” or “requesting that I judge him to be guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 25 16 e4tk figs-metaphor χαρίζεσθαί τινα ἄνθρωπον 1 to hand over any man Here, **hand over** represents sending someone to people who will punish or kill him. Alternate translation: “to let someone punish anyone” or “to condemn anyone to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 25 16 xjb4 figs-idiom πρὶν ἢ ὁ κατηγορούμενος, κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους 1 before the one who is accused may have his accusers face to face Here, **have his accusers face to face** is an idiom that means to meet in person with the people who accuse him. Alternate translation: “before the person whom others have accused of a crime had met directly with those who accused him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 25 17 z6g2 οὖν 1 Therefore “Because what I have just said is true.” Fetus had just said that an accused man should be able to face his accusers and make his defense. From 6475dc01741ae19f4bafe0719f3b74eca9797819 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Thu, 31 Mar 2022 18:31:53 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 03/15] Fixed format errors in 2 Corinthians (#2375) Co-authored-by: Larry Sallee Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2375 --- en_tn_48-2CO.tsv | 6 +++--- 1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv b/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv index 755bef9de9..0345b6dec5 100644 --- a/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_48-2CO.tsv @@ -1,5 +1,5 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote -2CO front intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Corinthians

1. Paul thanks God for the Corinthian Christians (1:1-11)
1. Paul explains his conduct and his ministry (1:12-7:16)
1. Paul speaks about contributing money for the Jerusalem church (8:1-9:15)
1. Paul defends his authority as an apostle (10:1-13:10)
1. Paul gives final greetings and encouragement (13:11-14)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 Corinthians?

Paul was the author. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul started the church in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of 2 Corinthians about?

In 2 Corinthians, Paul continued to write about the conflicts among the Christians in the city of Corinth. It is clear in this letter that the Corinthians had obeyed his previous instructions to them. In 2 Corinthians, Paul encouraged them to live in a way that would please God.

Paul also wrote to assure them that Jesus Christ sent him as an apostle to preach the Gospel. Paul wanted them to understand this, because a group of Jewish Christians opposed what he was doing. They claimed Paul was not sent by God and he was teaching a false message. This group of Jewish Christians wanted Gentile Christians to obey the law of Moses.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Second Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Corinth like?

Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.

### What did Paul mean by “false apostles” (11:13)?

These were Jewish Christians. They taught that Gentile Christians had to obey the law of Moses in order to follow Christ. Christian leaders had met in Jerusalem and decided on the matter (See: Acts 15). However, it is clear that there were still some groups that disagreed with what the leaders in Jerusalem decided.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Also, the word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Corinth. There are two exceptions to this: 6:2 and 12:9. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 2 Corinthians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”
* The meaning in most passages in 2 Corinthians is a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 1:1; 8:4; 9:1, 12; 13:13)
* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.”

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord”?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:19, 20; 2:12, 17; 3:14; 5:17, 19, 21; 10:17; 12:2, 19; and 13:4. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “A door was opened for me in the Lord,” (2:12) where Paul specifically meant that a door was opened for Paul by the Lord.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What does it mean to be a “new creation” in Christ (5:17)?

Paul’s message was that God makes Christians part of a “new world” when a person believes in Christ. God gives a new world of holiness, peace, and joy. In this new world, believers have a new nature that has been given them by the Holy Spirit. Translators should try to express this idea.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Corinthians?
* “and in your love for us” (8:7). Many versions, including the ULT and UST, read this way. However, many other versions read, “and in our love for you.” There is strong evidence that each reading is original. Translators should probably follow the reading preferred by other versions in their region.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +2CO front intro ur4j 0 # Introduction to 2 Corinthians

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of 2 Corinthians

1. Paul thanks God for the Corinthian Christians (1:1-11)
1. Paul explains his conduct and his ministry (1:12-7:16)
1. Paul speaks about contributing money for the Jerusalem church (8:1-9:15)
1. Paul defends his authority as an apostle (10:1-13:10)
1. Paul gives final greetings and encouragement (13:11-14)

### Who wrote the Book of 2 Corinthians?

Paul was the author. He was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul started the church in Corinth. He was staying in the city of Ephesus when he wrote this letter.

### What is the Book of 2 Corinthians about?

In 2 Corinthians, Paul continued to write about the conflicts among the Christians in the city of Corinth. It is clear in this letter that the Corinthians had obeyed his previous instructions to them. In 2 Corinthians, Paul encouraged them to live in a way that would please God.

Paul also wrote to assure them that Jesus Christ sent him as an apostle to preach the Gospel. Paul wanted them to understand this, because a group of Jewish Christians opposed what he was doing. They claimed Paul was not sent by God and he was teaching a false message. This group of Jewish Christians wanted Gentile Christians to obey the law of Moses.

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Second Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Second Letter to the Church in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the city of Corinth like?

Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. This resulted in the city having people from many different cultures. The city was famous for having people who lived in immoral ways. The people worshipped Aphrodite, the Greek goddess of love. As part of the ceremonies honoring Aphrodite, her worshipers had sexual intercourse with temple prostitutes.

### What did Paul mean by “false apostles” (11:13)?

These were Jewish Christians. They taught that Gentile Christians had to obey the law of Moses in order to follow Christ. Christian leaders had met in Jerusalem and decided on the matter (See: Acts 15). However, it is clear that there were still some groups that disagreed with what the leaders in Jerusalem decided.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Singular and plural “you”

In this book, the word “I” refers to Paul. Also, the word “you” is almost always plural and refers to the believers in Corinth. There are two exceptions to this: 6:2 and 12:9. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])

### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in 2 Corinthians in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless, faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones,” or “holy people.”
* The meaning in most passages in 2 Corinthians is a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 1:1; 8:4; 9:1, 12; 13:13)
* Sometimes the meaning in the passage implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “reserved for,” or “sanctified.”

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What did Paul mean by expressions like “in Christ” and “in the Lord”?

This kind of expression occurs in 1:19, 20; 2:12, 17; 3:14; 5:17, 19, 21; 10:17; 12:2, 19; and 13:4. Paul meant to express the idea of a very close union with Christ and the believers. At the same time, he often intended other meanings as well. See, for example, “A door was opened for me in the Lord,” (2:12) where Paul specifically meant that a door was opened for Paul by the Lord.

Please see the introduction to the Book of Romans for more details about this kind of expression.

### What does it mean to be a “new creation” in Christ (5:17)?

Paul’s message was that God makes Christians part of a “new world” when a person believes in Christ. God gives a new world of holiness, peace, and joy. In this new world, believers have a new nature that has been given them by the Holy Spirit. Translators should try to express this idea.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of 2 Corinthians?

* “and in your love for us” (8:7). Many versions, including the ULT and UST, read this way. However, many other versions read, “and in our love for you.” There is strong evidence that each reading is original. Translators should probably follow the reading preferred by other versions in their region.

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) 2CO 1 intro tsh3 0 # 2 Corinthians 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first paragraph reflects a common way to begin a letter in the ancient Near East.

## Special Concepts

### Paul’s integrity

People were criticizing Paul and saying he was not sincere. He refutes them by explaining his motives for what he was doing.

### Comfort

Comfort is a major theme of this chapter. The Holy Spirit comforts Christians. The Corinthians probably were afflicted and needed to be comforted.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical question

Paul uses two rhetorical questions to defend himself against a charge of not being sincere. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### We

Paul uses the pronoun “we”. This likely represents at least Timothy and himself. It may also include other people.

### Guarantee

Paul says the Holy Spirit is the guarantee, which means pledge or down-payment, of a Christian’s eternal life. Christians are securely saved. But they will not experience all of God’s given promises until after they die. The Holy Spirit is a personal guarantee that this will happen. This idea comes from a business term. A person gives some valuable item to another person as a “guarantee” that they will repay money. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/eternity]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/save]]) 2CO 1 1 epd2 0 General Information: After Paul’s greeting to the church in Corinth, he writes about suffering and comfort through Jesus Christ. Timothy is with him as well. The word “you” throughout this letter refers to the people of the church in Corinth and to the rest of the Christians in that area. Possibly Timothy writes on parchment paper the words that Paul says. 2CO 1 1 mel3 Παῦλος…τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ 1 Paul … to the church of God that is in Corinth Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and its intended audience. Alternate translation: “I, Paul … wrote this letter to you, the church of God that is in Corinth” @@ -487,7 +487,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 11 6 n7xy figs-abstractnouns οὐ τῇ γνώσει 1 The abstract noun “knowledge” can be translated with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “I am trained to know what they know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 2CO 11 7 un9v figs-rquestion ἢ ἁμαρτίαν ἐποίησα ἐμαυτὸν ταπεινῶν, ἵνα ὑμεῖς ὑψωθῆτε 1 Or did I sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted? Paul is beginning to claim that he treated the Corinthians well. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement, if necessary. Alternate translation: “I think we agree that I did not sin by humbling myself so you might be exalted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 2CO 11 7 ax51 δωρεὰν τὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ εὐαγγέλιον εὐηγγελισάμην ὑμῖν 1 freely preached the gospel of God to you Alternate translation: “I preached the gospel of God to you without expecting anything from you in return” -2CO 11 8 k6ds figs-irony ἄλλας ἐκκλησίας ἐσύλησα 1 I robbed other churches This is an exaggeration to emphasize that Paul received money from **churches** who were not obligated to give to him. Alternate translation: “I accepted money from other churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +2CO 11 8 k6ds figs-hyperbole ἄλλας ἐκκλησίας ἐσύλησα 1 I robbed other churches This is an exaggeration to emphasize that Paul received money from **churches** who were not obligated to give to him. Alternate translation: “I accepted money from other churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 2CO 11 8 a416 figs-explicit τὴν ὑμῶν διακονίαν 1 the ministry to you The full meaning of this can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “I could serve you at no cost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 2CO 11 9 a23k οἱ ἀδελφοὶ ἐλθόντες 1 the brothers who came These “brothers” were probably all male. 2CO 11 9 fc6l figs-metaphor ἐν παντὶ ἀβαρῆ ἐμαυτὸν ὑμῖν ἐτήρησα καὶ τηρήσω 1 In everything I have kept myself from being a burden to you Paul speaks of someone for whom one has to spend money as if they were heavy items that people have to carry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -572,7 +572,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 2CO 12 8 wc7r ὑπὲρ τούτου 1 Lord about this Alternate translation: “about this thorn in the flesh,” or “about this affliction” 2CO 12 9 nr2j ἀρκεῖ σοι ἡ χάρις μου 1 My grace is enough for you Alternate translation: “I will be kind to you, and that is all you need” 2CO 12 9 cs63 ἡ γὰρ δύναμις ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ τελεῖται 1 for power is made perfect in weakness Alternate translation: “for my power works best when you are weak” -2CO 12 9 g8mi figs-metaphor ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the power of Christ might reside on me Paul speaks of the **power of Christ** as if it were a tent built over him. This could mean: (1) people might see that Paul has the power of Christ” (2) Paul truly has the power of Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +2CO 12 9 g8mi figs-metaphor ἐπισκηνώσῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ἡ δύναμις τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the power of Christ might reside on me Paul speaks of the **power of Christ** as if it were a tent built over him. This could mean: (1) people might see that Paul has the power of Christ. (2) Paul truly has the power of Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 2CO 12 10 pxf1 εὐδοκῶ ἐν ἀσθενείαις, ἐν ὕβρεσιν, ἐν ἀνάγκαις, ἐν διωγμοῖς, καὶ στενοχωρίαις, ὑπὲρ Χριστοῦ 1 I am content for Christ’s sake in weaknesses, in insults, in troubles, in persecutions and distressing situations This could mean: (1) Paul is **content** in **weaknesses**, **insults**, **troubles**, **persecutions**, and **distressing situations** if these things come because I belong to Christ. (2) Paul is content in weakness if these things cause more people to know Christ. 2CO 12 10 s5sx ἐν ἀσθενείαις 1 in weaknesses Alternate translation: “when I am weak” 2CO 12 10 xl8q ἐν ὕβρεσιν 1 in insults Alternate translation: “when people try to make me angry by saying that I am a bad person” From eec932f71b77e59de83a0e8de195ff596fcdd883 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Thu, 31 Mar 2022 21:09:33 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 04/15] Corrected doubled support references in Acts 7-22 (#2376) Co-authored-by: lrsallee Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2376 --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 127 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++------------------ 1 file changed, 80 insertions(+), 47 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 152dd83bbe..995728cf26 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -960,7 +960,8 @@ ACT 7 21 mbp7 εἰς υἱόν 1 as a son Alternate translation: “as if he w ACT 7 22 c9nw figs-activepassive ἐπαιδεύθη Μωϋσῆς 1 Moses was educated If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The Egyptians educated Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 22 att9 figs-hyperbole πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων 1 in all the wisdom of the Egyptians This is an exaggeration to emphasize that he was trained in the best schools in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 7 22 m3dm δυνατὸς ἐν λόγοις καὶ ἔργοις αὐτοῦ 1 mighty in his words and works Alternate translation: “effective in his speech and actions” or “influential in what he said and did” -ACT 7 23 fj9s figs-metonymy ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 it came into his heart Here, **heart** is a metonym for “mind.” The phrase **it came into his heart** is an idiom that means to decide something. Alternate translation: “it came into his mind” or “he decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 7 23 fj9s figs-metonymy ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 it came into his heart Here, **heart** is a metonym for “mind.” Alternate translation: “it came into his mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 7 23 ckxj figs-idiom ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 The phrase **it came into his heart** is an idiom that means to decide something. Alternate translation: “he decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 23 x493 figs-explicit ἐπισκέψασθαι τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 1 to visit his brothers, the sons of Israel This refers to his people, and not just to his family. Alternate translation: “to see how his own people, the children of Israel, were doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 24 l4zv figs-activepassive καὶ ἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον, ἠμύνατο καὶ ἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 And seeing a certain one being mistreated, he defended him and made vengeance for the one being oppressed by striking the Egyptian If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form by rearranging the order. Alternate translation: “Seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite, Moses defended and avenged the Israelite by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 24 abc8 ἠμύνατο 1 he defended him Moses defended the Israelite who was being mistreated. @@ -1073,7 +1074,8 @@ ACT 8 3 yd2i κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους 1 according to the houses Altern ACT 8 3 w6vk figs-explicit ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας 1 men and women This refers to men and women who believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 8 4 dh3x 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the story of Philip, whom the people had chosen as a deacon ([Acts 6:5](../06/05.md)). ACT 8 4 ymy5 figs-activepassive διασπαρέντες 1 had been scattered The cause for the scattering, the persecution, was stated previously. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “had fled the great persecution and had gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 8 4 su6i figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word This is a metonym for “the message.” You may need to make explicit that the message was about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 8 4 su6i figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word This is a metonym for “the message.” Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 4 iaq4 figs-explicit τὸν λόγον 1 You may need to make explicit that the message was about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 8 5 gz5m κατελθὼν εἰς τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας 1 went down to the city of Samaria The phrase **went down** is used here because Samaria is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. ACT 8 5 f45b τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας 1 the city of Samaria Possible meanings are (1) Luke expected the readers to know which city he was writing about. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” or (2) Luke did not expect his readers to know which city he was writing about. Alternate translation: “a city in Samaria” ACT 8 5 pk1l figs-metonymy ἐκήρυσσεν αὐτοῖς τὸν Χριστόν 1 proclaimed to them the Christ The title **Christ** refers to Jesus, the Messiah. Alternate translation: “told them that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1336,16 +1338,18 @@ ACT 10 27 twp9 figs-explicit συνεληλυθότας πολλούς 1 many pe ACT 10 28 g7j7 ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 You yourselves know Peter is addressing Cornelius and his invited guests. ACT 10 28 iyx6 ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ 1 how unlawful it is for a Jewish man “that it is forbidden for a Jewish man.” This refers to the Jewish religious law. ACT 10 28 k3we ἀλλοφύλῳ 1 a foreigner This refers to people who were not Jews and not specifically to where they lived. -ACT 10 30 krz8 figs-you 0 General Information: In verses 31 and 32 Cornelius quotes what the angel had said to him when he appeared to him at the ninth hour. The words “you” and “your” are all singular. The word “we” here does not include Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 10 30 krz8 0 General Information: In verses 31 and 32 Cornelius quotes what the angel had said to him when he appeared to him at the ninth hour. ACT 10 30 n5fs 0 Connecting Statement: Cornelius responds to Peter’s question. ACT 10 30 na4u ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας 1 Four days ago Cornelius is referring to the day before the third night before he is speaking to Peter. Biblical culture counts the current day, so the day before three nights ago is **four days ago**. Current Western culture does not count the current day, so many Western translations read, “three days ago.” ACT 10 30 mqv8 translate-textvariants προσευχόμενος 1 praying Some ancient authorities say “fasting and praying” instead of simply **praying**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 10 30 yy6e τὴν ἐνάτην 1 at the ninth hour The normal afternoon time when the Jews pray to God. +ACT 10 31 x6d0 figs-you σου…σου 1 Both occurrences of **your** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 10 31 heh3 figs-activepassive εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ 1 your prayer has been heard If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 31 s6nz ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 have been remembered before God “brought you to God’s attention.” This does not imply that God had forgotten. ACT 10 32 ci31 μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος 1 summon Simon who is called Peter Alternate translation: “tell Simon who is also called Peter to come to you” ACT 10 33 p5ee ἐξαυτῆς 1 immediately Alternate translation: “right away” ACT 10 33 ruf3 σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος 1 and you did well in coming This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: “and I certainly thank you for coming” +ACT 10 33 lzie figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 The word **we** here does not include Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 10 33 ry21 ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God This refers to the presence of God. ACT 10 33 xt4x figs-activepassive τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 that you have been instructed by the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the Lord has told you to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 34 ku8u 0 Connecting Statement: Peter begins speaking to everyone in the house of Cornelius. @@ -1386,8 +1390,10 @@ ACT 10 45 f33n καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔθνη 1 also on the Gentiles Here, ** ACT 10 46 w58d 0 General Information: The words “he” and “him” refer to Peter. ACT 10 46 mpg5 0 Connecting Statement: This is the end of the part of the story about Cornelius. ACT 10 46 p6pa λαλούντων γλώσσαις, καὶ μεγαλυνόντων τὸν Θεόν 1 speaking with tongues and praising God These were known spoken languages that caused the Jews to acknowledge that the Gentiles were indeed praising God. -ACT 10 47 u5d5 figs-rquestion μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς? 1 No one is able to withhold water, is he, that these are not baptized, who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did? Peter uses this question to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. Alternate translation: “No one should keep water from these people! We should baptize them because they have received the Holy Spirit just as we did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 10 48 t2y9 figs-explicit προσέταξεν…αὐτοὺς…βαπτισθῆναι 1 he commanded them to be baptized It is implied that the Jewish Christians were the ones who would baptize them. Alternate translation: “Peter commanded the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them” or “Peter commanded the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 10 47 u5d5 figs-rquestion μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς? 1 No one is able to withhold water, is he, that these are not baptized, who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did? Peter uses this question to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one has the right to withhold water so that these are not baptized, who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 10 47 kwv5 figs-activepassive τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one should keep water from these people! We should baptize them because they have received the Holy Spirit just as we did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 10 48 t2y9 figs-explicit προσέταξεν…αὐτοὺς…βαπτισθῆναι 1 he commanded them to be baptized It is implied that the Jewish Christians were the ones who would baptize them. You can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Peter commanded the Gentile believers to allow the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 10 48 z4fh figs-activepassive προσέταξεν…αὐτοὺς…βαπτισθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Peter commanded the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 48 ax6x figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι 1 be baptized in the name of Jesus Christ Here, **in the name of Jesus Christ** expresses that the reason for their baptism was that they believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “be baptized as believers in Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 intro hva5 0 # Acts 11 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The Gentiles also had received the word of God”

Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to “receive the word of God.” Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit. ACT 11 1 uw5m 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new event in the story. @@ -1410,7 +1416,8 @@ ACT 11 6 ew64 θηρία 1 wild beasts This probably refer to the animals peopl ACT 11 6 t36i ἑρπετὰ 1 creeping animals These are reptiles. ACT 11 7 i5ic figs-synecdoche ἤκουσα…φωνῆς 1 I heard … a voice The person speaking is not specified. The **voice** was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God. See how you translated **a voice** in [Acts 10:13](../10/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 11 8 m4mu μηδαμῶς 1 By no means “I will not do that.” See how you translated this in [Acts 10:14](../10/14.md). -ACT 11 8 m5p5 figs-metonymy κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 the profane or unclean has never entered into my mouth Apparently the animals in the sheet were animals which the Jewish law in the Old Testament forbade the Jews to eat. This can be said in a positive way. Alternate translation: “I have eaten only meat from holy and clean animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +ACT 11 8 m5p5 figs-explicit κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 the profane or unclean has never entered into my mouth Apparently the animals in the sheet were animals which the Jewish law in the Old Testament forbade the Jews to eat. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 11 8 wwbw figs-doublenegatives κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **profane or unclean … never entered**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I have eaten only meat from holy and clean animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 11 8 kj91 ἀκάθαρτον 1 unclean In the Old Testament Jewish law, a person became ritually **unclean** in various ways, such as eating certain forbidden animals. ACT 11 9 n2gn figs-metonymy ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν, σὺ μὴ κοίνου 1 What God has cleansed, do not call unclean This refers to the animals in the sheet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 10 xrq6 τοῦτο…ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς 1 this happened three times It is possible that everything Peter saw happened did not happen three times, but that the phrase, “What God has cleansed, do not call it defiled,” was repeated three times. However, it may be best to simply say “this happened three times.” See how you translated **This happened three times** in [Acts 10:16](../10/16.md). @@ -1467,7 +1474,8 @@ ACT 11 28 wyk8 ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος 1 named Agabus Alternate translati ACT 11 28 q3tl ἐσήμανεν διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 and indicated by the Spirit that Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit enabled him to prophesy that” ACT 11 28 l3iz λιμὸν μεγάλην μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι 1 a great famine was about to occur Alternate translation: “a great shortage of food would happen” ACT 11 28 pd2t figs-hyperbole ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 over the whole world This was a generalization referring to the part of the world that they were interested in. Alternate translation: “all over the inhabited world” or “throughout the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 11 28 jmc5 figs-explicit ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου 1 in the days of Claudius Luke’s audience would know that Claudius was the emperor of Rome at that time. Alternate translation: “when Claudius was the Roman emperor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 11 28 jmc5 figs-explicit ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου 1 in the days of Claudius Luke’s audience would know that Claudius was the emperor of Rome at that time. Alternate translation: “when Claudius was the Roman emperor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 11 28 fjyk translate-names Κλαυδίου 1 **Claudius** is a man's name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 11 29 lhp8 0 General Information: The words “They” and “they” refer to the believers in the church in Antioch ([Acts 11:27](../11/27.md)). ACT 11 29 de92 δὲ 1 So This word means marks an event that happened because of something else that happened first. In this case, they sent money because of Agabus’ prophesy or the famine. ACT 11 29 rk9z καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις 1 just as anyone prospered The richer people sent more; the poorer people sent less. @@ -1490,7 +1498,8 @@ ACT 12 3 wpm1 ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 this ACT 12 3 ly66 ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. Alternate translation: “the festival when the Jewish people ate bread without yeast” ACT 12 4 pps1 τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν 1 to four squads of soldiers “to four groups of soldiers.” Each squad had four soldiers that guarded Peter, one group at a time. The groups divided the 24-hour day into four shifts. Each time two soldiers would have been at his side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. ACT 12 4 i23a βουλόμενος…ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ 1 he was intending to bring him out to the people Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in the presence of the people” or “Herod planned to judge Peter before the Jewish people” -ACT 12 5 v2yz figs-activepassive ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ 1 So Peter was kept in the prison This implies that the soldiers continually guarded Peter in prison. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “So the soldiers guarded Peter in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 12 5 v2yz figs-explicit ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ 1 So Peter was kept in the prison This implies that the soldiers continually guarded Peter in prison. Alternate translation: “So Peter was guarded by soldiers in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 12 5 xpcx figs-activepassive ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “So the soldiers guarded Peter in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 12 5 f8qc figs-activepassive προσευχὴ…ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 prayer was being made earnestly to God for him by the church If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the group of believers in Jerusalem earnestly prayed to God for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 12 5 g189 ἐκτενῶς 1 earnestly continuously and with dedication ACT 12 6 km83 figs-explicit ἤμελλεν προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν ὁ Ἡρῴδης τῇ νυκτὶ ἐκείνῃ 1 Herod was going to bring him out for trial, that night That Herod planned to execute him can be clarified. Alternate translation: “the same night before Herod was going to bring Peter out from prison to put him on trial and then to execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1749,7 +1758,8 @@ ACT 13 45 nc5l ἀντέλεγον 1 spoke against Alternate translation: “co ACT 13 45 m1an figs-activepassive τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις 1 the things that were said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 46 zvt5 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The first two instances of the word “you” are plural and refer to the Jews to whom Paul is speaking. Here the words “we” and “us” refers to Paul and Barnabas but not the crowd that was present. Paul’s quotation is from the prophet Isaiah in the Old Testament. In the original passage, the word “I” refers to God and the word “you” is singular and refers to the Messiah. Here, Paul and Barnabas seem to be saying that the quotation also refers to their ministry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 13 46 as6q figs-explicit ἦν ἀναγκαῖον 1 It was necessary for This implies that God had commanded this be done. Alternate translation: “God commanded that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 46 jn55 figs-activepassive ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 necessary for the word of God first to be spoken to you If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. “Word of God” here is a synecdoche for “message from God.” Alternate translation: “necessary that we speak the message from God to you first” or “the message of God had to be spoken to you first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 13 46 jn55 figs-synecdoche ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 necessary for the word of God first to be spoken to you Here, **word of God** is a synecdoche for “message from God.” Alternate translation: “the message of God had to be spoken to you first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 13 46 d08v figs-activepassive ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “necessary that we speak the message from God to you first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 46 lly5 figs-metaphor ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν 1 Since you reject it Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 46 ms36 οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς 1 judge yourselves unworthy of eternal life Alternate translation: “seem to think you are not worthy of eternal life” or “act as though you are not worthy of eternal life” ACT 13 46 rf9k figs-explicit στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη 1 we will turn to the Gentiles “we will go to the Gentiles.” Paul and Barnadas were implying that they would preach to the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1757,7 +1767,8 @@ ACT 13 47 v8au figs-metaphor εἰς φῶς 1 as a light Here the truth about J ACT 13 47 t5sp figs-abstractnouns εἶναί…εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 should be for salvation as far as the end of the earth The abstract word **salvation** can be translated with the verb “to save.” The phrase **end** refers to everywhere. Alternate translation: “should tell people everywhere in the world that I want to save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 13 48 e9ag figs-metonymy ἐδόξαζον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 glorified the word of the Lord Here, **word** refers to the message about Jesus that they had believed. Alternate translation: “praised God for the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 48 jct2 figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἦσαν τεταγμένοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 as many as were appointed to eternal life If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as many as God appointed to eternal life” or “all the people whom God had chosen to receive eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 49 qh9z figs-metonymy διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου δι’ ὅλης τῆς χώρας 1 the word of the Lord was being spread throughout the whole region Here, **word** refers to the message about Jesus. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those who believed spread the word of the Lord through the whole region” or “those who believed went everywhere in the region and told others about the message of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 13 49 qh9z figs-metonymy διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου δι’ ὅλης τῆς χώρας 1 the word of the Lord was being spread throughout the whole region Here, **word** refers to the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “and the message of Jesus was being spread through the whole region by those who believed spread the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 49 fpkr figs-activepassive διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου δι’ ὅλης τῆς χώρας 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those who believed went everywhere in the region and told others about the message of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 50 eqi5 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Barnabas. ACT 13 50 t4bv 0 Connecting Statement: This ends Paul and Barnabas’ time in Antioch of Pisidia and they go to Iconium. ACT 13 50 u8rm figs-synecdoche οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews This probably refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -1799,7 +1810,8 @@ ACT 14 8 kz7d ἀδύνατος…τοῖς ποσὶν 1 powerless in his feet ACT 14 8 tca1 χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 lame from the womb of his mother Alternate translation: “having been born as a cripple” ACT 14 8 hw4l χωλὸς 1 crippled unable to walk ACT 14 9 di49 ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ 1 He looked intently at him Alternate translation: “Paul looked straight at the man” -ACT 14 9 xak4 figs-abstractnouns ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 he has faith to be saved You can translate the abstract noun **faith** with the verb **to be saved**. Alternate translation: “he believed that Jesus could heal him” or “he believed that Jesus could make him well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 14 9 xak4 figs-abstractnouns ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 he has faith to be saved If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you can express it with the verb “believe”. Alternate translation: “he believed so that he could be healed” or “he believed so that he could be made well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 14 9 uwov figs-activepassive ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he believed that Jesus could heal him” or “he believed that Jesus could make him well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 14 10 v1kz ἥλατο 1 he jumped up “he dleaped in the air.” This implies that his legs were completely healed. ACT 14 11 axe6 ὃ ἐποίησεν Παῦλος 1 what Paul had done This refers to Paul’s healing the crippled man. ACT 14 11 lvs9 ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 they raised their voice Here, **raised their voice** means to speak loudly. Alternate translation: “they spoke loudly” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom) @@ -1875,7 +1887,7 @@ ACT 15 5 f2b5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and Barnabas are now in Jerusalem t ACT 15 5 k6k7 δέ τινες 1 But certain ones Here Luke contrasts those who believe that salvation is only in Jesus to others who believe salvation is by Jesus yet also believe that circumcision is required for salvation. ACT 15 5 b9nt τηρεῖν τὸν νόμον Μωϋσέως 1 to keep the law of Moses Alternate translation: “to obey the law of Moses” ACT 15 6 ugu6 ἰδεῖν περὶ τοῦ λόγου τούτου 1 to see about this matter The church leaders decided to discuss whether or not Gentiles needed to be circumcised and obey the law of Moses in order for God to save them from their sins. -ACT 15 7 wct8 figs-you 0 General Information: The first word “them” refers to apostles and elders ([Acts 15:6](../15/06.md)) and the other words “them” and “their” refer to the believing Gentiles. Here the word “you” is plural and refers to the apostles and elders present. The word “he” refers to God. Here “us” is plural and refers to Peter, the apostles and elders, and all Jewish believers in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 15 7 wct8 figs-you αὐτούς…ὑμεῖς…ὑμῖν 1 General Information: The word **them** refers to apostles and elders ([Acts 15:6](../15/06.md)). Both occurrences of **you** are plural and refer to the apostles and elders present. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 15 7 hxu9 0 Connecting Statement: Peter begins to speak to the apostles and elders who met to discuss whether Gentiles had to receive circumcision and keep the law ([Acts 15:5-6](./05.md)). ACT 15 7 a6q9 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Peter is addressing all of the believers who were present. ACT 15 7 s3wb figs-synecdoche διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου 1 by my mouth Here, **mouth** refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “from me” or “by me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -1885,12 +1897,15 @@ ACT 15 8 m1xc figs-metonymy καρδιογνώστης 1 who knows the heart Her ACT 15 8 p6d2 ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς 1 testified to them Alternate translation: “witnesses to the Gentiles” ACT 15 8 i1gc δοὺς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 giving them the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “causing the Holy Spirit to come upon them” ACT 15 8 abcs figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν 1 just as also to us Here Luke expects his readers to understand the words “he gave” that he leaves out. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 15 8 wlzx figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here **us** is plural and refers to Peter, the apostles and elders, and all Jewish believers in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 15 9 zs2g οὐδὲν διέκρινεν 1 he did not distinguish God did not treat Jewish believers different from Gentile believers. -ACT 15 9 ase1 figs-metaphor τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 having made their hearts clean by faith God’s forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins is spoken as though he literally cleaned their hearts. Here, **heart** stands for the person’s inner being. Alternate translation: “forgiving their sins because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 9 ase1 figs-metaphor τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 having made their hearts clean by faith God’s forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins is spoken as though he literally cleaned their hearts. Alternate translation: “forgiving their sins because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 9 yi8r figs-metonymy τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, **heart** stands for the person’s inner being. Alternate translation: “forgiving them because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 10 ha45 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Peter includes his audience by his use of “our” and “we.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 15 10 wjq7 0 Connecting Statement: Peter finishes speaking to the apostles and elders. ACT 15 10 rfr4 νῦν 1 Now This does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows. -ACT 15 10 zaz6 figs-rquestion τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι? 1 why are you testing God, to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear? Peter uses a question with a word picture to tell the Jewish believers they should not require the non-Jewish believers to perform circumcision to be saved. Alternate translation: “do not test God by putting a burden on the non-Jewish believers which we Jews were not able to bear!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 10 zaz6 figs-rquestion τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι? 1 why are you testing God, to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear? Peter uses this question to convict the disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not test God by putting a yoke on the neck of the non-Jewish believers which we Jews were not able to bear!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 15 10 qpyd figs-metaphor ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν 1 Peter uses a word picture to tell the Jewish believers they should not require the non-Jewish believers to perform circumcision to be saved. Alternate translation: “putting a burden on the non-Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 10 bfd5 οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers This refers to their Jewish ancestors. ACT 15 11 q28c figs-activepassive ἀλλὰ διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ, πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι καθ’ ὃν τρόπον κἀκεῖνοι 1 But we believe to be saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus, and they according to that same manner If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But we believe the Lord Jesus shall save us by his grace, just as he saved the non-Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 12 um1p 0 General Information: Here the word “them” refers to Paul and Barnabas. @@ -1927,7 +1942,7 @@ ACT 15 21 zd7t figs-metonymy Μωϋσῆς 1 Moses Here, **Moses** represents th ACT 15 21 wp1s figs-activepassive Μωϋσῆς…ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει 1 Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “there are Jews in every city, from ancient generations, who are proclaiming the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 21 xg5n figs-hyperbole κατὰ πόλιν 1 in every city The word **every** here is a generalization. Alternate translation: “in many cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 15 22 rhn3 0 General Information: Here the word “them” refers to Judas and Silas. The word “They” refers to the apostles, elders, and other believers of the church in Jerusalem. -ACT 15 22 hp6j figs-explicit ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the whole church Here, **church** refers to the people who are a part of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the church in Jerusalem” or “the whole community of believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 22 hp6j figs-metonymy ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the whole church Here, **church** refers to the people who are a part of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the church in Jerusalem” or “the whole community of believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 22 c711 translate-names Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν 1 Judas called Barsabbas This is the name of a man. **Barsabbas** is a second name that people called him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 15 23 e4g2 οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν 1 The apostles and the elders, brothers, to those throughout Antioch and Syria and Cilicia, who are brothers from among the Gentiles. Greetings This is the introduction of the letter. Your language may have a way of introducing the author of the letter and to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers” ACT 15 23 kp51 ἀδελφοὶ…ἀδελφοῖς 1 brothers … brothers Here both instances of the word **brothers** refer to fellow believers. By using these words, the apostles and elders assure the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers. @@ -1974,7 +1989,8 @@ ACT 15 39 u97a figs-abstractnouns ἐγένετο δὲ παροξυσμὸς, ACT 15 40 l2uq figs-activepassive παραδοθεὶς τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Κυρίου ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 after he had been entrusted by the brothers to the grace of the Lord To entrust to someone means to place the care and responsibility for someone or something to another person. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after the believers in Antioch entrusted Paul to the grace of the Lord” or “after the believers in Antioch prayed for the Lord to take care of Paul and show kindness to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 41 e3ym figs-explicit διήρχετο 1 he went through The previous sentence implies that Silas was with Paul. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went all around in” or “Paul took Silas and went throughout” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 41 t81z τὴν Συρίαν καὶ τὴν Κιλικίαν 1 Syria and Cilicia These are provinces or areas in Asia Minor, near the island of Cyprus. -ACT 15 41 tbv3 figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 strengthening the churches Encouraging the believers in the churches is spoken of as though Paul and Silas were making the believers physically stronger. The word **churches** refers to the groups of believers in Syria and Cilicia. Alternate translation: “encouraging the believers in the churches” or “helping the community of believers to depend even more in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 41 tbv3 figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 strengthening the churches Encouraging the believers in the churches is spoken of as though Paul and Silas were making the believers physically stronger. Alternate translation: “encouraging the believers in the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 41 s7yf figs-metonymy ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 The word **churches** refers to the groups of believers in Syria and Cilicia. Alternate translation: “helping the community of believers to depend even more in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Timothy’s circumcision

Paul circumcised Timothy because they were telling the message of Jesus to Jews and Gentiles. Paul wanted the Jews to know that he respected the law of Moses even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Christians did not need to be circumcised.

### The woman who had a spirit of divination

Most people want very much to know the future, but the law of Moses said that speaking with the spirits of dead people to learn about the future is a sin. This woman seems to have been able to tell the future very well. She was a slave, and her masters made much money from her work. Paul wanted her to stop sinning, so he told the spirit to leave her. Luke does not say that she began to follow Jesus or tell us anything more about her. ACT 16 1 l2b1 0 General Information: The first, third, and fourth instances of the word “him” refer to Timothy. The second “him” refers to Paul. ACT 16 1 f49m writing-background 0 This continues the missionary journeys of Paul with Silas. Timothy is introduced into the story and joins Paul and Silas. Verses 1 and 2 give background information about Timothy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -2013,7 +2029,8 @@ ACT 16 14 qj86 figs-ellipsis πορφυρόπωλις 1 a seller of purple Here ACT 16 14 c6n8 translate-names Θυατείρων 1 of Thyatira This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 14 cyk3 σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν 1 worshiping God When Luke says Lydia was **worshiping God**, he is saying that she was a Gentile who gave praise to God and followed him, but did not obey all of the Jewish laws. ACT 16 14 rd4r figs-metaphor ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν, προσέχειν 1 of whom the Lord opened the heart to pay attention to For the Lord to cause someone to **pay attention** and believe a message is spoken of as if he were opening a person’s **heart**. Alternate translation: “and the Lord caused her to listen well and to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 16 14 s9ju figs-metonymy διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 opened the heart Here, **heart** stands for a person’s mind. Also, the author speaks about the **heart** or “mind” as if it were a box that a person could open so it is ready for someone to fill it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 16 14 s9ju figs-metonymy διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 opened the heart Here, **heart** stands for a person’s mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 14 ddx8 figs-metaphor διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 The author speaks about the **heart** or “mind” as if it were a box that a person could open so it is ready for someone to fill it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 14 a74y figs-activepassive τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου 1 what was being said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 15 g7e9 figs-activepassive ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 And when she was baptized, and her household If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when they baptized Lydia and members of her household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 15 s799 figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 her household This refers to all the people who live in her house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2112,7 +2129,8 @@ ACT 17 5 pp7k εἰς τὸν δῆμον 1 to the people Possible meanings for ACT 17 6 i79p τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Here, **brothers** refers to believers. Alternate translation: “some other believers” ACT 17 6 e44z ἐπὶ τοὺς πολιτάρχας 1 before the city officials Alternate translation: “in the presence of the city officials” ACT 17 6 g7xj οἱ…οὗτοι 1 Those who … they The Jewish leaders were referring to Paul and Silas. -ACT 17 6 c2av figs-hyperbole τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 have turned the inhabited world upside down This phrase is another way of saying Paul and Silas where causing trouble everywhere they went. The Jewish leaders were exaggerating the influence Paul and Silas were having with their teaching. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere in the world” or “have caused trouble everywhere they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 17 6 c2av figs-idiom τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 have turned the inhabited world upside down This phrase is another way of saying Paul and Silas where causing trouble everywhere they went. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 17 6 x90b figs-hyperbole τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 The Jewish leaders were exaggerating the influence Paul and Silas were having with their teaching. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 7 hlc9 ὑποδέδεκται Ἰάσων; καὶ οὗτοι πάντες 1 Jason and all these men have welcomed This phrase signals that Jason and his companions were in agreement with the apostles’ troubling message. ACT 17 8 th2f ἐτάραξαν 1 were disturbed Alternate translation: “were worried” ACT 17 9 ya44 λαβόντες τὸ ἱκανὸν παρὰ τοῦ Ἰάσονος καὶ τῶν λοιπῶν 1 after they had received a bond from Jason and the rest of them Jason and the others had to pay the money to the city officials as a promise of good behavior; that money might be returned if all went well or it might be used to repair the damages brought on by bad behavior. @@ -2136,7 +2154,8 @@ ACT 17 15 tjh5 καθιστάνοντες τὸν Παῦλον 1 were leading ACT 17 15 gs1p figs-quotations λαβόντες ἐντολὴν πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον 1 after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy “after telling them to command Silas and Timothy so.” This can also be stated as a direct quotation as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 17 16 wk63 0 General Information: This is another part of the story of Paul and Silas’ travels. Paul is now in Athens where he is waiting for Silas and Timothy to join him. ACT 17 16 y9cr δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story. -ACT 17 16 we78 figs-synecdoche παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν 1 his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols Here, **his spirit** stands for Paul himself. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he became upset because he saw that there were idols everywhere in the city” or “seeing the idols everywhere in the city upset him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 17 16 we78 figs-synecdoche παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν 1 his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols Here, **his spirit** stands for Paul himself. Alternate translation: “he was provoked because he saw that there were idols everywhere in the city” or “seeing the idols everywhere in the city, he was provoked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 17 16 s011 figs-activepassive παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he became upset” or “the city upset him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 17 q8px διελέγετο 1 he reasoned “he debated” or “he discussed.” This means that there is interaction from the listeners rather than only his preaching. They are talking with him as well. ACT 17 17 jkj8 τοῖς σεβομένοις 1 those who were worshiping This refers to Gentiles (non-Jews) who give praise to God and follow him but do not obey all of the Jewish laws. ACT 17 17 ec14 ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 in the marketplace “in the public square.” This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. @@ -2153,7 +2172,8 @@ ACT 17 19 mv8c ἐπιλαβόμενοί τε αὐτοῦ, ἐπὶ τὸν ACT 17 19 b56g figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 to the Areopagus The **Areopagus** was the place where the leaders met. Alternate translation: “to the leaders that met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 19 ze7e τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον…λέγοντες 1 the Areopagus, saying Here the leaders on the Areopagus are speaking. This can stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the Areopagus. The leaders said to Paul” ACT 17 19 unc8 translate-names Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 Areopagus This is a prominent rock outcropping or hill in Athens upon which the supreme court of Athens may have met. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 17 20 lay8 figs-metaphor ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 For you are bringing some strange things to our ears Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection are spoken of as an object that a person can bring to another person. Here, **ears** refers to what they hear. Alternate translation: “For you are teaching some things that we have never heard before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 17 20 lay8 figs-metaphor ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 For you are bringing some strange things to our ears Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection are spoken of as an object that a person can bring to another person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 20 us7g figs-metonymy ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 Here, **ears** refers to what they hear. Alternate translation: “For you are teaching some things that we have never heard before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 21 dn1t figs-hyperbole Ἀθηναῖοι δὲ πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι 1 And all the Athenians and the foreigners living there The word **all** is a generalization referring to many. Alternate translation: “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” or “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 21 d8yb translate-names Ἀθηναῖοι 1 the Athenians **Athenians** are people from Athens, a city near the coast below Macedonia (present day Greece). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 21 sk5b figs-metaphor εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν, ἢ λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν 1 spent their time in nothing other than either to tell something or to listen to Here, **time** is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “used their time doing nothing but either telling or listening to” or “were always doing nothing but telling or listening to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2215,8 +2235,9 @@ ACT 18 4 r56h 0 General Information: Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul. ACT 18 4 h3az διελέγετο δὲ 1 And he reasoned “And Paul debated” or “And Paul discussed.” He gave reasons. This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people. ACT 18 4 r2gp ἔπειθέν τε Ἰουδαίους καὶ Ἕλληνας 1 persuading both Jews and Greeks Possible meanings are (1) “he caused both Jews and Greeks to believe” or (2) “he kept trying to persuade the Jews and the Greeks.” ACT 18 6 ncx8 translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια 1 shaking out his garment This is a symbolic action to indicate that Paul will no longer try to teach the Jews there about Jesus. He is leaving them to God’s judgment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 18 6 z12a figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Your blood be upon your head Here, **blood** stands for the guilt of their actions. Here, **head** refers to the whole person. Paul tells the Jews they are solely responsible for the judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone bear the responsibility for your punishment for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 18 7 cd3u 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers to Paul. The first word “his” refers to Titius Justus. The second word “his” refers to Crispus. +ACT 18 6 z12a figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Your blood be upon your head Here, **blood** stands for the guilt of their actions. Paul tells the Jews they are solely responsible for the judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone bear the responsibility for your punishment for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 6 pacx figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Here, **head** refers to the whole person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 18 7 cd3u εἰσῆλθεν 1 General Information: Here the word **he** refers to Paul. ACT 18 7 vs6y translate-names Τιτίου Ἰούστου 1 Titius Justus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 7 v8xg σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν 1 who worships God A worshiper of God is a Gentile who gives praise to God and follows him but does not necessarily obey all of the Jewish laws. ACT 18 8 lj2t translate-names Κρίσπος 1 Crispus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2227,7 +2248,8 @@ ACT 18 9 ws7p figs-parallelism μὴ φοβοῦ, ἀλλὰ λάλει καὶ ACT 18 9 zg8a figs-doublet λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 continue speaking and do not be silent The Lord gives the same command in two different ways to strongly command Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “you must certainly continue to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 18 9 a529 figs-explicit μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 do not be silent It can be stated explicitly what the Lord wants Paul to speak. Alternate translation: “do not stop speaking about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 18 10 a8lq λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 I have many people in this city Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who have put their faith in me” or “many people in this city will put their faith in me” -ACT 18 11 mqx2 writing-endofstory ἐκάθισεν δὲ ἐνιαυτὸν καὶ μῆνας ἓξ, διδάσκων ἐν αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 And so he stayed there for a year and six months, teaching the word of God among them This is a concluding statement for this part of the story. Here, **word of God** is a synecdoche for the entire scriptures. Alternate translation: “And so Paul lived there for a year and six months, teaching the scriptures among them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 18 11 mqx2 writing-endofstory ἐκάθισεν δὲ ἐνιαυτὸν καὶ μῆνας ἓξ, διδάσκων ἐν αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 And so he stayed there for a year and six months, teaching the word of God among them This is a concluding statement for this part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) +ACT 18 11 a18w figs-synecdoche 1 Here, **word of God** is a synecdoche for the entire Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 18 12 f41k translate-names 0 General Information: Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 12 b5bf 0 Connecting Statement: The unbelieving Jews bring Paul to the judgment seat before Gallio. ACT 18 12 se8m translate-names Γαλλίωνος 1 Gallio This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2247,7 +2269,7 @@ ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names 0 General Information: Here the word “he” re ACT 18 18 ura9 0 Connecting Statement: This continues Paul’s missionary journey as Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila leave Corinth. This seems to indicate that Silas and Timothy remain since it says “he” here and not “we.” The word “they” refers to Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila. ACT 18 18 et8c figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἀποταξάμενος 1 left the brothers The word **brothers** refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “left the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 18 18 v5kl ἐξέπλει εἰς τὴν Συρίαν, καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας 1 and sailed to Syria, and Priscilla and Aquila were with him Paul got on a ship that sailed for Syria. Priscilla and Aquila went with him. -ACT 18 18 kq6f translate-symaction κειράμενος…τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow This is a symbolic action that indicates the completion of a **vow**. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he had someone cut off the hair on his head … because he had completed a vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 18 18 kq6f translate-symaction κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow This is a symbolic action that indicates the completion of a **vow**. Alternate translation: “he had someone cut off the hair on his head in Cenchrea because he had completed a vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 18 19 abcx κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν 1 he left them Alternate translation: “Paul left Priscilla and Aquilla” ACT 18 19 st93 διελέξατο 1 reasoned with Alternate translation: “discussed with” or “debated with” ACT 18 20 u44s 0 General Information: Here the words “they” and “them” refer to the Jews in Ephesus. @@ -2274,8 +2296,9 @@ ACT 18 26 ga6v figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the way of G ACT 18 26 k1lb ἀκριβέστερον 1 more accurately Alternate translation: “more correctly” or “more fully” ACT 18 27 c2sq 0 General Information: Here the he words “he” and “him” refer to Apollos ([Acts 18:24](../18/24.md)). ACT 18 27 ll36 διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 to pass over into Achaia “to go to the region of Achaia.” The phrase **pass over** is used here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. -ACT 18 27 pql7 τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 Achaia Achaia was a Roman Province in the southern section of Greece. See how you translated this in [Acts 18:12](../18/12.md). -ACT 18 27 v2i6 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers The word **brothers** here refers to men and women believers. You can make explicit that these are believers in Ephesus. Alternate translation: “fellow believers in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 18 27 pql7 τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 Achaia **Achaia** was a Roman Province in the southern section of Greece. See how you translated this in [Acts 18:12](../18/12.md). +ACT 18 27 v2i6 figs-gendernotations οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers The word **brothers** here refers to both men and women believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +ACT 18 27 i5ij figs-explicit οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 You can make explicit that **the brothers** are believers in Ephesus. Alternate translation: “fellow believers in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 18 27 q5f2 ἔγραψαν τοῖς μαθηταῖς 1 and wrote to the disciples Alternate translation: “and wrote a letter to the Christians in Achaia” ACT 18 27 f99p τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος 1 those who had believed by grace Alternate translation: “those who had believed in salvation by grace” or “those who by God’s grace believed in Jesus” ACT 18 28 l2zt εὐτόνως…τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις διακατηλέγχετο δημοσίᾳ 1 he was powerfully refuting the Jews publicly Alternate translation: “in public debate Apollos powerfully proved that the Jews were wrong” @@ -2348,28 +2371,29 @@ ACT 19 21 rdz4 δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν 1 it is necessary ACT 19 22 cy6f translate-names Ἔραστον 1 Erastus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 22 k35j figs-explicit αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν χρόνον εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 he himself stayed in Asia for a time It is made explicit in the next few verses that Paul remains in Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 22 uy9x figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν 1 he himself stayed Here, **himself** is added for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -ACT 19 23 y5ae writing-background 0 General Information: Demetrius is introduced to the story. Verse 24 introduces background information about Demetrius. Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess Artemis, sometimes translated as “Diana.” She was a false goddess of fertility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 23 l7gz 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells about a riot that broke out while Paul was in Ephesus. ACT 19 23 kn49 ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος περὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 there was no small disturbance concerning the Way This is a summary opening statement. ACT 19 23 nb3p figs-litotes ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance “the people became very upset” See how you translated this in [Acts 12:18](../12/18.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 19 23 rwf2 τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 the Way This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated this title in [Acts 9:1](../09/01.md). +ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 General Information: This verse introduces background information about Demetrius. Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess Artemis, sometimes translated as “Diana.” She was a false goddess of fertility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 19 24 opb9 translate-names Δημήτριος 1 **Demetrius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 24 cg16 writing-participants Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος 1 a certain silversmith named Demetrius The use of the words **a certain** introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 19 24 nwt7 ἀργυροκόπος 1 a silversmith a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry -ACT 19 24 v8cb translate-names Δημήτριος…ὀνόματι 1 named Demetrius This is the name of a man. Demetrius was a silversmith in Ephesus who was against Paul and the local church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 19 24 nwt7 ἀργυροκόπος 1 a silversmith A **silversmith** is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry. ACT 19 24 p58m figs-litotes παρείχετο…οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν 1 brought in not a little business This is a way of saying that he brought in much business. Alternate translation: “made a lot of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 19 25 kuz6 τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας 1 the workmen of that occupation An occupation is a profession or job. Alternate translation: “others who did that kind of work” -ACT 19 26 w5z6 0 Connecting Statement: Demetrius continues to speak to the craftsmen. +ACT 19 25 kuz6 τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας 1 the workmen of that occupation An **occupation** is a profession or job. Alternate translation: “others who did that kind of work” ACT 19 26 rm6w θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε ὅτι 1 you see and hear that Alternate translation: “you have come to know and understand that” ACT 19 26 rx32 figs-metaphor μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον 1 and turned away a considerable crowd Paul’s stopping people from worshiping idols is spoken of as though Paul were literally turning the people in a different direction. Alternate translation: “and caused many people to stop worshiping the local gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 19 26 z7e7 figs-ellipsis λέγων ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοὶ, οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι 1 He is saying that the things that are being made with hands are not gods Here the word **hands** can refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “He is saying that the idols that people make are not real gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 19 26 z7e7 figs-synecdoche λέγων ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν θεοὶ, οἱ διὰ χειρῶν γινόμενοι 1 He is saying that the things that are being made with hands are not gods Here the word **hands** can refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “He is saying that the idols that people make are not real gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 19 27 r1w2 figs-activepassive τοῦτο κινδυνεύει ἡμῖν, τὸ μέρος εἰς ἀπελεγμὸν ἐλθεῖν 1 is this trade in peril for us to come to disrepute If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “might the people no longer want to buy idols that we make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 27 j3bb figs-activepassive τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτέμιδος ἱερὸν, εἰς οὐθὲν λογισθῆναι 1 the temple of the great goddess Artemis may be considered as nothing If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the people may think there is no benefit in going to the temple to worship the great goddess Artemis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 27 bqt4 μέλλειν τε καὶ καθαιρεῖσθαι τῆς μεγαλειότητος αὐτῆς 1 And indeed, her majesty is about to be destroyed Artemis’s greatness only comes from what people think of her. -ACT 19 27 hz7l figs-hyperbole ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 whom all Asia and the world worships This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Here the words **Asia** and **the world** refer to the people in Asia and the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 27 hz7l figs-hyperbole ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 whom all Asia and the world worships This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Alternate translation: “whom many parts Asia and other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 19 27 aq5c figs-metonymy ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 Here the words **Asia** and **the world** refer to the people in Asia and the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 28 t4lm 0 General Information: Here “they” refers to the craftsmen who made the idols ([Acts 19:24-25](./24.md)). ACT 19 28 uc5c figs-metaphor γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ 1 having become filled with anger This speaks of the craftsmen as though they were containers. Here, **anger** is spoken of as if it were the contents that fill a container. Alternate translation: “they became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 28 lcx8 ἔκραζον 1 they cried out Alternate translation: “they shouted aloud” or “they shouted loudly” -ACT 19 29 t7xs figs-metonymy ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 the whole city was filled with confusion Here, **city** refers to the people. The city is spoken of as if it were a container. And, **confusion** is spoken of as if it were the contents that filled the container. Alternate translation: “people all over the city became upset and started shouting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 19 29 t7xs figs-metonymy ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 the whole city was filled with confusion Here, **city** refers to the people of the city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 29 u42d figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 The city is spoken of as if it were a container. And, **confusion** is spoken of as if it were the contents that filled the container. Alternate translation: “people all over the city became upset and started shouting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 29 nt7y ὥρμησάν τε ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 and they rushed together This was a mob or near riot situation. ACT 19 29 ej3q εἰς τὸ θέατρον 1 into the theater The Ephesus theater was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. ACT 19 29 hjc8 συνεκδήμους Παύλου 1 Paul’s … travel companions The men who had been with Paul. @@ -2464,7 +2488,8 @@ ACT 20 22 ty3b 0 General Information: Here the word “I” refers to Paul. ACT 20 22 vam4 figs-activepassive δεδεμένος ἐγὼ τῷ Πνεύματι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form.They can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the Spirit compels me to go there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 22 a9j1 τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς 1 not knowing what will happen to me in it Alternate translation: “and I do not know what will happen to me there” or “not knowing what will happen to me in Jerusalem” ACT 20 23 q3ie figs-metonymy δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν 1 chains and sufferings await me Here, **chains** refers to Paul’s being arrested and put in prison. Alternate translation: “people will put me in prison and cause me to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 20 24 w8d2 figs-metaphor ὡς τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 so as to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus This speaks about Paul’s **race** and **ministry** as if they are objects that Jesus gives and Paul receives. Here, **race** and **ministry** mean basically the same thing. Paul repeats this for emphasis. Alternate translation: “so that I may complete the work that the Lord Jesus has commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +ACT 20 24 w8d2 figs-metaphor ὡς τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 so as to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus This speaks about Paul’s **race** and **ministry** as if they are objects that Jesus gives and Paul receives. Alternate translation: “so that I may complete the work that the Lord Jesus has commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 24 ga6d figs-doublet τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν 1 Here, **race** and **ministry** mean basically the same thing. Paul repeats this for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 20 24 m5gc figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου 1 to finish my race Paul speaks about completing the work that Jesus has commanded him to do as if he were running a **race**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 24 hg3l διαμαρτύρασθαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to solemnly testify to the gospel of the grace of God “to tell people what I have personally learned about the good news of God’s grace.” This is the ministry that Paul received from Jesus. ACT 20 25 f1sb 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to talk to the Ephesian elders ([Acts 20:17](../20/17.md)). @@ -2537,14 +2562,15 @@ ACT 21 10 hx8k 0 Connecting Statement: This tells about a prophecy made about ACT 21 10 n3i8 writing-participants τις…προφήτης ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος 1 a certain prophet named Agabus This introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 21 10 f9cb translate-names Ἅγαβος 1 Agabus Agabus was a man from Judea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 21 11 i8t2 ἄρας τὴν ζώνην τοῦ Παύλου 1 taken Paul’s belt Alternate translation: “removed Paul’s belt from Paul’s waist” -ACT 21 11 nq2y figs-quotesinquotes τάδε λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, τὸν ἄνδρα οὗ ἐστιν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, οὕτως δήσουσιν ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι, καὶ παραδώσουσιν εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν. 1 Thus says the Holy Spirit, ‘So the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt, and they will hand him over into the hands of the Gentiles This is a quotation within a quotation. The inner quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “‘The Holy Spirit says that this will be how the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt, and they will hand him over into the hands of the Gentiles.’ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +ACT 21 11 nq2y figs-quotesinquotes τάδε λέγει τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, τὸν ἄνδρα οὗ ἐστιν ἡ ζώνη αὕτη, οὕτως δήσουσιν ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι, καὶ παραδώσουσιν εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν. 1 Thus says the Holy Spirit, ‘So the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt, and they will hand him over into the hands of the Gentiles This is a quotation within a quotation. The inner quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “‘The Holy Spirit says that this will be how the Jews in Jerusalem will bind the man who owns this belt, and they will hand him over into the hands of the Gentiles.’ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) ACT 21 11 i8u7 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews This does not mean all the Jews, but that these were the people who would do that. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” or “some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 11 zvw8 παραδώσουσιν 1 they will hand him over Alternate translation: “they will deliver him” ACT 21 11 s92d figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν 1 into the hands of the Gentiles The word **hands** here represents control. Alternate translation: “into the legal custody of the Gentiles” or “to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 11 b59g figs-synecdoche ἐθνῶν 1 of the Gentiles This stands for the authorities among the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 12 fvh4 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” refers to Luke and the other believers but does not include the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 21 13 uwt2 figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? Paul asks this question to show the believers they should stop trying to persuade him. Alternate translation: “Stop what you are doing. Your weeping is breaking my heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 21 13 bj76 figs-metaphor συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 breaking my heart To make someone sad or to discourage someone is spoken of as if it were a heart being broken. Here, **heart** stands for a person’s emotions. Alternate translation: “discouraging me” or “making me very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 21 13 bj76 figs-metaphor συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 breaking my heart To make someone sad or to discourage someone is spoken of as if it were a heart being broken. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 21 13 k34w figs-metonymy συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 Here, **heart** stands for a person’s emotions. Alternate translation: “discouraging me” or “making me very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 13 p5e5 figs-activepassive οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι 1 not only to be bound If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “not only for them to tie me up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 13 q35x figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 for the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to the person of Jesus. Alternate translation: “for the sake of the Lord Jesus” or “because I believe in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 14 hwc5 figs-activepassive μὴ πειθομένου…αὐτοῦ 1 he would not be persuaded If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul would not allow us to persuade him” or “we were unable to persuade Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2580,7 +2606,8 @@ ACT 21 25 c4kl figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” ref ACT 21 25 cqm9 0 Connecting Statement: James and the elders in Jerusalem finish their request to Paul ([Acts 21:18](../21/18.md)). ACT 21 25 a35u figs-explicit φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον, καὶ αἷμα, καὶ πνικτὸν 1 to keep themselves from things sacrificed to idols, and from blood, and from what is strangled All of these are rules about what they can eat. They are forbidden to eat meat of animals sacrificed to an idol, meat with blood still in it, and meat from a strangled animal because it would still have blood in the meat. See how you translated similar phrases in [Acts 15:20](../15/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 25 bpb5 figs-activepassive φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς, τό τε εἰδωλόθυτον 1 to keep themselves from things sacrificed to idols If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “to stay away from the meat of an animal that someone sacrificed to an idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 21 25 wjd2 figs-explicit πνικτὸν 1 from what is strangled If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. You can also state explicitly the assumed information about strangled animals. Alternate translation: “from animals that a person has strangled” or “from animals that a person killed for food but did not drain its blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 21 25 wjd2 figs-activepassive πνικτὸν 1 from what is strangled If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “from animals that a person has strangled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 21 25 nu0i figs-explicit πνικτὸν 1 If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you can state explicitly the assumed information that what was **strangled** were animals, and that the reason this was wrong is that the blood was not drained from them. Alternate translation: “from animals strangled and killed for food with the blood still in them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 26 cr14 παραλαβὼν τοὺς ἄνδρας 1 having taken the men These are the four men who made a vow. ACT 21 26 s8z9 σὺν αὐτοῖς ἁγνισθεὶς 1 having been purified with them Before entering the temple area the Jews were required to be ceremonially or ritually clean. This cleansing had to do with Jews having contact with Gentiles. ACT 21 26 xu9r figs-synecdoche εἰσῄει εἰς τὸ ἱερόν 1 went into the temple They did not go into the temple itself where only the high priest was allowed to enter. They entered the temple courtyard. Alternate translation: “went into the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -2596,13 +2623,16 @@ ACT 21 28 sfg3 τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ τοῦ νόμου, καὶ τοῦ ACT 21 28 jc9q figs-explicit ἔτι τε καὶ Ἕλληνας εἰσήγαγεν εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 And besides, he has both brought Greeks into the temple Only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 29 t2z7 writing-background ἦσαν γὰρ προεωρακότες Τρόφιμον τὸν Ἐφέσιον ἐν τῇ πόλει σὺν αὐτῷ, ὃν ἐνόμιζον ὅτι εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν εἰσήγαγεν ὁ Παῦλος 1 For they had previously seen Trophimus the Ephesian with him in the city, whom they thought that Paul brought into the temple This is background information. Luke is explaining why the Jews from Asia thought Paul brought a Greek into the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 21 29 h1uu Τρόφιμον 1 Trophimus This was a Greek man that they accused Paul of having brought into the inner temple area that was only for Jews. See how you translated his name in [Acts 20:4](../20/04.md). -ACT 21 30 upl8 figs-hyperbole ἐκινήθη τε ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 And the whole city was stirred up The word **whole** here is an exaggeration for emphasis. The word **city** represents the people in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “And many people in the city became angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 21 30 st3f figs-metonymy ἐκινήθη τε ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 The word **city** represents the people in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “And the people in the city became angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 21 30 upl8 figs-hyperbole ἐκινήθη τε ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 And the whole city was stirred up The word **whole** here is an exaggeration for emphasis. Alternate translation: “And many people in the city became angry at Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 21 30 x2sx ἐπιλαβόμενοι τοῦ Παύλου 1 having laid hold of Paul Alternate translation: “having seized Paul” or “after they grabbed Paul” -ACT 21 30 xd6r figs-explicit εὐθέως ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 the doors were immediately shut They shut the doors so that there would not be rioting in the temple area. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews immediately shut the temple doors” or “the temple guards immediately shut the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 21 30 xd6r figs-explicit εὐθέως ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 the doors were immediately shut They **shut** **the doors** so that there would not be rioting in the temple area. Alternate translation: “the temple doors were immediately shut to protect the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 21 30 mmaa figs-activepassive εὐθέως ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θύραι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews immediately shut the temple doors” or “the temple guards immediately shut the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 31 d6vt figs-metonymy ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης 1 a report came up to the commander of the guard Here, **report** refers to the messenger who went to speak the report. Alternate translation: “someone gave news to the commander of the guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 31 hu5r ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ 1 a report came up to the commander The phrase **came up to** is used because the commander was in a fortress connected to the temple that was higher in elevation than the temple courtyard. -ACT 21 31 p85a τῷ χιλιάρχῳ 1 to the commander a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers -ACT 21 31 u65r figs-hyperbole ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 all Jerusalem was stirred up The word **Jerusalem** here represents the people of Jerusalem. The word **all** is an exaggeration to show a large crowd was upset. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were in an uproar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 21 31 p85a τῷ χιλιάρχῳ 1 to the commander A Roman **commander** was a military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers. +ACT 21 31 u65r figs-hyperbole ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 all Jerusalem was stirred up The word **Jerusalem** here represents the people of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were stirred up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 21 31 zgas figs-hyperbole ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 The word **all** is an exaggeration to show a large crowd was upset. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were in an uproar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 21 32 j81t 0 General Information: The first word “he” and the word “He” refer to the chief captain of the guard mentioned in [Acts 21:31](../21/31.md). ACT 21 32 dgz5 κατέδραμεν 1 ran down From the fortress, there are stairs going down into the court. ACT 21 32 e4rj τὸν χιλίαρχον 1 the commander a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers @@ -2659,7 +2689,8 @@ ACT 22 7 d6nd figs-synecdoche ἤκουσα φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι ACT 22 9 h95h figs-synecdoche τὴν…φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν τοῦ λαλοῦντός μοι 1 they did not understand the voice of the one who was speaking to me Here, **voice** stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “they did not understand what the one who spoke to me was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 22 10 a91a figs-activepassive κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται 1 and there you will be told If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “there someone will tell you” or “there you will find out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 11 n1kb οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτὸς ἐκείνου 1 I could not see because of the glory of that light Alternate translation: “I was left blind because of that light’s brightness” -ACT 22 11 n2n1 figs-synecdoche χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι, ἦλθον εἰς Δαμασκόν 1 being led by the hands of those who were with me, I came into Damascus Here, **hands** stands for those leading Paul. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those with me guided me into Damascus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 22 11 qyf0 figs-activepassive χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι, ἦλθον εἰς Δαμασκόν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those with me guided me into Damascus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 22 11 n2n1 figs-synecdoche χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι 1 being led by the hands of those who were with me, I came into Damascus Here, **hands** stands for those leading Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 22 12 a17q 0 General Information: The words “He” and “him” refer to Ananias. ACT 22 12 h5bh translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias Though this is not the same Ananias who died earlier in Acts [Acts 5:3](../05/03.md), you may translate it the same way though as you did in [Acts 5:1](../05/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 22 12 z1g3 ἀνὴρ εὐλαβὴς κατὰ τὸν νόμον 1 a devout man according to the law Ananias was very serious about following God’s law. @@ -2687,7 +2718,8 @@ ACT 22 19 q5cl 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to the n ACT 22 19 p7gz 0 Connecting Statement: This ends what Paul was able to say to the crowd of Jewish people by the fortress. ACT 22 19 im4n figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται 1 they themselves know The word **themselves** is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 22 19 da1e κατὰ τὰς συναγωγὰς 1 according to the synagogues “in each of the synagogues” or “in every synagogue.” Paul went to synagogues to find Jews who believed in Jesus. -ACT 22 20 y7t1 figs-metonymy ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου 1 the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled Here, **blood** stands for Stephen’s life. To **spill blood** means to kill. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they killed Stephen who testified about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 22 20 y7t1 figs-metonymy ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου 1 the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled Here, **blood** stands for Stephen’s life. To **spill blood** means to kill. Alternate translation: “your witness Stephen was killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 22 20 udrd figs-activepassive ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they killed Stephen who testified about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 22 fj9x 0 General Information: Here the words “him” and the first two words “he” refer to Paul. The word “He” and the last “he” refer to the chief captain. ACT 22 22 ta8z αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον 1 Remove such a one from the earth The phrase **from the earth** adds emphasis to “Remove such a one.” Alternate translation: “Kill him” ACT 22 23 ylr7 κραυγαζόντων τε αὐτῶν 1 And as they were shouting The phrase **as they were** is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time. @@ -2695,8 +2727,9 @@ ACT 22 23 b6a7 translate-symaction ῥιπτούντων τὰ ἱμάτια, κ ACT 22 24 x7zv χιλίαρχος 1 commander a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers ACT 22 24 h6gp figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσεν…εἰσάγεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 commanded him to be brought If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “ordered his soldiers to bring Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 24 sth6 τὴν παρεμβολήν 1 the fortress This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in [Acts 21:34](../21/34.md). -ACT 22 24 pz47 figs-activepassive εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 commanding him to be examined by flogging The commander wanted to torture Paul by whipping him to ensure that he was telling the truth. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “ordering his soldiers to whip Paul to force him to tell the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 22 25 ar63 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to the soldiers. +ACT 22 24 pz47 figs-explicit εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 commanding him to be examined by flogging The commander wanted to torture Paul by whipping him to ensure that he was telling the truth. Alternate translation: “ordering that Paul be whipped to force him to tell the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 22 24 og3n figs-activepassive εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordering his soldiers to whip Paul to force him to tell the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 22 25 ar63 προέτειναν 1 General Information: Here the word **they** refers to the soldiers. ACT 22 25 st4k τοῖς ἱμᾶσιν 1 for the whip The whip was made from strips of leather or animal hide. ACT 22 25 yjw3 figs-rquestion εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? 1 Is it lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and uncondemned? Paul uses this question to make the centurion check the validity of having his soldiers whip Paul. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and who was not given his legal right to a trial!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 22 26 pca7 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 What are you about to do? This question is used to urge the commander to reconsider his plan to whip Paul. Alternate translation: “You should not do this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -3208,4 +3241,4 @@ ACT 28 28 c575 0 Connecting Statement: Paul finishes speaking to the Jewish le ACT 28 28 b2za figs-metaphor τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles God’s message about how he saves people is spoken of as if it were an object that is sent. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God is sending his messengers to the Gentiles to tell them about how he will save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 28 28 d18n αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀκούσονται 1 they also will listen “some of them also will listen.” This response of the Gentiles is in contrast to the way the Jews of that time refused to listen to God. ACT 28 30 c56e writing-endofstory 0 Connecting Statement: Luke ends the story of Paul in the book of Acts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 28 31 wv1l figs-metonymy κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 proclaiming the kingdom of God Here, **kingdom of God** refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “preaching about God’s rule as king” or “preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) \ No newline at end of file +ACT 28 31 wv1l figs-metonymy κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 proclaiming the kingdom of God Here, **kingdom of God** refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “preaching about God’s rule as king” or “preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From d1a148159d0fac211e39648a2b2bce2288ec3edf Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Benjamin Wright Date: Fri, 1 Apr 2022 03:42:29 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 05/15] Exodus 40 (#2379) Co-authored-by: deferredreward Co-authored-by: Benjamin Wright Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2379 --- en_tn_02-EXO.tsv | 64 +++++++++++++++++++++++++----------------------- 1 file changed, 34 insertions(+), 30 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv b/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv index 4dd9d97811..ce3cdebd58 100644 --- a/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv @@ -1833,6 +1833,8 @@ EXO 26 29 nq3m לַ⁠בְּרִיחִ֑ם 1 crossbars These are horizontal sup EXO 26 30 csf9 figs-activepassive הָרְאֵ֖יתָ בָּ⁠הָֽר 1 you were shown on the mountain This can be stated in active form. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 26 31 yqi6 0 General Information: See how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md). EXO 26 33 p2yq translate-unknown הַ⁠קְּרָסִים֒ 1 clasps The **clasps** fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated these in [Exodus 26:6](./06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 26 33 x28l figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים 1 clasps Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy places. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. Alternate translation: “the most holy place” or “the extra-ordinarily holy place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +EXO 26 34 u3tu figs-possession בְּ⁠קֹ֖דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים 1 clasps Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy places. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “in the most holy place” or “in the extra-ordinarily holy place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 26 35 lv9e הַ⁠שֻּׁלְחָן֙…הַ⁠מְּנֹרָה֙ 1 The table must be on the north side This is the **table** Yahweh told Moses how to make in [25:23-30](../25/23.md) and the **lampstand** he told him how to make in [25:31-39](../25/31.md). EXO 26 36 tiz7 0 The table must be on the north side See how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md). EXO 26 36 rr16 תְּכֵ֧לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 blue, purple, and scarlet material Possible meanings are (1) “yarn that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple, and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md). @@ -2019,7 +2021,7 @@ EXO 29 35 wrfs translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֥ת 1 General Information: “7 EXO 29 35 c2si figs-idiom תְּמַלֵּ֥א יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 General Information: This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “you shall ordain them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 36 r5tx 0 General Information: This verse and the next explain the purpose of the sacrifice detailed in [verses 10-14](../29/10.md). EXO 29 36 s81n grammar-connect-logic-goal וּ⁠פַ֨ר חַטָּ֜את תַּעֲשֶׂ֤ה לַ⁠יּוֹם֙ עַל־הַ⁠כִּפֻּרִ֔ים וְ⁠חִטֵּאתָ֙ עַל־הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֔חַ בְּ⁠כַפֶּרְ⁠ךָ֖ עָלָ֑י⁠ו 1 General Information: The phrase **and you shall purify the altar by making atonement for it** describes the purpose of offering the bull. You may want to use a stronger connector, or in languages that need to put purpose first you may need to re-order the clauses. Alternate translation: “And you shall offer a bull of purification for atonement daily, thus you shall purify the altar, by making atonement for it.” or “You shall purify the altar by making atonement for it: you shall offer a bull of purification daily for its atonement.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -EXO 29 37 pq5d קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֔ים 1 Then the altar will be completely set apart to me “most holy” or “completely holy” or “completely set apart” +EXO 29 37 pq5d figs-possession קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֔ים 1 Then the altar will be completely set apart to me Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy things. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extra-ordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 29 37 qk5h יִקְדָּֽשׁ 1 will be set apart to Yahweh “will also become set apart” EXO 29 38 e4r9 figs-idiom בְּנֵֽי־שָׁנָ֛ה 1 General Information: This is an idiom meaning one year old. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 39 qxst figs-idiom בֵּ֥ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּֽיִם 1 General Information: The exact meaning of this phrase is debated. Since the priests ate many of the sacrifices it may have been offered around the time of the evening meal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2050,6 +2052,7 @@ EXO 30 9 ckf9 לֹא־תַעֲל֥וּ עָלָ֛י⁠ו קְטֹ֥רֶת זָ EXO 30 10 dgny grammar-connect-logic-goal קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 horns This last clause defines the purpose of the ritual described in this verse. See [Exo 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “This is to make it holy of holies to Yahweh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 30 10 k6xk קַרְנֹתָ֔י⁠ו 1 horns These were projections that looked like ox horns attached to the four corners of the altar. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md). EXO 30 10 san2 לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 throughout your generations “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). +EXO 30 10 jxn0 figs-possession קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים 1 throughout your generations Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy things. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extra-ordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 30 10 uxb4 figs-quotemarks לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 throughout your generations After **Yahweh**, the direct quote that began in [Exo 25:2](../25/02.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 30 12 dprx figs-idiom תִשָּׂ֞א אֶת־רֹ֥אשׁ 1 When you take In this context, **lift up the head** means to take a census. Alternate translation: “take a census” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 30 12 s73c figs-you תִשָּׂ֞א 1 When you take Possible meanings are (1) **you** refers to Moses and the leaders of Israel in future generations when they take a census or (2) **you** refers to just Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -2084,6 +2087,7 @@ EXO 30 25 k3s5 מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה רֹקֵ֑חַ 1 the work of a perfumer This EXO 30 25 yv9l translate-unknown רֹקֵ֑חַ 1 a perfumer This is a person who is skilled in mixing spices and oils. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 30 26 u241 figs-you וּ⁠מָשַׁחְתָּ֥ 1 You must anoint Here **you** may refer to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 30 29 np7g אֹתָ֔⁠ם 1 set them apart This refers to the items listed in [Exodus 30:26-28](../30/26.md). +EXO 30 29 m062 figs-possession קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֑ים 1 set them apart Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy things. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extra-ordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 30 31 k4s7 לְ⁠דֹרֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 throughout your people’s generations “all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). EXO 30 32 rlk4 figs-activepassive עַל־בְּשַׂ֤ר אָדָם֙ לֹ֣א יִיסָ֔ךְ 1 It must not be applied to people’s skin This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “You shall not pour it on the body of a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 30 32 v3br וּ⁠בְ⁠מַ֨תְכֻּנְתּ֔⁠וֹ 1 with the same formula “and … with the same ingredients” or “and … with the same items” or “and … according to this recipe” @@ -2094,8 +2098,9 @@ EXO 30 34 r3j2 1 General Information: Yahweh continues to tell Moses what to d EXO 30 34 uo57 translate-unknown נָטָ֤ף׀ וּ⁠שְׁחֵ֨לֶת֙ וְ⁠חֶלְבְּנָ֔ה…וּ⁠לְבֹנָ֣ה זַכָּ֑ה 1 General Information: Here is a brief description of these materials, though we really do not know exactly what they are. Stacte is a resin from certain gum plants. Onycha is from certain shellfish or mollusks. Galbanum is another kind of gum resin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 30 35 y8yj וְ⁠עָשִׂ֤יתָ אֹתָ⁠הּ֙ קְטֹ֔רֶת רֹ֖קַח מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה רוֹקֵ֑חַ 1 blended by a perfumer Possible meanings are (1) Moses was to have a perfumer do the work or (2) Moses was to do the work himself the way a perfumer would do it. See how you translated these words in [Exodus 30:25](../30/25.md). EXO 30 36 nz2a figs-you וְ⁠שָֽׁחַקְתָּ֣…וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֨ה 1 You will grind it “You will crush it.” Here **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -EXO 30 36 oj2r figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י הָ⁠עֵדֻת֙ 1 You will grind it Here, **face** figuratively represents the front of the testimony. Alternate translation: “in front of the testimony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 30 36 oj2r figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י 1 You will grind it Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 30 36 mxww figs-metonymy הָ⁠עֵדֻת֙ 1 You will grind it Here, **testimony** probably refers to the sacred chest that contained the tablets of the law. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 30 36 i71b figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֖ים 1 You will grind it Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy things. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extra-ordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 30 36 t8y9 figs-you לָ⁠כֶֽם 1 You will regard Here **you** is plural and refers to Moses and all the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 30 37 dq6c figs-you תַעֲשׂ֖וּ 1 you must not make any The word **you** here refers to the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 30 37 yv1y בְּ⁠מַ֨תְכֻּנְתָּ֔⁠הּ 1 with the same formula “with the same ingredients” or “with the same items.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 30:32](../30/32.md). @@ -2654,31 +2659,30 @@ EXO 39 41 z3ip 0 the tabernacle, the tent of meeting This verse is identical t EXO 39 42 ct6k 0 Thus the people This verse is almost identical to the second half of [verse 32](../39/32.md). EXO 39 43 t26m וְ⁠הִנֵּה֙ 1 behold Here, the word **behold** draws attention to the information that follows. Use a word or marking in your language that draws attention to the next information. EXO 39 43 z79s writing-endofstory 0 As Yahweh had commanded, in that way they did it This (and really verse 42) is the end of the conclusion of the construction of materials portion of the story. The ending began in [verse 32](../39/32.md). If your language has specific features that should be part of the end of a section like this consider using them here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -EXO 40 intro fa6e 0 # Exodus 40 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter is repetitive and should read as a series of instructions. It is repeated as well to show that Moses was obedient to every detail of Yahweh’s command.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Yahweh’s glory filled the tabernacle”
This phrase indicates that Yahweh began to dwell within the tabernacle, among Israel, in a special way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]]) -EXO 40 2 crr5 translate-hebrewmonths 1 the first day of the first month of the new year The new year marks the time when God rescued his people from Egypt. This happens around the middle of March on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 40 3 iv52 1 General Information: Yahweh continues to tell Moses what the people must do. -EXO 40 3 l7fp 1 place the ark of the testimony in it “place the ark of the covenant decrees in the sacred chest” -EXO 40 3 psu3 1 shield the ark with the curtain “put the ark behind the curtain” -EXO 40 5 n4wx 1 General Information: Yahweh continues to tell Moses what the people must do. -EXO 40 5 a4xe 1 ark of the testimony This refers to the “sacred chest.” -EXO 40 8 zfl6 1 General Information: Yahweh continues to tell Moses what the people must do. -EXO 40 9 ce7i 1 all its furnishings “all the things that are a part of it” -EXO 40 12 yiq8 1 General Information: Yahweh continues speaking to Moses. -EXO 40 12 j7ea 1 You are to bring Moses will do these things himself. -EXO 40 13 bs4j figs-activepassive 1 that are set apart to me This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that you have set apart to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 40 14 w7yw 1 General Information: Yahweh continues speaking to Moses. -EXO 40 15 js17 1 throughout their people’s generations “through all the generations of their descendants.” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). -EXO 40 17 r6pc figs-activepassive 1 So the tabernacle was set up This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “So the people set up the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 40 17 gzu5 translate-hebrewmonths 1 the first day of the first month This refers to exactly one year after God rescued his people from Egypt. This happens around the middle of March on Western calendars. See how you translated this in [Exodus 40:2](../40/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 40 17 wnh8 translate-ordinal 1 in the second year This is the second year after Yahweh brought his people out of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 40 18 kk4n figs-explicit 1 Moses set up Moses was the leader. The people helped him set up the tabernacle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 40 18 c6rm 1 posts a strong piece of wood set upright and used as a support -EXO 40 21 l31p 1 He brought Moses was the leader. He had workers helping him. -EXO 40 21 n8r9 1 for it to shield “in front of” -EXO 40 24 sw1w figs-explicit 1 He put the lampstand into the tent of meeting Moses instructed his workers to move the lampstand. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “Moses’ workmen set the lampstand inside the sacred tent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 40 26 i5gg figs-explicit 1 in front of the curtain This curtain separated the holy place from the very holy place. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “in front of the curtain that separated the holy place from the very holy place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 40 31 bf9c figs-explicit 1 washed their hands and their feet from the basin They washed with water from the basin. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “washed their hands and their feet with water from the basin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 40 33 y62k וַ⁠יְצַ֣ו 1 In this way “And so” -EXO 40 34 ysd8 כָּל־הַ⁠בֵּ֣ן הַ⁠יִּלּ֗וֹד הַ⁠יְאֹ֨רָ⁠ה֙ תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ 1 Yahweh’s glory filled “Yahweh’s awesome presence filled” -EXO 40 36 ak35 figs-activepassive לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר כָּל־הַ⁠בֵּ֣ן הַ⁠יִּלּ֗וֹד הַ⁠יְאֹ֨רָ⁠ה֙ תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ וְ⁠כָל־הַ⁠בַּ֖ת תְּחַיּֽוּ⁠ן 1 was taken up from over - **saying, “You shall throw every new-born son into the river, but every daughter you shall let live.”** - A single level direct quote. While this particular instruction is very easy to rephrase as an indirect quote (in English), the use of **saying** in Hebrew suggests that this should be translated as a direct quotation if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -EXO 40 37 s8y2 figs-activepassive תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ תְּחַיּֽוּ⁠ן 1 that it was lifted up - **you shall** - These are plural referring to all Pharaoh’s people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +EXO 40 intro fa6e 0 # Exodus 40 General Notes

## Structure and formatting
- In this chapter, **just as Yahweh commanded Moses,** is repeated seven times as in the previous chapter to show that Moses was obedient to every detail of Yahweh’s command.
- This chapter is repetitive both internally and with other parts of the book. Verses 17-33 parallel in an expanded way verses 2-8.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter


- The **tabernacle** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing but both appear next to each other many times in this chapter. The two interchangeable terms are brought together throughout this chapter in a poetic doubling to bring book to a close. If your readers would find this confusing you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST.
- This chapter says that Moses did all these things. Just like Bezalel in earlier chapters, it would have been impossible for him to do all this personally. The people helped him set up the tabernacle. In many translations this will more more clear if you make this explicit.
- “Yahweh’s glory filled the tabernacle”: This phrase indicates that Yahweh began to dwell within the tabernacle, among Israel, in a special way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]]) +EXO 40 1 ea7j writing-newevent 0 There is a transition to a new event at the beginning of this chapter. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +EXO 40 2 bgv1 translate-ordinal בְּ⁠יוֹם־הַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֖וֹן בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “On day one of the month, in month one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 40 2 gzk3 figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד 1 the first day of the first month of the new year These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the tabernacle, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +EXO 40 2 clkf figs-ellipsis לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 the first day of the first month of the new year Here, the new or next year omitted because it can be inferred from context. However, if that would be misunderstood by your readers (perhaps they would think it just meant ”next month” or something) you could add a phrase making it clear that it is the first month of the year. This refers to exactly one year after God rescued his people from Egypt. See [Exodus 12:2](../12/02.md). Alternate translation: “month of the year” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 40 3 l7fp וְ⁠סַכֹּתָ֥ עַל 1 place the ark of the testimony in it Alternate translation: “and you shall conceal” +EXO 40 5 b3ct figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י 1 place the ark of the testimony in it Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 40 6 o5sz figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֕י 1 place the ark of the testimony in it Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 40 6 nqha figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֥ן אֹֽהֶל־מוֹעֵֽד 1 place the ark of the testimony in it These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the tabernacle, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +EXO 40 10 yiq8 figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִֽׁים 1 General Information: Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy things. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extra-ordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +EXO 40 12 gqld 0 General Information: Verses 12-15 are similar to [Exodus 29:4-9](../29/04.md). +EXO 40 16 xl61 writing-newevent 0 General Information: This statement starts a new section in which Moses does all the things, **just as Yahweh had commanded**, the poetic obedience statement seen so often in the previous chapter. You may wish to mark this transition and poetic statement in a particular way in your language similar to how you did in the last chapter. See [39:32](../39/32.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +EXO 40 17 r6pc figs-activepassive הוּקַ֖ם הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּֽן 1 So the tabernacle was set up The use of the passive here indicates that the important thing is the completion of the task of setting up the tent on the specific date Yahweh had commanded. If your language would show that focus in a different way use a natural form to do that. Alternate translation: “that they set up the tabernacle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +EXO 40 17 gzu5 בַּ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּ⁠שָּׁנָ֥ה הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 the first day of the first month This refers to exactly one year after God rescued his people from Egypt. See [Exodus 12:2](../12/02.md). +EXO 40 17 wnh8 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֛וֹן בַּ⁠שָּׁנָ֥ה הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֖ית בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד 1 in the second year Alternate translation: “in month one, year two, on day one of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 40 18 kk4n figs-explicit וַ⁠יָּ֨קֶם מֹשֶׁ֜ה אֶת־הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּ֗ן וַ⁠יִּתֵּן֙ אֶת־אֲדָנָ֔י⁠ו 1 Moses set up Moses was the leader. It would have been impossible for him to do all this personally. The people helped him set up the tabernacle. In many translations this will more more clear if you make this explicit. This applies from here to all the tabernacle assembly listing through [verse 33](../40/33.md). Alternate translation: “And Moses directed the people to raise up the tabernacle, and they placed its bases”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 40 20 chx4 writing-pronouns וַ⁠יִּקַּ֞ח…וַ⁠יָּ֥שֶׂם 1 Moses set up In this verse and the next there may be an exception to **he** meaning someone who was helping Moses because these items were especially sacred. If you have been using a form that indicates that people are helping Moses construct the tabernacle, you may consider switching to “Moses” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 40 21 yhbs writing-pronouns וַ⁠יָּבֵ֣א…וַ⁠יָּ֗שֶׂם 1 Moses set up In this verse and the previous there may be an exception to **he** meaning someone who was helping Moses because these items were especially sacred. If you have been using a form that indicates that people are helping Moses construct the tabernacle, you may consider switching to “Moses” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 40 23 b3pp figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י 1 Moses set up Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 40 25 t2o2 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י 1 Moses set up Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 40 26 i5gg figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י 1 in front of the curtain Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 40 27 iwuo 0 in front of the curtain See [30:7](../30/07.md). +EXO 40 35 ysd8 וְ⁠לֹא־יָכֹ֣ל מֹשֶׁ֗ה לָ⁠בוֹא֙ אֶל־אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֔ד כִּֽי־שָׁכַ֥ן עָלָ֖י⁠ו הֶ⁠עָנָ֑ן וּ⁠כְב֣וֹד יְהוָ֔ה מָלֵ֖א אֶת־הַ⁠מִּשְׁכָּֽן 1 Yahweh’s glory filled If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because the cloud had settled on it and the glory of Yahweh had filled the tabernacle, Moses was not able to go into the tent of meeting.” +EXO 40 36 ak35 figs-activepassive וּ⁠בְ⁠הֵעָל֤וֹת הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ 1 was taken up from over If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Whenever Yahweh’s cloud moved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +EXO 40 37 s8y2 figs-activepassive וְ⁠אִם־לֹ֥א יֵעָלֶ֖ה הֶ⁠עָנָ֑ן וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִסְע֔וּ עַד־י֖וֹם הֵעָלֹתֽ⁠וֹ 1 that it was lifted up If your language does not use the passive form in this way you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “but if Yahweh did not take up the cloud, then they would not set out until the day he took it up.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +EXO 40 38 i8hu figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י כָל־בֵּֽית־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 that it was lifted up Here, **before the eyes of** refers to being able to see. All the Israelites could see the cloud and fire. Alternate translation: “and all the house of Israel could see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 40 38 bhi5 figs-metaphor בֵּֽית־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 that it was lifted up Here, **house** represents a people group, the Israelites, who were descended from Jacob who was also named Israel. If this would be misunderstood in your language you could use a metaphor from your language or translate the meaning. This is a common biblical metaphor, so you may want to check other places this occurs. The **house of Israel** is equivalent to “sons of Israel” or “Israelites.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 1a745742dd12129a0cbd8bd90d8ad4de12b242b7 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Fri, 1 Apr 2022 12:24:45 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 06/15] Aaron's edits to John 1-14 (#2380) Co-authored-by: avaldizan Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2380 --- en_tn_44-JHN.tsv | 305 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++-------------------- 1 file changed, 173 insertions(+), 132 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv index 189e035630..4c17ef5b3c 100644 --- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ JHN 1 14 zirk παρὰ πατρός 1 The phrase **from the Father** means th JHN 1 14 b5t5 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples πατρός 1 Father This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 1 14 tg4m figs-metaphor πλήρης χάριτος καὶ ἀληθείας 1 full of grace Here, John uses **full of** figuratively to describe Jesus fully possessing a quality, as if grace and truth are objects that could fill a person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “fully possessing grace and truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 14 c3b4 figs-abstractnouns πλήρης χάριτος καὶ ἀληθείας 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate the abstract nouns **grace** and **truth** with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “full of God’s gracious and faithful character” or “full of kind acts and true teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JHN 1 15 xduu Ἰωάννης μαρτυρεῖ περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” +JHN 1 15 xduu figs-pastforfuture Ἰωάννης μαρτυρεῖ περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “John testified about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 15 ql6u writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **him** refers to Jesus, whom John has called “the Word” in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “the Word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 1 15 qxgz writing-quotations καὶ κέκραγεν λέγων 1 Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. Alternate translation: “and has cried out, and he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 1 15 yfuv figs-quotesinquotes οὗτος ἦν ὃν εἶπον, ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος, ἔμπροσθέν μου γέγονεν, ὅτι πρῶτός μου ἦν. 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “This was the one of whom I said that he is coming after me who has become greater than me, for he was before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ JHN 1 20 b7zz ὡμολόγησεν καὶ οὐκ ἠρνήσατο, καὶ JHN 1 21 f926 writing-pronouns ἠρώτησαν 1 Here, **they** refers to “the Jews” mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say it explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jews asked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 1 21 iv9d τί οὖν? 1 What are you then? Alternate translation: “If you are not the Messiah, then who are you?” JHN 1 21 vk6r translate-names Ἠλείας 1 **Elijah** is the name of a man. **Elijah** was a prophet whom the Jews expected to return to earth shortly become the arrival of the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -JHN 1 21 h2dv καὶ λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “And he said” +JHN 1 21 h2dv figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 21 nhx9 figs-explicit ὁ προφήτης 1 Here, **the prophet** refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send a prophet like Moses which is recorded in Deuteronomy 18:15. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the prophet whom God promised to send to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 22 t8ib writing-pronouns εἶπαν…αὐτῷ 1 Here, the pronouns **they** and **him** refer to the priests and Levites and John the Baptist, respectively. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the priests and Levites … John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 1 22 wbd9 figs-ellipsis τίς εἶ? ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν τοῖς πέμψασιν ἡμᾶς; τί 1 John is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the context and may require you to change the punctuation of the sentences. Alternate translation: “Who are you? Tell us so that we might given an answer to those who sent us. What” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ JHN 1 28 tfxy translate-names τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 **Jordan** is the nam JHN 1 28 f5he translate-names πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου 1 Here, **beyond the Jordan** refers to the region of Judea that is on the east side of the Jordan River, which is the side opposite from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “on the side of the Jordan River opposite from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 1 28 ryi1 figs-explicit Ἰωάννης 1 Here, John refers to Jesus’ cousin, often referred to as “John the Baptist.” (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/names/johnthebaptist) It does not refer to the Apostle John who wrote this Gospel. If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John the Baptist” or “John the Immerser” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 29 bt67 grammar-connect-time-sequential τῇ ἐπαύριον 1 **The next day** here indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described in [1:19–28](../01/19.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “The day after John spoke with the priests and Levites from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -JHN 1 29 aqo3 βλέπει…λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he saw … said” +JHN 1 29 aqo3 figs-pastforfuture βλέπει…λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 29 fpj6 figs-metaphor ἴδε 1 John records John the Baptist using the term **Behold** to call his audience’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 29 gi3s figs-explicit ἴδε, ὁ Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The phrase **lamb of God** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Behold, Jesus, the Lamb of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 29 j397 figs-metaphor Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Lamb of God Here, John uses a metaphor to refer to Jesus as God’s perfect sacrifice. (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb) Since this is an important title for Jesus, we recommend that you translate the words directly and not provide a non-figurative explanation in the text of your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -155,17 +155,17 @@ JHN 1 34 wzc9 writing-pronouns οὗτός 1 Here, **this** refers to Jesus. If JHN 1 34 ea3y translate-textvariants ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the Son of God Although most copies of this text say **Son of God**, some say “chosen one of God” or “chosen Son of God.” If a translation of the Bible exists in your region, you may wish to use the phrase it uses. If a translation of the Bible does not exist in your region, you may wish to follow the example of the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) JHN 1 34 naf2 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 1 35 i3lg grammar-connect-time-sequential τῇ ἐπαύριον πάλιν 1 Again, the next day **The next day** here indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described in [1:29–34](../01/29.md). John saw Jesus two days after his conversation with the priests and Levites that is described in verses [19–28](../01/19.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “Two days after John spoke with the priests and Levites from Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -JHN 1 36 kuol λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” +JHN 1 36 kuol figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 36 ntaw figs-explicit ἴδε, ὁ Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The phrase lamb of God refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Behold, Jesus, the Lamb of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 36 t2yx figs-metaphor ἴδε 1 John records John the Baptist using the term **Behold** to call his audience’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 36 ap5m figs-metaphor Ἀμνὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Lamb of God Here, John uses a metaphor to refer to Jesus as God’s perfect sacrifice. (See: rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb) See how you translated this same phrase in [John 1:29](../01/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 37 v5be writing-pronouns ἤκουσαν οἱ δύο μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **his** and **him** refer to John the Baptist. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “John’s two disciples heard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 1 38 a8bg writing-pronouns θεασάμενος αὐτοὺς 1 Here, **them** refers to the two disciples John the Baptist who were mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having seen John’s two disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 1 38 hlee figs-ellipsis θεασάμενος αὐτοὺς ἀκολουθοῦντας 1 Here, John is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “having seen them following him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -JHN 1 38 qxej λέγει αὐτοῖς 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said to them” +JHN 1 38 qxej figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 38 kkey ποῦ μένεις 1 Alternate translation: “where are you spending the night” JHN 1 38 so66 figs-explicit ποῦ μένεις 1 This question is the answer to the question Jesus just asked in the previous sentence. It is a way for the two men to imply that they would like to have a private conversation with Jesus at the place where he was staying. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “where are you staying? We would like to speak with you privately.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 1 39 lio4 λέγει αὐτοῖς…μένει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “He said to them … he was staying” +JHN 1 39 lio4 figs-pastforfuture λέγει αὐτοῖς…μένει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “He said to them … he was staying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 39 k5m2 μένει 1 See how you translated this in the previous verse. JHN 1 39 ydqg figs-explicit τὴν ἡμέραν ἐκείνην 1 Here, **that day** refers to the day the two disciples left John the Baptist to follow Jesus, as indicated in verse [35](../01/35.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same day that they left John” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 39 tb9j ὥρα…δεκάτη 1 tenth hour In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. Here, **the tenth hour** indicates a time in the late afternoon, before dark, at which it would be too late to start traveling to another town. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “about 4:00 PM” @@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ JHN 1 40 f6b9 figs-explicit Ἰωάννου 1 Here, John refers to Jesus’ cou JHN 1 40 q0bp translate-names Ἀνδρέας…Σίμωνος Πέτρου 1 These are names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 1 40 jmyp Σίμωνος Πέτρου 1 **Simon** was also called **Peter** by Jesus, as recorded in verse [42](../01/42.md). Alternate translation: “Simon, who is also called Peter” JHN 1 41 xpi4 writing-pronouns οὗτος 1 **This one** here refers to Andrew, who was mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Andrew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JHN 1 41 vfsj εὑρίσκει…λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “found … said” +JHN 1 41 vfsj figs-pastforfuture εὑρίσκει…λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 41 roca translate-names Σίμωνα 1 These is the name of a man, Andrew’s brother. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 1 41 rxox figs-activepassive ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, Χριστός 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form **is translated** with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 1 41 ek1a figs-explicit ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, Χριστός 1 John assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the title Messiah means when translated from the Aramaic language into Greek. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is ‘Christ’ in Greek” or “which is the Aramaic word for Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -187,21 +187,21 @@ JHN 1 42 t3n5 figs-activepassive ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, Πέτρος 1 If JHN 1 42 esly figs-explicit ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται, Πέτρος 1 John assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Cephas means when translated from the Aramaic language into Greek. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which is ‘Peter’ in Greek” or “which is the Aramaic word for Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 43 cmi8 grammar-connect-time-sequential τῇ ἐπαύριον 1 **The next day** here indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described in the previous. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “The day after Andrew brought Simon to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) JHN 1 43 bhl6 translate-names τὴν Γαλιλαίαν 1 **Galilee** is the name of a region. It occurs many times in this book. Alternate translation: “the region of Galilee” or “the region around Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -JHN 1 43 qzfk καὶ εὑρίσκει Φίλιππον, καὶ λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “and he found Philip and said” +JHN 1 43 qzfk figs-pastforfuture καὶ εὑρίσκει Φίλιππον, καὶ λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 43 uvby translate-names Φίλιππον 1 **Philip** is the name of a man, a disciple of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 1 43 ejkg figs-idiom ἀκολούθει μοι 1 In this context, to **follow** someone means to become that person’s disciple. Alternate translation: “Become my disciple” or “Come, follow me as your teacher” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 1 44 i5bm writing-background ἦν δὲ ὁ Φίλιππος ἀπὸ Βηθσαϊδά, ἐκ τῆς πόλεως Ἀνδρέου καὶ Πέτρου 1 Now Philip was from Bethsaida, the city of Andrew and Peter This is background information about **Philip**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 1 45 m8j1 translate-names Φίλιππος…Ναθαναὴλ…Μωϋσῆς…Ἰησοῦν…Ἰωσὴφ 1 These are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -JHN 1 45 faz3 εὑρίσκει Φίλιππος τὸν Ναθαναὴλ, καὶ λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Philip found Nathaniel and said” +JHN 1 45 faz3 figs-pastforfuture εὑρίσκει Φίλιππος τὸν Ναθαναὴλ, καὶ λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 45 ci52 figs-ellipsis οἱ προφῆται 1 Here, John is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “the prophets wrote about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 1 45 r31z translate-names Ναζαρέτ 1 **Nazareth** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 1 46 s2kg writing-pronouns εἶπεν αὐτῷ Ναθαναήλ 1 Nathaniel said to him Here, **him** refers to Philip. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Nathaniel said to Philip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 1 46 i4wp figs-rquestion ἐκ Ναζαρὲτ δύναταί τι ἀγαθὸν εἶναι? 1 Can any good thing come out of Nazareth? Here, Nathaniel is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “No good thing can come out of Nazareth!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 1 46 shpn λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ Φίλιππος 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Philip said to him” -JHN 1 47 e1ke καὶ λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “and he said” +JHN 1 46 shpn figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JHN 1 47 e1ke figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 47 ka53 figs-metaphor ἴδε 1 John records Jesus using the term **Behold** to call his audience’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 1 47 ys8d figs-litotes ἐν ᾧ δόλος οὐκ ἔστιν 1 in whom is no deceit Here, Jesus uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “a completely truthful man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -JHN 1 48 am5y λέγει αὐτῷ Ναθαναήλ 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Nathaniel said to him” +JHN 1 48 am5y figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 48 d1on figs-explicit πρὸ τοῦ σε Φίλιππον φωνῆσαι, ὄντα ὑπὸ τὴν συκῆν, εἶδόν σε 1 Nathaniel’s reaction to this statement in the next verse indicates that this is a display of supernatural knowledge. It appears that Jesus knew something about Nathaniel that no one else could have known. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this in some way. Alternate translation: “Before Philip called you, being completely alone under the fig tree, I saw you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 48 a0ym figs-explicit ὄντα ὑπὸ τὴν συκῆν 1 The subject of this clause is Philip, not Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “while you were under the fig tree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 1 49 l666 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -209,7 +209,7 @@ JHN 1 50 d53b grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι JHN 1 50 p3ma figs-rquestion ὅτι εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι εἶδόν σε ὑποκάτω τῆς συκῆς, πιστεύεις? 1 Because I said to you … do you believe? John records Jesus using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You believe because I said, ‘I saw you underneath the fig tree’!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 1 50 fhzr figs-ellipsis πιστεύεις 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that this phrase would need in many languages in order to be complete. These words can be supplied from the context. Alternate translation: “do you believe that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 1 50 oubk writing-pronouns μείζω τούτων 1 Jesus uses the plural pronoun **these** to refer to a general category of something, in this case the miraculous display of supernatural knowledge that took place in verse [48](../01/48.md). Alternate translation: “greater things than this category of thing” or “greater things that this kind of miracle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JHN 1 51 byxy καὶ λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “And he said” +JHN 1 51 byxy figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 1 51 ga44 figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly, truly Jesus repeats **Truly** in order to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “What I am about to tell you is very true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 1 51 yuye figs-you λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Here, Jesus uses the plural form of **you** to indicate that he is speaking to all those who are with him at that moment. He is not only speaking to Nathaniel. If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I say to all of you here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JHN 1 51 s28k figs-explicit ὄψεσθε τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγότα, καὶ τοὺς ἀγγέλους τοῦ Θεοῦ ἀναβαίνοντας καὶ καταβαίνοντας 1 Here, Jesus refers to an event described in the Book of Genesis. While fleeing from his brother, Jacob had a dream in which he saw angels descending from and ascending to heaven. If it would be helpful to your readers who may not be familiar with the story, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “just as Jacob saw in his vision, you will see heaven opened, and the angels of God ascending and descending” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -220,24 +220,24 @@ JHN 2 1 rl16 writing-background 0 General Information: Jesus and his disciples JHN 2 1 vw9e writing-newevent τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρίτῃ 1 Three days later This time reference introduces a new event. The **third day** could refer to: (1) the third day from when Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel to follow him in [1:43](../01/43.md). According to the Jewish way of counting days, the first day would have been the day in [1:43](../01/43.md), making **the third day** occur two days afterward. Alternate translation: “two days after Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel” (2) the day after Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel to follow him in [1:43](../01/43.md). In this case, the first day would have occurred in [1:35](../01/35.md) and the second day in [1:43](../01/43.md). Alternate translation: “on the day after Jesus called Philip and Nathaniel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) JHN 2 1 po3t translate-names Κανὰ 1 **Cana** is the name of a town in the region of Galilee. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 2 2 xm3r figs-activepassive ἐκλήθη…καὶ ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν γάμον 1 Jesus and his disciples were invited to the wedding If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “they also invited Jesus and his disciples to the wedding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 2 3 kt44 λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 2 3 kt44 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 2 3 spbw figs-declarative οἶνον οὐκ ἔχουσιν 1 John records Jesus’ mother using a declarative statement to give an indirect request. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a request. Alternate translation: “They ran out of wine. Could you do something to solve this problem?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) JHN 2 3 mge0 οἶνον 1 Regarding the drinking of **wine** in Jewish culture, see the discussion in the General Notes to this chapter. -JHN 2 4 xo8k λέγει αὐτῇ ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to her” +JHN 2 4 xo8k figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 2 4 a2ji γύναι 1 Woman **Woman** here refers to Mary. If it is impolite for a son to call his mother “woman” in your language, you can use another word that is polite, or leave it out. JHN 2 4 jc75 figs-rquestion τί ἐμοὶ καὶ σοί, γύναι? 1 why do you come to me? Jesus is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Woman, this has nothing to do with me or you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 2 4 v5x5 figs-metonymy οὔπω ἥκει ἡ ὥρα μου 1 My time has not yet come The word **hour** refers to the right occasion for Jesus to show that he is the Messiah by working miracles. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “It is not yet the right time for me to perform a mighty act” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 2 5 d5wy λέγει ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “His mother said” +JHN 2 5 d5wy figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 2 6 y7p3 translate-bvolume μετρητὰς δύο ἢ τρεῖς 1 two to three metretes A **metretes** was equivalent to about 40 liters. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express the quantity in modern measurements. Alternatively, to help your readers recognize that the biblical writings come from long ago when people used different measurements, you could express the amount using the ancient measurement, the metrete, and explain the equivalent in modern measurements in a footnote. Alternate translation: “80 to 120 liters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) -JHN 2 7 hv80 λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς, 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to them” +JHN 2 7 hv80 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 2 7 byc0 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 Here, **them** refers to the servants at the wedding. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 2 7 vt75 ἕως ἄνω 1 to the brim The **brim** is the top edge of the water pot. Alternate translation: “to the very top” -JHN 2 8 xbw3 λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” +JHN 2 8 xbw3 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 2 8 y52q writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς…οἱ δὲ ἤνεγκαν 1 Here, **them** and **they** refer to the servants at the wedding. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the servants … And the servants carried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 2 8 h9gr τῷ ἀρχιτρικλίνῳ 1 the head waiter The term **head waiter** refers to the person in charge of the servants who served the food and drink at meals and feasts. JHN 2 9 t0zb ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος…ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος 1 See how you translated this term in the previous verse. JHN 2 9 yg44 writing-background καὶ οὐκ ᾔδει πόθεν ἐστίν, οἱ δὲ διάκονοι ᾔδεισαν, οἱ ἠντληκότες τὸ ὕδωρ 1 but the servants who had drawn the water knew John provides this background information about who knew where the wine came from in order to emphasize the veracity of this miracle. The head waiter did not know that the wine was originally water from the water pots. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -JHN 2 9 xfwq φωνεῖ τὸν νυμφίον ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “the head waiter called the bridegroom” +JHN 2 9 xfwq figs-pastforfuture φωνεῖ 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 2 10 qoch figs-hyperbole πᾶς ἄνθρωπος 1 **Every man** here is an exaggeration that refers to something being a common practice. If this is not clear in your language, you could use an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “A man usually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) JHN 2 10 vu60 figs-gendernotations πᾶς ἄνθρωπος 1 Here, **man** is used in a generic sense that includes all people. Alternate translation: “Every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JHN 2 10 mh3s figs-explicit καὶ ὅταν μεθυσθῶσιν τὸν ἐλάσσω 1 drunk This means that guests were given the cheaper wine, which is of lower quality and inferior flavor, after their senses had been dulled by drinking too much alcohol and were thus unable to tell that it was inferior wine. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and the cheaper wine when they have become drunk and unable to discern the quality of the wine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -259,7 +259,7 @@ JHN 2 15 nn6y writing-pronouns πάντας 1 Here, **them all** refers to the JHN 2 16 h6qy figs-explicit τὸν οἶκον τοῦ πατρός μου οἶκον ἐμπορίου 1 the house of my Father Jesus uses **the house of my Father** to refer to the temple. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the house of my Father, which is the temple, a house of commerce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 2 16 grg3 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ πατρός μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title that Jesus uses for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 2 17 c2pu figs-activepassive γεγραμμένον ἐστίν 1 it was written If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “someone had written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 2 17 q91v figs-explicit γεγραμμένον ἐστίν 1 This phrase introduces a quotation from the Old Testament. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly and designate which Old Testament author wrote this. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 2 17 q91v writing-quotations γεγραμμένον ἐστίν 1 Here John uses **it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 69:9](../../psa/69/09.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 2 17 pvct figs-yousingular τοῦ οἴκου σου 1 Here, **your** refers to God and is singular. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for God’s house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) JHN 2 17 ua3v figs-explicit τοῦ οἴκου σου 1 your house Here, **house** refers to the temple, which is often called God’s **house** in the Bible. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for your house, the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 2 17 gg1w figs-metaphor καταφάγεταί 1 consume Here, **consume** is used figuratively to refer to Jesus’ intense love for the temple, as if it was a fire that burned within him. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this plainly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “will be intense within” or “will be like a fire that consumes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -297,7 +297,7 @@ JHN 3 3 svpx figs-extrainfo γεννηθῇ ἄνωθεν 1 The phrase **born a JHN 3 3 t8pt γεννηθῇ ἄνωθεν 1 born again Here, the word translated **again** could also be translated as “from above.” It could refer to: (1) spiritual rebirth as a second birth that takes place in addition to physical birth. Alternate translation, as in the ULT: “would be born again” (2) spiritual rebirth as a birth that is caused by God, in which case “above” is a euphemism for God. Alternate translation: “would be born from above” (3) spiritual rebirth as both a second birth and a birth caused by God. See the discussion of John’s use of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to this book. Alternate translation: “would be born again by God” JHN 3 3 i0ew figs-metaphor ἰδεῖν τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **see** is used figuratively to refer to experiencing an event or state. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “to experience the kingdom of God” or “to participate in the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 3 3 ikj9 figs-metaphor τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 kingdom of God This phrase is a metaphor for the rule of God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/kingdomofgod]]) Alternate translation: “the place where God rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 3 4 z64b λέγει πρὸς αὐτὸν 1 a second time To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said to him” +JHN 3 4 z64b figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 a second time Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 3 4 wa1p figs-rquestion πῶς δύναται ἄνθρωπος γεννηθῆναι, γέρων ὤν? 1 How can a man be born when he is old? Nicodemus uses this question to emphasize that this cannot happen. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “A man certainly cannot be born again when he is old!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 3 4 yk9d figs-rquestion μὴ δύναται εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ δεύτερον εἰσελθεῖν καὶ γεννηθῆναι? 1 He cannot enter a second time into his mother’s womb and be born, can he? Nicodemus uses this question to emphasize his belief that a second birth is impossible. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “He surely cannot enter a second time into his mother’s womb!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 3 5 il52 figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in [3:3](../03/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -441,18 +441,18 @@ JHN 4 3 op81 writing-pronouns ἀφῆκεν 1 Here, **he** refers to Jesus. If JHN 4 3 dm2t translate-names τὴν Ἰουδαίαν…τὴν Γαλιλαίαν 1 he left Judea and went back again to Galilee These are two main regions in the land of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 4 4 tds9 translate-names τῆς Σαμαρείας 1 This is a region in the land of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 4 5 ukxr grammar-connect-time-sequential ἔρχεται οὖν 1 **Then** here indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event just described in verse [3](../04/03.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After leaving Judea, he comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -JHN 4 5 ff7t ἔρχεται 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he came” +JHN 4 5 ff7t figs-pastforfuture ἔρχεται 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 5 vqjm translate-names Συχὰρ 1 This is the name of a place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 4 6 bd8s figs-explicit ἐκεῖ 1 Here, **there** refers to the town of Sychar mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “there at Sychar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 4 6 vwdf grammar-connect-time-sequential ὁ οὖν Ἰησοῦς 1 **Then** here indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event just described in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “When Jesus came to Sychar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) JHN 4 6 lovl grammar-connect-logic-result κεκοπιακὼς 1 This clause indicates the reason why Jesus sat by the well. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because he had grown weary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 4 6 mwi2 grammar-connect-logic-result ἐκ τῆς ὁδοιπορίας 1 This phrase indicates the reason why Jesus had grown weary. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because of the journey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 4 6 yjzo ὥρα ἦν ὡς ἕκτη 1 In this culture, people began counting the hours each day beginning around daybreak at six o’clock in the morning. Here, **the sixth hour** indicates a time in the middle of the day, when it would be the hottest. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this in the way the people of your culture reckon time. Alternate translation: “about 12:00 PM” -JHN 4 7 kswz ἔρχεται…λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “came … said” +JHN 4 7 kswz figs-pastforfuture ἔρχεται…λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 7 g82d figs-imperative δός μοι πεῖν 1 Give me some water This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please give me to drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) JHN 4 7 urgd figs-ellipsis δός μοι πεῖν 1 Here, John records Jesus leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “Give me something to drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 4 8 u29c grammar-connect-logic-result οἱ γὰρ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἀπεληλύθεισαν 1 For his disciples had gone This phrase indicates the reason why Jesus asked the woman for water. The disciples had gone away and brought the tools for drawing water with them, so that Jesus could not draw the water himself. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “because his disciples had gone away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -JHN 4 9 dpoh λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 4 9 dpoh figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 9 l2qh writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 Then the Samaritan woman said to him Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 4 9 xdw7 figs-rquestion πῶς σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ὢν, παρ’ ἐμοῦ πεῖν αἰτεῖς γυναικὸς Σαμαρείτιδος οὔσης? 1 How is it that you, being a Jew, are asking … for something to drink? John records the woman using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate her words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I cannot believe that you, being a Jew, are asking a Samaritan woman for a drink!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 4 9 px8w οὐ…συνχρῶνται 1 have no dealings with Alternate translation: “do not associate with” or “have nothing to do with” @@ -462,28 +462,28 @@ JHN 4 10 ed4r figs-possession τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Jesus i JHN 4 10 oywu figs-123person τίς ἐστιν ὁ λέγων σοι…ᾔτησας αὐτὸν, καὶ ἔδωκεν 1 Jesus is referring to himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “who I am who is saying to you … would have asked me, and I would have given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 4 10 ua0b figs-quotesinquotes ὁ λέγων σοι, δός μοι πεῖν, 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “who is asking you to give him a drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 4 10 zub5 figs-extrainfo ὕδωρ ζῶν 1 living water The phrase **living water** usually refers to moving or flowing water. However, Jesus uses **living water** here figuratively to refer to the Holy Spirit who works in a person to save and transform them. However, the woman does not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to her in this verse. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -JHN 4 11 pf7q λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 4 11 pf7q figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 11 mw2b κύριε 1 The Samaritan woman calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]]) JHN 4 11 nwln τὸ ὕδωρ τὸ ζῶν 1 See how you translated this in the previous verse. JHN 4 12 di9q figs-rquestion μὴ σὺ μείζων εἶ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν Ἰακώβ, ὃς ἔδωκεν ἡμῖν τὸ φρέαρ, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἔπιεν, καὶ οἱ υἱοὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ τὰ θρέμματα αὐτοῦ? 1 You are not greater, are you, than our father Jacob … cattle? The woman is using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate her words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You are certainly not greater than our father Jacob, who gave us the well and drank from it himself, and his sons and his cattle!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 4 12 sj7n figs-ellipsis ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἔπιεν 1 drank from it Here, John records the woman leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “drank water from it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 4 13 leu7 διψήσει πάλιν 1 will be thirsty again Alternate translation: “will need to drink water again” JHN 4 14 udxp figs-exmetaphor ὃς δ’ ἂν πίῃ ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος οὗ ἐγὼ δώσω αὐτῷ, οὐ μὴ διψήσει…τὸ ὕδωρ ὃ δώσω αὐτῷ γενήσεται ἐν αὐτῷ πηγὴ ὕδατος, ἁλλομένου εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 Jesus speaks about receiving the Holy Spirit by continuing the metaphor of water. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this metaphor as a simile. Alternate translation: “but whoever is like one who drinks from the water that I will give him will be like one who never thirsts … the water that I will give him will become like a fountain of water in him, resulting in eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) -JHN 4 15 vzoy λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 4 15 vzoy figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 15 iz1p κύριε 1 Sir The Samaritan woman calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]]) JHN 4 15 hd9f ἀντλεῖν 1 draw water Here, **draw** refers to scooping water out of a well using a container that can hold water. Alternate translation: “get water” or “pull water up from the well” -JHN 4 16 ii7c λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “He said” -JHN 4 17 h5pt λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 4 16 ii7c figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JHN 4 17 h5pt figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 17 bg94 figs-quotesinquotes καλῶς εἶπας, ὅτι ἄνδρα οὐκ ἔχω 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “You have rightly said that you do not have a husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 4 18 zpl1 figs-explicit τοῦτο ἀληθὲς εἴρηκας 1 What you have said is true **This you have said** refers to the Samaritan woman’s statement in the previous verse that she did not have a husband. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “You have spoken the truth when you said you do not have a husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 4 19 tzs3 λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 4 19 tzs3 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 19 c2qi writing-pronouns αὐτῷ 1 Here, **him** refers to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 4 19 kfs1 κύριε 1 Sir The Samaritan woman calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]]) JHN 4 19 za2w figs-metaphor θεωρῶ ὅτι προφήτης εἶ σύ 1 I see that you are a prophet Here, **see** is used figuratively to refer to understanding something. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this plainly. Alternate translation: “I understand that you are a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 4 20 hp3m figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ 1 Our fathers Here, **this mountain** refers to Mount Gerizim, the mountain where the Samaritans built their own temple. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “here on Mount Gerizim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 4 20 keg4 figs-you ὑμεῖς λέγετε 1 The word **you** is plural and refers to the Jewish people. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you Jewish people say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JHN 4 20 m27n figs-explicit ὁ τόπος 1 Here, **the place** refers to the Jewish temple, the place where God commanded his people to worship at that time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 4 21 klz9 λέγει 1 Believe me To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 4 21 klz9 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Believe me Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 21 tisq γύναι 1 Here, **woman** refers to the Samaritan woman. If it is impolite to call someone “woman” in your language, you can use another word that is polite, or leave it out. JHN 4 21 eccs figs-explicit ἔρχεται ὥρα 1 Here, **hour** refers to a point in time when something happens. It does not refer to a 60-minute length of time. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to this chapter. Alternate translation: “a point in time is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 4 21 ff27 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρί 1 Father This is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -497,17 +497,17 @@ JHN 4 23 k1gf guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τῷ Πατρὶ…ὁ Πατὴρ JHN 4 23 fb51 ἐν πνεύματι 1 in spirit and truth Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) the inner person, which is what a person thinks and feels. Alternate translation: “with their spirits” (2) the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “in the Holy Spirit” JHN 4 23 utt7 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πνεύματι καὶ ἀληθείᾳ 1 in … truth Here, **truth** refers to thinking correctly of what is true about God, which is revealed in the Bible. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “in spirit and in accordance with God’s Word” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 4 24 pfdv ἐν πνεύματι καὶ ἀληθείᾳ 1 See how you translated this phrase in the previous verse. -JHN 4 25 ip1u λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 4 25 ip1u figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 25 lp44 figs-explicit ὁ λεγόμενος Χριστός 1 I know that the Messiah … Christ **Christ** is the Greek translation of **Messiah**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the one called Christ in the Greek language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 4 25 ek2f writing-pronouns ὅταν ἔλθῃ ἐκεῖνος 1 Here, **he** and **that one** refer to the Messiah. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “When the Messiah may come, the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 4 25 u8nb figs-explicit ἐκεῖνος, ἀναγγελεῖ ἡμῖν ἅπαντα 1 he will explain everything to us The words **declare everything** imply all that the people need to know. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “he will tell us all that we need to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 4 25 izgt figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 When the woman said “us,” she was including who she was speaking to, so languages that have inclusive and exclusive forms of “we” and “us” would use the inclusive form in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -JHN 4 26 lvgs λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 4 26 lvgs figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 26 rbgo figs-123person ὁ λαλῶν σοι 1 Jesus is referring to himself in third person. If this is confusing in your language, you can use the first person form. Alternate translation: “I who am speaking to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 4 27 vk5j ἐπὶ τούτῳ 1 At that moment his disciples returned Alternate translation: “at the time he said this” or “just as Jesus was saying this” JHN 4 27 p39j figs-explicit καὶ ἐθαύμαζον ὅτι μετὰ γυναικὸς ἐλάλει 1 Now they were wondering why he was speaking with a woman In the culture of that time, it was very unusual for a Jew to speak with a **woman** he did not know, especially if they were alone or if that woman was a Samaritan. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “and they were amazed that he was speaking alone with an unknown woman because people didn’t usually do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 4 27 cbc9 τί ζητεῖς? 1 no one said, “What … want?” or “Why … her?” This question could be spoken to: (1) Jesus. Alternate translation: “What do you want from this woman?” (2) the woman. Alternate translation: “What do you want from him?” -JHN 4 28 f13n λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 4 28 f13n figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 28 iu9d figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις 1 Here, **the men** could refer to: (1) the men who lived in the nearby town and would have been working out in the fields at that time. Alternate translation: “to the men of the town” (2) the people who lived in the nearby town. Alternate translation: “to the people of the town” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) JHN 4 29 hb5h figs-hyperbole δεῦτε, ἴδετε ἄνθρωπον ὃς εἶπέ μοι πάντα ὅσα ἐποίησα 1 Come, see a man who told me everything that I have ever done The Samaritan woman exaggerates to show that she is impressed by how much Jesus knows about her. Alternate translation: “Come see a man who knows very much about me, even though I have never met him before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) JHN 4 29 dl18 μήτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός 1 This could not be the Christ, could it? This question is not a rhetorical question. The woman is not sure that Jesus is the **Christ**, so she asks a question that expects “no” for an answer. However, the fact that she asked the question instead of making a statement indicates that she is uncertain. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in a way that shows her uncertainty. Alternate translation: “Is it even possible that this is the Christ?” @@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ JHN 4 31 t6hy ἐν τῷ μεταξὺ 1 In the meantime Alternate translation JHN 4 31 z7wy figs-imperative Ῥαββεί, φάγε 1 Here, **eat** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Rabbi, please eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) JHN 4 32 j8h2 figs-extrainfo ἐγὼ βρῶσιν ἔχω φαγεῖν 1 I have food to eat that you do not know about Here, Jesus uses the word **food** figuratively to refer to doing Gods will, as he states in verse [34](../04/34.md). However, his disciples do not understand this and Jesus does not explain the metaphor to them in this verse. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 4 33 w451 μή τις ἤνεγκεν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν? 1 No one has brought him anything to eat, have they? The disciples think Jesus is literally talking about something **to eat**. They begin asking each other this question, expecting a “no” response. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in a way that shows their uncertainty. Alternate translation: “Is it even possible that someone brought him food to eat?” -JHN 4 34 bnke λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 4 34 bnke figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 34 tvp1 figs-metaphor ἐμὸν βρῶμά ἐστιν ἵνα ποιήσω τὸ θέλημα τοῦ πέμψαντός με, καὶ τελειώσω αὐτοῦ τὸ ἔργον 1 My food is to do the will of him who sent me and to complete his work Here, Jesus uses **food** as a metaphor that represents obeying God’s **will**. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could say this with a simile. Alternate translation: “Like food satisfies a hungry person, doing the will of the one who sent me and completing his work satisfies me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 4 34 l64q figs-explicit τοῦ πέμψαντός με 1 Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “of God, the one who sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 4 35 u5d6 figs-rquestion οὐχ ὑμεῖς λέγετε 1 Do you not say John records Jesus using the question form for emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You surely say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -567,10 +567,10 @@ JHN 4 47 eqga writing-pronouns ἤμελλεν 1 Here, **he** refers to the roy JHN 4 48 u73r figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα ἴδητε, οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε 1 Unless you see signs and wonders, you will not believe This statement is a double negative. In some languages it is more natural to translate this statement in a positive form. Alternate translation: “Only if you see signs and wonders will you believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) JHN 4 48 hlts figs-you ἴδητε…πιστεύσητε 1 The word **you** is plural in this verse. This means that Jesus was not only speaking to the royal official, but also to the other people who were there. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “you all would see … you all would … believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) JHN 4 48 n3ot figs-hendiadys σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **wonders** describes the character of Jesus’ miraculous **signs**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “wonderful miraculous signs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -JHN 4 49 ui6f λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 4 49 ui6f figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 49 y3vi κύριε 1 The royal official calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. See how you translated this word in [4:11](../04/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]]) JHN 4 49 ycdt figs-imperative κατάβηθι 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “please come down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -JHN 4 50 n5mo λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 4 50 n5mo figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 4 50 cbtv figs-explicit ὁ ἄνθρωπος 1 Here, **the man** refers to the royal official who was introduced in verse [46](../04/46.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “The royal official” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 4 50 uwa3 figs-metonymy ἐπίστευσεν…τῷ λόγῳ 1 believed the word Here, **word** refers to all that Jesus said to the man. It does not refer to one specific word that Jesus said. Alternate translation: “believed the words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 4 51 a5gw writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ 1 While In this verse **he**, **his**, and **him** refer to the royal official who was introduced in verse [46](../04/46.md). If it would be misunderstood to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the royal official” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -592,12 +592,12 @@ JHN 5 2 dt12 translate-names Βηθζαθά 1 Bethesda This is the name of a pla JHN 5 2 luz3 στοὰς 1 roofed porches These **porches** were structures with roofs that had at least one wall missing and were attached to the sides of buildings. JHN 5 5 r1gt writing-participants ἦν δέ τις ἄνθρωπος ἐκεῖ 1 This verse introduces the man lying beside the pool as a new character to the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) JHN 5 5 bez8 figs-explicit ἦν…ἐκεῖ 1 was there Here, **there** refers to the pool called Bethesda in verse [2](../05/02.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “was at the Bethesda pool” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 5 6 w97q λέγει αὐτῷ 1 he said to him To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said to him” +JHN 5 6 w97q figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 he said to him Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 5 7 aeu3 κύριε 1 Sir, I do not have The man calls Jesus **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]]) JHN 5 7 ny5f figs-activepassive ὅταν ταραχθῇ τὸ ὕδωρ 1 when the water is stirred up If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in an active form and say who did the action. Verse [4](../05/04.md) indicates who the man believed was doing the action. Alternate translation: “when an angel moves the water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 5 7 kul6 εἰς τὴν κολυμβήθραν 1 into the pool See how you translated **pool** in verse [2](../05/02.md). JHN 5 7 u93g ἄλλος πρὸ ἐμοῦ καταβαίνει 1 another steps down before me The man believed that only the first person to enter the water after the water stirred would be healed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “another goes down before me and is healed” -JHN 5 8 eqe4 λέγει αὐτῷ 1 Get up To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said to him” +JHN 5 8 eqe4 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Get up Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 5 9 i4tk writing-background δὲ…ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 Now that day John uses the word **Now** to show that the words that follow provide background information for a new event in the story that takes place in verses [10–13](../05/10.md). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “On the day that Jesus healed the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 5 10 ja3x figs-synecdoche ἔλεγον οὖν οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 So the Jews said to him who was healed Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. It does not refer to the Jewish people in general. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). Alternate translation: “So the Jewish authorities said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 5 10 qydu figs-activepassive τῷ τεθεραπευμένῳ 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this in an active form and you could say who did the action, as is indicated in the previous verses. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “to the one whom Jesus had healed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -612,7 +612,7 @@ JHN 5 13 tijo figs-ellipsis τίς ἐστιν 1 John is leaving out some of th JHN 5 13 sgx1 grammar-connect-logic-result ὄχλου ὄντος ἐν τῷ τόπῳ 1 This could refer to: (1) the reason why Jesus left secretly. Alternate translation: “because a crowd was in the place” (2) the time when Jesus left secretly. Alternate translation: “while a crowd was in the place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 5 13 qzpi grammar-collectivenouns ὄχλου 1 The word **crowd** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “a group of people” or “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) JHN 5 14 rl0k grammar-connect-time-sequential μετὰ ταῦτα 1 This phrase indicates that what follows occurred after the Jewish leaders had spoken with the man who had been healed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “After this conversation between the Jewish leaders and this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -JHN 5 14 h1ri εὑρίσκει αὐτὸν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 Jesus found him To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Jesus found him” +JHN 5 14 h1ri figs-pastforfuture εὑρίσκει 1 Jesus found him Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 5 14 qo3z writing-pronouns αὐτὸν…αὐτῷ 1 Here, **him** refers to the man whom Jesus had healed. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the healed man … that man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 5 14 h39z figs-metaphor ἴδε 1 See John records Jesus using the term **Behold** to call the man’s attention to what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 5 15 auad figs-synecdoche τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. It does not refer to the Jewish people in general. See how you translated this term in [5:10](../05/10.md). Alternate translation: “to the Jewish authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -733,7 +733,7 @@ JHN 6 4 ri55 writing-background ἦν δὲ ἐγγὺς τὸ Πάσχα, ἡ JHN 6 5 thts grammar-connect-time-sequential οὖν 1 **Then** here could mean: (1) what follows is the next event in the story. Alternate translation: “Next” (2) what follows is the result of what happened in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) JHN 6 5 cxta figs-idiom ἐπάρας…τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς 1 Here, “lifted up his eyes” is an idiom that means to look upward. Alternate translation: “looking up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 6 5 v4hi grammar-collectivenouns πολὺς ὄχλος 1 See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). Alternate translation: “a large group of people” or “very many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -JHN 6 5 pzhc λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 6 5 pzhc figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 6 5 v0mp translate-names Φίλιππον 1 **Philip** is the name of a man who was one of Jesus’ disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 6 6 cj58 writing-background τοῦτο δὲ ἔλεγεν πειράζων αὐτόν; αὐτὸς γὰρ ᾔδει τί ἔμελλεν ποιεῖν 1 But Jesus said this to test Philip, for he himself knew what he was going to do In this verse, John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to explain why Jesus asked Philip where to buy bread. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Now he said this at that time to test him, for he himself knew what he was going to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 6 6 sr0p grammar-connect-logic-goal πειράζων αὐτόν 1 John is stating the purpose for which Jesus asked Philip the question in the previous verse. In your translation, follow the conventions of your language for purpose clauses. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that he could test Philip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) @@ -742,7 +742,7 @@ JHN 6 6 uk6t figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς…ᾔδει 1 for he himself knew Here, JHN 6 7 z3gj translate-bmoney διακοσίων δηναρίων ἄρτοι 1 Two hundred denarii worth of bread The word **denarii** is the plural form of “denarius,” which was a denomination of money in the Roman Empire that was equivalent to one days’ wages. Alternate translation: “The amount of bread that cost two hundred days’ wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) JHN 6 8 ih44 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ…αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **his** and **him** refer to Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ … to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 6 8 gzei translate-names Ἀνδρέας…Σίμωνος Πέτρου 1 **Andrew** and **Simon Peter** are names of men who were Jesus’ disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -JHN 6 8 diq0 λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 6 8 diq0 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 6 9 k3k6 translate-unknown πέντε ἄρτους κριθίνους 1 five bread loaves of barley The grain **barley** was a common grain eaten by the poor in Israel because it was cheaper than wheat. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/barley]]) They would bake the barley into **bread loaves**, which are lumps of flour dough that a person has shaped and baked. Alternate translation: “five loaves of barley bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JHN 6 9 xwu8 figs-rquestion ταῦτα τί ἐστιν εἰς τοσούτους? 1 what are these among so many? This remark appears in the form of a question to emphasize that they do not have enough food to feed everyone. Alternate translation: “these are not enough to feed so many!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 6 10 hnaw figs-quotations εἶπεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς, ποιήσατε τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἀναπεσεῖν. 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Jesus said to make the men sit down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -755,7 +755,7 @@ JHN 6 11 mnw3 figs-ellipsis εὐχαριστήσας 1 John leaves out some wo JHN 6 11 wi9d figs-synecdoche διέδωκεν 1 he gave it Here, **he** refers to “Jesus and his disciples.” Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples gave them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 6 11 ib37 figs-explicit τῶν ὀψαρίων 1 These **fish** are the two **fish** mentioned in verse [9](../06/09.md). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “the two fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 12 leym figs-activepassive ἐνεπλήσθησαν 1 If your language does not use passive voice, you could say this in an active or reflexive form. Alternate translation: “they had finished eating” or “they had filled themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 6 12 z5o3 λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” +JHN 6 12 z5o3 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 6 12 qp1n figs-quotations λέγει τοῖς μαθηταῖς αὐτοῦ, συναγάγετε 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express this as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “he says to his disciples to gather up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) JHN 6 13 h64z translate-unknown κοφίνους 1 Here, **baskets** refers to large baskets that were used for carrying food and goods while traveling. If your language has a word for this kind of basket, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “large traveling baskets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JHN 6 14 d7lp figs-gendernotations οἱ…ἄνθρωποι 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, John uses the word here in a generic sense that includes both men and women. Alternate translation: “the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -773,8 +773,8 @@ JHN 6 18 pms3 figs-metaphor διηγείρετο 1 John uses **aroused** figura JHN 6 18 z381 figs-activepassive ἥ…θάλασσα…διηγείρετο 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the wind was causing the sea to be aroused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 6 19 xx7d translate-unknown ἐληλακότες 1 they had rowed The boats used on the Sea of Galilee usually had two, four, or six people who **rowed** with oars together on each side side of the boat. If your readers would not be familiar with rowed boats, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having pushed the boat through the water by using oars” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JHN 6 19 sgf4 translate-bdistance ὡς σταδίους εἴκοσι πέντε ἢ τριάκοντα 1 about twenty-five or thirty stadia The word **stadia** is the plural of “stadium,” which is a Roman measurement of distance equivalent to about 185 meters or a little over 600 feet. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “about four and one half or five and one half kilometers” or “about thee or three and one half miles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) -JHN 6 19 diko θεωροῦσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they saw” -JHN 6 20 tjg9 λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” +JHN 6 19 diko figs-pastforfuture θεωροῦσιν 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JHN 6 20 tjg9 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 6 21 qtw5 figs-explicit ἤθελον…λαβεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον 1 they were willing to receive him into the boat It is implied that Jesus got **into the boat**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “they gladly received him into the boat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 22 v8cn grammar-collectivenouns ὁ ὄχλος 1 See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). Alternate translation: “the group of people” or “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) JHN 6 22 ho60 figs-explicit πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης 1 Here, **the other side of the sea** refers to the side of the Sea of Galilee where Jesus had fed the crowd. It does not refer to the side of the Sea of Galilee that he and his disciples arrived at in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the side of the sea where Jesus performed the miracle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -784,7 +784,7 @@ JHN 6 23 hwtc figs-explicit τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Here, **the Lord** refers to JHN 6 23 sqke figs-ellipsis εὐχαριστήσαντος τοῦ Κυρίου 1 John leaves out some words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “after the Lord had given thanks to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 6 24 vad6 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 **Therefore** indicates that this verse is the result of what happened in verse [22](../06/22.md). This verse resumes the narrative that was interrupted by the background information in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because Jesus and his disciples had gone to the other side of the Sea of Galilee” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 6 24 f7t2 grammar-collectivenouns ὁ ὄχλος 1 See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). Alternate translation: “the group of people” or “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -JHN 6 24 cql6 ἔστιν ἐκεῖ 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “were there” +JHN 6 24 cql6 figs-pastforfuture ἔστιν 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 6 24 fecq figs-explicit εἰς τὰ πλοιάρια 1 These **boats** are the **boats** mentioned in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “into the boats that had come from Tiberias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 24 o7vs grammar-connect-logic-goal ζητοῦντες τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 John is stating the purpose for which the crowd went to Capernaum. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation (without a comma preceding): “so that they could seek Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) JHN 6 25 tnms figs-explicit πέραν τῆς θαλάσσης 1 Here, **on the other side** refers to the side of the Sea of Galilee that is opposite the side where Jesus had miraculously fed the crowd. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the opposite side of the sea from where Jesus had fed the crowd” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -804,6 +804,7 @@ JHN 6 29 z1u9 writing-pronouns ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος 1 Here, * JHN 6 31 t3jt figs-explicit οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν τὸ μάννα ἔφαγον ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 In this verse, John assumes that his readers will know that the crowd is referring to a story recorded in the Old Testament book of Exodus. In that story, the Israelites complained against Moses and Aaron because they were hungry. God responded by providing a flake-like food that fell from the sky and could be baked into bread. The people called this flake-like food “manna.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/manna]]) You could indicate this explicitly if it would be helpful to your readers, particularly if they would not know the story. Alternate translation: “Our fathers ate the manna when they were wandering in the wilderness after leaving Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 31 gye7 figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 Our fathers Here, the word **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” If that use of **fathers** would be confusing in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors” or “Our forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 6 31 jz9p figs-activepassive ἐστιν γεγραμμένον 1 heaven If your language does not use the passive voice, you could say this in an active form and say who did the action. Alternate translation: “the prophets wrote in the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +JHN 6 31 bc59 writing-quotations ἐστιν γεγραμμένον 1 heaven Here the crowd uses **it is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 78:24](../../psa/78/24.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that the crowd is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 6 31 gzqv figs-quotesinquotes ἐστιν γεγραμμένον, ἄρτον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “it is written that he gave them bread from heaven to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 6 31 fjoo writing-pronouns ἄρτον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν 1 **He** here could refer to: (1) Moses, in which case the crowd was mistakenly quoting a scripture about God and applying it to Moses. This is possible because Jesus says in the next verse, “Moses has not given you the bread from heaven.” Alternate translation: “Moses gave them bread from heaven to eat” (2) God, which is who it referred to in the scripture the crowd is quoting. Alternate translation: “God gave them bread from heaven to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) JHN 6 31 iiaz figs-synecdoche ἄρτον 1 Here, John records the crowd using the word **bread** figuratively to represent food in general that is needed to sustain life. The manna that God gave the Israelites from heaven was not **bread**, but a food that could be baked into **bread**. Alternate translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -857,6 +858,7 @@ JHN 6 44 um43 figs-gendernotations αὐτόν…αὐτὸν 1 Although the pr JHN 6 44 s6b5 figs-idiom ἀναστήσω αὐτὸν 1 raise him up Here, to **raise** up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. See how you translated this in verse [40](../06/40.md). Alternate translation: “will cause them to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 6 44 g2ia figs-explicit ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 Here, **the last day** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]) See how you translated this in verse [40](../06/40.md). Alternate translation: “on the day when I return and judge everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 45 j1af figs-activepassive ἔστιν γεγραμμένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις 1 It is written in the prophets If your language does not use passive voice, you could translate this in an active form. Alternate translation, as in the UST: “The prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +JHN 6 45 jg6g writing-quotations ἔστιν γεγραμμένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις 1 It is written in the prophets Here Jesus uses **It is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Isaiah 54:13](../../isa/54/13.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “it had been written by the prophets in the scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 6 45 wnjr figs-quotesinquotes ἐν τοῖς προφήταις, καὶ ἔσονται πάντες διδακτοὶ Θεοῦ 1 If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “in the prophets that all will be taught by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) JHN 6 45 fken figs-activepassive ἔσονται πάντες διδακτοὶ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use passive voice, you could translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will teach all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 6 45 orme guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -899,7 +901,7 @@ JHN 6 55 tw5g figs-extrainfo σάρξ μου…αἷμά μου 1 Here, John re JHN 6 55 cik2 figs-extrainfo ἡ…σάρξ μου ἀληθής ἐστι βρῶσις, καὶ τὸ αἷμά μου ἀληθής ἐστι πόσις 1 my flesh is true food … my blood is true drink Here, John records Jesus using the phrases **true food** and **true drink** figuratively to say that Jesus gives life to those who trust in him. However, the Jews did not understand this. Therefore, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 6 55 j4ud figs-doublet ἡ…σάρξ μου ἀληθής ἐστι βρῶσις, καὶ τὸ αἷμά μου ἀληθής ἐστι πόσις 1 As in the previous two verses, these two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expressions in the previous two verses. Alternate translation: “my flesh is indeed true food, and my blood is indeed true blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) JHN 6 56 eaoy figs-extrainfo ὁ τρώγων μου τὴν σάρκα, καὶ πίνων μου τὸ αἷμα 1 See how you translated this in verse [54](../06/54.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) -JHN 6 56 u3w4 figs-explicit ἐν ἐμοὶ μένει 1 remains in me Here and frequently in John’s Gospel, **remains in** indicates having a continuous personal relationship with someone. If this would be confusing in your language, you could say this explicitly. See the discussion of this expression in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “has a personal relationship with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 6 56 u3w4 figs-explicit ἐν ἐμοὶ μένει 1 remains in me Here and frequently in John’s Gospel, **remains in** indicates being united in a continuous personal relationship with someone. If this would be confusing in your language, you could say this explicitly. See the discussion of this expression in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “has a close relationship with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 56 rjpa figs-ellipsis κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 Here, John records Jesus leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be confusing in your language, you could supply the word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and I remain in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 6 57 y334 figs-explicit ὁ ζῶν Πατὴρ 1 Here, **living** refers to being the source of life or having the ability to create life. This is also how Jesus used **living** in verse [51](../06/51.md). See how you translated **living** in verse [51](../06/51). Alternate translation: “the Father who causes life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 6 57 krma guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ…Πατέρα 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -972,7 +974,7 @@ JHN 7 4 mc8r grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ταῦτα ποιεῖς 1 J JHN 7 4 f33j figs-metonymy τῷ κόσμῳ 1 the world Here, **the world** is used figurative to refer to all of the people in the world. If this use of **world** would be confusing in your language, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 7 5 mz2b writing-background οὐδὲ γὰρ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπίστευον εἰς αὐτὸν 1 For even his brothers did not believe in him This sentence is a break from the main story line as John provides some background information about the brothers of Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Jesus’ brothers said this because even they didn’t believe in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 7 5 bs7f translate-kinship οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his brothers See how you translated this in verse [3](../07/03.md). Alternate translation: “his younger brothers” or “his half-brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -JHN 7 6 bcul λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 7 6 bcul figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 7 6 n5bj figs-metonymy ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ἐμὸς οὔπω πάρεστιν 1 My time has not yet come This could mean: (1) It was not the right **time** for Jesus to go to Jerusalem for the festival because God had not yet told him to go. This meaning explains why he eventually went to the festival in verse [10](../07/10.md). Alternate translation: “Now is not the right time for me to go to Jerusalem” (2) It was not the right **time** for Jesus to publicly reveal himself as the Messiah, which is what his brothers wanted him to do. Alternate translation: “Now is not the right time for me to publicly reveal myself as the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 7 6 z9gv figs-yousingular ὁ ὑμέτερος 1 All instances of “you” and **your** in verses [6–8](../07/06.md) are plural. They only refer to Jesus’ brothers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) JHN 7 6 shs9 ὁ δὲ καιρὸς ὁ ὑμέτερος πάντοτέ ἐστιν ἕτοιμος 1 your time is always ready Alternate translation: “but any time is good for you” @@ -1092,7 +1094,7 @@ JHN 7 49 y4wf grammar-collectivenouns τὸν νόμον 1 See how you translat JHN 7 49 jk8j figs-activepassive ἐπάρατοί εἰσιν 1 If your language does not use the passive voice, you could say this with an active form and say who did the action. Alternate translation: “God has cursed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 7 50 u5ha writing-background ὁ ἐλθὼν πρὸς αὐτὸν πρότερον, εἷς ὢν ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 one of the Pharisees, who came to him earlier John provides this information to remind us of who Nicodemus is and the conversation he had with Jesus that is recorded in [chapter 3](../03/01.md). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “this man was a Pharisee who had spoken with Jesus at an earlier time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 7 50 yw8i εἷς ὢν ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 Alternate translation: “although he was one of them” or “despite being one of them” -JHN 7 50 hj1u λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 7 50 hj1u figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 7 51 ia3j figs-rquestion μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ πρῶτον παρ’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ γνῷ τί ποιεῖ? 1 Does our law judge a man … what he does? This remark appears in the form of a question to add emphasis. If your readers would misunderstand this type of question, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Our law certainly does not judge a man unless it might first hear from him and might know what he does!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 7 51 y8df figs-personification μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ πρῶτον παρ’ αὐτοῦ, καὶ γνῷ 1 Does our law judge a man Here, Nicodemus speaks of the **law** as if it were a person. If this use of **law** is not natural in your language, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “It is not written in our law that we may judge a man unless we might first hear from him and might know … is it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) JHN 7 51 c2h5 figs-genericnoun τὸν ἄνθρωπον 1 Here, **a man** does not refer to a specific man. It refers to any man in general. Alternate translation: “any man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) @@ -1191,7 +1193,7 @@ JHN 8 37 ph1q figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐμὸς 1 my word Here, **word JHN 8 38 m62y guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τῷ Πατρὶ 1 I say what I have seen with my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 8 38 f9yu figs-extrainfo καὶ ὑμεῖς…ἃ ἠκούσατε παρὰ τοῦ πατρὸς, ποιεῖτε 1 you also do what you heard from your father In this clause, Jesus uses the phrase **the father** to refer to the devil. Despite using the same words as in the previous clause, here Jesus is not referring to God. However, since Jesus did not yet reveal what he meant when he used this phrase, but was speaking ambiguously, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) JHN 8 39 qp2r figs-metaphor ὁ πατὴρ 1 father Here, the word **father** figuratively means “ancestor.” If that use of **father** would be confusing in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Our forefather” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 8 39 wg9n λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 8 39 wg9n figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 8 39 v7og figs-metaphor τέκνα τοῦ Ἀβραάμ 1 Here, the word **children** figuratively means “descendants.” Alternate translation: “descendants of Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 8 39 xcnx figs-possession τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Ἀβραὰμ 1 Jesus is using the possessive form to describe **works** that were done by **Abraham**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “the works done by Abraham” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 8 40 s615 writing-pronouns τοῦτο Ἀβραὰμ οὐκ ἐποίησεν 1 Abraham did not do this Here, **this** refers to what Jesus said earlier in the verse about what the Jews were trying to do to him. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Abraham did not seek to kill someone who told him the truth from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) @@ -1285,7 +1287,7 @@ JHN 9 11 nii1 figs-activepassive ὁ λεγόμενος Ἰησοῦς 1 smeared JHN 9 11 a42y figs-explicit πηλὸν ἐποίησεν 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 6](../09/06.md). Alternate translation: “used his fingers to mix the dirt with saliva to make mud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 9 11 b5zf figs-explicit νίψαι…καὶ νιψάμενος 1 See how you translated **wash** in [verse 7](../09/07.md). Alternate translation: “wash your eyes … and having washed my eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 9 11 ajxb figs-abstractnouns ἀνέβλεψα 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **sight** in another way. Alternate translation: “I could see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JHN 9 13 cu14 ἄγουσιν αὐτὸν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they brought him” +JHN 9 13 cu14 figs-pastforfuture ἄγουσιν 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 9 14 dl48 writing-background 0 General Information: In this verse, John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about when Jesus healed the man. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 9 14 ef0w figs-explicit τὸν πηλὸν ἐποίησεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς, καὶ ἀνέῳξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς 1 The negative reaction of the Pharisees described in the following verses is based on their belief that Jesus’ actions were considered to be work according to their religious laws. Therefore, they believed that he was disobeying God’s command to rest and not work on the Sabbath. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/works]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]]). If your readers might misunderstanding this, you could say it explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus made the mud and opened his eyes. These were two deeds the Pharisees considered to be work.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 9 14 qxy9 figs-metonymy ἀνέῳξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς 1 Here, **opened** **eyes** figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “caused him to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1297,7 +1299,7 @@ JHN 9 16 h0tt figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν οὗτος παρὰ Θεοῦ JHN 9 16 k4sy figs-rquestion πῶς δύναται ἄνθρωπος ἁμαρτωλὸς τοιαῦτα σημεῖα ποιεῖν? 1 How can a man who is a sinner do such signs? Some people are using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that Jesus’ signs prove he is not a sinner. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “A sinner cannot possibly do such signs!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 9 16 qn73 σημεῖα 1 signs See how you translated this term in [2:11](../02/11.md). See also the discussion of **signs** in Part 3 of the General Introduction to the Gospel of John. Alternate translation: “significant miracles” JHN 9 16 jeyz figs-abstractnouns σχίσμα ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **division** in another way. Alternate translation: “they divided themselves against each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -JHN 9 17 lxnf λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “they asked” +JHN 9 17 lxnf figs-pastforfuture λέγουσιν 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 9 17 glud figs-explicit ὅτι ἠνέῳξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς 1 Because the next verse indicates that the Pharisees did not believe that the man used to be blind, **since** here does not mean that they thought the man had really been healed. If this clause might be misunderstood by your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “since you claim that he opened your eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 9 17 lcb3 figs-metonymy ἠνέῳξέν σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς 1 Here, **opened** **eyes** figuratively describes the ability to see by referring to something associated with vision coming into action, specifically, the **eyes**. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “he caused you to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 9 18 y3wn grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 **Therefore** here indicates that what follows is the result of what the man said about Jesus in the previous verse. Because the formerly blind man believed Jesus was a prophet, **the Jews** who opposed Jesus refused to believe that the man had really been blind. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “Since the man said that Jesus was a prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -1451,7 +1453,7 @@ JHN 10 27 f7y8 figs-idiom ἀκολουθοῦσίν μοι 1 Here, Jesus uses JHN 10 28 bpx3 figs-metonymy οὐχ ἁρπάσει τις αὐτὰ ἐκ τῆς χειρός μου 1 no one will snatch them out of my hand Here, Jesus uses the word **hand** figuratively to refer to his protective care and **snatch** to refer to removing someone from that care. If this use of **hand** and **snatch** would be confusing in your language, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no one will steal any of them away from me” or “they all will remain secure forever in my care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 10 29 g82a guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου ὃς δέδωκέν μοι 1 My Father, who has given them to me **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 10 29 k1ya figs-metonymy οὐδεὶς δύναται ἁρπάζειν ἐκ τῆς χειρὸς τοῦ Πατρός 1 the hand of the Father Here, Jesus uses the word **hand** figuratively to refer to God’s protective care and **snatch** to refer to removing someone from that care. See how you translated **hand** and **snatch** in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “no one will steal any of them away from my Father” or “they all will remain secure forever in my Father’s care” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 10 30 xok8 figs-explicit ἕν ἐσμεν 1 I and the Father are one Here, the word translated **one** means to be completely united. It does not mean to be the same identical person. Although this expression implies that Jesus is God, he is not identical to God **the Father**. If this use of **one** might be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “are united in purpose and character” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 10 30 xok8 figs-explicit ἕν ἐσμεν 1 I and the Father are one Here, the word translated **one** means to be one entity. Although this expression implies that Jesus is God, he is not identical to God **the Father**. Therefore, **one** cannot be translated as “one person.” If this use of **one** might be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “are one entity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 10 30 rs4j guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 I and the Father are one **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 10 31 fl8i figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 Then the Jews took up stones Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. It does not refer to the Jewish people in general. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md). Alternate translation: “The Jewish authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 10 31 a42t figs-explicit ἵνα λιθάσωσιν αὐτόν 1 **The Jews** opposing Jesus are outraged at what Jesus said in the previous verse. Here, John implies that they wanted to kill him with stones because he had made himself equal to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that they might stone him because he claimed to be equal with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1465,6 +1467,7 @@ JHN 10 33 w0v8 figs-explicit βλασφημίας 1 Here, the **Jews** use the JHN 10 33 h4kp ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν Θεόν 1 making yourself God This phrase means to claim to be God. It does not mean to try to make oneself into God or become God. Alternate translation: “claiming to be God” JHN 10 34 qi82 figs-rquestion οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένον ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν, ὅτι ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε? 1 Is it not written … gods”’? Here, Jesus uses the form of a question to add emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “It is certainly written in your law, ‘I said, “You are gods”’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 10 34 tb1l figs-activepassive οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένον 1 Is it not written … gods”’? If your language does not use the passive voice, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Did not a prophet write” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +JHN 10 34 smk1 writing-quotations οὐκ ἔστιν γεγραμμένον ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν 1 Is it not written … gods”’? Here Jesus uses **written in your law** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 82:6](../../psa/82/06.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Jesus is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “Has it not been written in the Psalms, part of your law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) JHN 10 34 rycn figs-synecdoche ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν 1 Jesus is using the name of the first part of the Hebrew Scriptures, the **law**, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. If this use of **law** might be misunderstood by your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in your Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 10 34 b3gp figs-123person ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε 1 You are gods Here, Jesus quotes [Psalm 82:6](../psa/82/06.md) where God calls some humans **gods**. Jesus does this in order to show that God also used the word “god” to refer to people other than himself. In the verse that Jesus quotes, the first person **I** refers to God. If this might be misunderstood by your readers, you could say it explicitly. Alternate translation: “I, God, said, ‘You are gods’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) JHN 10 34 h189 figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ εἶπα, θεοί ἐστε 1 You are gods If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I said that you are gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -1510,25 +1513,26 @@ JHN 11 4 ad99 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son o JHN 11 5 j6r4 writing-background ἠγάπα δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν Μάρθαν, καὶ τὴν ἀδελφὴν αὐτῆς, καὶ τὸν Λάζαρον 1 Now Jesus loved Martha and her sister and Lazarus In this verse, John briefly stops telling about the events in the story in order to give background information about Jesus relationship with **Lazarus** and his sisters. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 11 5 w6tg translate-kinship τὴν ἀδελφὴν 1 Now Jesus loved Martha and her sister and Lazarus Because those who wrote Scripture usually list the names of siblings in order from oldest to youngest, the list in [verse 5](../11/05.md) suggests that Martha was the oldest and Lazarus was the youngest of the three siblings. If your language uses different words for **sister** depending on birth order, use the word for a younger **sister** here. Alternate translation: “younger sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) JHN 11 6 vx3p grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 **Therefore** connects this verse to the previous verse in order to indicate that Jesus delayed going to Lazarus because he loved him and his sisters. Jesus’ delay is not in contrast to his love for them. Although Lazarus’s family would suffer for a short time, they would experience a great blessing when Jesus brought Lazarus back to life. Alternate translation: “Because Jesus loved them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -JHN 11 7 zq1l λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” +JHN 11 7 zq1l figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 11 8 p4x9 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to the Jewish leaders. It does not refer to the Jewish people in general. See how you translated this term in [1:19](../01/19.md) and the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Jewish authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) JHN 11 8 y4jm figs-rquestion πάλιν ὑπάγεις ἐκεῖ? 1 Rabbi, right now the Jews are trying to stone you, and you are going back there again? Here, the disciples use the form of a question to emphasize that they do not want Jesus to go to Jerusalem. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “you surely should not go back there again!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 11 9 uv34 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ δώδεκα ὧραί εἰσιν τῆς ἡμέρας? 1 Are there not twelve hours of light in a day? Jesus uses the form of a question for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “There are surely 12 hours in the day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 11 9 ln4r figs-metaphor ἐάν τις περιπατῇ ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, οὐ προσκόπτει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου τούτου βλέπει 1 If someone walks in the daytime, he will not stumble, because he sees by the light of this world Here, Jesus uses the idea of **someone** walking in the daylight figuratively to refer himself doing what God wants him to do while he is still on the earth. In this metaphor, Jesus uses **the light of this world** figuratively to refer to himself, who has previously called himself “the Light of the World” in [8:12](../08/12.md) and [9:5](../09/05.md). He also uses **stumble** figuratively to refer to death. The statement in this verse has a similar meaning to Jesus’ statement in [9:4](../09/04.md). Jesus does not want his disciples to worry about him going to Judea because he will be safe as long God wants him to remain on the earth. If this metaphor would be confusing in your language, you could say the meaning plainly or use a simile. See the discussion of this passage in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “Just as someone who walks in the daytime does not stumble because they can see in the light, so you do not need to worry about me while I, the Light of the World, am still with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 11 10 vm6h figs-exmetaphor ἐὰν δέ τις περιπατῇ ἐν τῇ νυκτί, προσκόπτει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 if he walks at night In this verse Jesus continues the metaphor of a person walking outside. Jesus uses the idea of **someone** walking **at night** figuratively to refer to the time when his earthly ministry would be complete and he would die and leave the earth. Jesus uses **night** figuratively to refer to the time when his ministry on earth would end. He uses **stumble** figuratively to refer to his death, and uses **light** figuratively to refer to his life. If this metaphor would be confusing in your language, you could say the meaning plainly or use a simile. See the discussion of this passage in the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “But just as someone who walks at night stumbles because there is no light, so I will die when it is time for me, the Light of the World, to leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) -JHN 11 11 fan2 λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said” +JHN 11 11 fan2 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 11 11 bev5 figs-euphemism Λάζαρος ὁ φίλος ἡμῶν κεκοίμηται 1 Our friend Lazarus has fallen asleep Jesus uses **fallen asleep** to refer to being dead. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. Since Jesus explains the meaning in [verse 14](../11/14.md), you do not need to explain it here. However, If you have an idiom for this idea in your language, you may use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) JHN 11 11 ze1z figs-idiom ἀλλὰ πορεύομαι ἵνα ἐξυπνίσω αὐτόν 1 but I am going so that I may wake him out of sleep Here, Jesus uses the phrase **wake him out of sleep** figuratively to refer to his plan to bring Lazarus back to life. If you have an idiom for this idea in your language, you may use it here. Since the disciples do not understand what Jesus is saying here, do not translate this in a non-figurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 11 12 hn2j figs-euphemism εἰ κεκοίμηται 1 if he has fallen asleep See how you translated **fallen asleep** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) JHN 11 13 h3kl writing-background 0 In this verse, John briefly stops telling the events in the story in order to give background information about Jesus’ conversation with his disciples. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 11 13 tt6v writing-pronouns ἐκεῖνοι 1 Here, **those ones** refers to Jesus’ disciples. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -JHN 11 13 leg3 λέγει 1 If this use of present tense in past narration would not be natural in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he was speaking” +JHN 11 13 leg3 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 11 13 pf8u figs-possession τῆς κοιμήσεως τοῦ ὕπνου 1 John is using the possessive form to describe **sleep** that is **slumber**. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “sleep that is actually sleep” or “natural sleep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) JHN 11 14 azy3 τότε…εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς παρρησίᾳ 1 Then Jesus said to them plainly Here, **plainly** means to say something clearly without using and metaphors or others figures of speech. Because the disciples did not understand the metaphor Jesus told them in [verse 11](../11/11.md), he told them the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Jesus then said to them in words that they could understand” JHN 11 15 c4wj δι’ ὑμᾶς 1 for your sakes Alternate translation: “for your benefit” or “for your good” JHN 11 15 ar2j figs-ellipsis ἵνα πιστεύσητε 1 Here, Jesus is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could supply this word from the context. You may also need to start a new sentence. Alternate translation: “I allowed this to happen so that you may believe in me” or “I let Lazarus die so that you may believe that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 11 16 e043 translate-names Θωμᾶς 1 **Thomas** is the name of a man, one of Jesus’ disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 11 16 dzc3 figs-activepassive ὁ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος 1 who was called Didymus If your language does not us the passive voice, you can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom some people called Didymus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 11 16 ymy6 translate-names Δίδυμος 1 Didymus This is the name of a man. It is a Greek word that means “twin.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +JHN 11 16 ymy6 translate-names Δίδυμος 1 Didymus This is the name of a man. It is a Greek word that means “twin” and is Thomas’ other name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 11 17 we1k figs-activepassive ὁ Ἰησοῦς εὗρεν αὐτὸν, τέσσαρας ἤδη ἡμέρας ἔχοντα ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ 1 he found that Lazarus had already been in the tomb for four days If your language does not use the passive voice, you can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus found him; people had put him in the tomb four days before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 11 18 icrj writing-background ἦν δὲ ἡ Βηθανία ἐγγὺς τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων, ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκαπέντε 1 fifteen stadia away This verse gives background information about the place where this event took place. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “This event took place in Bethany, which was near Jerusalem and was about 15 stadia away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 11 18 d35v translate-bdistance ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκαπέντε 1 fifteen stadia away The word **stadia** is the plural of “stadium,” which is a Roman measurement of distance equivalent to about 185 meters or a little over 600 feet. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express this in terms of modern measurements, either in the text or a footnote. Alternate translation: “about two miles away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) @@ -1538,10 +1542,10 @@ JHN 11 19 m26v translate-kinship τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ 1 about their brother JHN 11 20 k7dy figs-quotations ἤκουσεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἔρχεται 1 about their brother If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this statement as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “she heard that Jesus was coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) JHN 11 21 ef5h grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ἦς ὧδε, οὐκ ἂν ἀπέθανεν ὁ ἀδελφός μου 1 my brother would not have died **Martha** is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but she knows that the condition is not true. **Jesus** had not been there and her **brother** had **died**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “if you had been here, but you were not, my brother would not have died, but he did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) JHN 11 21 g9xt translate-kinship ὁ ἀδελφός 1 my brother would not have died See how you translated **brother** in [verse 2](../11/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -JHN 11 23 c1rc λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 11 23 c1rc figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 11 23 j8p2 figs-idiom ἀναστήσεται ὁ ἀδελφός σου 1 Your brother will rise again Here, **rise again** is an idiom that refers to a died person becoming alive **again**. If this use of **rise again** might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Your brother will become alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 11 23 hf5m translate-kinship ὁ ἀδελφός 1 Your brother will rise again See how you translated **brother** in [verse 2](../11/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -JHN 11 24 f0qy λέγει 1 he will rise again To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 11 24 f0qy figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 he will rise again Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 11 24 z7el figs-idiom ἀναστήσεται 1 he will rise again See how you translated **rise again** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 11 24 bco7 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει 1 he will rise again If your readers would misunderstand the abstract noun **resurrection**, you could express the idea behind it with a verb such as “resurrect.” Alternate translation: “when God resurrects people” or “when God brings people back from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) JHN 11 24 lxqk figs-explicit ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 Here, **the last day** refers to “the day of the Lord,” which is the time when God judges everyone, Jesus returns to earth, and the bodies of those who are dead are raised from their graves. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]). Alternate translation: “on the day when God judges everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1552,7 +1556,7 @@ JHN 11 25 ef7a figs-explicit ζήσεται 1 will live Here, **live** refers to JHN 11 26 a6gs figs-explicit πᾶς ὁ ζῶν 1 whoever lives and believes in me will never die Here, **living** refers to having eternal life, as “live” does in the previous verse. If your readers would misunderstand this use of **living**, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “everyone who has eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 11 26 fue3 figs-explicit οὐ μὴ ἀποθάνῃ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 will never die Here, **die** refers to spiritual death, which is eternal punishment in hell that occurs after physical death. If your readers would misunderstand this use of **die**, you could say this explicitly. See how you translated a similar phrase in [6:50](../06/50.md). Alternate translation: “may certainly not not die spiritually into eternity” or “may certainly not experience spiritual death into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 11 26 js8v figs-litotes οὐ μὴ ἀποθάνῃ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα 1 will never die Here, Jesus uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “may certainly live into eternity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -JHN 11 27 mk4e λέγει 1 She said to him To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 11 27 mk4e figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 She said to him Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 11 27 y83q guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 11 27 au1i figs-explicit ὁ εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἐρχόμενος 1 This phrase refers to a prophet the Jews were waiting for, based on God’s promise to send **into the world** a prophet like Moses, which is recorded in [Deuteronomy 18:15](../deu/18/15.md). If your readers will not be familiar with this Old Testament reference, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “whom God said he would send into the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 11 28 yd61 translate-kinship τὴν ἀδελφὴν 1 she went away and called her sister Mary See how you translated **sister** in [verse 5](../11/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) @@ -1573,10 +1577,10 @@ JHN 11 37 b3at figs-rquestion οὐκ ἐδύνατο οὗτος, ὁ ἀνοί JHN 11 37 a76u figs-metonymy ὁ ἀνοίξας τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς τοῦ τυφλοῦ 1 opened the eyes See how you translated a similar phrase in [9:14](../09/14.md). Alternate translation: “who caused the blind man to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 11 38 e72n ἐμβριμώμενος ἐν ἑαυτῷ 1 See how you translated the similar phrase in [verse 33](../11/33.md). JHN 11 38 xu7k writing-background ἦν δὲ σπήλαιον, καὶ λίθος ἐπέκειτο ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 Now it was a cave, and a stone lay against it John pauses the story briefly to describe the tomb where the people had entombed Lazarus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “The place Lazarus was entombed was a cave that had a stone laying against it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -JHN 11 39 hevw λέγει…λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said … said” +JHN 11 39 hevw figs-pastforfuture λέγει…λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 11 39 l2pd translate-kinship ἡ ἀδελφὴ 1 Martha, the sister of Lazarus **Martha** was Lazarus’ oldest **sister**. If your language uses different words for **sister** depending on birth order, use the word for a older or oldest **sister** here. Alternate translation: “the oldest sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) JHN 11 39 lt1d figs-explicit τεταρταῖος γάρ ἐστιν 1 This means that it has been **four days** since Lazarus **died**. If it would be clearer to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “for he has been dead for four days” or “for it has been four days since he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 11 40 c082 λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 11 40 c082 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 11 40 q5mw figs-rquestion οὐκ εἶπόν σοι, ὅτι ἐὰν πιστεύσῃς, ὄψῃ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ? 1 Did I not say to you that, if you believed, you would see the glory of God? Jesus is using the form of a question to emphasize that God is about to do something wonderful. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I certainly said to you that, if you believe, you would see the glory of God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 11 40 mpl5 figs-ellipsis ἐὰν πιστεύσῃς 1 Here, Jesus is leaving out some words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be confusing in your language, you could supply this word from the context. Alternate translation: “if you believe in me” or “if you believe that I am the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 11 40 pbc9 figs-possession τὴν δόξαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) God receives the glory. Alternate translation: “the glorification of God” or “God glorified” (2) glory that comes from God. Alternate translation: “the glory from God”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -1585,7 +1589,7 @@ JHN 11 41 j54b guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πάτερ 1 Father **Father** is a JHN 11 42 gw6t grammar-collectivenouns τὸν ὄχλον τὸν περιεστῶτα 1 See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). Alternate translation: “the group of people that is standing around” or “the many people who are standing around” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) JHN 11 44 x4cb figs-activepassive δεδεμένος τοὺς πόδας καὶ τὰς χεῖρας κειρίαις, καὶ ἡ ὄψις αὐτοῦ σουδαρίῳ περιεδέδετο 1 his feet and hands were bound with cloths, and his face was bound about with a cloth If your language does not use the passive voice, you can state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “someone having bound his feet and hands with cloths, and someone having bound his face with a cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 11 44 h203 translate-unknown δεδεμένος τοὺς πόδας καὶ τὰς χεῖρας κειρίαις, καὶ ἡ ὄψις αὐτοῦ σουδαρίῳ περιεδέδετο 1 his feet and hands were bound with cloths, and his face was bound about with a cloth Wrapping a dead body in strips of **cloth** was the burial custom in this culture. See the discussion of this in the General Notes for this chapter. If your readers would not be familiar with such a custom, you could describe it more specifically, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “his feet and hands having been bound with burial cloths, and his face having been wrapped with a burial cloth” or “his feet, hands, and face having been wrapped in clothes for burial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -JHN 11 44 n5yj λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 11 44 n5yj figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 11 45 rlf4 0 General Information: [Verses 45–54] explain what happened after Jesus raised Lazarus from the dead. JHN 11 45 ksi3 τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 See how you translated this phrase in [verse 19](../11/19.md). JHN 11 47 yl3k figs-explicit Συνέδριον 1 The **Sanhedrin** is the name of the highest ruling council of the Jews. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the Sanhedrin, their ruling council” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1639,7 +1643,7 @@ JHN 12 3 qblr figs-possession μύρου νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυ JHN 12 3 b3sa translate-unknown νάρδου πιστικῆς πολυτίμου 1 nard The **perfumed oil** was made from the **oil** of a **nard** plant, which is sometimes called “spikenard.” The **oil** is extracted from the roots of this plant. If your readers would not be familiar with **nard** plants, you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “of very precious scented plants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JHN 12 3 pq7c figs-activepassive ἡ δὲ οἰκία ἐπληρώθη ἐκ τῆς ὀσμῆς τοῦ μύρου 1 The house was filled with the fragrance of the perfume If your language does not use the passive voice, you can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Now the fragrance of the perfumed oil filled the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 12 4 frgx translate-names Ἰούδας ὁ Ἰσκαριώτης 1 the one who would betray him **Judas** is the name of a man, and **Iscariot** is a distinguishing term that most likely means he came from the village of Kerioth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -JHN 12 4 qbja λέγει 1 the one who would betray him To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 12 4 qbja figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 the one who would betray him Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 12 5 e8d7 figs-rquestion διὰ τί τοῦτο τὸ μύρον οὐκ ἐπράθη τριακοσίων δηναρίων, καὶ ἐδόθη πτωχοῖς? 1 Why was this perfume not sold for three hundred denarii and given to the poor? Judas is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize that he though the **perfumed oil** should not be poured on Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “This perfume could have been sold for 300 denarii and given to the poor!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 12 5 dx9e translate-bmoney δηναρίων 1 denarii The word **denarii** is the plural form of “denarius,” which was a denomination of money in the Roman Empire that was equivalent to one days’ wages. Alternate translation: “for 300 days’ wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) JHN 12 5 tted figs-nominaladj πτωχοῖς 1 Judas is using the adjective **poor** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “to people who are poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -1658,7 +1662,7 @@ JHN 12 8 kn28 figs-explicit ἐμὲ δὲ οὐ πάντοτε ἔχετε 1 Bu JHN 12 9 qm36 writing-background οὖν 1 Now **Then** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. This break continues until the end of [verse 11](../12/11.md). In this verse John gives background information about a new group of people that has come to Bethany. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 12 9 i6mn grammar-collectivenouns ὁ ὄχλος πολὺς 1 See how you translated **crowd** in [5:13](../05/13.md). Alternate translation: “a large group of people” or “very many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) JHN 12 9 ycv6 figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 Here, **the Jews** refers to people from Judea. See the General Notes for this chapter. Alternate translation: “the Judeans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -JHN 12 9 ilgp ἐστιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he was” +JHN 12 9 ilgp figs-pastforfuture ἐστιν 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 12 9 yokk figs-idiom ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 See how you translated this in [verse 1](../12/01.md). Alternate translation: “had made alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 12 10 nt9p ἐβουλεύσαντο 1 See how you translated this word in [11:53](../11/53.md). JHN 12 10 b9ri figs-explicit καὶ τὸν Λάζαρον ἀποκτείνωσιν 1 Here, **also** implies that **the chief priests** want to kill **Lazarus** in addition to Jesus, whom they already plotted to kill in [11:53](../11/53.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “they might put Lazarus to death in addition to Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1703,7 +1707,7 @@ JHN 12 21 lr8c translate-names Βηθσαϊδὰ 1 Bethsaida **Bethsaida** is th JHN 12 21 c8qt κύριε 1 The Greeks call **Philip** **Sir** in order to show respect or politeness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lord]]) JHN 12 21 xgoj figs-declarative θέλομεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν ἰδεῖν 1 The Greeks are using a statement to make a request. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for a request. Alternate translation: “may we see Jesus?” or “could you take us to see Jesus?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) JHN 12 22 e9vn figs-explicit λέγει τῷ Ἀνδρέᾳ 1 **Philip** tells **Andrew** about the Greeks’ request to see **Jesus**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “speaks to Andrew what the Greeks had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 12 22 vzih ἔρχεται…καὶ λέγει…ἔρχεται…καὶ λέγουσιν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “went and spoke … went and spoke” +JHN 12 22 vzih figs-pastforfuture ἔρχεται…καὶ λέγει…ἔρχεται…καὶ λέγουσιν 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 12 22 b9re figs-explicit λέγουσιν τῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 **Philip** and **Andrew** tell **Jesus** about the Greeks’ request to see him. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “speak to Jesus about what the Greeks had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 12 23 jl9u figs-metonymy ἐλήλυθεν ἡ ὥρα 1 The hour has come for the Son of Man to be glorified Here, **hour** refers to a point in time when something happens. It does not refer to a 60-minute length of time. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to chapter four. Alternate translation: “The point in time has come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 12 23 zj5j figs-explicit ἵνα δοξασθῇ ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Here, Jesus refers to his upcoming death, resurrection, and return to heaven as the time when he would be **glorified**. If this use of **glorified** might be confusing in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “so that the Son of Man might be glorified through his death, resurrection, and ascension” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1805,21 +1809,21 @@ JHN 13 2 iq56 translate-names Ἰούδας, Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτη JHN 13 3 qtr3 grammar-connect-logic-result εἰδὼς 1 Father Here, the word **Knowing** could mean: (1) the rest of this verse is the reason why Jesus did the result that John describes in the next verse. Alternate translation: “Because he knew” (2) this verse provides a contrast between who Jesus is and what he would do in the next verse. Alternate translation: “Although he knew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) JHN 13 3 fd2t guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 13 3 x8hc figs-metonymy εἰς τὰς χεῖρας 1 had given everything over into his hands Here, John uses **hands** figuratively to refer to power and authority. If this use of **hands** might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “into his power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 13 4 t7cu ἐγείρεται…τίθησιν 1 He got up from dinner and took off his outer clothing To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense **gets up** and **takes off** in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “He got up … took off” +JHN 13 4 t7cu figs-pastforfuture ἐγείρεται…τίθησιν 1 He got up from dinner and took off his outer clothing Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 4 nm8h figs-explicit ἐγείρεται ἐκ τοῦ δείπνου 1 He got up from dinner and took off his outer clothing During Jesus’ time, people would often eat meals while lying on their sides on low couches next to the table. Here, **gets up** means that Jesus went from lying on his side on a couch next to the table where he was eating **supper** to standing up. If this use of **gets up from supper** might confuse your readers, you could sat the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “He gets up from the table where he was eating supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 4 a9yt τίθησιν τὰ ἱμάτια 1 He got up from dinner and took off his outer clothing Here, **outer clothing** refers to clothing that is worn over undergarments. It does not refer to a coat that would be worn over a person's regular clothing. Use the term in your language for the regular clothing that people wear on top of their underwear. JHN 13 4 gfe4 figs-explicit λαβὼν λέντιον 1 Here, **towel** refers to piece of cloth that is long enough to wrap around Jesus' waist and still has enough leftover cloth to wipe the disciples' feet. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “having taken a long towel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 13 5 qfqd βάλλει 1 began to wash the feet of the disciples To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense here in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he poured” +JHN 13 5 qfqd figs-pastforfuture βάλλει 1 began to wash the feet of the disciples Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 5 adm9 figs-activepassive ᾧ ἦν διεζωσμένος 1 began to wash the feet of the disciples If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that he had tied around himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 13 6 hevx ἔρχεται…λέγει 1 Lord, are you going to wash my feet? To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense here in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he came … He said” +JHN 13 6 hevx figs-pastforfuture ἔρχεται…λέγει 1 Lord, are you going to wash my feet? Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 6 bz27 figs-rquestion Κύριε, σύ μου νίπτεις τοὺς πόδας? 1 Lord, are you going to wash my feet? **Peter** is using a rhetorical question here to show that he does not want Jesus to wash his feet. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Lord, it is not right for you to wash my feet!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 13 7 o7nf figs-explicit μετὰ ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** refers to Jesus’ crucifixion and resurrection. If this use of **these things** would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “after the events that are about to take place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 13 8 oy8j λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense here in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 13 8 oy8j figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 8 f6dg figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ νίψω σε, οὐκ ἔχεις μέρος μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 If I do not wash you, you have no share with me **Jesus** uses two negative statements to convince **Peter** to allow him to **wash** his **feet**. If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “I must wash you so that you can have a share with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) JHN 13 8 m90p figs-explicit ἐὰν μὴ νίψω σε, οὐκ ἔχεις μέρος μετ’ ἐμοῦ 1 Here, Jesus’ use of **no share with me** could imply: (1) that Peter must let him wash his feet if he wants to receive his **share** of the inheritance that God promised to give his people. Alternate translation: “If I do not wash you, you will not share in God’s promised inheritance with me” (2) that Peter must let him wash his feet if he wants to continue being his disciple. Alternate translation: “If I do not wash you, you will no longer be my disciple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 13 9 bjgq λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense here in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 13 9 bjgq figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 9 irnh figs-ellipsis μὴ τοὺς πόδας μου μόνον, 1 Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “wash not only my feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -JHN 13 10 dp8l λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense here in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 13 10 dp8l figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 10 is57 figs-metaphor ὁ λελουμένος οὐκ ἔχει χρείαν, εἰ μὴ τοὺς πόδας νίψασθαι 1 He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet In this verse, Jesus uses **washed** figuratively to refer to God forgiving a person for their sins. He also uses **feet** figuratively to refer to daily sins, because people in Jesus’ culture had to wash their **feet** frequently due to dirty roads. If this use of **washed** and **feet** might be confusing in your language, you could say their meanings clearly or use similes. Alternate translation: “The one who has received God’s forgiveness for their sins, only needs to be forgiven for his daily sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 13 10 bbon figs-activepassive ὁ λελουμένος 1 He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “The one who someone had washed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 13 10 o25q figs-metaphor ἀλλ’ ἔστιν καθαρὸς ὅλος; καὶ ὑμεῖς καθαροί ἐστε 1 He who is bathed has no need, except to wash his feet In this verse, Jesus uses **clean** figuratively to refer to someone who has been forgiven for their sins. If this use of **clean** might be confusing in your language, you could say its meaning clearly or use a simile. Alternate translation: “but he has been completely forgiven for his sins, and you have been forgiven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1857,18 +1861,18 @@ JHN 13 23 p2ee figs-explicit ἐν τῷ κόλπῳ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 Jesu JHN 13 24 eido figs-explicit τούτῳ 1 Jesus’ side Here, **this one** refers to John, who calls himself the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in the previous verse. If this use of **this one** would be confusing in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “to the disciple whom Jesus loved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 25 iqcj figs-explicit ἐκεῖνος 1 Jesus’ side Here, **that one** refers to John, who calls himself the disciple “whom Jesus loved” in [verse 23](../13/23.md). If this use of **that one** would be confusing in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “that disciple whom Jesus loved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 25 kqza figs-explicit λέγει 1 Jesus’ side [Verse 28](../13/28.md) indicates that the disciples did not know why Jesus spoke to Judas in the way he did. This means that they must not have heard the conversation in this verse and the next because John and Jesus were speaking quietly. If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “said in a quite voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 13 25 b22k λέγει 1 Jesus’ side To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense here in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 13 25 b22k figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Jesus’ side Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 26 qpj8 translate-names Ἰούδᾳ Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτη 1 See how you translated this phrase in [13:2](../13/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) JHN 13 27 r8lk figs-ellipsis καὶ μετὰ τὸ ψωμίον 1 Then after the bread John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And after Judas took the bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 13 27 xk39 figs-idiom τότε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς ἐκεῖνον ὁ Σατανᾶς 1 Satan entered into him Here, **entered into** is an idiom that means **Satan** took complete control of Judas. If this idiom would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Satan then started to command Judas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -JHN 13 27 agd7 λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense here in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 13 27 agd7 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 28 r37z writing-background 0 In [verses 28–29](../13/28.md), John interrupts the main story line in order to provide background information about the disciples’ confusion. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) JHN 13 28 fl66 figs-explicit τῶν ἀνακειμένων 1 See how you translated **reclining to eat** in [verse 23](../13/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 13 29 yagv λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense here in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 13 29 yagv figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 29 p66v figs-explicit ἑορτήν 1 Here, **festival** refers to the Jewish Passover Festival. See how you translated this word in [12:12](../12/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 13 29 rv4z figs-quotations τοῖς πτωχοῖς ἵνα τι δῷ 1 that he should give something to the poor If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Give something to the poor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) JHN 13 30 dw7m writing-background ἦν δὲ νύξ 1 It was night Here John provides background information about the time of day when Judas **went out** to betray Jesus. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -JHN 13 31 wi4o λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense here in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 13 31 wi4o figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 31 apde figs-pastforfuture νῦν ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου, καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ἐδοξάσθη ἐν αὐτῷ 1 In this verse, Jesus uses the past tense **has been glorified** twice figuratively in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “Now the Son of Man will be glorified, and God will be glorified in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 31 d6l8 figs-activepassive νῦν ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Now the Son of Man is glorified, and God is glorified in him If your language does not use the passive voice, you can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Now God will glorify the Son of Man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 13 31 gd4y figs-123person ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, the Son of Man, have been glorified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) @@ -1883,8 +1887,8 @@ JHN 13 33 zrqu figs-infostructure καὶ καθὼς εἶπον τοῖς Ἰ JHN 13 33 sjwl figs-infostructure ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασθε ἐλθεῖν 1 See how you translated this sentence in [8:21](../08/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) JHN 13 34 nmf5 figs-declarative καθὼς ἠγάπησα ὑμᾶς, ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀγαπᾶτε ἀλλήλους 1 love Jesus is using a future statement to give an instruction. If this is confusing in your language, you can use a more natural form for instruction. Alternate translation: “just as I have loved you, so also you must love one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) JHN 13 35 kyd9 figs-hyperbole πάντες 1 everyone Here, Jesus uses **everyone** as an exaggeration that refers only to those people who would see how the disciples love each other. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -JHN 13 36 s0gc λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense here in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” -JHN 13 37 xpt1 λέγει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, John uses the present tense here in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said” +JHN 13 36 s0gc figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JHN 13 37 xpt1 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 13 37 ye6m figs-euphemism τὴν ψυχήν μου…θήσω 1 lay down my life See how you translated a similar phrase in [10:11](../10/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) JHN 13 38 qp88 figs-rquestion τὴν ψυχήν σου ὑπὲρ ἐμοῦ θήσεις? 1 Will you lay down your life for me? Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. He knows that Peter is not really willing to **lay down** his life for Jesus. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You will certainly not lay down your life for me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) JHN 13 38 juha figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω σοι 1 Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -1892,73 +1896,110 @@ JHN 13 38 sp7p οὐ μὴ ἀλέκτωρ φωνήσῃ, ἕως οὗ ἀρν JHN 13 38 ef9n figs-metonymy οὐ μὴ ἀλέκτωρ φωνήσῃ, ἕως οὗ 1 the rooster will not crow before you have denied me three times Jesus is referring figuratively to a certain time of day. Roosters crow just before the sun appears in the morning. In other words, Jesus is referring to dawn. Alternate translation: “before another morning begins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 13 38 ui2h translate-unknown ἀλέκτωρ 1 A **rooster** is a bird that calls out loudly around the time the sun comes up. If your readers would not be familiar with this bird, you could use the name of a bird in your area that calls out or sings just before dawn, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the birds that sing in the morning may certainly not sing before which you will deny three times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JHN 13 38 kfze figs-genericnoun ἀλέκτωρ 1 Jesus is not speaking of one particular **rooster** but of roosters in general. Alternate translation: “the roosters” or “the birds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -JHN 14 intro kv6m 0 # John 14 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “My Father’s house”

Jesus used these words to speak of heaven, where God lives, not of the temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

### The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Comforter ([John 14:16](../../jhn/14/16.md)) who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them, He is also the Spirit of truth ([John 14:17](../../jhn/14/17.md)) who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]]) -JHN 14 1 a2xv 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus reclines at the table with his disciples and continues to speak to them. -JHN 14 1 w3dn figs-metonymy μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία 1 Do not let your heart be troubled Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s inner being. Alternate translation: “Stop being so anxious and worried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 14 2 cp9z ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ Πατρός μου, μοναὶ πολλαί εἰσιν 1 In my Father’s house are many rooms Alternate translation: “There are many places to live in my Father’s house” -JHN 14 2 eca3 ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 In my Father’s house This refers to heaven, where God lives. +JHN 14 intro kv6m 0 # John 14 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus says he is the way to the Father (14:1–14)
2. Jesus promises that the Holy Spirit will come (14:15–31)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “My Father’s house”

Jesus used these words to refer to heaven, where God lives. It does not refer to the temple in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]])

### The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. He called the Holy Spirit the Helper ([John 14:16](../../jhn/14/16.md)) who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them. Jesus also calls him the Spirit of Truth ([John 14:17](../../jhn/14/17.md)) who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]]) +JHN 14 1 a2xv 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues in this chapter. Jesus is reclines at the table with his disciples during the evening meal and continues to speak to them. +JHN 14 1 ughe figs-you 0 In verses 1–7, the word “you” is always plural and refers to Jesus’ disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive and rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +JHN 14 1 w3dn figs-metaphor μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία 1 Do not let your heart be troubled Here, Jesus uses **heart** figuratively to represent the disciples’ thoughts and emotions. If this use of **heart** would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Do not let your thoughts be troubled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 1 rq43 figs-declarative πιστεύετε εἰς τὸν Θεόν, καὶ εἰς ἐμὲ πιστεύετε 1 Both of these clauses could be: (1) commands, as in the UST. (2) statements. Alternate translation: “You believe in God; you also believe in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]]) +JHN 14 2 eca3 figs-metaphor ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 In my Father’s house Here, Jesus uses **house** figuratively to refer to heaven, which is the place where God dwells. If this use of **house** would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “In the place where my Father dwells” or “In heaven where my Father dwells”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 14 2 v9px guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 2 fp9r μοναὶ πολλαί 1 many rooms Here, **rooms** can refer to single rooms, or to larger dwellings. -JHN 14 2 xb2y figs-you πορεύομαι ἑτοιμάσαι τόπον ὑμῖν 1 I am going to prepare a place for you Jesus is **going to prepare a place** in heaven for every person who trusts in him. The **you** is plural and refers to all his disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -JHN 14 4 ir1d figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδόν 1 the way This could be: (1) a metaphor that refers to “the way to God.” (2) a metaphor that refers to “the one who takes people to God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 14 5 e1dl πῶς δυνάμεθα τὴν ὁδὸν εἰδέναι 1 how can we know the way? Alternate translation: “how can we know how to get there?” -JHN 14 6 i8le figs-metaphor ἡ ἀλήθεια 1 the truth This could be: (1) a metaphor that means “the true person.” (2) a metaphor that means “the one who speaks true words about God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 14 6 z9tr figs-metaphor ἡ ζωή 1 the life This is a metaphor that means Jesus can give life to people. Alternate translation: “the one who can make people alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 14 6 g5hn figs-explicit οὐδεὶς ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα, εἰ μὴ δι’ ἐμοῦ 1 no one comes to the Father except through me People can come to God and live with him only by trusting Jesus. Alternate translation: “No one can come to the Father and live with him unless he comes through me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 2 n3wl εἰ δὲ μή, εἶπον ἂν ὑμῖν, ὅτι πορεύομαι ἑτοιμάσαι τόπον ὑμῖν 1 Father The word translated **for** could also be translated “that,” in which case this sentence would be a question instead of a statement. With either interpretation the point of the sentence is the same: Jesus is emphasizing that what he has just said in the previous sentence is true. He is going to heaven **to prepare a place for** his people. Alternate translation: “But if not, would I have told you that I am going to prepare a place for you?” +JHN 14 3 sadi grammar-connect-condition-fact ἐὰν πορευθῶ 1 Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he knows that it will actually take place. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “when I go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 14 4 ir1d figs-extrainfo τὴν ὁδόν 1 the way Here, Jesus uses **the way** figuratively. This could refer to: (1) himself as the means by which people can go to God in heaven, which is clearly the meaning for **the way** in [verse 6](../14/06.md). (2) a manner of life that will eventually lead someone to be with God in heaven. Since the disciples did not understand this when Jesus said it, you do not need to explain its meaning further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]]) +JHN 14 5 aode translate-names Θωμᾶς 1 See how you translated this name in [11:16](../11/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +JHN 14 5 o21d figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JHN 14 5 j2go figs-rquestion πῶς δυνάμεθα τὴν ὁδὸν εἰδέναι 1 **Thomas** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We surely do not know the way!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +JHN 14 6 jdwf figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 the truth Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JHN 14 6 qoc0 figs-metaphor ἡ ὁδὸς 1 Here Jesus uses **the way** figuratively to indicate that he is the means by which people can go to God, who is in heaven. Trusting in Jesus is the only way to have access to God. If this use of **the way** might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who gives people access to the Father” or “the means by which one may come to the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 6 i8le figs-metaphor ἡ ἀλήθεια 1 the truth Here Jesus uses **the truth** figuratively to indicate that he is the one who reveals God’s truth to people. If this use of **the truth** might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who reveals God’s truth” or “the means by which people can know God’s truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 6 z9tr figs-metaphor ἡ ζωή 1 the life Here Jesus uses **the life** figuratively to indicate that he is the means by which people can receive eternal **life**. If this use of **the life** might confuse your readers, you could use a simile or say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who makes people spiritually alive” or “the means by which one may receive eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 6 g5hn figs-explicit οὐδεὶς ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα, εἰ μὴ δι’ ἐμοῦ 1 no one comes to the Father except through me Here, **through me** means that a person can come to God only by trusting Jesus. If this use of **through me** might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “No one comes to the Father except by believing in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 6 f95q guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +JHN 14 7 wx89 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ἐγνώκατε με 1 Father Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If you have known me, and you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 14 8 wwv7 translate-names Φίλιππος 1 **Philip** is the name of a man who was one of Jesus’ twelve disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+JHN 14 8 fy8b figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) JHN 14 8 kum1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Κύριε, δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν Πατέρα 1 Lord, show us the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 9 mr1a figs-rquestion τοσοῦτον χρόνον μεθ’ ὑμῶν εἰμι, καὶ οὐκ ἔγνωκάς με, Φίλιππε? 1 I have been with you for so long and you still do not know me, Philip? This remark appears in the form of a question to add emphasis to Jesus’ words. Alternate translation: “Philip, I have been with you disciples already for a very long time. You should know me by now!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 14 9 l3s8 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ ἑωρακὼς ἐμὲ, ἑώρακεν τὸν Πατέρα 1 Whoever has seen me has seen the Father To see Jesus, who is God the Son, is to see God **the Father**. **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 9 x1uh figs-rquestion πῶς σὺ λέγεις, δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν Πατέρα? 1 How can you say, ‘Show us the Father’? This remark appears in the form of a question to emphasize Jesus’ words to Philip. Alternate translation: “So you really should not be saying, ‘Show us the Father!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 14 10 v2jb 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus asks Philip a question and then he continues to speak to all of his disciples. -JHN 14 10 hc1z figs-rquestion οὐ πιστεύεις ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ, καὶ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί ἐστιν? 1 Do you not believe … in me? This remark appears in the form of a question to emphasize Jesus’ words to Philip. Alternate translation: “You really should believe that I am in the Father and the Father is in me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -JHN 14 10 e4se guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρὶ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 10 pgk6 τὰ ῥήματα ἃ ἐγὼ λαλῶ ὑμῖν, ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐ λαλῶ 1 The words that I say to you I do not speak from my own authority Alternate translation: “What I am telling you is not from me” or “The words I tell you are not from me” -JHN 14 10 wh9w τὰ ῥήματα ἃ ἐγὼ λαλῶ ὑμῖν 1 The words that I say to you Here, **you** is plural. Jesus is now speaking to all of his disciples. +JHN 14 9 q2iy figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 I have been with you for so long and you still do not know me, Philip? Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JHN 14 9 mr1a figs-rquestion τοσοῦτον χρόνον μεθ’ ὑμῶν εἰμι, καὶ οὐκ ἔγνωκάς με, Φίλιππε? 1 I have been with you for so long and you still do not know me, Philip? Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize the truth of what he is saying. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “So long a time I am with you, and you should know me, Philip!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +JHN 14 9 vx5b figs-you ὑμῶν…σὺ 1 The first occurrence of **you** in this verse is plural, but the second occurrence is singular. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
+JHN 14 9 l3s8 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 Whoever has seen me has seen the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +JHN 14 9 x1uh figs-rquestion πῶς σὺ λέγεις, δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν Πατέρα? 1 How can you say, ‘Show us the Father’? **Jesus** is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying to **Philip**. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You really should not say, ‘Show us the Father!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +JHN 14 10 hc1z figs-rquestion οὐ πιστεύεις ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ, καὶ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί ἐστιν? 1 Do you not believe … in me? Jesus is using a rhetorical question here to emphasize what he is saying to Philip. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You really should believe that I am in the Father, and the Father is in me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +JHN 14 10 li33 figs-idiom ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ, καὶ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί ἐστιν 1 Do you not believe … in me? See how you translated this expression in [10:38](../10/38.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +JHN 14 10 e4se guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρὶ…ὁ Πατὴρ…Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +JHN 14 10 wh9w figs-you τὰ ῥήματα ἃ ἐγὼ λαλῶ ὑμῖν 1 The words that I say to you Here, **you** is plural. Jesus shifts from speaking to Philip to speaking to all of his disciples. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +JHN 14 10 pgk6 figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα 1 The words that I say to you I do not speak from my own authority Here, **words** refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If this use of **words** might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the message” or “the teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
JHN 14 10 seon figs-explicit ἀπ’ ἐμαυτοῦ 1 See how you translated this phrase in [5:30](../05/30.md). Alternate translation: “on my own authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 14 11 ew6g figs-idiom ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ, καὶ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί 1 I am in the Father, and the Father is in me This is an idiom that means God the Father and Jesus have a unique relationship. Alternate translation: “I am one with the Father, and the Father is one with me” or “my Father and I are just as though we were one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +JHN 14 10 e3li figs-explicit τὰ ἔργα 1 See how you translated **works** in [7:3](../07/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN 14 11 ew6g figs-idiom ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρὶ, καὶ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί 1 I am in the Father, and the Father is in me See how you translated this in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +JHN 14 11 r2w8 figs-explicit τὰ ἔργα 1 See how you translated **works** in the previous works. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 12 gh64 figs-doublet ἀμὴν, ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν, 1 Truly, truly Jesus uses this phrase to emphasize the truth of the statement that follows. See how you translated this is in [1:51](../01/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -JHN 14 12 h2rh ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ 1 believes in me This means to believe that Jesus is the Son of God. +JHN 14 12 icjc figs-infostructure ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, τὰ ἔργα ἃ ἐγὼ ποιῶ, κἀκεῖνος ποιήσει 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “the one believing in me will also do the works that I do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +JHN 14 12 h2rh figs-explicit τὰ ἔργα 1 See how you translated **works** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 12 ui5t figs-ellipsis καὶ μείζονα τούτων ποιήσει 1 Jesus is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply the word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and he will do greater works than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 14 12 cn14 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 Father **Father** is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 13 n2id figs-metonymy ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 Whatever you ask in my name Here, **name** is a metonym that represents the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “Whatever you ask, using my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 14 13 i138 figs-activepassive ἵνα δοξασθῇ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ 1 so that the Father will be glorified in the Son You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “so I can show everyone how great my Father is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 14 13 j6nh guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ…Υἱῷ 1 Father … Son **Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 14 sgk6 figs-metonymy ἐάν τι αἰτήσητέ με ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου, ἐγὼ ποιήσω 1 If you ask me anything in my name, I will do it Here, **name** is a metonym that represents the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “If you ask me anything as one of my followers, I will do it” or “Whatever you ask of me, I will do it because you belong to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 14 16 tu1e Παράκλητον 1 Comforter This refers to the Holy Spirit. -JHN 14 17 sc6r Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Spirit of truth This refers to the Holy Spirit who teaches people what is true about God. -JHN 14 17 i2v7 figs-metonymy ὃ ὁ κόσμος οὐ δύναται λαβεῖν 1 The world cannot receive him Here the **world** is a metonym that refers to the people who oppose God. Alternate translation: “whom the unbelieving people in this world will never welcome” or “whom those who oppose God will not accept” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 14 18 hy8v figs-explicit οὐκ ἀφήσω ὑμᾶς ὀρφανούς 1 leave you alone Here Jesus implies that he **will not leave** his disciples with no one to care for them. Alternate translation: “I will not leave you with no one to care for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 14 19 r5q8 figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 the world Here the **world** is a metonym that represents the people who do not belong to God. Alternate translation: “the unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 14 20 b87j γνώσεσθε ὑμεῖς ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί μου 1 you will know that I am in my Father God the **Father** and Jesus live as one person. Alternate translation: “you will know that my Father and I are just like one person” +JHN 14 13 n2id figs-idiom ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 Whatever you ask in my name Here, **ask in my name** could mean: (1) to request something as the representative of Jesus or as if Jesus himself was requesting it. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask as if I were asking” or “whatever you might ask that I would ask” (2) to request something with the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “Whatever you ask with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +JHN 14 13 i138 figs-activepassive ἵνα δοξασθῇ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ 1 so that the Father will be glorified in the Son If your language does not use the passive voice, you can translate this in an active form. The one that may do the action could be: (1) Jesus, in which case **in the Son** would mean “by the Son.” Alternate translation: “so that the Son may glorify the Father” (2) everyone who experiences the result of what has been asked. Alternate translation: “so that everyone may glorify the Father in the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +JHN 14 13 j6nh guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ…Υἱῷ 1 Father … Son **Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +JHN 14 13 zr8g figs-123person ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ 1 Son Jesus is speaking of himself in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this phrase in the first person. Alternate translation: “in me, the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +JHN 14 14 sgk6 figs-idiom ἐάν τι αἰτήσητέ με ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 If you ask me anything in my name See how you translated **in my name** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +JHN 14 15 bws1 figs-explicit τὰς ἐντολὰς τὰς ἐμὰς τηρήσετε 1 Here, **keep** means to obey. If this use of **keep** would be confusing in your language, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you will obey my commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN 14 16 tu1e figs-explicit Παράκλητον 1 Comforter **Helper** here refers to the Holy Spirit. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. If this use of **Helper** might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “one who helps, the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 17 sc6r figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Spirit of truth The **Spirit of Truth** refers to the Holy Spirit. See the discussion of this term in the General Notes for this chapter. If this term might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Holy Spirit of Truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 17 ms9g figs-possession τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας 1 Spirit of truth Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the **Spirit** who teaches people the **Truth** about God. If this is not clear in your language, you could use a difference expression. Alternate translation: “the Spirit that teaches God’s truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +JHN 14 17 i2v7 figs-metonymy ὃ ὁ κόσμος οὐ δύναται λαβεῖν 1 The world cannot receive him Here Jesus uses **world** figuratively to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. If this use of **world** would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whom the people in this world who oppose God are not able to receive” or “whom those who oppose God are not able to receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 14 17 clz3 figs-explicit ἐν ὑμῖν ἔσται 1 The world cannot receive him Jesus uses the future tense **will** to indicate that the Holy **Spirit** would be inside Jesus’ disciples at a future point in time. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “will be in you at a future time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 18 hy8v figs-metaphor οὐκ ἀφήσω ὑμᾶς ὀρφανούς 1 leave you alone Here Jesus uses **orphans** figuratively to refer to people who have no one to care for them. If this use of **orphans** would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will not leave you with no one to care for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 18 k5bs figs-pastforfuture ἔρχομαι 1 Here Jesus uses the present tense **I am coming** to refer to something that will happen in the near future. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “I will come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JHN 14 19 r5q8 figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 the world See how you translated **the world** in [verse 17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 14 19 yjsl figs-explicit ὅτι ἐγὼ ζῶ, καὶ ὑμεῖς ζήσεσθε 1 the world In this verse, Jesus uses **live** to refer to living forever after one’s resurrection. Because Jesus will live forever after his death and resurrection, so too will his disciples life forever after they die and are resurrected. If this use of **live** would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Because I live forever, you will also life forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 19 cil5 figs-pastforfuture ὅτι ἐγὼ ζῶ 1 the world Here Jesus uses the present tense **I live** to refer to when he comes back to life after his death. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you could use the future tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Because I will live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JHN 14 20 ckki figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 you will know that I am in my Father **On that day** here refers to the time that Jesus’ disciples would see him again after his resurrection. If this phrase would be confusing in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “When you see me again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 20 b87j figs-explicit ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ Πατρί μου, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν ἐμοὶ, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 you will know that I am in my Father In this verse Jesus uses **in** to indicate being united with someone. If this would be confusing in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “I am united with my Father, and you are united with me, and I am united with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 20 he2a guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρί μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 20 ht8z ὑμεῖς ἐν ἐμοὶ, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 you are in me, and that I am in you Alternate translation: “you and I are just like one person” -JHN 14 21 rw8n ἀγαπῶν 1 loves This kind of love comes from God and focuses on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself. This kind of love cares for others, no matter what they do. -JHN 14 21 gjl8 figs-activepassive ὁ δὲ ἀγαπῶν με, ἀγαπηθήσεται ὑπὸ τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 he who loves me will be loved by my Father You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “and my Father will love everyone who loves me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +JHN 14 20 ht8z figs-doublet ὑμεῖς ἐν ἐμοὶ, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 you are in me, and that I am in you These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize that the unity between Jesus and his disciples. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “you and I are just like one person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+JHN 14 21 rw8n figs-metaphor ὁ ἔχων τὰς ἐντολάς μου 1 Jesus speaks figuratively of **commandments** as if they were an object that someone could possess. If your readers would not speak of knowing **commandments** in this way, you could say the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “The one knowing my commandments” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 21 x8m8 figs-explicit τηρῶν αὐτὰς 1 Here, **keeping** means obeying. See how you translated this word in [verse 15](../14/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 21 gjl8 figs-activepassive ὁ δὲ ἀγαπῶν με, ἀγαπηθήσεται ὑπὸ τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 he who loves me will be loved by my Father If your language does not use the passive voice, you can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “and my Father will love the one loving me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 14 21 qsu7 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 22 r22b translate-names Ἰούδας, οὐχ ὁ Ἰσκαριώτης 1 Judas (not Iscariot) This refers to another disciple whose name was Judas, not to the disciple who was from the village of Kerioth who betrayed Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -JHN 14 22 a7aa τί γέγονεν, ὅτι ἡμῖν μέλλεις ἐμφανίζειν σεαυτὸν 1 why is it that you will show yourself to us Here the word **show** refers to revealing how wonderful Jesus is. Alternate translation: “why will you reveal yourself only to us” or “why will you only let us see how wonderful you are” -JHN 14 22 gv3a figs-metonymy οὐχὶ τῷ κόσμῳ 1 not to the world Here, **world** is a metonym that represents the people who oppose God. Alternate translation: “not to those who do not belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 14 23 a9av 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus responds to Judas (not Iscariot). -JHN 14 23 xez7 ἐάν τις ἀγαπᾷ με, τὸν λόγον μου τηρήσει 1 If anyone loves me, he will keep my word Alternate translation: “The one who loves me will do what I have told him to do” -JHN 14 23 ai8y ἀγαπᾷ 1 loves This kind of love comes from God and focuses on the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself. This kind of love cares for others, no matter what they do. +JHN 14 21 jd80 figs-explicit ἐμφανίσω αὐτῷ ἐμαυτόν 1 This could mean: (1) Jesus will reveal himself to his disciples after his resurrection, as also stated in [verse 19](../14/19.md). Alternate translation: “I will show myself to him after I live again” (2) Jesus will reveal his character to the minds of anyone who loves and obeys him, as suggested by his statement in [verse 23](../14/23.md). Alternate translation: “I will reveal to him what I am like” (3) Jesus will both reveal himself to his disciples after his resurrection and reveal his character to everyone who loves and obeys him. Alternate translation: “I will reveal myself to him after I live again and will reveal what I am like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 22 r22b translate-names Ἰούδας, οὐχ ὁ Ἰσκαριώτης 1 Judas (not Iscariot) Here, **Judas** is the name of a man who was another disciple of Jesus. He was not the other disciple named **Judas** who was from the village of Kerioth and betrayed Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +JHN 14 22 qet7 figs-pastforfuture λέγει 1 Here John uses the present tense in past narration in order to call attention to a development in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JHN 14 22 a7aa figs-explicit τί γέγονεν, ὅτι ἡμῖν μέλλεις ἐμφανίζειν σεαυτὸν 1 why is it that you will show yourself to us **Judas** uses the expression **what has happened** to express his confusion about what Jesus said in the previous verse. The Jewish people were expecting the Messiah to come and reveal himself to the whole **world**, but Jesus said he would only show himself to his disciples. Therefore, **Judas** thinks something has caused Jesus to act differently than he had expected. Alternate translation: “what is causing you to only show yourself to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 22 v7dr figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 why is it that you will show yourself to us When **Judas** says **us**, he is speaking of himself and Jesus’ other disciples, so **us** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +JHN 14 22 gv3a figs-metonymy τῷ κόσμῳ 1 not to the world Here, **world** refers to the people who live in it. Alternate translation: “to the people living in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+JHN 14 23 xez7 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον μου τηρήσει 1 If anyone loves me, he will keep my word See how you translated a similar phrase in [8:51](../08/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 14 23 xk31 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 My Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 23 h9tl figs-explicit πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐλευσόμεθα, καὶ μονὴν παρ’ αὐτῷ ποιησόμεθα 1 we will come to him and we will make our home with him The Father and the Son will share life with those who obey what Jesus commands. Alternate translation: “we will come to live with him, and will have a personal relationship with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 14 24 b7di ὁ λόγος ὃν ἀκούετε, οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸς, ἀλλὰ τοῦ πέμψαντός με Πατρός 1 The word that you hear is not from me but from the Father who sent me Alternate translation: “the things I have told you are not things that I have decided to say on my own” -JHN 14 24 c3ju ὁ λόγος 1 The word Alternate translation: “the message” -JHN 14 24 d7ay ὃν ἀκούετε 1 that you hear Here when Jesus says **you** he is speaking to all of his disciples. -JHN 14 24 az71 figs-explicit τοῦ πέμψαντός με Πατρός 1 Here, this phrase refers to God. See how you translated it in [5:23](../05/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 23 ad6d figs-exclusive πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐλευσόμεθα, καὶ μονὴν παρ’ αὐτῷ ποιησόμεθα 1 My Father When **Jesus** says **we** in this verse, he is speaking of himself and God the Father, so **we** would be exclusive. Your language may require you to mark this form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +JHN 14 23 h9tl figs-explicit καὶ μονὴν παρ’ αὐτῷ ποιησόμεθα 1 we will come to him and we will make our home with him This clause refers to God and **Jesus** dwelling within the person who **loves** and obeys **Jesus**. After Jesus’ resurrection and return to heaven, he and God live inside every believer through the Holy Spirit. If **make a dwelling place with** might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and we will live within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 24 dj2n figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους μου…τηρεῖ 1 See how you translated a similar phrase in [8:51](../08/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 14 24 c3ju figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 The word Here, **word** refers to what Jesus has just said in the preceding verses. If this use of **word** would confuse your readers, you could say that meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “these things I have just said” or “this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 14 24 d7ay figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμὸς 1 that you hear Here, **mine** refers to the source of what Jesus has said. What Jesus has said did not come from himself, but from God. If this use of **mine** would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “does not come from me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 24 ke2f figs-possession τοῦ πέμψαντός με Πατρός 1 Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the source of **the word**. If this is not clear in your language, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “has come from the Father who sent me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +JHN 14 24 az71 figs-explicit τοῦ πέμψαντός με Πατρός 1 Here this phrase refers to God. See how you translated it in [5:23](../05/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 24 jhdc guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ…Πατρός 1 **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +JHN 14 26 lbgf figs-infostructure ὁ δὲ Παράκλητος, τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ πέμψει ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου, ἐκεῖνος ὑμᾶς διδάξει πάντα, καὶ ὑπομνήσει ὑμᾶς πάντα ἃ εἶπον ὑμῖν. 1 Father If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of the phrases in this verse. Alternate translation: “Now the Helper will teach you everything, and he will remind you of everything that I said to you. He is the Holy Spirit whom the Father will send in my name.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +JHN 14 26 n7ez ὁ…Παράκλητος 1 Father See how you translated this in [verse 16](../14/16.md). JHN 14 26 hk8n guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 27 nx8a figs-metonymy κόσμος 1 world Here, the **world** is a metonym that represents those people who do not love God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 14 27 m6qq figs-metonymy μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία, μηδὲ δειλιάτω 1 Do not let your heart be troubled, and do not be afraid Here, **heart** is a metonym for a person’s inner being. Alternate translation: “So stop being anxious, and do not be afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 14 28 s8bx ἠγαπᾶτέ 1 loved This kind of love comes from God and desires the good of others, even when it does not benefit oneself. This kind of love cares for others, no matter what they do. +JHN 14 26 jjhy figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 Father Here, **in my name** could mean: (1) as the representative of Jesus or in place of Jesus. Alternate translation: “as my representative” or “in place of me” (2) with the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +JHN 14 26 ig83 figs-hyperbole πάντα 1 Here, **everything** is an exaggeration that Jesus uses for emphasis. He means that the **Holy Spirit** would teach the disciples all that they needed to know about what he had taught them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could say the plain meaning. Alternate translation: “everything that you need to know about what I have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +JHN 14 27 t9c4 figs-abstractnouns εἰρήνην ἀφίημι ὑμῖν; εἰρήνην τὴν ἐμὴν δίδωμι ὑμῖν 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **peace** in another way. Alternate translation: “I leave you a peaceful feeling; I give you my peaceful feeling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +JHN 14 27 fb4o figs-metaphor εἰρήνην ἀφίημι ὑμῖν 1 Here Jesus speaks of **peace** figuratively as if it were an object that he could **leave** with someone. If this would be confusing in your language, you could use a different expression. Alternate translation: “You will feel peace after I leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 14 27 jve8 figs-ellipsis οὐ καθὼς ὁ κόσμος δίδωσιν, ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν 1 Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the previous sentence. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you peace as the world gives peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 14 27 i7gm figs-explicit οὐ καθὼς ὁ κόσμος δίδωσιν, ἐγὼ δίδωμι ὑμῖν 1 Here, **as the world gives** could mean: (1) the manner in which **the world gives** **peace**. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you in the manner that the world gives” (2) the type of **peace** that **the world gives**. Alternate translation: “I do not give to you the kind of peace that world gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 27 nx8a figs-metonymy κόσμος 1 world See how you translated this in [verse 17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 14 27 m6qq figs-metaphor μὴ ταρασσέσθω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία 1 Do not let your heart be troubled, and do not be afraid See how you translated this clause in [verse 1](../14/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+JHN 14 28 s8bx figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν, ὑπάγω καὶ ἔρχομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 If the direct quotation inside a direct quotation would be confusing in your language, you could translate the second direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “I said to you that I am going away, and I will come back to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +JHN 14 28 ayiy grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ἠγαπᾶτέ με, ἐχάρητε ἄν 1 Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. Jesus knows that at this point his disciples don’t truly love him in the way that they should. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If you loved me, but you don’t, you would be glad, but your aren’t” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) JHN 14 28 s3t3 figs-explicit πορεύομαι πρὸς τὸν Πατέρα 1 I am going to the Father Here Jesus implies that he will return to his **Father**. Alternate translation: “I am going back to the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 14 28 gtk5 figs-explicit ὁ Πατὴρ μείζων μού ἐστιν 1 the Father is greater than I Here Jesus implies that the Father has greater authority than the Son while the Son is on the earth. Alternate translation: “the Father has greater authority than I have here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 14 28 ymq4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 14 30 ah3s τοῦ κόσμου ἄρχων 1 ruler of this world Here, the **ruler** refers to Satan. See how you translated this in [John 12:31](../12/31.md). Alternate translation: “Satan who rules this world” -JHN 14 30 ea6m figs-explicit ἔρχεται…ὁ τοῦ κόσμου ἄρχων 1 ruler … is coming Here Jesus implies that Satan **is coming** to attack him. Alternate translation: “Satan is coming to attack me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 14 31 jhq1 figs-metonymy ἵνα γνῷ ὁ κόσμος 1 in order that the world will know Here the **world** is a metonym for the people who do not belong to God. Alternate translation: “in order that the ones who do not belong to God may know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 14 31 r9ub guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +JHN 14 28 gtk5 figs-explicit ὁ Πατὴρ μείζων μού ἐστιν 1 the Father is greater than I Here Jesus could mean: (1) that the Father has greater authority than the Son while the Son is on the earth. Alternate translation: “the Father has greater authority than I have here” (2) that Jesus functions in a subordinate role to the Father for all time. Alternate translation: “the Father has a superior role than I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 28 ymq4 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα…ὁ Πατὴρ 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +JHN 14 29 cj9y figs-ellipsis εἴρηκα ὑμῖν 1 Father Jesus is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “I have told you this” or “I have told you what will happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 14 30 ah3s figs-explicit ὁ τοῦ κόσμου ἄρχων 1 ruler of this world Here, **the ruler of this world** refers to Satan. See how you translated this phrase in [12:31](../12/31.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+JHN 14 30 ea6m figs-explicit ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν 1 ruler … is coming Here **has nothing in me** means that Satan has no control over Jesus and cannot make him do anything. If this phrase might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “he is not able to control me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 14 31 n3et grammar-connect-logic-goal ἀλλ’ ἵνα γνῷ ὁ κόσμος, ὅτι ἀγαπῶ τὸν Πατέρα, καὶ καθὼς ἐνετείλατο μοι ὁ Πατὴρ, οὕτως ποιῶ 1 Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. The first event that is done to accomplish this purpose could be: (1) a phrase Jesus left out that can be supplied from the context of the previous verses. Alternate translation: “but the ruler of this world is coming so that the world might know that I love the Father, and just as the Father commanded me, thus I do” or “but these things will happen so that the world might know that I love the Father, and just as the Father commanded me, thus I do” (2) what is stated later in the sentence, in which case the order of the clauses must be changed. Alternate translation: “but just as the Father commanded me, thus I do, so that the world might know that I love the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +JHN 14 31 jhq1 figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 in order that the world will know See how you translated this in [verse 17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 14 31 r9ub guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα…ὁ Πατὴρ 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 15 intro k9jd 0 # John 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Vine

Jesus used the vine as a metaphor for himself. This is because the vine of the grape plant is what takes water and minerals from the ground to the leaves and grapes. Without the vine, the grapes and leaves die. He wanted his followers to know that unless they loved and obeyed him, they would be unable to do anything that pleased God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 15 1 aws2 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus reclines at the table with his disciples and continues to speak to them. JHN 15 1 fen5 figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος ἡ ἀληθινή 1 I am the true vine Here the **true vine** is a metaphor. Jesus compares himself to a vine or a vine stem. He is the source of life that causes people to live in a way that pleases God. Alternate translation: “I am like a vine that produces good fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) From 61da7fe872c2215df01e6d04b92b072c93006408 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Fri, 1 Apr 2022 13:51:25 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 07/15] Updated notes in Acts 7-28 (#2381) Co-authored-by: lrsallee Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2381 --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 61 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++------------------- 1 file changed, 37 insertions(+), 24 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 995728cf26..d1ad394372 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -2631,7 +2631,7 @@ ACT 21 30 mmaa figs-activepassive εὐθέως ἐκλείσθησαν αἱ θ ACT 21 31 d6vt figs-metonymy ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ τῆς σπείρης 1 a report came up to the commander of the guard Here, **report** refers to the messenger who went to speak the report. Alternate translation: “someone gave news to the commander of the guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 31 hu5r ἀνέβη φάσις τῷ χιλιάρχῳ 1 a report came up to the commander The phrase **came up to** is used because the commander was in a fortress connected to the temple that was higher in elevation than the temple courtyard. ACT 21 31 p85a τῷ χιλιάρχῳ 1 to the commander A Roman **commander** was a military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers. -ACT 21 31 u65r figs-hyperbole ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 all Jerusalem was stirred up The word **Jerusalem** here represents the people of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were stirred up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 21 31 u65r figs-metonymy ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 all Jerusalem was stirred up The word **Jerusalem** here represents the people of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were stirred up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 31 zgas figs-hyperbole ὅλη συνχύννεται Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 The word **all** is an exaggeration to show a large crowd was upset. Alternate translation: “a lot of people in Jerusalem were in an uproar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 21 32 j81t 0 General Information: The first word “he” and the word “He” refer to the chief captain of the guard mentioned in [Acts 21:31](../21/31.md). ACT 21 32 dgz5 κατέδραμεν 1 ran down From the fortress, there are stairs going down into the court. @@ -2689,7 +2689,7 @@ ACT 22 7 d6nd figs-synecdoche ἤκουσα φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι ACT 22 9 h95h figs-synecdoche τὴν…φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν τοῦ λαλοῦντός μοι 1 they did not understand the voice of the one who was speaking to me Here, **voice** stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “they did not understand what the one who spoke to me was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 22 10 a91a figs-activepassive κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται 1 and there you will be told If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “there someone will tell you” or “there you will find out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 11 n1kb οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτὸς ἐκείνου 1 I could not see because of the glory of that light Alternate translation: “I was left blind because of that light’s brightness” -ACT 22 11 qyf0 figs-activepassive χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι, ἦλθον εἰς Δαμασκόν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those with me guided me into Damascus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 22 11 qyf0 figs-activepassive χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι, ἦλθον εἰς Δαμασκόν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those with me guided me into Damascus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 11 n2n1 figs-synecdoche χειραγωγούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν συνόντων μοι 1 being led by the hands of those who were with me, I came into Damascus Here, **hands** stands for those leading Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 22 12 a17q 0 General Information: The words “He” and “him” refer to Ananias. ACT 22 12 h5bh translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias Though this is not the same Ananias who died earlier in Acts [Acts 5:3](../05/03.md), you may translate it the same way though as you did in [Acts 5:1](../05/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2751,18 +2751,21 @@ ACT 23 3 igq4 figs-metaphor τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε 1 you whitewashed ACT 23 3 un7g figs-rquestion σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι? 1 do you sit judging me by the law, yet command me to be struck, against the law? Paul uses a question to point out Ananias’ hypocrisy. Alternate translation: “you sit there to judge me by the law, yet you command me to be struck against the law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 23 3 m6nb figs-activepassive κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι 1 command me to be struck If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. You can use the same word for **strike** as you did in the phrase “God will strike you.” Alternate translation: “command people to strike me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 4 lkh8 figs-rquestion τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς? 1 Are you insulting the high priest of God? The men use this question to scold Paul for what he has said in [Acts 23:3](../23/03.md). Alternate translation: “You should not insult God’s high priest!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 23 5 e8lg figs-explicit γέγραπται γὰρ 1 For it is written Paul is about to quote what Moses wrote in the law. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “For Moses wrote in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 23 5 e8lg figs-activepassive γέγραπται γὰρ 1 For it is written If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For Moses wrote in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 23 5 veqe figs-explicit ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς 1 Paul quotes from the writings of Moses. ACT 23 6 pbe1 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means “fellow Jews” ACT 23 6 as3f υἱὸς Φαρισαίων 1 a son of Pharisees Here, **son** means he is the literal son of a Pharisee and also the descendant of Pharisees. Alternate translation: “and my father and forefathers were Pharisees” ACT 23 6 ys5k figs-activepassive ἐγὼ κρίνομαι 1 I am being judged If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 23 6 iz18 figs-abstractnouns περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 concerning the hope and resurrection of the dead The word **resurrection** can be stated as “come back to life.” The word **dead** can be stated as “those who have died.” Alternate translation: “I have confidence that those who have died will come back to life again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 23 6 iz18 figs-abstractnouns περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 concerning the hope and resurrection of the dead If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you can express the idea as “come back to life.” Alternate translation: “because I have confidence that the dead will come back to life again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 23 6 dchr figs-nominaladj περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use the nominal adjective **dead**, you can be express it as “those who have died.” Alternate translation: “I have confidence that those who have died will come back to life again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 23 7 abs3 ἐσχίσθη τὸ πλῆθος 1 the crowd was divided Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd strongly disagreed with one another” ACT 23 8 gl1s writing-background Σαδδουκαῖοι μὲν γὰρ…Φαρισαῖοι δὲ 1 For the Sadducees … but the Pharisees This is background information about the Sadducees and Pharisees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 23 9 eaf1 ἐγένετο δὲ κραυγὴ μεγάλη 1 So a large uproar occurred “So they began shouting loudly at one another.” The word **so** marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is Paul’s stating his belief in the resurrection. ACT 23 9 ayr8 figs-hypo εἰ…πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος 1 what if a spirit has spoken to him, or an angel? The Pharisees are rebuking the Sadducees by affirming that spirits and angels do exist and can speak to people. Alternate translation: “perhaps a spirit or an angel has spoken to him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) ACT 23 10 dr1d figs-abstractnouns πολλῆς δὲ γινομένης στάσεως 1 And when a great argument happened The phrase **a great argument** can be re-stated as “to argue violently.” Alternate translation: “And when they began to argue violently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 23 10 s65i χιλίαρχος 1 commander a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers -ACT 23 10 f568 figs-activepassive διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 that Paul would be torn to pieces by them If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. The phrase **be torn to pieces** might be an exaggeration of how the people might harm Paul. Alternate translation: “that they might tear Paul to pieces” or “that they would cause Paul great physical harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 23 10 f568 figs-activepassive διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 that Paul would be torn to pieces by them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that they might tear Paul to pieces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 23 10 tqhu figs-hyperbole διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 The phrase **be torn to pieces** might be an exaggeration of how the people might harm Paul. Alternate translation: “that they would cause Paul great physical harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 23 10 man3 ἁρπάσαι αὐτὸν 1 to seize him by force Alternate translation: “to use physical force to take him away” ACT 23 10 ap3c εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν 1 into the fortress This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in [Acts 21:34](../21/34.md). ACT 23 11 i9w5 τῇ…ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ 1 the following night This means the night after the day Paul went before the council. Alternate translation: “that night” @@ -2772,8 +2775,10 @@ ACT 23 12 klb4 ποιήσαντες συστροφὴν 1 having formed a consp ACT 23 12 g3sj figs-explicit ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς 1 cursed themselves It can be made explicit what would cause them to be cursed. Alternate translation: “asked God to curse them if they did not do what they promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 23 13 f1u2 translate-numbers τεσσεράκοντα οἱ 1 40 who “forty men who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 23 13 u5s5 οἱ ταύτην τὴν συνωμοσίαν ποιησάμενοι 1 who had formed this conspiracy Alternate translation: “who had made this plan” or “who planned to kill Paul” -ACT 23 14 zb6w figs-you 0 General Information: Here the word “They” refers to the forty Jews in [Acts 23:13](../23/13.md). Here “you” is plural and refers to the chief priests and elders. Both “us” and “we” refer to the forty Jews who planned to kill Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 23 14 zb6w οἵτινες 1 General Information: Here the word “They” refers to the forty Jews in [Acts 23:13](../23/13.md). ACT 23 14 ur73 figs-metaphor ἀναθέματι ἀνεθεματίσαμεν ἑαυτοὺς, μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι ἕως οὗ ἀποκτείνωμεν τὸν Παῦλον 1 We have cursed ourselves with a curse, to eat nothing until we have killed Paul To make a vow and to ask God to curse them if they do not fulfill their vow is spoken of as if the curse were an object that they carry on their shoulders. Alternate translation: “We have sworn to eat nothing until we have killed Paul. We asked God to curse us if we do not do what we promised to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 23 15 tuao figs-you ὑμεῖς… ὑμᾶς …μέλλοντας 1 All instances of **you** are plural and refers to the chief priests and elders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +ACT 23 15 u8xm figs-you ἡμεῖς 1 Here, **we** refers to the forty Jews who planned to kill Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 23 15 w418 νῦν οὖν 1 Now, therefore Alternate translation: “Because what we have just said is true” or “Because we have put ourselves under this curse” ACT 23 15 q9e6 νῦν 1 Now This does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows. ACT 23 15 q9mb καταγάγῃ αὐτὸν εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 he will bring him down to you Alternate translation: “the commander will bring Paul from the fortress to meet with you” @@ -2800,9 +2805,11 @@ ACT 23 23 mgi9 translate-numbers δεξιολάβους διακοσίους 1 2 ACT 23 23 kg8s τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός 1 third hour of the night This was about 9:00 PM. ACT 23 25 vg8x 0 General Information: The chief captain writes a letter to Governor Felix about the arrest of Paul. ACT 23 25 vg8y translate-names 0 General Information: Claudius Lysias is the name of the chief captain. Governor Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 23 26 zf93 figs-123person Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν 1 Claudius Lysias to the most excellent Governor Felix, greetings This is a formal introduction to the letter. The commander begins by referring to himself. You can translate it in the first person. The words “am writing” are understood. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, am writing to you, the most excellent Governor Felix. Greetings to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 23 26 zf93 figs-123person Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν 1 Claudius Lysias to the most excellent Governor Felix, greetings This is a formal introduction to the letter. The commander begins by referring to himself. You can translate it in the first person. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, to the most excellent Governor Felix. Greetings to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) +ACT 23 26 yk79 figs-ellipsis Κλαύδιος Λυσίας, τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι, χαίρειν 1 The words “am writing” are understood. Alternate translation: “I, Claudius Lysias, am writing to you, the most excellent Governor Felix. Greetings to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 23 26 u2ih τῷ κρατίστῳ ἡγεμόνι Φήλικι 1 to the most excellent Governor Felix Alternate translation: “to Governor Felix who deserves greatest honors” -ACT 23 27 zr7l figs-synecdoche τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 This man, having been seized the Jews Here, **the Jews** means “some of the Jews.” If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews seized this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 23 27 zr7l figs-synecdoche τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 This man, having been seized the Jews Here, **the Jews** means “some of the Jews.” Alternate translation: “This man was seized by some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 23 27 yy0e figs-activepassive τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον συνλημφθέντα ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews seized this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 27 ha13 figs-activepassive μέλλοντα ἀναιρεῖσθαι ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 about to be killed by them If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they were ready to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 27 v78t ἐπιστὰς σὺν τῷ στρατεύματι, ἐξειλάμην 1 having come with detachment of soldiers, I rescued Alternate translation: “I with my soldiers arrived at the place where Paul and these Jews were and I rescued him” ACT 23 28 lb1a 0 General Information: Here the word “I” refers to Claudius Lysias, the chief captain. @@ -2825,16 +2832,16 @@ ACT 23 35 dwv2 figs-quotations ἔφη 1 he said This sentence, which begins wit ACT 23 35 uji1 διακούσομαί σου 1 I will hear you fully Alternate translation: “I will listen to all you have to say” ACT 23 35 mga2 κελεύσας…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν 1 having commanded him to be kept If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “having commanded soldiers to keep him” or “and commanded soldiers to restrain him” ACT 24 intro j74u 0 # Acts 24 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Paul told the governor that he had not done what the Jews were accusing him of doing and that the governor should not punish him for what he did do.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Respect

Both the Jewish leaders ([Acts 24:2-4](./02.md)) and Paul ([Acts 24:10](../act/24/10.md)) began their speeches with words that show respect to the governor.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Governmental leaders

The words “governor,” “commander,” and “centurion” may be difficult to translate into some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -ACT 24 1 qw1r figs-you 0 General Information: Here the word “you” refers to Felix, the governor. Here “we” refers to the citizens under Felix. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 24 1 bc8k 0 Connecting Statement: Paul is on trial in Caesarea. Tertullus presents Governor Felix with the charges against Paul. ACT 24 1 e8rp μετὰ δὲ πέντε ἡμέρας 1 And after five days Alternate translation: “And five days after the Roman soldiers took Paul to Caesarea” ACT 24 1 n9gu translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias This is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias as in [Acts 5:1](../05/01.md) nor the same Ananias as in [Acts 9:10](../09/10.md). See how you translated this in [Acts 23:1](../23/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 24 1 f3vx ῥήτορος 1 an orator “a lawyer.” Tertullus was an expert in Roman law who was there to accuse Paul in court. -ACT 24 1 xm6c translate-names Τερτύλλου 1 Tertullus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 24 1 xm6c translate-names Τερτύλλου 1 Tertullus **Tertullus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 24 1 q7wj κατέβη 1 went there Alternate translation: “went to Caesarea where Paul was” ACT 24 1 nq9x τῷ ἡγεμόνι 1 to the governor Alternate translation: “in the presence of the governor who was judge in the court” ACT 24 1 zm5e ἐνεφάνισαν…κατὰ τοῦ Παύλου 1 appeared … against Paul Alternate translation: “came there … to argue before the governor the case that Paul had broken the law.” ACT 24 2 e6zg figs-exclusive πολλῆς εἰρήνης τυγχάνοντες 1 We have obtained great peace Here, **we** refers to the citizens under Felix. Alternate translation: “we, the people that you govern, have obtained great peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 24 2 qw1r figs-you σοῦ…σῆς 1 General Information: Here the words **you** and **your** refers to Felix, the governor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 24 2 sv8c καὶ διορθωμάτων γινομένων τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ διὰ τῆς σῆς προνοίας 1 and good reforms have happened to our nation through your foresight Alternate translation: “and your planning has greatly improved our nation” ACT 24 3 r5jl figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας 1 with all thankfulness The word **thankfulness** is an abstract noun. It can be stated as an adjective or verb. Alternate translation: “so we are very thankful and we welcome everything that you do” or “so we thank you very much and welcome everything that you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 24 3 q3fj κράτιστε Φῆλιξ 1 most excellent Felix “Governor Felix who deserves greatest honor.” Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Acts 23:25](../23/25.md). @@ -2875,7 +2882,7 @@ ACT 24 19 ntg3 εἴ τι ἔχοιεν 1 if they have anything Alternate trans ACT 24 20 npt5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul finishes responding to Governor Felix about the charges brought against him. ACT 24 20 ag5d αὐτοὶ 1 these This refers to the members of the council who were present in Jerusalem at Paul’s trial. ACT 24 20 hnt9 εἰπάτωσαν, τί εὗρον ἀδίκημα 1 let … say what wrong they found Alternate translation: “let … prove what I did wrong” -ACT 24 21 ds1s figs-abstractnouns περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 concerning the resurrection of the dead The abstract noun **resurrection** can be stated as “God brings back to life.” Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will bring back to life those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 24 21 ds1s figs-abstractnouns περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 concerning the resurrection of the dead If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you can express the idea as “God brings back to life.” Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will bring back to life those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 24 21 d2lm figs-activepassive ἐγὼ κρίνομαι σήμερον ἐφ’ ὑμῶν 1 I am being judged before you today If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 24 22 w1tn translate-names 0 General Information: Felix is the Roman governor of the area who resides at Caesarea. See how you translated this name in [Acts 23:24](../23/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 24 22 a87f τῆς Ὁδοῦ 1 the Way This is a title for Christianity. See how you translated this in [Acts 9:2](../09/02.md). @@ -2920,14 +2927,16 @@ ACT 25 9 m49r 0 Connecting Statement: Paul asks to be taken before Caesar for ACT 25 9 b49x figs-synecdoche θέλων τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι 1 wanting to do a favor for the Jews Here, **the Jews** means the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “wanting to please the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 25 9 qe8h εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀναβὰς 1 to go up to Jerusalem Jerusalem was higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of going **up** to Jerusalem. ACT 25 9 wi2d figs-activepassive ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 and to be judged there before me about these things If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “where I will judge you with regard to these charges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 25 10 u1ef figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι 1 I stand before the judgment seat of Caesar, where it is necessary for me to be judged The **judgment seat** refers to Caesar’s authority to judge Paul. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am already being judged by Roman authority, which is the only place where I should be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 25 10 u1ef figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι 1 I stand before the judgment seat of Caesar, where it is necessary for me to be judged The **judgment seat** refers to Caesar’s authority to judge Paul. Alternate translation: “I am already being judged by Roman authority, which is the only place where I should be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 25 10 p78y figs-activepassive ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Roman authority is already judging me, and they are the only ones who should judge me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 25 11 el9d figs-hypo εἰ μὲν οὖν ἀδικῶ καὶ ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι, οὐ παραιτοῦμαι τὸ ἀποθανεῖν; εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου, οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι 1 Therefore, if I have done wrong and have done anything worthy of death, I do not refuse to die. But if there is nothing of which they can accuse me, no one is able to hand me over to them Paul is stating a hypothetical situation. If he were guilty, he would accept the punishment, but he knows that he is not guilty. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) ACT 25 11 ta55 ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι 1 have done anything worthy of death Alternate translation: “have done some wrong that deserves the death penalty” ACT 25 11 hxr1 εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου 1 But if there is nothing of which they can accuse me Alternate translation: “But if the charges against me are not true” ACT 25 11 hr23 οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι 1 no one is able to hand me over to them Possible meanings are (1) Festus does not have the legal authority to hand Paul over to these false accusers or (2) Paul was saying that if he has done nothing wrong, the governor should not give into the request of the Jews. ACT 25 11 b1bf Καίσαρα ἐπικαλοῦμαι 1 I appeal to Caesar Alternate translation: “I ask that I go before Caesar so he himself can judge me” ACT 25 12 t96z μετὰ τοῦ συμβουλίου 1 with the council This is not the Sanhedrin that is referred to as **council** throughout Acts. This is a political council in the Roman government. Alternate translation: “with his own government advisors” -ACT 25 13 izu8 writing-participants 0 General Information: King Agrippa and Bernice are new people in the story. Though he ruled over only a few territories, King Agrippa is the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice is Agrippa’s sister.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 25 13 izu8 writing-participants Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη 1 General Information: King Agrippa and Bernice are new people in the story. Though he ruled over only a few territories, King Agrippa is the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice is Agrippa’s sister.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 25 13 q0sv translate-names Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη 1 **Agrippa** is a man and **Bernice** is a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 25 13 ge5h 0 Connecting Statement: Festus explains Paul’s case to King Agrippa. ACT 25 13 c3gc δὲ 1 Now This word marks the beginning of a new event in the story. ACT 25 13 ukd3 ἀσπασάμενοι τὸν Φῆστον 1 paid their respects to Festus Alternate translation: “to make a formal visit to greet Festus” @@ -3025,7 +3034,8 @@ ACT 26 25 a6pb κράτιστε Φῆστε 1 most excellent Festus Alternate t ACT 26 26 ed7y figs-123person ὁ βασιλεύς, πρὸς ὃν…αὐτὸν 1 the king … to him … from him Paul is still speaking to King Agrippa, but he is referring to him in the third person. Alternate translation: “you … to you … from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) ACT 26 26 cs7b παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ 1 I am speaking boldly Paul was not afraid to speak to the king about Christ. Alternate translation: “I speak with confidence” ACT 26 26 svn9 figs-activepassive πείθομαι 1 I am persuaded that If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am sure that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 26 26 tta8 figs-activepassive λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ 1 that none of this are hidden from him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that he is aware of this” or “that you are aware of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 26 26 xqr1 figs-litotes λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ…οὐθέν; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο 1 Paul uses two negative phrases to emphasize that the events of Jesus’ life were well-known. Alternate translation: “he is well-aware of these things, because they were done openly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 26 26 tta8 figs-activepassive λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ 1 that none of this are hidden from him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he is aware of this” or “you are aware of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 26 26 v1uu figs-activepassive οὐ…ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο 2 this was not done in a corner If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “this has not happened in a corner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 26 26 i5wg figs-metaphor ἐν γωνίᾳ 1 in a corner This means doing something in secret as if a person went and did something in the **corner** of a room where no one can see him. Alternate translation: “in a dark place” or “in secret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 26 27 a4a2 figs-rquestion πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις? 1 Do you believe the prophets, King Agrippa? Paul asks this question to remind Agrippa that Agrippa already believes what the prophets said about Jesus. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “You already believe what the Jewish prophets said, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -3034,10 +3044,10 @@ ACT 26 29 k7kq figs-metonymy παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτω ACT 26 30 k7jh 0 General Information: Bernice was the sister of King Agrippa ([Acts 25:13](../25/13.md)). ACT 26 30 gaq5 0 Connecting Statement: This ends Paul’s time before King Agrippa. ACT 26 30 u8vl ἀνέστη τε ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμὼν 1 And then the king got up, and the governor Alternate translation: “And then King Agrippa stood up, and Governor Festus” -ACT 26 31 blz8 figs-abstractnouns οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 This man is not doing anything worthy of death or of chains The abstract noun **death** can be stated as the verb “die.” Here, **chains** stands for being in prison. Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or to be in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 26 31 blz8 figs-abstractnouns οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 This man is not doing anything worthy of death or of chains If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **death**, you can express the same idea with the verb “die.” Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or chains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 26 31 dwyb figs-metonymy οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 Here, **chains** stands for being in prison. Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or to be in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 26 32 n293 figs-activepassive ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 This man was able to have been released If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “This man could have gone free” or “I could have freed this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 27 intro r82x 0 # Acts 27 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sailing

People who lived near the sea traveled by boat powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible.

### Trust

Paul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailers and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])

### Paul breaks bread

Luke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here. -ACT 27 1 efe4 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Adramyttium was a city possibly located on the west coast of modern-day Turkey. The word “we” includes the author of Acts, Paul, and the others traveling with Paul, but not the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 27 1 dyf5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul, as a prisoner, begins his journey to Rome. ACT 27 1 b2yz figs-activepassive ὡς…ἐκρίθη 1 when it was decided If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the king and the governor decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 27 1 yv84 εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν 1 to Italy **Italy** is the name of the province Rome was in. See how you translated **Italy** in [Acts 18:2](../18/02.md). @@ -3045,7 +3055,9 @@ ACT 27 1 s6ny παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ACT 27 1 k52u παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας 1 they handed over both Paul and some other prisoners Possible meanings are that (1) **they** refers to the governor and the king or (2) **they** refers to other Roman officials. ACT 27 1 un2s translate-names ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ 1 to a centurion named Julius Julius is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 27 1 d22f translate-names σπείρης Σεβαστῆς 1 of the Augustan regiment This was the name of the battalion or army from which the centurion came. Some versions translate this as “the Imperial regiment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 27 2 efe4 translate-names Ἀδραμυντηνῷ 1 General Information: **Adramyttium** was a city possibly located on the west coast of modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 27 2 dnr9 figs-metonymy ἐπιβάντες…πλοίῳ…μέλλοντι πλεῖν 1 having boarded a ship … being about to sail Here, **ship … being about to sail** stands for the crew that will sail the ship. Alternate translation: “having boarded a ship … with a crew that was about to sail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 27 2 tol6 figs-exclusive ἀνήχθημεν…ἡμῖν 1 The words **we** and **us** include the author of Acts, Paul, and the others traveling with Paul, but not the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 27 2 fqy2 πλοίῳ Ἀδραμυντηνῷ 1 a ship from Adramyttium Possible meanings are (1) a **ship** that had come from Adramyttium or (2) a **ship** that was registered or licensed in Adramyttium. ACT 27 2 f8pf μέλλοντι πλεῖν 1 being about to sail Alternate translation: “going to sail soon” or “departing soon” ACT 27 2 m3ps ἀνήχθημεν 1 we set sail Alternate translation: “we began our journey on the sea” @@ -3115,8 +3127,7 @@ ACT 27 24 z1j8 figs-metonymy Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι 1 ACT 27 24 s3wv κεχάρισταί σοι…πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετὰ σοῦ 1 has graciously granted to you all those who are sailing with you Alternate translation: “has graciously decided to allow all those who are sailing with you to live” ACT 27 25 r9t8 figs-activepassive καθ’ ὃν τρόπον λελάληταί μοι 1 according to the way it was told to me If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as the angel told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 27 26 vmp6 εἰς νῆσον…τινα, δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἐκπεσεῖν 1 we must run aground upon some island Alternate translation: “the ship is going to be wrecked on some island” -ACT 27 27 im34 0 Connecting Statement: The fierce storm continues. -ACT 27 27 rrm5 translate-ordinal ὡς δὲ τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ ἐγένετο 1 And when the fourteenth night came The ordinal number **fourteenth** can be translated as “fourteen” or “14.” Alternate translation: “After 14 days since the storm started, that night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +ACT 27 27 rrm5 translate-ordinal ὡς δὲ τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ ἐγένετο 1 And when the fourteenth night came The ordinal number **fourteenth** can be translated as “fourteen” or “14.” Alternate translation: “After 14 days since the storm started, that night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) ACT 27 27 la7u figs-activepassive διαφερομένων ἡμῶν 1 as we were being driven this way and that If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as the wind blew us back and forth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 27 27 afs6 translate-names τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ 1 the Adriatic Sea This is the sea between Italy and Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 27 28 ruj1 βολίσαντες 1 taking soundings “measuring the depth of the sea water.” They measured the depth of water by dropping a line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water. @@ -3127,13 +3138,14 @@ ACT 27 29 q4am ἐκ πρύμνης 1 from the stern Alternate translation: “ ACT 27 30 br71 figs-you 0 General Information: Here the word “you” is plural and refers to the centurion and the Roman soldiers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 27 30 b4wv τὴν σκάφην 1 the lifeboat This is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship and sometime it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship. See how you translated this in [Acts 27:16](../27/16.md). ACT 27 30 rr89 ἐκ πρῴρης 1 from the bow Alternate translation: “from the front of the ship” -ACT 27 31 ez5c figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ οὗτοι μείνωσιν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε 1 Unless these men stay in the ship, you are not able to be saved You can state the negative words **unless** and **not able** in positive form. If your language does not use the passive form **be saved**, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “These men must stay in the ship in order for you to survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 27 31 ez5c figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ οὗτοι μείνωσιν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε 1 Unless these men stay in the ship, you are not able to be saved If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **unless … not able**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “These men must stay in the ship in order for you to survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +ACT 27 31 sz8y figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε 1 If your language does not use the passive form **be saved** in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will not survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 27 33 q3y8 ἄχρι δὲ οὗ ἡμέρα ἤμελλεν γίνεσθαι 1 And up until it was about to become daytime Alternate translation: “And until almost sunrise” -ACT 27 33 j5yg translate-ordinal τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν 1 Today is the fourteenth day The ordinal number **fourteenth** can be stated as “fourteen.” Alternate translation: “For 14 days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +ACT 27 33 j5yg translate-ordinal τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν 1 Today is the fourteenth day The ordinal number **fourteenth** can be stated as “fourteen.” Alternate translation: “For 14 days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) ACT 27 34 j3qx figs-idiom οὐδενὸς…ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται 1 a hair from the head of none of you will perish This was a customary way of saying no harm would come upon them. Alternate translation: “none of you will be injured in any way in this disaster” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 27 35 yh7y κλάσας 1 having broken bread Alternate translation: “after he had torn the bread into pieces” or “tearing off a piece from the loaf of bread” ACT 27 36 zt9q figs-activepassive εὔθυμοι δὲ γενόμενοι πάντες, καὶ 1 And they were all encouraged and If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And this encouraged all of them and they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 27 37 ynq3 translate-numbers ἤμεθα δὲ αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ 1 And in all, we were 276 souls in the ship “And there was a total of two hundred and seventy-six people in the ship.” This is background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 27 37 ynq3 writing-background ἤμεθα δὲ αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ 1 And in all, we were 276 souls in the ship This is background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 27 39 vdk2 κόλπον 1 a bay a large area of water partly surrounded by land ACT 27 39 r1bx τὴν γῆν οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον 1 they did not recognize the land Alternate translation: “they saw land but could not recognize it as any place they knew” ACT 27 40 k66v τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες, εἴων 1 having cut loose the anchors, they left them Alternate translation: “they cut the ropes and left the anchors behind” @@ -3232,13 +3244,14 @@ ACT 28 26 pax8 ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε…βλέποντες βλέψετε ACT 28 26 s1ti figs-parallelism καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε…καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 but you will certainly not understand … but you will certainly not perceive Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) ACT 28 27 fz42 0 General Information: Translate Paul’s quotation of Isaiah as a direct quotation or indirect quotation according to how you translated it in [Acts 28:25-26](./25.md). ACT 28 27 qu6t 0 Connecting Statement: Paul finishes quoting Isaiah the prophet. -ACT 28 27 ts5a figs-metaphor ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου 1 For the heart of this people has become dull People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if their heart is dull. Here “heart” is a metonym for the mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 28 27 ts5a figs-metaphor ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου 1 For the heart of this people has become dull People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if their **heart** is **dull**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 28 27 ngve figs-metonymy ἡ καρδία 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for the mind. Alternate translation: “the thinking” or “the thoughts” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 28 27 f5m4 figs-metaphor τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν 1 with their ears they hardly heard, and they shut their eyes People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if they are unable to hear and are shutting their eyes so that they will see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 28 27 lr99 figs-metonymy τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν 1 might understand with their heart Here, **heart** stands for the mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 28 27 q8c2 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 might turn again To start obeying God is spoken of as though the person were physically **turning** toward God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 28 27 vb9f ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 I will heal them This does not mean God will only heal them physically. He will also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins. -ACT 28 28 c575 0 Connecting Statement: Paul finishes speaking to the Jewish leaders in Rome. -ACT 28 28 b2za figs-metaphor τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles God’s message about how he saves people is spoken of as if it were an object that is sent. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God is sending his messengers to the Gentiles to tell them about how he will save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 28 28 b2za figs-metaphor τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles God’s message about how he saves people is spoken of as if it were an object that is **sent**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 28 28 e8hb figs-activepassive τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is sending his messengers to the Gentiles to tell them about how he will save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 28 28 d18n αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀκούσονται 1 they also will listen “some of them also will listen.” This response of the Gentiles is in contrast to the way the Jews of that time refused to listen to God. ACT 28 30 c56e writing-endofstory 0 Connecting Statement: Luke ends the story of Paul in the book of Acts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 28 31 wv1l figs-metonymy κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 proclaiming the kingdom of God Here, **kingdom of God** refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “preaching about God’s rule as king” or “preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From dc4cce144f37413e8f3ca96b583a9498a2eb1a4e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Fri, 1 Apr 2022 17:29:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 08/15] Added "Alternate translation:" labels to Acts notes (#2382) Co-authored-by: Larry Sallee Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2382 --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 240 +++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ 1 file changed, 119 insertions(+), 121 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index d1ad394372..406611f10d 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -922,22 +922,21 @@ ACT 7 5 ax1j οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κληρονομίαν ἐν α ACT 7 5 qff6 figs-idiom οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός 1 not even a stride of a foot Possible meanings for this phrase are (1) enough ground to stand on or (2) enough ground to take a step. Alternate translation: “not even a very tiny piece of ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 5 u6iw αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν…καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν 1 to him for a possession, and to his seed after him Alternate translation: “for Abraham to own and to give to his descendants” ACT 7 6 tn6b ἐλάλησεν…οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς 1 God spoke to him like this It may be helpful to state that this occurred later than the statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Later God told Abraham” -ACT 7 6 t1h9 translate-numbers ἔτη τετρακόσια 1 400 years “four hundred years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 7 7 f7fw figs-metonymy τὸ ἔθνος…κρινῶ ἐγώ 1 I will judge the nation Here, **nation** refers to the people in it. Alternate translation: “I will judge the people of the nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 7 q7y6 τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν 1 the nation that will enslave him Alternate translation: “the nation that they will serve” ACT 7 8 mwc9 figs-explicit ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς 1 God gave him the covenant of circumcision The Jews would have understood that this covenant required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “made a covenant with Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 8 g4bb οὕτως ἐγέννησεν τὸν Ἰσαὰκ 1 so he became the father of Isaac The story transitions to Abraham’s descendants. -ACT 7 8 ams1 figs-ellipsis Ἰακὼβ τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας 1 Jacob of the 12 patriarchs “Jacob became the father of the 12 patriarchs.” Stephen shortened this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ACT 7 8 ams1 figs-ellipsis Ἰακὼβ τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας 1 Jacob of the 12 patriarchs Stephen shortened this. Alternate translation: “Jacob became the father of the 12 patriarchs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 7 9 n981 οἱ πατριάρχαι 1 the patriarchs Alternate translation: “Jacob’s older sons” or “Joseph’s older brothers” ACT 7 9 tik7 figs-explicit ἀπέδοντο εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 sold him into Egypt The Jews knew their ancestors sold Joseph to be a slave in Egypt. Alternate translation: “sold him as a slave in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 9 w1is figs-idiom ἦν…μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 was with him This is an idiom for helping someone. Alternate translation: “helped him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 10 yr7m figs-metonymy ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 over Egypt This refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 10 pb4p figs-metonymy ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 over all his household This refers to all his possessions. Alternate translation: “over everything he owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 11 p42j ἦλθεν…λιμὸς 1 came a famine “a famine came.” The ground stopped producing food. +ACT 7 11 p42j ἦλθεν…λιμὸς 1 came a famine The ground stopped producing food. Alternate translation: “a famine came” ACT 7 11 p37v figs-explicit οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers This refers Jacob and his sons, who were the ancestors of the Jewish people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 12 pia8 σιτία 1 grain Grain was the most common food at that time. ACT 7 12 mbg8 τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Here this phrase refers to Jabob’s sons, Joseph’s older brothers. -ACT 7 13 ce2b translate-ordinal ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 On their second time “On their next trip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +ACT 7 13 ce2b translate-ordinal ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 On their second time Alternate translation: “On their next trip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) ACT 7 13 m37e ἀνεγνωρίσθη 1 was made known Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother. ACT 7 13 jxk8 figs-activepassive φανερὸν ἐγένετο τῷ Φαραὼ τὸ γένος Ἰωσήφ 1 the family of Joseph became known to Pharaoh If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph’s family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 14 aam5 ἀποστείλας 1 sending them back Alternate translation: “after sending his brothers back to Canaan” or “after sending his brothers back home” @@ -977,7 +976,7 @@ ACT 7 27 q2r4 figs-rquestion τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα κ ACT 7 28 hk1g μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον? 1 You do not want to kill me in the same way you killed the Egyptian yesterday, do you? The man used this question to warn Moses that he and probably others knew Moses had killed the Egyptian. ACT 7 29 l149 figs-explicit 0 General Information: Stephen’s audience already knew that Moses had married a Midianite woman when he fled Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 29 q8qv figs-explicit ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 at this statement The implied information is that Moses understood that the Israelites knew that he had killed an Egyptian the day before ([Acts 7:28](../07/28.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 30 zx1c figs-explicit καὶ πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα 1 And when 40 years were past “And after 40 years had passed.” This was the amount of time Moses had been in Midian. Alternate translation: “And 40 years after Moses fled from Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 7 30 zx1c figs-explicit καὶ πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα 1 And when 40 years were past This was the amount of time Moses had been in Midian. Alternate translation: “And 40 years after Moses fled from Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 30 f7yu figs-explicit ὤφθη…ἄγγελος 1 an angel appeared Stephen’s audience knew that God spoke through the angel. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 31 q6w6 figs-explicit ἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα 1 he marveled at the sight Moses was surprised that the bush was not burning up in the fire. This was previously known by Stephen’s audience. Alternate translation: “because the bush was not burning up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 31 uk7u προσερχομένου δὲ αὐτοῦ κατανοῆσαι 1 and as he approached to look at it This may mean Moses initially drew close to the bush to investigate. @@ -986,10 +985,10 @@ ACT 7 32 tdr7 ἔντρομος δὲ γενόμενος, Μωϋσῆς οὐκ ACT 7 32 e19k figs-explicit ἔντρομος…γενόμενος, Μωϋσῆς 1 becoming terrified, Moses Moses shook from fear. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “And Moses trembled with fear and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 33 x7cd translate-symaction λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα 1 Untie the sandals God told Moses this so he would honor God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 7 33 clk4 figs-explicit ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν 1 for the place on which you are standing is holy ground The implied information is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered or made holy by God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 34 yz7b ἰδὼν, εἶδον 1 I have certainly seen “I gave seen for sure.” The word certainly adds emphasis to seen. +ACT 7 34 yz7b ἰδὼν, εἶδον 1 I have certainly seen The word certainly adds emphasis to seen. Alternate translation: “I have seen for sure” ACT 7 34 x5bg τοῦ λαοῦ μου 1 of my people The word **my** emphasizes that these people belonged to God. Alternate translation: “of the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob” ACT 7 34 j32c κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς 1 I have come down to rescue them Alternate translation: “I will personally cause their release” -ACT 7 34 sq8y νῦν δεῦρο 1 now come “get ready.” God uses an order here. +ACT 7 34 sq8y νῦν δεῦρο 1 now come God uses an order here. Alternate translation: “get ready” ACT 7 35 x4p2 0 General Information: Verses 35-38 contains a series of connected phrases referring to Moses. Each phrase begins with statements such as “This Moses” or “This same Moses” or “This is the man” or “It is the same Moses.” If possible, use similar statements to emphasize Moses. After the Israelites left Egypt, they spent 40 years wandering around the wilderness before God led them into the land he had promised them. ACT 7 35 gn6e τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν, ὃν ἠρνήσαντο 1 This same Moses, whom they rejected This refers back to the events recorded in [Acts 7:27-28](../07/27.md). ACT 7 35 vp7e λυτρωτὴν 1 a redeemer Alternate translation: “a rescuer” @@ -1020,14 +1019,14 @@ ACT 7 43 rk4z figs-explicit ἀνελάβετε 1 you took up It is implied that ACT 7 43 im7e τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ 1 the tabernacle of Molech the tent that housed the false god Molech ACT 7 43 cq47 τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν 1 the star of your god Rephan the star that is identified with the false god Rephan ACT 7 43 gm4g τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε 1 and the images that you made They made statues or images of the gods Molech and Rephan in order to worship them. -ACT 7 43 zgq6 μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος 1 I will carry you away beyond Babylon “I will remove you to places even farther than Babylon.” This would be God’s act of judgment. +ACT 7 43 zgq6 μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος 1 I will carry you away beyond Babylon This would be God’s act of judgment. Alternate translation: “I will remove you to places even farther than Babylon” ACT 7 44 m9gw ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου 1 The tabernacle of the testimony The tent that housed the ark (a box) with the 10 commandments carved in stone inside it ACT 7 45 n2sc ἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν μετὰ Ἰησοῦ 1 Our fathers, under Joshua, received it and brought it with them The phrase **under Joshua** means that their ancestors did these things in obedience to Joshua’s direction. Alternate translation: “Our fathers, in accordance with Joshua’s instructions, received the tabernacle and brought it with them” ACT 7 45 n1pp ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν, ὧν ἐξῶσεν ὁ Θεὸς ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers This sentence tells why the ancestors were able to take possession of the land. Alternate translation: “when God forced the nations to leave the land before the face of our fathers so they could live in it” ACT 7 45 spm5 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν, ὧν ἐξῶσεν ὁ Θεὸς ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers Here, **the face of our fathers** refers to the presence of their ancestors. Possible meanings are (1) “when God took the land from the nations and drove them out as our ancestors watched” or (2) “when our ancestors came, God took the land from the nations and drove them out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 45 c2fb figs-metonymy τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 of the nations This refers to the people who lived in the land before Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people who previously lived here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 45 m9ib ὧν ἐξῶσεν ὁ Θεὸς 1 whom God drove out Alternate translation: “whom God forced to leave the land” -ACT 7 46 w3cu σκήνωμα τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ 1 a dwelling place for the house of Jacob “a house for the ark where the God of Jacob could stay.” David wanted a permanent place for the ark to reside in Jerusalem, not in a tent. +ACT 7 46 w3cu σκήνωμα τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ 1 a dwelling place for the house of Jacob David wanted a permanent place for the ark to reside in Jerusalem, not in a tent. Alternate translation: “a house for the ark where the God of Jacob could stay” ACT 7 47 a7bx 0 General Information: In verses 49 and 50, Stephen quotes from the prophet Isaiah. In the quotation, God is speaking about himself. ACT 7 48 c822 figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις 1 houses made with hands Here, **hand** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “houses made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 7 49 k2vn ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 Heaven is my throne, and the earth is the footstool for my feet The prophet is comparing the greatness of God’s presence to how impossible it is for man to build a place for God to rest on earth since the whole earth is nothing but a place for God to rest his feet. @@ -1046,14 +1045,14 @@ ACT 7 54 t4u2 0 Connecting Statement: The council reacts to Stephen’s words. ACT 7 54 ef2g ἀκούοντες δὲ ταῦτα 1 Now hearing these things This is the turning point; the sermon ends and the council members react. ACT 7 54 u4l7 figs-idiom διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 they were cut to their hearts Here “cut to their hearts” is an idiom for making them extremely angry. Alternate translation: “they became extremely angry” or “they became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 54 ae9s translate-symaction ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 they ground their teeth at him This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen or hatred of Stephen. Alternate translation: “they became so angry that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked at Stephen”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 7 55 ntp4 ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 and looking intently into heaven “and staring up into heaven.” It appears that only Stephen saw this vision and not anyone else in the crowd. +ACT 7 55 ntp4 ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 and looking intently into heaven It appears that only Stephen saw this vision and not anyone else in the crowd. Alternate translation: “and staring up into heaven” ACT 7 55 bl2j figs-explicit εἶδεν δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 he saw the glory of God People normally experienced the glory of God as a bright light. Alternate translation: “he saw a bright light from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 55 vyz3 translate-symaction καὶ Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 and Jesus standing at the right hand of God To stand **at the right hand of God** is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “and he saw Jesus standing in the place of honor and authority beside God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 7 56 aqp8 Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Son of Man Stephen refers to Jesus by the title “Son of Man.” -ACT 7 57 p4cg translate-symaction συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν 1 they covered their ears “they put their hands on their ears.” They did this to show that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 7 57 p4cg translate-symaction συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν 1 they covered their ears They did this to show that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. Alternate translation: “they put their hands on their ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 7 58 ks1u ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως 1 throwing him outside the city Alternate translation: “seizing Stephen, they forcefully took him out of the city” ACT 7 58 wy7n τὰ ἱμάτια 1 outer garments These are cloaks or robes they would wear outside to stay warm, similar in function to a jacket or coat. -ACT 7 58 sx2p παρὰ τοὺς πόδας 1 at the feet “in front of.” They were placed there so Saul could watch them. +ACT 7 58 sx2p παρὰ τοὺς πόδας 1 at the feet They were placed there so Saul could watch them. Alternate translation: “in front of” ACT 7 58 e2vl νεανίου 1 of a young man Saul was probably around 30 years old at the time. ACT 7 59 le7k 0 Connecting Statement: This ends the story of Stephen. ACT 7 59 k2el δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου 1 receive my spirit Alternate translation: “take my spirit.” It may be helpful to add “please” to show that this was a request. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit” @@ -1079,13 +1078,13 @@ ACT 8 4 iaq4 figs-explicit τὸν λόγον 1 You may need to make explicit t ACT 8 5 gz5m κατελθὼν εἰς τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας 1 went down to the city of Samaria The phrase **went down** is used here because Samaria is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. ACT 8 5 f45b τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας 1 the city of Samaria Possible meanings are (1) Luke expected the readers to know which city he was writing about. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” or (2) Luke did not expect his readers to know which city he was writing about. Alternate translation: “a city in Samaria” ACT 8 5 pk1l figs-metonymy ἐκήρυσσεν αὐτοῖς τὸν Χριστόν 1 proclaimed to them the Christ The title **Christ** refers to Jesus, the Messiah. Alternate translation: “told them that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 8 6 cnt9 δὲ οἱ ὄχλοι 1 And the crowds “And the people in the city of Samaria.” The location was specified in [Acts 8:5](../08/05.md). +ACT 8 6 cnt9 δὲ οἱ ὄχλοι 1 And the crowds The location was specified in [Acts 8:5](../08/05.md). Alternate translation: “And the people in the city of Samaria” ACT 8 6 wm83 προσεῖχον 1 were paying attention to The reason people paid attention was because of all the healing Philip did. ACT 8 7 xb2n ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα 1 having unclean spirits Alternate translation: “who were controlled by unclean spirits” ACT 8 8 z5z3 figs-metonymy ἐγένετο δὲ πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 And there was much joy in that city The phrase **that city** refers to the people who were rejoicing. Alternate translation: “So the people of the city were rejoicing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 9 jm7n writing-background 0 General Information: Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse gives the beginning of the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 8 9 bed1 writing-participants ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων 1 But … a certain man named Simon This is a way of introducing a new person into the story. Your language may use different wording to introduce a new person into the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 8 9 cx7a τῇ πόλει 1 the city “the city in Samaria” ([Acts 8:5](../08/05.md)) +ACT 8 9 cx7a τῇ πόλει 1 the city Alternate translation: “the city in Samaria” ([Acts 8:5](../08/05.md)) ACT 8 10 kb9b writing-background 0 General Information: Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse continues to give the beginning of the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 8 10 evt7 figs-hyperbole προσεῖχον πάντες 1 they all … were paying attention The word **all** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “many of the Samaritans … were paying attention” or “the Samaritans in the city … were paying attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 8 10 ibl1 figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 from least to greatest These two phrases refer to everyone from one extreme to the other. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) @@ -1167,7 +1166,7 @@ ACT 9 2 v9lw figs-metonymy πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς 1 to the synagog ACT 9 2 y8f6 ἐάν τινας εὕρῃ 1 if he might find anyone Alternate translation: “whenever he found anyone” ACT 9 2 pk19 τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας 1 being of the Way Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” or “who followed the teachings of Jesus Christ” ACT 9 2 n94s τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 of the Way This term appears to have been a title for Christianity at that time. -ACT 9 2 a6z4 figs-explicit δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 having bound them, he might bring them to Jerusalem “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem.” Paul’s purpose can be made clear by adding “so that the Jewish leaders could judge and punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 9 2 a6z4 figs-explicit δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 having bound them, he might bring them to Jerusalem Paul’s purpose can be made clear by adding “so that the Jewish leaders could judge and punish them.” Alternate translation: “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 3 lv9q 0 Connecting Statement: After the high priest gave Saul the letters, Saul left for Damascus. ACT 9 3 jf4g ἐν…τῷ πορεύεσθαι 1 as he was traveling Saul had left Jerusalem and was traveling to Damascus. ACT 9 3 by55 writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 it happened that This is an expression that marks a change in the story to show something different is about to happen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -1181,9 +1180,9 @@ ACT 9 5 abc0 ὁ 1 he Jesus is speaking. Alternate translation: “he replied ACT 9 6 i1kj ἀνάστηθι καὶ εἴσελθε εἰς τὴν πόλιν 1 get up and enter into the city Alternate translation: “get up and go into Damascus” ACT 9 6 fbi6 figs-activepassive λαληθήσεταί σοι 1 it will be told to you If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 9 7 xu7c ἀκούοντες μὲν τῆς φωνῆς, μηδένα δὲ θεωροῦντες 1 hearing the voice, but seeing no one Alternate translation: “they heard the voice, but they did not see anyone” -ACT 9 7 f9fe μηδένα δὲ θεωροῦντες 1 but seeing no one “but saw no one.” Apparently only Saul experienced the light. +ACT 9 7 f9fe μηδένα δὲ θεωροῦντες 1 but seeing no one Apparently only Saul experienced the light. Alternate translation: “but saw no one” ACT 9 8 puw3 figs-explicit ἀνεῳγμένων…τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ 1 his eyes being opened This implies that he had closed his eyes because the light was too bright. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 9 8 dgg8 οὐδὲν ἔβλεπεν 1 he was seeing nothing “he could not see anything.” Saul was blind. +ACT 9 8 dgg8 οὐδὲν ἔβλεπεν 1 he was seeing nothing Saul was blind. Alternate translation: “he could not see anything” ACT 9 9 fhn6 ἦν…μὴ βλέπων 1 he was … without sight Alternate translation: “he was … blind” or “he … could not see anything” ACT 9 9 t8uc οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲ ἔπιεν 1 neither ate nor drank It is not stated whether he chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship, or if he had no appetite because he was too distressed from his situation. It is preferable not to specify the reason. ACT 9 10 kgn9 translate-names 0 General Information: The story of Saul continues but Luke introduces another man named Ananias. This is not the same Ananias who died earlier in Acts [Acts 5:3](../05/03.md). You may translate this name the same way though as you did in [Acts 5:1](../05/01.md). Though there is more than one Judas mentioned in the New Testament, it is likely this is the only appearance of this Judas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1234,7 +1233,7 @@ ACT 9 30 aqn6 figs-explicit ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν εἰς Τα ACT 9 31 vk8y 0 General Information: Verse 31 is a statement that gives an update on the church’s growth. ACT 9 31 n7c5 0 Connecting Statement: In verse 32, the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter. ACT 9 31 s4bn ἡ…ἐκκλησία καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας, καὶ Γαλιλαίας, καὶ Σαμαρείας 1 the church throughout all Judea and Galilee and Samaria This is the first use of the singular **church** to refer to more than one local congregation. Here it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Israel. -ACT 9 31 fh2g εἶχεν εἰρήνην 1 had peace “lived peacefully.” This means the persecution that started with the murder of Stephen was finished. +ACT 9 31 fh2g εἶχεν εἰρήνην 1 had peace This means the persecution that started with the murder of Stephen was finished. Alternate translation: “lived peacefully” ACT 9 31 elq7 figs-activepassive οἰκοδομουμένη καὶ πορευομένη 1 being built up and going on The agent was either God or the Holy Spirit. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God helped them grow and to go on” or “the Holy Spirit built them up and they continued on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 9 31 j8c9 figs-metaphor πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 walking in the fear of the Lord Traveling is here a metaphor for “living.” Alternate translation: “living in obedience to the Lord” or “continuing to honor the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 9 31 hl24 τῇ παρακλήσει τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 in the comfort of the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “with the Holy Spirit strengthening and encouraging them” @@ -1264,7 +1263,7 @@ ACT 9 39 me79 πᾶσαι αἱ χῆραι 1 all the widows It is possible tha ACT 9 39 piu7 χῆραι 1 widows women whose husbands had died and therefore needed help ACT 9 39 y6q5 μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα 1 while being with them Alternate translation: “while she was still alive with the disciples” ACT 9 40 ek9c writing-endofstory 0 The story of Tabitha ends in verse 42. Verse 43 tells us what happens to Peter after the story ends. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 9 40 yp2u ἐκβαλὼν…ἔξω πάντας 1 put out all of them “told them all to leave the room.” Peter had everyone leave so he could be alone to pray for Tabitha. +ACT 9 40 yp2u ἐκβαλὼν…ἔξω πάντας 1 put out all of them Peter had everyone leave so he could be alone to pray for Tabitha. Alternate translation: “told them all to leave the room” ACT 9 41 r7n6 δοὺς…αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν 1 having given his hand to her, he raised her up Peter took hold of her hand and helped her stand up. ACT 9 41 b73s τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας 1 the saints and the widows The widows were possibly also believers but are mentioned specifically because Tabitha was so important to them. ACT 9 42 nda9 figs-activepassive γνωστὸν δὲ ἐγένετο καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰόππης 1 And this became known throughout all Joppa This refers to the miracle of Peter’s raising Tabitha from the dead. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1281,14 +1280,14 @@ ACT 10 2 s6rh εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 ACT 10 2 n8i3 φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 fearing God The word **fearing** here has the sense of deep respect and awe. ACT 10 2 abce τῷ λαῷ 1 to the people This here refers to Jewish people who were in need. ACT 10 2 w2kx figs-hyperbole δεόμενος τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ παντός 1 praying to God through all The phrase **through all** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “he prayed to God a lot” or “he prayed to God regularly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 10 3 up3j ὥραν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour “three o’clock in the afternoon.” This is the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. +ACT 10 3 up3j ὥραν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour This is the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon” ACT 10 3 g3lv εἶδεν…φανερῶς 1 he clearly saw Alternate translation: “Cornelius clearly saw” ACT 10 4 abcf ὁ δὲ, ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ 1 But he stared at him Cornelius looked intently at the angel. ACT 10 4 abcg εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ 1 And he said to him Alternate translation: “Then the angel said to Cornelius” ACT 10 4 p5ml figs-explicit αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Your prayers and your alms have gone up for a memorial offering before God It is implied that his gifts and prayers had been accepted by God. Alternate translation: “God is pleased by your prayers and your gifts that have gone up to him as a memorial offering to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 10 6 lt9n βυρσεῖ 1 a tanner a person who makes leather from animal skins -ACT 10 7 g6lq ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ 1 And when the angel who spoke to him had left Alternate translation: “When Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended.” -ACT 10 7 i3x7 στρατιώτην εὐσεβῆ τῶν προσκαρτερούντων αὐτῷ 1 a devout soldier of those who served him “one of the soldiers who served him, who also worshiped God.” This soldier worshiped God. That was rare in the Roman army, so Cornelius’ other soldiers probably did not worship God. +ACT 10 7 g6lq ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ 1 And when the angel who spoke to him had left Alternate translation: “When Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended” +ACT 10 7 i3x7 στρατιώτην εὐσεβῆ τῶν προσκαρτερούντων αὐτῷ 1 a devout soldier of those who served him This soldier worshiped God. That was rare in the Roman army, so Cornelius’ other soldiers probably did not worship God. Alternate translation: “one of the soldiers who served him, who also worshiped God” ACT 10 7 yg7g εὐσεβῆ 1 devout An adjective to describe a person who worshiped God and served him. ACT 10 8 pcg2 ἐξηγησάμενος ἅπαντα αὐτοῖς 1 having told them everything Cornelius explained his vision to his two servants and to one of his soldiers. ACT 10 8 d2p3 ἀπέστειλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν Ἰόππην 1 he sent them to Joppa Alternate translation: “he sent two of his two servants and the one soldier to Joppa” @@ -1297,7 +1296,7 @@ ACT 10 9 w3g4 0 Connecting Statement: The story shifts away from Cornelius to ACT 10 9 tu7n περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην 1 at about the sixth hour Alternate translation: “at around noon” ACT 10 9 r6l8 ἀνέβη…ἐπὶ τὸ δῶμα 1 went up to the housetop The roofs of the houses were flat, and people often did many different activities on them. ACT 10 10 slq7 παρασκευαζόντων…αὐτῶν 1 while they were preparing Alternate translation: “before the people finished cooking the food” -ACT 10 10 im7x figs-activepassive ἐγένετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις 1 a vision came upon him “God gave him a vision” or “he saw a vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 10 10 im7x figs-activepassive ἐγένετο ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἔκστασις 1 a vision came upon him Alternate translation: “God gave him a vision” or “he saw a vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 11 n4hi θεωρεῖ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀνεῳγμένον 1 he sees the sky having been opened This was the beginning of Peter’s vision. It can be a new sentence. ACT 10 11 u9u4 ὡς ὀθόνην μεγάλην, τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς 1 like a large sheet … by four corners The container holding the animals had the appearance of a large square piece of cloth. ACT 10 11 jh1m τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς καθιέμενον 1 being let down by four corners Alternate translation: “suspended by its four corners” @@ -1309,7 +1308,7 @@ ACT 10 15 xs5s figs-123person ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν 1 What God ACT 10 16 rlr9 τοῦτο…ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς 1 this happened three times It is possible that everything Peter saw happened did not happen three times, but that the phrase, “What God has cleansed, do not call it defiled,” was repeated three times. However, it may be best to simply say “This happened three times.” ACT 10 17 d4zi διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος 1 Peter was very confused … about This means that Peter was having difficulty understanding what the vision meant. ACT 10 17 n6da ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows, in this case, the two men standing at the gate. -ACT 10 17 e62m figs-explicit ἐπέστησαν ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα 1 stood before the gate “stood before the gate to the house.” It is implied that this house had a wall with a **gate** in it to enter the property. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 10 17 e62m figs-explicit ἐπέστησαν ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα 1 stood before the gate It is implied that this house had a wall with a **gate** in it to enter the property. Alternate translation: “stood before the gate to the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 10 17 h72m διερωτήσαντες τὴν οἰκίαν 1 having found by inquiry the house This happened before they arrived at the house. This could be stated earlier in the verse, as the UST does. ACT 10 18 qe9d φωνήσαντες 1 they called out Cornelius’ men remained outside the gate while asking about Peter. ACT 10 19 e8ai διενθυμουμένου περὶ τοῦ ὁράματος 1 while … was still thinking about the vision Alternate translation: “as … was still wondering about the meaning of the vision” @@ -1329,14 +1328,14 @@ ACT 10 23 t7cz τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν τῶν ἀπὸ Ἰόππη ACT 10 24 c3s6 τῇ…ἐπαύριον 1 the following day This was the next day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day. ACT 10 24 g2up ὁ δὲ Κορνήλιος ἦν προσδοκῶν αὐτοὺς 1 And Cornelius was waiting for them Alternate translation: “And Cornelius expected them” ACT 10 25 wxt8 ὡς…τοῦ εἰσελθεῖν τὸν Πέτρον 1 as Peter entered Alternate translation: “when Peter entered the house” -ACT 10 25 b4pn translate-symaction πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας 1 and falling down at his feet “and kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet.” He did this to honor Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 10 25 b4pn translate-symaction πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας 1 and falling down at his feet He did this to honor Peter. Alternate translation: “and kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 10 25 u2x5 πεσὼν 1 and falling down He purposely lies down facing the ground to show that he is worshiping. ACT 10 26 s7n5 ἀνάστηθι, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπός εἰμι 1 Get up! I too am a man myself This was a mild rebuke or correction to Cornelius not to worship Peter. Alternate translation: “Stop doing that! I am only a man, as you are” ACT 10 27 f9x6 figs-you 0 General Information: The word “him” here refers to Cornelius. Here the words “You” and “you” are plural and include Cornelius as well as the Gentiles who were present. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 10 27 bg7b 0 Connecting Statement: Peter addresses the people who are gathered in Cornelius’ house. -ACT 10 27 twp9 figs-explicit συνεληλυθότας πολλούς 1 many people gathered together “many Gentile people gathered together.” It is implied that these people Cornelius had invited were Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 10 27 twp9 figs-explicit συνεληλυθότας πολλούς 1 many people gathered together It is implied that these people Cornelius had invited were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “many Gentile people gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 10 28 g7j7 ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 You yourselves know Peter is addressing Cornelius and his invited guests. -ACT 10 28 iyx6 ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ 1 how unlawful it is for a Jewish man “that it is forbidden for a Jewish man.” This refers to the Jewish religious law. +ACT 10 28 iyx6 ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ 1 how unlawful it is for a Jewish man This refers to the Jewish religious law. Alternate translation: “that it is forbidden for a Jewish man” ACT 10 28 k3we ἀλλοφύλῳ 1 a foreigner This refers to people who were not Jews and not specifically to where they lived. ACT 10 30 krz8 0 General Information: In verses 31 and 32 Cornelius quotes what the angel had said to him when he appeared to him at the ninth hour. ACT 10 30 n5fs 0 Connecting Statement: Cornelius responds to Peter’s question. @@ -1345,7 +1344,7 @@ ACT 10 30 mqv8 translate-textvariants προσευχόμενος 1 praying Some ACT 10 30 yy6e τὴν ἐνάτην 1 at the ninth hour The normal afternoon time when the Jews pray to God. ACT 10 31 x6d0 figs-you σου…σου 1 Both occurrences of **your** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 10 31 heh3 figs-activepassive εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ 1 your prayer has been heard If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 10 31 s6nz ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 have been remembered before God “brought you to God’s attention.” This does not imply that God had forgotten. +ACT 10 31 s6nz ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 have been remembered before God This does not imply that God had forgotten. Alternate translation: “brought you to God’s attention” ACT 10 32 ci31 μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος 1 summon Simon who is called Peter Alternate translation: “tell Simon who is also called Peter to come to you” ACT 10 33 p5ee ἐξαυτῆς 1 immediately Alternate translation: “right away” ACT 10 33 ruf3 σύ τε καλῶς ἐποίησας παραγενόμενος 1 and you did well in coming This expression is a polite way of thanking Peter for coming. Alternate translation: “and I certainly thank you for coming” @@ -1410,12 +1409,12 @@ ACT 11 4 lrh6 0 Connecting Statement: Peter responds to the Jews by telling th ACT 11 4 bfp5 ἀρξάμενος…Πέτρος ἐξετίθετο 1 Peter began to explain Peter did not criticize the Jewish believers but reacted in a friendly explanatory manner. ACT 11 4 nuy6 καθεξῆς 1 in an orderly manner Alternate translation: “exactly what happened” ACT 11 5 j37p ὡς ὀθόνην μεγάλην 1 like a large sheet The container holding the animals had the appearance of a large square piece of cloth. See how you translated this in [Acts 10:11](../10/11.md). -ACT 11 5 axu6 τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς 1 by its four corners “suspended by its four corners.” See how you translated this in [Acts 10:11](../10/11.md). +ACT 11 5 axu6 τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς 1 by its four corners See how you translated this in [Acts 10:11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “suspended by its four corners” ACT 11 6 lbh4 figs-explicit τὰ τετράποδα τῆς γῆς, καὶ τὰ θηρία, καὶ τὰ ἑρπετὰ, καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 the four-legged animals of the earth, and the wild beasts, and the creeping animals, and the birds of the sky From Peter’s response, it can be implied that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of them. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Acts 10:12](../10/12.md). Alternate translation: “many kinds of animals and reptiles and birds that the Mosaic laws forbade Jews to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 11 6 ew64 θηρία 1 wild beasts This probably refer to the animals people do not or can not tame or control. ACT 11 6 t36i ἑρπετὰ 1 creeping animals These are reptiles. ACT 11 7 i5ic figs-synecdoche ἤκουσα…φωνῆς 1 I heard … a voice The person speaking is not specified. The **voice** was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God. See how you translated **a voice** in [Acts 10:13](../10/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 11 8 m4mu μηδαμῶς 1 By no means “I will not do that.” See how you translated this in [Acts 10:14](../10/14.md). +ACT 11 8 m4mu μηδαμῶς 1 By no means See how you translated this in [Acts 10:14](../10/14.md). Alternate translation: “I will not do that” ACT 11 8 m5p5 figs-explicit κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 the profane or unclean has never entered into my mouth Apparently the animals in the sheet were animals which the Jewish law in the Old Testament forbade the Jews to eat. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 11 8 wwbw figs-doublenegatives κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **profane or unclean … never entered**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I have eaten only meat from holy and clean animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 11 8 kj91 ἀκάθαρτον 1 unclean In the Old Testament Jewish law, a person became ritually **unclean** in various ways, such as eating certain forbidden animals. @@ -1429,7 +1428,7 @@ ACT 11 12 lf6m μηδὲν διακρίναντα 1 not making any distinction ACT 11 12 cf8x ἦλθον…σὺν ἐμοὶ 1 went with me Alternate translation: “went with me to Caesarea” ACT 11 12 xrc6 οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι 1 these six brothers Alternate translation: “these six Jewish believers” ACT 11 12 w6ia εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός 1 into the house of the man This refers to the house of Cornelius. -ACT 11 13 few6 Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον 1 Simon, who is called Peter “Simon, who is also called Peter.” See how you translated the same phrase in [Acts 10:32](../10/32.md). +ACT 11 13 few6 Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον 1 Simon, who is called Peter See how you translated the same phrase in [Acts 10:32](../10/32.md). Alternate translation: “Simon, who is also called Peter” ACT 11 14 hpr2 figs-metonymy πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου 1 all your household This refers to all the people in the household. Alternate translation: “everyone who lives in your house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 15 qy12 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “us” refers to Peter, the apostles, and any of the Jewish believers who had received the Holy Spirit at Pentecost. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 11 15 a8jw ἐν…τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν, ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς 1 as I began to speak, the Holy Spirit came on them This implies that Peter had not finished speaking but had intended to say more. @@ -1441,7 +1440,7 @@ ACT 11 17 e576 0 Connecting Statement: Peter finishes his speech (which he beg ACT 11 17 u3nu figs-rquestion εἰ οὖν τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν? 1 If, therefore, God gave to them the same gift as also to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, who was I, able to oppose God? Peter uses this question to emphasize that he was only obeying God. Alternate translation: “Since God gave to them the same gift as he also gave to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, I decided that I could not oppose God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 11 17 y7ag τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν 1 the same gift Peter refers to the gift of the Holy Spirit. ACT 11 18 nr7g ἡσύχασαν 1 they became quiet Alternate translation: “they did not argue with Peter” -ACT 11 18 z3fy figs-abstractnouns καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν 1 God has given repentance unto life to the Gentiles also “God has given repentance that leads to life to the Gentiles also.” Here, **life** refers to eternal life. The abstract nouns **repentance** and **life** can be translated as the verbs “repent” and “live.” Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles also to repent and live eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 11 18 z3fy figs-abstractnouns καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν 1 God has given repentance unto life to the Gentiles also Here, **life** refers to eternal life. The abstract nouns **repentance** and **life** can be translated as the verbs “repent” and “live.” Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles also to repent and live eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 11 19 zck4 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells about what happened to the believers who fled after the stoning of Stephen. ACT 11 19 bwb8 writing-newevent οὖν 1 Then This introduces the new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 11 19 m3i7 οἱ…διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ, διῆλθον 1 those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen spread The Jews began persecuting Jesus’ followers because Stephen had said and done things that the Jews did not like. Because of this persecution, many of Jesus’ followers left Jerusalem and went to many different places. @@ -1496,20 +1495,20 @@ ACT 12 3 v4ag ἰδὼν δὲ ὅτι ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς ACT 12 3 cu7s ὅτι…ἐστιν 1 that this is Alternate translation: “that Herod did this” or “that this happened” ACT 12 3 wpm1 ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 this is pleasing to the Jews Alternate translation: “made the Jewish leaders happy” ACT 12 3 ly66 ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. Alternate translation: “the festival when the Jewish people ate bread without yeast” -ACT 12 4 pps1 τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν 1 to four squads of soldiers “to four groups of soldiers.” Each squad had four soldiers that guarded Peter, one group at a time. The groups divided the 24-hour day into four shifts. Each time two soldiers would have been at his side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. +ACT 12 4 pps1 τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν 1 to four squads of soldiers Each squad had four soldiers that guarded Peter, one group at a time. The groups divided the 24-hour day into four shifts. Each time two soldiers would have been at his side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. Alternate translation: “to four groups of soldiers” ACT 12 4 i23a βουλόμενος…ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ 1 he was intending to bring him out to the people Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in the presence of the people” or “Herod planned to judge Peter before the Jewish people” ACT 12 5 v2yz figs-explicit ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ 1 So Peter was kept in the prison This implies that the soldiers continually guarded Peter in prison. Alternate translation: “So Peter was guarded by soldiers in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 5 xpcx figs-activepassive ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “So the soldiers guarded Peter in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 12 5 f8qc figs-activepassive προσευχὴ…ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 prayer was being made earnestly to God for him by the church If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the group of believers in Jerusalem earnestly prayed to God for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 12 5 g189 ἐκτενῶς 1 earnestly continuously and with dedication ACT 12 6 km83 figs-explicit ἤμελλεν προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν ὁ Ἡρῴδης τῇ νυκτὶ ἐκείνῃ 1 Herod was going to bring him out for trial, that night That Herod planned to execute him can be clarified. Alternate translation: “the same night before Herod was going to bring Peter out from prison to put him on trial and then to execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 12 6 g2bh δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν 1 bound with two chains “tied with two chains” or “fastened with two chains.” Each chain would have been attached to one of the two guards who stayed beside Peter. +ACT 12 6 g2bh δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν 1 bound with two chains Each chain would have been attached to one of the two guards who stayed beside Peter. Alternate translation: “tied with two chains” or “fastened with two chains” ACT 12 6 aqv1 ἐτήρουν τὴν φυλακήν 1 were keeping watch over the prison Alternate translation: “were guarding the prison doors” ACT 12 7 kk4i 0 General Information: The words “him” and “his” refer to Peter. ACT 12 7 i7g3 ἰδοὺ 1 behold This word alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows. ACT 12 7 lu25 ἐπέστη 1 appeared by him Alternate translation: “appeared next to him” or “suddenly stood beside him” ACT 12 7 z2i1 ἐν τῷ οἰκήματι 1 in the prison cell Alternate translation: “in the prison room” -ACT 12 7 dc5b πατάξας…τοῦ Πέτρου 1 he struck Peter “the angel tapped Peter” or “the angel poked Peter.” Peter was evidently sleeping deeply enough that this was required to wake him. +ACT 12 7 dc5b πατάξας…τοῦ Πέτρου 1 he struck Peter Peter was evidently sleeping deeply enough that this was required to wake him. Alternate translation: “the angel tapped Peter” or “the angel poked Peter” ACT 12 7 dqn9 ἐξέπεσαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἁλύσεις ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν 1 his chains fell away from his hands The angel caused the chains to fall from Peter without touching them. ACT 12 8 hxt9 ἐποίησεν…οὕτως 1 he did thus Alternate translation: “Peter did what the angel told him to do” or “Peter obeyed” ACT 12 8 abch λέγει αὐτῷ 1 he said to him Alternate translation: “the angel said to Peter” @@ -1532,18 +1531,18 @@ ACT 12 11 p739 figs-synecdoche πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ ACT 12 12 tfh3 συνιδών 1 having realized this He became aware that God had rescued him. ACT 12 12 ux4v figs-activepassive Ἰωάννου, τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου 1 of John, who was called Mark John was also called Mark. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “John, whom people also called Mark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 12 13 x5fg 0 General Information: Here the words “she” and “her” all refer to the servant girl Rhoda. Here the words “they” and “They” refer to the people who were inside praying ([Acts 12:12](../12/12.md)). -ACT 12 13 pfn7 κρούσαντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he knocked “when Peter knocked.” Tapping on the door was a normal Jewish custom to let others know you wish to visit them. You may need to change this to fit your culture. +ACT 12 13 pfn7 κρούσαντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he knocked Tapping on the door was a normal Jewish custom to let others know you wish to visit them. You may need to change this to fit your culture. Alternate translation: “when Peter knocked” ACT 12 13 c634 τὴν θύραν τοῦ πυλῶνος 1 at the door of the gate Alternate translation: “at the outer door” or “at the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard” ACT 12 13 khq1 προσῆλθε…ὑπακοῦσαι 1 came to answer Alternate translation: “came to the gate to ask who was knocking” ACT 12 14 y2ff ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς 1 from joy Alternate translation: “because she was so joyful” or “being overly excited” ACT 12 14 m3m7 οὐκ ἤνοιξεν τὸν πυλῶνα 1 she did not open the gate Alternate translation: “she did not open the door” or “she forgot to open the door” ACT 12 14 ky3p εἰσδραμοῦσα 1 running inside You may prefer to say “went running into the room in the house” ACT 12 14 yq3r ἀπήγγειλεν 1 she reported Alternate translation: “she told them” or “she said” -ACT 12 14 a19k ἑστάναι…πρὸ τοῦ πυλῶνος 1 stands at the gate “is standing outside the door.” Peter was still standing outside. +ACT 12 14 a19k ἑστάναι…πρὸ τοῦ πυλῶνος 1 stands at the gate Peter was still standing outside. Alternate translation: “is standing outside the door” ACT 12 15 ybz7 μαίνῃ 1 You are insane The people not only did not believe her, but rebuked her by saying she was crazy. Alternate translation: “You are crazy” ACT 12 15 xnm2 ἡ…διϊσχυρίζετο οὕτως ἔχειν 1 she insisted that it was thus Alternate translation: “she insisted that what she said was true” ACT 12 15 en8b οἱ…ἔλεγον 2 they said Alternate translation: “they answered” -ACT 12 15 qa8m ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ 1 It is his angel “What you have seen is Peter’s angel.” Some Jews believed in guardian angels and may have thought that Peter’s angel had come to them. +ACT 12 15 qa8m ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ 1 It is his angel Some Jews believed in guardian angels and may have thought that Peter’s angel had come to them. Alternate translation: “What you have seen is Peter’s angel” ACT 12 16 wwg1 0 General Information: Here the words “they” and “them” refer to the people in the house. The words “He” and “he” refer to Peter. ACT 12 16 bi6l ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἐπέμενεν κρούων 1 But Peter continued knocking The word “continued” means that Peter kept knocking the entire time those inside were talking. ACT 12 17 jx1a ἀπαγγείλατε…ταῦτα 1 Report these things Alternate translation: “Tell these things” @@ -1585,7 +1584,7 @@ ACT 13 1 srw6 translate-names Συμεὼν…Νίγερ…Λούκιος…Μα ACT 13 1 u48c Ἡρῴδου τοῦ τετράρχου σύντροφος 1 one brought up with Herod the tetrarch Manaen was probably Herod’s playmate or close friend growing up. Some scholars suggest he was Herod’s foster brother. ACT 13 2 ifb9 ἀφορίσατε 1 Set apart Alternate translation: “Appoint to serve” ACT 13 2 j6ym προσκέκλημαι αὐτούς 1 I have called them The verb here means that God chose them to do this work. -ACT 13 3 ku45 translate-symaction ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς 1 laid their hands on them “laid their hands on these men whom God had set apart for his service.” This act showed that the leaders agreed that the Holy Spirit had called Barnabas and Saul to do this work. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 13 3 ku45 translate-symaction ἐπιθέντες τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῖς 1 laid their hands on them This act showed that the leaders agreed that the Holy Spirit had called Barnabas and Saul to do this work. Alternate translation: “laid their hands on these men whom God had set apart for his service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 13 3 p1us ἀπέλυσαν 1 they sent them off Alternate translation: “they sent those men off” or “they sent those men off to do the work the Holy Spirit told them to do” ACT 13 4 br2m 0 General Information: Here the words “they,” “They,” and “their” refer to Barnabas and Silas. ACT 13 4 mt3h οὖν 1 So This word marks an event that happened because of a previous event. In this case, the previous event is Barnabas and Saul being set apart by the Holy Spirit. @@ -1669,7 +1668,7 @@ ACT 13 22 sw2r ᾧ καὶ εἶπεν μαρτυρήσας 1 to whom having te ACT 13 22 dbu5 εὗρον 1 I have found Alternate translation: “I have observed that” ACT 13 22 mp53 figs-idiom ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου 1 a man according to my heart This expression means he “a man who wants what I want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 23 lby6 0 General Information: The quotation here is from the Gospels. -ACT 13 23 xj5a τούτου…ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος 1 From the descendants of this one “From David’s descendants.” This is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the savior had to be one of David’s descendants ([Acts 13:22](../13/22.md)). +ACT 13 23 xj5a τούτου…ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος 1 From the descendants of this one This is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the savior had to be one of David’s descendants ([Acts 13:22](../13/22.md)). Alternate translation: “From David’s descendants” ACT 13 23 kc76 figs-metonymy ἤγαγεν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 brought to Israel This refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “gave to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 23 mk5g κατ’ ἐπαγγελίαν 1 according to promise Alternate translation: “just as God promised he would do” ACT 13 24 abcn πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 before the face of his coming Alternate translation: “before the coming of Jesus” @@ -1678,7 +1677,7 @@ ACT 13 25 vww3 figs-rquestion τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? 1 ACT 13 25 rp32 figs-explicit οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ 1 I am not him John was referring to the Messiah, whom they were expecting to come. Alternate translation: “I am not the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 25 nnl5 ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ 1 But behold This emphasizes the importance of what he will say next. ACT 13 25 r1pl figs-explicit ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ 1 one is coming after me This also refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Messiah will soon come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 25 gys2 οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι 1 of whom the sandals of his feet I am not worthy to untie “and I am not worthy even to untie his shoes.” The Messiah is so much greater than John that he did not even feel worthy do the lowest job for him. +ACT 13 25 gys2 οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι 1 of whom the sandals of his feet I am not worthy to untie The Messiah is so much greater than John that he did not even feel worthy do the lowest job for him. Alternate translation: “and I am not worthy even to untie his shoes” ACT 13 26 jdp6 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The word “they” and “their” refers to the Jews who lived in Jerusalem. Here the word “us” includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 13 26 kci9 ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 brothers, sons of the family of Abraham, and those among you who fear God Paul addresses his audience of Jews and Gentile converts to Judaism to remind them of their special status as worshiping the true God. ACT 13 26 u6zn figs-activepassive ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη 1 the word about this salvation has been sent If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has sent the message about this salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1692,9 +1691,9 @@ ACT 13 28 y9j6 μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου εὑρόντες ACT 13 28 d4xm ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον 1 they asked Pilate The word **asked** here is a strong word meaning to demand, beg or plead for. ACT 13 29 sq1j ὡς δὲ ἐτέλεσαν πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα 1 And when they had completed all that had been written about him Alternate translation: “And when they did to Jesus all the things that the prophets said would happen to him” ACT 13 29 m5f1 figs-explicit καθελόντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου 1 taking him down from the tree It may be helpful to explicitly say Jesus died before this happened. Alternate translation: “they killed Jesus and then took him down from the cross after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 29 vwt4 figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου 1 from the tree “from the cross.” This was another way people at that time referred to the cross. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 13 29 vwt4 figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου 1 from the tree This was another way people at that time referred to the cross. Alternate translation: “from the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 30 h5jw ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν 1 But God raised him **But** indicates a strong contrast between what the people did and what God did. -ACT 13 30 mqx8 ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised him from the dead “raised him from among those who were dead.” To be with **the dead** means that Jesus was dead. +ACT 13 30 mqx8 ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised him from the dead To be with **the dead** means that Jesus was dead. Alternate translation: “raised him from among those who were dead” ACT 13 30 zsx4 figs-idiom ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν 1 raised him Here, **raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “caused him to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 30 d14p ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To raise someone from among them speaks of making that person alive again. ACT 13 31 ig7w figs-activepassive ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 He was seen for many days by those who had come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The disciples who traveled with Jesus from Galilee to Jerusalem saw him for many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1702,7 +1701,7 @@ ACT 13 31 g4vl ἡμέρας πλείους 1 many days We know from other writ ACT 13 31 vqj4 νῦν εἰσιν μάρτυρες αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὸν λαόν 1 are now his witnesses to the people Alternate translation: “are now testifying to the people about Jesus” or “are now telling the people about Jesus” ACT 13 32 ipb9 0 General Information: The second quotation here is from the prophet Isaiah. ACT 13 32 y273 καὶ 1 And This word marks an event that happened because of previous event. In this case, the previous event is God’s raising Jesus from the dead. -ACT 13 32 hr2g τοὺς πατέρας 1 our fathers “our ancestors.” Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. These were the physical ancestors of the Jews, and the spiritual ancestors of the converts. +ACT 13 32 hr2g τοὺς πατέρας 1 our fathers Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. These were the physical ancestors of the Jews, and the spiritual ancestors of the converts. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” ACT 13 33 b1uh translate-versebridge ταύτην ὁ Θεὸς ἐκπεπλήρωκεν τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 God has fulfilled this for our children You may need to rearrange the parts of this sentence, which begins in verse 32. “God has fulfilled for us, their children, these promises that he made to our ancestors, by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 13 33 dy6w τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 for our children Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” but the best copies read, “for our children.” ACT 13 33 d95n figs-idiom ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν 1 by raising up Jesus Here, **raising up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “by making Jesus alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1713,7 +1712,7 @@ ACT 13 34 iy5q ὅτι δὲ ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶ ACT 13 34 h3nj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again. ACT 13 34 q3kq τὰ ὅσια…τὰ πιστά 1 the holy and sure blessings Alternate translation: “the holy and certain blessings” ACT 13 35 r1ev figs-explicit διότι καὶ ἐν ἑτέρῳ λέγει 1 On account of this he also says in another place Paul’s audience would have understood that this Psalm refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “In another Psalm of David, he also says about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 35 gl8s καὶ…λέγει 1 he also says “David also says.” David is the author of Psalm 16 from which this quotation is taken. +ACT 13 35 gl8s καὶ…λέγει 1 he also says David is the author of Psalm 16 from which this quotation is taken. Alternate translation: “David also says” ACT 13 35 hvt8 figs-metonymy οὐ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 You will not allow your Holy One to see decay The phrase **see decay** is a metonym for “decay.” Alternate translation: “You will not allow the body of your Holy One to rot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 35 ry97 οὐ δώσεις 1 You will not allow David is speaking to God here. ACT 13 36 u8vh ἰδίᾳ γενεᾷ 1 in his own generation Alternate translation: “during his lifetime” @@ -1762,7 +1761,7 @@ ACT 13 46 jn55 figs-synecdoche ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον ACT 13 46 d08v figs-activepassive ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “necessary that we speak the message from God to you first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 46 lly5 figs-metaphor ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν 1 Since you reject it Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 46 ms36 οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς 1 judge yourselves unworthy of eternal life Alternate translation: “seem to think you are not worthy of eternal life” or “act as though you are not worthy of eternal life” -ACT 13 46 rf9k figs-explicit στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη 1 we will turn to the Gentiles “we will go to the Gentiles.” Paul and Barnadas were implying that they would preach to the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 13 46 rf9k figs-explicit στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη 1 we will turn to the Gentiles Paul and Barnadas were implying that they would preach to the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 47 v8au figs-metaphor εἰς φῶς 1 as a light Here the truth about Jesus that Paul was preaching is spoken of as if it were **a light** that allowed people to see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 47 t5sp figs-abstractnouns εἶναί…εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 should be for salvation as far as the end of the earth The abstract word **salvation** can be translated with the verb “to save.” The phrase **end** refers to everywhere. Alternate translation: “should tell people everywhere in the world that I want to save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 13 48 e9ag figs-metonymy ἐδόξαζον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 glorified the word of the Lord Here, **word** refers to the message about Jesus that they had believed. Alternate translation: “praised God for the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1782,19 +1781,19 @@ ACT 13 52 dp5k οἵ…μαθηταὶ 1 the disciples This probably refers to ACT 14 intro rsg2 0 # Acts 14 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The message of his grace”

The message of Jesus is the message that God will show grace to those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Zeus and Hermes

The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods who do not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.”

Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul is saying the same thing using different words. ACT 14 1 vh8u 0 General Information: The story of Paul and Barnabas in Iconium continues. ACT 14 1 hk1z ἐγένετο δὲ, ἐν Ἰκονίῳ 1 And it happened that Iconium This begins a new event. -ACT 14 1 f4sq figs-explicit λαλῆσαι οὕτως 1 spoke in such a way “spoke so powerfully.” It may be helpful to state that they spoke the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke the message about Jesus powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 14 1 f4sq figs-explicit λαλῆσαι οὕτως 1 spoke in such a way It may be helpful to state that they spoke the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke the message about Jesus powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 14 2 wc4x οἱ…ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews who were disobedient This refers to a portion of the Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus. ACT 14 2 n2pp figs-metaphor ἐπήγειραν…τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 stirred up the souls of the Gentiles Causing the Gentiles to become angry is spoken of as if calm waters were disturbed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 14 2 k8mv figs-synecdoche τὰς ψυχὰς 1 the souls Here the word **souls** refers to the people. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 14 2 fu13 τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Here, **brothers** refers to Paul and Barnabas and the new believers. ACT 14 3 lp4v 0 General Information: Here the word “He” refers to the Lord. -ACT 14 3 a3gp μὲν οὖν…διέτριψαν 1 So they stayed there “Nevertheless they stayed there.” Paul and Barnabas stayed in Iconium to help the many people who had believed in [Acts 14:1](../14/01.md). **So** could be omitted if it adds confusion to the text. +ACT 14 3 a3gp μὲν οὖν…διέτριψαν 1 So they stayed there Paul and Barnabas stayed in Iconium to help the many people who had believed in [Acts 14:1](../14/01.md). **So** could be omitted if it adds confusion to the text. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless they stayed there” ACT 14 3 f2xh τῷ μαρτυροῦντι τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 who is testifying to the word of his grace Alternate translation: “who demonstrated that the message about his grace was true” ACT 14 3 wcn5 τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 to the word of his grace Alternate translation: “about the message of the Lord’s grace” ACT 14 3 c2cv figs-activepassive διδόντι σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα γίνεσθαι διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 by granting signs and wonders to be done by their hands If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “by enabling Paul and Barnabas to perform signs and wonders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 14 3 p9iq figs-synecdoche διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 by their hands Here, **hands** refers to the will and effort of these two men as guided by the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “by the ministry of Paul and Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 14 4 btu3 figs-metonymy ἐσχίσθη…τὸ πλῆθος τῆς πόλεως 1 the population of the city was divided Here, **population of the city** refers to the people in the city. Alternate translation: “most of the people of the city were divided” or “most of the people of the city did not agree with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 14 4 smz5 ἦσαν σὺν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 were with the Jews “supported the Jews” or “agreed with the Jews.” The first group mentioned did not agree with the message about grace. +ACT 14 4 smz5 ἦσαν σὺν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 were with the Jews The first group mentioned did not agree with the message about grace. Alternate translation: “supported the Jews” or “agreed with the Jews” ACT 14 4 q1xc figs-ellipsis σὺν τοῖς ἀποστόλοις 1 with the apostles The second group mentioned agreed with the message about grace. It may be helpful to restate the verb. Alternate translation: “sided with the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 14 4 mw9h τοῖς ἀποστόλοις 1 the apostles Luke refers to Paul and Barnabas. Here, **apostles** might be used in the general sense of “ones sent out.” ACT 14 5 s5h7 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Barnabas. @@ -1812,11 +1811,11 @@ ACT 14 8 hw4l χωλὸς 1 crippled unable to walk ACT 14 9 di49 ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ 1 He looked intently at him Alternate translation: “Paul looked straight at the man” ACT 14 9 xak4 figs-abstractnouns ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 he has faith to be saved If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you can express it with the verb “believe”. Alternate translation: “he believed so that he could be healed” or “he believed so that he could be made well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 14 9 uwov figs-activepassive ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he believed that Jesus could heal him” or “he believed that Jesus could make him well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 14 10 v1kz ἥλατο 1 he jumped up “he dleaped in the air.” This implies that his legs were completely healed. +ACT 14 10 v1kz ἥλατο 1 he jumped up This implies that his legs were completely healed. Alternate translation: “he leaped in the air” ACT 14 11 axe6 ὃ ἐποίησεν Παῦλος 1 what Paul had done This refers to Paul’s healing the crippled man. ACT 14 11 lvs9 ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 they raised their voice Here, **raised their voice** means to speak loudly. Alternate translation: “they spoke loudly” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom) ACT 14 11 d1gz figs-explicit οἱ θεοὶ…κατέβησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς 1 The gods … have come down to us A large number of people believed Paul and Barnabas were their pagan gods who had come down from heaven. Alternate translation: “The gods … have come down from heaven to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 14 11 x3bi Λυκαονιστὶ 1 in the Lycaonian language “in their own Lycaonian language.” The people of Lystra spoke Lycaonian and also Greek. +ACT 14 11 x3bi Λυκαονιστὶ 1 in the Lycaonian language The people of Lystra spoke Lycaonian and also Greek. Alternate translation: “in their own Lycaonian language” ACT 14 11 rm85 ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις 1 being made like men These people believed that the gods needed to change their appearance in order to look like men. ACT 14 12 t7uu translate-names Δία 1 Zeus Zeus was the king over all the other pagan gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 14 12 hh25 translate-names Ἑρμῆν 1 Hermes Hermes was the pagan god who brought messages to people from Zeus and the other gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1847,7 +1846,7 @@ ACT 14 20 pan3 τῶν μαθητῶν 1 the disciples These were new believers ACT 14 20 aqx3 εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν 1 he entered into the city Alternate translation: “Paul re-entered Lystra with the believers” ACT 14 20 e2y9 ἐξῆλθεν σὺν τῷ Βαρναβᾷ εἰς Δέρβην 1 he went with Barnabas to Derbe Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas went to the city of Derbe” ACT 14 21 wv7e figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the words “they” and “They” refer to Paul. Here the word “We” includes Paul, Barnabas, and the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 14 21 ykt4 τὴν πόλιν ἐκείνην 1 in that city “in Derbe” ([Acts 14:20](../14/20.md)) +ACT 14 21 ykt4 τὴν πόλιν ἐκείνην 1 in that city Alternate translation: “in Derbe” ([Acts 14:20](../14/20.md)) ACT 14 22 ek9l figs-synecdoche ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν 1 They were strengthening the souls of the disciples Here, **souls** refers to the disciples. This emphasizes their inner thoughts and beliefs. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to believe the message about Jesus” or “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to grow strong in their relationship with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 14 22 zkd2 παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει 1 and encouraging them to continue in the faith Alternate translation: “and encouraging the believers to keep trusting in Jesus” ACT 14 22 d9ic writing-quotations καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 and saying, “It is necessary for us to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions.” Some version translate this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “and saying that we must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) @@ -1865,7 +1864,7 @@ ACT 14 27 b4id figs-metaphor ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύρα ACT 14 28 abcq figs-litotes χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον 1 for not a little time This phrase is a litotes. The words **not** and **a little** together mean “a lot.” Alternate translation: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 15 intro h917 0 # Acts 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16-17.

The meeting that Luke describes in this chapter is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.” This was a time when many church leaders got together to decide if believers needed to obey the whole law of Moses.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Brothers

In this chapter Luke begins to use the word “brothers” to refer to fellow Christians instead of fellow Jews.

### Obeying the law of Moses

Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised and that this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not want the Gentiles to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do.

### “Abstain from things sacrificed to idols, blood, things strangled, and from sexual immorality”

It is possible that the church leaders decided on these laws so that Jews and Gentiles could not only live together but eat the same foods together. ACT 15 1 qck6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and Barnabas are still in Antioch when there is a dispute about the Gentiles and circumcision. -ACT 15 1 su66 figs-explicit τινες 1 certain ones “some men.” You can make explicit that these men were Jews who believed in Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 15 1 su66 figs-explicit τινες 1 certain ones You can make explicit that these men were Jews who believed in Christ. Alternate translation: “some men who believed in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 1 p3k9 κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 coming down from Judea The phrase **coming down** is used here because Judea is higher in elevation than Antioch. ACT 15 1 zi1n figs-explicit ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 taught the brothers Here, **brothers** stands for believers in Christ. It is implied that they were in Antioch. Alternate translation: “taught the believers at Antioch” or “were teaching the believers at Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 1 pm8h figs-activepassive ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε τῷ ἔθει τῷ Μωϋσέως, οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι 1 Unless you are circumcised in the custom of Moses, you are not able to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you in the custom of Moses, God cannot save you” or “God will not save you from your sins unless you receive circumcision according to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1897,7 +1896,7 @@ ACT 15 8 m1xc figs-metonymy καρδιογνώστης 1 who knows the heart Her ACT 15 8 p6d2 ἐμαρτύρησεν αὐτοῖς 1 testified to them Alternate translation: “witnesses to the Gentiles” ACT 15 8 i1gc δοὺς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 giving them the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “causing the Holy Spirit to come upon them” ACT 15 8 abcs figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν 1 just as also to us Here Luke expects his readers to understand the words “he gave” that he leaves out. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 15 8 wlzx figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here **us** is plural and refers to Peter, the apostles and elders, and all Jewish believers in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 15 8 wlzx figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, **us** is plural and refers to Peter, the apostles and elders, and all Jewish believers in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 15 9 zs2g οὐδὲν διέκρινεν 1 he did not distinguish God did not treat Jewish believers different from Gentile believers. ACT 15 9 ase1 figs-metaphor τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 having made their hearts clean by faith God’s forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins is spoken as though he literally cleaned their hearts. Alternate translation: “forgiving their sins because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 9 yi8r figs-metonymy τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, **heart** stands for the person’s inner being. Alternate translation: “forgiving them because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1909,14 +1908,14 @@ ACT 15 10 qpyd figs-metaphor ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν ACT 15 10 bfd5 οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers This refers to their Jewish ancestors. ACT 15 11 q28c figs-activepassive ἀλλὰ διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ, πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι καθ’ ὃν τρόπον κἀκεῖνοι 1 But we believe to be saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus, and they according to that same manner If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But we believe the Lord Jesus shall save us by his grace, just as he saved the non-Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 12 um1p 0 General Information: Here the word “them” refers to Paul and Barnabas. -ACT 15 12 d1uc πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος 1 all the crowd “everyone” or “the whole group” ([Acts 15:6](../15/06.md)) +ACT 15 12 d1uc πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος 1 all the crowd See how you translated this in ([Acts 15:6](../15/06.md)) Alternate translation: “everyone” or “the whole group” ACT 15 12 uks6 ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς 1 God had worked Alternate translation: “God had done” or “God had caused” ACT 15 13 vb25 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Barnabas ([Acts 15:12](../15/12.md)). ACT 15 13 l7mp 0 Connecting Statement: James begins to speak to the apostles and elders ([Acts 15:6](../15/06.md)). -ACT 15 13 pl6m ἀδελφοί, ἀκούσατέ 1 brothers, listen “fellow believers, listen.” James was probably speaking only to men. +ACT 15 13 pl6m ἀδελφοί, ἀκούσατέ 1 brothers, listen James was probably speaking only to men. Alternate translation: “fellow believers, listen” ACT 15 14 abct ἐπεσκέψατο, λαβεῖν ἐξ ἐθνῶν 1 concerned himself to take from the Gentiles Alternate translation: “graciously helped the Gentiles by taking out of them” ACT 15 14 s9dn λαβεῖν ἐξ ἐθνῶν λαὸν 1 to take from them a people Alternate translation: “so that he might choose from among them a people” -ACT 15 14 pnr9 figs-metonymy τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 for his name “for God’s name.” Here, **name** refers to God. Alternate translation: “for himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 15 14 pnr9 figs-metonymy τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 for his name Here, **name** refers to God. Alternate translation: “for himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 15 h9um 0 General Information: Here “I” refers to God who spoke through the words of his prophet. ACT 15 15 ibb2 0 Connecting Statement: James quotes the prophet Amos from the Old Testament. ACT 15 15 am6y figs-metonymy τούτῳ συμφωνοῦσιν οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν 1 this agrees with the words of the prophets Here, **words** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “what the prophets said agrees” or “the prophets agree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1974,13 +1973,13 @@ ACT 15 33 y2ls 0 Connecting Statement: Judas and Silas return to Jerusalem whi ACT 15 33 v7pj figs-metaphor ποιήσαντες δὲ χρόνον 1 And after they had spent time there This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. The word “they” refers to Judas and Silas. Alternate translation: “And after they stayed there for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 33 v6im figs-activepassive ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 they were sent away with peace from the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent Judas and Silas back in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 33 wzw4 τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers This refers to the believers in Antioch. -ACT 15 33 xv3h πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς 1 to those who had sent them “to the believers in Jerusalem who sent Judas and Silas” ([Acts 15:22](../15/22.md)) +ACT 15 33 xv3h πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς 1 to those who had sent them See how you translated this in ([Acts 15:22](../15/22.md)) Alternate translation: “to the believers in Jerusalem who sent Judas and Silas” ACT 15 35 e7s4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 36 k6c6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and Barnabas go on separate journeys. ACT 15 36 i1n5 ἐπιστρέψαντες δὴ 1 Returning, then Alternate translation: “On our way back to Antioch” or “As we are going back” ACT 15 36 ib2j ἐπισκεψώμεθα τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 let us visit the brothers Alternate translation: “let us care for the brothers” or “we should offer to help the believers” ACT 15 36 ua1f figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for the message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 36 y9i9 πῶς ἔχουσιν 1 how they are “to learn how they are doing.” They want to learn about the current condition of the brothers and how they are holding on to God’s truth. +ACT 15 36 y9i9 πῶς ἔχουσιν 1 how they are They want to learn about the current condition of the brothers and how they are holding on to God’s truth. Alternate translation: “to learn how they are doing” ACT 15 38 a5nn figs-litotes Παῦλος…ἠξίου…μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον 1 Paul thought it wise not to take along him The words **wise not** are used to say the opposite of **wise**. Alternate translation: “Paul thought that taking Mark along would be foolish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 15 38 ht3k Παμφυλίας 1 Pamphylia This was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). ACT 15 38 ln7w μὴ συνελθόντα αὐτοῖς εἰς τὸ ἔργον 1 did not go with them in the work Alternate translation: “did not continue to work with them” or “did not continue to serve with them” @@ -2045,7 +2044,7 @@ ACT 16 18 qi1k figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ ACT 16 18 u4z8 ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 it came out that same hour Alternate translation: “the spirit came out immediately” ACT 16 19 m1y7 οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς 1 her masters Alternate translation: “the owners of the slave girl” ACT 16 19 r1a1 figs-explicit ἰδόντες…οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς, ὅτι ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν 1 when her masters saw that their hope of profit was gone It can be stated clearly why they no longer hoped to make money. Alternate translation: “when her masters saw that she could no longer earn money for them by telling fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 19 bws7 εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 1 into the marketplace “into the public square.” This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services takes place. +ACT 16 19 bws7 εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 1 into the marketplace This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services takes place. Alternate translation: “into the public square” ACT 16 19 hf82 ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας 1 before the authorities Alternate translation: “into the presence of the authorities” or “so that the authorities could judge them” ACT 16 20 d2rg προσαγαγόντες αὐτοὺς τοῖς στρατηγοῖς 1 when they had brought them to the magistrates Alternate translation: “when they had brought them to the judges” ACT 16 20 wa94 τοῖς στρατηγοῖς 1 to the magistrates These were rulers or judges. @@ -2067,7 +2066,7 @@ ACT 16 26 s6mu figs-activepassive ἠνεῴχθησαν…αἱ θύραι π ACT 16 26 p393 figs-activepassive πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη 1 the chains of everyone were unfastened If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone’s chains came loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 27 ljy6 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” refers to Paul, Silas, and all of the other prisoners but excludes the jailer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 27 hr9q figs-activepassive ἔξυπνος…γενόμενος ὁ δεσμοφύλαξ 1 the jailer became awake If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the jailer woke up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 27 cwt5 ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν 1 he was about to kill himself “he was ready to kill himself.” The jailer preferred to commit suicide rather than suffer the consequences of letting the prisoners escape. +ACT 16 27 cwt5 ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν 1 he was about to kill himself The jailer preferred to commit suicide rather than suffer the consequences of letting the prisoners escape. Alternate translation: “he was ready to kill himself” ACT 16 29 pe66 figs-explicit αἰτήσας…φῶτα 1 having called for lights The reason why the jailer needed light can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after he called for someone to bring light so he could see who was still in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 29 h5ai figs-metonymy φῶτα 1 lights The word **lights** stands for something that makes light. Alternate translation: “torches” or “lamps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 29 r6is εἰσεπήδησεν 1 he rushed in Alternate translation: “he quickly entered the jail” @@ -2102,7 +2101,7 @@ ACT 17 1 e4w5 δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main st ACT 17 1 b7np διοδεύσαντες 1 having passed through Alternate translation: “when they had traveled through” ACT 17 1 kll1 translate-names τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν 1 Amphipolis and Apollonia These are coastal cities in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 1 yj66 figs-go ἦλθον εἰς Θεσσαλονίκην 1 they came to Thessalonica Here, **came** can be translated as “went” or “arrived.” Alternate translation: “they went to Thessalonica” or “they arrived at Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -ACT 17 2 vbf2 κατὰ…τὸ εἰωθὸς 1 according to his custom “as his habit was” or “as his common practice was.” Paul usually went to the synagogue on the Sabbath when Jews would be present. +ACT 17 2 vbf2 κατὰ…τὸ εἰωθὸς 1 according to his custom Paul usually went to the synagogue on the Sabbath when Jews would be present. Alternate translation: “as his habit was” or “as his common practice was” ACT 17 2 bt5e ἐπὶ Σάββατα τρία 1 for three Sabbaths Alternate translation: “on each Sabbath day for three weeks” ACT 17 2 wp3k figs-explicit διελέξατο αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν Γραφῶν 1 reasoned with them from the scriptures Paul explained what the scriptures means in order to prove to the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 2 qf4t διελέξατο αὐτοῖς 1 reasoned with them Alternate translation: “debated with them” or “discussed with them” @@ -2119,10 +2118,10 @@ ACT 17 5 nuh6 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to the un ACT 17 5 uj43 figs-metaphor ζηλώσαντες 1 having become jealous The feeling of jealousy is spoken of as if jealousy were actually moving the person. Alternate translation: “feeling very jealous” or “feeling very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 5 vev6 figs-explicit ζηλώσαντες 1 having become jealous It can be stated explicitly that these Jews were jealous because some of the Jews and Greeks believed Paul’s message. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 5 btw6 προσλαβόμενοι τῶν ἀγοραίων ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς 1 having taken certain wicked men of the marketplace Here, **having taken** does not mean the Jews took these people by force. It means the Jews persuaded these wicked men to help them. -ACT 17 5 lc6g ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς 1 certain wicked men “some evil men.” The word **men** here refers specifically to males. -ACT 17 5 ie1f τῶν ἀγοραίων 1 of the marketplace “from the public square.” This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. +ACT 17 5 lc6g ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς 1 certain wicked men The word **men** here refers specifically to males. Alternate translation: “some evil men” +ACT 17 5 ie1f τῶν ἀγοραίων 1 of the marketplace This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “from the public square” ACT 17 5 t3bc figs-metonymy ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν 1 they set the city in an uproar Here, **the city** stands for the people in the city. Alternate translation: “they caused the people of the city to be in an uproar” or “they caused the people of the city to riot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 17 5 s3uv ἐπιστάντες τῇ οἰκίᾳ 1 having assaulted the house “having violently attacking the house.” This probably means the people were throwing rocks at the house and trying to break down the door of the house. +ACT 17 5 s3uv ἐπιστάντες τῇ οἰκίᾳ 1 having assaulted the house This probably means the people were throwing rocks at the house and trying to break down the door of the house. Alternate translation: “having violently attacking the house” ACT 17 5 ks2l translate-names Ἰάσονος 1 of Jason **Jason** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 5 abcu αὐτοὺς προαγαγεῖν 1 to lead them Alternate translation: “to bring Paul and Silas” ACT 17 5 pp7k εἰς τὸν δῆμον 1 to the people Possible meanings for **the people** are (1) a governmental or legal group of citizens gathered to make a decision or (2) an unruly mob. @@ -2149,16 +2148,16 @@ ACT 17 13 vn8h translate-names 0 General Information: Athens is down the coast ACT 17 13 asb4 figs-metaphor ἦλθον κἀκεῖ, σαλεύοντες 1 they came and there stirred up This speaks about their agitating people as though it were a person stirring a liquid and causing the things at the bottom of the liquid to rise to the surface. Alternate translation: “they came there and agitated” or “they went there and disturbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 13 wjq3 ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 troubled the crowds Alternate translation: “worried the crowds” or “caused the people to become upset” ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers The word **brothers** here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 17 14 zw1c πορεύεσθαι ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 to go as far as to the sea “to go all the way to the coast.” From here Paul would probably sail to another city. +ACT 17 14 zw1c πορεύεσθαι ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 to go as far as to the sea From here Paul would probably sail to another city. Alternate translation: “to go all the way to the coast” ACT 17 15 tjh5 καθιστάνοντες τὸν Παῦλον 1 were leading Paul down Alternate translation: “who were accompanying Paul” or “who were going down with Paul” -ACT 17 15 gs1p figs-quotations λαβόντες ἐντολὴν πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον 1 after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy “after telling them to command Silas and Timothy so.” This can also be stated as a direct quotation as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +ACT 17 15 gs1p figs-quotations λαβόντες ἐντολὴν πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον 1 after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy This can also be stated as a direct quotation as in the UST. Alternate translation: “after telling them to command Silas and Timothy so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 17 16 wk63 0 General Information: This is another part of the story of Paul and Silas’ travels. Paul is now in Athens where he is waiting for Silas and Timothy to join him. ACT 17 16 y9cr δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story. ACT 17 16 we78 figs-synecdoche παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν 1 his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols Here, **his spirit** stands for Paul himself. Alternate translation: “he was provoked because he saw that there were idols everywhere in the city” or “seeing the idols everywhere in the city, he was provoked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 16 s011 figs-activepassive παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he became upset” or “the city upset him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 17 17 q8px διελέγετο 1 he reasoned “he debated” or “he discussed.” This means that there is interaction from the listeners rather than only his preaching. They are talking with him as well. +ACT 17 17 q8px διελέγετο 1 he reasoned This means that there is interaction from the listeners rather than only his preaching. They are talking with him as well. Alternate translation: “he debated” or “he discussed” ACT 17 17 jkj8 τοῖς σεβομένοις 1 those who were worshiping This refers to Gentiles (non-Jews) who give praise to God and follow him but do not obey all of the Jewish laws. -ACT 17 17 ec14 ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 in the marketplace “in the public square.” This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. +ACT 17 17 ec14 ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 in the marketplace This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “in the public square” ACT 17 18 ru6a 0 General Information: Here the words “him,” “He,” and “he” refer to Paul. ACT 17 18 l7le translate-names τῶν Ἐπικουρίων καὶ Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων 1 of the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers These people believed all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 18 f976 translate-names Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων 1 Stoic philosophers These people believed freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2184,12 +2183,12 @@ ACT 17 22 ja1k κατὰ πάντα…δεισιδαιμονεστέρους 1 ACT 17 23 gn1j διερχόμενος γὰρ 1 For passing through Alternate translation: “Because as I was walked through” or “As I was walking along” ACT 17 23 cem7 ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 To an Unknown God Possible meanings are (1) “to a certain unknown god” or (2) “to a god not known.” This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar. ACT 17 24 m1jm τὸν κόσμον 1 the world In the most general sense, the **world** refers to the heavens and the earth and everything in them. -ACT 17 24 rqk9 οὗτος…ὑπάρχων Κύριος 1 he who is Lord “because the one who is Lord.” Here, **he** is referring to the unknown god mentioned in [Acts 17:23](../17/23.md) that Paul is explaining is the Lord God. +ACT 17 24 rqk9 οὗτος…ὑπάρχων Κύριος 1 he who is Lord Here, **he** is referring to the unknown god mentioned in [Acts 17:23](../17/23.md) that Paul is explaining is the Lord God. Alternate translation: “because the one who is Lord” ACT 17 24 f2mz figs-merism οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς 1 of heaven and earth The words **heaven** and **earth** are used together to mean all beings and things in heaven and earth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 17 24 ju4h figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις 1 built with hands Here, **hands** stands for people. Alternate translation: “built by the hands of people” or “that people built” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 25 e3dg figs-activepassive οὐδὲ ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται 1 Neither is he served by hands of men Here, **served** has the sense of a doctor treating a patient to make the patient well again. Alternate translation: “Neither do men take care of him with their hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 25 yq68 figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 1 by hands of men Here, **hands** stands for the whole person. Alternate translation: “by humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 17 25 sj89 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς διδοὺς 1 himself giving “because he himself gives.” The word **himself** is added for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +ACT 17 25 sj89 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς διδοὺς 1 himself giving The word **himself** is added for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 17 26 r3lt figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the words “he” and “him” refer to the one true God, the creator. The words “their” and “them” refer to every nation of people living on the surface of the earth. In using the word “us,” Paul includes himself, his audience, and every nation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 26 p1e4 ἑνὸς 1 one man This means Adam, the first person God created. ACT 17 26 js4p ὁρίσας προστεταγμένους καιροὺς καὶ τὰς ὁροθεσίας τῆς κατοικίας αὐτῶν 1 having determined their appointed seasons and the boundaries of their habitation You can state this as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “And he determined when and where they would live” @@ -2215,7 +2214,7 @@ ACT 17 32 tc8t figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “We” ref ACT 17 32 c4sm writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 17 32 nb26 δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke shifts from Paul’s teachings to the reaction of the people of Athens. ACT 17 32 jlm5 ἀκούσαντες 1 when they heard of These are the people who were present at the Areopagus listening to Paul. -ACT 17 32 sn6j οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον 1 some mocked him “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul.” These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. +ACT 17 32 sn6j οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον 1 some mocked him These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul” ACT 17 34 psh8 translate-names Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης 1 Dionysius the Areopagite Dionysius is a man’s name. Areopagite implies that Dionysius was one of the judges at the council of Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 34 hsz3 translate-names Δάμαρις 1 Damaris This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The baptism of John

Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but this baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]]) @@ -2232,7 +2231,7 @@ ACT 18 2 n631 translate-names τῆς Ἰταλίας 1 Italy This is the name o ACT 18 2 n95f τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον 1 Claudius had ordered Claudius was the current Roman emperor. See how you translated this in [Acts 11:28](../11/28.md). ACT 18 3 q259 τὸ ὁμότεχνον εἶναι 1 he was of the same trade Alternate translation: “he did the same kind of work that they did” ACT 18 4 r56h 0 General Information: Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul. -ACT 18 4 h3az διελέγετο δὲ 1 And he reasoned “And Paul debated” or “And Paul discussed.” He gave reasons. This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people. +ACT 18 4 h3az διελέγετο δὲ 1 And he reasoned He gave reasons. This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people. Alternate translation: “And Paul debated” or “And Paul discussed” ACT 18 4 r2gp ἔπειθέν τε Ἰουδαίους καὶ Ἕλληνας 1 persuading both Jews and Greeks Possible meanings are (1) “he caused both Jews and Greeks to believe” or (2) “he kept trying to persuade the Jews and the Greeks.” ACT 18 6 ncx8 translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια 1 shaking out his garment This is a symbolic action to indicate that Paul will no longer try to teach the Jews there about Jesus. He is leaving them to God’s judgment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 18 6 z12a figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Your blood be upon your head Here, **blood** stands for the guilt of their actions. Paul tells the Jews they are solely responsible for the judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone bear the responsibility for your punishment for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2260,11 +2259,11 @@ ACT 18 14 d13b ὁ Γαλλίων 1 Gallio Gallio was the Roman governor of the ACT 18 15 y6mt νόμου τοῦ καθ’ ὑμᾶς 1 your law Here, **law** refers to the law of Moses and as well as the Jewish customs of Paul’s time. ACT 18 15 khr5 κριτὴς ἐγὼ τούτων οὐ βούλομαι εἶναι 1 I do not want to be a judge of these matters Alternate translation: “I refuse to make a judgment about these matters” ACT 18 16 yf81 0 General Information: Here the word “they” probably refers to the Gentiles at the court. They reacted against the Jews who had brought Paul before the judgment seat ([Acts 18:12](../18/12.md)). -ACT 18 16 d6nh figs-metonymy ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος 1 he sent them away from the judgment seat “Gallio dismissed them from the judgment seat.” Here, **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 16 d6nh figs-metonymy ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος 1 he sent them away from the judgment seat Here, **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 17 cyk6 figs-hyperbole ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες 1 they all, having seized This may be an exaggeration to emphasize the strong feelings the people had. Alternate translation: “many people seized” or “many of them grabbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 18 17 mj77 ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος 1 But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat Possible meanings are (1) the Gentiles beat Sosthenes in the court in front of the judgment seat because he was the Jewish leader or (2) it is possible that Sosthenes was a believer in Christ, so the Jews beat him in front of the court. ACT 18 17 x9w5 translate-names Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον 1 Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue **Sosthenes** was the Jewish ruler of the synagogue at Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 17 z9fv ἔτυπτον 1 were beating him Alternate translation: “repeatedly hit him” or “repeatedly punched him.” +ACT 18 17 z9fv ἔτυπτον 1 were beating him Alternate translation: “repeatedly hit him” or “repeatedly punched him” ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers to Paul. Cenchreae was a seaport that was part of the greater Corinth city area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 18 ura9 0 Connecting Statement: This continues Paul’s missionary journey as Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila leave Corinth. This seems to indicate that Silas and Timothy remain since it says “he” here and not “we.” The word “they” refers to Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila. ACT 18 18 et8c figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἀποταξάμενος 1 left the brothers The word **brothers** refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “left the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -2276,7 +2275,7 @@ ACT 18 20 u44s 0 General Information: Here the words “they” and “them” ACT 18 21 iz1u ἀποταξάμενος 1 having left them Alternate translation: “when he had departed from them” ACT 18 22 pr6u 0 General Information: Phrygia is a province in Asia which is now modern day Turkey. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). ACT 18 22 p364 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues his missionary journey. -ACT 18 22 gyy4 κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 having landed at Caesarea “when he had arrived at Caesarea.” The word **landed** is used to show that he arrived by ship. +ACT 18 22 gyy4 κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 having landed at Caesarea The word **landed** is used to show that he arrived by ship. Alternate translation: “when he had arrived at Caesarea” ACT 18 22 r26z ἀναβὰς 1 having gone up He traveled to the city of Jerusalem. The phrase **gone up** is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea. ACT 18 22 q9j6 figs-metonymy ἀσπασάμενος τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 greeted the church Here, **church** refers to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “greeted the members of the church of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 22 n3rh κατέβη 1 he went down The phrase **went down** is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. @@ -2286,16 +2285,16 @@ ACT 18 24 a7p9 writing-background 0 General Information: Apollos is introduced ACT 18 24 muc2 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells what happens in Ephesus with Priscilla and Aquila. ACT 18 24 xqy7 δέ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. ACT 18 24 n2b4 writing-participants Ἰουδαῖος…τις Ἀπολλῶς ὀνόματι 1 a certain Jew named Apollos The phrase **a certain** indicates that Luke is introducing a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 18 24 di14 translate-names Ἀλεξανδρεὺς τῷ γένει 1 an Alexandrian by birth “a man who was born in the city of Alexandria.” This was a city in Egypt on the north coast of Africa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 24 di14 translate-names Ἀλεξανδρεὺς τῷ γένει 1 an Alexandrian by birth This was a city in Egypt on the north coast of Africa. Alternate translation: “a man who was born in the city of Alexandria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 24 t4zi ἀνὴρ λόγιος 1 an eloquent man Alternate translation: “a good speaker” -ACT 18 24 bh25 δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς 1 He was mighty in the scriptures “he knew the scriptures thoroughly.” He understood the Old Testament writings well. +ACT 18 24 bh25 δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς 1 He was mighty in the scriptures He understood the Old Testament writings well. Alternate translation: “he knew the scriptures thoroughly” ACT 18 25 z7a8 figs-activepassive οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 He had been instructed in the way of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught Apollos how the Lord Jesus wanted people to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 18 25 ift8 figs-synecdoche καὶ ζέων τῷ πνεύματι 1 and being fervent in spirit Here, **spirit** refers to the entire person of Apollos. Alternate translation: “and being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 18 25 lr1h τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου 1 the baptism of John “The baptism that John performed.” This is comparing John’s baptism which was with water to Jesus’ baptism which is with the Holy Spirit. +ACT 18 25 lr1h τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου 1 the baptism of John This is comparing John’s baptism which was with water to Jesus’ baptism which is with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “The baptism that John performed” ACT 18 26 ga6v figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the way of God How God wants people to live is spoken of as if it were a road that a person travels. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 26 k1lb ἀκριβέστερον 1 more accurately Alternate translation: “more correctly” or “more fully” ACT 18 27 c2sq 0 General Information: Here the he words “he” and “him” refer to Apollos ([Acts 18:24](../18/24.md)). -ACT 18 27 ll36 διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 to pass over into Achaia “to go to the region of Achaia.” The phrase **pass over** is used here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. +ACT 18 27 ll36 διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 to pass over into Achaia The phrase **pass over** is used here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Alternate translation: “to go to the region of Achaia” ACT 18 27 pql7 τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 Achaia **Achaia** was a Roman Province in the southern section of Greece. See how you translated this in [Acts 18:12](../18/12.md). ACT 18 27 v2i6 figs-gendernotations οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers The word **brothers** here refers to both men and women believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 18 27 i5ij figs-explicit οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 You can make explicit that **the brothers** are believers in Ephesus. Alternate translation: “fellow believers in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2322,7 +2321,7 @@ ACT 19 5 g2dm figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰη ACT 19 6 gk8l ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας 1 when Paul had laid his hands on them He probably placed his hands on their shoulders or heads. Alternate translation: “when Paul had placed his hands on their heads as he prayed” ACT 19 6 j4n8 ἐλάλουν τε γλώσσαις καὶ ἐπροφήτευον 1 and they began to speak in tongues and prophesy Unlike in [Acts 2:3-4](../02/03.md), there are no details of who understood their messages. ACT 19 7 e7kj writing-background ἦσαν δὲ οἱ πάντες ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ δώδεκα 1 And they were about 12 men in all This tells how many men were baptized. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 19 7 u71i translate-numbers ἄνδρες…δώδεκα 1 12 men “12 men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +ACT 19 7 u71i translate-numbers ἄνδρες…δώδεκα 1 12 men Alternate translation: “12 men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 19 8 qv8z εἰσελθὼν…εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν, ἐπαρρησιάζετο ἐπὶ μῆνας τρεῖς 1 having gone into the synagogue, he was speaking boldly for three months Alternate translation: “Paul regularly attended the synagogue meetings for three months and spoke there boldly” ACT 19 8 yky2 διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων 1 reasoning and persuading them Alternate translation: “convincing people with convincing arguments and with clear teaching” ACT 19 8 v8et figs-metonymy περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 about the kingdom of God Here, **kingdom** stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “about God’s rule as king” or “about how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2356,12 +2355,12 @@ ACT 19 16 b8cb γυμνοὺς…ἐκφυγεῖν 1 they fled … naked The e ACT 19 17 j85h figs-activepassive ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” or “they considered the name of the Lord Jesus to be great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 17 j2hh figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα 1 the name This stands for the power and authority of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 18 tj8t writing-endofstory 0 This ends the story about the Jewish exorcists. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 19 19 z9rj συνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους 1 having brought their books together “having collected their books.” The word **books** refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were written. +ACT 19 19 z9rj συνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους 1 having brought their books together The word **books** refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were written. Alternate translation: “having collected their books” ACT 19 19 m6nf ἐνώπιον πάντων 1 before everyone Alternate translation: “in front of everyone” ACT 19 19 upz3 τὰς τιμὰς αὐτῶν 1 the value of them Alternate translation: “the value of the books” or “the value of the scrolls” -ACT 19 19 u9pi translate-numbers μυριάδας πέντε 1 50000 “fifty thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +ACT 19 19 u9pi translate-numbers μυριάδας πέντε 1 50000 Alternate translation: “fifty thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 19 19 bcv2 translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου 1 pieces of silver Each of the **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) -ACT 19 20 es71 figs-synecdoche οὕτως κατὰ κράτος τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power “So because of these powerful deeds, more and more people heard the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 19 20 es71 figs-synecdoche οὕτως κατὰ κράτος τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power Alternate translation: “So because of these powerful deeds, more and more people heard the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 19 21 k1j1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet. ACT 19 21 de4f δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story. ACT 19 21 q18b ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα…ὁ Παῦλος 1 this was completed, Paul Alternate translation: “Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus, he” @@ -2373,7 +2372,7 @@ ACT 19 22 k35j figs-explicit αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν χρόνον εἰς ACT 19 22 uy9x figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν 1 he himself stayed Here, **himself** is added for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 19 23 l7gz 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells about a riot that broke out while Paul was in Ephesus. ACT 19 23 kn49 ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος περὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 there was no small disturbance concerning the Way This is a summary opening statement. -ACT 19 23 nb3p figs-litotes ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance “the people became very upset” See how you translated this in [Acts 12:18](../12/18.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 19 23 nb3p figs-litotes ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance See how you translated this in [Acts 12:18](../12/18.md) Alternate translation: “the people became very upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 19 23 rwf2 τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 the Way This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated this title in [Acts 9:1](../09/01.md). ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 General Information: This verse introduces background information about Demetrius. Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess Artemis, sometimes translated as “Diana.” She was a false goddess of fertility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 19 24 opb9 translate-names Δημήτριος 1 **Demetrius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2416,7 +2415,7 @@ ACT 19 36 xj2n μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 to do nothing r ACT 19 36 s67q προπετὲς 1 rash without careful thought ACT 19 37 s8a9 τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους 1 these men The words **these men** refer to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions ([Acts 19:29](../19/29.md)). ACT 19 38 wgv5 0 Connecting Statement: The town clerk finishes speaking to the crowd. -ACT 19 38 qd4s οὖν 1 Therefore “Because what I have just said is true.” The town clerk had said in [Acts 19:37](../19/37.md) that Gaius and Aristarchus were not robbers or blasphemers. +ACT 19 38 qd4s οὖν 1 Therefore The town clerk had said in [Acts 19:37](../19/37.md) that Gaius and Aristarchus were not robbers or blasphemers. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” ACT 19 38 zkx5 figs-abstractnouns ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον 1 have a word against anyone Here having **a word against** someone means they want to accuse them of something. Alternate translation: “want to accuse someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 19 38 szf7 translate-unknown ἀνθύπατοί 1 proconsuls the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 38 g8tp ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 Let them accuse one another This does not mean Demetrius and those with him will accuse each other. It means this is a place where people in general can speak their accusation. Alternate translation: “There people can accuse one another” @@ -2429,7 +2428,7 @@ ACT 20 1 cwq7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul leaves Ephesus and continues his tr ACT 20 1 y5cq μετὰ δὲ τὸ παύσασθαι τὸν θόρυβον 1 After the uproar had ended Alternate translation: “After the riot” or “Following the riot” ACT 20 1 hr32 ἀσπασάμενος 1 and said farewell Alternate translation: “and he said goodbye” ACT 20 2 edb8 παρακαλέσας αὐτοὺς λόγῳ πολλῷ 1 had exhorted them with many words Alternate translation: “had greatly encouraged the believers by saying many things” or “had said many things to challenge the believers” -ACT 20 3 yxj3 figs-metaphor ποιήσας τε μῆνας τρεῖς 1 And after he had spent three months there “And after he had stayed there three months.” This speaks about time as if it were something a person could spend. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 3 yxj3 figs-metaphor ποιήσας τε μῆνας τρεῖς 1 And after he had spent three months there This speaks about time as if it were something a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after he had stayed there three months” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 3 cit9 figs-activepassive γενομένης ἐπιβουλῆς αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 a plot was formed against him by the Jews If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Jews formed a plot against him” or “the Jews formed a secret plan to harm him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 3 ah5w figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews This means only some of **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “by some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 3 m7na μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν 1 as he was about to sail for Syria Alternate translation: “as he was ready to sail to Syria” @@ -2491,7 +2490,7 @@ ACT 20 23 q3ie figs-metonymy δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένου ACT 20 24 w8d2 figs-metaphor ὡς τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 so as to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus This speaks about Paul’s **race** and **ministry** as if they are objects that Jesus gives and Paul receives. Alternate translation: “so that I may complete the work that the Lord Jesus has commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 24 ga6d figs-doublet τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν 1 Here, **race** and **ministry** mean basically the same thing. Paul repeats this for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 20 24 m5gc figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου 1 to finish my race Paul speaks about completing the work that Jesus has commanded him to do as if he were running a **race**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 24 hg3l διαμαρτύρασθαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to solemnly testify to the gospel of the grace of God “to tell people what I have personally learned about the good news of God’s grace.” This is the ministry that Paul received from Jesus. +ACT 20 24 hg3l διαμαρτύρασθαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to solemnly testify to the gospel of the grace of God This is the ministry that Paul received from Jesus. Alternate translation: “to tell people what I have personally learned about the good news of God’s grace” ACT 20 25 f1sb 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to talk to the Ephesian elders ([Acts 20:17](../20/17.md)). ACT 20 25 kj9c καὶ νῦν ἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ οἶδα 1 And now, behold, I know Alternate translation: “And now, pay careful attention, because I know” ACT 20 25 z4ng ἐγὼ οἶδα ὅτι…ὑμεῖς πάντες 1 I know that you all Alternate translation: “I know that all of you” @@ -2499,14 +2498,14 @@ ACT 20 25 aur9 figs-metonymy ἐν οἷς διῆλθον κηρύσσων τ ACT 20 25 cq45 figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου 1 will see my face no more The word **face** here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “will not see me anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 26 e546 figs-metonymy καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 I am innocent from the blood of all Here, **blood** stands for a person’s death, which, in this case, is not physical death but spiritual death when God declares a person guilty of sin. Paul had told them God’s truth. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for anyone whom God judges guilty of sin because they did not trust in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 26 v5el figs-gendernotations πάντων 1 of all Here this means any person whether male or female. Alternate translation: “of any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 20 27 qa9y figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι…ὑμῖν 1 For I did not hold back from declaring to you “For I did not keep silent and not tell you.” You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “For I certainly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 20 27 qa9y figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι…ὑμῖν 1 For I did not hold back from declaring to you You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “For I certainly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 20 28 u52d figs-metaphor τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the flock among which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers to shepherd the church of God Believers are likened to a **flock** of sheep here. Church leaders are entrusted by God with the care of the community of believers just as a **shepherd** would care for his flock of sheep and protect them from wolves. Alternate translation: “the group of believers the Holy spirit has entrusted to you. Be sure to take care of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 28 cx69 figs-metaphor τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood The shedding of the **blood** of Christ here is likened to a payment to God for our sins. Alternate translation: “the people Christ saved from their sins by shedding his blood on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 28 hjh6 figs-metonymy τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 his own blood Here, **blood** stands for Christ’s death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 29 ka6u figs-metaphor εἰσελεύσονται…λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου 1 vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the flock This is a picture of people who teach false doctrine and who harm the community of believers as though they were **wolves** that eat the sheep of the **flock**. Alternate translation: “many enemies will come among you and try to harm the community of believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 30 ftf4 figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ὀπίσω ἑαυτῶν 1 to draw away the disciples after them A false teacher convincing believers to start believing his false teaching is spoken of as if he were leading sheep away from the flock to follow him. Alternate translation: “in order to convince people who are disciples of Christ to become his disciples instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 31 q2nl γρηγορεῖτε, μνημονεύοντες 1 be alert, remembering Alternate translation: “be on guard and remember” or “be on guard as you remember” -ACT 20 31 ll64 figs-metaphor γρηγορεῖτε 1 be alert “be awake” or “watch out.” Christian leaders being **alert** about anyone that may harm the community of believers is spoken of as if they were guards in an army watching out for the enemy army. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 31 ll64 figs-metaphor γρηγορεῖτε 1 be alert Christian leaders being **alert** about anyone that may harm the community of believers is spoken of as if they were guards in an army watching out for the enemy army. Alternate translation: “be awake” or “watch out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 31 pvt6 μνημονεύοντες ὅτι 1 Remembering that Alternate translation: “continuing to remember that” or “not forgetting that” ACT 20 31 rt1h figs-hyperbole τριετίαν νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν, οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν 1 for three years I did not stop admonishing … night and day Paul did not teach them continuously for three years, but over the space of three years. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 20 31 hs1m οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν 1 I did not stop admonishing Alternate translation: “I did not stop warning” @@ -2541,7 +2540,7 @@ ACT 21 1 x7kg translate-names Πάταρα 1 Patara Patara is a city on the sout ACT 21 2 nz9k figs-metonymy καὶ εὑρόντες πλοῖον διαπερῶν εἰς Φοινίκην 1 And when we found a ship crossing over to Phoenicia Here, **a ship crossing over** stands for the crew that would sail the ship. Alternate translation: “And when we found a ship with a crew sailing over to Phoenicia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 2 vbd3 πλοῖον διαπερῶν 1 a ship crossing over Here, **crossing** does not mean it was presently crossing but that it would be crossing to Phoenicia soon. Alternate translation: “a ship that would be going across the water” or “a ship that would be going” ACT 21 3 er3r figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 21 3 vkr2 καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον 1 leaving it behind on the left “passed the island on our left” The **left** is the “port” side of a boat. +ACT 21 3 vkr2 καταλιπόντες αὐτὴν εὐώνυμον 1 leaving it behind on the left The **left** is the “port” side of a boat. Alternate translation: “passed the island on our left” ACT 21 3 hwx8 figs-metonymy ἐκεῖσε…τὸ πλοῖον ἦν ἀποφορτιζόμενον τὸν γόμον 1 the ship was to unload its cargo there Here, **ship** stands for the crew that was sailing the ship. Alternate translation: “the crew would unload the cargo from the ship there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 4 y35m οἵτινες τῷ Παύλῳ ἔλεγον διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 Through the Spirit they kept saying to Paul Alternate translation: “These believers told Paul what the Holy Spirit had revealed to them, for him” ACT 21 5 fe1u 0 General Information: Here the word “They” refers to the believers from Tyre. @@ -2554,7 +2553,7 @@ ACT 21 7 z4nt translate-names Πτολεμαΐδα 1 Ptolemais Ptolemais was a c ACT 21 7 ff1s τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Alternate translation: “the fellow believers” ACT 21 8 ay52 ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ 1 from the seven The **seven** refers to the men chosen to distribute food and aid to the widows in [Acts 6:5](../06/05.md). ACT 21 8 vi48 εὐαγγελιστοῦ 1 evangelist a person who tells people the good news about Jesus -ACT 21 9 rcf4 τούτῳ 1 this man “Philip” from verse 8 +ACT 21 9 rcf4 τούτῳ 1 this man Alternate translation: “Philip” ACT 21 9 cv8b writing-background δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells background information about Philip and his daughters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 21 9 r1i1 θυγατέρες τέσσαρες παρθένοι, προφητεύουσαι 1 four virgin daughters who prophesy Alternate translation: “four virgin daughters who regularly receive and pass along messages from God” ACT 21 10 fe6s figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the words “we” and “us” refers to Luke, Paul, and those with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -2596,9 +2595,9 @@ ACT 21 21 sdl3 figs-metonymy ἀποστασίαν…ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως 1 a ACT 21 21 knt4 figs-metaphor μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 not to walk in the customs To obey **the customs** is spoken of as if the customs were a path that people could **walk** along. Alternate translation: “and not to obey the customs” or “and not to practice the customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 21 21 u56t τοῖς ἔθεσιν 1 in the customs Alternate translation: “do the things that Jews normally do” ACT 21 22 b28b figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” refers to James and the elders ([Acts 21:18](../21/18.md)). The word “They” refers to the Jewish believers in Jerusalem who wanted to teach Jewish believers that they could still follow the laws of Moses ([Acts 21:20-21](./20.md)). The words “them,” “their,” and the first “they” refer to the four men who made a vow. The second words “they” and “They” refer to the Jewish believers in Jerusalem who wanted to teach Jewish believers that they could still follow the laws of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 21 23 b22r ἡμῖν ἄνδρες τέσσαρες, εὐχὴν ἔχοντες ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν 1 four men with us having a vow from themselves “four men who have made a promise to God.” This was the kind of vow where a person would not drink alcohol or cut his hair until the end of a set period of time. +ACT 21 23 b22r ἡμῖν ἄνδρες τέσσαρες, εὐχὴν ἔχοντες ἀφ’ ἑαυτῶν 1 four men with us having a vow from themselves This was the kind of vow where a person would not drink alcohol or cut his hair until the end of a set period of time. Alternate translation: “four men who have made a promise to God” ACT 21 24 km4w figs-explicit τούτους παραλαβὼν, ἁγνίσθητι σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 Having taken these men, be purified with them They had to make themselves ritually pure so they could worship in the temple. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 21 24 c3ap figs-explicit δαπάνησον ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς 1 pay the expenses for them “pay for what they will need.” The expenses would go toward buying a male and female lamb, a ram, and grain and drink offerings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 21 24 c3ap figs-explicit δαπάνησον ἐπ’ αὐτοῖς 1 pay the expenses for them The expenses would go toward buying a male and female lamb, a ram, and grain and drink offerings. Alternate translation: “pay for what they will need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 24 abq6 translate-symaction ξυρήσονται τὴν κεφαλήν 1 they will shave their heads This was a sign that the person had completed what they promised God they would do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 21 24 nu9v figs-activepassive ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ 1 what they have been told about you If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that people are saying about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 24 sv6i figs-metaphor στοιχεῖς καὶ αὐτὸς, φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον 1 you yourself walk in and obey the law This speaks of obeying the law as if **the law** were a path and people can **walk** along it. Alternate translation: “live a life that conforms to the law of Moses and other Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2652,7 +2651,7 @@ ACT 21 37 inl1 τῷ χιλιάρχῳ 1 to the commander a Roman military offi ACT 21 37 p5cd figs-rquestion Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις? 1 Do you know Greek? The commander uses this questions to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. Alternate translation: “So you speak Greek.” or “I didn’t know you spoke Greek.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 38 xx2w figs-rquestion οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων? 1 Are you not then the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness? The commander uses this question and the question “Do you speak Greek?” (verse 37) to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. Possible meanings are (1) as in ULT, the commander believes that even though Paul speaks Greek, Paul is the Egyptian. “Even though you speak Greek, I still think you are the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” (2) Because Paul speaks Greek, the commander thinks that perhaps Paul is not the Egyptian. “So you speak Greek. Perhaps I was wrong to think you were that Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” It is best to retain the questions if the reader can infer one of the two meanings from them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 38 nxs6 figs-explicit οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος 1 Are you not then the Egyptian Shortly before Paul’s visit, an unnamed man from Egypt had launched a revolt against Rome in Jerusalem. Later he escaped into the wilderness and the commander wonders if Paul might be the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 21 38 tqh6 translate-numbers τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας 1 the 4,000 men “the four thousand terrorists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +ACT 21 38 tqh6 translate-numbers τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας 1 the 4,000 men Alternate translation: “the four thousand terrorists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 21 38 p2ym τῶν σικαρίων 1 of the ‘Assassins’ This refers to a group of Jewish rebels who killed Romans and anyone who supported Romans. ACT 21 39 t6ax 0 Connecting Statement: Paul begins to defend what he did. ACT 21 39 ys84 δέομαι…σου 1 I ask you Alternate translation: “I beg you” or “I plead with you” @@ -2671,9 +2670,9 @@ ACT 22 3 g311 figs-activepassive ἀνατεθραμμένος δὲ ἐν τῇ ACT 22 3 d4dx figs-metonymy παρὰ τοὺς πόδας Γαμαλιήλ 1 at the feet of Gamaliel Here, **feet** stands for the place where a student would sit while learning from a teacher. Alternate translation: “by Gamaliel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 22 3 b1dq Γαμαλιήλ 1 of Gamaliel Gamaliel was one of the most prominent teachers of the Jewish law. See how you translated this name in [Acts 5:34](../05/34.md). ACT 22 3 iz4g figs-activepassive πεπαιδευμένος κατὰ ἀκρίβειαν τοῦ πατρῴου νόμου 1 instructed according to the strict ways of the law of our fathers If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he instructed me how to carefully obey every law of our forefathers” or “the instruction I received followed the exact details of the law of our forefathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 22 3 lqk7 τοῦ πατρῴου νόμου 1 of the law of our fathers “of the law of our ancestors.” This refers to the law that God gave to the people of Israel through Moses. +ACT 22 3 lqk7 τοῦ πατρῴου νόμου 1 of the law of our fathers This refers to the law that God gave to the people of Israel through Moses. Alternate translation: “of the law of our ancestors” ACT 22 3 a8d6 ζηλωτὴς ὑπάρχων τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 being zealous for God Alternate translation: “I am completely dedicated to obeying God” or “I am passionate about my service to God” -ACT 22 3 dbl4 καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον 1 just as all of you are today “in the same way all of you are today.” Paul compares himself with the crowd. +ACT 22 3 dbl4 καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον 1 just as all of you are today Paul compares himself with the crowd. Alternate translation: “in the same way all of you are today” ACT 22 4 jy3z figs-metonymy ὃς ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν ἐδίωξα 1 I persecuted this Way Here, **this Way** represents the people who belonged to the group called “the Way.” Alternate translation: “I persecuted the people who belonged to this Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 22 4 bk4c ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν 1 this Way This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated **the Way** in [Acts 9:2](../09/02.md). ACT 22 4 dr8c figs-abstractnouns ἄχρι θανάτου 1 as far as death The word **death** can be translated with the verb “kill” or “die.” Alternate translation: “and I looked for ways to kill them” or “to the point of killing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -2717,7 +2716,7 @@ ACT 22 18 qul6 οὐ παραδέξονταί σου μαρτυρίαν περ ACT 22 19 q5cl 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to the non-believing Jews in Jerusalem. ACT 22 19 p7gz 0 Connecting Statement: This ends what Paul was able to say to the crowd of Jewish people by the fortress. ACT 22 19 im4n figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ ἐπίστανται 1 they themselves know The word **themselves** is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -ACT 22 19 da1e κατὰ τὰς συναγωγὰς 1 according to the synagogues “in each of the synagogues” or “in every synagogue.” Paul went to synagogues to find Jews who believed in Jesus. +ACT 22 19 da1e κατὰ τὰς συναγωγὰς 1 according to the synagogues Paul went to synagogues to find Jews who believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “in each of the synagogues” or “in every synagogue” ACT 22 20 y7t1 figs-metonymy ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου 1 the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled Here, **blood** stands for Stephen’s life. To **spill blood** means to kill. Alternate translation: “your witness Stephen was killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 22 20 udrd figs-activepassive ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they killed Stephen who testified about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 22 fj9x 0 General Information: Here the words “him” and the first two words “he” refer to Paul. The word “He” and the last “he” refer to the chief captain. @@ -2735,8 +2734,8 @@ ACT 22 25 yjw3 figs-rquestion εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ACT 22 26 pca7 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 What are you about to do? This question is used to urge the commander to reconsider his plan to whip Paul. Alternate translation: “You should not do this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 22 27 pe31 0 General Information: Here the word “him” refers to Paul. ACT 22 27 e69y figs-go προσελθὼν…ὁ χιλίαρχος 1 having come, the commander Here, **come** can be translated as “gone.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -ACT 22 28 dr2w ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship with a large amount of money “I paid a lot of money to the Roman authorities to become a citizen of Rome.” The captain may be making this statement because he knows how hard it is to become a Roman citizen, and he suspects Paul is not telling truth. -ACT 22 28 r79c figs-abstractnouns ἐγὼ…τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship “I paid for citizenship.” The word **citizenship** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 22 28 dr2w ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship with a large amount of money The captain may be making this statement because he knows how hard it is to become a Roman citizen, and he suspects Paul is not telling truth. Alternate translation: “I paid a lot of money to the Roman authorities to become a citizen of Rome” +ACT 22 28 r79c figs-abstractnouns ἐγὼ…τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship The word **citizenship** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 22 28 rly1 ἐγὼ δὲ καὶ γεγέννημαι 1 I, however, was indeed born as one If a father is a Roman citizen, then his children become Roman citizens automatically when they are born. Paul's father was a Roman. Alternate translation: “But I am a citizen by birth!” ACT 22 29 ii8p οἱ μέλλοντες…ἀνετάζειν 1 those who were about to examine Alternate translation: “the men who planned to examine” or “the men who were preparing to question” ACT 22 30 g33i 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers to the chief captain. @@ -2760,7 +2759,7 @@ ACT 23 6 iz18 figs-abstractnouns περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστά ACT 23 6 dchr figs-nominaladj περὶ ἐλπίδος καὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 If your language does not use the nominal adjective **dead**, you can be express it as “those who have died.” Alternate translation: “I have confidence that those who have died will come back to life again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 23 7 abs3 ἐσχίσθη τὸ πλῆθος 1 the crowd was divided Alternate translation: “the people in the crowd strongly disagreed with one another” ACT 23 8 gl1s writing-background Σαδδουκαῖοι μὲν γὰρ…Φαρισαῖοι δὲ 1 For the Sadducees … but the Pharisees This is background information about the Sadducees and Pharisees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 23 9 eaf1 ἐγένετο δὲ κραυγὴ μεγάλη 1 So a large uproar occurred “So they began shouting loudly at one another.” The word **so** marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is Paul’s stating his belief in the resurrection. +ACT 23 9 eaf1 ἐγένετο δὲ κραυγὴ μεγάλη 1 So a large uproar occurred The word **so** marks an event that happened because of something else that happened previously. In this case, the previous event is Paul’s stating his belief in the resurrection. Alternate translation: “So they began shouting loudly at one another” ACT 23 9 ayr8 figs-hypo εἰ…πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος 1 what if a spirit has spoken to him, or an angel? The Pharisees are rebuking the Sadducees by affirming that spirits and angels do exist and can speak to people. Alternate translation: “perhaps a spirit or an angel has spoken to him!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) ACT 23 10 dr1d figs-abstractnouns πολλῆς δὲ γινομένης στάσεως 1 And when a great argument happened The phrase **a great argument** can be re-stated as “to argue violently.” Alternate translation: “And when they began to argue violently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 23 10 s65i χιλίαρχος 1 commander a Roman military officer or leader of about 600 soldiers @@ -2771,9 +2770,9 @@ ACT 23 10 ap3c εἰς τὴν παρεμβολήν 1 into the fortress This fo ACT 23 11 i9w5 τῇ…ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ 1 the following night This means the night after the day Paul went before the council. Alternate translation: “that night” ACT 23 11 r4q4 figs-ellipsis εἰς Ῥώμην μαρτυρῆσαι 1 to testify in Rome The words “about me” are understood. Alternate translation: “to bear witness about me in Rome” or “to testify about me in Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 23 12 fm3y 0 Connecting Statement: While Paul was in the prison at the fortress, the disbelieving religious Jews vow to kill him. -ACT 23 12 klb4 ποιήσαντες συστροφὴν 1 having formed a conspiracy “having organized a group with a shared purpose” here, to kill Paul. +ACT 23 12 klb4 ποιήσαντες συστροφὴν 1 having formed a conspiracy They formed this **conspiracy** for the purpose of killing Paul. Alternate translation: “having organized a group with a shared purpose” ACT 23 12 g3sj figs-explicit ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς 1 cursed themselves It can be made explicit what would cause them to be cursed. Alternate translation: “asked God to curse them if they did not do what they promised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 23 13 f1u2 translate-numbers τεσσεράκοντα οἱ 1 40 who “forty men who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +ACT 23 13 f1u2 translate-numbers τεσσεράκοντα οἱ 1 40 who Alternate translation: “forty men who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 23 13 u5s5 οἱ ταύτην τὴν συνωμοσίαν ποιησάμενοι 1 who had formed this conspiracy Alternate translation: “who had made this plan” or “who planned to kill Paul” ACT 23 14 zb6w οἵτινες 1 General Information: Here the word “They” refers to the forty Jews in [Acts 23:13](../23/13.md). ACT 23 14 ur73 figs-metaphor ἀναθέματι ἀνεθεματίσαμεν ἑαυτοὺς, μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι ἕως οὗ ἀποκτείνωμεν τὸν Παῦλον 1 We have cursed ourselves with a curse, to eat nothing until we have killed Paul To make a vow and to ask God to curse them if they do not fulfill their vow is spoken of as if the curse were an object that they carry on their shoulders. Alternate translation: “We have sworn to eat nothing until we have killed Paul. We asked God to curse us if we do not do what we promised to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2794,14 +2793,13 @@ ACT 23 19 yp12 ἐπιλαβόμενος…τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ ACT 23 20 uv6r figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι συνέθεντο 1 The Jews have agreed This does not mean all **Jews**, but all of the group that was there. Alternate translation: “Some of the Jews have agreed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 23 20 wp5d Παῦλον καταγάγῃς 1 you might bring Paul down Alternate translation: “you would bring Paul down from the fortress” ACT 23 20 fev5 ὡς μέλλων τι ἀκριβέστερον πυνθάνεσθαι περὶ αὐτοῦ. 1 as if they were going to inquire something more concerning him Alternate translation: “pretending they want to learn more about what Paul has done” -ACT 23 21 vdr5 translate-numbers ἄνδρες…τεσσεράκοντα 1 40 … men “forty … men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +ACT 23 21 vdr5 translate-numbers ἄνδρες…τεσσεράκοντα 1 40 … men Alternate translation: “forty … men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 23 21 i2k9 ἐνεδρεύουσιν…αὐτὸν 1 lie in wait for him Alternate translation: “are ready to ambush Paul” or “are waiting to kill Paul” ACT 23 21 r695 οἵτινες ἀνεθεμάτισαν ἑαυτοὺς μήτε φαγεῖν μήτε πιεῖν, ἕως οὗ ἀνέλωσιν αὐτόν 1 who have cursed themselves neither to eat nor to drink until they have killed him Alternate translation: “who have sworn to eat or drink nothing until they have killed Paul. And they asked God to curse them if they do not do what they promised to do” ACT 23 22 av3g 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers the chief captain. ACT 23 22 av3h 0 General Information: Felix, who resided at Caesarea, was the roman governor of the area. ACT 23 23 wk7k προσκαλεσάμενός 1 having summoned Alternate translation: “having called to himself” -ACT 23 23 b7z3 translate-numbers ἱππεῖς ἑβδομήκοντα 1 70 horsemen “seventy horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -ACT 23 23 mgi9 translate-numbers δεξιολάβους διακοσίους 1 200 spearmen “two hundred soldiers that are armed with spears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +ACT 23 23 mgi9 translate-numbers δεξιολάβους διακοσίους 1 200 spearmen Alternate translation: “two hundred soldiers that are armed with spears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 23 23 kg8s τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός 1 third hour of the night This was about 9:00 PM. ACT 23 25 vg8x 0 General Information: The chief captain writes a letter to Governor Felix about the arrest of Paul. ACT 23 25 vg8y translate-names 0 General Information: Claudius Lysias is the name of the chief captain. Governor Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2835,16 +2833,16 @@ ACT 24 intro j74u 0 # Acts 24 General Notes

## Structure and formattin ACT 24 1 bc8k 0 Connecting Statement: Paul is on trial in Caesarea. Tertullus presents Governor Felix with the charges against Paul. ACT 24 1 e8rp μετὰ δὲ πέντε ἡμέρας 1 And after five days Alternate translation: “And five days after the Roman soldiers took Paul to Caesarea” ACT 24 1 n9gu translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias This is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias as in [Acts 5:1](../05/01.md) nor the same Ananias as in [Acts 9:10](../09/10.md). See how you translated this in [Acts 23:1](../23/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 24 1 f3vx ῥήτορος 1 an orator “a lawyer.” Tertullus was an expert in Roman law who was there to accuse Paul in court. +ACT 24 1 f3vx ῥήτορος 1 an orator Alternate translation: Tertullus was an expert in Roman law who was there to accuse Paul in court. “a lawyer” ACT 24 1 xm6c translate-names Τερτύλλου 1 Tertullus **Tertullus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 24 1 q7wj κατέβη 1 went there Alternate translation: “went to Caesarea where Paul was” ACT 24 1 nq9x τῷ ἡγεμόνι 1 to the governor Alternate translation: “in the presence of the governor who was judge in the court” -ACT 24 1 zm5e ἐνεφάνισαν…κατὰ τοῦ Παύλου 1 appeared … against Paul Alternate translation: “came there … to argue before the governor the case that Paul had broken the law.” +ACT 24 1 zm5e ἐνεφάνισαν…κατὰ τοῦ Παύλου 1 appeared … against Paul Alternate translation: “came there … to argue before the governor the case that Paul had broken the law” ACT 24 2 e6zg figs-exclusive πολλῆς εἰρήνης τυγχάνοντες 1 We have obtained great peace Here, **we** refers to the citizens under Felix. Alternate translation: “we, the people that you govern, have obtained great peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 24 2 qw1r figs-you σοῦ…σῆς 1 General Information: Here the words **you** and **your** refers to Felix, the governor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 24 2 sv8c καὶ διορθωμάτων γινομένων τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ διὰ τῆς σῆς προνοίας 1 and good reforms have happened to our nation through your foresight Alternate translation: “and your planning has greatly improved our nation” ACT 24 3 r5jl figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας 1 with all thankfulness The word **thankfulness** is an abstract noun. It can be stated as an adjective or verb. Alternate translation: “so we are very thankful and we welcome everything that you do” or “so we thank you very much and welcome everything that you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 24 3 q3fj κράτιστε Φῆλιξ 1 most excellent Felix “Governor Felix who deserves greatest honor.” Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Acts 23:25](../23/25.md). +ACT 24 3 q3fj κράτιστε Φῆλιξ 1 most excellent Felix Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Acts 23:25](../23/25.md). Alternate translation: “Governor Felix who deserves greatest honor” ACT 24 4 tyq8 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The word “we” refers to Ananias, certain elders, and Tertullus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 24 4 jww2 ἵνα δὲ μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον σε ἐνκόπτω 1 However, in order that we may not bother you any longer Possible meanings are (1) “so that I will not take up too much of your time” or (2) “so that I will not tire you” ACT 24 4 xfm5 ἀκοῦσαί…ἡμῶν συντόμως, τῇ σῇ ἐπιεικείᾳ 1 to briefly listen to us in your kindness Alternate translation: “kindly listen to my short speech” @@ -2861,13 +2859,13 @@ ACT 24 10 ict8 0 Connecting Statement: Paul responds to Governor Felix about t ACT 24 10 s92a νεύσαντος…τοῦ ἡγεμόνος 1 and the governor motioned Alternate translation: “and the governor gestured” ACT 24 10 uu7a figs-metonymy κριτὴν τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ 1 a judge to this nation Here, **this nation** refers to the people of the Jewish nation. Alternate translation: “a judge for the people of the Jewish nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 24 10 sr5t ἀπολογοῦμαι 1 I … make my defense Alternate translation: “I … explain my situation” -ACT 24 11 dr4u translate-numbers ἡμέραι δώδεκα, ἀφ’ ἧς 1 12 days from when “twelve days since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +ACT 24 11 dr4u translate-numbers ἡμέραι δώδεκα, ἀφ’ ἧς 1 12 days from when Alternate translation: “twelve days since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 24 12 wbf6 ἢ ἐπίστασιν ποιοῦντα ὄχλου 1 nor causing a rebellion of the crowd Alternate translation: “and I did not provoke the crowd to rebel against Rome” ACT 24 14 c5xa ὁμολογῶ…τοῦτό σοι 1 I confess this to you Alternate translation: “I acknowledge this to you” ACT 24 14 k79p ὅτι κατὰ τὴν Ὁδὸν 1 that according to the Way The phrase **the Way** was a title used for Christianity during Paul’s time. ACT 24 14 rqu3 λέγουσιν αἵρεσιν 1 they call a sect This is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism. See how you translated **sect** in [Acts 24:5](../24/05.md). ACT 24 14 cg73 οὕτως λατρεύω τῷ πατρῴῳ Θεῷ 1 in that way I serve the God of our fathers Paul uses the phrase “in that way” to mean that he, as a believer in Jesus, serves God just as their Jewish ancestors did. He is not leading a **sect** or teaching something new that is opposed to their ancient religion. -ACT 24 15 nv5a καὶ αὐτοὶ 1 also these men “the same as these men.” Here, **these men** refers to the Jews who are accusing Paul in court. +ACT 24 15 nv5a καὶ αὐτοὶ 1 also these men Here, **these men** refers to the Jews who are accusing Paul in court. Alternate translation: “the same as these men” ACT 24 15 qza8 figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασιν μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι, δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων 1 that there is going to be a resurrection of both the righteous and of the unrighteous The abstract noun **resurrection** can be stated with the verb “resurrect.” Alternate translation: “that God will resurrect all who have died, both the righteous and the unrighteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 24 15 x1yd figs-nominaladj δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων 1 of both the righteous and the unrighteous These nominal adjectives refer to **righteous** people and **unrighteous** people. AT “both of righteous people and unrighteous people” or “both of those who have done what is right and those who have done what is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 24 16 sfw4 αὐτὸς ἀσκῶ…διὰ παντός 1 I myself always strive Alternate translation: “I myself always work hard” or “I always do my best” @@ -2887,7 +2885,7 @@ ACT 24 21 d2lm figs-activepassive ἐγὼ κρίνομαι σήμερον ἐφ ACT 24 22 w1tn translate-names 0 General Information: Felix is the Roman governor of the area who resides at Caesarea. See how you translated this name in [Acts 23:24](../23/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 24 22 a87f τῆς Ὁδοῦ 1 the Way This is a title for Christianity. See how you translated this in [Acts 9:2](../09/02.md). ACT 24 22 k1f7 Λυσίας 1 Lysias This is the name of the commander. See how you translated this name in [Acts 23:26](../23/26.md). -ACT 24 22 z5f9 καταβῇ 1 may come down “may come down from Jerusalem.” Jerusalem was higher than Caesarea so it was normal for them to speak of coming **down** from Jerusalem. +ACT 24 22 z5f9 καταβῇ 1 may come down Jerusalem was higher than Caesarea so it was normal for them to speak of coming **down** from Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “may come down from Jerusalem” ACT 24 22 ldi8 διαγνώσομαι τὰ καθ’ ὑμᾶς 1 I will decide the things concerning you Alternate translation: “I will make a decision concerning these accusations against you” or “I will judge whether you are guilty” ACT 24 23 sxy2 ἔχειν…ἄνεσιν 1 to have rest Alternate translation: “to grant Paul some freedom not otherwise granted to prisoners” ACT 24 24 wus4 μετὰ δὲ ἡμέρας τινὰς 1 But after some days Alternate translation: “But after several days” @@ -2946,7 +2944,7 @@ ACT 25 15 b6hx figs-metaphor περὶ οὗ…ἐνεφάνισαν 1 brought c ACT 25 15 hyp5 figs-abstractnouns αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην 1 requesting a judgment against him The abstract noun “judgment” can be expressed as a verb. Alternate translation: “asking me to judge him” or “requesting that I judge him to be guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 25 16 e4tk figs-metaphor χαρίζεσθαί τινα ἄνθρωπον 1 to hand over any man Here, **hand over** represents sending someone to people who will punish or kill him. Alternate translation: “to let someone punish anyone” or “to condemn anyone to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 25 16 xjb4 figs-idiom πρὶν ἢ ὁ κατηγορούμενος, κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους 1 before the one who is accused may have his accusers face to face Here, **have his accusers face to face** is an idiom that means to meet in person with the people who accuse him. Alternate translation: “before the person whom others have accused of a crime had met directly with those who accused him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 25 17 z6g2 οὖν 1 Therefore “Because what I have just said is true.” Fetus had just said that an accused man should be able to face his accusers and make his defense. +ACT 25 17 z6g2 οὖν 1 Therefore Fetus had just said that an accused man should be able to face his accusers and make his defense. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” ACT 25 17 rm5z συνελθόντων…ἐνθάδε 1 when they had come together here Alternate translation: “when the Jewish leaders had come to meet with me here” ACT 25 17 efe2 figs-metonymy καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 having sat in the judgment seat Here, **judgment seat** refers to Festus ruling over Paul’s trial as judge. Alternate translation: “having sat upon the seat to act as judge” or “having sat down as judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 25 17 hm6g figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσα ἀχθῆναι τὸν ἄνδρα 1 I commanded the man to be brought in If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to bring Paul before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2955,7 +2953,7 @@ ACT 25 20 y9bv figs-activepassive κἀκεῖ κρίνεσθαι περὶ το ACT 25 21 yli3 0 Connecting Statement: Festus finishes explaining Paul’s case to King Agrippa. ACT 25 21 ie7x figs-activepassive τοῦ δὲ Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ διάγνωσιν 1 But when Paul appealed for him to be kept for the decision of the emperor If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But when Paul insisted that he stay under Roman guard until the time when the emperor could decide his case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 25 21 ceq2 figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αὐτὸν 1 I commanded him to be kept If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to keep him in custody” or “I told the soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 25 22 t322 writing-quotations αὔριον, φησίν, ἀκούσῃ αὐτοῦ 1 “Tomorrow,” he says, “you will hear him.” The phrase **he says** can be moved to the beginning of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Festus says, ‘I will arrange for you to listen to Paul tomorrow.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +ACT 25 22 t322 writing-quotations αὔριον, φησίν, ἀκούσῃ αὐτοῦ 1 The phrase **he says** can be moved to the beginning of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Festus says, ‘I will arrange for you to listen to Paul tomorrow.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) ACT 25 23 y1yj 0 General Information: Though he ruled over only a few territories, Agrippa was the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice was his sister. See how you translated these names in [Acts 25:13](../25/13.md). ACT 25 23 qlm5 0 Connecting Statement: Festus again gives information about Paul’s case to King Agrippa. ACT 25 23 yw76 μετὰ πολλῆς φαντασίας 1 with much ceremony Alternate translation: “with a great ceremony to honor them” @@ -3011,8 +3009,8 @@ ACT 26 18 q3h8 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ…τῆς ἐξου ACT 26 18 m65i figs-abstractnouns τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ 1 for them to receive forgiveness of sins and The abstract noun **forgiveness** can be stated as the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “so that God may forgive their sins and give them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 26 18 m9ve figs-metaphor κλῆρον 1 an inheritance The blessings that Jesus gives to those who believe in him are spoken of as if they were **an inheritance** that children receive from their father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 26 18 c5ij figs-metaphor τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 those who have been sanctified by faith that is in me Jesus choosing some people to belong to him is spoken of as if he set them apart from other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 26 18 bgc5 πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 by faith that is in me “because they believe in me.” Here Paul finishes quoting the Lord. -ACT 26 19 ljx2 ὅθεν 1 Therefore “Because what I have just said is true.” Paul had just explained what the Lord had commanded him in his vision. +ACT 26 18 bgc5 πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 by faith that is in me Here Paul finishes quoting the Lord. Alternate translation: “because they believe in me” +ACT 26 19 ljx2 ὅθεν 1 Therefore Paul had just explained what the Lord had commanded him in his vision. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” ACT 26 19 zv2u figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ 1 I did not disobedient to the heavenly vision You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “I obeyed the heavenly vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 26 19 sn4h figs-metonymy τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ 1 to the heavenly vision This refers to what the person in the **vision** told Paul. Alternate translation: “to what the person from heaven told me in the vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 26 20 fei4 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 to turn to God To start trusting God is spoken of as if a person turns to start walking toward God. Alternate translation: “to trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -3025,7 +3023,7 @@ ACT 26 22 i9ki ὧν τε οἱ προφῆται 1 what both the prophets Paul ACT 26 23 pe9h figs-explicit εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός 1 that the Christ is to suffer You can make explicit that Christ must also die. Alternate translation: “that the Christ must suffer and die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 26 23 p9t8 ἐξ ἀναστάσεως 1 from the resurrection to be brought back to life ACT 26 23 sc5f νεκρῶν 1 of the dead The phrase **the dead** refers to the spirits of people who have died. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again. -ACT 26 23 z2ms figs-metaphor φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν 1 is going to proclaim light “he would proclaim the message about the light.” To tell people about how God saves people is spoken of as if a person were speaking about the light. Alternate translation: “he would proclaim the message about how God saves people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 26 23 z2ms figs-metaphor φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν 1 is going to proclaim light To tell people about how God saves people is spoken of as if a person were speaking about the light. Alternate translation: “he would proclaim the message about how God saves people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 26 24 h5b9 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and King Agrippa continue to talk together. ACT 26 24 dvn2 μαίνῃ 1 you are insane Alternate translation: “you are speaking nonsense” or “you are crazy” ACT 26 24 tk27 τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει 1 your great learning is turning you to insanity Alternate translation: “you have learned so much that it is now making you crazy” @@ -3063,7 +3061,7 @@ ACT 27 2 f8pf μέλλοντι πλεῖν 1 being about to sail Alternate tran ACT 27 2 m3ps ἀνήχθημεν 1 we set sail Alternate translation: “we began our journey on the sea” ACT 27 2 h3uy Ἀριστάρχου 1 Aristarchus Aristarchus came from Macedonia but had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in [Acts 19:29](../19/29.md). ACT 27 3 r71e figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 27 3 u6lt φιλανθρώπως…ὁ Ἰούλιος τῷ Παύλῳ χρησάμενος 1 Julius having treated Paul kindly “Julius having treated Paul with a friendly concern.” See how you translated **Julius** in [Acts 27:1](../27/01.md). +ACT 27 3 u6lt φιλανθρώπως…ὁ Ἰούλιος τῷ Παύλῳ χρησάμενος 1 Julius having treated Paul kindly See how you translated **Julius** in [Acts 27:1](../27/01.md). Alternate translation: “Julius having treated Paul with a friendly concern” ACT 27 3 rp73 figs-abstractnouns πρὸς τοὺς φίλους πορευθέντι, ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν 1 to go to his friends to receive their care The abstract noun **care** can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: “to go to his friends so they could care for him” or “to go to his friends so they could help him with whatever he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 27 4 d4hg ἀναχθέντες, ὑπεπλεύσαμεν 1 having put to sea, we sailed under Alternate translation: “we started sailing and went under” ACT 27 4 mjt8 ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κύπρον 1 we sailed under Cyprus Here, **under Cyprus** means they sailed along the side of that island that blocks the strong wind, so the ship was not forced off its course. @@ -3130,7 +3128,7 @@ ACT 27 26 vmp6 εἰς νῆσον…τινα, δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἐκπεσε ACT 27 27 rrm5 translate-ordinal ὡς δὲ τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ ἐγένετο 1 And when the fourteenth night came The ordinal number **fourteenth** can be translated as “fourteen” or “14.” Alternate translation: “After 14 days since the storm started, that night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) ACT 27 27 la7u figs-activepassive διαφερομένων ἡμῶν 1 as we were being driven this way and that If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as the wind blew us back and forth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 27 27 afs6 translate-names τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ 1 the Adriatic Sea This is the sea between Italy and Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 27 28 ruj1 βολίσαντες 1 taking soundings “measuring the depth of the sea water.” They measured the depth of water by dropping a line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water. +ACT 27 28 ruj1 βολίσαντες 1 taking soundings They measured the depth of water by dropping a line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water. Alternate translation: “measuring the depth of the sea water” ACT 27 28 tq53 translate-numbers εὗρον ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι 1 they found 20 fathoms A **fathom** is a unit of measurement for measuring the depth of water. One fathom is about two meters. Alternate translation: “they found the water was 40 meters deep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 27 28 ig3m translate-numbers εὗρον ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε 1 they found 15 fathoms A “fathom” is a unit of measurement for measuring the depth of water. One fathom is about two meters. Alternate translation: “they found the water was about 30 meters deep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 27 29 b1qc ἀγκύρας 1 anchors An **anchor** is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. See how you translated this in [Acts 27:13](../27/13.md). @@ -3150,7 +3148,7 @@ ACT 27 39 vdk2 κόλπον 1 a bay a large area of water partly surrounded by ACT 27 39 r1bx τὴν γῆν οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον 1 they did not recognize the land Alternate translation: “they saw land but could not recognize it as any place they knew” ACT 27 40 k66v τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες, εἴων 1 having cut loose the anchors, they left them Alternate translation: “they cut the ropes and left the anchors behind” ACT 27 40 ntr9 τῶν πηδαλίων 1 of the rudders large oars or pieces of wood at the back of the ship used for steering -ACT 27 40 cn2w τὸν ἀρτέμωνα 1 the foresail “the sail at the front of the ship.” The sail was a large piece of cloth that catches the wind to move the ship. +ACT 27 40 cn2w τὸν ἀρτέμωνα 1 the foresail The sail was a large piece of cloth that catches the wind to move the ship. Alternate translation: “the sail at the front of the ship” ACT 27 40 pa1k κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν 1 they headed to the beach Alternate translation: “they steered the ship toward the beach” ACT 27 41 y22n περιπεσόντες…εἰς τόπον διθάλασσον 1 having come to a place between two seas A current is water flowing in one continuous direction. Sometimes where two seas meet, the current of one can flow across the current of the other. This may cause the sand under the water to pile up making the water more shallow, and dangerous for ships. ACT 27 41 cpu5 πρῷρα 1 bow of the ship Alternate translation: “front of the ship” @@ -3252,6 +3250,6 @@ ACT 28 27 q8c2 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 might turn again To sta ACT 28 27 vb9f ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 I will heal them This does not mean God will only heal them physically. He will also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins. ACT 28 28 b2za figs-metaphor τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles God’s message about how he saves people is spoken of as if it were an object that is **sent**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 28 28 e8hb figs-activepassive τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is sending his messengers to the Gentiles to tell them about how he will save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 28 28 d18n αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀκούσονται 1 they also will listen “some of them also will listen.” This response of the Gentiles is in contrast to the way the Jews of that time refused to listen to God. +ACT 28 28 d18n αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀκούσονται 1 they also will listen This response of the Gentiles is in contrast to the way the Jews of that time refused to listen to God. Alternate translation: “some of them also will listen” ACT 28 30 c56e writing-endofstory 0 Connecting Statement: Luke ends the story of Paul in the book of Acts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 28 31 wv1l figs-metonymy κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 proclaiming the kingdom of God Here, **kingdom of God** refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “preaching about God’s rule as king” or “preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) From 2f9af40e287ae54248e3c62b8c5f85c8132287e4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Fri, 1 Apr 2022 21:42:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 09/15] Updating format of notes in Acts (#2383) Co-authored-by: lrsallee Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2383 --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 502 +++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ 1 file changed, 246 insertions(+), 256 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index 406611f10d..b795c1ed12 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -13,7 +13,7 @@ ACT 1 3 a004 οἷς καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα, ACT 1 3 dup3 figs-explicit μετὰ τὸ παθεῖν αὐτὸν 1 after he had suffered This refers to how Jesus suffered and died on the cross. Alternate translation: “after he had suffered and died on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 3 a005 figs-explicit ἐν πολλοῖς τεκμηρίοις 1 with many proofs The word translated **proofs** describes items of evidence that are decisive and convincing. Alternate translation: “with many definitive proofs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 3 yc16 figs-explicit δι’ ἡμερῶν τεσσεράκοντα, ὀπτανόμενος αὐτοῖς, καὶ λέγων 1 appearing to them for 40 days and speaking While the antecedent of **whom** is “the apostles whom he had chosen” in the previous verse, Jesus actually appeared to many other disciples besides his apostles. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “For 40 days he appeared to his apostles and many of his other disciples, and he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 1 3 a006 figs-abstractnouns τὰ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 things concerning the kingdom of God See the discussion of the concept of the **kingdom of God** in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a verb such as “rule,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 1 3 a006 figs-abstractnouns τὰ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 things concerning the kingdom of God See the discussion of the concept of the **kingdom of God** in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. kingdom**, you could express this with a verb such as “rule,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 1 4 a007 figs-doublenegatives ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι, ἀλλὰ 1 not to depart from Jerusalem, but If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **depart**. Alternate translation: “to remain in Jerusalem and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 1 4 vb7g figs-quotemarks ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων, μὴ χωρίζεσθαι 1 not to depart from Jerusalem The content of Jesus’ instructions to the apostles on this occasion begins here. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate and punctuate the material from here to the end of the verse as a direct quotation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 1 4 a008 translate-names Ἱεροσολύμων 1 Jerusalem **Jerusalem** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -28,14 +28,14 @@ ACT 1 5 dzj1 figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε 1 you ACT 1 5 a010 figs-litotes οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας 1 after these not many days Jesus is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “just a few days from now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 1 6 n9wt writing-pronouns οἱ μὲν οὖν συνελθόντες, ἠρώτων αὐτὸν 1 They therefore having assembled, they were asking him In the first instance, **they** describes Jesus and the apostles, while in the second instance, **they** refers to the apostles. (Other disciples could have been present on this occasion, but the instructions that Jesus gives about being “witnesses” in [1:8](../01/08.md) apply specifically to the apostles, so it would be good to name them directly.) Alternate translation: “When the apostles were together with Jesus, the apostles were asking him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 1 6 a011 figs-idiom εἰ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ, ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time This is an idiomatic way of asking a question. Alternate translation: “are you restoring the kingdom to Israel at this time” or “will you now restore the kingdom to Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 1 6 f7uj figs-abstractnouns εἰ…ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a concrete noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 1 6 f7uj figs-abstractnouns εἰ…ἀποκαθιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 if you are restoring the kingdom to Israel f your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **kingdom**, you could express the same idea with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “are you going to give Israel its own king again” or “are you going to become the restored king of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 1 6 a252 translate-names τῷ Ἰσραήλ 1 to Israel **Israel** is the name of a nation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 1 7 a012 figs-explicit οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν γνῶναι 1 It is not for you to know Jesus is saying implicitly by this response that he is not going to tell the apostles when the thing they are asking about will happen. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly in your translation. Alternate translation: “I am not going to tell you when that will happen, because it is not for you to know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 7 y1fu figs-doublet χρόνους ἢ καιροὺς 1 the times or the seasons The words **times** and **seasons** could: (1) refer to different kinds of time. Alternate translation: “the general period of time or the specific date” (2) have similar meanings, being used together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the exact time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 1 7 a013 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. Alternate translation: “God the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -ACT 1 7 a014 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ 1 by his own authority If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **authority** with a verb such as “control.” Alternate translation: “as the one who controls all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 1 7 a014 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ 1 by his own authority If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **authority**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “control.” Alternate translation: “as the one who controls all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 1 8 ld4k grammar-connect-logic-result λήμψεσθε δύναμιν, ἐπελθόντος τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔσεσθέ μου μάρτυρες 1 you will receive power when the Holy Spirit has come upon you, and you will be my witnesses Jesus is using the word translated **and** to describe a result. Alternate translation: “when the Holy Spirit comes upon you, then you will receive power to be my witnesses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -ACT 1 8 a015 figs-abstractnouns δύναμιν 1 power If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **power** with an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “powerful ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 1 8 a015 figs-abstractnouns δύναμιν 1 power If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **power**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “powerful ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 1 8 a016 translate-names Ἰερουσαλὴμ…Ἰουδαίᾳ…Σαμαρείᾳ 1 Jerusalem … Judea … Samaria **Jerusalem** is the name of a city, and **Judea** and **Samaria** are the names of regions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 1 8 vb4m figs-idiom ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 to the end of the earth This is a reference to place, not to time. Jesus does not mean “until the world ends.” Alternate translation: “all over the world” or “to the places on the earth that are farthest away from here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 9 e1q1 figs-explicit βλεπόντων αὐτῶν 1 as they were looking Your language may require you to specify the object of **looking**. Alternate translation: “as they were looking at him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ ACT 1 17 tmv2 figs-exclusive ἐν ἡμῖν 1 with us Although Peter is addres ACT 1 17 a052 figs-quotemarks τὸν κλῆρον τῆς διακονίας ταύτης 1 a share of this ministry Luke temporarily ends his quotation from Peter after this phrase so that he can provide further background information about Judas in [1:18–19](../01/18.md). The quotation resumes in [1:20](../01/20.md). If you are identifying quotations in your translation by putting them within quotation marks or by using some other punctuation or convention that your language uses, there should be an ending quotation mark or the equivalent after this phrase. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) ACT 1 18 tmv1 writing-background μὲν οὖν 1 Now indeed Luke is using this expression to introduce further background information that he provides in this verse and the next one about how Judas died and about what people called the field where he died. This is not part of Peter’s speech. You may want to indicate that by putting these verses in parentheses or by using the equivalent convention in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 1 18 dd58 figs-nominaladj οὗτος 1 this one Luke is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Judas. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could say “he” or use the name “Judas.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 1 18 a053 figs-abstractnouns ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 from the wage of unrighteousness If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **unrighteousness** with an adjective such as “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for doing an unrighteous deed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 1 18 a053 figs-abstractnouns ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 from the wage of unrighteousness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **unrighteousness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “unrighteous.” Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for doing an unrighteous deed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 1 18 w83j figs-metonymy ἐκ μισθοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας 1 from the wage of unrighteousness Luke is using the term **unrighteousness** figuratively to describe Judas betraying Jesus, by association with the way that was an unrighteous thing to do. Alternate translation: “with the money that he received for betraying Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 1 18 kg3q figs-explicit πρηνὴς γενόμενος 1 having fallen headfirst Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Judas did not fall down accidentally. Rather, he threw himself onto the field intentionally in order to kill himself. The implications are that he must have done this from a height. Alternate translation: “because he then threw himself down from a height onto that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 1 18 a054 πρηνὴς γενόμενος 1 having fallen headfirst The word **headfirst** describes someone falling forward, as opposed to falling backwards. Alternate translation: “having fallen forward” @@ -114,14 +114,14 @@ ACT 1 20 a059 τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερ ACT 1 21 t916 translate-versebridge 0 To help your readers understand Peter’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put his main point in a first sentence and his further explanation in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore it is necessary for someone else to become a witness with us of Jesus’ resurrection. It should be one of the men who accompanied us during all the time that the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us, beginning from the baptism of John until the day that he was taken up from us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 1 21 xz69 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν…ἡμᾶς 1 us … us In the first instance of **us**, Peter means himself and his fellow apostles, not everyone to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of the word if your language marks that distinction. However, in the second instance of **us**, Peter could well mean himself and his entire audience, so use the inclusive form in that instance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 1 21 zuf7 figs-idiom εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς 1 the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us Peter is speaking in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 1 22 qb8j figs-abstractnouns ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου 1 beginning from the baptism of John If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **baptism** with a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “beginning from when John started baptizing people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 1 22 qb8j figs-abstractnouns ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τοῦ βαπτίσματος Ἰωάννου 1 beginning from the baptism of John If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **baptism**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “baptize.” Alternate translation: “beginning from when John started baptizing people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 1 22 a060 translate-names Ἰωάννου 1 John **John** is the name of a man. Peter means the man who was known as John the Baptist. See how you translated his name in [1:5](../01/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 1 22 a061 figs-idiom τῆς ἡμέρας ἧς 1 the day on which While Jesus was taken up to heaven on a specific **day**, Peter may be using the word **day** idiomatically to mean a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time when” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 1 22 a062 writing-pronouns ἀνελήμφθη…τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ 1 he was taken up … his resurrection The pronoun **he** refers to Jesus, not to John the Baptist. The pronoun **his** also refers to Jesus. For clarity, you may want to use the name Jesus instead of one or both of these pronouns. Alternate translation: “Jesus was taken up … the resurrection of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 1 22 yi3a figs-activepassive ἀνελήμφθη ἀφ’ ἡμῶν 1 he was taken up from us If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God took him up from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 1 22 a063 figs-exclusive ἀφ’ ἡμῶν…σὺν ἡμῖν 1 from us … with us When Peter says **from us**, he is referring to God taking Jesus from everyone to whom he is speaking. But when Peter says **with us**, he means only himself and the other apostles. So the word “us” would be inclusive in the first instance and exclusive in the second instance, if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 1 22 mrx7 figs-nominaladj ἕνα τούτων 1 one of these is Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **these** as a noun to refer to specific people, the men whose qualifications he has just described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning. Alternate translation: “one of these men is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -ACT 1 22 g3n9 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ 1 of his resurrection If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **resurrection** with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “that God made him alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 1 22 g3n9 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀναστάσεως αὐτοῦ 1 of his resurrection If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “that God made him alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 1 23 lz7y writing-pronouns ἔστησαν δύο 1 they stood up two The pronoun **they** refers to all of the believers who were present on this occasion. This is the group that Luke describes as “the brothers” in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 1 23 a064 figs-nominaladj ἔστησαν δύο 1 they stood up two Luke is using the adjective **two** as a noun to refer to specific people, two men who met the qualifications Peter described. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could add the term “men” to clarify the meaning, and you could also describe these men more specifically. Alternate translation: “the believers stood up two men” or “the believers stood up two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 1 23 a065 translate-symaction ἔστησαν δύο 1 they stood up two When the believers **stood up** these two men, that is, when they had them stand up within the group, this was a symbolic way of proposing them as candidates to replace Judas. Alternate translation: “the believers proposed two men who met the qualifications that Peter described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ ACT 2 19 p5zi figs-possession ἀτμίδα καπνοῦ 1 vapor of smoke Here ACT 2 20 ylv7 figs-quotations ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα, πρὶν ἢ ἐλθεῖν ἡμέραν Κυρίου τὴν μεγάλην καὶ ἐπιφανῆ 1 The sun will be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord comes You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from Joel into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. Alternate translation: “God said that sun would be turned to darkness, and the moon to blood before the great and remarkable day of the Lord came” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 2 20 a6yh figs-activepassive ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will turn the sun to darkness” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “God said that he would turn the sun to darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 20 a122 figs-metaphor ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness God is speaking figuratively as if he would change the **sun** into something else. Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” or “The sun will no longer shine brightly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 2 20 a123 figs-abstractnouns ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **darkness** with an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 2 20 a123 figs-abstractnouns ὁ ἥλιος μεταστραφήσεται εἰς σκότος 1 The sun will be turned to darkness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **darkness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “dark.” Alternate translation: “The sun will become dark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 20 a124 figs-ellipsis καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 and the moon to blood Here some words have been left out that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “and the moon will be turned to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 2 20 a125 figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 and the moon to blood If you decide to supply words as the previous note suggests, but your language does not use passive verbal forms, you can use an active form. Alternate translation: “and I will turn the moon to blood” or, if you are making this an indirect quotation, “and that he would turn the moon to blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 20 f34k figs-metaphor καὶ ἡ σελήνη εἰς αἷμα 1 and the moon to blood God is speaking figuratively as if he would change the **moon** into something else. Alternate translation: “and the moon will look like blood” or “and the moon will appear to be red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ ACT 2 22 f2t1 figs-activepassive ἀποδεδειγμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ ACT 2 22 a135 figs-doublet δυνάμεσι, καὶ τέρασι, καὶ σημείοις 1 with mighty deeds and wonders and signs The terms **mighty deeds**, **wonders**, and **signs** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “by means of many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 2 23 a136 figs-nominaladj τοῦτον 1 This one Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “This Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 2 23 i6un figs-activepassive τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἔκδοτον 1 given up by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God The term translated **given up** is an adjective, not a passive verbal form, but even so you may wish to translate it with an active verbal form. Alternate translation: “whom God gave up by his determined counsel and foreknowledge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 2 23 s38b figs-abstractnouns τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **counsel** and **foreknowledge** with verbs. Alternate translation: “as God had planned in a determined way for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 2 23 s38b figs-abstractnouns τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **counsel** and **foreknowledge**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “as God had planned in a determined way for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 23 a137 figs-activepassive τῇ, ὡρισμένῃ βουλῇ καὶ προγνώσει τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 by the determined counsel and foreknowledge of God The word **determined** is a passive verbal form that you could express with an active form. Alternate translation: “in a way that God had determined as he planned for things he knew about ahead of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 23 f5kn figs-synecdoche ἀνείλατε 1 you killed It was the Romans who literally killed Jesus, but Peter says figuratively that the Jewish people in the crowd killed him because their demands led to his death. Alternate translation: “you demanded to be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 2 23 e38a figs-metonymy διὰ χειρὸς ἀνόμων 1 of the lawless Here, **hand** refers figuratively to actions. Alternate translation: “through the actions of the lawless” or “by what the lawless did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -284,7 +284,7 @@ ACT 2 26 a148 figs-quotations διὰ τοῦτο ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδ ACT 2 26 z8vw figs-metaphor ηὐφράνθη ἡ καρδία μου 1 my heart was glad Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “I felt glad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 2 26 a149 figs-metonymy ἠγαλλιάσατο ἡ γλῶσσά μου 1 my tongue exulted Here, the **tongue** figuratively represents the capacity for speech. Alternate translation: “I said joyful things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 26 zz6k figs-metonymy καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope Here, **flesh** figuratively means the human body by association with the way that is made of flesh. Alternate translation: “my body will also dwell in hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 2 26 a150 figs-abstractnouns καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **hope** with an adverb such as “hopefully.” Alternate translation: “my body will also live hopefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 2 26 a150 figs-abstractnouns καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **hope**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “hopefully.” Alternate translation: “my body will also live hopefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 26 a151 figs-personification καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope The Messiah is speaking figuratively as if his body itself would live hopefully. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope for my body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 2 26 a152 figs-explicit καὶ ἡ σάρξ μου κατασκηνώσει ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι 1 my flesh will also dwell in hope If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say explicitly what **hope** the Messiah had for his body. Alternate translation: “I will also have hope that God will bring my body back to life after I die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 27 m3ij figs-quotations ὅτι οὐκ ἐνκαταλείψεις τὴν ψυχήν μου εἰς ᾍδην, οὐδὲ δώσεις τὸν Ὅσιόν σου ἰδεῖν διαφθοράν 1 For you will not abandon my soul to Hades, nor will you allow your Holy One to see decay You may have decided to turn Peter’s quotation from David into an indirect quotation in order to avoid having a second-level quotation. If so, it may be necessary to add some introductory material here. Alternate translation: “The Messiah knew that God would not abandon his soul to Hades and that God would not allow his Holy One to see decay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -312,7 +312,7 @@ ACT 2 30 a164 figs-explicit προφήτης…ὑπάρχων, καὶ εἰδ ACT 2 30 x11q figs-metonymy ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ 1 to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne Peter is using the word **loins** figuratively to represent David himself by association with the way the reproductive organs are in the loins. He is using the word **fruit** in a broad sense to mean what someone or something produces, in this case a descendant. Alternate translation: “to set one of his descendants upon his throne” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 30 hq71 figs-synecdoche ἐκ καρποῦ τῆς ὀσφύος αὐτοῦ, καθίσαι ἐπὶ τὸν θρόνον αὐτοῦ 1 to set from the fruit of his loins upon his throne When Peter says that God promised to **set** one of David’s descendants **upon his throne**, he is using that one action figuratively to represent God’s promise to David that this descendant would succeed him as king. Alternate translation: “to make one of his descendants succeed him as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 2 31 a165 writing-pronouns ἐλάλησεν…ἐνκατελείφθη…αὐτοῦ 1 he spoke … was he abandoned … his The first instance of **he** refers to David, and the second instance of **he** and the pronoun **his** refer to Christ. Alternate translation: “David spoke … was Christ abandoned … Christ’s” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 2 31 a166 figs-abstractnouns ἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 he spoke about the resurrection of the Christ If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **resurrection** with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 2 31 a166 figs-abstractnouns ἐλάλησεν περὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 he spoke about the resurrection of the Christ If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “he described how God would make Christ alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 31 tn4b figs-activepassive οὔτε ἐνκατελείφθη εἰς ᾍδην 1 neither was he abandoned to Hades If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. Alternate translation: “neither did God abandon him to Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 31 a167 figs-explicit τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 the Christ **Christ** is the Greek word for “Messiah.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use the term “Messiah” in your translation, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 31 a168 translate-names ᾍδην 1 Hades See how you translated the term **Hades** in [2:27](../02/27.md). Alternate translation: “the realm of the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -347,7 +347,7 @@ ACT 2 37 a179 figs-exclusive τί ποιήσωμεν 1 what should we do The peo ACT 2 38 a180 figs-you μετανοήσατε…βαπτισθήτω ἕκαστος ὑμῶν…τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν…λήμψεσθε 1 Repent … each of you be baptized … of your sins … you will receive The words **you** and **your** are plural, **you will receive** is a plural verb form, and the implied “you” in the imperative **Repent** is also plural. But the implied “you” in the imperative **be baptized** is singular, since the subject is **each**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 2 38 cmb7 figs-activepassive βαπτισθήτω 1 be baptized If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “allow us to baptize you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 38 geb2 figs-idiom ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Peter has just finished demonstrating that God sent Jesus as the Christ or Messiah [2:36](../02/36.md). He is saying here that people should acknowledge that as the basis of their baptism for the forgiveness of their sins. So **in the name** here is an idiomatic way of saying “on the basis of naming.” Alternate translation: “on the basis of naming Jesus as the Christ” or “upon acknowledging that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 2 38 a181 figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν 1 for the forgiveness of your sins If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **forgiveness** with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 2 38 a181 figs-abstractnouns εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν 1 for the forgiveness of your sins If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “forgive.” Alternate translation: “to show that you want God to forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 39 a182 figs-metonymy ἐστιν ἡ ἐπαγγελία 1 the promise is Peter is speaking figuratively of the Holy Spirit by association with the way God promised to send the Holy Spirit, as Peter says specifically in [2:33](../02/33.md). Alternate translation: “God has promised the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 2 39 a183 figs-explicit ὑμῖν…καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν 1 to you and to your children Peter showed the people in [2:17](../02/17.md) that God’s promise through Joel to pour out his Spirit included their “sons” and “daughters.” So the implication could be that the people in the crowd should not think that any of them have to reach a certain age before professing faith in Jesus and being baptized. Alternate translation: “to all of you, no matter what your age,” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 39 a184 figs-metaphor ὑμῖν…καὶ τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν 1 to you and to your children Peter could also be using the word **children** in a figurative sense to mean “descendants.” In that case, he would be saying that faith in Jesus as the Messiah was not something just for the people living at this time, but also for people living at all times in the future. That would parallel what he says next about faith in Jesus not being just for those who are present in this place, but for people living in all places. Alternate translation: “to you and your descendants” or “to you and everyone who will live after you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -365,7 +365,7 @@ ACT 2 41 a190 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ 1 his word Luke is u ACT 2 41 kz64 figs-activepassive οἱ…ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who did the action. The apostles themselves may have baptized all these people, but because so many people repented and wanted to be baptized, it is possible that some of the other believers may have baptized some of them. Alternate translation: “the apostles baptized them” or “the believers baptized them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 41 sv5j figs-synecdoche ψυχαὶ 1 souls Luke is using one part of these people, their **souls**, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 2 41 a47f figs-activepassive προσετέθησαν 1 were added If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “became part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 2 42 a191 figs-abstractnouns ἦσαν…προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς 1 they were continuing in the teaching of the apostles and in fellowship, in the breaking of bread and in prayers If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **teaching** and **fellowship** with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 2 42 a191 figs-abstractnouns ἦσαν…προσκαρτεροῦντες τῇ διδαχῇ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῇ κοινωνίᾳ, τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου, καὶ ταῖς προσευχαῖς 1 they were continuing in the teaching of the apostles and in fellowship, in the breaking of bread and in prayers If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **teaching** and **fellowship**, you could express the same ideas with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “they continued to learn from what the apostles taught and to share life with one another, and to break bread together and to pray together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 42 gc59 figs-synecdoche τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 in the breaking of bread Luke could be using the word **breaking** to mean “eating,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be figuratively using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing meals together. Alternate translation: “in sharing meals” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 2 42 a192 figs-explicit τῇ κλάσει τοῦ ἄρτου 1 in the breaking of bread By **the breaking of bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it and also sharing a cup of wine. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “in observing the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 43 a193 figs-personification ἐγίνετο…πάσῃ ψυχῇ φόβος 1 fear was coming on every soul Here the word **fear** describes a deep respect for God. Luke describes this **fear** figuratively as if it were a living thing that could come onto people. Alternate translation: “every soul began to feel a deep respect for God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ ACT 2 46 in43 καθ’ ἡμέραν τε προσκαρτεροῦντες ACT 2 46 a427 figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ 1 in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so here **the temple** means the courtyard around the temple. Alternate translation: “in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 2 46 q1ge figs-synecdoche κλῶντές…κατ’ οἶκον ἄρτον 1 breaking bread in each house See how you translated the similar expression in [2:42](../02/42.md). There were two possible meanings there, but here **breaking bread** seems to mean specifically sharing meals. Alternate translation: “having meals together in their homes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 2 46 i2yk figs-metaphor ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας 1 with exultation and sincerity of heart Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the emotions. Alternate translation: “with feelings of exultation and sincerity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 2 46 a195 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας 1 with exultation and sincerity of heart If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **exultation** and **sincerity** with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 2 46 a195 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἀγαλλιάσει καὶ ἀφελότητι καρδίας 1 with exultation and sincerity of heart If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **exultation** and **sincerity**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs that would indicate feelings. Alternate translation: “joyfully and sincerely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 2 47 z6ig figs-hyperbole αἰνοῦντες τὸν Θεὸν καὶ ἔχοντες χάριν πρὸς ὅλον τὸν λαόν 1 praising God and having favor with the whole people Luke says **the whole people** as a generalization to emphasize how widely the people favored the believers. As the General Notes to this chapter suggest, it may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They praised God and enjoyed wide favor with the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 2 47 kc42 figs-activepassive τοὺς σῳζομένους 1 those who were being saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “those whom he was saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 2 47 a196 ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό 1 to the same See the discussion of this phrase in Part 3 of the Introduction to Acts. Alternate translation: “to their Christian fellowship” @@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ ACT 3 10 p2zh translate-names τῇ Ὡραίᾳ Πύλῃ 1 the Beautiful Gate ACT 3 10 a209 figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with wonder and amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 10 j6zf figs-doublet ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him The words **wonder** and **amazement** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. You can combine the words in your translation if that might be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him filled them with complete amazement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 3 10 a210 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him Luke is speaking figuratively as if the people were containers that these responses could fill. Alternate translation: “what had happened to him made them completely amazed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 3 10 a211 figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **wonder** and **amazement** with verbs. Alternate translation: “they wondered and marveled greatly at what had happened to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 3 10 a211 figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθησαν θάμβους καὶ ἐκστάσεως ἐπὶ τῷ συμβεβηκότι αὐτῷ 1 they were filled with wonder and amazement at what had happened to him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wonder** and **amazement**, you could express the same idea with verbs. Alternate translation: “they wondered and marveled greatly at what had happened to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 3 11 a212 figs-hyperbole πᾶς ὁ λαὸς 1 all the people The word **all** is a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the crowd that was there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 3 11 rk1m translate-names τῇ στοᾷ τῇ καλουμένῃ Σολομῶντος 1 the porch that is called Solomon’s This is the name of a covered walkway in the Jerusalem temple courtyard. It consisted of rows of pillars that supported a roof. People had named this porch after King Solomon. Alternate translation: “Solomon’s Porch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 3 11 rj43 figs-activepassive τῇ καλουμένῃ 1 that is called If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” or “whose name is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -460,12 +460,12 @@ ACT 3 19 cw18 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψατε 1 turn back Peter is speakin ACT 3 19 zm6y figs-activepassive πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας 1 for your sins to be wiped away If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you could say who will do the action. Alternate translation: “so that God will wipe away your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 19 a230 figs-metaphor πρὸς τὸ ἐξαλειφθῆναι ὑμῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας 1 for your sins to be wiped away Peter is speaking of sins as if they would be physically **wiped away** when God forgave them. Alternate translation: “so that God will forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 20 a231 figs-personification ὅπως ἂν ἔλθωσιν καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 so that times of refreshment may come from the face of the Lord Peter is speaking of these **times** figuratively as if they could actively **come** to his listeners on their own. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord may send you times of refreshing from his face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ACT 3 20 x3ca figs-abstractnouns καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως 1 times of refreshment If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **refreshment** with an adjective such as “refreshing” or “restful.” Alternate translation: “refreshing times” or “restful times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 3 20 x3ca figs-abstractnouns καιροὶ ἀναψύξεως 1 times of refreshment If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **refreshment**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “refreshing” or “restful.” Alternate translation: “refreshing times” or “restful times” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 3 20 f2wm figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ Κυρίου 1 from the face of the Lord Peter is using the term **face** figuratively to represent the presence of the Lord. Alternate translation: “from the presence of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 3 20 h3nk figs-explicit ἀποστείλῃ 1 he may send Peter is referring implicitly to Christ’s coming again. Alternate translation: “he may again send” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 3 20 yzr6 figs-activepassive τὸν προκεχειρισμένον ὑμῖν 1 the one appointed for you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the one whom he has appointed for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 3 21 vgn8 figs-personification ὃν δεῖ οὐρανὸν μὲν δέξασθαι 1 whom it is necessary for heaven to receive Peter is speaking figuratively of **heaven** as if it were a person who has welcomed Jesus into his home. Alternate translation: “who must remain in heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ACT 3 21 x2f3 figs-abstractnouns ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων 1 the times of the restoration of all things If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **restoration** with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 3 21 x2f3 figs-abstractnouns ἄχρι χρόνων ἀποκαταστάσεως πάντων 1 the times of the restoration of all things If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **restoration**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “restore.” Alternate translation: “until the times when God will restore all things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 3 21 a2m8 figs-idiom ἀπ’ αἰῶνος 1 from the age This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 3 21 a12i figs-metonymy διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων…αὐτοῦ προφητῶν 1 through the mouth of his holy prophets Peter is figuratively using the **mouth** of the prophets to represent what they said by using their mouths. Alternate translation: “through what his holy prophets said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 3 22 a232 figs-quotesinquotes Μωϋσῆς μὲν εἶπεν, ὅτι προφήτην ὑμῖν ἀναστήσει Κύριος, ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν, ὡς ἐμέ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσεσθε κατὰ πάντα, ὅσα ἂν λαλήσῃ πρὸς ὑμᾶς 1 Moses indeed said, ‘The Lord our God will raise up for you a prophet like me from your brothers. You will listen to him according to everything—whatever he may speak to you If your readers would misunderstand this, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “Moses indeed said that the Lord our God would raise up a prophet like himself for us Israelites from among our brothers. Moses said that we were to listen to him according to everything—whatever he might speak to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -498,7 +498,7 @@ ACT 3 25 g31m figs-metonymy πᾶσαι αἱ πατριαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 ACT 3 26 b7tz figs-idiom ἀναστήσας ὁ Θεὸς τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ, ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν 1 God, having raised up his Servant, sent him The expression **raised up** has the same meaning here as in [3:22](../03/22.md). See how you translated it there. Alternate translation: “When God appointed Jesus as the Messiah, he sent him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 3 26 z5q6 τὸν παῖδα αὐτοῦ 1 his Servant See the discussion of the term **Servant** in the General Notes to this chapter, and see how you translated that term in [3:13](../03/13.md). Alternate translation: “his Messiah” ACT 3 26 x8ss figs-metaphor τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 by turning each of you from your wickedness Here, **turning** someone **from** something figuratively means leading that person to stop doing that thing. See how you translated the similar expression in [3:19](../03/19.md). Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to repent of your wickedness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 3 26 a248 figs-abstractnouns τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 by turning each of you from your wickedness If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wickedness** with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 3 26 a248 figs-abstractnouns τῷ ἀποστρέφειν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν πονηριῶν ὑμῶν 1 by turning each of you from your wickedness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wickedness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wicked.” Alternate translation: “by leading every one of you to stop doing wicked things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 intro pv3a 0 # Acts 4 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set lines of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 4:25–26.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Unity

The first Christians wanted very much to be united. They wanted to believe the same things and share everything they owned and help those who needed help.

### “Signs and wonders”

This phrase refers to things that only God can do. The Christians wanted God to do what only he could do so that people would believe that what they said about Jesus was true.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### The “head of the corner” or cornerstone (4:11)

The cornerstone was the first piece of stone that people put down when they were building a building out of stone. Peter refers to it as the “head of the corner” in 4:11. This is a metaphor for the most important part of something, the part on which everything else depends. To say that Jesus is the cornerstone of the church is to say that nothing in the church is more important than Jesus and that everything in the church depends on Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “no other name” (4:12)

“There is no other name under heaven given among men by which we must be saved” (Acts 4:12). As a note to this verse explains, in this expression the term “name” figuratively represents a person. So with these words, Peter was saying that no other person who has ever been on the earth or who will ever be on earth can save people. This statement might cause some controversy in some places today, but it is an essential part of the Christian message, and it should be translated so that its meaning is clear. ACT 4 1 abc4 writing-pronouns λαλούντων…αὐτῶν 1 as they were speaking The pronoun **they** refers to Peter and John. Alternate translation: “as Peter and John were speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 4 1 ew3l figs-explicit ὁ στρατηγὸς τοῦ ἱεροῦ 1 the captain of the temple The temple had its own guards, and this man was their commanding officer. Alternate translation: “the commander of the temple guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -506,12 +506,12 @@ ACT 4 1 a253 translate-names οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι 1 the Sadducees **Sad ACT 4 1 m74s figs-explicit οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι 1 the Sadducees The Sadducees would have been particularly upset that Peter and John were saying that God raised Jesus from the dead, because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain that explicitly here. Alternate translation: “the Sadducees, who do not believe in the resurrection,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 1 d3tv figs-synecdoche οἱ Σαδδουκαῖοι 1 the Sadducees Luke is using the name of the whole group to mean some of its members. Alternate translation: “some of the Sadducees” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 4 2 abc5 writing-pronouns διαπονούμενοι διὰ τὸ διδάσκειν αὐτοὺς 1 greatly troubled because they were teaching The pronoun **they** refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “These men were greatly troubled because Peter and John were teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 4 2 mg5l figs-abstractnouns καταγγέλλειν ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ τὴν ἀνάστασιν, τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 proclaiming in Jesus the resurrection that is from the dead If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **resurrection** with an equivalent phrase. Peter and John were saying that God would raise people from the dead in the same way that he had raised Jesus. Translate this in a way that allows **the resurrection** to refer to both Jesus’ resurrection and the general resurrection of other people. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that God makes people alive again who have died, just as God had done for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 4 2 mg5l figs-abstractnouns καταγγέλλειν ἐν τῷ Ἰησοῦ τὴν ἀνάστασιν, τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 proclaiming in Jesus the resurrection that is from the dead If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent phrase. Peter and John were saying that God would raise people from the dead in the same way that he had raised Jesus. Translate this in a way that allows **the resurrection** to refer to both Jesus’ resurrection and the general resurrection of other people. Alternate translation: “proclaiming that God makes people alive again who have died, just as God had done for Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 2 np5g figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead Peter is using the adjective **dead** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “from among those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 4 3 a254 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 1 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the men who came up to Peter and John did because they were so troubled by their teaching. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 4 3 a255 writing-pronouns ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 they laid hands on them The pronoun **they** refers to the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees. The pronoun **them** refers to Peter and John. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the priests, the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees laid hands on Peter and John” or “the men who had come up to Peter and John laid hands on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 4 3 zla7 figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 they laid hands on them The expression **laid hands on** figuratively means to arrest someone, by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 4 3 a256 figs-abstractnouns ἔθεντο εἰς τήρησιν 1 put them in custody If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **custody** with a verb such as “imprison.” Alternate translation: “they imprisoned them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 4 3 a256 figs-abstractnouns ἔθεντο εἰς τήρησιν 1 put them in custody If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **custody**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “imprison.” Alternate translation: “they imprisoned them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 3 h5f9 figs-explicit ἦν γὰρ ἑσπέρα ἤδη 1 since it was already evening The implication is that the ruling council, which Luke describes in [4:5–6](../04/05.md), would not meet to question anyone at night. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “since it was already evening and the council would not meet to question them at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 4 a257 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 But Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened after this much of the story as a result of the events within the story itself. This is not the end of the whole story, but it is the end of a significant part of it. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 4 4 a258 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that Peter and John shared by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -547,7 +547,7 @@ ACT 4 11 w195 figs-metaphor ὁ λίθος ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ ACT 4 11 c1bh figs-activepassive ὁ ἐξουθενηθεὶς ὑφ’ ὑμῶν, τῶν οἰκοδόμων 1 that was rejected by you, the builders If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that you, the builders, rejected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 11 f1nx figs-idiom κεφαλὴν γωνίας 1 the head of the corner The phrase **the head of the corner** is an idiom that refers to a large stone with straight edges that builders would place down first and use as a reference to make sure that the walls of a stone building were straight and that the building was oriented in the right direction. Your language may have its own term for such a stone. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “the cornerstone” or “the reference stone for the whole building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 4 12 a268 figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία 1 there is no salvation in anyone else In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “there is no salvation in no one else.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he is the only one in whom there is salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -ACT 4 12 tq3z figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία 1 there is no salvation in anyone else If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **salvation** with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 4 12 tq3z figs-abstractnouns οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν ἄλλῳ οὐδενὶ ἡ σωτηρία 1 there is no salvation in anyone else If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **salvation**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “save.” Alternate translation: “he is the only one who is able to save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 12 l66w figs-activepassive οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν τὸ δεδομένον 1 there is no other name under heaven given If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “God has not given any other name under heaven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 12 iz7k figs-metonymy οὐδὲ…ὄνομά ἐστιν ἕτερον…ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς 1 there is no other name … by which we must be saved Here, **name** figuratively represents a person, by association with the way that each person has a name. Alternate translation: “there is no other person … by whom we must be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 12 jm25 figs-idiom ὑπὸ τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 under heaven This is an idiom. See how you translated it in [2:5](../02/05.md). Alternate translation: “on earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -555,7 +555,7 @@ ACT 4 12 a269 figs-gendernotations ἐν ἀνθρώποις 1 among men Peter i ACT 4 12 gg8h figs-activepassive ἐν ᾧ δεῖ σωθῆναι ἡμᾶς 1 by which we must be saved If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “that can save us” or, if you translate “name” as “person,” “who can save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 12 tdw8 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 we Peter is using the word **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 4 13 r6d6 figs-idiom θεωροῦντες 1 seeing Luke is using the word **seeing** idiomatically to mean that the council members noticed this and found it significant. Alternate translation: “taking note of” or “impressed with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 4 13 t6kc figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου 1 the boldness of Peter and John Here the abstract noun **boldness** refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders. It can be translated with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 4 13 t6kc figs-abstractnouns τὴν τοῦ Πέτρου παρρησίαν καὶ Ἰωάννου 1 the boldness of Peter and John Here the abstract noun **boldness** refers to the way in which Peter and John responded to the Jewish leaders. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you can express the same idea with an adverb or an adjective. Alternate translation: “how boldly Peter and John had spoken” or “how bold Peter and John were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 13 qaa5 figs-explicit καταλαβόμενοι 1 realizing The implication is that the Jewish leaders realized this because of the way Peter and John spoke. Alternate translation: “realizing from the way they spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 13 xn39 writing-pronouns ἐθαύμαζον; ἐπεγίνωσκόν τε αὐτοὺς, ὅτι σὺν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἦσαν 1 they marveled, and they recognized them, that they had been with Jesus Here the pronoun **they** refers in its first two instances to the council members, and in its third instance it refers to Peter and John, as does the pronoun **them**. It may be helpful to your readers to clarify this and to state the meaning here more concisely. Alternate translation: “the council members marveled, and they recognized that Peter and John had been with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) ACT 4 13 erv7 figs-doublet ἄνθρωποι ἀγράμματοί εἰσιν καὶ ἰδιῶται 1 they were uneducated and ordinary men The words **uneducated** and **ordinary** mean similar things. Both words indicate that Peter and John had no formal education. Luke uses them together for emphasis, to express from the council members’ perspective how amazed they were. Alternate translation: “they had no formal education at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -632,7 +632,7 @@ ACT 4 29 b38z καὶ τὰ νῦν 1 And now The believers use the expression ACT 4 29 t5qm figs-idiom ἔπιδε ἐπὶ τὰς ἀπειλὰς αὐτῶν 1 look upon their threats The phrase **look upon** is an idiomatic way of asking God to pay attention to the threats that the Jewish leaders have made against the believers. Alternate translation: “pay attention to the threats they have made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 4 29 a306 figs-123person τοῖς δούλοις σου 1 to your servants The believers are speaking of themselves in the third person. If that would be confusing to your readers, you can use the first person in your translation. Alternate translation: “to us, your servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) ACT 4 29 zh7j figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον σου 1 your word The believers are using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 4 29 a307 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης 1 with all boldness If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **boldness** with an adverb such as “boldly.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 4 29 a307 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης 1 with all boldness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **boldness**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 30 x9r1 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ τὴν χεῖρά σου, ἐκτείνειν σε εἰς ἴασιν, καὶ σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα, γίνεσθαι 1 as you stretch out your hand to heal and for signs and wonders to happen Here the **hand** figuratively represents God’s power. To **stretch out** the hand means to use it. So this is a prayer for God to do powerful things. Alternate translation: “as you do powerful things to heal people and to make signs and wonders happen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 30 a308 figs-doublet σημεῖα, καὶ τέρατα 1 signs and wonders The terms **signs** and **wonders** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:43](../02/43.md). Alternate translation: “great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 4 30 t5uw figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος 1 through the name Here, **name** refers figuratively to authority. Alternate translation: “by the authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -643,15 +643,15 @@ ACT 4 31 x9b3 figs-activepassive ἐσαλεύθη 1 was shaken If your readers ACT 4 31 ps3m figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. See how you translated the same expression in [2:4](../02/04.md). Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit filled them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 31 a311 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ἅπαντες τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 they were all filled with the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking figuratively as if the believers were containers that the Holy Spirit **filled**. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit inspired them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 4 31 a312 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 4 31 a313 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας 1 with boldness If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **boldness** with an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 4 31 a313 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ παρρησίας 1 with boldness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **boldness**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “boldly.” Alternate translation: “boldly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 32 a314 grammar-connect-time-background δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information in [4:32–37](../04/32.md) that will help readers understand further episodes in the story. These verses introduce Barnabas, who will be an important character in the book, and they also help account for what happens to Ananias and Sapphira in the next chapter. You can translate the word **Now** with a term or phrase that serves the same purpose in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) ACT 4 32 xu3j figs-metonymy ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία 1 was one in heart and soul Here the word **heart** seems to represent the emotions and the word **soul** seems to represent the desires. Alternate translation: “thought the same way and desired the same things” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 4 32 a315 figs-doublet ἦν καρδία καὶ ψυχὴ μία 1 was one in heart and soul The terms **heart** and **soul** mean similar things, and Luke may be using them together for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine the terms in your translation. Alternate translation: “was genuinely united” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 4 32 a316 τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ 1 of the things that were to him Alternate translation: “of the things that he owned” ACT 4 32 zyp5 figs-hyperbole ἦν αὐτοῖς πάντα κοινά 1 everything was common to them The word **everything** may be a generalization that emphasizes the powerful spirit of generosity among the believers. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:44](../02/44.md). Alternate translation: “they shared their belongings with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 4 33 a317 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 of the resurrection of the Lord Jesus If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **resurrection** with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “of how God made the Lord Jesus alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 4 33 a317 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἀναστάσεως τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 of the resurrection of the Lord Jesus If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “alive.” Alternate translation: “of how God made the Lord Jesus alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 33 a318 writing-pronouns χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 great grace was upon them all The pronoun **them** refers back to “the multitude of those who believed” in [4:32](../04/32.md). It does not refer just to the **apostles**, who are mentioned in this verse. Alternate translation: “great grace was upon all of the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -ACT 4 33 d8dr figs-abstractnouns χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 great grace was upon them all If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** with an equivalent expression. The word could describe: (1) how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 4 33 d8dr figs-abstractnouns χάρις τε μεγάλη ἦν ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 great grace was upon them all If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **grace**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. The word could describe: (1) how God was blessing the believers. Alternate translation: “God was blessing all of the believers in wonderful ways” (2) how the people in Jerusalem held the believers in high esteem. Alternate translation: “the people of Jerusalem thought very highly of all the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 34 a331 translate-versebridge οὐδὲ γὰρ ἐνδεής τις ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς 1 For there was not anyone needy among them This statement expresses the result of the rest of what Luke says in this verse and what he says in the next verse. If your readers would misunderstand this to put this result after the reasons for it, you could create a verse bridge by moving this statement to the end of the next verse and beginning it with the word “So” instead of **For**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 4 34 a319 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For Luke uses the word **For** in its first instance in this verse to introduce the evidence or reason for his statement at the end of the previous verse that “great grace was upon them all.” The meaning here depends on the meaning there. Alternate translation: (1) “The way God was blessing the believers could be seen in the fact that” or (2) “One thing that made the people think very highly of the believers was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 4 34 a320 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 2 for Luke uses the word **for** in its second instance in this verse to introduce the reason why no one in the community of believers was needy. Alternate translation: “and the reason for this was that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -660,14 +660,14 @@ ACT 4 34 l938 figs-activepassive τὰς τιμὰς τῶν πιπρασκομ ACT 4 35 a321 translate-symaction ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 they were laying it at the feet of the apostles The expression **laying it at the feet** indicates that believers who sold possessions were putting the money they got on the ground in front of the apostles. In this culture, that was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction) ACT 4 35 vv4z translate-symaction ἐτίθουν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 they were laying it at the feet of the apostles In this culture, putting the money on the ground in front of the apostles was a symbolic way of presenting it to them as a gift to be used to help others in the community. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “they were presenting it to the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 4 35 a322 figs-activepassive διεδίδετο 1 it was being distributed If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles were distributing it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 4 35 ps4s figs-abstractnouns ἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν 1 to each one, according as anyone had need If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **need** with a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “to every person in the amount that he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 4 35 ps4s figs-abstractnouns ἑκάστῳ, καθότι ἄν τις χρείαν εἶχεν 1 to each one, according as anyone had need If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **need**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “need.” Alternate translation: “to every person in the amount that he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 36 uc2a writing-participants Ἰωσὴφ δὲ 1 Then Joseph Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 4 36 a323 translate-names Ἰωσὴφ…Βαρναβᾶς 1 Joseph … Barnabas **Joseph** and **Barnabas** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 4 36 a324 figs-activepassive ὁ ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς, ἀπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 who was called Barnabas by the apostles If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “whom the apostles called Barnabas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 36 a325 figs-activepassive ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the meaning of the passive verbal form **being translated** with an active form. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 4 36 a326 figs-explicit ὅ ἐστιν μεθερμηνευόμενον, υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 which, being translated, is Son of Encouragement Luke assumes that his readers will know that he is saying what the name Barnabas means when **translated** from the Aramaic language. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “which means Son of Encouragement in Aramaic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 4 36 nr4v figs-idiom υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 Son of Encouragement The expression **Son of** figuratively describes a person who shares the qualities of something. The apostles used this name to describe Joseph’s behavior and character, since he was a person who encouraged others. Alternate translation: “the Encourager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 4 36 a327 figs-abstractnouns υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 Son of Encouragement If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **Encouragement** with a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “the One who Encourages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 4 36 a327 figs-abstractnouns υἱὸς παρακλήσεως 1 Son of Encouragement If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **Encouragement**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “encourage.” Alternate translation: “the One who Encourages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 4 36 a328 translate-names Λευείτης 1 a Levite The name **Levite** describes a person from the tribe of Levi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 4 36 a329 translate-names Κύπριος 1 Cyprus **Cyprus** is the name of an island. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 4 37 a330 ὑπάρχοντος αὐτῷ 1 that was to him See how you translated the similar expression in [4:32](../04/32.md). Alternate translation: “that he owned” @@ -749,7 +749,7 @@ ACT 5 17 f9ye figs-events ἀναστὰς…ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ π ACT 5 17 pc45 figs-activepassive ἀναστὰς…ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς καὶ πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου, 1 rising up, the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) were filled with jealousy If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form instead of the passive form **were filled**. Alternate translation: “jealousy filled the high priest and all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) and they rose up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 5 17 a370 figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 rising up Here the expression **rising up** means that the high priest decided to take action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “taking action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 5 17 a371 figs-explicit πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, ἡ οὖσα αἵρεσις τῶν Σαδδουκαίων 1 all those with him (which is the sect of the Sadducees) The phrase **all those with him** means specifically all the other priests who joined the high priest in taking action against the apostles. Luke observes here that those other priests were from the group known as the **Sadducees**. As a note to [4:1](../04/01.md) explains, they opposed the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “and all of the priests from the group known as the Sadducees who wanted to oppose the apostles’ teaching because they did not believe in the resurrection” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 5 17 a372 figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 were filled with jealousy If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **jealousy** with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 5 17 a372 figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 were filled with jealousy If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **jealousy**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “jealous.” Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 5 17 a373 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 were filled with jealousy Luke is speaking figuratively as if the high priest and his allies were containers that jealousy **filled**. Alternate translation: “became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 5 18 j58p figs-metonymy ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους 1 they laid hands on the apostles The expression **laid hands on** figuratively means to arrest someone, by association with the way that arresting officers might physically take hold of a person with their **hands**. Alternate translation: “they arrested the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 5 18 a374 figs-synecdoche ἐπέβαλον τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀποστόλους 1 they laid hands on the apostles The high priest and his allies did not arrest the apostles personally. They would have ordered the temple guards to arrest them. But Luke speaks figuratively as if the high priest and his allies did this action because they had a significant part in it by ordering it. Alternate translation: “they had the temple guards arrest the apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -766,7 +766,7 @@ ACT 5 21 a379 figs-explicit τὸ Συνέδριον καὶ πᾶσαν τὴν ACT 5 21 a380 figs-metaphor τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραήλ 1 the sons of Israel Here, **sons** figuratively means “descendants.” Luke is identifying the Israelites as descendants of their ancestor Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 5 21 li6a figs-ellipsis ἀπέστειλαν εἰς τὸ δεσμωτήριον 1 sent to the prison Luke is leaving out a word that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. He means that the high priest and his allies sent someone to the prison to get the apostles. Alternate translation: “sent someone to the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 5 23 a381 figs-activepassive τὸ δεσμωτήριον εὕρομεν κεκλεισμένον ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ, καὶ τοὺς φύλακας 1 We found the prison shut in all security and the guards If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use an active verbal form in place of the passive form **shut**, and you can say who did the action. Alternate translation: “We found that the guards had shut the prison in all security and we found the guards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 5 23 a382 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ 1 in all security If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **security** with an adverb such as “securely.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very securely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 5 23 a382 figs-abstractnouns ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ 1 in all security If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **security**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “securely.” The word **all** is an intensifier. Alternate translation: “very securely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 5 23 a383 figs-explicit ἀνοίξαντες 1 having opened Your language may require you to specify the object of **opened**. Alternate translation: “once we opened the doors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 5 23 ld7d figs-hyperbole ἔσω οὐδένα εὕρομεν 1 we found no one inside By **no one**, the officers mean that they found none of the men they had been sent to bring, that is, none of the apostles. It is possible that other people were also being held in the prison, but the angel would not have released them, and they would still have been inside. Alternate translation: “we did not find any of the apostles inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 5 24 k5g6 figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους τούτους 1 these words Luke is using the term **words** figuratively to mean the report that the officers gave. Alternate translation: “this report” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -798,7 +798,7 @@ ACT 5 30 a395 figs-explicit κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 having ACT 5 31 a396 figs-nominaladj τοῦτον 1 this one Peter is using the demonstrative adjective **this** as a noun to refer to a specific person, Jesus. (ULT shows that by adding **one**.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could specify whom Peter means. Alternate translation: “Jesus” or “this Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 5 31 a397 figs-nominaladj τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 1 to his right Peter is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:25](../02/25.md). Alternate translation: “to his right side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 5 31 uh2d translate-symaction τῇ δεξιᾷ αὐτοῦ 1 to his right God placing Jesus at his **right** side was a symbolic way of giving him great honor. Alternate translation: “to a place of great honor next to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 5 31 mr1d figs-abstractnouns τοῦ δοῦναι μετάνοιαν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 to give repentance and forgiveness of sins to Israel If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **repentance** and **forgiveness** with verbs. Alternate translation: “to give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 5 31 mr1d figs-abstractnouns τοῦ δοῦναι μετάνοιαν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 1 to give repentance and forgiveness of sins to Israel If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **forgiveness**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “to give the people of Israel an opportunity to repent and have God forgive their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 5 31 q1il figs-personification Ἰσραὴλ 1 Israel Peter is referring figuratively to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 5 32 a398 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we Peter is addressing the Sanhedrin, but he is using the word **we** to refer only to himself and the other apostles. So if your language distinguishes between exclusive and inclusive “us,” it would be accurate to use the exclusive form here. Other languages may have other ways of indicating that **we** is exclusive here. Alternate translation: “we apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 5 32 a399 figs-ellipsis καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον, ὃ ἔδωκεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς πειθαρχοῦσιν αὐτῷ 1 and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him Peter is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit, whom God has given to those obeying him, is also a witness of these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -860,7 +860,7 @@ ACT 6 1 cg5t figs-idiom ἐν…ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις 1 in th ACT 6 1 e7vb translate-names τῶν Ἑλληνιστῶν 1 of the Hellenists **Hellenists** was the name for Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke the Greek language and followed Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 1 ftz8 translate-names τοὺς Ἑβραίους 1 the Hebrews In this context, Luke is using the name **Hebrews** to mean Jews in the Roman Empire who spoke Aramaic, a language closely related to Hebrew, and who did not follow Greek customs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 1 s4qy figs-activepassive παρεθεωροῦντο ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ αἱ χῆραι αὐτῶν 1 their widows were being overlooked in the daily service If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form, and you can say who was doing the action. Alternate translation: “those who were distributing food each day were overlooking their widows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 6 1 rde8 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ 1 in the daily service If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **service** with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 6 1 rde8 figs-abstractnouns ἐν τῇ διακονίᾳ τῇ καθημερινῇ 1 in the daily service If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **service**, you could express the same idea with an equivalent expression. Alternate translations: “by those who were distributing food each day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 2 kwvo grammar-connect-logic-result δὲ 1 So Luke is using the word **So** to introduce the results of what the previous sentence described. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for this same purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 6 2 n5r4 figs-nominaladj οἱ δώδεκα 1 the Twelve Luke is using the adjective **Twelve** as a noun in order to indicate a group of people, the apostles who led the church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the 12 apostles” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 6 2 is74 translate-names οἱ δώδεκα 1 the Twelve Alternatively, even if your language does not ordinarily use adjectives as nouns, you may be able to do that in this case, since this is a title by which the apostles were known. Even though it is a number, if you translate it as a title, as ULT does, follow the conventions for titles in your language. For example, capitalize main words and write out numbers rather than use digits. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -870,25 +870,25 @@ ACT 6 2 fwk6 figs-metaphor διακονεῖν τραπέζαις 1 to serve tab ACT 6 3 lcyx figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί 1 brothers See how you translated the term **brothers** in [1:15](../01/15.md). Alternate translation: “my fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 6 3 p1yz figs-activepassive ἄνδρας…μαρτυρουμένους 1 men being attested The expression **being attested** is a passive verbal form. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the same meaning with an active form. Alternate translation: “men to whose honesty people attest” or “men whom people say they trust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 6 3 mgid figs-metaphor πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 full of the Spirit and of wisdom The apostles are speaking figuratively of these men as if they were containers that the Holy Spirit and wisdom could fill. Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who possess great wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 6 3 pxe5 figs-abstractnouns πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 full of the Spirit and of wisdom If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wisdom** with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 6 3 pxe5 figs-abstractnouns πλήρεις Πνεύματος καὶ σοφίας 1 full of the Spirit and of wisdom If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “in whose lives the Spirit is evidently present and who act very wisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 3 i27a figs-metaphor ἐπὶ τῆς χρείας ταύτης 1 over this task When the apostles say that they will appoint these men **over** the work of food distribution, they are using a spatial metaphor. Alternate translation: “to be responsible for this task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 6 4 b3bj figs-metonymy τοῦ λόγου 1 of the word The apostles are using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God has told them to teach and preach by using words. Alternate translation: “of teaching and preaching the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 5 wh9t figs-metonymy ἤρεσεν ὁ λόγος ἐνώπιον παντὸς τοῦ πλήθους 1 the statement was pleasing before the whole multitude Luke is using the word **before** to refer to the opinion of the believers, since people assess things that come to to their attention in front of them. Alternate translation: “what the apostles recommended pleased all of the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 5 jayc grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 2 And Luke is using the word translated **And** to introduce what the believers did as a result of the apostles’ request. Alternate translation: “So” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) ACT 6 5 ajq1 translate-names Στέφανον…Φίλιππον…Πρόχορον…Νικάνορα…Τίμωνα…Παρμενᾶν…Νικόλαον 1 Stephen…Philip…Prochorus…Nicanor…Timon…Parmenas…Nicolaus These are the names of seven men. They are all Greek names, and this suggests that all of the men selected were from the group of Greek-speaking Jews among the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 5 vsyk figs-metaphor ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit Luke is speaking figuratively of Stephen as if they were a container that faith and the Holy Spirit had filled. Alternate translation: “a man who possessed great wisdom and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 6 5 yqsj figs-abstractnouns ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 6 5 yqsj figs-abstractnouns ἄνδρα πλήρης πίστεως καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “trust.” Alternate translation: “a man who confidently trusted in God and in whose life the Holy Spirit was evidently present” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 5 cg5s translate-names Ἀντιοχέα 1 an Antiochian The name **Antiochian** describes a person who comes from the city of Antioch. Alternate translation: “who came from Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 6 wu1y translate-symaction ἐπέθηκαν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας 1 and placed their hands upon them The apostles **placed their hands** on the seven men to show publicly that they were giving them the responsibility and authority to oversee the food distribution. Alternate translation: “and placed their hands on them to show that they were giving them responsibility and authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 6 7 x48w writing-endofstory 0 As the outline in the General Introduction indicates, this verse is the end of the first major section of the book of Acts. That section describes how the apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem. Luke uses this verse to summarize what happened as a result of the events within this whole section of the book. You language may have its own way of indicating how such a summary relates to a significant part of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 6 7 wu4l figs-metaphor ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 the word of God was growing Luke is speaking figuratively of the way the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **growing**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 6 7 ueie figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν 1 the word of God was growing Luke is using the term **word** figuratively to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus kept becoming more widespread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 7 jg8y figs-synecdoche ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει 1 became obedient to the faith Luke speaks generally of **the faith** (that is, belief in Jesus) to indicate that these priests **became obedient** to one part of it, Jesus’ teachings about how to live. But that obedience showed that the priests genuinely embraced faith in Jesus as Messiah in its entirety. Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 6 7 qq3l figs-abstractnouns ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει 1 became obedient to the faith If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 6 7 qq3l figs-abstractnouns ὑπήκουον τῇ πίστει 1 became obedient to the faith If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you could express the same idea with a verb such as “believe.” Alternate translation: “came to believe in Jesus and so started obeying his teachings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 8 et2j writing-participants Στέφανος δὲ 1 Now Stephen Luke uses this phrase to introduce Stephen as the main character in this part of the story. Your language may have its own way of doing that. If so, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 6 8 pzr0 figs-metaphor Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing Luke is speaking figuratively as if Stephen were a container that **grace and power** were filling. Alternate translation: “Stephen had abundant grace and power, and so he was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 6 8 h8sg figs-hendiadys Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing Luke may be using the two words **grace** and **power** together to express a single idea. The word **grace** would describe the character of the **power** that Stephen had. Specifically, it would be power that God was giving him. Alternate translation: “Stephen, full of gracious power, was doing” or “Stephen, full of power from God, was doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -ACT 6 8 xscq figs-abstractnouns Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **grace** and **power** with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 6 8 xscq figs-abstractnouns Στέφανος…πλήρης χάριτος καὶ δυνάμεως, ἐποίει 1 Stephen, full of grace and power, was doing If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **grace** and **power**, you could express the same ideas with adverbs. Alternate translation: “Stephen was supernaturally and powerfully doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 8 m0zh figs-doublet τέρατα καὶ σημεῖα μεγάλα 1 great wonders and signs The terms **wonders** and **signs** mean similar things. Luke is using them together for emphasis. See how you translated the similar expression in [2:22](../02/22.md). Alternate translation: “many great miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 6 9 d74m figs-idiom ἀνέστησαν 1 rose up Here the expression **rose up** means that these people took action, specifically to oppose Stephen, not that they stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “took action to oppose Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 6 9 nei0 figs-activepassive τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένης Λιβερτίνων 1 the synagogue called Freedmen If your readers would misunderstand this, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “the synagogue whose name was Freedmen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -896,7 +896,7 @@ ACT 6 9 k88n figs-explicit τῆς συναγωγῆς, τῆς λεγομένη ACT 6 9 e7b0 translate-names Κυρηναίων…Ἀλεξανδρέων…Κιλικίας…Ἀσίας 1 of the Cyrenians…of the Alexandrians…Cilicia…Asia **Cyrenians** is the name for people from the city of Cyrene, and **Alexandrians** is the name for people from the city of Alexandria. **Cilicia** and **Asia** are the names of two Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 6 10 v5ia figs-idiom οὐκ ἴσχυον ἀντιστῆναι 1 they were not able to stand against The expression **stand against** is an idiom. Alternate translation: “they could not argue successfully against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 6 10 fnb2 figs-hendiadys τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke Luke may be using the two words **wisdom** and **Spirit** together to express a single idea. The word **Spirit** would describe the source and character of the **wisdom** that Stephen was displaying. The word **Spirit** refers to the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit-inspired wisdom by which he spoke” or “the wisdom that the Holy Spirit gave him as he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -ACT 6 10 psha figs-abstractnouns τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke If your readers would misunderstand this, you could express the ideas behind the abstract noun **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 6 10 psha figs-abstractnouns τῇ σοφίᾳ καὶ τῷ Πνεύματι, ᾧ ἐλάλει 1 the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **wisdom**, you could express the same idea with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise things he said as the Spirit inspired him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 6 11 ren5 figs-explicit ὑπέβαλον ἄνδρας λέγοντας 1 they instigated men to say The word **instigated** means that Stephen’s opponents in some way persuaded these men to lie about what Stephen was saying. They may have offered them money, or they may have convinced them that Stephen was a dangerous person who needed to be stopped. Since Luke does not specify the means, it may be best not to suggest a means in your translation. But it would be appropriate to indicate that what these men were recruited to say about Stephen was a lie. Alternate translation: “recruited some men to lie about Stephen by saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 6 11 s2cl figs-exclusive ἀκηκόαμεν 1 We have heard The men are using the word **We** to refer only to themselves, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 6 11 x747 figs-metonymy λαλοῦντος ῥήματα βλάσφημα 1 speaking blasphemous words The men are using the term **words** figuratively to mean the things that Stephen has been saying by using words. Alternate translation: “saying blasphemous things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -912,49 +912,49 @@ ACT 6 14 uok4 figs-explicit τὸν τόπον τοῦτον 1 this place By **t ACT 6 14 vak4 figs-metonymy τὰ ἔθη ἃ παρέδωκεν ἡμῖν Μωϋσῆς 1 the customs that Moses handed down to us The phrase **handed down** is an idiom that refers to something that is passed from generation to generation. The false witnesses are describing how the ancestors of the Jews have passed on the teachings originally received from Moses to each successive generation. Alternate translation: “the customs that our ancestors learned from Moses and have taught each successive generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 6 15 k8rw figs-simile εἶδον τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ, ὡσεὶ πρόσωπον ἀγγέλου 1 saw his face as the face of an angel Luke offers this comparison but he does not say specifically in what way Stephen’s face was like **the face of an angel**. However, this may mean that his face was shining brightly, since descriptions of angels in the Bible often say they were shining brightly. So you might choose to say that in your translation. Alternate translation: “saw that his face was shining brightly, like the face of an angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) ACT 7 intro p9h4 0 # Acts 7 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 7:42-43 and 49-50.

It appears that 8:1 is part of the narrative of this chapter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “Stephen said”

Stephen told the history of Israel very briefly. He paid special attention to the times that the Israelites had rejected the people God had chosen to lead them. At the end of the story, he said that the Jewish leaders he was talking to had rejected Jesus just as the evil Israelites had always rejected the leaders God had appointed for them.

### “Full of the Holy Spirit”

The Holy Spirit completely controlled Stephen so that he said only and all of what God wanted him to say.

### Foreshadowing

When an author speaks of something that is not important at that time but will be important later in the story, this is called foreshadowing. Luke mentions Saul, also known as Paul, here, even though he is not an important person in this part of the story. This is because Paul is an important person in the rest of the Book of Acts.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Implied information

Stephen was talking to Jews who knew the law of Moses well, so he did not explain things that his hearers already knew. But you may need to explain some of these things so that your readers will be able to understand what Stephen was saying. For example, you may need to make explicit that when Joseph’s brothers “sold him into Egypt” ([Acts 7:9](../act/07/09.md)), Joseph was going to be a slave in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Metonymy

Stephen spoke of Joseph ruling “over Egypt” and over all of Pharaoh’s household. By this he meant that Joseph ruled over the people of Egypt and of the people and possessions in Pharaoh’s household. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Background knowledge

The Jewish leaders to whom Stephen spoke already knew much about the events he was telling them about. They knew what Moses had written in the Book of Genesis. If the Book of Genesis has not been translated into your language, it may be difficult for your readers to understand what Stephen said. -ACT 7 1 pt4h figs-you 0 General Information: The word “our” includes both Steven, the Jewish council to whom he spoke, and the entire audience. The word “your” is singular refers to Abraham. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 7 1 hy9r 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story about Stephen, which began in [Acts 6:8](../06/08.md), continues. Stephen begins his response to the high priest and the council by talking about things that happened in Israel’s history. Most of this history comes from Moses’ writings. ACT 7 2 abc7 ὁ δὲ ἔφη 1 Then he said Stephen is speaking. ACT 7 2 v5si ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες, ἀκούσατε 1 brothers, and fathers, listen to me Stephen was being very respectful to the council in greeting them as extended family. -ACT 7 4 pfg3 0 General Information: In verse 4 the words “he,” “his,” and “him” refer to Abraham. In verse 5 the words “He” and “he” refer to God, but the word “him” refers to Abraham. +ACT 7 2 pt4h figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 General Information: The word **our** includes both Steven, the Jewish council to whom he spoke, and the entire audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 7 4 pfg3 κατῴκησεν…αὐτοῦ…αὐτὸν 1 General Information: In this verse, the words **he**, **his**, and **him** refer to Abraham. ACT 7 4 pfg4 figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 you Here the word **you** refers to the Jewish council and audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +ACT 7 5 tnsm ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ…ἐπηγγείλατο…αὐτῷ…αὐτοῦ… αὐτόν…αὐτῷ 1 In this verse, the words **He** and **he** refer to God, but the word **him** refers to Abraham. ACT 7 5 ax1j οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ κληρονομίαν ἐν αὐτῇ 1 he did not give him an inheritance in it Alternate translation: “he did not give any of it to him as an inheritance” -ACT 7 5 qff6 figs-idiom οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός 1 not even a stride of a foot Possible meanings for this phrase are (1) enough ground to stand on or (2) enough ground to take a step. Alternate translation: “not even a very tiny piece of ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 7 5 qff6 figs-idiom οὐδὲ βῆμα ποδός 1 not even a stride of a foot This could mean: (1) enough ground to stand on or (2) enough ground to take a step. Alternate translation: “not even a very tiny piece of ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 5 u6iw αὐτῷ εἰς κατάσχεσιν…καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ μετ’ αὐτόν 1 to him for a possession, and to his seed after him Alternate translation: “for Abraham to own and to give to his descendants” -ACT 7 6 tn6b ἐλάλησεν…οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς 1 God spoke to him like this It may be helpful to state that this occurred later than the statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Later God told Abraham” +ACT 7 6 tn6b ἐλάλησεν…οὕτως ὁ Θεὸς 1 God spoke to him like this It may be helpful to state that this occurred later than the statement in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “later God told Abraham” ACT 7 7 f7fw figs-metonymy τὸ ἔθνος…κρινῶ ἐγώ 1 I will judge the nation Here, **nation** refers to the people in it. Alternate translation: “I will judge the people of the nation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 7 q7y6 τὸ ἔθνος ᾧ ἐὰν δουλεύσωσιν 1 the nation that will enslave him Alternate translation: “the nation that they will serve” -ACT 7 8 mwc9 figs-explicit ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς 1 God gave him the covenant of circumcision The Jews would have understood that this covenant required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “made a covenant with Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 7 8 mwc9 figs-explicit ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ διαθήκην περιτομῆς 1 God gave him the covenant of circumcision The Jews would have understood that this **covenant** required Abraham to circumcise the males of his family. Alternate translation: “made a covenant with Abraham to circumcise the males of his family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 8 g4bb οὕτως ἐγέννησεν τὸν Ἰσαὰκ 1 so he became the father of Isaac The story transitions to Abraham’s descendants. ACT 7 8 ams1 figs-ellipsis Ἰακὼβ τοὺς δώδεκα πατριάρχας 1 Jacob of the 12 patriarchs Stephen shortened this. Alternate translation: “Jacob became the father of the 12 patriarchs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 7 9 n981 οἱ πατριάρχαι 1 the patriarchs Alternate translation: “Jacob’s older sons” or “Joseph’s older brothers” ACT 7 9 tik7 figs-explicit ἀπέδοντο εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 sold him into Egypt The Jews knew their ancestors sold Joseph to be a slave in Egypt. Alternate translation: “sold him as a slave in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 9 w1is figs-idiom ἦν…μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 was with him This is an idiom for helping someone. Alternate translation: “helped him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 7 10 yr7m figs-metonymy ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 over Egypt This refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 7 10 yr7m figs-metonymy ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 over Egypt This refers to the people of **Egypt**. Alternate translation: “over all the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 10 pb4p figs-metonymy ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 over all his household This refers to all his possessions. Alternate translation: “over everything he owned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 11 p42j ἦλθεν…λιμὸς 1 came a famine The ground stopped producing food. Alternate translation: “a famine came” ACT 7 11 p37v figs-explicit οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers This refers Jacob and his sons, who were the ancestors of the Jewish people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 12 pia8 σιτία 1 grain Grain was the most common food at that time. ACT 7 12 mbg8 τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Here this phrase refers to Jabob’s sons, Joseph’s older brothers. -ACT 7 13 ce2b translate-ordinal ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 On their second time Alternate translation: “On their next trip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +ACT 7 13 ce2b translate-ordinal ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 On their second time Alternate translation: “on their next trip” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) ACT 7 13 m37e ἀνεγνωρίσθη 1 was made known Joseph revealed to his brothers his identity as their brother. ACT 7 13 jxk8 figs-activepassive φανερὸν ἐγένετο τῷ Φαραὼ τὸ γένος Ἰωσήφ 1 the family of Joseph became known to Pharaoh If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh learned that they were Joseph’s family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 14 aam5 ἀποστείλας 1 sending them back Alternate translation: “after sending his brothers back to Canaan” or “after sending his brothers back home” -ACT 7 15 w2sm ἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 he and our fathers died Make sure it does not sound as though he died as soon as he arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob and our ancestors died” +ACT 7 15 w2sm ἐτελεύτησεν αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 he and our fathers died Make sure it does not sound as though he **died** as soon as he arrived in Egypt. Alternate translation: “eventually Jacob and our ancestors died” ACT 7 15 fe56 αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 he and our fathers Alternate translation: “Jacob and his sons who became our ancestors” ACT 7 16 slg3 figs-activepassive μετετέθησαν…καὶ ἐτέθησαν 1 they were carried over … and laid If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Jacob’s descendants carried Jacob’s body and his son’s bodies over … and buried them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 16 la8a τιμῆς ἀργυρίου 1 for a price in silver Alternate translation: “with money” -ACT 7 17 np3u figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The word “our” includes Stephen and his audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 7 17 tuq2 καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας…ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη 1 And as the time of the promise … approached, the people increased and multiplied In some languages it may be helpful to say that the people increased in number before saying that the time of the promise arrived. -ACT 7 17 tlh9 ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 the time of the promise … approached It was close to the time that God would fulfill his promise to Abraham. +ACT 7 17 tuq2 καθὼς δὲ ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας…ηὔξησεν ὁ λαὸς καὶ ἐπληθύνθη 1 And as the time of the promise … approached, the people increased and multiplied In some languages it may be helpful to say that the people **increased** in number before saying that **the time of the promise** arrived. +ACT 7 17 tlh9 ἤγγιζεν ὁ χρόνος τῆς ἐπαγγελίας 1 the time of the promise … approached It was close to the time that God would fulfill his **promise** to Abraham. ACT 7 18 whe7 ἀνέστη βασιλεὺς ἕτερος ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 there arose over Egypt another king Alternate translation: “another king began to rule over Egypt” ACT 7 18 g2wq figs-metonymy ἐπ’ Αἴγυπτον 1 over Egypt Here, **Egypt** refers to the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “the people of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 18 e2y6 figs-metonymy ὃς οὐκ ᾔδει τὸν Ἰωσήφ 1 who did not know Joseph Here, **Joseph** refers to the reputation of Joseph. Alternate translation: “who did not know that Joseph had helped Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 20 q66s writing-participants ἐν ᾧ καιρῷ ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς 1 At that time Moses was born This introduces Moses into the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 7 20 cd5z figs-idiom ἦν ἀστεῖος τῷ Θεῷ 1 he was beautiful to God This phrase is an idiom that means Moses was very beautiful. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 7 20 q66s writing-participants ἐν ᾧ καιρῷ ἐγεννήθη Μωϋσῆς 1 At that time Moses was born This introduces **Moses** into the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 7 20 cd5z figs-idiom ἦν ἀστεῖος τῷ Θεῷ 1 he was beautiful to God This phrase is an idiom that means Moses was very **beautiful**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 20 pnb1 figs-activepassive ἀνετράφη 1 was nourished If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “his parents nourished him” or “his parents cared for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 21 w3iu figs-activepassive ἐκτεθέντος δὲ αὐτοῦ 1 But when he was exposed Moses was **exposed** because of Pharaoh’s command. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “When his parents placed him outside” or “When they abandoned him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 7 21 url3 ἡ θυγάτηρ Φαραὼ, καὶ ἀνεθρέψατο αὐτὸν ἑαυτῇ εἰς υἱόν 1 the daughter of Pharaoh … and raised him for herself as a son She did for him every good thing a mother would do for her own son. Use your language’s normal word for what a mother does to make sure her son becomes a healthy adult. +ACT 7 21 url3 ἡ θυγάτηρ Φαραὼ, καὶ ἀνεθρέψατο αὐτὸν ἑαυτῇ εἰς υἱόν 1 the daughter of Pharaoh … and raised him for herself as a son She did for him every good thing a mother would do for her own **son**. Use your language’s normal word for what a mother does to make sure her son becomes a healthy adult. ACT 7 21 mbp7 εἰς υἱόν 1 as a son Alternate translation: “as if he were her own son” ACT 7 22 c9nw figs-activepassive ἐπαιδεύθη Μωϋσῆς 1 Moses was educated If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The Egyptians educated Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 7 22 att9 figs-hyperbole πάσῃ σοφίᾳ Αἰγυπτίων 1 in all the wisdom of the Egyptians This is an exaggeration to emphasize that he was trained in the best schools in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -963,153 +963,148 @@ ACT 7 23 fj9s figs-metonymy ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτ ACT 7 23 ckxj figs-idiom ἀνέβη ἐπὶ τὴν καρδίαν αὐτοῦ 1 The phrase **it came into his heart** is an idiom that means to decide something. Alternate translation: “he decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 23 x493 figs-explicit ἐπισκέψασθαι τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ, τοὺς υἱοὺς Ἰσραήλ 1 to visit his brothers, the sons of Israel This refers to his people, and not just to his family. Alternate translation: “to see how his own people, the children of Israel, were doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 24 l4zv figs-activepassive καὶ ἰδών τινα ἀδικούμενον, ἠμύνατο καὶ ἐποίησεν ἐκδίκησιν τῷ καταπονουμένῳ, πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 And seeing a certain one being mistreated, he defended him and made vengeance for the one being oppressed by striking the Egyptian If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form by rearranging the order. Alternate translation: “Seeing an Egyptian mistreating an Israelite, Moses defended and avenged the Israelite by striking the Egyptian who was oppressing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 7 24 abc8 ἠμύνατο 1 he defended him Moses defended the Israelite who was being mistreated. -ACT 7 24 r2e8 πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 by striking the Egyptian Moses hit the Egyptian so hard that he died. +ACT 7 24 abc8 ἠμύνατο 1 he defended him Moses **defended** the Israelite who was being mistreated. +ACT 7 24 r2e8 πατάξας τὸν Αἰγύπτιον 1 by striking the Egyptian Moses hit **the Egyptian** so hard that he died. ACT 7 25 wm3j ἐνόμιζεν 1 he thought Alternate translation: “he imagined” ACT 7 25 nhb9 figs-metonymy διὰ χειρὸς αὐτοῦ δίδωσιν σωτηρίαν αὐτοῖς 1 by his hand was giving salvation to them Here, **hand** refers to the actions of Moses. Alternate translation: “was rescuing them through what Moses was doing” or “was using the actions of Moses to rescue them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 26 t1hw figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “us” refers to the Israelites but does not include Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 7 26 t2vc figs-explicit αὐτοῖς μαχομένοις 1 to them as they were quarreling The audience would have known from the account in Exodus that these were two Israelite men, but Stephen does not specify that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 26 mpc7 συνήλλασσεν αὐτοὺς εἰς εἰρήνην 1 he urged them to peace Alternate translation: “urged them to stop fighting” ACT 7 26 zzt4 ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί ἐστε 1 Men, you are brothers Moses was addressing the Israelites who were fighting. -ACT 7 26 k1ku figs-rquestion ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους? 1 Why is it that you are hurting each other? Moses asked this question to encourage them to stop fighting. Alternate translation: “You should not hurt each other!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 7 27 q2r4 figs-rquestion τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν? 1 Who appointed you a ruler and a judge over us? The man used this question to rebuke Moses. Alternate translation: “You have no authority over us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 7 28 hk1g μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον? 1 You do not want to kill me in the same way you killed the Egyptian yesterday, do you? The man used this question to warn Moses that he and probably others knew Moses had killed the Egyptian. +ACT 7 26 k1ku figs-rquestion ἱνα τί ἀδικεῖτε ἀλλήλους? 1 Why is it that you are hurting each other? Moses asked this question to encourage them to stop fighting. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not hurt each other!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 7 27 q2r4 figs-rquestion τίς σε κατέστησεν ἄρχοντα καὶ δικαστὴν ἐφ’ ἡμῶν? 1 Who appointed you a ruler and a judge over us? The man used this question to rebuke Moses. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You have no authority over us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 7 27 t1hw figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 General Information: Here the word **us** refers to the Israelites but does not include Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 7 28 hk1g figs-rquestion μὴ ἀνελεῖν με σὺ θέλεις, ὃν τρόπον ἀνεῖλες ἐχθὲς τὸν Αἰγύπτιον? 1 You do not want to kill me in the same way you killed the Egyptian yesterday, do you? The man used this question to warn Moses that he and probably others knew Moses had killed the Egyptian. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Don't kill me in the same way you killed the Egyptian yesterday!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 7 29 l149 figs-explicit 0 General Information: Stephen’s audience already knew that Moses had married a Midianite woman when he fled Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 29 q8qv figs-explicit ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 at this statement The implied information is that Moses understood that the Israelites knew that he had killed an Egyptian the day before ([Acts 7:28](../07/28.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 30 zx1c figs-explicit καὶ πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα 1 And when 40 years were past This was the amount of time Moses had been in Midian. Alternate translation: “And 40 years after Moses fled from Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 30 f7yu figs-explicit ὤφθη…ἄγγελος 1 an angel appeared Stephen’s audience knew that God spoke through the angel. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 7 30 zx1c figs-explicit καὶ πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα 1 And when 40 years were past **40 yeears** was the amount of time Moses had been in Midian. Alternate translation: “And 40 years after Moses fled from Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 7 30 f7yu figs-explicit ὤφθη…ἄγγελος 1 an angel appeared Stephen’s audience knew that God spoke through the **angel**. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 31 q6w6 figs-explicit ἐθαύμασεν τὸ ὅραμα 1 he marveled at the sight Moses was surprised that the bush was not burning up in the fire. This was previously known by Stephen’s audience. Alternate translation: “because the bush was not burning up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 31 uk7u προσερχομένου δὲ αὐτοῦ κατανοῆσαι 1 and as he approached to look at it This may mean Moses initially drew close to the bush to investigate. ACT 7 32 b4q6 ἐγὼ ὁ Θεὸς τῶν πατέρων σου 1 I am the God of your fathers Alternate translation: “I am the God whom your ancestors worshiped” -ACT 7 32 tdr7 ἔντρομος δὲ γενόμενος, Μωϋσῆς οὐκ ἐτόλμα κατανοῆσαι 1 And becoming terrified, Moses did not dare to look This may mean Moses drew back in fear when he heard the voice. +ACT 7 32 tdr7 ἔντρομος δὲ γενόμενος, Μωϋσῆς οὐκ ἐτόλμα κατανοῆσαι 1 And becoming terrified, Moses did not dare to look This may mean **Moses** drew back in fear when he heard the voice. ACT 7 32 e19k figs-explicit ἔντρομος…γενόμενος, Μωϋσῆς 1 becoming terrified, Moses Moses shook from fear. This can be made clear. Alternate translation: “And Moses trembled with fear and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 33 x7cd translate-symaction λῦσον τὸ ὑπόδημα 1 Untie the sandals God told Moses this so he would honor God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 7 33 clk4 figs-explicit ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν 1 for the place on which you are standing is holy ground The implied information is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered or made holy by God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 34 yz7b ἰδὼν, εἶδον 1 I have certainly seen The word certainly adds emphasis to seen. Alternate translation: “I have seen for sure” +ACT 7 33 clk4 figs-explicit ὁ γὰρ τόπος ἐφ’ ᾧ ἕστηκας γῆ ἁγία ἐστίν 1 for the place on which you are standing is holy ground The implied information is that where God is present, the immediate area around God is considered or made **holy** by God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 7 34 yz7b ἰδὼν, εἶδον 1 I have certainly seen The word **certainly** adds emphasis to seen. Alternate translation: “I have seen for sure” ACT 7 34 x5bg τοῦ λαοῦ μου 1 of my people The word **my** emphasizes that these people belonged to God. Alternate translation: “of the descendants of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob” ACT 7 34 j32c κατέβην ἐξελέσθαι αὐτούς 1 I have come down to rescue them Alternate translation: “I will personally cause their release” -ACT 7 34 sq8y νῦν δεῦρο 1 now come God uses an order here. Alternate translation: “get ready” +ACT 7 34 sq8y νῦν δεῦρο 1 now come God gives an order here. Alternate translation: “get ready” ACT 7 35 x4p2 0 General Information: Verses 35-38 contains a series of connected phrases referring to Moses. Each phrase begins with statements such as “This Moses” or “This same Moses” or “This is the man” or “It is the same Moses.” If possible, use similar statements to emphasize Moses. After the Israelites left Egypt, they spent 40 years wandering around the wilderness before God led them into the land he had promised them. -ACT 7 35 gn6e τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν, ὃν ἠρνήσαντο 1 This same Moses, whom they rejected This refers back to the events recorded in [Acts 7:27-28](../07/27.md). +ACT 7 35 gn6e τοῦτον τὸν Μωϋσῆν, ὃν ἠρνήσαντο 1 This same Moses, whom they rejected This phrase refers back to the events recorded in [Acts 7:27-28](../07/27.md). ACT 7 35 vp7e λυτρωτὴν 1 a redeemer Alternate translation: “a rescuer” ACT 7 35 yjz9 figs-metonymy σὺν χειρὶ ἀγγέλου τοῦ ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ βάτῳ 1 with the hand of the angel who appeared to him in the bush Here, **hand** is a metonym for the action performed by the person. In this case, the angel had commanded Moses to return to Egypt. Stephen speaks as if the angel had a physical hand. You may need to make explicit what action the angel did. Alternate translation: “by the action of the angel” or “by having the angel … bush command him to return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 35 abc9 ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ 1 appeared to him The angel appeared to Moses. -ACT 7 36 gz9r figs-explicit ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα 1 during 40 years Stephen’s audience knew about the 40 years the Israelites spent in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “during the 40 years that the Israelite people lived in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 7 35 abc9 ὀφθέντος αὐτῷ 1 appeared to him The angel **appeared** to Moses. +ACT 7 36 gz9r figs-explicit ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα 1 during 40 years Stephen’s audience knew about the **40 years** the Israelites spent in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “during the 40 years that the Israelite people lived in the wilderness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 37 b4sg προφήτην…ἀναστήσει 1 will raise up a prophet Alternate translation: “will cause a man to be a prophet” ACT 7 37 j2rx ἐκ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ὑμῶν 1 from among your brothers Alternate translation: “from among your own people” -ACT 7 38 l8u7 0 General Information: The quotation in verse 40 is from the writings of Moses. ACT 7 38 e8qu οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 This is the one who was in the assembly Alternate translation: “This is the man Moses who was among the Israelites” -ACT 7 38 fd25 οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος 1 This is the one The phrase **This is the one** throughout this passage refers to Moses. -ACT 7 38 y2zu ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα δοῦναι ὑμῖν 1 who received living words to give to us God was the one who gave those words. Alternate translation: “to whom God spoke living words to give to us” -ACT 7 38 p3xk figs-metonymy λόγια ζῶντα 1 living words Possible meanings are (1) “a message that endures” or (2) “words that give life.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 7 38 fd25 οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ γενόμενος 1 This is the one The phrase **This is the one** refers to Moses. +ACT 7 38 y2zu ὃς ἐδέξατο λόγια ζῶντα δοῦναι ὑμῖν 1 who received living words to give to us God was the one who gave those **words**. Alternate translation: “to whom God spoke living words to give to us” +ACT 7 38 p3xk figs-metonymy λόγια ζῶντα 1 living words This could mean: (1) “a message that endures” or (2) “words that give life.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 39 mvz8 figs-metaphor ἀπώσαντο 1 they pushed him away This metaphor emphasizes their rejection of Moses. Alternate translation: “they rejected him as their leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 7 39 z3ze figs-metonymy ἐστράφησαν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 turned back in their hearts Here, **hearts** is a metonym for people’s thoughts. To do something in the heart means to desire to do something. Alternate translation: “they desired to turn back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 41 w38i 0 General Information: Stephen’s quotation here is from the prophet Amos. +ACT 7 40 l8u7 ποίησον ἡμῖν θεοὺς οἳ προπορεύσονται ἡμῶν. ὁ γὰρ Μωϋσῆς οὗτος, ὃς ἐξήγαγεν ἡμᾶς ἐκ γῆς Αἰγύπτου, οὐκ οἴδαμεν τί ἐγένετο αὐτῷ 1 General Information: The quotation in this verse is from the writings of Moses. ACT 7 41 ux1j figs-explicit ἐμοσχοποίησαν 1 they made an image of a calf Stephen’s audience knew the **image of a calf** they made was a statue to be used as an idol. Alternate translation: “they made as an idol a statue that looked like a calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 41 hh77 ἐμοσχοποίησαν…τῷ εἰδώλῳ…τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 they made an image of a calf … to the idol … the work of their hands These phrases all refer to the same statue of the calf. -ACT 7 42 d3dd translate-symaction ἔστρεψεν…ὁ Θεὸς 1 God turned away This action expresses that God was not pleased with the people and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped correcting them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 7 41 hh77 ἐμοσχοποίησαν…τῷ εἰδώλῳ…τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν χειρῶν αὐτῶν 1 they made an image of a calf … to the idol … the work of their hands These phrases all refer to the same statue of the **calf**. +ACT 7 42 d3dd translate-symaction ἔστρεψεν…ὁ Θεὸς 1 God turned away This action expresses that **God** was not pleased with the people and no longer helped them. Alternate translation: “God stopped correcting them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 7 42 rag5 παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς 1 gave them up Alternate translation: “abandoned them” -ACT 7 42 u7lx τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 the host of heaven Possible meanings for the original phrase are (1) the stars in the sky or (2) the sun, moon, and stars. +ACT 7 42 u7lx τῇ στρατιᾷ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 the host of heaven This could mean: (1) the stars in the sky or (2) the sun, moon, and stars. ACT 7 42 f314 βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν 1 the book of the prophets This was apparently a collection of the writings of several of the Old Testament prophets into one scroll. It would also have included the writings of Amos. -ACT 7 42 gd1b figs-rquestion μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ? 1 You did not offer to me slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, did you, O house of Israel? God asked this question to show Israel they did not worship Him with their sacrifices. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness O house of Israel.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 7 42 j4q8 figs-metonymy οἶκος Ἰσραήλ 1 O house of Israel This refers to the whole nation of Israel. Alternate translation: “all you Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 43 zek5 0 General Information: The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here. -ACT 7 43 fs4q 0 Connecting Statement: Stephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in [Acts 7:2](../07/02.md). +ACT 7 42 w38i μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ? 1 General Information: Stephen’s quotation here is from the prophet Amos. +ACT 7 42 gd1b figs-rquestion μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ? 1 You did not offer to me slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, did you, O house of Israel? God asked this question to show **Israel** they did not worship Him with their **sacrifices**. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness O house of Israel.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 7 42 j4q8 figs-metonymy οἶκος Ἰσραήλ 1 O house of Israel This phrase refers to the whole nation of **Israel**. Alternate translation: “all you Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 7 43 zek5 καὶ ἀνελάβετε τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ, καὶ τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν, τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε προσκυνεῖν αὐτοῖς. καὶ μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος. 1 General Information: The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here. ACT 7 43 rk4z figs-explicit ἀνελάβετε 1 you took up It is implied that they took these idols with them as they traveled in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “you carried with you from place to place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 7 43 im7e τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ 1 the tabernacle of Molech the tent that housed the false god Molech -ACT 7 43 cq47 τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν 1 the star of your god Rephan the star that is identified with the false god Rephan -ACT 7 43 gm4g τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε 1 and the images that you made They made statues or images of the gods Molech and Rephan in order to worship them. +ACT 7 43 im7e τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ 1 the tabernacle of Molech The **tabernacle of Molech** was the tent that housed the false god Molech. +ACT 7 43 cq47 τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν 1 the star of your god Rephan This **star** is identified with the false **god Rephan**. +ACT 7 43 gm4g τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε 1 and the images that you made They made statues or **images** of the gods Molech and Rephan in order to worship them. ACT 7 43 zgq6 μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος 1 I will carry you away beyond Babylon This would be God’s act of judgment. Alternate translation: “I will remove you to places even farther than Babylon” -ACT 7 44 m9gw ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου 1 The tabernacle of the testimony The tent that housed the ark (a box) with the 10 commandments carved in stone inside it +ACT 7 44 fs4q 0 Connecting Statement: Stephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in [Acts 7:2](../07/02.md). +ACT 7 44 m9gw ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου 1 The tabernacle of the testimony The **tabernacle** was a tent that housed the ark (a box) with the 10 commandments carved in stone inside it. ACT 7 45 n2sc ἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν μετὰ Ἰησοῦ 1 Our fathers, under Joshua, received it and brought it with them The phrase **under Joshua** means that their ancestors did these things in obedience to Joshua’s direction. Alternate translation: “Our fathers, in accordance with Joshua’s instructions, received the tabernacle and brought it with them” -ACT 7 45 n1pp ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν, ὧν ἐξῶσεν ὁ Θεὸς ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers This sentence tells why the ancestors were able to take possession of the land. Alternate translation: “when God forced the nations to leave the land before the face of our fathers so they could live in it” -ACT 7 45 spm5 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν, ὧν ἐξῶσεν ὁ Θεὸς ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers Here, **the face of our fathers** refers to the presence of their ancestors. Possible meanings are (1) “when God took the land from the nations and drove them out as our ancestors watched” or (2) “when our ancestors came, God took the land from the nations and drove them out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 45 c2fb figs-metonymy τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 of the nations This refers to the people who lived in the land before Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people who previously lived here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 7 45 n1pp ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν, ὧν ἐξῶσεν ὁ Θεὸς ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers This sentence tells why the ancestors were able to take **possession** of the land. Alternate translation: “when God forced the nations to leave the land before the face of our fathers so they could live in it” +ACT 7 45 spm5 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶν, ὧν ἐξῶσεν ὁ Θεὸς ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers Here, **the face of our fathers** refers to the presence of their ancestors. This could mean: (1) “when God took the land from the nations and drove them out as our ancestors watched” or (2) “when our ancestors came, God took the land from the nations and drove them out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 7 45 c2fb figs-metonymy τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 of the nations Here, **the nations** refers to the people who lived in the land before Israel. Alternate translation: “of the people who previously lived here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 7 45 m9ib ὧν ἐξῶσεν ὁ Θεὸς 1 whom God drove out Alternate translation: “whom God forced to leave the land” ACT 7 46 w3cu σκήνωμα τῷ οἴκῳ Ἰακώβ 1 a dwelling place for the house of Jacob David wanted a permanent place for the ark to reside in Jerusalem, not in a tent. Alternate translation: “a house for the ark where the God of Jacob could stay” -ACT 7 47 a7bx 0 General Information: In verses 49 and 50, Stephen quotes from the prophet Isaiah. In the quotation, God is speaking about himself. ACT 7 48 c822 figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις 1 houses made with hands Here, **hand** is a synecdoche for the whole person. Alternate translation: “houses made by people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 7 49 k2vn ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 Heaven is my throne, and the earth is the footstool for my feet The prophet is comparing the greatness of God’s presence to how impossible it is for man to build a place for God to rest on earth since the whole earth is nothing but a place for God to rest his feet. -ACT 7 49 wc9m figs-rquestion ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? 1 What kind of house will you build for me? God asks this question to show how useless man’s efforts are to take care of God. Alternate translation: “You can not build a house adequate enough for me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 7 49 u1ft figs-rquestion ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου? 1 or what is the place for my rest? God asks this question to show man that he cannot provide God any rest. Alternate translation: “and there is no place of rest good enough for me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 7 50 rfk1 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 Did my hand not make all these things? God asks this question to show that man did not create anything. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 7 51 zei2 0 Connecting Statement: With a sharp rebuke, Stephen finishes his response to the high priest and the council which he began in [Acts 7:2](../07/02.md). -ACT 7 51 umq6 σκληροτράχηλοι 1 O stiff-necked Stephen shifted from identifying with the Jewish leaders to rebuking them. +ACT 7 49 a7bx 0 General Information: In verses 49 and 50, Stephen quotes from the prophet Isaiah. In the quotation, God is speaking about himself. +ACT 7 49 k2vn ὁ οὐρανός μοι θρόνος, ἡ δὲ γῆ ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν μου 1 Heaven is my throne, and the earth is the footstool for my feet The prophet is comparing the greatness of God’s presence to how impossible it is for man to build a place for God to rest on earth since the whole earth is nothing but a place for God to rest his **feet**. +ACT 7 49 wc9m figs-rquestion ποῖον οἶκον οἰκοδομήσετέ μοι? 1 What kind of house will you build for me? God asks this question to show how useless man’s efforts are to take care of God. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You can not build a house adequate enough for me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 7 49 u1ft figs-rquestion ἢ τίς τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μου? 1 or what is the place for my rest? God asks this question to show man that he cannot provide God any **rest**. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “and there is no place of rest good enough for me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 7 50 rfk1 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 Did my hand not make all these things? God asks this question to show that man did not create anything. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 7 51 umq6 σκληροτράχηλοι 1 O stiff-necked Stephen shifts from identifying with the Jewish leaders to rebuking them. ACT 7 51 vn7h figs-idiom σκληροτράχηλοι 1 O stiff-necked This does not mean their necks were stiff but rather that they were “stubborn.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 7 51 zp55 figs-metonymy ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 uncircumcised in heart and ears The Jews regarded uncircumcised people as disobedient to God. Stephen uses **heart and ears** to represent to the Jewish leaders who acted the way Gentiles act when they do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “you refuse to obey and hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 7 52 x7kf figs-rquestion τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? 1 Which of the prophets did your fathers not persecute? Stephen asked this question to show them that they learned nothing from the errors of their forefathers. Alternate translation: “Your forefathers persecuted every prophet!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 7 52 q8wb τοῦ Δικαίου 1 of the Righteous One This refers to the Christ, the Messiah. +ACT 7 51 zp55 figs-metonymy ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 uncircumcised in heart and ears The Jews regarded **uncircumcised** people as disobedient to God. Stephen uses **heart and ears** to represent to the Jewish leaders who acted the way Gentiles act when they do not obey or listen to God. Alternate translation: “you refuse to obey and hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 7 52 x7kf figs-rquestion τίνα τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἐδίωξαν οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν? 1 Which of the prophets did your fathers not persecute? Stephen asked this question to show them that they learned nothing from the errors of their forefathers. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Your forefathers persecuted every prophet!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 7 52 q8wb τοῦ Δικαίου 1 of the Righteous One This title refers to the Christ, the Messiah. ACT 7 52 agd9 οὗ νῦν ὑμεῖς προδόται καὶ φονεῖς ἐγένεσθε 1 of whom you have now become betrayers and murderers Alternate translation: “you have also betrayed and murdered him” ACT 7 53 euw5 τὸν νόμον εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων 1 the law as ordained by angels Alternate translation: “the law that God caused angels to give to our ancestors” ACT 7 54 t4u2 0 Connecting Statement: The council reacts to Stephen’s words. -ACT 7 54 ef2g ἀκούοντες δὲ ταῦτα 1 Now hearing these things This is the turning point; the sermon ends and the council members react. -ACT 7 54 u4l7 figs-idiom διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 they were cut to their hearts Here “cut to their hearts” is an idiom for making them extremely angry. Alternate translation: “they became extremely angry” or “they became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +ACT 7 54 ef2g ἀκούοντες δὲ ταῦτα 1 Now hearing these things This indicates a turning point; the sermon ends and the council members react. +ACT 7 54 u4l7 figs-idiom διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 they were cut to their hearts Here, **cut to their hearts** is an idiom for making them extremely angry. Alternate translation: “they became extremely angry” or “they became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 7 54 ae9s translate-symaction ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 they ground their teeth at him This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen or hatred of Stephen. Alternate translation: “they became so angry that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked at Stephen”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 7 55 ntp4 ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 1 and looking intently into heaven It appears that only Stephen saw this vision and not anyone else in the crowd. Alternate translation: “and staring up into heaven” -ACT 7 55 bl2j figs-explicit εἶδεν δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 he saw the glory of God People normally experienced the glory of God as a bright light. Alternate translation: “he saw a bright light from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 7 55 bl2j figs-explicit εἶδεν δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 he saw the glory of God People normally experienced **the glory of God** as a bright light. Alternate translation: “he saw a bright light from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 7 55 vyz3 translate-symaction καὶ Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 and Jesus standing at the right hand of God To stand **at the right hand of God** is a symbolic action of receiving great honor and authority from God. Alternate translation: “and he saw Jesus standing in the place of honor and authority beside God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 7 56 aqp8 Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Son of Man Stephen refers to Jesus by the title “Son of Man.” +ACT 7 56 aqp8 Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 Son of Man Stephen refers to Jesus by the title **Son of Man**. ACT 7 57 p4cg translate-symaction συνέσχον τὰ ὦτα αὐτῶν 1 they covered their ears They did this to show that they did not want to hear any more of what Stephen said. Alternate translation: “they put their hands on their ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 7 58 ks1u ἐκβαλόντες ἔξω τῆς πόλεως 1 throwing him outside the city Alternate translation: “seizing Stephen, they forcefully took him out of the city” -ACT 7 58 wy7n τὰ ἱμάτια 1 outer garments These are cloaks or robes they would wear outside to stay warm, similar in function to a jacket or coat. +ACT 7 58 wy7n τὰ ἱμάτια 1 outer garments These **outer garments** were cloaks or robes they would wear outside to stay warm, similar in function to a jacket or coat. ACT 7 58 sx2p παρὰ τοὺς πόδας 1 at the feet They were placed there so Saul could watch them. Alternate translation: “in front of” ACT 7 58 e2vl νεανίου 1 of a young man Saul was probably around 30 years old at the time. -ACT 7 59 le7k 0 Connecting Statement: This ends the story of Stephen. ACT 7 59 k2el δέξαι τὸ πνεῦμά μου 1 receive my spirit Alternate translation: “take my spirit.” It may be helpful to add “please” to show that this was a request. Alternate translation: “please receive my spirit” ACT 7 60 u86q translate-symaction θεὶς δὲ τὰ γόνατα 1 But having knelt down on his knees This is an act of submission to God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 7 60 tvf8 figs-litotes μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 do not hold this sin against them You can state this in a positive way. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 7 60 r9vi figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 he fell asleep Here to fall asleep is a euphemism for dying. Alternate translation: “died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) ACT 8 intro q9d9 0 # Acts 8 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33.

The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “So there began.”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Receiving the Holy Spirit

In this chapter for the first time Luke speaks of people receiving the Holy Spirit ([Acts 8:15-19](../08/15.md)). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.

### Proclaimed

This chapter more than any other in the Book of Acts speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something. -ACT 8 1 tp9e translate-versebridge 0 General Information: It may be helpful to your audience to move these parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) -ACT 8 1 a7uc 0 Connecting Statement: The story shifts from Stephen to Saul in these verses. -ACT 8 1 ez88 writing-background ἐγένετο…ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, τὴν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις. πάντες δὲ διεσπάρησαν κατὰ τὰς χώρας τῆς Ἰουδαίας καὶ Σαμαρείας, πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 there began on that day a great persecution against the church that was in Jerusalem, and they all were scattered throughout the regions of Judea and Samaria, except the apostles This part of verse 1 is background information about the persecution that began after Stephen’s death. This explains why Saul was persecuting the believers in verse 3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 8 1 vc8x ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 that day This refers to the day that Stephen died ([Acts 7:59-60](../07/59.md)). +ACT 8 1 tp9e translate-versebridge 0 General Information: It may be helpful to your audience to move these parts of the story about Stephen together by using a verse bridge for verses 1-2 as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) +ACT 8 1 a7uc 0 Connecting Statement: The story here shifts from Stephen to Saul. +ACT 8 1 ez88 writing-background ἐγένετο…ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, τὴν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις. πάντες δὲ διεσπάρησαν κατὰ τὰς χώρας τῆς Ἰουδαίας καὶ Σαμαρείας, πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 there began on that day a great persecution against the church that was in Jerusalem, and they all were scattered throughout the regions of Judea and Samaria, except the apostles This verse gives background information about the **persecution** that began after Stephen’s death. This explains why Saul was persecuting the believers in verse 3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 8 1 vc8x ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 that day Here, **that day** refers to the day that Stephen died ([Acts 7:59-60](../07/59.md)). ACT 8 1 u5pi figs-hyperbole πάντες…διεσπάρησαν 1 they were all scattered The word **all** is a generalization to express that a large number of the believers left Jerusalem because of the persecution. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 8 1 k5a2 figs-explicit πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 except the apostles This statement implies that the apostles remained in Jerusalem even though they also experienced this great persecution. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 8 1 k5a2 figs-explicit πλὴν τῶν ἀποστόλων 1 except the apostles This statement implies that **the apostles** remained in Jerusalem even though they also experienced this great persecution. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 8 2 sjc8 ἄνδρες εὐλαβεῖς 1 devout men Alternate translation: “God-fearing men” or “men who feared God” ACT 8 2 a38x ἐποίησαν κοπετὸν μέγαν ἐπ’ αὐτῷ 1 made great lamentation over him Alternate translation: “greatly mourned his death” ACT 8 3 nz28 σύρων τε ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας 1 dragging out both men and women Saul forcefully took Jewish believers out of their home and put them into prison. ACT 8 3 yd2i κατὰ τοὺς οἴκους 1 according to the houses Alternate translation: “houses one by one” or “from house to house” -ACT 8 3 w6vk figs-explicit ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας 1 men and women This refers to men and women who believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 8 4 dh3x 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the story of Philip, whom the people had chosen as a deacon ([Acts 6:5](../06/05.md)). +ACT 8 3 w6vk figs-explicit ἄνδρας καὶ γυναῖκας 1 men and women This refers to **men and women** who believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 8 4 ymy5 figs-activepassive διασπαρέντες 1 had been scattered The cause for the scattering, the persecution, was stated previously. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “had fled the great persecution and had gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 8 4 su6i figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word This is a metonym for “the message.” Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 4 iaq4 figs-explicit τὸν λόγον 1 You may need to make explicit that the message was about Jesus. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 8 5 dh3x Φίλιππος 1 Connecting Statement: This begins the story of **Philip**, whom the people had chosen as a deacon ([Acts 6:5](../06/05.md)). ACT 8 5 gz5m κατελθὼν εἰς τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας 1 went down to the city of Samaria The phrase **went down** is used here because Samaria is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. -ACT 8 5 f45b τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας 1 the city of Samaria Possible meanings are (1) Luke expected the readers to know which city he was writing about. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” or (2) Luke did not expect his readers to know which city he was writing about. Alternate translation: “a city in Samaria” +ACT 8 5 f45b τὴν πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας 1 the city of Samaria This could mean: (1) Luke expected the readers to know which city he was writing about. Alternate translation: “the main city in Samaria” or (2) Luke did not expect his readers to know which city he was writing about. Alternate translation: “a city in Samaria” ACT 8 5 pk1l figs-metonymy ἐκήρυσσεν αὐτοῖς τὸν Χριστόν 1 proclaimed to them the Christ The title **Christ** refers to Jesus, the Messiah. Alternate translation: “told them that Jesus is the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 6 cnt9 δὲ οἱ ὄχλοι 1 And the crowds The location was specified in [Acts 8:5](../08/05.md). Alternate translation: “And the people in the city of Samaria” ACT 8 6 wm83 προσεῖχον 1 were paying attention to The reason people paid attention was because of all the healing Philip did. ACT 8 7 xb2n ἐχόντων πνεύματα ἀκάθαρτα 1 having unclean spirits Alternate translation: “who were controlled by unclean spirits” ACT 8 8 z5z3 figs-metonymy ἐγένετο δὲ πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 And there was much joy in that city The phrase **that city** refers to the people who were rejoicing. Alternate translation: “So the people of the city were rejoicing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 8 9 jm7n writing-background 0 General Information: Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse gives the beginning of the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 8 9 jm7n writing-background Σίμων 1 General Information: **Simon** is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse gives the beginning of the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 8 9 bed1 writing-participants ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων 1 But … a certain man named Simon This is a way of introducing a new person into the story. Your language may use different wording to introduce a new person into the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 8 9 cx7a τῇ πόλει 1 the city Alternate translation: “the city in Samaria” ([Acts 8:5](../08/05.md)) -ACT 8 10 kb9b writing-background 0 General Information: Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse continues to give the beginning of the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 8 10 evt7 figs-hyperbole προσεῖχον πάντες 1 they all … were paying attention The word **all** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “many of the Samaritans … were paying attention” or “the Samaritans in the city … were paying attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 8 10 kb9b writing-background 0 General Information: This verse continues to give additional background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 8 10 evt7 figs-hyperbole πάντες 1 they all … were paying attention The word **all** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “many of the Samaritans” or “the Samaritans in the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 8 10 ibl1 figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 from least to greatest These two phrases refer to everyone from one extreme to the other. Alternate translation: “no matter how important they were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 8 10 j3d8 οὗτός ἐστιν ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη 1 This man is the power of God which is called Great People were saying that Simon was the divine power known as “The Great Power.” -ACT 8 10 yw5v ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη 1 the power of God which is called Great Possible meanings are (1) the powerful representative of God or (2) God or (3) the most powerful man or (4) and angel. Since the term is unclear, it may be best to simply translate it as “the Great power of God”. -ACT 8 11 pxj8 writing-background 0 General Information: Simon is introduced to the story of Philip. This verse ends the background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 8 12 yiw3 0 Connecting Statement: These verses give more information about Simon and some of the Samaritans coming to believe in Jesus. +ACT 8 10 yw5v ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη 1 the power of God which is called Great This could mean: (1) the powerful representative of God or (2) God or (3) the most powerful man or (4) and angel. Since the term is unclear, it may be best to simply translate it as “the Great power of God”. +ACT 8 11 pxj8 writing-background 0 General Information: This verse gives additional background information about Simon and who he was among the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 8 12 vsy8 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 they were baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip baptized them” or “Philip baptized the new believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 8 13 k2th figs-rpronouns ὁ…Σίμων καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπίστευσεν 1 Simon himself also believed The word **himself** is here used to emphasize that Simon believed. Alternate translation: “Simon was also one of those who believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 8 13 v91t figs-activepassive βαπτισθεὶς 1 having been baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after Philip had baptized Simon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 8 14 q8wx 0 Connecting Statement: Luke continues the news of what was happening in Samaria. ACT 8 14 s7lr writing-newevent ἀκούσαντες δὲ οἱ ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις ἀπόστολοι 1 Now when the apostles in Jerusalem heard This marks the beginning of a new part of the story of the Samaritan’s becoming believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -ACT 8 14 ju21 figs-synecdoche ἡ Σαμάρεια 1 Samaria This refers to the many people, who had become believers, throughout the district of Samaria. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 8 14 ju21 figs-synecdoche ἡ Σαμάρεια 1 Samaria This refers to the many people, who had become believers, throughout the district of **Samaria**. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 8 14 e682 δέδεκται 1 had received Alternate translation: “had believed” or “had accepted” -ACT 8 15 af1n οἵτινες καταβάντες 1 who, having come down This refers to Peter and John. +ACT 8 15 af1n οἵτινες καταβάντες 1 who, having come down This phrase refers to Peter and John. ACT 8 15 hk1m καταβάντες 1 having come down This phrase is used here because Samaria is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. ACT 8 15 bun9 προσηύξαντο περὶ αὐτῶν 1 prayed for them Alternate translation: “prayed for the Samaritan believers” ACT 8 15 n7vc ὅπως λάβωσιν Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον 1 so that they might receive the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “so that the Samaritan believers might receive the Holy Spirit” ACT 8 16 rn3c figs-metonymy μόνον…βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 they had only been baptized into the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** represents authority, and being baptized into his name represents being baptized in order to be under his authority. Alternate translation: “they had only been baptized to become disciples of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 16 m1nw figs-activepassive μόνον…βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον 1 they had only been baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 8 17 fwh8 ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 they were laying their hands on them Peter and John placed their hands on the Samaritan people who had believed Stephen’s message of the gospel. -ACT 8 17 q7gd translate-symaction ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 they were laying their hands on them This symbolic action shows that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 8 17 q7gd translate-symaction ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 they were laying their hands on them Peter and John placed their **hands** on the Samaritan people who had believed Stephen’s message of the gospel. This symbolic action shows that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 8 18 rh79 figs-activepassive διὰ τῆς ἐπιθέσεως τῶν χειρῶν τῶν ἀποστόλων δίδοται τὸ Πνεῦμα 1 the Holy Spirit was being given through the laying on of the hands of the apostles If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles gave the Holy Spirit by laying their hands on people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 8 19 fbw9 ἵνα ᾧ ἐὰν ἐπιθῶ τὰς χεῖρας, λαμβάνῃ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον 1 so that whoever I lay my hands on may receive the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “so that I can give the Holy Spirit to anyone on whom I place my hands” -ACT 8 20 df1j 0 General Information: Here the words him, your, you, and yours all refer to Simon. +ACT 8 20 df1j αὐτόν…σου…σοὶ…ἐνόμισας 1 General Information: Here the words **him**, **Your**, and both occurrences of **you** all refer to Simon. ACT 8 20 jju3 τὸ ἀργύριόν σου, σὺν σοὶ εἴη εἰς ἀπώλειαν 1 Your silver with you is for destruction Alternate translation: “May you and your money be destroyed” ACT 8 20 gh12 τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the gift of God Here this refers to the ability to give the Holy Spirit by laying his hands on someone. ACT 8 21 p2ev figs-doublet οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 There is to you no part or share in this matter The words **part** and **share** mean the same thing and are used for emphasis. Alternate translation: “You may not participate in this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) @@ -1119,156 +1114,151 @@ ACT 8 22 sa6s τῆς κακίας…ταύτης 1 this wickedness Alternate t ACT 8 22 pe2u εἰ ἄρα ἀφεθήσεταί σοι ἡ ἐπίνοια τῆς καρδίας σου 1 if therefore the intention of your heart will be forgiven to you Alternate translation: “If he may be willing to forgive you for the desires you had” ACT 8 23 d3v7 figs-metaphor εἰς…χολὴν πικρίας 1 in the poison of bitterness Here, **in the poison of bitterness** is a metaphor for being very envious. It speaks of envy as if it tastes bitter and poisons the person who is envious. Alternate translation: “very envious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 8 23 j696 figs-metaphor σύνδεσμον ἀδικίας 1 the bond of unrighteousness The phrase **bond of unrighteousness** is spoken of as if unrighteousness can restrain Simon and keep him a prisoner. It is metaphor that means Simon is not able to stop himself from sinning. Alternate translation: “because you continue sinning you are like a prisoner” or “you are like a prisoner to unrighteousness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 8 24 n5cw 0 General Information: Here the word “you” refers to Peter and John. +ACT 8 24 n5cw ὑμεῖς…εἰρήκατε 1 General Information: Here the words **You** and **you** refer to Peter and John. ACT 8 24 u1a4 ὅπως μηδὲν ἐπέλθῃ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ ὧν εἰρήκατε 1 so that nothing of which you have spoken may happen to me You can state this another way. Alternate translation: “so that the things you have said may not happen to me” ACT 8 24 sk5w μηδὲν…ὧν εἰρήκατε 1 nothing … of which you have spoken This refers to Peter’s rebuke about Simon’s silver perishing along with him. -ACT 8 25 dl9f 0 Connecting Statement: This is concludes the part of the story about Simon and the Samaritans. ACT 8 25 uz15 οἱ…διαμαρτυράμενοι 1 when they had testified Peter and John told what they personally knew about Jesus to the Samaritans. ACT 8 25 ww9k figs-metonymy λαλήσαντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 spoken the word of the Lord Here, **word** is a metonym for “message.” Peter and John explained the message about Jesus to the Samaritans. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 25 eu66 figs-synecdoche πολλάς…κώμας τῶν Σαμαρειτῶν 1 to many villages of the Samaritans Here, **villages** refers to the people in them. Alternate translation: “to the people in many Samaritan villages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 8 26 zkc5 writing-background 0 General Information: Verse 27 gives background information about the man from Ethiopia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 8 26 rnh4 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the part of the story about Philip and the man from Ethiopia. -ACT 8 26 mbj9 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now This marks a transition in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +ACT 8 26 mbj9 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now **Now** marks a transition in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 8 26 w1nk ἀνάστηθι καὶ πορεύου 1 Arise and go These verbs work together to emphasize that he should get ready to start a long journey that will take some time. Alternate translation: “Get ready to travel” -ACT 8 26 le2c τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν 1 that goes down from Jerusalem to Gaza The phrase “goes down” is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Gaza. +ACT 8 26 le2c τὴν καταβαίνουσαν ἀπὸ Ἰερουσαλὴμ εἰς Γάζαν 1 that goes down from Jerusalem to Gaza The phrase **goes down** is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Gaza. ACT 8 26 a18y writing-background αὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος 1 This is desert Most scholars believe Luke added this comment to describe the area through which Philip would travel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 8 27 xy7x writing-participants ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** alerts us to a new person in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 8 27 zkc5 writing-background ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ 1 General Information: This verse gives background information about the **man from Ethiopia**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 8 27 s1uf εὐνοῦχος 1 a eunuch The emphasis of **eunuch** here is that the Ethiopian was a high government official, not that his physical state was being castrated. ACT 8 27 t5t1 translate-names Κανδάκης 1 of Candace This was a title for the queens of Ethiopia. It is similar to the way the word Pharaoh was used for the kings of Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 8 27 v8q7 figs-explicit ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 who had come to Jerusalem to worship This implies that he was a Gentile who believed in God and had come to worship at the Jewish temple. Alternate translation: “who had come to worship God at the temple in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 8 28 d3kv τοῦ ἅρματος 1 chariot Possibly “wagon” or “carriage” is more fitting in this context. Chariots are normally mentioned as a vehicle for war, not as a vehicle for long-distance travel. Also, people stood to ride in chariots. -ACT 8 28 bx2j figs-metonymy ἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν 1 was reading the prophet Isaiah This is the Old Testament book Isaiah. Alternate translation: “was reading from the book of the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 8 29 llh1 figs-metonymy κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ 1 be joined to this chariot Philip understood that this meant he was to stay close to the person riding in the chariot. Alternate translation: “accompany the man in this chariot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 8 30 ffh7 figs-metonymy ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην 1 reading Isaiah the prophet This is the Old Testament book Isaiah. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 28 bx2j figs-metonymy ἀνεγίνωσκεν τὸν προφήτην Ἠσαΐαν 1 was reading the prophet Isaiah This refers to the Old Testament book Isaiah. Alternate translation: “was reading from the book of the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 29 llh1 figs-metonymy κολλήθητι τῷ ἅρματι τούτῳ 1 be joined to this chariot Philip understood that this meant he was to stay close to the person riding in the **chariot**. Alternate translation: “accompany the man in this chariot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 8 30 ffh7 figs-metonymy ἀναγινώσκοντος Ἠσαΐαν τὸν προφήτην 1 reading Isaiah the prophet This is the Old Testament book **Isaiah**. Alternate translation: “reading from the book of the prophet Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 30 x98i ἆρά γε γινώσκεις ἃ ἀναγινώσκεις 1 Do you understand what you are reading? The Ethiopian was intelligent and could read, but he lacked spiritual discernment. Alternate translation: “Do you understand the meaning of what you are reading?” -ACT 8 31 r5g2 figs-rquestion πῶς…ἂν δυναίμην ἐὰν μή τις ὁδηγήσει με? 1 how would I be able, unless someone will guide me? This question was asked to state emphatically that he could not understand without help. Alternate translation: “I cannot understand unless someone guides me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 8 31 zx9h figs-explicit παρεκάλεσέν…τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ 1 he summoned Philip, having come up, to sit with him It is implied here that Philip agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the scriptures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 8 32 nd93 0 General Information: This a passage from the book of Isaiah. Here the words “he” and “his” refer to the Messiah. -ACT 8 32 lu3j ὡς ἀμνὸς ἐναντίον τοῦ κείραντος αὐτὸν ἄφωνος 1 like a lamb before its shearer is silent A shearer is a person who cuts the wool off the sheep so that it may be used. +ACT 8 31 r5g2 figs-rquestion πῶς…ἂν δυναίμην ἐὰν μή τις ὁδηγήσει με? 1 how would I be able, unless someone will guide me? This question was asked to state emphatically that he could not understand without help. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I cannot understand unless someone guides me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 8 31 zx9h figs-explicit παρεκάλεσέν…τὸν Φίλιππον, ἀναβάντα καθίσαι σὺν αὐτῷ 1 he summoned Philip, having come up, to sit with him It is implied here that **Philip** agreed to travel down the road with him to explain the Scriptures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 8 32 nd93 ὡς πρόβατον ἐπὶ σφαγὴν ἤχθη, καὶ ὡς ἀμνὸς ἐναντίον τοῦ κείραντος αὐτὸν ἄφωνος, οὕτως οὐκ ἀνοίγει τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ 1 General Information: This a passage from the book of Isaiah. Here the words **He**, **he**, and **his** refer to the Messiah. +ACT 8 32 lu3j ὡς ἀμνὸς ἐναντίον τοῦ κείραντος αὐτὸν ἄφωνος 1 like a lamb before its shearer is silent A **shearer** is a person who cuts the wool off the sheep so that it may be used. ACT 8 33 y2a1 figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ ταπεινώσει, ἡ κρίσις αὐτοῦ ἤρθη 1 In humiliation his justice was taken away If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “He was humiliated and they did not judge him fairly” or “He allowed his accusers to humble him and he suffered injustice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 8 33 k3uz figs-rquestion τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται? 1 Who can fully describe his generation? This question was used to emphasize the he will not have descendants. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to speak about his descendant, for there will not be any.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 8 33 k3uz figs-rquestion τὴν γενεὰν αὐτοῦ τίς διηγήσεται? 1 Who can fully describe his generation? This question was used to emphasize the he will not have descendants. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one will be able to speak about his descendant, for there will not be any.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 8 33 idk8 figs-activepassive αἴρεται ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ἡ ζωὴ αὐτοῦ 1 his life was taken from the earth This referred to his death. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “men killed him” or “men took his life from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 8 34 htb2 δέομαί σου 1 I am begging you Alternate translation: “Please tell me” ACT 8 35 uw21 figs-metonymy τῆς Γραφῆς ταύτης 1 this scripture This refers to Isaiah’s writings in the Old Testament. Alternate translation: “the writings of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 8 36 ip13 ἐπορεύοντο κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 they were going along the road Alternate translation: “they continued to travel along the road” -ACT 8 36 muz2 figs-rquestion τί κωλύει με βαπτισθῆναι? 1 What is preventing me from being baptized? The eunuch uses this question as a way of asking Philip for permission to be baptized. Alternate translation: “Please allow me to be baptized.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 8 36 muz2 figs-rquestion τί κωλύει με βαπτισθῆναι? 1 What is preventing me from being baptized? The eunuch uses this question as a way of asking Philip for permission to be baptized. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Please allow me to be baptized.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 8 38 l8wl ἐκέλευσεν στῆναι τὸ ἅρμα 1 he commanded the chariot to stop Alternate translation: “the eunich told the driver of the chariot to stop” -ACT 8 39 tz5u 0 Connecting Statement: This is the end of the part of the story about Philip and the man from Ethiopia. The story of Philip ends at Caesarea. ACT 8 39 xp52 οὐκ εἶδεν αὐτὸν οὐκέτι ὁ εὐνοῦχος 1 the eunuch did not see him anymore Alternate translation: “the eunuch did not see Philip again” -ACT 8 40 r1x7 Φίλιππος…εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον 1 Philip was found at Azotus There was no indication of Philip’s traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and Azotus. He just suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. +ACT 8 40 r1x7 Φίλιππος…εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον 1 Philip was found at Azotus There was no indication of Philip’s traveling between where he baptized the Ethiopian and **Azotus**. He just suddenly disappeared along the road to Gaza and reappeared at the town of Azotus. ACT 8 40 arh5 διερχόμενος 1 passed through Philip preached in the area around the town of Azotus. ACT 8 40 zfn6 τὰς πόλεις πάσας 1 to all the cities Alternate translation: “to all the cities in that region” ACT 9 intro jm6x 0 # Acts 9 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The Way”

No one knows for sure who first started calling believers “followers of the Way.” This is probably what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God.

### “Letters for the synagogues in Damascus”

The “letters” Paul asked for were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### What Saul saw when he met Jesus

It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here. -ACT 9 1 r4n5 writing-background 0 General Information: These verses give background information telling us what Saul has been doing since the stoning of Stephen. Here the word “him” refers to the high priest and “he” refers to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 9 1 yt9e 0 Connecting Statement: The story shifts back to Saul and his salvation. -ACT 9 1 anb6 figs-abstractnouns ἔτι ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς τοὺς μαθητὰς 1 still speaking threats even of murder against the disciples The noun **murder** can be translated as a verb. Alternate translation: “still speaking threats, even to murder the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 9 2 v9lw figs-metonymy πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς 1 to the synagogues This refers to the people in the synagogues. Alternate translation: “to the people in the synagogues” or “to the leaders in the synagogues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 9 1 yt9e ὁ…Σαῦλος 1 Connecting Statement: The story shifts back to **Saul** and his salvation. +ACT 9 1 r4n5 writing-background 0 General Information: Verses 1-2 give background information telling us what Saul has been doing since the stoning of Stephen. Here the word “him” refers to the high priest and “he” refers to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 9 1 anb6 figs-abstractnouns ἔτι ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς τοὺς μαθητὰς 1 still speaking threats even of murder against the disciples If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **murder**, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “still speaking threats, even to murder the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 9 2 v9lw figs-metonymy πρὸς τὰς συναγωγάς 1 to the synagogues This refers to the people in the **synagogues**. Alternate translation: “to the people in the synagogues” or “to the leaders in the synagogues” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 2 y8f6 ἐάν τινας εὕρῃ 1 if he might find anyone Alternate translation: “whenever he found anyone” ACT 9 2 pk19 τῆς ὁδοῦ, ὄντας 1 being of the Way Alternate translation: “who belonged to the Way” or “who followed the teachings of Jesus Christ” ACT 9 2 n94s τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 of the Way This term appears to have been a title for Christianity at that time. -ACT 9 2 a6z4 figs-explicit δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 having bound them, he might bring them to Jerusalem Paul’s purpose can be made clear by adding “so that the Jewish leaders could judge and punish them.” Alternate translation: “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 9 3 lv9q 0 Connecting Statement: After the high priest gave Saul the letters, Saul left for Damascus. -ACT 9 3 jf4g ἐν…τῷ πορεύεσθαι 1 as he was traveling Saul had left Jerusalem and was traveling to Damascus. +ACT 9 2 a6z4 figs-explicit δεδεμένους ἀγάγῃ εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 having bound them, he might bring them to Jerusalem Paul’s purpose can be made explicit by adding “so that the Jewish leaders could judge and punish them.” Alternate translation: “he might take them as prisoners to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 9 3 jf4g ἐν…τῷ πορεύεσθαι 1 as he was traveling After the high priest gave Saul the letters, Saul left left Jerusalem to go to Damascus. ACT 9 3 by55 writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 it happened that This is an expression that marks a change in the story to show something different is about to happen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 9 3 dm6c αὐτὸν περιήστραψεν φῶς ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 there shone on him a light from heaven Alternate translation: “a light from heaven shone all around him” -ACT 9 3 gua8 ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 from heaven Possible meanings are (1) heaven, where God lives or (2) the sky. The first meaning is preferable. Use that meaning if your language has a separate word for it. -ACT 9 4 y4u4 πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 1 he fell to the ground Possible meanings are that (1) “Saul threw himself to the ground” or (2) “The light caused him to fall to the ground” or (3) “Saul fell to the ground the way one who fainted fell.” Saul did not fall accidentally. -ACT 9 4 c9l4 figs-rquestion τί με διώκεις? 1 why are you persecuting me? This rhetorical question communicates a rebuke to Saul. In some languages a statement would be more natural (AT): “You are persecuting me!” or a command (AT): “Stop persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 9 5 q8ge 0 General Information: Every occurrence of the word “you” here is singular. -ACT 9 5 jaq2 τίς εἶ, κύριε? 1 Who are you, Lord? Saul was not acknowledging that Jesus is the Lord. He uses that title because he understood that he spoke to someone of supernatural power. +ACT 9 3 gua8 ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 from heaven This could mean: (1) heaven, where God lives or (2) the sky. The first meaning is preferable. Use that meaning if your language has a separate word for it. +ACT 9 4 y4u4 πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν 1 he fell to the ground This could mean: (1) “Saul threw himself to the ground” or (2) “The light caused him to fall to the ground” or (3) “Saul fell to the ground the way one who fainted fell.” Saul did not fall accidentally. +ACT 9 4 c9l4 figs-rquestion τί με διώκεις? 1 why are you persecuting me? This rhetorical question communicates a rebuke to Saul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as either a statement or as a command. Alternate translation: “You are persecuting me!” or “Stop persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 9 5 q8ge εἶ…σὺ 1 General Information: Both occurrences of the word **you** here are singular. +ACT 9 5 jaq2 τίς εἶ, κύριε? 1 Who are you, Lord? Saul was not acknowledging that Jesus is the **Lord**. He uses that title because he understood that he spoke to someone of supernatural power. ACT 9 5 abc0 ὁ 1 he Jesus is speaking. Alternate translation: “he replied” ACT 9 6 i1kj ἀνάστηθι καὶ εἴσελθε εἰς τὴν πόλιν 1 get up and enter into the city Alternate translation: “get up and go into Damascus” -ACT 9 6 fbi6 figs-activepassive λαληθήσεταί σοι 1 it will be told to you If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 9 6 fbi6 figs-activepassive λαληθήσεταί σοι 1 it will be told to you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 9 7 xu7c ἀκούοντες μὲν τῆς φωνῆς, μηδένα δὲ θεωροῦντες 1 hearing the voice, but seeing no one Alternate translation: “they heard the voice, but they did not see anyone” ACT 9 7 f9fe μηδένα δὲ θεωροῦντες 1 but seeing no one Apparently only Saul experienced the light. Alternate translation: “but saw no one” -ACT 9 8 puw3 figs-explicit ἀνεῳγμένων…τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ 1 his eyes being opened This implies that he had closed his eyes because the light was too bright. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 9 8 puw3 figs-explicit ἀνεῳγμένων…τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ 1 his eyes being opened This implies that he had closed his **eyes** because the light was too bright. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 8 dgg8 οὐδὲν ἔβλεπεν 1 he was seeing nothing Saul was blind. Alternate translation: “he could not see anything” -ACT 9 9 fhn6 ἦν…μὴ βλέπων 1 he was … without sight Alternate translation: “he was … blind” or “he … could not see anything” +ACT 9 9 fhn6 ἦν ἡμέρας τρεῖς μὴ βλέπων 1 he was … without sight Alternate translation: “he was blind for three days” or “he could not see anything for three days” ACT 9 9 t8uc οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲ ἔπιεν 1 neither ate nor drank It is not stated whether he chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship, or if he had no appetite because he was too distressed from his situation. It is preferable not to specify the reason. -ACT 9 10 kgn9 translate-names 0 General Information: The story of Saul continues but Luke introduces another man named Ananias. This is not the same Ananias who died earlier in Acts [Acts 5:3](../05/03.md). You may translate this name the same way though as you did in [Acts 5:1](../05/01.md). Though there is more than one Judas mentioned in the New Testament, it is likely this is the only appearance of this Judas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 9 10 kgn9 translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 General Information: The story of Saul continues but Luke introduces another man named **Ananias**. This is not the same Ananias who died earlier in Acts [Acts 5:3](../05/03.md). You may translate this name the same way though as you did in [Acts 5:1](../05/01.md). Though there is more than one Judas mentioned in the New Testament, it is likely this is the only appearance of this Judas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 9 10 j847 writing-participants ἦν δέ 1 Now there was This introduces Ananias as a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 9 10 vl8k ὁ…εἶπεν 3 he said Alternate translation: “Ananias said” ACT 9 11 mn24 πορεύθητι ἐπὶ τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν 1 go to the street which is called Straight Alternate translation: “go to Straight Street” -ACT 9 11 ie1l οἰκίᾳ Ἰούδα 1 the house of Judas This Judas is not the disciple who betrayed Jesus. This Judas was owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying. +ACT 9 11 ie1l οἰκίᾳ Ἰούδα 1 the house of Judas This **Judas** is not the disciple who betrayed Jesus. This Judas was owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying. ACT 9 11 u5j8 Σαῦλον ὀνόματι Ταρσέα 1 a man named Saul, from Tarsus Alternate translation: “a man from the city of Tarsus named Saul” or “Saul of Tarsus” ACT 9 12 jk46 translate-symaction ἐπιθέντα αὐτῷ χεῖρας 1 laying hands on him This was a symbol of giving a spiritual blessing to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 9 12 nx5q ἀναβλέψῃ 1 he might see again Alternate translation: “he might regain his ability to see” ACT 9 13 la9t ἁγίοις σου 1 to your saints Here, **saints** refers to Christians. Alternate translation: “the people in Jerusalem who believe in you” -ACT 9 14 ptd6 figs-explicit ἔχει ἐξουσίαν…δῆσαι πάντας 1 he has authority … to bind all It is implied that the extent of the power and authority granted Saul was limited to the Jewish people at this point in time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 9 14 ptd6 figs-explicit ἔχει ἐξουσίαν…δῆσαι πάντας 1 he has authority … to bind all It is implied that the extent of the power and **authority** granted Saul was limited to the Jewish people at this point in time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 14 t3fl figs-metonymy τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομά σου 1 who call upon your name Here, **your name** refers to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 15 jmt7 figs-metonymy σκεῦος ἐκλογῆς ἐστίν μοι οὗτος 1 this one is a chosen instrument of mine Here, **chosen instrument** refers to something that is set apart for service. Alternate translation: “I have chosen him to serve me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 15 z5fj figs-metonymy τοῦ βαστάσαι τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 who will carry my name This is an expression for identifying or speaking out for Jesus. Alternate translation: “in order that he might speak about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 16 kty3 figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου 1 for my name This is an expression meaning “for telling people about me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 9 17 q61x figs-you 0 General Information: The word “you” here is singular and refers to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +ACT 9 17 q61x figs-you σοι…ἤρχου…ἀναβλέψῃς 1 General Information: All occurrences of the word **you** here are singular and refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 9 17 j2pf 0 Connecting Statement: Ananias goes to the house where Saul is staying. After Saul is healed, the story shifts from Ananias back to Saul. -ACT 9 17 s8ms ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν 1 And Ananias departed, and entered into the house It may be helpful to state that Ananias went to the house before he entered into it. Alternate translation: “So Ananias went, and after he found the house where Saul was, he entered it” +ACT 9 17 s8ms ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν 1 And Ananias departed, and entered into the house It may be helpful to state that **Ananias** went to **the house** before he **entered into** it. Alternate translation: “So Ananias went, and after he found the house where Saul was, he entered it” ACT 9 17 my6m translate-symaction ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 having laid his hands on him Ananias **laid his hands** on Saul. This was a symbol of giving a blessing to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 9 17 a89q figs-activepassive ὅπως ἀναβλέψῃς καὶ πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 so that you might see again and be filled with the Holy Spirit If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “has sent me so that you might see again and that the Holy Spirit might fill you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 9 18 m1hx ἀπέπεσαν…ὡς λεπίδες 1 something like scales fell Alternate translation: “something that appeared like fish scales fell” ACT 9 18 efs9 figs-activepassive ἀναστὰς ἐβαπτίσθη 1 rising up, he was baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he got up and Ananias baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 9 20 rc49 0 General Information: Here only the second “he” refers to Jesus, the Son of God. The first “he” and the other ones refer to Saul. -ACT 9 20 w65r guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God This is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +ACT 9 20 rc49 ἐκήρυσσεν…οὗτός 1 General Information: Here, **he** refers to Saul, and **this one** refers to Jesus, the Son of God. +ACT 9 20 w65r guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) ACT 9 21 xid8 figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες 1 all who were hearing The word **all**is a generalization. Alternate translation: “those who heard him” or “many who heard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 9 21 f4fd figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πορθήσας ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 Is not this the one who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name? This is a rhetorical and negative question that emphasizes that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers. Alternate translation: “This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who called on this name Jesus!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 9 21 f4fd figs-rquestion οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ πορθήσας ἐν Ἰερουσαλὴμ τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 Is not this the one who destroyed those in Jerusalem who call on this name? This is a rhetorical and negative question that emphasizes that Saul was indeed the man who had persecuted the believers. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “This is the man who destroyed those in Jerusalem who called on this name Jesus!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 9 21 ctg3 figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο 1 this name Here, **name** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 22 r1np συνέχυννεν τοὺς Ἰουδαίους 1 was stirring up the Jews They were distressed in the sense that they could not find a way to refute Saul’s arguments that Jesus was the Christ. -ACT 9 23 g6gw 0 General Information: The word “him” in this section refers to Saul. -ACT 9 23 g74c figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews This refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 9 23 g6gw αὐτόν 1 General Information: The word **him** refers to Saul. +ACT 9 23 g74c figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews This refers to the leaders of **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 9 24 lv62 figs-activepassive ἐγνώσθη δὲ τῷ Σαύλῳ ἡ ἐπιβουλὴ αὐτῶν 1 But their plan became known to Saul If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But someone told their plan to Saul” or “But Saul learned about their plan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 9 24 cy9n παρετηροῦντο…καὶ τὰς πύλας 1 indeed they were watching the gates This city had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through the gates. -ACT 9 25 lc8m οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his disciples people who believed Saul’s message about Jesus and were following his teaching +ACT 9 24 cy9n παρετηροῦντο…καὶ τὰς πύλας 1 indeed they were watching the gates This city had a wall surrounding it. People could normally only enter and exit the city through **the gates**. +ACT 9 25 lc8m οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his disciples The **disciples** were people who believed Saul’s message about Jesus and were following his teaching. ACT 9 25 u8g8 διὰ τοῦ τείχους, καθῆκαν αὐτὸν, χαλάσαντες ἐν σπυρίδι 1 let him down through the wall, lowering him in a basket Alternate translation: “used ropes to lower him in a large basket through an opening in the wall” -ACT 9 26 j1el 0 General Information: Here the words “he” and “him” refer to Saul all but one time. “And ‘he’ told them how” in verse 27 refers to Barnabas. +ACT 9 26 j1el παραγενόμενος…ἐπείραζεν…αὐτόν…ἐστὶν 1 General Information: Here all occurrences of the words **he** and **him** refer to Saul. ACT 9 26 e38m figs-hyperbole καὶ πάντες ἐφοβοῦντο αὐτόν 1 but they were all afraid of him Here, **they were all** is a generalization, but it is possible that it refers to every person. Alternate translation: “but they were afraid of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 9 27 abca διηγήσατο αὐτοῖς 1 told them Alternate translation: “Barnabas told the apostles” ACT 9 27 abcb εἶδεν 1 he had seen Alternate translation: “Saul had seen” ACT 9 27 abcc ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ 1 he had spoken to him Alternate translation: “the Lord had spoken to Saul” -ACT 9 27 n9f1 figs-metonymy ἐπαρρησιάσατο ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 he had spoken boldly in the name of Jesus This is a way of saying he preached or taught the gospel message of Jesus Christ without fear. Alternate translation: “had openly preached the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 9 27 n9f1 figs-metonymy ἐπαρρησιάσατο ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 he had spoken boldly in the name of Jesus This is a way of saying he preached or taught the gospel message of **Jesus** Christ without fear. Alternate translation: “had openly preached the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 28 m5rs ἦν μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 he was with them Here the word **he** refers to Paul. The word **them** probably refers to the apostles and other disciples in Jerusalem. -ACT 9 28 fbb7 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord Possible meanings are (1) this simply refers to the Lord Jesus and tells who Paul spoke about. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” or (2) **name** is a metonym for authority. Alternate translation: “under the authority of the Lord Jesus” or “with the authority that the Lord Jesus gave him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 9 28 fbb7 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου 1 in the name of the Lord This could mean: (1) this simply refers to the Lord Jesus and tells who Paul spoke about. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” or (2) **name** is a metonym for authority. Alternate translation: “under the authority of the Lord Jesus” or “with the authority that the Lord Jesus gave him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 9 29 d7lm συνεζήτει πρὸς τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς 1 debated with the Hellenists Saul tried to reason with the Jews who spoke Greek. ACT 9 30 uz9a οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers The words **the brothers** refers to the believers in Jerusalem. ACT 9 30 j4mt κατήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 they brought him down to Caesarea The phrase **brought him down** is used here because Caesarea is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. -ACT 9 30 aqn6 figs-explicit ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν εἰς Ταρσόν 1 sent him away to Tarsus Caesarea was a seaport. They brothers probably sent Saul to Tarsus by ship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 9 31 vk8y 0 General Information: Verse 31 is a statement that gives an update on the church’s growth. -ACT 9 31 n7c5 0 Connecting Statement: In verse 32, the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter. -ACT 9 31 s4bn ἡ…ἐκκλησία καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας, καὶ Γαλιλαίας, καὶ Σαμαρείας 1 the church throughout all Judea and Galilee and Samaria This is the first use of the singular **church** to refer to more than one local congregation. Here it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Israel. +ACT 9 30 aqn6 figs-explicit ἐξαπέστειλαν αὐτὸν εἰς Ταρσόν 1 sent him away to Tarsus Caesarea was a seaport. They brothers probably **sent** Saul to Tarsus by ship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 9 31 vk8y 0 General Information: This verse is a statement that gives an update on the church’s growth. +ACT 9 32 n7c5 Πέτρον 1 Connecting Statement: In this verse, the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about **Peter**. ACT 9 31 fh2g εἶχεν εἰρήνην 1 had peace This means the persecution that started with the murder of Stephen was finished. Alternate translation: “lived peacefully” +ACT 9 31 s4bn ἡ…ἐκκλησία καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας, καὶ Γαλιλαίας, καὶ Σαμαρείας 1 the church throughout all Judea and Galilee and Samaria This is the first use of the singular **church** to refer to more than one local congregation. Here it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Israel. ACT 9 31 elq7 figs-activepassive οἰκοδομουμένη καὶ πορευομένη 1 being built up and going on The agent was either God or the Holy Spirit. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God helped them grow and to go on” or “the Holy Spirit built them up and they continued on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 9 31 j8c9 figs-metaphor πορευομένη τῷ φόβῳ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 walking in the fear of the Lord Traveling is here a metaphor for “living.” Alternate translation: “living in obedience to the Lord” or “continuing to honor the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 9 31 hl24 τῇ παρακλήσει τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 in the comfort of the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “with the Holy Spirit strengthening and encouraging them” ACT 9 32 w68g writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Now it happened that This phrase is used to mark a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 9 32 m9sg figs-hyperbole διὰ πάντων 1 throughout the whole region This is an generalization for Peter’s visiting the believers in many places in the region of Judea, Galilee, and Samaria. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 9 32 ad7g κατελθεῖν 1 to come down The phrase **come down** is used here because Lydda is lower in elevation than the other places where he was traveling. -ACT 9 32 g5c4 Λύδδα 1 in Lydda Lydda is a city located about 18 kilometers southeast of Joppa. This city was called Lod in the Old Testament and in modern Israel. +ACT 9 32 g5c4 Λύδδα 1 in Lydda **Lydda** is a city located about 18 kilometers southeast of Joppa. This city was called Lod in the Old Testament and in modern Israel. ACT 9 33 hzd7 εὗρεν…ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπόν τινα 1 he found there a certain man Peter was not intentionally searching for a paralyzed person, but happened upon him. Alternate translation: “There Peter met a man” -ACT 9 33 jnc4 writing-participants ἄνθρωπόν τινα ὀνόματι Αἰνέαν 1 a certain man named Aeneas This introduces Aeneas as a new character in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 9 33 uj5f writing-background κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος 1 lying in a bed … who was paralyzed This is background information about Aeneas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 9 33 k7hw παραλελυμένος 1 paralyzed unable to walk, probably unable to move below the waist +ACT 9 33 jnc4 writing-participants ἄνθρωπόν τινα ὀνόματι Αἰνέαν 1 a certain man named Aeneas This introduces **Aeneas** as a new character in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 9 33 uj5f writing-background ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος 1 lying in a bed … who was paralyzed This is background information about Aeneas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 9 33 k7hw παραλελυμένος 1 paralyzed Aeneas was unable to walk, and probably unable to move below the waist. ACT 9 34 ff2a στρῶσον σεαυτῷ 1 make your bed Alternate translation: “roll up your mat” ACT 9 35 z3fp figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα 1 all who were living in Lydda and in Sharon This is a generalization referring to many of the people there. Alternate translation: “those who lived in Lydda and in Sharon” or “many people who lived in Lydda and Sharon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 9 35 qkv4 Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα 1 in Lydda and in Sharon The city of Lydda was located in the Plain of Sharon. -ACT 9 35 pf23 εἶδαν αὐτὸν 1 saw him It may be helpful to state that they saw that the man was healed. Alternate translation: “saw the man whom Peter had healed” +ACT 9 35 qkv4 Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα 1 in Lydda and in Sharon The city of **Lydda** was located in the Plain of **Sharon**. +ACT 9 35 pf23 εἶδαν αὐτὸν 1 saw him It may be helpful to state that they **saw** that the man was healed. Alternate translation: “saw the man whom Peter had healed” ACT 9 35 x9yw figs-metaphor οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 and they turned to the Lord Here, **turned to the Lord** is a metaphor for starting to obey the Lord. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and started obeying the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 9 36 gy8u writing-background 0 General Information: These verses give background information about the woman named Tabitha. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 9 36 du3s 0 Connecting Statement: Luke continues the story with a new event about Peter. ACT 9 36 zgq5 writing-newevent δέ…ἦν 1 Now there was This introduces a new part in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +ACT 9 36 gy8u writing-background 0 General Information: Verses 36-37 give background information about the woman named Tabitha. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 9 36 gwr4 translate-names Ταβειθά, ἣ διερμηνευομένη λέγεται, Δορκάς 1 Tabitha, which is translated to say “Dorcas.” **Tabitha** is her name in the Aramaic language, and **Dorcas** is her name in the Greek language. Both names mean “gazelle.” Alternate translation: “Tabitha, which was Dorcas in the Greek language” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 9 36 q2rn πλήρης ἔργων ἀγαθῶν 1 full of good works Alternate translation: “doing many good things” ACT 9 37 mg72 figs-explicit ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις 1 And it happened that in those days This refers to the time when Peter was in Joppa. You can state this explicitly. Alternate translation: “And it came about while Peter was nearby” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 9 37 y8sx λούσαντες…αὐτὴν 1 having washed her This was washing to prepare for her burial. ACT 9 37 znj4 ἔθηκαν ἐν ὑπερῴῳ 1 they laid her in an upper room This was a temporary display of the body during the funeral process. ACT 9 39 k1se εἰς τὸ ὑπερῷον 1 to the upper room Alternate translation: “to the upstairs room where Dorcas’ body was lying” -ACT 9 39 me79 πᾶσαι αἱ χῆραι 1 all the widows It is possible that all the widows of the town were there since it was not a large town. -ACT 9 39 piu7 χῆραι 1 widows women whose husbands had died and therefore needed help +ACT 9 39 me79 πᾶσαι αἱ χῆραι 1 all the widows It is possible that all the **widows** of the town were there since it was not a large town. +ACT 9 39 piu7 χῆραι 1 widows These **widows** would have need help since their husbands had died. ACT 9 39 y6q5 μετ’ αὐτῶν οὖσα 1 while being with them Alternate translation: “while she was still alive with the disciples” -ACT 9 40 ek9c writing-endofstory 0 The story of Tabitha ends in verse 42. Verse 43 tells us what happens to Peter after the story ends. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 9 40 yp2u ἐκβαλὼν…ἔξω πάντας 1 put out all of them Peter had everyone leave so he could be alone to pray for Tabitha. Alternate translation: “told them all to leave the room” -ACT 9 41 r7n6 δοὺς…αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν 1 having given his hand to her, he raised her up Peter took hold of her hand and helped her stand up. -ACT 9 41 b73s τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας 1 the saints and the widows The widows were possibly also believers but are mentioned specifically because Tabitha was so important to them. +ACT 9 41 r7n6 δοὺς…αὐτῇ χεῖρα, ἀνέστησεν αὐτήν 1 having given his hand to her, he raised her up Peter extended his **hand** to her to help her stand up. +ACT 9 41 b73s τοὺς ἁγίους καὶ τὰς χήρας 1 the saints and the widows The **widows** were possibly also believers but are mentioned specifically because Tabitha was so important to them. ACT 9 42 nda9 figs-activepassive γνωστὸν δὲ ἐγένετο καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰόππης 1 And this became known throughout all Joppa This refers to the miracle of Peter’s raising Tabitha from the dead. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “People throughout all Joppa heard about this matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 9 42 fyz4 ἐπίστευσαν…ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 believed on the Lord Alternate translation: “believed in the gospel of the Lord Jesus” -ACT 9 43 k9ik writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 Now it happened that This introduces the beginning of the next event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +ACT 9 43 k9ik writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Now it happened that This introduces the beginning of the next event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 9 43 qar2 Σίμωνι, βυρσεῖ 1 Simon, a tanner Alternate translation: “a man named Simon who made leather from animal skins” ACT 10 intro ym7z 0 # Acts 10 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Unclean

The Jews believed that they could become unclean in God’s sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against it because they wanted to keep people from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that God’s people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Baptism and the Holy Spirit

The Holy Spirit “fell on” those who were listening to Peter. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could receive the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized. ACT 10 1 m1vx writing-background 0 General Information: These verses give background information about Cornelius. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) @@ -1437,10 +1427,10 @@ ACT 11 15 th4m ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 in the beginning Peter is referring to the da ACT 11 16 v116 figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will baptize you in the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 11 17 pe42 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The word “them” refers to Cornelius and his Gentile guests and household. Peter does not call them Gentiles in his account to the Jewish believers at Jerusalem. The word “they” refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter spoke. The word “us” includes all of the Jewish believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 11 17 e576 0 Connecting Statement: Peter finishes his speech (which he began in [Acts 11:4](../11/04.md)) to the Jews about his vision and about what had happened at the house of Cornelius. -ACT 11 17 u3nu figs-rquestion εἰ οὖν τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν? 1 If, therefore, God gave to them the same gift as also to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, who was I, able to oppose God? Peter uses this question to emphasize that he was only obeying God. Alternate translation: “Since God gave to them the same gift as he also gave to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, I decided that I could not oppose God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 11 17 u3nu figs-rquestion εἰ οὖν τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν? 1 If, therefore, God gave to them the same gift as also to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, who was I, able to oppose God? Peter uses this question to emphasize that he was only obeying God. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Since God gave to them the same gift as he also gave to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, I decided that I could not oppose God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 11 17 y7ag τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν 1 the same gift Peter refers to the gift of the Holy Spirit. ACT 11 18 nr7g ἡσύχασαν 1 they became quiet Alternate translation: “they did not argue with Peter” -ACT 11 18 z3fy figs-abstractnouns καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν 1 God has given repentance unto life to the Gentiles also Here, **life** refers to eternal life. The abstract nouns **repentance** and **life** can be translated as the verbs “repent” and “live.” Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles also to repent and live eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 11 18 z3fy figs-abstractnouns καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν 1 God has given repentance unto life to the Gentiles also Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **life**, you could express the same ideas with the verbs “repent” and “live.” Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles also to repent and live eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 11 19 zck4 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells about what happened to the believers who fled after the stoning of Stephen. ACT 11 19 bwb8 writing-newevent οὖν 1 Then This introduces the new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 11 19 m3i7 οἱ…διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ, διῆλθον 1 those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen spread The Jews began persecuting Jesus’ followers because Stephen had said and done things that the Jews did not like. Because of this persecution, many of Jesus’ followers left Jerusalem and went to many different places. @@ -1489,7 +1479,7 @@ ACT 12 1 zy6y figs-idiom ἐπέβαλεν…τὰς χεῖρας 1 laid hands ACT 12 1 u1gv figs-explicit τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 some of those from the church Only James and Peter are specified, which implies that these were leaders of the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 1 s7lc κακῶσαί 1 to harm them Alternate translation: “in order to cause the believers to suffer” ACT 12 2 aw4t ἀνεῖλεν δὲ Ἰάκωβον, τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰωάννου, μαχαίρῃ 1 And he killed James, the brother of John, with the sword This tells the manner in which James was killed. -ACT 12 2 r1zv figs-metonymy ἀνεῖλεν…Ἰάκωβον 1 he killed James Possible meanings are (1) Herod himself killed James or (2) Herod ordered someone to kill James. Alternate translation: “Herod gave the order and they killed James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 12 2 r1zv figs-metonymy ἀνεῖλεν…Ἰάκωβον 1 he killed James This could mean: (1) Herod himself killed James or (2) Herod ordered someone to kill James. Alternate translation: “Herod gave the order and they killed James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 12 3 pms7 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers to Herod ([Acts 12:1](../12/01.md)). ACT 12 3 v4ag ἰδὼν δὲ ὅτι ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 And when he saw that this is pleasing to the Jews Alternate translation: “And when Herod realized that putting James to death pleased the Jewish leaders” ACT 12 3 cu7s ὅτι…ἐστιν 1 that this is Alternate translation: “that Herod did this” or “that this happened” @@ -1551,8 +1541,8 @@ ACT 12 18 blx5 0 General Information: The word “him” here refers to Peter. ACT 12 18 ail9 δὲ 1 Now This word is used to mark a break in the story-line. Time has passed; it is now the next day. ACT 12 18 iqv4 γενομένης…ἡμέρας 1 when it became day Alternate translation: “in the morning” ACT 12 18 zl7i figs-litotes ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what therefore had happened to Peter This phrase is used to emphasize what really happened. This could be said in a positive way. Alternate translation: “there was a great disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 12 18 ilz4 figs-abstractnouns ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter The abstract noun **disturbance** can be expressed with the words “disturbed” or “upset.” Alternate translation: “the soldiers were very disturbed about what had happened to Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 12 19 pz6v Ἡρῴδης δὲ ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν 1 And Herod, having searched for him Possible meanings are that (1) “And when Herod heard Peter was missing, he went himself to search the prison” or (2) “And when Herod heard Peter was missing, he sent other soldiers to search the prison.” +ACT 12 18 ilz4 figs-abstractnouns ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **disturbance**, you could express the same ideas with the words “disturbed” or “upset.” Alternate translation: “the soldiers were very disturbed about what had happened to Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 12 19 pz6v Ἡρῴδης δὲ ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν 1 And Herod, having searched for him This could mean: (1) “And when Herod heard Peter was missing, he went himself to search the prison” or (2) “And when Herod heard Peter was missing, he sent other soldiers to search the prison.” ACT 12 19 c69i ἀνακρίνας τοὺς φύλακας, ἐκέλευσεν ἀπαχθῆναι 1 questioned the guards and ordered them to be put to death It was the normal punishment for the Roman government to kill the guards if their prisoner escaped. ACT 12 19 br16 καὶ κατελθὼν 1 And having gone down The phrase **having gone down** is used here because Caesarea is lower in elevation than Judea. ACT 12 20 n2lw 0 Connecting Statement: Luke continues with another event in Herod’s life. @@ -1593,7 +1583,7 @@ ACT 13 4 iyh8 κατῆλθον 1 went down The phrase **went down** is used he ACT 13 4 d1q5 Σελεύκιαν 1 Seleucia a city by the sea ACT 13 5 at85 Σαλαμῖνι 1 Salamis The city of Salamis was on Cyprus Island. ACT 13 5 ct8b figs-synecdoche κατήγγελλον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 they were proclaiming the word of God Here, **word of God** is a synecdoche for “message of God.” Alternate translation: “they proclaimed the message of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 13 5 p5t3 συναγωγαῖς τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 synagogues of the Jews Possible meanings are that (1) “there were multiple Jewish synagogues in the city of Salamis where Barnabas and Saul preached” or (2) “Barnabas and Saul started at the synagogue at Salamis and continued to preach in all the synagogues they found while they traveled around the Island of Cyprus.” +ACT 13 5 p5t3 συναγωγαῖς τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 synagogues of the Jews This could mean: (1) “there were multiple Jewish synagogues in the city of Salamis where Barnabas and Saul preached” or (2) “Barnabas and Saul started at the synagogue at Salamis and continued to preach in all the synagogues they found while they traveled around the Island of Cyprus.” ACT 13 5 sxw6 εἶχον δὲ καὶ Ἰωάννην, ὑπηρέτην 1 And they also had John as an assistant Alternate translation: “And John Mark went with them and was helping them” ACT 13 5 ukx2 ὑπηρέτην 1 as an assistant Alternate translation: “as a helper” ACT 13 6 h9he 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Paul, Silas, and John Mark. The words “This man” refer to “Sergius Paulus.” The first word “he” refers to Sergius Paulus, the proconsul; the second word “he” refers to Elymas (also called Bar-Jesus), the magician. @@ -1618,7 +1608,7 @@ ACT 13 10 r8x2 ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥ ACT 13 10 d2pk figs-metonymy υἱὲ διαβόλου 1 son of the devil Paul is saying the man is acting like the devil. Alternate translation: “you are like the devil” or “you act like the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 10 pyu7 ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 wickedness In this context it means to be lazy and not diligent in following God’s law. ACT 13 10 hlq9 ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης 1 enemy of all righteousness Paul is grouping Elymas with the devil. Just as the devil is an enemy of God and is against righteousness, so also was Elymas. -ACT 13 10 bc9p figs-rquestion οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας? 1 will you not stop perverting the straight paths of the Lord? Paul uses this question to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. Alternate translation: “you are always saying that the truth about the Lord God is false!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 13 10 bc9p figs-rquestion οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας? 1 will you not stop perverting the straight paths of the Lord? Paul uses this question to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “you are always saying that the truth about the Lord God is false!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 13 10 p8sa figs-idiom τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας 1 the straight paths of the Lord Here, **straight paths** refer to the ways that are true. Alternate translation: “the true ways of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 11 k51g 0 General Information: The words “you” and “him” refer to Elymas the magician. The word “he” refers to the Sergius Paulus, proconsul (governor of Paphos). ACT 13 11 pey7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul finishes speaking to Elymas. @@ -1672,8 +1662,8 @@ ACT 13 23 xj5a τούτου…ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος 1 From the de ACT 13 23 kc76 figs-metonymy ἤγαγεν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 brought to Israel This refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “gave to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 23 mk5g κατ’ ἐπαγγελίαν 1 according to promise Alternate translation: “just as God promised he would do” ACT 13 24 abcn πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 before the face of his coming Alternate translation: “before the coming of Jesus” -ACT 13 24 x892 figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance You can translate the word **repentance** as the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism to repent” or “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent for their sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 13 25 vww3 figs-rquestion τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? 1 Who do you think I am? John asked this question to compel the people to think about who he was. Alternate translation: “Think about who I am.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 13 24 x892 figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism to repent” or “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent for their sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 13 25 vww3 figs-rquestion τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? 1 Who do you think I am? John asked this question to compel the people to think about who he was. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Think about who I am.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 13 25 rp32 figs-explicit οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ 1 I am not him John was referring to the Messiah, whom they were expecting to come. Alternate translation: “I am not the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 25 nnl5 ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ 1 But behold This emphasizes the importance of what he will say next. ACT 13 25 r1pl figs-explicit ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ 1 one is coming after me This also refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Messiah will soon come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1681,7 +1671,7 @@ ACT 13 25 gys2 οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶ ACT 13 26 jdp6 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The word “they” and “their” refers to the Jews who lived in Jerusalem. Here the word “us” includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 13 26 kci9 ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 brothers, sons of the family of Abraham, and those among you who fear God Paul addresses his audience of Jews and Gentile converts to Judaism to remind them of their special status as worshiping the true God. ACT 13 26 u6zn figs-activepassive ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη 1 the word about this salvation has been sent If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has sent the message about this salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 26 v6r3 figs-abstractnouns τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης 1 about this salvation The word **salvation** can be translated with the verb “save.” Alternate translation: “that God will save people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 13 26 v6r3 figs-abstractnouns τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης 1 about this salvation If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **salvation**, you could express the same idea with the verb “save.” Alternate translation: “that God will save people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 13 27 psk5 τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες 1 did not recognize this one Alternate translation: “did not realize that this man Jesus was the one whom God had sent to save them” ACT 13 27 ri1f figs-metonymy τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν 1 the voices of the prophets Here the word **voices** represents the message of the prophets. Alternate translation: “the writings of the prophets” or “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 27 m4tz figs-activepassive τὰς…ἀναγινωσκομένας 2 that are read If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which someone reads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1727,7 +1717,7 @@ ACT 13 38 ki8q 0 General Information: Here the word “him” refers to Jesus. ACT 13 38 yg35 γνωστὸν…ἔστω ὑμῖν 1 let it be known to you Alternate translation: “know this” or “this is important for you to know” ACT 13 38 qy18 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Paul uses this term because they are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. Alternate translation: “my fellow Israelites and other friends” ACT 13 38 t3i5 figs-activepassive ὅτι διὰ τούτου, ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ 1 that because of this, forgiveness of sins is being proclaimed to you, and freedom If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that we proclaim to you that your sins can be forgiven through Jesus, and you can be free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 38 w7y1 figs-abstractnouns ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν 1 forgiveness of sins The abstract noun “forgiveness” can be translated with the verb “to forgive.” Alternate translation: “that God can forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 13 38 w7y1 figs-abstractnouns ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν 1 forgiveness of sins If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with the verb “to forgive.” Alternate translation: “that God can forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 13 39 g5h9 figs-activepassive ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων δικαιοῦται 1 In this one every one who believes is justified If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus justifies everyone who believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 39 j6rr ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων 1 In this one every one who believes Alternate translation: “By him every person who believes” or “Every one who believes in him” ACT 13 40 kk1j 0 General Information: In his message to the people in the synagogue, Paul quotes the prophet Habakkuk. Here the word “I” refers to God. @@ -1744,7 +1734,7 @@ ACT 13 41 p4c2 ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν 1 even if someo ACT 13 42 ax8v ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν 1 And as they were leaving Alternate translation: “When Paul and Barnabas were leaving” ACT 13 42 f3sw παρεκάλουν 1 they begged them Alternate translation: “the people begged them” ACT 13 42 y4p9 figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 these same words Here, **words** refers to the message that Paul had spoken. Alternate translation: “this same message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 13 43 a58z λυθείσης δὲ τῆς συναγωγῆς 1 And when the synagogue meeting had ended Possible meanings are (1) this restates “As Paul and Barnabas left” in verse 42 or (2) Paul and Barnabas left the meeting before it ended and this occurs later. +ACT 13 43 a58z λυθείσης δὲ τῆς συναγωγῆς 1 And when the synagogue meeting had ended This could mean: (1) this restates “As Paul and Barnabas left” in verse 42 or (2) Paul and Barnabas left the meeting before it ended and this occurs later. ACT 13 43 sws7 προσηλύτων 1 proselytes These were non-Jewish people who converted to Judaism. ACT 13 43 q2aj οἵτινες προσλαλοῦντες αὐτοῖς, ἔπειθον αὐτοὺς 1 who speaking to them, urged them Alternate translation: “and Paul and Barnabas spoke to those people and urged them” ACT 13 43 fv15 figs-explicit προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to continue in the grace of God It is implied that they believed Paul’s message that Jesus was the Messiah. Alternate translation: “to continue to trust that God kindly forgives people’s sins because of what Jesus did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1763,7 +1753,7 @@ ACT 13 46 lly5 figs-metaphor ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν 1 ACT 13 46 ms36 οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς 1 judge yourselves unworthy of eternal life Alternate translation: “seem to think you are not worthy of eternal life” or “act as though you are not worthy of eternal life” ACT 13 46 rf9k figs-explicit στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη 1 we will turn to the Gentiles Paul and Barnadas were implying that they would preach to the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 47 v8au figs-metaphor εἰς φῶς 1 as a light Here the truth about Jesus that Paul was preaching is spoken of as if it were **a light** that allowed people to see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 13 47 t5sp figs-abstractnouns εἶναί…εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 should be for salvation as far as the end of the earth The abstract word **salvation** can be translated with the verb “to save.” The phrase **end** refers to everywhere. Alternate translation: “should tell people everywhere in the world that I want to save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 13 47 t5sp figs-abstractnouns εἶναί…εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 should be for salvation as far as the end of the earth If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **salvation**, you could express the same idea with the verb “to save.” The phrase **end** refers to everywhere. Alternate translation: “should tell people everywhere in the world that I want to save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 13 48 e9ag figs-metonymy ἐδόξαζον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 glorified the word of the Lord Here, **word** refers to the message about Jesus that they had believed. Alternate translation: “praised God for the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 48 jct2 figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἦσαν τεταγμένοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 as many as were appointed to eternal life If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as many as God appointed to eternal life” or “all the people whom God had chosen to receive eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 49 qh9z figs-metonymy διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου δι’ ὅλης τῆς χώρας 1 the word of the Lord was being spread throughout the whole region Here, **word** refers to the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “and the message of Jesus was being spread through the whole region by those who believed spread the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1825,7 +1815,7 @@ ACT 14 13 iha1 ἐπὶ τοὺς πυλῶνας 1 to the gates The **gates** ACT 14 13 ud37 ἤθελεν θύειν 1 wanting to sacrifice Alternate translation: “wanting to offer sacrifice to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes” ACT 14 14 kt1f οἱ ἀπόστολοι Βαρναβᾶς καὶ Παῦλος 1 the apostles, Barnabas and Paul Luke is here probably using **apostle** in the general sense of “one sent out.” ACT 14 14 kx43 διαρρήξαντες τὰ ἱμάτια ἑαυτῶν 1 they tore their clothing This was a symbolic action to show that they were deeply distressed and upset that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them. -ACT 14 15 w4fd figs-rquestion ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε? 1 Men, why are you doing these things? Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. Alternate translation: “Men, you must not do these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 14 15 w4fd figs-rquestion ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε? 1 Men, why are you doing these things? Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Men, you must not do these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 14 15 f8vc ταῦτα ποιεῖτε 1 are you doing these things Alternate translation: “are you worshiping us” ACT 14 15 u9pq καὶ ἡμεῖς ὁμοιοπαθεῖς ἐσμεν ὑμῖν ἄνθρωποι 1 We also are men with the same feelings as you By this statement, Barnabas and Paul are saying that they are not gods. Alternate translation: “We are just human beings like you. We are not gods!” ACT 14 15 n9e4 ὁμοιοπαθεῖς…ὑμῖν 1 with the same feelings as you Alternate translation: “like you in every way” @@ -1853,7 +1843,7 @@ ACT 14 22 d9ic writing-quotations καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψ ACT 14 22 wu1c figs-exclusive δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν 1 It is necessary for us to enter Paul includes his hearers, so the word **us** is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 14 23 pk5l 0 General Information: Except for the third use of the word “they” which refers to the people that Paul and Barnabas had led to the Lord, all the words “they” here refer to Paul and Barnabas. ACT 14 23 mqp9 χειροτονήσαντες δὲ αὐτοῖς κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν πρεσβυτέρους 1 And when they had appointed for them elders in every church Alternate translation: “And when Paul and Barnabas had appointed leaders in each new group of believers” -ACT 14 23 nd87 παρέθεντο αὐτοὺς 1 they entrusted them Possible meanings are (1) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the elders they had appointed” or (2) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the leaders and other believers” +ACT 14 23 nd87 παρέθεντο αὐτοὺς 1 they entrusted them This could mean: (1) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the elders they had appointed” or (2) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the leaders and other believers” ACT 14 23 ls62 εἰς ὃν πεπιστεύκεισαν 1 in whom they had believed Who **they** refers to depends on your choice for the meaning of “them” in the previous note (either elders or leaders and other believers). ACT 14 25 t513 figs-metonymy καὶ λαλήσαντες ἐν Πέργῃ τὸν λόγον 1 And when they had spoken the word in Perga Here, **word** is a metonym for “message of God.” Alternate translation: “And when they had spoken the message about Jesus in Perga” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 14 25 h8sh κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν 1 they went down to Attalia The phrase **went down** is used here because Attalia is lower in elevation than Perga. @@ -1869,14 +1859,14 @@ ACT 15 1 p3k9 κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 comin ACT 15 1 zi1n figs-explicit ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 taught the brothers Here, **brothers** stands for believers in Christ. It is implied that they were in Antioch. Alternate translation: “taught the believers at Antioch” or “were teaching the believers at Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 1 pm8h figs-activepassive ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε τῷ ἔθει τῷ Μωϋσέως, οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι 1 Unless you are circumcised in the custom of Moses, you are not able to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you in the custom of Moses, God cannot save you” or “God will not save you from your sins unless you receive circumcision according to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 2 abcr figs-litotes στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης 1 not a little dispute and debate This phrase is a litotes. The words **not** and **a little** together mean “a lot.” Alternate translation: “a sharp dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 15 2 f9nd figs-abstractnouns στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης 1 not a little dispute and debate The abstract nouns **dispute** and **debate** can be stated as verbs and where the men came from can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “strongly confronted and debated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 15 2 f9nd figs-abstractnouns στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης 1 not a little dispute and debate If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **dispute** and **debate**, you could express the same ideas with verbs and where the men came from can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “strongly confronted and debated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 15 2 ek6a ἀναβαίνειν…εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 to go up … in Jerusalem Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem. ACT 15 2 z983 τοῦ ζητήματος τούτου 1 this question Alternate translation: “this issue” ACT 15 3 h2mw 0 General Information: Here the words “They,” “they,” and “them” refer to Paul, Barnabas, and certain others ([Acts 15:2](../15/02.md)). ACT 15 3 av5y figs-activepassive οἱ μὲν οὖν προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 Therefore, the ones who had been sent by the church If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Therefore the community of believers sent them from Antioch to Jerusalem, and they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 3 aia5 figs-metonymy προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 who had been sent by the church Here, **church** refers to the people that were a part of the church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 3 i5kd διήρχοντο τήν τε Φοινίκην καὶ Σαμάρειαν, ἐκδιηγούμενοι 1 passed through both Phoenicia and Samaria announcing The words **passed through** and **announcing** indicate they spent some time in different places sharing in detail what God was doing. -ACT 15 3 rk37 figs-abstractnouns ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 announcing the conversion of the Gentiles The abstract noun **conversion** means the Gentiles were rejecting their false gods and believing in God. Alternate translation: “announced to the community of believers in those places that Gentiles were believing in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 15 3 rk37 figs-abstractnouns ἐκδιηγούμενοι τὴν ἐπιστροφὴν τῶν ἐθνῶν 1 announcing the conversion of the Gentiles Here, **conversion** means the Gentiles were rejecting their false gods and believing in God. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **conversion**, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “announced to the community of believers in those places that Gentiles were believing in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 15 3 nje7 figs-metaphor ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 they brought great joy to all the brothers Their message causing the brothers to be joyful is spoken of as if **joy** were an object that they brought to **the brothers**. Alternate translation: “what they said caused their fellow believers to rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 3 bbd4 πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 to all the brothers Here, **brothers** refers to fellow believers. ACT 15 4 ej1r figs-activepassive παρεδέχθησαν ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 they were welcomed by the church, and the apostles, and the elders If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles, the elders, and the rest of the community of believers welcomed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1965,7 +1955,7 @@ ACT 15 30 c3uk οἱ μὲν οὖν ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον ACT 15 30 usz6 figs-activepassive οἱ…ἀπολυθέντες 1 when they were dismissed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the apostles and elders dismissed the four men” or “when the believers in Jerusalem sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 30 t55a κατῆλθον εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν 1 they came down to Antioch The phrase **came down** is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. ACT 15 31 k1mr ἐχάρησαν 1 they rejoiced Alternate translation: “the believers in Antioch rejoiced” -ACT 15 31 e4gf figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει 1 because of the encouragement The abstract noun **encouragement** can be expressed with the verb “encourage.” Alternate translation: “because what the apostles and elders wrote encouraged them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 15 31 e4gf figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ τῇ παρακλήσει 1 because of the encouragement If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **encouragement**, you could express the same idea with the verb “encourage.” Alternate translation: “because what the apostles and elders wrote encouraged them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 15 32 r65l καὶ αὐτοὶ προφῆται ὄντες 1 also being prophets themselves Prophets were teachers authorized by God to speak for him. Alternate translation: “because they were also prophets” or “who were also prophets” ACT 15 32 e2en τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Alternate translation: “the fellow believers” ACT 15 32 j99g figs-metaphor ἐπεστήριξαν 1 strengthened them Helping someone to depend even more on Jesus is spoken of as if they were making them physically stronger. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1984,7 +1974,7 @@ ACT 15 38 a5nn figs-litotes Παῦλος…ἠξίου…μὴ συνπαραλ ACT 15 38 ht3k Παμφυλίας 1 Pamphylia This was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). ACT 15 38 ln7w μὴ συνελθόντα αὐτοῖς εἰς τὸ ἔργον 1 did not go with them in the work Alternate translation: “did not continue to work with them” or “did not continue to serve with them” ACT 15 39 bb8w 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Barnabas and Paul. -ACT 15 39 u97a figs-abstractnouns ἐγένετο δὲ παροξυσμὸς, ὥστε ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων 1 And there arose a sharp disagreement, so as to separate them from each other The abstract noun **disagreement** can be stated as the verb “disagree.” Alternate translation: “And they so strongly disagreed with each other that they separated from each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 15 39 u97a figs-abstractnouns ἐγένετο δὲ παροξυσμὸς, ὥστε ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων 1 And there arose a sharp disagreement, so as to separate them from each other If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **disagreement**, you could express the same idea with the verb “disagree.” Alternate translation: “And they so strongly disagreed with each other that they separated from each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 15 40 l2uq figs-activepassive παραδοθεὶς τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Κυρίου ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 after he had been entrusted by the brothers to the grace of the Lord To entrust to someone means to place the care and responsibility for someone or something to another person. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after the believers in Antioch entrusted Paul to the grace of the Lord” or “after the believers in Antioch prayed for the Lord to take care of Paul and show kindness to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 41 e3ym figs-explicit διήρχετο 1 he went through The previous sentence implies that Silas was with Paul. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went all around in” or “Paul took Silas and went throughout” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 41 t81z τὴν Συρίαν καὶ τὴν Κιλικίαν 1 Syria and Cilicia These are provinces or areas in Asia Minor, near the island of Cyprus. @@ -2086,7 +2076,7 @@ ACT 16 37 v4yk figs-exclusive 0 General Information: All of the times the word ACT 16 37 b4jm figs-explicit ἔφη πρὸς αὐτούς 1 said to them Probably Paul is speaking to the jailer, but he intends for the jailer to tell the magistrates what he says. Alternate translation: “said to the jailer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 37 b7cc figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 They have beaten us in public Here “They” refers to the magistrates who commanded their soldiers to beat them. Alternate translation: “The magistrates ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 37 wc37 ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν 1 without trial—men being Romans—they threw us into prison Alternate translation: “without a trial to prove us guilty, even though we are Roman citizens, and they had their soldiers put us in jail” -ACT 16 37 qq1u figs-rquestion λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? οὔ γάρ 1 they cast us out secretly? No indeed! Paul uses a question to emphasize that he will not allow the magistrates to send them out the city in secret after they had mistreated Paul and Silas. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not let them send us out of the city in secret!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 16 37 qq1u figs-rquestion λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? οὔ γάρ 1 they cast us out secretly? No indeed! Paul uses a question to emphasize that he will not allow the magistrates to send them out the city in secret after they had mistreated Paul and Silas. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not let them send us out of the city in secret!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 16 37 jr2j figs-rpronouns ἀλλὰ ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ 1 Instead, coming themselves Here, **themselves** is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 16 38 ym2u figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans To be a Roman meant to be a legal citizens of the Empire. Citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. The city leaders were afraid that more important Roman authorities might learn how the city leaders had mistreated Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 40 q59h 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Silas. The word “them” refers to the believers in Philippi. @@ -2106,7 +2096,7 @@ ACT 17 2 bt5e ἐπὶ Σάββατα τρία 1 for three Sabbaths Alternate t ACT 17 2 wp3k figs-explicit διελέξατο αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν Γραφῶν 1 reasoned with them from the scriptures Paul explained what the scriptures means in order to prove to the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 2 qf4t διελέξατο αὐτοῖς 1 reasoned with them Alternate translation: “debated with them” or “discussed with them” ACT 17 3 e85n 0 General Information: Here the word “He” refers to Paul ([Acts 17:2](../17/02.md)). -ACT 17 3 ir9q figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 He is fully opening Possible meanings are (1) to explain the scriptures in a way that people can understand is spoken of as if Paul were opening something so people can see what is inside of it, or (2) Paul was literally opening a book or scroll and reading from it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 3 ir9q figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 He is fully opening This could mean: (1) to explain the scriptures in a way that people can understand is spoken of as if Paul were opening something so people can see what is inside of it, or (2) Paul was literally opening a book or scroll and reading from it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 3 he78 ἔδει 1 it was necessary for Alternate translation: “it was part of God’s plan for” ACT 17 3 ipb2 ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise Alternate translation: “to come back to life” ACT 17 3 b9qi ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again. @@ -2124,7 +2114,7 @@ ACT 17 5 t3bc figs-metonymy ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν 1 they set th ACT 17 5 s3uv ἐπιστάντες τῇ οἰκίᾳ 1 having assaulted the house This probably means the people were throwing rocks at the house and trying to break down the door of the house. Alternate translation: “having violently attacking the house” ACT 17 5 ks2l translate-names Ἰάσονος 1 of Jason **Jason** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 5 abcu αὐτοὺς προαγαγεῖν 1 to lead them Alternate translation: “to bring Paul and Silas” -ACT 17 5 pp7k εἰς τὸν δῆμον 1 to the people Possible meanings for **the people** are (1) a governmental or legal group of citizens gathered to make a decision or (2) an unruly mob. +ACT 17 5 pp7k εἰς τὸν δῆμον 1 to the people This could mean: (1) a governmental or legal group of citizens gathered to make a decision or (2) an unruly mob. ACT 17 6 i79p τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Here, **brothers** refers to believers. Alternate translation: “some other believers” ACT 17 6 e44z ἐπὶ τοὺς πολιτάρχας 1 before the city officials Alternate translation: “in the presence of the city officials” ACT 17 6 g7xj οἱ…οὗτοι 1 Those who … they The Jewish leaders were referring to Paul and Silas. @@ -2181,7 +2171,7 @@ ACT 17 21 wr1r λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν τι καινότερον ACT 17 22 zq3y 0 General Information: Paul begins his speech to the philosophers on the Areopagus. ACT 17 22 ja1k κατὰ πάντα…δεισιδαιμονεστέρους 1 very religious in every way Paul is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices. ACT 17 23 gn1j διερχόμενος γὰρ 1 For passing through Alternate translation: “Because as I was walked through” or “As I was walking along” -ACT 17 23 cem7 ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 To an Unknown God Possible meanings are (1) “to a certain unknown god” or (2) “to a god not known.” This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar. +ACT 17 23 cem7 ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 To an Unknown God This could mean: (1) “to a certain unknown god” or (2) “to a god not known.” This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar. ACT 17 24 m1jm τὸν κόσμον 1 the world In the most general sense, the **world** refers to the heavens and the earth and everything in them. ACT 17 24 rqk9 οὗτος…ὑπάρχων Κύριος 1 he who is Lord Here, **he** is referring to the unknown god mentioned in [Acts 17:23](../17/23.md) that Paul is explaining is the Lord God. Alternate translation: “because the one who is Lord” ACT 17 24 f2mz figs-merism οὐρανοῦ καὶ γῆς 1 of heaven and earth The words **heaven** and **earth** are used together to mean all beings and things in heaven and earth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) @@ -2223,7 +2213,7 @@ ACT 18 1 qa9b 0 Connecting Statement: This is another part of the story of Pau ACT 18 1 fky7 μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things Alternate translation: “After these events took place in Athens” ACT 18 1 abcw χωρισθεὶς 1 having departed Alternate translation: “when Paul had departed” ACT 18 1 h2si τῶν Ἀθηνῶν 1 Athens Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. See how you translated this in [Acts 17:15](../17/15.md). -ACT 18 2 d9zx καὶ εὑρών 1 And when he found Possible meanings are that (1) Paul happened to find by chance or (2) Paul intentionally found. +ACT 18 2 d9zx καὶ εὑρών 1 And when he found This could mean: (1) Paul happened to find by chance or (2) Paul intentionally found. ACT 18 2 hm16 writing-participants τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν 1 a certain Jew named Aquila Here the phrase **a certain** indicates this is introducing new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 18 2 y97p translate-names Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει 1 a native of Pontus Pontus was a province on the southern coast of the Black Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 2 q4va προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα 1 who had recently come This probably happened sometime in the past year. @@ -2232,7 +2222,7 @@ ACT 18 2 n95f τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον 1 Claudius had or ACT 18 3 q259 τὸ ὁμότεχνον εἶναι 1 he was of the same trade Alternate translation: “he did the same kind of work that they did” ACT 18 4 r56h 0 General Information: Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul. ACT 18 4 h3az διελέγετο δὲ 1 And he reasoned He gave reasons. This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people. Alternate translation: “And Paul debated” or “And Paul discussed” -ACT 18 4 r2gp ἔπειθέν τε Ἰουδαίους καὶ Ἕλληνας 1 persuading both Jews and Greeks Possible meanings are (1) “he caused both Jews and Greeks to believe” or (2) “he kept trying to persuade the Jews and the Greeks.” +ACT 18 4 r2gp ἔπειθέν τε Ἰουδαίους καὶ Ἕλληνας 1 persuading both Jews and Greeks This could mean: (1) “he caused both Jews and Greeks to believe” or (2) “he kept trying to persuade the Jews and the Greeks.” ACT 18 6 ncx8 translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια 1 shaking out his garment This is a symbolic action to indicate that Paul will no longer try to teach the Jews there about Jesus. He is leaving them to God’s judgment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 18 6 z12a figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Your blood be upon your head Here, **blood** stands for the guilt of their actions. Paul tells the Jews they are solely responsible for the judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone bear the responsibility for your punishment for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 6 pacx figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Here, **head** refers to the whole person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -2261,7 +2251,7 @@ ACT 18 15 khr5 κριτὴς ἐγὼ τούτων οὐ βούλομαι εἶ ACT 18 16 yf81 0 General Information: Here the word “they” probably refers to the Gentiles at the court. They reacted against the Jews who had brought Paul before the judgment seat ([Acts 18:12](../18/12.md)). ACT 18 16 d6nh figs-metonymy ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος 1 he sent them away from the judgment seat Here, **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 17 cyk6 figs-hyperbole ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες 1 they all, having seized This may be an exaggeration to emphasize the strong feelings the people had. Alternate translation: “many people seized” or “many of them grabbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 18 17 mj77 ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος 1 But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat Possible meanings are (1) the Gentiles beat Sosthenes in the court in front of the judgment seat because he was the Jewish leader or (2) it is possible that Sosthenes was a believer in Christ, so the Jews beat him in front of the court. +ACT 18 17 mj77 ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος 1 But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat This could mean: (1) the Gentiles beat Sosthenes in the court in front of the judgment seat because he was the Jewish leader or (2) it is possible that Sosthenes was a believer in Christ, so the Jews beat him in front of the court. ACT 18 17 x9w5 translate-names Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον 1 Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue **Sosthenes** was the Jewish ruler of the synagogue at Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 17 z9fv ἔτυπτον 1 were beating him Alternate translation: “repeatedly hit him” or “repeatedly punched him” ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers to Paul. Cenchreae was a seaport that was part of the greater Corinth city area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2311,7 +2301,7 @@ ACT 19 2 nvn4 οὐδ’ εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἔστιν ἠκού ACT 19 3 hml1 0 General Information: Here the words “They,” “you,” and “they” refer to certain disciples in the city of Ephesus ([Acts 19:1](../19/01.md)). The word “him” refers to John. ACT 19 3 mrm6 figs-activepassive εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε 1 Into what then were you baptized? If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “What kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 3 jzp7 figs-ellipsis εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα 1 Into the baptism of John You can translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism about which John taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 19 4 r46y figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance You can translate the abstract noun **repentance** as the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “the baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 19 4 r46y figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “the baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 19 4 pv7t τὸν ἐρχόμενον 1 the one who is coming Here, **the one** refers to Jesus. ACT 19 4 q5fh τὸν ἐρχόμενον μετ’ αὐτὸν 1 the one who is coming after him This means to come after John the Baptist in time and not following after him physically. ACT 19 5 zx2b 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues staying in Ephesus. @@ -2336,7 +2326,7 @@ ACT 19 11 cb6w 0 General Information: Here the words “them” and “they” ACT 19 11 fa6h figs-synecdoche δυνάμεις τε οὐ τὰς τυχούσας, ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίει διὰ τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου 1 And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul Here, **hands** stands for Paul’s whole person. Alternate translation: “And God was causing Paul to do unusual miracles” or “And God was doing amazing miracles through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 19 11 abcy οὐ τὰς τυχούσας 1 not ordinary Alternate translation: “unusual” ACT 19 12 m3kl καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια, καὶ 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body were taken to the sick and If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when they took to sick people even handkerchiefs and aprons that had touched Paul” -ACT 19 12 vc1v καὶ…ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body Possible meanings are (1) these were cloth items that Paul had touched or (2) these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used. +ACT 19 12 vc1v καὶ…ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body This could mean: (1) these were cloth items that Paul had touched or (2) these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used. ACT 19 12 aks4 σουδάρια 1 handkerchiefs cloths worn around the head ACT 19 12 xs31 σιμικίνθια 1 aprons clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of people ACT 19 12 kw9z figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 the sick This refers to sick people. Alternate translation: “sick people” or “those who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -2348,7 +2338,7 @@ ACT 19 13 d59p τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὃν Παῦλος κηρύσσει 1 b ACT 19 13 vqt1 figs-metonymy τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 by the Jesus This stands for the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus” or “by the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 14 cb8p translate-names Σκευᾶ 1 of Sceva This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 15 i4a2 τὸν Ἰησοῦν γινώσκω, καὶ τὸν Παῦλον ἐπίσταμαι 1 Jesus I know, and Paul I know Alternate translation: “I know Jesus and Paul” or “I know Jesus, and I know Paul” -ACT 19 15 nsl1 figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 but who are you? The spirit asked this question to emphasize that the exorcists had no authority over evil spirits. Alternate translation: “but I do not know you!” or “but you have no authority over me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 19 15 nsl1 figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 but who are you? The spirit asked this question to emphasize that the exorcists had no authority over evil spirits. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “but I do not know you!” or “but you have no authority over me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 19 16 ty4x ἐφαλόμενος ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ἐν ᾧ ἦν τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν 1 the man in whom was the evil spirit, after leaping on them This means that the **evil spirit** caused the **man** whom it was controlling to leap on the exorcists. ACT 19 16 lu7u αὐτοὺς 1 them This refers to the exorcists who send evil spirits from people or places. See how you translated this in [Acts 19:13](../19/13.md). ACT 19 16 b8cb γυμνοὺς…ἐκφυγεῖν 1 they fled … naked The exorcists fled with their clothes ripped off them. @@ -2364,7 +2354,7 @@ ACT 19 20 es71 figs-synecdoche οὕτως κατὰ κράτος τοῦ Κυρ ACT 19 21 k1j1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet. ACT 19 21 de4f δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story. ACT 19 21 q18b ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα…ὁ Παῦλος 1 this was completed, Paul Alternate translation: “Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus, he” -ACT 19 21 fgq5 ἔθετο…ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι 1 he determined in the Spirit Possible meanings are (1) Paul decided with the help of the Holy Spirit or (2) Paul decided within his own spirit, which means he made up his mind. +ACT 19 21 fgq5 ἔθετο…ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι 1 he determined in the Spirit This could mean: (1) Paul decided with the help of the Holy Spirit or (2) Paul decided within his own spirit, which means he made up his mind. ACT 19 21 brb7 Ἀχαΐαν 1 Achaia Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. It was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. See how you translated this in [Acts 18:12](../18/12.md). ACT 19 21 rdz4 δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν 1 it is necessary for me also to see Rome Alternate translation: “I must also travel to Rome” ACT 19 22 cy6f translate-names Ἔραστον 1 Erastus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2406,7 +2396,7 @@ ACT 19 34 u1hp figs-metaphor φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων ACT 19 35 fm3m figs-you 0 General Information: The words “You” and “you” refer to all the men present who were from Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 19 35 pu96 0 Connecting Statement: The clerk of Ephesus speaks to quiet the crowd. ACT 19 35 sy9m ὁ γραμματεὺς 1 the town clerk This refers to the town “writer” or “secretary.” -ACT 19 35 sd3s figs-rquestion τίς γάρ ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς? 1 what man indeed is there who does not know that the city of Ephesus is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of that which is fallen down from heaven? The clerk asked this question to assure the crowd they were right and to comfort them. Alternate translation: “for every man knows that the Ephesians guard the temple of the great Artemis and of her image that fell down from heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 19 35 sd3s figs-rquestion τίς γάρ ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς? 1 what man indeed is there who does not know that the city of Ephesus is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of that which is fallen down from heaven? The clerk asked this question to assure the crowd they were right and to comfort them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “for every man knows that the Ephesians guard the temple of the great Artemis and of her image that fell down from heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 19 35 k8dy figs-litotes ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 who does not know The town clerk uses **not** to emphasize that all of the people knew this. Alternate translation: “everyone knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 19 35 hiw3 νεωκόρον 1 temple keeper The Ephesian people maintained and guarded the temple of Artemis. ACT 19 35 afd1 τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 of that which is fallen down from heaven Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite which fell from the sky. People thought that his rock had come directly from Zeus, the ruler of the Greek gods (idols). @@ -2442,7 +2432,7 @@ ACT 20 5 kv8t οὗτοι…προσελθόντες 1 they had gone before us ACT 20 6 l5dr τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. See how you translated this in [Acts 12:3](../12/03.md). ACT 20 7 dnt4 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [Acts 20:4-6](./04.md)) ACT 20 7 mbr8 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells about Paul’s preaching in Troas and about what happened to Eutychus. -ACT 20 7 zff8 figs-synecdoche κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 to break bread Bread was part of their meals. Possible meanings are (1) this refers simply to eating a meal together. Alternate translation: “eat a meal” or (2) this refers to the meal they would eat together in order to remember Christ’s death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “to eat the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 7 zff8 figs-synecdoche κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 to break bread Bread was part of their meals. This could mean: (1) this refers simply to eating a meal together. Alternate translation: “eat a meal” or (2) this refers to the meal they would eat together in order to remember Christ’s death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “to eat the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 7 j888 παρέτεινέν τε τὸν λόγον 1 and so he continued his message Alternate translation: “and so he continued to speak” ACT 20 8 ak8z ὑπερῴῳ 1 upper room This may have been the third floor of the house. ACT 20 9 hw7b 0 General Information: Here the word “himself” refers to Paul. The first word “he” refers to Paul; the second word “he” refers to the young man, Eutychus. The word “him” refers to Eutychus. @@ -2456,7 +2446,7 @@ ACT 20 11 av7m 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers to Paul. ACT 20 11 lih8 0 Connecting Statement: This is the end of the part of the story about Paul’s preaching at Troas and about Eutychus. ACT 20 11 w5w8 figs-synecdoche κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον 1 had broken bread Bread was a common food during meals. Here, **broken bread** probably means they shared a meal with more kinds of food than just bread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 11 t88c οὕτως ἐξῆλθεν 1 In this way, he left Alternate translation: “This is what happened as he was going away” -ACT 20 12 jkj5 τὸν παῖδα 1 the boy This refers to Eutychus ([Acts 20:9](../20/09.md)). Possible meanings are (1) he was a young man over 14 years old or (2) he was a boy between 9 and 14 years old or (3) the word “boy” implies that he was a servant or a slave. +ACT 20 12 jkj5 τὸν παῖδα 1 the boy This refers to Eutychus ([Acts 20:9](../20/09.md)). This could mean: (1) he was a young man over 14 years old or (2) he was a boy between 9 and 14 years old or (3) the word “boy” implies that he was a servant or a slave. ACT 20 12 abx0 figs-litotes οὐ μετρίως 1 not moderately This is a way of saying that they were greatly comforted. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 20 13 dja7 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The words “he,” “himself,” and “him” refer to Paul. Here the word “we” refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 20 13 awt9 0 Connecting Statement: The writer Luke, Paul, and his other companions continue their travels; however, Paul goes separately for part of the trip. @@ -2482,7 +2472,7 @@ ACT 20 19 e6k7 πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι 1 trials ACT 20 19 y5iw figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 of the Jews This does not mean every Jew. This lets us know who plotted. Alternate translation: “of some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 20 nu7h ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν 1 how I kept back nothing that was useful which I did not declare to you Alternate translation: “how I declared to you everything that was beneficial to you” ACT 20 20 kut9 κατ’ οἴκους 1 according to houses Paul taught people in various private homes. Alternate translation: “in each house” or “in everyone's home” -ACT 20 21 w7mv figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 about repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus The abstract nouns **repentance** and **faith** can be stated as verbs. Alternate translation: “that they need to repent before God and believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 20 21 w7mv figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 about repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “that they need to repent before God and believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 20 22 ty3b 0 General Information: Here the word “I” refers to Paul. ACT 20 22 vam4 figs-activepassive δεδεμένος ἐγὼ τῷ Πνεύματι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form.They can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the Spirit compels me to go there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 22 a9j1 τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς 1 not knowing what will happen to me in it Alternate translation: “and I do not know what will happen to me there” or “not knowing what will happen to me in Jerusalem” @@ -2567,7 +2557,7 @@ ACT 21 11 zvw8 παραδώσουσιν 1 they will hand him over Alternate tra ACT 21 11 s92d figs-metonymy εἰς χεῖρας ἐθνῶν 1 into the hands of the Gentiles The word **hands** here represents control. Alternate translation: “into the legal custody of the Gentiles” or “to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 11 b59g figs-synecdoche ἐθνῶν 1 of the Gentiles This stands for the authorities among the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “of the Gentile authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 12 fvh4 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” refers to Luke and the other believers but does not include the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 21 13 uwt2 figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? Paul asks this question to show the believers they should stop trying to persuade him. Alternate translation: “Stop what you are doing. Your weeping is breaking my heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 21 13 uwt2 figs-rquestion τί ποιεῖτε, κλαίοντες καὶ συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν? 1 What are you doing, weeping and breaking my heart? Paul asks this question to show the believers they should stop trying to persuade him. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Stop what you are doing. Your weeping is breaking my heart!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 13 bj76 figs-metaphor συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 breaking my heart To make someone sad or to discourage someone is spoken of as if it were a heart being broken. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 21 13 k34w figs-metonymy συνθρύπτοντές μου τὴν καρδίαν 1 Here, **heart** stands for a person’s emotions. Alternate translation: “discouraging me” or “making me very sad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 21 13 p5e5 figs-activepassive οὐ μόνον δεθῆναι 1 not only to be bound If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “not only for them to tie me up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -2648,15 +2638,15 @@ ACT 21 36 kax6 figs-euphemism αἶρε αὐτόν 1 Away with him The crowd is ACT 21 37 j9xk figs-activepassive μέλλων τε εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν παρεμβολὴν, ὁ Παῦλος 1 And as Paul was about to be brought into the fortress If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “As the soldiers were ready to bring Paul inside the fortress” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 21 37 qp63 τὴν παρεμβολὴν 1 the fortress This fortress was connected to the outer temple court. See how you translated this in [Acts 21:34](../21/34.md). ACT 21 37 inl1 τῷ χιλιάρχῳ 1 to the commander a Roman military officer of about 600 soldiers -ACT 21 37 p5cd figs-rquestion Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις? 1 Do you know Greek? The commander uses this questions to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. Alternate translation: “So you speak Greek.” or “I didn’t know you spoke Greek.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 21 38 xx2w figs-rquestion οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων? 1 Are you not then the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness? The commander uses this question and the question “Do you speak Greek?” (verse 37) to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. Possible meanings are (1) as in ULT, the commander believes that even though Paul speaks Greek, Paul is the Egyptian. “Even though you speak Greek, I still think you are the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” (2) Because Paul speaks Greek, the commander thinks that perhaps Paul is not the Egyptian. “So you speak Greek. Perhaps I was wrong to think you were that Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” It is best to retain the questions if the reader can infer one of the two meanings from them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 21 37 p5cd figs-rquestion Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις? 1 Do you know Greek? The commander uses this questions to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “So you speak Greek.” or “I didn’t know you spoke Greek.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 21 38 xx2w figs-rquestion οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων? 1 Are you not then the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness? The commander uses this question and the question “Do you speak Greek?” (verse 37) to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. This could mean: (1) as in ULT, the commander believes that even though Paul speaks Greek, Paul is the Egyptian. “Even though you speak Greek, I still think you are the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” (2) Because Paul speaks Greek, the commander thinks that perhaps Paul is not the Egyptian. “So you speak Greek. Perhaps I was wrong to think you were that Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the four thousand men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness.” It is best to retain the questions if the reader can infer one of the two meanings from them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 21 38 nxs6 figs-explicit οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος 1 Are you not then the Egyptian Shortly before Paul’s visit, an unnamed man from Egypt had launched a revolt against Rome in Jerusalem. Later he escaped into the wilderness and the commander wonders if Paul might be the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 38 tqh6 translate-numbers τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας 1 the 4,000 men Alternate translation: “the four thousand terrorists” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 21 38 p2ym τῶν σικαρίων 1 of the ‘Assassins’ This refers to a group of Jewish rebels who killed Romans and anyone who supported Romans. ACT 21 39 t6ax 0 Connecting Statement: Paul begins to defend what he did. ACT 21 39 ys84 δέομαι…σου 1 I ask you Alternate translation: “I beg you” or “I plead with you” ACT 21 39 a139 ἐπίτρεψόν μοι 1 allow me Alternate translation: “please allow me” or please permit me” -ACT 21 40 qp2q figs-abstractnouns ἐπιτρέψαντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he had given him permission The word **permission** can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: “when the commander permitted him to speak” or “after the commander allowed him to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 21 40 qp2q figs-abstractnouns ἐπιτρέψαντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he had given him permission If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **permission**, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “when the commander permitted him to speak” or “after the commander allowed him to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 21 40 a4y2 ὁ Παῦλος ἑστὼς ἐπὶ τῶν ἀναβαθμῶν 1 Paul, standing on the steps The word **steps** here refers to the steps on the stairway to the fortress. ACT 21 40 rk1y figs-explicit κατέσεισε τῇ χειρὶ τῷ λαῷ 1 motioned with his hand to the people It can be stated explicitly why Paul motioned with the hand. Alternate translation: “motioned with his hand for the people to be quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 21 40 xj6i πολλῆς δὲ σιγῆς γενομένης 1 And when there was a deep silence Alternate translation: “And when the people were completely silent” @@ -2675,7 +2665,7 @@ ACT 22 3 a8d6 ζηλωτὴς ὑπάρχων τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 being zealous ACT 22 3 dbl4 καθὼς πάντες ὑμεῖς ἐστε σήμερον 1 just as all of you are today Paul compares himself with the crowd. Alternate translation: “in the same way all of you are today” ACT 22 4 jy3z figs-metonymy ὃς ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν ἐδίωξα 1 I persecuted this Way Here, **this Way** represents the people who belonged to the group called “the Way.” Alternate translation: “I persecuted the people who belonged to this Way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 22 4 bk4c ταύτην τὴν Ὁδὸν 1 this Way This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated **the Way** in [Acts 9:2](../09/02.md). -ACT 22 4 dr8c figs-abstractnouns ἄχρι θανάτου 1 as far as death The word **death** can be translated with the verb “kill” or “die.” Alternate translation: “and I looked for ways to kill them” or “to the point of killing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 22 4 dr8c figs-abstractnouns ἄχρι θανάτου 1 as far as death If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **death**, you could express the same idea with the verb “kill” or “die.” Alternate translation: “and I looked for ways to kill them” or “to the point of killing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 22 4 zd2r δεσμεύων καὶ παραδιδοὺς εἰς φυλακὰς, ἄνδρας τε καὶ γυναῖκας 1 binding and delivering to prison both men and women Alternate translation: “tying up both men and women and taking them to prison” ACT 22 5 v2km μαρτυρεῖ 1 testifies Alternate translation: “can testify” or “can tell you” ACT 22 5 i45u παρ’ ὧν καὶ ἐπιστολὰς δεξάμενος 1 from whom also having received letters Alternate translation: “who also gave me letters” @@ -2704,7 +2694,7 @@ ACT 22 14 k417 τὸ θέλημα αὐτοῦ 1 his will Alternate translation ACT 22 14 dg8q figs-synecdoche ἀκοῦσαι φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ 1 to hear the voice from his own mouth Both **voice** and **mouth** refer to the one speaking. Alternate translation: “to hear him speak directly to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 22 15 i5q8 figs-gendernotations πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους 1 to all men Here, **men** means all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 22 16 bhg9 νῦν 1 Now Here, **now** does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows. -ACT 22 16 mmx9 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις? 1 why are you waiting? This question was asked to exhort Paul to be baptized. Alternate translation: “do not wait!” or “do not delay!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 22 16 mmx9 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις? 1 why are you waiting? This question was asked to exhort Paul to be baptized. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not wait!” or “do not delay!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 22 16 lt2i figs-activepassive βάπτισαι 1 be baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “let me baptize you” or “receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 16 zr5p figs-metaphor ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου 1 wash away your sins As washing one’s body removes dirt, calling on the name of Jesus for forgiveness cleanses one’s inner being from sin. Alternate translation: “ask forgiveness for your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 22 16 g5dq ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 having called on his name Here, **name** refers to the Lord. Alternate translation: “having called on the Lord” or “trusting in the Lord” @@ -2730,12 +2720,12 @@ ACT 22 24 pz47 figs-explicit εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθα ACT 22 24 og3n figs-activepassive εἴπας μάστιξιν ἀνετάζεσθαι αὐτὸν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “ordering his soldiers to whip Paul to force him to tell the truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 22 25 ar63 προέτειναν 1 General Information: Here the word **they** refers to the soldiers. ACT 22 25 st4k τοῖς ἱμᾶσιν 1 for the whip The whip was made from strips of leather or animal hide. -ACT 22 25 yjw3 figs-rquestion εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? 1 Is it lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and uncondemned? Paul uses this question to make the centurion check the validity of having his soldiers whip Paul. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and who was not given his legal right to a trial!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 22 26 pca7 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 What are you about to do? This question is used to urge the commander to reconsider his plan to whip Paul. Alternate translation: “You should not do this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 22 25 yjw3 figs-rquestion εἰ ἄνθρωπον Ῥωμαῖον καὶ ἀκατάκριτον, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν μαστίζειν? 1 Is it lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and uncondemned? Paul uses this question to make the centurion check the validity of having his soldiers whip Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “It is not lawful for you to whip a man who is a Roman and who was not given his legal right to a trial!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 22 26 pca7 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν? 1 What are you about to do? This question is used to urge the commander to reconsider his plan to whip Paul. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not do this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 22 27 pe31 0 General Information: Here the word “him” refers to Paul. ACT 22 27 e69y figs-go προσελθὼν…ὁ χιλίαρχος 1 having come, the commander Here, **come** can be translated as “gone.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 22 28 dr2w ἐγὼ πολλοῦ κεφαλαίου τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship with a large amount of money The captain may be making this statement because he knows how hard it is to become a Roman citizen, and he suspects Paul is not telling truth. Alternate translation: “I paid a lot of money to the Roman authorities to become a citizen of Rome” -ACT 22 28 r79c figs-abstractnouns ἐγὼ…τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship The word **citizenship** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 22 28 r79c figs-abstractnouns ἐγὼ…τὴν πολιτείαν ταύτην ἐκτησάμην 1 I bought this citizenship If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **citizenship**, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “I became a citizen by paying for it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 22 28 rly1 ἐγὼ δὲ καὶ γεγέννημαι 1 I, however, was indeed born as one If a father is a Roman citizen, then his children become Roman citizens automatically when they are born. Paul's father was a Roman. Alternate translation: “But I am a citizen by birth!” ACT 22 29 ii8p οἱ μέλλοντες…ἀνετάζειν 1 those who were about to examine Alternate translation: “the men who planned to examine” or “the men who were preparing to question” ACT 22 30 g33i 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers to the chief captain. @@ -2747,9 +2737,9 @@ ACT 23 1 jru4 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here this means “fellow Jews.” ACT 23 1 nn2q ἐγὼ πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ πεπολίτευμαι τῷ Θεῷ ἄχρι ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρας 1 I have lived as a citizen before God in all good conscience until this day Alternate translation: “I know that even to this day I have done what God has wanted me to do as a Jewish man” ACT 23 2 yz4n translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias This is the name of a man. Though this is the same name, this not the same Ananias as in [Acts 5:1](../05/01.md) nor the same Ananias as in [Acts 9:10](../09/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 23 3 igq4 figs-metaphor τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε 1 you whitewashed wall This refers to a **wall** that was painted white to make it look clean. Paul told Ananias that just as a wall can be painted to look clean, so Ananias appeared to look morally clean, but he was really full of evil intent. Alternate translation: “you wall painted white” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 23 3 un7g figs-rquestion σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι? 1 do you sit judging me by the law, yet command me to be struck, against the law? Paul uses a question to point out Ananias’ hypocrisy. Alternate translation: “you sit there to judge me by the law, yet you command me to be struck against the law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 23 3 un7g figs-rquestion σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι? 1 do you sit judging me by the law, yet command me to be struck, against the law? Paul uses a question to point out Ananias’ hypocrisy. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “you sit there to judge me by the law, yet you command me to be struck against the law.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 23 3 m6nb figs-activepassive κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι 1 command me to be struck If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. You can use the same word for **strike** as you did in the phrase “God will strike you.” Alternate translation: “command people to strike me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 23 4 lkh8 figs-rquestion τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς? 1 Are you insulting the high priest of God? The men use this question to scold Paul for what he has said in [Acts 23:3](../23/03.md). Alternate translation: “You should not insult God’s high priest!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 23 4 lkh8 figs-rquestion τὸν ἀρχιερέα τοῦ Θεοῦ λοιδορεῖς? 1 Are you insulting the high priest of God? The men use this question to scold Paul for what he has said in [Acts 23:3](../23/03.md). If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not insult God’s high priest!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 23 5 e8lg figs-activepassive γέγραπται γὰρ 1 For it is written If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “For Moses wrote in the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 5 veqe figs-explicit ἄρχοντα τοῦ λαοῦ σου, οὐκ ἐρεῖς κακῶς 1 Paul quotes from the writings of Moses. ACT 23 6 pbe1 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, **brothers** means “fellow Jews” @@ -2815,7 +2805,7 @@ ACT 23 28 lb1b 0 General Information: The word “they” refers to the group ACT 23 28 lb1c figs-you 0 General Information: The word “you” is singular and refers to Governor Felix. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 23 28 pmq7 0 Connecting Statement: The chief captain ends his letter to Governor Felix. ACT 23 29 zt4f figs-activepassive ὃν εὗρον ἐνκαλούμενον περὶ ζητημάτων τοῦ νόμου αὐτῶν 1 I learned that he was being accused concerning questions of their own law If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I learned that they were accusing him about things in their own law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 23 29 wsh2 figs-abstractnouns μηδὲν δὲ ἄξιον θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἔχοντα ἔγκλημα 1 but there was no accusation worthy of death or imprisonment The abstract nouns **accusation**, **death**, and **imprisonment** can be stated as verbs. Alternate translation: “but nobody accused him of anything that should cause Roman authorities to kill him or to send him to prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 23 29 wsh2 figs-abstractnouns μηδὲν δὲ ἄξιον θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἔχοντα ἔγκλημα 1 but there was no accusation worthy of death or imprisonment If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **accusation**, **death**, and **imprisonment**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “but nobody accused him of anything that should cause Roman authorities to kill him or to send him to prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 23 30 i2ji figs-activepassive μηνυθείσης δέ μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι 1 And when a plot was to be against the man was revealed to me If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when I later learned that there was a plot to kill this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 23 31 ifs1 translate-names 0 General Information: Here the first word “him” refers to Paul; the second use of the word “him” refers to Governor Felix. Antipatris was a city built by Herod in honor of his father, Antipater. It stood at a site located today in central Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 23 31 s9rf 0 Connecting Statement: This ends Paul’s time under arrest in Jerusalem and begins his time of arrest in Caesarea with Governor Felix. @@ -2841,10 +2831,10 @@ ACT 24 1 zm5e ἐνεφάνισαν…κατὰ τοῦ Παύλου 1 appeared ACT 24 2 e6zg figs-exclusive πολλῆς εἰρήνης τυγχάνοντες 1 We have obtained great peace Here, **we** refers to the citizens under Felix. Alternate translation: “we, the people that you govern, have obtained great peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 24 2 qw1r figs-you σοῦ…σῆς 1 General Information: Here the words **you** and **your** refers to Felix, the governor. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 24 2 sv8c καὶ διορθωμάτων γινομένων τῷ ἔθνει τούτῳ διὰ τῆς σῆς προνοίας 1 and good reforms have happened to our nation through your foresight Alternate translation: “and your planning has greatly improved our nation” -ACT 24 3 r5jl figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας 1 with all thankfulness The word **thankfulness** is an abstract noun. It can be stated as an adjective or verb. Alternate translation: “so we are very thankful and we welcome everything that you do” or “so we thank you very much and welcome everything that you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 24 3 r5jl figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης εὐχαριστίας 1 with all thankfulness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **thankfulness**, you could express the same idea with an adjective or verb. Alternate translation: “so we are very thankful and we welcome everything that you do” or “so we thank you very much and welcome everything that you do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 24 3 q3fj κράτιστε Φῆλιξ 1 most excellent Felix Felix was the Roman governor over the whole region. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Acts 23:25](../23/25.md). Alternate translation: “Governor Felix who deserves greatest honor” ACT 24 4 tyq8 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The word “we” refers to Ananias, certain elders, and Tertullus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 24 4 jww2 ἵνα δὲ μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον σε ἐνκόπτω 1 However, in order that we may not bother you any longer Possible meanings are (1) “so that I will not take up too much of your time” or (2) “so that I will not tire you” +ACT 24 4 jww2 ἵνα δὲ μὴ ἐπὶ πλεῖον σε ἐνκόπτω 1 However, in order that we may not bother you any longer This could mean: (1) “so that I will not take up too much of your time” or (2) “so that I will not tire you” ACT 24 4 xfm5 ἀκοῦσαί…ἡμῶν συντόμως, τῇ σῇ ἐπιεικείᾳ 1 to briefly listen to us in your kindness Alternate translation: “kindly listen to my short speech” ACT 24 5 i1qs εὑρόντες…τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον λοιμὸν 1 we have found this man to be a troublemaker Alternate translation: “we have learned that Paul is always causing trouble” ACT 24 5 k1v1 figs-hyperbole πᾶσι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις τοῖς κατὰ τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 among all the Jews who are throughout the world The word **all** here is probably an exaggeration used to strengthen their accusation against Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -2866,7 +2856,7 @@ ACT 24 14 k79p ὅτι κατὰ τὴν Ὁδὸν 1 that according to the Way ACT 24 14 rqu3 λέγουσιν αἵρεσιν 1 they call a sect This is a smaller group of people within a larger group. Tertullus considers the Christians to be a small group within Judaism. See how you translated **sect** in [Acts 24:5](../24/05.md). ACT 24 14 cg73 οὕτως λατρεύω τῷ πατρῴῳ Θεῷ 1 in that way I serve the God of our fathers Paul uses the phrase “in that way” to mean that he, as a believer in Jesus, serves God just as their Jewish ancestors did. He is not leading a **sect** or teaching something new that is opposed to their ancient religion. ACT 24 15 nv5a καὶ αὐτοὶ 1 also these men Here, **these men** refers to the Jews who are accusing Paul in court. Alternate translation: “the same as these men” -ACT 24 15 qza8 figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασιν μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι, δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων 1 that there is going to be a resurrection of both the righteous and of the unrighteous The abstract noun **resurrection** can be stated with the verb “resurrect.” Alternate translation: “that God will resurrect all who have died, both the righteous and the unrighteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 24 15 qza8 figs-abstractnouns ἀνάστασιν μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι, δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων 1 that there is going to be a resurrection of both the righteous and of the unrighteous If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you could express the same idea with the verb “resurrect.” Alternate translation: “that God will resurrect all who have died, both the righteous and the unrighteous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 24 15 x1yd figs-nominaladj δικαίων τε καὶ ἀδίκων 1 of both the righteous and the unrighteous These nominal adjectives refer to **righteous** people and **unrighteous** people. AT “both of righteous people and unrighteous people” or “both of those who have done what is right and those who have done what is evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 24 16 sfw4 αὐτὸς ἀσκῶ…διὰ παντός 1 I myself always strive Alternate translation: “I myself always work hard” or “I always do my best” ACT 24 16 kcg8 figs-metonymy ἀπρόσκοπον συνείδησιν ἔχειν πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν 1 to have a blameless conscience before God Here, **conscience** refers to a person’s inner morality that chooses between right and wrong. Alternate translation: “to be blameless before God” or “to always do what is right before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2880,7 +2870,7 @@ ACT 24 19 ntg3 εἴ τι ἔχοιεν 1 if they have anything Alternate trans ACT 24 20 npt5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul finishes responding to Governor Felix about the charges brought against him. ACT 24 20 ag5d αὐτοὶ 1 these This refers to the members of the council who were present in Jerusalem at Paul’s trial. ACT 24 20 hnt9 εἰπάτωσαν, τί εὗρον ἀδίκημα 1 let … say what wrong they found Alternate translation: “let … prove what I did wrong” -ACT 24 21 ds1s figs-abstractnouns περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 concerning the resurrection of the dead If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you can express the idea as “God brings back to life.” Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will bring back to life those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 24 21 ds1s figs-abstractnouns περὶ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 concerning the resurrection of the dead If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **resurrection**, you can express the same idea as “God brings back to life.” Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will bring back to life those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 24 21 d2lm figs-activepassive ἐγὼ κρίνομαι σήμερον ἐφ’ ὑμῶν 1 I am being judged before you today If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “you are judging me today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 24 22 w1tn translate-names 0 General Information: Felix is the Roman governor of the area who resides at Caesarea. See how you translated this name in [Acts 23:24](../23/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 24 22 a87f τῆς Ὁδοῦ 1 the Way This is a title for Christianity. See how you translated this in [Acts 9:2](../09/02.md). @@ -2902,7 +2892,7 @@ ACT 25 intro b6uk 0 # Acts 25 General Notes

## Special concepts in thi ACT 25 1 c84u 0 General Information: Festus becomes the governor of Caesarea. See how you translated this name in [Acts 24:27](../24/27.md). ACT 25 1 tj76 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to be a prisoner in Caesarea. ACT 25 1 w8h3 οὖν 1 then This word marks the beginning of a new event in the story. -ACT 25 1 i7t9 Φῆστος…ἐπιβὰς τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ 1 Festus … having arrived in the province Possible meanings are (1) Festus arrived in the area to begin his rule or (2) Festus simply arrived in the area. +ACT 25 1 i7t9 Φῆστος…ἐπιβὰς τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ 1 Festus … having arrived in the province This could mean: (1) Festus arrived in the area to begin his rule or (2) Festus simply arrived in the area. ACT 25 1 zz4l ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπὸ Καισαρείας 1 went from Caesarea up to Jerusalem The phrase **went up** is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea. ACT 25 2 qnc8 figs-metaphor ἐνεφάνισάν…αὐτῷ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρῶτοι τῶν Ἰουδαίων κατὰ τοῦ Παύλου 1 the chief priest and the most prominent of the Jews made clear to him the things against Paul This speaks about accusations as if they were an object that a person could bring to someone else. Alternate translation: “the chief priest and the important Jews accused Paul to Festus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 25 2 uj5p παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν 1 they begged him Here the word **him** refers to Festus. @@ -2930,7 +2920,7 @@ ACT 25 10 p78y figs-activepassive ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρο ACT 25 11 el9d figs-hypo εἰ μὲν οὖν ἀδικῶ καὶ ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι, οὐ παραιτοῦμαι τὸ ἀποθανεῖν; εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου, οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι 1 Therefore, if I have done wrong and have done anything worthy of death, I do not refuse to die. But if there is nothing of which they can accuse me, no one is able to hand me over to them Paul is stating a hypothetical situation. If he were guilty, he would accept the punishment, but he knows that he is not guilty. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) ACT 25 11 ta55 ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι 1 have done anything worthy of death Alternate translation: “have done some wrong that deserves the death penalty” ACT 25 11 hxr1 εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου 1 But if there is nothing of which they can accuse me Alternate translation: “But if the charges against me are not true” -ACT 25 11 hr23 οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι 1 no one is able to hand me over to them Possible meanings are (1) Festus does not have the legal authority to hand Paul over to these false accusers or (2) Paul was saying that if he has done nothing wrong, the governor should not give into the request of the Jews. +ACT 25 11 hr23 οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι 1 no one is able to hand me over to them This could mean: (1) Festus does not have the legal authority to hand Paul over to these false accusers or (2) Paul was saying that if he has done nothing wrong, the governor should not give into the request of the Jews. ACT 25 11 b1bf Καίσαρα ἐπικαλοῦμαι 1 I appeal to Caesar Alternate translation: “I ask that I go before Caesar so he himself can judge me” ACT 25 12 t96z μετὰ τοῦ συμβουλίου 1 with the council This is not the Sanhedrin that is referred to as **council** throughout Acts. This is a political council in the Roman government. Alternate translation: “with his own government advisors” ACT 25 13 izu8 writing-participants Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη 1 General Information: King Agrippa and Bernice are new people in the story. Though he ruled over only a few territories, King Agrippa is the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice is Agrippa’s sister.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -2941,7 +2931,7 @@ ACT 25 13 ukd3 ἀσπασάμενοι τὸν Φῆστον 1 paid their respe ACT 25 14 x8jf figs-activepassive ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος 1 There is a certain man who has been left behind by Felix, a prisoner If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “When Felix left office, he left a man in prison here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 25 14 z7yw Φήλικος 1 Felix Felix was the Roman governor of the area who resided in Caesarea. See how you translated this name in [Acts 23:24](../23/24.md). ACT 25 15 b6hx figs-metaphor περὶ οὗ…ἐνεφάνισαν 1 brought charges concerning him To charge someone in court is spoken of as if it were an object that a person brings to court. Alternate translation: “spoke to me against this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 25 15 hyp5 figs-abstractnouns αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην 1 requesting a judgment against him The abstract noun “judgment” can be expressed as a verb. Alternate translation: “asking me to judge him” or “requesting that I judge him to be guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 25 15 hyp5 figs-abstractnouns αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην 1 requesting a judgment against him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **judgment**, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “asking me to judge him” or “requesting that I judge him to be guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 25 16 e4tk figs-metaphor χαρίζεσθαί τινα ἄνθρωπον 1 to hand over any man Here, **hand over** represents sending someone to people who will punish or kill him. Alternate translation: “to let someone punish anyone” or “to condemn anyone to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 25 16 xjb4 figs-idiom πρὶν ἢ ὁ κατηγορούμενος, κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους 1 before the one who is accused may have his accusers face to face Here, **have his accusers face to face** is an idiom that means to meet in person with the people who accuse him. Alternate translation: “before the person whom others have accused of a crime had met directly with those who accused him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 25 17 z6g2 οὖν 1 Therefore Fetus had just said that an accused man should be able to face his accusers and make his defense. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” @@ -2967,19 +2957,19 @@ ACT 25 25 g856 τὸν Σεβαστὸν 1 to the emperor The **emperor** was t ACT 25 26 jcq2 προήγαγον αὐτὸν ἐφ’ ὑμῶν, καὶ μάλιστα ἐπὶ σοῦ, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα 1 I have him before you, and especially before you, King Agrippa Alternate translation: “I have brought Paul to all of you, but especially to you, King Agrippa.” ACT 25 26 rhy2 ὅπως…σχῶ τι γράψω 1 so that … I might have something to write Alternate translation: “so that … I will have something else to write” or “so that … I will know what I should write” ACT 25 27 txs6 figs-doublenegatives ἄλογον…μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ…σημᾶναι 1 it seems unreasonable for me to send a prisoner and to not state The negative words **unreasonable** and **to not** can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me that if I send a prisoner then I should also state” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -ACT 25 27 xm65 τὰς κατ’ αὐτοῦ αἰτίας 1 the charges against him Possible meanings are (1) the accusations that the Jewish leaders have brought against him or (2) the charges under Roman law that apply to Paul’s case. +ACT 25 27 xm65 τὰς κατ’ αὐτοῦ αἰτίας 1 the charges against him This could mean: (1) the accusations that the Jewish leaders have brought against him or (2) the charges under Roman law that apply to Paul’s case. ACT 26 intro e2q6 0 # Acts 26 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This is the third account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 22](../22/01.md))

Paul told the King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and that the governor should not punish him for that.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Light and darkness

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]]) ACT 26 1 b34d 0 Connecting Statement: Festus has brought Paul before King Agrippa. In verse 2, Paul gives his defense to King Agrippa. ACT 26 1 gz9f Ἀγρίππας 1 Agrippa **Agrippa** was the current reigning king in Palestine, though he ruled over only a few territories. See how you translated this name in [Acts 25:13](../25/13.md). ACT 26 1 wme6 ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα 1 having stretched out his hand Alternate translation: “holding out his hand” or “gesturing with his hand” -ACT 26 1 vni8 figs-abstractnouns ἀπελογεῖτο 1 made his defense The abstract noun **defense** can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: “began to defend himself against those who were accusing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 26 1 vni8 figs-abstractnouns ἀπελογεῖτο 1 made his defense If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **defense**, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “began to defend himself against those who were accusing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 26 2 ha47 ἥγημαι ἐμαυτὸν μακάριον 1 I consider myself blessed Paul said he was **blessed** because he considered his appearance before Agrippa to be an opportunity to speak about the gospel. ACT 26 2 xhz1 ἀπολογεῖσθαι 1 to make my defense Alternate translation: “to defend myself” or “to explain why I am innocent of these charges” ACT 26 2 mdq2 figs-activepassive περὶ πάντων ὧν ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 Concerning all the things of which I am accused by the Jews If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “About the crimes that the Jews are saying that I committed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 26 2 cbr3 figs-synecdoche Ἰουδαίων 1 the Jews This does not mean all **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 26 3 kns2 figs-explicit ζητημάτων 1 their controversies You can make explicit what kinds of **controversies** Paul is speaking about. Alternate translation: “questions about religious matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 26 4 t8bg figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 all the Jews This is a generalization. Possible meanings are (1) this refers to Jews in general who knew about Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jews” or (2) this refers to Pharisees who knew Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 26 4 x96h ἐν τῷ ἔθνει μου 1 among my nation Possible meanings are (1) among his own people, not necessarily in the geographical land of Israel or (2) in the land of Israel. +ACT 26 4 t8bg figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 all the Jews This is a generalization. This could mean: (1) this refers to Jews in general who knew about Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jews” or (2) this refers to Pharisees who knew Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 26 4 x96h ἐν τῷ ἔθνει μου 1 among my nation This could mean: (1) among his own people, not necessarily in the geographical land of Israel or (2) in the land of Israel. ACT 26 5 y9a1 τὴν ἀκριβεστάτην αἵρεσιν τῆς ἡμετέρας θρησκείας 1 the strictest sect of our religion Alternate translation: “a group within Judaism who live by very strict rules” ACT 26 6 xkp9 figs-you 0 General Information: Here “you” is plural and refers to the people who were listening to Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 26 6 s9kr νῦν 1 Now This word marks a shift from Paul discussing his past to talking about himself in the present. @@ -2989,12 +2979,12 @@ ACT 26 7 hnf1 figs-metonymy εἰς ἣν τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶ ACT 26 7 apf2 figs-metaphor εἰς ἣν…ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι 1 to which … hope to attain This speaks about a promise as if it were a destination that can be reached. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 26 7 kzg4 figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν λατρεῦον 1 serving night and day The extremes **night** and **day** mean they “worshiped God continually.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) ACT 26 7 c4lm figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews This does not mean all **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “by the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 26 8 de83 figs-rquestion τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει? 1 Why is it judged unbelievable among you that God raises the dead? Paul uses a question to challenge the Jews present. They believe God can raise the dead but do not think God brought Jesus back to life. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “None of you think it is unbelievable that God raises the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 26 8 de83 figs-rquestion τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει? 1 Why is it judged unbelievable among you that God raises the dead? Paul uses a question to challenge the Jews present. They believe God can raise the dead but do not think God brought Jesus back to life. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “None of you think it is unbelievable that God raises the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 26 8 ukk6 νεκροὺς ἐγείρει 1 raises the dead Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “makes dead people come alive again” ACT 26 9 hm33 μὲν οὖν 1 Then Paul uses this word to mark another shift in his defense. He is now beginning to describe how he formerly persecuted Jesus’ people. ACT 26 9 r4df figs-metonymy πρὸς τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ…ἐναντία 1 opposed to the name of Jesus The word **name** here stands for the teaching about the person. Alternate translation: “to stop people from teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 26 10 nys7 figs-activepassive ἀναιρουμένων…αὐτῶν, κατήνεγκα ψῆφον 1 when they were being put to death, I cast my vote against them If your language does not use this passive form, you can state the phrase **were being put to death** in active form. Alternate translation: “I voted in agreement with the other Jewish leaders to condemn the believers to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 26 11 rri6 πολλάκις τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς 1 often punishing them Possible meanings are (1) Paul punished some believers many times or (2) Paul punished many different believers. +ACT 26 11 rri6 πολλάκις τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς 1 often punishing them This could mean: (1) Paul punished some believers many times or (2) Paul punished many different believers. ACT 26 12 p55i 0 Connecting Statement: While talking to King Agrippa, Paul tells about when the Lord spoke with him. ACT 26 12 us8d ἐν οἷς 1 While doing this Paul uses this phrase to mark another shift in his defense. He is now telling about when he saw Jesus and became his disciple. ACT 26 12 h3ic ἐν οἷς 1 While This word is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time. In this case, Paul went to Damascus during the time when he persecuted Christians. @@ -3006,7 +2996,7 @@ ACT 26 15 h2ws 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues giving his defense to Ki ACT 26 18 fk1k figs-metaphor ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν 1 to open their eyes Helping people to understand the truth is spoken of as if a person were literally helping someone to open his eyes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 26 18 gw8f figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς 1 to turn from darkness to light Helping someone to stop doing what is evil and to start trusting and obeying God is spoken of as if the person is literally leading someone out of a dark place into a place of light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 26 18 q3h8 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ…τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 to turn from … from the power of Satan to God Helping someone to stop obeying Satan and to start obeying God is spoken of as if a person were literally turning a person and taking them from the place where Satan rules and leading him to the place where God rules. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 26 18 m65i figs-abstractnouns τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ 1 for them to receive forgiveness of sins and The abstract noun **forgiveness** can be stated as the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “so that God may forgive their sins and give them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 26 18 m65i figs-abstractnouns τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ 1 for them to receive forgiveness of sins and If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “so that God may forgive their sins and give them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 26 18 m9ve figs-metaphor κλῆρον 1 an inheritance The blessings that Jesus gives to those who believe in him are spoken of as if they were **an inheritance** that children receive from their father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 26 18 c5ij figs-metaphor τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 those who have been sanctified by faith that is in me Jesus choosing some people to belong to him is spoken of as if he set them apart from other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 26 18 bgc5 πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 by faith that is in me Here Paul finishes quoting the Lord. Alternate translation: “because they believe in me” @@ -3014,7 +3004,7 @@ ACT 26 19 ljx2 ὅθεν 1 Therefore Paul had just explained what the Lord had ACT 26 19 zv2u figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ 1 I did not disobedient to the heavenly vision You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “I obeyed the heavenly vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 26 19 sn4h figs-metonymy τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ 1 to the heavenly vision This refers to what the person in the **vision** told Paul. Alternate translation: “to what the person from heaven told me in the vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 26 20 fei4 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 to turn to God To start trusting God is spoken of as if a person turns to start walking toward God. Alternate translation: “to trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 26 20 h1v2 figs-abstractnouns ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας 1 doing deeds worthy of repentance The abstract noun **repentance** can be stated as the verb “repented.” Alternate translation: “and start doing good deeds to show they truly have repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 26 20 h1v2 figs-abstractnouns ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας 1 doing deeds worthy of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repented.” Alternate translation: “and start doing good deeds to show they truly have repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 26 21 tl6t figs-synecdoche Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews This does not mean all of **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “some Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 26 22 n5hn 0 Connecting Statement: Paul finishes giving his defense to King Agrippa. ACT 26 22 t8f4 μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ 1 to both small and great Here, **small** and **great** are used together to mean “all people.” Alternate translation: “to all people, whether common or great” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism) @@ -3036,8 +3026,8 @@ ACT 26 26 xqr1 figs-litotes λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων ACT 26 26 tta8 figs-activepassive λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ 1 that none of this are hidden from him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he is aware of this” or “you are aware of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 26 26 v1uu figs-activepassive οὐ…ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο 2 this was not done in a corner If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “this has not happened in a corner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 26 26 i5wg figs-metaphor ἐν γωνίᾳ 1 in a corner This means doing something in secret as if a person went and did something in the **corner** of a room where no one can see him. Alternate translation: “in a dark place” or “in secret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 26 27 a4a2 figs-rquestion πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις? 1 Do you believe the prophets, King Agrippa? Paul asks this question to remind Agrippa that Agrippa already believes what the prophets said about Jesus. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “You already believe what the Jewish prophets said, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 26 28 y8qq figs-rquestion ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι 1 In a short time, are you persuading me to become a Christian? Agrippa asks this question to show Paul that he cannot convince Agrippa so easily without more proof. This can be expressed as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you do not think you can convince me so easily to believe in Jesus!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 26 27 a4a2 figs-rquestion πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις? 1 Do you believe the prophets, King Agrippa? Paul asks this question to remind Agrippa that Agrippa already believes what the prophets said about Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “You already believe what the Jewish prophets said, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +ACT 26 28 y8qq figs-rquestion ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι 1 In a short time, are you persuading me to become a Christian? Agrippa asks this question to show Paul that he cannot convince Agrippa so easily without more proof. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you do not think you can convince me so easily to believe in Jesus!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 26 29 k7kq figs-metonymy παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτων 1 but without these chains Here, **chains** stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “but, of course, I do no want you to be a prisoner like I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 26 30 k7jh 0 General Information: Bernice was the sister of King Agrippa ([Acts 25:13](../25/13.md)). ACT 26 30 gaq5 0 Connecting Statement: This ends Paul’s time before King Agrippa. @@ -3050,19 +3040,19 @@ ACT 27 1 dyf5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul, as a prisoner, begins his journey ACT 27 1 b2yz figs-activepassive ὡς…ἐκρίθη 1 when it was decided If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the king and the governor decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 27 1 yv84 εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν 1 to Italy **Italy** is the name of the province Rome was in. See how you translated **Italy** in [Acts 18:2](../18/02.md). ACT 27 1 s6ny παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας, ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ, σπείρης Σεβαστῆς 1 they handed over both Paul and some other prisoners to a centurion named Julius of the Augustan regiment Alternate translation: “they put a centurion named Julius, of the Augustan regiment, in charge of Paul and some other prisoners” -ACT 27 1 k52u παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας 1 they handed over both Paul and some other prisoners Possible meanings are that (1) **they** refers to the governor and the king or (2) **they** refers to other Roman officials. +ACT 27 1 k52u παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας 1 they handed over both Paul and some other prisoners This could mean: (1) **they** refers to the governor and the king or (2) **they** refers to other Roman officials. ACT 27 1 un2s translate-names ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ 1 to a centurion named Julius Julius is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 27 1 d22f translate-names σπείρης Σεβαστῆς 1 of the Augustan regiment This was the name of the battalion or army from which the centurion came. Some versions translate this as “the Imperial regiment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 27 2 efe4 translate-names Ἀδραμυντηνῷ 1 General Information: **Adramyttium** was a city possibly located on the west coast of modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 27 2 dnr9 figs-metonymy ἐπιβάντες…πλοίῳ…μέλλοντι πλεῖν 1 having boarded a ship … being about to sail Here, **ship … being about to sail** stands for the crew that will sail the ship. Alternate translation: “having boarded a ship … with a crew that was about to sail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 27 2 tol6 figs-exclusive ἀνήχθημεν…ἡμῖν 1 The words **we** and **us** include the author of Acts, Paul, and the others traveling with Paul, but not the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 27 2 fqy2 πλοίῳ Ἀδραμυντηνῷ 1 a ship from Adramyttium Possible meanings are (1) a **ship** that had come from Adramyttium or (2) a **ship** that was registered or licensed in Adramyttium. +ACT 27 2 fqy2 πλοίῳ Ἀδραμυντηνῷ 1 a ship from Adramyttium This could mean: (1) a **ship** that had come from Adramyttium or (2) a **ship** that was registered or licensed in Adramyttium. ACT 27 2 f8pf μέλλοντι πλεῖν 1 being about to sail Alternate translation: “going to sail soon” or “departing soon” ACT 27 2 m3ps ἀνήχθημεν 1 we set sail Alternate translation: “we began our journey on the sea” ACT 27 2 h3uy Ἀριστάρχου 1 Aristarchus Aristarchus came from Macedonia but had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in [Acts 19:29](../19/29.md). ACT 27 3 r71e figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 27 3 u6lt φιλανθρώπως…ὁ Ἰούλιος τῷ Παύλῳ χρησάμενος 1 Julius having treated Paul kindly See how you translated **Julius** in [Acts 27:1](../27/01.md). Alternate translation: “Julius having treated Paul with a friendly concern” -ACT 27 3 rp73 figs-abstractnouns πρὸς τοὺς φίλους πορευθέντι, ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν 1 to go to his friends to receive their care The abstract noun **care** can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: “to go to his friends so they could care for him” or “to go to his friends so they could help him with whatever he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 27 3 rp73 figs-abstractnouns πρὸς τοὺς φίλους πορευθέντι, ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν 1 to go to his friends to receive their care If **, you could express the same idea with** can be stated as a verb. Alternate translation: “to go to his friends so they could care for him” or “to go to his friends so they could help him with whatever he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 27 4 d4hg ἀναχθέντες, ὑπεπλεύσαμεν 1 having put to sea, we sailed under Alternate translation: “we started sailing and went under” ACT 27 4 mjt8 ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κύπρον 1 we sailed under Cyprus Here, **under Cyprus** means they sailed along the side of that island that blocks the strong wind, so the ship was not forced off its course. ACT 27 5 g1t7 Παμφυλίαν 1 Pamphylia This was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). @@ -3167,21 +3157,21 @@ ACT 28 2 e7w6 οἵ…βάρβαροι 1 the native people Alternate translatio ACT 28 2 v8yh figs-metaphor παρεῖχαν οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν ἡμῖν 1 offered to us not ordinary kindness Being kind to someone is spoken of as if it were an object that someone offers. Alternate translation: “were especially kind to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 28 2 r7jy figs-litotes οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν 1 not just ordinary kindness This phrase is used to emphasize the opposite of what is said. Alternate translation: “a great deal of kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 28 2 z9cp ἅψαντες…πυρὰν 1 having lit a fire Alternate translation: “when they put together twigs and branches and burned them” -ACT 28 2 itw2 προσελάβοντο πάντας ἡμᾶς 1 they welcomed us all Possible meanings are (1) “welcomed all of the people from the ship” or (2) “welcomed Paul and all his companions.” +ACT 28 2 itw2 προσελάβοντο πάντας ἡμᾶς 1 they welcomed us all This could mean: (1) “welcomed all of the people from the ship” or (2) “welcomed Paul and all his companions.” ACT 28 3 g4ad ἔχιδνα ἀπὸ τῆς θέρμης ἐξελθοῦσα 1 a viper, having come out from the heat Alternate translation: “a poisonous snake, driven from the bundle of sticks by the heat of the fire” ACT 28 3 xmx4 καθῆψε τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 fastened on to his hand Alternate translation: “bit Paul’s hand and did not let go” ACT 28 4 ye7h πάντως φονεύς ἐστιν ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 This man certainly is a murderer Alternate translation: “For sure, this man is a murderer” or “This man is truly a murderer” ACT 28 4 ma1b figs-explicit ἡ δίκη 1 justice The word **justice** refers to the name of a god that they worshiped. Alternate translation: “the god called Justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 28 5 q5i3 ἀποτινάξας τὸ θηρίον εἰς τὸ πῦρ 1 shaking off the snake into the fire Alternate translation: “after shaking his hand so that the snake fell from his hand into the fire” ACT 28 5 asr8 ἔπαθεν οὐδὲν κακόν 1 suffered no harm Alternate translation: “was not hurt at all” -ACT 28 6 m11i πίμπρασθαι 1 to become inflamed Possible meanings are (1) his body would swell because of the snake venom or (2) he would become very hot with fever. +ACT 28 6 m11i πίμπρασθαι 1 to become inflamed This could mean: (1) his body would swell because of the snake venom or (2) he would become very hot with fever. ACT 28 6 i6i6 figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον 1 nothing unusual happening to him You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “everything about him was as it should be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 28 6 u81u figs-metaphor μεταβαλόμενοι 1 having changed their minds To think differently about a situation is spoken of as if a person is changing his mind. Alternate translation: “thinking again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 28 6 cfe9 figs-quotations ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν 1 they said that he was a god You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘This man must be a god.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) ACT 28 6 d1rj ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν 1 they said that he was a god Perhaps there was a belief that someone who lived after a poisonous snake bite was divine or a god. ACT 28 7 f4sa figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the words “us” and we” refer to Paul, Luke, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 28 7 r95r ἐν δὲ τοῖς περὶ τὸν τόπον ἐκεῖνον 1 Now in the area near that same place **Now** is used to introduce a new person or event in the account. -ACT 28 7 wx6t τῷ πρώτῳ τῆς νήσου 1 of the most important man of the island Possible meanings are (1) the main leader of the people or (2) someone who was the most important person on the island, perhaps because of his wealth. +ACT 28 7 wx6t τῷ πρώτῳ τῆς νήσου 1 of the most important man of the island This could mean: (1) the main leader of the people or (2) someone who was the most important person on the island, perhaps because of his wealth. ACT 28 7 wh2d translate-names ὀνόματι Ποπλίῳ 1 named Publius This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 28 8 g12t writing-background ἐγένετο δὲ, τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι 1 And it happened that the father of Publius was lying sick, having been afflicted with fever and dysentery This is background information about Publius’ father that is important to understanding the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 28 8 m154 figs-activepassive πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον 1 having been afflicted with fever and dysentery If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “was suffering from fever and dysentery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -3192,7 +3182,7 @@ ACT 28 10 ydg4 πολλαῖς τιμαῖς ἐτίμησαν ἡμᾶς 1 hon ACT 28 11 jc5t figs-explicit 0 General Information: The Twin Brothers refers to Castor and Pollux, the twin sons of Zeus, a Greek god. They were thought to be protectors of ships. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 28 11 be1c 0 Connecting Statement: Paul’s journey to Rome continues. ACT 28 11 qi6e παρακεχειμακότι ἐν τῇ νήσῳ 1 that had wintered at the island Alternate translation: “that the crew left at the island for the cold season” -ACT 28 11 cm2t ἐν πλοίῳ…Ἀλεξανδρίνῳ 1 in an Alexandrian ship Possible meanings are this refers to (1) a ship that came from Alexandria, or (2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Alexandria. +ACT 28 11 cm2t ἐν πλοίῳ…Ἀλεξανδρίνῳ 1 in an Alexandrian ship This could mean: this refers to (1) a ship that came from Alexandria, or (2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Alexandria. ACT 28 11 em5p παρασήμῳ Διοσκούροις 1 with a “Twin Gods” figurehead On the bow of the ship, there was a carving of the two idols called “the Twin Gods.” Their names were Castor and Pollux. ACT 28 12 w5c6 translate-names Συρακούσας 1 Syracuse **Syracuse** is a city on the southeast coast of the modern-day island of Sicily, just southwest of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 28 13 se8v translate-names 0 General Information: The Market of Appius and The Three Taverns was a popular market and inn on the main highway called the Appian Way, about 50 kilometers south of the city of Rome. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -3219,7 +3209,7 @@ ACT 28 19 lr96 figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the Jews This does no ACT 28 19 zk8f ἀντιλεγόντων 1 objecting Alternate translation: “complaining about what the Roman authorities wanted to do” ACT 28 19 n6vf figs-activepassive ἠναγκάσθην ἐπικαλέσασθαι Καίσαρα 1 I was forced to appeal to Caesar If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I had to ask for Caesar to judge me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 28 19 e7gr figs-metonymy οὐχ ὡς τοῦ ἔθνους μου ἔχων τι κατηγορεῖν 1 not as if I have anything to accuse my nation Here, **nation** stands for the people. Alternate translation: “but it was not because I wanted to accuse the people of my nation before Caesar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 28 20 b1fd τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 the hope of Israel Possible meanings are (1) the people of Israel confidently expect the Messiah to come or (2) the people of Israel confidently expect God to bring those who have died back to life. +ACT 28 20 b1fd τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 the hope of Israel This could mean: (1) the people of Israel confidently expect the Messiah to come or (2) the people of Israel confidently expect God to bring those who have died back to life. ACT 28 20 pgr8 figs-metonymy τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι 1 I am bound with this chain Here, **bound with this chain** stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I am a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 28 20 n3s7 figs-metonymy τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 of Israel Here, **Israel** stands for the people. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 28 21 x5d5 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the words “We,” “we,” and “us” refer to the Jewish leaders in Rome. (See: [Acts 28:17](../28/17.md) and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 5e25254afc229e842caef9c2ef80e0d81a38d88e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Tue, 5 Apr 2022 14:22:10 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 10/15] Updates to Matthew note format (#2384) Co-authored-by: lrsallee Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2384 --- en_tn_41-MAT.tsv | 75 +++++++++++++++++++++--------------------------- 1 file changed, 32 insertions(+), 43 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv index 31149a2647..e897e776e8 100644 --- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv @@ -796,7 +796,7 @@ MAT 10 2 sc7b translate-ordinal πρῶτος 1 first This is **first** in order MAT 10 3 g6eg Μαθθαῖος ὁ τελώνης 1 Matthew the tax collector Alternate translation: “Matthew, who was a tax collector” MAT 10 4 n4st ὁ Καναναῖος 1 the Zealot The word **Zealot** could be: (1) a title that shows that he was part of the group of people who wanted to free the Jewish people from Roman rule. Alternate translation: “the patriot” or “the nationalist” (2) a description that shows that he was zealous for God to be honored. Alternate translation: “the zealous one” or “the passionate one” MAT 10 4 kmp2 ὁ καὶ παραδοὺς αὐτόν 1 who also betrayed him Alternate translation: “who would betray Jesus” -MAT 10 5 sn9v figs-events 0 General Information: Although verse 5 begins by saying that he sent out the twelve, Jesus gives these instructions before sending them out. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) +MAT 10 5 sn9v figs-events 0 General Information: Although this verse begins by saying that Jesus sent out the twelve, he gives these instructions before sending them out. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) MAT 10 5 c46d τούτους τοὺς δώδεκα ἀπέστειλεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 1 These Twelve Jesus sent out Alternate translation: “Jesus sent out these twelve men” or “It was these twelve men whom Jesus sent out” MAT 10 5 yix4 ἀπέστειλεν 1 sent out Jesus **sent** them **out** for a particular purpose. MAT 10 5 ryl4 παραγγείλας αὐτοῖς 1 having instructed them Alternate translation: “having told them what they needed to do” or “having commanded them” @@ -813,7 +813,6 @@ MAT 10 9 a4xx figs-metonymy χρυσὸν, μηδὲ ἄργυρον, μηδὲ MAT 10 9 b4m7 τὰς ζώνας 1 purses People at that time carried money in their **belts**. A belt is a long strip of cloth or leather worn around the waist. It was often wide enough that it could be folded and used to carry money. lf your readers would not use a belt for this purpose, you can express this with the word for whatever they use to carry money. MAT 10 10 kia9 πήραν 1 a bag This could either be any **bag** used to carry things on a journey, or a bag used by someone to collect food or money. MAT 10 10 i2ex δύο χιτῶνας 1 two tunics Use the same word you used for **tunic** in [5:40](../05/40.md). -MAT 10 10 ei4d ὁ ἐργάτης 1 a laborer a worker MAT 10 10 m97h figs-synecdoche τῆς τροφῆς αὐτοῦ 1 of his food Here, **food** refers to anything a person needs. Alternate translation: “of what he needs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 10 11 b7ig εἰς ἣν δ’ ἂν πόλιν ἢ κώμην εἰσέλθητε 1 But whatever city or village you might enter into Alternate translation: “But whenever you enter a city or village” or “But when you go into any city or village” MAT 10 11 p4ln πόλιν…κώμην 1 city … village See how you translated **city** and **village** in [9:35](../09/35.md). @@ -830,7 +829,7 @@ MAT 10 14 m8e9 καὶ ὃς ἂν μὴ δέξηται ὑμᾶς, μηδὲ MAT 10 14 w5py figs-you ὑμᾶς…ὑμῶν 1 you … your Here, **you** and **your** are plural and refer to the twelve apostles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 10 14 z826 figs-metonymy ἀκούσῃ τοὺς λόγους ὑμῶν 1 listen to your words Here, **words** refers to what the disciples say. Alternate translation: “listen to your message” or “listen to what you have to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 10 14 hi3i πόλεως 1 city You should translate **city** the same way you did in [10:11](../10/11.md). -MAT 10 14 i5mc translate-symaction ἐκτινάξατε τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ὑμῶν 1 shake off the dust from your feet This is a sign that God has rejected the people of that house or city. Alternate translation: “shake the dust off your feet as you leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +MAT 10 14 i5mc translate-symaction ἐκτινάξατε τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ὑμῶν 1 shake off the dust from your feet This action is a sign that God has rejected the people of that house or city. Alternate translation: “shake the dust off your feet as you leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) MAT 10 15 pk4f ἀμὴν, λέγω ὑμῖν 1 Truly I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. Alternate translation: “I tell you the truth” MAT 10 15 d6ib ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται 1 it will be more tolerable Alternate translation: “the suffering will be less” MAT 10 15 sg3c figs-metonymy γῇ Σοδόμων καὶ Γομόρρων 1 for the land of Sodom and Gomorrah This refers to the people who lived in **Sodom and Gomorrah**. Alternate translation: “the people who lived in the cities of Sodom and Gomorrah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -850,9 +849,9 @@ MAT 10 19 qcs3 figs-you ὑμᾶς…μὴ μεριμνήσητε…λαλήση MAT 10 19 qzd2 μὴ μεριμνήσητε 1 you should not be anxious about Alternate translation: “you should not worry about” MAT 10 19 ien3 figs-hendiadys πῶς ἢ τί λαλήσητε 1 how or what you should speak The two ideas **how** and **what** may be combined: “what you are to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) MAT 10 19 l7rb figs-activepassive δοθήσεται γὰρ ὑμῖν ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ τί λαλήσητε 1 for what you should say will be given to you in that hour If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for at that time, the Holy Spirit will tell you what to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 10 19 cm7h figs-metonymy ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 in that hour Here, **hour** means “right then.” Alternate translation: “right then” or “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +MAT 10 19 cm7h figs-metonymy ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 in that hour Here, **in that hour** means “right then.” Alternate translation: “right then” or “at that time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 10 20 yuk1 figs-you ὑμεῖς…ὑμῶν…ὑμῖν 1 you … your … you All instances of **you** and **your** are plural and refer to the twelve apostles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 10 20 v9tm τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Πατρὸς ὑμῶν 1 the Spirit of your Father If necessary, You can translate this as “the Spirit of God your heavenly Father” or a footnote can be added to make it clear that this refers to God the Holy Spirit and not to the spirit of an earthly father. +MAT 10 20 v9tm τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Πατρὸς ὑμῶν 1 the Spirit of your Father If necessary, you can translate this as “the Spirit of God your heavenly Father” or a footnote can be added to make it clear that this refers to God the Holy Spirit and not to the spirit of an earthly father. MAT 10 20 k3xr guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρὸς ὑμῶν 1 of your Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 10 20 zxd8 ἐν ὑμῖν 1 in you Alternate translation: “through you” MAT 10 21 p9ms παραδώσει δὲ ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς θάνατον 1 Brother will deliver up brother to death Jesus speaks of something that will happen many times. Alternate translation: “But a brother will deliver up his own brother to death” or “But brothers will deliver up their brothers to death” @@ -860,7 +859,7 @@ MAT 10 21 lh6z figs-abstractnouns παραδώσει…ἀδελφὸν εἰς MAT 10 21 p8w9 figs-ellipsis πατὴρ τέκνον 1 a father his child These words can be translated as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “a father will deliver up his child to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 10 21 xja9 ἐπαναστήσονται…ἐπὶ 1 will rise up against Alternate translation: “will rebel against” or “will turn against” MAT 10 21 xf2d θανατώσουσιν αὐτούς 1 put them to death Alternate translation: “have them put to death” or “have the authorities execute them” -MAT 10 22 sp6p figs-activepassive ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων 1 you will be hated by everyone You can translate this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone will hate you” or “all people will hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +MAT 10 22 sp6p figs-activepassive ἔσεσθε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων 1 you will be hated by everyone If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “everyone will hate you” or “all people will hate you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 10 22 va6i figs-you ἔσεσθε 1 you will be Here, **you** is plural and refers to the twelve disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 10 22 n3xn figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 because of my name Here, **name** refers to the entire person. Alternate translation: “because of me” or “because you trust in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 10 22 k5w9 ὁ…ὑπομείνας 1 the one who endures Alternate translation: “whoever stays faithful” @@ -898,7 +897,7 @@ MAT 10 28 ei7y τὸ σῶμα 1 the body The **body** is the part of a person MAT 10 28 e4de τὴν…ψυχὴν…ἀποκτεῖναι 1 to kill the soul This means to harm people after they have physically died. MAT 10 28 pk7k grammar-connect-words-phrases φοβεῖσθε δὲ μᾶλλον τὸν δυνάμενον 1 But instead, fear the one who is able You can add “because” to clarify why people should **fear** God. Alternate translation: “But instead, fear God because he is able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) MAT 10 29 tm3s writing-proverbs οὐχὶ δύο στρουθία ἀσσαρίου πωλεῖται? καὶ ἓν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐ πεσεῖται ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, ἄνευ τοῦ Πατρὸς ὑμῶν 1 Are not two sparrows sold for an assarion? Jesus states this proverb to express that even though sparrows are worth very little money, God watched over them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-proverbs]]) -MAT 10 29 glbl figs-rquestion οὐχὶ δύο στρουθία ἀσσαρίου πωλεῖται? 1 Are not two sparrows sold for an assarion? Jesus uses this question to teach his disciples. Alternate translation: “Think about the sparrows. They have so little value that you can buy two of them for only one small coin.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 10 29 glbl figs-rquestion οὐχὶ δύο στρουθία ἀσσαρίου πωλεῖται? 1 Are not two sparrows sold for an assarion? Jesus uses this question to teach his disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Think about the sparrows. They have so little value that you can buy two of them for only one small coin.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 10 29 q22l translate-unknown στρουθία 1 sparrows These **sparrows** are very small, seed-eating birds. Alternate translation: “small birds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 10 29 i399 ἀσσαρίου 1 for an assarion An **assarion** refers to a copper coin worth about one-sixteenth of a day’s wage for a laborer. This is often translated as the least valuable coin available in your country. Alternate translation: “very little money” MAT 10 29 wxt4 figs-doublenegatives ἓν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐ πεσεῖται ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, ἄνευ τοῦ Πατρὸς ὑμῶν 1 not one of them will fall to the ground without the knowledge of your Father You can state this in a positive form. Alternate translation: “your Father knows when even one sparrow dies and falls to the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) @@ -939,7 +938,6 @@ MAT 10 41 f9pv εἰς ὄνομα προφήτου 1 in the name of a prophet MAT 10 41 yj1q μισθὸν προφήτου 1 a reward of a prophet This refers to the **reward** that God gives the **prophet**, not to the reward that a prophet gives to another person. MAT 10 41 x483 εἰς ὄνομα δικαίου 1 in the name of a righteous man Alternate translation: “because he is a righteous man” MAT 10 41 qfv7 μισθὸν δικαίου 1 a reward of a righteous man This refers to the **reward** God gives to **a righteous** person, not a reward that a righteous person gives to another person. -MAT 10 42 wx4a 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus finishes instructing his disciples about what they should do and expect when they go to preach. MAT 10 42 v6jg ὃς ἐὰν ποτίσῃ 1 whoever might give … to drink Alternate translation: “anyone who gives … to drink” MAT 10 42 z8tk ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τούτων 1 to one of these little ones The phrase **one of these** here refers to one of Jesus’ disciples. Alternate translation: “to one of these lowly ones” or “to the least important of these” MAT 10 42 lza6 εἰς ὄνομα μαθητοῦ 1 in the name of a disciple Alternate translation: “because he is my disciple” @@ -1057,8 +1055,7 @@ MAT 11 27 rt5b οὐδεὶς ἐπιγινώσκει 1 no one knows The word * MAT 11 27 esp4 figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν 1 the Son Jesus was referring to himself as he **Son** in the third person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) MAT 11 27 l8xe guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Υἱὸν 1 the Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 11 27 w6yq οὐδὲ τὸν Πατέρα τις ἐπιγινώσκει, εἰ μὴ ὁ Υἱὸς 1 no one knows the Father except the Son You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “only the Son knows the Father” -MAT 11 28 q9x1 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus finishes speaking to the crowd. -MAT 11 28 x978 figs-you πάντες οἱ κοπιῶντες καὶ πεφορτισμένοι, κἀγὼ ἀναπαύσω ὑμᾶς 1 all you who are laboring and are heavy burdened, and I will give you rest Both occurrences of **you** are plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +MAT 11 28 x978 figs-you πάντες οἱ κοπιῶντες καὶ πεφορτισμένοι, κἀγὼ ἀναπαύσω ὑμᾶς 1 all you who are laboring and are heavy burdened, and I will give you rest Here, **you** is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 11 28 t2jj figs-metaphor οἱ κοπιῶντες καὶ πεφορτισμένοι 1 who are laboring and are heavy burdened Jesus speaks of people being discouraged in their attempts to obey all the laws as if those laws were **heavy** burdens and the people were **laboring** to carry them. Alternate translation: “who are discouraged from trying so hard” or “who are discouraged from trying so hard to obey the laws perfectly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 11 28 f1w4 κἀγὼ ἀναπαύσω ὑμᾶς 1 and I will give you rest Alternate translation: “and I will allow you to rest from your labor and burden” MAT 11 29 q1ya figs-metaphor ἄρατε τὸν ζυγόν μου ἐφ’ ὑμᾶς 1 Take my yoke on you Jesus continues the metaphor. Jesus is inviting the people to become his disciples and follow him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1069,13 +1066,12 @@ MAT 11 29 i3ls figs-synecdoche εὑρήσετε ἀνάπαυσιν ταῖς MAT 11 30 ynf1 figs-parallelism ὁ γὰρ ζυγός μου χρηστὸς καὶ τὸ φορτίον μου ἐλαφρόν ἐστιν 1 For my yoke is easy and my burden is light Both of these phrases mean the same thing. Jesus is emphasizing that it is easier to obey him than it is the Jewish law. Alternate translation: “For what I place on you, you will be able to carry because it is light” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 11 30 tc2g τὸ φορτίον μου ἐλαφρόν ἐστιν 1 my burden is light The word **light** here is the opposite of heavy, not the opposite of dark. MAT 12 intro y7z6 0 # Matthew 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 12:18-21, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Sabbath

This chapter has much to say about how God’s people are to obey the Sabbath. Jesus said that the rules that the Pharisees made up did not help people obey the Sabbath the way God wanted them to. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

### “Blasphemy against the Spirit”

No one knows for sure what actions people perform or what words they say when they commit this sin. However, they probably insult the Holy Spirit and his work. Part of the Holy Spirit’s work is to make people understand that they are sinners and that they need to have God forgive them. Therefore, anyone who does not try to stop sinning is probably committing blasphemy against the Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/blasphemy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Brothers and sisters

Most people call those who have the same parents “brother” and “sister” and think of them as the most important people in their lives. Many people also call those with the same grandparents “brother” and “sister.” In this chapter Jesus says that the most important people to him are those who obey his Father in heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]]) -MAT 12 1 u1f2 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new part of the story where Matthew tells of growing opposition to Jesus’ ministry. Here, the Pharisees criticize his disciples for picking grain on the Sabbath. -MAT 12 1 m2n1 ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 1 At that time This phrase marks a new part of the story. Alternate translation: “A little later” +MAT 12 1 m2n1 ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 1 At that time This phrase marks a new part of the story where Matthew tells of growing opposition to Jesus’ ministry. Here, the Pharisees criticize his disciples for picking grain on the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “A little later” MAT 12 1 tvt9 translate-unknown τῶν σπορίμων 1 the grainfields A grainfield is a place to plant grain. If wheat is unknown and “grain” is too general, then you can use “fields of the plant they made bread from.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 12 1 yrf8 τίλλειν στάχυας καὶ ἐσθίειν 1 to pluck heads of grain and to eat them Picking **grain** in others’ fields and eating it was not considered stealing. The question was whether one could do this otherwise lawful activity on the Sabbath. MAT 12 1 zz4r τίλλειν στάχυας καὶ ἐσθίειν 1 to pluck heads of grain and to eat them Alternate translation: “to pick some of the wheat and to eat it” or “to pick some of the grain and to eat it” -MAT 12 1 y5vr στάχυας 1 heads of grain The “head” is the topmost part of the wheat plant. It holds the mature grain or seeds of the plant. -MAT 12 2 swl7 ποιοῦσιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν ποιεῖν ἐν Σαββάτῳ 1 do what is not lawful to do on the Sabbath Picking grain in others’ fields and eating it was not considered stealing. The question was whether one could do this otherwise lawful activity on the Sabbath. +MAT 12 1 y5vr στάχυας 1 heads of grain The **heads** are the topmost part of the wheat plant. They holds the mature grain or seeds of the plant. +MAT 12 2 swl7 ποιοῦσιν ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστιν ποιεῖν ἐν Σαββάτῳ 1 do what is not lawful to do on the Sabbath Picking grain in others’ fields and eating it was not considered stealing. The question was whether one could do this otherwise lawful activity **on the Sabbath**. MAT 12 2 mch7 οἱ…Φαρισαῖοι 1 the Pharisees This does not mean all of **the Pharisees**. Alternate translation: “some Pharisees” MAT 12 2 nh12 ἰδοὺ, οἱ μαθηταί σου 1 Behold, your disciples The Pharisees use the word **Behold** to draw attention to what the disciples are doing. Alternate translation: “Look, your disciples” MAT 12 3 et11 αὐτοῖς 1 to them Alternate translation: “to the Pharisees” @@ -1089,8 +1085,7 @@ MAT 12 5 dqe9 τὸ Σάββατον βεβηλοῦσιν 1 profane the Sabbat MAT 12 5 i6y9 ἀναίτιοί εἰσιν 1 are innocent Alternate translation: “God will not punish them” or “God does not consider them guilty” MAT 12 6 ji7a λέγω…ὑμῖν 1 I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. MAT 12 6 k4mn figs-123person τοῦ ἱεροῦ μεῖζόν 1 greater than the temple Jesus was referring to himself as the one who is **greater**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) Alternate translation: “I am someone who is more important than the temple” -MAT 12 7 rh53 ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν 1 General Information: In this verse, Jesus quotes the prophet Hosea to rebuke the Pharisees. -MAT 12 7 ypj7 figs-explicit εἰ δὲ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν, ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 But if you had known what this is, ‘I desire mercy and not sacrifice,’ you would not have condemned the innocent Here Jesus quotes scripture. Alternate translation: “The prophet Hosea wrote this long ago: ‘I desire mercy and not sacrifice.’ If you had understood what this meant, you would not have condemned the innocent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 12 7 ypj7 figs-explicit εἰ δὲ ἐγνώκειτε τί ἐστιν, ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν, οὐκ ἂν κατεδικάσατε τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 But if you had known what this is, ‘I desire mercy and not sacrifice,’ you would not have condemned the innocent In this verse, Jesus quotes the prophet Hosea to rebuke the Pharisees. Alternate translation: “The prophet Hosea wrote this long ago: ‘I desire mercy and not sacrifice.’ If you had understood what this meant, you would not have condemned the innocent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 12 7 e1ju ἔλεος θέλω καὶ οὐ θυσίαν 1 I desire mercy and not sacrifice In the law of Moses, God did command the Israelites to offer sacrifices. This means God considers **mercy** more important than the **sacrifice**. MAT 12 7 jw57 θέλω 1 I desire The pronoun **I** refers to God. MAT 12 7 s23l figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀναιτίους 1 the innocent If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **innocent**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “those who are not guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) @@ -1234,7 +1229,6 @@ MAT 12 46 mh5f ἡ μήτηρ 1 his mother This is Mary, Jesus’ human mother. MAT 12 46 dq8m οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his brothers Most people understand **his brothers** to refer to other sons born to Mary after Jesus—his younger brothers. Some people believe the word **brothers** here refers to Jesus’ cousins. MAT 12 46 z97j ζητοῦντες…λαλῆσαι 1 seeking to speak Alternate translation: “wanting to speak” MAT 12 47 qd32 figs-quotations εἶπεν δέ τις αὐτῷ, ἰδοὺ, ἡ μήτηρ σου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί σου ἔξω ἑστήκασιν ζητοῦντές σοι λαλῆσαι. 1 Someone said to him, “Behold, your mother and your brothers stand outside, seeking to speak to you.” You can translate this direct quotation as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “Someone told Jesus that his mother and brothers were outside and wanted to speak to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -MAT 12 48 q1cd 0 Connecting Statement: This is the end of the part of the story that began in [12:1](../12/01.md), where Matthew tells of growing opposition to Jesus’ ministry. MAT 12 48 jm1y figs-ellipsis τῷ λέγοντι αὐτῷ 1 to the one speaking to him The details of the message the person told Jesus are understood and not repeated here. Alternate translation: “to the one who told Jesus that his mother and brothers wanted to speak to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 12 48 e535 figs-rquestion τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ μου καὶ τίνες εἰσὶν οἱ ἀδελφοί μου? 1 Who is my mother and who are my brothers? Jesus uses this question to teach the people. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will tell you who are really my mother and brothers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 12 49 gk62 ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Alternate translation: “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” @@ -1248,11 +1242,11 @@ MAT 13 1 vx5y ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ 1 On that day These event MAT 13 1 cy1t ἐξελθὼν…τῆς οἰκίας 1 having gone out of the house It is not mentioned at whose **house** Jesus was staying. MAT 13 1 zjb3 figs-explicit ἐκάθητο παρὰ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 was sitting beside the sea It is implied that the reason he sat down was to teach the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 2 d16z figs-explicit ὥστε αὐτὸν εἰς πλοῖον ἐμβάντα καθῆσθαι 1 so that, having stepped into a boat, he sat down It is implied that Jesus got into a boat because it would make it easier to teach the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 2 jge7 translate-unknown πλοῖον 1 a boat This was probably an open, wooden fishing boat with a sail. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +MAT 13 2 jge7 translate-unknown πλοῖον 1 a boat This **boat** was probably an open, wooden fishing boat with a sail. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) MAT 13 3 e99p 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus describes the kingdom of heaven by telling a parable about a person who sows seeds. MAT 13 3 f5mv καὶ ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολλὰ ἐν παραβολαῖς 1 And he spoke many things to them in parables Alternate translation: “And Jesus told them many things in parables” MAT 13 3 w5p3 αὐτοῖς 1 to them Alternate translation: “to the people in the crowd” -MAT 13 3 m97r ἰδοὺ 1 Behold This word calls attention to what is to be said next. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” or “Look” or “Listen” +MAT 13 3 m97r ἰδοὺ 1 Behold The word **Behold** calls attention to what is to be said next. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you” or “Look” or “Listen” MAT 13 3 ur64 ἐξῆλθεν ὁ σπείρων τοῦ σπείρειν 1 a sower went out to sow Alternate translation: “a farmer went out to scatter seeds in a field” MAT 13 4 c6g6 καὶ ἐν τῷ σπείρειν αὐτὸν 1 And as he sowed Alternate translation: “And as the farmer scattered the seed” MAT 13 4 v7r8 παρὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 beside the road Here, **road** may refer to a path next to the field. The ground there would have been hard from people walking on it. @@ -1270,13 +1264,12 @@ MAT 13 9 gkv1 figs-123person ὁ ἔχων ὦτα, ἀκουέτω 1 The one ha MAT 13 10 p8yc 0 General Information: Jesus explains to his disciples why he teaches with parables. MAT 13 11 fc5n figs-activepassive ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has given to you to understand mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but God has not given it to these people” or “God has made you able to understand mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but he has not enabled these people to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 11 xq2v figs-explicit ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι τὰ μυστήρια τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν, ἐκείνοις δὲ οὐ δέδοται 1 To you has been given to understand the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but to those it has not been given You can state the implied information clearly. Alternate translation: “God has given you the privilege of understanding mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens, but God has not given it to these people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 11 rcd3 figs-you ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι 1 To you has been given to understand The word **you** is plural here and refers to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +MAT 13 11 rcd3 figs-you ὑμῖν 1 To you has been given to understand The word **you** is plural here and refers to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 13 11 ah6u figs-metonymy τὰ μυστήρια τῆς Βασιλείας τῶν Οὐρανῶν 1 the mysteries of the kingdom of the heavens Here, **kingdom of the heavens** refers to God’s rule. The phrase **kingdom of the heavens** occurs only in the book of Matthew. If possible, try to keep it in your translation. Alternate translation: “the secrets about our God in heaven and his rule” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 12 j3rl ὅστις…ἔχει 1 whoever has Alternate translation: “whoever has understanding” or “whoever receives what I teach” MAT 13 12 v61y figs-activepassive δοθήσεται 1 it will be given If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will give him more understanding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 12 xsr5 ὅστις…οὐκ ἔχει 2 whoever does not have Alternate translation: “whoever does not have understanding” or “whoever does not receive what I teach” MAT 13 12 bl5s figs-activepassive καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρθήσεται ἀπ’ αὐτοῦ 1 even what he has will be taken away from him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will take away even what he has” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -MAT 13 13 hm4t 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues to explain to his disciples why he teaches in parables. MAT 13 13 v6pb αὐτοῖς…οὐ βλέπουσιν…οὐκ ἀκούουσιν 1 to them … they do not see … they do not hear All occurrences of **them** and **they** refer to the people in the crowd. MAT 13 13 uk7j figs-parallelism ὅτι βλέποντες οὐ βλέπουσιν, καὶ ἀκούοντες οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, οὐδὲ συνίουσιν 1 because seeing, they do not see; and hearing, they do not hear nor understand Jesus uses this parallelism to tell and emphasize to the disciples that the crowd refuses to understand God’s truth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 13 13 ae8k βλέποντες 1 seeing This could refer to: (1) them **seeing** what Jesus does. Alternate translation: “though they see what I do” (2) their ability to see. Alternate translation: “though they are able to see” @@ -1285,9 +1278,8 @@ MAT 13 13 j4bg ἀκούοντες 1 hearing This could refer to: (1) them **he MAT 13 13 gq65 figs-metaphor οὐκ ἀκούουσιν 1 they do not hear Here, **hear** represents listening well. Alternate translation: “they do not listen well” or “they do not pay attention” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 14 jz9n καὶ ἀναπληροῦται αὐτοῖς ἡ προφητεία Ἠσαΐου ἡ λέγουσα 1 And to them the prophecy of Isaiah is being fulfilled, which says If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And they are fulfilling what God said long ago through the prophet Isaiah” MAT 13 14 z2es figs-parallelism ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 In hearing you will hear, but you may certainly not understand; and seeing, you will see, but you may certainly not perceive This begins a quote from the prophet Isaiah about the unbelieving people of Isaiah’s day. Jesus uses this quote to describe the very crowd that was listening to him. These statements are again parallel and emphasize that the people refused to understand God’s truth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -MAT 13 14 a1im figs-explicit ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε 1 In hearing you will hear, but you may certainly not understand You can make explicit what the people will hear. Alternate translation: “You will hear what God says through the prophets, but you will not understand its true meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 14 emu1 figs-explicit βλέποντες βλέψετε καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 seeing, you will see, but you may certainly not perceive You can make explicit what the people will **see**. Alternate translation: “you will see what God does through the prophets, but you will not understand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 13 15 e8r5 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus finishes quoting the prophet Isaiah. +MAT 13 14 a1im figs-explicit ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε 1 In hearing you will hear, but you may certainly not understand You can make explicit what the people **will hear**. Alternate translation: “You will hear what God says through the prophets, but you will not understand its true meaning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +MAT 13 14 emu1 figs-explicit βλέποντες βλέψετε καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 seeing, you will see, but you may certainly not perceive You can make explicit what the people **will see**. Alternate translation: “you will see what God does through the prophets, but you will not understand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 15 lu8u figs-metaphor ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν; μήποτε ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν, καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν, καὶ ἐπιστρέψωσιν καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 For the heart of this people has become dull, and their ears heard with difficulty, and they closed their eyes, lest they might see with their eyes, and might hear with their ears, and might understand with their hearts, and they might turn back, and I will heal them In 13:15 God describes the people of Israel as if they have physical diseases that cause them to be unable to learn, to **see**, and to **hear**. God wants them to come to him so he will **heal** them. This is all a metaphor describing the people’s spiritual condition. It means the people are stubborn and refuse to receive and understand God’s truth. If they would, then they would repent and God would forgive them and welcome them back as his people. If the meaning is clear, keep the metaphor in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 13 15 fy7m figs-metonymy ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου 1 For the heart of this people has become dull Here, **heart** refers to the mind. Alternate translation: “For these people’s minds are slow to learn” or “For these people can no longer learn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 13 15 q87m figs-metonymy τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν 1 their ears heard with difficulty They are not physically deaf. Here, **heard with difficulty** means they refuse to listen and learn God’s truth. Alternate translation: “they refuse to use their ears to listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1301,7 +1293,7 @@ MAT 13 16 glp8 figs-synecdoche ὑμῶν δὲ μακάριοι οἱ ὀφθα MAT 13 16 rlt3 figs-you ὑμῶν…ὑμῶν 1 your … your Both occurrences of **your** are plural and refer to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 13 16 jp32 figs-synecdoche τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶν ὅτι ἀκούουσιν 1 your ears, for they hear Here, **ears** refer to the whole person. Alternate translation: “you, for you hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) MAT 13 16 xczh figs-ellipsis τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶν ὅτι ἀκούουσιν 1 your ears, for they hear You can clearly explicitly the implied information. Alternate translation: “you are blessed because your ears are able to hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -MAT 13 17 mg58 ἀμὴν, γὰρ λέγω ὑμῖν 1 For truly I say to you This adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. Alternate translation: “For I tell you the truth” +MAT 13 17 mg58 ἀμὴν, γὰρ λέγω ὑμῖν 1 For truly I say to you This phrase adds emphasis to what Jesus says next. Alternate translation: “For I tell you the truth” MAT 13 17 bsj7 figs-you ὑμῖν…βλέπετε…ἀκούετε 1 to you … you see … you hear All occurrences of **you** are plural and refer to the disciples. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 13 17 e6ci figs-explicit ἃ βλέπετε 1 the things you see You can state explicitly what they have seen. Alternate translation: “the things you have seen me do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 17 q14w figs-explicit ἃ ἀκούετε 1 the things you hear You can state explicitly what they have heard. Alternate translation: “the things you have heard me say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1364,11 +1356,11 @@ MAT 13 33 r88g translate-bvolume ἀλεύρου σάτα τρία 1 three measu MAT 13 33 c35r figs-explicit γυνὴ ἐνέκρυψεν εἰς ἀλεύρου σάτα τρία, ἕως οὗ ἐζυμώθη ὅλον 1 a woman mixed with three measures of flour until it all was leavened The implied information is that the yeast and the three measures of flour were made into dough for baking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 13 34 nt7u figs-parallelism ταῦτα πάντα ἐλάλησεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἐν παραβολαῖς τοῖς ὄχλοις, καὶ χωρὶς παραβολῆς οὐδὲν ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς 1 All these things Jesus spoke to the crowds in parables; and he was speaking nothing to them without a parable Both sentences mean the same thing. They are combined to emphasize that Jesus taught **the crowds** only with **parables**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) MAT 13 34 n54e ταῦτα πάντα 1 All these things Here, **All these things** refers to what Jesus taught beginning at [13:1](../13/01.md). -MAT 13 34 a5c7 figs-doublenegatives χωρὶς παραβολῆς οὐδὲν ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς 1 he was speaking nothing to them without a parable If your readers would misunderstand the double negative **nothing … without**, you can express it in a positive way. Alternate translation: “everything he taught them he said in parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +MAT 13 34 a5c7 figs-doublenegatives χωρὶς παραβολῆς οὐδὲν ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς 1 he was speaking nothing to them without a parable If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **nothing … without**, you can express it in a positive way. Alternate translation: “everything he taught them he said in parables” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) MAT 13 35 ybq5 figs-activepassive πληρωθῇ τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος 1 what had been said through the prophet might be fulfilled, saying If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what God told one of the prophets to write long ago might come true” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 35 p3tb λέγοντος 1 saying Alternate translation: “when the prophet said” MAT 13 35 f9gl ἀνοίξω ἐν παραβολαῖς τὸ στόμα μου; ἐρεύξομαι κεκρυμμένα ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 General Information: Here the author quotes from the Psalms to show that Jesus’ teaching in parables fulfilled prophecy. -MAT 13 35 n1pa figs-idiom ἀνοίξω…τὸ στόμα μου 1 I will open my mouth This is an idiom that means to speak. Alternate translation: “I will speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +MAT 13 35 n1pa figs-idiom ἀνοίξω…τὸ στόμα μου 1 I will open my mouth This is an idiom that means “to speak.” Alternate translation: “I will speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) MAT 13 35 yx6y figs-activepassive κεκρυμμένα 1 what has been hidden If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “things that God has kept hidden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 13 35 th8t ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου 1 from the foundation of the world Alternate translation: “since the beginning of the world” or “since God created the world” MAT 13 36 pq2h 0 Connecting Statement: Here the scene shifts to the house where Jesus and his disciples were staying. Jesus begins to explain to them the parable of the field that had both wheat and weeds, which he told beginning in [13:24](../13/24.md). @@ -1441,7 +1433,7 @@ MAT 14 2 pd1b εἶπεν 1 he said Alternate translation: “Herod said” MAT 14 2 nx7x ἠγέρθη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν 1 has been raised from the dead The words **from the dead** speak of all dead people together in the underworld. To rise from the dead speaks of coming alive again. MAT 14 2 vve7 διὰ τοῦτο αἱ δυνάμεις ἐνεργοῦσιν ἐν αὐτῷ 1 because of this, miraculous powers are at work in him Some Jews at that time believed if a person came back from the dead he would have **powers** to do mighty things. MAT 14 3 zgp9 figs-events 0 Connecting Statement: Here the author begins to tell about how Herod had executed John the Baptist. These events occur some time before the event in the previous verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) -MAT 14 4 d3gp figs-events 0 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” If needed, you can present the events of 14:3-4 in the order that they happened, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) +MAT 14 3 d3gp figs-events 0 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” If needed, you can present the events of 14:3-4 in the order that they happened, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-events]]) MAT 14 3 h466 figs-metonymy ὁ γὰρ Ἡρῴδης κρατήσας τὸν Ἰωάννην, ἔδησεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ ἀπέθετο 1 For Herod, having arrested John, bound him, and put him in prison It says that **Herod** did these things because he ordered others to do them for him. Alternate translation: “Herod ordered his soldiers to arrest and bind John the Baptist and put him in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) MAT 14 3 lr92 translate-names τὴν γυναῖκα Φιλίππου 1 the wife of Philip **Philip** was Herod’s brother. Herod had taken Philip’s wife to be his own **wife**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 14 4 n1t6 figs-quotations ἔλεγεν γὰρ αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰωάννης, οὐκ ἔξεστίν σοι ἔχειν αὐτήν. 1 For John was saying to him, “It is not lawful for you to have her.” This direct quotation can be expressed as an indirect quote, if needed. Alternate translation: “For John had said to Herod that it was not lawful for Herod to have Herodias as his wife.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -1463,7 +1455,7 @@ MAT 14 11 lqb6 τῷ κορασίῳ 1 to the girl Translate **girl** with the MAT 14 12 fl47 οἱ μαθηταὶ αὐτοῦ 1 his disciples Alternate translation: “the disciples of John” MAT 14 12 ni1q τὸ πτῶμα 1 the corpse Alternate translation: “the dead body” MAT 14 12 mq89 figs-explicit ἐλθόντες, ἀπήγγειλαν τῷ Ἰησοῦ 1 having come, they reported it to Jesus The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “the disciples of John went and told Jesus what had happened to John the Baptist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 14 13 id97 writing-background 0 General Information: Verses [13-14](..\14\13.md) give background information about the miracle that Jesus is about to perform by feeding five thousand people in verses [15-21](..\14\15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MAT 14 13 id97 writing-background 0 General Information: Verses 13-14 give background information about the miracle that Jesus is about to perform by feeding five thousand people in verses [15-21](..\14\15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 14 13 ds5w δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Matthew starts to tell a new part of the story. MAT 14 13 dvq4 ἀκούσας 1 having heard this Alternate translation: “having heard what happened to John” or “having heard the news about John” MAT 14 13 ia39 figs-explicit ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν 1 Jesus withdrew It is implied that Jesus’ disciples went with him. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1488,7 +1480,7 @@ MAT 14 20 l2h8 figs-activepassive καὶ ἐχορτάσθησαν 1 and were f MAT 14 20 p73g ἦραν 1 they took up Alternate translation: “the disciples gathered up” or “some people gathered up” MAT 14 21 wv59 οἱ δὲ ἐσθίοντες 1 Now those eating Alternate translation: “Now those who ate the bread and the fish” MAT 14 21 als7 translate-numbers ἄνδρες…πεντακισχίλιοι 1 5,000 men Alternate translation: “five thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -MAT 14 22 yp8l 0 General Information: Verses [22-24](..\14\22.md) give background information about the miracle that Jesus is about to perform of walking on water. +MAT 14 22 yp8l 0 General Information: Verses 22-24 give background information about the miracle that Jesus is about to perform of walking on water. MAT 14 22 wt1t καὶ εὐθέως ἠνάγκασεν 1 And immediately he made Alternate translation: “And as soon as Jesus had finished feeding all the people, he made” MAT 14 23 d27u ὀψίας δὲ γενομένης 1 Now evening having come about Alternate translation: “Now late in the evening” or “Now when it became dark” MAT 14 24 vzd1 ἦν βασανιζόμενον ὑπὸ τῶν κυμάτων 1 was being tossed about by the waves Alternate translation: “and the disciples could not control the boat because of the large waves” @@ -1510,21 +1502,18 @@ MAT 14 36 x8jv τοῦ ἱματίου αὐτοῦ 1 of his garment Alternate MAT 14 36 mw8n figs-activepassive διεσώθησαν 1 were healed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “became well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 intro i9a5 0 # Matthew 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 15:8-9, which are words from the Old Testament.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The “traditions of the elders”

The “traditions of the elders” were oral laws that the Jewish religious leaders developed because they wanted to make sure that everyone obeyed the law of Moses. However, they often worked harder to obey these rules than to obey the law of Moses itself. Jesus rebuked the religious leaders for this, and they became angry as a result. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Jews and Gentiles

The Jews of Jesus’ time thought that only Jews could please God by the way they lived. Jesus healed a Canaanite Gentile woman’s daughter to show his followers that he would accept both Jews and Gentiles as his people.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Sheep

The Bible often speaks of people as if they were sheep because sheep need someone to take care of them. This is because they do not see well and they often go to where other animals can kill them easily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 15 1 q6af writing-newevent 0 General Information: The scene shifts to events that occurred some time after events of the previous chapter. Here Jesus responds to the criticisms of the Pharisees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -MAT 15 2 j1b8 figs-rquestion διὰ τί οἱ μαθηταί σου παραβαίνουσιν τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων? 1 Why do your disciples violate the traditions of the elders? The Pharisees and scribes use this question to criticize Jesus and his disciples. Alternate translation: “Your disciples do not respect the rules that our ancestors have given us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 15 2 yn6l τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 the traditions of the elders This is not the same as the law of Moses. This refers to later teachings and interpretations of the law given by religious leaders after Moses. +MAT 15 2 j1b8 figs-rquestion διὰ τί οἱ μαθηταί σου παραβαίνουσιν τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων? 1 Why do your disciples violate the traditions of the elders? The Pharisees and scribes use this question to criticize Jesus and his disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Your disciples do not respect the rules that our ancestors have given us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 15 2 yn6l τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 the traditions of the elders These **traditions of the elders** are not the same as the law of Moses. This refers to later teachings and interpretations of the law given by religious leaders after Moses. MAT 15 2 gfn6 figs-explicit οὐ…νίπτονται τὰς χεῖρας 1 they do not wash their hands This washing is not only to clean hands. This refers to a ceremonial washing according to the tradition of the elders. Alternate translation: “they do not wash their hands properly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -MAT 15 3 ia1e figs-rquestion διὰ τί καὶ ὑμεῖς παραβαίνετε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν? 1 Why do you also violate the commandment of God because of your traditions? Jesus answers with a question to criticize what the religious leaders do. Alternate translation: “And I see that you refuse to obey God’s commands just so that you can follow what your ancestors taught you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) +MAT 15 3 ia1e figs-rquestion διὰ τί καὶ ὑμεῖς παραβαίνετε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν? 1 Why do you also violate the commandment of God because of your traditions? Jesus answers with a question to criticize what the religious leaders do. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “And I see that you refuse to obey God’s commands just so that you can follow what your ancestors taught you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) MAT 15 4 srz6 0 General Information: In verse 4, Jesus quotes twice from Exodus to show how God expects people to treat their parents. -MAT 15 4 cz1q 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues to respond to the Pharisees. MAT 15 4 qmm7 θανάτῳ τελευτάτω 1 let him die the death Alternate translation: “the people must surely execute him” -MAT 15 5 ql75 figs-you ὑμεῖς δὲ λέγετε 1 But you say Here, **you** is plural and refers to the Pharisees and scribes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -MAT 15 6 b81c 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus continues to rebuke the Pharisees. +MAT 15 5 ql75 figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 But you say Here, **you** is plural and refers to the Pharisees and scribes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) MAT 15 6 vr6y figs-quotesinquotes οὐ μὴ τιμήσει τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ 1 he will certainly not honor his father The words beginning with “But you say” (verse 5) have a quotation within a quotation. If necessary you can translate them as indirect quotations. “But you teach that a person does not need to honor his parents by giving them something that may help them if the person tells his parents that he has already given it as a gift to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) MAT 15 6 q3kt figs-explicit οὐ μὴ τιμήσει τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ 1 he will certainly not honor his father It is implied that **his father** means “his parents.” This means the religious leaders taught that a person does not need to show respect to his parents by taking care of them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 15 6 znt9 ἠκυρώσατε τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 you have made void the word of God Here, **word of God** refers specifically to his commands. Alternate translation: “you have treated the word of God as if it were invalid” or “you have ignored God’s commands” MAT 15 6 yq5a διὰ τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν 1 because of your traditions Alternate translation: “because you want to follow your traditions” MAT 15 7 t4fq 0 General Information: In verses 8 and 9, Jesus quotes the prophet Isaiah to rebuke the Pharisees and scribes. -MAT 15 7 tn3b 0 Connecting Statement: Jesus concludes his response to the Pharisees and scribes. MAT 15 7 wv77 καλῶς ἐπροφήτευσεν περὶ ὑμῶν Ἠσαΐας 1 Well did Isaiah prophesy about you Alternate translation: “Isaiah told the truth in this prophecy about you” MAT 15 7 n4ti figs-explicit λέγων 1 saying It is implied that Isaiah is speaking what God told him. Alternate translation: “when he told what God said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 15 8 qw69 figs-metonymy ὁ λαὸς οὗτος τοῖς χείλεσίν με τιμᾷ 1 This people honors me with their lips Here, **lips** refers to speaking. Alternate translation: “These people say all the right things to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1539,7 +1528,7 @@ MAT 15 13 n5ij figs-metaphor πᾶσα φυτεία ἣν οὐκ ἐφύτευ MAT 15 13 j49e guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος 1 my heavenly Father **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) MAT 15 13 hs4t figs-activepassive ἐκριζωθήσεται 1 will be uprooted If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “my Father will uproot” or “he will take out of the ground” or “he will remove” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 14 r167 ἄφετε αὐτούς 1 Let them go! The word **them** refers to the Pharisees. -MAT 15 14 ai9x figs-metaphor ὁδηγοί εἰσιν τυφλοί τυφλὸς, δὲ τυφλὸν ἐὰν ὁδηγῇ, ἀμφότεροι εἰς βόθυνον πεσοῦνται 1 They are blind guides. But if the blind might guide the blind, both will fall into a pit Jesus speaks of the Pharisees as if they were blind people trying to guide other blind people. Jesus means that the Pharisees do not understand God’s commands or how to please him. Therefore, they cannot teach others how to please God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +MAT 15 14 ai9x figs-metaphor ὁδηγοί εἰσιν τυφλοί τυφλὸς, δὲ τυφλὸν ἐὰν ὁδηγῇ, ἀμφότεροι εἰς βόθυνον πεσοῦνται 1 They are blind guides. But if the blind might guide the blind, both will fall into a pit Jesus speaks of the Pharisees as if they were blind people trying to **guide** other **blind** people. Jesus means that the Pharisees do not understand God’s commands or how to please him. Therefore, they cannot teach others how to please God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) MAT 15 15 cje4 0 Connecting Statement: Peter asks Jesus to explain the parable that Jesus told in verses[13-14](../15/13.md). MAT 15 15 shg6 ἡμῖν 1 to us Alternate translation: “to us disciples” MAT 15 16 al9z figs-rquestion ἀκμὴν καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί ἐστε? 1 Are you also still without understanding? Jesus uses a question to rebuke the disciples for not understanding the parable. Also, the word **you** is emphasized. Jesus cannot believe his own disciples do not understand. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I am disappointed that you, my disciples, still do not understand what I teach!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1553,7 +1542,7 @@ MAT 15 20 bme7 ἀνίπτοις χερσὶν φαγεῖν 1 to eat with unwa MAT 15 21 e5gv 0 General Information: This begins an account of Jesus healing the daughter of a Canaanite woman. MAT 15 21 t81u figs-explicit ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀνεχώρησεν 1 Jesus withdrew It is implied that the disciples went with Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus and his disciples went away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 15 22 x1wm ἰδοὺ, γυνὴ Χαναναία…ἐξελθοῦσα 1 behold, a Canaanite woman having come out The word **behold** alerts us to a new person in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this. Alternate translation: “Now there was a Canaanite woman who came” -MAT 15 22 jt94 γυνὴ Χαναναία ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων ἐκείνων ἐξελθοῦσα, ἔκραζεν 1 a Canaanite woman having come out from that region, was crying out The country of Canaan no longer existed by this time. She was a part of a people group that lived near the cities of Tyre and Sidon. Alternate translation: “a woman who was from that region and who belonged to the group of people called Canaanites came and cried out” +MAT 15 22 jt94 γυνὴ Χαναναία ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων ἐκείνων ἐξελθοῦσα, ἔκραζεν 1 a Canaanite woman having come out from that region, was crying out The country of Canaan no longer existed by this time. This woman was a part of a people group that lived near the cities of Tyre and Sidon. Alternate translation: “a woman who was from that region and who belonged to the group of people called Canaanites came and cried out” MAT 15 22 f4k2 figs-explicit ἐλέησόν με 1 Have mercy on me This phrase implies that the woman is asking Jesus to heal her daughter. Alternate translation: “Have mercy and heal my daughter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) MAT 15 22 xs64 Υἱὸς Δαυείδ 1 Son of David Jesus was not David’s literal son, so this may be translated as “Descendant of David.” However, **Son of David** is also a title for the Messiah, and the woman may have been calling Jesus by this title. MAT 15 22 j6rt figs-activepassive ἡ θυγάτηρ μου κακῶς δαιμονίζεται 1 My daughter is severely demon-possessed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “A demon is controlling my daughter terribly” or “A demon is tormenting my daughter severely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1570,22 +1559,22 @@ MAT 15 27 i5tt τὰ κυνάρια 1 the little dogs Use words here for **dogs MAT 15 28 tea2 figs-activepassive γενηθήτω 1 let it be done If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I will do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 28 n229 figs-activepassive ἰάθη ἡ θυγάτηρ αὐτῆς 1 her daughter was healed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus healed her daughter” or “her daughter became well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 28 wwq3 figs-idiom ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 1 from that hour This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “at exactly the same time” or “immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -MAT 15 29 np6e writing-background 0 General Information: Verses 29-31give background information about the miracle that Jesus is about to perform by feeding four thousand people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +MAT 15 29 np6e writing-background 0 General Information: Verses 29-31 give background information about the miracle that Jesus is about to perform by feeding four thousand people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) MAT 15 30 c8td χωλούς, τυφλούς, κυλλούς, κωφούς 1 the lame, the blind, the crippled, the mute Alternate translation: “those who could not walk, those who could not see, those whose arms or legs did not function, those who could not talk” MAT 15 30 yf7i ἔρριψαν αὐτοὺς παρὰ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ 1 they laid them at his feet Apparently some of these sick or crippled people were unable to stand up, so when their friends brought them to Jesus, they placed them on the ground in front of him. Alternate translation: “the crowds placed the sick people on the ground in front of Jesus” MAT 15 31 pi52 figs-activepassive κυλλοὺς ὑγιεῖς 1 the crippled made well If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the crippled become well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) MAT 15 31 be52 figs-nominaladj κυλλοὺς…χωλοὺς…τυφλοὺς 1 the crippled … the lame … the blind If your readers would misunderstand these nominal adjectives, you could express them as adjectives. Alternate translation: “people who were crippled … people who were lame … people who were blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -MAT 15 32 z28i 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus feeding four thousand people with seven loaves of bread and a few small fish. +MAT 15 32 z28i 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the account of Jesus feeding 4,000 people with seven loaves of bread and a few small fish. MAT 15 32 efc2 νήστεις…μήποτε ἐκλυθῶσιν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ 1 hungry, lest they may faint on the way Alternate translation: “without eating because they might faint on the way” MAT 15 33 uhi3 figs-rquestion πόθεν ἡμῖν ἐν ἐρημίᾳ, ἄρτοι τοσοῦτοι ὥστε χορτάσαι ὄχλον τοσοῦτον? 1 From where would be to us in a wilderness enough bread to satisfy so large a crowd? The disciples use a question to state that there is nowhere to get food for the **crowd**. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “There is nowhere in this wilderness where we can get enough bread for such a large crowd.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -MAT 15 34 k86l figs-ellipsis ἑπτά, καὶ ὀλίγα ἰχθύδια 1 Seven, and a few small fish The understood information can be made clear. Alternate translation: “Seven loaves of bread, and a few small fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +MAT 15 34 k86l figs-ellipsis ἑπτά, καὶ ὀλίγα ἰχθύδια 1 Seven, and a few small fish The understood information can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “Seven loaves of bread, and a few small fish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) MAT 15 35 x13q ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν 1 to recline on the ground Use your language’s word for how people customarily eat when there is no table, whether sitting or lying down. MAT 15 36 x7kc ἔλαβεν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους καὶ τοὺς ἰχθύας 1 he took the seven loaves and the fish Alternate translation: “Jesus held the seven loaves and the fish in his hands” MAT 15 36 dcr4 ἔκλασεν 1 he broke them Alternate translation: “he broke the loaves” MAT 15 36 a9s4 ἐδίδου 1 was giving them Alternate translation: “continued giving the bread and the fish” MAT 15 37 fc8g ἦραν 1 they took away Alternate translation: “the disciples gathered up” or “some people gathered up” MAT 15 38 udk7 οἱ…ἐσθίοντες 1 those eating Alternate translation: “the people who ate” -MAT 15 38 z66m translate-numbers τετρακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 4,000 men “four thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +MAT 15 38 z66m translate-numbers τετρακισχίλιοι ἄνδρες 1 4,000 men Alternate translation: “four thousand men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) MAT 15 39 be43 τὰ ὅρια 1 the region Alternate translation: “the area” MAT 15 39 m8dp translate-names Μαγαδάν 1 of Magadan This region is sometimes called “Magdala.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) MAT 16 intro za2k 0 # Matthew 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Yeast

Jesus spoke of the way people thought about God as if it were bread, and he spoke of what people taught about God as if it were the yeast that makes bread dough become larger and the baked bread taste good. He did not want his followers to listen to what the Pharisees and Sadducees taught. This was because if they did listen, they would not understand who God is and how he wants his people to live. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Metaphor

Jesus told his people to obey his commands. He did this by telling them to “follow” him. It is as if he were walking on a path and they were walking after him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Background information

Matthew continues his account from chapter 15 in verses 1-20. The account stops in verse 21 so Matthew can tell the reader that Jesus told his disciples again and again that people would kill him after he arrived in Jerusalem. Then the account continues in verses 22-27 with what happened the first time Jesus told the disciples that he would die.

### Paradox

A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. Jesus uses a paradox when he says, “Whoever wants to save his life will lose it, and whoever loses his life for my sake will find it” ([Matthew 16:25](../mat/16/25.md)). From 8364e199add3817bf81b8cea6d9077b7a5bf8ff3 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Benjamin Wright Date: Tue, 5 Apr 2022 20:28:01 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 11/15] error corrections (#2385) Co-authored-by: deferredreward Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2385 --- en_tn_02-EXO.tsv | 97 +++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------- 1 file changed, 46 insertions(+), 51 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv b/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv index ce3cdebd58..124887dd7b 100644 --- a/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv @@ -900,8 +900,8 @@ EXO 9 35 x0kn figs-metaphor כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָ EXO 10 intro s5g1 0 # Exodus 10 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pharaoh’s hard heart

Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Let my people go

This is a very important statement. Moses does not ask Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he demands that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people. EXO 10 1 w4pw figs-metaphor כִּֽי־אֲנִ֞י הִכְבַּ֤דְתִּי אֶת־לִבּ⁠וֹ֙ וְ⁠אֶת־לֵ֣ב עֲבָדָ֔י⁠ו 1 for I have hardened his heart and the hearts of his servants This means God made Pharaoh and his servants stubborn. Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their hearts were heavy. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md), but note that the metaphor is slightly different here. Alternate translation: “for I have caused Pharaoh and his servants to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 10 2 zg4c הִתְעַלַּ֨לְתִּי֙ בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 various signs “I mocked Egypt” -EXO 10 3 pm8p וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until near the end of [10:6](../10/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 10 3 u3mq וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֔ים 1 It may be helpful to turn the introductory quotation into an indirect quotation so that you do not have to use quotes within quotes. Alternate translation: “and told him that Yahweh, the God of the Hebrews, said thus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) +EXO 10 3 pm8p figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until near the end of [10:6](../10/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 10 3 u3mq figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֔ים 1 It may be helpful to turn the introductory quotation into an indirect quotation so that you do not have to use quotes within quotes. Alternate translation: “and told him that Yahweh, the God of the Hebrews, said thus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 10 3 vze4 כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ 1 This quotation form is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. EXO 10 3 cicf figs-metonymy עַד־מָתַ֣י מֵאַ֔נְתָּ לֵ⁠עָנֹ֖ת מִ⁠פָּנָ֑⁠י 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Particularly, it means the presence of his judgment (the plagues). Alternate translation: “Until when will you refuse to be humble when I judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 10 4 ge67 הִנְ⁠נִ֨י 1 listen **Behold me** adds emphasis to what is said next. Alternate translation: “beware” @@ -919,7 +919,7 @@ EXO 10 8 bu1x figs-activepassive וַ⁠יּוּשַׁ֞ב אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֤ EXO 10 8 fzsv מִ֥י וָ⁠מִ֖י 1 “Who all” EXO 10 9 fnnl figs-exclusive נֵלֵ֑ךְ…נֵלֵ֔ךְ 1 **We** means the Israelites and does not include Pharaoh or the Egyptians. Use an exclusive form here if your language has this distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 10 10 hjc9 יְהִ֨י כֵ֤ן יְהוָה֙ עִמָּ⁠כֶ֔ם כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר אֲשַׁלַּ֥ח אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠אֶֽת־טַפְּ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 if I ever let you go and your little ones go **May Yahweh be with you** is usually a blessing but is almost certainly not here. It likely means something like “It will take Yahweh’s power to make me let you and your children go,” or “May Yahweh be as favorable to you as I am to the idea of letting your children go.” Pharaoh is saying that it will take Yahweh to make him do what Moses wants, but he does not think that will happen. Alternate translation: “It will be clear that Yahweh is with you if I let you and your children go” -EXO 10 10 w8x4 רְא֕וּ כִּ֥י רָעָ֖ה נֶ֥גֶד פְּנֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 The phrase **for evil is before your faces** could either be a warning from Pharaoh that Moses’ actions will lead to evil for the Israelites, or it could mean that Pharaoh thinks the Israelites plan something that he considers evil. **Faces** is a metonym for the whole person. Alternate translations: “I see that you plan evil” or “Be careful! Your actions will have bad consequences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 10 10 w8x4 figs-metonymy רְא֕וּ כִּ֥י רָעָ֖ה נֶ֥גֶד פְּנֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 The phrase **for evil is before your faces** could either be a warning from Pharaoh that Moses’ actions will lead to evil for the Israelites, or it could mean that Pharaoh thinks the Israelites plan something that he considers evil. **Faces** is a metonym for the whole person. Alternate translations: “I see that you plan evil” or “Be careful! Your actions will have bad consequences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 10 11 pkm4 הַ⁠גְּבָרִים֙ 1 Then Moses and Aaron were driven out from Pharaoh’s presence This interjection clarifies who may go. Alternate translation: “the leaders” EXO 10 11 vdjk figs-metonymy מֵ⁠אֵ֖ת פְּנֵ֥י פַרְעֹֽה 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Pharaoh. Alternate translation: “from his presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 10 12 kchn writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה 1 There is a minor scene change here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -943,7 +943,7 @@ EXO 10 18 p9hz וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֖א 1 Moses and Aaron were summoned to the ki EXO 10 19 xhsv רֽוּחַ־יָם֙ חָזָ֣ק מְאֹ֔ד 1 “a very strong west wind” or “a very strong wind from the west” EXO 10 19 mdp5 וַ⁠יִּשָּׂא֙ אֶת־הָ֣⁠אַרְבֶּ֔ה 1 picked up the locusts “and it moved the locusts upwards” EXO 10 19 zhcu grammar-collectivenouns הָ֣⁠אַרְבֶּ֔ה…אַרְבֶּ֣ה 1 See how you translated this in [10:4](../10/04.md). Alternate translation: “the locusts … of the locusts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 10 19 q8aj grammar-collectivenouns וַ⁠יִּתְקָעֵ֖⁠הוּ 1 Here, the first **it** refers to the wind, the second agrees in number with the collective singular “locust.” See how you translated this in [10:5](../10/05.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]] +EXO 10 19 q8aj grammar-collectivenouns וַ⁠יִּתְקָעֵ֖⁠הוּ 1 Here, the first **it** refers to the wind, the second agrees in number with the collective singular “locust.” See how you translated this in [10:5](../10/05.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 10 20 dw1d figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֥ק יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 10 21 x6xk writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה 1 A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. This is the start of the third plague sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 10 21 utyz יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. @@ -1128,7 +1128,7 @@ EXO 13 14 qr7q figs-metonymy בְּ⁠חֹ֣זֶק יָ֗ד 1 strong hand Here, EXO 13 14 rcz7 figs-metaphor מִ⁠בֵּ֥ית עֲבָדִֽים 1 the house of slavery Moses speaks of Egypt as if it were a house where people keep slaves. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:3](../13/03.md). Alternate translation: “from the place where you were slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 13 15 fgvg figs-metaphor כִּֽי־הִקְשָׁ֣ה פַרְעֹה֮ לְ⁠שַׁלְּחֵ⁠נוּ֒ 1 This means he was stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he were hard. Alternate translation: “that when Pharaoh resisted letting us go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 13 15 atxz figs-merism מִ⁠בְּכֹ֥ר אָדָ֖ם וְ⁠עַד־בְּכ֣וֹר בְּהֵמָ֑ה 1 This is a figure of speech used to emphasize the extent of the plague. Alternate translation: “whether he was a person or an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 13 16 bse4 figs-parallelism וְ⁠הָיָ֤ה לְ⁠אוֹת֙ עַל־יָ֣דְ⁠כָ֔ה וּ⁠לְ⁠טוֹטָפֹ֖ת בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 become a reminder on your hands, and a reminder on your forehead This expresses two ways to remember the importance of the passover event. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 13:9](./09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +EXO 13 16 bse4 figs-parallelism וְ⁠הָיָ֤ה לְ⁠אוֹת֙ עַל־יָ֣דְ⁠כָ֔ה וּ⁠לְ⁠טוֹטָפֹ֖ת בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 become a reminder on your hands, and a reminder on your forehead This expresses two ways to remember the importance of the Passover event. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 13:9](../13/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 13 16 xfag figs-metonymy בְּ⁠חֹ֣זֶק יָ֔ד 1 Here, **hand** represents God’s actions or works. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “with his powerful works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 13 17 cv8n writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֗י 1 This marks the transition from instruction to narrative. You should mark the resumption of the narrative in a natural way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 13 17 pum6 grammar-connect-condition-contrary וְ⁠לֹא־נָחָ֣⁠ם אֱלֹהִ֗ים דֶּ֚רֶךְ אֶ֣רֶץ פְּלִשְׁתִּ֔ים כִּ֥י קָר֖וֹב ה֑וּא 1 The route on which God took the Israelites was not the expected route. In some languages you may need to put the portion that describes the expectation first. Alternate translation: “although it was nearby, God did not lead them by way of the land of the Philistines.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) @@ -1219,7 +1219,7 @@ EXO 14 30 e2lf figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֣ד מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 out of the EXO 14 30 p5zw עַל־שְׂפַ֥ת הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 on the seashore “on the land along the edge of the sea” EXO 14 31 o1oc grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 on the seashore This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 14 31 np6s figs-metonymy אֶת־הַ⁠יָּ֣ד הַ⁠גְּדֹלָ֗ה 1 on the seashore Here, **hand** refers to power. Alternate translation: “the great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 15 intro ni4b 0 # Exodus 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verses 1b-18 and 21b of chapter 15 verses are poetry. They are a song of praise to Yahweh because he defeated and destroyed the Egyptian army ([Exodus 14:26-28](../14/26.md).). Translating poetry should be done by someone who is a skilled poet in the target language. Because the forms of poetry are so different in different languages, a translation that is good poetry in the target language may seem very different from the original poem. The structure may look quite different. The poet will be well served by looking at the entire poem from multiple perspectives. He will need to know the meaning of the poem, the themes and discourse structure of the poem, and the feelings that the poem is supposed to create in the reader at each point (UST, tNotes). He will need to understand how that was accomplished by the original form and structure (ULT). Then he will need to compose the translated poem using forms and structures that have the same or similar meaning, themes, discourse elements, and feelings.

### Structure

This song follows a basic AB structure which is given to us in verse 1b-c and 21b-c:

* A - praise to Yahweh - he is magnificent (expressed in various words)
* B - because he defeats our enemies

The song can be divided into three major sections, each of which is patterned as: AB(a)b. Each section starts with an AB portion which is characterized by fewer verbs (or participles, how to express) (especially the A portion). The section then elaborates on each. Note that there are other possible analyses of the structure of the poem.

Here is an outline of the structure according to this model:

* Section 1 (see alternate breakdown below):
* 1b: A “Let me sing to Yahweh, for he has triumphantly triumphed;”
* 1c: B “the horse and the one riding it he threw into the sea.”
* 2-3: a
* 4-5: b
* Section 2:
* 6a: A
* 6b: B
* 7a: a “And in the abundance of your majesty”
* 7a-10: b“you overthrow those who rise up against you … ”
* Section 3:
* 11: A
* 12: B
* 13a: a (possibly) “In your covenant loyalty”
* 13a-17: b
* 18: finale

Alternate breakdown of section 1: it is possible to view 1b-c as the introduction and divide verse 2 such that:

* 2a: A “Yah is my strength and my song”
* 2b: B “and he has become my salvation”
* 2c-3: a
* 4-5: b

### Themes:

There are several images and themes that are throughout the song as well as some that are throughout an individual section.

* “High” versus “low”: Yahweh is high, while his enemies are low.
* The following words are all related to the idea of being high or rising up: **triumph** ([v1](../15/01.md)), **exalt** ([v2](../15/02.md)), **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v11](../15/11.md)), **majesty** ([v7](../15/07.md)), and **the mountain of** \[Yahweh’s\] **possession** ([v17](../15/17.md)). In the last case Yahweh’s people are brought to a high place with him.
* In contrast, his enemies are low. Note in [verse 7](../15/07.md), Yahweh overthrows those who **rise up against** \[him\]. Ideas of being low are as follows: **sank** ([v4](../15/04.md), [v10](../15/19.md)), **deeps** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **descended into the depths** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **melted away** ([v15](../15/15.md)), and **fall on them** ([v16](../15/16.md)).
* The strength of Yahweh in [verses 2](../15/02.md), [6](../15/06.md), and [13](../15/13.md).
* The effectiveness of Yahweh’s hand versus the enemy's hand. Yahweh’s hand (and arm) is effective in [verses 6](../15/06.md), [12](../15/12.md), [16](../15/16.md), and [17](../15/17.md) but the enemy’s hand is ineffective despite his boasting in [verse 9](../15/09.md).
* There is parallel imagery near the end of each section. The enemy is compared three times by simile to a heavy, inert object. In [verses 5](../15/05.md) and [16](../15/16.md) that is a **stone**, in [verse 10](../15/10.md) that is **lead**.
* More parallel imagery occurs at the end of sections one ([v5](../15/05.md)) and two ([v10](../15/10.md)): that of the enemy sinking in the water and being covered by it.
* In sections two and three the water ([v8](../15/08.md)) and the other peoples ([v16](../15/16.md)) are made still by Yahweh.
* Section two begins and ends with **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v10](../15/10.md)) and that word is picked up in the beginning of section three ([v11](../15/11.md)).
* In section two ([v9](../15/09.md)), the enemies seek to **dispossess** (or disinherit) the Israelites; in section three ([v16](../15/16.md)), the Israelites come to live in the land of Yahweh’s **possession** (or inheritance).
* In [verse 11](../15/11.md), three themes for the third section are introduced. These are each expanded on in that section.
* **Holiness** occurs again in [verses 13](../15/13.md) and [16](../15/16.md)
* **Fear** is vividly described in [verses 14-16](../15/14.md) (shake, terror, panic, trembling, melted away, dread)
* Yahweh **does miracles** to protect and build a home for his people
* [Verses 14](../15/14.md)-16a are a chiasm, a complex parallel structure where concepts are repeated in reverse order:
* A: 14a: peoples (nations) *become* afraid
* B: 14b: *inhabitants* of Philistia are afraid
* C: 15a: *rulers* of Edom are afraid
* C’: 15b: *rulers* of Moab are afraid
* B’: 15c: *inhabitants* of Canaan are afraid
* A’: 16a: people *become* afraid
* In section three, there is another parallel structure:
* [v13](../15/13.md): you led this people => [v16](../15/16.md): your people pass by
* v13: this people you redeemed => v16: this people you acquired (or purchased or ransomed)
* v13: you led them to the home => [v17](../15/17.md): you will bring them … \[to\] the place … you made
* v13: of your holiness => v17: the holy place

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Israelite’s discontent
In [verse 24](../15/24.md) the word **murmur** is introduced for the first time. This is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers.

### Yahweh’s laws

In verses [24-26](../15/24.md), there is an introductory revelation of the requirement that Israel keep the covenant by obeying the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]]) +EXO 15 intro ni4b 0 # Exodus 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verses 1b-18 and 21b of chapter 15 verses are poetry. They are a song of praise to Yahweh because he defeated and destroyed the Egyptian army ([Exodus 14:26-28](../14/26.md).). Translating poetry should be done by someone who is a skilled poet in the target language. Because the forms of poetry are so different in different languages, a translation that is good poetry in the target language may seem very different from the original poem. The structure may look quite different. The poet will be well served by looking at the entire poem from multiple perspectives. He will need to know the meaning of the poem, the themes and discourse structure of the poem, and the feelings that the poem is supposed to create in the reader at each point (UST, tNotes). He will need to understand how that was accomplished by the original form and structure (ULT). Then he will need to compose the translated poem using forms and structures that have the same or similar meaning, themes, discourse elements, and feelings.

### Structure

This song follows a basic AB structure which is given to us in verse 1b-c and 21b-c:

* A - praise to Yahweh - he is magnificent (expressed in various words)
* B - because he defeats our enemies

The song can be divided into three major sections, each of which is patterned as: AB(a)b. Each section starts with an AB portion which is characterized by fewer verbs (or participles, how to express) (especially the A portion). The section then elaborates on each. Note that there are other possible analyses of the structure of the poem.

Here is an outline of the structure according to this model:

* Section 1 (see alternate breakdown below):
* 1b: A “Let me sing to Yahweh, for he has triumphantly triumphed;”
* 1c: B “the horse and the one riding it he threw into the sea.”
* 2-3: a
* 4-5: b
* Section 2:
* 6a: A
* 6b: B
* 7a: a “And in the abundance of your majesty”
* 7a-10: b “you overthrow those who rise up against you … ”
* Section 3:
* 11: A
* 12: B
* 13a: a (possibly) “In your covenant loyalty”
* 13a-17: b
* 18: finale

Alternate breakdown of section 1: it is possible to view 1b-c as the introduction and divide verse 2 such that:

* 2a: A “Yah is my strength and my song”
* 2b: B “and he has become my salvation”
* 2c-3: a
* 4-5: b

### Themes:

There are several images and themes that are throughout the song as well as some that are throughout an individual section.

* “High” versus “low”: Yahweh is high, while his enemies are low.
* The following words are all related to the idea of being high or rising up: **triumph** ([v1](../15/01.md)), **exalt** ([v2](../15/02.md)), **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v11](../15/11.md)), **majesty** ([v7](../15/07.md)), and **the mountain of** \[Yahweh’s\] **possession** ([v17](../15/17.md)). In the last case Yahweh’s people are brought to a high place with him.
* In contrast, his enemies are low. Note in [verse 7](../15/07.md), Yahweh overthrows those who **rise up against** \[him\]. Ideas of being low are as follows: **sank** ([v4](../15/04.md), [v10](../15/19.md)), **deeps** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **descended into the depths** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **melted away** ([v15](../15/15.md)), and **fall on them** ([v16](../15/16.md)).
* The strength of Yahweh in [verses 2](../15/02.md), [6](../15/06.md), and [13](../15/13.md).
* The effectiveness of Yahweh’s hand versus the enemy's hand. Yahweh’s hand (and arm) is effective in [verses 6](../15/06.md), [12](../15/12.md), [16](../15/16.md), and [17](../15/17.md) but the enemy’s hand is ineffective despite his boasting in [verse 9](../15/09.md).
* There is parallel imagery near the end of each section. The enemy is compared three times by simile to a heavy, inert object. In [verses 5](../15/05.md) and [16](../15/16.md) that is a **stone**, in [verse 10](../15/10.md) that is **lead**.
* More parallel imagery occurs at the end of sections one ([v5](../15/05.md)) and two ([v10](../15/10.md)): that of the enemy sinking in the water and being covered by it.
* In sections two and three the water ([v8](../15/08.md)) and the other peoples ([v16](../15/16.md)) are made still by Yahweh.
* Section two begins and ends with **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v10](../15/10.md)) and that word is picked up in the beginning of section three ([v11](../15/11.md)).
* In section two ([v9](../15/09.md)), the enemies seek to **dispossess** (or disinherit) the Israelites; in section three ([v16](../15/16.md)), the Israelites come to live in the land of Yahweh’s **possession** (or inheritance).
* In [verse 11](../15/11.md), three themes for the third section are introduced. These are each expanded on in that section.
* **Holiness** occurs again in [verses 13](../15/13.md) and [16](../15/16.md)
* **Fear** is vividly described in [verses 14-16](../15/14.md) (shake, terror, panic, trembling, melted away, dread)
* Yahweh **does miracles** to protect and build a home for his people
* [Verses 14](../15/14.md)-16a are a chiasm, a complex parallel structure where concepts are repeated in reverse order:
* A: 14a: peoples (nations) *become* afraid
* B: 14b: *inhabitants* of Philistia are afraid
* C: 15a: *rulers* of Edom are afraid
* C’: 15b: *rulers* of Moab are afraid
* B’: 15c: *inhabitants* of Canaan are afraid
* A’: 16a: people *become* afraid
* In section three, there is another parallel structure:
* [v13](../15/13.md): you led this people => [v16](../15/16.md): your people pass by
* v13: this people you redeemed => v16: this people you acquired (or purchased or ransomed)
* v13: you led them to the home => [v17](../15/17.md): you will bring them … \[to\] the place … you made
* v13: of your holiness => v17: the holy place

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Israelite’s discontent
In [verse 24](../15/24.md) the word **murmur** is introduced for the first time. This is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers.

### Yahweh’s laws

In verses [24-26](../15/24.md), there is an introductory revelation of the requirement that Israel keep the covenant by obeying the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]]) EXO 15 1 kw29 figs-explicit גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה 1 he has triumphed gloriously It can be stated explicitly over whom Yahweh triumphed. Alternate translation: “he has achieved a glorious victory over the army of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 15 1 bpyj גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה 1 he has triumphed gloriously “he is highly exalted” or “he is extremely high” or “he is exaltedly exalted” EXO 15 1 f6ue figs-metaphor ס֥וּס וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ רָמָ֥ה בַ⁠יָּֽם 1 the horse and its rider he has thrown into the sea Moses sang about God causing the sea to cover and drown the horse and rider as if God had thrown them into the sea. Alternate translation: “he has made the horse and rider drown in the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1371,7 +1371,7 @@ EXO 17 14 c5rl figs-metaphor מָחֹ֤ה אֶמְחֶה֙ אֶת־זֵ֣כֶר EXO 17 14 jm77 figs-metonymy עֲמָלֵ֔ק 1 Amalek This refers to the Amalekites. Alternate translation: Amalekites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 17 14 n42j figs-metonymy מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠שָּׁמָֽיִם 1 Amalek This phrase is used to represent all people everywhere. Alternate translation: “from all people every where” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 17 15 fneg נִסִּֽ⁠י 1 Amalek **Banner** is something lifted up high, perhaps like a flag, that people can see from a distance and follow. Alternate translation: “is my military standard” or “is my guidon” -EXO 17 16 lr14 כִּֽי־יָד֙ עַל־כֵּ֣ס יָ֔הּ 1 Amalek The Hebrew here is very difficult and there are a variety of opinions regarding the meaning. Questions include: 1) Whose hand is referred to? Amalek’s, Yahweh’s, or Moses’? 2) What is the hand on (or against)? Yahweh’s throne or banner? 3) What is the meaning of the preposition meaning on, against, or above? What does that signify? Rebellion, or taking an oath, or holding onto a symbol of power? If there is another translation in your region, it may be best to simply follow the interpretation it gives. Alternate translation: “Because a hand was on the throne of Yah” or “Because a hand was on the banner of Yah” +EXO 17 16 lr14 כִּֽי־יָד֙ עַל־כֵּ֣ס יָ֔הּ 1 Amalek The Hebrew here is very difficult and there are a variety of opinions regarding the meaning. Questions include: (1) Whose hand is referred to? Amalek’s, Yahweh’s, or Moses’? (2) What is the hand on (or against)? Yahweh’s throne or banner? (3) What is the meaning of the preposition meaning on, against, or above? What does that signify? Rebellion, or taking an oath, or holding onto a symbol of power? If there is another translation in your region, it may be best to simply follow the interpretation it gives. Alternate translation: “Because a hand was on the throne of Yah” or “Because a hand was on the banner of Yah” EXO 17 16 sw1q מִלְחָמָ֥ה לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה בַּֽ⁠עֲמָלֵ֑ק 1 Amalek This phrase has no verbs in Hebrew. You may need to translate the noun **war** as a verb. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will make war with Amalek” or “Yahweh will war against Amalek” EXO 18 intro t8g2 0 # Exodus 18 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Leadership lessons
Jethro taught Moses an important leadership lesson in this chapter. Many scholars look at this chapter for important leadership lessons. Moses delegated some of his responsibilities to other godly men so that he would not become worn out by all the demands made of him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])


## Possible translation difficulties
### Order of events
The timing of the events in [verse 2](../18/02.md) is not clear and whatever their timing, may be difficult to translate. The question is: Is Jethro’s **taking** Zipporah related to the past event of Moses sending her back to him at some otherwise unmentioned point in time, or is Jethro’s **taking** related to his coming to meet Moses in [verse 5](../18/05.md).

### Verse 11
[Verse 11](../18/11.md) is difficult in the original and requires interpretation.

### God and Yahweh
For this chapter God, who is named Yahweh, is mostly referred to as God instead by his name as is usual in much of the rest of the book. Translations should not suggest that they are not different beings.

### Kinship: Father-in-law
Jethro is the father of Moses’ wife. Some languages may make a distinction between that and a woman’s father-in-law. If that is the case, note it in verses: 1-2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])


### Participant reference
Jethro is often referred to simply as the father-in-law of Moses in this chapter. He is also named explicitly an unusually high number of times (it would be more usual to have more pronouns referring to him). This is likely to emphasize his familial ties and authority (or honored status). Some languages may need to use alter the way he is referred to for naturalness or to convey the same sense of familial ties and authority (or honored status). EXO 18 1 nl86 translate-kinship חֹתֵ֣ן מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 Moses’ father-in-law This refers to the father of the wife of Moses. If your language uses a different term for a man’s father-in-law than for a woman’s, choose the appropriate one here. Note also in verses: 2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. Alternate translation: “the father of the wife of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) @@ -1388,7 +1388,7 @@ EXO 18 8 a1ra figs-metaphor כָּל־הַ⁠תְּלָאָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר EXO 18 9 wp1p figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרָֽיִם 1 the hand of the Egyptians The hand represents the power of someone to do something. Alternate translation: “the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians were doing to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 18 10 nrv7 figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרַ֖יִם וּ⁠מִ⁠יַּ֣ד פַּרְעֹ֑ה…מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת יַד־מִצְרָֽיִם 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh The hand represents the power of someone to do something. Alternate translation: “from the power of the Egyptians and from the power of Pharaoh … from the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians and Pharaoh were doing to you … from what the Egyptians were doing to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 18 11 kmk7 כִּ֣י בַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh **Because of the matter** probably refers back to Yahweh’s rescue of Israel. Alternate translation: “because of what he did” -EXO 18 11 ljj6 אֲשֶׁ֥ר זָד֖וּ עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh The most natural referent for **they** is **the gods**, who, perhaps through their agents (Pharaoh and the Egyptians), fought against Yahweh and oppressed the Israelites. This would connect back to [Exodus 12:12](../12/12.md) where Yahweh declares that he is bring judgment on the gods of Egypt. You may need to make some part of this explicit. Alternate translation: “in which they proudly fought Yahweh by oppressing Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 18 11 ljj6 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר זָד֖וּ עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh The most natural referent for **they** is **the gods**, who, perhaps through their agents (Pharaoh and the Egyptians), fought against Yahweh and oppressed the Israelites. This would connect back to [Exodus 12:12](../12/12.md) where Yahweh declares that he is bring judgment on the gods of Egypt. You may need to make some part of this explicit. Alternate translation: “in which they proudly fought Yahweh by oppressing Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 18 12 voi9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of God. In this case it likely means that this was a worship event. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 18 13 ni2b writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִי֙ מִֽ⁠מָּחֳרָ֔ת 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 18 13 ano2 translate-symaction וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֖ה לִ⁠שְׁפֹּ֣ט 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh Sitting was symbolic of having a position of authority. Alternate translation: “Moses sat down as a judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) @@ -1419,7 +1419,7 @@ EXO 18 26 abx4 וְ⁠שָׁפְט֥וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֖ם בְּ⁠כָ EXO 18 26 z7j4 figs-metaphor אֶת־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠קָּשֶׁה֙ יְבִיא֣וּ⁠ן אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 The difficult cases they brought to Moses The author writes of telling Moses about the difficult cases as bringing him the difficult cases. Alternate translation: “They told Moses about the difficult cases” or “When there were difficult cases, they told Moses about them so that he would judge them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 18 26 ve8h הַ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠קָּטֹ֖ן 1 the small cases “easy case” EXO 19 intro ck7e 0 # Exodus 19 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### “A kingdom of priests”
The function of the priests was to intercede for the people. The Levites were the only priests in Israel; this is a metaphor indicating that the nation was to intercede for the world as a whole. They were also to be holy, or set apart, from the rest of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Revealing the Law
The events of this chapter are concerned with preparing the people to receive the law of Moses. The people go through all of this to prepare themselves for the law, which shows the great importance of this event for Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])


### Boundaries between Yahweh and the people
Moses is told to make the people holy in preparation for meeting Yahweh, then boundaries are set up to keep the people separate from Yahweh, then the priests are told to make themselves holy. The theme of a holy separation is beginning to be developed that will become much of the law code. -EXO 19 1 r5tj translate-hebrewmonths בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֔י…בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה 1 In the third month…on the same day This means they arrived at the wilderness on the first day of the month just as they left Egypt on the first day of the month. The first day of the third month on the Hebrew calendar is near the middle of May on Western calendars. Alternate translation: “In the third month … on the first day of the month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 19 1 r5tj translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֔י…בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה 1 In the third month…on the same day This means they arrived at the wilderness on the first day of the month just as they left Egypt on the first day of the month. The first day of the third month on the Hebrew calendar is near the middle of May on Western calendars. Alternate translation: “In the third month … on the first day of the month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 19 2 nk51 translate-names מֵ⁠רְפִידִ֗ים 1 Rephidim **Rephidim** is an area on the edge of the wilderness of Sinai where the people of Israel had been camping. See how you translated this name in [Exodus 17:1](../17/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 19 3 kgev figs-parallelism תֹאמַר֙ לְ⁠בֵ֣ית יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠תַגֵּ֖יד לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 the house of Jacob, the people of Israel These two phrases have exactly the same meaning. This may be for poetic effect as Yahweh’s statement here through [verse 6](../19/06.md) is somewhat artfully crafted. You may need to use a strategy other than parallelism to achieve a similar poetic effect in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 19 4 z9i6 figs-you אַתֶּ֣ם רְאִיתֶ֔ם 1 You have seen The word **you** here refers to the Israelites. Yahweh is telling Moses what to tell the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -1462,7 +1462,7 @@ EXO 19 24 p1yq figs-metaphor יִפְרָץ־בָּֽ⁠ם 1 break through the b EXO 20 intro x7vt 0 # Exodus 20 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The instructions recorded in this chapter are commonly known as the “ten commandments.”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Covenant
Yahweh’s covenant faithfulness is now based on the covenant he made with Abraham as well as the covenant he is making with Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenantfaith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])


### Form of you
The singular form of you is used in the commandments, however, the commandments applied to the whole Israelite community. There is both a singular and a corporate aspect to them. You may need to choose between singular and plural if you language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) EXO 20 2 qg71 figs-metaphor מִ⁠בֵּ֥ית עֲבָדִֽים 1 house of slavery Moses speaks of Egypt as if it were a house where people keep slaves. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:3](../13/03.md). Alternate translation: “from the place where you were slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 20 3 r9h3 לֹֽ֣א יִהְיֶֽה־לְ⁠ךָ֛ אֱלֹהִ֥ים אֲחֵרִ֖ים עַל־פָּנָֽ⁠יַ 1 You must have no other gods before me “You must not worship any other gods besides me” -EXO 20 4 s7n3 figs-merisms וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר בַּ⁠שָּׁמַ֨יִם֙ מִ⁠מַּ֔עַל וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בָּ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠תָּ֑חַת וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בַּ⁠מַּ֖יִם מִ⁠תַּ֥חַת לָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 nor the likeness This list means, all created things wherever they are. Alternate translation: “nor anything that looks like anything created whether that is in heaven above, or that is in the earth beneath, or that is in the water under the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merisms]]) +EXO 20 4 s7n3 figs-merism וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר בַּ⁠שָּׁמַ֨יִם֙ מִ⁠מַּ֔עַל וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בָּ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠תָּ֑חַת וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בַּ⁠מַּ֖יִם מִ⁠תַּ֥חַת לָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 nor the likeness This list means, all created things wherever they are. Alternate translation: “nor anything that looks like anything created whether that is in heaven above, or that is in the earth beneath, or that is in the water under the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 20 4 rkn1 figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה 1 nor the likeness “nor anything looking like something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 20 5 ka3i writing-pronouns לָ⁠הֶ֖ם 1 You must not bow down to them or worship them The word **them** refers to carved figures or idols. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 20 5 s2ia translate-ordinal עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation “to generations 3 and 4.” This refers to the grandchildren and great-grandchildren. Alternate translation: “even on the grandchildren and great-grandchildren (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) @@ -1595,7 +1595,7 @@ EXO 22 7 na9h figs-activepassive וְ⁠גֻנַּ֖ב 1 if it is stolen This ca EXO 22 7 x2sh figs-activepassive אִם־יִמָּצֵ֥א הַ⁠גַּנָּ֖ב 1 if the thief is found This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “if you find the thief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 8 lwg5 figs-activepassive אִם־לֹ֤א יִמָּצֵא֙ הַ⁠גַּנָּ֔ב וְ⁠נִקְרַ֥ב בַּֽעַל־הַ⁠בַּ֖יִת אֶל־הָֽ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 come before the judges to see whether You may need to translate these in an active voice if your language does not use passive in this way. Alternate translation: “If no one finds the thief, bring the owner of the house to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 8 c812 figs-metonymy הָֽ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 come before the judges to see whether The word for **God** at its most literal means “great ones.” Here and in the [next verse](../22/09.md) it may have this basic meaning and refer to human judges or other leaders in Israel. It may also be a metonym and refer to the judges because they represent God to the people and have his authority. See [Exodus 21:6](../21/06.md) for another example of this. Alternate translation: “the judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 22 8 f774 figs-metonymy שָׁלַ֛ח יָד֖⁠וֹ בִּ⁠מְלֶ֥אכֶת רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ 1 has put his own hand on his neighbor’s property This is an idiom. If you have a way of saying this in your language, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “he has stolen his neighbor’s property” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) revisit +EXO 22 8 f774 figs-idiom שָׁלַ֛ח יָד֖⁠וֹ בִּ⁠מְלֶ֥אכֶת רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ 1 has put his own hand on his neighbor’s property This is an idiom for stealing. If you have a way of saying this in your language, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “he has stolen his neighbor’s property” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 22 9 p7ab דְּבַר…דְּבַר 1 “dispute” EXO 22 9 fgz1 כִּי־ה֣וּא זֶ֔ה 1 the claim of both parties must come before the judges “This is mine” or “This is my missing property” EXO 22 9 m31k figs-metonymy הָֽ⁠אֱלֹהִ֔ים…אֱלֹהִ֔ים 1 the claim of both parties must come before the judges The word for **God** at its most literal means “great ones.” Here and in the [previous verse](../22/08.md) it may have this basic meaning and refer to human judges or other leaders in Israel. It may also be a metonym and refer to the judges because they represent God to the people and have his authority. See [Exodus 21:6](../21/06.md) for another example of this. Alternate translation: “the judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1666,7 +1666,7 @@ EXO 23 13 x5tf figs-metonymy וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִי EXO 23 13 apnw figs-metonymy לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods To be **on your mouth** means to speak. Alternate translation: “nor speak them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 13 s86p figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods You could translate this in an active manner. Also see previous note. Alternate translation: “nor speak them so someone could hear them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 23 14 ezgh translate-numbers שָׁלֹ֣שׁ 1 mention the names of other gods “3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 23 15 bu7n translate-hebrewmonths הָֽ⁠אָבִ֔יב 1 Aviv This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. Aviv is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +EXO 23 15 bu7n translate-hebrewmonths הָֽ⁠אָבִ֔יב 1 Aviv This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. Aviv is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) EXO 23 15 i88n translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֣ת 1 Aviv “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 23 15 tx1v figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠לֹא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖⁠י רֵיקָֽם 1 not appear before me empty-handed Here understatement is used to emphasize that the Israelites must bring a suitable offering to Yahweh. Alternate translation: “come to me without a proper offering” or “always bring an offering to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 23 16 ybsb וְ⁠חַ֤ג הַ⁠קָּצִיר֙ 1 Festival of Ingathering Elsewhere this is called the “Festival of Weeks.” See [Exodus 34:22](../34/22.md) and Deuteronomy 16:9 and following. @@ -1715,7 +1715,7 @@ EXO 24 7 c9tm translate-unknown סֵ֣פֶר הַ⁠בְּרִ֔ית 1 foot of t EXO 24 8 h9ff figs-explicit הַ⁠דָּ֔ם 1 Then Moses took the blood This refers to the blood that Moses had put into the bowls. This can be stated clearly. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 24 8 juxf figs-explicit עַ֥ל כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים הָ⁠אֵֽלֶּה׃ 1 Then Moses took the blood **These words** refers to what Moses just read aloud, that is, Yahweh’s commands. You can make this more clear. Alternate translation: “which I just read aloud to you and you agreed to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 24 9 izl5 writing-newevent 0 Nadab…Abihu A new scene begins with this verse, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. Here the narrative is connected to [verse 2](../24/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 24 9 uz7y וַ⁠יַּ֥עַל 1 Nadab…Abihu These are men’s names. See how you translated these names in [Exodus 6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +EXO 24 9 uz7y translate-names וַ⁠יַּ֥עַל 1 Nadab…Abihu These are men’s names. See how you translated these names in [Exodus 6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 24 9 nuq7 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֥עַל 1 Nadab…Abihu The men **went up** the mountain. You can state this clearly. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 24 10 ic4s figs-personification וְ⁠תַ֣חַת רַגְלָ֗י⁠ו 1 Under his feet This speaks of God as if he had human feet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 24 10 q8sn לִבְנַ֣ת 1 pavement a hard surface for walking or riding @@ -1737,7 +1737,7 @@ EXO 24 16 uwdd translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ EXO 24 17 e4n6 figs-simile כְּ⁠אֵ֥שׁ אֹכֶ֖לֶת 1 like a devouring fire This means the glory of Yahweh was very large and seemed to burn brightly like a fire. Alternate translation: “like a big fire burning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 24 17 k5lj figs-metaphor לְ⁠עֵינֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 in the eyes of the Israelites Their eyes represent seeing, and seeing represents their thoughts or judgment about they saw. Alternate translation: “to the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 24 18 h1wy translate-numbers אַרְבָּעִ֣ים י֔וֹם וְ⁠אַרְבָּעִ֖ים לָֽיְלָה 1 forty days and forty nights “40 days and 40 nights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 25 intro t23a 0 # Exodus 25 General Notes
## Structure:
- v. 1-7: Instructions for gifts the Israelites may give to help build the place they will worship God
- v. 8-9: Introductory building instructions
- v. 10-22: Instructions for building the Box of the Testimony
- v. 23-30: Instructions for building the table
- v. 31-39: Instructions for building the lampstand
- v. 40: Summary instruction

## Special concepts in this chapter
- The tent of meeting and Box of the Testimony are introduced in this chapter.
- Translators will need to take care translating the concept of atonement.


## Potential translation issues in this chapter:
- There are many unfamiliar items in this chapter. Fortunately they are mostly all physical items. Translators will have to try to understand what each item is and translate it into the closest equivalent in their culture. It may be helpful for translators to try to find images depicting some of the items the Israelites were to make.
- There are some biblical weights and measurements that translators may not have encountered before.
- From [verse 11](../25/11.md) until the end of chapter 30 almost every instruction regarding the construction of the tent of meeting and all the associated items are given with a singular form of “you” as if Moses himself would make them. However, it is clear and made explicit in [chapter 31](../31/01.md) that certain skilled craftsmen will receive these instructions from Moses and make these items. In some languages you may need to change from second to third person throughout, following the pattern in [25:10](../25/10.md). There are a few exceptions which will have their own note. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]].
+EXO 25 intro t23a 0 # Exodus 25 General Notes

## Structure:
- v. 1-7: Instructions for gifts the Israelites may give to help build the place they will worship God
- v. 8-9: Introductory building instructions
- v. 10-22: Instructions for building the Box of the Testimony
- v. 23-30: Instructions for building the table
- v. 31-39: Instructions for building the lampstand
- v. 40: Summary instruction

## Special concepts in this chapter
- The tent of meeting and Box of the Testimony are introduced in this chapter.
- Translators will need to take care translating the concept of atonement.


## Potential translation issues in this chapter:
- There are many unfamiliar items in this chapter. Fortunately they are mostly all physical items. Translators will have to try to understand what each item is and translate it into the closest equivalent in their culture. It may be helpful for translators to try to find images depicting some of the items the Israelites were to make.
- There are some biblical weights and measurements that translators may not have encountered before.
- From [verse 11](../25/11.md) until the end of chapter 30 almost every instruction regarding the construction of the tent of meeting and all the associated items are given with a singular form of “you” as if Moses himself would make them. However, it is clear and made explicit in [chapter 31](../31/01.md) that certain skilled craftsmen will receive these instructions from Moses and make these items. In some languages you may need to change from second to third person throughout, following the pattern in [25:10](../25/10.md). There are a few exceptions which will have their own note. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]].
EXO 25 2 ygtd figs-quotemarks דַּבֵּר֙ 1 who is motivated by a willing heart At the beginning of this verse, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [Exo 30:10](../30/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 25 2 tktu figs-quotations דַּבֵּר֙ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל וְ⁠יִקְחוּ־לִ֖⁠י תְּרוּמָ֑ה 1 who is motivated by a willing heart In some languages you may have to make **and they shall take a contribution for me** a direct quote. Note that this will make it a second-level quotation and you will need to mark it with second-level quotation marking if your language uses them. Alternate translation: “Say to the sons of Israel, ‘You shall take a contribution for me.’ ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 25 2 r5yr figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֣ר יִדְּבֶ֣⁠נּוּ לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 who is motivated by a willing heart This is an idiom that indicates a person’s desire to give an offering. Many languages will have a similar idiom though the body part may vary. Alternate translation: “who wants to give one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1809,8 +1809,8 @@ EXO 26 8 p423 translate-numbers שְׁלֹשִׁים֙…אַרְבַּ֣ע…ל EXO 26 8 v7i1 translate-bdistance שְׁלֹשִׁים֙ בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה…אַרְבַּ֣ע בָּ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 cubits You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 13.8 meter … 184 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 26 9 kb9x figs-metonymy אֶל־מ֖וּל פְּנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֹֽהֶל 1 cubits Here, **face** is probably referring to the entrance of the tent. The opening for the protective tent and the sacred tent would have been coordinated so they were in the same place. Alternate translation: “in front of the entrance of the tent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 26 9 q3og הָ⁠אֹֽהֶל 1 cubits As in [verse 7](../26/07.md), **the tent** refers to the outer tent over the sacred tent. Alternate translation: “the outer tent” -EXO 26 10 etf7 0 loops See how you translated a very similar text in [Exodus 26:4](./04.md). -EXO 26 11 cq36 translate-unknown הַ⁠קְּרָסִים֙ 1 clasps The **clasps** fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:6](./06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 26 10 etf7 0 loops See how you translated a very similar text in [Exodus 26:4](../26/04.md). +EXO 26 11 cq36 translate-unknown הַ⁠קְּרָסִים֙ 1 clasps The **clasps** fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:6](../26/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 12 hftk translate-fraction חֲצִ֤י 1 clasps The word **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) EXO 26 13 k4ci translate-bdistance וְ⁠הָ⁠אַמָּ֨ה…וְ⁠הָ⁠אַמָּ֤ה 1 cubit You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 26 14 kii8 translate-unknown תְּחָשִׁ֖ים 1 a covering of ram skins dyed red, and another covering of fine leather The meaning of this word, **sea cows**, is not known. It may refer to a water mammal that has skin that can be made into a high-quality leather. [Sea cows on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sirenia) See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1832,7 +1832,7 @@ EXO 26 29 ji1j בָּתִּ֖ים לַ⁠בְּרִיחִ֑ם 1 for them to ser EXO 26 29 nq3m לַ⁠בְּרִיחִ֑ם 1 crossbars These are horizontal support beams that give stability to the structure. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:26](../26/26.md). EXO 26 30 csf9 figs-activepassive הָרְאֵ֖יתָ בָּ⁠הָֽר 1 you were shown on the mountain This can be stated in active form. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 26 31 yqi6 0 General Information: See how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md). -EXO 26 33 p2yq translate-unknown הַ⁠קְּרָסִים֒ 1 clasps The **clasps** fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated these in [Exodus 26:6](./06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 26 33 p2yq translate-unknown הַ⁠קְּרָסִים֒ 1 clasps The **clasps** fit into the loops to hold the curtains together. See how you translated these in [Exodus 26:6](../26/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 33 x28l figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים 1 clasps Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy places. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. Alternate translation: “the most holy place” or “the extra-ordinarily holy place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 26 34 u3tu figs-possession בְּ⁠קֹ֖דֶשׁ הַ⁠קֳּדָשִֽׁים 1 clasps Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy places. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated it in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “in the most holy place” or “in the extra-ordinarily holy place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 26 35 lv9e הַ⁠שֻּׁלְחָן֙…הַ⁠מְּנֹרָה֙ 1 The table must be on the north side This is the **table** Yahweh told Moses how to make in [25:23-30](../25/23.md) and the **lampstand** he told him how to make in [25:31-39](../25/31.md). @@ -1844,7 +1844,7 @@ EXO 26 37 av60 0 an embroiderer See how you translated very similar instructio EXO 27 intro x4f7 0 # Exodus 27 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.
- v. 1-8: Instructions for constructing the altar
- v. 9-19: Instructions for constructing the outer curtain walls forming the courtyard around the sacred tent
- v. 20-21: Instructions for the lampstand


## Special concepts in this chapter

### The tent of meeting
This chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building (around the tent of meeting) of the courtyard area containing the altar where priests made sacrifices to Yahweh.

## Potential translation issues
- The verb **make** at the beginning of [verse 9](../27/09.md) is the only verb from verses 9-18. Some languages may be able to translate a clause chain this long without additional verbs, others (including English), will need to supply at least a minimum number of verbs (ULT) or quite a few verbs (UST) for naturalness.
- There continues to be a number of possibly unknown terms, still all tangible objects. EXO 27 1 s8qy translate-bdistance חָמֵשׁ֩ אַמּ֨וֹת…וְ⁠חָמֵ֧שׁ אַמּ֣וֹת…וְ⁠שָׁלֹ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת 1 cubits You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people, if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 2.3 meters … 2.3 meters … 138 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 27 4 hsq3 רֶ֣שֶׁת 1 grate a frame of crossed metal bars for holding wood when burning -EXO 27 4 vlau 1 grate You may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles when translating this verse. See [Exo 25:12](../25/12.md), [Exo 25:26](../25/26.md), & [Exo 25:27](../25/27.md). +EXO 27 4 vlau 0 grate You may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles when translating this verse. See [Exo 25:12](../25/12.md), [Exo 25:26](../25/26.md), & [Exo 25:27](../25/27.md). EXO 27 5 c5em figs-explicit וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֣ה אֹתָ֗⁠הּ תַּ֛חַת כַּרְכֹּ֥ב הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֖חַ מִ⁠לְּ⁠מָ֑טָּה וְ⁠הָיְתָ֣ה הָ⁠רֶ֔שֶׁת עַ֖ד חֲצִ֥י הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּֽחַ 1 You must put the grate under the ledge of the altar The grate was placed inside the altar. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “And you shall put the grate under the rim of the altar, on the inside of the altar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 27 7 b3yx figs-activepassive וְ⁠הוּבָ֥א אֶת־בַּדָּ֖י⁠ו 1 The poles must be put into the rings, and the poles must be on the two sides of the altar, to carry it This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “And you shall put its poles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 27 8 ecmh figs-123person הֶרְאָ֥ה 1 The poles must be put into the rings, and the poles must be on the two sides of the altar, to carry it Here, **he** refers to Yahweh in the third person. If it would be unnatural in your language for someone to refer to himself in this way, you may need to change it. Alternate translation: “I showed” or “Yahweh showed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) @@ -1883,7 +1883,7 @@ EXO 28 3 wt7m figs-metonymy אֶל־כָּל־חַכְמֵי־לֵ֔ב אֲשׁ EXO 28 4 tr5e וּ⁠כְתֹ֥נֶת תַּשְׁבֵּ֖ץ 1 a coat of woven work We do not know what word translated **of woven work** means as it only occurs here and in [verse 39](../28/39.md) as a verb. Alternate translation: “and a chequered tunic” EXO 28 4 dz5h translate-unknown מִצְנֶ֣פֶת 1 turban This is a tall head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. You may translate it using a word commonly used for a similar item in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 4 k184 translate-unknown וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֑ט 1 sash This a piece of cloth that people wear around their waist or across their chest. You may translate it using a word commonly used for a similar item in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 28 5 rxke translate-unknown וְ⁠אֶת־הַ⁠תְּכֵ֖לֶת וְ⁠אֶת־הָֽ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֑ן וְ⁠אֶת־תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י 1 sash Possible meanings are (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or ”thread” may be the best understanding. See how you translated this in [25:4](../25/04.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 28 5 rxke translate-unknown וְ⁠אֶת־הַ⁠תְּכֵ֖לֶת וְ⁠אֶת־הָֽ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֑ן וְ⁠אֶת־תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י 1 sash Possible meanings are (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or ”thread” may be the best understanding. See how you translated this in [25:4](../25/04.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 5 pfq5 translate-unknown תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י 1 sash A bright red color for dying cloth was extracted from these worms. Alternate translation: “and bright red” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 6 u3rx translate-unknown וְ⁠שֵׁ֥שׁ מָשְׁזָ֖ר 1 fine-twined linen This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md). Alternate translation: “finely-twined linen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 6 k3bj חֹשֵֽׁב 1 skillful craftsman This refers to a person who can make beautiful objects by hand. @@ -1933,7 +1933,7 @@ EXO 28 32 x42n מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה אֹרֵ֗ג 1 This must be the work of a wea EXO 28 32 rw96 translate-unknown אֹרֵ֗ג 1 a weaver “a person who weaves” or “a person who creates cloth using thread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 32 t60l translate-unknown תַחְרָ֛א 1 a weaver We do not know what this term means, but the implication seems to be that the collar should be made strong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 32 ubhg figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יִקָּרֵֽעַ 1 a weaver You can translate this in another form. Alternate translation: see UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 28 33 qm1f translate-unknown תְּכֵ֤לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָן֙ וְ⁠תוֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י 1 pomegranates Possible meanings are (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or ”thread” may be the best understanding. See how you translated this in [25:4](../25/04.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 28 33 qm1f translate-unknown תְּכֵ֤לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָן֙ וְ⁠תוֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י 1 pomegranates Possible meanings are (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or ”thread” may be the best understanding. See how you translated this in [25:4](../25/04.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 34 kl55 פַּעֲמֹ֤ן זָהָב֙ וְ⁠רִמּ֔וֹן פַּֽעֲמֹ֥ן זָהָ֖ב וְ⁠רִמּ֑וֹן 1 a golden bell and a pomegranate This phrase is repeated to show the pattern of the design on the robe. Alternate translation: “alternate pomegranates and golden bells” EXO 28 35 pf61 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִשְׁמַ֣ע ק֠וֹל⁠וֹ 1 so that its sound can be heard This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “so that the bells make a sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 28 35 fmqu figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֧י יְהוָ֛ה 1 so that its sound can be heard Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1978,7 +1978,7 @@ EXO 29 9 bh2d translate-unknown מִגְבָּעֹ֔ת 1 headbands A headband is EXO 29 9 r1x4 translate-unknown כְּהֻנָּ֖ה 1 The work of the priesthood Here, **priesthood** means the official office of priest. Alternate translation: “the duty of being priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 9 ze9l figs-explicit וְ⁠הָיְתָ֥ה לָ⁠הֶ֛ם 1 will belong to them The duty of being priests will also belong to the descendants of Aaron’s sons. You can state this clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “And … will belong to them and their descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 29 9 p7m9 לְ⁠חֻקַּ֣ת עוֹלָ֑ם 1 permanent law “a law that will not end.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:43](../28/43.md). -EXO 29 9 zbzk figs-idiom מִלֵּאתָ֥ יַֽד־אַהֲרֹ֖ן וְ⁠יַד־בָּנָֽי⁠ו 1 permanent law This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “And you shall ordain Aaron and his sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 29 9 zbzk figs-idiom וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֥ יַֽד־אַהֲרֹ֖ן וְ⁠יַד־בָּנָֽי⁠ו 1 permanent law This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “And you shall ordain Aaron and his sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 9 jhwb וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֥ יַֽד־אַהֲרֹ֖ן וְ⁠יַד־בָּנָֽי⁠ו 1 tent of meeting Interpretations of this phrase vary. Some take it to mean that the actions previous to this statement describe the consecrating of Aaron and his sons as priests. And at this point they are ordained. Others suggest this phrase may introduce the following material as the consecration process. However, because there are several statements regarding this consecration (literally filling the hand) throughout the chapter (see verses 29, 33, and 35), it may also merely be a summary and reminder statement of the purpose of the entire process as the instructions transition from dressing the priests to the sacrificial portion of the ritual. It would probably be best to translate this in the way a mid-text summary reminder phrase would be spoken in your language, avoiding any indication that it refers only to the previous or following text. EXO 29 10 wjko 0 tent of meeting The sacrifice explained here through verse 14 is to purify or cleanse the altar. This is made more clear in [verses 36-37](../29/36.md). EXO 29 10 sgur figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד 1 tent of meeting Here, **face** refers to the front of the tent. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1989,7 +1989,7 @@ EXO 29 13 x2c5 וְ⁠הִקְטַרְתָּ֖ 1 covers the inner parts “and EXO 29 13 nsg6 translate-unknown הַ⁠כָּבֵ֔ד…הַ⁠כְּלָיֹ֔ת 1 liver…kidneys These are organs in the body. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 14 eza8 וְ⁠אֶת־בְּשַׂ֤ר הַ⁠פָּר֙ וְ⁠אֶת־עֹר֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת 1 But as for the bull’s flesh, as well as its skin and dung “But as for the remaining parts of the bull, including the flesh and” EXO 29 14 o262 מִ⁠ח֖וּץ לַֽ⁠מַּחֲנֶ֑ה 1 But as for the bull’s flesh, as well as its skin and dung “outside the borders of where the Israelites are camped” -EXO 29 15 pd0t grammar-connect-time-simultaneous סָ֨מְכ֜וּ אַהֲרֹ֧ן וּ⁠בָנָ֛י⁠ו אֶת־יְדֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־רֹ֥אשׁ הָ⁠אָֽיִל 1 But as for the bull’s flesh, as well as its skin and dung The slaughter of the ram in the next verse occurs while they continue to have their hands on the ram’s head. Take care to arrange the phrases and to use words or forms that indicate that the two events happened at the same time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) +EXO 29 15 pd0t grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וְ⁠סָ֨מְכ֜וּ אַהֲרֹ֧ן וּ⁠בָנָ֛י⁠ו אֶת־יְדֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־רֹ֥אשׁ הָ⁠אָֽיִל 1 But as for the bull’s flesh, as well as its skin and dung The slaughter of the ram in the next verse occurs while they continue to have their hands on the ram’s head. Take care to arrange the phrases and to use words or forms that indicate that the two events happened at the same time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) EXO 29 17 w2nb translate-unknown קִרְבּ⁠וֹ֙ 1 the inner parts “the organs” See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:13](../29/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 18 qc2i וְ⁠הִקְטַרְתָּ֤ אֶת־כָּל־הָ⁠אַ֨יִל֙ 1 on the altar “and burn all of the ram to make smoke” EXO 29 18 pwjk figs-parallelism עֹלָ֥ה ה֖וּא לַֽ⁠יהוָ֑ה רֵ֣יחַ נִיח֔וֹחַ אִשֶּׁ֥ה לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה הֽוּא 1 on the altar These phrases are in parallel with the second expanding and clarifying the first. In some languages, you may need to use a different structure to expand and clarify the **burnt offering.** Alternate translation: “It is a pleasing smelling burnt offering made by fire to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -2008,7 +2008,7 @@ EXO 29 24 ypit figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָֽה 1 You must put t EXO 29 25 e6bj וְ⁠הִקְטַרְתָּ֥ הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֖חָ⁠ה עַל־הָ⁠עֹלָ֑ה לְ⁠רֵ֤יחַ נִיח֨וֹחַ֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה אִשֶּׁ֥ה ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 You must put these See how you translated similar phrases in [verse 18](../29/18.md). EXO 29 26 bf71 מֵ⁠אֵ֤יל הַ⁠מִּלֻּאִים֙ 1 ram of dedication See how you translated this in [verse 22](../29/22.md). Alternate translation: “ram that you dedicated” EXO 29 26 c21f translate-symaction וְ⁠הֵנַפְתָּ֥ אֹת֛⁠וֹ תְּנוּפָ֖ה 1 Aaron’s ram of dedication The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. You may need to make this clear in your language. See how you translated this in [verse 24](../29/24.md). Alternate translation: “and show that you are giving it to me by holding it up to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -EXO 29 27 dzkx translate-symaction 1 Aaron’s ram of dedication The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. You may need to make this clear in your language. See how you translated this in [verse 24](../29/24.md). Alternate translation: “and show that you are giving it to me by holding it up to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +EXO 29 27 dzkx translate-symaction הַ⁠תְּנוּפָ֗ה וְ⁠אֵת֙ שׁ֣וֹק הַ⁠תְּרוּמָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוּנַ֖ף וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֣ר הוּרָ֑ם 1 Aaron’s ram of dedication The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. You may need to make this clear in your language. See how you translated this in [verse 24](../29/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 29 28 uc2d וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֨ן וּ⁠לְ⁠בָנָ֜י⁠ו לְ⁠חָק־עוֹלָ֗ם מֵ⁠אֵת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֥י תְרוּמָ֖ה ה֑וּא 1 This will be a perpetual share for Aaron and his sons “This offering is what Aaron and his sons will always receive from the people” EXO 29 28 q3ms מֵ⁠אֵת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֥י תְרוּמָ֖ה ה֑וּא וּ⁠תְרוּמָ֞ה יִהְיֶ֨ה מֵ⁠אֵ֤ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ מִ⁠זִּבְחֵ֣י שַׁלְמֵי⁠הֶ֔ם תְּרוּמָתָ֖⁠ם לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 This will be a perpetual share for Aaron and his sons The amount of repetition in this verse may make it difficult to translate smoothly. You may consider combining some of them if that would work better in your language. Alternate translation: “for the Israelites must offer this portion from what they bring to Yahweh as peace offerings to them” EXO 29 29 a59z figs-idiom וּ⁠לְ⁠מַלֵּא־בָ֖⁠ם אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 The holy garments of Aaron must also be reserved for his sons after him This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “to ordain them in them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2032,14 +2032,12 @@ EXO 29 41 ibch figs-idiom בֵּ֣ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּ֑יִם 1 a tenth EXO 29 42 j8cg לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 throughout your generations “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). EXO 29 42 h5r7 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 tent of meeting This means in the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 29 43 ic8i figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִקְדַּ֖שׁ בִּ⁠כְבֹדִֽ⁠י 1 the tent will be set apart for me by my glory This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “My awesome presence will dedicate the tent to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 29 45 zcs1 1 General Information: Yahweh continues speaking to Moses. EXO 30 intro z3yc 0 # Exodus 30 General Notes
This chapter is mostly a return to instructions for building worship equipment for the sacred tent.
The forms of you are mostly singular, however, they again refer to the workmen that Moses will instruct so you should return to whatever form you have been following in chapters 25-28.


## Structure:
- v. 1-10: Incense altar
- v. 1-6: Instructions for making the incense altar
- v. 7-10: Use of the incense altar
- v. 11-16: Ransom money for taking a census
- v. 17-21: Instructions for a washbasin
- v. 22-30: Anointing oil
- v. 22-25: Instructions for making the oil
- v. 26-33: Instructions for using the oil
v- 34-38: Making and using sacred incense

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Atonement
Through the offering of blood and money things and people were kept in God’s favor. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/atonement]])


### Holiness
Some items in this chapter became so holy that they could make other things holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])


### Unknown terms
There are a number of ingredient terms that are unknown even to scholars. -EXO 30 1 r1f4 1 General Information: Yahweh tells Moses how to build the worship equipment. EXO 30 1 v8vb figs-you וְ⁠עָשִׂ֥יתָ 1 You must make Here **you** refers to Moses and the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 30 2 w56e translate-unknown קַרְנֹתָֽי⁠ו 1 Its horns must be made See how you translated **horns** in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 30 2 a39m translate-bdistance אַמָּ֨ה…וְ⁠אַמָּ֤ה…וְ⁠אַמָּתַ֖יִם 1 Its horns must be made You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46cm … 46cm … 94cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) -EXO 30 3 d3uu 1 General Information: This verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md), see how you translated there. -EXO 30 4 qyg4 1 to be attached to it You may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles when translating this verse. See [Exo 25:12](../25/12.md), [Exo 25:26](../25/26.md), [Exo 25:27](../25/27.md), & [Exo 27:4](../27/04.md). +EXO 30 3 d3uu 0 General Information: This verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md), see how you translated there. +EXO 30 4 qyg4 0 to be attached to it You may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles when translating this verse. See [Exo 25:12](../25/12.md), [Exo 25:26](../25/26.md), [Exo 25:27](../25/27.md), & [Exo 27:4](../27/04.md). EXO 30 4 bvxi figs-idiom לְ⁠בָתִּ֣ים 1 to be attached to it Here, **housings** means that the rings will hold the poles. Since they are where the poles belong for use, they are figuratively their **house.** If you have a similar idiom meaning “place of belonging” you may use it or you may translate the idea. Alternate translation: “to be a place for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 30 6 ulvn figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י…לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י 1 to be attached to it Here, **before the face of** means in front of. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 30 6 e87s figs-you לְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 to be attached to it Here **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -2094,7 +2092,6 @@ EXO 30 32 v3br וּ⁠בְ⁠מַ֨תְכֻּנְתּ֔⁠וֹ 1 with the same EXO 30 32 it0x grammar-connect-logic-result קֹ֣דֶשׁ ה֔וּא קֹ֖דֶשׁ יִהְיֶ֥ה לָ⁠כֶֽם 1 with the same formula The second half of this statement (**it shall be holy to you**) explains to the people the result of this oil being holy, which is, they must respect it as a holy thing. It may make more sense in some languages to move this whole statement to the beginning of the verse because the rule about pouring on someone’s body is an application of the result. Alternate translation (placed at the beginning of the verse): “Because it is sacred, you must treat it like it is sacred, therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 30 33 pa53 figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו 1 that person must be cut off from his people The metaphor **cut off** has at least three possible meanings. The following alternate translations express those: (1) “that person must be sent away” or (2) “that person will no longer be considered to be one of the people of Israel” or (3) “that person must be killed” See how you translated **cut off** in Exodus 12:15. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 30 33 yhgi figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו 1 that person must be cut off from his people The metaphor **cut off** has at least three possible meanings. They can be expressed in active form. Who will cut off that person is also not specified, it could be the Israelites or Yahweh. The following alternate translations express those: (1) “the people of Israel must send him away” or (2) “I will no longer consider him to be one of the people of Israel” or (3) “the people of Israel must kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 30 34 r3j2 1 General Information: Yahweh continues to tell Moses what to do. Yahweh gives the commands only to Moses: all instances of **you** are singular. However, the words “blended by a perfumer” might mean that Moses could have the perfumer take the spices, blend them, grind them, and give them to Moses so Moses could put part of the mixture in front of the ark, as in UST. EXO 30 34 uo57 translate-unknown נָטָ֤ף׀ וּ⁠שְׁחֵ֨לֶת֙ וְ⁠חֶלְבְּנָ֔ה…וּ⁠לְבֹנָ֣ה זַכָּ֑ה 1 General Information: Here is a brief description of these materials, though we really do not know exactly what they are. Stacte is a resin from certain gum plants. Onycha is from certain shellfish or mollusks. Galbanum is another kind of gum resin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 30 35 y8yj וְ⁠עָשִׂ֤יתָ אֹתָ⁠הּ֙ קְטֹ֔רֶת רֹ֖קַח מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה רוֹקֵ֑חַ 1 blended by a perfumer Possible meanings are (1) Moses was to have a perfumer do the work or (2) Moses was to do the work himself the way a perfumer would do it. See how you translated these words in [Exodus 30:25](../30/25.md). EXO 30 36 nz2a figs-you וְ⁠שָֽׁחַקְתָּ֣…וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֨ה 1 You will grind it “You will crush it.” Here **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) @@ -2124,7 +2121,7 @@ EXO 31 13 i1lw figs-metonymy אַ֥ךְ אֶת־שַׁבְּתֹתַ֖⁠י תּ EXO 31 13 gw13 לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 throughout your people’s generations “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). EXO 31 14 dsya figs-quotemarks לָ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 throughout your people’s generations One possible ending place for the second-level quotation that began in the previous verse is after **to you**. The rest of Yahweh’s instructions to Moses in this section do not use the second person to address Israel directly, so you may close the second-level quotation here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 31 14 plq5 figs-activepassive מ֣וֹת יוּמָ֔ת 1 must surely be put to death Here, **shall surely be put to death**, can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you must surely kill” or “you must surely execute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 31 14 fz1g figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֛ה 1 must surely be cut off from his people You can express **shall be cut off** in active form. Alternate translation: “you shall cut him off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +EXO 31 14 fz1g figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֛ה 1 must surely be cut off from his people You can express **shall be cut off** in active form. Alternate translation: “you shall cut him off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 31 15 v4dv translate-numbers שֵׁ֣שֶׁת 1 but the seventh day “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 31 15 fvga translate-ordinal הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 but the seventh day “the 7th” or “day number 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 31 15 lrat שַׁבַּ֧ת שַׁבָּת֛וֹן 1 but the seventh day “a Sabbath of complete rest” @@ -2151,7 +2148,7 @@ EXO 32 5 ztx4 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 When Aaron EXO 32 5 odaq figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנָ֑י⁠ו 1 When Aaron saw this Here, **before its face** means in front of. Alternate translation: “in front of it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 32 5 p2df figs-explicit לְ⁠פָנָ֑י⁠ו 1 When Aaron saw this Here, **it** is the golden bull-calf. Alternate translation: “in front of the bull-calf idol” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 32 6 as6u figs-euphemism לְ⁠צַחֵֽק 1 to carouse in wild celebration This word may imply drunken and sexual sin (for a sexual implication see [Genesis 26:8](../GEN/26/08)). However, the only actions mentioned in the text are singing ([v. 18](../32/18.md)) and dancing ([v. 19](../32/19.md)) so translators should avoid using a term that is overly suggestive. Alternate translation: “to revel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -EXO 32 7 iajs writing-newevent 1 to carouse in wild celebration There is a scene shift back to the top of the mountain with Moses and Yahweh here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +EXO 32 7 iajs writing-newevent 0 to carouse in wild celebration There is a scene shift back to the top of the mountain with Moses and Yahweh here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 32 7 tcek figs-rpronouns שִׁחֵ֣ת 1 to carouse in wild celebration Here, the reflexive **themselves** is used to translate the fact that the Israelites actions made the Israelites corrupt. Alternate translation: “have acted corruptly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 32 8 eua5 figs-metaphor סָ֣רוּ מַהֵ֗ר מִן־הַ⁠דֶּ֨רֶךְ֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר צִוִּיתִ֔⁠ם 1 left the way that I commanded them Here God speaks of the people disobeying what he commanded them as if he had told them to walk on a certain road and they left that road. Alternate translation: “They have quickly stopped doing what I commanded them to do” or “They have quickly stopped obeying what I commanded them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 32 8 tg9e figs-quotemarks אֵ֤לֶּה אֱלֹהֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל אֲשֶׁ֥ר הֶֽעֱל֖וּ⁠ךָ מֵ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 left the way that I commanded them This is a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) @@ -2187,7 +2184,7 @@ EXO 32 19 d8zo תַּ֥חַת 1 the tablets “at the bottom of” EXO 32 21 du5l figs-quotesinquotes וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר מֹשֶׁה֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן מֶֽה־עָשָׂ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖י⁠ו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה׃ 1 Then Moses said to Aaron, “What did this people…a great sin on them?” Moses’ question is a second-level quote. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation.
However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage.. Alternate translation: “Then Moses asked Aaron what the people did to him, that he had brought such a great sin on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 32 21 np73 figs-metaphor כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖י⁠ו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה 1 you have brought such a great sin on them Moses spoke of causing people to sin as if sin were an object and Aaron put it on them. Alternate translation: “that you have caused them to sin greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 32 22 z2ch figs-idiom אַל־יִ֥חַר אַ֖ף 1 Do not let your anger burn hot This is an idiom for anger. Alternate translation: “Do not be angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 32 22 vdy2 figs-idiom כִּ֥י בְ⁠רָ֖ע הֽוּא 1 they are set on doing evil This is probably an idiom meaning one of two things: 1) that the people are prone to evil, 2) that the people were in trouble (that is, they felt troubled because of not having contact with God). Alternate translation: “that they are set on evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 32 22 vdy2 figs-idiom כִּ֥י בְ⁠רָ֖ע הֽוּא 1 they are set on doing evil This is probably an idiom that could mean (1) that the people are prone to evil or (2) that the people were in trouble (that is, they felt troubled because of not having contact with God). Alternate translation: “that they are set on evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 22 h6dm figs-123person הֽוּא 1 they are set on doing evil Here, **it** is used because **people** is grammatically singular in Hebrew. Alternate translation: “they are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 32 23 w91d figs-quotesinquotes עֲשֵׂה־לָ֣⁠נוּ אֱלֹהִ֔ים אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֵלְכ֖וּ לְ⁠פָנֵ֑י⁠נוּ כִּי־זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה הָ⁠אִ֗ישׁ אֲשֶׁ֤ר הֶֽעֱלָ֨⁠נוּ֙ מֵ⁠אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם לֹ֥א יָדַ֖עְנוּ מֶה־הָ֥יָה לֽ⁠וֹ׃ 1 they are set on doing evil This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 32 23 zn68 זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה הָ⁠אִ֗ישׁ 1 this Moses People showed disrespect by putting the word **this** before his name, as if Moses were someone they did not know and could not trust. They were creating distance between him and themselves socially. When translating, use a form in your language that communicates the same sense of disassociation between people. See how you translated this in [verse 1](../32/01.md). @@ -2198,7 +2195,7 @@ EXO 32 25 ck1f פָרֻ֖עַ 1 were running wild “were behaving wildly” or EXO 32 25 csg0 grammar-collectivenouns כִּ֥י פָרֻ֖עַ ה֑וּא כִּֽי־פְרָעֹ֣⁠ה אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 were running wild Here, the pronoun **it** agrees with the grammatical number of **people** (singular). Alternate translation: “that they were let loose, for Aaron had let them loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 32 26 jis7 figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֕אמֶר מִ֥י לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה אֵלָ֑⁠י 1 Then Moses stood at the entrance…“Whoever is on Yahweh’s side, come to me.” You can state this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “and said that whoever was for Yahweh should come to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 32 26 ryb5 figs-idiom מִ֥י לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה 1 Whoever is on Yahweh’s side Moses speaks of being loyal to Yahweh as being **for Yahweh**. Alternate translation: “Whoever serves Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 32 27 xsl3 1 go back and forth from entrance to entrance “go from side of the camp to the other, starting at one entrance to the camp and going to the entrance on the other side of the camp” +EXO 32 27 xsl3 עִבְר֨וּ וָ⁠שׁ֜וּבוּ מִ⁠שַּׁ֤עַר לָ⁠שַׁ֨עַר֙ בַּֽ⁠מַּחֲנֶ֔ה 1 go back and forth from entrance to entrance “Go from side of the camp to the other, starting at one entrance to the camp and going to the entrance on the other side of the camp” EXO 32 28 at4i translate-numbers כִּ⁠שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת אַלְפֵ֖י 1 three thousand of the people “about three thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 32 29 to5d figs-idiom מִלְא֨וּ יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם 1 You have been placed into Yahweh’s service This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). However, this usage is different from that text as here it is not specified what authority they are given or what they are consecrated for other than **for Yahweh**. Alternate translation: “Consecrate yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 29 rkp6 מִלְא֨וּ יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם הַ⁠יּוֹם֙ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה 1 You have been placed into Yahweh’s service Here it is unclear if **fill** should be rightly understood in the past or as a command. You may want to follow the decision of another translation your people are familiar with. Alternate translation: “You have filled your hand for Yahweh today” @@ -2215,9 +2212,9 @@ EXO 32 32 ahb3 figs-explicit כָּתָֽבְתָּ 1 the book that you have wri EXO 32 33 igb4 figs-metonymy אֶמְחֶ֖⁠נּוּ מִ⁠סִּפְרִֽ⁠י 1 that person I will blot out of my book Here, “him” represents that person’s name. Alternate translation: “I will erase that person’s name from my book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 32 33 qwk9 מִ⁠סִּפְרִֽ⁠י 1 my book This refers to the book of Yahweh that Moses spoke of in [Exodus 32:32](../32/32.md). EXO 32 34 xn8p grammar-connect-logic-result וּ⁠בְ⁠י֣וֹם פָּקְדִ֔⁠י וּ⁠פָקַדְתִּ֥י עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם חַטָּאתָֽ⁠ם 1 But on the day that I punish them, I will punish them Yahweh makes it clear that he will punish the people because they sinned by making and worshipping the idol. If it would be more clear in your language to place the reason first you may consider reordering the clauses. Alternate translation: “However, because they sinned, one day I will come to punish them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 32 35 wv1v figs-explicit עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן 1 they had made the calf, the one that Aaron made The first **made** here could mean 1) “do” which could imply worship 2) the people are being spoken of as having made the calf themselves (as well as Aaron) because they demanded it and gave their gold for it. Alternate translation: “they had worshiped the calf that Aaron made” or “they were guilty along with Aaron of making the calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 32 35 wv1v figs-explicit עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן 1 they had made the calf, the one that Aaron made The first **made** here could mean (1) “do” which could imply worship (2) the people are being spoken of as having made the calf themselves (as well as Aaron) because they demanded it and gave their gold for it. Alternate translation: “they had worshiped the calf that Aaron made” or “they were guilty along with Aaron of making the calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 32 35 h3kl grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּגֹּ֥ף יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֑ם עַ֚ל אֲשֶׁ֣ר עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן 1 they had made the calf, the one that Aaron made If your language requires placing the reason before the result you may reorder these clauses. Alternate translation: “And on account that they had made the calf (that Aaron made), Yahweh plagued the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 33 intro g5k3 0 # Exodus 33 General Notes

This chapter is largely about Moses continuing to negotiate for a closer relationship between Yahweh and himself and Yahweh and the people. There are a number of important theological issues addressed especially Yahweh’s holiness and character. Several key terms appear.

## Potential Translation Issues

Yahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4, so in some languages you may need to reverse them.

Verses 7-11 seem to be background, general information about a somewhat unspecified time period. Be sure this is clear in how you structure these verses. See the beginning of verse 7 in the UST. While the term in verses 7-11 is often used interchangeably with the tabernacle that will be built in chapters 35-39, it is a temporary and different tent. One distinguishing feature is that it is well outside the camp while the tabernacle will be in the center of the tent.

The word **tent** in verses 7-11 refers either to this temporary “tent of meeting” that Moses set up, or to the tents that the Israelites lived in. Pay attention throughout these verses to which tent is referred to.



+EXO 33 intro g5k3 0 # Exodus 33 General Notes

This chapter is largely about Moses continuing to negotiate for a closer relationship between Yahweh and himself and Yahweh and the people. There are a number of important theological issues addressed especially Yahweh’s holiness and character. Several key terms appear.

## Potential Translation Issues

Yahweh’s statement to Moses in verse 5 seems to have happened before the people’s reaction in verse 4, so in some languages you may need to reverse them.

Verses 7-11 seem to be background, general information about a somewhat unspecified time period. Be sure this is clear in how you structure these verses. See the beginning of verse 7 in the UST. While the term in verses 7-11 is often used interchangeably with the tabernacle that will be built in chapters 35-39, it is a temporary and different tent. One distinguishing feature is that it is well outside the camp while the tabernacle will be in the center of the tent.

The word **tent** in verses 7-11 refers either to this temporary “tent of meeting” that Moses set up, or to the tents that the Israelites lived in. Pay attention throughout these verses to which tent is referred to.
EXO 33 1 p8xp figs-quotesinquotes לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר לְ⁠זַרְעֲ⁠ךָ֖ אֶתְּנֶֽ⁠נָּה 1 General Information: The words following **saying** are a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation.
However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 33 2 tlen וְ⁠שָׁלַחְתִּ֥י לְ⁠פָנֶ֖י⁠ךָ מַלְאָ֑ךְ וְ⁠גֵֽרַשְׁתִּ֗י אֶת־הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִי֙ הָֽ⁠אֱמֹרִ֔י וְ⁠הַֽ⁠חִתִּי֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠פְּרִזִּ֔י הַ⁠חִוִּ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִֽי 1 General Information: See how you translated these in [Exodus 23:20](../23/20.md) and [23:23](../23/23.md). EXO 33 3 yyt4 figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 that land, which is flowing with milk and honey Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. See how you translated this in [Exodus 3:8](../03/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2313,15 +2310,15 @@ EXO 34 7 px85 figs-metaphor פֹּקֵ֣ד׀ עֲוֺ֣ן אָב֗וֹת עַל EXO 34 7 c3tb figs-metonymy עַל־בָּנִים֙ וְ⁠עַל־בְּנֵ֣י בָנִ֔ים 1 their children The references to **sons** and **sons of the sons** represents descendants. Alternate translation: “on their descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 34 7 d462 figs-explicit עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִֽים 1 their children Here, “generation” is implied. Many translations will need to make this explicit as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 34 7 pacu figs-metonymy עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִֽים 1 their children Here, **third** and **fourth** means “several.” If this would not be understood and your language has a way of referring to an unspecified (but approximately 3-4) number, you may have to use it here. Alternate translation: “on a few generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 34 8 c1qt figs-rpronoun וַ⁠יִּשְׁתָּֽחוּ 1 their children Here, **himself** means that Moses did this action to his own body. Some languages may use a special form to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronoun]]) +EXO 34 8 c1qt figs-rpronouns וַ⁠יִּשְׁתָּֽחוּ 1 their children Here, **himself** means that Moses did this action to his own body. Some languages may use a special form to indicate this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 34 8 mf8o figs-doublet וַ⁠יִּקֹּ֥ד אַ֖רְצָ⁠ה וַ⁠יִּשְׁתָּֽחוּ 1 their children These two verbs have very similar meanings and are often used together to express people’s physical and spiritual posture in worship. If such repetition would be misunderstood in your language you may need to express the physical action and spiritual action explicitly. Alternate translation: “bowed to the ground in worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 34 9 mh3a figs-idiom מָצָ֨אתִי חֵ֤ן בְּ⁠עֵינֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 If now I have found favor in your eyes Here, **found favor** is an idiom that means that God is pleased with Moses. You may also need to make the phrase active in form and change the abstract noun **favor** into another form. Finally, **eyes** are a metonym for sight, and sight is a metaphor representing his evaluation. See how you dealt with the multiple issues in the phrase **I have found favor in your eyes** in [Exodus 33:12](../33/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 34 9 vhu5 figs-metaphor עַם־קְשֵׁה־עֹ֨רֶף֙ ה֔וּא 1 If now I have found favor in your eyes Moses speaks of the people being rebellious as if they had hard necks. See how you translated this in [Exodus 32:9](../32/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 34 9 hw66 figs-doublet לַ⁠עֲוֺנֵ֥⁠נוּ וּ⁠לְ⁠חַטָּאתֵ֖⁠נוּ 1 our iniquity and our sin The words **iniquity** and **sin** mean basically the same thing and are combined for emphasis. Alternate translation: “all our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -EXO 34 10 zwsm 0 your people The covenant is largely repeated starting in this verse and consists of two parts 1) What Yahweh will do which is detailed in verses 10-11 (and briefly restated in verse 24) and 2) What is required of the Israelites which is detailed in verses 12-26. For further context see [Exodus 19:5 and following](../19/05.md), and [23:20-24:8](../23/20.md). Verses 12-26 are another list of ten commandments. +EXO 34 10 zwsm 0 your people The covenant is largely repeated starting in this verse and consists of two parts (1) What Yahweh will do which is detailed in verses 10-11 (and briefly restated in verse 24) and (2) What is required of the Israelites which is detailed in verses 12-26. For further context see [Exodus 19:5 and following](../19/05.md), and [23:20-24:8](../23/20.md). Verses 12-26 are another list of ten commandments. EXO 34 10 ps7o figs-metaphor כֹּרֵ֣ת בְּרִית֒ 1 your people To **cut a covenant** means to make a covenant. The terminology refers to ancient rituals around making covenants which is illustrated in Genesis 15. Alternate translation: “am about to make a covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 34 10 zdq6 figs-possession עַמְּ⁠ךָ֙ 1 your people Here the **people** are referred to as belonging to Moses. This refers to his being their leader. Alternate translation: ”the people you lead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 34 10 itdx כָל־הָ֠⁠עָם אֲשֶׁר־אַתָּ֨ה בְ⁠קִרְבּ֜⁠וֹ 1 your people This phrase is ambiguous and could refer to 1) the nations that surrounded Israel or 2) the Israelites (who surrounded Moses). Attempt to maintain the ambiguity if you can, otherwise you may choose one, perhaps following another locally known translation’s choice. +EXO 34 10 itdx כָל־הָ֠⁠עָם אֲשֶׁר־אַתָּ֨ה בְ⁠קִרְבּ֜⁠וֹ 1 your people This phrase is ambiguous and could refer to (1) the nations that surrounded Israel or (2) the Israelites (who surrounded Moses). Attempt to maintain the ambiguity if you can, otherwise you may choose one, perhaps following another locally known translation’s choice. EXO 34 10 bj1a כִּֽי־נוֹרָ֣א ה֔וּא אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֲנִ֖י עֹשֶׂ֥ה עִמָּֽ⁠ךְ 1 it is a fearful thing that I am doing with you This means that what Yahweh is doing causes people to be afraid. In this case, people will fear Yahweh when they see what he does. Alternate translation: “for what I am doing with you will cause fear” EXO 34 10 s7uz figs-you עִמָּֽ⁠ךְ 1 I am doing with you Here **you** refers to Moses and the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 34 11 xtkf figs-metonymy גֹרֵ֣שׁ מִ⁠פָּנֶ֗י⁠ךָ 1 I am doing with you Here, **from before your faces** means “ahead of you” or “on your behalf.” Yahweh is emphasizing who is doing the driving out. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2354,15 +2351,15 @@ EXO 34 16 d4ma figs-metaphor וְ⁠זָנ֣וּ בְנֹתָ֗י⁠ו אַחֲ EXO 34 16 k0lr figs-metaphor וְ⁠הִזְנוּ֙ אֶת־בָּנֶ֔י⁠ךָ אַחֲרֵ֖י אֱלֹהֵי⁠הֶֽן 1 you will eat some of his sacrifice In this metaphor, Yahweh speaks of people worshiping other gods as if they were prostitutes going to other men. The metaphor is clear here since it is referring to Israelite men who should be Yahweh worshippers. Alternate translation: “and cause your sons to worship their gods” or “and cause your sons to worship their gods like prostitutes who go to other men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 34 16 p98a grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠הִזְנוּ֙ אֶת־בָּנֶ֔י⁠ךָ אַחֲרֵ֖י אֱלֹהֵי⁠הֶֽן 1 you will eat some of his sacrifice This is the climatic consequence of living in peace the the nations God is driving out before them: complete apostacy from Yahweh and loss of the next generation to wickedness. Specifically it is the result of intermarriage with the pagans, which God has explicitly forbidden for this very reason. If your language marks the final consequence of a string of actions in a particular way it may be appropriate to use it here. Alternate translation: “and in the end, they will cause even your sons to prostitute after their gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 34 17 lgab 0 you will eat some of his sacrifice The prohibition here is focused on making gods. In your translation make sure that the focus is not on the method, but the god-making. -EXO 34 17 rux0 מַסֵּכָ֖ה 1 you will eat some of his sacrifice See how you translated **molten metal** in [Exodus 32:4}(../32/04.md). +EXO 34 17 rux0 מַסֵּכָ֖ה 1 you will eat some of his sacrifice See how you translated **molten metal** in [Exodus 32:4](../32/04.md). EXO 34 18 s1rr 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to most of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md). EXO 34 18 u5be translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֨ת 1 seven days “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 34 18 i5ck translate-hebrewmonths הָ⁠אָבִ֑יב…הָֽ⁠אָבִ֔יב 1 in the month of Aviv This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. **Aviv** is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated **Aviv** in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +EXO 34 18 i5ck translate-hebrewmonths הָ⁠אָבִ֑יב…הָֽ⁠אָבִ֔יב 1 in the month of Aviv This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. **Aviv** is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated **Aviv** in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) EXO 34 19 ly7d 0 General Information: This verse is similar to [Exodus 13:12](../13/12.md). EXO 34 20 sbrs 0 buy back This verse is very similar to [Exodus 13:13](../13/13.md). EXO 34 20 j4tv figs-explicit בְ⁠שֶׂ֔ה…וַ⁠עֲרַפְתּ֑⁠וֹ 1 buy back You may need to make explicit that either the **lamb** or **donkey** must be killed, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 34 20 c5ow לֹ֥א תִפְדֶּ֖ה 1 buy back “you do not ransom the donkey” -EXO 34 20 yz8x 1 buy back Firstborn sons and firstborn donkeys belonged to Yahweh, but Yahweh did not want them sacrificed to Him. Instead, the Israelites were to sacrifice a lamb in their place. This allowed the Israelites to buy the donkeys and sons back from Yahweh. +EXO 34 20 yz8x כֹּ֣ל בְּכ֤וֹר בָּנֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ תִּפְדֶּ֔ה 1 buy back Firstborn sons and firstborn donkeys belonged to Yahweh, but Yahweh did not want them sacrificed to Him. Instead, the Israelites were to sacrifice a lamb in their place. This allowed the Israelites to buy the donkeys and sons back from Yahweh. EXO 34 20 u2p5 figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠לֹֽא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖⁠י רֵיקָֽם 1 No one may appear before me empty-handed Here understatement is used to emphasize that the Israelites must bring a suitable offering to Yahweh. This portion of the verse is identical to the end of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md). Alternate translation: “come to me without a proper offering” or “always bring an offering to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 34 21 w9ed 0 General Information: This command is similar to that in [Exodus 20:9](../20/09.md). EXO 34 21 n2ka translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 General Information: “but on day seven” Here **seventh** is the ordinal number for 7. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) @@ -2376,17 +2373,16 @@ EXO 34 25 zx2v 0 General Information: See the very similar [Exodus 23:18](../2 EXO 34 25 e8v2 figs-explicit דַּם־זִבְחִ֑⁠י 1 the blood of my sacrifice The fact that the blood is from an animal can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “the blood of an animal that you sacrifice to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 34 26 bv0a 0 the blood of my sacrifice This verse is identical to [Exodus 23:19](../23/19.md). EXO 34 27 x6j9 כִּ֞י עַל־פִּ֣י׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 the blood of my sacrifice “for in accordance with these words” or “for according to these words” -EXO 34 27 ybz6 figs-metaphor רַ֧תִּי אִתְּ⁠ךָ֛ בְּרִ֖ית 1 the blood of my sacrifice To **cut a covenant** means to make a covenant. The terminology refers to ancient rituals around making covenants which is illustrated in Genesis 15. See UST. See how you translated this in [verse 12](../34/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EXO 34 27 ybz6 figs-metaphor כָּרַ֧תִּי אִתְּ⁠ךָ֛ בְּרִ֖ית 1 the blood of my sacrifice To **cut a covenant** means to make a covenant. The terminology refers to ancient rituals around making covenants which is illustrated in Genesis 15. See UST. See how you translated this in [verse 12](../34/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 34 28 j9t4 translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֖רֶת 1 forty days “10” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 34 28 wt1c אַרְבָּעִ֥ים יוֹם֙ וְ⁠אַרְבָּעִ֣ים לַ֔יְלָה 1 for forty days and nights “for 40 days, including the nights” EXO 34 28 yun2 writing-pronouns וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֣ב 1 He wrote Here, **he** probably refers to Moses, based on Yahweh’s command in the previous verse. However, [Exodus 34:1](../34/01.md) opens the possibility that Yahweh wrote. It is best to leave it ambiguous, but if you must specify, saying Moses is better. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 34 29 t1s0 writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֗י 1 had become radiant This marks a change of scene which you should mark in a natural way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 34 29 x70x figs-infostructure יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠רֶ֤דֶת מֹשֶׁה֙ מֵ⁠הַ֣ר סִינַ֔י וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֨י לֻחֹ֤ת הָֽ⁠עֵדֻת֙ בְּ⁠יַד־מֹשֶׁ֔ה בְּ⁠רִדְתּ֖⁠וֹ מִן־הָ⁠הָ֑ר 1 had become radiant The statement about Moses’ descent from the mountain is repeated almost verbatim, but does not refer to two events. If this would be misunderstood you may need to state it only once in translation as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Then Moses came down from Mount Sinai. As he was coming down from the mountain, he was carrying the two tablets of the testimony in his hands.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -EXO 34 29 gkze figs-infostructure 1 had become radiant (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +EXO 34 29 x70x figs-infostructure וַ⁠יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠רֶ֤דֶת מֹשֶׁה֙ מֵ⁠הַ֣ר סִינַ֔י וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֨י לֻחֹ֤ת הָֽ⁠עֵדֻת֙ בְּ⁠יַד־מֹשֶׁ֔ה בְּ⁠רִדְתּ֖⁠וֹ מִן־הָ⁠הָ֑ר 1 had become radiant The statement about Moses’ descent from the mountain is repeated almost verbatim, but does not refer to two events. If this would be misunderstood you may need to state it only once in translation as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Then Moses came down from Mount Sinai. As he was coming down from the mountain, he was carrying the two tablets of the testimony in his hands.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) EXO 34 29 yagj figs-infostructure וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה לֹֽא־יָדַ֗ע כִּ֥י קָרַ֛ן ע֥וֹר פָּנָ֖י⁠ו בְּ⁠דַבְּר֥⁠וֹ אִתּֽ⁠וֹ 1 had become radiant In some languages it will make more sense to state that Moses’ **face shone** before saying that he **did not know that** as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) EXO 34 29 d9zk קָרַ֛ן 1 had become radiant “became radiant” EXO 34 30 yn9s grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּֽירְא֖וּ 1 had become radiant They were afraid because of his bright face. Alternate translation: “because of that, they were afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 34 32 kt23 יְצַוֵּ֕⁠ם אֵת֩ כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר דִּבֶּ֧ר יְהוָ֛ה אִתּ֖⁠וֹ בְּ⁠הַ֥ר סִינָֽי 1 all the commands that Yahweh had given him This means that Moses commanded the Israelites to obey everything Yahweh had commanded Moses to command the Israelites to do. +EXO 34 32 kt23 וַ⁠יְצַוֵּ֕⁠ם אֵת֩ כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר דִּבֶּ֧ר יְהוָ֛ה אִתּ֖⁠וֹ 1 all the commands that Yahweh had given him This means that Moses commanded the Israelites to obey everything Yahweh had commanded Moses to command the Israelites to do. EXO 34 34 fzm1 grammar-connect-time-background 0 he would remove This and the next verse give a general statement about Moses’s practice for an unstated amount of time (it was probably from this point until his death as he continued to talk to Yahweh). You should mark this with a form in your language that is used for on-going action like **would** and the UST’s “Whenever.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) EXO 34 34 m1sv figs-activepassive יְצֻוֶּֽה 1 what he was commanded This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Yahweh had commanded him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 35 intro lew9 0 # Exodus 35 General Notes
## Translation issues in this chapter


- In the last chapter some repetition of Yahweh’s instructions began, mostly around the covenant commands. Starting in this chapter and even more so in chapter 36, the commands regarding the construction of the tabernacle complex are repeated, often word for word, from chapters 25-31. In many verses the only difference will be a change of verb form from instruction to completion. As much as possible, these parallels will be pointed out for the translators with links to the previous verses. Translators should refer back to the previously translated verses for consistency and because notes in this section may not cover everything that was covered in the initial instruction section.
- Many items, materials, and processes for building the tabernacle may be unknown, but should have already been addressed in chapters 25-31.


## Structure
- v. 1-3: reiteration of Sabbath command
- v. 4-9: list of materials for donation (see [Exodus 25:1-7](../25/01.md))
- v. 10-19: things they need to make for the tabernacle complex
- v. 20-29: the people bring all the things listed
- v. 30-36:1: appointing of lead craftsmen to build these things @@ -2414,7 +2410,6 @@ EXO 35 8 y11w translate-unknown וּ⁠בְשָׂמִים֙ 1 General Informatio EXO 35 9 f1dd 0 General Information: Except for an initial **and**, this verse is identical to [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md). EXO 35 9 hcs9 translate-unknown וְ⁠אַ֨בְנֵי־שֹׁ֔הַם 1 General Information: An **onyx stone** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red or brown. If this stone is unknown to your people, consider translating it by using a word for a familiar stone with a similar pattern, if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 35 9 kk7z וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֖י 1 General Information: “and valuable gems for” or “and treasured gems for” -EXO 35 10 c31r 1 General Information: Moses continues telling the people what God commanded them to do. EXO 35 10 dc4b figs-metonymy וְ⁠כָל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב 1 Every skilled man Here, **heart** is referring to innate possession by a person, that is, traits of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftsman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:3](../28/03.md). Alternate translation: “And every man with a skill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 35 10 lkp4 figs-ellipsis צִוָּ֖ה 1 Every skilled man Here, some the words that a sentence would need to be complete in some languages are left out. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 35 10 ugjb 0 Every skilled man After this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list. @@ -2454,7 +2449,7 @@ EXO 35 24 loob figs-hyperbole וְ⁠כֹ֡ל 1 Everyone who had…brought them EXO 35 24 bab9 figs-metonymy לְ⁠כָל־מְלֶ֥אכֶת הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֖ה 1 Everyone who had…brought them Here, **service** refers to worshiping Yahweh and the phrase **work of the service** refers to building the tabernacle as a place for worshiping Yahweh. Alternate translation: “for any of the building of a place for worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 35 25 ae9d figs-metonymy חַכְמַת־לֵ֖ב 1 blue, purple, or scarlet wool Here, **heart** is referring to innate possession by a person, that is, traits of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftswoman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 28:3](../28/03.md). Alternate translation: “And every man with a skill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 35 25 ebm5 אֶֽת־הַ⁠תְּכֵ֨לֶת֙ וְ⁠אֶת־הָֽ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֔ן אֶת־תּוֹלַ֥עַת הַ⁠שָּׁנִ֖י 1 blue, purple, or scarlet wool Possible meanings are (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md). -EXO 35 26 k1gy figs-synecdoche אֲשֶׁ֨ר נָשָׂ֥א לִבָּ֛⁠ן אֹתָ֖⁠נָה 1 whose hearts stirred them up Here, **heart** refers to a persons’ will, their desire to do something. It is spoken of as causing a person to use her skills for Yahweh. This is the same as the first phrase in [verse 21](../35/21.md). Alternate translation: “whose will impelled her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]) +EXO 35 26 k1gy figs-synecdoche אֲשֶׁ֨ר נָשָׂ֥א לִבָּ֛⁠ן אֹתָ֖⁠נָה 1 whose hearts stirred them up Here, **heart** refers to a persons’ will, their desire to do something. It is spoken of as causing a person to use her skills for Yahweh. This is the same as the first phrase in [verse 21](../35/21.md). Alternate translation: “whose will impelled her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 35 27 f13n 0 The leaders brought…breastpiece From **onyx** on, this verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md). EXO 35 28 h3a1 0 they brought spices…fragrant incense [Exodus 25:6](../25/06.md) has almost identical words, arranged slightly differently. EXO 35 29 hqle figs-infostructure 0 whose heart was willing The order of clauses in the ULT is reversed from the original because of required English sentence structure. **The sons of Israel brought a freewill offering to Yahweh** is at the end of the verse. Other languages may be able to retain the original order. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) @@ -2470,11 +2465,11 @@ EXO 35 31 qx5o figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בְ⁠דַ֖עַת 1 He has filled Bez EXO 35 31 cf63 figs-abstractnouns מְלָאכָֽה 1 He has filled Bezalel with his Spirit If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **craftsmanship** in another way. Alternate translation: “and for making all kinds of crafts” or “and so that he can make all kinds of things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 35 32 r7e3 0 to make artistic designs…bronze This verse is identical to [Exodus 31:4](../31/04.md), except for the first **and**. EXO 35 33 fj6f 0 also to cut and set stones…craftsmanship This verse is identical to [Exodus 31:5](../31/05.md) except for the final **of invention**. -EXO 35 34 xd67 figs-idiom לְ⁠הוֹרֹ֖ת נָתַ֣ן בְּ⁠לִבּ֑⁠וֹ 1 He has put it in his heart to teach This is an idiom referring to ability and desire. These are spoken of as if they are something that could be placed in a heart. Alternate translation: “and he gave the ability and desire to teach to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EXO 35 34 xd67 figs-idiom וּ⁠לְ⁠הוֹרֹ֖ת נָתַ֣ן בְּ⁠לִבּ֑⁠וֹ 1 He has put it in his heart to teach This is an idiom referring to ability and desire. These are spoken of as if they are something that could be placed in a heart. Alternate translation: “and he gave the ability and desire to teach to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 35 34 ab2z translate-names וְ⁠אָֽהֳלִיאָ֥ב…אֲחִיסָמָ֖ךְ 1 Oholiab son of Ahisamak, from the tribe of Dan “Oholiab” and “Ahisamak” are names of men. See how you translated these names in [Exodus 31:6](../31/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 35 35 ehu7 0 filled them with skill This verse summarizes and pulls together many previously mentioned things. See [28:3](../28/03.md) (**skill of heart**), [25:4](../25/04.md) (for materials), [26:36](../26/36.md) (**embroiderer**), [28:32](../28/32.md) (**weaver**), [26:31](../26/31.md) (**skillful workman**), [31:3](../31/03.md) (**craftsman**), [28:6](../28/06.md) (**designer of designs**). EXO 35 35 rcv9 figs-metaphor מִלֵּ֨א אֹתָ֜⁠ם חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב 1 filled them with skill Skill to create beautiful objects is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. Alternate translation: “made them very skillful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 35 35 jvtd figs-synedoche חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב 1 filled them with skill Here, **heart** refers to possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synedoche]]) +EXO 35 35 jvtd figs-synecdoche חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב 1 filled them with skill Here, **heart** refers to possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 36 intro nz4n 0 # Exodus 36 General Notes
## Translation issues
- The first verse of this chapter goes with the last chapter.
- Most of this chapter exactly quotes chapter 26 with a shift from instruction to past narrative form on the verbs and a few other minor changes, some are Hebrew word order that will be invisible here. Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency.
- Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he** used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

## Structure
- v. 1: finish Moses’ instruction
- v. 2-7: craftsmen collect materials from Moses, inform him the people should stop bringing things because they have too much already
-v. 8-38: construction of the tabernacle, verse-by-verse quotations marked below
- v. 8-18: quote [Exodus 26:1-11](../26/01.md)
- v. 19-34: quote [Exodus 26:14-29](../26/14.md)
- v. 35-36: quote [26:31-32](../26/31.md)
- v. 37-38: quote [26:36-37](../26/36.md)
EXO 36 1 ubk2 0 General Information: This verse is the end of a quotation from Moses that begin in [35:30](../35/30.md). It should be connected as visually as possible to the previous verses as the chapter break here is poorly placed. EXO 36 1 ds99 translate-names בְצַלְאֵ֨ל וְ⁠אָהֳלִיאָ֜ב 1 Bezalel These are the names of men. See how you translated this in [Exodus 31:2](../31/02.md) and [31:6](../31/06.md) as well as in the end of [chapter 35](../35/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -2585,7 +2580,7 @@ EXO 38 17 s5g5 0 General Information See how you translated many of these word EXO 38 18 hmi5 0 General Information See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:16 and 18](../27/16.md). EXO 38 18 yf6z translate-bdistance וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִ֤ים…חָמֵ֣שׁ 1 cubits You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 9.2m … 2.3m (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 38 18 trz5 אֹ֔רֶךְ וְ⁠קוֹמָ֤ה 1 The curtain was made of This probably refers to the general dimensions (20 cubits long by 5 cubits wide) but clarifies that the **width** would become the **height** of the curtain when the craftsmen or Levites set up the tabernacle. Alternate translation: “and the width which corresponded to the height” -EXO 38 19 fjw4 1 General Information See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:17](../27/17.md). +EXO 38 19 fjw4 0 General Information See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 27:17](../27/17.md). EXO 38 20 ye5c 0 General Information This verse is very similar to the second half of [Exodus 27:19](../27/19.md). EXO 38 21 k2ex figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֥ר פֻּקַּ֖ד 1 as it was taken If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “which the Levites recorded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 38 21 qivw figs-idiom עַל־פִּ֣י מֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 Ithamar This is an idiom referring to Moses telling them to make these records. Alternate translation: “following Moses’ instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2600,7 +2595,7 @@ EXO 38 24 y7hy translate-bweight תֵּ֤שַׁע וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֙ כ EXO 38 25 ni5b translate-bweight מְאַ֣ת כִּכָּ֑ר וְ⁠אֶלֶף֩ וּ⁠שְׁבַ֨ע מֵא֜וֹת וַ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֧ה וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֛ים שֶׁ֖קֶל בְּ⁠שֶׁ֥קֶל הַ⁠קֹּֽדֶשׁ 1 one hundred talents A talent is about 34 kilograms and a shekel is about 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time, **by the shekel of the sanctuary,** specified which one was to be used. See [the previous verse](../38/24.md). See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) EXO 38 26 rp46 0 one hundred talents See how you translated many of the same things in [Exodus 30:13-14](../30/13.md). EXO 38 26 t2gi translate-bweight בֶּ֚קַע לַ⁠גֻּלְגֹּ֔לֶת מַחֲצִ֥ית הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ 1 one beka A beka is 1/2 a shekel. A shekel is 11 grams. There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time, **by the shekel of the sanctuary,** specified which one was to be used. See [verse 24](../38/24.md).Alternate translation: “five and a half grams” or “5 1/2 grams” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) -EXO 38 26 fyy5 translate-fraction מַחֲצִ֥ית הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל 1 half a shekel A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) +EXO 38 26 fyy5 translate-fraction מַחֲצִ֥ית הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל 1 half a shekel A **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) EXO 38 26 nvf8 figs-ellipsis לְ⁠כֹ֨ל הָ⁠עֹבֵ֜ר עַל־הַ⁠פְּקֻדִ֗ים מִ⁠בֶּ֨ן עֶשְׂרִ֤ים שָׁנָה֙ וָ⁠מַ֔עְלָ⁠ה לְ⁠שֵׁשׁ־מֵא֥וֹת אֶ֨לֶף֙ וּ⁠שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת אֲלָפִ֔ים וַ⁠חֲמֵ֥שׁ מֵא֖וֹת וַ⁠חֲמִשִּֽׁים 1 half a shekel Here the account leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. The idea that this silver was “received” **from** these “men” is left out. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “received from every passer over to the counted ones from a son of 20 years and older—received from 603,550 men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 38 26 ll8b figs-idiom מִ⁠בֶּ֨ן עֶשְׂרִ֤ים שָׁנָה֙ 1 This figure was reached on the basis of every person who was counted in the census This is an idiom meaning 20 years old. Alternate translation: “from those 20 years old” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 38 27 p7r5 translate-bweight מְאַת֙ כִּכַּ֣ר 1 One hundred talents of silver were cast A talent is about 34 kilograms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) @@ -2609,7 +2604,7 @@ EXO 38 28 rcda 0 Bezalel See how you translated some of these in [Exodus 27:17 EXO 38 29 p3mr translate-bweight שִׁבְעִ֣ים כִּכָּ֑ר וְ⁠אַלְפַּ֥יִם וְ⁠אַרְבַּע־מֵא֖וֹת שָֽׁקֶל 1 seventy talents and 2,400 shekels A talent is about 34 kilograms and a shekel is about 11 grams. See the UST. (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) EXO 38 30 rck7 מִכְבַּ֥ר 1 grate This is a frame of crossed bars for holding wood when burning. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md). EXO 38 31 bvr9 יִתְדֹ֧ת…יִתְדֹ֥ת 1 tent pegs These are sharp bronze stakes that were used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:19](../27/19.md). -EXO 39 intro mll6 0 # Exodus 39 General Notes
- This chapter continues record of the construction in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions. The special, holy clothing mentioned in previous chapters is produced in this chapter to the correct specifications. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency. Verses 1-31 of this chapter follow [Exodus 28:1-37](../28/08.md) with some differences. Verses 33-41 follow [35:10-19](../35/10.md).
- Throughout the chapter the people making the items are referred to interchangeably as **he** or **they**. Both are generic nouns referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could change all instances to “they” or “he” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+EXO 39 intro mll6 0 # Exodus 39 General Notes
- This chapter continues record of the construction in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions. The special, holy clothing mentioned in previous chapters is produced in this chapter to the correct specifications. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency. Verses 1-31 of this chapter follow [Exodus 28:1-37](../28/01.md) with some differences. Verses 33-41 follow [35:10-19](../35/10.md).
- Throughout the chapter the people making the items are referred to interchangeably as **he** or **they**. Both are generic nouns referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could change all instances to “they” or “he” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EXO 39 1 h8kg 0 as Yahweh had commanded Moses See how you translated similar instructions in [Exodus 28:4-5](../28/04.md). EXO 39 1 e1xh figs-abstractnouns בִּגְדֵ֤י הַ⁠קֹּ֨דֶשׁ֙ 1 as Yahweh had commanded Moses If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **holiness** in another way. Alternate translation: “the holy clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 39 2 b9mg 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:6](../28/06.md). From ab2866570b1361570ab255906f2aea7acf129177 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Wed, 6 Apr 2022 12:19:19 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 12/15] Aaron's edits to John 1-15 (#2386) Co-authored-by: avaldizan Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2386 --- en_tn_44-JHN.tsv | 119 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++------------------- 1 file changed, 70 insertions(+), 49 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv index 4c17ef5b3c..eae1b8b79d 100644 --- a/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv +++ b/en_tn_44-JHN.tsv @@ -1938,6 +1938,7 @@ JHN 14 12 icjc figs-infostructure ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ, τὰ JHN 14 12 h2rh figs-explicit τὰ ἔργα 1 See how you translated **works** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 14 12 ui5t figs-ellipsis καὶ μείζονα τούτων ποιήσει 1 Jesus is leaving out a word that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply the word from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “and he will do greater works than these” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 14 12 cn14 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατέρα 1 Father **Father** is an important title that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +JHN 14 13 bn30 figs-ellipsis ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε 1 Whatever you ask in my name Jesus is leaving out some a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask God” or “whatever you might ask me”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) JHN 14 13 n2id figs-idiom ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 Whatever you ask in my name Here, **ask in my name** could mean: (1) to request something as the representative of Jesus or as if Jesus himself was requesting it. Alternate translation: “whatever you might ask as if I were asking” or “whatever you might ask that I would ask” (2) to request something with the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “Whatever you ask with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) JHN 14 13 i138 figs-activepassive ἵνα δοξασθῇ ὁ Πατὴρ ἐν τῷ Υἱῷ 1 so that the Father will be glorified in the Son If your language does not use the passive voice, you can translate this in an active form. The one that may do the action could be: (1) Jesus, in which case **in the Son** would mean “by the Son.” Alternate translation: “so that the Son may glorify the Father” (2) everyone who experiences the result of what has been asked. Alternate translation: “so that everyone may glorify the Father in the Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 14 13 j6nh guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατὴρ…Υἱῷ 1 Father … Son **Father** and **Son** are important titles that describe the relationship between God and Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) @@ -2000,64 +2001,84 @@ JHN 14 30 ea6m figs-explicit ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν 1 ru JHN 14 31 n3et grammar-connect-logic-goal ἀλλ’ ἵνα γνῷ ὁ κόσμος, ὅτι ἀγαπῶ τὸν Πατέρα, καὶ καθὼς ἐνετείλατο μοι ὁ Πατὴρ, οὕτως ποιῶ 1 Here, **so that** introduces a purpose clause. The first event that is done to accomplish this purpose could be: (1) a phrase Jesus left out that can be supplied from the context of the previous verses. Alternate translation: “but the ruler of this world is coming so that the world might know that I love the Father, and just as the Father commanded me, thus I do” or “but these things will happen so that the world might know that I love the Father, and just as the Father commanded me, thus I do” (2) what is stated later in the sentence, in which case the order of the clauses must be changed. Alternate translation: “but just as the Father commanded me, thus I do, so that the world might know that I love the Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) JHN 14 31 jhq1 figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 in order that the world will know See how you translated this in [verse 17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 14 31 r9ub guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα…ὁ Πατὴρ 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 15 intro k9jd 0 # John 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Vine

Jesus used the vine as a metaphor for himself. This is because the vine of the grape plant is what takes water and minerals from the ground to the leaves and grapes. Without the vine, the grapes and leaves die. He wanted his followers to know that unless they loved and obeyed him, they would be unable to do anything that pleased God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 15 1 aws2 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus reclines at the table with his disciples and continues to speak to them. -JHN 15 1 fen5 figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος ἡ ἀληθινή 1 I am the true vine Here the **true vine** is a metaphor. Jesus compares himself to a vine or a vine stem. He is the source of life that causes people to live in a way that pleases God. Alternate translation: “I am like a vine that produces good fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 15 1 w2d4 figs-metaphor ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ γεωργός ἐστιν 1 my Father is the gardener Here, the **gardener** is a metaphor. A “gardener” is a person who takes care of the vine to ensure it is as fruitful as possible. Alternate translation: “my Father is like a gardener” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 intro k9jd 0 # John 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

1. Jesus says he is the vine (15:1–8)
2. Jesus commands his disciples to love each other (15:9–17)
3. Jesus promises that his disciples will be persecuted (15:18–27)

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Vine

Jesus used the vine as a metaphor for himself. The vine of the grape plant takes water and minerals from the ground and gives them to the leaves and grapes that are on the branches. Without the vine, the branches, grapes, and leaves die. He wanted his followers to know that unless they loved and obeyed him, they would be unable to do anything that pleased God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### “Remain in me”

Jesus uses the word “remain” as a metaphor. He is speaking of a believer being spiritually joined to someone else as if the person “remained” in the other person. Christians are said to “remain” in Christ. The Son is said to “remain” in believers. Many translators will find it impossible to represent these ideas in their languages in exactly the same way. In ([John 15:7](../15/07.md)), the UST expresses this idea of “If my words remain in you” as “If you live according to my teachings.” Translators may find it possible to use this translation as a model.
+JHN 15 1 aws2 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus continues to speak to his disciples either at the end of their evening meal or after they have finished that meal and are walking to Gethsemane. It is unclear whether or not they left immediately after Jesus said “Let us go from here” at the end of the previous chapter ([John 14:31](../14/31.md)]). +JHN 15 1 fen5 figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος ἡ ἀληθινή 1 I am the true vine Here Jesus uses the **true vine** figuratively to refer to himself. The way that a **vine** is the source of life for its branches, Jesus causes people to live in a way that pleases God and brings other people to believe in Jesus. Since the **vine** is an important metaphor in the Bible, we recommend that you translate the words directly or use a simile and not provide a non-figurative explanation in the text of your translation. Alternate translation: “I am like a true vine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 1 puzl translate-unknown ἡ ἀληθινή 1 The word translated **vine** refers specifically grapevine plant that produces grapes. If your readers would not be familiar with grapevines, use an equivalent word in your language for a **vine** that grows fruit. Alternate translation: “grapevine” or “fruit-producing vine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) JHN 15 1 hqj7 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 15 2 p311 figs-metaphor πᾶν κλῆμα ἐν ἐμοὶ μὴ φέρον καρπὸν, αἴρει 1 He takes away every branch in me that does not bear fruit Here, **Every branch** represents people, and **bearing fruit** represents living in a way that pleases God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 15 2 wt8w αἴρει αὐτό 1 takes away Alternate translation: “he cuts it off and takes it away” -JHN 15 2 xej7 πᾶν τὸ καρπὸν φέρον, καθαίρει αὐτὸ 1 prunes every branch Alternate translation: “he trims every branch that bears fruit” -JHN 15 3 xn3j figs-metaphor ἤδη ὑμεῖς καθαροί ἐστε, διὰ τὸν λόγον ὃν λελάληκα ὑμῖν 1 You are already clean because of the message that I have spoken to you The implied metaphor here is the **clean** branches that have already been “pruned.” Alternate translation: “It is as if you have already been pruned and are clean branches because you have obeyed what I have taught you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 1 w2d4 figs-metaphor ὁ Πατήρ μου ὁ γεωργός ἐστιν 1 my Father is the gardener Here, Jesus uses **farmer** figuratively to refer to God. Just as a **farmer** takes care of the**vine** to ensure it is as fruitful as possible, so God takes care of his people. If this use of **farmer** would be confusing in your language, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “my Father is like a gardener” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 1 t4ne ὁ γεωργός 1 my Father is the gardener While **farmer** is a general term for anyone who farms the ground, in this context it refers to someone who takes care of grapevines and grows grapes. Alternate translation: “vine grower” or “grape farmer” +JHN 15 2 p311 figs-exmetaphor πᾶν κλῆμα ἐν ἐμοὶ μὴ φέρον καρπὸν…καὶ πᾶν τὸ καρπὸν φέρον…ἵνα καρπὸν πλείονα φέρῃ 1 He takes away every branch in me that does not bear fruit Jesus speaks about people who claim to be his disciples but are not by continuing the metaphor of a vine. In this paragraph, Jesus uses **branch** figuratively to refer to both true and false disciples. He also uses **bearing fruit**, **bears fruit**, and **bear more fruit** figuratively to refer to living in a manner that pleases God, especially demonstrating the Christian qualities called the “fruit of the Spirit” in [Galatians 5:22–23](../../gal/05/22.md). You could express this metaphor as a simile if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Everyone who claims to be my disciple but does not please God is like a branch in me that does not bear fruit … and every person who pleases God is like a branch that bears fruit … so that he might be like a branch that bears more fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]]) +JHN 15 2 wt8w αἴρει αὐτό 1 takes away Alternate translation: “he cuts it off of the vine and takes it away” or “he breaks it off of the vine and throws it away” +JHN 15 2 enrh καθαίρει αὐτὸ 1 takes away The word translated **prunes** could mean: (1) remove excess parts from a plant. Alternate translation: “he trims it” (2) to cause something to become clean. Alternate translation: “he cleans it” (3) remove excess parts from a plant in order to make it clean. See the discussion of John’s use of double meaning in Part 3 of the Introduction to this book. Alternate translation: “he prunes it so that it will be clean” +JHN 15 3 xn3j figs-metaphor ἤδη ὑμεῖς καθαροί ἐστε 1 You are already clean because of the message that I have spoken to you The word translated **clean** is related to the word translated “prunes” in the previous verse. Here Jesus uses **clean** to imply that the branches have already been cleaned by pruning off the excess parts. If this use of **clean** might confuse your readers, you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “You are like branches that have already been pruned and are clean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 3 ls0g figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 You are already clean because of the message that I have spoken to you Here, **word** refers to the message or teachings of Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand this use of **word**, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 3 l5zz figs-you ὑμεῖς…ὑμῖν 1 you The words **You** and **you** in this verse are plural and refer to the disciples of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -JHN 15 4 qvv9 μείνατε ἐν ἐμοί, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν 1 Remain in me, and I in you Alternate translation: “If you remain joined to me, I will remain joined to you” or “Remain joined to me, and I will remain joined to you” -JHN 15 4 hn7q ἐὰν μὴ ἐν ἐμοὶ μένητε 1 unless you remain in me By remaining in Christ, those who belong to him depend on him for everything. Alternate translation: “unless you stay joined to me and depend upon me for everything” -JHN 15 5 mw4t figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος; ὑμεῖς τὰ κλήματα 1 I am the vine, you are the branches Here, the **vine** is a metaphor that represents Jesus, and the **branches** is a metaphor that represent those who trust in Jesus and belong to him. Alternate translation: “I am like a vine, and you are like branches that are attached to the vine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 15 5 r4di figs-explicit ὁ μένων ἐν ἐμοὶ κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 He who remains in me and I in him Here Jesus implies that his followers are joined to him as he is joined to God. Alternate translation: “The person who stays joined to me, as I stay joined to my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 15 5 hzh4 figs-metaphor οὗτος φέρει καρπὸν πολύν 1 he bears much fruit The implied metaphor here is the fruitful branch that represents the believer who pleases God. Just as a branch that is attached to the vine will bear **much fruit**, those who stay joined to Jesus will do many things that please God. Alternate translation: “that person will bear much fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 15 6 k1tm figs-metaphor ἐβλήθη ἔξω ὡς τὸ κλῆμα καὶ ἐξηράνθη 1 he is thrown away like a branch and dries up Here the implied metaphor is the unfruitful branch that represents those who do not stay joined to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 15 6 h6cu figs-activepassive ἐβλήθη ἔξω ὡς τὸ κλῆμα καὶ ἐξηράνθη 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “the vinedresser throws him away like a branch and he dries up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 15 6 e789 figs-activepassive καίεται 1 they are burned up You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “the fire burns them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 15 7 m38f figs-explicit ὃ ἐὰν θέλητε, αἰτήσασθε 1 ask whatever you wish Jesus implies that believers must ask God to answer their prayers. Alternate translation: “ask God whatever you wish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 15 7 mcz5 figs-activepassive γενήσεται ὑμῖν 1 it will be done for you You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “he will do it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 15 8 yq67 figs-activepassive ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 My Father is glorified in this You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “It causes people to honor my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +JHN 15 4 qvv9 figs-explicit μείνατε ἐν ἐμοί, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν…ἐν ἐμοὶ μένητε 1 Remain in me, and I in you See how you translated a similar phrase in [6:56](../06/56.md). See also the discussion of **Remain in me** in the General Notes for this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 15 5 mw4t figs-metaphor ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος; ὑμεῖς τὰ κλήματα 1 I am the vine, you are the branches See how you translated **vine** in [verse 1](../15/01.md) and “branch” in [verse 2](../15/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 5 r4di figs-explicit ὁ μένων ἐν ἐμοὶ κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 He who remains in me and I in him See how you translated this similar expression in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 15 5 hzh4 figs-metaphor οὗτος φέρει καρπὸν πολύν 1 he bears much fruit See how you translated **bears fruit** in [verse 2](../15/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 5 b1qd figs-explicit ποιεῖν οὐδέν 1 he bears much fruit Here Jesus uses **nothing** to refer to doing **nothing** that pleases God or to lack any spiritual fruit. It does not refer to doing **nothing** at all. If this use of **nothing** would be misunderstood in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “do nothing that pleases God” or “do nothing acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 15 6 fgnm ἐὰν μή τις μένῃ ἐν ἐμοί, ἐβλήθη ἔξω ὡς τὸ κλῆμα καὶ ἐξηράνθη, καὶ συνάγουσιν αὐτὰ καὶ εἰς τὸ πῦρ βάλλουσιν, καὶ καίεται 1 In middle of this verse, Jesus changes from referring to the **branch** in a singular form to a plural form. If this change would be confusing in your language, you could change the singular forms into plural forms. Alternate translation: “If people do not remain in me, they are thrown outside like branches and are dried up, and they gather them into the fire, and they are burned up” +JHN 15 6 d5mt figs-explicit μένῃ ἐν ἐμοί 1 See how you translated **remain in me** in the previous two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 15 6 h6cu figs-activepassive ἐβλήθη ἔξω ὡς τὸ κλῆμα καὶ ἐξηράνθη 1 If your language does not use the passive voice, you can translate this in an active form and say who would do the action. Alternate translation: “the farmer throws him outside like a branch and he dries up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +JHN 15 6 k1tm figs-metaphor τὸ κλῆμα 1 he is thrown away like a branch and dries up Here Jesus uses **branch** figuratively to refer to someone who claims to be Jesus’ disciple but is not. See how you translated the similar use of **branch** in [verse 2](../15/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 6 ura6 figs-metaphor καὶ συνάγουσιν αὐτὰ καὶ εἰς τὸ πῦρ βάλλουσιν, καὶ καίεται 1 he is thrown away like a branch and dries up The first **they** refers to an indefinite subject, but the second **they** refers to the object. If this would be confusing in your language, you could translate them differently. Alternate translation: “and some helpers gather them and throw them into the fire, and they are burned up” or “and someone gathers them and throws them into the fire, and those branches are burned up” +JHN 15 6 e789 figs-activepassive καίεται 1 they are burned up If your language does not use the passive voice, you can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “the fire burns them up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +JHN 15 7 knr4 figs-explicit μείνητε ἐν ἐμοὶ 1 ask whatever you wish See how you translated **remain in me** in the previous three verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 15 7 lpzq figs-idiom τὰ ῥήματά μου ἐν ὑμῖν μείνῃ 1 ask whatever you wish This is an idiom that means to obey Jesus. See how you translated a similar expression in [8:31](../08/31.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +JHN 15 7 m38f figs-ellipsis ὃ ἐὰν θέλητε, αἰτήσασθε 1 ask whatever you wish Jesus is leaving out a word that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply the word from the context. Alternate translation: “ask God whatever you desire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 15 7 mcz5 figs-activepassive γενήσεται ὑμῖν 1 it will be done for you If your language does not use the passive voice, you can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “God will do it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +JHN 15 8 pq2t figs-pastforfuture ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 My Father is glorified in this Jesus is figuratively using the past tense in order to refer to something that will happen in the future. He is doing this to show that the event will certainly happen. If this is confusing in your language, you could use the future tense. Alternate translation: “My Father will be glorified in this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]]) +JHN 15 8 yq67 figs-activepassive ἐν τούτῳ ἐδοξάσθη ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 My Father is glorified in this If your language does not use the passive voice, you can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “You glorify my Father in this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) JHN 15 8 z1ww guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ μου 1 My Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 15 8 wpa6 figs-metaphor ἵνα καρπὸν πολὺν φέρητε 1 that you bear much fruit Here, **fruit** is a metaphor for living to please God. Alternate translation: “that you live in a way that pleases him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 15 8 vtg5 γένησθε ἐμοὶ μαθηταί 1 are my disciples Alternate translation: “show you are my disciples” or “demonstrate you are my disciples” -JHN 15 9 nf5v guidelines-sonofgodprinciples καθὼς ἠγάπησέν με ὁ Πατήρ, κἀγὼ ὑμᾶς ἠγάπησα 1 As the Father has loved me, I have also loved you Jesus shares the love that God the Father has for him with those who trust in him. **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 15 9 d32z μείνατε ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐμῇ 1 Remain in my love Alternate translation: “Continue to accept my love” -JHN 15 10 cu4e figs-explicit ἐὰν τὰς ἐντολάς μου τηρήσητε, μενεῖτε ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ μου, καθὼς ἐγὼ τοῦ Πατρός τὰς ἐντολὰς τετήρηκα, καὶ μένω αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 If you keep my commandments, you will remain in my love, as I have kept the commandments of my Father and remain in his love When Jesus’ followers obey him, they show their love for him. Alternate translation: “When you do the things I have told you to do, you are living in my love, just as I obey my Father and live in his love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 15 8 wpa6 figs-metaphor καρπὸν πολὺν φέρητε 1 that you bear much fruit See how you translated a similar expression in [verse 5](../15/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 8 vtg5 γένησθε ἐμοὶ μαθηταί 1 are my disciples Alternate translation: “show that you are my disciples” or “demonstrate that you are my disciples” +JHN 15 9 nf5v guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Πατήρ 1 As the Father has loved me, I have also loved you **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +JHN 15 9 d32z figs-metaphor μείνατε ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐμῇ 1 Remain in my love Here, Jesus uses **remain in** figuratively to refer to continuing in a certain state. Jesus is commanding his disciples to continue being in a close and loving relationship with him by obeying his commands. If this use of **remain in** might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “continue having a loving relationship with me” or “live in a way that enables you to continue experiencing my love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 10 thg9 figs-explicit τηρήσητε…τετήρηκα 1 If you keep my commandments, you will remain in my love, as I have kept the commandments of my Father and remain in his love Here, **keep** and **kept** refer to obeying. See how you translated this word in [14:15](../14/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 15 10 cu4e figs-metaphor μενεῖτε ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ μου…μένω αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 If you keep my commandments, you will remain in my love, as I have kept the commandments of my Father and remain in his love See how you translated the similar clause in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) JHN 15 10 k1nm guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) JHN 15 11 rcv8 ταῦτα λελάληκα ὑμῖν, ἵνα ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ ἐν ὑμῖν ᾖ 1 I have spoken these things to you so that my joy will be in you Alternate translation: “I have told you these things so that you will have the same kind of joy that I have” -JHN 15 11 r1p1 figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πληρωθῇ 1 so that your joy will be complete You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “so that you will be completely joyful” or “so that your joy may have nothing missing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 15 13 bu8j τὴν ψυχὴν 1 life This refers to physical life. -JHN 15 15 h2wv πάντα ἃ ἤκουσα παρὰ τοῦ Πατρός μου, ἐγνώρισα ὑμῖν 1 everything that I heard from my Father, I have made known to you Alternate translation: “I have told you everything my Father told me” +JHN 15 11 r1p1 figs-activepassive καὶ ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πληρωθῇ 1 so that your joy will be complete If your language does not use the passive voice, you can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “so that you will be completely joyful” or “so that you will be joyful to the fullest extent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +JHN 15 13 uqny μείζονα ταύτης ἀγάπην οὐδεὶς ἔχει, ἵνα τις τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ θῇ ὑπὲρ τῶν φίλων αὐτοῦ 1 Alternate translation: “The greatest love a person can have for his friends is to voluntarily die for them” or “The best way that a person can show that he loves his friends is to willingly die for them” +JHN 15 13 bu8j figs-explicit τὴν ψυχὴν 1 life Here, **life** refers to physical **life**. It does not refer to eternal life. If this use of **life** might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “physical life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 15 13 emyr figs-euphemism τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ θῇ 1 life See how you translated the similar phrase in [10:11](../10/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) JHN 15 15 b56f guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 15 16 yu3e figs-explicit οὐχ ὑμεῖς με ἐξελέξασθε 1 You did not choose me Jesus implies that his followers did not decide on their own to become his disciples. Alternate translation: “You did not decide to become my disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 15 16 qj98 figs-metaphor ὑπάγητε καὶ καρπὸν φέρητε 1 go and bear fruit Here, **fruit** is a metaphor that represents a life that is pleasing to God. Alternate translation: “live lives that please God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -JHN 15 16 v3je καὶ ὁ καρπὸς ὑμῶν μένῃ 1 that your fruit should remain Alternate translation: “that the results of what you do should last forever” -JHN 15 16 z431 figs-metonymy ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε τὸν Πατέρα ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου, δῷ ὑμῖν 1 whatever you ask of the Father in my name, he will give it to you Here, **name** is a metonym that represents the authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “because you ask with my authority, whatever you ask of the Father, he will give it to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 16 qj98 figs-metaphor καρπὸν φέρητε 1 bear fruit In this verse, **bear fruit** could mean: (1) preach the gospel to people who respond by trusting in Jesus, as suggested by the use of **go** before **bear**. Alternate translation: “would lead people to believe in me” (2) live in a manner that pleases God, as **bear fruit** is used in [verses 2–8](../15/02.md). Alternate translation: “would do what pleases God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 16 v3je figs-explicit καὶ ὁ καρπὸς ὑμῶν μένῃ 1 that your fruit should remain Here, **remain** means to last forever. If this use of **remain** might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “and your fruit should last forever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 15 16 kc4z grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα ὅ τι ἂν αἰτήσητε 1 that your fruit should remain This phrase introduces a purpose clause. It could mean: (1) the content of this clause is the purpose for Jesus choosing his disciples. Alternate translation: “and he chose you so that whatever you would ask” (2) the content of this clause is the purpose for the disciples’ fruit remaining. Alternate translation: “and this fruit would remain so that whatever you would ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) JHN 15 16 bcy1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 the Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 15 18 d5ff figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 the world Here, the **world** refers to the people who do not belong to God and are opposed to him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 15 19 x6q8 figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου 1 the world Here, the **world** refers to the people who do not belong to God and are opposed to him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 15 19 xas7 ἐφίλει 1 love This refers to human, brotherly **love** or love for a friend or family member. -JHN 15 20 v53s figs-metonymy μνημονεύετε τοῦ λόγου οὗ ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν 1 Remember the word that I said to you Here, **word** is a metonym for the message of Jesus. Alternate translation: “Remember the message that I spoke to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 15 21 z35m figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 because of my name Here, **because of my name** is a metonym that represents Jesus. People will make his followers suffer because they belong to him. Alternate translation: “because you belong to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 16 acqo figs-idiom ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου 1 See how you translated this in [14:13](../14/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +JHN 15 17 rib2 ταῦτα 1 Here, **these things** could refer to: (1) the commands Jesus referred to in the previous verses. Alternate translation: “These commands” (2) the command in the second half of this verse. Alternate translation: “This” +JHN 15 18 ntzw grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ὁ κόσμος ὑμᾶς μισεῖ 1 the world Jesus is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Jesus is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “If the world hates you, and it does” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +JHN 15 18 d5ff figs-metonymy ὁ κόσμος 1 the world Here Jesus uses **world** figuratively to refer to the people in the **world** who oppose God. See how you translated this in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 19 aj8s grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἦτε 1 the world Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that his disciples are not **from the world**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If you were from the world, but you are not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +JHN 15 19 x6q8 figs-metonymy τοῦ κόσμου…ὁ κόσμος…τοῦ κόσμου…τοῦ κόσμου…ὁ κόσμος 1 the world See how you translated **the world** in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 19 ayo7 figs-infostructure ὅτι δὲ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου οὐκ ἐστέ, ἀλλ’ ἐγὼ ἐξελεξάμην ὑμᾶς ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, διὰ τοῦτο μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὁ κόσμος 1 the world If it would be more natural in your language, you could change the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “But because you are not from the world, this world hates you, but I chose you from the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +JHN 15 20 v53s figs-metonymy μνημονεύετε τοῦ λόγου οὗ ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν 1 Remember the word that I said to you Here, Jesus uses **word** figuratively to refer to what he says later in this sentence. If this use of **word** might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Remember the teaching that I said to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 20 wzg6 figs-explicit οὐκ ἔστιν δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὐτοῦ 1 Remember the word that I said to you See how you translated this in [13:16](../13/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 15 20 a8kw figs-metonymy εἰ τὸν λόγον μου ἐτήρησαν…τηρήσουσιν 1 Remember the word that I said to you See how you translated a similar phrase in [8:51](../08/51.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 21 eh1v figs-metonymy ταῦτα πάντα ποιήσουσιν εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 because of my name Here, **all these things** refers to the bad things Jesus told his disciples that the unbelievers in the world would do to them in [verses 18–20](../15/18.md). If this use of **these things** might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they will hate and persecute you” +JHN 15 21 z35m figs-metonymy διὰ τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 because of my name Here, Jesus uses **my name** figuratively to refer to himself. People will make his followers suffer because they belong to him. If this use of **name** would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because you belong to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 15 21 hs9x figs-explicit τὸν πέμψαντά με 1 Here, **the one who sent me** refers to God. See how you translated it in [4:34](../04/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 15 22 m75h figs-explicit εἰ μὴ ἦλθον καὶ ἐλάλησα αὐτοῖς, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν; νῦν δὲ πρόφασιν οὐκ ἔχουσιν περὶ τῆς ἁμαρτίας αὐτῶν 1 If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin Jesus implies here that he has shared God’s message with those who do not trust him. Alternate translation: “Because I have come and told them God’s message, they have no excuse when God judges them for their sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 15 23 sw4l ὁ ἐμὲ μισῶν, καὶ τὸν Πατέρα μου μισεῖ 1 He who hates me also hates my Father To hate God the Son is to hate God the Father. +JHN 15 22 m75h grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ μὴ ἦλθον καὶ ἐλάλησα αὐτοῖς 1 If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He knows that he did come and speak to the world. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If I had not come and spoken to them, but I did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +JHN 15 22 uble figs-metaphor ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν 1 If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin Here Jesus speaks figuratively of **sin** as if it were an object that a person could possess. See how you translated a similar phrase in [9:41](../09/41.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 22 uj4o figs-explicit ἁμαρτίαν…ἁμαρτίας 1 If I had not come and spoken to them, they would not have sin, but now they have no excuse for their sin Here, Jesus uses **sin** to refer specifically the the **sin** of rejecting Jesus and his teachings. It does not refer to **sin** in general, because everyone is guilty of **sin**. If this use of **sin** might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the sin of rejecting me and my teachings … sin of rejecting me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) JHN 15 23 u9u7 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 15 24 bd47 figs-doublenegatives εἰ τὰ ἔργα μὴ ἐποίησα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος ἐποίησεν, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν…δὲ 1 If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, they would have no sin, but You can translate this double negative in a positive form. Alternate translation: “Because I have done among them the works that no one else did, they have had sin, and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -JHN 15 24 v23s ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν 1 they would have no sin “they would not have any sin.” See how you translated this in [John 15:22](../15/22.md). -JHN 15 24 v6pt καὶ ἑωράκασιν καὶ μεμισήκασιν, καὶ ἐμὲ καὶ τὸν Πατέρα μου 1 they have seen and hated both me and my Father To hate God the Son is to hate God the Father. -JHN 15 25 x7g9 figs-metonymy ἵνα πληρωθῇ ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ αὐτῶν γεγραμμένος 1 to fulfill the word that is written in their law Here, **word** is a metonym for the entire message of God. Alternate translation: “in order that the prophecy in their law might be fulfilled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -JHN 15 25 rod8 figs-activepassive ἵνα πληρωθῇ ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ αὐτῶν γεγραμμένος 1 You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “this happened in order to fulfill the prophecy in their law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -JHN 15 25 j2m2 τῷ νόμῳ 1 law Here, **law** refers generally to the entire Old Testament, which contained all of God’s instructions for his people. -JHN 15 26 mwq6 πέμψω ὑμῖν παρὰ τοῦ Πατρός, τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας…ἐκεῖνος μαρτυρήσει περὶ ἐμοῦ 1 will send … from the Father … the Spirit of truth … he will testify about me God the Father sent God the Spirit to show the world that Jesus is God the Son. -JHN 15 26 tpw6 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) -JHN 15 26 tzi9 figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the Spirit of truth This is a title for the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the Spirit who tells the truth about God and me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 15 27 r47f figs-explicit καὶ ὑμεῖς…μαρτυρεῖτε 1 You are also testifying Here, **testifying** means they are telling others about Jesus. Alternate translation: “you also must tell everyone what you know about me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -JHN 15 27 ew2v figs-metonymy ἀρχῆς 1 the beginning Here the **beginning** is a metonym that means the first days of Jesus’ ministry. Alternate translation: “the very first days when I began teaching the people and doing miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 24 bd47 figs-doublenegatives εἰ τὰ ἔργα μὴ ἐποίησα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος ἐποίησεν, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν…δὲ 1 If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, they would have no sin, but If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Because I have done the works that no one else did among them, they have sin, and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +JHN 15 24 rnt4 grammar-connect-condition-contrary εἰ τὰ ἔργα μὴ ἐποίησα ἐν αὐτοῖς ἃ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος ἐποίησεν, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν 1 If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, they would have no sin, but Jesus is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he knows that the condition is not true. He has done **works that no one else did** among the people. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “If I had not done the works that no one else did among them, but I did, they would have no sin, but they do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) +JHN 15 24 v23s figs-metaphor ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν 1 they would have no sin See how you translated this in [15:22](../15/22.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +JHN 15 24 z6we figs-ellipsis καὶ ἑωράκασιν 1 The object of the verb **seen** could be: (1) **the works** referred to earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “they have both seen the works” (2) Jesus and the **Father** referred to at the end of the verse. Alternate translation: “they have both seen me and my Father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +JHN 15 24 v6pt guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τὸν Πατέρα μου 1 they have seen and hated both me and my Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +JHN 15 25 x7g9 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 to fulfill the word that is written in their law Here, Jesus uses **word** figuratively to refer to a specific prophecy in the Old Testament. If this use of **word** would confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the prophecy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +JHN 15 25 s5wj writing-quotations ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ αὐτῶν γεγραμμένος 1 Here Jesus uses **the word that is written** to introduce a quotation from an Old Testament book ([Psalm 35:19](../../psa/35/19.md) or [69:4](../../psa/69/04.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that John is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “the statement that has been written in their scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) +JHN 15 25 rod8 figs-activepassive πληρωθῇ ὁ λόγος ὁ ἐν τῷ νόμῳ αὐτῶν γεγραμμένος 1 If your language does not use the passive voice, you can translate this in an active form and say who did the action. Alternate translation: “they might fulfill the word that a prophet wrote in their law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +JHN 15 25 j2m2 figs-synecdoche τῷ νόμῳ 1 law Jesus is using the name of the first part of the Hebrew Scriptures, the **law**, to represent the entire Hebrew Scriptures in general. See how you translated a similar expression in [10:34](../10/34.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +JHN 15 26 eexc figs-explicit ὁ Παράκλητος 1 See how you translated this in [14:16](../14/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 15 26 tpw6 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Πατρός…Πατρὸς 1 Father **Father** is an important title for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +JHN 15 26 tzi9 figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληθείας 1 the Spirit of truth See how you translated this in [14:17](../14/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +JHN 15 27 ew2v figs-metonymy ἀρχῆς 1 the beginning Here Jesus uses **beginning** figuratively to refer to the first days of his ministry. If this use of **beginning** might confuse your readers, you could say the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the very first days when I began teaching the people and doing miracles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) JHN 16 intro wb8v 0 # John 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Holy Spirit

Jesus told his disciples that he would send the Holy Spirit to them. The Holy Spirit is the Comforter ([John 14:16](../../jhn/14/16.md)) who is always with God’s people to help them and to speak to God for them, He is also the Spirit of truth ([John 14:17](../../jhn/14/17.md)) who tells God’s people what is true about God so they know him better and serve him well. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])

### “The hour is coming”

Jesus used these words to begin prophecies about times that could be shorter or longer than sixty minutes. “The hour” in which people would persecute his followers ([John 16:2](../../jhn/16/02.md)) was days, weeks, and years long, but “the hour” in which his disciples would scatter and leave him alone ([John 16:32](../../jhn/16/32.md)) was less than sixty minutes long. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Simile

Jesus said that just as a woman is in pain as she gives birth to a baby and his followers would be sad when he died. But the woman is glad after the baby is born, and his followers would be happy when he became alive again. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) JHN 16 1 pbc8 0 Connecting Statement: The part of the story from the previous chapter continues. Jesus reclines at the table with his disciples and continues to speak to them. JHN 16 1 vui6 figs-explicit μὴ σκανδαλισθῆτε 1 you will not fall away Here the phrase **fall away** implies to stop putting one’s trust in Jesus. Alternate translation: “you will not stop trusting in me because of the difficulties you must face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) From 32c827cb32e732bacbc7321daf323897799bf534 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Wed, 6 Apr 2022 20:44:00 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 13/15] Larry's edits to Acts 7-10 (#2387) Co-authored-by: lrsallee Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2387 --- en_tn_45-ACT.tsv | 734 ++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------- 1 file changed, 343 insertions(+), 391 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv index b795c1ed12..e772ef81c3 100644 --- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv +++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv @@ -1261,27 +1261,27 @@ ACT 9 42 fyz4 ἐπίστευσαν…ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 believed ACT 9 43 k9ik writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Now it happened that This introduces the beginning of the next event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 9 43 qar2 Σίμωνι, βυρσεῖ 1 Simon, a tanner Alternate translation: “a man named Simon who made leather from animal skins” ACT 10 intro ym7z 0 # Acts 10 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Unclean

The Jews believed that they could become unclean in God’s sight if they visited or ate food with a Gentile. This was because the Pharisees had made a law against it because they wanted to keep people from eating foods that the law of Moses said were unclean. The law of Moses did say that some foods were unclean, but it did not say that God’s people could not visit or eat with Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/clean]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

### Baptism and the Holy Spirit

The Holy Spirit “fell on” those who were listening to Peter. This showed the Jewish believers that Gentiles could receive the word of God and receive the Holy Spirit just as the Jewish believers had. After that, the Gentiles were baptized. -ACT 10 1 m1vx writing-background 0 General Information: These verses give background information about Cornelius. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 10 1 nfy5 0 Connecting Statement: This is the beginning of the part of the story about Cornelius. +ACT 10 1 m1vx writing-background Κορνήλιος 1 General Information: Verses 1-2 give background information about **Cornelius**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 10 1 wtb9 writing-participants ἀνὴρ δέ τις 1 Now there was a certain man This was a way of introducing a new person to this part of the historical account. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 10 1 x476 ὀνόματι Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἐκ Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς 1 named Cornelius, a centurion from the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’ Alternate translation: “whose name was Cornelius. He was an officer in charge of 100 soldiers from the Italian section of the Roman army” ACT 10 1 abcd Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς 1 the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’ Alternate translation: “the Italian Regiment” ACT 10 2 s6rh εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 devout and fearing God Alternate translation: “believing in God and seeking to honor and worship God in his life” ACT 10 2 n8i3 φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 fearing God The word **fearing** here has the sense of deep respect and awe. -ACT 10 2 abce τῷ λαῷ 1 to the people This here refers to Jewish people who were in need. +ACT 10 2 abce τῷ λαῷ 1 to the people Here, **the people** refers to Jewish people who were in need. ACT 10 2 w2kx figs-hyperbole δεόμενος τοῦ Θεοῦ διὰ παντός 1 praying to God through all The phrase **through all** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “he prayed to God a lot” or “he prayed to God regularly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 10 3 up3j ὥραν ἐνάτην 1 the ninth hour This is the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Alternate translation: “three o’clock in the afternoon” ACT 10 3 g3lv εἶδεν…φανερῶς 1 he clearly saw Alternate translation: “Cornelius clearly saw” ACT 10 4 abcf ὁ δὲ, ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ 1 But he stared at him Cornelius looked intently at the angel. ACT 10 4 abcg εἶπεν δὲ αὐτῷ 1 And he said to him Alternate translation: “Then the angel said to Cornelius” -ACT 10 4 p5ml figs-explicit αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Your prayers and your alms have gone up for a memorial offering before God It is implied that his gifts and prayers had been accepted by God. Alternate translation: “God is pleased by your prayers and your gifts that have gone up to him as a memorial offering to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 10 6 lt9n βυρσεῖ 1 a tanner a person who makes leather from animal skins -ACT 10 7 g6lq ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ 1 And when the angel who spoke to him had left Alternate translation: “When Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended” -ACT 10 7 i3x7 στρατιώτην εὐσεβῆ τῶν προσκαρτερούντων αὐτῷ 1 a devout soldier of those who served him This soldier worshiped God. That was rare in the Roman army, so Cornelius’ other soldiers probably did not worship God. Alternate translation: “one of the soldiers who served him, who also worshiped God” -ACT 10 7 yg7g εὐσεβῆ 1 devout An adjective to describe a person who worshiped God and served him. +ACT 10 4 p5ml figs-explicit αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου, ἀνέβησαν εἰς μνημόσυνον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Your prayers and your alms have gone up for a memorial offering before God It is implied that his gifts and **prayers** had been accepted by **God**. Alternate translation: “God is pleased by your prayers and your gifts that have gone up to him as a memorial offering to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 10 6 lt9n βυρσεῖ 1 a tanner A **tanner** is a person who makes leather from animal skins. +ACT 10 7 g6lq ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ 1 And when the angel who spoke to him had left Alternate translation: “And when Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended” +ACT 10 7 i3x7 στρατιώτην εὐσεβῆ τῶν προσκαρτερούντων αὐτῷ 1 a devout soldier of those who served him This **soldier** worshiped God. That was rare in the Roman army, so Cornelius’ other soldiers probably did not worship God. Alternate translation: “one of the soldiers who served him, who also worshiped God” +ACT 10 7 yg7g εὐσεβῆ 1 devout The adjective **devout** describes a person who worshiped God and served him. ACT 10 8 pcg2 ἐξηγησάμενος ἅπαντα αὐτοῖς 1 having told them everything Cornelius explained his vision to his two servants and to one of his soldiers. ACT 10 8 d2p3 ἀπέστειλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὴν Ἰόππην 1 he sent them to Joppa Alternate translation: “he sent two of his two servants and the one soldier to Joppa” -ACT 10 9 ey9n 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Cornelius’ two servants and the soldier under Cornelius’ command ([Acts 10:7](../10/07.md)). +ACT 10 9 ey9n ὁδοιπορούντων ἐκείνων 1 General Information: Here the word **they** refers to Cornelius’ two servants and the soldier under Cornelius’ command ([Acts 10:7](../10/07.md)). ACT 10 9 w3g4 0 Connecting Statement: The story shifts away from Cornelius to tell us what God is doing with to Peter. ACT 10 9 tu7n περὶ ὥραν ἕκτην 1 at about the sixth hour Alternate translation: “at around noon” ACT 10 9 r6l8 ἀνέβη…ἐπὶ τὸ δῶμα 1 went up to the housetop The roofs of the houses were flat, and people often did many different activities on them. @@ -1293,46 +1293,44 @@ ACT 10 11 jh1m τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς καθιέμενον 1 being l ACT 10 12 ua3j figs-explicit πάντα τὰ τετράποδα, καὶ ἑρπετὰ τῆς γῆς, καὶ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 all the four-footed animals and creeping things on the earth, and birds of the sky From Peter’s response in the next verse, it can be implied that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of them. Alternate translation: “every kind of animal and reptile and bird that the Mosaic laws forbade Jews to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 10 13 a2z4 figs-synecdoche ἐγένετο φωνὴ πρὸς αὐτόν 1 a voice came to him The person speaking is not specified. The **voice** was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 10 14 z7r5 μηδαμῶς 1 Not at all Alternate translation: “I will not do that” -ACT 10 14 a2jj figs-explicit οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον 1 I have never eaten anything defiled and unclean It is implied that some the animals in the container were unclean as defined by the law of Moses and were not to be eaten by believers who lived before Christ died. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 10 14 a2jj figs-explicit οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινὸν καὶ ἀκάθαρτον 1 I have never eaten anything defiled and unclean It is implied that some the animals in the container were **unclean** as defined by the law of Moses and were not to be eaten by believers who lived before Christ died. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 10 15 xs5s figs-123person ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν 1 What God has cleansed If God is the speaker, he is referring to himself in the third person. Alternate translation: “What I, God, have cleansed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) ACT 10 16 rlr9 τοῦτο…ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς 1 this happened three times It is possible that everything Peter saw happened did not happen three times, but that the phrase, “What God has cleansed, do not call it defiled,” was repeated three times. However, it may be best to simply say “This happened three times.” -ACT 10 17 d4zi διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος 1 Peter was very confused … about This means that Peter was having difficulty understanding what the vision meant. +ACT 10 17 d4zi ἐν ἑαυτῷ διηπόρει ὁ Πέτρος 1 Peter was very confused … about This means that **Peter** was having difficulty understanding what the vision meant. ACT 10 17 n6da ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** here alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows, in this case, the two men standing at the gate. ACT 10 17 e62m figs-explicit ἐπέστησαν ἐπὶ τὸν πυλῶνα 1 stood before the gate It is implied that this house had a wall with a **gate** in it to enter the property. Alternate translation: “stood before the gate to the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 10 17 h72m διερωτήσαντες τὴν οἰκίαν 1 having found by inquiry the house This happened before they arrived at the house. This could be stated earlier in the verse, as the UST does. ACT 10 18 qe9d φωνήσαντες 1 they called out Cornelius’ men remained outside the gate while asking about Peter. -ACT 10 19 e8ai διενθυμουμένου περὶ τοῦ ὁράματος 1 while … was still thinking about the vision Alternate translation: “as … was still wondering about the meaning of the vision” +ACT 10 19 e8ai τοῦ…Πέτρου διενθυμουμένου περὶ τοῦ ὁράματος 1 while … was still thinking about the vision Alternate translation: “as Peter was still wondering about the meaning of the vision” ACT 10 19 d9q8 τὸ Πνεῦμα 1 the Spirit Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” ACT 10 19 iqx5 ἰδοὺ 1 Behold Alternate translation: “Pay attention, because what I am about to say is both true and important: three” ACT 10 19 va39 translate-textvariants ἄνδρες τρεῖς ζητοῦσιν σε 1 three men are looking for you Cornelius sent two of his servants and one soldier. Some ancient texts have a different number of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ACT 10 20 ym1x κατάβηθι 1 go down Alternate translation: “go down from the roof of the house” ACT 10 20 wx4n πορεύου σὺν αὐτοῖς, μηδὲν διακρινόμενος 1 go with them. Do not hesitate It would be natural for Peter not to want to go with them, because they were strangers and they were Gentiles. ACT 10 21 lj1f ἐγώ εἰμι ὃν ζητεῖτε 1 I am he whom you are seeking Alternate translation: “I am the man you are looking for” -ACT 10 22 i4zh 0 General Information: The words “They” and “them” here refer to the two servants and the soldier from Cornelius ([Acts 10:7](../10/07.md)). +ACT 10 22 i4zh οἱ…εἶπαν 0 General Information: Here, **they** refers to the two servants and the soldier from Cornelius ([Acts 10:7](../10/07.md)). ACT 10 22 baa3 figs-activepassive Κορνήλιος, ἑκατοντάρχης ἀνὴρ δίκαιος, καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν, μαρτυρούμενός τε ὑπὸ ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων, ἐχρηματίσθη ὑπὸ ἀγγέλου ἁγίου, μεταπέμψασθαί σε εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι ῥήματα παρὰ σοῦ 1 Cornelius, a centurion, a man righteous and fearing God, and well-testifed to by the whole nation of the Jews, was instructed by a holy angel to summon you to his house and to hear a word from you If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form as the UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 22 wvl1 φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 fearing God The word **fearing** here has the sense of deep respect and awe. ACT 10 22 gv91 figs-hyperbole ὅλου τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the whole nation of the Jews This number of people is exaggerated with the word **whole** to emphasize how widely this was known among the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 10 23 jlc7 εἰσκαλεσάμενος οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐξένισεν 1 Therefore, having invited them in, he hosted them The journey to Caesarea was too long for them to begin that afternoon. ACT 10 23 shs5 ἐξένισεν 1 he hosted them Alternate translation: “he invited them to be his guests” -ACT 10 23 t7cz τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν τῶν ἀπὸ Ἰόππης 1 some of the brothers who were from Joppa This refers to believers who lived in Joppa. +ACT 10 23 t7cz τινες τῶν ἀδελφῶν τῶν ἀπὸ Ἰόππης 1 some of the brothers who were from Joppa This phrase refers to believers who lived in Joppa. ACT 10 24 c3s6 τῇ…ἐπαύριον 1 the following day This was the next day after they left Joppa. The journey to Caesarea took longer than one day. ACT 10 24 g2up ὁ δὲ Κορνήλιος ἦν προσδοκῶν αὐτοὺς 1 And Cornelius was waiting for them Alternate translation: “And Cornelius expected them” ACT 10 25 wxt8 ὡς…τοῦ εἰσελθεῖν τὸν Πέτρον 1 as Peter entered Alternate translation: “when Peter entered the house” ACT 10 25 b4pn translate-symaction πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας 1 and falling down at his feet He did this to honor Peter. Alternate translation: “and kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -ACT 10 25 u2x5 πεσὼν 1 and falling down He purposely lies down facing the ground to show that he is worshiping. ACT 10 26 s7n5 ἀνάστηθι, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπός εἰμι 1 Get up! I too am a man myself This was a mild rebuke or correction to Cornelius not to worship Peter. Alternate translation: “Stop doing that! I am only a man, as you are” -ACT 10 27 f9x6 figs-you 0 General Information: The word “him” here refers to Cornelius. Here the words “You” and “you” are plural and include Cornelius as well as the Gentiles who were present. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -ACT 10 27 bg7b 0 Connecting Statement: Peter addresses the people who are gathered in Cornelius’ house. +ACT 10 27 f9x6 αὐτῷ 1 General Information: The word **him** here refers to Cornelius. ACT 10 27 twp9 figs-explicit συνεληλυθότας πολλούς 1 many people gathered together It is implied that these people Cornelius had invited were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “many Gentile people gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 10 28 g7j7 ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 You yourselves know Peter is addressing Cornelius and his invited guests. -ACT 10 28 iyx6 ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ 1 how unlawful it is for a Jewish man This refers to the Jewish religious law. Alternate translation: “that it is forbidden for a Jewish man” -ACT 10 28 k3we ἀλλοφύλῳ 1 a foreigner This refers to people who were not Jews and not specifically to where they lived. -ACT 10 30 krz8 0 General Information: In verses 31 and 32 Cornelius quotes what the angel had said to him when he appeared to him at the ninth hour. -ACT 10 30 n5fs 0 Connecting Statement: Cornelius responds to Peter’s question. +ACT 10 28 xhuo figs-you ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 Here, **You yourselves** is plural and include Cornelius as well as the Gentiles who were present. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +ACT 10 28 iyx6 ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ 1 how unlawful it is for a Jewish man This phrase refers to the requirements of the Jewish religious law. Alternate translation: “that it is forbidden for a Jewish man” +ACT 10 28 k3we ἀλλοφύλῳ 1 a foreigner Here, **foreigner** refers to people who were not Jews and not specifically to where they lived. +ACT 10 30 n5fs καὶ ὁ Κορνήλιος ἔφη 1 Connecting Statement: Cornelius responds to Peter’s question. ACT 10 30 na4u ἀπὸ τετάρτης ἡμέρας 1 Four days ago Cornelius is referring to the day before the third night before he is speaking to Peter. Biblical culture counts the current day, so the day before three nights ago is **four days ago**. Current Western culture does not count the current day, so many Western translations read, “three days ago.” ACT 10 30 mqv8 translate-textvariants προσευχόμενος 1 praying Some ancient authorities say “fasting and praying” instead of simply **praying**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -ACT 10 30 yy6e τὴν ἐνάτην 1 at the ninth hour The normal afternoon time when the Jews pray to God. -ACT 10 31 x6d0 figs-you σου…σου 1 Both occurrences of **your** are singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +ACT 10 30 yy6e τὴν ἐνάτην 1 at the ninth hour This was the normal afternoon time when the Jews pray to God. +ACT 10 31 krz8 0 General Information: In verses 31 and 32 Cornelius quotes what the angel had said to him when he appeared to him at the ninth hour. +ACT 10 31 x6d0 figs-you σου…σου 1 Both occurrences of **your** are singular and refer to Cornelius. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 10 31 heh3 figs-activepassive εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ 1 your prayer has been heard If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 31 s6nz ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 have been remembered before God This does not imply that God had forgotten. Alternate translation: “brought you to God’s attention” ACT 10 32 ci31 μετακάλεσαι Σίμωνα, ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος 1 summon Simon who is called Peter Alternate translation: “tell Simon who is also called Peter to come to you” @@ -1343,32 +1341,30 @@ ACT 10 33 ry21 ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 before God This refers to th ACT 10 33 xt4x figs-activepassive τὰ προστεταγμένα σοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 that you have been instructed by the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the Lord has told you to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 34 ku8u 0 Connecting Statement: Peter begins speaking to everyone in the house of Cornelius. ACT 10 34 cyn8 ἀνοίξας δὲ Πέτρος τὸ στόμα εἶπεν 1 And Peter opened his mouth and said Alternate translation: “And Peter began to speak to them” -ACT 10 34 ha31 ἐπ’ ἀληθείας 1 In truth This means that what he is about to say is especially important to know. +ACT 10 34 ha31 ἐπ’ ἀληθείας 1 In truth This phrase means that what Peter is about to say is especially important. ACT 10 34 iii7 οὐκ ἔστιν προσωπολήμπτης ὁ Θεός 1 God is not one who shows partiality Alternate translation: “God does not favor certain people” ACT 10 35 j78e ὁ φοβούμενος αὐτὸν καὶ ἐργαζόμενος δικαιοσύνην, δεκτὸς αὐτῷ ἐστιν 1 the one who fears him and works righteous deeds is acceptable to him Alternate translation: “he accepts anyone who worships him and does righteous deeds” ACT 10 35 b5cr φοβούμενος 1 fears The word **fears** here has the sense of deep respect and awe. -ACT 10 36 bjk7 0 General Information: The word “him” here refers to Jesus. -ACT 10 36 sv4s 0 Connecting Statement: Peter continues to talk to Cornelius and his guests. +ACT 10 36 jtr3 0 Jesus who is from Nazareth, how God anointed him with the Holy Spirit and with power, who went about doing good and healing all who were oppressed by the devil, for God was with him The long sentence in verse 36-38 can be shortened into several sentences as in the UST. ACT 10 36 md1l οὗτός ἐστιν πάντων Κύριος 1 he is Lord of all Here, **all** means “all people.” ACT 10 37 ch65 figs-hyperbole καθ’ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 throughout all Judea The word **all** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “throughout Judea” or “in many places in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 10 37 sq2i μετὰ τὸ βάπτισμα ὃ ἐκήρυξεν Ἰωάννης 1 after the baptism that John proclaimed Alternate translation: “after John preached to the people to repent and then baptized them” -ACT 10 38 jtr3 Ἰησοῦν τὸν ἀπὸ Ναζαρέθ, ὡς ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει; ὃς διῆλθεν εὐεργετῶν καὶ ἰώμενος πάντας τοὺς καταδυναστευομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου, ὅτι ὁ Θεὸς ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 Jesus who is from Nazareth, how God anointed him with the Holy Spirit and with power, who went about doing good and healing all who were oppressed by the devil, for God was with him This long sentence, which begins in verse 36, can be shortened into several sentences as in the UST. ACT 10 38 ku82 figs-metaphor ἔχρισεν αὐτὸν ὁ Θεὸς Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ καὶ δυνάμει 1 God anointed him with the Holy Spirit and with power The Holy Spirit and God’s power are spoken of as if they are something that can be poured out onto a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 10 38 y5ya figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς καταδυναστευομένους ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβόλου 1 all who were oppressed by the devil The word **all** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “those who were oppressed by the devil” or “many people who were oppressed by the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 10 38 tj3u figs-idiom ὁ Θεὸς ἦν μετ’ αὐτοῦ 1 God was with him The idiom **was with him** means “was helping him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 10 39 kal7 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The words “We” and “we” here refer to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth. The words “he” and “him” here refer to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 10 39 kal7 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἐποίησεν…ὃν…κρεμάσαντες 1 General Information: Here, **we** refers to Peter and the apostles and believers who were with Jesus when he was on earth. The words **he** and **him** here refer to Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 10 39 sx3a ἔν…τῇ χώρᾳ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 in the country of the Jews This refers mainly to Judea at that time. ACT 10 39 z4dt κρεμάσαντες ἐπὶ ξύλου 1 by hanging him on a tree This is another expression that refers to crucifixion. Alternate translation: “by nailing him to a wooden cross” ACT 10 40 cxj5 figs-idiom τοῦτον ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 but God raised up this one Here, **raised up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “but God caused him to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 10 40 w8kv τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 1 on the third day Alternate translation: “on the third day after he died” ACT 10 40 iz8l ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ γενέσθαι 1 caused him to be seen Alternate translation: “permitted many people to see him after he was raised from the dead” ACT 10 41 q7d1 ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. -ACT 10 42 ik96 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “us” includes Peter and believers. It excludes his audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 10 42 ik96 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 General Information: Here the word **us** includes Peter and believers. It excludes his audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 10 42 zne5 0 Connecting Statement: Peter finishes his speech to everyone in the house of Cornelius, which he began in [Acts 10:34](../10/34.md). ACT 10 42 c1ak figs-activepassive ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ὡρισμένος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 that he is the one who has been chosen by God If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that God chose this Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 42 ws4t figs-nominaladj ζώντων καὶ νεκρῶν 1 of the living and the dead This refers to people who are still living and people who have died. Alternate translation: “of the people who are alive and the people who are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 10 43 ub5d τούτῳ πάντες οἱ προφῆται μαρτυροῦσιν 1 To this one, all the prophets bear witness that Alternate translation: “All the prophets bear witness to Jesus that” -ACT 10 43 vq6l figs-activepassive ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν λαβεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, πάντα τὸν πιστεύοντα εἰς αὐτὸν 1 everyone who believes in him shall receive forgiveness of sins through his name This could be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “God will forgive the sins of everyone who believes in Jesus because of what Jesus has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 10 43 vq6l figs-activepassive ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν λαβεῖν διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ, πάντα τὸν πιστεύοντα εἰς αὐτὸν 1 everyone who believes in him shall receive forgiveness of sins through his name If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God will forgive the sins of everyone who believes in Jesus because of what Jesus has done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 43 y6d1 figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ 1 through his name Here, **his name** refers to the actions of Jesus. His name means God who saves. Alternate translation: “through what Jesus has done for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 10 44 cz7x ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 the Holy Spirit fell Here the word **fell** means “happened suddenly.” Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit suddenly came” ACT 10 44 wf7u πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας 1 all of those who were listening Here, **all** refers to all the Gentiles at the house who were listening to Peter. @@ -1376,8 +1372,6 @@ ACT 10 45 j6wt ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 the gif ACT 10 45 g161 figs-activepassive ἡ δωρεὰ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος ἐκκέχυται 1 the gift of the Holy Spirit was poured out If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God poured out the Holy Spirit as a gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 45 mqs8 figs-metaphor ἐκκέχυται 1 was poured out The Holy Spirit is spoken of as if he were something that could be poured out upon people. It implies a generous amount. Alternate translation: “was generously given” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 10 45 f33n καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ ἔθνη 1 also on the Gentiles Here, **also** refers to the fact that the Holy Spirit had already been given to the Jewish believers. -ACT 10 46 w58d 0 General Information: The words “he” and “him” refer to Peter. -ACT 10 46 mpg5 0 Connecting Statement: This is the end of the part of the story about Cornelius. ACT 10 46 p6pa λαλούντων γλώσσαις, καὶ μεγαλυνόντων τὸν Θεόν 1 speaking with tongues and praising God These were known spoken languages that caused the Jews to acknowledge that the Gentiles were indeed praising God. ACT 10 47 u5d5 figs-rquestion μήτι τὸ ὕδωρ δύναται κωλῦσαί τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς? 1 No one is able to withhold water, is he, that these are not baptized, who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did? Peter uses this question to convince the Jewish Christians that the Gentile believers should be baptized. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “No one has the right to withhold water so that these are not baptized, who have received the Holy Spirit as we also did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 10 47 kwv5 figs-activepassive τις τοῦ μὴ βαπτισθῆναι τούτους, οἵτινες τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔλαβον, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “No one should keep water from these people! We should baptize them because they have received the Holy Spirit just as we did!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1385,13 +1379,13 @@ ACT 10 48 t2y9 figs-explicit προσέταξεν…αὐτοὺς…βαπτι ACT 10 48 z4fh figs-activepassive προσέταξεν…αὐτοὺς…βαπτισθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Peter commanded the Jewish Christians to baptize them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 10 48 ax6x figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ βαπτισθῆναι 1 be baptized in the name of Jesus Christ Here, **in the name of Jesus Christ** expresses that the reason for their baptism was that they believed in Jesus. Alternate translation: “be baptized as believers in Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 intro hva5 0 # Acts 11 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The Gentiles also had received the word of God”

Almost all of the first believers were Jewish. Luke writes in this chapter that many Gentiles started to believe in Jesus. They believed that the message about Jesus was true and so began to “receive the word of God.” Some of the believers in Jerusalem did not believe that Gentiles could truly follow Jesus, so Peter went to them and told them what had happened to him and how he had seen the Gentiles receive the Word of God and receive the Holy Spirit. -ACT 11 1 uw5m 0 General Information: This is the beginning of a new event in the story. -ACT 11 1 j7f7 0 Connecting Statement: Peter arrives in Jerusalem and begins talking to the Jews there. +ACT 11 1 uw5m δὲ 1 General Information: **Now** signals the beginning of a new event in the story. ACT 11 1 ab75 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now This marks a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 11 1 f1md οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 2 the brothers The phrase **the brothers** here refers to the believers in Judea. ACT 11 1 q8wl οἱ ὄντες κατὰ τὴν Ἰουδαίαν 1 who were throughout Judea Alternate translation: “who were throughout the province of Judea” ACT 11 1 w3rx figs-metonymy ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 had received the word of God This expression refers to the fact that the Gentiles believed the gospel message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “had believed the message of God about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 11 2 kb4m ἀνέβη…εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 came up to Jerusalem Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of coming up to Jerusalem and going down from it. +ACT 11 2 j7f7 0 Connecting Statement: Peter arrives in Jerusalem and begins talking to the Jews there. +ACT 11 2 kb4m ἀνέβη…εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 came up to Jerusalem Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of coming **up** to Jerusalem and going down from it. ACT 11 2 yar6 figs-metonymy οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those from the circumcision This is a reference to some of the Jews who believed that every believer must be circumcised. Alternate translation: “some Jewish believers in Jerusalem who wanted all followers of Christ to be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 3 ah7v figs-metonymy ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας 1 uncircumcised men The phrase **uncircumcised men** refers to Gentiles. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 3 t9e1 συνέφαγεν αὐτοῖς 1 ate with them It was against Jewish tradition for Jews to eat with Gentiles. @@ -1401,17 +1395,17 @@ ACT 11 4 nuy6 καθεξῆς 1 in an orderly manner Alternate translation: “ ACT 11 5 j37p ὡς ὀθόνην μεγάλην 1 like a large sheet The container holding the animals had the appearance of a large square piece of cloth. See how you translated this in [Acts 10:11](../10/11.md). ACT 11 5 axu6 τέσσαρσιν ἀρχαῖς 1 by its four corners See how you translated this in [Acts 10:11](../10/11.md). Alternate translation: “suspended by its four corners” ACT 11 6 lbh4 figs-explicit τὰ τετράποδα τῆς γῆς, καὶ τὰ θηρία, καὶ τὰ ἑρπετὰ, καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 1 the four-legged animals of the earth, and the wild beasts, and the creeping animals, and the birds of the sky From Peter’s response, it can be implied that the law of Moses commanded the Jews not to eat some of them. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Acts 10:12](../10/12.md). Alternate translation: “many kinds of animals and reptiles and birds that the Mosaic laws forbade Jews to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 11 6 ew64 θηρία 1 wild beasts This probably refer to the animals people do not or can not tame or control. +ACT 11 6 ew64 θηρία 1 wild beasts Here, **wild beasts** probably refer to the animals people do not or can not tame or control. ACT 11 6 t36i ἑρπετὰ 1 creeping animals These are reptiles. -ACT 11 7 i5ic figs-synecdoche ἤκουσα…φωνῆς 1 I heard … a voice The person speaking is not specified. The **voice** was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God. See how you translated **a voice** in [Acts 10:13](../10/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 11 7 i5ic figs-synecdoche ἤκουσα…καὶ φωνῆς 1 I heard … a voice The person speaking is not specified. The **voice** was probably God, although it could possibly have been an angel from God. See how you translated **a voice** in [Acts 10:13](../10/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 11 8 m4mu μηδαμῶς 1 By no means See how you translated this in [Acts 10:14](../10/14.md). Alternate translation: “I will not do that” ACT 11 8 m5p5 figs-explicit κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 the profane or unclean has never entered into my mouth Apparently the animals in the sheet were animals which the Jewish law in the Old Testament forbade the Jews to eat. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 11 8 wwbw figs-doublenegatives κοινὸν ἢ ἀκάθαρτον οὐδέποτε εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὸ στόμα μου 1 If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **profane or unclean … never entered**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I have eaten only meat from holy and clean animals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) ACT 11 8 kj91 ἀκάθαρτον 1 unclean In the Old Testament Jewish law, a person became ritually **unclean** in various ways, such as eating certain forbidden animals. ACT 11 9 n2gn figs-metonymy ἃ ὁ Θεὸς ἐκαθάρισεν, σὺ μὴ κοίνου 1 What God has cleansed, do not call unclean This refers to the animals in the sheet. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 10 xrq6 τοῦτο…ἐγένετο ἐπὶ τρίς 1 this happened three times It is possible that everything Peter saw happened did not happen three times, but that the phrase, “What God has cleansed, do not call it defiled,” was repeated three times. However, it may be best to simply say “this happened three times.” See how you translated **This happened three times** in [Acts 10:16](../10/16.md). -ACT 11 11 ias8 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here “we” refers to Peter and the believers in Joppa. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 11 11 b2qv ἰδοὺ 1 behold This word alerts us to the new people in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this. +ACT 11 11 ias8 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here, **we** refers to Peter and the believers in Joppa. It does not include his current audience in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 11 11 b2qv ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** alerts us to the new people in the story. Your language may have a way of doing this. ACT 11 11 k44j ἐξαυτῆς 1 right away Alternate translation: “immediately” or “at that exact moment” ACT 11 11 qwn5 figs-activepassive ἀπεσταλμένοι 1 having been sent If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “someone had sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 11 12 lf6m μηδὲν διακρίναντα 1 not making any distinction Alternate translation: “not being concerned that they were Gentiles” @@ -1419,29 +1413,27 @@ ACT 11 12 cf8x ἦλθον…σὺν ἐμοὶ 1 went with me Alternate transl ACT 11 12 xrc6 οἱ ἓξ ἀδελφοὶ οὗτοι 1 these six brothers Alternate translation: “these six Jewish believers” ACT 11 12 w6ia εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀνδρός 1 into the house of the man This refers to the house of Cornelius. ACT 11 13 few6 Σίμωνα, τὸν ἐπικαλούμενον Πέτρον 1 Simon, who is called Peter See how you translated the same phrase in [Acts 10:32](../10/32.md). Alternate translation: “Simon, who is also called Peter” -ACT 11 14 hpr2 figs-metonymy πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου 1 all your household This refers to all the people in the household. Alternate translation: “everyone who lives in your house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 11 15 qy12 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “us” refers to Peter, the apostles, and any of the Jewish believers who had received the Holy Spirit at Pentecost. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 11 14 hpr2 figs-metonymy πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου 1 all your household This refers to all the people in the **household**. Alternate translation: “everyone who lives in your house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 11 15 qy12 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word **us** refers to Peter, the apostles, and any of the Jewish believers who had received the Holy Spirit at Pentecost. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 11 15 a8jw ἐν…τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν, ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς 1 as I began to speak, the Holy Spirit came on them This implies that Peter had not finished speaking but had intended to say more. ACT 11 15 ak2p figs-ellipsis ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 the Holy Spirit came on them, just as also on us in the beginning Peter leaves out some things to keep the story short. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit came on the Gentile believers, just as he also came on the Jewish believers at Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 11 15 th4m ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 in the beginning Peter is referring to the day of Pentecost. ACT 11 16 v116 figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς…βαπτισθήσεσθε ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 you will be baptized in the Holy Spirit If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will baptize you in the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 11 17 pe42 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The word “them” refers to Cornelius and his Gentile guests and household. Peter does not call them Gentiles in his account to the Jewish believers at Jerusalem. The word “they” refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter spoke. The word “us” includes all of the Jewish believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 11 17 e576 0 Connecting Statement: Peter finishes his speech (which he began in [Acts 11:4](../11/04.md)) to the Jews about his vision and about what had happened at the house of Cornelius. +ACT 11 17 pe42 figs-exclusive αὐτοῖς…ἡμῖν 1 General Information: The word **them** refers to Cornelius and his Gentile guests and household. Peter does not call them Gentiles in his account to the Jewish believers at Jerusalem. The word **us** includes all of the Jewish believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 11 17 u3nu figs-rquestion εἰ οὖν τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Θεὸς, ὡς καὶ ἡμῖν πιστεύσασιν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον Ἰησοῦν Χριστόν, ἐγὼ τίς ἤμην δυνατὸς κωλῦσαι τὸν Θεόν? 1 If, therefore, God gave to them the same gift as also to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, who was I, able to oppose God? Peter uses this question to emphasize that he was only obeying God. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Since God gave to them the same gift as he also gave to us when we believed on the Lord Jesus Christ, I decided that I could not oppose God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -ACT 11 17 y7ag τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν 1 the same gift Peter refers to the gift of the Holy Spirit. +ACT 11 17 y7ag τὴν ἴσην δωρεὰν 1 the same gift Peter refers to the **gift** of the Holy Spirit. +ACT 11 18 xlpt figs-exclusive ἀκούσαντες…ἡσύχασαν 1 The word **they** refers to the Jewish believers to whom Peter spoke. ACT 11 18 nr7g ἡσύχασαν 1 they became quiet Alternate translation: “they did not argue with Peter” ACT 11 18 z3fy figs-abstractnouns καὶ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν μετάνοιαν εἰς ζωὴν ἔδωκεν 1 God has given repentance unto life to the Gentiles also Here, **life** refers to eternal life. If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **life**, you could express the same ideas with the verbs “repent” and “live.” Alternate translation: “God has allowed the Gentiles also to repent and live eternally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 11 19 zck4 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells about what happened to the believers who fled after the stoning of Stephen. -ACT 11 19 bwb8 writing-newevent οὖν 1 Then This introduces the new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -ACT 11 19 m3i7 οἱ…διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ, διῆλθον 1 those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen spread The Jews began persecuting Jesus’ followers because Stephen had said and done things that the Jews did not like. Because of this persecution, many of Jesus’ followers left Jerusalem and went to many different places. +ACT 11 19 bwb8 writing-newevent οὖν 1 Then This introduces the new part of the story. He tells about what happened to the believers who fled after the stoning of Stephen.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +ACT 11 19 m3i7 οἱ…διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ, διῆλθον 1 those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen spread The Jews began persecuting Jesus’ followers because **Stephen** had said and done things that the Jews did not like. Because of this **persecution**, many of Jesus’ followers left Jerusalem and went to many different places. ACT 11 19 whm6 figs-activepassive οἱ…διασπαρέντες ἀπὸ τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ 1 those who had been scattered from the persecution that happened over Stephen If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the ones whom the Jews had been persecuting after they killed Stephen, who had left Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 11 19 vx4b τῆς θλίψεως τῆς γενομένης ἐπὶ Στεφάνῳ 1 the persecution that arose over Stephen the persecution that happened because of what Stephen had said and done ACT 11 19 w5jn διῆλθον 1 spread Alternate translation: “went in many different directions” ACT 11 19 c8ha μόνον Ἰουδαίοις 1 only to Jews The believers thought God’s message was for the Jewish people, and not for the Gentiles. ACT 11 20 mww9 figs-explicit ἐλάλουν καὶ πρὸς τοὺς Ἑλληνιστάς 1 and spoke also to Greeks These Greek-speaking people were Gentiles, not Jews. Alternate translation: “and also spoke to Gentiles who spoke Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 11 21 aj5g figs-metonymy ἦν χεὶρ Κυρίου μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 The hand of the Lord was with them God’s **hand** signifies his powerful help. Alternate translation: “God was powerfully enabling those believers to preach effectively” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 21 n9pq figs-metaphor ἐπέστρεψεν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 turned to the Lord Here, **turned to the Lord** is a metaphor for starting to obey the Lord. Alternate translation: “and they repented of their sins and began to obey the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 11 22 mrg9 0 General Information: In these verses, the word “he” refers to Barnabas. The word “they” refers to the believers of the church at Jerusalem. The words “them” and “their” refer to the new believers ([Acts 11:20](../11/20.md)). +ACT 11 23 mrg9 ὃς…ἰδὼν…ἐχάρη…παρεκάλει 1 General Information: All occurrences of the word **he** refer to Barnabas. The word **them** refers to the new believers ([Acts 11:20](../11/20.md)). ACT 11 22 i7vs figs-metonymy τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 the ears of the church Here, **ears** refers to the believers’ hearing about the event. Alternate translation: “the believers in the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 23 b7w7 ἰδὼν τὴν χάριν τὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 saw the grace that is of God Alternate translation: “saw how God acted kindly toward the believers” ACT 11 23 m1q9 παρεκάλει πάντας 1 exhorted them all Alternate translation: “kept on encouraging them” @@ -1449,63 +1441,62 @@ ACT 11 23 qlu4 προσμένειν τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 to remain with the Lord ACT 11 23 bz6w figs-metonymy τῇ προθέσει τῆς καρδίας 1 with purpose of heart Here the **heart** refers to a person’s will and desire. Alternate translation: “with all their will” or “with complete commitment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 11 24 he5z πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 full of the Holy Spirit The Holy Spirit controlled Barnabas as he obeyed the Holy Spirit. ACT 11 24 e57t figs-metonymy προσετέθη ὄχλος ἱκανὸς τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 a considerable crowd was added to the Lord Here, **added** means they came to believe the same thing as the others. Alternate translation: “many more people also believed in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 11 25 yhl6 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers to Barnabas and “him” refers to Saul. +ACT 11 25 yhl6 ἐξῆλθεν 1 General Information: Here the word **he** refers to Barnabas. ACT 11 25 dm92 ἐξῆλθεν…εἰς Ταρσὸν 1 he went out to Tarsus Alternate translation: “he went out to the city of Tarsus” ACT 11 26 hu2g καὶ εὑρὼν 1 and when he found him It probably took some time and effort for Barnabas to locate Saul. ACT 11 26 wf5l writing-newevent ἐγένετο 1 It happened that This begins a new event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 11 26 w4dz αὐτοῖς…συναχθῆναι ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 they were gathered together with the church Alternate translation: “Barnabas and Saul were gathered together with the church” ACT 11 26 x8gx figs-activepassive χρηματίσαι τε πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ τοὺς μαθητὰς, Χριστιανούς 1 And the disciples were called Christians first in Antioch This implies that other people called the believers by this name. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The people of Antioch were the first to call the disciples Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 11 26 r6sl πρώτως ἐν Ἀντιοχείᾳ 1 first in Antioch Alternate translation: “for the first time in Antioch” +ACT 11 27 h6zw δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story-line. ACT 11 27 pz7y writing-background 0 General Information: Here Luke tells background information about a prophecy in Antioch. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 11 27 h6zw δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story-line. -ACT 11 27 d8bb κατῆλθον ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων…εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν 1 came down from Jerusalem to Antioch Jerusalem was higher in elevation than Antioch, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem or going down from it. +ACT 11 27 d8bb κατῆλθον ἀπὸ Ἱεροσολύμων…εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν 1 came down from Jerusalem to Antioch Jerusalem was higher in elevation than Antioch, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem or going **down** from it. ACT 11 28 wyk8 ὀνόματι Ἅγαβος 1 named Agabus Alternate translation: “whose name was Agabus” ACT 11 28 q3tl ἐσήμανεν διὰ τοῦ Πνεύματος 1 and indicated by the Spirit that Alternate translation: “and the Holy Spirit enabled him to prophesy that” ACT 11 28 l3iz λιμὸν μεγάλην μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι 1 a great famine was about to occur Alternate translation: “a great shortage of food would happen” -ACT 11 28 pd2t figs-hyperbole ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 over the whole world This was a generalization referring to the part of the world that they were interested in. Alternate translation: “all over the inhabited world” or “throughout the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 11 28 jmc5 figs-explicit ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου 1 in the days of Claudius Luke’s audience would know that Claudius was the emperor of Rome at that time. Alternate translation: “when Claudius was the Roman emperor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 11 28 pd2t figs-hyperbole ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 over the whole world Here, **whole** was a generalization referring to the part of the world that they were interested in. Alternate translation: “all over the inhabited world” or “throughout the Roman Empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 11 28 jmc5 figs-explicit ἐπὶ Κλαυδίου 1 in the days of Claudius Luke’s audience would know that **Claudius** was the emperor of Rome at that time. Alternate translation: “when Claudius was the Roman emperor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 11 28 fjyk translate-names Κλαυδίου 1 **Claudius** is a man's name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 11 29 lhp8 0 General Information: The words “They” and “they” refer to the believers in the church in Antioch ([Acts 11:27](../11/27.md)). -ACT 11 29 de92 δὲ 1 So This word means marks an event that happened because of something else that happened first. In this case, they sent money because of Agabus’ prophesy or the famine. +ACT 11 29 de92 δὲ 1 So The word **So** marks an event that happened because of something else that happened first. In this case, they sent money because of Agabus’ prophesy or the famine. ACT 11 29 rk9z καθὼς εὐπορεῖτό τις 1 just as anyone prospered The richer people sent more; the poorer people sent less. ACT 11 29 up7a τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν ἐν τῇ Ἰουδαίᾳ ἀδελφοῖς 1 to the brothers living in Judea Alternate translation: “to the believers in Judea” +ACT 11 30 lhp8 καὶ ἐποίησαν 1 General Information: Here, **they** refers to the believers in the church in Antioch ([Acts 11:27](../11/27.md)). ACT 11 30 l8i8 figs-idiom διὰ χειρὸς Βαρναβᾶ καὶ Σαύλου 1 by the hand of Barnabas and Saul Here, **hand** is a synecdoche for the action of the whole person. Alternate translation: “by having Barnabas and Saul take to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 12 intro f66j 0 # Acts 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Chapter 12 tells what happened to King Herod while Barnabas was bringing Saul back from Tarsus and they were delivering money from Antioch Jerusalem (11:25-30). He killed many of the leaders of the church, and he put Peter in prison. After God helped Peter escape the prison, Herod killed the prison guards, and then God killed Herod. In the last verse of the chapter, Luke tells how Barnabas and Saul return to Antioch.

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Personification

The “word of God” is spoken of as if it were a living thing that could grow and become many. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wordofgod]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -ACT 12 1 u4w7 writing-background 0 General Information: This is background information about Herod’s killing James. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 12 1 ua9p 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the new persecution, first of James’ death and then of Peter’s imprisonment and then release. ACT 12 1 ti1y writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now This begins a new part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -ACT 12 1 f2gr κατ’ ἐκεῖνον…τὸν καιρὸν 1 about that time This refers to the time of the famine. +ACT 12 1 f2gr κατ’ ἐκεῖνον…τὸν καιρὸν 1 about that time Here, **that time** refers to the time of the famine. ACT 12 1 zy6y figs-idiom ἐπέβαλεν…τὰς χεῖρας 1 laid hands on This means Herod had the believers arrested. See how you translated this in [Acts 5:18](../05/18.md). Alternate translation: “sent soldiers to arrest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 12 1 u1gv figs-explicit τινας τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 some of those from the church Only James and Peter are specified, which implies that these were leaders of the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 1 s7lc κακῶσαί 1 to harm them Alternate translation: “in order to cause the believers to suffer” -ACT 12 2 aw4t ἀνεῖλεν δὲ Ἰάκωβον, τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰωάννου, μαχαίρῃ 1 And he killed James, the brother of John, with the sword This tells the manner in which James was killed. +ACT 12 2 u4w7 writing-background ἀνεῖλεν δὲ Ἰάκωβον, τὸν ἀδελφὸν Ἰωάννου, μαχαίρῃ 1 General Information: This is background information about Herod’s killing **James**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 12 2 r1zv figs-metonymy ἀνεῖλεν…Ἰάκωβον 1 he killed James This could mean: (1) Herod himself killed James or (2) Herod ordered someone to kill James. Alternate translation: “Herod gave the order and they killed James” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 12 3 pms7 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers to Herod ([Acts 12:1](../12/01.md)). +ACT 12 3 pms7 ἰδὼν…προσέθετο 1 General Information: Here the word **he** refers to Herod ([Acts 12:1](../12/01.md)). ACT 12 3 v4ag ἰδὼν δὲ ὅτι ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 And when he saw that this is pleasing to the Jews Alternate translation: “And when Herod realized that putting James to death pleased the Jewish leaders” ACT 12 3 cu7s ὅτι…ἐστιν 1 that this is Alternate translation: “that Herod did this” or “that this happened” ACT 12 3 wpm1 ἀρεστόν ἐστιν τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 this is pleasing to the Jews Alternate translation: “made the Jewish leaders happy” -ACT 12 3 ly66 ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. Alternate translation: “the festival when the Jewish people ate bread without yeast” -ACT 12 4 pps1 τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν 1 to four squads of soldiers Each squad had four soldiers that guarded Peter, one group at a time. The groups divided the 24-hour day into four shifts. Each time two soldiers would have been at his side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. Alternate translation: “to four groups of soldiers” +ACT 12 3 ly66 ἡμέραι τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread This phrase refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. Alternate translation: “the festival when the Jewish people ate bread without yeast” +ACT 12 4 pps1 τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρατιωτῶν 1 to four squads of soldiers Each squad had four **soldiers** that guarded Peter, one group at a time. The groups divided the 24-hour day into four shifts. Each time two soldiers would have been at his side and the other two soldiers by the entrance. Alternate translation: “to four groups of soldiers” ACT 12 4 i23a βουλόμενος…ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ 1 he was intending to bring him out to the people Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in the presence of the people” or “Herod planned to judge Peter before the Jewish people” -ACT 12 5 v2yz figs-explicit ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ 1 So Peter was kept in the prison This implies that the soldiers continually guarded Peter in prison. Alternate translation: “So Peter was guarded by soldiers in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 12 5 v2yz figs-explicit ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ 1 So Peter was kept in the prison This implies that the soldiers continually guarded Peter **in the prison**. Alternate translation: “So Peter was guarded by soldiers in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 5 xpcx figs-activepassive ὁ μὲν οὖν Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “So the soldiers guarded Peter in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 12 5 f8qc figs-activepassive προσευχὴ…ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 prayer was being made earnestly to God for him by the church If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the group of believers in Jerusalem earnestly prayed to God for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 12 5 g189 ἐκτενῶς 1 earnestly continuously and with dedication -ACT 12 6 km83 figs-explicit ἤμελλεν προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν ὁ Ἡρῴδης τῇ νυκτὶ ἐκείνῃ 1 Herod was going to bring him out for trial, that night That Herod planned to execute him can be clarified. Alternate translation: “the same night before Herod was going to bring Peter out from prison to put him on trial and then to execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 12 6 km83 figs-explicit ἤμελλεν προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν ὁ Ἡρῴδης τῇ νυκτὶ ἐκείνῃ 1 Herod was going to bring him out for trial, that night That Herod planned to execute him can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same night before Herod was going to bring Peter out from prison to put him on trial and then to execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 6 g2bh δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν 1 bound with two chains Each chain would have been attached to one of the two guards who stayed beside Peter. Alternate translation: “tied with two chains” or “fastened with two chains” ACT 12 6 aqv1 ἐτήρουν τὴν φυλακήν 1 were keeping watch over the prison Alternate translation: “were guarding the prison doors” -ACT 12 7 kk4i 0 General Information: The words “him” and “his” refer to Peter. -ACT 12 7 i7g3 ἰδοὺ 1 behold This word alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows. +ACT 12 7 kk4i ἐπέστη…αὐτὸν…αὐτοῦ 1 General Information: The words **him** and **his** refer to Peter. +ACT 12 7 i7g3 ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** alerts us to pay attention to the surprising information that follows. ACT 12 7 lu25 ἐπέστη 1 appeared by him Alternate translation: “appeared next to him” or “suddenly stood beside him” ACT 12 7 z2i1 ἐν τῷ οἰκήματι 1 in the prison cell Alternate translation: “in the prison room” ACT 12 7 dc5b πατάξας…τοῦ Πέτρου 1 he struck Peter Peter was evidently sleeping deeply enough that this was required to wake him. Alternate translation: “the angel tapped Peter” or “the angel poked Peter” -ACT 12 7 dqn9 ἐξέπεσαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἁλύσεις ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν 1 his chains fell away from his hands The angel caused the chains to fall from Peter without touching them. +ACT 12 7 dqn9 ἐξέπεσαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἁλύσεις ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν 1 his chains fell away from his hands The angel caused the **chains** to fall from Peter without touching them. ACT 12 8 hxt9 ἐποίησεν…οὕτως 1 he did thus Alternate translation: “Peter did what the angel told him to do” or “Peter obeyed” ACT 12 8 abch λέγει αὐτῷ 1 he said to him Alternate translation: “the angel said to Peter” -ACT 12 9 gx77 0 General Information: Here the word “He” refers to Peter. The words “they” and “They” refer to Peter and the angel. +ACT 12 9 gx77 ἠκολούθει…ᾔδει…ἐδόκει 1 General Information: Here the word **he** refers to Peter. ACT 12 9 abci ἠκολούθει 1 he followed him Alternate translation: “Peter followed the angel” ACT 12 9 sh8k οὐκ ᾔδει 1 he did not know Alternate translation: “he did not understand” -ACT 12 9 p9ty figs-activepassive ἀληθές ἐστιν τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου 1 what is done by the angel is real This could be changed to active form. Alternate translation: “the actions of the angel were real” or “what the angel did truly happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 12 9 p9ty figs-activepassive ἀληθές ἐστιν τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου 1 what is done by the angel is real If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the actions of the angel were real” or “what the angel did truly happened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 12 10 ursb διελθόντες…ἦλθαν…αὐτοῖς…προῆλθον 1 The words **they** and **them** refer to Peter and the angel. ACT 12 10 r7gy figs-explicit διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν 1 But when they had passed by the first guard and the second It is implied that the soldiers were not able to see Peter and the angel as they walked by. Alternate translation: “The first and second guards did not see them as they passed by, and then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 12 10 c18q διελθόντες 1 when they had passed by Alternate translation: “when they had walked by” ACT 12 10 e36s figs-ellipsis καὶ δευτέραν 1 and the second The word **guard** is understood from the previous phrase. Alternate translation: “and the second guard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) @@ -1517,53 +1508,52 @@ ACT 12 10 fl89 εὐθέως ἀπέστη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπ’ αὐτ ACT 12 11 wlb6 figs-idiom καὶ ὁ Πέτρος ἐν ἑαυτῷ γενόμενος 1 And when Peter had come to himself This is an idiom. Alternate translation: “And when Peter became fully awake and alert” or “And when Peter became aware that what had happened was real” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 12 11 ue4k figs-metonymy ἐξείλατό με ἐκ χειρὸς Ἡρῴδου 1 delivered me from the hand of Herod Here, **the hand of Herod** refers to “Herod’s power” or “Herod’s plans.” Alternate translation: “brought me from the harm Herod had planned for me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 12 11 hw63 ἐξείλατό με 1 delivered me Alternate translation: “rescued me” -ACT 12 11 p739 figs-synecdoche πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 from all the expectations of the Jewish people Here “the people of the Jews” probably referred mainly to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “from all that the Jewish leaders thought would happen to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 12 11 p739 figs-synecdoche πάσης τῆς προσδοκίας τοῦ λαοῦ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 from all the expectations of the Jewish people Here, **the Jewish people** probably referred mainly to the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “from all that the Jewish leaders thought would happen to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 12 12 tfh3 συνιδών 1 having realized this He became aware that God had rescued him. -ACT 12 12 ux4v figs-activepassive Ἰωάννου, τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου 1 of John, who was called Mark John was also called Mark. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “John, whom people also called Mark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 12 13 x5fg 0 General Information: Here the words “she” and “her” all refer to the servant girl Rhoda. Here the words “they” and “They” refer to the people who were inside praying ([Acts 12:12](../12/12.md)). +ACT 12 12 ux4v figs-activepassive Ἰωάννου, τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Μάρκου 1 of John, who was called Mark **John** was also called **Mark**. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “John, whom people also called Mark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 12 13 pfn7 κρούσαντος…αὐτοῦ 1 when he knocked Tapping on the door was a normal Jewish custom to let others know you wish to visit them. You may need to change this to fit your culture. Alternate translation: “when Peter knocked” ACT 12 13 c634 τὴν θύραν τοῦ πυλῶνος 1 at the door of the gate Alternate translation: “at the outer door” or “at the door of the entrance from the street to the courtyard” ACT 12 13 khq1 προσῆλθε…ὑπακοῦσαι 1 came to answer Alternate translation: “came to the gate to ask who was knocking” +ACT 12 14 x5fg ἐπιγνοῦσα…οὐκ ἤνοιξεν…ἀπήγγειλεν 1 General Information: Here the words **she** and **her** all refer to the servant girl Rhoda. ACT 12 14 y2ff ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς 1 from joy Alternate translation: “because she was so joyful” or “being overly excited” ACT 12 14 m3m7 οὐκ ἤνοιξεν τὸν πυλῶνα 1 she did not open the gate Alternate translation: “she did not open the door” or “she forgot to open the door” -ACT 12 14 ky3p εἰσδραμοῦσα 1 running inside You may prefer to say “went running into the room in the house” ACT 12 14 yq3r ἀπήγγειλεν 1 she reported Alternate translation: “she told them” or “she said” ACT 12 14 a19k ἑστάναι…πρὸ τοῦ πυλῶνος 1 stands at the gate Peter was still standing outside. Alternate translation: “is standing outside the door” +ACT 12 15 j2kx οἱ…οἱ 1 Here the word **they** refers to the people who were inside praying ([Acts 12:12](../12/12.md)). ACT 12 15 ybz7 μαίνῃ 1 You are insane The people not only did not believe her, but rebuked her by saying she was crazy. Alternate translation: “You are crazy” ACT 12 15 xnm2 ἡ…διϊσχυρίζετο οὕτως ἔχειν 1 she insisted that it was thus Alternate translation: “she insisted that what she said was true” ACT 12 15 en8b οἱ…ἔλεγον 2 they said Alternate translation: “they answered” -ACT 12 15 qa8m ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ 1 It is his angel Some Jews believed in guardian angels and may have thought that Peter’s angel had come to them. Alternate translation: “What you have seen is Peter’s angel” -ACT 12 16 wwg1 0 General Information: Here the words “they” and “them” refer to the people in the house. The words “He” and “he” refer to Peter. -ACT 12 16 bi6l ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἐπέμενεν κρούων 1 But Peter continued knocking The word “continued” means that Peter kept knocking the entire time those inside were talking. +ACT 12 15 qa8m ὁ ἄγγελός ἐστιν αὐτοῦ 1 It is his angel Some Jews believed in guardian angels and may have thought that Peter’s **angel** had come to them. Alternate translation: “What you have seen is Peter’s angel” +ACT 12 16 wwg1 εἶδαν 1 General Information: Here the word **they** refers to the people in the house. +ACT 12 16 bi6l ὁ δὲ Πέτρος ἐπέμενεν κρούων 1 But Peter continued knocking The word **continued** means that Peter kept knocking the entire time those inside were talking. ACT 12 17 jx1a ἀπαγγείλατε…ταῦτα 1 Report these things Alternate translation: “Tell these things” ACT 12 17 jf16 τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 the brothers Alternate translation: “the other believers” -ACT 12 18 blx5 0 General Information: The word “him” here refers to Peter. The word “he” refers to Herod. -ACT 12 18 ail9 δὲ 1 Now This word is used to mark a break in the story-line. Time has passed; it is now the next day. +ACT 12 19 blx5 αὐτὸν…εὑρὼν…διέτριβεν 1 General Information: The word **him** here refers to Peter. The word **he** refers to Herod. +ACT 12 18 ail9 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used to mark a break in the story-line. Time has passed; it is now the next day. ACT 12 18 iqv4 γενομένης…ἡμέρας 1 when it became day Alternate translation: “in the morning” ACT 12 18 zl7i figs-litotes ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what therefore had happened to Peter This phrase is used to emphasize what really happened. This could be said in a positive way. Alternate translation: “there was a great disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 12 18 ilz4 figs-abstractnouns ἦν τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what had happened to Peter If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **disturbance**, you could express the same ideas with the words “disturbed” or “upset.” Alternate translation: “the soldiers were very disturbed about what had happened to Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 12 19 pz6v Ἡρῴδης δὲ ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν 1 And Herod, having searched for him This could mean: (1) “And when Herod heard Peter was missing, he went himself to search the prison” or (2) “And when Herod heard Peter was missing, he sent other soldiers to search the prison.” -ACT 12 19 c69i ἀνακρίνας τοὺς φύλακας, ἐκέλευσεν ἀπαχθῆναι 1 questioned the guards and ordered them to be put to death It was the normal punishment for the Roman government to kill the guards if their prisoner escaped. +ACT 12 19 c69i ἀνακρίνας τοὺς φύλακας, ἐκέλευσεν ἀπαχθῆναι 1 questioned the guards and ordered them to be put to death It was the normal punishment for the Roman government to kill **the guards** if their prisoner escaped. ACT 12 19 br16 καὶ κατελθὼν 1 And having gone down The phrase **having gone down** is used here because Caesarea is lower in elevation than Judea. ACT 12 20 n2lw 0 Connecting Statement: Luke continues with another event in Herod’s life. -ACT 12 20 aip7 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark the next event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) +ACT 12 20 aip7 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark the next event in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) ACT 12 20 gxs4 figs-hyperbole ὁμοθυμαδὸν…παρῆσαν πρὸς αὐτόν 1 they went to him together Here the word **they** is a generalization. It is unlikely that all the people of Tyre and Sidon went to Herod. Alternate translation: “men representing the people of Tyre and Sidon went together to talk with Herod” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 12 20 t6mi πείσαντες Βλάστον 1 having persuaded Blastus Alternate translation: “these men persuaded Blastus” -ACT 12 20 qsg4 translate-names Βλάστον 1 Blastus Blastus was an assistant to or an officer of King Herod. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 12 20 qsg4 translate-names Βλάστον 1 Blastus **Blastus** was an assistant to or an officer of King Herod. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 12 20 l5r1 ᾐτοῦντο εἰρήνην 1 they asked for peace Alternate translation: “these men requested peace” -ACT 12 20 j253 figs-explicit τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς 1 their food for their country was from the king’s country They probably purchased this food. Alternate translation: “the people of Tyre and Sidon bought all their food from the people that Herod ruled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 12 20 dy51 figs-explicit τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν 1 their food It is implied that Herod restricted this supply of food because he was angry with the people of Tyre and Sidon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 12 21 e3w9 τακτῇ…ἡμέρᾳ 1 on a set day This was probably the day on which Herod agreed to meet with the representatives. Alternate translation: “on the day when Herod agreed to meet them” -ACT 12 21 kv7g ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν 1 in royal clothing expensive clothing that would demonstrate he was the king -ACT 12 21 g6ir καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 sitting on the throne This was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him. -ACT 12 22 ze1s 0 Connecting Statement: This is the end of the part of the story about Herod. +ACT 12 20 j253 figs-explicit τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώραν ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλικῆς 1 their food for their country was from the king’s country They probably purchased this **food**. Alternate translation: “the people of Tyre and Sidon bought all their food from the people that Herod ruled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 12 20 dy51 figs-explicit τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν 1 their food It is implied that Herod restricted this supply of **food** because he was angry with the people of Tyre and Sidon. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 12 21 e3w9 τακτῇ…ἡμέρᾳ 1 on a set day This was probably the **day** on which Herod agreed to meet with the representatives. Alternate translation: “on the day when Herod agreed to meet them” +ACT 12 21 kv7g ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν 1 in royal clothing This **royal clothing** was expensive clothing that would demonstrate he was the king. +ACT 12 21 g6ir καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 sitting on the throne The **throne** was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him. ACT 12 23 b4bc παραχρῆμα…ἄγγελος 1 immediately an angel Alternate translation: “right away an angel” or “while the people were still praising Herod, an angel” ACT 12 23 b5s9 ἐπάταξεν αὐτὸν 1 struck him Alternate translation: “afflicted Herod” or “caused Herod to become very ill” ACT 12 23 iw57 οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 he did not give the glory to God Herod let those people worship him instead of telling them to worship God. ACT 12 23 d419 figs-activepassive γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν 1 becoming worm-eaten, he died Here, **worm** refers to worms inside the body, probably intestinal worms. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “worms ate Herod’s insides and he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 12 24 j2un writing-endofstory 0 Verse 24 continues the history from verse 23. Verse 25 continues the history from 11:30. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 12 24 m1sw figs-metaphor ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο 1 the word of God increased and was multiplied The word of God is spoken of as if it was a living plant that was able to grow and reproduce. Alternate translation: “the message of God spread to more places and more people believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 12 24 m1sw figs-metaphor ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο 1 the word of God increased and was multiplied The **word of God** is spoken of as if it was a living plant that was able to grow and reproduce. Alternate translation: “the message of God spread to more places and more people believed in him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 12 24 wn8m ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Alternate translation: “the message God sent about Jesus” +ACT 12 25 j2un writing-endofstory 0 This verse continues the history from [11:30](../11/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 12 25 t7d8 Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 And Barnabas and Saul returned to Jerusalem Although some ancient copies read “Barnabas and Saul returned from Jerusalem,” the reading of “to Jerusalem” is probably correct. We know they went back to Antioch from Jerusalem, Therefore, this verse may indicate that they went somewhere else in Judea, and then returned to Jerusalem before they went back to Antioch. ACT 12 25 pv6a figs-explicit πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν 1 having completed their service This refers back to when they brought money from the believers at Antioch in [Acts 11:29-30](../11/29.md). Alternate translation: “when they had delivered the money to the church leaders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 intro rlh6 0 # Acts 13 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the three quotes from Psalms in 13:33-35.

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 13:41.

The chapter is where the second half of the Book of Acts begins. Luke writes more about Paul than about Peter, and it describes how it is the Gentiles and not the Jews to whom the believers tell the message about Jesus.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### A light for the Gentiles

The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. The Jews considered all Gentiles as walking in darkness, but Paul and Barnabas spoke of telling the Gentiles about Jesus as if they were going to bring them physical light. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]]) @@ -1585,90 +1575,85 @@ ACT 13 5 at85 Σαλαμῖνι 1 Salamis The city of Salamis was on Cyprus Isl ACT 13 5 ct8b figs-synecdoche κατήγγελλον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 they were proclaiming the word of God Here, **word of God** is a synecdoche for “message of God.” Alternate translation: “they proclaimed the message of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 13 5 p5t3 συναγωγαῖς τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 synagogues of the Jews This could mean: (1) “there were multiple Jewish synagogues in the city of Salamis where Barnabas and Saul preached” or (2) “Barnabas and Saul started at the synagogue at Salamis and continued to preach in all the synagogues they found while they traveled around the Island of Cyprus.” ACT 13 5 sxw6 εἶχον δὲ καὶ Ἰωάννην, ὑπηρέτην 1 And they also had John as an assistant Alternate translation: “And John Mark went with them and was helping them” -ACT 13 5 ukx2 ὑπηρέτην 1 as an assistant Alternate translation: “as a helper” -ACT 13 6 h9he 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Paul, Silas, and John Mark. The words “This man” refer to “Sergius Paulus.” The first word “he” refers to Sergius Paulus, the proconsul; the second word “he” refers to Elymas (also called Bar-Jesus), the magician. +ACT 13 6 h9he εὗρον 1 General Information: Here the word **they** refers to Paul, Silas, and John Mark. ACT 13 6 ja1i ὅλην τὴν νῆσον 1 the whole island They crossed from one side of the island to the other and shared the gospel message in each town they passed through. -ACT 13 6 cl2z Πάφου 1 Paphos a major city on Cyprus island where the proconsul lived +ACT 13 6 cl2z Πάφου 1 Paphos **Paphos** was a major city on Cyprus island where the proconsul lived. ACT 13 6 zf3b εὗρον 1 they found Here, **found** means they came upon him without looking for him. Alternate translation: “they met” or “they came upon” ACT 13 6 xe7h ἄνδρα, τινὰ μάγον 1 a certain man, a magician Alternate translation: “a particular person who practices witchcraft” or “a person who practices supernatural magic arts” ACT 13 6 ak38 translate-names ᾧ ὄνομα Βαριησοῦς 1 whose name was Bar Jesus **Bar Jesus** means “Son of Jesus.” There is no relation between this man and Jesus Christ. **Jesus** was a common name at that time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 13 7 bee2 ἦν σὺν 1 was with Alternate translation: “was often with” or “was often in the company of” -ACT 13 7 s1su ἀνθυπάτῳ 1 proconsul This was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “governor” +ACT 13 7 s1su ἀνθυπάτῳ 1 proconsul A **proconsul** was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “governor” ACT 13 7 h5xx writing-background ἀνδρὶ συνετῷ 1 an intelligent man This is background information about Sergius Paulus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 13 7 abck οὗτος, προσκαλεσάμενος 1 He summoned Alternate translation: “The proconsul summoned” ACT 13 8 lp2u translate-names Ἐλύμας ὁ μάγος 1 Elymas “the magician” This was Bar-Jesus, who was also called “the magician.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 13 8 qw4j οὕτως γὰρ μεθερμηνεύεται τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 for that is how his name is translated Alternate translation: “for that was what he was called in Greek” ACT 13 8 n23s ἀνθίστατο…αὐτοῖς…ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον 1 opposed them; he sought to turn the proconsul away Alternate translation: “resisted them by trying to turn the proconsul away” or “attempted to stop them by trying to turn the proconsul away” ACT 13 8 w2xt figs-metaphor ζητῶν διαστρέψαι τὸν ἀνθύπατον ἀπὸ τῆς πίστεως 1 he sought to turn the proconsul away from the faith Here, **to turn … away from** is a metaphor for convincing someone to not do something. Alternate translation: “he attempted to persuade the governor not to believe the gospel message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 13 9 gws2 0 General Information: The word “him” refers to the magician Elymas, who is also called Bar Jesus ([Acts 13:6-8](./06.md)). -ACT 13 9 nau1 0 Connecting Statement: While on the island of Paphos, Paul begins to talk to Elymas. +ACT 13 9 gws2 αὐτὸν 1 General Information: The word **him** refers to the magician Elymas, who is also called Bar Jesus ([Acts 13:6-8](./06.md)). ACT 13 9 ey6d figs-activepassive Σαῦλος…ὁ καὶ Παῦλος 1 Saul, who is also Paul **Saul** was his Jewish name, and **Paul** was his Roman name. Since he was speaking to a Roman official, he used his Roman name. Alternate translation: “Saul, who now called himself Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 9 xjy9 ἀτενίσας εἰς αὐτὸν 1 stared at him intensely Alternate translation: “looked at him intensely” ACT 13 10 r8x2 ὦ πλήρης παντὸς δόλου καὶ πάσης ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 O one full of all deceit and all wickedness Alternate translation: “O you are always intent in causing others to believe what is not true using falsehood and always doing what is wrong” -ACT 13 10 d2pk figs-metonymy υἱὲ διαβόλου 1 son of the devil Paul is saying the man is acting like the devil. Alternate translation: “you are like the devil” or “you act like the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 13 10 pyu7 ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 wickedness In this context it means to be lazy and not diligent in following God’s law. -ACT 13 10 hlq9 ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης 1 enemy of all righteousness Paul is grouping Elymas with the devil. Just as the devil is an enemy of God and is against righteousness, so also was Elymas. +ACT 13 10 d2pk figs-metonymy υἱὲ διαβόλου 1 son of the devil Paul is saying the man is acting like **the devil**. Alternate translation: “you are like the devil” or “you act like the devil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 10 pyu7 ῥᾳδιουργίας 1 wickedness In this context, **wickedness** means to be lazy and not diligent in following God’s law. +ACT 13 10 hlq9 ἐχθρὲ πάσης δικαιοσύνης 1 enemy of all righteousness Paul is grouping Elymas with the devil. Just as the devil is an **enemy** of God and is against **righteousness**, so also was Elymas. ACT 13 10 bc9p figs-rquestion οὐ παύσῃ διαστρέφων τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας? 1 will you not stop perverting the straight paths of the Lord? Paul uses this question to rebuke Elymas for opposing God. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “you are always saying that the truth about the Lord God is false!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 13 10 p8sa figs-idiom τὰς ὁδοὺς τοῦ Κυρίου τὰς εὐθείας 1 the straight paths of the Lord Here, **straight paths** refer to the ways that are true. Alternate translation: “the true ways of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 13 11 k51g 0 General Information: The words “you” and “him” refer to Elymas the magician. The word “he” refers to the Sergius Paulus, proconsul (governor of Paphos). -ACT 13 11 pey7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul finishes speaking to Elymas. -ACT 13 11 xul9 figs-metonymy χεὶρ Κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ 1 the hand of the Lord upon you Here, **hand** represents the power of God and “upon you” implies punishment. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 11 xul9 figs-metonymy χεὶρ Κυρίου ἐπὶ σέ 1 the hand of the Lord upon you Here, **hand** represents the power of God and **upon you** implies punishment. Alternate translation: “the Lord will punish you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 11 rse8 figs-activepassive ἔσῃ τυφλὸς 1 you will be blind If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will make you blind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 11 w3gh μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον 1 not seeing the sun Elymas will be so completely blind that he not even be able to see the sun. Alternate translation: “you will not even see the sun” +ACT 13 11 w3gh μὴ βλέπων τὸν ἥλιον 1 not seeing the sun Elymas will be so completely blind that he not even be able to see **the sun**. Alternate translation: “you will not even see the sun” ACT 13 11 b5b8 ἄχρι καιροῦ 1 for a time Alternate translation: “for a period of time” or “until the time appointed by God” ACT 13 11 t7j1 ἔπεσεν ἐπ’ αὐτὸν ἀχλὺς καὶ σκότος 1 a mist and darkness fell on Elymas Alternate translation: “the eyes of Elymas became blurry and then dark” or “Elymas started seeing unclearly and then he could not see anything” ACT 13 11 a7es περιάγων 1 he is going around Alternate translation: “Elymas wandered around” or “Elymas started feeling around and” -ACT 13 12 x9fl ἀνθύπατος 1 proconsul This was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “governor” +ACT 13 12 x9fl ἀνθύπατος 1 proconsul A **proconsul** was a governor in charge of a Roman province. Alternate translation: “governor” ACT 13 12 pyh7 ἐπίστευσεν 1 believed Alternate translation: “believed in Jesus” ACT 13 12 twa8 figs-activepassive ἐκπλησσόμενος ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 being astonished at the teaching of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the teaching about the Lord amazing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 13 i65t writing-background 0 General Information: Verses 13 and 14 give background information about this part of the story. “Paul and his friends” were Barnabas and John Mark (also called John). From this point on, Saul is called Paul in Acts. Paul’s name is listed first which indicates that he had become the leader of the group. It is important to keep this order in the translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 13 13 rk3k 0 Connecting Statement: This is a new part of the story about Paul in Antioch in Pisidia. -ACT 13 13 r9hi δὲ 1 Now This marks the beginning of a new part of the story. +ACT 13 13 r9hi δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** marks the beginning of a new part of the story about Paul in Antioch in Pisidia. +ACT 13 13 i65t writing-background οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον 1 General Information: Verses 13 and 14 give background information about this part of the story. Here, **those around Paul** refers to Barnabas and John Mark (also called John). From this point on, Saul is called Paul in Acts. Paul’s name is listed first which indicates that he had become the leader of the group. It is important to keep this order in the translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 13 13 abcl οἱ περὶ, Παῦλον 1 those around Paul This refers to Paul and his companions. ACT 13 13 k4s9 ἀναχθέντες…ἀπὸ τῆς Πάφου 1 having set sail from Paphos Alternate translation: “having traveled by sailboat from Paphos” ACT 13 13 h1cb ἦλθον εἰς Πέργην τῆς Παμφυλίας 1 came to Perga in Pamphylia Alternate translation: “arrived in Perga which is in Pamphylia” ACT 13 13 g6l5 Ἰωάννης δὲ ἀποχωρήσας ἀπ’ αὐτῶν 1 But John, withdrawing from them Alternate translation: “But John Mark, leaving Paul and Barnabas” ACT 13 14 vrp1 Ἀντιόχειαν τὴν Πισιδίαν 1 Antioch of Pisidia Alternate translation: “the city of Antioch in the district of Pisidia” -ACT 13 15 dnb4 figs-synecdoche μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 And after the reading of the law and of the prophets The **law** and **prophets** refer to parts of the Jewish scriptures which were read. Alternate translation: “And after someone read from the books of the law and the writings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 13 15 dnb4 figs-synecdoche μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἀνάγνωσιν τοῦ νόμου καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 And after the reading of the law and of the prophets The phrase **the law and the prophets** refers to parts of the Jewish scriptures which were read. Alternate translation: “And after someone read from the books of the law and the writings of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 13 15 z7bh ἀπέστειλαν…πρὸς αὐτοὺς λέγοντες 1 sent to them, saying Alternate translation: “told someone to say to them” or “asked someone to tell them” ACT 13 15 td4h ἀδελφοί 1 brothers The term **brothers** is here used by the people in the synagogue to refer to Paul and Barnabas as fellow Jews. ACT 13 15 jru8 εἴ τίς ἐστιν ἐν ὑμῖν λόγος παρακλήσεως πρὸς τὸν λαόν 1 if there is among you any word of exhortation for the people Alternate translation: “if you want to say anything to encourage our people” ACT 13 15 kj1h λέγετε 1 speak it Alternate translation: “please speak it” or “please tell it to us” -ACT 13 16 tbc4 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The first word “he” refers to Paul. The second word “he” refers to God. Here the word “our” refers to Paul and his fellow Jews. The words “they” and “them” refer to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 13 16 p93q 0 Connecting Statement: Paul begins his speech to those in the synagogue in Pisidian Antioch. He begins by talking about things that happened in Israel’s history. -ACT 13 16 i8pz translate-symaction κατασείσας τῇ χειρὶ 1 motioned with his hand This could refer to moving his hands as a signal that he was ready to speak. Alternate translation: “moving his hands to show that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 13 16 i8pz translate-symaction κατασείσας τῇ χειρὶ 1 motioned with his hand This phrase could refer to moving his hands as a signal that he was ready to speak. Alternate translation: “moving his hands to show that he was about to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 13 16 rh93 οἱ φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 ones who fear God This refers to Gentiles who had converted to Judaism. “you who are not Israelites but who worship God” ACT 13 16 ah55 τὸν Θεόν, ἀκούσατε 1 God, listen Alternate translation: “God, listen to me” or “God, listen to what I am about to say” ACT 13 17 se2b ὁ Θεὸς τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου Ἰσραὴλ 1 The God of this people Israel Alternate translation: “The God whom the people of Israel worship” +ACT 13 17 tbc4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 General Information: Here the word **our** refers to Paul and his fellow Jews. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 13 17 l9cn τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Alternate translation: “our ancestors” ACT 13 17 aaj5 τὸν λαὸν ὕψωσεν 1 exalted the people Alternate translation: “caused our people to become very numerous” ACT 13 17 vw4z figs-metonymy μετὰ βραχίονος ὑψηλοῦ 1 with an uplifted arm This refers to God’s mighty power. Alternate translation: “with great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 17 b74t ἐξ αὐτῆς 1 from it Alternate translation: “out from the land of Egypt” ACT 13 18 zv9e ἐτροποφόρησεν αὐτοὺς 1 he put up with them This means “he tolerated them.” Some versions have a different word that means “he took care of them.” Alternate translation: “God endured their disobedience” or “God took care of them” -ACT 13 19 nvp7 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers to God. The words “their land” refer to the land the seven nations had previously occupied. The word “them” refers to the people of Israel. The word “our” refers to Paul and his audience. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 13 19 nvp7 figs-exclusive καθελὼν… κατεκληρονόμησεν…τὴν γῆν αὐτῶν 1 General Information: Here the word **he** refers to God. The word **them** refers to the people of Israel. The words **their land** refer to the land the seven nations had previously occupied. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 13 19 h5qg ἔθνη 1 nations Here the word **nations** refers to different people groups and not to geographical boundaries. ACT 13 20 abcm ἔδωκεν 1 he gave them Alternate translation: “God gave them” ACT 13 20 qmc8 ἕως Σαμουὴλ προφήτου 1 until Samuel the prophet Alternate translation: “until the time of the prophet Samuel” -ACT 13 21 akg6 0 General Information: The quotation here is from the history of Samuel and from a Psalm of Ethan in the Old Testament. ACT 13 21 yxi8 ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα 1 for 40 years Alternate translation: “to be their king for 40 years” ACT 13 22 z4x3 μεταστήσας αὐτὸν 1 having removed him This expression means God caused Saul to stop being king. Alternate translation: “rejected Saul from being king” ACT 13 22 bsp6 ἤγειρεν τὸν Δαυεὶδ αὐτοῖς εἰς βασιλέα 1 he raised up David for them as their king Alternate translation: “God chose David to be their king” ACT 13 22 iyd6 βασιλέα 1 their king Alternate translation: “the king of Israel” or “the king over the Israelites” ACT 13 22 sw2r ᾧ καὶ εἶπεν μαρτυρήσας 1 to whom having testified, he also said Alternate translation: “about whom God testified by saying” +ACT 13 22 akg6 εὗρον Δαυεὶδ τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου, ὃς ποιήσει πάντα τὰ θελήματά μου 1 General Information: The quotation here is from the history of Samuel and from a Psalm of Ethan in the Old Testament. ACT 13 22 dbu5 εὗρον 1 I have found Alternate translation: “I have observed that” ACT 13 22 mp53 figs-idiom ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου 1 a man according to my heart This expression means he “a man who wants what I want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 13 23 lby6 0 General Information: The quotation here is from the Gospels. -ACT 13 23 xj5a τούτου…ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος 1 From the descendants of this one This is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the savior had to be one of David’s descendants ([Acts 13:22](../13/22.md)). Alternate translation: “From David’s descendants” -ACT 13 23 kc76 figs-metonymy ἤγαγεν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 brought to Israel This refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “gave to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 13 23 xj5a τούτου…ἀπὸ τοῦ σπέρματος 1 From the descendants of this one This phrase is placed at the beginning of the sentence to emphasize that the Savior had to be one of David’s descendants ([Acts 13:22](../13/22.md)). Alternate translation: “From David’s descendants” +ACT 13 23 kc76 figs-metonymy ἤγαγεν τῷ Ἰσραὴλ 1 brought to Israel Here, **Israel** refers to the people of Israel. Alternate translation: “gave to the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 23 mk5g κατ’ ἐπαγγελίαν 1 according to promise Alternate translation: “just as God promised he would do” ACT 13 24 abcn πρὸ προσώπου τῆς εἰσόδου αὐτοῦ 1 before the face of his coming Alternate translation: “before the coming of Jesus” ACT 13 24 x892 figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “a baptism to repent” or “a baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent for their sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +ACT 13 25 lby6 τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ, ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ, ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι 1 General Information: The quotation here is from the Gospels. ACT 13 25 vww3 figs-rquestion τί ἐμὲ ὑπονοεῖτε εἶναι? 1 Who do you think I am? John asked this question to compel the people to think about who he was. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Think about who I am.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 13 25 rp32 figs-explicit οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ 1 I am not him John was referring to the Messiah, whom they were expecting to come. Alternate translation: “I am not the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 25 nnl5 ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ 1 But behold This emphasizes the importance of what he will say next. +ACT 13 25 nnl5 ἀλλ’ ἰδοὺ 1 But behold This phrase emphasizes the importance of what he will say next. ACT 13 25 r1pl figs-explicit ἔρχεται μετ’ ἐμὲ 1 one is coming after me This also refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “the Messiah will soon come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 25 gys2 οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι 1 of whom the sandals of his feet I am not worthy to untie The Messiah is so much greater than John that he did not even feel worthy do the lowest job for him. Alternate translation: “and I am not worthy even to untie his shoes” -ACT 13 26 jdp6 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The word “they” and “their” refers to the Jews who lived in Jerusalem. Here the word “us” includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 13 25 gys2 οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι 1 of whom the sandals of his feet I am not worthy to untie The Messiah is so much greater than John that he did not even feel **worthy** do the lowest job for him. Alternate translation: “and I am not worthy even to untie his shoes” +ACT 13 26 jdp6 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 General Information: Here the word **us** includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 13 26 kci9 ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 brothers, sons of the family of Abraham, and those among you who fear God Paul addresses his audience of Jews and Gentile converts to Judaism to remind them of their special status as worshiping the true God. ACT 13 26 u6zn figs-activepassive ὁ λόγος τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης ἐξαπεστάλη 1 the word about this salvation has been sent If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God has sent the message about this salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 26 v6r3 figs-abstractnouns τῆς σωτηρίας ταύτης 1 about this salvation If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **salvation**, you could express the same idea with the verb “save.” Alternate translation: “that God will save people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) @@ -1676,30 +1661,29 @@ ACT 13 27 psk5 τοῦτον ἀγνοήσαντες 1 did not recognize this o ACT 13 27 ri1f figs-metonymy τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν 1 the voices of the prophets Here the word **voices** represents the message of the prophets. Alternate translation: “the writings of the prophets” or “the message of the prophets” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 27 m4tz figs-activepassive τὰς…ἀναγινωσκομένας 2 that are read If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which someone reads” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 27 rle6 τὰς φωνὰς τῶν προφητῶν…ἐπλήρωσαν 1 they fulfilled the voices of the prophets Alternate translation: “they actually did just what the prophets said that they would do” -ACT 13 28 v3hw 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem. The word “him” here refers to Jesus. +ACT 13 28 v3hw 0 General Information: Here the word **they** refers to the Jewish people and their religious leaders in Jerusalem. The word **him** here refers to Jesus. ACT 13 28 y9j6 μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου εὑρόντες 1 they found no reason for death Alternate translation: “they did not find any reason why anyone should kill Jesus” ACT 13 28 d4xm ᾐτήσαντο Πειλᾶτον 1 they asked Pilate The word **asked** here is a strong word meaning to demand, beg or plead for. ACT 13 29 sq1j ὡς δὲ ἐτέλεσαν πάντα τὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ γεγραμμένα 1 And when they had completed all that had been written about him Alternate translation: “And when they did to Jesus all the things that the prophets said would happen to him” ACT 13 29 m5f1 figs-explicit καθελόντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου 1 taking him down from the tree It may be helpful to explicitly say Jesus died before this happened. Alternate translation: “they killed Jesus and then took him down from the cross after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 29 vwt4 figs-explicit ἀπὸ τοῦ ξύλου 1 from the tree This was another way people at that time referred to the cross. Alternate translation: “from the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 13 29 vwt4 figs-explicit τοῦ ξύλου 1 from the tree This was another way people at that time referred to the cross. Alternate translation: “the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 30 h5jw ὁ δὲ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν 1 But God raised him **But** indicates a strong contrast between what the people did and what God did. ACT 13 30 mqx8 ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 raised him from the dead To be with **the dead** means that Jesus was dead. Alternate translation: “raised him from among those who were dead” ACT 13 30 zsx4 figs-idiom ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν 1 raised him Here, **raised** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “caused him to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -ACT 13 30 d14p ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To raise someone from among them speaks of making that person alive again. +ACT 13 30 d14p ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead This phrase means “from among all those who have died.” This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. To raise someone from among them speaks of making that person alive again. ACT 13 31 ig7w figs-activepassive ὃς ὤφθη ἐπὶ ἡμέρας πλείους τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 He was seen for many days by those who had come up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The disciples who traveled with Jesus from Galilee to Jerusalem saw him for many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 31 g4vl ἡμέρας πλείους 1 many days We know from other writings that this period was 40 days. Translate **many days** with a term that would be appropriate for that length of time. ACT 13 31 vqj4 νῦν εἰσιν μάρτυρες αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὸν λαόν 1 are now his witnesses to the people Alternate translation: “are now testifying to the people about Jesus” or “are now telling the people about Jesus” -ACT 13 32 ipb9 0 General Information: The second quotation here is from the prophet Isaiah. -ACT 13 32 y273 καὶ 1 And This word marks an event that happened because of previous event. In this case, the previous event is God’s raising Jesus from the dead. ACT 13 32 hr2g τοὺς πατέρας 1 our fathers Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. These were the physical ancestors of the Jews, and the spiritual ancestors of the converts. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” ACT 13 33 b1uh translate-versebridge ταύτην ὁ Θεὸς ἐκπεπλήρωκεν τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 God has fulfilled this for our children You may need to rearrange the parts of this sentence, which begins in verse 32. “God has fulfilled for us, their children, these promises that he made to our ancestors, by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]]) ACT 13 33 dy6w τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 for our children Paul is still speaking to the Jews and Gentile converts in the synagogue at Antioch of Pisidia. Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” but the best copies read, “for our children.” ACT 13 33 d95n figs-idiom ἀναστήσας Ἰησοῦν 1 by raising up Jesus Here, **raising up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “by making Jesus alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 33 y3tz ὡς καὶ ἐν τῷ ψαλμῷ γέγραπται τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 As it is also written in the second Psalm Alternate translation: “This is what was also written in the second Psalm” ACT 13 33 h9ir τῷ ψαλμῷ…τῷ δευτέρῳ 1 the second Psalm Alternate translation: “Psalm 2” -ACT 13 33 tla1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱός…γεγέννηκά σε 1 Son … I have fathered you These are important titles that describe the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +ACT 13 33 tla1 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱός…γεγέννηκά σε 1 Son … I have fathered you **Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) +ACT 13 34 ipb9 δώσω ὑμῖν τὰ ὅσια Δαυεὶδ τὰ πιστά 1 General Information: This quotation here is from the prophet Isaiah. ACT 13 34 iy5q ὅτι δὲ ἀνέστησεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν, μηκέτι μέλλοντα ὑποστρέφειν εἰς διαφθοράν, οὕτως εἴρηκεν 1 And that he raised him up from the dead, never to be about to return to decay, he has spoken in this way Alternate translation: “God spoke these words about his making Jesus alive again so that he would never die again” -ACT 13 34 h3nj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again. +ACT 13 34 h3nj ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again. ACT 13 34 q3kq τὰ ὅσια…τὰ πιστά 1 the holy and sure blessings Alternate translation: “the holy and certain blessings” ACT 13 35 r1ev figs-explicit διότι καὶ ἐν ἑτέρῳ λέγει 1 On account of this he also says in another place Paul’s audience would have understood that this Psalm refers to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “In another Psalm of David, he also says about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 35 gl8s καὶ…λέγει 1 he also says David is the author of Psalm 16 from which this quotation is taken. Alternate translation: “David also says” @@ -1713,20 +1697,19 @@ ACT 13 36 la5s figs-metonymy εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 saw decay The phra ACT 13 37 bmw3 ὃν δὲ 1 But he whom Alternate translation: “But Jesus whom” ACT 13 37 n9pl figs-idiom ὁ Θεὸς ἤγειρεν 1 God raised up Here, **raised up** is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “God caused to live again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 13 37 j52x figs-metonymy οὐκ εἶδεν διαφθοράν 1 did not see decay The phrase **did not see decay** is a way to say “his body did not decay.” Alternate translation: “did not rot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 13 38 ki8q 0 General Information: Here the word “him” refers to Jesus. ACT 13 38 yg35 γνωστὸν…ἔστω ὑμῖν 1 let it be known to you Alternate translation: “know this” or “this is important for you to know” -ACT 13 38 qy18 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Paul uses this term because they are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. Alternate translation: “my fellow Israelites and other friends” +ACT 13 38 qy18 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Paul uses the term **brothers** because they are his fellow-Jews and followers of Judaism. They are not Christian believers at this point. Alternate translation: “my fellow Israelites and other friends” ACT 13 38 t3i5 figs-activepassive ὅτι διὰ τούτου, ὑμῖν ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν καταγγέλλεται, καὶ 1 that because of this, forgiveness of sins is being proclaimed to you, and freedom If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that we proclaim to you that your sins can be forgiven through Jesus, and you can be free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 38 w7y1 figs-abstractnouns ἄφεσις ἁμαρτιῶν 1 forgiveness of sins If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with the verb “to forgive.” Alternate translation: “that God can forgive your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 13 39 g5h9 figs-activepassive ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων δικαιοῦται 1 In this one every one who believes is justified If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Jesus justifies everyone who believes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 13 39 ki8q τούτῳ 1 General Information: Here the term **this one** refers to Jesus. ACT 13 39 j6rr ἐν τούτῳ πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων 1 In this one every one who believes Alternate translation: “By him every person who believes” or “Every one who believes in him” -ACT 13 40 kk1j 0 General Information: In his message to the people in the synagogue, Paul quotes the prophet Habakkuk. Here the word “I” refers to God. -ACT 13 40 zx6p 0 Connecting Statement: Paul finishes his speech in the synagogue in Pisidian Antioch, which he began in [Acts 13:16](../13/16.md). -ACT 13 40 y2kg figs-explicit βλέπετε 1 be careful that It is implied that the thing they should be careful about is Paul’s message. Alternate translation: “give close attention to the things I have said so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 13 40 y2kg figs-explicit βλέπετε 1 be careful that It is implied that the thing they should **be careful** about is Paul’s message. Alternate translation: “give close attention to the things I have said so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 40 tt1x τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν τοῖς προφήταις 1 the thing spoken about in the prophets Alternate translation: “what the prophets spoke about” ACT 13 41 tqk5 ἴδετε, οἱ καταφρονηταί 1 Look, you despisers Alternate translation: “Look, you who feel contempt” or “Look, you who ridicule” ACT 13 41 ky3s θαυμάσατε 1 be astonished Alternate translation: “be amazed” or “be shocked” ACT 13 41 ilh2 καὶ ἀφανίσθητε 1 and perish Alternate translation: “and die” +ACT 13 41 kk1j ἔργον ἐργάζομαι ἐγὼ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν, ἔργον ὃ οὐ μὴ πιστεύσητε, ἐάν τις ἐκδιηγῆται ὑμῖν 1 General Information: In his message to the people in the synagogue, Paul quotes the prophet Habakkuk. Here the word **I** refers to God. ACT 13 41 dvn1 ἔργον ἐργάζομαι 1 am doing a work Alternate translation: “am doing something” ACT 13 41 nm2q ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ὑμῶν 1 in your days Alternate translation: “during your lifetime” ACT 13 41 w6tq ἔργον ὃ 1 A work that Alternate translation: “I am doing something which” @@ -1735,39 +1718,40 @@ ACT 13 42 ax8v ἐξιόντων δὲ, αὐτῶν 1 And as they were leaving ACT 13 42 f3sw παρεκάλουν 1 they begged them Alternate translation: “the people begged them” ACT 13 42 y4p9 figs-metonymy τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα 1 these same words Here, **words** refers to the message that Paul had spoken. Alternate translation: “this same message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 43 a58z λυθείσης δὲ τῆς συναγωγῆς 1 And when the synagogue meeting had ended This could mean: (1) this restates “As Paul and Barnabas left” in verse 42 or (2) Paul and Barnabas left the meeting before it ended and this occurs later. -ACT 13 43 sws7 προσηλύτων 1 proselytes These were non-Jewish people who converted to Judaism. +ACT 13 43 sws7 προσηλύτων 1 proselytes These **proselytes** were non-Jewish people who had converted to Judaism. ACT 13 43 q2aj οἵτινες προσλαλοῦντες αὐτοῖς, ἔπειθον αὐτοὺς 1 who speaking to them, urged them Alternate translation: “and Paul and Barnabas spoke to those people and urged them” ACT 13 43 fv15 figs-explicit προσμένειν τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to continue in the grace of God It is implied that they believed Paul’s message that Jesus was the Messiah. Alternate translation: “to continue to trust that God kindly forgives people’s sins because of what Jesus did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 13 44 m129 0 General Information: Here the word “him” refers to Paul. ACT 13 44 vq3y figs-metonymy σχεδὸν πᾶσα ἡ πόλις συνήχθη 1 almost the whole city was gathered together The **city** represents the people in the city. This phrase is used to show the great response to the Lord’s word. Alternate translation: “almost all the people of the city were gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 44 yga7 figs-explicit ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 to hear the word of the Lord It is implied that Paul and Barnabas were the ones who spoke the word of the Lord. Alternate translation: “to hear Paul and Barnabas speak about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 45 j4zq figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Here, **Jews** represents Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 13 45 qrh2 figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθησαν ζήλου 1 they were filled with jealousy Here, **jealousy** is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. Alternate translation: “they became very jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 45 nc5l ἀντέλεγον 1 spoke against Alternate translation: “contradicted” or “opposed” ACT 13 45 m1an figs-activepassive τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λαλουμένοις 1 the things that were said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 46 zvt5 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The first two instances of the word “you” are plural and refer to the Jews to whom Paul is speaking. Here the words “we” and “us” refers to Paul and Barnabas but not the crowd that was present. Paul’s quotation is from the prophet Isaiah in the Old Testament. In the original passage, the word “I” refers to God and the word “you” is singular and refers to the Messiah. Here, Paul and Barnabas seem to be saying that the quotation also refers to their ministry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 13 46 zvt5 figs-exclusive ὑμῖν…ἀπωθεῖσθε…στρεφόμεθα 1 General Information: The first two instances of the word **you** are plural and refer to the Jews to whom Paul is speaking. Here the word **we** refers to Paul and Barnabas but not the crowd that was present. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 13 46 as6q figs-explicit ἦν ἀναγκαῖον 1 It was necessary for This implies that God had commanded this be done. Alternate translation: “God commanded that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 13 46 jn55 figs-synecdoche ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 necessary for the word of God first to be spoken to you Here, **word of God** is a synecdoche for “message from God.” Alternate translation: “the message of God had to be spoken to you first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 13 46 d08v figs-activepassive ὑμῖν…ἀναγκαῖον πρῶτον λαληθῆναι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “necessary that we speak the message from God to you first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 46 lly5 figs-metaphor ἐπειδὴ ἀπωθεῖσθε αὐτὸν 1 Since you reject it Their rejection of the word of God is spoken of as if it were something they pushed away. Alternate translation: “Since you reject the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 46 ms36 οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτοὺς τῆς αἰωνίου ζωῆς 1 judge yourselves unworthy of eternal life Alternate translation: “seem to think you are not worthy of eternal life” or “act as though you are not worthy of eternal life” -ACT 13 46 rf9k figs-explicit στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη 1 we will turn to the Gentiles Paul and Barnadas were implying that they would preach to the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 13 46 rf9k figs-explicit στρεφόμεθα εἰς τὰ ἔθνη 1 we will turn to the Gentiles Paul and Barnabas were implying that they would preach to **the Gentiles**. Alternate translation: “we will leave you and start preaching to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 13 47 tx94 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here the word **us** refers to Paul and Barnabas but not the crowd that was present. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 13 47 xbiw figs-you τέθεικά σε εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν, τοῦ εἶναί σε εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 Paul’s quotation is from the prophet Isaiah in the Old Testament. In the original passage, the word **I** refers to God and the word **you** is singular and refers to the Messiah. Here, Paul and Barnabas seem to be saying that the quotation also refers to their ministry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 13 47 v8au figs-metaphor εἰς φῶς 1 as a light Here the truth about Jesus that Paul was preaching is spoken of as if it were **a light** that allowed people to see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 13 47 t5sp figs-abstractnouns εἶναί…εἰς σωτηρίαν ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς 1 should be for salvation as far as the end of the earth If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **salvation**, you could express the same idea with the verb “to save.” The phrase **end** refers to everywhere. Alternate translation: “should tell people everywhere in the world that I want to save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 13 48 e9ag figs-metonymy ἐδόξαζον τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 glorified the word of the Lord Here, **word** refers to the message about Jesus that they had believed. Alternate translation: “praised God for the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 48 jct2 figs-activepassive ὅσοι ἦσαν τεταγμένοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον 1 as many as were appointed to eternal life If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as many as God appointed to eternal life” or “all the people whom God had chosen to receive eternal life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 13 49 qh9z figs-metonymy διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου δι’ ὅλης τῆς χώρας 1 the word of the Lord was being spread throughout the whole region Here, **word** refers to the message about Jesus. Alternate translation: “and the message of Jesus was being spread through the whole region by those who believed spread the word of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 13 49 fpkr figs-activepassive διεφέρετο…ὁ λόγος τοῦ Κυρίου δι’ ὅλης τῆς χώρας 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those who believed went everywhere in the region and told others about the message of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 13 50 eqi5 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Barnabas. -ACT 13 50 t4bv 0 Connecting Statement: This ends Paul and Barnabas’ time in Antioch of Pisidia and they go to Iconium. +ACT 13 50 eqi5 αὐτοὺς 1 General Information: Here the word **them** refers to Paul and Barnabas. ACT 13 50 u8rm figs-synecdoche οἱ…Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews This probably refers to the leaders of the Jews. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 13 50 cf21 παρώτρυναν 1 stirred up Alternate translation: “convinced” or “urged on” ACT 13 50 wmm5 τοὺς πρώτους 1 the leading men Alternate translation: “the most important men” ACT 13 50 n7qe ἐπήγειραν διωγμὸν ἐπὶ τὸν Παῦλον καὶ Βαρναβᾶν 1 a persecution arose against Paul and Barnabas Alternate translation: “They convinced the important men and women to persecute Paul and Barnabas” ACT 13 50 cq9h ἐξέβαλον αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν 1 threw them out from their boundaries Alternate translation: “they removed Paul and Barnabas from their city” +ACT 13 51 t4bv ἦλθον εἰς Ἰκόνιον 1 Connecting Statement: This ends Paul and Barnabas’ time in Antioch of Pisidia and they go to **Iconium**. ACT 13 51 abco οἱ δὲ, ἐκτιναξάμενοι 1 But when they had shaken off Alternate translation: “But after Paul and Silas shook off” ACT 13 51 xi1z writing-symlanguage οἱ…ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονιορτὸν τῶν ποδῶν ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς 1 when they had shaken off the dust from their feet against them This was a symbolic act to indicate to the unbelieving people that God had rejected them and would punish them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) -ACT 13 52 dp5k οἵ…μαθηταὶ 1 the disciples This probably refers to the new believers in the Antioch of Pisidia that Paul and Silas just left. +ACT 13 52 dp5k οἵ…μαθηταὶ 1 the disciples Here, **the disciples** probably refers to the new believers in the Antioch of Pisidia that Paul and Silas just left. ACT 14 intro rsg2 0 # Acts 14 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “The message of his grace”

The message of Jesus is the message that God will show grace to those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])

### Zeus and Hermes

The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods who do not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.”

Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul is saying the same thing using different words. ACT 14 1 vh8u 0 General Information: The story of Paul and Barnabas in Iconium continues. ACT 14 1 hk1z ἐγένετο δὲ, ἐν Ἰκονίῳ 1 And it happened that Iconium This begins a new event. @@ -1790,30 +1774,27 @@ ACT 14 5 s5h7 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Paul a ACT 14 5 q6g2 ὑβρίσαι καὶ λιθοβολῆσαι αὐτούς 1 to mistreat and stone them Alternate translation: “to beat Paul and Barnabas and to kill them by throwing stones at them” ACT 14 6 tpl1 translate-names τῆς Λυκαονίας 1 of Lycaonia A district in Asia Minor (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 14 6 m5gv translate-names Λύστραν 1 Lystra A city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and north of Derbe (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 14 6 tl4q translate-names Δέρβην 1 Derbe A city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and Lystra (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 14 6 tl4q translate-names Δέρβην 1 Derbe **Derbe** is a city in Asia Minor south of Iconium and Lystra (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 14 7 z5nd κἀκεῖ εὐαγγελιζόμενοι ἦσαν 1 and where they continued to proclaim the gospel Alternate translation: “and where Paul and Barnabas continued to proclaim the good news” -ACT 14 8 ep46 0 General Information: The first word “he” refers to the crippled man; the second word “he” refers to Paul. The word “him” refers to the crippled man. -ACT 14 8 l5pu 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and Barnabas are now in Lystra. -ACT 14 8 wb5k writing-participants τις ἀνὴρ…ἐκάθητο 1 a certain man sat This introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 14 8 wb5k writing-participants τις ἀνὴρ…ἐκάθητο 1 a certain man sat This phrase introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 14 8 kz7d ἀδύνατος…τοῖς ποσὶν 1 powerless in his feet Alternate translation: “unable to move his legs” or “unable to walk on his feet” ACT 14 8 tca1 χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 lame from the womb of his mother Alternate translation: “having been born as a cripple” -ACT 14 8 hw4l χωλὸς 1 crippled unable to walk ACT 14 9 di49 ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ 1 He looked intently at him Alternate translation: “Paul looked straight at the man” ACT 14 9 xak4 figs-abstractnouns ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 he has faith to be saved If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **faith**, you can express it with the verb “believe”. Alternate translation: “he believed so that he could be healed” or “he believed so that he could be made well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 14 9 uwov figs-activepassive ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he believed that Jesus could heal him” or “he believed that Jesus could make him well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 14 10 v1kz ἥλατο 1 he jumped up This implies that his legs were completely healed. Alternate translation: “he leaped in the air” +ACT 14 10 v1kz ἥλατο 1 he jumped up This implies that the man's legs were completely healed. Alternate translation: “he leaped in the air” ACT 14 11 axe6 ὃ ἐποίησεν Παῦλος 1 what Paul had done This refers to Paul’s healing the crippled man. ACT 14 11 lvs9 ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 they raised their voice Here, **raised their voice** means to speak loudly. Alternate translation: “they spoke loudly” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom) -ACT 14 11 d1gz figs-explicit οἱ θεοὶ…κατέβησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς 1 The gods … have come down to us A large number of people believed Paul and Barnabas were their pagan gods who had come down from heaven. Alternate translation: “The gods … have come down from heaven to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 14 11 x3bi Λυκαονιστὶ 1 in the Lycaonian language The people of Lystra spoke Lycaonian and also Greek. Alternate translation: “in their own Lycaonian language” +ACT 14 11 d1gz figs-explicit οἱ θεοὶ…κατέβησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς 1 The gods … have come down to us A large number of people believed Paul and Barnabas were their pagan **gods** who had come down from heaven. Alternate translation: “The gods … have come down from heaven to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 14 11 x3bi Λυκαονιστὶ 1 in the Lycaonian language The people of Lystra spoke **Lycaonian** and also Greek. Alternate translation: “in their own Lycaonian language” ACT 14 11 rm85 ὁμοιωθέντες ἀνθρώποις 1 being made like men These people believed that the gods needed to change their appearance in order to look like men. -ACT 14 12 t7uu translate-names Δία 1 Zeus Zeus was the king over all the other pagan gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 14 12 hh25 translate-names Ἑρμῆν 1 Hermes Hermes was the pagan god who brought messages to people from Zeus and the other gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 14 13 iz6r figs-explicit ὅ τε ἱερεὺς τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως…ἐνέγκας 1 And the priest of the temple of Zeus, which was in front of the city, brought It may be helpful to include additional information about the priest. Alternate translation: “And there was a temple just outside the city where the people worshiped Zeus. When the priest who served in the temple heard what Paul and Barnabas had done, he brought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 14 12 t7uu translate-names Δία 1 Zeus **Zeus** was the king over all the other pagan gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 14 12 hh25 translate-names Ἑρμῆν 1 Hermes **Hermes** was the pagan god who brought messages to people from Zeus and the other gods. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 14 13 iz6r figs-explicit ὅ τε ἱερεὺς τοῦ Διὸς, τοῦ ὄντος πρὸ τῆς πόλεως…ἐνέγκας 1 And the priest of the temple of Zeus, which was in front of the city, brought It may be helpful to include additional information about the **priest**. Alternate translation: “And there was a temple just outside the city where the people worshiped Zeus. When the priest who served in the temple heard what Paul and Barnabas had done, he brought” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 14 13 v2a9 ταύρους καὶ στέμματα 1 oxen and wreaths The **oxen** were to be sacrificed. The **wreaths** were either to crown Paul and Barnabas, or put on the oxen for sacrifice. ACT 14 13 iha1 ἐπὶ τοὺς πυλῶνας 1 to the gates The **gates** of the cities were often used as a meeting place for the people of the city. ACT 14 13 ud37 ἤθελεν θύειν 1 wanting to sacrifice Alternate translation: “wanting to offer sacrifice to Paul and Barnabas as the gods Zeus and Hermes” -ACT 14 14 kt1f οἱ ἀπόστολοι Βαρναβᾶς καὶ Παῦλος 1 the apostles, Barnabas and Paul Luke is here probably using **apostle** in the general sense of “one sent out.” +ACT 14 14 kt1f οἱ ἀπόστολοι Βαρναβᾶς καὶ Παῦλος 1 the apostles, Barnabas and Paul Luke is here probably using **apostles** in the general sense of “ones sent out.” ACT 14 14 kx43 διαρρήξαντες τὰ ἱμάτια ἑαυτῶν 1 they tore their clothing This was a symbolic action to show that they were deeply distressed and upset that the crowd wanted to sacrifice to them. ACT 14 15 w4fd figs-rquestion ἄνδρες, τί ταῦτα ποιεῖτε? 1 Men, why are you doing these things? Barnabas and Paul are rebuking the people for trying to sacrifice to them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “Men, you must not do these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 14 15 f8vc ταῦτα ποιεῖτε 1 are you doing these things Alternate translation: “are you worshiping us” @@ -1823,34 +1804,32 @@ ACT 14 15 n98g figs-metaphor ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν ματαίων ἐπ ACT 14 15 qr5b Θεὸν ζῶντα 1 a living God Alternate translation: “a God who truly exists” or “a God who lives” ACT 14 16 s2rn ἐν ταῖς παρῳχημέναις γενεαῖς 1 In the generations gone by Alternate translation: “In previous times” or “Until now” ACT 14 16 vpt5 figs-metaphor πορεύεσθαι ταῖς ὁδοῖς αὐτῶν 1 to go their own ways Going in a way, or going along a path, is a metaphor for living one’s life. Alternate translation: “to live their lives the way they wanted to” or “to do whatever they wanted to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 14 17 fw2s 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and Barnabas continue speaking to the crowd outside the city of Lystra ([Acts 14:8](../14/08.md)). -ACT 14 17 kig8 figs-litotes οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν 1 he did not leave himself without witness This could also be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “God has certainly left a witness” or “God has indeed testified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 14 17 kig8 figs-litotes οὐκ ἀμάρτυρον αὑτὸν ἀφῆκεν 1 he did not leave himself without witness If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not … without**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “God has certainly left a witness” or “God has indeed testified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 14 17 ps9z figs-metonymy ἐμπιπλῶν τροφῆς καὶ εὐφροσύνης τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν 1 filling your hearts with food and gladness Here, **your hearts** refers to the people. Alternate translation: “giving you enough to eat and things about which to be happy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 14 18 ut73 μόλις κατέπαυσαν τοὺς ὄχλους τοῦ μὴ θύειν αὐτοῖς 1 they barely restrained the crowds from sacrificing to them Paul and Barnabas stopped the multitude from sacrificing to them, but it was difficult to do so. +ACT 14 18 ut73 μόλις κατέπαυσαν τοὺς ὄχλους τοῦ μὴ θύειν αὐτοῖς 1 they barely restrained the crowds from sacrificing to them Paul and Barnabas stopped the multitude **from sacrificing to them**, but it was difficult to do so. ACT 14 18 la43 μόλις κατέπαυσαν 1 they barely restrained Alternate translation: “had difficulty preventing” -ACT 14 19 bz7k 0 General Information: Here the words “he” and “him” refer to Paul. -ACT 14 19 wmc2 figs-explicit πείσαντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 persuaded the crowds It my be helpful to explicitly state what they persuaded the crowd to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded the people not to believe Paul and Barnabas, and to turn against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 14 19 xbv3 τοὺς ὄχλους 1 the crowds This may not be the same group as the “multitude” in the previous verse. Some time had passed, and this might be a different group that gathered together. +ACT 14 19 wmc2 figs-explicit πείσαντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 persuaded the crowds It my be helpful to explicitly state what they **persuaded the crowds** to do. Alternate translation: “persuaded the people not to believe Paul and Barnabas, and to turn against them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 14 19 xbv3 τοὺς ὄχλους 1 the crowds These **crowds** may not be the same group as the “multitude” in the previous verse. Some time had passed, and this might be a different group that gathered together. ACT 14 19 t8mg νομίζοντες αὐτὸν τεθνηκέναι 1 thinking him to be dead Alternate translation: “because they thought that he was already dead” -ACT 14 20 pan3 τῶν μαθητῶν 1 the disciples These were new believers in the city of Lystra. +ACT 14 20 pan3 τῶν μαθητῶν 1 the disciples These **disciples** were new believers in the city of Lystra. ACT 14 20 aqx3 εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν 1 he entered into the city Alternate translation: “Paul re-entered Lystra with the believers” ACT 14 20 e2y9 ἐξῆλθεν σὺν τῷ Βαρναβᾷ εἰς Δέρβην 1 he went with Barnabas to Derbe Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas went to the city of Derbe” -ACT 14 21 wv7e figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the words “they” and “They” refer to Paul. Here the word “We” includes Paul, Barnabas, and the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 14 22 rh8q figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 Here the word **us** includes Paul, Barnabas, and the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 14 21 ykt4 τὴν πόλιν ἐκείνην 1 in that city Alternate translation: “in Derbe” ([Acts 14:20](../14/20.md)) -ACT 14 22 ek9l figs-synecdoche ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν 1 They were strengthening the souls of the disciples Here, **souls** refers to the disciples. This emphasizes their inner thoughts and beliefs. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to believe the message about Jesus” or “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to grow strong in their relationship with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 14 22 ek9l figs-synecdoche ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν 1 They were strengthening the souls of the disciples Here, **souls** refers to the **disciples**. This emphasizes their inner thoughts and beliefs. Alternate translation: “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to believe the message about Jesus” or “Paul and Barnabas urged the believers to continue to grow strong in their relationship with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 14 22 zkd2 παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει 1 and encouraging them to continue in the faith Alternate translation: “and encouraging the believers to keep trusting in Jesus” ACT 14 22 d9ic writing-quotations καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 and saying, “It is necessary for us to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions.” Some version translate this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “and saying that we must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) ACT 14 22 wu1c figs-exclusive δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν 1 It is necessary for us to enter Paul includes his hearers, so the word **us** is inclusive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 14 23 pk5l 0 General Information: Except for the third use of the word “they” which refers to the people that Paul and Barnabas had led to the Lord, all the words “they” here refer to Paul and Barnabas. +ACT 14 23 pk5l χειροτονήσαντες…παρέθεντο…πεπιστεύκεισαν 1 General Information: The first two occurrences of **they** here refer to Paul and Barnabas. The third occurrence of **they** refers to the people that Paul and Barnabas had led to the Lord. ACT 14 23 mqp9 χειροτονήσαντες δὲ αὐτοῖς κατ’ ἐκκλησίαν πρεσβυτέρους 1 And when they had appointed for them elders in every church Alternate translation: “And when Paul and Barnabas had appointed leaders in each new group of believers” ACT 14 23 nd87 παρέθεντο αὐτοὺς 1 they entrusted them This could mean: (1) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the elders they had appointed” or (2) “Paul and Barnabas entrusted the leaders and other believers” ACT 14 23 ls62 εἰς ὃν πεπιστεύκεισαν 1 in whom they had believed Who **they** refers to depends on your choice for the meaning of “them” in the previous note (either elders or leaders and other believers). ACT 14 25 t513 figs-metonymy καὶ λαλήσαντες ἐν Πέργῃ τὸν λόγον 1 And when they had spoken the word in Perga Here, **word** is a metonym for “message of God.” Alternate translation: “And when they had spoken the message about Jesus in Perga” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 14 25 h8sh κατέβησαν εἰς Ἀττάλιαν 1 they went down to Attalia The phrase **went down** is used here because Attalia is lower in elevation than Perga. ACT 14 26 f2cg ὅθεν ἦσαν παραδεδομένοι τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 where they had been commended to the grace of God If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “where believers and leaders in Antioch had commended Paul and Barnabas to the grace of God” or “where the people of Antioch prayed that God would care for and protect Paul and Barnabas” -ACT 14 27 vcd3 0 General Information: Here the words “they,” “them,” and “They” refer to Paul and Barnabas. The word “he” refers to God. +ACT 14 27 vcd3 παραγενόμενοι…ἀνήγγελλον…αὐτῶν…ἤνοιξεν 1 General Information: Here the words **they** and **them** refer to Paul and Barnabas. The word **he** refers to God. ACT 14 27 i9dv συναγαγόντες τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 gathered together the church Alternate translation: “called the local believers to meet together” -ACT 14 27 b4id figs-metaphor ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles God’s enabling the Gentiles to believe is spoken of as if he had opened a door that had prevented them from entering into faith. Alternate translation: “God had made it possible for the Gentiles to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 14 27 b4id figs-metaphor ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles God’s enabling **the Gentiles** to believe is spoken of as if he had opened a door that had prevented them from entering into **faith**. Alternate translation: “God had made it possible for the Gentiles to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 14 28 abcq figs-litotes χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον 1 for not a little time This phrase is a litotes. The words **not** and **a little** together mean “a lot.” Alternate translation: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 15 intro h917 0 # Acts 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16-17.

The meeting that Luke describes in this chapter is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.” This was a time when many church leaders got together to decide if believers needed to obey the whole law of Moses.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Brothers

In this chapter Luke begins to use the word “brothers” to refer to fellow Christians instead of fellow Jews.

### Obeying the law of Moses

Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised and that this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not want the Gentiles to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do.

### “Abstain from things sacrificed to idols, blood, things strangled, and from sexual immorality”

It is possible that the church leaders decided on these laws so that Jews and Gentiles could not only live together but eat the same foods together. ACT 15 1 qck6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and Barnabas are still in Antioch when there is a dispute about the Gentiles and circumcision. @@ -1860,9 +1839,8 @@ ACT 15 1 zi1n figs-explicit ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 t ACT 15 1 pm8h figs-activepassive ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε τῷ ἔθει τῷ Μωϋσέως, οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι 1 Unless you are circumcised in the custom of Moses, you are not able to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you in the custom of Moses, God cannot save you” or “God will not save you from your sins unless you receive circumcision according to the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 2 abcr figs-litotes στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης 1 not a little dispute and debate This phrase is a litotes. The words **not** and **a little** together mean “a lot.” Alternate translation: “a sharp dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 15 2 f9nd figs-abstractnouns στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης 1 not a little dispute and debate If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **dispute** and **debate**, you could express the same ideas with verbs and where the men came from can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “strongly confronted and debated” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 15 2 ek6a ἀναβαίνειν…εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 to go up … in Jerusalem Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going up to Jerusalem. +ACT 15 2 ek6a ἀναβαίνειν…εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 to go up … in Jerusalem Jerusalem was higher than almost any other place in Israel, so it was normal for Israelites to speak of going **up** to Jerusalem. ACT 15 2 z983 τοῦ ζητήματος τούτου 1 this question Alternate translation: “this issue” -ACT 15 3 h2mw 0 General Information: Here the words “They,” “they,” and “them” refer to Paul, Barnabas, and certain others ([Acts 15:2](../15/02.md)). ACT 15 3 av5y figs-activepassive οἱ μὲν οὖν προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 Therefore, the ones who had been sent by the church If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Therefore the community of believers sent them from Antioch to Jerusalem, and they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 3 aia5 figs-metonymy προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 who had been sent by the church Here, **church** refers to the people that were a part of the church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 3 i5kd διήρχοντο τήν τε Φοινίκην καὶ Σαμάρειαν, ἐκδιηγούμενοι 1 passed through both Phoenicia and Samaria announcing The words **passed through** and **announcing** indicate they spent some time in different places sharing in detail what God was doing. @@ -1871,15 +1849,14 @@ ACT 15 3 nje7 figs-metaphor ἐποίουν χαρὰν μεγάλην πᾶσι ACT 15 3 bbd4 πᾶσι τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 to all the brothers Here, **brothers** refers to fellow believers. ACT 15 4 ej1r figs-activepassive παρεδέχθησαν ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας, καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 1 they were welcomed by the church, and the apostles, and the elders If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the apostles, the elders, and the rest of the community of believers welcomed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 4 a2x1 μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 with them Alternate translation: “through them” -ACT 15 5 efe5 0 General Information: Here the word “them” refers to non-Jewish believers who were not circumcised and did not keep the Old Testament laws of God. -ACT 15 5 f2b5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and Barnabas are now in Jerusalem to meet with the apostles and elders there. -ACT 15 5 k6k7 δέ τινες 1 But certain ones Here Luke contrasts those who believe that salvation is only in Jesus to others who believe salvation is by Jesus yet also believe that circumcision is required for salvation. +ACT 15 5 efe5 αὐτοὺς, παραγγέλλειν 1 General Information: Here both occurrences of the word **them** refers to non-Jewish believers who were not circumcised and did not keep the Old Testament laws of God. +ACT 15 5 k6k7 δέ τινες 1 But certain ones Here Luke uses the word **But** to contrast those who believe that salvation is only in Jesus to others who believe salvation is by Jesus yet also believe that circumcision is required for salvation. ACT 15 5 b9nt τηρεῖν τὸν νόμον Μωϋσέως 1 to keep the law of Moses Alternate translation: “to obey the law of Moses” ACT 15 6 ugu6 ἰδεῖν περὶ τοῦ λόγου τούτου 1 to see about this matter The church leaders decided to discuss whether or not Gentiles needed to be circumcised and obey the law of Moses in order for God to save them from their sins. ACT 15 7 wct8 figs-you αὐτούς…ὑμεῖς…ὑμῖν 1 General Information: The word **them** refers to apostles and elders ([Acts 15:6](../15/06.md)). Both occurrences of **you** are plural and refer to the apostles and elders present. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) ACT 15 7 hxu9 0 Connecting Statement: Peter begins to speak to the apostles and elders who met to discuss whether Gentiles had to receive circumcision and keep the law ([Acts 15:5-6](./05.md)). ACT 15 7 a6q9 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Peter is addressing all of the believers who were present. -ACT 15 7 s3wb figs-synecdoche διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου 1 by my mouth Here, **mouth** refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “from me” or “by me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 15 7 s3wb figs-synecdoche διὰ τοῦ στόματός μου 1 by my mouth Here, **my mouth** refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “from me” or “by me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 15 7 yer1 ἀκοῦσαι τὰ ἔθνη 1 the Gentiles to hear Alternate translation: “that the Gentiles would hear” ACT 15 7 b5s8 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 1 the word of the gospel Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 8 m1xc figs-metonymy καρδιογνώστης 1 who knows the heart Here, **heart** refers to the “minds” or “inner beings.” Alternate translation: “who knows the people’s minds” or “who knows what people think” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1888,29 +1865,28 @@ ACT 15 8 i1gc δοὺς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον 1 giving them the ACT 15 8 abcs figs-ellipsis καθὼς καὶ ἡμῖν 1 just as also to us Here Luke expects his readers to understand the words “he gave” that he leaves out. Alternate translation: “just as he also gave to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 15 8 wlzx figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here, **us** is plural and refers to Peter, the apostles and elders, and all Jewish believers in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 15 9 zs2g οὐδὲν διέκρινεν 1 he did not distinguish God did not treat Jewish believers different from Gentile believers. -ACT 15 9 ase1 figs-metaphor τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 having made their hearts clean by faith God’s forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins is spoken as though he literally cleaned their hearts. Alternate translation: “forgiving their sins because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 9 ase1 figs-metaphor τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 having made their hearts clean by faith God’s forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins is spoken as though he literally cleaned **their hearts**. Alternate translation: “forgiving their sins because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 9 yi8r figs-metonymy τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, **heart** stands for the person’s inner being. Alternate translation: “forgiving them because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 10 ha45 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Peter includes his audience by his use of “our” and “we.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 15 10 wjq7 0 Connecting Statement: Peter finishes speaking to the apostles and elders. -ACT 15 10 rfr4 νῦν 1 Now This does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows. +ACT 15 10 ha45 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμεῖς 1 General Information: Peter includes his audience by his use of **our** and **we**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 15 10 rfr4 νῦν 1 Now Here, **Now** does not mean “at this moment,” but is used to draw attention to the important point that follows. ACT 15 10 zaz6 figs-rquestion τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι? 1 why are you testing God, to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear? Peter uses this question to convict the disciples. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “do not test God by putting a yoke on the neck of the non-Jewish believers which we Jews were not able to bear!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 15 10 qpyd figs-metaphor ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν 1 Peter uses a word picture to tell the Jewish believers they should not require the non-Jewish believers to perform circumcision to be saved. Alternate translation: “putting a burden on the non-Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 15 10 bfd5 οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers This refers to their Jewish ancestors. +ACT 15 10 bfd5 οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Here, **our fathers** refers to their Jewish ancestors. ACT 15 11 q28c figs-activepassive ἀλλὰ διὰ τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ, πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι καθ’ ὃν τρόπον κἀκεῖνοι 1 But we believe to be saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus, and they according to that same manner If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But we believe the Lord Jesus shall save us by his grace, just as he saved the non-Jewish believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 15 12 um1p 0 General Information: Here the word “them” refers to Paul and Barnabas. -ACT 15 12 d1uc πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος 1 all the crowd See how you translated this in ([Acts 15:6](../15/06.md)) Alternate translation: “everyone” or “the whole group” +ACT 15 12 um1p αὐτῶν 1 General Information: Here the word **them** refers to Paul and Barnabas. +ACT 15 12 d1uc πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος 1 all the crowd See how you translated this phrase in ([Acts 15:6](../15/06.md)) Alternate translation: “everyone” or “the whole group” ACT 15 12 uks6 ἐποίησεν ὁ Θεὸς 1 God had worked Alternate translation: “God had done” or “God had caused” -ACT 15 13 vb25 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Barnabas ([Acts 15:12](../15/12.md)). +ACT 15 13 vb25 αὐτοὺς 1 General Information: Here the word **they** refers to Paul and Barnabas ([Acts 15:12](../15/12.md)). ACT 15 13 l7mp 0 Connecting Statement: James begins to speak to the apostles and elders ([Acts 15:6](../15/06.md)). ACT 15 13 pl6m ἀδελφοί, ἀκούσατέ 1 brothers, listen James was probably speaking only to men. Alternate translation: “fellow believers, listen” ACT 15 14 abct ἐπεσκέψατο, λαβεῖν ἐξ ἐθνῶν 1 concerned himself to take from the Gentiles Alternate translation: “graciously helped the Gentiles by taking out of them” ACT 15 14 s9dn λαβεῖν ἐξ ἐθνῶν λαὸν 1 to take from them a people Alternate translation: “so that he might choose from among them a people” ACT 15 14 pnr9 figs-metonymy τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 1 for his name Here, **name** refers to God. Alternate translation: “for himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 15 h9um 0 General Information: Here “I” refers to God who spoke through the words of his prophet. -ACT 15 15 ibb2 0 Connecting Statement: James quotes the prophet Amos from the Old Testament. +ACT 15 15 ibb2 0 Connecting Statement: In verses 16-18, James quotes the prophet Amos from the Old Testament. ACT 15 15 am6y figs-metonymy τούτῳ συμφωνοῦσιν οἱ λόγοι τῶν προφητῶν 1 this agrees with the words of the prophets Here, **words** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “what the prophets said agrees” or “the prophets agree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 15 nbi1 τούτῳ συμφωνοῦσιν 1 this agrees with Alternate translation: “this confirms” ACT 15 15 j4f5 figs-activepassive καθὼς γέγραπται 1 just as it is written If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as they wrote” or “just as the prophet Amos wrote long ago” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 15 16 h9um ἀναστρέψω…ἀνοικοδομήσω…ἀνοικοδομήσω 1 General Information: Here **I** refers to God who spoke through the words of his prophet. ACT 15 16 f5wf figs-metaphor ἀνοικοδομήσω τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ τὴν πεπτωκυῖαν, καὶ τὰ κατεστραμμένα αὐτῆς, ἀνοικοδομήσω καὶ ἀνορθώσω αὐτήν 1 I will build again the tent of David, which has fallen down; and I will rebuild its ruins and will restore it This speaks of God’s again choosing one of David’s descendants to rule over his people as though he were setting up a tent again after it fell down. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 16 ist8 figs-metonymy τὴν σκηνὴν Δαυεὶδ 1 the tent of David Here, **tent** stands for David’s family. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 17 sm79 figs-metaphor ἐκζητήσωσιν οἱ κατάλοιποι τῶν ἀνθρώπων τὸν Κύριον 1 the remnant of men may seek the Lord This speaks about people wanting to obey God and learn more about him as if they were literally looking for him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1919,37 +1895,33 @@ ACT 15 17 pe4l figs-123person ἐκζητήσωσιν…τὸν Κύριον 1 m ACT 15 17 tu21 figs-activepassive καὶ πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄνομά μου ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 including all the Gentiles upon whom my name has been called upon them If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “including all the Gentiles who belong to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 17 c8gm figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 my name Here, **my name** stands for God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 18 tr27 figs-activepassive γνωστὰ 1 known If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people have known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 15 19 g3zx figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here “we” includes James, the apostles, and the elders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 15 19 f6za 0 Connecting Statement: James finishes speaking to the apostles and elders. (See: [Acts 15:2](../15/02.md) and [Acts 15:13](../15/13.md)) -ACT 15 19 pyb9 figs-explicit μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 not to trouble those from the Gentiles who are turning to God You can make explicit in what way James does not want to trouble the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “we should not require the Gentiles who are believing in God to become circumcised and to obey the laws of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 19 vr6u figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 who are turning to God A person who starts obeying God is spoken of as if the person is physically **turning** towards God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 19 pyb9 figs-explicit μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 not to trouble those from the Gentiles who are turning to God You can make explicit in what way James does not want **to trouble** **the Gentiles**. Alternate translation: “we should not require the Gentiles who are believing in God to become circumcised and to obey the laws of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 15 19 vr6u figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 who are turning to God A person who starts obeying God is spoken of as if the person is physically **turning** towards **God**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 20 wx8f ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων, καὶ τῆς πορνείας, καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος 1 to keep away from the pollution of idols, and sexual immorality, and things that are strangled, and blood Sexual immorality, strangling animals, and consuming blood were often part of ceremonies to worship idols and false gods. -ACT 15 20 n6f2 figs-explicit ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 pollution of idols This possibly refers to eating the meat of an animal that someone has sacrificed to an idol or to anything to do with idol worship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 20 j2rl figs-explicit τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος 1 things that are strangled, and blood God did not allow Jews to eat meat that still had the blood in it. Also, even earlier in Moses’ writings in Genesis, God had forbidden the drinking of blood. Therefore, they could not eat an animal that someone strangled because the blood was not properly drained from the body of the animal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 21 si1h figs-explicit Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος. 1 For Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him, being read in the synagogues every Sabbath James is implying that Gentiles know how important these rules are because Jews preach them in every city where there is a synagogue. It also implies the Gentiles can go to the teachers from the synagogues to learn more about these rules. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 15 20 n6f2 figs-explicit ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 pollution of idols This phrase possibly refers to eating the meat of an animal that someone has sacrificed to an idol or to anything to do with idol worship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 15 20 j2rl figs-explicit τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος 1 things that are strangled, and blood God did not allow Jews to eat meat that still had the **blood** in it. Also, even earlier in Moses’ writings in Genesis, God had forbidden the drinking of blood. Therefore, they could not eat an animal that someone strangled because the blood was not properly drained from the body of the animal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 15 21 si1h figs-explicit Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος. 1 For Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him, being read in the synagogues every Sabbath James is implying that Gentiles know how important these rules are because Jews preach them **in every city** where there is a synagogue. It also implies the Gentiles can go to the teachers from **the synagogues** to learn more about these rules. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 21 zd7t figs-metonymy Μωϋσῆς 1 Moses Here, **Moses** represents the law of Moses. Alternate translation: “the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 21 wp1s figs-activepassive Μωϋσῆς…ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει 1 Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “there are Jews in every city, from ancient generations, who are proclaiming the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 21 xg5n figs-hyperbole κατὰ πόλιν 1 in every city The word **every** here is a generalization. Alternate translation: “in many cities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 15 22 rhn3 0 General Information: Here the word “them” refers to Judas and Silas. The word “They” refers to the apostles, elders, and other believers of the church in Jerusalem. ACT 15 22 hp6j figs-metonymy ὅλῃ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the whole church Here, **church** refers to the people who are a part of the church in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “the church in Jerusalem” or “the whole community of believers in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 22 c711 translate-names Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν 1 Judas called Barsabbas This is the name of a man. **Barsabbas** is a second name that people called him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 15 22 c711 translate-names Ἰούδαν τὸν καλούμενον Βαρσαββᾶν 1 Judas called Barsabbas **Judas** is the name of a man. **Barsabbas** is a second name that people called him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 15 23 e4g2 οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν 1 The apostles and the elders, brothers, to those throughout Antioch and Syria and Cilicia, who are brothers from among the Gentiles. Greetings This is the introduction of the letter. Your language may have a way of introducing the author of the letter and to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers” ACT 15 23 kp51 ἀδελφοὶ…ἀδελφοῖς 1 brothers … brothers Here both instances of the word **brothers** refer to fellow believers. By using these words, the apostles and elders assure the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers. -ACT 15 23 php8 translate-names Κιλικίαν 1 Cilicia This is the name of a province on the coast in Asia Minor north of the Island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 15 24 g8m9 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here all instances of “we,” “our,” and “us” refer to the believers in the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [Acts 15:22](../15/22.md)) +ACT 15 23 php8 translate-names Κιλικίαν 1 Cilicia **Cilicia** is the name of a province on the coast in Asia Minor north of the Island of Cyprus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 15 24 g8m9 figs-exclusive ὑμᾶς…οὐ διεστειλάμεθα 1 General Information: Here **us** and **we** refer to the believers in the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [Acts 15:22](../15/22.md)) ACT 15 24 p1tl ὅτι τινὲς 1 that certain ones Alternate translation: “that some men” ACT 15 24 kh16 οἷς οὐ διεστειλάμεθα 1 who were not ordered by us Alternate translation: “even though we gave no orders for them to go” ACT 15 24 bxq8 figs-synecdoche ἐτάραξαν ὑμᾶς λόγοις ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν 1 to disturb you with teachings that are upsetting your souls Here, **souls** refers to the people. Alternate translation: “to teach things that have troubled you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 15 25 c3dl ἐκλεξαμένοις ἄνδρας 1 chosen men The men they sent were Judas called Barsabbas and Silas ([Acts 15:22](../15/22.md)). +ACT 15 25 c3dl ἐκλεξαμένοις ἄνδρας 1 chosen men The **men** they sent were Judas called Barsabbas and Silas ([Acts 15:22](../15/22.md)). ACT 15 26 t7vw figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ Here, **name** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: “because they believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” or “because they serve our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 15 27 j1jb figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the words “We” and “us” refer to the leaders and believers in the church in Jerusalem. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [Acts 15:22](../15/22.md)) -ACT 15 27 v2ee 0 Connecting Statement: This concludes the letter from the Jerusalem church to the Gentile believers in Antioch. +ACT 15 27 j1jb figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word **we** refers to the leaders and believers in the church in Jerusalem ([Acts 15:22](../15/22.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 15 27 xw8l figs-explicit αὐτοὺς διὰ λόγου ἀπαγγέλλοντας τὰ αὐτά 1 they are reporting to you the same thing in words This phrase emphasizes that Judas and Silas will say the same things that the apostles and elders had written. Alternate translation: “they themselves will tell you the same things about which we have written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 15 28 l9z6 figs-metaphor μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος, πλὴν τούτων τῶν ἐπάναγκες 1 to be laid upon you no greater burden than these necessary things This speaks about laws that people need to obey as if they were objects that people carry on their shoulders. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 29 nt7s εἰδωλοθύτων 1 things sacrificed to idols This means they are not allowed to eat the meat of an animal that someone sacrifices to an idol. -ACT 15 29 vcc6 figs-explicit αἵματος 1 blood This refers to drinking blood or eating meat from which the blood has not been drained. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 29 rt55 πνικτῶν 1 things strangled A strangled animal was killed but its blood was not drained. -ACT 15 29 buy9 ἔρρωσθε 1 Farewell This announces the end of the letter. Alternate translation: “Goodbye” +ACT 15 29 vcc6 figs-explicit αἵματος 1 blood This refers to drinking **blood** or eating meat from which the blood has not been drained. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 15 29 rt55 πνικτῶν 1 things strangled A **strangled** animal was killed but its blood was not drained. +ACT 15 29 buy9 ἔρρωσθε 1 Farewell The word **Farewell** announces the end of the letter. Alternate translation: “Goodbye” ACT 15 30 khi8 0 Connecting Statement: Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas leave for Antioch. ACT 15 30 c3uk οἱ μὲν οὖν ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον εἰς Ἀντιόχειαν 1 So when they were dismissed, they came down to Antioch The word **they** refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. Alternate translation: “So when the four men were dismissed, they came down to Antioch” ACT 15 30 usz6 figs-activepassive οἱ…ἀπολυθέντες 1 when they were dismissed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the apostles and elders dismissed the four men” or “when the believers in Jerusalem sent them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1960,9 +1932,9 @@ ACT 15 32 r65l καὶ αὐτοὶ προφῆται ὄντες 1 also being ACT 15 32 e2en τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 the brothers Alternate translation: “the fellow believers” ACT 15 32 j99g figs-metaphor ἐπεστήριξαν 1 strengthened them Helping someone to depend even more on Jesus is spoken of as if they were making them physically stronger. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 33 y2ls 0 Connecting Statement: Judas and Silas return to Jerusalem while Paul and Barnabas remain in Antioch. -ACT 15 33 v7pj figs-metaphor ποιήσαντες δὲ χρόνον 1 And after they had spent time there This speaks about time as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. The word “they” refers to Judas and Silas. Alternate translation: “And after they stayed there for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 15 33 v7pj figs-metaphor ποιήσαντες δὲ χρόνον 1 And after they had spent time there This speaks about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. The word **they** refers to Judas and Silas. Alternate translation: “And after they stayed there for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 33 v6im figs-activepassive ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 they were sent away with peace from the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent Judas and Silas back in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 15 33 wzw4 τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers This refers to the believers in Antioch. +ACT 15 33 wzw4 τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Here, **the brothers** refers to the believers in Antioch. ACT 15 33 xv3h πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς 1 to those who had sent them See how you translated this in ([Acts 15:22](../15/22.md)) Alternate translation: “to the believers in Jerusalem who sent Judas and Silas” ACT 15 35 e7s4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 36 k6c6 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and Barnabas go on separate journeys. @@ -1971,153 +1943,143 @@ ACT 15 36 ib2j ἐπισκεψώμεθα τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 let us ACT 15 36 ua1f figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for the message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 15 36 y9i9 πῶς ἔχουσιν 1 how they are They want to learn about the current condition of the brothers and how they are holding on to God’s truth. Alternate translation: “to learn how they are doing” ACT 15 38 a5nn figs-litotes Παῦλος…ἠξίου…μὴ συνπαραλαμβάνειν τοῦτον 1 Paul thought it wise not to take along him The words **wise not** are used to say the opposite of **wise**. Alternate translation: “Paul thought that taking Mark along would be foolish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 15 38 ht3k Παμφυλίας 1 Pamphylia This was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). +ACT 15 38 ht3k Παμφυλίας 1 Pamphylia **Pamphylia** was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). ACT 15 38 ln7w μὴ συνελθόντα αὐτοῖς εἰς τὸ ἔργον 1 did not go with them in the work Alternate translation: “did not continue to work with them” or “did not continue to serve with them” -ACT 15 39 bb8w 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Barnabas and Paul. ACT 15 39 u97a figs-abstractnouns ἐγένετο δὲ παροξυσμὸς, ὥστε ἀποχωρισθῆναι αὐτοὺς ἀπ’ ἀλλήλων 1 And there arose a sharp disagreement, so as to separate them from each other If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **disagreement**, you could express the same idea with the verb “disagree.” Alternate translation: “And they so strongly disagreed with each other that they separated from each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 15 40 l2uq figs-activepassive παραδοθεὶς τῇ χάριτι τοῦ Κυρίου ὑπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 after he had been entrusted by the brothers to the grace of the Lord To entrust to someone means to place the care and responsibility for someone or something to another person. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “after the believers in Antioch entrusted Paul to the grace of the Lord” or “after the believers in Antioch prayed for the Lord to take care of Paul and show kindness to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 15 41 e3ym figs-explicit διήρχετο 1 he went through The previous sentence implies that Silas was with Paul. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went all around in” or “Paul took Silas and went throughout” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 15 41 t81z τὴν Συρίαν καὶ τὴν Κιλικίαν 1 Syria and Cilicia These are provinces or areas in Asia Minor, near the island of Cyprus. +ACT 15 41 t81z τὴν Συρίαν καὶ τὴν Κιλικίαν 1 Syria and Cilicia **Syria** and **Cilicia** are provinces or areas in Asia Minor, near the island of Cyprus. ACT 15 41 tbv3 figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 strengthening the churches Encouraging the believers in the churches is spoken of as though Paul and Silas were making the believers physically stronger. Alternate translation: “encouraging the believers in the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 15 41 s7yf figs-metonymy ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 The word **churches** refers to the groups of believers in Syria and Cilicia. Alternate translation: “helping the community of believers to depend even more in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Timothy’s circumcision

Paul circumcised Timothy because they were telling the message of Jesus to Jews and Gentiles. Paul wanted the Jews to know that he respected the law of Moses even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Christians did not need to be circumcised.

### The woman who had a spirit of divination

Most people want very much to know the future, but the law of Moses said that speaking with the spirits of dead people to learn about the future is a sin. This woman seems to have been able to tell the future very well. She was a slave, and her masters made much money from her work. Paul wanted her to stop sinning, so he told the spirit to leave her. Luke does not say that she began to follow Jesus or tell us anything more about her. -ACT 16 1 l2b1 0 General Information: The first, third, and fourth instances of the word “him” refer to Timothy. The second “him” refers to Paul. -ACT 16 1 f49m writing-background 0 This continues the missionary journeys of Paul with Silas. Timothy is introduced into the story and joins Paul and Silas. Verses 1 and 2 give background information about Timothy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 16 1 km5q figs-go κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Paul also came down Here, **came** can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -ACT 16 1 d4ka Δέρβην 1 Derbe This is the name of a city in Asia Minor. See how you translated it in [Acts 14:6](../14/06.md). +ACT 16 1 km5q figs-go κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Paul also came down This continues the missionary journeys of Paul with Silas. Here, **came** can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +ACT 16 1 f49m writing-background μαθητής τις ἦν ἐκεῖ ὀνόματι Τιμόθεος, υἱὸς γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς, πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 **Timothy** is introduced into the story and joins Paul and Silas. Verses 1 and 2 give background information about Timothy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 16 1 d4ka Δέρβην 1 Derbe **Derbe** is the name of a city in Asia Minor. See how you translated it in [Acts 14:6](../14/06.md). ACT 16 1 u3vr ἰδοὺ 1 behold The word **behold** alerts us to a new person in the narrative. Your language may have a way of doing this. ACT 16 1 wxl8 figs-ellipsis γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς 1 a believing Jewish woman The words “in Christ” are understood. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 16 2 t1lu figs-activepassive ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 He was well spoken of by the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “The brothers spoke well of him” or “Timothy had a good reputation among the brothers” or “The brothers said good things about him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 2 rez2 ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 by the brothers Here, **brothers** refers to believers. Alternate translation: “by the believers” -ACT 16 3 p6z8 περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν 1 he circumcised him It is possible that Paul himself circumcised Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise Timothy. +ACT 16 3 p6z8 περιέτεμεν αὐτὸν 1 he circumcised him It is possible that Paul himself **circumcised** Timothy, but it is more likely that he had someone else circumcise Timothy. ACT 16 3 za93 διὰ τοὺς Ἰουδαίους τοὺς ὄντας ἐν τοῖς τόποις ἐκείνοις 1 because of the Jews who were in those places Alternate translation: “because of the Jews living in the areas where Paul and Timothy would be traveling” -ACT 16 3 hk2l figs-explicit ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν 1 for they all knew that his father was a Greek Since Greek men did not have their sons circumcised, the Jews would have known Timothy was not circumcised, and they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 4 n46i 0 General Information: The word “they” here refers to Paul, Silas ([Acts 15:40](../15/40.md)), and Timothy ([Acts 16:3](../16/03.md)). +ACT 16 3 hk2l figs-explicit ᾔδεισαν γὰρ ἅπαντες, ὅτι Ἕλλην ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ ὑπῆρχεν 1 for they all knew that his father was a Greek Since **Greek** men did not have their sons circumcised, the Jews would have known Timothy was not circumcised, and they would have rejected Paul and Timothy before hearing their message about Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 4 n46i διεπορεύοντο…παρεδίδοσαν 1 General Information: The word **they** here refers to Paul, Silas ([Acts 15:40](../15/40.md)), and Timothy ([Acts 16:3](../16/03.md)). ACT 16 4 bu6r αὐτοῖς φυλάσσειν 1 for them to keep Alternate translation: “for the church members to obey” or “for the believers to obey” ACT 16 4 gpi3 figs-activepassive τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ πρεσβυτέρων τῶν ἐν Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 that had been decided by the apostles and elders who were in Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that the apostles and elders in Jerusalem had written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 5 q8v9 figs-activepassive αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει, καὶ ἐπερίσσευον τῷ ἀριθμῷ καθ’ ἡμέραν 1 the churches were being strengthened in the faith and were increasing in number each day If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the believers became stronger in their faith, and there were more and more people becoming believers every day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 5 lv4f figs-metaphor αἱ…ἐκκλησίαι ἐστερεοῦντο τῇ πίστει 1 the churches were being strengthened in the faith This speaks of helping someone to believe more confidently as if it were making them physically stronger. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 16 6 g97e τὴν Φρυγίαν 1 Phrygia This is a region in Asia. See how you translated this name in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). +ACT 16 6 g97e τὴν Φρυγίαν 1 Phrygia **Phrygia** is a region in Asia. See how you translated this name in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). ACT 16 6 ue3k figs-activepassive κωλυθέντες ὑπὸ τοῦ Ἁγίου Πνεύματος 1 having been forbidden by the Holy Spirit If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for the Holy Spirit had forbidden them” or “because the Holy Spirit did not permit them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 6 h4u4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 the word Here, **word** stands for “message.” Alternate translation: “the message about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 7 x1b1 figs-go ἐλθόντες 1 when they had come Here, **had come** can be translated as “had gone” or “had arrived.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -ACT 16 7 b1xq translate-names Μυσίαν…Βιθυνίαν 1 Mysia … Bithynia These are two more regions in Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 16 7 b1xq translate-names Μυσίαν…Βιθυνίαν 1 Mysia … Bithynia **Mysia** and **Bithynia** are two more regions in Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 7 b539 τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ 1 the Spirit of Jesus Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit” ACT 16 8 s6l1 κατέβησαν εἰς Τρῳάδα 1 they came down to the city of Troas The phrase **came down** is used here because Troas is lower in elevation than Mysia. ACT 16 8 xq6n figs-go κατέβησαν 1 they came down Here, **came** can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 16 9 t6v2 ὅραμα…τῷ Παύλῳ ὤφθη 1 a vision appeared to Paul Alternate translation: “Paul saw a vision from God” or “Paul had a vision from God” ACT 16 9 hq8e παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν 1 calling him Alternate translation: “begging him” or “inviting him” -ACT 16 9 cm2u διαβὰς εἰς Μακεδονίαν 1 Coming over into Macedonia The phrase **Coming over** is used because Macedonia is across the sea from Troas. +ACT 16 9 cm2u διαβὰς εἰς Μακεδονίαν 1 Coming over into Macedonia The phrase **coming over** is used because **Macedonia** is across the sea from Troas. ACT 16 10 fg5h ἐζητήσαμεν ἐξελθεῖν εἰς Μακεδονίαν, συμβιβάζοντες ὅτι προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εὐαγγελίσασθαι αὐτούς 1 we sought to go out to Macedonia, reasoning together that God had called us to proclaim the gospel to them Here the words **we** and **us** refer to Paul and his companions including Luke, the author of Acts. -ACT 16 11 m2p5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and his companions are now in Philippi on their missionary trip. Verse 13 begins the story of Lydia. This short story happens during Paul’s travels. -ACT 16 11 q2pr translate-names Σαμοθρᾴκην…Νέαν Πόλιν 1 Samothrace … Neapolis These are coastal cities near Phillipi in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 16 12 tl9f figs-explicit κολωνία 1 a colony This is a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 14 x8bp 0 Connecting Statement: This ends the story of Lydia. -ACT 16 14 n952 writing-participants τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία 1 a certain woman named Lydia Here, **a certain woman** introduces a new person in the story. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 16 11 m2p5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul and his companions are now in Philippi on their missionary trip. +ACT 16 11 q2pr translate-names Σαμοθρᾴκην…Νέαν Πόλιν 1 Samothrace … Neapolis **Samothrace** and **Neapolis** are coastal cities near Phillipi in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 16 12 tl9f figs-explicit κολωνία 1 a colony This **colony** was a city outside of Italy where many people who came from Rome lived. The people there had the same rights and freedoms as people who lived in cities in Italy. They could govern themselves and they did not have to pay taxes. Alternate translation: “a Roman colony” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 14 n952 writing-participants τις γυνὴ ὀνόματι Λυδία 1 a certain woman named Lydia Here, **a certain woman** introduces **Lydia** as a new person in the story. Alternate translation: “there was a woman named Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 16 14 qj86 figs-ellipsis πορφυρόπωλις 1 a seller of purple Here “cloth” is understood. Alternate translation: “a merchant who sold purple cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -ACT 16 14 c6n8 translate-names Θυατείρων 1 of Thyatira This is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 16 14 c6n8 translate-names Θυατείρων 1 of Thyatira **Thyatira** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 16 14 cyk3 σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν 1 worshiping God When Luke says Lydia was **worshiping God**, he is saying that she was a Gentile who gave praise to God and followed him, but did not obey all of the Jewish laws. ACT 16 14 rd4r figs-metaphor ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν, προσέχειν 1 of whom the Lord opened the heart to pay attention to For the Lord to cause someone to **pay attention** and believe a message is spoken of as if he were opening a person’s **heart**. Alternate translation: “and the Lord caused her to listen well and to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 14 s9ju figs-metonymy διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 opened the heart Here, **heart** stands for a person’s mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 14 ddx8 figs-metaphor διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 The author speaks about the **heart** or “mind” as if it were a box that a person could open so it is ready for someone to fill it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 14 a74y figs-activepassive τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου 1 what was being said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 15 g7e9 figs-activepassive ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 And when she was baptized, and her household If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when they baptized Lydia and members of her household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 15 s799 figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 her household This refers to all the people who live in her house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 16 vyn4 writing-background 0 General Information: Background information is given here to explain that this young fortune teller brought much financial gain to her masters by guessing people’s futures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 16 16 anc1 0 Connecting Statement: This begins the first event in another short story during Paul’s travels; it is about a young fortune teller. +ACT 16 15 s799 figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 her household Here, **her household** refers to all the people who live in her house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 16 ufy4 ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that This phrase marks the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. +ACT 16 16 vyn4 writing-background παιδίσκην τινὰ ἔχουσαν πνεῦμα Πύθωνα, ὑπαντῆσαι ἡμῖν, ἥτις ἐργασίαν πολλὴν παρεῖχεν τοῖς κυρίοις αὐτῆς μαντευομένη 1 General Information: This verse give background information to explain that this young fortune teller brought much financial gain to her masters by guessing people’s futures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 16 16 y1gc writing-participants παιδίσκην τινὰ 1 a certain young female slave The phrase **a certain** introduces a new person to the story. Alternate translation: “there was a young female slave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 16 16 ymt9 πνεῦμα Πύθωνα 1 a spirit of divination An evil spirit spoke to her often about the immediate future of people. +ACT 16 16 ymt9 πνεῦμα Πύθωνα 1 a spirit of divination An evil **spirit** spoke to her often about the immediate future of people. ACT 16 17 tni9 figs-metaphor ὁδὸν σωτηρίας 1 the way of salvation How a person can be saved is spoken of here as if it were a way or path that a person walks on. Alternate translation: “how God can save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 16 18 lj79 figs-activepassive διαπονηθεὶς δὲ Παῦλος, καὶ ἐπιστρέψας 1 But Paul, being greatly annoyed and turning If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But she greatly annoyed Paul so he turned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 18 qi1k figs-metonymy ἐν ὀνόματι Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 in the name of Jesus Christ Here, **name** stands for speaking with the authority or as the representative of Jesus Christ. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 18 u4z8 ἐξῆλθεν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ 1 it came out that same hour Alternate translation: “the spirit came out immediately” ACT 16 19 m1y7 οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς 1 her masters Alternate translation: “the owners of the slave girl” ACT 16 19 r1a1 figs-explicit ἰδόντες…οἱ κύριοι αὐτῆς, ὅτι ἐξῆλθεν ἡ ἐλπὶς τῆς ἐργασίας αὐτῶν 1 when her masters saw that their hope of profit was gone It can be stated clearly why they no longer hoped to make money. Alternate translation: “when her masters saw that she could no longer earn money for them by telling fortunes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 19 bws7 εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 1 into the marketplace This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services takes place. Alternate translation: “into the public square” +ACT 16 19 bws7 εἰς τὴν ἀγορὰν 1 into the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services took place. Alternate translation: “into the public square” ACT 16 19 hf82 ἐπὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας 1 before the authorities Alternate translation: “into the presence of the authorities” or “so that the authorities could judge them” ACT 16 20 d2rg προσαγαγόντες αὐτοὺς τοῖς στρατηγοῖς 1 when they had brought them to the magistrates Alternate translation: “when they had brought them to the judges” -ACT 16 20 wa94 τοῖς στρατηγοῖς 1 to the magistrates These were rulers or judges. +ACT 16 20 wa94 τοῖς στρατηγοῖς 1 to the magistrates These **magistrates** were rulers or judges. ACT 16 20 dkz2 figs-exclusive οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἐκταράσσουσιν ἡμῶν τὴν πόλιν 1 These men are stirring up our city Here the word **our** refers to the people of the city and includes the magistrates who ruled it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 21 gna6 παραδέχεσθαι οὐδὲ ποιεῖν 1 to accept nor to practice Alternate translation: “to believe nor to obey” or “to accept nor to do” -ACT 16 22 r1gr 0 General Information: Here the words “their” and “them” refer to Paul and Silas. The word “they” here refers to soldiers. +ACT 16 22 r1gr αὐτῶν…περιρήξαντες αὐτῶν τὰ ἱμάτια, ἐκέλευον 1 General Information: Here the words **their** and **them** refer to Paul and Silas. ACT 16 22 at6i figs-activepassive ἐκέλευον ῥαβδίζειν 1 commanding them to be beaten with rods If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “commanding the soldiers to beat them with rods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 23 dsr3 πολλάς…ἐπιθέντες αὐτοῖς πληγὰς 1 when they had laid many blows upon them Alternate translation: “when they had hit them many times with rods” ACT 16 23 y4mc παραγγείλαντες τῷ δεσμοφύλακι ἀσφαλῶς τηρεῖν αὐτούς 1 having commanded the jailer to guard them securely Alternate translation: “having told the jailer to make sure they did not escape” -ACT 16 23 zkp7 δεσμοφύλακι 1 jailer a person responsible for all the people held in the jail or prison +ACT 16 23 zkp7 δεσμοφύλακι 1 jailer A **jailer** was a person responsible for all the people held in the jail or prison. ACT 16 24 a79x ὃς παραγγελίαν τοιαύτην λαβὼν 1 who, having received such a command Alternate translation: “who, when he heard this command” ACT 16 24 rl8c τοὺς πόδας ἠσφαλίσατο αὐτῶν εἰς τὸ ξύλον 1 fastened their feet in the stocks Alternate translation: “securely locked their feet in the stocks” -ACT 16 24 jug6 ξύλον 1 stocks a piece of wood with holes for preventing a person’s feet from moving -ACT 16 25 rwu3 0 General Information: The word “them” refers to Paul and Silas. -ACT 16 25 hme2 0 Connecting Statement: This continues Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi in prison and tells what happens to their jailer. +ACT 16 24 jug6 ξύλον 1 stocks The **stocks** was a wooden frame with holes for a person’s feet that prevented them from moving. ACT 16 26 q7z1 figs-activepassive σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας, ὥστε σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 a great earthquake happened, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “a severe earthquake shook the foundations of the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 26 m4ye figs-synecdoche τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 the foundations of the prison When the foundations shook, this caused the entire prison to shake. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 16 26 m4ye figs-synecdoche σαλευθῆναι τὰ θεμέλια τοῦ δεσμωτηρίου 1 the foundations of the prison When the **foundations** shook, this caused the entire prison to shake. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 16 26 s6mu figs-activepassive ἠνεῴχθησαν…αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι 1 all the doors were opened If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “all the doors opened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 26 p393 figs-activepassive πάντων τὰ δεσμὰ ἀνέθη 1 the chains of everyone were unfastened If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone’s chains came loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 27 ljy6 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” refers to Paul, Silas, and all of the other prisoners but excludes the jailer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 27 hr9q figs-activepassive ἔξυπνος…γενόμενος ὁ δεσμοφύλαξ 1 the jailer became awake If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the jailer woke up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 27 cwt5 ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν 1 he was about to kill himself The jailer preferred to commit suicide rather than suffer the consequences of letting the prisoners escape. Alternate translation: “he was ready to kill himself” -ACT 16 29 pe66 figs-explicit αἰτήσας…φῶτα 1 having called for lights The reason why the jailer needed light can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after he called for someone to bring light so he could see who was still in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 28 ljy6 figs-exclusive ἐσμεν 1 General Information: Here the word **we** refers to Paul, Silas, and all of the other prisoners but excludes the jailer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 16 29 pe66 figs-explicit αἰτήσας…φῶτα 1 having called for lights The reason why the jailer needed **light** can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after he called for someone to bring light so he could see who was still in the prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 16 29 h5ai figs-metonymy φῶτα 1 lights The word **lights** stands for something that makes light. Alternate translation: “torches” or “lamps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 29 r6is εἰσεπήδησεν 1 he rushed in Alternate translation: “he quickly entered the jail” -ACT 16 29 bb6t translate-symaction προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ 1 fell down before Paul and Silas The jailer humbled himself by bowing down at the feet of Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +ACT 16 29 bb6t translate-symaction προσέπεσεν τῷ Παύλῳ καὶ Σιλᾷ 1 fell down before Paul and Silas The jailer humbled himself by bowing down at the feet of **Paul and Silas**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 16 30 a3h6 προαγαγὼν αὐτοὺς ἔξω 1 having brought them out Alternate translation: “after he had led them outside the jail” ACT 16 30 u132 figs-activepassive τί με δεῖ ποιεῖν, ἵνα σωθῶ 1 what must I do in order to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “what must I do in order for God to save me from my sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 16 31 br4k figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 you will be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God will save you” or “God will save you from your sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 31 w8ed figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκός σου 1 your household This refers to all the people who live in the house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 16 32 kb35 0 General Information: Here the first use of the word “they” as well as the words “their” and “them” refer to Paul and Silas. Compare [Acts 16:25](../16/25.md). The last use of the word “they” refers to the people in the jailers’ household. The words “him,” “his,” and “he” refer to the jailer. +ACT 16 31 w8ed figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκός σου 1 your household Here, **your household** refers to all the people who lived in the house. Alternate translation: “all the members of your household” or “your family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy ἐλάλησαν αὐτῷ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 they spoke the word of the Lord to him Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “they told him the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 33 r3la figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη, αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ αὐτοῦ πάντες παραχρῆμα 1 he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas immediately baptized the jailer and all the members of his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 16 35 x3x8 0 General Information: This is the last event in the story of Paul and Silas in Philippi ([Acts 16:12](../16/12.md)). -ACT 16 35 lb4z δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells the last event in the story that started in [Acts 16:16](../16/16.md). +ACT 16 35 lb4z δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke tells the last event in the story that started in [Acts 16:16](../16/16.md). ACT 16 35 vev9 ἀπόλυσον τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐκείνους 1 Release those men Alternate translation: “Allow those men to leave” ACT 16 36 k3i6 ἐξελθόντες 1 having come out Alternate translation: “having come out of the jail” -ACT 16 37 v4yk figs-exclusive 0 General Information: All of the times the word “they” is used and the first time “them” is used, the words refer to the magistrates. The word “themselves” refers to the magistrates. The second time the word “them” is used, it refers to Paul and Silas. The word “us” refers only to Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 16 37 v4yk figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἔβαλαν…ἡμᾶς…ἡμᾶς 1 General Information: The word **us** refers only to Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 16 37 b4jm figs-explicit ἔφη πρὸς αὐτούς 1 said to them Probably Paul is speaking to the jailer, but he intends for the jailer to tell the magistrates what he says. Alternate translation: “said to the jailer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 37 b7cc figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 They have beaten us in public Here “They” refers to the magistrates who commanded their soldiers to beat them. Alternate translation: “The magistrates ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 16 37 b7cc figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 They have beaten us in public Here **They** refers to the magistrates who commanded their soldiers to beat them. Alternate translation: “The magistrates ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 16 37 wc37 ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν 1 without trial—men being Romans—they threw us into prison Alternate translation: “without a trial to prove us guilty, even though we are Roman citizens, and they had their soldiers put us in jail” ACT 16 37 qq1u figs-rquestion λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? οὔ γάρ 1 they cast us out secretly? No indeed! Paul uses a question to emphasize that he will not allow the magistrates to send them out the city in secret after they had mistreated Paul and Silas. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “I will certainly not let them send us out of the city in secret!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 16 37 jr2j figs-rpronouns ἀλλὰ ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ 1 Instead, coming themselves Here, **themselves** is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -ACT 16 38 ym2u figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans To be a Roman meant to be a legal citizens of the Empire. Citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. The city leaders were afraid that more important Roman authorities might learn how the city leaders had mistreated Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ACT 16 40 q59h 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Silas. The word “them” refers to the believers in Philippi. +ACT 16 38 ym2u figs-explicit ἐφοβήθησαν…ἀκούσαντες ὅτι Ῥωμαῖοί εἰσιν 1 they were terrified when they heard that they are Romans To be a Roman meant to be a legal citizens of the Roman Empire. Citizenship provided freedom from torture and the right to a fair trial. The city leaders were afraid that more important Roman authorities might learn how the city leaders had mistreated Paul and Silas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 16 40 q59h εἰσῆλθον…ἰδόντες, παρεκάλεσαν 1 General Information: Here the word **they** refers to Paul and Silas. The word **them** refers to the believers in Philippi. ACT 16 40 y14i writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of Paul and Silas’ time in Philippi. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 16 40 t1pf figs-go εἰσῆλθον πρὸς τὴν Λυδίαν 1 they came to the house of Lydia Here, **came** can be translated as “went.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 16 40 ylk9 τὴν Λυδίαν 1 the house of Lydia Alternate translation: “the home of Lydia” ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-gendernotations ἰδόντες…τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had seen the brothers Here, **the brothers** refers to believers whether male or female. Alternate translation: “when they had visited with the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 17 intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Misunderstandings about the Messiah

The Jews expected the Christ or Messiah to be a powerful king because the Old Testament says so many times. But it also says many times that the Messiah would suffer, and that was what Paul was telling the Jews. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]])

### The religion of Athens

Paul said that the Athenians were “religious,” but they did not worship the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples and begun to worship the gods of the people they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])

In this chapter Luke describes for the first time how Paul told the message of Christ to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament. -ACT 17 1 q9x4 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to Paul and Silas. Compare [Acts 16:40](../16/40.md). The word “them” refers to the Jews at the synagogue in Thessalonica. -ACT 17 1 r3qb 0 Connecting Statement: This continues the story of Paul, Silas, and Timothy’s missionary trip. They arrive in Thessalonica, apparently without Luke, since he says “they” and not “we.” -ACT 17 1 e4w5 δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke, the author, starts to tell a new part of the story. +ACT 17 1 e4w5 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke, the author, starts to tell a new part of the story. ACT 17 1 b7np διοδεύσαντες 1 having passed through Alternate translation: “when they had traveled through” -ACT 17 1 kll1 translate-names τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν 1 Amphipolis and Apollonia These are coastal cities in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 1 q9x4 ἦλθον 1 General Information: Here the word **they** refers to Paul and Silas. They arrive in Thessalonica, apparently without Luke, since he says “they” and not “we.” Compare [Acts 16:40](../16/40.md). +ACT 17 1 kll1 translate-names τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν 1 Amphipolis and Apollonia **Amphipolis** and **Apollonia** are coastal cities in Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 1 yj66 figs-go ἦλθον εἰς Θεσσαλονίκην 1 they came to Thessalonica Here, **came** can be translated as “went” or “arrived.” Alternate translation: “they went to Thessalonica” or “they arrived at Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) ACT 17 2 vbf2 κατὰ…τὸ εἰωθὸς 1 according to his custom Paul usually went to the synagogue on the Sabbath when Jews would be present. Alternate translation: “as his habit was” or “as his common practice was” ACT 17 2 bt5e ἐπὶ Σάββατα τρία 1 for three Sabbaths Alternate translation: “on each Sabbath day for three weeks” -ACT 17 2 wp3k figs-explicit διελέξατο αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν Γραφῶν 1 reasoned with them from the scriptures Paul explained what the scriptures means in order to prove to the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 17 2 wp3k figs-explicit διελέξατο αὐτοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν Γραφῶν 1 reasoned with them from the scriptures Paul explained what the **Scriptures** means in order to prove to the Jews that Jesus is the Messiah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 2 qf4t διελέξατο αὐτοῖς 1 reasoned with them Alternate translation: “debated with them” or “discussed with them” -ACT 17 3 e85n 0 General Information: Here the word “He” refers to Paul ([Acts 17:2](../17/02.md)). ACT 17 3 ir9q figs-metaphor διανοίγων 1 He is fully opening This could mean: (1) to explain the scriptures in a way that people can understand is spoken of as if Paul were opening something so people can see what is inside of it, or (2) Paul was literally opening a book or scroll and reading from it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 3 he78 ἔδει 1 it was necessary for Alternate translation: “it was part of God’s plan for” ACT 17 3 ipb2 ἀναστῆναι 1 to rise Alternate translation: “to come back to life” -ACT 17 3 b9qi ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again. +ACT 17 3 b9qi ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again. ACT 17 4 es2u figs-activepassive τινες ἐξ αὐτῶν ἐπείσθησαν 1 some from them were persuaded If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews believed” or “some of the Jews understood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 4 nyp2 προσεκληρώθησαν τῷ Παύλῳ 1 joined Paul Alternate translation: “became associated with Paul” -ACT 17 4 t21z σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων 1 of worshiping Greeks This refers to Greeks who worship God but have not converted to Judaism through circumcision. -ACT 17 4 ye8v figs-litotes γυναικῶν…τῶν πρώτων οὐκ ὀλίγαι 1 not a few of the leading women This is an understatement to emphasize that many leading women joined them. Alternate translation: “many leading women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 17 5 nuh6 0 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to the unbelieving Jews and wicked men from the marketplace. +ACT 17 4 t21z σεβομένων Ἑλλήνων 1 of worshiping Greeks This refers to **Greeks** who worship God but have not converted to Judaism through circumcision. +ACT 17 4 ye8v figs-litotes γυναικῶν…τῶν πρώτων οὐκ ὀλίγαι 1 not a few of the leading women Here, **not a few** is an understatement to emphasize that many **leading women** joined them. Alternate translation: “many leading women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 17 5 nuh6 ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν…ἐζήτουν 1 General Information: Here the word **they** refers to the unbelieving Jews and wicked men from the marketplace. ACT 17 5 uj43 figs-metaphor ζηλώσαντες 1 having become jealous The feeling of jealousy is spoken of as if jealousy were actually moving the person. Alternate translation: “feeling very jealous” or “feeling very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 5 vev6 figs-explicit ζηλώσαντες 1 having become jealous It can be stated explicitly that these Jews were jealous because some of the Jews and Greeks believed Paul’s message. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +ACT 17 5 vev6 figs-explicit ζηλώσαντες 1 having become jealous It can be stated explicitly that these Jews were **jealous** because some of the Jews and Greeks believed Paul’s message. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 17 5 btw6 προσλαβόμενοι τῶν ἀγοραίων ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς 1 having taken certain wicked men of the marketplace Here, **having taken** does not mean the Jews took these people by force. It means the Jews persuaded these wicked men to help them. ACT 17 5 lc6g ἄνδρας τινὰς πονηροὺς 1 certain wicked men The word **men** here refers specifically to males. Alternate translation: “some evil men” -ACT 17 5 ie1f τῶν ἀγοραίων 1 of the marketplace This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “from the public square” +ACT 17 5 ie1f τῶν ἀγοραίων 1 of the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “from the public square” ACT 17 5 t3bc figs-metonymy ἐθορύβουν τὴν πόλιν 1 they set the city in an uproar Here, **the city** stands for the people in the city. Alternate translation: “they caused the people of the city to be in an uproar” or “they caused the people of the city to riot” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 17 5 s3uv ἐπιστάντες τῇ οἰκίᾳ 1 having assaulted the house This probably means the people were throwing rocks at the house and trying to break down the door of the house. Alternate translation: “having violently attacking the house” +ACT 17 5 s3uv ἐπιστάντες τῇ οἰκίᾳ 1 having assaulted the house This phrase probably means the people were throwing rocks at the **house** and trying to break down the door of the house. Alternate translation: “having violently attacking the house” ACT 17 5 ks2l translate-names Ἰάσονος 1 of Jason **Jason** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 5 abcu αὐτοὺς προαγαγεῖν 1 to lead them Alternate translation: “to bring Paul and Silas” ACT 17 5 pp7k εἰς τὸν δῆμον 1 to the people This could mean: (1) a governmental or legal group of citizens gathered to make a decision or (2) an unruly mob. ACT 17 6 i79p τινας ἀδελφοὺς 1 certain brothers Here, **brothers** refers to believers. Alternate translation: “some other believers” ACT 17 6 e44z ἐπὶ τοὺς πολιτάρχας 1 before the city officials Alternate translation: “in the presence of the city officials” -ACT 17 6 g7xj οἱ…οὗτοι 1 Those who … they The Jewish leaders were referring to Paul and Silas. +ACT 17 6 g7xj οἱ…οὗτοι 1 Those who … they The Jewish leaders were using the pronouns **Those** and **they** to refer to Paul and Silas. ACT 17 6 c2av figs-idiom τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 have turned the inhabited world upside down This phrase is another way of saying Paul and Silas where causing trouble everywhere they went. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere in the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) ACT 17 6 x90b figs-hyperbole τὴν οἰκουμένην ἀναστατώσαντες 1 The Jewish leaders were exaggerating the influence Paul and Silas were having with their teaching. Alternate translation: “have caused trouble everywhere they have gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 7 hlc9 ὑποδέδεκται Ἰάσων; καὶ οὗτοι πάντες 1 Jason and all these men have welcomed This phrase signals that Jason and his companions were in agreement with the apostles’ troubling message. @@ -2133,42 +2095,42 @@ ACT 17 11 hle3 figs-metonymy ἐδέξαντο τὸν λόγον 1 received the ACT 17 11 uh8a μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας 1 with all readiness These Bereans were prepared to examine earnestly Paul’s teachings about the scripture. ACT 17 11 lzm3 καθ’ ἡμέραν ἀνακρίνοντες τὰς Γραφὰς 1 examining the scriptures each day Alternate translation: “carefully reading and evaluating the scriptures every day” ACT 17 11 g8an ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως 1 these things were so Alternate translation: “the things Paul said were true” -ACT 17 12 abcv figs-litotes ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι 1 not a few men This is an understatement to emphasize that many men believed the message. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 17 13 vn8h translate-names 0 General Information: Athens is down the coast from Barea which is in Macedonia. Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 12 abcv figs-litotes ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι 1 not a few men Here, **not a few** is an understatement to emphasize that many men believed the message. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 17 13 asb4 figs-metaphor ἦλθον κἀκεῖ, σαλεύοντες 1 they came and there stirred up This speaks about their agitating people as though it were a person stirring a liquid and causing the things at the bottom of the liquid to rise to the surface. Alternate translation: “they came there and agitated” or “they went there and disturbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 13 wjq3 ταράσσοντες τοὺς ὄχλους 1 troubled the crowds Alternate translation: “worried the crowds” or “caused the people to become upset” ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers The word **brothers** here refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 17 14 zw1c πορεύεσθαι ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 to go as far as to the sea From here Paul would probably sail to another city. Alternate translation: “to go all the way to the coast” ACT 17 15 tjh5 καθιστάνοντες τὸν Παῦλον 1 were leading Paul down Alternate translation: “who were accompanying Paul” or “who were going down with Paul” +ACT 17 15 vn8h translate-names Ἀθηνῶν 1 General Information: **Athens** is down the coast from Barea which is in Macedonia. Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 15 gs1p figs-quotations λαβόντες ἐντολὴν πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον 1 after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy This can also be stated as a direct quotation as in the UST. Alternate translation: “after telling them to command Silas and Timothy so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -ACT 17 16 wk63 0 General Information: This is another part of the story of Paul and Silas’ travels. Paul is now in Athens where he is waiting for Silas and Timothy to join him. -ACT 17 16 y9cr δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story. +ACT 17 16 y9cr δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story. +ACT 17 16 wk63 ἐν…ταῖς Ἀθήναις, ἐκδεχομένου αὐτοὺς τοῦ Παύλου 1 General Information: This is another part of the story of **Paul** and Silas’ travels. Paul is now in **Athens** where he is waiting for Silas and Timothy to join him. ACT 17 16 we78 figs-synecdoche παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν 1 his spirit was being provoked within him, seeing the city being full of idols Here, **his spirit** stands for Paul himself. Alternate translation: “he was provoked because he saw that there were idols everywhere in the city” or “seeing the idols everywhere in the city, he was provoked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 16 s011 figs-activepassive παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he became upset” or “the city upset him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 17 17 q8px διελέγετο 1 he reasoned This means that there is interaction from the listeners rather than only his preaching. They are talking with him as well. Alternate translation: “he debated” or “he discussed” +ACT 17 17 q8px διελέγετο 1 he reasoned This phrase means that there is interaction from the listeners rather than only his preaching. They are talking with him as well. Alternate translation: “he debated” or “he discussed” ACT 17 17 jkj8 τοῖς σεβομένοις 1 those who were worshiping This refers to Gentiles (non-Jews) who give praise to God and follow him but do not obey all of the Jewish laws. -ACT 17 17 ec14 ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 in the marketplace This is a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “in the public square” -ACT 17 18 ru6a 0 General Information: Here the words “him,” “He,” and “he” refer to Paul. +ACT 17 17 ec14 ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 in the marketplace The **marketplace** was a public place of business, where buying and selling of goods, cattle, or services take place. Alternate translation: “in the public square” +ACT 17 18 ru6a αὐτῷ…δοκεῖ…εὐηγγελίζετο 1 General Information: Here the words **him**, **He**, and **he** refer to Paul. ACT 17 18 l7le translate-names τῶν Ἐπικουρίων καὶ Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων 1 of the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers These people believed all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 17 18 f976 translate-names Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων 1 Stoic philosophers These people believed freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 18 f976 translate-names Στοϊκῶν φιλοσόφων 1 Stoic philosophers These **Stoic philosophers** believed freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 18 dnj8 τινες ἔλεγον 1 some said Alternate translation: “some of the Stoic philosophers said” -ACT 17 18 g4bv figs-metaphor τί ἂν θέλοι ὁ σπερμολόγος οὗτος λέγειν? 1 What is this babbler wanting to say? The word “babbler” was used to refer to birds picking up seeds as food. It refers negatively to a person who only knows a little bit of information. The philosophers said Paul had bits of information which were not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “What is this uneducated person trying to say?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 18 k2ps οἱ δέ, ξένων 1 But others said Alternate translation: “But other philosophers said” +ACT 17 18 g4bv figs-metaphor τί ἂν θέλοι ὁ σπερμολόγος οὗτος λέγειν? 1 What is this babbler wanting to say? The word **babbler** was used to refer to birds picking up seeds as food. It refers negatively to a person who only knows a little bit of information. The philosophers said Paul had bits of information which were not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “What is this uneducated person trying to say?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 18 k2ps οἱ δέ 1 But others said Alternate translation: “But other philosophers said” ACT 17 18 l41t δοκεῖ καταγγελεὺς εἶναι 1 He seems to be a proclaimer Alternate translation: “He seems to be teaching a philosophy” -ACT 17 18 sx9t ξένων δαιμονίων 1 of foreign gods That is, gods that Greeks and Romans do not worship or know about. -ACT 17 19 fs5g figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The words “him,” “He” and “you” refer to Paul ([Acts 17:18](../17/18.md)). Here the words “They” and “we” refer to the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 17 18 sx9t ξένων δαιμονίων 1 of foreign gods That is, **gods** that Greeks and Romans do not worship or know about. ACT 17 19 mv8c ἐπιλαβόμενοί τε αὐτοῦ, ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον ἤγαγον 1 And taking hold of him, they brought him to the Areopagus This does not mean they arrested Paul. The philosophers invited Paul to speak formally to their leaders. ACT 17 19 b56g figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 to the Areopagus The **Areopagus** was the place where the leaders met. Alternate translation: “to the leaders that met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 17 19 ze7e τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον…λέγοντες 1 the Areopagus, saying Here the leaders on the Areopagus are speaking. This can stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the Areopagus. The leaders said to Paul” -ACT 17 19 unc8 translate-names Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 Areopagus This is a prominent rock outcropping or hill in Athens upon which the supreme court of Athens may have met. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 19 ze7e τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον…λέγοντες 1 the Areopagus, saying Here the leaders on the **Areopagus** are speaking. This can stated as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “the Areopagus. The leaders said to Paul” +ACT 17 19 unc8 translate-names Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 Areopagus The **Areopagus** is a prominent rock outcropping or hill in Athens upon which the supreme court of Athens may have met. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 20 lay8 figs-metaphor ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 For you are bringing some strange things to our ears Paul’s teachings about Jesus and the resurrection are spoken of as an object that a person can bring to another person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 17 20 fs5g figs-exclusive βουλόμεθα 1 General Information: Here the word **we** refers to the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 20 us7g figs-metonymy ξενίζοντα γάρ τινα εἰσφέρεις εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς ἡμῶν 1 Here, **ears** refers to what they hear. Alternate translation: “For you are teaching some things that we have never heard before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 21 dn1t figs-hyperbole Ἀθηναῖοι δὲ πάντες καὶ οἱ ἐπιδημοῦντες ξένοι 1 And all the Athenians and the foreigners living there The word **all** is a generalization referring to many. Alternate translation: “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” or “And many of the Athenians and the strangers living there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 17 21 d8yb translate-names Ἀθηναῖοι 1 the Athenians **Athenians** are people from Athens, a city near the coast below Macedonia (present day Greece). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 21 d8yb translate-names Ἀθηναῖοι 1 the Athenians Here, **the Athenians** are people from Athens, a city near the coast below Macedonia (present day Greece). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 17 21 sk5b figs-metaphor εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν, ἢ λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν 1 spent their time in nothing other than either to tell something or to listen to Here, **time** is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “used their time doing nothing but either telling or listening to” or “were always doing nothing but telling or listening to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 21 ij4e figs-hyperbole εἰς οὐδὲν ἕτερον ηὐκαίρουν 1 spent their time in nothing other than The phrase **spent their time in nothing** is an exaggeration. Alternate translation: “did not do much but” or “spent much of their time only” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 17 21 wr1r λέγειν τι ἢ ἀκούειν τι καινότερον 1 to tell something or to listen to something new Alternate translation: “discussing new philosophical ideas” or “talking about what was new to them” -ACT 17 22 zq3y 0 General Information: Paul begins his speech to the philosophers on the Areopagus. +ACT 17 22 zq3y ἄνδρες, Ἀθηναῖοι, κατὰ πάντα ὡς δεισιδαιμονεστέρους ὑμᾶς θεωρῶ 1 General Information: Paul begins his speech to the philosophers on the Areopagus. ACT 17 22 ja1k κατὰ πάντα…δεισιδαιμονεστέρους 1 very religious in every way Paul is referring to the Athenians’ public display of honoring the gods through prayers, building altars, and offering sacrifices. ACT 17 23 gn1j διερχόμενος γὰρ 1 For passing through Alternate translation: “Because as I was walked through” or “As I was walking along” ACT 17 23 cem7 ἀγνώστῳ Θεῷ 1 To an Unknown God This could mean: (1) “to a certain unknown god” or (2) “to a god not known.” This was a specific writing or inscription on that altar. @@ -2179,58 +2141,56 @@ ACT 17 24 ju4h figs-synecdoche χειροποιήτοις 1 built with hands Her ACT 17 25 e3dg figs-activepassive οὐδὲ ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων θεραπεύεται 1 Neither is he served by hands of men Here, **served** has the sense of a doctor treating a patient to make the patient well again. Alternate translation: “Neither do men take care of him with their hands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 17 25 yq68 figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ χειρῶν ἀνθρωπίνων 1 by hands of men Here, **hands** stands for the whole person. Alternate translation: “by humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 17 25 sj89 figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς διδοὺς 1 himself giving The word **himself** is added for emphasis. Alternate translation: “because he himself gives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -ACT 17 26 r3lt figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the words “he” and “him” refer to the one true God, the creator. The words “their” and “them” refer to every nation of people living on the surface of the earth. In using the word “us,” Paul includes himself, his audience, and every nation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 17 26 p1e4 ἑνὸς 1 one man This means Adam, the first person God created. +ACT 17 26 r3lt ἐποίησέν…προστεταγμένους…αὐτῶν 1 General Information: Here the word **he** refers to the one true God, the creator. Both occurrences of the word **their** refer to every nation of people living on the surface of the earth. +ACT 17 26 p1e4 ἑνὸς 1 one man This refers to Adam, the first person God created. ACT 17 26 js4p ὁρίσας προστεταγμένους καιροὺς καὶ τὰς ὁροθεσίας τῆς κατοικίας αὐτῶν 1 having determined their appointed seasons and the boundaries of their habitation You can state this as a new sentence. Alternate translation: “And he determined when and where they would live” ACT 17 27 jae5 figs-metaphor ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν, εἰ ἄρα γε ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν 1 to seek God and perhaps they might feel around for him and find him Here, **to seek God** represents desiring to know him, and **feel around for him and find him** represents praying and having a relationship with him. Alternate translation: “so that they should want to know God and perhaps pray to him and become one of his people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 17 27 p8hk figs-litotes καί γε οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἡμῶν ὑπάρχοντα 1 Yet he is not far from each one of us You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “Yet he is very near to everyone of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 17 28 tkd3 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the words “him” and “his” refer to God ([Acts 17:24](../17/24.md)). When Paul says “we” here, he includes himself as well as his hearers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 17 27 p8hk figs-litotes καί γε οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ ἑνὸς ἑκάστου ἡμῶν ὑπάρχοντα 1 Yet he is not far from each one of us Paul uses the negative **not far** to emphasize that God is close to man. Alternate translation: “Yet he is very near to everyone of us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 17 27 onm4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 In using the word **us**, Paul includes himself, his audience, and every nation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 17 28 tkd3 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the words **him** and **his** refer to God ([Acts 17:24](../17/24.md)). When Paul says **we** here, he includes himself as well as his hearers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 28 cbd9 ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ 1 For in him Alternate translation: “Because of him” ACT 17 29 k9ws figs-metaphor γένος…ὑπάρχοντες τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 are God’s offspring Because God created everyone, all people are spoken of as if they were God’s literal children. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 17 29 czi9 figs-metonymy τὸ θεῖον 1 the divine being Here, **divine being** refers to God’s nature or attributes. Alternate translation: “the true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 17 29 q4q2 figs-activepassive χαράγματι τέχνης καὶ ἐνθυμήσεως ἀνθρώπου 1 images of the skill and imagination of man If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “which a man then uses his skill to make it into something that he has designed” or “images that people make by using their art and imagination” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 17 30 y2u8 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers to God. -ACT 17 30 zj28 0 Connecting Statement: Paul finishes his speech to the philosophers in the Areopagus, which he began in [Acts 17:22](../17/22.md). ACT 17 30 suh6 οὖν 1 Therefore Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” ACT 17 30 iva4 τοὺς…χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας ὑπεριδὼν ὁ Θεὸς 1 God, having overlooked the times of ignorance Alternate translation: “God, having decided not to punish people during the times of ignorance” ACT 17 30 h8uy χρόνους τῆς ἀγνοίας 1 times of ignorance This refers to the time before God fully revealed himself through Jesus Christ and before people truly knew how to obey God. -ACT 17 30 qim5 figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις πάντας 1 all men This means all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +ACT 17 30 qim5 figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀνθρώποις πάντας 1 all men Here, **all men** refers to all people whether male or female. Alternate translation: “all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) ACT 17 31 htp7 ἐν ᾗ μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ, ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν 1 in which he is about to judge the world in righteousness by the man whom he has appointed Alternate translation: “when the man he has chosen will judge the world in righteousness” ACT 17 31 jt3a figs-metonymy μέλλει κρίνειν τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 he is about to judge the world Here, **world** refers to the people. Alternate translation: “he will judge all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 17 31 i9aw ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ 1 in righteousness Alternate translation: “justly” or “fairly” ACT 17 31 l61p πίστιν παρασχὼν 1 He has provided signs Alternate translation: “God has demonstrated his choice of this man” -ACT 17 31 ulr4 ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all dead people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again. -ACT 17 32 tc8t figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “We” refers to the men of Athens but not to Paul, so this is exclusive. Though some of them probably did want to hear Paul again, they may only have been being polite. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 17 31 ulr4 ἐκ νεκρῶν 1 from the dead From among all those who have died. This expression describes all **dead** people together in the underworld. To come back from among them speaks of becoming alive again. +ACT 17 32 tc8t figs-exclusive ἀκουσόμεθά 1 General Information: Here the word **We** refers to the men of Athens but not to Paul, so this is exclusive. Though some of them probably did want to hear Paul again, they may only have been being polite. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 17 32 c4sm writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -ACT 17 32 nb26 δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke shifts from Paul’s teachings to the reaction of the people of Athens. +ACT 17 32 nb26 δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke shifts from Paul’s teachings to the reaction of the people of Athens. ACT 17 32 jlm5 ἀκούσαντες 1 when they heard of These are the people who were present at the Areopagus listening to Paul. ACT 17 32 sn6j οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον 1 some mocked him These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul” -ACT 17 34 psh8 translate-names Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης 1 Dionysius the Areopagite Dionysius is a man’s name. Areopagite implies that Dionysius was one of the judges at the council of Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 17 34 hsz3 translate-names Δάμαρις 1 Damaris This is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 34 psh8 translate-names Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης 1 Dionysius the Areopagite **Dionysius** is a man’s name. **Areopagite** implies that Dionysius was one of the judges at the council of Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 17 34 hsz3 translate-names Δάμαρις 1 Damaris **Damaris** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The baptism of John

Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but this baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]]) -ACT 18 1 jat1 writing-background 0 General Information: Aquila and Priscilla are introduced to the story and verses 2 and 3 give background information about them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 18 1 qa9b 0 Connecting Statement: This is another part of the story of Paul’s travels as he goes to Corinth. ACT 18 1 fky7 μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things Alternate translation: “After these events took place in Athens” ACT 18 1 abcw χωρισθεὶς 1 having departed Alternate translation: “when Paul had departed” -ACT 18 1 h2si τῶν Ἀθηνῶν 1 Athens Athens was one of the most important cities in Greece. See how you translated this in [Acts 17:15](../17/15.md). +ACT 18 1 h2si τῶν Ἀθηνῶν 1 Athens **Athens** was one of the most important cities in Greece. See how you translated this in [Acts 17:15](../17/15.md). ACT 18 2 d9zx καὶ εὑρών 1 And when he found This could mean: (1) Paul happened to find by chance or (2) Paul intentionally found. -ACT 18 2 hm16 writing-participants τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν 1 a certain Jew named Aquila Here the phrase **a certain** indicates this is introducing new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 18 2 y97p translate-names Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει 1 a native of Pontus Pontus was a province on the southern coast of the Black Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 2 hm16 writing-participants τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν 1 a certain Jew named Aquila Here the phrase **a certain** indicates Luke is introducing **Aquilla** as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 18 2 jat1 writing-background τινα Ἰουδαῖον ὀνόματι Ἀκύλαν, Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει, προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης 1 General Information: Verses 2 and 3 give background information about **Aquila** and **Priscilla**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 18 2 y97p translate-names Ποντικὸν τῷ γένει 1 a native of Pontus **Pontus** was a province on the southern coast of the Black Sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 2 q4va προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα 1 who had recently come This probably happened sometime in the past year. -ACT 18 2 n631 translate-names τῆς Ἰταλίας 1 Italy This is the name of land. Rome is the capital city of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 2 n95f τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον 1 Claudius had ordered Claudius was the current Roman emperor. See how you translated this in [Acts 11:28](../11/28.md). +ACT 18 2 n631 translate-names τῆς Ἰταλίας…τῆς Ῥώμης 1 Italy **Italy** is the name of land. **Rome** is the capital city of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 2 n95f τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον 1 Claudius had ordered **Claudius** was the current Roman emperor. See how you translated this in [Acts 11:28](../11/28.md). ACT 18 3 q259 τὸ ὁμότεχνον εἶναι 1 he was of the same trade Alternate translation: “he did the same kind of work that they did” -ACT 18 4 r56h 0 General Information: Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul. -ACT 18 4 h3az διελέγετο δὲ 1 And he reasoned He gave reasons. This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people. Alternate translation: “And Paul debated” or “And Paul discussed” +ACT 18 4 h3az διελέγετο δὲ 1 And he reasoned This means that rather than just preaching, Paul talked and interacted with the people. Alternate translation: “And Paul debated” or “And Paul discussed” ACT 18 4 r2gp ἔπειθέν τε Ἰουδαίους καὶ Ἕλληνας 1 persuading both Jews and Greeks This could mean: (1) “he caused both Jews and Greeks to believe” or (2) “he kept trying to persuade the Jews and the Greeks.” +ACT 18 5 r56h 0 General Information: Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul. ACT 18 6 ncx8 translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενος τὰ ἱμάτια 1 shaking out his garment This is a symbolic action to indicate that Paul will no longer try to teach the Jews there about Jesus. He is leaving them to God’s judgment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 18 6 z12a figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Your blood be upon your head Here, **blood** stands for the guilt of their actions. Paul tells the Jews they are solely responsible for the judgment they will face for their stubbornness if they refuse to repent. Alternate translation: “You alone bear the responsibility for your punishment for sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 6 pacx figs-synecdoche τὸ αἷμα ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν ὑμῶν 1 Here, **head** refers to the whole person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 18 7 cd3u εἰσῆλθεν 1 General Information: Here the word **he** refers to Paul. -ACT 18 7 vs6y translate-names Τιτίου Ἰούστου 1 Titius Justus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 7 vs6y translate-names Τιτίου Ἰούστου 1 Titius Justus **Titius Justus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 7 v8xg σεβομένου τὸν Θεόν 1 who worships God A worshiper of God is a Gentile who gives praise to God and follows him but does not necessarily obey all of the Jewish laws. -ACT 18 8 lj2t translate-names Κρίσπος 1 Crispus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 8 kkk9 ἀρχισυνάγωγος 1 leader of the synagogue a layperson who sponsored and administered the synagogue, not necessarily the teacher +ACT 18 8 lj2t translate-names Κρίσπος 1 Crispus **Crispus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 8 kkk9 ἀρχισυνάγωγος 1 leader of the synagogue The **leader of the synagogue** was a layperson who sponsored and administered the synagogue, but not necessarily the teacher. ACT 18 8 uaq5 figs-metonymy ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 all those in his house Here, **house** refers to the people who lived together. Alternate translation: “the people who lived with him in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 8 t3np figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 were being baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 18 9 ws7p figs-parallelism μὴ φοβοῦ, ἀλλὰ λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 Do not be afraid, but continue speaking and do not be silent The Lord is giving one command in two different ways to emphasize that Paul should certainly continue preaching. Alternate translation: “You must not be afraid and, instead, continue to speak and not become silent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -2239,51 +2199,51 @@ ACT 18 9 a529 figs-explicit μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 do not be silent It can be ACT 18 10 a8lq λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 I have many people in this city Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who have put their faith in me” or “many people in this city will put their faith in me” ACT 18 11 mqx2 writing-endofstory ἐκάθισεν δὲ ἐνιαυτὸν καὶ μῆνας ἓξ, διδάσκων ἐν αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 And so he stayed there for a year and six months, teaching the word of God among them This is a concluding statement for this part of the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 18 11 a18w figs-synecdoche 1 Here, **word of God** is a synecdoche for the entire Scriptures. Alternate translation: “the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 18 12 f41k translate-names 0 General Information: Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 12 f41k translate-names τῆς Ἀχαΐας 1 General Information: **Achaia** was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 12 b5bf 0 Connecting Statement: The unbelieving Jews bring Paul to the judgment seat before Gallio. -ACT 18 12 se8m translate-names Γαλλίωνος 1 Gallio This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 12 j762 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews This stands for the Jewish leaders that did not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 18 12 se8m translate-names Γαλλίωνος 1 Gallio **Gallio** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 12 j762 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** stands for the Jewish leaders that did not believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 18 12 lp79 κατεπέστησαν ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 rose up together against Alternate translation: “came together against” or “joined together to attack” ACT 18 12 u36c figs-metonymy ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ βῆμα 1 brought him before the judgment seat The Jews took Paul by force to bring Paul before the court. Here, **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio sat when he made legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “took him so that the governor could judge him at the judgment seat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 18 14 d13b ὁ Γαλλίων 1 Gallio Gallio was the Roman governor of the Province. +ACT 18 14 d13b ὁ Γαλλίων 1 Gallio **Gallio** was the Roman governor of the Province. ACT 18 15 y6mt νόμου τοῦ καθ’ ὑμᾶς 1 your law Here, **law** refers to the law of Moses and as well as the Jewish customs of Paul’s time. ACT 18 15 khr5 κριτὴς ἐγὼ τούτων οὐ βούλομαι εἶναι 1 I do not want to be a judge of these matters Alternate translation: “I refuse to make a judgment about these matters” -ACT 18 16 yf81 0 General Information: Here the word “they” probably refers to the Gentiles at the court. They reacted against the Jews who had brought Paul before the judgment seat ([Acts 18:12](../18/12.md)). ACT 18 16 d6nh figs-metonymy ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος 1 he sent them away from the judgment seat Here, **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 18 17 yf81 ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες 1 General Information: Here the word **they** probably refers to the Gentiles at the court. They reacted against the Jews who had brought Paul before the judgment seat ([Acts 18:12](../18/12.md)). ACT 18 17 cyk6 figs-hyperbole ἐπιλαβόμενοι…πάντες 1 they all, having seized This may be an exaggeration to emphasize the strong feelings the people had. Alternate translation: “many people seized” or “many of them grabbed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 18 17 mj77 ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος 1 But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat This could mean: (1) the Gentiles beat Sosthenes in the court in front of the judgment seat because he was the Jewish leader or (2) it is possible that Sosthenes was a believer in Christ, so the Jews beat him in front of the court. ACT 18 17 x9w5 translate-names Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον 1 Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue **Sosthenes** was the Jewish ruler of the synagogue at Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 17 z9fv ἔτυπτον 1 were beating him Alternate translation: “repeatedly hit him” or “repeatedly punched him” -ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers to Paul. Cenchreae was a seaport that was part of the greater Corinth city area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 18 18 ura9 0 Connecting Statement: This continues Paul’s missionary journey as Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila leave Corinth. This seems to indicate that Silas and Timothy remain since it says “he” here and not “we.” The word “they” refers to Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila. +ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς…εἶχεν 1 General Information: Here the words **He** and **he** refer to Paul. **Cenchreae** was a seaport that was part of the greater Corinth city area. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 18 ura9 0 Connecting Statement: This continues Paul’s missionary journey as Paul, Priscilla, and Aquila leave Corinth. This seems to indicate that Silas and Timothy remain since it says “he” here and not “we.” ACT 18 18 et8c figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς ἀποταξάμενος 1 left the brothers The word **brothers** refers to men and women believers. Alternate translation: “left the fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 18 18 v5kl ἐξέπλει εἰς τὴν Συρίαν, καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας 1 and sailed to Syria, and Priscilla and Aquila were with him Paul got on a ship that sailed for Syria. Priscilla and Aquila went with him. +ACT 18 18 v5kl ἐξέπλει εἰς τὴν Συρίαν, καὶ σὺν αὐτῷ Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας 1 and sailed to Syria, and Priscilla and Aquila were with him Paul got on a ship that sailed for **Syria**. **Priscilla and Aquila** went with him. ACT 18 18 kq6f translate-symaction κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow This is a symbolic action that indicates the completion of a **vow**. Alternate translation: “he had someone cut off the hair on his head in Cenchrea because he had completed a vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 18 19 abcx κἀκείνους κατέλιπεν 1 he left them Alternate translation: “Paul left Priscilla and Aquilla” ACT 18 19 st93 διελέξατο 1 reasoned with Alternate translation: “discussed with” or “debated with” -ACT 18 20 u44s 0 General Information: Here the words “they” and “them” refer to the Jews in Ephesus. +ACT 18 20 u44s ἐρωτώντων 1 General Information: Here the word “they” refers to the Jews in Ephesus. ACT 18 21 iz1u ἀποταξάμενος 1 having left them Alternate translation: “when he had departed from them” -ACT 18 22 pr6u 0 General Information: Phrygia is a province in Asia which is now modern day Turkey. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). ACT 18 22 p364 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues his missionary journey. ACT 18 22 gyy4 κατελθὼν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 having landed at Caesarea The word **landed** is used to show that he arrived by ship. Alternate translation: “when he had arrived at Caesarea” ACT 18 22 r26z ἀναβὰς 1 having gone up He traveled to the city of Jerusalem. The phrase **gone up** is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea. ACT 18 22 q9j6 figs-metonymy ἀσπασάμενος τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 greeted the church Here, **church** refers to the believers in Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “greeted the members of the church of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 18 22 n3rh κατέβη 1 he went down The phrase **went down** is used here because Antioch is lower in elevation than Jerusalem. -ACT 18 23 pww5 ἐξῆλθεν 1 he departed Alternate translation: “Paul went away” or “Paul left” ACT 18 23 h65j figs-metaphor καὶ ποιήσας χρόνον τινὰ 1 And having spent some time there This speaks about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after staying there for a while” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 18 24 a7p9 writing-background 0 General Information: Apollos is introduced to the story. Verses 24 and 25 give background information about him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 18 24 muc2 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells what happens in Ephesus with Priscilla and Aquila. -ACT 18 24 xqy7 δέ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. -ACT 18 24 n2b4 writing-participants Ἰουδαῖος…τις Ἀπολλῶς ὀνόματι 1 a certain Jew named Apollos The phrase **a certain** indicates that Luke is introducing a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -ACT 18 24 di14 translate-names Ἀλεξανδρεὺς τῷ γένει 1 an Alexandrian by birth This was a city in Egypt on the north coast of Africa. Alternate translation: “a man who was born in the city of Alexandria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 18 23 pww5 ἐξῆλθεν 1 he departed Alternate translation: “Paul went away” or “Paul left” +ACT 18 23 pr6u Φρυγίαν 1 General Information: **Phrygia** is a province in Asia which is now modern day Turkey. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md). +ACT 18 24 a7p9 writing-background Ἀπολλῶς 1 General Information: **Apollos** is introduced to the story. Verses 24 and 25 give background information about him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 18 24 xqy7 δέ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. +ACT 18 24 n2b4 writing-participants Ἰουδαῖος…τις Ἀπολλῶς ὀνόματι 1 a certain Jew named Apollos The phrase **a certain** indicates that Luke is introducing **Apollos** as a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ACT 18 24 di14 translate-names Ἀλεξανδρεὺς τῷ γένει 1 an Alexandrian by birth Alexandria was a city in Egypt on the north coast of Africa. Alternate translation: “a man who was born in the city of Alexandria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 18 24 t4zi ἀνὴρ λόγιος 1 an eloquent man Alternate translation: “a good speaker” ACT 18 24 bh25 δυνατὸς ὢν ἐν ταῖς Γραφαῖς 1 He was mighty in the scriptures He understood the Old Testament writings well. Alternate translation: “he knew the scriptures thoroughly” ACT 18 25 z7a8 figs-activepassive οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 He had been instructed in the way of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught Apollos how the Lord Jesus wanted people to live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 18 25 ift8 figs-synecdoche καὶ ζέων τῷ πνεύματι 1 and being fervent in spirit Here, **spirit** refers to the entire person of Apollos. Alternate translation: “and being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 18 25 lr1h τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου 1 the baptism of John This is comparing John’s baptism which was with water to Jesus’ baptism which is with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “The baptism that John performed” +ACT 18 25 lr1h τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου 1 the baptism of John This is comparing John’s **baptism** which was with water to Jesus’ baptism which is with the Holy Spirit. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed” +ACT 18 26 muc2 Πρίσκιλλα καὶ Ἀκύλας προσελάβοντο αὐτὸν, καὶ ἀκριβέστερον αὐτῷ ἐξέθεντο τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Connecting Statement: Luke tells what happens in Ephesus with **Priscilla and Aquila**. ACT 18 26 ga6v figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the way of God How God wants people to live is spoken of as if it were a road that a person travels. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 18 26 k1lb ἀκριβέστερον 1 more accurately Alternate translation: “more correctly” or “more fully” -ACT 18 27 c2sq 0 General Information: Here the he words “he” and “him” refer to Apollos ([Acts 18:24](../18/24.md)). +ACT 18 27 c2sq αὐτοῦ…προτρεψάμενοι…αὐτόν…ὃς…συνεβάλετο πολὺ 1 General Information: Here the he words **he** and **him** refer to Apollos ([Acts 18:24](../18/24.md)). ACT 18 27 ll36 διελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 to pass over into Achaia The phrase **pass over** is used here because Apollos had to cross the Aegean Sea to get to Achaia from Ephesus. Alternate translation: “to go to the region of Achaia” ACT 18 27 pql7 τὴν Ἀχαΐαν 1 Achaia **Achaia** was a Roman Province in the southern section of Greece. See how you translated this in [Acts 18:12](../18/12.md). ACT 18 27 v2i6 figs-gendernotations οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers The word **brothers** here refers to both men and women believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -2292,26 +2252,23 @@ ACT 18 27 q5f2 ἔγραψαν τοῖς μαθηταῖς 1 and wrote to the d ACT 18 27 f99p τοῖς πεπιστευκόσιν διὰ τῆς χάριτος 1 those who had believed by grace Alternate translation: “those who had believed in salvation by grace” or “those who by God’s grace believed in Jesus” ACT 18 28 l2zt εὐτόνως…τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις διακατηλέγχετο δημοσίᾳ 1 he was powerfully refuting the Jews publicly Alternate translation: “in public debate Apollos powerfully proved that the Jews were wrong” ACT 19 intro g38y 0 # Acts 19 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Baptism

John baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins. Jesus’ followers baptized people who wanted to follow Jesus.

### Temple of Diana

The temple of Diana was an important place in the city of Ephesus. Many people came to Ephesus to see this temple, and they bought statues of the goddess Diana while they were there. The people who sold statues of Diana were afraid that if people did not believe Diana was a real goddess, they would stop giving the sellers money for statues. -ACT 19 1 rhv1 0 General Information: The “upper country” was an area of Asia which today is part of modern-day Turkey to the north of Ephesus. Paul must have traveled by land around the top of the Aegean sea in order to come to Ephesus (also in Turkey today) which is directly east of Corinth by sea. -ACT 19 1 wu6p 0 Connecting Statement: Paul travels to Ephesus. ACT 19 1 lp23 ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. +ACT 19 1 wu6p 0 Connecting Statement: Paul travels to Ephesus. +ACT 19 1 rhv1 Παῦλον διελθόντα τὰ ἀνωτερικὰ μέρη, κατελθεῖν εἰς Ἔφεσον 1 General Information: The **upper parts** was an area of Asia which today is part of modern-day Turkey to the north of **Ephesus**. Paul must have traveled by land around the top of the Aegean sea in order to come to Ephesus (also in Turkey today) which is directly east of Corinth by sea. ACT 19 1 ati9 διελθόντα 1 passed through Alternate translation: “traveled through” ACT 19 2 wqi4 εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἐλάβετε 1 Did you receive the Holy Spirit This means to have the Holy Spirit come upon them. ACT 19 2 nvn4 οὐδ’ εἰ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον ἔστιν ἠκούσαμεν 1 we did not even heard if there is a Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “we have never heard about the Holy Spirit” -ACT 19 3 hml1 0 General Information: Here the words “They,” “you,” and “they” refer to certain disciples in the city of Ephesus ([Acts 19:1](../19/01.md)). The word “him” refers to John. ACT 19 3 mrm6 figs-activepassive εἰς τί οὖν ἐβαπτίσθητε 1 Into what then were you baptized? If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “What kind of baptism did you receive?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 3 jzp7 figs-ellipsis εἰς τὸ Ἰωάννου βάπτισμα 1 Into the baptism of John You can translate this as a complete sentence. Alternate translation: “We received the kind of baptism about which John taught” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) ACT 19 4 r46y figs-abstractnouns βάπτισμα μετανοίας 1 a baptism of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “the baptism that people requested when they wanted to repent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) ACT 19 4 pv7t τὸν ἐρχόμενον 1 the one who is coming Here, **the one** refers to Jesus. ACT 19 4 q5fh τὸν ἐρχόμενον μετ’ αὐτὸν 1 the one who is coming after him This means to come after John the Baptist in time and not following after him physically. -ACT 19 5 zx2b 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues staying in Ephesus. ACT 19 5 k9st ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized Here, **they** refers to the disciples in Ephesus who were talking with Paul ([Acts 19:1](../19/01.md)), ACT 19 5 ueh1 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθησαν 1 they were baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they received baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 19 5 g2dm figs-metonymy εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 in the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. Alternate translation: “as believers in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 19 6 gk8l ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας 1 when Paul had laid his hands on them He probably placed his hands on their shoulders or heads. Alternate translation: “when Paul had placed his hands on their heads as he prayed” +ACT 19 6 gk8l ἐπιθέντος αὐτοῖς τοῦ Παύλου χεῖρας 1 when Paul had laid his hands on them He probably placed **his hands** on their shoulders or heads. Alternate translation: “when Paul had placed his hands on their heads as he prayed” ACT 19 6 j4n8 ἐλάλουν τε γλώσσαις καὶ ἐπροφήτευον 1 and they began to speak in tongues and prophesy Unlike in [Acts 2:3-4](../02/03.md), there are no details of who understood their messages. -ACT 19 7 e7kj writing-background ἦσαν δὲ οἱ πάντες ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ δώδεκα 1 And they were about 12 men in all This tells how many men were baptized. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -ACT 19 7 u71i translate-numbers ἄνδρες…δώδεκα 1 12 men Alternate translation: “12 men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +ACT 19 7 e7kj writing-background ἦσαν δὲ οἱ πάντες ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ δώδεκα 1 And they were about 12 men in all This tells how many **men** were baptized. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 19 8 qv8z εἰσελθὼν…εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν, ἐπαρρησιάζετο ἐπὶ μῆνας τρεῖς 1 having gone into the synagogue, he was speaking boldly for three months Alternate translation: “Paul regularly attended the synagogue meetings for three months and spoke there boldly” ACT 19 8 yky2 διαλεγόμενος καὶ πείθων 1 reasoning and persuading them Alternate translation: “convincing people with convincing arguments and with clear teaching” ACT 19 8 v8et figs-metonymy περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 about the kingdom of God Here, **kingdom** stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “about God’s rule as king” or “about how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2319,56 +2276,55 @@ ACT 19 9 mq1g figs-metaphor τινες ἐσκληρύνοντο καὶ ἠπε ACT 19 9 n6ir figs-metaphor κακολογοῦντες τὴν ὁδὸν ἐνώπιον τοῦ πλήθους 1 speaking evil of the Way before the crowd What Christ wants people to believe is spoken of as though it were a road that a person travels. The phrase **the Way** seems to have been a title for Christianity at the time. Alternate translation: “speaking evil about Christianity to the crowd” or “speaking to the crowd evil things about those who follow Christ and who obey his teaching about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [Acts 9:2](../09/02.md)) ACT 19 9 ts8d κακολογοῦντες 1 speaking evil Alternate translation: “speaking bad things about” ACT 19 9 xsm6 ἐν τῇ σχολῇ Τυράννου 1 in the lecture hall of Tyrannus Alternate translation: “in the large room where Tyrannus had taught people” -ACT 19 9 den4 translate-names Τυράννου 1 of Tyrannus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 19 9 den4 translate-names Τυράννου 1 of Tyrannus ***Tyrannus* is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 10 cw5g figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς κατοικοῦντας τὴν Ἀσίαν ἀκοῦσαι τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 all those who lived in Asia heard the word of the Lord Here, **all** is a generalization that means very many people throughout Asia heard the gospel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 19 10 kj12 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “the message about the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 19 11 cb6w 0 General Information: Here the words “them” and “they” refer to those who were sick. +ACT 19 12 cb6w αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους…ἐκπορεύεσθαι 1 General Information: Here the words **their** and **them** refer to those who were sick. ACT 19 11 fa6h figs-synecdoche δυνάμεις τε οὐ τὰς τυχούσας, ὁ Θεὸς ἐποίει διὰ τῶν χειρῶν Παύλου 1 And God was doing not ordinary miracles by the hands of Paul Here, **hands** stands for Paul’s whole person. Alternate translation: “And God was causing Paul to do unusual miracles” or “And God was doing amazing miracles through Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 19 11 abcy οὐ τὰς τυχούσας 1 not ordinary Alternate translation: “unusual” ACT 19 12 m3kl καὶ ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας ἀποφέρεσθαι ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια, καὶ 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body were taken to the sick and If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when they took to sick people even handkerchiefs and aprons that had touched Paul” ACT 19 12 vc1v καὶ…ἀπὸ τοῦ χρωτὸς αὐτοῦ σουδάρια ἢ σιμικίνθια 1 even handkerchiefs and aprons from his body This could mean: (1) these were cloth items that Paul had touched or (2) these were cloth items that Paul had worn or used. -ACT 19 12 aks4 σουδάρια 1 handkerchiefs cloths worn around the head -ACT 19 12 xs31 σιμικίνθια 1 aprons clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of people -ACT 19 12 kw9z figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 the sick This refers to sick people. Alternate translation: “sick people” or “those who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 19 12 aks4 σουδάρια 1 handkerchiefs The **handkerchiefs** were small pieces of cloth used to wipe one's face. +ACT 19 12 xs31 σιμικίνθια 1 aprons The **aprons** were clothing worn on the front of the body to protect the clothes of the wearers. +ACT 19 12 kw9z figs-nominaladj τοὺς ἀσθενοῦντας 1 the sick This refers to **sick** people. Alternate translation: “sick people” or “those who were sick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 19 12 nl3a ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι ἀπ’ αὐτῶν τὰς νόσους 1 their illnesses departed from them Alternate translation: “those who were sick became healthy” ACT 19 13 he2x 0 General Information: This is the beginning of another event that happened while Paul was in Ephesus. It is about Jewish exorcists. -ACT 19 13 fgq4 ἐξορκιστῶν 1 exorcists people who send evil spirits away from people or places +ACT 19 13 fgq4 ἐξορκιστῶν 1 exorcists These **exorcists** were people who sent evil spirits away from people or places. ACT 19 13 s12u figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus Here, **name** refers to Jesus’ power and authority. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 13 d59p τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὃν Παῦλος κηρύσσει 1 by the Jesus whom Paul proclaims **Jesus** was a common name at the time, so these exorcists wanted people to know of whom they spoke. -ACT 19 13 vqt1 figs-metonymy τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 by the Jesus This stands for the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus” or “by the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 19 14 cb8p translate-names Σκευᾶ 1 of Sceva This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 19 13 vqt1 figs-metonymy τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 by the Jesus This phrase stands for the power and authority of Jesus. Alternate translation: “by the authority of Jesus” or “by the power of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 19 14 cb8p translate-names Σκευᾶ 1 of Sceva **Sceva** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 15 i4a2 τὸν Ἰησοῦν γινώσκω, καὶ τὸν Παῦλον ἐπίσταμαι 1 Jesus I know, and Paul I know Alternate translation: “I know Jesus and Paul” or “I know Jesus, and I know Paul” ACT 19 15 nsl1 figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 but who are you? The spirit asked this question to emphasize that the exorcists had no authority over evil spirits. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “but I do not know you!” or “but you have no authority over me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 19 16 ty4x ἐφαλόμενος ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ἐν ᾧ ἦν τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν 1 the man in whom was the evil spirit, after leaping on them This means that the **evil spirit** caused the **man** whom it was controlling to leap on the exorcists. -ACT 19 16 lu7u αὐτοὺς 1 them This refers to the exorcists who send evil spirits from people or places. See how you translated this in [Acts 19:13](../19/13.md). +ACT 19 16 lu7u αὐτοὺς 1 them Here, **them** refers to the exorcists who send evil spirits from people or places. See how you translated this in [Acts 19:13](../19/13.md). ACT 19 16 b8cb γυμνοὺς…ἐκφυγεῖν 1 they fled … naked The exorcists fled with their clothes ripped off them. ACT 19 17 j85h figs-activepassive ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” or “they considered the name of the Lord Jesus to be great” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 19 17 j2hh figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα 1 the name This stands for the power and authority of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 19 18 tj8t writing-endofstory 0 This ends the story about the Jewish exorcists. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) +ACT 19 17 j2hh figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα 1 the name Here, **the name** stands for the power and authority of Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 19 z9rj συνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους 1 having brought their books together The word **books** refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were written. Alternate translation: “having collected their books” ACT 19 19 m6nf ἐνώπιον πάντων 1 before everyone Alternate translation: “in front of everyone” ACT 19 19 upz3 τὰς τιμὰς αὐτῶν 1 the value of them Alternate translation: “the value of the books” or “the value of the scrolls” ACT 19 19 u9pi translate-numbers μυριάδας πέντε 1 50000 Alternate translation: “fifty thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) ACT 19 19 bcv2 translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου 1 pieces of silver Each of the **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage for a common laborer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) +ACT 19 20 tj8t writing-endofstory 0 This ends the story about the Jewish exorcists. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) ACT 19 20 es71 figs-synecdoche οὕτως κατὰ κράτος τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power Alternate translation: “So because of these powerful deeds, more and more people heard the message about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 19 21 k1j1 0 Connecting Statement: Paul talks about going Jerusalem but does not leave Ephesus yet. -ACT 19 21 de4f δὲ 1 Now This word is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story. +ACT 19 21 de4f δὲ 1 Now The word **Now** is used here to mark a break in the main story line. Here Luke starts to tell a new part of the story. ACT 19 21 q18b ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα…ὁ Παῦλος 1 this was completed, Paul Alternate translation: “Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus, he” ACT 19 21 fgq5 ἔθετο…ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι 1 he determined in the Spirit This could mean: (1) Paul decided with the help of the Holy Spirit or (2) Paul decided within his own spirit, which means he made up his mind. -ACT 19 21 brb7 Ἀχαΐαν 1 Achaia Achaia was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. It was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. See how you translated this in [Acts 18:12](../18/12.md). +ACT 19 21 brb7 Ἀχαΐαν 1 Achaia **Achaia** was the Roman province in which Corinth was located. It was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. See how you translated this in [Acts 18:12](../18/12.md). ACT 19 21 rdz4 δεῖ με καὶ Ῥώμην ἰδεῖν 1 it is necessary for me also to see Rome Alternate translation: “I must also travel to Rome” -ACT 19 22 cy6f translate-names Ἔραστον 1 Erastus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 19 22 cy6f translate-names Ἔραστον 1 Erastus **Erastus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 22 k35j figs-explicit αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν χρόνον εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 he himself stayed in Asia for a time It is made explicit in the next few verses that Paul remains in Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 22 uy9x figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ἐπέσχεν 1 he himself stayed Here, **himself** is added for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 19 23 l7gz 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells about a riot that broke out while Paul was in Ephesus. -ACT 19 23 kn49 ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος περὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 there was no small disturbance concerning the Way This is a summary opening statement. -ACT 19 23 nb3p figs-litotes ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance See how you translated this in [Acts 12:18](../12/18.md) Alternate translation: “the people became very upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 19 23 nb3p figs-litotes ἐγένετο…τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance Luke uses the negative **no small** to indicate that the riot was very large. See how you translated this in [Acts 12:18](../12/18.md) Alternate translation: “the people became very upset” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 19 23 rwf2 τῆς ὁδοῦ 1 the Way This was a term used to refer to Christianity. See how you translated this title in [Acts 9:1](../09/01.md). -ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 General Information: This verse introduces background information about Demetrius. Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess Artemis, sometimes translated as “Diana.” She was a false goddess of fertility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +ACT 19 24 y5ae writing-background Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος, ποιῶν ναοὺς ἀργυροῦς Ἀρτέμιδος 1 General Information: This verse introduces background information about **Demetrius**. Ephesus had a large temple dedicated to the goddess **Artemis**, sometimes translated as “Diana.” She was a false goddess of fertility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) ACT 19 24 opb9 translate-names Δημήτριος 1 **Demetrius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 24 cg16 writing-participants Δημήτριος…τις ὀνόματι ἀργυροκόπος 1 a certain silversmith named Demetrius The use of the words **a certain** introduces a new person in the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) ACT 19 24 nwt7 ἀργυροκόπος 1 a silversmith A **silversmith** is a craftsman who works with silver metal to make statues and jewelry. -ACT 19 24 p58m figs-litotes παρείχετο…οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν 1 brought in not a little business This is a way of saying that he brought in much business. Alternate translation: “made a lot of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 19 24 p58m figs-litotes παρείχετο…οὐκ ὀλίγην ἐργασίαν 1 brought in not a little business Luke uses the negative **not a little** to say that he brought in much business. Alternate translation: “made a lot of money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 19 25 kuz6 τοὺς περὶ τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργάτας 1 the workmen of that occupation An **occupation** is a profession or job. Alternate translation: “others who did that kind of work” ACT 19 26 rm6w θεωρεῖτε καὶ ἀκούετε ὅτι 1 you see and hear that Alternate translation: “you have come to know and understand that” ACT 19 26 rx32 figs-metaphor μετέστησεν ἱκανὸν ὄχλον 1 and turned away a considerable crowd Paul’s stopping people from worshiping idols is spoken of as though Paul were literally turning the people in a different direction. Alternate translation: “and caused many people to stop worshiping the local gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2378,40 +2334,38 @@ ACT 19 27 j3bb figs-activepassive τὸ τῆς μεγάλης θεᾶς Ἀρτ ACT 19 27 bqt4 μέλλειν τε καὶ καθαιρεῖσθαι τῆς μεγαλειότητος αὐτῆς 1 And indeed, her majesty is about to be destroyed Artemis’s greatness only comes from what people think of her. ACT 19 27 hz7l figs-hyperbole ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 whom all Asia and the world worships This was an exaggeration to show how popular the goddess Artemis was. Alternate translation: “whom many parts Asia and other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) ACT 19 27 aq5c figs-metonymy ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 Here the words **Asia** and **the world** refer to the people in Asia and the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 19 28 t4lm 0 General Information: Here “they” refers to the craftsmen who made the idols ([Acts 19:24-25](./24.md)). +ACT 19 28 t4lm ἔκραζον 1 General Information: Here **they** refers to the craftsmen who made the idols ([Acts 19:24-25](./24.md)). ACT 19 28 uc5c figs-metaphor γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ 1 having become filled with anger This speaks of the craftsmen as though they were containers. Here, **anger** is spoken of as if it were the contents that fill a container. Alternate translation: “they became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 28 lcx8 ἔκραζον 1 they cried out Alternate translation: “they shouted aloud” or “they shouted loudly” +ACT 19 28 ii1u 0 General Information: Ephesus was part of the Roman empire and in the province of Asia. ACT 19 29 t7xs figs-metonymy ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 the whole city was filled with confusion Here, **city** refers to the people of the city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 19 29 u42d figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 The city is spoken of as if it were a container. And, **confusion** is spoken of as if it were the contents that filled the container. Alternate translation: “people all over the city became upset and started shouting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 29 nt7y ὥρμησάν τε ὁμοθυμαδὸν 1 and they rushed together This was a mob or near riot situation. -ACT 19 29 ej3q εἰς τὸ θέατρον 1 into the theater The Ephesus theater was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. -ACT 19 29 hjc8 συνεκδήμους Παύλου 1 Paul’s … travel companions The men who had been with Paul. -ACT 19 29 d6r9 translate-names Γάϊον…Ἀρίσταρχον 1 Gaius … Aristarchus These are names of men. Gaius and Aristarchus came from Macedonia but were working with Paul in Ephesus at this time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 19 30 ii1u 0 General Information: Ephesus was part of the Roman empire and in the province of Asia. +ACT 19 29 ej3q εἰς τὸ θέατρον 1 into the theater The Ephesus **theater** was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. +ACT 19 29 hjc8 Γάϊον καὶ Ἀρίσταρχον Μακεδόνας, συνεκδήμους Παύλου 1 Paul’s … travel companions These were men who had been with Paul. +ACT 19 29 d6r9 translate-names Γάϊον…Ἀρίσταρχον 1 Gaius … Aristarchus **Gaius** and **Aristarchus** are names of men. Gaius and Aristarchus came from Macedonia but were working with Paul in Ephesus at this time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 31 z7ww τὸ θέατρον 1 the theater The Ephesus **theater** was used for public meetings and for entertainment such as plays and music. It was an outdoor semi-circular area with bench seats that could hold thousands of people. See how you translated **theater** in [Acts 19:29](../19/29.md). -ACT 19 33 jr85 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρον 1 Alexander This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 19 33 jr85 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρον 1 Alexander **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 19 33 j1mi figs-explicit κατασείσας τὴν χεῖρα 1 motioned with his hand You can make explicit that Alexander was showing the crowd that he wanted them to be quiet. Alternate translation: “gestured to the crowd to be quiet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) ACT 19 33 tlq7 ἀπολογεῖσθαι 1 to give a defense It is not clear whom or what Alexander wanted to defend. If your language requires this information, it might be best to use a general phrase like “to explain what was going on.” -ACT 19 34 u1hp figs-metaphor φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων 1 there was one voice from all of them The shouting together of the people at the same time is spoken of as though they were speaking with one voice. Alternate translation: “they were shouting in unison” or “they were shouting together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 19 35 fm3m figs-you 0 General Information: The words “You” and “you” refer to all the men present who were from Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +ACT 19 34 u1hp figs-metaphor φωνὴ ἐγένετο μία ἐκ πάντων 1 there was one voice from all of them The shouting together of the people at the same time is spoken of as though they were speaking with **one voice**. Alternate translation: “they were shouting in unison” or “they were shouting together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 19 35 pu96 0 Connecting Statement: The clerk of Ephesus speaks to quiet the crowd. -ACT 19 35 sy9m ὁ γραμματεὺς 1 the town clerk This refers to the town “writer” or “secretary.” +ACT 19 35 sy9m ὁ γραμματεὺς 1 the town clerk This **town clerk** was like a “writer” or “secretary” for the town. ACT 19 35 sd3s figs-rquestion τίς γάρ ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς? 1 what man indeed is there who does not know that the city of Ephesus is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of that which is fallen down from heaven? The clerk asked this question to assure the crowd they were right and to comfort them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you can express it as a statement. Alternate translation: “for every man knows that the Ephesians guard the temple of the great Artemis and of her image that fell down from heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) ACT 19 35 k8dy figs-litotes ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 who does not know The town clerk uses **not** to emphasize that all of the people knew this. Alternate translation: “everyone knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 19 35 hiw3 νεωκόρον 1 temple keeper The Ephesian people maintained and guarded the temple of Artemis. +ACT 19 35 hiw3 νεωκόρον…τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος 1 temple keeper The Ephesian people maintained and guarded the **temple** of **Artemis**. ACT 19 35 afd1 τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 of that which is fallen down from heaven Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite which fell from the sky. People thought that his rock had come directly from Zeus, the ruler of the Greek gods (idols). ACT 19 36 r8cf ἀναντιρρήτων οὖν ὄντων τούτων 1 So these things are undeniable Alternate translation: “So since you know these things are true” ACT 19 36 xj2n μηδὲν προπετὲς πράσσειν 1 to do nothing rash Alternate translation: “do not do anything before you have had time to think about it” -ACT 19 36 s67q προπετὲς 1 rash without careful thought +ACT 19 36 s67q προπετὲς 1 rash To be **rash** is to act without careful thought. ACT 19 37 s8a9 τοὺς ἄνδρας τούτους 1 these men The words **these men** refer to Gaius and Aristarchus, Paul’s traveling companions ([Acts 19:29](../19/29.md)). -ACT 19 38 wgv5 0 Connecting Statement: The town clerk finishes speaking to the crowd. ACT 19 38 qd4s οὖν 1 Therefore The town clerk had said in [Acts 19:37](../19/37.md) that Gaius and Aristarchus were not robbers or blasphemers. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true” ACT 19 38 zkx5 figs-abstractnouns ἔχουσιν πρός τινα λόγον 1 have a word against anyone Here having **a word against** someone means they want to accuse them of something. Alternate translation: “want to accuse someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 19 38 szf7 translate-unknown ἀνθύπατοί 1 proconsuls the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +ACT 19 38 szf7 translate-unknown ἀνθύπατοί 1 proconsuls The **proconsuls** were the Roman governor’s representatives who made legal decisions in court. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) ACT 19 38 g8tp ἐγκαλείτωσαν ἀλλήλοις 1 Let them accuse one another This does not mean Demetrius and those with him will accuse each other. It means this is a place where people in general can speak their accusation. Alternate translation: “There people can accuse one another” ACT 19 39 hxh3 εἰ δέ τι περὶ ἑτέρων ἐπιζητεῖτε 1 But if you seek anything about other matters Alternate translation: “But if you have other matters to discuss” ACT 19 39 wga5 figs-activepassive ἐν τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐπιλυθήσεται 1 it will be settled in the regular assembly If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “let us settle it in the regular assembly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 19 39 et5j τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the regular assembly This refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided. +ACT 19 39 et5j τῇ ἐννόμῳ ἐκκλησίᾳ 1 the regular assembly This **regular assembly** refers to a public gathering of citizens over which the county clerk presided. ACT 19 40 sds7 figs-activepassive κινδυνεύομεν ἐνκαλεῖσθαι στάσεως περὶ τῆς σήμερον 1 we are in danger of being accused of rioting concerning this day If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we are in danger of the Roman authorities accusing us of starting this riot today” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 intro u91c 0 # Acts 20 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

In this chapter Luke describes Paul’s last visits to believers in the provinces of Macedonia and Asia before he went to Jerusalem.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Race

Paul spoke of living for Jesus as if he were running in a race. By this he meant that he needed to keep working hard even when things were difficult and he wanted to quit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/discipline]])

### “Compelled by the Spirit”

Paul thought that the Holy Spirit wanted him to go to Jerusalem even if Paul did not want to go there. The same Holy Spirit told other people that when Paul arrived in Jerusalem, people would try to harm him. ACT 20 1 cwq7 0 Connecting Statement: Paul leaves Ephesus and continues his travels. @@ -2420,75 +2374,74 @@ ACT 20 1 hr32 ἀσπασάμενος 1 and said farewell Alternate translation ACT 20 2 edb8 παρακαλέσας αὐτοὺς λόγῳ πολλῷ 1 had exhorted them with many words Alternate translation: “had greatly encouraged the believers by saying many things” or “had said many things to challenge the believers” ACT 20 3 yxj3 figs-metaphor ποιήσας τε μῆνας τρεῖς 1 And after he had spent three months there This speaks about time as if it were something a person could spend. Alternate translation: “And after he had stayed there three months” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 3 cit9 figs-activepassive γενομένης ἐπιβουλῆς αὐτῷ ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 a plot was formed against him by the Jews If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Jews formed a plot against him” or “the Jews formed a secret plan to harm him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 20 3 ah5w figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews This means only some of **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “by some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 3 ah5w figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews Here, **the Jews** refers to only some of the Jews. Alternate translation: “by some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 3 m7na μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν Συρίαν 1 as he was about to sail for Syria Alternate translation: “as he was ready to sail to Syria” -ACT 20 4 y35x figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “him” refers to Paul ([Acts 20:1](../20/01.md)). All instances of “us” and “we” in the verses that follow refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 20 4 c9et συνείπετο δὲ αὐτῷ 1 And accompanying him Alternate translation: “And traveling with him” ACT 20 4 dw6j translate-names Σώπατρος…Πύρρου…Σεκοῦνδος,…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος 1 were Sopater of Pyrrhus … Secundus … Tychicus … Trophimus These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 4 w4n1 translate-names Βεροιαῖος…Δερβαῖος 1 from Berea … from Derbe These are names of places. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 4 w8j6 Ἀρίσταρχος…Γάϊος 1 Aristarchus … Gaius These are names of men. See how you translated these names in [Acts 19:29](../19/29.md). -ACT 20 5 itz1 translate-names Τρῳάδι 1 Troas This is the name of a place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 4 w4n1 translate-names Βεροιαῖος…Θεσσαλονικέων…Δερβαῖος…Ἀσιανοὶ 1 from Berea … from Derbe These are names of places. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 4 w8j6 Σώπατρος Πύρρου…Ἀρίσταρχος…Σεκοῦνδος…Γάϊος…Τιμόθεος…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος 1 Aristarchus … Gaius These are names of men. See how you translated these names in [Acts 19:29](../19/29.md). +ACT 20 5 y35x figs-exclusive προσελθόντες…ἡμᾶς 1 General Information: All instances of **us** in this verse refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 20 5 kv8t οὗτοι…προσελθόντες 1 they had gone before us Alternate translation: “these men had traveled ahead of us” +ACT 20 5 itz1 translate-names Τρῳάδι 1 Troas **Troas** is the name of a place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 6 vmj6 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…ἤλθομεν…διετρίψαμεν 1 All instances of **we** in this verse refer to the writer and Paul and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 20 6 l5dr τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread This refers to a time of Jewish religious feast time during the Passover season. See how you translated this in [Acts 12:3](../12/03.md). -ACT 20 7 dnt4 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [Acts 20:4-6](./04.md)) +ACT 20 7 dnt4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 General Information: Here the word **we** refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]] and [Acts 20:4-6](./04.md)) ACT 20 7 mbr8 0 Connecting Statement: Luke tells about Paul’s preaching in Troas and about what happened to Eutychus. ACT 20 7 zff8 figs-synecdoche κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 to break bread Bread was part of their meals. This could mean: (1) this refers simply to eating a meal together. Alternate translation: “eat a meal” or (2) this refers to the meal they would eat together in order to remember Christ’s death and resurrection. Alternate translation: “to eat the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 7 j888 παρέτεινέν τε τὸν λόγον 1 and so he continued his message Alternate translation: “and so he continued to speak” -ACT 20 8 ak8z ὑπερῴῳ 1 upper room This may have been the third floor of the house. -ACT 20 9 hw7b 0 General Information: Here the word “himself” refers to Paul. The first word “he” refers to Paul; the second word “he” refers to the young man, Eutychus. The word “him” refers to Eutychus. -ACT 20 9 v5q7 ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος 1 on the window This was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on it. -ACT 20 9 ju64 translate-names Εὔτυχος 1 Eutychus This is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 9 tsp4 figs-metaphor καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ 1 was falling into a deep sleep This speaks about sleep as if it were a deep hole into which a person could fall. Alternate translation: “was sleeping soundly” or “was becoming more and more tired until finally he was sleeping soundly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 9 abcz κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 having been overcome by sleep The young man was fell asleep, not Paul. -ACT 20 9 jp89 figs-activepassive καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός 1 and was picked up dead When they went down to check his condition, they saw he was dead. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and when they went to pick him up, they found that he was dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ACT 20 9 kh3h τριστέγου 1 third story This means two floors above the ground floor. If your culture does not count the ground floor, you may state this as the “second story.” -ACT 20 11 av7m 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers to Paul. +ACT 20 8 ak8z ὑπερῴῳ 1 upper room This **upper room** may have been the third floor of the house. +ACT 20 9 v5q7 ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος 1 on the window This **window** was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on it. +ACT 20 9 ju64 translate-names Εὔτυχος 1 Eutychus **Eutychus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 9 tsp4 figs-metaphor καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ 1 was falling into a deep sleep This speaks about **sleep** as if it were a deep hole into which a person could fall. Alternate translation: “was sleeping soundly” or “was becoming more and more tired until finally he was sleeping soundly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +ACT 20 9 abcz κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 having been overcome by sleep The young man fell asleep, not Paul. +ACT 20 9 jp89 figs-activepassive καὶ ἤρθη νεκρός 1 and was picked up dead When they went down to check his condition, they saw he was **dead**. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “and when they went to pick him up, they found that he was dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 20 9 kh3h τριστέγου 1 third story The **third story** refers to a level two floors above the ground floor. If your culture does not count the ground floor, you may state this as the “second story.” +ACT 20 11 av7m ἀναβὰς…τε ὁμιλήσας…ἐξῆλθεν 1 General Information: Here all occurrences of the word **he** refer to Paul. ACT 20 11 lih8 0 Connecting Statement: This is the end of the part of the story about Paul’s preaching at Troas and about Eutychus. ACT 20 11 w5w8 figs-synecdoche κλάσας τὸν ἄρτον 1 had broken bread Bread was a common food during meals. Here, **broken bread** probably means they shared a meal with more kinds of food than just bread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 11 t88c οὕτως ἐξῆλθεν 1 In this way, he left Alternate translation: “This is what happened as he was going away” -ACT 20 12 jkj5 τὸν παῖδα 1 the boy This refers to Eutychus ([Acts 20:9](../20/09.md)). This could mean: (1) he was a young man over 14 years old or (2) he was a boy between 9 and 14 years old or (3) the word “boy” implies that he was a servant or a slave. -ACT 20 12 abx0 figs-litotes οὐ μετρίως 1 not moderately This is a way of saying that they were greatly comforted. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -ACT 20 13 dja7 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: The words “he,” “himself,” and “him” refer to Paul. Here the word “we” refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 20 13 awt9 0 Connecting Statement: The writer Luke, Paul, and his other companions continue their travels; however, Paul goes separately for part of the trip. +ACT 20 12 jkj5 τὸν παῖδα 1 the boy Here, **the boy** refers to Eutychus ([Acts 20:9](../20/09.md)). This could mean: (1) he was a young man over 14 years old. (2) he was a boy between 9 and 14 years old. (3) he was a servant or a slave. +ACT 20 12 abx0 figs-litotes οὐ μετρίως 1 not moderately Luke uses the negative **not moderately** to say that they were greatly comforted. Alternate translation: “greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 20 13 dja7 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς…μέλλοντες 1 General Information: Here the word **we** refers to the writer and those traveling with him, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) ACT 20 13 w4ew figs-rpronouns ἡμεῖς…προελθόντες 1 we, having gone ahead The word **we** here refers to Luke and his traveling companions, and not to Paul. Paul did travel on the ship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -ACT 20 13 q4yz translate-names τὴν Ἆσσον 1 Assos Assos is a town located directly below present day Behram in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 13 q4yz translate-names τὴν Ἆσσον 1 Assos **Assos** is a town located directly below present-day Behram in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 13 nq2q figs-rpronouns ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν 1 ἦν μέλλων αὐτὸς πεζεύειν Here, **himself** is used to emphasize that this is what Paul wanted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 20 13 p8y7 πεζεύειν 1 to go on foot Alternate translation: “to walk” -ACT 20 14 ju8f translate-names Μιτυλήνην 1 Mitylene Mitylene is a town located in present day Mitilini in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 15 ll2h figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” refers to Paul, the writer, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -ACT 20 15 ulk6 translate-names Χίου 1 Chios Chios is an island off the coast of modern day Turkey in the Aegean Sea. Alternate translation: “the island of Chios” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 14 ju8f translate-names Μιτυλήνην 1 Mitylene **Mitylene** is a town located in present-day Mitilini in Turkey on the coast of the Aegean sea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 15 ll2h figs-exclusive κατηντήσαμεν…παρεβάλομεν…ἤλθομεν 1 General Information: Here the word **we** refers to Paul, the writer, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 20 15 ulk6 translate-names Χίου 1 Chios **Chios** is an island off the coast of modern-day Turkey in the Aegean Sea. Alternate translation: “the island of Chios” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 15 jyr7 παρεβάλομεν εἰς Σάμον 1 we landed at Samos Alternate translation: “we arrived at the island of Samos” -ACT 20 15 b6c6 translate-names Σάμον 1 Samos Samos is an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea off the coast of modern day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 15 s7g2 translate-names Μίλητον 1 Miletus Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -ACT 20 16 p272 translate-names κεκρίκει γὰρ ὁ Παῦλος παραπλεῦσαι τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 For Paul had decided to sail past Ephesus Paul sailed south past the port city of Ephesus, further south in order to land at Miletus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 15 b6c6 translate-names Σάμον 1 Samos **Samos** is an island south of Chios in the Aegean Sea off the coast of modern day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 15 s7g2 translate-names Μίλητον 1 Miletus **Miletus** was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 16 p272 translate-names κεκρίκει γὰρ ὁ Παῦλος παραπλεῦσαι τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 For Paul had decided to sail past Ephesus Paul sailed south past the port city of **Ephesus**, further south in order to land at Miletus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 16 p61e figs-metaphor ὅπως μὴ γένηται αὐτῷ χρονοτριβῆσαι 1 so that he would not spend time This speaks about **time** as if it were a commodity that a person could spend or use up. Alternate translation: “so that he would not have to remain for a time” or “so that he would not have a delay” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 17 nw52 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “he” refers to Paul. The word “our” refers to Paul and the elders to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 20 17 nw52 μετεκαλέσατο 1 General Information: Here the word **he** refers to Paul. ACT 20 17 v9al 0 Connecting Statement: Paul calls the elders of the church of Ephesus and begins to speak to them. -ACT 20 17 l9aj translate-names τῆς Μιλήτου 1 Miletus Miletus was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. See how you translated this in [Acts 20:15](../20/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +ACT 20 17 l9aj translate-names τῆς Μιλήτου 1 Miletus **Miletus** was a port city in western Asia Minor near the mouth of the Meander River. See how you translated this in [Acts 20:15](../20/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) ACT 20 18 b6li figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς ἐπίστασθε 1 You yourselves know Here, **yourselves** is used for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 20 18 vw6n figs-synecdoche ἐπέβην εἰς τὴν Ἀσίαν 1 I set foot in Asia Here, **foot** stands for the entire person. Alternate translation: “I entered Asia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -ACT 20 19 wh5m figs-metonymy δακρύων 1 tears Here “tears” stands for feeling sad and crying. Alternate translation: “sadness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 20 19 e6k7 πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι 1 trials that happened to me Here, **trials** is an abstract noun. The meaning can be expressed as a verb. Alternate Translation: “while I was tested” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) -ACT 20 19 y5iw figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 of the Jews This does not mean every Jew. This lets us know who plotted. Alternate translation: “of some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +ACT 20 19 wh5m figs-metonymy δακρύων 1 tears Here **tears** stands for feeling sad and crying. Alternate translation: “sadness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +ACT 20 19 e6k7 πειρασμῶν, τῶν συμβάντων μοι 1 trials that happened to me If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **trials**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate Translation: “while I was tested” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) +ACT 20 19 y5iw figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 of the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not mean every Jew. This lets us know who plotted. Alternate translation: “of some of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 20 nu7h ὡς οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην τῶν συμφερόντων τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι ὑμῖν 1 how I kept back nothing that was useful which I did not declare to you Alternate translation: “how I declared to you everything that was beneficial to you” ACT 20 20 kut9 κατ’ οἴκους 1 according to houses Paul taught people in various private homes. Alternate translation: “in each house” or “in everyone's home” ACT 20 21 w7mv figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν καὶ πίστιν εἰς τὸν Κύριον ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦν 1 about repentance toward God and faith in our Lord Jesus If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas behind the words **repentance** and **faith**, you could express the same ideas with verbs. Alternate translation: “that they need to repent before God and believe in our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -ACT 20 22 ty3b 0 General Information: Here the word “I” refers to Paul. -ACT 20 22 vam4 figs-activepassive δεδεμένος ἐγὼ τῷ Πνεύματι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form.They can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the Spirit compels me to go there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ACT 20 21 x552 figs-exclusive 1 The word **our** refers to Paul and the elders to whom he is speaking. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +ACT 20 22 ty3b ἐγὼ 1 General Information: Here the word **I** refers to Paul. +ACT 20 22 vam4 figs-activepassive δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form.They can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the Spirit compels me to go there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) ACT 20 22 a9j1 τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς 1 not knowing what will happen to me in it Alternate translation: “and I do not know what will happen to me there” or “not knowing what will happen to me in Jerusalem” ACT 20 23 q3ie figs-metonymy δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν 1 chains and sufferings await me Here, **chains** refers to Paul’s being arrested and put in prison. Alternate translation: “people will put me in prison and cause me to suffer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 24 w8d2 figs-metaphor ὡς τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν ἣν ἔλαβον παρὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 so as to finish my race and the ministry that I received from the Lord Jesus This speaks about Paul’s **race** and **ministry** as if they are objects that Jesus gives and Paul receives. Alternate translation: “so that I may complete the work that the Lord Jesus has commanded me to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 24 ga6d figs-doublet τὸν δρόμον μου, καὶ τὴν διακονίαν 1 Here, **race** and **ministry** mean basically the same thing. Paul repeats this for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) ACT 20 24 m5gc figs-metaphor τελειῶσαι τὸν δρόμον μου 1 to finish my race Paul speaks about completing the work that Jesus has commanded him to do as if he were running a **race**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 24 hg3l διαμαρτύρασθαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 to solemnly testify to the gospel of the grace of God This is the ministry that Paul received from Jesus. Alternate translation: “to tell people what I have personally learned about the good news of God’s grace” -ACT 20 25 f1sb 0 Connecting Statement: Paul continues to talk to the Ephesian elders ([Acts 20:17](../20/17.md)). ACT 20 25 kj9c καὶ νῦν ἰδοὺ, ἐγὼ οἶδα 1 And now, behold, I know Alternate translation: “And now, pay careful attention, because I know” ACT 20 25 z4ng ἐγὼ οἶδα ὅτι…ὑμεῖς πάντες 1 I know that you all Alternate translation: “I know that all of you” ACT 20 25 aur9 figs-metonymy ἐν οἷς διῆλθον κηρύσσων τὴν βασιλείαν 1 among whom I went about proclaiming the kingdom Here, **kingdom** stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “to whom I preached the message about God’s reign as king” or “to whom I preached about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 25 cq45 figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου 1 will see my face no more The word **face** here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “will not see me anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 26 e546 figs-metonymy καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 I am innocent from the blood of all Here, **blood** stands for a person’s death, which, in this case, is not physical death but spiritual death when God declares a person guilty of sin. Paul had told them God’s truth. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for anyone whom God judges guilty of sin because they did not trust in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 20 26 v5el figs-gendernotations πάντων 1 of all Here this means any person whether male or female. Alternate translation: “of any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -ACT 20 27 qa9y figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι…ὑμῖν 1 For I did not hold back from declaring to you You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “For I certainly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +ACT 20 26 v5el figs-gendernotations πάντων 1 of all Here **all** refers to any person, whether male or female. Alternate translation: “of any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +ACT 20 27 qa9y figs-litotes οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι…ὑμῖν 1 For I did not hold back from declaring to you Paul uses the negative **not hold back** to emphasize that he told them everything. Alternate translation: “For I certainly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) ACT 20 28 u52d figs-metaphor τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the flock among which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers to shepherd the church of God Believers are likened to a **flock** of sheep here. Church leaders are entrusted by God with the care of the community of believers just as a **shepherd** would care for his flock of sheep and protect them from wolves. Alternate translation: “the group of believers the Holy spirit has entrusted to you. Be sure to take care of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 28 cx69 figs-metaphor τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood The shedding of the **blood** of Christ here is likened to a payment to God for our sins. Alternate translation: “the people Christ saved from their sins by shedding his blood on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 28 hjh6 figs-metonymy τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 his own blood Here, **blood** stands for Christ’s death. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2497,28 +2450,27 @@ ACT 20 30 ftf4 figs-metaphor τοῦ ἀποσπᾶν τοὺς μαθητὰς ACT 20 31 q2nl γρηγορεῖτε, μνημονεύοντες 1 be alert, remembering Alternate translation: “be on guard and remember” or “be on guard as you remember” ACT 20 31 ll64 figs-metaphor γρηγορεῖτε 1 be alert Christian leaders being **alert** about anyone that may harm the community of believers is spoken of as if they were guards in an army watching out for the enemy army. Alternate translation: “be awake” or “watch out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 31 pvt6 μνημονεύοντες ὅτι 1 Remembering that Alternate translation: “continuing to remember that” or “not forgetting that” -ACT 20 31 rt1h figs-hyperbole τριετίαν νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν, οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν 1 for three years I did not stop admonishing … night and day Paul did not teach them continuously for three years, but over the space of three years. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -ACT 20 31 hs1m οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν 1 I did not stop admonishing Alternate translation: “I did not stop warning” +ACT 20 31 rt1h figs-hyperbole τριετίαν νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν, οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν 1 for three years I did not stop admonishing … night and day Paul did not teach them continuously **for three years**, but over the space of three years. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +ACT 20 31 hs1m οὐκ ἐπαυσάμην…νουθετῶν 1 I did not stop admonishing If your readers would misunderstand the double-negative **not stop**, you can express it in positive form. Alternate translation: “I continued to warn” ACT 20 31 rvh6 figs-metonymy μετὰ δακρύων 1 with tears Here, **tears** refers to Paul’s crying because of the strong emotion of concern he felt while he was warning the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 32 ylm3 figs-metonymy παρατίθεμαι ὑμᾶς τῷ Θεῷ, καὶ τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ 1 I am entrusting you to God and to the word of his grace Here, **word** stands for a message. Alternate translation: “I ask God to take care of you and that he will help you to keep believing the message I spoke to you about his grace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -ACT 20 32 vnb2 παρατίθεμαι 1 I am entrusting to give someone else the responsibility of taking care of someone or something +ACT 20 32 vnb2 παρατίθεμαι 1 I am entrusting To “entrust” something to someone is to give them the responsibility of taking care of someone or something. ACT 20 32 s7rf figs-metaphor τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι 1 which is able to build you up A person’s faith becoming stronger is spoken of as if the person were a wall and someone were building him higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you become stronger and stronger in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) ACT 20 32 zvz8 figs-personification δοῦναι τὴν κληρονομίαν 1 to give you the inheritance This speaks about the **word of his grace** as if it were God himself that would give the inheritance to believers. Alternate translation: “God will give you the inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) ACT 20 32 x5jy figs-metaphor τὴν κληρονομίαν 1 the inheritance The blessings that God gives believers is spoken of as if they were money or property that a child inherits from his father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -ACT 20 33 y6ii 0 Connecting Statement: Paul finishes speaking to the elders of the church of Ephesus; he began to speak them in [Acts 20:18](../20/18.md). ACT 20 33 yw8a ἀργυρίου…οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα 1 I coveted no one’s silver Alternate translation: “I did not desire anyone’s silver” or “I did not want for myself anyone’s silver” ACT 20 33 ipq5 ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς 1 no one’s silver, gold, or clothing Here, **clothing** is considered a treasure; the more you had, the richer you were. ACT 20 34 f5a3 figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γινώσκετε 1 You yourselves know The word **yourselves** is used here to add emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) ACT 20 34 ja5v figs-synecdoche ταῖς χρείαις μου, καὶ τοῖς…ὑπηρέτησαν αἱ χεῖρες αὗται 1 these hands ministered to my needs and to those who The word **hands** here represents the entire person. Alternate translation: “I worked to earn money and pay for my own expenses and for those who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 20 35 wn8j κοπιῶντας δεῖ ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 it is necessary to work hard to help those who are weak Alternate translation: “you should work so as to have money to help people who are in need” -ACT 20 35 p3n8 figs-nominaladj τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 those who are weak You can state this nominal adjective as an adjective. Alternate translation: “weak people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +ACT 20 35 p3n8 figs-nominaladj τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 those who are weak You can state the nominal adjective **weak** as an adjective. Alternate translation: “weak people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) ACT 20 35 dpu1 ἀσθενούντων 1 weak Alternate translation: “sick” ACT 20 35 ps2i figs-metonymy τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the words of the Lord Jesus Here, **words** refers to what Jesus has said. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) ACT 20 35 e396 μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν 1 It is more blessed to give than to receive This means a person receives the favor of God and experiences more joy when he gives to other people rather than always receiving from other people. ACT 20 36 q6bs 0 Connecting Statement: Paul ends his time with the elders of the church of Ephesus by praying with them. ACT 20 36 u3uc translate-symaction θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ…προσηύξατο 1 having bowed his knees, he prayed It was a common custom to kneel down while praying. It was a sign of humility before God. Alternate translation: “he knelt down and prayed to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) ACT 20 37 pb4r ἐπιπεσόντες ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τοῦ Παύλου 1 having fallen upon Paul’s neck Alternate translation: “having embraced Paul” or “putting their arms around him” -ACT 20 37 sze4 κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 they were kissing him **Kissing** someone on the cheek is an expression of brotherly or friendly love in the Middle East. +ACT 20 37 sze4 κατεφίλουν αὐτόν 1 they were kissing him To kiss someone on the cheek was an expression of brotherly or friendly love in the Middle East. ACT 20 38 bs3s figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ θεωρεῖν 1 they were never going to see his face again The word **face** here represents Paul’s physical body. Alternate translation: “they would not see him anymore on this earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) ACT 21 intro gh1j 0 # Acts 21 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Acts 21:1-19 describes Paul’s journey to Jerusalem. After he arrived in Jerusalem, the believers there told him that the Jews wanted to harm him and what he should do so they would not harm him (verses 20-26). Even though Paul did what the believers told him to do, the Jews tried to kill him. The Romans rescued him and gave him a chance to speak to the Jews.

The last verse of the chapter ends with an incomplete sentence. Most translations leave the sentence incomplete, as the ULT does.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “They are all determined to keep the law”

The Jews in Jerusalem were following the law of Moses. Even those who were following Jesus still kept the law. Both groups thought that Paul had been telling Jews in Greece not to keep the law. But it was only the Gentiles to whom Paul was saying that.

### Nazarite vow

The vow that Paul and his three friends made was probably a Nazarite vow, because they shaved their heads ([Acts 21:23](../act/21/23.md)).

### Gentiles in the temple

The Jews accused Paul of bringing a Gentile man into a part of the temple into which God only allowed Jews to go. They thought that God wanted them to punish Paul by killing him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Roman citizenship

The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. ACT 21 1 s3h3 figs-exclusive 0 General Information: Here the word “we” refers to Luke, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) From 1b0619a200967eca95e016cf004790e639a633a2 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Larry Sallee Date: Wed, 6 Apr 2022 21:42:20 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 14/15] Corrected format errors in Rom and 1Th that prevented merge. (#2389) Co-authored-by: Larry Sallee Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2389 --- en_tn_46-ROM.tsv | 8 +- en_tn_53-1TH.tsv | 534 ++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------- 2 files changed, 257 insertions(+), 285 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv index c73d8f56a2..3db9d31006 100644 --- a/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv +++ b/en_tn_46-ROM.tsv @@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote ROM front intro gtn1 0 # Introduction to Romans

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of the Book of Romans

1. Introduction (1:1-15)
2. Righteousness by faith in Jesus Christ (1:16-17)
3. All mankind is condemned because of sin (1:18-3:20)
4. Righteousness through Jesus Christ by faith in him (3:21-4:25)
5. The fruits of the Spirit (5:1-11)
6. Adam and Christ compared (5:12-21)
7. Becoming like Christ in this life (6:1-8:39)
8. God’s plan for Israel (9:1-11:36)
9. Practical advice for living as Christians (12:1-15:13)
10. Conclusion and greetings (15:14-16:27)

### Who wrote the Book of Romans?

The Apostle Paul wrote the Book of Romans. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee. He persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire telling people about Jesus.

Paul probably wrote this letter while he was staying in the city of Corinth during his third trip through the Roman Empire.

### What is the Book of Romans about?

Paul wrote this letter to the Christians in Rome. Paul wanted to get them ready to receive him when he visited them. He said his purpose was to “bring about the obedience of faith” (16:26).

In this letter Paul most fully described the gospel of Jesus Christ. He explained that both Jews and non-Jews have sinned, and God will forgive them and declare them righteous only if they believe in Jesus (chapters 1-11). Then he gave them practical advice for how believers should live (chapters 12-16),

### How should the title of this book be translated?

Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “Romans.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s Letter to the Church in Rome,” or “A Letter to the Christians in Rome.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What are the titles used to refer to Jesus?

In Romans, Paul described Jesus Christ by many titles and descriptions: Jesus Christ (1:1), the Seed of David (1:3), the Son of God (1:4), the Lord Jesus Christ (1:7), Christ Jesus (3:24), Propitiation (3:25), Jesus (3:26), Jesus our Lord (4:24), Lord of Hosts (9:29), a Stumbling Stone and Rock of Offence (9:33), the End of the Law (10:4), the Deliverer (11:26), Lord of the Dead and the Living (14:9), and the Root of Jesse (15:12).

### How should theological terms in Romans be translated?

Paul uses many theological terms that are not used in the four gospels. As early Christians learned more about the meaning of Jesus Christ and his message, they needed words and expressions for new ideas. Some examples of these words are “justification” (5:1), “works of the law” (3:20), “reconcile” (5:10), “propitiation” (3:25), “sanctification” (6:19), and “the old man” (6:6).

The “key terms” dictionary can help translators understand many of these terms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])

Terms such as those given above are difficult to explain. It is often hard or impossible for translators to find equivalent terms in their own languages. It can help to know that word equivalents of these terms are not necessary. Instead, translators can develop short expressions to communicate these ideas. For example, the term “gospel” can be translated as “the good news about Jesus Christ.”

Translators should also remember that some of these terms have more than one meaning. The meaning will depend on how the author is using the word in that particular passage. For example, “righteousness” sometimes means that a person obeys God’s law. At other times, “righteousness” means that Jesus Christ has perfectly obeyed God’s law for us.

### What did Paul mean by “a remnant” of Israel (11:5)?

The idea of a “remnant” is important both in the Old Testament and for Paul. Most of the Israelites were either killed or scattered among other people when the Assyrians and then the Babylonians conquered their land. Only a relatively few Jews survived. They were known as “the remnant.”

In 11:1-9, Paul speaks of another remnant. This remnant is the Jews whom God saved because they believed in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/remnant]])

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### What did Paul mean by being “in Christ”?

The phrase “in Christ” and similar phrases occur in 3:24; 6:11, 23; 8:1,2,39; 9:1; 12:5,17; 15:17; and 16:3,7,9,10. Paul used these kinds of phrases as a metaphor to express that Christian believers belong to Jesus Christ. Belonging to Christ means the believer is saved and is made a friend with God. The believer is also promised to live with God forever. However, this idea can be difficult to represent in many languages.

These phrases also have specific meanings that depend on how Paul used them in a particular passage. For example, in 3:24 (“the redemption that is in Christ Jesus”), Paul referred to our being redeemed “because” of Jesus Christ. In 8:9 (“you are not in the flesh but in the Spirit”), Paul spoke of believers submitting “to” the Holy Spirit. In 9:1 (“I tell the truth in Christ”), Paul meant that he is telling the truth that “is in agreement with” Jesus Christ.

Nevertheless, the basic idea of our being united with Jesus Christ (and with the Holy Spirit) is seen in these passages as well. Therefore, the translator has a choice in many passages that use “in.” He will often decide to represent the more immediate sense of “in,” such as, “by means of,” “in the manner of,” or “in regard to.” But, if possible, the translator should choose a word or phrase that represents the immediate sense and the sense of “in union with.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/inchrist]])

### How are the ideas of “holy,” “saints” or “holy ones,” and “sanctify” represented in Romans in the ULT?

The scriptures use such words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating into English, the ULT uses the following principles:

* Sometimes the meaning in a passage implies moral holiness. Especially important for understanding the gospel is the fact that God considers Christians to be sinless because they are united to Jesus Christ. Another related fact is that God is perfect and faultless. A third fact is that Christians are to conduct themselves in a blameless and faultless manner in life. In these cases, the ULT uses “holy,” “holy God,” “holy ones” or “holy people.” (See: 1:7)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In cases where some other English versions have “saints” or “holy ones,” the ULT uses “believers.” (See: 8:27; 12:13; 15:25, 26, 31; 16:2, 15)
* Sometimes the meaning in a passage indicates the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “set apart,” “dedicated to,” “consecrated,” or “reserved for.” (See: 15:16)

The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.

### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Romans?

For the following verses, modern version of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT includes the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote.

* “he \[God\] works all things together for good” (8:28). Some older versions read, “All things work together for good.”
* “But if it is by grace, it is no longer by works. Otherwise grace would no longer be grace” (11:6). Some older versions read: “But if it is by works, then is it no more grace: otherwise work is no more work.”

The following verse is not in the best ancient copies of the Bible. Translators are advised not to include this verse. However, if in the translators’ region there are older Bible versions that have this verse, the translators can include it. If it is translated, it should be put inside square brackets (\[\]) to indicate that it is probably not original to the Book of Romans.

* “May the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ be with you all. Amen” (16:24).

(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) ROM 1 intro hn5n 0 # Romans 1 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The first verse is a type of introduction. People in the ancient Mediterranean region often started their letters this way. Sometimes this is called a “salutation.”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The gospel

This chapter refers to the contents of the Book of Romans as “the gospel” ([Romans 1:2](../rom/01/02.md)). Romans is not a gospel like Matthew, Mark, Luke and John. Instead, chapters 1-8 present the biblical gospel: All have sinned. Jesus died for our sins. He was raised again that we might have new life in him.

### Fruit

This chapter uses the imagery of fruit. The image of fruit usually refers to a person’s faith producing good works in their life. In this chapter, it refers to the results of Paul’s work among the Roman Christians. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fruit]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])

### Universal Condemnation and the Wrath of God

This chapter explains that everyone is without excuse. We all know about the true God, Yahweh, from his creation all around us. Because of our sin and our sinful nature, every person justly deserves the wrath of God. This wrath was satisfied by Jesus dying on a cross for those who believe in him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### “God gave them over”

Many scholars view the phrases “God gave them over” and “God gave them up” as theologically significant. For this reason, it is important to translate these phrases with God playing a passive role in the action. God simply allows men to pursue their own desires, he does not force them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Difficult phrases and concepts

This chapter has many difficult ideas in it. How Paul writes makes many of the phrases in this chapter difficult to translate. The translator may need to use the UST to understand the meaning of the phrases. And it may be necessary to more freely translate these phrases. Some of the difficult phrases include: “obedience of faith,” “whom I serve in my spirit,” “from faith to faith” and “exchanged the glory of the imperishable God for the likenesses of an image of perishable man.” -ROM 1 1 x3em figs-explicit Παῦλος 1 Paul Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter. You may also need to tell in this same verse who the people are to whom **Paul** wrote the letter ([Romans 1:7](../01/07.md)). Alternate translation: “I, Paul, wrote this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -ROM 1 1 v5b9 figs-activepassive κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, ἀφωρισμένος εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ 1 called to be an apostle and set apart for the gospel of God You can translate this in an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God called to be an apostle and chose to tell people about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -ROM 1 1 sg88 κλητὸς 1 called This means that God has appointed or chosen people to be his children, to be his servants and proclaimers of his message of salvation through Jesus. -ROM 1 2 r5x7 ὃ προεπηγγείλατο διὰ τῶν προφητῶν αὐτοῦ ἐν Γραφαῖς ἁγίαις 1 which he promised beforehand by his prophets in the holy scriptures God promised his people that he would set up his kingdom. He told the **prophets** to write these promises in the **scriptures**. +ROM 1 1 x3em writing-participants Παῦλος, δοῦλος Χριστοῦ 1 Paul In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language may have a particular way of introducing the author of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you could use it here. Immediately after introducing the writer, you might also want to indicate to whom the letter was written (See [Romans 1:7](../01/07.md)). Alternate translation: “I, Paul, am the one writing this letter to you believers in Christ in the city of Rome, am a servant of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +ROM 1 1 v5b9 figs-activepassive κλητὸς ἀπόστολος, ἀφωρισμένος εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ 1 called to be an apostle and set apart for the gospel of God You can state this in active form, or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that **Jesus** **called** and **set apart** (See also [Acts 9:1-18](Acts/09/01.md). Alternate translation: “whom Jesus summoned to represent him and specially chose to proclaim God’s good news” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +ROM 1 1 w6j9 figs-ellipsis κλητὸς ἀπόστολος 1 A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **to be** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +ROM 1 1 ukts grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς εὐαγγέλιον Θεοῦ 1 Here, **for** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which he is **a servant of Christ Jesus**, and the reason why Jesus **called** him and **set** him **apart** . Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to preach God’s good news” or “so that I could announce the good news from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) ROM 1 3 lab1 περὶ τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ 1 concerning his Son This refers to “the gospel of God,” the good news that God promised to send **his Son** into the world. ROM 1 3 lk5q guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Υἱοῦ 1 Son **Son** is an important title for Jesus, the Son of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]]) ROM 1 3 rj9f figs-explicit τοῦ γενομένου ἐκ σπέρματος Δαυεὶδ κατὰ σάρκα 1 who was a descendant of David according to the flesh Here the word **flesh** refers to the physical body. Alternate translation: “who is a descendant of David according to the physical nature” or “who was born into the family of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) diff --git a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv index 2966c321e6..de47a520c6 100644 --- a/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv +++ b/en_tn_53-1TH.tsv @@ -13,21 +13,20 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 1 2 o7cp figs-hyperbole πάντοτε…μνείαν ποιούμενοι ἐπὶ τῶν προσευχῶν ἡμῶν, ἀδιαλείπτως 1 Here, the words **always** and **continually** are exaggerations that figuratively express the intensity and frequency of the prayers offered up to God by Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy for the Thessalonians. If your language would not use exaggeration in this way, use plain language and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We regularly give thanks to God for all of you, very often making mention of you in our prayers” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole) 1TH 1 3 ecw0 figs-idiom μνημονεύοντες 1 The main verb of this sentence is “we give thanks” (See [1:2](../01/02.md)). The phrase **remembering…before our God and Father** is an idiom that also means to thank God in prayer. The apostles are remembering these things about the Thessalonians and thanking God for them. If it would be helpful for your readers, you could move the phrase **before our God and Father** to follow **remembering**. Alternate translation: “offering thanks for…to our God and Father” or “gratefully mentioning to our God and Father” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom) 1TH 1 3 w769 figs-possession τοῦ ἔργου τῆς πίστεως, καὶ τοῦ κόπου τῆς ἀγάπης, καὶ τῆς ὑπομονῆς τῆς ἐλπίδος 1 Paul uses three pairs of words in a possessive relationship here. The most likely meaning of this possessive relationship is that the second word of each pair is the motivation for the first word of the pair. Alternate translation: “work motivated by faith and labor because of love and endurance based on future promises” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession) -1TH 1 3 kr8q figs-possession τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The words **hope in our Lord Jesus Christ** is a possessive form. The relationship between **our Lord Jesus Christ** and **hope** could be: (1) Jesus is the object of hope. Alternate translation: “that our Lord Jesus Christ will do what he has promised” (2) Jesus is the source of hope. Alternate translation: “that comes from our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession) +1TH 1 3 kr8q figs-possession τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 The words **hope in our Lord Jesus Christ** is a possessive form. The relationship between **our Lord Jesus Christ** and **hope** could refer to: (1) Jesus as the object of hope. Alternate translation: “that our Lord Jesus Christ will do what he has promised” (2) Jesus as the source of hope. Alternate translation: “that comes from our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession) 1TH 1 3 tvrg figs-hendiadys τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our God and Father** refers to the one divine person who is both God and Father. This phrase is a hendiadys, since Father further describes God. Alternate translation: “God our Father” or “our Father God” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys) 1TH 1 3 v01e figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Here, **our** refers to Paul, Silvanus, Timothy, and the Thessalonian church. All believers are the spiritual children of God the Father through Jesus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive) 1TH 1 4 psc4 grammar-connect-time-simultaneous εἰδότες 1 Here, **knowing** continues the simultaneous description of how the writers of this letter “give thanks” (See UST). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) 1TH 1 4 qx5o figs-nominaladj ἀδελφοὶ ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This phrase acts as nominal adjective that describes the Thessalonian Church in relational terms. They are spiritual siblings in their relationship with the writers of the letter, and beloved children in their relationship with **God** the Father (See [1:3](../01/03.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1TH 1 4 erb6 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Throughout this letter, **brothers** is a metaphor meaning “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers in Christ.” If your readers would not understand what **brothers** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 1 4 egkq figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὶ 1 Although the term **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both males and females. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1TH 1 4 kiz3 ἠγαπημένοι 1 The word translated **loved** indicates a past relationship with continuing results (literally, “has been and/or continues to be loved”). If your language has this verbal distinction, you could emphasize the past and present nuances in your translation. Alternate translation: “who have always been loved” or “who are continually loved” 1TH 1 4 j08t figs-activepassive ἠγαπημένοι ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it is clearer in your language, this passive form **loved** could be changed to an active form. Alternate translation: “whom God has always loved” (see UST)(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) 1TH 1 4 t70n grammar-connect-logic-result τὴν ἐκλογὴν ὑμῶν 1 This phrase **your election** is the direct objective of **knowing** and the beginning of a result clause. The reason why the writers of this letter know that the Thessalonians have been chosen as God’s people is found in the following verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 1 4 ohtl figs-abstractnouns τὴν ἐκλογὴν ὑμῶν, 1 Here, **your election** is an abstract noun phrase. If this is unclear in your language, you could change this abstract noun to a verb form. Alternate translation: “that he chose you to belong to him,” or “that he ordained you to be his children,” or starting a new sentence, “God selected you to be his people.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 1 5 jxfs grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 Here, **because** is the marker of a result clause. The writers of this letter are certain of the “election” and identity of the Thessalonian Church as God’s people [1:4](../01/04.md), **because** they received the gospel message in all the ways described in verse 5. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 1 5 ude4 grammar-connect-logic-contrast τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐγενήθη εἰς ὑμᾶς ἐν λόγῳ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, καὶ πληροφορίᾳ πολλῇ 1 not in word only The writers of this letter use a contrasting clause to emphasis the multi-faceted effect of the gospel. Alternate translation: “our gospel preaching did not come to you as only a simple message, but even accompanied with power and the Holy Spirit and full assurance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1TH 1 5 sm4j grammar-connect-time-simultaneous τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ἡμῶν οὐκ ἐγενήθη εἰς ὑμᾶς ἐν λόγῳ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ, καὶ πληροφορίᾳ πολλῇ 1 not in word only If it is clearer in your language, you could change this extended phrase to a simultaneous clause, framed in a positive way. Alternate translation: “our gospel message was completely validated: by our words, by a display of power, by the Holy Spirit, by your own full assurance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) -1TH 1 5 h675 ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 but also in power, and in the Holy Spirit This refers to: (1) the **Holy Spirit** gave the apostles the ability to preach the **gospel** powerfully. See UST (2) the **Holy Spirit** caused the preaching of the **gospel** to have a powerful effect among the Thessalonian Church. Alternate translation: “but also empowered by the Holy Spirit” (3) the **Holy Spirit** demonstrated the truth of the **gospel** preaching through displays of **power**. Alternate translation: “but also with powerful signs from the Holy Spirit” +1TH 1 5 h675 ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν δυνάμει, καὶ ἐν Πνεύματι Ἁγίῳ 1 but also in power, and in the Holy Spirit This phrase could refer to: (1) the **Holy Spirit** who gave the apostles the ability to preach the **gospel** powerfully. See UST (2) the **Holy Spirit** who caused the preaching of the **gospel** to have a powerful effect among the Thessalonian Church. Alternate translation: “but also empowered by the Holy Spirit” (3) the **Holy Spirit** demonstrated the truth of the **gospel** preaching through displays of **power**. Alternate translation: “but also with powerful signs from the Holy Spirit” 1TH 1 5 t1w3 figs-abstractnouns πληροφορίᾳ πολλῇ 1 in much assurance Here, **assurance** is an abstract noun. If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **assurance** in another way. Alternate translation: “the Holy Spirit gave you full confidence” or “the Holy Spirit fully convinced you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 1 5 wdr7 καθὼς οἴδατε οἷοι 1 The phrase **just as you know what kind of men** is used by writers of this letter to validate the gospel message, by the example of their own conduct amongst the Thessalonian Church. Alternate translation: “you even experienced it for yourself” or “you are well aware how we behaved” 1TH 1 6 cs49 figs-abstractnouns καὶ ὑμεῖς μιμηταὶ ἡμῶν ἐγενήθητε καὶ τοῦ Κυρίου 1 you became imitators If your language would not use a noun for the idea behind **imitators**, you could translate this with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “And all of you mimicked us and the Lord” or “And all of you copied us and the Lord” or “And all of you behaved like us and the Lord” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns) @@ -155,8 +154,12 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 2 15 ihh7 grammar-connect-logic-result ἡμᾶς ἐκδιωξάντων; καὶ Θεῷ μὴ ἀρεσκόντων, καὶ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ἐναντίων 1 Here, **and** indicates that the following phrase is the result of Jews’ persecution. If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes.To emphasize God’s response toward the Jews’ persecution, you could begin a new sentence with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “have persecuted us and are enemies of all people. This is why God is continually displeased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 2 15 tfc4 figs-parallelism καὶ Θεῷ μὴ ἀρεσκόντων, καὶ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ἐναντίων, 1 These two phrases mean similar things. These phrases are meant to express how the Jewish persecution of Christians is the same thing as opposing God himself. If it would be clearer in your language, you can combine the phrases into one clarifying idea. Alternate translation: “and they make themselves enemies of God by how hostile they are against the Jewish and Gentile churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1TH 2 15 g6q1 figs-possession πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ἐναντίων, 1 Paul is using the possessive form of **hostile** to describe how the persecutors of the Christian Church are characterized by a hostile attitude. Alternate translation: “characterized by being opposed to all people types” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1TH 2 15 dmxm figs-ellipsis ἐναντίων 1 Paul leaves out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “are opposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1TH 2 15 pg9u figs-synecdoche πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Paul refers figuratively to **all men** to mean “all people types” or “the whole human race.” Here, **all men** refers to two parts of humanity represented by Jews and Gentiles. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all people types” or “to all the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1TH 2 15 dmxm figs-ellipsis ἐναντίων 1 A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **are** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “are opposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1TH 2 15 u6ko figs-synecdoche πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Paul speaks figuratively about **all men** to refer to “all people types” or “the whole human race.” Here, **all men** refers to two parts of humanity represented by Jews (See [2:14](../02/14.md)) and Gentiles (See [2:16](../02/16.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “to all people types” or “to all the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) +1TH 2 15 ywwr figs-hyperbole πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις 1 Here, **to all men** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to express his emotions about the hostile Jews. Paul does not mean that the Jews are hostile to every individual human being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows this emphasis. Alternate translation: “toward all of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +1TH 2 15 vfyv figs-gendernotations ἀνθρώποις 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word here in a generic sense that includes both **men** and women. Alternate translation: “humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) +1TH 2 16 u012 figs-distinguish κωλυόντων ἡμᾶς τοῖς ἔθνεσιν λαλῆσαι, ἵνα σωθῶσιν 1 This clause gives further information for why the Gentiles are “not pleasing to God and {are} hostile to all men” (See [2:15](../02/15.md)). If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +1TH 2 16 o0vb figs-genericnoun τοῖς ἔθνεσιν 1 Here, **Gentiles** refers to all the non-Christian nations in general, not one group of people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase. Alternate translation: “among the non-Jews” or “to all the nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) 1TH 2 16 r5fi grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα σωθῶσιν 1 This purpose clause gives the reason why the Jews are trying to prevent the apostles from preaching the gospel to the Gentiles. Here, **to speak** expresses the way the Gentiles **might be saved.** This clause could refer to: (1) the Jews purposely trying to keep the Gentiles from salvation. Alternate translation: “to hinder the Gentiles from being saved” (2) how the speaking is for the purpose of saving the Gentiles. Alternate translation: “in order that the Gentiles can be saved” or “for the purpose of saving the nations” The clause could also refer to both ideas. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1TH 2 16 n2ue figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ ἀναπληρῶσαι αὐτῶν τὰς ἁμαρτίας πάντοτε 1 to always fill up their own sins Paul speaks figuratively of the Jews’ sins as if they fill a container. He means that these Jews sin so much and so extremely that they can never escape God’s **wrath**. If your readers would not understand what it means to **to always fill up** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “causing them to always reach the limit of their sinfulness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 2 16 z5fr grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς τὸ ἀναπληρῶσαι 1 This result clause explains what will happen to the Jews for **forbidding** the apostles **to speak to the Gentiles**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “as a result, God will no longer forgive their many sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) @@ -185,35 +188,35 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 2 19 e7tl figs-metonymy στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 crown of boasting Here, **crown** refers figuratively to a laurel wreath awarded to victorious athletes. The expression **crown of boasting** means a reward for victory, or having competed well. The proof the apostles’ success will ultimately be displayed at the Second Coming of Christ, if the Thessalonian Church remains faithful to God (See [4:13-5:11](../04/13/.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “reward for victory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) 1TH 2 19 uvb4 figs-possession στέφανος καυχήσεως 1 crown of boasting Paul is using this possessive form to describe either: (1) product of boasting. Alternate translation: “crown that produces boasting” (2) means of boasting. Alternate translation: “crown through which we boast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1TH 2 19 h7gh figs-metonymy ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 crown of boasting Here, **before** refers to location or sphere, used as a substitute for “in front of” or “in the presence of.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our Lord Jesus” or “in front of our Lord Jesus” or “in the sight of our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1TH 2 19 mksc figs-idiom ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ 1 crown of boasting Here, **his coming** is a well-known idiom in 1-2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [3:13](../03/13.md)) or the “Day of the Lord” (See [5:2](../05/02.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “at his Second Coming” or “when he arrives again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 2 19 mksc figs-idiom ἐν τῇ αὐτοῦ παρουσίᾳ 1 crown of boasting Here, **his coming** is a well-known idiom in 1-2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [3:13](../03/13.md)) or the “Day of the Lord” (See [5:2](../05/02.md)). Use a natural way in your languageto emphasize this idea. Alternate translation: “at his Second Coming” or “when he arrives again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 2 20 l3m0 figs-parallelism ὑμεῖς γάρ ἐστε ἡ δόξα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἡ χαρά 1 crown of boasting This verse means the same thing as “our hope or joy or crown of boasting” in [2:19](../02/19.md). Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to emphasize that he is genuinely pleased with the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1TH 2 20 d8dz figs-rpronouns ὑμεῖς 1 crown of boasting Paul uses the word **you** to emphasize how the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness to God brings honor and joy to the apostles. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 2 20 nlbd figs-personification ὑμεῖς γάρ ἐστε ἡ δόξα ἡμῶν, καὶ ἡ χαρά 1 crown of boasting Here, the Thessalonian church is figuratively compared to the abstract concepts of **glory and joy**. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because of you, God will honor us and make us rejoice” or “Certainly, we will become glorified and rejoice because of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) 1TH 3 intro j379 0 # 1 Thessalonians 3 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 3

1. Timothy’s Visit (3:1-5)
* Apostolic concern (3:1-2)
* Apostolic encouragement (3:3-5)
2. Timothy’s Report (3:6-13)
* Good news (3:6-10)
* Apostolic prayer (3:11-13)

## Structure and formatting

The first part of this chapter recounts Timothy’s visit to Thessalonica. The second part tells about his report to Paul and Silvanus at Athens. Lastly, the apostles offer a prayer on behalf of the Thessalonian Church.

## “We” and “you”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Metaphor

In this chapter, the Apostle Paul uses the phrase “stand firm” in [3:8](../03/08.md) as a metaphor of faithfulness to the Gospel, and “be shaken” in [3:3](../03/03.md)) as the opposite of being faithful. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]])

Use a building metaphor, the apostles pray that God will “strengthen the “hearts” of the Thessalonian Church “blameless” (See [3:13](../03/13.md).

The enemy of God’s people, “Satan” (See [2:18](../02/18.md)) is here called “the tempter” (See [3:5](../03/05.md)).

### Hyperbole

Paul uses emotional and extreme language when speaking of his memory of the Thessalonian church. “Enduring it no longer,” the apostles and especially Paul (See [3:1,5](../03/01.md)), feel compelled to find out about the spiritual condition of the church. The intensity and duration the apostles’ prayers is described as “night and day pleading earnestly” (See [3:10](../03/10.md)).

### The Second Coming of Christ

Here, the apostles pray that the Thessalonian Church will be preserved holy when Christ comes again with all his holy ones, or “saints” (See [3:13](../03/13.md). -1TH 3 1 fqe3 grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ μηκέτι στέγοντες, ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι ἐν Ἀθήναις μόνοι, 1 enduring it no longer If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “We thought it proper to stay behind in Athens alone, because we could not restrain ourselves any longer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 3 1 fqe3 grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ μηκέτι στέγοντες, ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι ἐν Ἀθήναις μόνοι, 1 enduring it no longer This is a result clause. Paul is explaining why he sent Timothy to Thessalonica in [3:2](../03/02.md). Alternate translation: “Because we could not restrain ourselves any longer, we thought it proper to stay behind in Athens alone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 3 1 zvgz grammar-connect-words-phrases διὸ 1 enduring it no longer Here, **Therefore** indicates a return to the topic of a visit from the apostles (See [2:17-18](../02/17/.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 3 1 amxf figs-hyperbole διὸ μηκέτι στέγοντες 1 enduring it no longer This phrase uses extreme exaggeration to express the apostles’ deep desire to visit the Thessalonian church (See [2:17](../02/17.md)). The word translated **enduring** can also convey the concept of keeping water out of a ship or trying to contain or holding something back. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that communicates anxious longing. Alternate translation: “Thus, since we could not bear to wait any longer” or “Therefore, because we could not ignore these emotions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -1TH 3 1 n47x figs-explicit ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι ἐν Ἀθήναις μόνοι 1 we thought it good to be left behind at Athens alone The assumed knowledge is that **we** and **alone** refer to Paul and Silvanus (and perhaps Timothy), since in [3:2](../03/02.md) it says “we sent Timothy.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Silas and I thought it was good idea to remain alone in Athens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 3 2 q1f7 grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ 1 our brother and a servant Here, **and** indicates that what follows is the result of the apostles’ desire to visit the Thessalonian church. You can make this clear in your translation with more explicit connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “Even though this was true” or “So” or “This is why” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 3 1 amxf figs-hyperbole διὸ μηκέτι στέγοντες 1 enduring it no longer This phrase uses extreme exaggeration to express the apostles’ deep desire to visit the Thessalonian church (See [2:17](../02/17.md)). The word translated **enduring** is related to the idea of keeping water out of a ship or trying to contain or holding something back. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that communicates anxious longing. Alternate translation: “Thus, since we could not bear to wait any longer” or “Therefore, because we could not ignore these emotions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +1TH 3 1 n47x figs-explicit ηὐδοκήσαμεν καταλειφθῆναι ἐν Ἀθήναις μόνοι 1 we thought it good to be left behind at Athens alone Here, **we** and **alone** refer to Paul and Silvanus (and perhaps Timothy), since in [3:2](../03/02.md) it says “we sent Timothy.” If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Silas and I thought it was good idea to remain alone in Athens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 3 2 q1f7 grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 our brother and a servant What follows the word **and** here is in contrast to Paul and Silvanus staying behind at Athens. Instead, they sent Timothy. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Even though this was true” or “Yet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) 1TH 3 2 vsoo figs-exclusive ἐπέμψαμεν…ἡμῶν 1 our brother and a servant When Paul says **we** and **our**, he is exclusively speaking of himself and Silvanus. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 3 2 d8yy figs-distinguish τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν, καὶ διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 our brother and a servant This phrase gives us further information about Timothy. It is meant to clarify that he is authorized by the apostles and God himself. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “and we sent Timothy who is our fellow worker and an authorized servant of God” or “and we sent Timothy. He is our assistant and God’s authorized servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -1TH 3 2 yyio figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν, καὶ διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 our brother and a servant Here, the metaphors **our brother** and **servant** refer to **Timothy** as a fellow apostle. If your readers would not understand what **brother** or **servant** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he assists us and ministers for God in the preaching of the gospel about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 3 2 lkvo figs-possession καὶ διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 our brother and a servant Here, **servant of God** likely refer to these ideas: (1) a servant in general. Alternate translation: “and a minister of God” or “and assistant to God” (2) office of deacon. Alternate translation: “and a deacon of God” or “who also serves God as a deacon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1TH 3 2 dsnc ἐν 1 our brother and a servant This preposition **in** could convey a few different nuances of meaning: (1) Association. Alternate translation: “associated with” or “partnering in” (2) Cause. Alternate translation: “for the cause of” or “for the sake of” (3) Instrument. Alternate translation: “through” or “by means of” -1TH 3 2 pqif figs-possession τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 our brother and a servant Paul is most likely using the possessive form to refer to **the gospel** that is “about” **Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could replace **of** with “about.” Alternate translation: “about Christ” or concerning Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1TH 3 2 yyio figs-metaphor τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἡμῶν, καὶ διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 our brother and a servant Here, the metaphors **our brother** and **servant** refer to **Timothy** as a fellow apostle (See [2:6](..02/06.md)). If your readers would not understand what **brother** or **servant** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he assists us and ministers for God in the preaching of the gospel about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 3 2 lkvo figs-possession καὶ διάκονον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 our brother and a servant Here, **servant of God** could refer to: (1) a servant in general. Alternate translation: “and a minister of God” or “and assistant to God” (2) office of deacon. Alternate translation: “and a deacon of God” or “who also serves God as a deacon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1TH 3 2 dsnc ἐν 1 our brother and a servant This preposition **in** could refer to: (1) Timothy’s association with the gospel. Alternate translation: “associated with” or “partnering in” (2) the cause of the gospel. Alternate translation: “for the cause of” or “for the sake of” (3) the means of the gospel. Alternate translation: “through” or “by means of” +1TH 3 2 pqif figs-possession τοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 our brother and a servant Paul is most likely using the possessive form to refer to **the gospel** that is “about” **Christ**. If this is not clear in your language, you could replace **of** with “about.” Alternate translation: “about Christ” or “concerning Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) 1TH 3 2 x4vx grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμᾶς καὶ παρακαλέσαι 1 our brother and a servant This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why he and Silvanus sent Timothy. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that you would be confirmed and consoled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1TH 3 3 u7vo figs-abstractnouns τὸ μηδένα σαίνεσθαι ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν ταύταις 1 no one be disturbed If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **afflictions** in another way. Alternate translation: “so that being distressed would not make anyone waver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TH 3 3 u7vo figs-abstractnouns τὸ μηδένα σαίνεσθαι ἐν ταῖς θλίψεσιν ταύταις 1 no one be disturbed If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **afflictions** in another way. Alternate translation: “so that when you are distressed it would not make anyone waver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 3 3 o4w8 grammar-connect-logic-goal τὸ μηδένα σαίνεσθαι 1 no one be disturbed This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for sending Timothy. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that no one would waver” or “for the purpose of keeping anyone from being deceived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1TH 3 3 v8q7 grammar-collectivenouns μηδένα σαίνεσθαι 1 no one be disturbed The word **no one** is singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “no person wavers” or “none of you are deceived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 1TH 3 3 t0vs figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γὰρ οἴδατε 1 no one be disturbed Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize what the apostles had previously told them about **afflictions**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “In fact, you know for yourselves” or “Certainly, you are well aware of the fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1TH 3 3 cdaa grammar-collectivenouns εἰς τοῦτο 1 no one be disturbed The word **this** is a singular pronoun that equates **afflictions** with a condition or state of being. If your language does not use singular pronouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “for this very thing” or “for this purpose” or “for this destiny” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +1TH 3 3 cdaa grammar-collectivenouns εἰς τοῦτο 1 no one be disturbed Here, **this** refers to **afflictions**. However, in this sentence the meaning is more like a condition or state of “being afflicted” regularly or continually. The pronoun is changed to be singular to agree with this unstated idea. If you readers would not understand this shift you could change **this** to a plural pronoun or make this unstated idea explicit. Alternate translation: “for these afflictions” or “for this affliction” “for a life characterized by afflictions”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) 1TH 3 3 rkx9 figs-explicit κείμεθα 1 we are appointed Paul assumes that the Thessalonian church knows that it is God who **appointed** the apostles for **afflictions**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “God appointed us” or “God destined us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) 1TH 3 3 gla7 figs-exclusive κείμεθα 1 we are appointed Here, **we** refers exclusively to the apostles. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: See UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1TH 3 4 nm1l writing-background καὶ γὰρ ὅτε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἦμεν, προελέγομεν ὑμῖν ὅτι μέλλομεν θλίβεσθαι, καθὼς καὶ ἐγένετο καὶ οἴδατε. 1 to suffer affliction Paul is giving background information about his previous visit. He encourages the Thessalonian church that he sent Timothy to remind them of what he had already told them about apostolic sufferings. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the last time we visited you, we kept telling you before it happened, ‘We are destined to be afflicted.’ You are well aware that it happened exactly as we told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +1TH 3 4 nm1l writing-background καὶ γὰρ ὅτε πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἦμεν, προελέγομεν ὑμῖν ὅτι μέλλομεν θλίβεσθαι, καθὼς καὶ ἐγένετο καὶ οἴδατε. 1 to suffer affliction Paul is giving background information about his previous visit. Paul reminds the Thessalonian church that what he predicted about the apostles’ sufferings has come true, so they should not be tempted to doubt the apostles’ authority or teaching (See [3:5,7](../03/05.md)). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Indeed, the last time we visited you, we kept telling you before it happened, ‘We are destined to be afflicted.’ You are well aware that it happened exactly as we told you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) 1TH 3 4 wo6q figs-exclusive ἦμεν 1 to suffer affliction Here, **we** is exclusive of the apostles. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we apostles were” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 3 4 w95u grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 to suffer affliction Here, **For** indicates that what follows explains and emphasizes what the Thessalonian already know about the apostles’ afflictions. Alternate translation: “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 3 4 wuco figs-quotations προελέγομεν ὑμῖν ὅτι μέλλομεν θλίβεσθαι 1 to suffer affliction Here, **that** could either express emphasis or be a quotation marker of what the apostles said. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “we kept telling you ahead of time, ‘We are destined to endure distress.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -1TH 3 4 a5y6 καὶ ἐγένετο 1 to suffer affliction Here, **and it happened** is meant to emphasize Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy’s apostolic credentials by verifying that their prophetic words came true. +1TH 3 4 a5y6 καὶ ἐγένετο 1 to suffer affliction Here, **and it happened** is meant to emphasize Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy’s apostolic credentials by verifying that their prophetic words came true. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “and this is precisely what happened” 1TH 3 5 tj4e writing-participants διὰ τοῦτο κἀγὼ μηκέτι στέγων, ἔπεμψα εἰς τὸ γνῶναι τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν 1 I also no longer enduring it Here, Paul summarizes the story of Timothy’s visit, but leaves out mention of Timothy as redundant information. If it is clearer in your language, you could include mention of Timothy. Alternate translation: “Again, since I could not wait anymore, I sent Timothy to learn if you still trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) 1TH 3 5 o9ep figs-parallelism κἀγὼ μηκέτι στέγων, ἔπεμψα 1 I also no longer enduring it Paul repeats the same phrase **no longer enduring it** found in [3:1](../03/01.md). Here, **I … sent** parallels “we … sent” in [3:1-2](../03/01.md). This expresses that Paul represents the apostles who sent Timothy to Thessalonica. Use a natural way in language to indicate this parallelism. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) 1TH 3 5 st3d figs-hyperbole κἀγὼ μηκέτι στέγων 1 I also no longer enduring it This phrase is an exaggeration that Paul uses to express deep concern. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows deep concern. See your translation at [3:1](../03/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -234,7 +237,7 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 3 6 e6kx figs-abstractnouns καὶ ὅτι ἔχετε μνείαν ἡμῶν ἀγαθὴν πάντοτε 1 you always have good memories If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **memories** in another way. Alternate translation: “and how you always remember us fondly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 3 7 dpij grammar-connect-logic-result διὰ τοῦτο παρεκλήθημεν, ἀδελφοί, ἐφ’ ὑμῖν 1 brothers This phrase is a result clause. Paul is stating the result of the Timothy’s good news in [3:6])../03/06.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a result clause. Alternate translation: “Fellow believers in Christ, as a result of Timothy’s good news about you, God consoled us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 3 7 csz7 figs-hendiadys ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ καὶ θλίψει ἡμῶν 1 in all our distress and affliction This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **distress** describes the **affliction**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Here, this phrase emphasizes how much and how intensely the apostles were persecuted. Alternate translation: “in all our abusive affliction” or “in all our violent suffering” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -1TH 3 7 e96u figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ καὶ θλίψει ἡμῶν 1 in all our distress and affliction If your language does not use an abstract noun phrase for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind this abstract noun phrase in another way. Here, it could refer to: (1) time of distress and affliction. Alternate translation: “during all our abuse and affliction” or “each time we violently suffered” (2) place or way of distress and affliction. Alternate translation: “in every place the tempter violently afflicted us” or “in every way we suffered abuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TH 3 7 e96u figs-abstractnouns ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ ἀνάγκῃ καὶ θλίψει ἡμῶν 1 in all our distress and affliction If your language does not use an abstract noun phrase for these ideas, you could express the abstract noun phrase **distress and affliction** in another way. Here, it could refer to: (1) the time of distress and affliction. Alternate translation: “during all our abuse and affliction” or “each time we violently suffered” (2) the place or way of distress and affliction. Alternate translation: “in every place the tempter violently afflicted us” or “in every way we suffered abuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 3 8 utk3 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι νῦν ζῶμεν, ἐὰν ὑμεῖς στήκετε ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 if you stand firm in the Lord If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since you are remaining faithful to the Lord Jesus, we are now refreshed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 3 7 k54j figs-abstractnouns διὰ τῆς ὑμῶν πίστεως 1 because of your faith If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** in another way. Alternate translation: “because you remain faithful to God” or “through your faithfulness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 3 8 y1vb figs-hyperbole ὅτι νῦν ζῶμεν 1 we live Here, **For now we live** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how thankful he is that the Thessalonians **stand firm** in the Christian faith (See [3:7](../03/07.md)). Paul is not trying to say that he was dead. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that shows thankfulness. Alternate translation (replace the comma): “O how we are now refreshed!” or “O how we now feel alive!” or “Certainly now we thrive!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -245,287 +248,256 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNo 1TH 3 9 pzq7 figs-rquestion τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν δι’ ὑμᾶς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν. 1 For what thanks are we able to give back to God concerning you, for all the joy in which we rejoice before our God because of you, Paul is using a rhetorical question that continues to the end of [3:10](../03/10.md) in order to emphasize the apostles’ thankful joy for the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness to God. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate his words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “We could not possibly thank God enough for what he has done for you! When we pray to our God, we greatly rejoice because of you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) 1TH 3 9 pdc5 figs-metaphor τίνα γὰρ εὐχαριστίαν δυνάμεθα τῷ Θεῷ ἀνταποδοῦναι περὶ ὑμῶν 1 before our God With the phrase **give back**, Paul speaks figuratively of the apostles as if they owe God a debt for the sake of the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness. Paul means that the apostles cannot express how thankful they are. If your readers would not understand what it means to **give back** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because, how could we possibly show how grateful we are to God for you” or “Indeed, what kind of thanksgiving could we give in exchange for you to repay our debt to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 3 9 j6pj grammar-connect-logic-result ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν δι’ ὑμᾶς, ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 before our God If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Since this is a rhetorical question, you could change it to a statement, and begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Because of you, we greatly rejoice when we pray to God!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 3 9 u00t figs-doublet ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν 1 before our God These words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much joy the apostles have because of the Thessalonian church’s faithfulness to God. Alternate translation: “for how much we greatly rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +1TH 3 9 u00t figs-doublet ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ χαρᾷ ᾗ χαίρομεν 1 before our God Here, **joy** and **rejoice** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much joy the apostles have because of how faithful the Thessalonian church has been towards God. Alternate translation: “for how much we greatly rejoice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TH 3 9 p5ka figs-idiom χαίρομεν…ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν 1 before our God Here, **before our God** is an idiom for being in the personal presence of God. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “we rejoice in the presence of our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 3 10 k71n figs-hyperbole νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας, ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ δεόμενοι 1 earnestly This emphatic phrase is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how much and often the apostles pray for the Thessalonian church. Paul does not mean to say he never does anything else except pray. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we never stop intensely pleading” or “we continually and fervently praying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) 1TH 3 10 eb26 figs-idiom εἰς τὸ ἰδεῖν ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον 1 to see your face Here, the phrase **to see your face** is an idiom meaning “visit.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to visit you” or “to spend time with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) 1TH 3 10 s0xz figs-synecdoche ὑμῶν τὸ πρόσωπον 1 to see your face Paul refers figuratively to **your face** to mean the whole Thessalonian church. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1TH 3 10 e5fh figs-abstractnouns καὶ καταρτίσαι τὰ ὑστερήματα τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν 1 to see your face If your language does not use an abstract noun phrase for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **faith** in another way (See also [2:17](../02/17.md)). Alternate translation: “and to provide support so that you remain faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 3 11 tet9 grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ…κατευθύναι 1 General Information: Here, **But…may…direct** indicate that this verse is the beginning of a prayer that continues through [3:13](../03/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 3 11 mc2m figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς 1 may our God and Father … direct Paul uses the word **himself** to distinguish **our God and Father** from **our Lord Jesus**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +1TH 3 11 tet9 grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ…κατευθύναι 1 General Information: Here, the verb forms indicate that this is a blessing or prayer that continues through [3:13](../03/13.md). Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “Now we pray that … would guide” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) 1TH 3 11 f3wh figs-hendiadys ὁ Θεὸς καὶ Πατὴρ ἡμῶν 1 our God and Father … our Lord Here, **our God and Father** refers to the one divine person who is both God and Father. This phrase is a hendiadys, since Father further describes God (See also [1:3](../01/03.md)). Alternate translation: “God our Father” or “our Father God” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys) +1TH 3 11 mc2m figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς 1 may our God and Father … direct Paul uses the word **himself** to distinguish **our God and Father** from **our Lord Jesus**. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) 1TH 3 11 bql9 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμῶν…ἡμῶν 1 our God and Father … our Lord It is possible that these first two uses of **our** are inclusive of the the whole Christian Church. Yet, the third use of **our** exclusively refers to the apostles. So, it is most likely that **our** refers exclusively to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy in this whole verse (see also [1:9, 2:1, 3:9](../01/09.md)). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) 1TH 3 11 um1c figs-metaphor κατευθύναι τὴν ὁδὸν ἡμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς. 1 may … direct our way to you Paul speaks figuratively about God as if he was a pilot or captain of a ship. Paul means that he wants God to allow the apostles to visit the Thessalonian church again. If your readers would not understand what **may … direct our way to you** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “O that … would quickly bring us to you!” or “to direct our voyage so that we can visit you” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 3 12 f4ma figs-doublet πλεονάσαι καὶ περισσεύσαι 1 may the Lord make you increase and abound in love Here, **increase** and **abound** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much the apostles want the Thessalonian church to keep increasing in their love for all people. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “completely excel” or “fully thrive” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TH 3 12 o80n figs-metaphor τῇ ἀγάπῃ 1 may the Lord make you increase and abound in love Paul speaks figuratively of **love** as something that can be quantified or measured. He means that he hopes the Thessalonian church will keep loving people well. If your readers would not understand what **in love** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “lovingly increase and abound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 3 12 f4ma figs-doublet πλεονάσαι καὶ περισσεύσαι 1 may the Lord make you increase and abound in love These two words mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much the apostles want the Thessalonian church to keep increasing in their love for all people. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “completely excel” or “fully thrive” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1TH 3 12 ofl2 figs-merism εἰς ἀλλήλους, καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 may the Lord make you increase and abound in love Paul speaks figuratively, using these phrases in order to include the whole human race. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “toward each and every person” or “toward the whole human race” or “toward Christians and non-Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +1TH 3 12 ofl2 figs-merism εἰς ἀλλήλους, καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 may the Lord make you increase and abound in love Paul could be speaking figuratively, using these phrases in order to include the whole human race. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “toward each and every person” or “toward the whole human race” or “toward Christians and non-Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +1TH 3 12 gyy3 figs-nominaladj εἰς πάντας 1 may the Lord make you increase and abound in love Paul could be using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. It could refer to: (1) the whole human race. Alternate translation: “toward all humanity” (2) all Christians. Alternate translation: “for all your fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) 1TH 3 12 dm6c καθάπερ καὶ ἡμεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 may the Lord make you increase and abound in love Here, **just as we also toward you** is an emphatic phrase meant to reinforce the deep love the apostles have for the Thessalonian church (also in [3:6](../03/06.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “in the same way we love you” -1TH 3 13 ms8t figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, ἀμέμπτους ἐν ἁγιωσύνῃ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind these abstract noun phrases in another way. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord establishes you with innocent affections that are appropriate for those who belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TH 3 13 ms8t figs-abstractnouns εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας, ἀμέμπτους ἐν ἁγιωσύνῃ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind **hearts** and **holiness** in another way. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord establishes you with innocent affections that are appropriate for those who belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 3 13 ly21 figs-metaphor εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 to strengthen your hearts, blameless Paul speaks figuratively of the Thessalonian church as if they have one heart that is like a building that can be established or supported. He means that he wants God to increase their willpower or affections so that they would remain faithful to God. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “to establish your affections” or “to strengthen your will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 3 13 taws grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς τὸ στηρίξαι ὑμῶν τὰς καρδίας 1 to strengthen your hearts, blameless This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why he prays that God will increase the Thessalonian church’s love for all people. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that the Lord will establish your affections for him” or “in order that the Lord will strengthen your willpower” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1TH 3 13 jev8 figs-doublet ἀμέμπτους ἐν ἁγιωσύνῃ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize total sanctification. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. This phrase could refer to: (1) condition of holiness. Alternate translation: “blameless in a condition of holiness” (2) means of holiness. Alternate translation: “blameless through holiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +1TH 3 13 jev8 figs-doublet ἀμέμπτους ἐν ἁγιωσύνῃ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus Here, **blameless** and **holiness** mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize total sanctification. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. This phrase could refer to: (1) a condition of holiness. Alternate translation: “blameless in a condition of holiness” (2) how to become holy. Alternate translation: “blameless through holiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) 1TH 3 13 p12j figs-idiom ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus This phrase an idiom for being in the personal presence of God (See [3:9](../03/09.md)). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our Father God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 3 13 vnsi figs-explicit ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, μετὰ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων αὐτοῦ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus This is a reference to the Zechariah 14:5 (See also 2 Thessalonians 1:7,10; Jude 14). The implication is that these **saints** are all those **who are blameless in holiness** who have already died (See [4:14](../04/14.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time the Lord Jesus arrives along with all his holy people who have already died” or “when the Lord Jesus returns a second time with all those reposed people who belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 3 13 ytqg figs-idiom ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus Here, the word translated **coming** is a well-known idiom in 1-2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [2:19](../02/19.md) or the “Day of the Lord” [5:2](../05/02.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our Lord Jesus at his Second Coming” or “in the sight of our Lord Jesus when he arrives again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 3 13 py9f translate-textvariants ἀμήν 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus Many ancient manuscripts omit this word. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 4 intro b1z5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 4 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 4

1. Apostolic Teachings on Holiness (4:1-8)
2. Apostolic Teachings on Christian Love (4:9-12)
* Reminder (4:9-10)
* Keep Busy (4:11-12)
3. Apostolic Teachings on the Manner of the Second Coming of Christ (4:13-18)

## “We” and “you”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Christian love

The apostles address this topic of Christian love that the Thessalonian Church had previously asked about. The apostles encouraged the church that they were already loving well, and to continue to grow in this practice. The apostles also link “brotherly love” to living in harmony with each other and minding their own businesss, so that they would be a good example to non-Christians (See [4:11-12](../04/11.md)).

### Dying before the Second Coming of Christ

The Thessalonian Church was concerned about what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They were anxious to know whether or not those who died before Christ returned would be part of the Kingdom of God. Paul addresses that concern in [4:13-5:11](../04/13.md).

### The manner of the Second Coming of Christ

In [4:13-18](../04/13.md), the apostles teach about the events related to the Second Coming of Christ (called “the day of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md). This is so that the Thessalonians can “comfort one another with these words” (See [4:18](../04/18.md)).

## Important translation issues in this chapter

### Sexual immorality

Different cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators will have to consider the most appropriate way to communicate these sensitive issues.

### The Second Coming of Christ

Historically, there has been one teaching on the Second Coming of Christ. As the Nicene Creed of 381 states: “I await the resurrection of the dead and the life of the age to come.” Christ came once as Incarnate God and will return once as Resurrected Judge. This is what [4:13-5:11](../04/13.md) unequivocally refers to. Here, “the coming of the Lord” and the “day of the Lord” [5:2](../05/02.md) are the same event, as is clear from the context. One confusion stems from the fact that novel and heterodox interpretations have become popularized. Prior to the mid-1800’s there was no other view in any denomination of the Church. Another confusion comes from the reliance on modern chapter headings that often confuse readers about when and where subject matter changes. The original text of 1 Thessalonians had no chapter or verse markings, so it would have been more obvious to an ancient reader that chapter four and five are talking about the same event. -1TH 4 1 vtas grammar-connect-words-phrases λοιπὸν οὖν 1 brothers Here, **So finally** could refer to: (1) summary of the apostles teachings. Alternate translation: “So, in summary,” or (2) remaining things to address. “So then, here is what remains to talk about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 3 13 vnsi figs-explicit ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ, μετὰ πάντων τῶν ἁγίων αὐτοῦ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus This is a reference to Zechariah 14:5 (See also 2 Thessalonians 1:7,10; Jude 14). Here it is implied that these **saints** are all those **who are blameless in holiness** and who have already died (See [4:14](../04/14.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “at the time the Lord Jesus arrives along with all his holy people who have already died” or “when the Lord Jesus returns a second time with all those reposed people who belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 3 13 ytqg figs-idiom ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ 1 at the coming of our Lord Jesus Here, **at the coming of the Lord Jesus** is a well-known idiom in 1-2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [2:19; 4:15](../02/19.md) or the “Day of the **Lord**” [5:2](../05/02.md). Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this idea. Alternate translation: “in the presence of our Lord Jesus at his Second Coming” or “in the sight of our Lord Jesus when he arrives again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 4 intro b1z5 0 # 1 Thessalonians 4 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 4

1. Apostolic Teachings on Holiness (4:1-8)
2. Apostolic Teachings on Christian Love (4:9-12)
* Reminder (4:9-10)
* Keep Busy (4:11-12)
3. Apostolic Teachings on the Manner of the Second Coming of Christ (4:13-18)

## “We” and “you”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Christian love

The apostles address this topic of Christian love that the Thessalonian Church had previously asked about. The apostles encouraged the church that they were already loving well, and to continue to grow in this practice. The apostles also link “brotherly love” to living in harmony with each other and minding their own businesss, so that they would be a good example to non-Christians (See [4:11-12](../04/11.md)).

### Dying before the Second Coming of Christ

The Thessalonian Church was concerned about what would happen if a believer died before Christ returned. They were anxious to know whether or not those who died before Christ returned would be part of the Kingdom of God. Paul addresses that concern in [4:13-5:11](../04/13.md).

### The manner of the Second Coming of Christ

In [4:13-18](../04/13.md), the apostles teach about the events related to the Second Coming of Christ (called “the day of the Lord” in [5:2](../05/02.md). This is so that the Thessalonians can “comfort one another with these words” (See [4:18](../04/18.md)).

## Important translation issues in this chapter

### Sexual immorality

Different cultures have different standards of sexual morality. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators will have to consider the most appropriate way to communicate these sensitive issues.

### The Second Coming of Christ

Historically, there has been one teaching on the Second Coming of Christ. As the Nicene Creed of 381 states: “I await the resurrection of the dead and the life of the age to come.” Christ came once as Incarnate God and will return once as Resurrected Judge. This is what the passage in [4:13-5:11](../04/13.md) unequivocally refers to. Here, “the coming of the Lord” and the “day of the Lord” [5:2](../05/02.md) are the same event, as is clear from the context. One confusion stems from the fact that novel and heterodox interpretations have become popularized. Prior to the mid-1800’s there was no other view in any denomination of the Church. Another confusion comes from the reliance on modern chapter headings that often confuse readers about when and where subject matter changes. The original text of 1 Thessalonians had no chapter or verse markings, so it would have been more obvious to an ancient reader that chapter four and five are talking about the same event. +1TH 4 1 vtas grammar-connect-words-phrases λοιπὸν οὖν 1 brothers Here, **So finally** could refer to: (1) a summary of the apostles teachings. Alternate translation: “So, in summary,” (2) the remaining things to address. “So then, here is what remains for us to talk about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) 1TH 4 1 u2lw figs-doublet ἐρωτῶμεν ὑμᾶς καὶ παρακαλοῦμεν 1 we beg and exhort you These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how seriously the apostles want the Thessalonian church to follow their teachings. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “we are urging and appealing to you” or “we are strongly urging to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1TH 4 1 foeh figs-idiom ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ 1 we beg and exhort you Paul speaks figuratively as if the apostles are occupying space inside of **the Lord Jesus**. Here, the metaphor expresses the idea that the apostles represent Jesus himself like ambassadors who possess a king’s authority. If your readers would not understand what **in the Lord** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with our authority from the Lord Jesus” or “as spokespersons for the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 1 foeh figs-idiom ἐν Κυρίῳ Ἰησοῦ 1 we beg and exhort you Paul speaks figuratively as if the apostles are occupying space inside of **the Lord Jesus**. Here, the metaphor expresses the idea that the apostles represent Jesus himself like ambassadors who possess a king’s authority. If your readers would not understand what **in the Lord** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with our authority from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 4 1 p4db figs-metaphor τὸ πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν 1 it is necessary for you to walk Here, **to walk** is a metaphor that means “to live” or “to obey” (See [2:12](../02/12.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means **to walk** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “about how you must live” or “about how you are obligated to obey” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) 1TH 4 1 ckii figs-hendiadys τὸ πῶς δεῖ ὑμᾶς περιπατεῖν καὶ ἀρέσκειν Θεῷ (καθὼς καὶ περιπατεῖτε) 1 it is necessary for you to walk Here, **to walk and to please** expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **please** describes how the Thessalonian church should **walk**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “about how you must live to please God (exactly as you live now)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -1TH 4 1 q937 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα περισσεύητε μᾶλλον 1 it is necessary for you to walk This phrase could introduce a purpose clause. Paul could be stating the purpose for which apostles are begging and exhorting the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that you can excel more and more” or “in order that you thrive even more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1TH 4 1 q937 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα περισσεύητε μᾶλλον 1 it is necessary for you to walk This phrase is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for which apostles are begging and exhorting the Thessalonian church. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that you can excel more and more” or “in order that you thrive even more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) 1TH 4 2 oyu3 grammar-connect-time-background 0 through the Lord Jesus Paul is providing this background information about the apostles’ teachings during their previous visit to help readers understand what happens next. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) -1TH 4 2 dg4p grammar-connect-logic-result οἴδατε γὰρ τίνας παραγγελίας ἐδώκαμεν ὑμῖν διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 through the Lord Jesus This verse expresses that the Thessalonian church should do what the apostles previously taught them (See [4:1](../04/01.md)), because these teachings are are actually commands from **the Lord Jesus** himself. Use a natural way in your language to express a result clause. Alternate translation: “Because you recognize that the Lord Jesus commanded you through what we taught” or “Since you are aware that when we gave commands it was actually the Lord Jesus who taught you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 4 2 dg4p grammar-connect-logic-result οἴδατε γὰρ τίνας παραγγελίας ἐδώκαμεν ὑμῖν διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 through the Lord Jesus This verse expresses that the Thessalonian church should do what the apostles previously taught them (See [4:1](../04/01.md)), because these teachings are actually commands from **the Lord Jesus** himself. Use a natural way in your language to express a result clause. Alternate translation: “Because you recognize that the Lord Jesus commanded you through what we taught” or “Since you realize that when we gave commands it was actually the Lord Jesus who taught you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) 1TH 4 2 ebjm grammar-connect-words-phrases γὰρ 1 through the Lord Jesus Here, **For** indicates that what follows is something else important that the Thessalonian church should pay attention to. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “In fact” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 4 2 vg16 figs-metaphor διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 through the Lord Jesus Paul speaks figuratively of the **commands** that the apostles gave to the Thessalonian church as though **Jesus** personally spoke them to the apostles. Paul means that **Jesus** made the apostles his messengers, not that **Jesus** is a messenger of the apostles. If your readers would not understand what **through the Lord Jesus** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “by order of the Lord Jesus himself” or “through a message from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 4 3 ycsw figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὁ ἁγιασμὸς ὑμῶν, 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality If your language does not use an abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **will** and **sanctification** in another way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, God desires that you live like those who belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 4 3 vnp0 grammar-collectivenouns τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality Here, **this** is a singular pronoun that emphasizes what **is the will of God**. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “In fact, this is God’s will” or “Certainly, this very thing is God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -1TH 4 3 lit4 grammar-connect-words-phrases τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality Here, **For this is** indicates that this is the beginning of a section about the content of the “commands … through the Lord Jesus” in [4:2](../04/02.md). Use a natural way in your language that indicates the beginning of new topic. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 4 3 mw4j figs-litany ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τῆς πορνείας 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality Here, begins a list spanning from [4:3-8](../04/03.md) that explains what **sanctification** means. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) -1TH 4 3 lgac grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τῆς πορνείας 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality Here, **sexual immorality** is contrasted with **sanctification**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “to refrain from sexually immoral acts” or “to hold yourself back from sexually immoral activity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1TH 4 3 lhxi figs-imperative ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality The following list of verb forms in [4:3-6](../04/3.md) could be translated as commands (See [4:2](../04/02.md)). Here, the verb forms are likely meant to express a strong suggestion or appeal. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “you yourselves must refrain” or “so you should withhold yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -1TH 4 3 le7j translate-textvariants τῆς πορνείας 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality Some ancient manuscripts read “all **sexual immorality**” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 4 4 ox95 figs-abstractnouns εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ, 1 to know to possess his own vessel If it is clearer in your language, you could change this abstract phrase to an active form. Alternate translation: “each husband must only have sexual knowledge of his own wife, by treating her like she belongs to God and by honoring her” or “each man should know how to practice self-control by setting apart and honoring his own body” or (See UST for two separate sentences)(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 4 4 zis1 figs-abstractnouns εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ, 1 to know to possess his own vessel If it is clearer in your language, you could change this abstract noun phrase into two active sentences (See UST). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 4 4 vhbp figs-euphemism εἰδέναι…κτᾶσθαι 1 to know to possess his own vessel **to know … to possess** is a euphemism for sexual intimacy or knowledge (See previous note for an alternate translation). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -1TH 4 4 f4ux figs-metaphor τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι 1 to know to possess his own vessel Here, **to possess his own vessel** is a metaphor or idiom that compares sexual self-control to a proper use of a container. It could refer to: (1) a husband’s own body. Alternate translation: “to practice self-control with his own body” or “to control his own body” (2) his wife’s body. Alternate translation: “to hold onto his wife’s body” or “to properly care for his own wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 4 4 fk6n figs-nominaladj ἕκαστον 1 to know to possess his own vessel This nominal adjective is used to emphasize that every husband or man must obey this teaching. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) -1TH 4 4 arkf figs-rpronouns ἑαυτοῦ 1 to know to possess his own vessel This reflexive pronoun further emphasizes the necessity of “sanctification” [4:3](../04/03.md), that the **vessel** belongs to the husband or man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1TH 4 4 ihqe figs-hendiadys ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ 1 to know to possess his own vessel This phrase is a hendiadys. Alternate translation: “by sanctifying and honoring his body” or “by sanctifying and honoring her body” or “by honorably setting it apart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -1TH 4 4 nppk ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ 1 to know to possess his own vessel This phrase could also refer to: (1) Condition. Alternate translation: “in the condition of holiness and honor” or “in a state of holiness and honor” (2) Association. Alternate translation: “with holiness and honor” (3) Means. Alternate translation: “through holiness and honor” -1TH 4 5 y9g2 figs-parallelism μὴ ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας, καθάπερ καὶ τὰ ἔθνη τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν 1 in the passion of lust This verse expresses a contrasting parallelism. **in the passion of lust** contrasts “in holiness and honor”. **each of you to know** contrasts “the Gentiles who do not know”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 4 5 utvd figs-abstractnouns μὴ ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 in the passion of lust If it is clearer in your language, you could change this abstract noun phrase into an active form (See UST), Alternate translation: “You must not passionately lust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 4 5 x2t7 μὴ ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 in the passion of lust Like the previous phrase, this could refer to: (1) condition. Alternate translation: “in the condition of lustful passion” or “in a state of passionate lust” (2) association. Alternate translation: “with lustful passion” (3) means. Alternate translation: “through lustful passion” -1TH 4 5 vjej figs-possession πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 in the passion of lust This genitive phrase could refer to: (1) attribute. Alternate translation: “lustful passion” (2) source. Alternate translation: “from lustful passion” or “from desire’s passion” (3) object. Alternate translation: “passion that leads to lust” (4) means. Alternate translation: “through lustful passion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1TH 4 5 nrmz figs-distinguish καθάπερ καὶ τὰ ἔθνη τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν 1 in the passion of lust This emphatic clause is meant to inform. **who do not know** indicates a past state of being that continues. **God** indicates “the one true **God**” or “the only **God**”. Alternate translation: “the nations who remain ignorant of God act like this” or “this is the way those nations live, who continually refuse to give recognition to God” or “exactly like all the people who have no relationship with God” or “this is exactly the way the Gentiles, who have never known God, live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -1TH 4 5 tz8o figs-genericnoun τὰ ἔθνη 1 in the passion of lust Here, **the Gentiles** is a generic noun that refers to all non-Christians (See [2:16](../02/16.md)). Alternate translation: “all those nations” or “all the people” or “the pagan nations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) -1TH 4 6 wmb6 figs-parallelism τὸ μὴ ὑπερβαίνειν καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν 1 transgress and wrong This is a parallel clause that strongly repeats the prohibitive “not” concept found in [4:5](../04/05.md). Alternate translation: “no one should offend and take advantage of” or “no one must violate and exploit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 4 6 a9st figs-doublet ὑπερβαίνειν καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν 1 transgress and wrong The words translated **transgress and wrong** are a superlative doublet. The word translated **transgress** can mean “to overstep.” The word translated **wrong** can mean “possess more.” Here it conveys the nuance of “claiming what does not belong to someone,” or “to take advantage of.” The idea is that no one is permitted to violate or cross over the bounds of lawful marital relations, by taking what belongs to another man. Alternate translation: “trespass against and claim what belongs to” or “violate and exploit” or “transgress and take advantage of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1TH 4 6 ckez figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ πράγματι τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 the Lord is an avenger Here, **in this matter** uses a business metaphor to speak of sexual immorality [4:3](../04/03.md). The idea is that no one should intrude in the marital relationship of another **brother** or “fellow Christian.” Alternate translation: “in the marital matters of his fellow Christian” or “in the marriage relationship of another Christian” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 4 6 q7bf grammar-connect-logic-result διότι ἔκδικος Κύριος περὶ πάντων τούτων 1 the Lord is an avenger This clause gives the final result of those who live “in the passion of lust” [4:5](../04/05.md). This could refer to: (1) the sexually immoral people. Alternate translation: “This is because the Lord will punish all those people” (2) all the matters spoken of in [1:3-6](../01/03.md). Alternate translation: “Certainly, the Lord will avenge for all these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 4 6 p80j figs-abstractnouns ἔκδικος 1 the Lord is an avenger If it is clearer in your language, you could change this abstract noun into a verb form. Alternate translation: “is a punisher” or “is a judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 4 6 r9n4 figs-metaphor ἔκδικος Κύριος 1 the Lord is an avenger This is a metaphorical title used of God throughout the Old Testament (See Judith 9:2 for a similar use in relational to sexual immorality). **avenger** literally means “judge from.” Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus will avenge” or “the Lord Jesus will punish” or “the Lord Jesus will judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 4 6 jitm figs-explicit Κύριος 1 the Lord is an avenger The assumed knowledge here is that **Lord** refers to “Jesus” (See [4:2](../04/02.md)). Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 4 6 d1ip writing-background καθὼς καὶ προείπαμεν ὑμῖν καὶ διεμαρτυράμεθα 1 we also forewarned you and testified This is background information referring to the apostles earlier visit. The same root word translated **testified** here, is used twice in [2:10-12](../02/10.md). Alternate translation: “in the just the way we previously told and warned you” or “This will happen just we already told and solemnly warned you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -1TH 4 6 ix4p figs-doublet καθὼς καὶ προείπαμεν ὑμῖν καὶ διεμαρτυράμεθα 1 we also forewarned you and testified **just as** combined with these two similar verbs, indicates that this is a doublet. If it is clearer in your language, you could combine the verbs to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “as we also previously warned you” or “exactly as we also solemnly forewarned you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1TH 4 7 qx6y figs-abstractnouns οὐ γὰρ ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς ἐπὶ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ 1 God did not call us This verse parallels [4:4](../04/04.md). If it is clearer in your language, you could change these abstract nouns into verb forms, the double negatives to positive statements, and the reorder the clauses. Alternate translation: “God called us, so we must purify and set ourselves apart like those who belong to God” or “We must not live impurely or act unholy, because God did not call us as his people for this purpose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 4 7 v3np figs-doublenegatives οὐ γὰρ ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς ἐπὶ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ 1 God did not call us to uncleanness, but in holiness The double negative is used as a strong prohibition against sexual immorality [4:3](../04/03.md). Alternate translation: “Because God did not summon us for impurity, but into sanctification”. You could also state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “Because God called us to be pure and holy” or “Certainly God summoned us to pure and holy living” or “Indeed, God invited us to become pure and holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -1TH 4 7 ie7g ἐκάλεσεν 1 God did not call us to uncleanness, but in holiness The word translated **called** can also refer to simple statement of fact or summarizing act. Alternate translation: “summons” or “beckons” or “invites” -1TH 4 7 q4tj figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 God did not call us Here “us” is inclusive, referring to the apostles, the Thessalonian Church, and by extension all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1TH 4 7 qli0 ἐπὶ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ 1 God did not call us The prepositions translated **to** and **in** can refer to: (1) Disadvantage and advantage. Alternate translation: “for the sake of … for the sake of” (2) Purpose and rule. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of … to conform to” (3) Basis and association. Alternate translation: “on the basis of … in association with” (4) Destination. Alternate translation: “to lead to … leading to” (5) Means. Alternate translation: “through … through” -1TH 4 8 zdsc figs-parallelism τοιγαροῦν ὁ ἀθετῶν, οὐκ ἄνθρωπον ἀθετεῖ, ἀλλὰ τὸν Θεὸν, τὸν διδόντα τὸ Πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ τὸ Ἅγιον εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 the one rejecting this This verse parallels some of the concepts found in [4:7](../04/07.md). The words translated **Therefore** and “For” have the same root. **the one rejecting** and **rejects** parallel “uncleanness.” **Holy Spirit** parallels “in holiness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 4 8 mn5y grammar-connect-words-phrases τοιγαροῦν 1 the one rejecting this This triply emphatic connecting word is meant to mark the end of this section prohibiting sexual immorality. Alternate translation: “Now pay close attention” or “So then, you must realize” or “It is absolutely certain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 4 8 gzz8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὁ ἀθετῶν…ἀλλὰ τὸν Θεὸν, τὸν διδόντα 1 rejecting this rejects not man, but God The words translated **the one rejecting this** and **who gives** indicate continual or repeated activity. God’s constant giving of the **Holy Spirit** is contrasted with person who constantly **rejects** the apostolic teaching. Alternate translation: “he who continues to reject … but actually God himself, who continues to give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1TH 4 8 su51 figs-ellipsis ὁ ἀθετῶν 1 rejecting this rejects not man, but God The phrase translated **the one rejecting this** does not contain **this**, but the context implies that it should be included. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1TH 4 8 mm3n translate-textvariants διδόντα 1 rejecting this rejects not man, but God Many ancient manuscripts read “**who** gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 4 8 k7fr translate-textvariants ὑμᾶς 1 rejecting this rejects not man, but God Many ancient manuscripts read “us”. This could either refer exclusively to the apostles or inclusively to all Christians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 4 8 vrbs figs-explicit ἀλλὰ τὸν Θεὸν, τὸν διδόντα τὸ Πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ τὸ Ἅγιον 1 rejecting this rejects not man, but God In [1:5,6](../01/05.md) we see that the **Holy Spirit** gives power and joy. Here, two implicit teachings are contained: the divinity of the Holy Spirit, and the doctrine of the procession of the Spirit from the Father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 4 9 uxn8 figs-explicit περὶ δὲ τῆς φιλαδελφίας, οὐ χρείαν ἔχετε γράφειν ὑμῖν 1 brotherly love This connecting phrase implies that the apostles are answering a specific question previously asked by the Thessalonian Church. If it is clearer in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Now as it relates to your question about how fellow believers in Christ should show affection to each other …” or “Now, about your question referring to Christian relationships …” or “Now, about your question relating to Christian friendships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 4 2 vg16 figs-metaphor διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 through the Lord Jesus Paul speaks figuratively of the **commands** that the apostles gave to the Thessalonian church as though **Jesus** personally told them to the apostles. Paul means that **Jesus** made the apostles his messengers, not that **Jesus** is a messenger of the apostles. If your readers would not understand what **through the Lord Jesus** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “through a message from the Lord Jesus” or “by order of the Lord Jesus himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 3 ycsw figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ, ὁ ἁγιασμὸς ὑμῶν, 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality If your language does not use abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **will** and **sanctification** in another way. Alternate translation: “Indeed, God desires that you live like those who belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TH 4 3 lit4 grammar-connect-words-phrases τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality Here, **For this is** indicates that this is the beginning of a section about the content of the “commands … through the Lord Jesus” in [4:2](../04/02.md). Use a natural way in your language to indicate the beginning of new topic. Alternate translation: “Now, this is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 4 3 vnp0 grammar-collectivenouns τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν θέλημα τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality Here, **this** is a singular pronoun that emphasizes what **is the will of God**. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Certainly, this very thing is God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +1TH 4 3 mw4j figs-litany ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τῆς πορνείας 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality Here begins a list spanning through [4:3-8](../04/03.md) that explains what **sanctification** means in this context. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) +1TH 4 3 lgac figs-distinguish ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς ἀπὸ τῆς πορνείας 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality
This phrase gives us further information about what is **sanctification**. Paul is defining the **sanctification** God wants for his people by forbidding **sexually immorality**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +1TH 4 3 lhxi figs-imperative ἀπέχεσθαι ὑμᾶς 1 for you to keep from sexual immorality The following list of verb forms in [4:3-6](../04/03.md) could be translated as commands (See [4:2](../04/02.md)). Here, the verb forms are likely meant to express a strong suggestion or appeal. Use a form in your language that would be used in this type of situation. Alternate translation: “so you yourselves must refrain” or “so you should withhold yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1TH 4 4 u98k figs-distinguish εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ 1 to know to possess his own vessel Here Paul gives more instructions about the **sanctification** God wants for his people, by telling the Thessalonian church that every husband needs to treat his wife’s body or his own body **in sanctification and honor**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these verses clearer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +1TH 4 4 vhbp figs-euphemism εἰδέναι ἕκαστον ὑμῶν τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ, 1 to know to possess his own vessel Here, **to know to possess** refers to sexual intimacy. This is a polite way of referring to something private. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or you could state this plainly. Alternate translation: “God desires that you treat your wives’ bodies like they belong to God and to honor them” or “each of you men must use your own body for God’s holy and honorable purposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +1TH 4 4 fk6n figs-nominaladj ἕκαστον 1 to know to possess his own vessel Paul is using the adjective **each** as a noun in order to describe a group of men. Here it specifically is used to emphasize that every husband or man must obey this teaching. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “each and every man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +1TH 4 4 f4ux figs-metaphor τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος, κτᾶσθαι 1 to know to possess his own vessel Here, Paul speaks figuratively of a person’s body as if it were a container. Here, **to possess his own vessel** is a metaphor that compares sexual self-control to a proper use of a container. If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. It could refer to: (1) a wife’s body. Alternate translation: “to use his wife’s body” or “to properly care for his own wife” (2) a husband's own body. Alternate translation: “to control his own body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 4 arkf figs-possession τὸ ἑαυτοῦ σκεῦος 1 to know to possess his own vessel Paul is using the possessive form **his own** to express ownership. Use a natural way in your language to express ownership. Alternate translation: “the wife that belongs to you” or “your very own wife” or “the body that belongs to you”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1TH 4 4 ihqe figs-hendiadys ἐν ἁγιασμῷ καὶ τιμῇ 1 to know to possess his own vessel This phrase could express a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **honor** tells how a husband or man must live in **sanctification**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “by honorably setting it apart for God’s purposes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +1TH 4 5 utvd figs-abstractnouns μὴ ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 in the passion of lust If your language does not use an abstract noun phrase for these ideas, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun phrase **in the passion of lust** in another way. Alternate translation: “You must not passionately lust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TH 4 5 y9g2 grammar-connect-logic-contrast μὴ ἐν πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 in the passion of lust Here, **not in the passion of lust** contrasts with the previous phrase “in holiness and honor” (See 4:4])../04/04.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but not with lustful passion” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +1TH 4 5 vjej figs-possession πάθει ἐπιθυμίας 1 in the passion of lust Paul is using the possessive phrase **of lust** to describe **passion**. This genitive phrase could refer to: 1) passion characterized by lust. Alternate translation: “lustful passion” 2) the source of the passion. Alternate translation: “passion that comes from lust” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1TH 4 5 nrmz figs-distinguish καθάπερ καὶ τὰ ἔθνη τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν 1 in the passion of lust This phrase gives us further information about the those who live **in the passion of lust**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “the nations who remain ignorant of God act like this” or “exactly like all the people who have no relationship with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +1TH 4 5 tz8o figs-genericnoun τὰ ἔθνη 1 in the passion of lust Here, **the Gentiles** refers to all the non-Christian nations in general, not one group of people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a more natural phrase (See your translation at [2:16](../02/16.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) +1TH 4 5 w03g figs-distinguish τὰ μὴ εἰδότα τὸν Θεόν 1 in the passion of lust Here, **who do not know God** is meant to give further information about the **Gentiles**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who have no relationship with God” or “who remain ignorant of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +1TH 4 6 wmb6 hendiadys ὑπερβαίνειν καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν 1 transgress and wrong This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **wrong** describes **transgress** . If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “wrongfully trespass” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/hendiadys]]) +1TH 4 6 ho6h figs-metaphor ὑπερβαίνειν καὶ πλεονεκτεῖν 1 transgress and wrong Here, **transgress and exploit** speaks figuratively about adultery, by comparing it to a person who unlawfully enters someone’s property and claims it for their own. If your readers would not understand what it means to **transgress and exploit** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “must trespass and defraud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 6 ckez figs-metaphor ἐν τῷ πράγματι τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ 1 the Lord is an avenger Here, **in this matter** could be speaking figuratively of adultery as if someone is intruding in another person’s business matters. If your readers would not understand what **in this matter** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in the marital matters of his fellow believer in Christ” or “in the marriage relationship of another believer in Christ” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 6 q7bf grammar-connect-logic-result διότι ἔκδικος Κύριος περὶ πάντων τούτων 1 the Lord is an avenger This clause gives the final result of those who live “in the passion of lust” (See [4:5](../04/05.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express result. This could refer to: 1) all the matters spoken of in [4:3-6](../04/03.md). Alternate translation: “Certainly, the Lord Jesus will avenge for all these things” 2) the sexually immoral people. Alternate translation: “This is because the Lord Jesus will punish all those people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 4 6 d1ip writing-background καθὼς καὶ προείπαμεν ὑμῖν καὶ διεμαρτυράμεθα 1 we also forewarned you and testified Paul provides this background information about what the apostles said in an earlier visit (See in [2:10-12](../02/10.md)). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “This will happen just we already told you and solemnly testified to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +1TH 4 6 ix4p figs-doublet καθὼς καὶ προείπαμεν ὑμῖν καὶ διεμαρτυράμεθα 1 we also forewarned you and testified These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize what the apostles had already told the Thessalonian church during a previous visit. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “exactly as we also solemnly forewarned you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +1TH 4 7 qx6y figs-abstractnouns οὐ γὰρ ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς ἐπὶ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ 1 God did not call us If your language does not use an abstract nouns for these ideas, you could express the ideas behind the abstract nouns **uncleanness** and **sanctification** with positive forms. Alternate translation: “We must not live impurely or act unholy, because God did not call us as his people for this purpose” or “God called us, so we must purify and set ourselves apart like those who belong to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TH 4 7 v3np figs-doublenegatives οὐ γὰρ ἐκάλεσεν ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς ἐπὶ ἀκαθαρσίᾳ, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ 1 God did not call us to uncleanness, but in holiness If the double negative **not…uncleanness** would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “Certainly God summons us to pure and holy living” or “Because God calls us to be pure and holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +1TH 4 7 q4tj figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 God did not call us Here, **us** is inclusive, referring to the apostles, the Thessalonian church, and by extension all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “us believers in Christ” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1TH 4 7 qli0 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλ’ ἐν ἁγιασμῷ 1 God did not call us What follows the word **but** is in contrast to **uncleanness**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +1TH 4 8 mn5y grammar-connect-words-phrases τοιγαροῦν 1 the one rejecting this This emphatic connecting word is meant to mark the end of this section prohibiting sexual immorality. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Now pay close attention” or “So then, you must realize” or “It is absolutely certain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 4 8 gzz8 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὁ ἀθετῶν…ἀλλὰ τὸν Θεὸν, τὸν διδόντα 1 rejecting this rejects not man, but God Here God’s constant giving of the **Holy Spirit** is contrasted with person who constantly **rejects** the apostolic teaching. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “he who continues to reject … but actually God himself, who continues to give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +1TH 4 9 uxn8 figs-explicit περὶ δὲ τῆς φιλαδελφίας 1 brotherly love This phrase implies that the apostles are answering a specific question previously asked by the Thessalonian church. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now, related to your question about how to love fellow believers in Christ” or “Now, about your question referring to Christian relationships” or “Now, about your question related to Christian friendships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 4 9 rpmn figs-abstractnouns τῆς φιλαδελφίας 1 brotherly love If your readers would misunderstand this abstract noun phrase, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun phrase **brotherly love** in another way. Alternate translation: “how to affectionately care for fellow believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) 1TH 4 9 sgen grammar-connect-logic-result οὐ χρείαν ἔχετε γράφειν ὑμῖν, αὐτοὶ γὰρ ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε, εἰς τὸ ἀγαπᾶν ἀλλήλους 1 brotherly love If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “because God himself teaches you that you should love each other, you do not need us to write to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 4 9 l1n7 figs-hyperbole οὐ χρείαν…ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε 1 brotherly love The apostles use hyperbolic phrases **no need** and “**you yourselves** are those **taught by God**” to express how successfully the Thessalonian Church is practicing Christian love. “(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -1TH 4 9 xxg8 translate-textvariants ἔχετε 1 brotherly love Some ancient manuscripts read “we were having.” Other manuscripts read “we are having.” Alternate translation: “we do not need to write to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 4 9 j7z0 figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ γὰρ ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε, εἰς τὸ ἀγαπᾶν ἀλλήλους 1 brotherly love This phrase could also be using a metaphor, speaking as if the Thessalonian Church has God himself physically present as their teacher. Alternate translation: “God is the one who teaches you how to love each other” or “God himself teaches you that you must love one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 4 9 ctiq grammar-connect-logic-result αὐτοὶ γὰρ ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε, εἰς τὸ ἀγαπᾶν ἀλλήλους 1 brotherly love This clause could indicate: (1) Content of God’s teaching. Alternate translation: “Because it is God himself who teaches you: love each other” (2) Manner. Alternate translation: “Indeed, God is the one who teaches you how to love each other” (3) Purpose/Result. Alternate translation: “the reason why God teaches you is so that you would love each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 4 10 e3e0 writing-background καὶ γὰρ ποιεῖτε αὐτὸ εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, τοὺς ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ 1 you do this to all the brothers who are in all Macedonia This is background reference that shows another aspect of how the Thessalonian Church “became an example” to the churches in Macedonia and Achaia (See [1:7-8](../01/07.md)). Alternate translation: “Certainly, you make a practice of showing love to all your fellow believers in Christ throughout the region of Macedonia” or “In fact, you are doing just that, to all the fellow Christians throughout the province of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -1TH 4 10 dec9 grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 you do this to all the brothers who are in all Macedonia These connecting words indicate that what follows in an example of how the Thessalonian Church shows Christian love. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 4 10 hg7a figs-rpronouns αὐτὸ 1 you do this to all the brothers who are in all Macedonia This reflexive pronoun **this** refers back to the phrase “to love” [4:9](../04/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1TH 4 10 jcg3 figs-idiom ἀδελφοὺς 1 brothers Throughout this letter, **brothers** is an idiom meaning “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers in Christ” [4:1](../04/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 4 10 k81f figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὺς 1 brothers Here, the idiom **brothers** includes females. If your language does not have this idiom, you can use a gender inclusive term that refers to male and female. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” or “fellow believers in God” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1TH 4 10 gxfa figs-litany παρακαλοῦμεν δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, περισσεύειν μᾶλλον 1 brothers This is the beginning of a list of five verb forms that continues into [4:11](../04/11.md), that the apostles **exhort** the Thessalonian Church to do. Alternate translation: “Now, fellow believers in Christ, we are urging you: to excel more and more,” or “But, fellow Christians, we are encouraging you: to surpass even more,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) -1TH 4 10 u3fl figs-ellipsis περισσεύειν 1 abound Here, **abound** refers back to “love one another” in [4:9](../04/09.md) in a relative ellipsis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1TH 4 11 h2df figs-metaphor καὶ φιλοτιμεῖσθαι, ἡσυχάζειν καὶ πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια, καὶ ἐργάζεσθαι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν ὑμῶν 1 to strive The combination of these verbs could be a metaphor for peaceful communal living. If it is clearer in your language, you could use an expression that explains this metaphor for peaceful communal living. Alternate translation: “and seek to lovingly honor others: by living quietly and tending to your own business and focusing on doing your own work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 4 11 d2fg figs-hendiadys καὶ φιλοτιμεῖσθαι, ἡσυχάζειν 1 to strive This phrase continues the litany of exhortations from the apostles. Here, **and to strive to live quietly** could: (1) Express separate ideas. Alternate translation: “and seek to lovingly honor others, to live quietly” (2) Complement each other. Alternate translation: “and to aspire to live quietly” or “and to show ambition to honor others by living silently” or “to aim to be still” (3) Function as hendiadys. Alternate translation: “and to quietly seek to lovingly honor others” or “and to silently seek to lovingly honor others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) -1TH 4 11 j4c7 figs-explicit πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια 1 to live quietly Here, **to perform your own things** implicitly refers to self-sacrificial thoughts and actions. The surrounding verbs make this explicit. Alternate translation: “to focus on your own tasks” or “to focus on your own business” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 4 11 jmt9 figs-idiom ἐργάζεσθαι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν ὑμῶν 1 to perform your own things **to work with your own hands** is an idiom for “earning a living.” Alternate translation: “to work hard to earn what you need” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 4 11 bz8s figs-distinguish καθὼς ὑμῖν παρηγγείλαμεν 1 to work with your own hands This phrase and the following verse signal the end of this larger section of teaching (See [4:1,2](../04/02.md) for the same wording). Here, the apostles are reminding the Thessalonian Church of what they already taught them, by way of summary. It also equates that what God taught the Thessalonian Church is the same thing as what the apostles teach [4:9](../04/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -1TH 4 12 hp6g figs-idiom περιπατῆτε εὐσχημόνως 1 you may walk properly Here, **walk** is the common biblical idiom that means “live.” The word translated **properly** literally means “well-formed.” It can also mean “appropriately, decently, modestly, nobly.” Alternate translation: “you would live appropriately” or “you would live nobly” or “you would behave modestly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 4 12 wj25 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα περιπατῆτε 1 you may walk properly **so that you may walk** could be a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that you live” or “in order that you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1TH 4 12 oo9l grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα περιπατῆτε εὐσχημόνως 1 you may walk properly **so that you may walk** could be a result clause. Alternate translation: “then you will live”. It is possible that this phrase refers to both purpose and result. If there is a way to indicate this in your language, you could express this dual meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 4 12 k59r figs-metaphor πρὸς τοὺς ἔξω 1 before those outside **those outside** is a metaphor for “non-Christians.” Alternate translation: “in the presence of non-Christians” or “in front of unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 4 12 uwsf figs-distinguish καὶ μηδενὸς χρείαν ἔχητε 1 before those outside This clause signals the end of the shorter section of teaching, by using the same phrase found in [4:9](../04/09.md). Here, the apostles are reminding the Thessalonian Church of what they already taught them about “brotherly love.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -1TH 4 12 nait grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ μηδενὸς χρείαν ἔχητε 1 before those outside This phrase also continues the idea of self-sufficiency found in verse 11, by using a result clause. It is possible that this phrase refers to both purpose and result. If there is a way to indicate this in your language, you could express this dual meaning. Alternate translation: “and so that you would not need anything” or “then you will be self-sufficient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 4 13 vi2y grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 General Information: **Now** is a connecting word that signals the beginning of an extended section [4:13-5:11](..04/13/.md) about the Second Coming of Christ (See chapter and book introduction)(See also 2 Thessalonians 1:7-10; 2:3-12). If our language has a special section marker, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 4 13 lan8 figs-doublenegatives οὐ θέλομεν δὲ ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 General Information: If it is clearer in your language, you could change this double negative or litotes to a positive form. Alternate translation: “But, we want you to know for certain” or “Now, we desire to clarify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -1TH 4 13 mmy0 figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 General Information: Throughout this letter, **brothers** is an idiom meaning “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers in Christ” [4:10](../04/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 4 13 wt7l figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, the idiom **brothers** includes females. If your language does not have this idiom, you can use a gender inclusive term that refers to male and female. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” or “fellow believers in God” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1TH 4 13 qt5b figs-explicit περὶ 1 you may not grieve Here, **about** implies that the apostles are answering another specific question previously asked by the Thessalonian Church (See [4:9](../04/09.md)). If it is clearer in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “as it relates to your question about” or “concerning your question about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 4 13 j68e figs-euphemism τῶν κοιμωμένων 1 General Information: In the biblical usage, **fallen asleep** often refers to physical death. It could indicate an idiom or euphemism. The verb form indicates that this is a present condition “are sleeping.” If you have a cultural idiom or euphemism for representing death as “sleeping”, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “those who are already dead” or “those who have died” or “those who have been laid to rest” or “those who continue to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -1TH 4 13 wzr3 translate-textvariants κοιμωμένων 1 General Information: Many ancient manuscripts read “have fallen asleep (and remain asleep)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 4 13 ocjp grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα μὴ λυπῆσθε 1 brothers Here, **so that you may not grieve** is a purpose clause that informs how the Thessalonian Church should respond to **those who are asleep**. Alternate translation: “so that you would not sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1TH 4 13 r9f8 figs-explicit καθὼς καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ 1 so that you may not grieve just as also the rest Here, it is assumed that **the rest** are non-Christians. If it is clearer in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “in the same way as the rest of humanity” or “like the rest of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 4 13 f9eq figs-explicit οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα 1 so that you may not grieve just as also the rest Here, it is assumed that **hope** refers to resurrection salvation (See [1:3; 2:19; 4:16; 5:8](../01/03.md)), and was previously associated with the Second Coming of Christ in [2:19](../02/19.md). Alternate translation: “who possess no hope of life after death” or “who possess no confidence of life after death” or “who possess no assurance of life after death” or “who do not have confidence in the future promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 4 14 j09o grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ γὰρ πιστεύομεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἀπέθανεν καὶ ἀνέστη 1 if we believe This clause frames the apostles’ argument as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but they actually mean that it is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think what the apostles are saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “We certainly believe that Jesus died and resurrected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) -1TH 4 14 hmw4 figs-explicit Ἰησοῦς ἀπέθανεν καὶ ἀνέστη 1 if we believe Here, it is assumed that the Thessalonian Church knows that**Jesus died and rose again** is the main content of the gospel message. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 4 14 ybz6 figs-exclusive πιστεύομεν 1 if we believe Though, **we believe** could be inclusive of the Thessalonian church (and by extension all Christians), it is most likely exclusive, referring to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. The previous use in [4:11](../04/11.md) and subsequent uses (See “we say” in [4:15](../04/15.md)) are clearly referring to the apostles. Here, it mostly likely is a reference to their authoritative teaching. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1TH 4 14 kmk2 grammar-connect-logic-result οὕτως καὶ ὁ Θεὸς 1 rose again This phrase could express at least two things: (1) Manner. Alternate translation: “this is the way God” or “this is how God” (2) Result. Alternate translation: “then God will also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 4 14 m1fy figs-possession καὶ ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς κοιμηθέντας διὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἄξει σὺν αὐτῷ 1 rose again Here, **through Jesus** could refer to: (1) those who are only temporarily dead through/associated with/in union with Jesus’ resurrection power. Alternate translation: “God … those who through Jesus are asleep” or “God … those who are asleep in Jesus” (2) it is through Jesus that God will bring them back again. Alternate translation: “through Jesus, God will also bring those who sleep along with Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1TH 4 14 b3gs figs-explicit ὁ Θεὸς…τοῦ Ἰησοῦ 1 rose again The assumed knowledge is that **God** is equated with Father, and he is one who sends the Son **Jesus** back to earth at the Second Coming. If it would be clearer in your language, you could make this distinction explicit. Alternate translation: “God the Father … his Son Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 4 14 tjqj figs-rpronouns αὐτῷ 1 rose again This is a reflexive pronoun that refers to Jesus. If it would be clearer in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1TH 4 15 vvda grammar-connect-words-phrases τοῦτο γὰρ ὑμῖν λέγομεν ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου 1 by the word of the Lord This clause indicates a strong emphasis in form and content (See [1:8](../01/08.md) for **the word of the Lord**). Alternate translation: “Certainly, what we now say to you is the Lord’s message” or “In fact, what we are saying is from the Lord himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 4 15 ni3m figs-metonymy ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου 1 by the word of the Lord Here, **word** is a metonym for “message.” It could refer to: (1) means of the message. Alternate translation: “with the Lord’s message” (2) authority of the message. “with the authorization of the Lord” or “is the Lord’s message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -1TH 4 15 gbe1 grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 by the word of the Lord This connecting word indicates that what follows is the content of **the word of the Lord**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 4 15 fdwk figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 by the word of the Lord Though, **we who are alive** could be exclusive of the apostles (See note at [4:14](../04/14.md)), the universal content of the following section, implies that this is inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1TH 4 15 hdlr figs-distinguish οἱ περιλειπόμενοι 1 by the word of the Lord The relative clause **who are left behind** refers to **we who are alive**. Alternate translation: “who survive” or “who are remain around” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -1TH 4 15 b786 figs-idiom εἰς τὴν παρουσίαν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 at the coming of the Lord Here, the word translated **coming** is a well-known idiom in 1-2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ [3:13](../03/13.md) or the “Day of the Lord” [5:2](../05/02.md). It literally means, “presence” or “being with or near.” Here, **coming** expresses “presence,” so the emphasis is on the lasting presence of the Lord Jesus (see also Matthew 24). The definite article **the** indicates either the one and only Coming of the Lord, or the well-known Coming of the Lord. The word translated **until** could indicate: (1) Duration. Alternate translation: “until the Lord returns” or “until the second coming of the Lord” (2) Event. Alternate translation: “at the coming of our Lord Jesus” or “at the arrival of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 4 15 byit figs-explicit τοῦ Κυρίου 1 at the coming of the Lord It is assumed that the **Lord** refers to Jesus (See [4:1](../04/01.md)). If it is clearer in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” or “our Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 4 15 k9n9 translate-textvariants τοῦ Κυρίου 1 at the coming of the Lord One important ancient manuscript reads “of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 4 15 xd2y figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ φθάσωμεν τοὺς κοιμηθέντας 1 by the word of the Lord This double negative **certainly not** is an idiom for “never.” Alternate translation: “will never precede those who are dead” or “can never overtake those already dead” or “are not permitted to come before those asleep in the Lord”. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -1TH 4 16 ah7p grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 the Lord himself … will descend **For** marks the beginning of the sequence of events related to the Second Coming. The word then indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. Alternately translation: “Certainly” or “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 4 16 yk2q figs-litany ὅτι αὐτὸς ὁ Κύριος ἐν κελεύσματι, ἐν φωνῇ ἀρχαγγέλου, καὶ ἐν σάλπιγγι Θεοῦ, καταβήσεται ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ; καὶ οἱ νεκροὶ ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστήσονται πρῶτον, 1 the Lord himself … will descend The list of the events of the Second Coming continues through verse 17. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) -1TH 4 16 c26b grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὅτι αὐτὸς ὁ Κύριος ἐν κελεύσματι, ἐν φωνῇ ἀρχαγγέλου, καὶ ἐν σάλπιγγι Θεοῦ, καταβήσεται ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ 1 the Lord himself … will descend These things happen at the same time **the Lord** descends. The text emphasizes the order of events by listing them prior to the main verb. If it is clearer in your language, you could place the main verb before the accompanying actions. Alternate translation: “Certainly, the Lord Jesus himself will come down from heaven: with a commanding shout, with the archangel’s voice, and with God’s trumpet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) -1TH 4 16 ygfp figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord himself … will descend This reflexive noun **himself** emphasizes that “with him” in [4:14](../04/14.md) refers to **the Lord** Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus himself” or “it is the Lord Jesus who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1TH 4 16 z9ka ἀρχαγγέλου 1 of the archangel See Jude 9. -1TH 4 16 pjrh figs-parallelism καταβήσεται ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ; καὶ οἱ νεκροὶ ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστήσονται πρῶτον 1 the Lord himself … will descend The first main verb **descend** is listed after the events that describe it. This is to show a contrasting parallelism with the second verb **rise**. After the Lord Jesus comes down form heaven, the dead Christians will resurrect from the earth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 4 16 k7sg grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 2 the Lord himself … will descend Here, the word translated **and** indicates sequence. If it is clearer in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “then next” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -1TH 4 16 ni7n figs-parallelism οἱ νεκροὶ ἐν Χριστῷ 1 the dead in Christ will rise first This is a parallel phrase to “those who are asleep through Jesus” in [4:14](../04/14.md). Alternate translation: “those who died in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 4 16 dr89 figs-explicit οἱ νεκροὶ ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστήσονται πρῶτον 1 the dead in Christ will rise first **the dead in Christ** are the same as “the sleepers” in [4:13–15](../04/13.md). The verb translated “rise” refers to this section’s main theme of resurrection. Alternate translation: “Christians who have already died will be the first to resurrect” or “those who died united with Christ will resurrect first” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 4 16 gnp0 figs-parallelism οἱ νεκροὶ ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστήσονται πρῶτον 1 the dead in Christ will rise first This clause parallels and explains, “may not certainly go before those who have fallen asleep” [4:15](../04/15/md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 4 16 wboi figs-parallelism ἐν Χριστῷ 1 the dead in Christ will rise first **in Christ** is another reference to the important concept of union with Christ or God (See [2:14](../02/14.md)). This is also a parallel phrase to “those who are asleep through Jesus” in [4:14](../04/14.md). Alternate translation: “united to Christ” or “in union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 4 16 offz translate-textvariants πρῶτον 1 the dead in Christ will rise first Some ancient manuscripts read “**the first** ones” referring to **the dead**, not the timing of resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 4 17 ay13 figs-parallelism ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες, οἱ περιλειπόμενοι 1 we who are alive **who are alive, who are left behind** is a parallel reference to [4:15](../04/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 4 17 l5l1 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 we who are alive Though, **we who are alive** could be exclusive of the apostles (See note for the same phrase at [4:15](../04/15.md)), the universal content of this section, implies that all Christians are in view. It also implies that the apostles assumed Second Coming would happen in their lifetime. Your language may require you to mark these forms(See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1TH 4 17 otiq grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἅμα σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 we who are alive **together with them** could indicate three things: (1) Simultaneous event. Alternate translation: “with them at the same time” (2) Association. Alternate translation: “along with them” (3) Both event and association. Alternate translation: “at the same time together with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) -1TH 4 17 wvi8 writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 with them The word **them** refers to the resurrected dead who are united to Christ. Alternate translation: “the resurrected dead who are united to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1TH 4 17 m3gb writing-background ἁρπαγησόμεθα ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 with them This phrase indicates a reference to the words of the angels at Jesus’ Ascension in Acts 1:9-11, as a fulfillment of the prophecy of Daniel 7:13-14. Alternate translation: “we will be snatched up on clouds to encounter the Lord Jesus in the air” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -1TH 4 17 o7lj grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ἀπάντησιν 1 with them Here, the word translated **to meet** indicates purpose, and a positive encounter and/or royal escort. Alternate translation: “as a royal escort of” or “for a meeting with” or “to encounter” (See Exodus 19:17 where this same root word is used when God’s people encounter God, and Matthew 25:6 where this word is used in the same context of the Second Coming with bridal escorts). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1TH 4 17 ukh1 writing-symlanguage ἐν νεφέλαις…εἰς ἀέρα 1 with them Here, **clouds … air** could be considered symbolic language representing God’s presence and the spiritual realm. (See Exodus 19; Daniel 7:13-14; Matthew 24; Mark 13; Luke 17; 21; Ephesians 2:2). Alternate translation: “ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) -1TH 4 17 ti69 writing-endofstory καὶ οὕτως πάντοτε σὺν Κυρίῳ ἐσόμεθα 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This clause is meant to signal the end of the events related to the Second Coming. You can use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -1TH 4 17 ouvu grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ οὕτως πάντοτε σὺν Κυρίῳ ἐσόμεθα 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This clause also indicates the result of the meeting with **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “and then we will always be together with the Lord Jesus” or “this is the how we will be with the Lord Jesus forever” or “as a result, we will always be together with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 4 17 k6qc figs-parallelism σὺν Κυρίῳ 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air Here, **with the Lord** parallels **together with them** to express union with Christ as communion with his people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 4 17 pdqi translate-textvariants σὺν 2 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air One important ancient manuscript reads “united to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 4 18 gt91 grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε παρακαλεῖτε 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This is a result clause. Alternate translation: “because of this, you should comfort” or “as a result, you can bring comfort to” or “so then, you ought to encourage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]] -1TH 4 18 y7zi figs-imperative παρακαλεῖτε 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This clause also could express an appeal or polite command. Alternate translation: “you should encourage” or “you must encourage” or “keep comforting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -1TH 4 18 aya5 writing-pronouns ἀλλήλους 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This pronoun indicates association among the Thessalonian Church. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “the fellow member of your church” or “your fellow Thessalonian Christian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -1TH 4 18 xsus figs-metonymy ἐν τοῖς λόγοις τούτοις 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air **with these words** is a reference to “and in this way we will always be with the Lord” in [4:17](../04/17.md) or a metonymy for all that has been said in [4:13-17](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: (See UST) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TH 4 9 l1n7 figs-hyperbole οὐ χρείαν ἔχετε γράφειν ὑμῖν 1 brotherly love Here, **no need** is an exaggeration that Paul uses to show how successfully the Thessalonian church is practicing Christian love. Paul knows that they still have things to learn about loving fellow believers in Christ. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language. Alternate translation: “we feel no need to write you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +1TH 4 9 fyqe figs-ellipsis οὐ χρείαν 1 brotherly love A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **for us** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1TH 4 9 ctiq αὐτοὶ γὰρ ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε, εἰς τὸ ἀγαπᾶν ἀλλήλους 1 brotherly love This clause could refer to: (1) the content of God’s teaching. Alternate translation: “because it is God himself who teaches you: love each other” (2) the manner of God’s teaching. Alternate translation: “indeed, it is God who teaches you how to love each other” (3) the purpose of God’s teaching. Alternate translation: “the reason why God teaches you is so that you would love each other” Use a natural way in your language for expressing this idea. +1TH 4 9 j7z0 figs-metaphor αὐτοὶ γὰρ ὑμεῖς θεοδίδακτοί ἐστε 1 brotherly love Paul speaks figuratively of the Thessalonian church as though God himself is physically present as their teacher. Paul means that the Thessalonian church already has been taught **to love one another** through the words of Jesus (See John 13:34; 15:12, 17) by the apostles. If your readers would not understand what it means to **be taught by God** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “because you have learned well what God teaches” or “since this is what God teaches you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 9 pi1u figs-metaphor γὰρ 1 brotherly love Here, **for** indicates that what follows is the content of what **brotherly love** is. Alternate translation: “certainly” or “it is obvious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 4 9 zroq figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ 1 brotherly love Paul uses the word **yourselves** to emphasize that Thessalonian church is doing what God teaches. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “personally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +1TH 4 10 e3e0 writing-background καὶ γὰρ ποιεῖτε αὐτὸ εἰς πάντας τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς, τοὺς ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ Μακεδονίᾳ 1 you do this to all the brothers who are in all Macedonia Paul provides this background information to show another aspect of how the Thessalonian church “became an example” to the churches in Macedonia and Achaia (See [1:7-8](../01/07.md)). Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. Alternate translation: “Certainly, you habitually show love to all your fellow believers in Christ throughout the region of Macedonia” or “In fact, you are doing just that, to all the fellow Christians throughout the province of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +1TH 4 10 dec9 grammar-connect-words-phrases καὶ γὰρ 1 you do this to all the brothers who are in all Macedonia Here, **For indeed** indicates that what follows in an example of how the Thessalonian church shows Christian love. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 4 10 hg7a figs-explicit ποιεῖτε αὐτὸ 1 you do this to all the brothers who are in all Macedonia What is implied here is that **this** refers back to the phrase “to love” in [4:9](../04/09.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 4 10 gxfa figs-litany παρακαλοῦμεν δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, 1 brothers Paul uses a repetitive series of five verb forms that continues into [4:11](../04/11.md), that the apostles **exhort** the Thessalonian Church to do. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone is urged to do. Alternate translation: “Now, fellow believers in Christ, we are urging you” or “But, fellow Christians, we are encouraging you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) +1TH 4 10 u3fl grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 abound Here, **But** indicates that what follows is the beginning of a list of exhortations. Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “However” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 4 11 h2df figs-metaphor καὶ φιλοτιμεῖσθαι, ἡσυχάζειν καὶ πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια, καὶ ἐργάζεσθαι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν ὑμῶν 1 to strive Paul is figuratively describing peaceful communal living by using this combination of ideas. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and seek to lovingly honor others: by living quietly and tending to your own business and focusing on doing your own work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TH 4 11 d2fg καὶ φιλοτιμεῖσθαι, ἡσυχάζειν 1 to strive This phrase continues the apostles’ litany of exhortations. Here, **and to strive to live quietly** could refer to: (1) phrases that complement each other. Alternate translation: “and to aspire to live quietly” (2) phrases that express separate ideas. Alternate translation: “and seek to lovingly honor others, to live quietly” Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this. +1TH 4 11 j4c7 figs-explicit πράσσειν τὰ ἴδια 1 to live quietly Here, **to perform your own things** implies that the Thessalonian church should tend to their own concerns. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to tend to your own business” or “to focus on your own tasks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 4 11 jmt9 figs-idiom ἐργάζεσθαι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσὶν ὑμῶν 1 to perform your own things Here, **to work with your own hands** is an idiom meaning “earn what you need to live.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to work hard to earn what you need” or “to labor to pay for your expenses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 4 11 bz8s figs-distinguish καθὼς ὑμῖν παρηγγείλαμεν 1 to work with your own hands This phrase and the following verse signal the end of this larger section of teaching about how to live in Christian community (See [4:1,2](../04/01.md) for the same wording). Here, “just as we commanded” also expresses that what the apostles teach is the same as being “taught by God” (See [4:9](../04/09.md)). If this would not be understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “this is what we already commanded you to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +1TH 4 12 wj25 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα περιπατῆτε 1 you may walk properly Here, **so that you may walk** could be a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for the apostles’ exhortation in [4:10](../04/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order that you would behave” or “so that you might live” or “in order that you would live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1TH 4 12 oo9l grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα περιπατῆτε 1 you may walk properly Here, **so that you may walk** could be a result clause. Alternate translation: then you would live” or “then you will live” It is possible that this phrase refers to both purpose and result. If there is a way to indicate this in your language, you could express this dual meaning. Alternate translation: “as a result you now live” or “then you will live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 4 12 hp6g figs-metaphor περιπατῆτε εὐσχημόνως 1 you may walk properly Here, **to walk** is a metaphor that means “to live” or “behave.” If your readers would not understand what it means **to walk** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “you would live appropriately” or “you would live nobly” or “you would behave modestly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 12 k59r figs-metaphor πρὸς τοὺς ἔξω 1 before those outside Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were physically located outside of an area. He means that they are not part of the Christian community. If your readers would not understand what “before those outside” means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “in the presence of non-Christians” or “in front of those who do not trust in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 12 nait grammar-connect-logic-purpose καὶ μηδενὸς χρείαν ἔχητε 1 before those outside This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for the apostles’ exhortation in [4:10](../04/12.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “and so that you would not need anything” or “then you can be self-sufficient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-purpose]]) +1TH 4 13 vi2y grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 General Information: Here, **Now** is a connecting word that signals the beginning of an extended section in [4:13-5:11](..04/13/.md) about the Second Coming of Christ (See chapter and book introduction)(See also 2 Thessalonians 1:7-10; 2:3-12). If our language has a special section marker, you could use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 4 13 lan8 figs-doublenegatives οὐ θέλομεν δὲ ὑμᾶς ἀγνοεῖν 1 General Information: If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “But, we want you to know for certain” or “Now, we desire to clarify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +1TH 4 13 qt5b figs-explicit περὶ 1 you may not grieve Here, **concerning** implies that the apostles are answering another specific question previously asked by the Thessalonian church (See [4:9](../04/09.md)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “as it relates to your question about” or “concerning your question about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 4 13 j68e figs-euphemism τῶν κοιμωμένων 1 General Information: Here, **those who are asleep** is a euphemism for death that continues through [5:10](../05/10.md). In this specific context, it refers to those human souls who are awaiting the reunion of their bodies at the Second Coming of Christ (See [4:16–17](../04/16.md)). You could either use a similar euphemism for death in your language or say this in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “those who are already dead” or “those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) +1TH 4 13 ocjp grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα μὴ λυπῆσθε 1 brothers Here, **so that you may not grieve** is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why he does not want the Thessalonian church to remain ignorant about the destiny of their loved ones **who are asleep**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that you would not sorrow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1TH 4 13 r9f8 figs-explicit καθὼς καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ 1 so that you may not grieve just as also the rest Paul is using the adjective phrase **the rest** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “like the rest of people” or “in the same way as the rest of humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +1TH 4 13 f9eq figs-explicit οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα 1 so that you may not grieve just as also the rest Here, Paul assumes that his readers will know **hope** refers to salvation at the final resurrection (See [1:3; 2:19; 4:16; 5:8](../01/03.md)). Previously **hope** was associated with the Second Coming of Christ in [2:19](../02/19.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “who possess no confidence of life after death” or “who possess no assurance of life after death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 4 13 puvg figs-explicit οἱ μὴ ἔχοντες ἐλπίδα 1 so that you may not grieve just as also the rest If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **hope** in another way. Alternate translation: “who are not confident of life after death” “who are not sure about life after death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TH 4 14 j09o grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ γὰρ πιστεύομεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἀπέθανεν καὶ ἀνέστη 1 if we believe Paul is speaking as if this were a hypothetical possibility, but he actually means that it is true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think what the apostles are saying is not certain, then you can translate their words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “We certainly believe that Jesus died and resurrected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]]) +1TH 4 14 hmw4 figs-explicit πιστεύομεν ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἀπέθανεν καὶ ἀνέστη 1 if we believe Here it is assumed that the Thessalonian church knows the apostolic teaching that **Jesus died and rose again**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “you already know that we apostles trust that Jesus died and resurrected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 4 14 ybz6 figs-exclusive πιστεύομεν 1 if we believe Although **we believe** could be inclusive of the Thessalonian church (and by extension all Christians), it is most likely exclusive, referring to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy. The previous use in [4:11](../04/11.md) and subsequent uses (See “we say” in [4:15](../04/15.md)) are clearly referring to the apostles. Here, it mostly likely is a reference to their authoritative teaching. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: See the UST (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1TH 4 14 kmk2 grammar-connect-logic-result οὕτως καὶ ὁ Θεὸς 1 rose again This phrase could refer to: (1) result. Alternate translation: “then God … also” (2) manner. Alternate translation: “this is the way God … also” or “this is how God … also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 4 14 m1fy figs-possession ὁ Θεὸς τοὺς κοιμηθέντας διὰ τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ἄξει σὺν αὐτῷ. 1 rose again Paul is using the possessive form. Here, **through Jesus** could refer to: (1) being united to Jesus’ resurrection power **through** death. Alternate translation: “God will bring back with Jesus those who are united to him in death” (2) those who God will also bring back again **through** Jesus. Alternate translation: “it is through Jesus that God will bring back the dead people who are with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1TH 4 14 tjqj figs-rpronouns αὐτῷ 1 rose again Here Paul implies that **him** refers to **Jesus**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 4 15 vvda grammar-connect-words-phrases τοῦτο γὰρ ὑμῖν λέγομεν ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου 1 by the word of the Lord This clause indicates that what follows is something else important that the Thessalonian church should pay attention to (See also [1:8](../01/08.md) for **the word of the Lord**)). Alternate translation: “Certainly, what we now say to you is the Lord Jesus’ message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 4 15 ni3m figs-metonymy ἐν λόγῳ Κυρίου 1 by the word of the Lord The phrase **the word of the Lord** figuratively refers to “the whole message of the Lord’s gospel.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Here, **word** could refer to: (1) the authority of the message. Alternate translation: “because the Lord Jesus authorized our message” (2) the means of the message. Alternate translation: “with a message from the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +1TH 4 15 gbe1 grammar-connect-words-phrases Κυρίου, ὅτι ἡμεῖς 1 by the word of the Lord Here, **that** indicates that the rest of the verse is the content of **the word of the Lord**. You could indicate this by changing the punctuation or some other natural way in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord: we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 4 15 fdwk figs-exclusive λέγομεν…ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 by the word of the Lord When Paul says **we say**, he is speaking of himself, Silvanus, and Timothy, so **we** would be exclusive. However, when Paul says **we who are alive**, since he seems to be referring to all Christians, **we who are alive** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “we apostles say … all of us believers in Christ who are still alive” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1TH 4 15 hdlr figs-distinguish οἱ περιλειπόμενοι 1 by the word of the Lord This phrase gives us further information about **we who are alive**. It is not making a distinction between **who are left behind** and **we who are alive**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “and survive” or “and remain here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +1TH 4 15 b786 figs-idiom εἰς τὴν παρουσίαν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 at the coming of the Lord Here, **coming of the Lord** is a well-known idiom in 1-2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ [3:13](../03/13.md) or the “Day of the **Lord**” [5:2](../05/02.md). Use a natural way in your natural to emphasize this idea. Here, the word translated **until** could refer to: (1) the time before the Lord comes. Alternate translation: “until the Lord Jesus returns” or “until the Second Coming of the Lord Jesus” (2) the event of the Lord’s coming. Alternate translation: “at the coming of our Lord Jesus” or “at the arrival of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 4 15 xd2y figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ φθάσωμεν τοὺς κοιμηθέντας 1 by the word of the Lord Here, **certainly not** is a strong prohibition meaning “never.” If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement (See the UST). Alternate translation: “will never precede those who are dead” or “are not permitted to come before those who have already died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +1TH 4 16 yk2q figs-litany ὅτι αὐτὸς ὁ Κύριος ἐν κελεύσματι, ἐν φωνῇ ἀρχαγγέλου, καὶ ἐν σάλπιγγι Θεοῦ, καταβήσεται ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ; καὶ οἱ νεκροὶ ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστήσονται πρῶτον, 1 the Lord himself … will descend Paul uses a repetitive series of sentences in [4:16-17](../04/16.md). This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” This is a list of the events to describe the Second Coming of Christ. Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) +1TH 4 16 ah7p grammar-connect-words-phrases ὅτι 1 the Lord himself … will descend **For** indicates that following events are related to the Second Coming. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this. Alternately translation: “Certainly” or “Because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 4 16 c26b grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ὅτι αὐτὸς ὁ Κύριος ἐν κελεύσματι, ἐν φωνῇ ἀρχαγγέλου, καὶ ἐν σάλπιγγι Θεοῦ, καταβήσεται ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ 1 the Lord himself … will descend In this verse, Paul is describing events that happen at the same time **the Lord will descend from heaven**. He emphasizes the order of events by listing them prior to the main verb. If it is clearer in your language, you could place the main verb before the accompanying actions. You can also make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “Certainly, the Lord Jesus himself will come down from heaven with a commanding shout, and with the archangel’s voice, and with God’s trumpet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) +1TH 4 16 ygfp figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς ὁ Κύριος 1 the Lord himself … will descend Paul uses the word **himself** to emphasize that the Lord Jesus will come back in person. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus will come back personally” or “the very person, the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +1TH 4 16 z9ka ἀρχαγγέλου 1 of the archangel See Jude 9 for the only other use of this word in the Bible. +1TH 4 16 breq figs-possession σάλπιγγι Θεοῦ 1 of the archangel Paul is using the possessive form to describe **a trumpet** that is related to God. Here, **trumpet of God** could refer to: (1) a trumpet that God commands to be blown. Alternate translation: “a trumpet that God orders to be blown” (2) a trumpet that belongs to God. Alternate translation: “God’s trumpet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1TH 4 16 pjrh figs-parallelism καταβήσεται ἀπ’ οὐρανοῦ; καὶ οἱ νεκροὶ ἐν Χριστῷ ἀναστήσονται πρῶτον 1 the Lord himself … will descend The first main verb **descend** is listed after the events that describe it. This is to show contrast with the second verb **rise**. After the **Lord** Jesus comes down from **heaven**, the **dead** Christians will resurrect from the earth. Paul makes two opposite statements, in similar ways, to emphasis the dramatic nature of the Lord’s Second Coming. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “will come down from heaven, but the dead people who are united to Christ will be the first to resurrect from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1TH 4 16 k7sg grammar-connect-time-sequential καὶ 2 the Lord himself … will descend The word **and** indicates that the event the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “then after that” or “afterwards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +1TH 4 16 dr89 figs-explicit οἱ νεκροὶ 1 the dead in Christ will rise first Paul assumes that the Thessalonian church knows that **the dead** are the same as “those who are asleep” in [4:13–15](../04/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. See how you translated “fallen asleep” in [4:13–15](../04/13.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 4 16 xrxu figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ 1 the dead in Christ will rise first Here, Paul speaks figuratively about **the dead** as though they were occupying space inside **Christ**. This metaphor expresses the idea that believers are spiritually united to **Christ** (See also [2:14](../02/14.md)). Here, it also highlights the communion that living Thessalonian believers **in Christ** have with the believers **in Christ** who have died. If this might be misunderstood in your language, you can express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “who are united to Jesus Christ” or “who share life with Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 4 17 iy00 grammar-connect-time-sequential ἔπειτα 1 we who are alive Here, **Then** indicates that the events the story will now relate came after the event it has just described. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could show this relationship by using a fuller phrase. Alternate translation: “After that” or “Afterwards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) +1TH 4 17 l5l1 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς οἱ ζῶντες 1 we who are alive Though, **we who are alive** could be exclusive of the apostles (See note for the same phrase at [4:15](../04/15.md)), the universal content of this section, implies that all Christians are in view, so **we** would be inclusive. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “all of us believers in Christ who remain alive” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1TH 4 17 otiq writing-pronouns ἅμα σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 we who are alive Here, Paul refers to “the dead in Christ” (See [4:16](../04/16.md) as **them**. If this is confusing in your language, you could make the reference explicit. Alternate translation: “together with the dead in Christ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1TH 4 17 aj1n grammar-connect-time-simultaneous ἅμα σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 we who are alive Here, **together with them** could refer to: 1) a simultaneous event. You can make this clear in your translation with an appropriate connecting word or phrase. Alternate translation: “with them at the same time” 2) association with the “dead in Christ.” Alternate translation: “along with the dead in Christ” 3) both event and association. Alternate translation: “at the same time together with the dead in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) +1TH 4 17 m3gb writing-background ἁρπαγησόμεθα ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 with them Here, it is assumed that Paul is referring to the words of the angels at Jesus’ Ascension in [Acts 1:9-11] (acts/01/09.md), as a fulfillment of the prophecy in [Daniel 7:13-14](dan/07/13.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could provide a footnote or reference. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 4 17 z6km figs-explicit εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 with them What is implied in the phrase **to meet**, is that these believers are being compared to citizens coming out of a city to escort a victorious king back into his royal palace after winning a battle (See [Matthew 25:6](matt/25/06.md) where this word is used in the same context of the Second Coming with bridal escorts)). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain why Paul uses this phrase. Alternate translation: “to meet the Lord in the air and then escort him to earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 4 17 o7lj grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς ἀπάντησιν 1 with them Here, **to meet** is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why living believers **will be caught up together** with “the dead in Christ.” Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “in order to encounter” or “to act as royal escorts of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1TH 4 17 ukh1 writing-symlanguage ἐν νεφέλαις εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ Κυρίου εἰς ἀέρα 1 with them Here, **clouds … air** could be considered symbolic language representing God’s presence and the spiritual realm (See Exodus 19; Daniel 7:13-14; Matthew 24; Mark 13; Luke 17; 21; Ephesians 2:2). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to spiritually encounter the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]]) +1TH 4 17 ti69 writing-endofstory καὶ οὕτως 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This clause is meant to signal the end of the events related to the Second Coming. You can use the natural form in your language for expressing the conclusion of a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) +1TH 4 17 ouvu grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ οὕτως 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This clause also indicates the result of the meeting with **the Lord**. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “and then” or “as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 4 17 k6qc figs-parallelism σὺν Κυρίῳ 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air Here, **with the Lord** parallels **together with them** to express union with Christ as communion with his people. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1TH 4 18 gt91 grammar-connect-logic-result ὥστε παρακαλεῖτε 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “So then, keep encouraging” or “Because of this, you must comfort” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]] +1TH 4 18 y7zi figs-imperative παρακαλεῖτε 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air This is an imperative, but it communicates an appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates an appeal. Alternate translation: “you should encourage” or “please continue to comfort (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1TH 4 18 aya5 writing-pronouns ἀλλήλους 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air The pronoun **one another** refers to the Thessalonian church. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “each fellow member of your church” or “your fellow Thessalonian believer in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1TH 4 18 xsus figs-synecdoche ἐν τοῖς λόγοις τούτοις 1 will be caught up … in the clouds to meet the Lord in the air Here, **with these words** could refer to “we will always be with the Lord” in [4:17](../04/17.md) or figuratively to all that has been said in [4:13-17](../04/13.md). Alternate translation: “by reminding each other of our message” or “with these promises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) 1TH 5 intro ay3d 0 # 1 Thessalonians 5 General Notes

## Outline of 1 Thessalonians 5

1. Apostolic Teachings on the Second Coming of Christ (5:1-10)
* Timing (5:1-3)
* Preparation (5:4-8)
* God’s plan (5:9-10)
2. Final Instructions (5:11-28)
* Final Commands (5:11-22)
* Final Prayer (5:23-24)
* Final Appeals (5:25-27)
* Final blessing (5:25-27)

## Structure and formatting

Paul concludes his letter in a way that was typical of letters in the ancient Near East.

## “We” and “you”

In this letter, the words **we** and **our** refer to Paul, Silvanus, and Timothy, unless otherwise noted. Throughout the letter, **we** and **our** is used to convey that all three apostles are in agreement with the letter.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Idiom

#### Day of the Lord

The “day of the Lord” is an idiom for the time of final salvation for God’s people final judgment for God’s enemies. “Day” is metaphorical for a time period. Thus, the exact time of the coming “day of the Lord” will be a surprise to the world. The simile “like a thief in the night” refers this surprise timing. Because of this, Christians must prepare for the coming of the Lord by living with faith, hope and love [5:8](../05/08.md) toward God and others. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/dayofthelord]]

### Simile

#### Like a Thief

The simile “like a thief in the night” refers this surprise timing. Because of this, Christians must prepare for the coming of the Lord by living with faith, hope and love [5:8](../05/08.md) toward God and others. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])

### Metaphor

#### Day and Night, Light and Darkness

The apostles use many metaphors throughout [5:1-11](../05/1.md). “Night,” “darkness,” “drunk,” “sleep” are all metaphors about spiritual ignorance or lack of readiness. “Day,” “light,” “sober,” “watch” are all metaphors about spiritual awareness and readiness.

#### Armor

Here, the apostles use a military metaphor to urge the Thessalonian Church to be ready for Christ’s Second Coming at “the day of the Lord.” Just as soldiers must always be armed and ready to fight, so the Christian must live prepared for Christ’s return. Faithfulness and love are compared to a breastplate, and the hope of salvation is likened to a helmet [5:8](../05/08.md).

#### Prophecy

Those who “despise prophecies” in [5:20](../05/20.md) are said to “quench the Spirit.” This is a metaphor for trying to hinder the Holy Spirit’s guidance in the Church. All prophecies are to be examined and tested to determine if they adhere to apostolic teaching [5:21](../05/21.md). All prophecies that are proven to agree with apostolic teaching, are to be retained as good [5:21-22](../05/21/.md).

### Submission to Christian Leadership

The apostles link the well-being and spiritual safety of the Thessalonian Church to obedience to their leaders. Christian leaders are to be given recognition and loving respect by the church [5:12-13](../05/12.md).

### Holy Kiss

This refers to the ancient practice of exchanging a kiss of peace on the cheek during the liturgy. Different cultures have different standards of appropriate physical contact. These different cultural standards may make translating this passage difficult. Translators will have to consider the most appropriate way to communicate this sensitive issue [5:26](../05/26.md). -1TH 5 1 i2vm figs-explicit περὶ δὲ 1 General Information: **Now concerning** signals a change in subject (See [4:9](../04/09.md)). Here, the timing of and preparation for the Second Coming is in view. This phrase implies that the apostles are answering another specific question previously asked by the Thessalonian Church. If it could be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Now as it relates to your question about” or “Now, about your question referring to” or “Now, about your question relating to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 5 1 a8f3 figs-idiom τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 General Information: Here, **the times and the seasons** is an idiom referring to: (1) a specific period in time. Alternate translation: “the appointed time of Jesus’ return” or “the fixed time when Jesus returns” (See Acts 1:7 for this exact phrase referring to the same thing). (2) a specific amount of time. Alternate translation: “how long it will take for the Lord Jesus to return” or “when the Lord Jesus will return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 5 1 z1s6 figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 Connecting Statement: Throughout this letter, **brothers** is an idiom meaning “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers in Christ” [4:13](../04/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 5 1 pjf6 figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 Connecting Statement: Here, the idiom **brothers** includes females. If your language does not have this idiom, you can use a gender inclusive term that refers to male and female. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” or “fellow believers in God” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1TH 5 1 bcsa figs-activepassive οὐ χρείαν ἔχετε ὑμῖν γράφεσθαι 1 General Information: If you have no passive form in your language, you could make it active (See this same phrase in [4:9](../04/09.md)). Alternate translation: “we do not need to write to you” or “you have no need for us to write it for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1TH 5 1 caue figs-you ἔχετε 1 General Information: The word **you** is plural and refers to the believers in the Thessalonian Church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -1TH 5 2 dqgk figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἀκριβῶς οἴδατε 1 perfectly well The words **For**, **yourselves**, and **perfectly** emphasize the how clearly the Thessalonian Church should understand when and how the Lord’s Second Coming will happen. Alternate translation: “Certainly you are well aware” or “Because you understand perfectly well” or “Indeed, you know precisely” or “In fact, you recognize accurately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1TH 5 2 yvg3 figs-simile αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἀκριβῶς οἴδατε ὅτι ἡμέρα Κυρίου, ὡς κλέπτης ἐν νυκτὶ οὕτως ἔρχεται 1 perfectly well This verse begins an extended list of contrasting similes that continues through [5:8](./05/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -1TH 5 2 mcq9 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 perfectly well This connecting word gives the reason why the Thessalonian Church has no need to have anything written to them about the timing and manner of the Lord’s Second Coming. Alternate translation: “Because” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 2 tu9t figs-idiom ἡμέρα Κυρίου 1 in this manner—like a thief in the night This is an idiom that refers to the Old Testament concept of the time of God’s final judgment. This passage makes it clear that **the day of the Lord** is synonymous with “the coming of the Lord” in [2:15](../02/15.md). (See also Acts 2:20; 1 Corinthians 5:5; 2 Thessalonians 2:2; 2 Peter 3:10). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 5 2 tmj3 figs-simile ὡς κλέπτης ἐν νυκτὶ οὕτως ἔρχεται 1 in this manner—like a thief in the night This simile expresses the unknown timing and exact manner, but certain reality of the Second Coming of the Lord. Alternate translation: “is coming as unexpectedly as a robber at night” or “is going to come so surprisingly” or “is going to happen like this–all of a sudden” (See UST) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -1TH 5 3 p1wi figs-hypo ὅταν λέγωσιν, εἰρήνη καὶ ἀσφάλεια 1 When they may say This clause continues the theme of unexpected timing of the Lord’s Coming, by using a hypothetical situation to express the suddenness of the “the day of the Lord.” Alternate translation: “Whenever they might say, ‘Everything is safe and sound,’” or “At a time when people are saying, ‘All is well,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -1TH 5 3 mjvd grammar-connect-logic-contrast τότε 1 When they may say This verse expresses a contrast to what is expected. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1TH 5 3 ne9n figs-parallelism τότε αἰφνίδιος αὐτοῖς ἐφίσταται ὄλεθρος 1 then sudden destruction **sudden destruction** parallels the idea of terror that accompanies a sudden attack by “a thief in the night” [5:2](../05/02.md). Alternate translation: “right then immediate destruction is looming over them” or “at that moment unseen destruction hovers over them” or “then swift destruction attacks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 5 3 f1xr figs-simile ὥσπερ ἡ ὠδὶν τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ; καὶ οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 like birth pains to the one having in the womb **like birth pains** is a simile of the suddenness and inescapable nature of God’s judgment. Alternate translation: “just as suddenly as labor pains seize a pregnant woman–they can never escape this destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -1TH 5 3 sde2 figs-parallelism ὥσπερ ἡ ὠδὶν τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ; καὶ οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 like birth pains to the one having in the womb **like birth pains** parallels **sudden**, and **destruction** parallels **certainly not escape**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 5 4 sk6v grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὑμεῖς δέ 1 you, brothers **But you** begins a clause that contrasts the destruction of those appointed “to wrath” (See [5:9](../05/09.md)) with the Thessalonian Church who are **not in darkness**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1TH 5 4 rr9j ἀδελφοί 1 you, brothers Throughout this letter, **brothers** is an idiom meaning “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers in Christ” [5:1](../05/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 5 4 nr5f figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 you, brothers Here, the idiom **brothers** includes females. If your language does not have this idiom, you can use a gender inclusive term that refers to male and female. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” or “fellow believers in God” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1TH 5 4 b6lv figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐστὲ ἐν σκότει 1 are not in darkness Here **in darkness** is a metaphor for “unaware” or “unprepared” or “living in sin (like a thief)” (See [4:6-8](../0406.md)). Alternate translation: “are not unaware” or “are not unprepared” or “are not living in sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 4 elp9 grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα ἡ ἡμέρα ὑμᾶς ὡς κλέπτας καταλάβῃ 1 so that the day might overtake you like a thief This is a result clause. Alternate translation: “causing you to be like people surprised by a robber. You are ready for the time when he returns” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 4 otz2 figs-ellipsis ἡ ἡμέρα 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Here, **the day** is a relative ellipsis referring to the “**the day** of the Lord.” If it would be misunderstood in your language, you can make it clear. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1TH 5 5 ddce figs-doublet πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας. οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Here, **sons of the light** means the same thing as **sons of the day**. Also, **of the night** means the same thing as **of the darkness**. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Certainly, all of you are ready for Christ’s second coming. None of us are ignorant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1TH 5 5 ww4y figs-parallelism πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας. οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Here, **you are all sons of the light and sons of the day** is a contrasting parallelism to **We are not of the night, nor of the darkness**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 5 5 zp3z figs-metaphor πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day **sons of the light and sons of the day** are metaphors for prepared Christians who will be saved (See [5:8-9](../05/08.md)). **sons** means “Christians who are characterized by.” **light** and **day** mean “spiritually ready.” This is opposite of those **of the darkness**. See also “those outside” in [4:12](../04/12.md). Alternate translation: “This is because all of you are ready for Christ’s coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 5 ilv4 grammar-connect-logic-result πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς…ἐστε 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day This reason clause uses an emphatic reflexive pronoun **you** and the inclusive **all** in order to “comfort” the Thessalonians [4:18, 5:11](../04/18.md). Alternate translation: “Certainly all of you are” or “This is because you are all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 5 d6fm figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 We are not of the night nor of the darkness **night** and **darkness** are metaphors for “ignorant,” “unprepared,” or “sin” (See [5:4](../05/04.md). Alternate translation: “We are not characterized by spiritual ignorance” or “We are not unprepared like those who live in the darkness, like those at night” or “we do not live like those who are characterized by sinful activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 5 kq0x figs-exclusive ἐσμὲν 1 We are not of the night nor of the darkness Here, **we** is inclusive of all Christians in [5:5-5:10](../05/05.md). Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1TH 5 6 paqf grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα οὖν 1 we might keep watch and be sober This phrase indicates as strong emphatic reason clause. Alternate translation: “This is the reason why,” or “As a result,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 6 d2aj figs-metaphor μὴ καθεύδωμεν ὡς οἱ λοιποί 1 we might keep watch and be sober Here, **sleep** is used as a metaphor for “unprepared” or “unaware” (See note at [5:4](../05/04.md)). **the rest** refers to non-Christians: “those outside” in [4:12](../04/12.md), those “in darkness” in [5:4](../05/04.md), those “of the night and of the darkness” in [5:5](../05/05.md). Alternate translation: “we must not be unprepared like non-Christians” or “we must not remain spiritually unaware like the rest of humanity” or “let us not be like others, who are not aware that Jesus is coming back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 6 on3d μὴ καθεύδωμεν…γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 we might keep watch and be sober Here, the verb forms **sleep**, **keep watch**, and **be sober** can be translated in three main ways: (1) Commands. Alternate translation: “we must not sleep … we must keep watch and be sober” (2) Suggestions/Obligations. Alternate translation: “we should not sleep … we should keep watch and we should be sober” (3) Appeals. Alternate translation: “let us not sleep … let us keep watch and let us be sober” -1TH 5 6 q33e grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 we might not sleep This marks the beginning of a contrast clause. Alternate translation: “however” or “instead” or “on the contrary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1TH 5 6 sdww figs-metaphor γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 we might not sleep The metaphor of spiritual preparedness and awareness continues with the phrase **keep watch and be sober**. Alternate translation: “instead, we must stay spiritually alert and prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 6 osxu figs-doublet γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 we might not sleep Here, **keep watch** and **be sober** could refer to the same thing. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “let us remain soberly awake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1TH 5 7 s253 figs-metaphor οἱ γὰρ καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν 1 For those who are sleeping, sleep at night Here again, like in [5:6](../05/06.md), **sleep** is used as a metaphor for “unprepared” or “unaware” or even “sinful” (see also note at [5:4](../05/04.md). Here, this is combined with the metaphor of **night** [5:2](../05/02.md). This verb forms also conveys habitual or repeated activity. Alternate translation: “Because those who are sleep are unaware” or “Certainly those who are asleep are unprepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 7 fxca figs-parallelism οἱ γὰρ καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν; καὶ οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν 1 For those who are sleeping, sleep at night This verse utilizes structural parallelism to compare **sleeping** and **getting drunk**. It uses the same phrasing in both clauses to convey this parallelism. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 5 7 exa8 figs-metaphor οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν 1 those who are getting drunk, get drunk at night Again, the metaphor of “unprepared” or “unaware” is compared to “drunkenness.” So, here, **sleeping** and **getting drunk** are metaphorical synonyms. Both verbs indicate a repeated or habitual practice. Alternate translation: “those who are drunk are unaware” or “Certainly those who are drunk are unprepared” or “those who drink too much alcohol, do it at night” or “alcoholics tend to get drunk at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 8 wh3g grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἡμεῖς δὲ ἡμέρας ὄντες, νήφωμεν 1 we, being of the day This contrasting clause concludes this section’s main theme of **day** (See first note at [5:2](../05/02.md) and emphasizes the previous term **sober** [5:6](../05/06.md) as a contrast to “getting drunk.” Alternate translation: However, since we are ready for Christ’s coming, we must stay prepared” or “Instead, because we are ready, let us remain aware” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1TH 5 8 i8j1 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 might stay sober Here, **we** is inclusive of all Christians (See note at [4:17, 5:5](../04/17.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1TH 5 8 iv63 νήφωμεν 1 we, being of the day This verb can be translated in three main ways (see your translation at [5:6](../05/06.md): (1) command. Alternate translation: “we must remain sober” (2) strong suggestion/obligation. Alternate translation: “we should remain sober” (3) appeal. Alternate translation: “let us remain sober” -1TH 5 8 jqqo figs-metaphor ἡμέρας ὄντες 1 we, being of the day **being of the day** could refer to: (1) belonging. Alternate translation: “belong to Christ” or “are part of those who are ready for Christ’s coming” (2) character. (See your translation at [5:5](../05/05.md). Alternate translation: “This is because all of you are ready for Christ’s coming” or “Certainly none of you are characterized by ignorance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 8 ev6i figs-metaphor ἐνδυσάμενοι θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ περικεφαλαίαν, ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας 1 having put on the breastplate of faith and of love The military metaphor of **breastplate** and **helmet** reinforces that **sober** refers to readiness. As a soldier must equip himself with armor in order to be ready to fight, so the Christian must prepare himself for the Second Coming of Christ with spiritual protection (See also Ephesians 6:10-18,23). Alternate translation: “having equipped ourselves with faithfulness and love, like a soldier wears a breastplate; and having put on the confidence of salvation, like a helmet” or “by arming ourselves with faithful love, as with a breastplate; and salvation’s confident assurance, as with a helmet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 8 l89q figs-possession πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης…σωτηρίας 1 having put on the breastplate of faith and of love Here is a reference to three things that “remain: faith, hope, love” (See 1 Corinthians 13:13). These genitive phrases **of faith and of love … of salvation** can refer to: (1) means. Alternate translation: “through faith … love … salvation” (2) source. Alternate translation: “that comes from faith … that comes from love … that comes from salvation” (3) association. Alternate translation: “associated with faith … love … salvation” or “that is characterized by faith … love … salvation” (4) attribute. Alternate translation: “of faithful love … salvation’s hope” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1TH 5 9 sgu8 figs-parallelism ὅτι οὐκ ἔθετο ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς ὀργὴν, ἀλλὰ εἰς περιποίησιν σωτηρίας διὰ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, 1 whether we might be awake or asleep To emphasize the contrast of this parallelism, you could convert these clauses into two sentences. Alternate translation: “Because God did not destine us for wrath. Actually, God destined that our Lord Jesus Christ would preserve and save us.” or “Certainly, God did not determine to punish us. Instead, he determined that our Lord Jesus Christ would protect and save us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 5 9 lrx6 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Here, **For** signals a reason clause. Alternate translation: “This is because” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 9 h5y2 figs-abstractnouns ὅτι οὐκ ἔθετο ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς ὀργὴν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Here, **wrath** is an abstract noun referring to God’s future and final Judgment. See your translation of **wrath** at [1:10, 2:16](../01/10/.md). If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate this phrase with a verb form. Alternate translation: “This is because God did not determine that he would judge us” or “Certainly, God did not destine to punish us” (See: [What is the “second coming” of Jesus?](../front/intro.md))(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 5 9 y7bg figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Here, **us** is inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1TH 5 9 qmo5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Here, **but** marks the beginning of a contrast clause that emphasizes the impossibility of God’s people experiencing final judgment. Alternate translation: “but actually” or “instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -1TH 5 9 ea58 figs-parallelism εἰς περιποίησιν σωτηρίας 1 whether we might be awake or asleep This clause reinforces the impossibility of Christians experiencing God’s final **wrath**, and parallels the language of [5:8](../05/08.md). This word translated **to obtain** is a noun that literally means “placed around,” echoing the language of “helmet.” So then, **to obtain** and “hope” are parallels describing **salvation** in both verses. Alternate translation: “for possession of salvation” or “for preserving salvation” or “for the protection of salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 5 9 qfcf figs-possession περιποίησιν σωτηρίας 1 whether we might be awake or asleep This genitive phrase expresses possession. Alternate translation: “possession of salvation” or “acquiring of salvation” or “preserving of salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1TH 5 9 ytdm grammar-connect-time-sequential εἰς περιποίησιν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep This phrase could refer to destination. Alternate translation: “leading to the obtaining of” or “towards possession of” or “toward preserving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -1TH 5 9 m8y1 grammar-connect-logic-result εἰς περιποίησιν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep This phrase could be a result clause. Alternate translation: “with the result of the possession of” or “causing us to obtain” or “so then preserving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 9 c8t7 grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς περιποίησιν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep This phrase could be a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of possessing” or “in order to obtain” or “so that we preserve” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1TH 5 9 reki translate-textvariants Χριστοῦ 1 whether we might be awake or asleep A number of ancient manuscripts omit **Christ**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 5 10 arhm figs-distinguish τοῦ ἀποθανόντος περὶ ἡμῶν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep This relative clause gives the guarantee that we will “obtain salvation,” because Jesus **died for us**. Alternate translation: “he died for our sake” or “he died on our behalf” or “he died on our in place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) -1TH 5 10 dzq0 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα εἴτε γρηγορῶμεν εἴτε καθεύδωμεν, ἅμα σὺν αὐτῷ ζήσωμεν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep This could be a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that … we would live together with him” or “in order that … we could both live together with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -1TH 5 10 j2ye grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα εἴτε γρηγορῶμεν εἴτε καθεύδωμεν, ἅμα σὺν αὐτῷ ζήσωμεν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep This could be a result clause. Alternate translation: “resulting in the fact that … we will live together with him” or “. So then, … we will both live together with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 10 w59c figs-euphemism εἴτε γρηγορῶμεν εἴτε καθεύδωμεν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep **awake or asleep** is likely a euphemism that refers to “the dead and the living.” The previous use of **asleep** refers to those “appointed to wrath,” so it would not make sense to have the same meaning here. Alternate translation: “whether alive or dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -1TH 5 10 q3oy figs-metaphor εἴτε γρηγορῶμεν εἴτε καθεύδωμεν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep This could also be continuing the metaphor of spiritual alertness or sleepiness. See [5:6](../05/05.md)) where the same words have this meaning. Here, it would indicate that since Christ **died for us**, we are assured “to obtain salvation” [5:9](..05/09.md). Alternate translation: “even if we are spiritually alert or groggy” or “whether we are prepared or caught unaware” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 10 lrxs figs-parallelism ἅμα σὺν αὐτῷ ζήσωμεν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep This phrase echoes the language of [4:17](../04/17.md), indicating that this life **together with him** is eternal life. Here, **for us** parallels **together with him** to express union with Christ as communion with his people. Alternate translation: “we would both live eternally with him” or “both the living and dead will live forever with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 5 11 r921 grammar-connect-words-phrases διὸ παρακαλεῖτε ἀλλήλους, καὶ οἰκοδομεῖτε εἷς τὸν ἕνα, καθὼς καὶ ποιεῖτε 1 build up one the other **Therefore** indicates the conclusion of this section about “the day of the Lord,” echoing and expanding on the closing exhortation and exact phrase **comfort one another** found in [4:18](../04/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 5 11 m2c9 figs-doublet διὸ παρακαλεῖτε ἀλλήλους, καὶ οἰκοδομεῖτε εἷς τὸν ἕνα, καθὼς καὶ ποιεῖτε 1 build up one the other This verse uses a doublet to make an emphatic appeal to the Thessalonian Church. **comfort one another** is similar to **build up one the other**. **just as** is a common emphatic phrase in this letter (See [4:1](../04/01.md)). Alternate translation: “So then, keep encouraging each other and edifying one another, exactly as you are now doing” or “This is why you must keep consoling each other and confirming each one, doing it just as you are now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -1TH 5 11 fx2f figs-idiom οἰκοδομεῖτε 1 build up one the other **build up** is an idiom that refers to spiritual strengthening or a metaphor that compares building a house to strengthening another person’s faithfulness. Alternate translation: “keep supporting” or “continue to confirm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 5 11 kdae figs-idiom εἷς τὸν ἕνα 1 build up one the other The phrase translated **one the other** literally means “one the one.” It is an idiom that means “each and every one” or “each one” or “one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 5 12 pd47 grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 General Information: This connecting word indicates the final section of instructions from the apostles. Alternate translation: “Finally” or “But” or “Indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 5 12 jeeb grammar-connect-words-phrases ἐρωτῶμεν δὲ ὑμᾶς 1 General Information: Here, **we ask you** is a final appeal to the Thessalonian Church. Alternate translation: “Now we appeal to you” or “But we urge you” (See [4:1](../04/01.md) for a similar phrase). -1TH 5 12 rka4 ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Throughout this letter, **brothers** is an idiom meaning “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers in Christ” [5:4](../05/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 5 12 xnnz figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, the idiom **brothers** includes females. If your language does not have this idiom, you can use a gender inclusive term that refers to male and female. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” or “fellow believers in God” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1TH 5 12 ksp2 εἰδέναι 1 to acknowledge those who are laboring In [5:12-13](../05/12/.md) the verb forms **to know** and “to regard” are used twice to urge the Thessalonian Church to submit to their leaders. Alternate translation: “to acknowledge the authority of” or “to recognize the authority” -1TH 5 12 fqh3 figs-merism τοὺς κοπιῶντας ἐν ὑμῖν, καὶ προϊσταμένους ὑμῶν ἐν Κυρίῳ, καὶ νουθετοῦντας ὑμᾶς 1 leading you in the Lord This clause is merism that expresses different functions or categories for the same group of leaders: working, leading, training. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -1TH 5 12 f4jv figs-idiom ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 leading you in the Lord Here, the idiom **in the Lord** indicates that the Thessalonian Church must **acknowledge** these leaders because they are authorized by Lord Jesus himself (See also [4:1](../04/01.md). Alternate translation: “with their authority from the Lord Jesus” or “as spokespersons of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 5 12 zlqn νουθετοῦντας 1 leading you in the Lord The word translated **admonishing** literally means “placing in mind” or “putting within the perceptions.” In essence, it refers to all the aspects of spiritual instruction. Alternate translation: “instructing” or “training” or “warning” or “disciplining” -1TH 5 13 c966 figs-parallelism καὶ ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, διὰ τὸ ἔργον αὐτῶν 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work This verse uses intensified parallelism [5:12](../05/12.md), by adding **highly in love**. **to regard** parallels “to acknowledge,” **because of their work** parallels “laboring.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 5 13 jq0o grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, διὰ τὸ ἔργον αὐτῶν 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of their work for you, we also ask you to regard them highly in love” or “Since they work so hard for you, we also urge you to show them the highest honor out of love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 13 qcw4 καὶ ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work This phrase uses double emphasis. The word translated **regard** is meant to be a pun for leadership. The apostles are urging the Thessalonian Church “to lead the way” by their “excessive love” for their leaders. Alternate translation: “and to continue to model for them how to abundantly love” or “and to keep showing them the highest honor in love” or “and to lovingly demonstrate the utmost consideration” -1TH 5 13 p6m4 ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work This phrase could refer to: (1) means. Alternate translation: “with love” (2) association. Alternate translation: “in the communion of love” (3) basis. Alternate translation: “on the basis of love” or “from love” -1TH 5 13 rqs8 figs-imperative εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here is the first of seventeen final appeals that apostles give the Thessalonian Church in [5:13-26](../05/13.md). **Be at peace** is an imperative, but the previous use of “we ask” in [5:12](../05/12.md) and following use of “we exhort” in [5:14](../05/14.md) communicate polite requests rather than a command. You could use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. **among yourselves** refers to the Thessalonian Church at its leaders. Alternate translation: “Continue to live at peace with your leaders” or “Reconcile with each other” or (See UST)(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -1TH 5 14 tdxa grammar-connect-words-phrases παρακαλοῦμεν δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work This phrase signals the apostles’ final appeals to the Thessalonian Church. Since there are fourteen commands in this section [5:14-22](../05/14.md), you could use a marker from your language to indicate this final section. Alternate translation: “Now, we urge you, fellow believers in Christ:” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) -1TH 5 14 qadb figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work See notes at [5:12](../05/12.md) about **brothers**. -1TH 5 14 lajk figs-litany νουθετεῖτε τοὺς ἀτάκτους, παραμυθεῖσθε τοὺς ὀλιγοψύχους, ἀντέχεσθε τῶν ἀσθενῶν, μακροθυμεῖτε πρὸς πάντας 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here begins a litany of commands that extends through [5:22](../05/22). It most likely is addressed to the leaders spoken of in [5:12-13](../05/12.md). All of these verbs indicate an emphasis of characteristic or repeated action. If your language makes this distinction, you could indicate this emphasis in your translation. Alternate translation: “Keep admonishing … toward all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) -1TH 5 15 oz10 figs-parallelism ὁρᾶτε μή τις κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ τινι ἀποδῷ, ἀλλὰ πάντοτε τὸ ἀγαθὸν διώκετε, καὶ εἰς ἀλλήλους καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work This verse uses contrasting parallelism: **pay back evil for evil** contrasts **pursue good**, **no one** contrasts **always**. This verse also uses synonymous parallelism: **to anyone** is similar to **both for one another and for all**. If this parallelism is unclear in your language, you could make it emphatic. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 5 15 vlp7 figs-idiom ὁρᾶτε μή τις κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ τινι ἀποδῷ 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here, **See that** is an idiom for commanding attention. Alternate translation: “Be certain that no one repays evil in place of evil” or “It is forbidden for anyone to pay back evil instead of evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 5 15 mc2z figs-hyperbole πάντοτε 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here, **always** could be using a hyperbole to express emphasis. Alternate translation: “constantly” or “habitually” or “make every effort to” or (See UST) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -1TH 5 15 pe3l figs-merism καὶ εἰς ἀλλήλους καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here, **both for one another and for all** is used as a way to emphasize the whole human race (See how you translated this phrase in [3:12](../03/12.md). If **both for one another and for all** would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for everyone” or “for each and every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -1TH 5 16 chw9 figs-hyperbole πάντοτε 1 Rejoice always Here again, **always** could be using a hyperbole to express emphasis. Alternate translation: “constantly” or “habitually” or “make every effort to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -1TH 5 17 l63i figs-hyperbole ἀδιαλείπτως προσεύχεσθε 1 Pray without ceasing Here, **without ceasing** could be using a hyperbole to express emphasis. Alternate translation: “Keep praying regularly” or “Continue to habitually pray” or “Be in a prayerful state” or “Retain a prayerful state of mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -1TH 5 18 bt5q ἐν παντὶ εὐχαριστεῖτε 1 In everything Here, **in everything** could refer to: (1) situation/circumstance. Alternate translation: “In every situation give thanks” or “In every circumstance be thankful” or “No matter what happens offer thanks to God” (2) time. Alternate translation: “At every time give thanks” or “In every moment be thankful” (3) both. Alternate translation: “In every situation and moment” -1TH 5 18 z9gg figs-infostructure ἐν παντὶ εὐχαριστεῖτε 1 In everything give thanks If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Continue to give thanks in everything” or “Keep giving thanks at every time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -1TH 5 18 q7gn grammar-connect-logic-result τοῦτο γὰρ θέλημα Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 for this is the will of God This is a reason clause. Alternate translation: “Because this is God’s will for you who are united to Christ Jesus” or “Certainly, this very thing is God’s will for you who are in union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 18 l3sk grammar-collectivenouns τοῦτο γὰρ θέλημα Θεοῦ 1 for this is the will of God **this** emphasizes what **is the will of God**. **this** refers either to **in everything give thanks** or all the commands in [5:14-18](../05/14.md). See your translation of **the will of God** at [4:3](../04/03.md). Alternate translation: “In fact, this is God’s will” or “Certainly, this very thing is God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -1TH 5 18 sw8b figs-abstractnouns θέλημα Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 for this is the will of God If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could change this abstract noun phrase to an active form. Alternate translation: “God desires that you live like those who are in union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 5 19 j1ei figs-metaphor τὸ Πνεῦμα μὴ σβέννυτε 1 Do not quench the Spirit **quench** is a metaphor comparing the **Spirit** to a breath or wind that can be snuffed out. Alternate translation: “Do not extinguish the Spirit” or “Do not reject the Spirit” or (See UST) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 19 sv8r figs-litotes μὴ σβέννυτε 1 Do not quench the Spirit If **do not quench** would be misunderstood in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Continue to kindle the Spirit” or “Keep working along with the Spirit” or “Be fervent in the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -1TH 5 19 lqc3 figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα 1 Do not quench the Spirit The phrase translated **the Spirit** is assumed to refer to “the Holy **Spirit**” (See [4:8](../04/08.md). Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit” or “the Spirit of God” or “God’s Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 5 20 iv1n προφητείας μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 Do not despise prophecies This could refer to: (1) the content of “quench the Spirit.” Alternate translation: “Do not despise prophecies from the Spirit” (2) a separate issue within the Thessalonian Church. Alternate translation: “Do not revile prophecies” or “Do not scorn prophetic messages” -1TH 5 21 wx69 figs-metaphor πάντα δοκιμάζετε 1 Test all things **all things** refers to “prophecies” [5:20](../05/21.md). (See [2:4](../02/04.md) for the word translated **test** as “approved” used in the same context). Here, **test** is a metaphor comparing “prophecies” to metal tested for purity in a refiner’s fire. If you have an equivalent metaphor from your culture, you could use it. Alternate translation: “Examine and approve all prophecies” or “Test and examine all prophetic messages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 21 qgay translate-textvariants πάντα δοκιμάζετε; τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 Test all things Many ancient manuscripts add a contrasting “But” at the beginning of this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 5 21 n1jv figs-metaphor τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 Test all things Here, “prophecies” are spoken of as **what {is} good**, compared to objects that someone could hold in his hands. Alternate translation: “Hold on tight to a genuine prophecy from the Spirit” or “Keep only the good prophecies” or “Clutch whatever prophecies are excellent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -1TH 5 22 bm8l figs-parallelism ἀπὸ παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ ἀπέχεσθε 1 Test all things This verse is a contrasting parallel to [5:21](../05/21.md). **Stay away** is the opposite of “Hold fast,” **all** parallels “all things,” **appearance of evil** is opposite of “what is good.” Alternate translation: “Hold back from accepting any prophecy that appears wicked” or “Don’t hold on tight to any prophecy that appears false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 5 22 z9k0 figs-personification παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ 1 Test all things **appearance** is used to personify prophecy as if someone or something that can be seen. If **appearance** might be misunderstood by your readers, you could express **appearance** in clear terms. Alternate translation: “all apparently evil prophecies” or “all obvious evil prophecies” or “any clearly wicked prophecies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) -1TH 5 23 mqi7 translate-blessing ἁγιάσαι 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly The verbs **sanctify … be kept** indicate that this is a final blessing or prayer section. You could use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “Now I pray, that God himself, who gives peace, would sancitfy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) -1TH 5 23 ozyh figs-parallelism ἁγιάσαι ὑμᾶς ὁλοτελεῖς, καὶ ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως…τηρηθείη 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Here, the words translated **completely** and **entire** have parallel forms and meanings. **sanctify** parallels **be kept blamelessly**. See also [3:13](../03/13.md) for a parallel passage. Alternate translation: “may … fully preserve you as his people to the end, and may every part of you be protected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 5 23 sbxc figs-possession ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly **the God of peace** is a title for God found in the New Testament (See Romans 15:33; 16:20; Philippians 4:9; Hebrews 13:20). **the God of peace** can refer to: (1) God’s character. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by peace” (2) What God does. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” (3) Both. Alternate translation: (See UST) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -1TH 5 23 nb1x figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly **himself** is used to emphasize the urgency of the apostles’ prayer or blessing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1TH 5 23 vkhs figs-activepassive ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως…τηρηθείη. 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly The passive verb form **may be … kept** indicates God is one who is being asked to complete the action. You could change this phrase to an active form. Alternate translation: “may God make your whole life sinless” or “may God keep you completely blameless” or (See UST) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1TH 5 23 a64t ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως…τηρηθείη. 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly The word translated **may … be kept** also indicates a strong desire or hope. Alternate translation: “O that … would be kept” or “may … be guarded blamelessly” or “may … be protected blamelessly” or “may … be preserved blamelessly”. -1TH 5 23 s36k figs-merism ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Here, the concepts **your entire spirit, and soul, and body** represent the whole person. If your language does not have three words for these concepts you can state it as “your whole life” “your entire life” or “all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -1TH 5 23 nyma figs-idiom ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Here, the word translated **coming** is a well-known idiom in 1-2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ [4:15](../04/15.md) or the “Day of the Lord” [5:2](../05/02.md). It literally means, “presence” or “being with or near.” Here, **coming** expresses “presence,” so the emphasis is on the lasting presence of the Lord Jesus (see also Matthew 24). The definite article **the** indicates either the one and only Coming of the Lord, or the well-known Coming of the Lord. Alternate translation: or “when the Lord Jesus Christ presents himself” or “at the arrival of the Lord Jesus Christ” or “when our Lord Jesus Christ arrives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 5 24 vx20 πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς, ὃς καὶ ποιήσει 1 Faithful is he who calls you This statement concludes the blessing of [5:23](../05/23.md). -1TH 5 24 mq2u figs-parallelism πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς 1 Faithful is he who calls you This verse specifically parallels the language of [4:7](../04/07.md) and also [2:12](../02/12.md). Alternate translation: “The faithful God keeps summoning you to complete sanctification” or “The trustworthy God is inviting you to completely belong to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -1TH 5 24 i03k grammar-connect-logic-result πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς, ὃς καὶ ποιήσει 1 who will also do it Here, **who will also do it** is the reason of result clause. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Because God is faithful, he will also completely sanctify you” or “Since God is trustworthy, he will also accomplish your complete sanctification” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -1TH 5 24 j08v figs-ellipsis ὁ καλῶν 1 Faithful is he who calls you This is an example of relative ellipsis, where the presumed reference is “the God of peace” in [5:23](../05/23.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “God who calls” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -1TH 5 24 c3jg figs-rpronouns ὃς 1 who will also do it The pronoun **who** refers to **he**. **he** refers to God and emphasizes the faithfulness of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -1TH 5 25 q8ki figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 General Information: Throughout this letter, **brothers** is an idiom meaning “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers in Christ” [5:14](../05/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 5 25 qa1c figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here, the idiom **brothers** includes females. If your language does not have this idiom, you can use a gender inclusive term that refers to male and female. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” or “spiritual brothers and sisters” or “fellow believers in Christ” or “fellow believers in God” (See [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -1TH 5 25 b7w3 figs-imperative προσεύχεσθε 1 brothers **pray** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please pray” or “We ask you to pray” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) -1TH 5 25 i5yv translate-textvariants καὶ 1 brothers Some ancient manuscripts omit “also” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1TH 5 1 i2vm figs-explicit περὶ δὲ τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 General Information: Here, **Now concerning** signals a change in subject (See also [4:9](../04/09.md)). This phrase implies that the apostles are answering a specific question previously asked by the Thessalonian church about the timing of “the coming of the Lord” and how they should prepare for it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Now, about your question related to the exact timing of the Lord’s return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 5 1 a8f3 figs-idiom τῶν χρόνων καὶ τῶν καιρῶν 1 General Information: Here, **the times and the seasons** is an idiom referring to a specific point in time or a time period. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. This phrase could refer to: (1) a specific point in time. Alternate translation: “the appointed time when Jesus returns” or “the fixed time when Jesus returns” (See [Acts 1:7](acts/01/07.md) for this exact phrase referring to the same thing)). (2) a specific amount of time. Alternate translation: “how long it will take for the Lord Jesus to return” or “when the Lord Jesus will return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 5 1 caue figs-ellipsis οὐ χρείαν ἔχετε ὑμῖν γράφεσθαι 1 General Information: Here, words are left out in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **for us** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1TH 5 2 yvg3 figs-simile perfectly well This verse begins an extended list of contrasting similes that continues through [5:8](../05/08.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use equivalent comparisons or express these meanings in a non-figurative way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +1TH 5 2 dqgk figs-rpronouns αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἀκριβῶς οἴδατε 1 perfectly well The words **For**, **yourselves**, and **perfectly** emphasize the how clearly the Thessalonian church should understand when and how the Lord’s Second Coming will happen. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “In fact, it is certain that you recognize accurately” or “Certainly you are well aware of this fact” or “Indeed, you know precisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +1TH 5 2 mcq9 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 perfectly well Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church has “no need that anything be written” to them about the timing and manner of the Lord’s Second Coming (See [5:1](..05/01.md)). Alternate translation: “Because in fact” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 5 2 tu9t figs-idiom ἡμέρα Κυρίου 1 in this manner—like a thief in the night Here, **the day of the Lord** is an idiom that refers to the Old Testament concept of the time of God’s final judgment. The context of this passage makes it clear that **the day of the Lord** is synonymous with “the coming of the Lord” Jesus in [4:15](../04/15.md). (See also [Acts 2:20](acts/02/20.md); [1 Corinthians 5:5](1cor/05/05.md); [2 Thessalonians 2:2](2thes/02/02.md); [2 Peter 3:10](2pet/03/10)). Use a natural way in your language to emphasize this idea. Alternate translation; “when the Lord Jesus returns again to earth” or “the time when the Lord Jesus will finally judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 5 2 tmj3 figs-simile ὡς κλέπτης ἐν νυκτὶ οὕτως ἔρχεται 1 in this manner—like a thief in the night The point of this comparison is that, just like a thief at night comes unexpectedly, the way Jesus will return is unexpected and/or the timing of his return is unknown. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “is going to come as unexpectedly as a robber at night” or “is going to come so surprisingly–like when a thief breaks in at night” or “is going to happen like this–all of a sudden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +1TH 5 3 p1wi figs-hypo ὅταν λέγωσιν, εἰρήνη καὶ ἀσφάλεια 1 When they may say Paul is using a hypothetical situation to express the suddenness of the “the day of the Lord.” Use the natural form in your language for expressing a hypothetical situation. Alternate translation: “Whenever they might say, ‘Everything is safe and sound,’” or “At a time when people are saying, ‘All is well,’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) +1TH 5 3 mjvd grammar-connect-logic-contrast τότε 1 When they may say Here what follows the word **then** is in contrast to the **Peace and safety** these people expected to last. Instead, **sudden destruction comes** on them. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +1TH 5 3 ne9n figs-parallelism τότε αἰφνίδιος αὐτοῖς ἐφίσταται ὄλεθρος 1 then sudden destruction Here, **sudden destruction** parallels the idea of terror that accompanies a sudden attack by “a thief in the night” (See [5:2](../05/02.md)). If it would be clearer in your language, you could make this idea explicit. Alternate translation: “then unexpected destruction attacks like a thief in the night” or “right then immediate destruction is looming over them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1TH 5 3 sde2 figs-parallelism αἰφνίδιος αὐτοῖς ἐφίσταται ὄλεθρος, ὥσπερ ἡ ὠδὶν τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ; καὶ οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 like birth pains to the one having in the womb Here, **sudden** describes the unexpected timing of **birth pains** , and **certainly not escape** describes the nature of **destruction**. Paul says similar things with these phrases to show that God’s final judgment will be a total surprise and complete ruin for unbelievers. Use a natural way in your language to emphasize these ideas. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1TH 5 3 f1xr figs-simile ὥσπερ ἡ ὠδὶν τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ; καὶ οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 like birth pains to the one having in the womb The point of this comparison is that, just like a pregnant woman suddenly experiences labor pains, God’s final judgment will come suddenly and be inescapable. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent comparison or express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “just as suddenly as labor pains seize a pregnant woman–these people can never escape God’s destruction” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) +1TH 5 3 iwc2 figs-idiom τῇ ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχούσῃ 1 like birth pains to the one having in the womb Here, this clause is an idiom meaning “pregnant.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “do for a woman in late pregnancy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 5 3 undo figs-doublenegatives οὐ μὴ ἐκφύγωσιν 1 like birth pains to the one having in the womb Here, **certainly not** is a strong prohibition meaning “never” (See [4:15](..04/15.md)). If this double negative would be misunderstood in your language, you could translate it as a positive statement. Alternate translation: “they will never escape” or “there is no way to possibly escape” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) +1TH 5 4 sk6v grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὑμεῖς δέ 1 you, brothers Here what follows the words **But you** is in contrast to the “sudden destruction” of the people in [5:3](../05/03.md). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “Certainly you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +1TH 5 4 b6lv figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐστὲ ἐν σκότει 1 are not in darkness Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they actually live in place without light. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **in darkness** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “are not unprepared” or “are not living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 4 elp9 grammar-connect-logic-result ἵνα ἡ ἡμέρα ὑμᾶς ὡς κλέπτας καταλάβῃ 1 so that the day might overtake you like a thief This is a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to indicate result. Alternate translation: “causing you to be like people surprised by a robber. You are ready for the time when the Lord Jesus will return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 5 4 otz2 figs-metaphor ἡ ἡμέρα 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Here, Paul speaks figuratively about the idiom “the **day** of the Lord” in [5:2](..05/02.md), by contrasting **the day** with **darkness**. He means that because the Thessalonian church is not unaware of “the **day** of the Lord,” they will not be unprepared like people who live **in darkness**. If your readers would not understand what **the day** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “the day of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 4 ywez figs-metaphor ἵνα ἡ ἡμέρα ὑμᾶς ὡς κλέπτας καταλάβῃ 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Paul speaks figuratively of “the **day** of the Lord” as if it were a thief who surprises a person. He means that “the **day** of the Lord” will come suddenly for those who are unprepared (See “sudden destruction” in [5:3](..05/03.md)). If your readers would not understand what this phrase means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “making you unprepared, like when a robber breaks in at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 5 ddce figs-doublet πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας. οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Here, **sons of the light** means basically the same thing as **sons of the day**. Also, **of the night** means basically the same thing as **of the darkness**. The repetition is used to emphasize how **light** characterizes **day** and how **darkness** characterizes **night**. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “Certainly, all of you are ready for Christ’s Second Coming. None of us are unprepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +1TH 5 5 zp3z figs-metaphor πάντες γὰρ ὑμεῖς υἱοὶ φωτός ἐστε, καὶ υἱοὶ ἡμέρας 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Paul speaks figuratively of the Thessalonian church as if the **light** and **day** were their physical parents. He means that the Thessalonian church members are God’s spiritual children who are characterized by spiritual readiness. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **sons of the light and sons of the day** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “This is because all of you who belong to God are ready for Christ’s coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 5 ilv4 grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church will escape God’s judgment on “the **day** of the Lord” (See [5:2](../05/04.md)). Alternate translation: “Because in fact” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 5 5 cxo9 figs-nominaladj πάντες…ὑμεῖς…ἐστε 1 For you are all sons of the light and sons of the day Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe the whole Thessalonian church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “you Thessalonians are all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +1TH 5 5 d6fm figs-metaphor οὐκ ἐσμὲν νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 We are not of the night nor of the darkness Again, Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they actually live in a place without light. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully (See [5:4](../05/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to be **of the night** or **of the darkness** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “We are not unprepared like those at night, or those who live in the darkness, ” or “We are not characterized by being spiritually ignorant” or “we do not live like those who are characterized by sinful activities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 5 kq0x figs-exclusive ἐσμὲν 1 We are not of the night nor of the darkness In [5:5-5:10](../05/05.md), **we** is inclusive of all Christians. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “We believers in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) +1TH 5 5 f4uw figs-possession νυκτὸς οὐδὲ σκότους 1 We are not of the night nor of the darkness Paul is using the possessive form to describe people who are characterized by spiritual ignorance or who live sinfully. This means that they will not be prepared at “**the day** of the Lord.” If this is not clear in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “characterized by being spiritually unprepared and living sinfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1TH 5 6 paqf grammar-connect-logic-result ἄρα οὖν 1 we might keep watch and be sober Here, **so then** emphatically introduces a result clause. Use a natural way in your language to introduce a result clause. Alternate translation: “This is the reason why” or “As a result then,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 5 6 d2aj figs-metaphor μὴ καθεύδωμεν ὡς οἱ λοιποί 1 we might keep watch and be sober Here, Paul speaks figuratively about the people “of the night” and “of the darkness” are if they are sleeping. He means that they are unaware or unprepared for the Lord’s return because they are living sinfully (See notes for “darkness” at [5:4-5](../05/04.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to **sleep** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “we must not be unprepared like non-Christians” or “let us not be like the rest of humanity, who are not aware that Jesus is coming back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 6 on3d figs-imperative μὴ καθεύδωμεν…γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 we might keep watch and be sober Here, the verb forms **sleep**, **keep watch**, and **be sober** could also refer to: (1) commands. Alternate translation: “we must not sleep … we must keep watch and be sober” (2) appeals. Alternate translation: “let us not sleep … let us keep watch and let us be sober” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1TH 5 6 x0zh figs-nominaladj οἱ λοιποί 1 we might keep watch and be sober Paul is using the adjective **the rest** as a noun in order to describe those who are unprepared for Christ’s return. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “like others who are not ready for the Lord Jesus to return” or “like the rest of humanity” or (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +1TH 5 6 q33e grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 we might not sleep Here, what follows the word **but** is in contrast to **the rest** who **sleep**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “on the contrary” or “however” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +1TH 5 6 sdww figs-metaphor γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 we might not sleep Here, Paul speaks figuratively of Christians as if they are watch guards. He means that they should be aware or prepared for the Lord’s return by living as God’s people should. If your readers would not understand what it means to **keep watch** or **be sober** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternate translation: “instead, we must stay spiritually alert and prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 6 osxu figs-hendiadys γρηγορῶμεν καὶ νήφωμεν 1 we might not sleep These verbs express a similar idea by using two words connected with **and**. The verb **be sober** tells how Christians should **keep watch**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “we should calmly remain alert” or “let us remain soberly awake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]]) +1TH 5 7 fxca figs-parallelism οἱ γὰρ καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν; καὶ οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν 1 For those who are sleeping, sleep at night These two phrases convey similar ideas by repeating the same verb forms twice. Paul says the same thing twice, in different ways, to show that **sleeping** and **getting drunk** are states of being that make people unaware or unprepared. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can condense each phrase. Alternate translation: “Because people sleep at night, and people get drunk at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1TH 5 7 oyjo grammar-connect-logic-result γὰρ 1 For those who are sleeping, sleep at night Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church should “not sleep” or be unprepared for the Lord’s return (See [5:6](..05/06.md)). Alternate translation: “Because in fact” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 5 7 s253 figs-metaphor οἱ γὰρ καθεύδοντες, νυκτὸς καθεύδουσιν 1 For those who are sleeping, sleep at night Here again, like in [5:6](../05/06.md), Paul speaks figuratively as if these people are actually sleeping or it is night time. He means that these people are spiritually unprepared or unaware or even sinful (see also notes at [5:2,4](../05/02.md). If your readers would not understand what **sleep** or **night** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Because those who are sleeping are unaware” or “Certainly those who are asleep are unprepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 7 exa8 figs-metaphor οἱ μεθυσκόμενοι, νυκτὸς μεθύουσιν 1 those who are getting drunk, get drunk at night Paul speaks figuratively as if these people are actually drunk or it is night time. He means that these people are spiritually unprepared or unaware or sinful. If your readers would not understand what **getting drunk** or **night** mean in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “those who are drunk are unprepared” or “those who are drunk are unaware” or or “those who drink too much alcohol, tend to drink at night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 8 wh3g grammar-connect-logic-contrast δὲ 1 we, being of the day What follows the word **But** here is in contrast to “getting drunk” at “night” in [5:7](../05/07.md). Instead, Christians are characterized by the activities of **the day** and staying **sober** (See [5:5–6](../05/06.md)). Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “However” or “Instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +1TH 5 8 iv63 figs-imperative νήφωμεν 1 we, being of the day Here, **might stay sober** could refer to: (1) a command. Alternate translation: “we must stay sober” (2) an appeal. Alternate translation: “let us stay sober” (See your translation at [5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1TH 5 8 jqqo figs-metaphor ἡμεῖς δὲ ἡμέρας ὄντες 1 we, being of the day Paul speaks figuratively of Christians as if they are actually a part of the day time. He means that they are characterized by spiritual readiness for the Lord’s return. If your readers would not understand what it means to be **of the day** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Now, because we are ready for Christ’s coming, we” or “since we are characterized by being ready, we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 8 ev6i figs-metaphor ἐνδυσάμενοι θώρακα πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης, καὶ περικεφαλαίαν, ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας 1 having put on the breastplate of faith and of love Paul speaks figuratively of Christians as if they are soldiers. He means that just as a soldier must equip himself with armor in order to be ready to fight, so Christians must prepare themselves for the Second Coming of Christ with the spiritual protection of **faith**, **love**, and **hope** (See also [Ephesians 6:10-18,23](eph/6/10.md)). If your readers would not understand what these phrases mean in this context, you could use equivalent metaphors from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 9 h5y2 figs-abstractnouns ὅτι οὐκ ἔθετο ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς εἰς ὀργὴν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Here, **wrath** refers to God’s future and final Judgment (See your translation of **wrath** at [1:10, 2:16](../01/10/.md)(See also [What is the “second coming” of Jesus?](../front/intro.md)). If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **wrath** with a verb form or another way. Alternate translation: “Certainly, God did not destine to punish us” or “Because in fact, God did not determine that he would judge us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TH 5 9 lrx6 grammar-connect-logic-result ὅτι 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Here, **For** begins a reason clause that explains why the Thessalonian church should have “the hope of salvation” (See [5:8](../05/08.md)). Use a natural way in your language to express this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Because in fact” or “Certainly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 5 8 l89q figs-possession πίστεως καὶ ἀγάπης…σωτηρίας 1 having put on the breastplate of faith and of love Paul uses the possessive form to describe things that are characterized by **faith** and **hope** and **love**. You could turn these phrases into similes if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: See UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1TH 5 9 erz5 grammar-connect-logic-goal εἰς…εἰς 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Here, **to** introduces a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose or goal for which God **appointed** these two types of people. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “for the purpose of … in order to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1TH 5 9 qmo5 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 whether we might be awake or asleep What follows the word **but** here is in contrast to **wrath**. Here Paul emphasizes that God’s true people will not experience his final punishment. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “but actually” or “instead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +1TH 5 9 qfcf figs-possession εἰς περιποίησιν σωτηρίας 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Paul is using this possessive phrase to indicate that **salvation** is something that belongs to God’s people. If this is not clear in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “for the possessing of salvation” or “for the acquiring of salvation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1TH 5 10 arhm figs-distinguish τοῦ ἀποθανόντος περὶ ἡμῶν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Here, **the one who died for us** gives us further information about what “salvation through our Lord Jesus Christ” is (See [5:9](../05/09.md)). Paul means that God gives the guarantee that Christians will “obtain salvation,” because Jesus **died for us**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases clearer. Alternate translation: “who died on our behalf” or “who died for our sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +1TH 5 10 dzq0 grammar-connect-logic-goal ἵνα…ἅμα σὺν αὐτῷ ζήσωμεν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep This is a purpose clause. Paul is stating the purpose for why Jesus **died for us**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a purpose clause. Alternate translation: “so that … we would live together with him” or “in order that … both could live together with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) +1TH 5 10 w59c figs-metaphor εἴτε γρηγορῶμεν εἴτε καθεύδωμεν 1 whether we might be awake or asleep Paul speaks figuratively of these people as if they were physically **awake or asleep**. He means that they are “alive or dead” (See [4:14–17](../04/14.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to be **awake or asleep** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “whether we are living or even if we are dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 11 r921 grammar-connect-words-phrases διὸ 1 build up one the other Here, **Therefore** indicates the conclusion of this section about timing of “the day of the Lord,” and connects to the manner of Christ’s return in [4:14–18](../04/18.md) by using the same phrase **comfort one another**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 5 11 o85i grammar-connect-logic-result διὸ παρακαλεῖτε 1 build up one the other Here, **Therefore** begins a result clause. Paul explains what the Thessalonian church should do in response to that Jesus died so that Christians can “obtain salvation” (See [5:9](../05/09.md)). Alternate translation: “This is why you should encourage” or “As a result, you must comfort” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 5 11 m2c9 figs-doublet διὸ παρακαλεῖτε ἀλλήλους, καὶ οἰκοδομεῖτε εἷς τὸν ἕνα 1 build up one the other These two phrases mean basically the same thing. The repetition is used to emphasize how much Paul wants the Thessalonian church to encourage and support each other. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “As a result, continue to be supportive of what each person needs” or “This is why you must keep consoling each other and confirming each one in the faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) +1TH 5 11 hepx figs-imperative παρακαλεῖτε…οἰκοδομεῖτε 1 build up one the other These verbs are imperatives, but could communicate an appeal rather than a command. You could use a form in your language that communicates an urgent request or appeal. Alternate translation: “we apostles urge you to comfort … build up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1TH 5 11 fx2f figs-idiom οἰκοδομεῖτε 1 build up one the other Paul speaks figuratively of the Thessalonian church as if they were a building that can be constructed. He means that they should mutually support one another in the Christian life. If your readers would not understand what it means to **build up** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “keep supporting” or “continue to confirm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 11 kdae figs-idiom εἷς τὸν ἕνα 1 build up one the other Here, the term **one the other** is an idiom meaning “each and every one” or “each one.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “each one” or “one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 5 11 sfv4 καθὼς καὶ ποιεῖτε 1 build up one the other Here, Paul uses the emphatic phrase **just as also you are doing** to encourage the Thessalonian church to continue their practice of mutually supporting each other. Use a natural way in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “exactly as you have been doing” +1TH 5 12 pd47 grammar-connect-words-phrases δὲ 1 General Information: Here, **Now** indicates that what follows is the final section of instructions from the apostles. Alternate translation: “Lastly” or “Indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 5 12 fqh3 figs-distinguish τοὺς κοπιῶντας ἐν ὑμῖν, καὶ προϊσταμένους ὑμῶν ἐν Κυρίῳ, καὶ νουθετοῦντας ὑμᾶς 1 leading you in the Lord This clause expresses different functions for the same group of leaders. It is not making a distinction between **those who are laboring … leading … admonishing you**. If this is not understood in your language, you can make the relationship between these phrases more clear. Alternate translation: “your leaders who are working … guiding … training you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]]) +1TH 5 12 f4jv figs-metaphor ἐν Κυρίῳ 1 leading you in the Lord Paul speaks figuratively as if the leaders of the church at Thessalonica are occupying space inside of **the Lord**. Here, the metaphor expresses the idea that these men represent Jesus himself in their leadership role in the Thessalonian church (See also [4:1](../04/01.md). If your readers would not understand what **in the Lord** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “with authority from the Lord Jesus” or “as spokespersons for the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 13 jq0o grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, διὰ τὸ ἔργον αὐτῶν 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Because of their work on your behalf, we also ask you to lovingly show them the utmost consideration” or “Since they work so hard for you, we also urge you to show them the highest honor out of love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 5 13 qcw4 καὶ ἡγεῖσθαι αὐτοὺς ὑπέρἐκπερισσοῦ ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Since, the word translated **regard** often means “to lead,” Paul could be emphasizing the Thessalonian church should “lead the way” or “set an example” in loving their leaders. Use way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “and to set an example of how to abundantly love” or “and to lovingly demonstrate the utmost consideration” +1TH 5 13 p6m4 ἐν ἀγάπῃ 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Paul speaks figuratively as if the Thessalonian church is occupying space inside of **love**. He is describing how they should show honor to their leaders. If your readers would not understand what **in love** means in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Here, **in love** could refer to: (1) the means of love. Alternate translation: “by loving them” (2) the basis for love. Alternate translation: “on the basis of your love for them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 13 rqs8 figs-imperative εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here is the first of seventeen final appeals in [5:13-26](../05/13.md) that the apostles give the Thessalonian church. **Be at peace** is an imperative, but here it could be an urgent request rather than a command. Use a natural way in your language to communicate an appeal or urgent request. Alternate translation: “We urge you to continue to live in peace with your leaders” or “We request that you reconcile with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1TH 5 14 lajk figs-litany 0 to regard them highly in love because of their work Paul uses a repetitive series of imperative sentences in [5:14–22](../05/14) to urge the Thessalonian church to show practical love to one another. This repetitive style of speaking or writing is called a “litany.” Use a form in your language that someone would use to list things that someone should do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]]) +1TH 5 14 tdxa grammar-connect-words-phrases παρακαλοῦμεν δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work This phrase signals the apostles’ final appeals to the Thessalonian church. Since there are fourteen commands in this section [5:14-22](../05/14.md), you could use a marker from your language to indicate this final section. Alternate translation: “Finally, we urge you, fellow believers in Christ” See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]]) +1TH 5 14 qadb figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here the idiom **brothers** could refer to: (1) the whole Thessalonian church including the leaders. Alternate translation: “our fellow believers in Christ” (2) the leaders of the Thessalonian church. Alternate translation: “fellow leaders of Christ’s church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 5 14 g34k figs-nominaladj πρὸς πάντας 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe the Thessalonian church. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “toward all your fellow believers in Christ” or “with the whole Thessalonian church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +1TH 5 15 vlp7 figs-idiom ὁρᾶτε 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here, **See that** is an idiom used to command attention. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “Be certain that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 5 15 dqs8 figs-metaphor κακὸν ἀντὶ κακοῦ τινι ἀποδῷ 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Paul speaks figuratively of **evil** as if it was money that can be exchanged. He means that if a someone treats you badly, you should not respond the same way. If your readers would not understand what it means to **pay back evil for evil** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “treat anyone wrongly because they treat you wrongly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 15 oz10 grammar-connect-logic-contrast ἀλλὰ 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here what follows the word **but** is in contrast to repaying **evil for evil**. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation: “on the contrary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) +1TH 5 15 mc2z figs-hyperbole πάντοτε 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here, **always** could be using exaggeration to express emphasis. Paul means that the Thessalonian church should make it a habit to **pursue what is good**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses this emphasis. Alternate translation: “make every effort to” or “constantly” or “habitually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +1TH 5 15 pe3l figs-merism καὶ εἰς ἀλλήλους καὶ εἰς πάντας 1 to regard them highly in love because of their work Here, **both for one another and for all** is used to emphasize groups of people. In this context, the phrase could refer to: (1) the Thessalonian church and all believers in Christ. Alternate translation: “for your church at Thessalonica and for all believers in Christ” (2) the Thessalonian church and the whole human race (See how you translated this phrase in [3:12](../03/12.md)). Alternate translation: “for everyone” or “for each and every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +1TH 5 15 i0jy figs-nominaladj εἰς πάντας 2 to regard them highly in love because of their work Paul could be using the adjective **all** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Here it could refer to: (1) all Christians. Alternate translation: “for all your fellow believers in Christ” (2) the whole human race. Alternate translation: “toward all humanity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +1TH 5 16 chw9 figs-hyperbole πάντοτε 1 Rejoice always Here, **always** could be using exaggeration to express emphasis. Paul could mean that the Thessalonian church should make it a habit to **rejoice**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses this emphasis. Alternate translation: “constantly” or “habitually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +1TH 5 17 l63i figs-hyperbole ἀδιαλείπτως προσεύχεσθε 1 Pray without ceasing Here, **without ceasing** could be using exaggeration to express emphasis. Paul could mean that the Thessalonian church should make it a habit to **pray**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language that expresses this emphasis. Alternate translation: “Continue to pray” or “Keep praying regularly” or “Retain a prayerful state of mind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) +1TH 5 18 bt5q figs-nominaladj ἐν παντὶ 1 In everything Paul is using the adjective **everything** as a noun in order to describe a situation or time. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Here, **in everything** could refer to: (1) a situation or circumstance. Alternate translation: “In every circumstance” or “No matter what happens” (2) time. Alternate translation: “At every time” or “At every moment” (3) both a situation and time. Alternate translation: “In every circumstance and moment”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +1TH 5 18 x2jg figs-infostructure ἐν παντὶ εὐχαριστεῖτε; 1 In everything If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases. Alternate translation: “Continue to give thanks in everything” or “Keep giving thanks at every time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) +1TH 5 18 q7gn grammar-connect-logic-result ἐν παντὶ εὐχαριστεῖτε; τοῦτο γὰρ θέλημα Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 for this is the will of God Here, **for* begins a reason clause. Paul is telling the Thessalonian church the reason why they should “rejoice,” “pray,” and **give thanks** in [5:16–18](../05/16.md)). If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Give thanks in everything–because all these things are what God desires for those who are united to Christ Jesus” or “Because this is God’s will for you who are united to Christ Jesus, you must give thanks in everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 5 18 l3sk grammar-collectivenouns τοῦτο γὰρ θέλημα Θεοῦ 1 for this is the will of God Here, **this** is a singular pronoun that could refer to: (1) all the commands in [5:14-18](../05/14.md) Alternate translation: “because all these things are what God desires” (2) **give thanks**. Alternate translation: “in fact, this is God’s will” or “certainly, this very thing is God’s will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +1TH 5 18 yu36 figs-ellipsis τοῦτο 1 for this is the will of God A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1TH 5 18 sw8b figs-abstractnouns θέλημα Θεοῦ ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 for this is the will of God If your language does not use an abstract noun phrase for these ideas, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun phrase **the will of God in Christ Jesus for you** in another way. Alternate translation: “how God desires people to live who are united to Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TH 5 18 mbz1 figs-metaphor ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ εἰς ὑμᾶς 1 for this is the will of God Here, Paul speaks figuratively of **the will of God** as though it was occupying space inside **Christ Jesus**. This metaphor means that the way God desires his people to live is inseparable from being united to **Christ Jesus** (See also [2:14](../04/16.md)). If this might be misunderstood in your language, you can express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation, “for those of you who are united to Jesus Christ” or “for all of you who share life with Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 19 j1ei figs-metaphor τὸ Πνεῦμα μὴ σβέννυτε 1 Do not quench the Spirit Paul speaks figuratively of **the** Holy **Spirit** as if he is fire that can be extinguished. Paul means that the Thessalonian church must not hinder the work of the Holy **Spirit**, especially by despising prophecies (See [5:20](../05/20.md)). If your readers would not understand what it means to **quench** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Do not extinguish the Spirit” or “Do not reject the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 19 sv8r figs-litotes μὴ σβέννυτε 1 Do not quench the Spirit Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you can express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Continue to kindle” or “Be fervent in” or “Keep working along with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +1TH 5 20 iv1n figs-litotes μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 Do not despise prophecies Paul uses a figure of speech that expresses a strong positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If this is confusing in your language, you could express the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “Readily accept” or “Cherish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) +1TH 5 20 rrza figs-parallelism προφητείας μὴ ἐξουθενεῖτε 1 Do not despise prophecies The two phrases in [5:19–20](../05/19.md) could refer to the same thing. Paul could be saying the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to correct how the Thessalonian church viewed prophecy. He means that the Holy Spirit is the source of true prophecy (See [2 Peter 1:21](2pet/01/21.md)), so they should not “quench the Spirit” by rejecting all prophecies. You could use a natural way in your language to emphasize this. Alternate translation: “Do not continue to despise prophetic messages from the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1TH 5 21 wx69 figs-metaphor πάντα δοκιμάζετε 1 Test all things Paul speaks figuratively of prophecies as if they could take and pass a test. He means that the Thessalonian church must examine and approve prophecies to determine whether or not they are genuinely from the Holy Spirit (See [2:4](../02/04.md) for a similar context)). If your readers would not understand what it means to **Test all things** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Examine and approve all prophecies” or “Test and examine all prophetic messages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 21 sjh0 nominaladj πάντα 1 Test all things Paul is using the adjectival phrase **all things** as a noun in order to describe prophecies. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “all prophecies” or “all messages to see if they are genuine prophecies from the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) +1TH 5 21 n1jv figs-metaphor τὸ καλὸν κατέχετε 1 Test all things Paul speaks figuratively of prophecies as if they are objects that someone could hold tightly in his hands. He means that the Thessalonian church should only accept prophecies that prove to be from the Holy Spirit. If your readers would not understand what it means to **hold fast to what {is} good** in this context, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express Paul’s meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Keep only the valid prophecies” or “Hold on tight to a genuine prophecy from the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +1TH 5 21 jska figs-ellipsis τὸ καλὸν 1 Test all things A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “what is good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1TH 5 22 bm8l figs-parallelism ἀπὸ παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ ἀπέχεσθε 1 Test all things The concepts in [5:20](../05/20/.md) and [5:21](../05/21/.md) mean the exact opposite thing. Paul says the opposite thing, with contrasting parallel language, to emphasize precisely how the Thessalonian church should handle the issue of prophecy. If it would be natural in your language, you could make this emphasis explicit. Alternate translation: “Refrain from accepting any prophecy that appears wicked” or “Do not retain any prophecy that appears false” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1TH 5 22 z9k0 figs-personification παντὸς εἴδους πονηροῦ 1 Test all things Here, **evil** is spoken of figuratively as though it were a person who could be seen. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “all apparently evil prophecies” or “all obviously evil prophecies” or “any clearly wicked prophecies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) +1TH 5 23 mqi7 translate-blessing αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης ἁγιάσαι 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Here, the verb forms indicate that this is a blessing or prayer (See also [3:11–13](../03/11.md)). Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing or prayer in your language. Alternate translation: “Now we pray, that God himself, who gives peace, would sanctify” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) +1TH 5 23 ozyh figs-parallelism ἁγιάσαι ὑμᾶς ὁλοτελεῖς, καὶ ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως…τηρηθείη 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly These two clauses mean the same thing. Paul says the same thing twice, in slightly different ways, to show how much he wants God to preserve the Thessalonian church as his people. If saying the same thing twice might be confusing for your readers, you can combine the phrases into one. Alternate translation: “may … fully preserve you as his people to the end, and may every part of you be protected” or “may … completely preserve each and every one of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) +1TH 5 23 sbxc figs-possession ὁ Θεὸς τῆς εἰρήνης 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Here Paul uses the possessive form **the God of peace**, which is a title for God found in the New Testament (See Romans 15:33; 16:20; Philippians 4:9; Hebrews 13:20). If this is not clear in your language, you could make it explicit. In this context, **the God of peace** could refer to: (1) who God is. Alternate translation: “the God who is characterized by peace” (2) what God does. Alternate translation: “the God who gives peace” (3) Both. Alternate translation: See the UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +1TH 5 23 nb1x figs-rpronouns αὐτὸς 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Paul uses the word **himself** to emphasize the urgency of the apostles’ prayer or blessing by drawing attention to **God**, who is the only one who can sanctify and keep the Christian person blameless. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) +1TH 5 23 vkhs figs-activepassive ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα, ἀμέμπτως…τηρηθείη. 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly If it would be more natural in your language, you could say **be kept** with an active form, and you could emphasize who did the action. Alternate translation: “may God keep you completely blameless” or “may God make your whole life sinless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1TH 5 23 s36k figs-merism ὁλόκληρον ὑμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα, καὶ ἡ ψυχὴ, καὶ τὸ σῶμα 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Paul speaks figuratively, using these three aspects of the human person in order to represent the whole human being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “your whole being” or “your whole life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +1TH 5 23 nyma figs-idiom ἐν τῇ παρουσίᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 may your entire spirit, and soul, and body be kept blamelessly Here, **coming of the Lord** is a well-known idiom in 1-2 Thessalonians for the Second Coming of Christ (See [4:15](../04/15.md)) or the “Day of the **Lord**” in [5:2](../05/02.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “when our Lord Jesus Christ comes back to earth again” or “at the arrival of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 5 24 i03k grammar-connect-logic-result πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς, ὃς καὶ ποιήσει 1 who will also do it Here, **who will also do it** expresses the result of God’s faithfulness. If it would be misunderstood in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “Because God is faithful, he will also preserve you sanctified” or “Since God is trustworthy, he will also completely sanctify you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) +1TH 5 24 vx20 figs-explicit πιστὸς ὁ καλῶν ὑμᾶς 1 Faithful is he who calls you Here it is implied that **he** refers to “the God of peace” in [5:23](../05/23.md). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “Faithful is God who calls you” or “The God who continues to summon you is faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 5 24 lg3b figs-ellipsis πιστὸς ὁ 1 Faithful is he who calls you A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **is** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1TH 5 24 c3jg writing-pronouns ὁ καλῶν…ὃς 1 who will also do it The pronouns **he** and **who** refer to “the God of peace” [5:23](../05/23.md). If it is natural in your language, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “is God who calls … God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +1TH 5 24 pa1g figs-ellipsis ποιήσει 1 who will also do it A word is left out here in the original that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. Since English needs it, **it** is added in brackets. Do what is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +1TH 5 25 b7w3 figs-imperative προσεύχεσθε καὶ περὶ ἡμῶν 1 brothers Here, **pray** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request or appeal rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request or appeal. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clearer. Alternate translation: “We ask you to pray” or “Please pray for us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1TH 5 25 tbhj figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 brothers Here, **us** refers exclusively to the apostles. Your language may require you to mark these forms. Alternate translation: “us apostles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -1TH 5 26 j46q figs-imperative ἀσπάσασθε 1 brothers **Greet** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. Alternate translation: “Make it your habit to greet” or “Make it your practice to greet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) +1TH 5 26 j46q figs-imperative ἀσπάσασθε 1 brothers Here, **Greet** is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. Alternate translation: “Make it your habit to greet” or “Make it your practice to greet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]]) 1TH 5 26 dwl8 figs-idiom τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς πάντας 1 brothers Here, **all the brothers** is an idiom that refers to the whole Thessalonian Church–and by extension–all Christians. Alternate translation: “all believers in Christ” or “all Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 5 26 v9iy figs-explicit ἐν φιλήματι ἁγίῳ 1 brothers **a holy kiss** is a reference to a symbolic greeting of Christian affection that the Thessalonian Church would have understood. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 5 26 jhvi φιλήματι ἁγίῳ 1 brothers This letter’s theme of holiness is reinforced by calling it a **holy kiss**. Alternate translation: “a kiss shared by those who belong to God” or “a kiss that shows that you belong to God’s people” -1TH 5 27 xn0n writing-oathformulas ἐνορκίζω ὑμᾶς τὸν Κύριον 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read The phrase **I solemnly charge you by the Lord** is an oath formula. If you have a term or phrase that would be most natural in your language to express an oath in this context, consider using that. Alternate translation: “I put you under oath to the Lord that this read this letter must be read” or “I implore you by the Lord to read this letter” or “You must swear an oath to the Lord that you will read this letter” or “You must make a vow to the Lord that you will read this letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformulas]]) -1TH 5 27 n5cn figs-explicit ἀναγνωσθῆναι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read **to have this letter read** indicates the content of the **charge** **by the Lord**. The assumption is that this letter would be read out loud by someone in the local church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -1TH 5 27 yp7e figs-activepassive ἀναγνωσθῆναι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read If your language does not contain passive verbs, you could change it to an active verb. Alternate translation: “to make sure you read this letter out loud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -1TH 5 27 fyc7 figs-idiom πᾶσιν τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read Here, **all the brothers** is an idiom that refers to the whole Thessalonian Church–and by extension–all Christians (See [5:26](../05/26.md). Alternate translation: “to the whole church at Thessalonica” or “to all believers in Christ” or “to all Christians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -1TH 5 27 ojue translate-textvariants πᾶσιν τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read Many ancient manuscripts read “**all the** holy **brothers**” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) -1TH 5 28 ykkr translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read This is a blessing formula. You should use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May our Lord Jesus Christ show you how kind he is” or “May the favor of the Lord Jesus Christ be among you all” or “I pray that the Lord Jesus Christ will favor all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) -1TH 5 28 n8ur figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read **grace** is an abstract noun. Alternate translation: “May our Lord Jesus Christ always show you how kind he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -1TH 5 28 d35d translate-textvariants μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read Many ancient manuscripts add “Amen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) +1TH 5 26 v9iy translate-symaction ἐν φιλήματι ἁγίῳ 1 brothers This action was an expression of Christian affectionate in this culture. It showed the unity of those who belong to Christ. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) +1TH 5 27 xn0n writing-oathformulas ἐνορκίζω ὑμᾶς τὸν Κύριον, ἀναγνωσθῆναι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read The phrase **I solemnly charge you by the Lord** is an oath formula. Use a natural way in your language to express an oath. Alternate translation: “You must make a vow to the Lord that you will read this letter” or “I put you under oath to the Lord that this letter must be read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-oathformulas]]) +1TH 5 27 n5cn figs-explicit ἀναγνωσθῆναι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read It is assumed that this letter would be read out loud by someone in the local church. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to have this letter read out loud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +1TH 5 27 yp7e figs-activepassive ἀναγνωσθῆναι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read If it would be more natural in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “to make sure you read this letter out loud” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +1TH 5 27 mtvd figs-idiom πᾶσιν τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read Here, **all the brothers** is an idiom that refers to the whole Thessalonian Church–and by extension–all Christians (See [5:26](../05/26.md). Alternate translation: “to the whole church at Thessalonica” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +1TH 5 28 ykkr translate-blessing ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read This is a blessing and greeting formula. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing that could be used as a greeting in your language. Alternate translation: “May our Lord Jesus Christ show you how kind he is” or “May the favor of the Lord Jesus Christ be among you all” or “I pray that the Lord Jesus Christ will favor all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]]) +1TH 5 28 n8ur figs-abstractnouns ἡ χάρις τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **grace** in another way. Alternate translation: “May our Lord Jesus Christ always show you how kind he is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +1TH 5 28 d35d translate-textvariants μεθ’ ὑμῶν 1 I solemnly charge you by the Lord to have this letter read Many ancient manuscripts add “Amen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]]) \ No newline at end of file From e44770dd0cfaff289389aa0ae1c1ee3199c6483e Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Benjamin Wright Date: Thu, 7 Apr 2022 14:27:41 +0000 Subject: [PATCH 15/15] error fixes (#2390) Co-authored-by: deferredreward Co-authored-by: Benjamin Wright Reviewed-on: https://git.door43.org/unfoldingWord/en_tn/pulls/2390 --- en_tn_02-EXO.tsv | 978 +++++++++++++++++++++++------------------------ 1 file changed, 488 insertions(+), 490 deletions(-) diff --git a/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv b/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv index 124887dd7b..6703787c4d 100644 --- a/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv +++ b/en_tn_02-EXO.tsv @@ -1,15 +1,15 @@ Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote EXO front intro b4pp 0 # Introduction to Exodus

## Part 1: General Introduction

### Outline of Exodus

1. Israel in Egypt; preparing to depart from slavery (1–12)

* First genealogy (1:1–6)
* Israel as slaves in Egypt (1:7–22)
* Moses’ history to the time of the Exodus (2:1–4:26)
* Israel suffers in Egypt (4:27–6:13)
* Second genealogy (6:14–27)
* Moses and Aaron go to Pharaoh (6:28–7:25)
* The plagues (8:1–11:10)

1. Instructions for celebrating the Passover (12:1–30)
2. From Egypt to Mount Sinai (12:31–18:27)

* The Passover; preparing to leave Egypt; leaving Egypt (12:31–50, 13:1–22)
* Journey from Egypt to Mount Sinai (14:1–18:27)

1. Mount Sinai and the Law (19-40)

* Preparing for the covenant (19:1–25)
* The Ten Commandments (20:1–17)
* The covenant described (20:18–23:33)
* The people agree to the covenant; Moses returns to Mount Sinai (24:1–18)
* Design of the tabernacle and its furnishings; what was required of those who serve in it; tabernacle functions (25:1–31:18)
* The golden calf; Moses prays for the people (32:1–33:22)
* The covenant described again (34:1–35)
* Making of the ark and its furnishings (35:1–38:31) and priestly garments (39:1–43, 40:1–33)
* The cloud (40:34–38)

### What is the book of Exodus about?

Exodus continues the story of the previous book, Genesis. The first half of Exodus is about how Yahweh made Abraham’s descendants into a nation. This nation, which would be called “Israel,” was meant to belong to Yahweh and worship him. The second half of Exodus describes how God gave the Israelites his law through Moses. The law of Moses told the Israelites how to obey and worship Yahweh properly.

The book of Exodus tells how the Israelites were to build the tabernacle. The tabernacle was a tent where Yahweh would be among his people. The Israelites worshiped and sacrificed animals to Yahweh at the tabernacle. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]])

### How should the title of this book be translated?

“Exodus” means “exit” or “departure.” Translators may translate this title in a way that can communicate its subject clearly, for example, “About the Israelites Leaving Egypt” or “How the Israelites Left the Land of Egypt.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])

### Who wrote the book of Exodus?

The writers of both the Old and New Testaments present Moses as being very involved with writing the book of Exodus. Since ancient times, both Jews and Christians have thought that Moses wrote Genesis, Exodus, Leviticus, Numbers, and Deuteronomy.

### Why did Moses write so much about God delivering or rescuing the people of Israel?

Moses wrote much about God rescuing his people from the Egyptians to show that Yahweh is very powerful. Egypt was the most powerful nation at that time, but Yahweh was still able to free the Israelites from the Egyptians. Also, by rescuing the Israelites, Yahweh showed that he had chosen them as his people, and they should worship him.

### How does the book of Exodus show the fulfillment of the promises given to Abraham?

The book of Exodus shows God beginning to fulfill his promise to Abraham. In Genesis, God promised Abraham that he would have many descendants and that they would become a large nation. When God rescued the Israelites from the Egyptians, he took them to Mount Sinai. There he made a covenant with them, and they became the nation that belonged to Yahweh.

## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts

### What was the Jewish Passover?

The Jewish Passover was a religious festival. Yahweh commanded the Israelites to celebrate it every year. Passover was a time to remember how God rescued Israel from the Egyptians. The first Passover meal was eaten in the evening just before they left Egypt.

### What was the law of Moses to the people of Israel?

The law of Moses instructed the people of Israel about what Yahweh required them to do as his people. In the law, God told the people how they should live so that they would honor him. He also instructed them about their need to offer animal sacrifices. God required these sacrifices so that he could forgive their sins and continue living among them. The law also described the duties of the priests and told how to build the tabernacle.

### What did it mean that Israel was to be a “kingdom of priests and a holy nation” ([19:6](../19/06.md) ULT)?

Israel was a holy nation because Yahweh separated them from all other nations to belong to him. They were to honor and worship him only. This made them different from all the other nations of the world. These other nations worshiped many false gods.

## Part 3: Important Translation Issues

### Thus says Yahweh

This phrase is used many times in the Old Testament to introduce Yahweh’s speech. Your team should pick a standard translation. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more.

### Pharaoh’s stubborn heart

Between chapters 4–14 there are 18 cases where Pharaoh’s heart is described as strong (11x), heavy (6x), or hard (1x), and one case where the Egyptians’ hearts are described as strong. These are metaphors for being stubborn, that is, being unwilling to obey Yahweh or even to do what is clearly in his own and Egypt’s best interest. Many cultures have similar metaphors, but not all will use the same body part. Within these cases, six times there is a neutral description that Pharaoh was stubborn without saying anyone made him so ([7:13](../07/13.md), [7:14](../07/14.md), [7:22](../07/22.md), [8:19](../08/19.md), [9:7](../09/07.md), [9:35](../09/35.md)); three times Pharaoh makes himself stubborn ([8:15](../08/15.md), [8:32](../08/32.md), [9:34](../09/34.md)); and ten times Yahweh makes Pharaoh/the Egyptians stubborn ([4:21](../04/21.md), [7:3](../07/03.md), [9:12](../09/12.md), [10:1](../10/01.md), [10:20](../10/20.md), [10:27](../10/27.md), [11:10](../11/10.md), [14:4](../14/04.md), [14:8](../14/08.md), [14:17](../14/17.md)).

### Why are the details of the construction of the tabernacle in Exodus 25–32 repeated in Exodus 35–40?

In Exodus 25–32, God describes exactly how the tabernacle was to be built. The details were repeated in Exodus 35–40. This showed that the people were to be careful to do exactly as God commanded.

### Are the events in the order that they actually happened?

Most, but not all, of the events in the book of Exodus are told in the order that they actually happened. Translators may need to make it clear when the events are in an unusual order.

### What does it mean that God “lived” among his people?

The book of Exodus presents God as living in the tabernacle among the nation of Israel. God is everywhere, but he lived among the Israelites in a special way. God dwelled with the Israelites because they belonged to him. He promised to lead them and bless them. In return, the people were to worship him and honor him. EXO 1 intro cj55 0 # Exodus 01 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter is intended to form a smooth transition from the last chapter of the book of Genesis.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Israel’s growth

Israel grew in number. This was in fulfillment of the covenant God made with Abraham. It also caused the Egyptians great concern that there would be more Israelites than Egyptians, because the Egyptians would be unable to defend themselves against such a large number of people. Pharaoh also tried to kill all of the male babies so they would not become soldiers who fought against him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fulfill]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### End of the famine

It is obvious that some time has passed since the beginning of the famine which brought the Israelites into Egypt. Yahweh appears to be punishing the Hebrews for not returning to the Promised Land, but instead, choosing to stay in Egypt. No return attempt is recorded to have been made. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “All of the descendants of Jacob were 70 in number”

This number included both Jacob’s children and grandchildren. It may cause confusion, but it is important to remember Jacob only had 12 sons. -EXO 1 1 h51f writing-background 0 Verses 1–7 are background information for the story.If your language has a way of structuring background information, consider using it for these verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -EXO 1 1 g89k figs-metonymy וּ⁠בֵית֖⁠וֹ 1 household Here, **house** refers to all of the people who live together, usually a large family with servants. Alternate translation: “and his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 1 1 h51f writing-background 0 Verses 1–7 are background information for the story. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +EXO 1 1 g89k figs-metonymy וּ⁠בֵית֖⁠וֹ 1 household Here, **house** refers to all of the people who live together, usually a large family with servants. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 1 1 fxbx figs-go הַ⁠בָּאִ֖ים…בָּֽאוּ 1 The words translated as **came in** could also be translated as “went in.” Use whichever form is most natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 1 1 e65z translate-names יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל…יַעֲקֹ֔ב 1 **Jacob** and **Israel** are two names for the same man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 1 5 fv84 translate-numbers שִׁבְעִ֣ים 1 seventy in number “70 in number” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 1 5 fv84 translate-numbers שִׁבְעִ֣ים 1 seventy in number Alternate translation: “70 in number” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 1 6 sh42 grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יָּ֤מָת 1 Jacob and his sons spent the rest of their lives in Egypt and died there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) EXO 1 6 g5qg וְ⁠כָל־אֶחָ֔י⁠ו 1 all his brothers **All his brothers** includes ten older brothers and one younger brother. If your language has different words for those, you can say, “his ten older brothers and his younger brother” EXO 1 6 pev3 figs-possession אֶחָ֔י⁠ו 1 This an instance of the possessive of social relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 1 7 c368 figs-metonymy וּ⁠בְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל 1 This is the first of many times in this book that **sons of Israel** refers to the Israelite nation or people. Alternate translation: “And the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 1 7 c368 figs-metonymy וּ⁠בְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל 1 This is the first of many times in this book that **sons of Israel** refers to the Israelite nation or people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the people of Israel” or “And the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 1 7 c7ep figs-doublet פָּר֧וּ וַֽ⁠יִּשְׁרְצ֛וּ וַ⁠יִּרְבּ֥וּ וַ⁠יַּֽעַצְמ֖וּ 1 All of these verbs mean similar things and are used together to emphasize that the Israelite people became very numerous. If your language doesn’t have as many words that mean the same thing, you can use fewer words and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “multiplied and became extremely numerous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 1 7 uo65 פָּר֧וּ…וַ⁠יִּרְבּ֥וּ…וַ⁠תִּמָּלֵ֥א הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ 1 Compare your translation of **fruitful … and multiplied … and the land was filled** here to Genesis 1:28; 9:1, 7; andespecially Genesis35:11, where God renamed Jacob to be called Israel. EXO 1 7 nk2l figs-metaphor פָּר֧וּ 1 were fruitful The birth of children to the Israelites is spoken of as if they were plants that were producing fruit. Alternate translation: “had many children” or “gave birth to many children” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -18,32 +18,32 @@ EXO 1 7 e110 figs-idiom בִּ⁠מְאֹ֣ד מְאֹ֑ד 1 Here the same word EXO 1 7 piq4 writing-participants אֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 with them Here, **them** refers to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 1 8 eu8y writing-newevent וַ⁠יָּ֥קָם 1 This sentence introduces a new event in the story. If your language marks this with particular discourse features, apply them here. (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 1 8 d20y writing-participants מֶֽלֶךְ־חָדָ֖שׁ 1 The story begins with the new king.Your language may have a specific way to introduce new events or new characters in a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 1 8 t6jd figs-metonymy וַ⁠יָּ֥קָם מֶֽלֶךְ־חָדָ֖שׁ עַל־מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 arose over Egypt Here, **Egypt** refers to the place and the people of Egypt. Alternate translation: “And a new king began to rule over the Egyptians and the country of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 1 8 dnkw figs-metonymy לֹֽא־יָדַ֖ע אֶת־יוֹסֵֽף 1 Here, **Joseph** refers to both the person Joseph and to all of the good things that he did for Egypt. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 1 9 tf59 writing-participants וַ⁠יֹּ֖אמֶר 1 He said to his people “And the king said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +EXO 1 8 t6jd figs-metonymy וַ⁠יָּ֥קָם מֶֽלֶךְ־חָדָ֖שׁ עַל־מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 arose over Egypt Here, **Egypt** refers to the place and the people of Egypt. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And a new king began to rule over the Egyptians and the country of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 1 8 dnkw figs-metonymy לֹֽא־יָדַ֖ע אֶת־יוֹסֵֽף 1 Here, **Joseph** refers to both the person Joseph and to all of the good things that he did for Egypt. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 1 9 tf59 writing-participants וַ⁠יֹּ֖אמֶר 1 He said to his people Alternate translation: “And the king said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 1 9 aku3 figs-exclamations הִנֵּ֗ה 1 Here, **behold** draws special attention to what is about to be said. Use a way of drawing people’s attention that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Listen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) EXO 1 9 x65i figs-possession עַמּ֑⁠וֹ 1 his people The people are spoken of as if they belonged to the king. This is an instance of the possessive of social relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 1 9 t7s1 עַמּ֑⁠וֹ 1 There is some ambiguity as to whom exactly Pharaoh was addressing. It could have been: 1) the people who lived in Egypt, the Egyptians or 2) some group of “his people” like his advisors, generals, nobles, or friends and family. Even if option 1 is meant, it is quite possible that he actually spoke to some smaller group of representatives, as in option 2. +EXO 1 9 t7s1 עַמּ֑⁠וֹ 1 There is some ambiguity as to whom exactly Pharaoh was addressing. It could have been: (1) the people who lived in Egypt, the Egyptians or (2) some group of “his people” like his advisors, generals, nobles, or friends and family. Even if option 1 is meant, it is quite possible that he actually spoke to some smaller group of representatives, as in option 2. EXO 1 9 jik8 מִמֶּֽ⁠נּוּ 1 Use a way that is natural in your language to compare non-specific sizes of groups of people. Alternate translation: “more than we are” EXO 1 9 njuf figs-quotemarks הִנֵּ֗ה 1 Beginning from **behold** to the end of [verse 10](../01/10.md) is a direct quote of what the king said. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 1 10 hiq4 figs-exclusive נִֽתְחַכְּמָ֖ה…שֹׂ֣נְאֵ֔י⁠נוּ…בָּ֖⁠נוּ 1 let us The word **us** is inclusive and refers to the king and his people, the Egyptians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 1 10 il4u grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical פֶּן־יִרְבֶּ֗ה וְ⁠הָיָ֞ה כִּֽי־תִקְרֶ֤אנָה מִלְחָמָה֙ 1 The king suggests a combination of two hypothetical events: 1. There are even more Israelites, 2. There is a battle. These are followed by a series of undesirable consequences: 3. The Israelites join an enemy, 4. The Israelites attack the Egyptians, 5. The Israelites leave Egypt. While the series of consequences is also technically hypothetical, the king’s language indicates that if 1-2 happen, then 3-5 are certain. Use language that makes it clear that the first two events are hypothetical, and that the next three are consequences that could be expected if the first two events happen. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -EXO 1 10 jc1h וְ⁠עָלָ֥ה מִן־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 leave the land “and he leaves Egypt” +EXO 1 10 jc1h וְ⁠עָלָ֥ה מִן־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 leave the land Alternate translation: “and he leaves Egypt” EXO 1 10 ni77 figs-quotemarks הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of what the king said comes to an end. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 1 11 y2mi שָׂרֵ֣י 1 taskmasters Egyptians whose job it was to force the Israelites to do hard work. EXO 1 11 o926 מִסִּ֔ים 1 Here the plural means groups. Alternative translation: “work crews” -EXO 1 11 l9lj לְמַ֥עַן עַנֹּת֖⁠וֹ בְּ⁠סִבְלֹתָ֑⁠ם 1 to oppress them with hard labor “to force the Israelites to do hard work for the Egyptians” +EXO 1 11 l9lj לְמַ֥עַן עַנֹּת֖⁠וֹ בְּ⁠סִבְלֹתָ֑⁠ם 1 to oppress them with hard labor Alternate translation: “to force the Israelites to do hard work for the Egyptians” EXO 1 11 pkz4 translate-unknown עָרֵ֤י מִסְכְּנוֹת֙ 1 store cities These were places where the leaders put away food and other important things to keep them safe. Alternative translation: “cities in which to put away things to keep them safe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 1 11 dy34 figs-possession עָרֵ֤י מִסְכְּנוֹת֙ 1 The possessive is objective; storage of goods is what occurs in the cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 1 12 c1fy grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠כַ⁠אֲשֶׁר֙ יְעַנּ֣וּ אֹת֔⁠וֹ כֵּ֥ן יִרְבֶּ֖ה וְ⁠כֵ֣ן יִפְרֹ֑ץ 1 This sentence expresses a result that is opposite of what the king expected. If your language has a way to express something happening that was opposite of what was expected, use that structure. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -EXO 1 12 pdfk figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠יָּקֻ֕צוּ 1 “And they were afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 1 12 qgzz figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that the Egyptians were afraid of the Israelites’ existence in the country. Alternate translation: “whenever they saw an Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 1 12 pdfk figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠יָּקֻ֕צוּ 1 Alternate translation: “And they were afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 1 12 qgzz figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. The phrase means that the Egyptians were afraid of the Israelites’ existence in the country. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “whenever they saw an Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 1 13 j1q6 figs-abstractnouns וַ⁠יַּעֲבִ֧דוּ מִצְרַ֛יִם אֶת־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בְּ⁠פָֽרֶךְ 1 made…work rigorously Here, **rigor** is a noun used to modify the verb **enslaved**. **Rigor** could refer either to how hard the work was or how unkindly the Egyptians treated the Israelites. Alternate translation: “And the Egyptians made the sons of Israel work very hard” or “And the Egyptians harshly made the sons of Israel work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 1 14 mx6v figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְמָרְר֨וּ 1 made their lives bitter The difficult lives of the Israelites are spoken of as if they were bitter food that was difficult to eat. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 1 14 jre2 figs-abstractnouns בַּ⁠עֲבֹדָ֣ה קָשָׁ֗ה 1 **Slavery** is an abstract noun modified by **hard**. Alternative translation: “by making them work hard as slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 1 14 cuq7 translate-unknown בְּ⁠חֹ֨מֶר֙ 1 mortar This was a wet glue or mud put between bricks or stones that held them together when it dried. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 1 14 h5dx translate-unknown וּ⁠בִ⁠לְבֵנִ֔ים 1 **Bricks** are hardened rectangular blocks of mud, clay etc., used for building. (Source: Wiktionary) The clay or mud was hardened either in the sun or by heating it to higher temperatures in other ways. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 1 14 gzq7 אֵ֚ת כָּל־עֲבֹ֣דָתָ֔⁠ם אֲשֶׁר־עָבְד֥וּ בָ⁠הֶ֖ם בְּ⁠פָֽרֶךְ׃ 1 All their required work was hard “the Egyptians made them work very hard” or “the Egyptians forced them to work very hard” See how you translated this in [verse 13](../01/13.md) +EXO 1 14 gzq7 אֵ֚ת כָּל־עֲבֹ֣דָתָ֔⁠ם אֲשֶׁר־עָבְד֥וּ בָ⁠הֶ֖ם בְּ⁠פָֽרֶךְ׃ 1 All their required work was hard Alternate translation: “the Egyptians made them work very hard” or “the Egyptians forced them to work very hard” See how you translated this in [verse 13](../01/13.md) EXO 1 14 ct02 writing-participants וַ⁠יְמָרְר֨וּ…בָ⁠הֶ֖ם 1 These pronouns refer to the Egyptians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 1 14 acj5 writing-participants חַיֵּי⁠הֶ֜ם…עֲבֹ֣דָתָ֔⁠ם…עָבְד֥וּ 1 These pronouns refer to the Israelites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 1 15 yoaj writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙ 1 This sentence introduces a new event in the story. If your language marks this with particular discourse features, apply them here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ EXO 1 15 h59t writing-participants שִׁפְרָ֔ה…פּוּעָֽה 1 The EXO 1 16 t8f5 וַ⁠יֹּ֗אמֶר 1 In the UST, **And the king said**, is combined with “spoke” from [verse 15](../01/15.md), because the verb for “say” is used twice before he speaks. This may be strange in some languages. If it would be unnatural to say that the king spoke or said twice, you may leave one off. EXO 1 16 yovg figs-quotemarks בְּ⁠יַלֶּדְ⁠כֶן֙ אֶת־הָֽ⁠עִבְרִיּ֔וֹת וּ⁠רְאִיתֶ֖ן עַל־הָ⁠אָבְנָ֑יִם אִם־בֵּ֥ן הוּא֙ וַ⁠הֲמִתֶּ֣ן אֹת֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠אִם־בַּ֥ת הִ֖יא וָ⁠חָֽיָה 1 This is a direct quote of what the king said. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 1 16 zfcv figs-youdual בְּ⁠יַלֶּדְ⁠כֶן֙…וּ⁠רְאִיתֶ֖ן…וַ⁠הֲמִתֶּ֣ן 1 The king is speaking to the two midwives, so the form of **you** is plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 1 16 h3mb figs-metonymy עַל־הָ⁠אָבְנָ֑יִם 1 on the birthstool Women sat on this short stool as they gave birth. Therefore, it is associated with birth. Alternate translation: “as they give birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 1 16 h3mb figs-metonymy עַל־הָ⁠אָבְנָ֑יִם 1 on the birthstool Women sat on this short stool as they gave birth. Therefore, it is associated with birth. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “as they give birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 1 16 nms7 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical אִם־בֵּ֥ן הוּא֙ וַ⁠הֲמִתֶּ֣ן אֹת֔⁠וֹ וְ⁠אִם־בַּ֥ת הִ֖יא וָ⁠חָֽיָה 1 These two statements are hypothetical conditions (starting at **if**) with instructions for what the midwives should do in each situation (starting at **then**). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) EXO 1 17 gy7k grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠תִּירֶ֤אןָ 1 Use a conjunction or other language structure that expresses contrast. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 1 18 y9g5 לַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֔ת 1 midwives These were women who helped a woman give birth to a baby. See how you translated this in [Exodus 1:15](../01/15.md). @@ -70,11 +70,11 @@ EXO 1 20 h133 figs-doublet וַ⁠יִּ֧רֶב הָ⁠עָ֛ם וַ⁠יַּֽ EXO 1 20 eo1p grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יֵּ֥יטֶב אֱלֹהִ֖ים לַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֑ת 1 This phrase is more logically connected to the statements in verse 21. It describes the result of the midwives fearing God with a general statement. You may need to rearrange vs 20-21 so that the reason (vs 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 1 21 de53 grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יְהִ֕י כִּֽי־יָֽרְא֥וּ הַֽ⁠מְיַלְּדֹ֖ת אֶת־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 This is the reason for what God did. You may need to rearrange vs 20-21 so that the reason (vs 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 1 21 pbve grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ לָ⁠הֶ֖ם בָּתִּֽים 1 This describes the result of the midwives fearing God with a specific statement. You may need to rearrange vs 20-21 so that the reason (vs 21) comes before both the general and specific results. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 1 21 jx9c בָּתִּֽים 1 he gave them families “households” +EXO 1 21 jx9c בָּתִּֽים 1 he gave them families Alternate translation: “households” EXO 1 22 ld1j figs-explicit כָּל־הַ⁠בֵּ֣ן הַ⁠יִּלּ֗וֹד הַ⁠יְאֹ֨רָ⁠ה֙ תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ 1 You must throw every son…into the river This order was given in order to drown the male children. The full meaning of this may be made explicit. Alternate translation: “You must dispose of each new baby boy in the river so he will drown” or “Drown each baby boy in the river when he is born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 1 22 a6b2 figs-quotations וַ⁠יְצַ֣ו פַּרְעֹ֔ה לְ⁠כָל־עַמּ֖⁠וֹ לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר כָּל־הַ⁠בֵּ֣ן הַ⁠יִּלּ֗וֹד הַ⁠יְאֹ֨רָ⁠ה֙ תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ וְ⁠כָל־הַ⁠בַּ֖ת תְּחַיּֽוּ⁠ן 1 From **You shall** to the end of the verse is a direct quote of Pharaoh’s speech. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. However, it could be translated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And Pharaoh commanded all of his people to throw every baby boy into the river, but to let every girl live.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 1 22 stag figs-youdual תַּשְׁלִיכֻ֔⁠הוּ…תְּחַיּֽוּ⁠ן 1 The uses of the word **you** here refer to all the Egyptians. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 2 intro rwf3 0 # Exodus 02 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter


### Covenant
God begins to relate to the Israelites based on his covenant with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob.


### Moses’ heritage
In the first part of this chapter, Pharaoh’s daughter recognizes Moses as being a Hebrew, but in the last part of this chapter, the Midianites believe him to be an Egyptian.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Identification of participants
- Moses is the only participant named in most of this chapter. This is because many of the participants play very minor roles and because this part of the story is focusing on Moses’ life.

### Ironic situations
- While Pharaoh tried to diminish the power of the Israelites by killing all of their baby boys, God used Pharaoh’s own daughter to save Moses.


- Moses believes he is meant to be the rescuer of his people, but they reject him. Ultimately, Moses was correct, but God had not yet sent him for that mission. +EXO 2 intro rwf3 0 # Exodus 02 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter


### Covenant

God begins to relate to the Israelites based on his covenant with Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob.


### Moses’ heritage

In the first part of this chapter, Pharaoh’s daughter recognizes Moses as being a Hebrew, but in the last part of this chapter, the Midianites believe him to be an Egyptian.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Identification of participants

- Moses is the only participant named in most of this chapter. This is because many of the participants play very minor roles and because this part of the story is focusing on Moses’ life.

### Ironic situations

- While Pharaoh tried to diminish the power of the Israelites by killing all of their baby boys, God used Pharaoh’s own daughter to save Moses.


- Moses believes he is meant to be the rescuer of his people, but they reject him. Ultimately, Moses was correct, but God had not yet sent him for that mission. EXO 2 1 wvj9 writing-newevent וַ⁠יֵּ֥לֶךְ 1 Now A new scene begins here; that may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 2 1 riy7 writing-participants אִ֖ישׁ…בַּת 1 These are new participants. They remain unnamed until [Exodus 6:20](../06/20.md) where they are identified as Amram and Jochebed. For now it is best to leave them unnamed in your language, if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 2 1 mp7m figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּקַּ֖ח אֶת־בַּת־לֵוִֽי 1 This is an idiom for marrying. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -115,7 +115,7 @@ EXO 2 9 mogg שְׂכָרֵ֑⁠ךְ 1 This refers to payment that Pharaoh’s EXO 2 9 hqsa figs-explicit וַ⁠תִּקַּ֧ח…וַ⁠תְּנִיקֵֽ⁠הוּ 1 The mother’s acceptance of the deal is implied. You could make it explicit, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 2 10 zj8h grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יִגְדַּ֣ל הַ⁠יֶּ֗לֶד וַ⁠תְּבִאֵ֨⁠הוּ֙ 1 she brought him An unspecified amount of time is designated by this. He would have stayed with his mother at least until he was weaned (no longer drinking his mother’s milk). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) EXO 2 10 ta4r figs-possession לְ⁠בַת־פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 This is the possessive of social relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 2 10 j7n1 וַֽ⁠יְהִי־לָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠בֵ֑ן 1 he became her son “and he became the adopted son of Pharaoh’s daughter” +EXO 2 10 j7n1 וַֽ⁠יְהִי־לָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠בֵ֑ן 1 he became her son Alternate translation: “and he became the adopted son of Pharaoh’s daughter” EXO 2 10 h7to grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וַֽ⁠יְהִי־לָ֖⁠הּ לְ⁠בֵ֑ן וַ⁠תִּקְרָ֤א שְׁמ⁠וֹ֙ מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 These events were likely simultaneous, because her act of naming him may have been what made him become **as a son to her**. Consider using a conjunction that does not make a great separtion between these events. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) EXO 2 10 nh2m מֹשֶׁ֔ה וַ⁠תֹּ֕אמֶר כִּ֥י מִן־הַ⁠מַּ֖יִם מְשִׁיתִֽ⁠הוּ 1 Because I drew him from the water Translators may add a footnote that says, “The name Moses sounds like the Hebrew word that means ‘draw out.’” EXO 2 10 ityq figs-quotations וַ⁠תֹּ֕אמֶר כִּ֥י מִן־הַ⁠מַּ֖יִם מְשִׁיתִֽ⁠הוּ 1 This is a direct quote. It could be stated indirectly. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. Alternate translation: “because she said she draw him out of the water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -123,9 +123,9 @@ EXO 2 10 yax4 translate-names מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 drew him **Moses** - (See: [[rc:/ EXO 2 11 tyol grammar-connect-time-sequential וַ⁠יְהִ֣י ׀ בַּ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠הֵ֗ם וַ⁠יִּגְדַּ֤ל מֹשֶׁה֙ וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֣א 1 A significant amount of time has passed; later texts state that Moses was 40 years old at this point. Alternative translation: “Many years later, once Moses was grown, he went out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) EXO 2 11 p7gx writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֣י ׀ בַּ⁠יָּמִ֣ים הָ⁠הֵ֗ 1 This introduces a new event in the story. In your language, use a phrase that indicates a new event occurring after significant time has passed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 2 11 uy39 figs-go וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֣א 1 The UST supplies a probable location that he **went out** from; it could also have been simply out from the Egyptian area or out to the work area or cities. Use go or come as appropriate in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) -EXO 2 11 swn3 מַכֶּ֥ה אִישׁ־עִבְרִ֖י 1 striking a Hebrew “hitting a Hebrew” or “beating a Hebrew” +EXO 2 11 swn3 מַכֶּ֥ה אִישׁ־עִבְרִ֖י 1 striking a Hebrew Alternate translation: “hitting a Hebrew” or “beating a Hebrew” EXO 2 12 m9bn figs-merism וַ⁠יִּ֤פֶן כֹּה֙ וָ⁠כֹ֔ה 1 He looked this way and that way These two opposite directions have the combined meaning of “everywhere.” Alternate translation: “He looked all around” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 2 12 rmgn figs-metonymy וַ⁠יַּךְ֙ 1 The context makes clear that Moses struck the Egyptian hard enough or repeatedly until Moses killed him. Consider using a word that indicates a deadly blow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 2 12 rmgn figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּךְ֙ 1 The context makes clear that Moses struck the Egyptian hard enough or repeatedly until Moses killed him. Consider using a word that indicates a deadly blow. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 2 13 qn45 figs-go וַ⁠יֵּצֵא֙ 1 He went out See how you translated this in [Exodus 2:11](../02/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 2 13 wqrm translate-ordinal הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י 1 The ordinal number here could mean “the next day” (UST) or simply on some day following the events of the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 2 13 rgn1 figs-exclamations וְ⁠הִנֵּ֛ה 1 behold Here, **behold** shows that Moses was surprised by what he saw. You can use a word in your language that will give this meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) @@ -133,15 +133,15 @@ EXO 2 13 i4d6 לָֽ⁠רָשָׁ֔ע 1 the one who was in the wrong Based on M EXO 2 13 duob figs-quotemarks לָ֥⁠מָּה תַכֶּ֖ה רֵעֶֽ⁠ךָ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 2 14 qb2n figs-rquestion מִ֣י שָֽׂמְ⁠ךָ֞ לְ⁠אִ֨ישׁ שַׂ֤ר וְ⁠שֹׁפֵט֙ עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ 1 Who made you a leader and judge over us? The man used this question to rebuke Moses for intervening in the fight. Alternate translation: “You are not our leader and have no right to judge us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 2 14 afne figs-quotemarks מִ֣י שָֽׂמְ⁠ךָ֞ לְ⁠אִ֨ישׁ שַׂ֤ר וְ⁠שֹׁפֵט֙ עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַ⁠מִּצְרִ֑י 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 2 14 k6s5 figs-irony הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַ⁠מִּצְרִ֑י 1 Are you planning to kill me as you killed that Egyptian? The man used a question here to be sarcastic. Alternate translation: “We know that you killed an Egyptian yesterday. You had better not kill me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]] +EXO 2 14 k6s5 figs-irony הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַ⁠מִּצְרִ֑י 1 Are you planning to kill me as you killed that Egyptian? The man used a question here to be sarcastic. Alternate translation: “We know that you killed an Egyptian yesterday. You had better not kill me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]]) EXO 2 14 l62d figs-rquestion הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר הָרַ֖גְתָּ אֶת־הַ⁠מִּצְרִ֑י 1 The man asks a question that is intended to make a statement. Alternate translation: “Do you think you can kill me without anyone finding out? We know what you did to the Egyptian” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 2 14 d2ja הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר 1 “Are you planning to kill me” or “Are you threatening to kill me” +EXO 2 14 d2ja הַ⁠לְ⁠הָרְגֵ֨⁠נִי֙ אַתָּ֣ה אֹמֵ֔ר 1 Alternate translation: “Are you planning to kill me” or “Are you threatening to kill me” EXO 2 14 lyqh figs-aside אָכֵ֖ן נוֹדַ֥ע הַ⁠דָּבָֽר 1 It is likely this is something Moses said to himself, that is, he thought it to himself rather than speaking to the men in front of him. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]]) EXO 2 14 vfw5 figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּאמַ֔ר אָכֵ֖ן נוֹדַ֥ע הַ⁠דָּבָֽר 1 It may be clearer to present as an indirect quotation what was likely a thought Moses had. Alternative translation (as indirect quotation): “because he thought that everyone knew what he had done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 2 15 yutr וַ⁠יְבַקֵּ֖שׁ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֣ג אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 Pharaoh most likely delegated this task. Alternative translation: “and he sought to have Moses killed” (note that the passive form will not work in every language), see UST -EXO 2 15 l5rc figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י 1 His **face** means his presence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 2 15 l5rc figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י 1 His **face** means his presence. Alternate translation: “from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 2 15 otsl וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב…וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב 1 These are the same verb. There are three possible interpretations: 1. Moses lived in Midian. He sat by this well one day. This may have been the well for the town he lived in. 2. Moses lived in Midian. His home was by this well. 3. Moses was a wanderer. He was in Midian and sat by this well when the next event occurred. -EXO 2 16 shg5 writing-background וּ⁠לְ⁠כֹהֵ֥ן מִדְיָ֖ן שֶׁ֣בַע בָּנ֑וֹת 1 Now the priest of Midian had seven daughters This sentence is background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +EXO 2 16 shg5 writing-background וּ⁠לְ⁠כֹהֵ֥ן מִדְיָ֖ן שֶׁ֣בַע בָּנ֑וֹת 1 Now the priest of Midian had seven daughters This sentence is background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) EXO 2 16 pjzc writing-newevent וּ⁠לְ⁠כֹהֵ֥ן מִדְיָ֖ן שֶׁ֣בַע בָּנ֑וֹת 1 This sentence is used to mark a transition. However, the last clause of the previous verse (“and he sat down by a well”) seems to be related to this new scene so you may want to make your transition there as is done in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 2 16 cfe5 writing-participants שֶׁ֣בַע בָּנ֑וֹת וַ⁠תָּבֹ֣אנָה 1 The **daughters** are new participants. Indicate that in a way that is natural in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 2 16 sm8f figs-go וַ⁠תָּבֹ֣אנָה 1 The perspective of the narrative is set at the well. The daughters came from elsewhere to the well. They were probably on foot. Here each language will need to choose the appropriate word. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ EXO 2 16 v5yk figs-possession וּ⁠לְ⁠כֹהֵ֥ן מִדְיָ֖ן שֶׁ EXO 2 16 esdm translate-numbers שֶׁ֣בַע 1 7 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 2 16 i2jh וַ⁠תִּדְלֶ֗נָה 1 drew water This means that they brought up water from a well. EXO 2 16 g1e6 translate-unknown הָ֣⁠רְהָטִ֔ים 1 troughs These were a long, narrow, open containers for animals to eat or drink out of. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 2 16 p3uo figs-possession צֹ֥אן אֲבִי⁠הֶֽן 1 There are two possessives here: 1) **their father** is the possessive of social relationship; 2) **the flock of … father** is the possessive of ownership. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +EXO 2 16 p3uo figs-possession צֹ֥אן אֲבִי⁠הֶֽן 1 There are two possessives here: (1) **their father** is the possessive of social relationship; (2) **the flock of … father** is the possessive of ownership. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 2 17 k5yc figs-go וַ⁠יָּבֹ֥אוּ 1 A group of men came. They may not have been far away before coming and driving the women away. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 2 17 zksv writing-participants הָ⁠רֹעִ֖ים 1 These are new, very brief, participants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 2 17 z17m grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠יָּ֤קָם 1 helped them Use an expression that communicates that what Moses did was unexpected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) @@ -161,37 +161,37 @@ EXO 2 18 lukb figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֕אמֶר מַדּ֛וּעַ מִה EXO 2 18 hq6y figs-go בֹּ֖א 1 Alternative translation: “in returning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 2 19 r01g figs-quotemarks אִ֣ישׁ מִצְרִ֔י הִצִּילָ֖⁠נוּ מִ⁠יַּ֣ד הָ⁠רֹעִ֑ים וְ⁠גַם־דָּלֹ֤ה דָלָה֙ לָ֔⁠נוּ וַ⁠יַּ֖שְׁקְ אֶת־הַ⁠צֹּֽאן 1 This is a direct quote. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 2 19 w57e אִ֣ישׁ מִצְרִ֔י 1 Jethro’s daughters assume Moses was Egyptian. When you translate it, you should be clear that this refers to Moses. -EXO 2 19 hvb4 figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֣ד 1 **Hand** figuratively refers to the power, control, or actions of the shepherds.Alternative translation: “from the strength of” or “from the harm of” or see UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 2 19 hvb4 figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֣ד 1 Here, **hand** figuratively refers to the power, control, or actions of the shepherds. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “from the strength of” or “from the harm of” or see the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 2 19 a7v2 figs-idiom דָּלֹ֤ה דָלָה֙ 1 The repeated word expresses surprise or emphasizes the magnitude of Moses’ act of kindness to the women. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 2 20 x73j figs-possession בְּנֹתָ֖י⁠ו 1 This is a possessive of social relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 2 20 x9yb figs-rquestion וְ⁠אַיּ֑⁠וֹ לָ֤⁠מָּה זֶּה֙ עֲזַבְתֶּ֣ן אֶת־הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ 1 Why did you leave the man? These questions are a mild rebuke to the daughters for not inviting Moses into their home according to the normal hospitality of that culture. Alternate translation: “You should not have left this man at the well!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 2 20 p6xh figs-quotemarks וְ⁠אַיּ֑⁠וֹ לָ֤⁠מָּה זֶּה֙ עֲזַבְתֶּ֣ן אֶת־הָ⁠אִ֔ישׁ קִרְאֶ֥ן ל֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠יֹ֥אכַל לָֽחֶם׃ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 2 20 mb8w writing-participants ל֖⁠וֹ 1 **Him** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 2 20 hal8 figs-synecdoche לָֽחֶם 1 **Bread** is used to refer to food in general. Alternative translation: “food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -EXO 2 21 zvr1 וַ⁠יּ֥וֹאֶל מֹשֶׁ֖ה לָ⁠שֶׁ֣בֶת אֶת־הָ⁠אִ֑ישׁ 1 Moses agreed to stay with the man “Moses agreed to live with Reuel” +EXO 2 21 zvr1 וַ⁠יּ֥וֹאֶל מֹשֶׁ֖ה לָ⁠שֶׁ֣בֶת אֶת־הָ⁠אִ֑ישׁ 1 Moses agreed to stay with the man Alternate translation: “Moses agreed to live with Reuel” EXO 2 21 y3q7 translate-names צִפֹּרָ֥ה 1 Zipporah **Zipporah** is Reuel’s (Jethro’s) daughter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 2 21 qi5p figs-possession בִתּ֖⁠וֹ 1 This is a possessive of social relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 2 22 l3xg figs-quotemarks גֵּ֣ר הָיִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אֶ֖רֶץ נָכְרִיָּֽה 1 Only this portion is a quotation. As a possibility for clarity, the UST includes both speech events as one quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 2 22 n5b1 translate-names גֵּרְשֹׁ֑ם 1 Gershom This is Moses’ son. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 2 22 f76m translate-names גֵּרְשֹׁ֑ם 1 His name, **Gershom**, sounds somewhat like the Hebrew for “a stranger here.” You may consider using a footnote to explain that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 2 22 q7d8 גֵּ֣ר הָיִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אֶ֖רֶץ נָכְרִיָּֽה 1 resident in a foreign land “stranger in a foreign land” +EXO 2 22 q7d8 גֵּ֣ר הָיִ֔יתִי בְּ⁠אֶ֖רֶץ נָכְרִיָּֽה 1 resident in a foreign land Alternate translation: “stranger in a foreign land” EXO 2 23 fjkt writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִי֩ בַ⁠יָּמִ֨ים הָֽ⁠רַבִּ֜ים הָ⁠הֵ֗ם 1 This introduces a new section and series of events. A large amount of time went by. According to Stephen’s sermon in Acts 7:30, Moses was in Midian 40 years. Alternative translation: “This is what happened during the many days Moses was in Midian.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 2 23 ym88 writing-background וַ⁠יְהִי֩ בַ⁠יָּמִ֨ים הָֽ⁠רַבִּ֜ים הָ⁠הֵ֗ם 1 Verses 23-25 give a summary of what happened in Egypt and with the Israelites and God while Moses was in exile. These verses give background information to set the scene. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +EXO 2 23 ym88 writing-background 0 Verses 23-25 give a summary of what happened in Egypt and with the Israelites and God while Moses was in exile. These verses give background information to set the scene. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) EXO 2 23 csg2 וַ⁠יֵּאָנְח֧וּ 1 groaned They **groaned** because of their sorrow and misery. Alternate translation: “sighed deeply” EXO 2 23 x84a figs-personification וַ⁠תַּ֧עַל שַׁוְעָתָ֛⁠ם 1 their pleas went up to God The cries of the Israelites are spoken of as if they were a person and were able to travel up to where God is. Alternate translation: “and their cries arose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 2 24 sja4 figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּזְכֹּ֤ר אֱלֹהִים֙ 1 God called to mind his covenant This was a customary way of saying that God thought about what He had promised. Alternate translation: “and God recalled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 3 intro n6ze 0 # Exodus 03 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter records one of the most important events in the history of the Israelite people: the revelation of the name Yahweh at the burning bush. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### God’s holiness

God is so holy that people could not look upon him without dying. This is why Moses covered his eyes. It is also why he took off his shoes. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

### Yahweh

The name Yahweh is sacred in the Hebrew religion. It is the personal name of God, which he revealed to Moses. It is by this name that he is known. Yahweh means “I am.” Some translations use all capitals to set this apart, “I AM.” Great care must be taken in translating the phrase “I am that I am.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/yahweh]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Participants

“The angel of Yahweh,” “Yahweh,” and “God” all appear to be speaking to Moses and interacting with him from the burning bush. Furthermore, God says that his name is “I AM.” (See note above on Yahweh and I AM.) Yahweh and God are the same while there is speculation about who the angel of Yahweh is. EXO 3 1 gqvh writing-newevent וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֗ה הָיָ֥ה רֹעֶ֛ה 1 This phrase brings the story focus back to Midian and Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 3 1 oqcr writing-background וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֗ה הָיָ֥ה רֹעֶ֛ה אֶת־צֹ֛אן יִתְר֥וֹ חֹתְנ֖⁠וֹ כֹּהֵ֣ן מִדְיָ֑ן וַ⁠יִּנְהַ֤ג אֶת־הַ⁠צֹּאן֙ אַחַ֣ר הַ⁠מִּדְבָּ֔ר וַ⁠יָּבֹ֛א אֶל־הַ֥ר הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים חֹרֵֽבָ⁠ה׃ 1 Verse 1 provides immediate background context, setting the scene for Moses’ interaction with Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +EXO 3 1 oqcr writing-background 0 Verse 1 provides immediate background context, setting the scene for Moses’ interaction with Yahweh. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) EXO 3 1 jv7b figs-possession צֹ֛אן יִתְר֥וֹ 1 This is an ownership possessive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 3 1 w1nt figs-possession חֹתְנ֖⁠וֹ 1 This is a possessive of social relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 3 1 l7x6 figs-possession כֹּהֵ֣ן מִדְיָ֑ן 1 This is a possessive of social relationship. Jethro is a priest who serves the Midianites. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 3 1 v97t figs-go וַ⁠יָּבֹ֛א אֶל 1 “and he arrived at” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +EXO 3 1 v97t figs-go וַ⁠יָּבֹ֛א אֶל 1 Alternate translation: “and he arrived at” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 3 1 p27s figs-possession הַ֥ר הָ⁠אֱלֹהִ֖ים 1 This is an associative possessive. This mountain was associated with God in some way. In [Exodus 3:12](../03/12.md) God tells Moses that he and the Israelites will serve him on this mountain. Later in the story, this promise is fulfilled, and it is where God makes his covenant with Israel and gives them the 10 Commandments. So it may have been called the mountain of God in retrospect (as Moses probably wrote this book sometime after the Israelites were wandering in the wilderness). However, it is possible that the mountain was already associated with God’s presence or worship somehow before Moses went there with the flock. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 3 2 p0nt וַ֠⁠יֵּרָא מַלְאַ֨ךְ יְהֹוָ֥ה אֵלָ֛י⁠ו בְּ⁠לַבַּת־אֵ֖שׁ מִ⁠תּ֣וֹךְ הַ⁠סְּנֶ֑ה 1 This is a summary of what happened. The next few verses tell the story of how this happened and how Moses discovered what was happening. EXO 3 2 x5ci יְהֹוָ֥ה 1 Yahweh This is the name of God that he revealed to his people in the Old Testament. See the translationWord page about Yahweh concerning how to translate this. EXO 3 2 d3tf grammar-connect-logic-contrast וְ⁠הִנֵּ֤ה הַ⁠סְּנֶה֙ בֹּעֵ֣ר בָּ⁠אֵ֔שׁ וְ⁠הַ⁠סְּנֶ֖ה אֵינֶ֥⁠נּוּ אֻכָּֽל 1 behold The word **behold** here shows that Moses saw something that was very different from what he expected. He expected the bush to be burnt up completely by the fire. Consider using an interjection in your language that expresses that the next thing is a surprise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -EXO 3 2 jmz0 figs-metonymy אֻכָּֽל 1 **Being consumed** means being eaten completely until gone. In the case of fire, this is a metonym for burning completely until gone. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 2 jmz0 figs-metonymy אֻכָּֽל 1 Here, **being consumed** means being eaten completely until gone. In the case of fire, this is a metonym for burning completely until gone. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “destroyed by the fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 3 fpww figs-quotemarks אָסֻֽרָה־נָּ֣א וְ⁠אֶרְאֶ֔ה אֶת־הַ⁠מַּרְאֶ֥ה הַ⁠גָּדֹ֖ל הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה מַדּ֖וּעַ לֹא־יִבְעַ֥ר הַ⁠סְּנֶֽה 1 This is a direct quote. It’s not specified who Moses spoke to; he may have been alone or with a group of shepherds or his family. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 3 4 ue8v writing-participants יְהוָ֖ה…אֱלֹהִ֜ים 1 These terms both refer to the same being since God’s name is Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 3 5 jg97 figs-quotemarks אַל־תִּקְרַ֣ב הֲלֹ֑ם שַׁל־נְעָלֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ מֵ⁠עַ֣ל רַגְלֶ֔י⁠ךָ כִּ֣י הַ⁠מָּק֗וֹם אֲשֶׁ֤ר אַתָּה֙ עוֹמֵ֣ד עָלָ֔י⁠ו אַדְמַת־קֹ֖דֶשׁ הֽוּא 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) @@ -203,8 +203,8 @@ EXO 3 6 lfbb grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יַּסְתֵּ֤ר מֹשֶׁ EXO 3 7 nl33 figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה 1 After this phrase a direct quote begins that continues through the end of [verse 10](../03/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 3 7 xoz0 figs-idiom רָאֹ֥ה רָאִ֛יתִי 1 The repetition of **see** expresses the intensity, certainty, or clarity of Yahweh’s seeing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 3 7 tpk0 figs-possession אֶת־עֳנִ֥י עַמִּ֖⁠י 1 There are two possessives here. 1) “affliction of … people”: This is an event-related possessive where the people are the objects of affliction. They are treated badly as slaves. 2) “my people”: This one is more difficult as it involves both ownership and the possessive of social relationship. God views his people as his possession, and he is also in relationship with them as their God because they are descended from Abraham, though at this time they may not know God as theirs. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 3 7 p3tx figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י נֹֽגְשָׂ֔י⁠ו 1 **Faces** refers to the whole person or the presence of the person(s) who were oppressing the Israelites. If this image is used in your language, you may translate it. If a similar image is used, you may consider using it. If neither is the case, you may omit the word “face” and translate the meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 3 7 xx7r נֹֽגְשָׂ֔י⁠ו 1 taskmasters “his oppressors” +EXO 3 7 p3tx figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י נֹֽגְשָׂ֔י⁠ו 1 Here, **faces** refers to the whole person or the presence of the person(s) who were oppressing the Israelites. If this image is used in your language, you may translate it. If a similar image is used, you may consider using it. If neither is the case, you may omit the word “face” and translate the meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 7 xx7r נֹֽגְשָׂ֔י⁠ו 1 taskmasters Alternate translation: “his oppressors” EXO 3 7 ofxt כִּ֥י 1 The conjunction is probably functioning modally here, intensifying the expression of Yahweh’s knowledge. Your translation should express Yahweh’s knowing with certainty or strength. EXO 3 7 mfn2 grammar-collectivenouns נֹֽגְשָׂ֔י⁠ו…מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו 1 These pronouns, **him** and **his**, refer to the Israelites as a group in the singular. They agree with “people” as a collective noun in [3:6](../03/06.md). Some languages may have to use plural pronouns. Others may have to match the pronoun’s gender to the grammatical gender of the word for “people” in their language. If necessary, change “him” to “them” or change “his” to “hers” or “its” (depending on grammatical gender of “people”.) Alternate translation: “those who oppress them … their anguish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 3 7 hkcj figs-possession מַכְאֹבָֽי⁠ו 1 This is an event-related possessive where the people (as a group: **his**) are the subjects of anguish. Your translation should express that they are in deep mental and emotional distress (anguish). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) @@ -215,11 +215,11 @@ EXO 3 8 nahb grammar-collectivenouns לְ⁠הַצִּיל֣⁠וֹ…וּֽ⁠ EXO 3 8 bi4e figs-metaphor מִ⁠יַּ֣ד 1 Someone’s **hand** is a common metaphor for power and control. Use a similar image if your language has one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 3 8 djbz figs-possession מִ⁠יַּ֣ד מִצְרַ֗יִם 1 This is a possessive where the Egyptians are the subject of **the hand**, which means power. The Egyptians used their power and control to oppress the Israelites. Use a phrase in your language that expresses the idea of a group of people having power. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 3 8 mqyp figs-parallelism אֶל־אֶ֤רֶץ טוֹבָה֙ וּ⁠רְחָבָ֔ה אֶל־אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 There are multiple levels of parallelism here. First, the statements, **to a good and wide land** and **to a land flowing with milk and honey** are in parallel with each other. Within each of those, **good** and **wide** are in parallel with each other and also **milk** and **honey**are in parallel with each other.Each of these levels is meant to reinforce and expand on one another. These are not examples of synonymous parallelism, and each part of the statement should be translated. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 3 8 xs87 figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. See UST and [the next note]([[rc://en/tn/help/exo/03/08/pxy8]]) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 8 xs87 figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See UST and [the next note]([[rc://en/tn/help/exo/03/08/pxy8]]) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 8 pxy8 figs-metaphor אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 a land flowing with milk and honey God spoke of the land being good for animals and plants as if the milk and honey from those animals and plants were flowing through the land. If this metaphor makes sense in your language, you may translate it, if your language has metaphors that mean a land is good for producing healthy livestock and good crops, you may consider using those. If neither is the case, you may translate the meaning. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 3 8 dtz9 זָבַ֥ת 1 flowing with “full of” or “with an abundance of” -EXO 3 8 q94i figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב 1 milk Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 3 8 l1as figs-metonymy וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 honey Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 8 dtz9 זָבַ֥ת 1 flowing with Alternate translation: “full of” or “with an abundance of” +EXO 3 8 q94i figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב 1 milk Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 8 l1as figs-metonymy וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 honey Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 9 a2kf grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠עַתָּ֕ה 1 This functions as a discourse marker expressing logical conclusion. “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 3 9 tp2v figs-exclamations הִנֵּ֛ה 1 This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “certainly.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) EXO 3 9 uup9 figs-personification צַעֲקַ֥ת בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל בָּ֣אָה אֵלָ֑⁠י 1 the shouts of the people of Israel have come to me Here, **the cry** is spoken of as if it were a person who is capable of moving on his own. Alternate translation: “I have heard the cries of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) @@ -255,25 +255,25 @@ EXO 3 16 dvsz figs-quotemarks פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙ 1 This EXO 3 16 efhh figs-idiom פָּקֹ֤ד פָּקַ֨דְתִּי֙ 1 The Hebrew word meaning **attended,** visited, or observed is repeated here for emphasis. This word often means God is coming to take action. Translate this phrase in a way that communicates God’s focused, caring observation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 3 16 fv77 figs-youdual אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם 1 I have indeed observed you The word **you** refers to the people of Israel. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 3 16 q4en figs-activepassive הֶ⁠עָשׂ֥וּי 1 In some languages you may not be able to translate this in the passive form. Alternative translation: see UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 3 16 johw figs-metonymy בְּ⁠מִצְרָֽיִם 1 The phrase **in Egypt** is a metonym for the Egyptian oppressors. Alternative translation: “by the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 16 johw figs-metonymy בְּ⁠מִצְרָֽיִם 1 The phrase **in Egypt** is a metonym for the Egyptian oppressors. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “by the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 17 c54k figs-quotesinquotes אַעֲלֶ֣ה אֶתְ⁠כֶם֮ מֵ⁠עֳנִ֣י מִצְרַיִם֒ אֶל־אֶ֤רֶץ הַֽ⁠כְּנַעֲנִי֙ וְ⁠הַ֣⁠חִתִּ֔י וְ⁠הָֽ⁠אֱמֹרִי֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠פְּרִזִּ֔י וְ⁠הַ⁠חִוִּ֖י וְ⁠הַ⁠יְבוּסִ֑י אֶל־אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ 1 This is a fourth-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer three levels. Alternatively, it can be translated as an indirect quotation, see UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 3 17 eloj figs-quotemarks וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ 1 If you are using direct quotations, at the end of this verse you should have three closing markers. In English, it looks like ’ ” ’ (without spaces). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 3 17 r8mg figs-idiom אַעֲלֶ֣ה 1 Regardless of the geographic realities, to **bring up** does not primarily have a literal meaning. Rather, it means to bring the Israelites into a better situation. God promised to bring them up from their low status as slaves to a place where they would be the masters of a good land. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 3 17 wyvt figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ 1 Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. See UST and [the next note]([[rc://en/tn/help/exo/03/08/pwn5]]) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 17 wyvt figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ 1 Here, **milk** is a metonym for domestic animals and the food products obtained from them; **honey** is a metonym for the food obtained from growing plants. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See UST and [the next note]([[rc://en/tn/help/exo/03/08/pwn5]]) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 17 pwn5 figs-metaphor אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ 1 a land flowing with milk and honey God spoke of the land being good for animals and plants as if the milk and honey from those animals and plants were flowing through the land. See how you translated this in [Exodus 3:8](../03/08.md) at [[rc://en/tn/help/exo/03/08/pxy8]]. Alternate translation: “a land that is excellent for raising livestock and growing crops” or “a land where milk and honey flow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 3 17 za9l זָבַ֥ת 1 flowing with “full of” or “with an abundance of” -EXO 3 17 rtr5 figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב 1 milk Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 3 17 msf8 figs-metonymy וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ 1 honey Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 17 za9l זָבַ֥ת 1 flowing with Alternate translation: “full of” or “with an abundance of” +EXO 3 17 rtr5 figs-metonymy חָלָ֖ב 1 milk Since milk comes from cows and goats, this represents food produced by livestock. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 17 msf8 figs-metonymy וּ⁠דְבָֽשׁ 1 honey Since honey is produced from flowers, this represents food from crops. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “food from crops” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 18 cy2z figs-idiom וְ⁠שָׁמְע֖וּ 1 **Listen** often means “hear and do/obey.” Alternative translation: “heed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 3 18 j24k writing-participants לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ…אַתָּה֩ 1 They will listen to you The word **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 3 18 w742 figs-synecdoche לְ⁠קֹלֶ֑⁠ךָ 1 This phrase means the elders will listen to the message Moses brings from God. Alternative translation: “to your message” or “to my message which you tell them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 3 18 r74o figs-possession וְ⁠זִקְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 This is a possessive of social relationship. Alternative translation: “elders in charge of the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 3 18 eep7 grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 **Israel** is a collective noun that refers to all the Israelites. Alternative translation: “the Israelites” or “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 3 18 ot9r figs-metonymy מִצְרַ֗יִם 1 Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptian nation. Alternate translation: “of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 3 18 ot9r figs-metonymy מִצְרַ֗יִם 1 Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptian nation. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 18 idp7 figs-youdual וַ⁠אֲמַרְתֶּ֤ם 1 General Information: If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 3 18 i47o figs-exclusive עָלֵ֔י⁠נוּ…נֵֽלֲכָה…וְ⁠נִזְבְּחָ֖ה 1 These instances of **us** are exclusive; they include Moses, the elders, and all the Israelites, but exclude the king of Egypt. If your language makes this distinction, verify that you used the correct form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -EXO 3 18 d85b translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֤שֶׁת 1 “3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 3 19 qf46 figs-metonymy וְ⁠לֹ֖א בְּ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 unless his hand is forced The word **hand** is a metonym for the power of the owner of the hand. Possible meanings are (1) “only if he sees that he has no power to do anything else,” where the “hand” belongs to Pharaoh; where the “hand” belongs to Yahweh, (2) “only if I force him to let you go” or (3) “not even if I force him to let you go.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] +EXO 3 18 d85b translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֤שֶׁת 1 Alternate translation: “3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 3 19 qf46 figs-metonymy וְ⁠לֹ֖א בְּ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 unless his hand is forced The word **hand** is a metonym for the power of the owner of the hand. Possible meanings include: (1) “only if he sees that he has no power to do anything else,” where the **hand** belongs to Pharaoh (2) “only if I force him to let you go,” where the **hand** belongs to Yahweh (3) “not even if I force him to let you go.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] EXO 3 20 nuzx grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠שָׁלַחְתִּ֤י 1 God says this will be a result of the king of Egypt’s stubbornness. Alternate translation: “Therefore I will send out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 3 20 yds5 figs-metonymy וְ⁠שָׁלַחְתִּ֤י אֶת־יָדִ⁠י֙ 1 I will reach out with my hand and attack Here, **hand** refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “I will use my strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 3 20 dzsp figs-metonymy מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 **Egypt** refers to both the land and the people group, and then, by extension, to Pharaoh as well. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -283,28 +283,28 @@ EXO 3 20 ay53 writing-participants יְשַׁלַּ֥ח 1 Here, **he** refers t EXO 3 20 awxs figs-youdual אֶתְ⁠כֶֽם 1 Here, **you** refers to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 3 21 btwc figs-idiom חֵ֥ן…בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 **In the eyes of the Egyptians** is an idiom for the Egyptian’s feelings. **Favor** means those feelings are positive. Taken together, this means that when the Egyptians see the Israelites (Hebrews) leaving Egypt, they will gladly help them (because they want them to leave so badly due to the Egyptians suffering under God’s judgment). If your language has the same or a similar idiom, you can translate or use it. Otherwise, you can translate the meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 3 21 hfrr figs-possession בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֣י מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 This is a part-whole possessive. Also, if your language uses a specific form of the possessive for things one cannot lose, it would be appropriate to use that form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 3 21 s45u הָֽ⁠עָם־הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה 1 “you” +EXO 3 21 s45u הָֽ⁠עָם־הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה 1 Alternate translation: “you” EXO 3 21 uz3c figs-youdual תֵֽלֵכ֔וּ⁠ן…תֵלְכ֖וּ 1 If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 3 21 wymx figs-go תֵֽלֵכ֔וּ⁠ן…תֵלְכ֖וּ 1 “leave” or “go out” or “come out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +EXO 3 21 wymx figs-go תֵֽלֵכ֔וּ⁠ן…תֵלְכ֖וּ 1 Alternate translation: “leave” or “go out” or “come out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 3 21 j9qz figs-doublenegatives לֹ֥א…רֵיקָֽם 1 The double negative, **not … emptily** is used to mean “full.” Alternate translation: “[go] with many things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 3 21 kt7b figs-litotes לֹ֥א תֵלְכ֖וּ רֵיקָֽם 1 will not go empty-handed This phrase is used to emphasize the opposite meaning. Alternate translation: “you will go with your hands full of good things” or “you will go with many valuable things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) EXO 3 22 w2av וּ⁠מִ⁠גָּרַ֣ת בֵּיתָ֔⁠הּ 1 any women staying in her neighbors’ houses **Sojourning** means living somewhere other than one’s native land, usually temporarily. It is unclear both who the sojourning (visiting) women are and in whose house they are sojourning, leaving several possibilities. Most translations that make a decision about who they are identify both the temporary resident and her host home as Egyptian. This makes sense as the Israelites will be plundering the Egyptians. If it is possible to leave this ambiguous in your translation, that would be best. EXO 3 22 fmfu figs-youdual וְ⁠שַׂמְתֶּ֗ם עַל־בְּנֵי⁠כֶם֙ וְ⁠עַל־בְּנֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠נִצַּלְתֶּ֖ם 1 Each of these is a plural **you.** If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 3 22 h38j figs-quotemarks מִצְרָֽיִם 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh’s word starting in [verse 15](../03/15.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 4 intro kap5 0 # Exodus 04 General Notes

## Potential Translation Issues

### Quotations

* There is a difficult transition between [4:4](../04/04.md) and [4:5](../04/05.md) because the quotation stops in the middle to inject a bit of narrative. When it resumes in [4:5](../04/05.md),the sentence seems incomplete (even if merged directly with the quotation fragment in [4:4](../04/04.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])* Yahweh’s instructions to Moses are complex and there are up to four levels of quotations in this chapter. Translators will need to decide if some of these need to become indirect quotations (if that is possible in their language) and take great care to use the proper quotation markings in the proper location.

### Order of events

* The order of events is not always clear. In [4:14](../04/14.md) Yahweh tells Moses that Aaron is coming to meet him, but Yahweh telling Aaron to go meet Moses in the wilderness is not recorded until [4:27](../04/27.md).
* The timing of the events in [4:18](../18/.md)\-[4:27](../04/23.md), especially verse 18-19 and 27, in relation to the rest of the events of the chapter is unclear.

### Thus says Yahweh

The first of over 400 occurrences throughout the Old Testament of a standard phrase used to introduce direct, authoritative instruction from Yahweh occurs in [4:22](../04/22.md). It occurs ten times in the book of Exodus; nine of these are between chapters 4–11. It would be good for your team to have a standard way to translate this that makes it clear that the words that come next are directly from God. If your language has a standard way of introducing a new message from your leader that alerts the hearers that these are the words of the leader, that would be a good phrase to consider.

### Yahweh’s attempt to kill someone

The encounter recorded from [4:24](../04/24.md) to [4:26](../04/26.md) is one of the strangest and most difficult passages in the entire book. Difficulties include:

* To whom do the pronouns refer? Masculine pronouns are used throughout the section, but there are two possible antecedents, Moses (who is not named in the narrative) and Zipporah’s son (who was presumably also Moses’ son, but this is how he is referred to in this text. For why, see below on why Yahweh did this). Most commentators believe the pronouns refer to Moses.
* Circumcision is described in fairly graphic detail. Different cultures will need to approach this differently. Some may have terms for circumcision, while others may be comfortable translating mostly literally, and others will need to use euphemisms or other strategies to translate. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]])* The meaning of the phrase **a bridegroom of blood** (ULT) is unknown.
* Why did Yahweh attack Moses? Many commentators conclude that Moses had neglected to circumcise one of his sons because it displeased Zipporah, and Yahweh was holding Moses responsible before he returned to lead the Israelites (who should have been circumcised). When Zipporah repented by circumcising the son herself and touching the foreskin to Moses’ feet, Yahweh relents. These conclusions should help inform translation but should not be made explicit in the text.

## Study concepts in this chapter

### Moses does not understand

Although Moses believes in Yahweh, he does not trust in him. This is because Moses lacks understanding. Moses tries to believe the things he is asked to do are done by his own power. Yahweh is trying to get Moses to trust that these things are Yahweh’s doing. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])

### Children of God

This chapter introduces the concept that Israel, the people group, is the chosen people of God and God’s firstborn son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/elect]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/firstborn]])

### Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart

Scholars are divided over how to understand this statement. There is debate over whether Pharaoh plays an active or passive role in the hardening of his own heart. Translators should simply follow the text. In Exodus 4-14 there are ten statements that Yahweh hardens Pharaoh’s heart, and ten statements that Pharaoh hardens his own heart. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +EXO 4 intro kap5 0 # Exodus 04 General Notes

## Potential Translation Issues

### Quotations

* There is a difficult transition between [4:4](../04/04.md) and [4:5](../04/05.md) because the quotation stops in the middle to inject a bit of narrative. When it resumes in [4:5](../04/05.md),the sentence seems incomplete (even if merged directly with the quotation fragment in [4:4](../04/04.md)). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])* Yahweh’s instructions to Moses are complex and there are up to four levels of quotations in this chapter. Translators will need to decide if some of these need to become indirect quotations (if that is possible in their language) and take great care to use the proper quotation markings in the proper location.

### Order of events

* The order of events is not always clear. In [4:14](../04/14.md) Yahweh tells Moses that Aaron is coming to meet him, but Yahweh telling Aaron to go meet Moses in the wilderness is not recorded until [4:27](../04/27.md).
* The timing of the events in [4:18](../18/.md)\-[4:27](../04/27.md), especially verse 18-19 and 27, in relation to the rest of the events of the chapter is unclear.

### Thus says Yahweh

The first of over 400 occurrences throughout the Old Testament of a standard phrase used to introduce direct, authoritative instruction from Yahweh occurs in [4:22](../04/22.md). It occurs ten times in the book of Exodus; nine of these are between chapters 4–11. It would be good for your team to have a standard way to translate this that makes it clear that the words that come next are directly from God. If your language has a standard way of introducing a new message from your leader that alerts the hearers that these are the words of the leader, that would be a good phrase to consider.

### Yahweh’s attempt to kill someone

The encounter recorded from [4:24](../04/24.md) to [4:26](../04/26.md) is one of the strangest and most difficult passages in the entire book. Difficulties include:

* To whom do the pronouns refer? Masculine pronouns are used throughout the section, but there are two possible antecedents, Moses (who is not named in the narrative) and Zipporah’s son (who was presumably also Moses’ son, but this is how he is referred to in this text. For why, see below on why Yahweh did this). Most commentators believe the pronouns refer to Moses.
* Circumcision is described in fairly graphic detail. Different cultures will need to approach this differently. Some may have terms for circumcision, while others may be comfortable translating mostly literally, and others will need to use euphemisms or other strategies to translate. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/circumcise]])* The meaning of the phrase **a bridegroom of blood** (ULT) is unknown.
* Why did Yahweh attack Moses? Many commentators conclude that Moses had neglected to circumcise one of his sons because it displeased Zipporah, and Yahweh was holding Moses responsible before he returned to lead the Israelites (who should have been circumcised). When Zipporah repented by circumcising the son herself and touching the foreskin to Moses’ feet, Yahweh relents. These conclusions should help inform translation but should not be made explicit in the text.

## Study concepts in this chapter

### Moses does not understand

Although Moses believes in Yahweh, he does not trust in him. This is because Moses lacks understanding. Moses tries to believe the things he is asked to do are done by his own power. Yahweh is trying to get Moses to trust that these things are Yahweh’s doing. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])

### Children of God

This chapter introduces the concept that Israel, the people group, is the chosen people of God and God’s firstborn son. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/elect]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/peopleofgod]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/firstborn]])

### Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart

Scholars are divided over how to understand this statement. There is debate over whether Pharaoh plays an active or passive role in the hardening of his own heart. Translators should simply follow the text. In Exodus 4-14 there are ten statements that Yahweh hardens Pharaoh’s heart, and ten statements that Pharaoh hardens his own heart. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 4 1 j4yg וַ⁠יַּ֤עַן מֹשֶׁה֙ וַ⁠יֹּ֔אמֶר 1 if they do not believe Here, **answered and said** is a Hebrew expression which does not convey any extra information. Unless your language naturally uses a similar structure, it is better to translate one verb and omit the other. Alternate translation: “Moses answered” EXO 4 1 b3xv figs-quotemarks וְ⁠הֵן֙ לֹֽא־יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ לִ֔⁠י וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִשְׁמְע֖וּ בְּ⁠קֹלִ֑⁠י כִּ֣י יֹֽאמְר֔וּ לֹֽא־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֖י⁠ךָ יְהוָֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 1 neto figs-quotesinquotes לֹֽא־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֖י⁠ךָ יְהוָֽה 1 This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. However, you could translate it as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “that Yahweh has not appeared to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 4 1 fu2x וְ⁠הֵן֙ 1 This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “Listen to me.” -EXO 4 2 qmvk writing-participants אֵלָ֛י⁠ו…וַ⁠יֹּ֖אמֶר 1 “Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +EXO 4 2 qmvk writing-participants אֵלָ֛י⁠ו…וַ⁠יֹּ֖אמֶר 1 Alternate translation: “Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 4 2 r3f9 figs-quotemarks מ⁠זה בְ⁠יָדֶ֑⁠ךָ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 2 p8sg figs-quotemarks מַטֶּֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 3 jgir figs-quotemarks הַשְׁלִיכֵ֣⁠הוּ אַ֔רְצָ⁠ה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 3 zycd figs-metonymy מִ⁠פָּנָֽי⁠ו 1 Here, “face” figuratively represents the snake itself. Alternative translation: “from the snake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 4 4 g6bk וֶ⁠אֱחֹ֖ז בִּ⁠זְנָב֑⁠וֹ 1 take it by the tail “and pick it up by the tail” or “and grasp it by the tail” +EXO 4 4 g6bk וֶ⁠אֱחֹ֖ז בִּ⁠זְנָב֑⁠וֹ 1 take it by the tail Alternate translation: “and pick it up by the tail” or “and grasp it by the tail” EXO 4 4 mqpc figs-quotemarks שְׁלַח֙ יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֔ וֶ⁠אֱחֹ֖ז בִּ⁠זְנָב֑⁠וֹ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 4 bzmp grammar-connect-time-sequential שְׁלַח֙ יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֔ וֶ⁠אֱחֹ֖ז בִּ⁠זְנָב֑⁠וֹ 1 This direct quotation is interrupted by Moses obeying Yahweh. This is probably a tightly ordered sequence of events where Yahweh paused and then continued speaking immediately after Moses obeyed. The quote resumes in [verse 5](../04/05.md) and there is more discussion there about how to handle the resumption. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -EXO 4 4 m86n וַ⁠יְהִ֥י לְ⁠מַטֶּ֖ה 1 became a staff “and it turned into a rod” or “and it changed into a staff” +EXO 4 4 m86n וַ⁠יְהִ֥י לְ⁠מַטֶּ֖ה 1 became a staff Alternate translation: “and it turned into a rod” or “and it changed into a staff” EXO 4 5 l4tn figs-quotemarks לְמַ֣עַן יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֛י⁠ךָ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב 1 This continues the direct quotation from the first part of [verse 4](../04/04.md). It may be more natural to reorganize verses four and five to keep the quote together. If you rearrange like this, Moses picking up the snake/staff should come after the full quotation. However, it is better to do something similar to the UST, which restates that Yahweh is speaking and provides some implied directives from Yahweh to make a complete sentence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 5 m4fk figs-ellipsis לְמַ֣עַן יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־נִרְאָ֥ה אֵלֶ֛י⁠ךָ יְהוָ֖ה אֱלֹהֵ֣י אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם אֱלֹהֵ֧י אַבְרָהָ֛ם אֱלֹהֵ֥י יִצְחָ֖ק וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֥י יַעֲקֹֽב 1 This quote is not a complete sentence; the UST provides a clarification. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 4 5 zbfr writing-participants יַאֲמִ֔ינוּ…אֲבֹתָ֑⁠ם 1 These pronouns refer either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is a better option. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) @@ -315,32 +315,32 @@ EXO 4 6 ep52 figs-exclamations וְ⁠הִנֵּ֥ה 1 behold This word is used EXO 4 6 pw7g figs-simile כַּ⁠שָּֽׁלֶג 1 as white as snow The word **like** (ULT) or “as” (UST) here is used to compare how Moses’ hand looked. You may not have a word for snow in your language. If so, consider an alternative that describes something very white. You may need to make the whiteness explicit. Alternate translation: “like wool” or “that made it look white like the sand on the beach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 4 7 kv9r figs-quotemarks הָשֵׁ֤ב יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ אֶל־חֵיקֶ֔⁠ךָ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 7 prr9 figs-exclamations וְ⁠הִנֵּה 1 This word is used to create an exclamation, showing surprise. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) -EXO 4 8 q9qb figs-exclamations וְ⁠הָיָה֙ 1 Yahweh’s speech resumes here and continues through the end of [verse 9](../04/09.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 4 8 q9qb figs-quotemarks וְ⁠הָיָה֙ 1 Yahweh’s speech resumes here and continues through the end of [verse 9](../04/09.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 8 well figs-personification וְ⁠לֹ֣א יִשְׁמְע֔וּ לְ⁠קֹ֖ל הָ⁠אֹ֣ת הָ⁠רִאשׁ֑וֹן וְ⁠הֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ לְ⁠קֹ֖ל הָ⁠אֹ֥ת הָ⁠אַחֲרֽוֹן 1 Here the **sign**s are spoken of as if they had a **voice** with which they could speak. If this imagery would not make sense in your language, you may need to translate this in a way that makes explicit that the signs are meant to be proof that God sent Moses. Alternative translation: “and are not convinced that God has appeared to you by seeing the first sign, then they will be convinced by seeing the second sign.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 4 8 gxlg writing-participants יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ…יִשְׁמְע֔וּ…וְ⁠הֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ 1 These pronouns refer either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is the better option, but be sure to do the same as you did in [verse 5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 4 8 lsb3 לֹ֣א יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ…וְ⁠הֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ 1 pay attention “they do not acknowledge … then they will acknowledge” or “they do not accept … then they will accept” +EXO 4 8 lsb3 לֹ֣א יַאֲמִ֣ינוּ…וְ⁠הֶֽאֱמִ֔ינוּ 1 pay attention Alternate translation: “they do not acknowledge … then they will acknowledge” or “they do not accept … then they will accept” EXO 4 9 q82r writing-participants יַאֲמִ֡ינוּ…יִשְׁמְעוּ⁠ן֙ 1 These pronouns refer either to the Israelites or to the Israelite elders. God had instructed Moses to gather and speak to the elders; if you make this participant explicit, elders is the better option, but be sure to do the same as you did in [verse 5](../04/05.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 4 9 hlym figs-quotemarks וְ⁠הָי֥וּ לְ⁠דָ֖ם בַּ⁠יַּבָּֽשֶׁת 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Yahweh’s speech from the previous verse ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 10 aazp figs-quotemarks בִּ֣י אֲדֹנָ⁠י֒ לֹא֩ אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים אָנֹ֗כִי גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם גַּ֛ם מֵ⁠אָ֥ז דַּבֶּרְ⁠ךָ אֶל־עַבְדֶּ֑⁠ךָ כִּ֧י כְבַד־פֶּ֛ה וּ⁠כְבַ֥ד לָשׁ֖וֹן אָנֹֽכִי 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 10 t8i9 בִּ֣י 1 This word is used by a speaker to beg a superior to allow him to speak. Alternate translation: “Please” -EXO 4 10 w12a לֹא֩ אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים אָנֹ֗כִי גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 have never been eloquent “I have never been an excellent speaker” +EXO 4 10 w12a לֹא֩ אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים אָנֹ֗כִי גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 have never been eloquent Alternate translation: “I have never been an excellent speaker” EXO 4 10 opes אִ֨ישׁ דְּבָרִ֜ים 1 This expression means “a man who uses words well,” in other words, an eloquent man who can speak well and convincingly. EXO 4 10 pk0l figs-merism גַּ֤ם מִ⁠תְּמוֹל֙ גַּ֣ם מִ⁠שִּׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 This phrase simply means “in the past.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 4 10 wsl4 figs-123person עַבְדֶּ֑⁠ךָ 1 Moses refers to himself as God’s servant to lower his status before God (and perhaps by doing so to make his argument of inability stronger). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 4 10 bv64 figs-doublet כְבַד־פֶּ֛ה וּ⁠כְבַ֥ד לָשׁ֖וֹן 1 I am slow of speech and slow of tongue These phrases mean basically the same thing. Moses uses them to emphasize that he is not a good speaker. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -EXO 4 10 zm3y figs-metonymy לָשׁ֖וֹן 1 slow of tongue Here, **tongue** refers to Moses’ ability to speak. Alternate translation: “speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 4 10 zm3y figs-metonymy לָשׁ֖וֹן 1 slow of tongue Here, **tongue** refers to Moses’ ability to speak. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 11 xpgf figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of the [next verse](../04/12.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 11 ks2m figs-rquestion מִ֣י שָׂ֣ם פֶּה֮ לָֽ⁠אָדָם֒ 1 Who is it who made man’s mouth? Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he is the Creator who makes it possible for people to speak. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am the one who created the human mouth and the ability to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 4 11 e1y6 figs-rquestion מִֽי־יָשׂ֣וּם אִלֵּ֔ם א֣וֹ חֵרֵ֔שׁ א֥וֹ פִקֵּ֖חַ א֣וֹ עִוֵּ֑ר 1 Who makes a man mute or deaf or seeing or blind? Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he is the one who decides if people can speak and hear, and if they can see. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, make people able to speak, or hear, or to see, or to be blind!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 4 11 uq7j figs-rquestion הֲ⁠לֹ֥א אָנֹכִ֖י יְהוָֽה 1 Is it not I, Yahweh? Yahweh uses this question to emphasize that he alone makes these decisions. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am the one who does this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 4 12 kkr1 figs-metonymy וְ⁠אָנֹכִי֙ אֶֽהְיֶ֣ה עִם־פִּ֔י⁠ךָ 1 I will be with your mouth Here, **mouth** refers to Moses’ ability to speak. Alternate translation: “I will give you the ability to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 4 12 kkr1 figs-metonymy וְ⁠אָנֹכִי֙ אֶֽהְיֶ֣ה עִם־פִּ֔י⁠ךָ 1 I will be with your mouth Here, **mouth** refers to Moses’ ability to speak. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I will give you the ability to speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 12 kg7l figs-quotemarks תְּדַבֵּֽר 1 After this phrase, the direct quote from the previous verse ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 13 zy9m figs-quotemarks בִּ֣י אֲדֹנָ֑⁠י שְֽׁלַֽח־נָ֖א בְּ⁠יַד־תִּשְׁלָֽח 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 13 brer בִּ֣י 1 This word is used by a speaker to beg a superior to allow him to speak. See what you did in [verse 10](../04/10.md). Alternate translation: “Please” EXO 4 13 s8nl שְֽׁלַֽח־נָ֖א בְּ⁠יַד־תִּשְׁלָֽח 1 In translating this phrase, it is important to make clear that Moses is asking Yahweh to send someone else. Here he is not accepting Yahweh’s commission. EXO 4 13 y4a7 figs-synecdoche בְּ⁠יַד 1 This phrase means “by a person.” The figure is of a person taking Yahweh’s message in his hand to the Israelites and Pharaoh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 4 14 uy2v figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־אַ֨ף יְהוָ֜ה 1 This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh is angry. Alternate translation: “Yahweh became angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 4 14 ifax writing-participants וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙ 1 “and Yahweh said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +EXO 4 14 ifax writing-participants וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙ 1 Alternate translation: “and Yahweh said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 4 14 zn40 figs-quotemarks בְּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֗ה וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙ 1 After this phrase a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [verse 17](../04/17.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 14 okko figs-rquestion הֲ⁠לֹ֨א אַהֲרֹ֤ן אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙ הַ⁠לֵּוִ֔י 1 Yahweh uses this rhetorical question to suggest an alternative to Moses. Alternative translation: “I know you have a brother, Aaron the Levite.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 4 14 e0js translate-kinship אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 His **brother** Aaron was three years older than Moses (see [Exodus 7:7](../07/07.md)), which may be important for translating “brother” in some languages. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) @@ -350,7 +350,7 @@ EXO 4 14 ettp figs-go יֹצֵ֣א 1 Yahweh says Aaron is coming from Egypt to EXO 4 14 tfsa grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠שָׂמַ֥ח 1 Aaron will be glad because he sees Moses. Consider a conjunction or other form that expresses result as in the UST or alternative translation: “and because he sees you, he will have joy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 4 14 ew4h figs-metonymy בְּ⁠לִבּֽ⁠וֹ 1 he will be glad in his heart Here, **heart** refers to inner thoughts and emotions. If the heart is not a body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s thoughts and emotions, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 15 u97f figs-metaphor הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים 1 put the words to say into his mouth Words here are spoken of as if they were something that can be physically placed in a person’s mouth. Alternate translation: “the message that he is to repeat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 4 15 q9cf figs-metonymy וְ⁠אָנֹכִ֗י אֶֽהְיֶ֤ה עִם־פִּ֨י⁠ךָ֙ וְ⁠עִם־פִּ֔י⁠הוּ 1 I will be with your mouth The word **mouth** here represents Moses’ and Aaron’s choice of words. Alternate translation: “And I will be with you as you speak and with him as he speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 4 15 q9cf figs-metonymy וְ⁠אָנֹכִ֗י אֶֽהְיֶ֤ה עִם־פִּ֨י⁠ךָ֙ וְ⁠עִם־פִּ֔י⁠הוּ 1 I will be with your mouth The word **mouth** here represents Moses’ and Aaron’s choice of words. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And I will be with you as you speak and with him as he speaks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 15 v57x figs-youdual אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם…תַּעֲשֽׂוּ⁠ן 1 with his mouth These refer to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form if you have one or, if not, use a plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 4 16 mnsp figs-simile לְ⁠פֶ֔ה 1 This phrase compares Aaron to a mouth, because he will be the one to actually vocalize to the Israelites and Pharaoh what Moses tells him to say. Alternate translation: “the one to say what you tell him to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 4 16 gn5v figs-simile תִּֽהְיֶה־לּ֥⁠וֹ לֵֽ⁠אלֹהִֽים 1 you will be to him like me, God The word **like** here means Moses would represent the same authority to Aaron as God did to Moses. Alternate translation: “you will speak to Aaron with the same authority with which I speak to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) @@ -359,10 +359,10 @@ EXO 4 17 hm47 figs-explicit הַ⁠מַּטֶּ֥ה הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה 1 Yahweh EXO 4 18 j2ix writing-participants יֶ֣תֶר 1 Jethro is reintroduced as a participant in the narrative here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 4 18 cbop figs-go וַ⁠יֵּ֨לֶךְ 1 Because the setting has shifted back to Jethro’s home, some languages may need to use “come” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 4 18 b6mf translate-kinship חֹֽתְנ֗⁠וֹ 1 father-in-law This refers to the father of Moses’ wife. Some languages may use a different term for the husband’s or wife’s father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -EXO 4 18 wlit writing-participants וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר 1 “and Moses said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 4 18 g1h1 writing-participants ל⁠וֹ֙ 1 “to Jethro” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +EXO 4 18 wlit writing-participants וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר 1 Alternate translation: “and Moses said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +EXO 4 18 g1h1 writing-participants ל⁠וֹ֙ 1 Alternate translation: “to Jethro” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 4 18 uvqk figs-quotemarks אֵ֣לֲכָה נָּ֗א וְ⁠אָשׁ֨וּבָה֙ אֶל־אַחַ֣⁠י אֲשֶׁר־בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם וְ⁠אֶרְאֶ֖ה הַ⁠עוֹדָ֣⁠ם חַיִּ֑ים 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 4 18 urt0 figs-metonymy אַחַ֣⁠י 1 “my relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 4 18 urt0 figs-metonymy אַחַ֣⁠י 1 Here the tern **brothers** refers more broadly to all of Moses’ people group, those he is related to. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my relatives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 18 gq2g figs-idiom וְ⁠אֶרְאֶ֖ה הַ⁠עוֹדָ֣⁠ם 1 Later in the Bible we are told that Moses was in Midian for 40 years. Moses’ request may have been literal or an idiom that meant he wanted to know how they were doing. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 4 18 yay3 figs-explicit לֵ֥ךְ לְ⁠שָׁלֽוֹם 1 This is a phrase of assent and blessing. It may be necessary for some languages to explicitly add, “Yes,” to the beginning of Jethro’s response. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 4 18 i807 figs-quotemarks לֵ֥ךְ לְ⁠שָׁלֽוֹם 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) @@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ EXO 4 22 teyy figs-quotesinquotes כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This EXO 4 22 kud7 figs-quotemarks בְּנִ֥⁠י 1 This is the beginning of a third-level quotation that continues until the end of [4:23](../04/23.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening third-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. (If you chose to translate, “Thus says Yahweh,” as an indirect quote, this will be a second- level quotation.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 22 gr2d figs-metaphor בְּנִ֥⁠י בְכֹרִ֖⁠י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל׃ 1 Some languages may need to change the metaphor here into a simile. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 4 22 pt4n grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 Israel is my son The word **Israel** here represents all the people of Israel as a group. It is important to keep the singular reference to Israel as son, rather than change it to something like ‘the Israelites are my children,’ because God is making a particular contrast here between his son and Pharaoh’s son. Some languages may not be able to use “Israel” as a collective noun and may need to choose a translation like “the nation of Israel” or “the Israelite nation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 4 22 nbn7 figs-metonymy יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 The Israelite nation is often referred to simply by the name of the patriarch. For alternative translation see: [[rc://en/tn/help/exo/04/22/pt4n]] (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 4 22 nbn7 figs-metonymy יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 The Israelite nation is often referred to simply by the name of the patriarch. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. For alternative translation see: [[rc://en/tn/help/exo/04/22/pt4n]] (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 23 syar figs-quotemarks שַׁלַּ֤ח אֶת־בְּנִ⁠י֙ וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֵ֔⁠נִי 1 This is a fourth-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. (If you chose to translate “Thus says Yahweh” as an indirect quote, this will be a third-level quotation.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 23 yyuo figs-quotations וָ⁠אֹמַ֣ר אֵלֶ֗י⁠ךָ שַׁלַּ֤ח אֶת־בְּנִ⁠י֙ וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֵ֔⁠נִי וַ⁠תְּמָאֵ֖ן 1 The fourth-level quotation here may be a good one to translate as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the levels of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “and I told you to let my son go that he may serve me. But you have refused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 4 23 k7mh figs-metaphor בְּנִ⁠י֙ 1 you have refused to let him go Yahweh continues to metaphorically speak of Israel as **my son.** See what you did at [[rc://en/tn/help/exo/04/22/1od0]]. Alternative translation: “the Israelite nation which is like a son to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -406,7 +406,7 @@ EXO 4 25 l6sr figs-euphemism לְ⁠רַגְלָ֑י⁠ו 1 to his feet It is po EXO 4 25 iuzw figs-quotemarks כִּ֧י חֲתַן־דָּמִ֛ים אַתָּ֖ה לִֽ⁠י 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 4 25 b2t3 figs-metaphor כִּ֧י חֲתַן־דָּמִ֛ים אַתָּ֖ה לִֽ⁠י 1 you are a bridegroom to me by blood The meaning of this metaphor is unclear. It was probably a known saying in that culture. Alternate translation: “you are related to me by this blood” or “you are my husband because of blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 4 26 ceqk grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּ֖רֶף 1 As a result of Zipporah’s action. Consider a conjunction or other form that expresses result as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 4 26 o4zt writing-participants וַ⁠יִּ֖רֶף 1 “Yahweh relented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) +EXO 4 26 o4zt writing-participants וַ⁠יִּ֖רֶף 1 Alternate translation: “Yahweh relented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 4 26 k136 writing-participants מִמֶּ֑⁠נּוּ 1 As in [4:24](../04/24.md) this could mean either Moses or the son, but most commentators think it is still Moses. The UST uses “anyone” to preserve ambiguity. Alternative translation: “from Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 4 26 r8hj figs-quotations חֲתַ֥ן דָּמִ֖ים 1 This is a unique quotation because Zipporah probably does not speak again; rather, the quotation refers back to her statement in [4:25](../04/25.md). Your language may handle this sort of quotation in a special way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 4 26 abmg figs-quotemarks חֲתַ֥ן דָּמִ֖ים לַ⁠מּוּלֹֽת 1 It is not clear if the quotation includes **because of the circumcision** or if that is a comment explaining the quotation. Translations are divided in where they end the quotation, but most exclude **because of the circumcision** and it is best to follow that unless a locally respected translation includes it. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) @@ -418,12 +418,12 @@ EXO 4 27 tfn2 translate-symaction וַ⁠יִּשַּׁק 1 This was a traditio EXO 4 28 ad9x שְׁלָח֑⁠וֹ…צִוָּֽ⁠הוּ 1 These are a bit awkward to translate in English, so the UST adds more information. Other languages may not have the same difficulty. EXO 4 28 b429 writing-participants שְׁלָח֑⁠וֹ…צִוָּֽ⁠הוּ 1 he had sent him to say The words **he** refers to Yahweh, and **him** refers to Moses. Alternative translation: “Yahweh sent Moses … Yahweh commanded Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 4 29 y8o3 writing-newevent וַ⁠יֵּ֥לֶךְ 1 This begins a new event which you may need to mark in your translation with a transitional word like the UST’s “When.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 4 30 bm2x figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הָ⁠עָֽם 1 in the sight of the people This means he did the signs so they could see them. Alternative translation: “in their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 4 30 bm2x figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י הָ⁠עָֽם 1 in the sight of the people Here, **before the eyes** means he did the signs so they could see them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “in their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 4 30 x1v3 writing-participants הָ⁠עָֽם 1 Context suggests that **people** refers to the leaders gathered in [4:29](../04/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 4 31 glp2 writing-participants הָ⁠עָ֑ם 1 Context suggests that **people** refers to the leaders gathered in [4:29](../04/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) -EXO 4 31 q1er פָקַ֨ד…בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל 1 had observed the Israelites “saw the Israelites” or “was concerned about the Israelites” +EXO 4 31 q1er פָקַ֨ד…בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל 1 had observed the Israelites Alternate translation: “saw the Israelites” or “was concerned about the Israelites” EXO 4 31 g83a translate-symaction וַֽ⁠יִּקְּד֖וּ וַ⁠יִּֽשְׁתַּחֲוּֽוּ 1 they bowed their heads Alternative translations: “they bowed their heads in awe” or “they bowed down low in reverence.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -EXO 5 intro kea2 0 # Exodus 05 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### A slave’s work
The Egyptians were known for making their slaves do a lot of work. The Israelite slaves were forced to make a specific number of bricks every day. In this chapter, they were required not only to make these bricks, but also to gather straw, one of the raw materials, in order to make these bricks.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Let my people go”
This is a very important statement. Moses does not seek permission to leave, asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he demands that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.

### Titles
The leaders are given different titles in this chapter. The ULT uses “taskmasters” and “foremen.” Many cultures will not have these types of titles. Generic expressions like “Egyptian leaders” and “Hebrew leaders” may be necessary. +EXO 5 intro kea2 0 # Exodus 05 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### A slave’s work

The Egyptians were known for making their slaves do a lot of work. The Israelite slaves were forced to make a specific number of bricks every day. In this chapter, they were required not only to make these bricks, but also to gather straw, one of the raw materials, in order to make these bricks.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### “Let my people go”

This is a very important statement. Moses does not seek permission to leave, asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he demands that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.

### Titles

The leaders are given different titles in this chapter. The ULT uses “taskmasters” and “foremen.” Many cultures will not have these types of titles. Generic expressions like “Egyptian leaders” and “Hebrew leaders” may be necessary. EXO 5 1 q0zv writing-newevent וְ⁠אַחַ֗ר בָּ֚אוּ מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֖וּ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 This time phrase, **and afterward**, marks a transition in the narrative. Alternative translation: “After that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 5 1 q9kn grammar-connect-time-sequential וְ⁠אַחַ֗ר בָּ֚אוּ מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֖וּ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 After these things happened It is unclear how long Moses and Aaron waited until they went to see Pharoah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) EXO 5 1 cudx figs-go בָּ֚אוּ 1 In this instance, depending on how they have to set scenes, some languages may need to use “came in.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -436,16 +436,16 @@ EXO 5 2 v4c1 grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר 1 Why should EXO 5 2 fq6i figs-quotemarks מִ֤י יְהוָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶשְׁמַ֣ע בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ לְ⁠שַׁלַּ֖ח אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל לֹ֤א יָדַ֨עְתִּי֙ אֶת־יְהוָ֔ה וְ⁠גַ֥ם אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֹ֥א אֲשַׁלֵּֽחַ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 2 lqwt מִ֤י יְהוָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר אֶשְׁמַ֣ע בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ לְ⁠שַׁלַּ֖ח אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 This is not a rhetorical question, though Pharaoh may have spoken with contempt. Pharaoh would have considered himself a go. The Egyptians had several gods, and most people groups were assumed to have their own gods. Therefore, Pharaoh had truly not heard of Yahweh (who has just told his name to Moses). EXO 5 2 wpff grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל…יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Here the nation is spoken of as an individual. Alternative translation: “the nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 5 2 c653 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ 1 listen to his voice This represent the words God spoke. Alternate translation: “listen to what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 5 2 c653 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ 1 listen to his voice Here, **his voice** represent the words God spoke. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “listen to what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 5 2 ma6b וְ⁠גַ֥ם 1 This functions to strengthen Pharaoh’s statement about his decision. Alternative translation: “and most definitely” EXO 5 3 dt39 writing-participants וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמְר֔וּ 1 It may not make sense in all languages for multiple people to speak. Since Aaron was appointed as Moses’ spokesman, consider the alternative translation: “Aaron replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 5 3 ru1w figs-quotemarks אֱלֹהֵ֥י הָ⁠עִבְרִ֖ים נִקְרָ֣א עָלֵ֑י⁠נוּ נֵ֣לֲכָה נָּ֡א דֶּרֶךְ֩ שְׁלֹ֨שֶׁת יָמִ֜ים בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּ֗ר וְ⁠נִזְבְּחָה֙ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ פֶּ֨ן־יִפְגָּעֵ֔⁠נוּ בַּ⁠דֶּ֖בֶר א֥וֹ בֶ⁠חָֽרֶב 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 3 y9ip אֱלֹהֵ֥י הָ⁠עִבְרִ֖ים 1 God of the Hebrews This term is also used for Yahweh, the Israelites’ God. EXO 5 3 kclj figs-exclusive עָלֵ֑י⁠נוּ נֵ֣לֲכָה…וְ⁠נִזְבְּחָה֙…יִפְגָּעֵ֔⁠נוּ 1 Here, **us** (or “we” in UST) refers to the Hebrew people (the Israelites). It exclude Pharaoh and his people. Some languages may need to consider whether to use an inclusive or exclusive form. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) -EXO 5 3 gfs5 figs-metonymy בֶ⁠חָֽרֶב 1 or with the sword Here, **sword** represents war or an attack by enemies. Alternate translation: “cause our enemies to attack us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 5 3 gfs5 figs-metonymy בֶ⁠חָֽרֶב 1 or with the sword Here, **sword** represents war or an attack by enemies. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “cause our enemies to attack us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 5 4 cb7w figs-quotemarks לָ֚⁠מָּה מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן תַּפְרִ֥יעוּ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֖ם מִ⁠מַּֽעֲשָׂ֑י⁠ו לְכ֖וּ לְ⁠סִבְלֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 4 kl1i figs-rquestion לָ֚⁠מָּה מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן תַּפְרִ֥יעוּ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֖ם מִ⁠מַּֽעֲשָׂ֑י⁠ו 1 why are you taking the people from their work? Pharaoh uses this question to express his anger towards Moses and Aaron for taking the Israelites away from their work. Alternate translation: “Stop distracting the people from doing their work!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 5 4 fiw9 figs-rquestion לְכ֖וּ לְ⁠סִבְלֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 This **your** could refer to Moses and Aaron, or it could mean “all you Israelite people.” The second meaning is more likely. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) +EXO 5 4 fiw9 figs-youdual לְכ֖וּ לְ⁠סִבְלֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 This **your** could refer to Moses and Aaron, or it could mean “all you Israelite people.” The second meaning is more likely. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 5 5 nqbe figs-aside וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 It is unusual for the same speaker to be reintroduced like this. Some translations omit the repetition, but there is another option. This statement may be more connected to the next couple of verses, so it might be appropriate to make a minor break before this verse. Pharaoh may have been more commenting to himself, or he only thought this statement silently, and it led to his next actions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]]) EXO 5 5 todi הֵן 1 This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. EXO 5 5 c53k figs-youdual וְ⁠הִשְׁבַּתֶּ֥ם 1 Here, **you** means Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form (if you have one) or plural (if not) form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) @@ -467,7 +467,7 @@ EXO 5 10 zvxx כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 This is the same qu EXO 5 10 c12s figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֥וּ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֖ם לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 It might be helpful in some languages to translate **thus says Pharaoh** as an indirect quote so that his conveyed command is not a quote within a quote. Alternate translation: “and told the people that Pharaoh says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 5 10 mkom figs-quotesinquotes אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי 1 This is a the beginning of a second-level quotation that continues until the end of verse 11. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the start of a quotation within a quotation. However, you could also translate this as an indirect quote. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 5 10 ad73 grammar-connect-logic-contrast אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי נֹתֵ֥ן לָ⁠כֶ֖ם תֶּֽבֶן 1 The structure of this phrase and the one that opens [the next verse](../05/11.md) create a strong contrast between what **I** (Pharaoh) and **you** (you all, the Israelites) will do. Translate this in a way that emphasizes, if possible, the contrast between “I” and “you.” Alternative translation: “It is not I who will give you straw.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -EXO 5 10 si2e figs-metonymy אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי 1 Pharaoh does not physically give the Israelites straw. Rather, he had commanded his servants take straw that belongs to Pharaoh and give it to the Israelites. Now he told his servants to stop providing straw. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 5 10 si2e figs-metonymy אֵינֶ֛⁠נִּי נֹתֵ֥ן לָ⁠כֶ֖ם תֶּֽבֶן 1 Pharaoh uses **I** to refer to his ownership and commands. Pharaoh does not physically give the Israelites straw. Rather, he had commanded his servants take straw that belonged to Pharaoh and give it to the Israelites. Now he told his servants to stop providing straw. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “My servants will no longer give you my straw” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 5 10 gb4d figs-youdual לָ⁠כֶ֖ם 1 I will no longer give you **You**is plural and refers to the Israelite people. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 5 11 ewg6 grammar-connect-logic-contrast אַתֶּ֗ם לְכ֨וּ קְח֤וּ לָ⁠כֶם֙ תֶּ֔בֶן מֵ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר תִּמְצָ֑אוּ 1 The structure of this phrase serves as the opposing side of the contrast Pharaoh sets up in the last phrase. By explicitly using a pronoun with a command, he is emphasizing who will go get straw. If possible, translate this in a way that emphasizes the contrast between “I” and “you.” See [[rc://en/tn/help/exo/05/10/7zfp]] for more info. Alternative translation: “Rather, it is you yourselves who must go get straw from wherever you might find it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 5 11 xe4i figs-youdual אַתֶּ֗ם 1 you can find…your workload Here, **you** is plural and refers to the Israelite people. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) @@ -499,7 +499,7 @@ EXO 5 16 civf figs-quotemarks וּ⁠לְבֵנִ֛ים…עֲשׂ֑וּ 1 **Ma EXO 5 16 m0go וְ⁠הִנֵּ֧ה 1 This is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. EXO 5 16 xrly figs-activepassive עֲבָדֶ֛י⁠ךָ מֻכִּ֖ים 1 The text does not specify who beat the officers. It was probably either the taskmasters or someone the taskmasters ordered to beat the officers. If your language cannot express this with the passive, you can make the taskmasters the subject. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 5 16 ff2k figs-euphemism וְ⁠חָטָ֥את עַמֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 The Israelites are indirectly accusing Pharaoh of doing wrong. To translate this, consider polite or indirect ways of making accusations in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -EXO 5 16 l7sn וְ⁠חָטָ֥את 1 “but it is the wrong-doing of” +EXO 5 16 l7sn וְ⁠חָטָ֥את 1 Alternate translation: “but it is the wrong-doing of” EXO 5 17 cw5u figs-youdual אַתֶּ֖ם…אַתֶּ֣ם 1 These uses of **you** are plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 5 17 zlkc figs-exclamations נִרְפִּ֥ים אַתֶּ֖ם נִרְפִּ֑ים 1 Pharaoh repeats himself for emphasis. In your translation, make sure the idea of laziness or idleness is repeated or strengthened in a way that is natural. Alternative translation: “You are extremely lazy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]]) EXO 5 17 a8o2 figs-quotemarks נֵלְכָ֖ה נִזְבְּחָ֥ה לַֽ⁠יהוָֽה 1 Here the king is quoting another person’s speech. This is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) @@ -508,26 +508,26 @@ EXO 5 18 z6wt figs-youdual לָ⁠כֶ֑ם…תִּתֵּֽנּוּ 1 This mean EXO 5 19 x6pp grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּרְא֞וּ שֹֽׁטְרֵ֧י בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל אֹתָ֖⁠ם בְּ⁠רָ֣ע לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר לֹא־תִגְרְע֥וּ מִ⁠לִּבְנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם דְּבַר־י֥וֹם בְּ⁠יוֹמֽ⁠וֹ 1 You may need to reorder the events in this verse in your language to put the reason before the result. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 5 19 i3ot figs-quotemarks לֹא־תִגְרְע֥וּ מִ⁠לִּבְנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם דְּבַר־י֥וֹם בְּ⁠יוֹמֽ⁠וֹ 1 This is a direct quotation of what Pharaoh said. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation of another person’s speech. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 19 l9d2 figs-rpronouns אֹתָ֖⁠ם 1 when they were told Here the officers are both the subject and object, because they are thinking about their own situation. Different languages have different methods of marking this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) -EXO 5 19 j6f9 וַ⁠יִּרְא֞וּ…אֹתָ֖⁠ם בְּ⁠רָ֣ע לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר 1 “knew that they were in trouble, because the king said” or “perceived themselves in danger, because the king said” +EXO 5 19 j6f9 וַ⁠יִּרְא֞וּ…אֹתָ֖⁠ם בְּ⁠רָ֣ע לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר 1 Alternate translation: “knew that they were in trouble, because the king said” or “perceived themselves in danger, because the king said” EXO 5 20 ve3z writing-newevent וַֽ⁠יִּפְגְּעוּ֙ 1 palace A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 5 20 s9d2 writing-participants וַֽ⁠יִּפְגְּעוּ֙…לִ⁠קְרָאתָ֑⁠ם בְּ⁠צֵאתָ֖⁠ם 1 Here, **they** and **them** refer to the officers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 5 21 jsbv figs-quotemarks יֵ֧רֶא יְהוָ֛ה עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִשְׁפֹּ֑ט אֲשֶׁ֧ר הִבְאַשְׁתֶּ֣ם אֶת־רֵיחֵ֗⁠נוּ בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֤י פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י עֲבָדָ֔י⁠ו לָֽ⁠תֶת־חֶ֥רֶב בְּ⁠יָדָ֖⁠ם לְ⁠הָרְגֵֽ⁠נוּ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 21 kv0v יֵ֧רֶא יְהוָ֛ה עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִשְׁפֹּ֑ט 1 They used this form to curse Moses and Aaron. EXO 5 21 vfit figs-youdual עֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִשְׁפֹּ֑ט 1 **You** refers to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual or plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 5 21 j3zp figs-metaphor הִבְאַשְׁתֶּ֣ם אֶת־רֵיחֵ֗⁠נוּ בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֤י פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י עֲבָדָ֔י⁠ו 1 you have made us offensive The Egyptians responded to the Israelites the same way they would respond to a foul odor. Alternate translation: “you have caused Pharaoh and his servants to hate us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 5 21 d592 figs-metonymy חֶ֥רֶב בְּ⁠יָדָ֖⁠ם 1 have put a sword in their hand to kill us Here, **a sword into their hand** is a metonym for “a reason in their mind.” The Israelites are afraid that the Egyptians will feel that they are doing the right thing if they kill the Israelites, because Moses and Aaron are making demands to the king and because the Egyptians view the Israelites as lazy and dangerous. Alternate translation: “them a reason to think they would be right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 5 21 d592 figs-metonymy חֶ֥רֶב בְּ⁠יָדָ֖⁠ם 1 have put a sword in their hand to kill us Here, **a sword into their hand** is a metonym for “a reason in their mind.” The Israelites are afraid that the Egyptians will feel that they are doing the right thing if they kill the Israelites, because Moses and Aaron are making demands to the king and because the Egyptians view the Israelites as lazy and dangerous. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “them a reason to think they would be right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 5 22 pm0l figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּאמַ֑ר 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of the chapter. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 5 22 g4d5 figs-rquestion לָ֥⁠מָּה זֶּ֖ה שְׁלַחְתָּֽ⁠נִי 1 Lord, why have you caused trouble for this people? This question shows how disappointed Moses was that the Egyptians were treating the Israelites even more harshly now. He is expressing that he thinks God has caused the opposite of what he promised to happen. Alternate translation: “You sent me to rescue them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 5 23 v2k2 figs-metonymy בִּ⁠שְׁמֶ֔⁠ךָ 1 to speak to him in your name Here, **in your name** indicates that Moses delivers Yahweh’s message. Alternate translation: “for you” or “your message for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 5 23 v2k2 figs-metonymy בִּ⁠שְׁמֶ֔⁠ךָ 1 to speak to him in your name Here, **in your name** indicates that Moses delivers Yahweh’s message. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “for you” or “your message for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 5 23 fzir figs-idiom וְ⁠הַצֵּ֥ל לֹא־הִצַּ֖לְתָּ 1 In Hebrew, **rescued** is repeated for emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 5 23 ce6s figs-idiom עַמֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Moses that began in the [previous verse](../05/22.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 5 23 ce6s figs-quotemarks עַמֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Moses that began in the [previous verse](../05/22.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 intro we5k 0 # Exodus 06 General Notes

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Repetition of events:

Most of the content of this chapter is very similar to the events and dialogue in chapters 3-4. For consistency, translators should consult the decisions they made there while keeping in mind that this narrative is not exactly the same. Also, verses 10-12 and verses 28-30 are very similar to each other. These events are probably a recommissioning of Moses. After his first encounter with Pharaoh went very poorly and the Israelites seem to reject God, reminds Moses of God’s promises and power.

### Referring to God

A name for God (**Yahweh**) and a title for God (**El Shaddai**) are mentioned in this chapter ([6:2](../06/02.md)\-[6:3](../06/03.md)). The precise meaning of El Shaddai is not known, but most scholars think it means something like “almighty.” Translators who have worked on Genesis may find confusing the statement that Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob did not know Yahweh as the name of God.

### Other possible translation difficulties:

With little explanation, a large portion of the chapter is devoted to the genealogy of Moses and Aaron. Some of the people in the genealogy lived much longer than is normal for humans today. If translators are not familiar with the lengths of people’s lives in the early days of the world (as recorded in Genesis, especially chapter 5), this may cause confusion.

## Study concepts in this chapter

### Promised Land

According to the covenant Yahweh made with Abraham, Egypt is not the home of the Hebrew people. Their home is the Promised Land in Canaan. The people are to return home to their land. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promisedland]])

### “Let my people go”

This is a very important statement. Moses is not asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he is demanding that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.

### God and his people

In verse 7, note mention of a very important biblical theme of God being “your God” and the special relationship that his people have with him. EXO 6 1 ip5i figs-quotemarks עַתָּ֣ה תִרְאֶ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֖ה לְ⁠פַרְעֹ֑ה כִּ֣י בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ יְשַׁלְּחֵ֔⁠ם וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה יְגָרְשֵׁ֖⁠ם מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 1 lu95 grammar-connect-time-sequential עַתָּ֣ה 1 This refers to future events starting very soon. Alternative translation: “Starting soon” or “Very soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -EXO 6 1 ece6 figs-metonymy בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙…וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 my strong hand **Hand** is a metonym for power. Alternate translation: “by a strong power … and by a strong power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 6 1 utnn figs-metonymy בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙…וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 It is not clear in the text whose **hand** is referred to here. The options are: (1) Both refer to God’s hand (forcing Pharaoh’s actions), (2) Both refer to Pharaoh’s hand (forcing the Israelites out), (3) They don’t refer to the same person’s hand; the first refers to God’s and the second to Pharaoh’s. The UST has followed (1) which is the most common interpretation. Alternate translation: (1) “by my strong hand … and by my strong hand” or (2) “by his strong hand … and by his strong hand” or (3) “by my strong hand … and by his strong hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 6 1 ece6 figs-metonymy בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙…וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 my strong hand Here, **hand** is a metonym for power. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by a strong power … and by a strong power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 6 1 utnn figs-metonymy בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙…וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 It is not clear in the text whose **hand** is referred to here. The options include: (1) Both refer to God’s hand (forcing Pharaoh’s actions) (2) Both refer to Pharaoh’s hand (forcing the Israelites out) (3) They don’t refer to the same person’s hand; the first refers to God’s and the second to Pharaoh’s. The UST has followed (1) which is the most common interpretation. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: (1) “by my strong hand … and by my strong hand” (2) “by his strong hand … and by his strong hand” (3) “by my strong hand … and by his strong hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 6 1 vdno figs-parallelism כִּ֣י בְ⁠יָ֤ד חֲזָקָה֙ יְשַׁלְּחֵ֔⁠ם וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה יְגָרְשֵׁ֖⁠ם מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 These two phrases mean similar things. God says the same thing twice, in similar ways, for emphasis. You do not need to repeat both phrases in your translation if that might be confusing for your readers. Instead, if it would be clearer in your language, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “I will force him to let my people leave the land” However, there is a slight difference in meaning, and you could also choose to bring that out in your translation. The second phrase intensifies the first by portraying Pharaoh as not merely letting the Israelites go, but as forcing them to leave the land. Alternate translation: “I will force him to let them go, in fact, I will force him to force them to leave his land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 6 1 sdon מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 “from Egypt” +EXO 6 1 sdon מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “from Egypt” EXO 6 2 wse5 writing-newevent וַ⁠יְדַבֵּ֥ר אֱלֹהִ֖ים אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֑ה וַ⁠יֹּ֥אמֶר אֵלָ֖י⁠ו 1 There is a transition here. Before this verse, Yahweh was answering Moses’ question more directly. At the beginning of this verse, Yahweh is reintroduced as “God” because he begins to make a clarifying statement about himself and his relationship with the Israelites and their ancestors as well as his plans for the Israelites. Much of this section repeats what Yahweh has already told Moses. You may want to consider a section break before this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 6 2 kcty figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יְדַבֵּ֥ר אֱלֹהִ֖ים אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֑ה וַ⁠יֹּ֥אמֶר אֵלָ֖י⁠ו 1 After this phrase a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [verse 8](../06/08.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 3 l81y translate-transliterate בְּ⁠אֵ֣ל שַׁדָּ֑י 1 I appeared to Abraham, to Isaac, and to Jacob This is a title for God that many scholars think means “almighty.” You will need to decide if you will transliterate the term into your language or translate the meaning. Either approach has broad support. Alternative translation: “as the strongest God of all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]]) @@ -556,64 +556,64 @@ EXO 6 10 tpw4 לֵּ⁠אמֹֽר 1 This is used to mark the beginning of a di EXO 6 11 pi7a figs-quotemarks בֹּ֣א דַבֵּ֔ר אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֖ה מֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרָ֑יִם וִֽ⁠ישַׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 11 fxf2 figs-quotations וִֽ⁠ישַׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 This is an indirect quote; in some languages you will have to make it a direct quote. Be careful to change the third-person pronouns to second-person pronouns if you do this. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘You must let the sons of Israel go from your land’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 6 12 rsag figs-quotemarks הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔⁠י וְ⁠אֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣⁠נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה וַ⁠אֲנִ֖י עֲרַ֥ל שְׂפָתָֽיִם 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 6 12 h7o0 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by saying he **before the face of Yahweh** Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 6 12 h7o0 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by saying **before the face of Yahweh.** If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 6 12 iiui הֵ֤ן 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.” EXO 6 12 k7hl figs-rquestion הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔⁠י וְ⁠אֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣⁠נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 If the Israelites have not listened to me, why will Pharaoh listen to me, since I am not good at speaking? Moses asked this question hoping God would change His mind about using Moses. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “Since the Israelites did not listen to me, neither will Pharaoh!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 6 12 lj51 grammar-connect-logic-result הֵ֤ן בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ לֹֽא־שָׁמְע֣וּ אֵלַ֔⁠י וְ⁠אֵיךְ֙ יִשְׁמָעֵ֣⁠נִי פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 Moses is presenting a reasoned argument: since this, then probably that. Use a natural way of expressing such arguments in your language. Alternate translation: “Since the sons of Israel have not listened to me, why would you think Pharaoh would listen to me?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 6 12 k3br figs-metaphor וַ⁠אֲנִ֖י עֲרַ֥ל שְׂפָתָֽיִם 1 This is a metaphor that means that Moses was not a good speaker. It is somewhat crude; your translation of this phrase could convey that Moses spoke impolitely. Alternate translation: “And I do not speak well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 6 13 janr וַ⁠יְצַוֵּ⁠ם֙ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל וְ⁠אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֖ה 1 This phrase is somewhat difficult to translate. Here, **command** could also be translated as “charge” or “commission.” Another difficulty is knowing to whom the command is directed: is it to Moses and Aaron or are they to give the command to Pharaoh and the Israelites, thus **to** could be translated as “for” or “regarding” Alternate translations: “and he charged them regarding the sons of Israel and regarding Pharaoh” or “and he gave them a command for the sons of Israel and for Pharaoh” or “and he gave them a commission to the sons of Israel and to Pharaoh” -EXO 6 14 hh3z writing-background אֵ֖לֶּה 1 Verses 14-27 are background information. If your language marks background information with particular discourse features, use them here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -EXO 6 14 h195 figs-metonymy רָאשֵׁ֣י 1 the heads of their fathers’ houses Here, “heads” refers to the original ancestors of the clan. Alternate translation: “the ancestors of ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 6 14 hh3z writing-background 0 Verses 14-27 are background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +EXO 6 14 h195 figs-metonymy רָאשֵׁ֣י 1 the heads of their fathers’ houses Here, **heads** refers to the original ancestors of the clan. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the ancestors of ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 6 14 wv89 translate-names רְאוּבֵ֜ן…יִשְׂרָאֵ֗ל…חֲנ֤וֹךְ וּ⁠פַלּוּא֙ חֶצְר֣וֹן וְ⁠כַרְמִ֔י…רְאוּבֵֽן 1 Hanok, Pallu, Hezron, and Karmi These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 15 c1ni translate-names שִׁמְע֗וֹן יְמוּאֵ֨ל וְ⁠יָמִ֤ין וְ⁠אֹ֨הַד֙ וְ⁠יָכִ֣ין וְ⁠צֹ֔חַר וְ⁠שָׁא֖וּל…שִׁמְעֽוֹן 1 Jemuel, Jamin, Ohad, Jakin, Zohar, and Shaul These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 16 k64h translate-names לֵוִי֙…גֵּרְשׁ֕וֹן וּ⁠קְהָ֖ת וּ⁠מְרָרִ֑י…לֵוִ֔י 1 Gershon…Merari These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 6 16 m36f translate-numbers שֶׁ֧בַע וּ⁠שְׁלֹשִׁ֛ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת 1 137 years old “one hundred thirty-seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 6 16 m36f translate-numbers שֶׁ֧בַע וּ⁠שְׁלֹשִׁ֛ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת 1 137 years old Alternate translation: “one hundred thirty-seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 6 17 alm8 translate-names גֵרְשׁ֛וֹן לִבְנִ֥י וְ⁠שִׁמְעִ֖י 1 Amram…Uzziel These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 18 gzm3 translate-names קְהָ֔ת עַמְרָ֣ם וְ⁠יִצְהָ֔ר וְ⁠חֶבְר֖וֹן וְ⁠עֻזִּיאֵ֑ל…קְהָ֔ת 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 6 18 qu41 translate-numbers שָׁלֹ֧שׁ וּ⁠שְׁלֹשִׁ֛ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת 1 133 years old “one hundred thirty-three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 6 18 qu41 translate-numbers שָׁלֹ֧שׁ וּ⁠שְׁלֹשִׁ֛ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת 1 133 years old Alternate translation: “one hundred thirty-three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 6 19 p5sz translate-names מְרָרִ֖י מַחְלִ֣י וּ⁠מוּשִׁ֑י 1 These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 20 ni1l translate-names עַמְרָ֜ם…יוֹכֶ֤בֶד…אַהֲרֹ֖ן…מֹשֶׁ֑ה…עַמְרָ֔ם 1 These are the names of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 20 mh02 translate-kinship דֹּֽדָת⁠וֹ֙ 1 This word specifically means father’s sister. If your language uses a different term that is specific in this way, translators should use it. Alternate translation: see UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) -EXO 6 20 ti6q translate-numbers שֶׁ֧בַע וּ⁠שְׁלֹשִׁ֛ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת 1 137 years “one hundred thirty-seven years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 6 20 ti6q translate-numbers שֶׁ֧בַע וּ⁠שְׁלֹשִׁ֛ים וּ⁠מְאַ֖ת 1 137 years Alternate translation: “one hundred thirty-seven years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 6 21 f3yr translate-names יִצְהָ֑ר קֹ֥רַח וָ⁠נֶ֖פֶג וְ⁠זִכְרִֽי׃ 1 Izhar…Korah…Zichri These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 22 n7cl translate-names עֻזִּיאֵ֑ל מִֽישָׁאֵ֥ל וְ⁠אֶלְצָפָ֖ן וְ⁠סִתְרִֽי 1 Uzziel…Mishael…Sithri These are the names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 23 n1xh translate-names אַהֲרֹ֜ן…אֱלִישֶׁ֧בַע…עַמִּינָדָ֛ב…נַחְשׁ֖וֹן…נָדָב֙…אֲבִיה֔וּא…אֶלְעָזָ֖ר…אִֽיתָמָֽר 1 Nadab…Ithamar These are the names of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 24 rkz9 translate-names קֹ֔רַח אַסִּ֥יר וְ⁠אֶלְקָנָ֖ה וַ⁠אֲבִיאָסָ֑ף 1 These are the names of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 24 i6o7 translate-names הַ⁠קָּרְחִֽי 1 This was the name of the clan of people descended from Korah. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 6 25 zvg2 translate-names וְ⁠אֶלְעָזָ֨ר…אַהֲרֹ֜ן…פּֽוּטִיאֵל֙…פִּֽינְחָ֑ס 1 Phinehas These are the names of people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 6 25 fck8 figs-metonymy רָאשֵׁ֛י 1 These were the heads of the fathers’ houses The word “heads” here represents family leaders. Alternate translation: “These were the leaders of the families” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 6 26 dqm8 figs-quotemarks הֶ֔ם הוֹצִ֜יאוּ אֶת־בְּנֵ֧י יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל מֵ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרַ֖יִם עַל־צִבְאֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 This is a direct quotation of what Yahweh said earlier. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation of a previous remark. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 6 25 fck8 figs-metonymy רָאשֵׁ֛י 1 These were the heads of the fathers’ houses Here, **heads** here represents family leaders. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “These were the leaders of the families” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 6 26 dqm8 figs-quotemarks הוֹצִ֜יאוּ אֶת־בְּנֵ֧י יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל מֵ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרַ֖יִם עַל־צִבְאֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 This is a direct quotation of what Yahweh said earlier. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation of a previous remark. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 26 ft6y translate-unknown עַל־צִבְאֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 by their groups of fighting men The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people often organized into groups for war. Alternate translation: “by their groups” or “by their divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 6 27 o7xp grammar-connect-logic-goal לְ⁠הוֹצִ֥יא 1 This expresses their goal when they spoke to Pharaoh. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 6 28 xssl writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠י֨וֹם 1 This marks a transition from the record of the genealogy back to the narrative. Consider placing a section break at the start of this verse. Alternate translation: “One day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 6 29 i50m figs-quotemarks לֵּ⁠אמֹ֖ר 1 Here, **saying** is used to mark the beginning of a direct quotation. It can be omitted if unnatural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 29 vogm figs-quotemarks אֲנִ֣י יְהוָ֑ה דַּבֵּ֗ר אֶל־פַּרְעֹה֙ מֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרַ֔יִם אֵ֛ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֲנִ֖י דֹּבֵ֥ר אֵלֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 6 30 zyqs figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by saying he spoke before **the face of Yahweh**. See how you translated this in [6:12](../06/12.md) Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 6 30 zyqs figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of a person. There may also be a hint of impudence in Moses’ attitude that is conveyed by saying he spoke before **the face of Yahweh**. See how you translated this in [6:12](../06/12.md). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” or “boldly to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 6 30 nf3w figs-rquestion הֵ֤ן אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם וְ⁠אֵ֕יךְ יִשְׁמַ֥ע אֵלַ֖⁠י פַּרְעֹֽה 1 I am not good…why will Pharaoh listen to me? Moses asks this question hoping to change God’s mind about sending him. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “Behold, I am not a good speaker. Pharaoh will certainly not listen to me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 6 30 qvxf figs-quotemarks הֵ֤ן אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם וְ⁠אֵ֕יךְ יִשְׁמַ֥ע אֵלַ֖⁠י פַּרְעֹֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 6 30 y4g2 הֵ֤ן 1 **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation, or you can use an alternate translation like “as you know.” EXO 6 30 vzhq figs-metaphor אֲנִי֙ עֲרַ֣ל שְׂפָתַ֔יִם 1 This is a metaphor that means that Moses thought he was not a good speaker. It is somewhat crude, and your translation of this phrase could convey that Moses spoke impolitely. See how you translated this in [6:12](../06/12.md) Alternate translation: “And I always fail to speak well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 7 intro r9we 0 # Exodus 07 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Miracles
When Yahweh had Moses perform miracles, Pharaoh’s men were able to copy these miracles. It is unknown how they were able to do this, but since it was not from Yahweh, they were probably done under some evil power. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

### Pharaoh’s hard heart
Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard, strong, or heavy in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions.

### “Let my people go”
This is a very important statement. Moses is not asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he is demanding that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter include:
- Moses as God to Pharaoh
- A number of difficult terms: prophet, signs, wonders, miracles, sorcerers, magicians, magic, judgments, canals, reservoirs
- The use of “heart” to refer to the seat of will and emotion
- Up to third-level quotations

+EXO 7 intro r9we 0 # Exodus 07 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Miracles

When Yahweh had Moses perform miracles, Pharaoh’s men were able to copy these miracles. It is unknown how they were able to do this, but since it was not from Yahweh, they were probably done under some evil power. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/miracle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/evil]])

### Pharaoh’s hard heart

Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard, strong, or heavy in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions.

### “Let my people go”

This is a very important statement. Moses is not asking Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he is demanding that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people.

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter include:

- Moses as God to Pharaoh
- A number of difficult terms: prophet, signs, wonders, miracles, sorcerers, magicians, magic, judgments, canals, reservoirs
- The use of “heart” to refer to the seat of will and emotion
- Up to third-level quotations

EXO 7 1 r18p figs-quotemarks מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of [verse 5](../07/05.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 7 1 gy1t רְאֵ֛ה 1 This is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternative translation: “Listen carefully” EXO 7 1 dn1s figs-metaphor נְתַתִּ֥י⁠ךָ אֱלֹהִ֖ים לְ⁠פַרְעֹ֑ה 1 I have made you like a god This means Moses would represent the same authority to Pharaoh as God did to Moses. See how you translated the very similar phrase in [Exodus 4:16](../04/16.md), see [this note]([[rc://en/tn/help/exo/04/16/gn5v]]). Alternate translation:“I will cause Pharaoh to consider you as a god” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 7 1 z163 figs-metaphor וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֥ן אָחִ֖י⁠ךָ יִהְיֶ֥ה נְבִיאֶֽ⁠ךָ 1 This phrase compares Aaron to a prophet, because he will be the one actually to proclaim to Pharaoh what Moses tells him. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 4:16](../04/16.md), see [this note]([[rc://en/tn/help/exo/04/16/mnsp]]). Alternate translation:“and Aaron your brother will act like your prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 7 2 l44v translate-kinship אָחִ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) EXO 7 2 hdwo figs-quotations וְ⁠שִׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 Some languages may need to make this a direct quote. If so, be sure to mark it as a second-level quotation, subordinate to Yahweh’s main speech. Alternative translation: “saying, ‘You must let the sons of Israel go from your land’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) -EXO 7 2 p9p7 מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 “Egypt” +EXO 7 2 p9p7 מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 Alternate translation: “Egypt” EXO 7 3 adsq figs-metaphor אַקְשֶׁ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 This means God will make him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were hard. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 4:21](../04/21.md), but note the slightly different metaphor there: the heart being strong vs. hard. Alternate translation: “will cause Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 7 3 vtt1 figs-doublet אֶת־אֹתֹתַ֛⁠י וְ⁠אֶת־מוֹפְתַ֖⁠י 1 many signs…many wonders The words **signs** and **wonders** mean basically the same thing. God uses them to emphasize the greatness of what he will do in Egypt. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 7 4 ar0l figs-youdual אֲלֵ⁠כֶם֙ 1 Here, **you** means Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form (if you have one) or plural form (if not) here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 7 4 e2kv figs-metonymy יָדִ֖⁠י 1 put my hand on The words **my hand** represent God’s great power. Alternate translation: “my power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 7 4 b6h8 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 **On Egypt** refers to the land and everything in it, including people, animals, and plants. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 7 4 e2kv figs-metonymy יָדִ֖⁠י 1 put my hand on The words **my hand** represent God’s great power. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 7 4 b6h8 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Here, **on Egypt** refers to the land and everything in it, including people, animals, and plants. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 7 4 nilu אֶת־צִבְאֹתַ֜⁠י אֶת־עַמִּ֤⁠י בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ 1 These phrases refer to the Israelites in three different ways; they do not refer to three different groups of people. **Armies** is the same word translated “hosts” in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “the armies of my Israelite people” EXO 7 5 cg3n grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠יָדְע֤וּ מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ כִּֽי־אֲנִ֣י יְהוָ֔ה 1 This is the result of God rescuing the Israelites. In some languages the result will have to be placed after the cause, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 7 5 npd6 figs-metonymy בִּ⁠נְטֹתִ֥⁠י אֶת־יָדִ֖⁠י עַל 1 reach out with my hand on This phrase represents God’s great power. Alternate translation: “when I show my powerful acts against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 7 5 npd6 figs-metonymy בִּ⁠נְטֹתִ֥⁠י אֶת־יָדִ֖⁠י עַל 1 reach out with my hand on This phrase represents God’s great power. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “when I show my powerful acts against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 7 5 dguc grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠הוֹצֵאתִ֥י אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מִ⁠תּוֹכָֽ⁠ם 1 The goal of God’s powerful acts was to rescue the Israelites. Alternate translation: “so that I bring the sons of Israel out from their midst” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 7 5 d1hq figs-quotemarks מִ⁠תּוֹכָֽ⁠ם 1 At the end of this verse, the direct quote that began in [verse 1](../07/01.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. Note that the UST is reordered. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 7 6 iii5 figs-parallelism וַ⁠יַּ֥עַשׂ…עָשֽׂוּ 1 This repetition emphasizes the statement. Some languages can use repetition for emphasis; others will need to use another way of expressing emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 7 7 liir writing-background וּ⁠מֹשֶׁה֙ בֶּן־שְׁמֹנִ֣ים שָׁנָ֔ה וְ⁠אַֽהֲרֹ֔ן בֶּן־שָׁלֹ֥שׁ וּ⁠שְׁמֹנִ֖ים שָׁנָ֑ה בְּ⁠דַבְּרָ֖⁠ם אֶל־פַּרְעֹֽה 1 This verse contains background information. If your language marks background information with particular discourse features, use them here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) -EXO 7 7 g7i5 translate-numbers שְׁמֹנִ֣ים…שָׁלֹ֥שׁ וּ⁠שְׁמֹנִ֖ים 1 Aaron eighty-three years old “eighty … eighty-three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 7 7 liir writing-background 0 This verse contains background information. Use the natural form in your language for expressing background information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]]) +EXO 7 7 g7i5 translate-numbers שְׁמֹנִ֣ים…שָׁלֹ֥שׁ וּ⁠שְׁמֹנִ֖ים 1 Aaron eighty-three years old Alternate translation: “eighty … eighty-three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 7 7 zoou figs-idiom בֶּן־שְׁמֹנִ֣ים שָׁנָ֔ה…בֶּן־שָׁלֹ֥שׁ וּ⁠שְׁמֹנִ֖ים שָׁנָ֑ה 1 This is an idiom that refers to their age. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 7 8 pwph writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This verse marks the beginning of new sections, both major and minor. The major story of the plagues and Exodus itself unfolds from here until after Pharaoh’s army is defeated at the Red Sea. The next minor event is the miracle of the rods becoming snakes. Either by using particular forms that your language uses to mark transitions or by making a section break and heading, this transition should be marked for readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 7 8 p2kf לֵ⁠אמֹֽר 1 Here, **saying** marks the beginning of a direct quote and is often omitted in translation when such a construction is unnatural in the target language. See UST. @@ -624,12 +624,12 @@ EXO 7 9 r0tp figs-quotemarks קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַ EXO 7 9 p3xh לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר 1 Here, **saying** marks the beginning of a direct quote and is often omitted in translation when such a construction is unnatural in the target language. See UST. EXO 7 9 ms5o figs-youdual אֲלֵ⁠כֶ֤ם…לָ⁠כֶ֖ם 1 These are plural, referring to Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a dual form (if you have one) or plural form (if not) here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 7 9 kj8g figs-quotesinquotes תְּנ֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֖ם מוֹפֵ֑ת 1 This is a second-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer level. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -EXO 7 9 s5a9 קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְ⁠תַנִּֽין 1 This is a second-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer level. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -EXO 7 9 ogk9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה 1 Although **before the face of** still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Moses and Aaron are to actually do the miracles in front of Pharaoh so that Pharaoh can see them. Alternative translation: “so Pharaoh can see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 7 10 ehm9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֛ה וְ⁠לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י עֲבָדָ֖י⁠ו 1 This time, while **before the face of** still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Aaron actually does this right in front of Pharaoh and his servants so they could watch what happens. Alternative translation: “where Pharaoh and his servants could see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 7 9 s5a9 figs-quotesinquotes קַ֧ח אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠הַשְׁלֵ֥ךְ לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה יְהִ֥י לְ⁠תַנִּֽין 1 This is a second-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer level. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) +EXO 7 9 ogk9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵֽי־פַרְעֹ֖ה 1 Although **before the face of** still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Moses and Aaron are to actually do the miracles in front of Pharaoh so that Pharaoh can see them. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “so Pharaoh can see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 7 10 ehm9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י פַרְעֹ֛ה וְ⁠לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י עֲבָדָ֖י⁠ו 1 This time, while **before the face of** still has the standard figurative meaning of “in the presence of,” it is a much more literal use here. Aaron actually does this right in front of Pharaoh and his servants so they could watch what happens. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternative translation: “where Pharaoh and his servants could see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 7 10 kv93 עֲבָדָ֖י⁠ו 1 **His servants** probably refers to important advisors that would be in the king’s court, and does not refer common servants. EXO 7 11 mqde לַֽ⁠חֲכָמִ֖ים וְ⁠לַֽ⁠מְכַשְּׁפִ֑ים…חַרְטֻמֵּ֥י 1 Here, **magicians** probably describes both **wise men and sorcerers** rather than being a third group. See translationWords articles for each term. -EXO 7 12 u6np וַ⁠יִּבְלַ֥ע 1 swallowed up “ate up” or “devoured” +EXO 7 12 u6np וַ⁠יִּבְלַ֥ע 1 swallowed up Alternate translation: “ate up” or “devoured” EXO 7 12 m0kw grammar-connect-logic-contrast וַ⁠יִּבְלַ֥ע מַטֵּֽה־אַהֲרֹ֖ן אֶת־מַטֹּתָֽ⁠ם 1 This is a surprising and amusing twist which was not what the magicians expected. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 7 12 prnp figs-personification מַטֵּֽה…מַטֹּתָֽ⁠ם 1 It may be necessary in some languages to translate the word **staff** as “snake” since it had turned into one. This may be true if it would not make sense in the target language to say (because it is not living) that a staff swallowed or ate something. It may also be not make sense in some languages to speak of the snakes as staffs once transformed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 7 13 g42f figs-metaphor וַ⁠יֶּחֱזַק֙ לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 Pharaoh’s heart was hardened Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were **strong**. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 4:21](../04/21.md), but note that this is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn, as many others in this part of the narrative do). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -639,7 +639,7 @@ EXO 7 14 qiyx writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר 1 A new scene begins her EXO 7 14 t79b figs-quotemarks מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues to the end of [verse 18](../07/18.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 7 15 ecby הִנֵּה֙ 1 This is used to draw attention to information that follows. EXO 7 15 c5np יֹצֵ֣א הַ⁠מַּ֔יְמָ⁠ה 1 when he goes out to the water There are various theories as to what Pharaoh went down to the Nile to do, but there is no need to speculate or specify in the translation. -EXO 7 16 yqp7 וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 Say to him “Say to Pharaoh” +EXO 7 16 yqp7 וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 Say to him Alternate translation: “Say to Pharaoh” EXO 7 16 i4yt figs-quotemarks יְהוָ֞ה 1 This begins a second-level quotation that continues until the end of [verse 18](../07/18.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 7 16 uvxe figs-possession אֱלֹהֵ֤י הָ⁠עִבְרִים֙ 1 Yahweh claimed the Hebrews (Israelites) as his own. They worshiped him. This is a possessive of social relationship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 7 16 d16q figs-quotesinquotes שַׁלַּח֙ אֶת־עַמִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֻ֖⁠נִי בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּ֑ר וְ⁠הִנֵּ֥ה לֹא־שָׁמַ֖עְתָּ עַד־כֹּֽה 1 This is a third-level quotation. It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer levels. Alternatively, you could translate it as an indirect quotation as in the UST. If you do this, take care to adjust the pronoun person (second/third) as appropriate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -654,10 +654,10 @@ EXO 7 18 grwh figs-quotemarks מִן־הַ⁠יְאֹֽר 1 After this phrase, EXO 7 19 jima figs-quotemarks אֱמֹ֣ר אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֡ן קַ֣ח מַטְּ⁠ךָ֣ וּ⁠נְטֵֽה־יָדְ⁠ךָ֩ עַל־מֵימֵ֨י מִצְרַ֜יִם עַֽל־נַהֲרֹתָ֣⁠ם׀ עַל־יְאֹרֵי⁠הֶ֣ם וְ⁠עַל־אַגְמֵי⁠הֶ֗ם וְ⁠עַ֛ל כָּל־מִקְוֵ֥ה מֵימֵי⁠הֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִֽהְיוּ־דָ֑ם וְ⁠הָ֤יָה דָם֙ בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֣רֶץ מִצְרַ֔יִם וּ⁠בָ⁠עֵצִ֖ים וּ⁠בָ⁠אֲבָנִֽים 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 7 19 gwc2 figs-quotemarks קַ֣ח מַטְּ⁠ךָ֣ וּ⁠נְטֵֽה־יָדְ⁠ךָ֩ עַל־מֵימֵ֨י מִצְרַ֜יִם עַֽל־נַהֲרֹתָ֣⁠ם׀ עַל־יְאֹרֵי⁠הֶ֣ם וְ⁠עַל־אַגְמֵי⁠הֶ֗ם וְ⁠עַ֛ל כָּל־מִקְוֵ֥ה מֵימֵי⁠הֶ֖ם וְ⁠יִֽהְיוּ־דָ֑ם 1 This is a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 7 19 ysi7 figs-merism עַֽל־נַהֲרֹתָ֣⁠ם׀ עַל־יְאֹרֵי⁠הֶ֣ם וְ⁠עַל־אַגְמֵי⁠הֶ֗ם וְ⁠עַ֛ל כָּל־מִקְוֵ֥ה מֵימֵי⁠הֶ֖ם 1 This list is meant to expand on and reinforce the idea of all of the water in Egypt. You should translate the list in such a way that the locations of the blood are not limited to these specific places, but to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 7 19 wxp2 בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֣רֶץ 1 throughout all “in every part of” +EXO 7 19 wxp2 בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֣רֶץ 1 throughout all Alternate translation: “in every part of” EXO 7 19 msxp figs-possession וּ⁠בָ⁠עֵצִ֖ים וּ⁠בָ⁠אֲבָנִֽים 1 This possessive show composition. Alternate translation: “and in containers made from wood and in containers made from stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 7 20 zy18 figs-explicit בַּ⁠יְאֹ֔ר 1 in the river The name of the river may be made explicit. Alternate translation: “in the Nile River” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 7 20 mj8v figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה וּ⁠לְ⁠עֵינֵ֖י עֲבָדָ֑י⁠ו 1 This means in their sight. Alternate translation: “in the sight of Pharaoh and his servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 7 20 mj8v figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה וּ⁠לְ⁠עֵינֵ֖י עֲבָדָ֑י⁠ו 1 This means in their sight. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the sight of Pharaoh and his servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 7 22 n7kr translate-unknown חַרְטֻמֵּ֥י 1 See how you translated this term in [7:11](../07/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 7 22 qdc7 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יֶּחֱזַ֤ק לֵב־פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 Pharaoh’s heart was hardened Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:13](../07/13.md). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 7 22 sbic כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה 1 Because Yahweh’s prediction precedes this event, some languages may need to place the reference to that prediction before the statement that it was fulfilled. See UST and how you handled this in [7:13](../07/13.md) where the same sentence appears. @@ -665,8 +665,8 @@ EXO 7 23 atdk figs-idiom וְ⁠לֹא־שָׁ֥ת לִבּ֖⁠וֹ גַּם־ EXO 7 24 m6zn figs-hyperbole כָל־מִצְרַ֛יִם 1 All the Egyptians The word **all** here is a generalization that means “many.” At the least, the upper class would have sent their slaves to dig for them. Alternate translation: “Many of the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 7 25 bn5h writing-newevent וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֖א 1 A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 7 25 gjyb figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּמָּלֵ֖א שִׁבְעַ֣ת יָמִ֑ים 1 This is an idiom meaning seven days later. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 7 25 dg56 translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֣ת 1 “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 8 intro ww1y 0 # Exodus 08 General Notes
## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

- the exact insects in plagues 3-4 are not certain, translation teams will need to decide what insects they can use for each
- Pharaoh makes his own heart heavy, that is, he determines to be proud and resist Yahweh twice in this chapter
- the Israelites’ sacrifices are spoken of as an abomination to the Egyptians but it is not specified how or why that is


### Lifting up the hand and staff:
In the next few chapters God will instruct Moses and/or Aaron to raise his hand and/or staff. The narrative will then record that whoever will raise his hand and/or staff. The instruction and the action do not always match exactly. God may say raise your hand and the narrative may say Moses raised his staff. These are not conflicting reports. Translators should understand that the hand and the staff are always understood together. They are one unit and they can both be mentioned or they can be mentioned separately. In each case, Moses or Aaron raises his hand with the staff in it. This fact is merely expressed differently.


## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pharaoh’s hard heart
Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.

### Let my people go

This is a very important statement. Moses does not ask Pharaoh for permission to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he is demanding that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people. +EXO 7 25 dg56 translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֣ת 1 Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 8 intro ww1y 0 # Exodus 08 General Notes

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

- the exact insects in plagues 3-4 are not certain, translation teams will need to decide what insects they can use for each
- Pharaoh makes his own heart heavy, that is, he determines to be proud and resist Yahweh twice in this chapter
- the Israelites’ sacrifices are spoken of as an abomination to the Egyptians but it is not specified how or why that is


### Lifting up the hand and staff:

In the next few chapters God will instruct Moses and/or Aaron to raise his hand and/or staff. The narrative will then record that whoever will raise his hand and/or staff. The instruction and the action do not always match exactly. God may say raise your hand and the narrative may say Moses raised his staff. These are not conflicting reports. Translators should understand that the hand and the staff are always understood together. They are one unit and they can both be mentioned or they can be mentioned separately. In each case, Moses or Aaron raises his hand with the staff in it. This fact is merely expressed differently.


## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pharaoh’s hard heart

Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.

### Let my people go

This is a very important statement. Moses does not ask Pharaoh for permission to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he is demanding that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people. EXO 8 1 tf7b figs-quotations בֹּ֖א 1 This begins a direct quote that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 8 1 v6ll כֹּ֚ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה 1 This quotation form is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. EXO 8 1 lndc figs-quotesinquotes כֹּ֚ה 1 This begins a second-level quote that continues until the end of [verse 4](../08/04.md). It should be marked in some manner that distinguishes it from the outer level. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) @@ -674,7 +674,7 @@ EXO 8 1 kure figs-quotesinquotes שַׁלַּ֥ח 1 This begins a third-level q EXO 8 2 s7y1 figs-ellipsis לְ⁠שַׁלֵּ֑חַ 1 What Pharaoh is to **let go** is not specified, but “my people” or “the Israelites” are the understood object. Alternate translation: “to let the Israelites go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 8 2 aei8 הִנֵּ֣ה 1 **Behold** is an interjection meant to focus the attention of the listener on what comes next, in this case a dire warning. Alternate translation: “look out” EXO 8 3 vgby figs-merism בְּ⁠בֵיתֶ֔⁠ךָ וּ⁠בַ⁠חֲדַ֥ר מִשְׁכָּבְ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠עַל־מִטָּתֶ֑⁠ךָ וּ⁠בְ⁠בֵ֤ית עֲבָדֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ וּ⁠בְ⁠תַנּוּרֶ֖י⁠ךָ וּ⁠בְ⁠מִשְׁאֲרוֹתֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 This long list means “everywhere in Egypt.” It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that the frogs’ location is not limited to these specific places. The list should imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 8 4 okok figs-quotemarks 1 Up to three levels of quotes end at the end of this verse. Depending on how many levels you chose to mark as direct quotations, you should indicate them ending here with closing second-level (and third-level) quotation mark(s) or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations and quotations within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) +EXO 8 4 okok figs-quotemarks Up to three levels of quotes end at the end of this verse. Depending on how many levels you chose to mark as direct quotations, you should indicate them ending here with closing second-level (and third-level) quotation mark(s) or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations and quotations within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 8 5 wll3 figs-quotemarks אֱמֹ֣ר אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֗ן נְטֵ֤ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠מַטֶּ֔⁠ךָ עַל־הַ֨⁠נְּהָרֹ֔ת עַל־הַ⁠יְאֹרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־הָ⁠אֲגַמִּ֑ים וְ⁠הַ֥עַל אֶת־הַֽ⁠צְפַרְדְּעִ֖ים עַל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level opening and closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 8 5 ley6 figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮ אֶל־מֹשֶׁה֒ אֱמֹ֣ר אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֗ן 1 It may be helpful to translate this first quotation indirectly to avoid having two levels of quotations in this verse. Alternate translation: “And Yahweh told Moses to say to Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 8 5 dqsb figs-quotemarks נְטֵ֤ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֙ בְּ⁠מַטֶּ֔⁠ךָ עַל־הַ֨⁠נְּהָרֹ֔ת עַל־הַ⁠יְאֹרִ֖ים וְ⁠עַל־הָ⁠אֲגַמִּ֑ים וְ⁠הַ֥עַל אֶת־הַֽ⁠צְפַרְדְּעִ֖ים עַל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This is a second-level direct quotation (if you chose to make **Say to Aaron** a direct quotation). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level opening and closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation inside a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) @@ -687,7 +687,7 @@ EXO 8 6 drmg figs-explicit וַ⁠תַּ֨עַל֙ 1 [Verse 3](../08/03.md) has EXO 8 6 rxze grammar-collectivenouns הַ⁠צְּפַרְדֵּ֔עַ 1 There were so many frogs that the text uses the collective singular. If that does not make sense in your language, you may simply use the plural as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 8 6 j83d figs-metaphor וַ⁠תַּ֨עַל֙ הַ⁠צְּפַרְדֵּ֔עַ וַ⁠תְּכַ֖ס אֶת־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This means that there were frogs everywhere in Egypt. The image is like that of a blanket smothering the entire country. (Or more directly, like one giant, nation-sized frog sitting on top of the entire land). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 8 7 n02y translate-unknown הַֽ⁠חֲרְטֻמִּ֖ים בְּ⁠לָטֵי⁠הֶ֑ם 1 See how you translated these in [7:11](../07/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 8 8 mhn3 וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֨א פַרְעֹ֜ה לְ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה וּֽ⁠לְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֗ן 1 Then Pharaoh called for Moses and Aaron “Then Pharaoh sent for Moses and Aaron” or “And the king summoned Moses and Aaron” +EXO 8 8 mhn3 וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֨א פַרְעֹ֜ה לְ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה וּֽ⁠לְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֗ן 1 Then Pharaoh called for Moses and Aaron Alternate translation: “Then Pharaoh sent for Moses and Aaron” or “And the king summoned Moses and Aaron” EXO 8 8 nfe3 figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֨א פַרְעֹ֜ה לְ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה וּֽ⁠לְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֗ן וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר֙ 1 It is implied that Moses and Aaron came between being called and Pharaoh speaking to them. You may need to make that explicit. Alternate translation: “And Pharaoh called for Moses and for Aaron, and after they came he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 8 8 pc7e figs-quotemarks הַעְתִּ֣ירוּ אֶל־יְהוָ֔ה וְ⁠יָסֵר֙ הַֽ⁠צְפַרְדְּעִ֔ים מִמֶּ֖⁠נִּי וּ⁠מֵֽ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י וַ⁠אֲשַׁלְּחָה֙ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֔ם וְ⁠יִזְבְּח֖וּ לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 8 8 tx3t figs-quotations אֶל־יְהוָ֔ה וְ⁠יָסֵר֙ הַֽ⁠צְפַרְדְּעִ֔ים מִמֶּ֖⁠נִּי וּ⁠מֵֽ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י 1 In some languages you may have to make the content of Pharaoh’s prayer to Yahweh a direct quote. Note that this will make it a second-level quotation and you will need to mark it with second-level quotation markings if your language uses them. Alternate translation: “to Yahweh saying, ‘Please take away the frogs from Pharaoh and from his people.’ ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -701,12 +701,12 @@ EXO 8 10 ofw3 grammar-connect-logic-goal לְמַ֣עַן תֵּדַ֔ע כִּ EXO 8 10 d1wp figs-exclusive אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 Here, **our** refers to the Israelites’ God, excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 8 11 zwqo figs-merism מִמְּ⁠ךָ֙ וּ⁠מִ⁠בָּ֣תֶּ֔י⁠ךָ וּ⁠מֵ⁠עֲבָדֶ֖י⁠ךָ וּ⁠מֵ⁠עַמֶּ֑⁠ךָ 1 This list means “from everywhere and everyone” (in Egypt). This shows that the end of the plague will be as complete as its extent. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics, but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 8 11 ttyr figs-quotemarks רַ֥ק בַּ⁠יְאֹ֖ר תִּשָּׁאַֽרְנָה 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Moses that started in the previous verse ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 8 12 jjv2 שָׂ֥ם 1 “Yahweh had set” +EXO 8 12 jjv2 שָׂ֥ם 1 Alternate translation: “Yahweh had set” EXO 8 12 nxyi writing-newevent וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֥א מֹשֶׁ֛ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֖ן 1 A minor scene shift occurs here and may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 8 13 rwe1 figs-merism מִן־הַ⁠בָּתִּ֥ים מִן־הַ⁠חֲצֵרֹ֖ת וּ⁠מִן־הַ⁠שָּׂדֹֽת 1 This list means “from everywhere” (in Egypt). This makes clear that there was a complete end of the plague. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics, but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 8 14 a03n חֳמָרִ֣ם חֳמָרִ֑ם 1 Literally, “piles piles.” Repetition is used in Hebrew to emphasize how many or how big they were. EXO 8 15 lv2n figs-metaphor וְ⁠הַכְבֵּד֙ אֶת־לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 he hardened his heart Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he made his own heart heavy. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:14](../07/14.md), but note, there, that the state of Pharaoh’s heart is reported, whereas here, Pharaoh makes his own heart heavy. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh determined to be defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 8 15 b47h כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה 1 just as Yahweh had said that he would do “just as Yahweh had said Pharaoh would do” +EXO 8 15 b47h כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה 1 just as Yahweh had said that he would do Alternate translation: “just as Yahweh had said Pharaoh would do” EXO 8 16 cikq writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮ 1 A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. This is the start of the third plague sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 8 16 s5gh figs-quotations אֱמֹר֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן נְטֵ֣ה אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֔ וְ⁠הַ֖ךְ אֶת־עֲפַ֣ר הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ וְ⁠הָיָ֥ה לְ⁠כִנִּ֖ם בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. However, it may be helpful to translate one of the parts as an indirect quotation so that you do not have to have two levels of quotations here. Alternate translation: see UST or “[And Yahweh told Moses] to tell Aaron” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 8 16 xh9e figs-quotemarks נְטֵ֣ה אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֔ וְ⁠הַ֖ךְ אֶת־עֲפַ֣ר הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ וְ⁠הָיָ֥ה לְ⁠כִנִּ֖ם בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This is a second-level direct quotation (unless you translated one portion as an indirect quotation). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level (or first-level) quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation (within a quotation). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) @@ -726,7 +726,7 @@ EXO 8 19 lk2k figs-synecdoche אֶצְבַּ֥ע אֱלֹהִ֖ים הִ֑וא 1 EXO 8 19 z1w2 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יֶּחֱזַ֤ק לֵב־פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 Pharaoh’s heart was hardened Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:13](../07/13.md). This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 8 19 rp3i writing-participants אֲלֵ⁠הֶ֔ם 1 It is possible that **them** refers to the magicians here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 8 19 gjgg כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֖ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָֽה 1 Some languages will need to place this before the thing that Yahweh predicted, as in the UST. -EXO 8 20 j5n8 וְ⁠הִתְיַצֵּב֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 stand in front of Pharaoh “and present yourself to Pharaoh” +EXO 8 20 j5n8 וְ⁠הִתְיַצֵּב֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 stand in front of Pharaoh Alternate translation: “and present yourself to Pharaoh” EXO 8 20 frfn writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה 1 A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. This is the beginning of the fourth plague sequence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 8 20 syv2 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 Here, **face** figuratively means the presence of a person. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 8 20 vnym הִנֵּ֖ה 1 This is used to draw attention to important information that is next. In some languages and translation styles it will make the most sense to omit this, as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully” @@ -737,7 +737,7 @@ EXO 8 20 fgl3 grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠יַֽעַבְדֻֽ⁠נִי 1 EXO 8 21 hitq הִנְ⁠נִי֩ 1 This is used to draw attention to important information that is next. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully” EXO 8 21 hwcl grammar-collectivenouns הֶ⁠עָרֹ֑ב…הֶ֣⁠עָרֹ֔ב 1 This is a collective singular noun that refers to a great number of swarming, biting insects. Alternate translation: “swarms of flies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 8 21 l5z7 translate-unknown הֶ⁠עָרֹ֑ב…הֶ֣⁠עָרֹ֔ב 1 These are probably the large common flies that bother humans and livestock. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 8 21 foli figs-merism בְּ⁠ךָ֜ וּ⁠בַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֧י⁠ךָ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֛ וּ⁠בְ⁠בָתֶּ֖י⁠ךָ…בָּתֵּ֤י מִצְרַ֨יִם֙…וְ⁠גַ֥ם הָ⁠אֲדָמָ֖ה 1 This long list means, “everywhere in Egypt.” It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that the flies’ location is not limited to these specific places, but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]] +EXO 8 21 foli figs-merism בְּ⁠ךָ֜ וּ⁠בַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֧י⁠ךָ וּֽ⁠בְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֛ וּ⁠בְ⁠בָתֶּ֖י⁠ךָ…בָּתֵּ֤י מִצְרַ֨יִם֙…וְ⁠גַ֥ם הָ⁠אֲדָמָ֖ה 1 This long list means, “everywhere in Egypt.” It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that the flies’ location is not limited to these specific places, but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 8 22 mv8w grammar-connect-logic-result לְ⁠בִלְתִּ֥י הֱיֽוֹת־שָׁ֖ם עָרֹ֑ב 1 General Information: This is the result of Yahweh treating the land of Goshen differently. Alternate translation: “by keeping the swarm from there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 8 22 apum grammar-collectivenouns עָרֹ֑ב 1 This is a collective singular noun that refers to a great number of swarming, biting insects. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md). Alternate translation: “swarms of flies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 8 22 qb9h translate-unknown עָרֹ֑ב 1 These are probably the large common flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -751,7 +751,7 @@ EXO 8 23 tb24 figs-quotemarks לְ⁠מָחָ֥ר יִהְיֶ֖ה הָ⁠אֹ֥ EXO 8 24 gw3c figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֤עַשׂ יְהוָה֙ כֵּ֔ן 1 The UST supplies a brief sentence filling in the gap between Yahweh’s command to Moses and the onset of the plague. Some languages will need something like that to make the progression of events clear. Alternate translation: “Moses obeyed the instructions Yahweh gave him and Pharaoh responded as Yahweh had said he would. And Yahweh did so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 8 24 lk5s writing-newevent וַ⁠יַּ֤עַשׂ יְהוָה֙ כֵּ֔ן 1 There is a minor scene change here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 8 24 ut0f translate-unknown עָרֹ֣ב 1 There are probably the large common flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 8 24 dg0k translate-go וַ⁠יָּבֹא֙ 1 Some languages may need to translate this as going rather than coming. Alternate translation: “and … went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) +EXO 8 24 dg0k figs-go וַ⁠יָּבֹא֙ 1 Some languages may need to translate this as going rather than coming. Alternate translation: “and … went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 8 24 tmcf figs-merism בֵּ֥יתָ⁠ה פַרְעֹ֖ה וּ⁠בֵ֣ית עֲבָדָ֑י⁠ו 1 This means “to everyone everywhere” (in Egypt) as made explicit in the next statement. This makes clear that the insects were throughout the land. You should translate this in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics, but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 8 24 nd6e figs-activepassive תִּשָּׁחֵ֥ת הָ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠פְּנֵ֥י הֶ⁠עָרֹֽב 1 the land was ruined because of the swarms of flies This can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: “The swarms of flies devastated the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 8 24 ngue figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֥י הֶ⁠עָרֹֽב 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of the insects. Alternate translation: “because the insects were everywhere” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -762,12 +762,12 @@ EXO 8 26 tvnj figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מֹשֶׁ֗ה 1 After th EXO 8 26 e9wk תּוֹעֲבַ֣ת מִצְרַ֔יִם…תּוֹעֲבַ֥ת מִצְרַ֛יִם 1 We do not know what about their sacrificing was an **abomination** to the Egyptians. The same term is used in Genesis 43:32 and 46:34 to describe the Egyptians’ feelings about eating with Hebrews and about the Hebrew profession of shepherding, respectively. Translators should attempt to convey the strong negative feelings that would be provoked in the Egyptians without speculating as to the cause. EXO 8 26 idkt figs-exclusive נִזְבַּ֖ח…אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ…נִזְבַּ֞ח…יִסְקְלֻֽ⁠נוּ 1 Here, **we, our,** and **us** should all be translated as exclusive (if your language makes that distinction). Pharaoh and the Egyptians are not included. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 8 26 i7dy figs-rquestion וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִסְקְלֻֽ⁠נוּ 1 will they not stone us? Moses asks this question to show Pharaoh that the Egyptians would not allow the Israelites to worship Yahweh by making a sacrifice repugnant to them. Alternate translation: “they will certainly stone us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 8 26 gy7d figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֖ם 1 right before their eyes This is a figurative way of saying “where they can see.” Alternate translation: “in their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 8 26 gy7d figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֖ם 1 right before their eyes This is a figurative way of saying “where they can see.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in their sight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 8 27 ju3u figs-exclusive נֵלֵ֖ךְ…וְ⁠זָבַ֨חְנוּ֙…אֱלֹהֵ֔י⁠נוּ…אֵלֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 Here, **we, our,** and **us** should all be translated as exclusive (if your language makes that distinction). Pharaoh and his people are not included. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 8 27 clc3 figs-quotemarks אֵלֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 After this phrase, the direct quote of Moses’ argument to Pharaoh ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 8 28 p3pd figs-quotemarks אָנֹכִ֞י אֲשַׁלַּ֤ח אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙ וּ⁠זְבַחְתֶּ֞ם לַ⁠יהוָ֤ה אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠כֶם֙ בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּ֔ר רַ֛ק הַרְחֵ֥ק לֹא־תַרְחִ֖יקוּ לָ⁠לֶ֑כֶת הַעְתִּ֖ירוּ בַּעֲדִֽ⁠י 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 8 28 qxes figs-youdual אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙…אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠כֶם֙…תַרְחִ֖יקוּ 1 If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 8 28 mla2 אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙ 1 “the Israelites” +EXO 8 28 mla2 אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙ 1 Alternate translation: “the Israelites” EXO 8 28 hnud figs-idiom הַרְחֵ֥ק…תַרְחִ֖יקוּ 1 In Hebrew, **far** is repeated to emphasize (with **not**) that they are absolutely not to go too far. If your language does not use repeating words like this, express the emphasis in another way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 8 29 kgkx figs-quotemarks הִנֵּ֨ה אָנֹכִ֜י יוֹצֵ֤א מֵֽ⁠עִמָּ⁠ךְ֙ וְ⁠הַעְתַּרְתִּ֣י אֶל־יְהוָ֔ה וְ⁠סָ֣ר הֶ⁠עָרֹ֗ב מִ⁠פַּרְעֹ֛ה מֵ⁠עֲבָדָ֥י⁠ו וּ⁠מֵ⁠עַמּ֖⁠וֹ מָחָ֑ר רַ֗ק אַל־יֹסֵ֤ף פַּרְעֹה֙ הָתֵ֔ל לְ⁠בִלְתִּי֙ שַׁלַּ֣ח אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֔ם לִ⁠זְבֹּ֖חַ לַֽ⁠יהוָֽה 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 8 29 h94t הִנֵּ֨ה 1 This is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. If there is not a good way to translate this term in your language, this term can be omitted from the translation. Alternate translation: “Know this” @@ -775,7 +775,7 @@ EXO 8 29 jirm translate-unknown הֶ⁠עָרֹ֗ב 1 These are probably the la EXO 8 29 yvcl figs-123person מִ⁠פַּרְעֹ֛ה…פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 Moses may be using the third person to refer to Pharaoh to show respect, because the king appears to be relenting. If use of the third person is not a way of showing respect in your culture or is not a valid way of addressing an individual at all, you may need to change the form. Alternate translation: “from you … you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 8 29 la3z figs-merism מִ⁠פַּרְעֹ֛ה מֵ⁠עֲבָדָ֥י⁠ו וּ⁠מֵ⁠עַמּ֖⁠וֹ 1 This list means “from everywhere and everyone” (in Egypt). This shows that the end of the plague will be as complete as its extent. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics, but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 8 29 bf85 figs-doublenegatives אַל־יֹסֵ֤ף פַּרְעֹה֙ הָתֵ֔ל לְ⁠בִלְתִּי֙ שַׁלַּ֣ח אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 you must not deal deceitfully any more by not letting our people go This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “you must begin to deal truthfully with us and let our people go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -EXO 8 29 hh4q רַ֗ק אַל־יֹסֵ֤ף פַּרְעֹה֙ הָתֵ֔ל 1 But you must not deal deceitfully “But you must not deceive us” or “But you must not lie to us” +EXO 8 29 hh4q רַ֗ק אַל־יֹסֵ֤ף פַּרְעֹה֙ הָתֵ֔ל 1 But you must not deal deceitfully Alternate translation: “But you must not deceive us” or “But you must not lie to us” EXO 8 30 tull writing-newevent וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֥א מֹשֶׁ֖ה 1 There is a minor scene shift here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 8 31 rj50 translate-unknown הֶ⁠עָרֹ֔ב 1 These are probably the large common flies that bother humans and livestock. See how you translated this in [8:21](../08/21.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 8 31 iyhn figs-merism מִ⁠פַּרְעֹ֖ה מֵ⁠עֲבָדָ֣י⁠ו וּ⁠מֵ⁠עַמּ֑⁠וֹ 1 This list means “from everyone and everywhere” (in Egypt). This makes clear that there was a complete end of the plague. You should translate the list in such a way that it does not convey limitation to these specifics, but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) @@ -787,32 +787,31 @@ EXO 9 1 p1oj figs-quotemarks אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a dire EXO 9 1 maqa figs-quotemarks אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 After this phrase, a second-level direct quote begins which continues to the end of [9:4](../09/04.md) and contains one more level of quotes. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 9 1 fo4o figs-quotesinquotes וְ⁠דִבַּרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֔ים 1 You may want to translate the quote beginning with **Thus says Yahweh** as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the levels of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “and say to him that Yahweh, the God of the Hebrews, says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 9 1 w0lg כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ 1 This quotation form is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. -EXO 9 1 x4bd עַמִּ֖⁠י 1 “the Israelites” +EXO 9 1 x4bd עַמִּ֖⁠י 1 Alternate translation: “the Israelites” EXO 9 2 l7ld figs-parallelism כִּ֛י אִם־מָאֵ֥ן אַתָּ֖ה לְ⁠שַׁלֵּ֑חַ וְ⁠עוֹדְ⁠ךָ֖ מַחֲזִ֥יק בָּֽ⁠ם 1 if you refuse to let them go, if you still keep them back These two phrases mean basically the same thing. Alternate translation: “If you continue refusing to let them go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 9 3 fltr הִנֵּ֨ה 1 This is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternate translation: “look out” -EXO 9 3 ume2 figs-metonymy יַד־יְהוָ֜ה הוֹיָ֗ה בְּ⁠מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֙ 1 then Yahweh’s hand will be on your cattle Here, **hand** represents Yahweh’s power to afflict their animals with disease. Alternate translation: “Then the power of Yahweh will afflict your livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 9 3 ume2 figs-metonymy יַד־יְהוָ֜ה הוֹיָ֗ה בְּ⁠מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֙ 1 then Yahweh’s hand will be on your cattle Here, **hand** represents Yahweh’s power to afflict their animals with disease. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Then the power of Yahweh will afflict your livestock” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 3 cjt9 figs-123person יַד־יְהוָ֜ה 1 This is part of the reported speech that Yahweh wants Moses to say to Pharaoh. Therefore, you could change the third person **the hand of Yahweh** to first person if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “My hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 9 3 tn3z figs-youdual בְּ⁠מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֙ 1 on your cattle While the word **your** here is not plural, the next verse shows that it refers to all the people of Egypt who owned cattle. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, you may want to use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 9 3 v8ur figs-merism בַּ⁠סּוּסִ֤ים בַּֽ⁠חֲמֹרִים֙ בַּ⁠גְּמַלִּ֔ים בַּ⁠בָּקָ֖ר וּ⁠בַ⁠צֹּ֑אן 1 This long list is meant to reinforce the universal effects of the coming plague. It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that it is not limiting, but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]] +EXO 9 3 v8ur figs-merism בַּ⁠סּוּסִ֤ים בַּֽ⁠חֲמֹרִים֙ בַּ⁠גְּמַלִּ֔ים בַּ⁠בָּקָ֖ר וּ⁠בַ⁠צֹּ֑אן 1 This long list is meant to reinforce the universal effects of the coming plague. It is presented in this way for rhetorical effect, that is, to convince Pharaoh of how bad this plague will be so he will obey. You should translate the list in such a way that it is not limiting, but is understood to imply universality. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 9 3 m1fk grammar-collectivenouns בַּ⁠בָּקָ֖ר…וּ⁠בַ⁠צֹּ֑אן 1 These (**cattle** and **flock**) are collective singular nouns which refer to groups of animals. Alternate translation: “on your bulls and cows and on your sheep and goats” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 9 3 f5sr figs-metaphor כָּבֵ֥ד 1 Here, the plague is spoken of as if it weighed a lot. This means it would be very bad. Alternate translation: “severe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 9 4 x12r figs-123person יְהוָ֔ה 1 This is part of the reported speech that Yahweh wants Moses to say to Pharaoh. Therefore you could change the third person **Yahweh** to first person if it would be clearer in your language. You should do the same as you did in the [previous verse](../09/04.md). Alternate translation: “I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 9 4 c9ob figs-possession מִקְנֵ֣ה יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל…מִקְנֵ֣ה מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 This means the livestock owned by the two groups. Alternate translation: “the livestock that the Israelites own … the livestock that the Egyptians own” or “the livestock belonging to the Israelites … the livestock belonging to the Egyptians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 9 4 lp3t figs-metonymy יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Israel’s cattle Here, **Israel** refers to the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 9 4 lp3t figs-metonymy יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Israel’s cattle Here, **Israel** refers to the Israelites. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 4 u60c grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Here, **Israel** is used as a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 9 4 fs25 figs-metonymy מִקְנֵ֣ה מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Egypt’s cattle Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptians. Alternate translation: “the livestock of the Egyptian people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 9 4 k5rx דָּבָֽר 1 “animal” -EXO 9 4 xk5d מִ⁠כָּל־לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 “which belongs to any of the sons of Israel” +EXO 9 4 fs25 figs-metonymy מִקְנֵ֣ה מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 Egypt’s cattle Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptians. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the livestock of the Egyptian people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 9 4 k5rx דָּבָֽר 1 Alternate translation: “animal” +EXO 9 4 xk5d מִ⁠כָּל־לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Alternate translation: “which belongs to any of the sons of Israel” EXO 9 4 cbsz figs-quotemarks וְ⁠לֹ֥א יָמ֛וּת מִ⁠כָּל־לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל דָּבָֽר 1 After this phrase, the three levels of direct quotes of Yahweh ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with closing quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of levels of quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 9 5 vqz2 וַ⁠יָּ֥שֶׂם יְהוָ֖ה מוֹעֵ֣ד 1 fixed a time “And Yahweh made an appointed time” +EXO 9 5 vqz2 וַ⁠יָּ֥שֶׂם יְהוָ֖ה מוֹעֵ֣ד 1 fixed a time Alternate translation: “And Yahweh made an appointed time” EXO 9 5 w8gk לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר 1 This marks the beginning of a direct quotation. It can be omitted in translation if your language does not use a similar form. However, in this sentence it is the only verb related to speech, so you may need to translate it similarly to the way the UST does.
. EXO 9 5 dh4h figs-quotemarks מָחָ֗ר יַעֲשֶׂ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה הַ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠זֶּ֖ה בָּ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 9 5 pxb1 figs-123person יְהוָ֛ה 1 Yahweh is speaking here. Therefore you could change the third person **Yahweh** to first person if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 9 6 gt3n figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּ֨עַשׂ יְהוָ֜ה 1 It is implied that Moses went and spoke to Pharaoh as directed. You may need to make that explicit in your translation in some languages. Alternate translation: “Moses did as Yahweh had commanded. And Yahweh did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 9 6 cx5i figs-hyperbole כֹּ֖ל מִקְנֵ֣ה 1 All the cattle of Egypt died This is exaggerated to emphasize the seriousness of the event. There were still some animals alive that were afflicted by later plagues. However, it may be best to translate this with the word “all.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -EXO 9 6 iccg מִקְנֵ֣ה מִצְרָ֑יִם…וּ⁠מִ⁠מִּקְנֵ֥ה בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 This means the livestock owned by the two groups. Alternate translation: “the livestock that the Egyptians owned … But from the livestock that the Israelites owned” or “the livestock belonging to the Egyptians … But from the livestock belonging to the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 9 6 gy7t figs-metonymy מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 cattle of Egypt Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptians. Alternate translation: “the Egyptian peoples’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 9 6 mboa figs-metonymy בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 Here, **sons** figuratively means descendants. The phrase speaks of all of the Israelites as descendants of the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the Israelite peoples’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 9 6 iccg figs-possession מִקְנֵ֣ה מִצְרָ֑יִם…וּ⁠מִ⁠מִּקְנֵ֥ה בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 This means the livestock owned by the two groups. Alternate translation: “the livestock that the Egyptians owned … But from the livestock that the Israelites owned” or “the livestock belonging to the Egyptians … But from the livestock belonging to the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) +EXO 9 6 gy7t figs-metonymy מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 cattle of Egypt Here, **Egypt** refers to the Egyptians. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the Egyptian peoples’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 6 i0bl figs-litotes וּ⁠מִ⁠מִּקְנֵ֥ה בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֹא־מֵ֥ת אֶחָֽד 1 This emphatic negative statement could be stated positively. Alternate translation: “But every single one of the Israelites’ livestock lived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) EXO 9 7 md84 וְ⁠הִנֵּ֗ה 1 behold **Behold** is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Alternate translation: “and listen” EXO 9 7 rtny figs-litotes לֹא־מֵ֛ת מִ⁠מִּקְנֵ֥ה יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל עַד־אֶחָ֑ד 1 This emphatic negative statement could be stated positively. Alternate translation: “every single one of the Israelites’ livestock was alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) @@ -822,21 +821,21 @@ EXO 9 7 j51j figs-metaphor וַ⁠יִּכְבַּד֙ לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ EXO 9 8 brm6 writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָה֮ 1 kiln A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. This is the start of the sixth plague scene. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 9 8 ik2i figs-quotemarks אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹן֒ 1 After this phrase a direct quote begins. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 9 8 luhg figs-youdual לָ⁠כֶם֙…חָפְנֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 **You** and **your** refer to both Moses and Aaron. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use dual form (if you have one) or plural forms (if not) here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 9 8 ydar קְח֤וּ לָ⁠כֶם֙ מְלֹ֣א חָפְנֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 “Each of you fill both your hands with” -EXO 9 8 u5wn פִּ֖יחַ כִּבְשָׁ֑ן 1 “ash from a furnace” or “ash produced by a furnace” +EXO 9 8 ydar קְח֤וּ לָ⁠כֶם֙ מְלֹ֣א חָפְנֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “Each of you fill both your hands with” +EXO 9 8 u5wn פִּ֖יחַ כִּבְשָׁ֑ן 1 Alternate translation: “ash from a furnace” or “ash produced by a furnace” EXO 9 8 gk7f grammar-collectivenouns פִּ֖יחַ 1 Here, **ash** is singular. For some languages you may need to make it plural as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 9 8 gu1v הַ⁠שָּׁמַ֖יְמָ⁠ה 1 “toward the sky” -EXO 9 8 p795 figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י פַרְעֹֽה 1 This means in his sight. Alternate translation: “in the sight of Pharaoh” or “so Pharaoh sees it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 9 8 gu1v הַ⁠שָּׁמַ֖יְמָ⁠ה 1 Alternate translation: “toward the sky” +EXO 9 8 p795 figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י פַרְעֹֽה 1 This means in his sight. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the sight of Pharaoh” or “so Pharaoh sees it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 9 d2v3 translate-unknown לִ⁠שְׁחִ֥ין פֹּרֵ֛חַ אֲבַעְבֻּעֹ֖ת 1 fine This is a condition where the skin is red and hot, the skin breaks, and blood and puss come out. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 9 9 jlh0 figs-gendernotations הָ⁠אָדָ֜ם 1 This includes women and children. Alternate translation: “people” or “mankind” or “humans” See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -EXO 9 9 eyc7 הַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֗ה 1 to break out on “wild and domestic animals” or “wild animals and livestock” +EXO 9 9 eyc7 הַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֗ה 1 to break out on Alternate translation: “wild and domestic animals” or “wild animals and livestock” EXO 9 10 wdcn grammar-collectivenouns פִּ֣יחַ 1 Here, **ash** is singular. For some languages you may need to make it plural as in the UST. See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 9 10 dp3l פִּ֣יחַ הַ⁠כִּבְשָׁ֗ן 1 “ash from a furnace” or “ash produced by a furnace” See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). +EXO 9 10 dp3l פִּ֣יחַ הַ⁠כִּבְשָׁ֗ן 1 Alternate translation: “ash from a furnace” or “ash produced by a furnace” See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). EXO 9 10 ufpn figs-metonymy וַ⁠יַּֽעַמְדוּ֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֔ה 1 Here, **before the face of** means in Pharaoh’s presence. Alternate translation: “and stood in Pharaoh’s presence” See how you translated a similar statement in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 9 10 xmbw הַ⁠שָּׁמָ֑יְמָ⁠ה 1 “toward the sky” See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). +EXO 9 10 xmbw הַ⁠שָּׁמָ֑יְמָ⁠ה 1 Alternate translation: “toward the sky” See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). EXO 9 10 jhzb translate-unknown שְׁחִין֙ אֲבַעְבֻּעֹ֔ת פֹּרֵ֕חַ 1 This is a condition where the skin is red and hot, the skin breaks, and blood and puss come out. See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 9 10 rdo3 figs-gendernotations בָּ⁠אָדָ֖ם 1 This includes women and children. See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -EXO 9 10 iftm וּ⁠בַ⁠בְּהֵמָֽה 1 “and on wild and domestic animals” or “and on wild animals and livestock” See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). +EXO 9 10 iftm וּ⁠בַ⁠בְּהֵמָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “and on wild and domestic animals” or “and on wild animals and livestock” See how you translated this in the [previous verse](../09/09.md). EXO 9 11 jrc3 הַֽ⁠חַרְטֻמִּ֗ים…בַּֽ⁠חֲרְטֻמִּ֖ם 1 See how you translated **magicians** in [7:11](../07/11.md). EXO 9 11 dxsx figs-metonymy לַ⁠עֲמֹ֛ד לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י מֹשֶׁ֖ה 1 Here, **before the face of** means in Moses’ presence. Alternate translation: “to stand in Moses’ presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 11 k9uu figs-metaphor מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י הַ⁠שְּׁחִ֑ין 1 Here, **the face of** means the existence of or perhaps pain from the boils. Alternate translation: “because of the boils” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -854,22 +853,22 @@ EXO 9 15 f056 grammar-connect-condition-contrary כִּ֤י עַתָּה֙ שׁ EXO 9 15 a3l8 figs-metonymy שָׁלַ֣חְתִּי אֶת־יָדִ֔⁠י וָ⁠אַ֥ךְ אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֛ 1 reached out with my hand and attacked you Here, **my hand** refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “I could have used my power to attack you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 15 hgfx figs-metaphor וָ⁠אַ֥ךְ אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֛ וְ⁠אֶֽת־עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ בַּ⁠דָּ֑בֶר 1 Here, **a plague** is spoken about as if it were something that could be used to hit someone. Alternate translation: “and caused you and your people to suffer from a plague” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 9 16 kwks grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠אוּלָ֗ם בַּ⁠עֲב֥וּר זֹאת֙ הֶעֱמַדְתִּ֔י⁠ךָ בַּ⁠עֲב֖וּר הַרְאֹתְ⁠ךָ֣ אֶת־כֹּחִ֑⁠י וּ⁠לְמַ֛עַן סַפֵּ֥ר שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ׃ 1 The statements from **to show** to the end of the verse are Yahweh’s stated goals, and thus, his reasons for not yet destroying Egypt and Pharaoh. You will need to translate, **However, for this reason I appointed you: in order** in a way that connects with the [previous verse](../09/15.md) in an action-goal manner. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -EXO 9 16 nec7 figs-metonymy וּ⁠לְמַ֛עַן סַפֵּ֥ר שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 so that my name may be proclaimed throughout all the earth Here, **my name** represents Yahweh’s reputation. Alternate translation: “and so that people everywhere will know who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 9 16 nec7 figs-metonymy וּ⁠לְמַ֛עַן סַפֵּ֥ר שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 so that my name may be proclaimed throughout all the earth Here, **my name** represents Yahweh’s reputation. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and so that people everywhere will know who I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 17 h3ed figs-metaphor עוֹדְ⁠ךָ֖ מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל בְּ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י 1 lifting yourself up against my people Pharaoh’s opposition to letting the Israelites go to worship Yahweh is spoken of as if he were raising himself up as a barrier to them. Alternate translation: “You are still blocking my people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 9 17 sdav figs-rpronouns מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל 1 Here, Pharaoh fills two different roles in the sentence. Different languages have different methods of marking this. Translate this in a way that conveys that Pharaoh is making Pharaoh (himself) proud (metaphorically expressed as Pharaoh making Pharaoh (himself) the obstacle in the Israelites’ way to freedom as discussed in the previous note.) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 9 17 r1wv מִסְתּוֹלֵ֣ל 1 Here, **you** is Pharaoh. EXO 9 17 zfhb בְּ⁠עַמִּ֑⁠י 1 Here, **my people** are the Israelites. -EXO 9 18 fnd2 הִנְ⁠נִ֤י 1 Listen! “Pay attention to the important thing I am about to tell you” -EXO 9 18 pmy0 כָּ⁠עֵ֣ת…אֲשֶׁ֨ר לֹא־הָיָ֤ה כָמֹ֨⁠הוּ֙ 1 “at this time. There has never been anything like this” -EXO 9 19 fduj figs-metonymy שְׁלַ֤ח הָעֵז֙ אֶֽת־מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֔ וְ⁠אֵ֛ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֥ר לְ⁠ךָ֖ בַּ⁠שָּׂדֶ֑ה 1 The form of address here is singular; Moses is speaking directly to Pharaoh. However, the next two verses make it clear that Pharaoh’s servants heard and understood this warning to be for them as well. In this sense Pharaoh represents the Egyptians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 9 19 eo52 וְ⁠יָרַ֧ד עֲלֵ⁠הֶ֛ם הַ⁠בָּרָ֖ד 1 “the hail will come down on” +EXO 9 18 fnd2 הִנְ⁠נִ֤י 1 Listen! Alternate translation: “Pay attention to the important thing I am about to tell you” +EXO 9 18 pmy0 כָּ⁠עֵ֣ת…אֲשֶׁ֨ר לֹא־הָיָ֤ה כָמֹ֨⁠הוּ֙ 1 Alternate translation: “at this time. There has never been anything like this” +EXO 9 19 fduj figs-metonymy שְׁלַ֤ח הָעֵז֙ אֶֽת־מִקְנְ⁠ךָ֔ וְ⁠אֵ֛ת כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֥ר לְ⁠ךָ֖ בַּ⁠שָּׂדֶ֑ה 1 The form of address here is singular; Moses is speaking directly to Pharaoh. However, the next two verses make it clear that Pharaoh’s servants heard and understood this warning to be for them as well. In this sense Pharaoh represents the Egyptians. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 9 19 eo52 וְ⁠יָרַ֧ד עֲלֵ⁠הֶ֛ם הַ⁠בָּרָ֖ד 1 Alternate translation: “the hail will come down on” EXO 9 19 x4ja figs-gendernotations כָּל־הָ⁠אָדָ֨ם 1 Here, **man** means humans and includes men, women, and children. Alternate translation: “everyone” or “anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 9 19 itlv וְ⁠הַ⁠בְּהֵמָ֜ה 1 This includes domestic and wild animals. EXO 9 19 f80e figs-explicit וָ⁠מֵֽתוּ 1 The people and animals **will die** because they are hurt fatally by the hail. You may need to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “and the hail will kill them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 9 19 g90p figs-quotemarks וָ⁠מֵֽתוּ 1 Up to three levels of direct quotation (depending on your earlier decision about converting a level to an indirect quotation) end at the end of this verse. You should indicate that ending here with closing first-level, second-level, and third-level (if required) quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of quotations within quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 9 20 dp8j figs-explicit הַ⁠יָּרֵא֙ 1 As in some other occasions, Moses’ conversation with Pharaoh is not recorded. You may need to make explicit the fact that he did as Yahweh instructed. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 9 20 p3nz הַ⁠יָּרֵא֙ אֶת־דְּבַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה מֵֽ⁠עַבְדֵ֖י פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 “Those of Pharaoh’s servants who feared Yahweh’s warning” -EXO 9 21 dvwv וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹא־שָׂ֛ם לִבּ֖⁠וֹ אֶל 1 Here, **set his heart** means he believed or thought something was true. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. Alternate translation: “but whoever did not respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EXO 9 20 p3nz הַ⁠יָּרֵא֙ אֶת־דְּבַ֣ר יְהוָ֔ה מֵֽ⁠עַבְדֵ֖י פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 Alternate translation: “Those of Pharaoh’s servants who feared Yahweh’s warning” +EXO 9 21 dvwv figs-metaphor וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹא־שָׂ֛ם לִבּ֖⁠וֹ אֶל 1 Here, **set his heart** means he believed or thought something was true. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. Alternate translation: “but whoever did not respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 9 22 vtfl writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה 1 A minor scene shift occurs here and may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 9 22 zwvk יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. EXO 9 22 h9cr figs-gendernotations הָ⁠אָדָ֣ם 1 This includes women and children. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -883,31 +882,31 @@ EXO 9 27 sh1x חָטָ֣אתִי 1 Some commentators suggest translating **sin EXO 9 27 joxy הַ⁠צַּדִּ֔יק…הָ⁠רְשָׁעִֽים 1 Many commentators suggest that Pharaoh is using these terms in a narrow, legal sense and only referring to this instance. That is, he is saying something like “I’ve lost this round in court.” See UST. EXO 9 27 wag1 וְ⁠עַמִּ֖⁠י 1 **My people** refers to the Egyptians. EXO 9 28 r0cs figs-litotes וְ⁠לֹ֥א תֹסִפ֖וּ⁠ן לַ⁠עֲמֹֽד 1 This negative statement strengthens the force of Pharaoh’s statement that he will let the people go. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) -EXO 9 29 ajz3 וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר אֵלָי⁠ו֙ מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 Moses said to him “And Moses said to Pharaoh” +EXO 9 29 ajz3 וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר אֵלָי⁠ו֙ מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 Moses said to him Alternate translation: “And Moses said to Pharaoh” EXO 9 29 b787 translate-symaction אֶפְרֹ֥שׂ אֶת־כַּפַּ֖⁠י אֶל־יְהוָ֑ה 1 spread my hands out to Yahweh This symbolic gesture accompanies prayer. Alternate translation: “I will pray to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 9 30 tn94 grammar-connect-condition-contrary וְ⁠אַתָּ֖ה וַ⁠עֲבָדֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 honor Yahweh God This phrase is shifted to the beginning of the sentence to mark focus on Pharaoh and his servants because, despite Yahweh demonstrating his power, they are not yet afraid of him. If your language has a form or discourse feature that draws contrastive focus to participants, use it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) EXO 9 30 srx4 figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֖י יְהוָ֥ה 1 Here, **face** means presence or power. Alternate translation: “of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 9 31 p1v8 translate-unknown וְ⁠הַ⁠פִּשְׁתָּ֥ה…וְ⁠הַ⁠פִּשְׁתָּ֖ה 1 flax **Flax** is a plant that produces fibers that can be made into linen cloth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 9 31 lzar translate-unknown אָבִ֔יב 1 This means the seeds at the top of the stalk were developing but still green. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 9 31 xnvj גִּבְעֹֽל 1 “was flowering” +EXO 9 31 xnvj גִּבְעֹֽל 1 Alternate translation: “was flowering” EXO 9 32 jmq3 translate-unknown וְ⁠הַ⁠כֻּסֶּ֖מֶת 1 spelt **Spelt** is a kind of wheat. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 9 33 fa2j translate-symaction וַ⁠יִּפְרֹ֥שׂ כַּפָּ֖י⁠ו אֶל־יְהוָ֑ה 1 spread out his hands to Yahweh This symbolic gesture accompanies prayer. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 9:29](../09/29.md). Alternate translation: “lifted up his hands toward Yahweh and prayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 9 34 ke5k figs-metaphor וַ⁠יַּכְבֵּ֥ד לִבּ֖⁠וֹ 1 hardened his heart Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if he made his own heart heavy. This time his servants do the same. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [8:15](../08/15.md). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh determined to be defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 9 34 nz0e וַ⁠יֹּ֣סֶף לַ⁠חֲטֹ֑א 1 This statement is from the author’s perspective. Therefore, unlike in [9:27](../09/27.md), **sin** should be translated with the word your language uses for “sin.” -EXO 9 34 ooed וַ⁠יַּכְבֵּ֥ד לִבּ֖⁠וֹ ה֥וּא וַ⁠עֲבָדָֽי⁠ו 1 “and he caused his heart to be heavy. His servants did also” or “and he caused his heart to be heavy. His servants did the same” +EXO 9 34 ooed וַ⁠יַּכְבֵּ֥ד לִבּ֖⁠וֹ ה֥וּא וַ⁠עֲבָדָֽי⁠ו 1 Alternate translation: “and he caused his heart to be heavy. His servants did also” or “and he caused his heart to be heavy. His servants did the same” EXO 9 35 yxt8 figs-metaphor וַֽ⁠יֶּחֱזַק֙ לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 The heart of Pharaoh was hardened Pharaoh’s stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [Exodus 7:13](../07/13.md). This is a neutral statement (it does not say that anyone caused him to be stubborn as many others in this part of the narrative do). Alternate translation: “Pharaoh was still defiant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 9 35 x0kn figs-metaphor כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר דִּבֶּ֥ר יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠יַד־מֹשֶֽׁה 1 This is similar to [9:12](../09/12.md). In this case, what Yahweh said is figuratively spoken of as if it were something that could be held in someone’s hand. This means that Moses delivered a message from Yahweh that Pharaoh would be stubborn. It is not clear if this message was given to the Israelites or if this refers to Moses’ statement to Pharaoh in [9:30](../09/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 10 intro s5g1 0 # Exodus 10 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pharaoh’s hard heart

Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Let my people go

This is a very important statement. Moses does not ask Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he demands that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people. +EXO 10 intro s5g1 0 # Exodus 10 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pharaoh’s hard heart

Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Let my people go

This is a very important statement. Moses does not ask Pharaoh to “let go” of the Hebrew people. Instead, he demands that Pharaoh free the Hebrew people. EXO 10 1 w4pw figs-metaphor כִּֽי־אֲנִ֞י הִכְבַּ֤דְתִּי אֶת־לִבּ⁠וֹ֙ וְ⁠אֶת־לֵ֣ב עֲבָדָ֔י⁠ו 1 for I have hardened his heart and the hearts of his servants This means God made Pharaoh and his servants stubborn. Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their hearts were heavy. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md), but note that the metaphor is slightly different here. Alternate translation: “for I have caused Pharaoh and his servants to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 10 2 zg4c הִתְעַלַּ֨לְתִּי֙ בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 various signs “I mocked Egypt” +EXO 10 2 zg4c הִתְעַלַּ֨לְתִּי֙ בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 various signs Alternate translation: “I mocked Egypt” EXO 10 3 pm8p figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until near the end of [10:6](../10/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 10 3 u3mq figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּאמְר֣וּ אֵלָ֗י⁠ו כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ אֱלֹהֵ֣י הָֽ⁠עִבְרִ֔ים 1 It may be helpful to turn the introductory quotation into an indirect quotation so that you do not have to use quotes within quotes. Alternate translation: “and told him that Yahweh, the God of the Hebrews, said thus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 10 3 vze4 כֹּֽה־אָמַ֤ר יְהוָה֙ 1 This quotation form is used to introduce commands from Yahweh. See [4:intro](../04/intro.md) for more information. -EXO 10 3 cicf figs-metonymy עַד־מָתַ֣י מֵאַ֔נְתָּ לֵ⁠עָנֹ֖ת מִ⁠פָּנָ֑⁠י 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Particularly, it means the presence of his judgment (the plagues). Alternate translation: “Until when will you refuse to be humble when I judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 10 3 cicf figs-metonymy עַד־מָתַ֣י מֵאַ֔נְתָּ לֵ⁠עָנֹ֖ת מִ⁠פָּנָ֑⁠י 1 Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Particularly, it means the presence of his judgment (the plagues). Alternate translation: “Until when will you refuse to be humble when I judge you” or “Until when will you refuse to be humble before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 10 4 ge67 הִנְ⁠נִ֨י 1 listen **Behold me** adds emphasis to what is said next. Alternate translation: “beware” EXO 10 4 uwtp grammar-collectivenouns אַרְבֶּ֖ה 1 **Locust** is a singular noun referring to the group as one. Alternate translation: “locusts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 10 5 zu5r figs-parallelism וְ⁠כִסָּה֙ אֶת־עֵ֣ין הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ וְ⁠לֹ֥א יוּכַ֖ל לִ⁠רְאֹ֣ת אֶת־הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ 1 hail These parallel statements have a similar meaning. They are used to emphasize the great number of locusts that are coming. In some languages this will not have the same rhetorical effect, and you will need to use another device to emphasize the statement. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 10 5 rdav וְ⁠כִסָּה֙ אֶת־עֵ֣ין הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ 1 “And it will cover the land from sight” +EXO 10 5 rdav וְ⁠כִסָּה֙ אֶת־עֵ֣ין הָ⁠אָ֔רֶץ 1 Alternate translation: “And it will cover the land from sight” EXO 10 5 oj3i grammar-collectivenouns וְ⁠כִסָּה֙…וְ⁠אָכַ֣ל…וְ⁠אָכַל֙ 1 Here the pronoun **it** agrees in number with the collective singular “locust” in the previous verse. Insects are often referred to without gender in English, but you will need to use whatever number, gender, and/or noun class is required in your language to agree with the word for “locust” that you used in the [previous verse](../10/04.md). See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 10 6 ir5l figs-hyperbole עַל־הָ֣⁠אֲדָמָ֔ה 1 nothing ever seen This could either mean **on the earth** (planet) or “on the land” (Egypt). Either way, it is meant to emphasize an extremely long time, meaning never. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 10 6 ma0o figs-explicit וַ⁠יִּ֥פֶן 1 [Verse 3](../10/03.md) says that Aaron came in to see the king with Moses. It is implied that he left with him as well. You may make this explicit if it would help your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -916,7 +915,7 @@ EXO 10 7 jqbh figs-gendernotations הָ֣⁠אֲנָשִׁ֔ים 1 Here, **men* EXO 10 7 xdm5 figs-rquestion הֲ⁠טֶ֣רֶם תֵּדַ֔ע כִּ֥י אָבְדָ֖ה מִצְרָֽיִם 1 Do you not yet realize that Egypt is destroyed? Pharaoh’s servants ask this question to bring Pharaoh to recognize what he refuses to see. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should realize that Egypt is destroyed!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 10 7 c6pr figs-activepassive כִּ֥י אָבְדָ֖ה מִצְרָֽיִם 1 that Egypt is destroyed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that these plagues have destroyed Egypt” or “that their God has destroyed Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 10 8 bu1x figs-activepassive וַ⁠יּוּשַׁ֞ב אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֤ה וְ⁠אֶֽת־אַהֲרֹן֙ אֶל־פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “And a servant brought Moses and Aaron back to Pharaoh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 10 8 fzsv מִ֥י וָ⁠מִ֖י 1 “Who all” +EXO 10 8 fzsv מִ֥י וָ⁠מִ֖י 1 Alternate translation: “Who all” EXO 10 9 fnnl figs-exclusive נֵלֵ֑ךְ…נֵלֵ֔ךְ 1 **We** means the Israelites and does not include Pharaoh or the Egyptians. Use an exclusive form here if your language has this distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 10 10 hjc9 יְהִ֨י כֵ֤ן יְהוָה֙ עִמָּ⁠כֶ֔ם כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֛ר אֲשַׁלַּ֥ח אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠אֶֽת־טַפְּ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 if I ever let you go and your little ones go **May Yahweh be with you** is usually a blessing but is almost certainly not here. It likely means something like “It will take Yahweh’s power to make me let you and your children go,” or “May Yahweh be as favorable to you as I am to the idea of letting your children go.” Pharaoh is saying that it will take Yahweh to make him do what Moses wants, but he does not think that will happen. Alternate translation: “It will be clear that Yahweh is with you if I let you and your children go” EXO 10 10 w8x4 figs-metonymy רְא֕וּ כִּ֥י רָעָ֖ה נֶ֥גֶד פְּנֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 The phrase **for evil is before your faces** could either be a warning from Pharaoh that Moses’ actions will lead to evil for the Israelites, or it could mean that Pharaoh thinks the Israelites plan something that he considers evil. **Faces** is a metonym for the whole person. Alternate translations: “I see that you plan evil” or “Be careful! Your actions will have bad consequences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -934,14 +933,14 @@ EXO 10 15 b3h5 grammar-collectivenouns וַ⁠יְכַ֞ס…וַ⁠יֹּ֜אכ EXO 10 15 xszc וַ⁠יְכַ֞ס אֶת־עֵ֣ין כָּל־הָ⁠אָרֶץ֮ 1 See how you translated this in [10:5](../10/05.md). EXO 10 15 ill1 figs-parallelism וַ⁠יֹּ֜אכַל אֶת־כָּל־עֵ֣שֶׂב הָ⁠אָ֗רֶץ וְ⁠אֵת֙ כָּל־פְּרִ֣י הָ⁠עֵ֔ץ אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוֹתִ֖יר הַ⁠בָּרָ֑ד וְ⁠לֹא־נוֹתַ֨ר כָּל־יֶ֧רֶק בָּ⁠עֵ֛ץ וּ⁠בְ⁠עֵ֥שֶׂב הַ⁠שָּׂדֶ֖ה בְּ⁠כָל־אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 These parallel statements reinforce one another. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 10 16 ty9f figs-youdual אֱלֹֽהֵי⁠כֶ֖ם וְ⁠לָ⁠כֶֽם 1 Here, **you** and **your** are plural. These could refer either to Moses and Aaron or to all the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 10 17 tsve שָׂ֣א 1 “take away” +EXO 10 17 tsve שָׂ֣א 1 Alternate translation: “take away” EXO 10 17 ttog אַ֣ךְ הַ⁠פַּ֔עַם…רַ֖ק 1 Pharaoh could either be desperate and using **just this once … only** to attempt to make his request as small as possible to increase the chances of it being granted, or he could be still too proud to admit guilt beyond this single incident (which is probably his bold statement about Yahweh being with the Israelites in [10:10](../10/10.md)). The former seems more likely given that he terms this plague “this death.” If your culture has a way of making a request seem as small as possible, you may want to use it to translate Pharaoh’s request. EXO 10 17 kd6d figs-youdual אֱלֹהֵי⁠כֶ֑ם 1 this time Here, **your** is plural. This could refer either to Moses and Aaron or to all the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) -EXO 10 17 doeg figs-metonymy הַ⁠מָּ֥וֶת הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 The word **death** here refers to the destruction by the locusts of all plants in Egypt, which would eventually lead to the deaths of people, because there would be no crops. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 10 17 doeg figs-metonymy הַ⁠מָּ֥וֶת הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 The word **death** here refers to the destruction by the locusts of all plants in Egypt, which would eventually lead to the deaths of people, because there would be no crops. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 10 17 nn2b figs-explicit הַ⁠מָּ֥וֶת הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 take this death away from me The word **death** here refers to the destruction by the locusts of all plants in Egypt, which would eventually lead to the deaths of people because there would be no crops. The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “this destruction that will lead to our deaths” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 10 18 p9hz וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֖א 1 Moses and Aaron were summoned to the king in [10:16](../10/16.md) so some translations will need to say that they both left. -EXO 10 19 xhsv רֽוּחַ־יָם֙ חָזָ֣ק מְאֹ֔ד 1 “a very strong west wind” or “a very strong wind from the west” -EXO 10 19 mdp5 וַ⁠יִּשָּׂא֙ אֶת־הָ֣⁠אַרְבֶּ֔ה 1 picked up the locusts “and it moved the locusts upwards” +EXO 10 19 xhsv רֽוּחַ־יָם֙ חָזָ֣ק מְאֹ֔ד 1 Alternate translation: “a very strong west wind” or “a very strong wind from the west” +EXO 10 19 mdp5 וַ⁠יִּשָּׂא֙ אֶת־הָ֣⁠אַרְבֶּ֔ה 1 picked up the locusts Alternate translation: “and it moved the locusts upwards” EXO 10 19 zhcu grammar-collectivenouns הָ֣⁠אַרְבֶּ֔ה…אַרְבֶּ֣ה 1 See how you translated this in [10:4](../10/04.md). Alternate translation: “the locusts … of the locusts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 10 19 q8aj grammar-collectivenouns וַ⁠יִּתְקָעֵ֖⁠הוּ 1 Here, the first **it** refers to the wind, the second agrees in number with the collective singular “locust.” See how you translated this in [10:5](../10/05.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 10 20 dw1d figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֥ק יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -949,15 +948,15 @@ EXO 10 21 x6xk writing-newevent וַ⁠יֹּ֨אמֶר יְהוָ֜ה 1 A new EXO 10 21 utyz יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. EXO 10 21 m38s figs-metaphor מִצְרָ֑יִם וְ⁠יָמֵ֖שׁ חֹֽשֶׁךְ 1 darkness that may be felt This is a somewhat puzzling construction which describes the darkness. Most English translations take it as a passive, which restated actively means, “people will feel the darkness,” meaning metaphorically what is expressed in different ways in the UST and the alternate translation here. Another option is to view the Hebrew verb form as causative and translate as such: “and the darkness will cause people to feel,” meaning people will have to feel where they are going because they will not be able to see. A final option would be a personification of darkness such that the darkness gropes around, filling in every place in the land. Alternate translation: “Egypt — an extremely oppressive darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 10 22 z4ge יָד֖⁠וֹ 1 See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. -EXO 10 22 vbzj translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת 1 “for 3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 10 23 jmd8 figs-metonymy לֹֽא־רָא֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ אֶת־אָחִ֗י⁠ו 1 This phrase means that people could not see the people who lived closest to them, whether or not that person was literally their brother. Alternate translation: “No one could see the people who lived with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 10 22 vbzj translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת 1 Alternate translation: “for 3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 10 23 jmd8 figs-metonymy לֹֽא־רָא֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ אֶת־אָחִ֗י⁠ו 1 This phrase means that people could not see the people who lived closest to them, whether or not that person was literally their **brother**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “No one could see the people who lived with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 10 23 o572 figs-gendernotations אִ֣ישׁ…אִ֥ישׁ 1 Here, **man** refers to any human in general. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) -EXO 10 23 qstu translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת 1 “for 3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 10 23 qstu translate-numbers שְׁלֹ֣שֶׁת 1 Alternate translation: “for 3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 10 24 vfo4 figs-quotemarks לְכוּ֙ עִבְד֣וּ אֶת־יְהוָ֔ה רַ֛ק צֹאנְ⁠כֶ֥ם וּ⁠בְקַרְ⁠כֶ֖ם יֻצָּ֑ג גַּֽם־טַפְּ⁠כֶ֖ם יֵלֵ֥ךְ עִמָּ⁠כֶֽם 1 This is a direct quote of what the king said. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 10 24 vp7b figs-youdual לְכוּ֙ עִבְד֣וּ…צֹאנְ⁠כֶ֥ם וּ⁠בְקַרְ⁠כֶ֖ם…טַפְּ⁠כֶ֖ם…עִמָּ⁠כֶֽם 1 Every instance of **you** and **your**, as well as the imperative verb forms in this verse, are plural. They refer to the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 10 25 hnt5 figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [10:26](10:26). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 10 25 rsr4 figs-metonymy גַּם־אַתָּ֛ה תִּתֵּ֥ן בְּ⁠יָדֵ֖⁠נוּ זְבָחִ֣ים וְ⁠עֹל֑וֹת 1 The construction here is difficult. Based on context, Moses is probably not saying that Pharaoh needs to provide his own animals to the Israelites. He is asking Pharaoh to let the Israelites take their own animals. **Give in our hands** means to take with them, by whatever means, which may include holding a rope in the hand to lead the animals or any other means of herding the animals. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 10 25 cj78 figs-metonymy זְבָחִ֣ים וְ⁠עֹל֑וֹת 1 Here, **sacrifices and burnt offerings** refers to the animals of their flocks and herds that they must take. Alternate translation: “animals for sacrifices and burnt offerings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 10 25 rsr4 figs-metonymy גַּם־אַתָּ֛ה תִּתֵּ֥ן בְּ⁠יָדֵ֖⁠נוּ זְבָחִ֣ים וְ⁠עֹל֑וֹת 1 The construction here is difficult. Based on context, Moses is probably not saying that Pharaoh needs to provide his own animals to the Israelites. He is asking Pharaoh to let the Israelites take their own animals. **Give in our hands** means to take with them, by whatever means, which may include holding a rope in the hand to lead the animals or any other means of herding the animals. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 10 25 cj78 figs-metonymy זְבָחִ֣ים וְ⁠עֹל֑וֹת 1 Here, **sacrifices and burnt offerings** refers to the animals of their flocks and herds that they must take. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “animals for sacrifices and burnt offerings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 10 25 bjy0 וְ⁠עָשִׂ֖ינוּ לַ⁠יהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 Here, **do** means “do the sacrifices and burnt offerings.” Alternate translation: “and we will make those sacrifices and burnt offerings to Yahweh our God” EXO 10 25 ixo7 figs-exclusive בְּ⁠יָדֵ֖⁠נוּ…וְ⁠עָשִׂ֖ינוּ…אֱלֹהֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 Here, **we** and **us** refers to the Israelites (same group as the speaker’s) while excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians (listeners’ group). If your language distinguishes between forms of we and us based on who is included, be sure to use the one appropriate to the described group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) EXO 10 26 k0pi figs-exclusive מִקְנֵ֜⁠נוּ…עִמָּ֗⁠נוּ…נִקַּ֔ח…אֱלֹהֵ֑י⁠נוּ וַ⁠אֲנַ֣חְנוּ…נֵדַ֗ע…נַּעֲבֹד֙…בֹּאֵ֖⁠נוּ 1 Here, **we, our,** and **us** each refers to the Israelites (same group as the speaker’s) while excluding Pharaoh and the Egyptians (listeners’ group). If your language distinguishes between forms of we, our, and us based on who is included, be sure to use the one appropriate to the described group. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]]) @@ -965,7 +964,7 @@ EXO 10 26 ys4v figs-activepassive לֹ֤א תִשָּׁאֵר֙ פַּרְסָ֔ EXO 10 26 v9uc figs-synecdoche פַּרְסָ֔ה 1 a hoof Here the word **hoof** refers to the entire animal. Alternate translation: “a single animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) EXO 10 26 uiom שָֽׁמָּ⁠ה 1 The destination is unspecified. Previous context suggests it would be at the mountain of God (see [3:1](../03/01.md), especially [3:12](../03/12.md), and [4:27](../04/27.md)) which would take three days to travel to (see [3:18](../03/18.md) and [5:3](../05/03.md)). EXO 10 27 n588 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֥ק יְהוָ֖ה אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֑ה 1 Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 10 27 mv8t וְ⁠לֹ֥א אָבָ֖ה לְ⁠שַׁלְּחָֽ⁠ם 1 he would not let them go “and Pharaoh would not consent to let them go” +EXO 10 27 mv8t וְ⁠לֹ֥א אָבָ֖ה לְ⁠שַׁלְּחָֽ⁠ם 1 he would not let them go Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh would not consent to let them go” EXO 10 28 di6g figs-rpronouns הִשָּׁ֣מֶר לְ⁠ךָ֗ 1 Here, the listener, Moses, fills two different roles in the sentence. He is the person told to look (subject) and he himself is what he is told to look at (object). Different languages have different methods of marking this. Alternate translation: “You watch yourself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 10 28 lcz2 figs-explicit תָּמֽוּת 1 Be careful about one thing Pharaoh means he will have Moses killed. You may choose to make this explicit as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 10 28 te45 figs-synecdoche פָּנַ֔⁠י…פָנַ֖⁠י 1 you see my face Here, **face** refers to the whole person. Alternate translation: see UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) @@ -978,7 +977,7 @@ EXO 11 1 iocd כָּלָ֕ה גָּרֵ֛שׁ יְגָרֵ֥שׁ 1 The wording EXO 11 1 i87h figs-youdual אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם…אֶתְ⁠כֶ֖ם 1 he will let you go from here Each occurrence of the word **you** in this verse is plural and refers to Moses and the rest of the Israelites. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 11 2 x83s figs-aside דַּבֶּר־נָ֖א בְּ⁠אָזְנֵ֣י הָ⁠עָ֑ם וְ⁠יִשְׁאֲל֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ׀ מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת רֵעֵ֗⁠הוּ וְ⁠אִשָּׁה֙ מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת רְעוּתָ֔⁠הּ כְּלֵי־כֶ֖סֶף וּ⁠כְלֵ֥י זָהָֽב 1 In this verse the author interjects a comment about the situation. Some translations choose to put the verse in parenthesis to indicate this. You may mark it in a way that is natural to your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-aside]]) EXO 11 2 t14c נָ֖א 1 Here, **now** conveys urgency, indicating that Moses should speak soon, without delaying for other things. If you have a way of giving a command that shows that it is important for someone to do it quickly, it would be better to translate in that way than in a way that means “now” in a time sense (versus earlier or later). -EXO 11 2 nlsk בְּ⁠אָזְנֵ֣י הָ⁠עָ֑ם 1 “so the people hear you” or “when all the people are listening” +EXO 11 2 nlsk בְּ⁠אָזְנֵ֣י הָ⁠עָ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “so the people hear you” or “when all the people are listening” EXO 11 2 jl6w כְּלֵי־כֶ֖סֶף וּ⁠כְלֵ֥י זָהָֽב 1 These could be any sort of thing made from silver or gold (for instance: utensils, cups, pitchers, plates, candleholders), not just jewelry. EXO 11 2 ddej וְ⁠יִשְׁאֲל֞וּ אִ֣ישׁ׀ מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת רֵעֵ֗⁠הוּ וְ⁠אִשָּׁה֙ מֵ⁠אֵ֣ת רְעוּתָ֔⁠הּ כְּלֵי־כֶ֖סֶף וּ⁠כְלֵ֥י זָהָֽב 1 [Exodus 3:22](../03/22.md) contains similar instructions; see how you translated there. EXO 11 2 jyqa figs-quotemarks זָהָֽב 1 At the end of this verse, the direct quote of Yahweh that started in the previous verse ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) @@ -990,7 +989,7 @@ EXO 11 4 kpb5 כֹּ֖ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֑ה 1 midnight This quotation EXO 11 4 vyvr figs-quotemarks כֹּ֖ה אָמַ֣ר יְהוָ֑ה 1 After this phrase, a second-level direct quote begins which continues until the end of [11:7](../11/07.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 11 5 hv8k בְּכוֹר֮…מִ⁠בְּכ֤וֹר…בְּכ֣וֹר…בְּכ֥וֹר 1 All the firstborn … the firstborn of Pharaoh … the firstborn of the slave girl … the firstborn of the cattle The “firstborn” always refers to the oldest male offspring. EXO 11 5 k42h figs-merism מִ⁠בְּכ֤וֹר פַּרְעֹה֙ הַ⁠יֹּשֵׁ֣ב עַל־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַ⁠שִּׁפְחָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֖ר אַחַ֣ר הָ⁠רֵחָ֑יִם וְ⁠כֹ֖ל בְּכ֥וֹר בְּהֵמָֽה 1 who sits on his throne This is a merism. First, two extremes are mentioned: the highest of society (**Pharaoh, who sits on his throne**) and the lowest (**the slave girl who is behind the mill**). Then the animals (**beasts**) are added making it a three- item list of parts of society and even economy to show the totality of the coming judgment. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 11 5 hr1x אֲשֶׁ֖ר אַחַ֣ר הָ⁠רֵחָ֑יִם 1 who is behind the handmill grinding it “who is grinding at the handmill” or “who is behind the handmill grinding grain” +EXO 11 5 hr1x אֲשֶׁ֖ר אַחַ֣ר הָ⁠רֵחָ֑יִם 1 who is behind the handmill grinding it Alternate translation: “who is grinding at the handmill” or “who is behind the handmill grinding grain” EXO 11 6 hui7 figs-merism אֲשֶׁ֤ר כָּמֹ֨⁠הוּ֙ לֹ֣א נִהְיָ֔תָה וְ⁠כָמֹ֖⁠הוּ לֹ֥א תֹסִֽף 1 This is a merism that uses the extremes of past and future to emphasize the concept of “never.” Alternate translation: “such as has never been and never will be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 11 7 b60a figs-idiom לֹ֤א יֶֽחֱרַץ…לְשֹׁנ֔⁠וֹ 1 This means make an unfriendly noise. Alternate translation: “will not growl” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 11 7 t61i figs-youdual תֵּֽדְע֔וּ⁠ן 1 Here, **you** is plural. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) @@ -1005,32 +1004,32 @@ EXO 11 8 milu figs-idiom בָּ⁠חֳרִי־אָֽף 1 This is an idiom meani EXO 11 9 xk4l figs-quotemarks לֹא־יִשְׁמַ֥ע אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם פַּרְעֹ֑ה לְמַ֛עַן רְב֥וֹת מוֹפְתַ֖⁠י בְּ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 11 10 h5g7 writing-endofstory וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֗ן עָשׂ֛וּ אֶת־כָּל־הַ⁠מֹּפְתִ֥ים הָ⁠אֵ֖לֶּה לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י פַרְעֹ֑ה וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה וְ⁠לֹֽא־שִׁלַּ֥ח אֶת־בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠אַרְצֽ⁠וֹ 1 This verse is summarizing and wrapping up the story of the plagues. If your language has a way of summarizing information at the end of a story, try to translate this verse (and possibly verse 9 - see the the introductory notes to this chapter) in this way. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) EXO 11 10 um4u figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֤ק יְהוָה֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב פַּרְעֹ֔ה 1 Yahweh hardened Pharaoh’s heart This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 12 intro fd2f 0 # Exodus 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The events of this chapter are known as the Passover. They are remembered in the celebration of Passover. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])
1. Instruction v. 1-28
- v. 1-20: Yahweh gives instructions
- v. 1-11: how to eat this Passover
- v. 12-13: description of the plague
- v. 14-20: directions for future celebration of Passover
- v. 21-28: Moses repeats Yahweh’s instructions to Israelites
2. Narrative v. 29-42: Passover and Exodus
3. Instruction v. 43-49: which foreigners may eat Passover
4. Summary Narrative v. 50-51

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Unleavened bread
The concept of unleavened bread is introduced in this chapter. Its significance stems from its connection to the events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]])

### Ethnic segregation
The Hebrew people were to be separate from the rest of the world. Because of this, they separated themselves from other people groups. At this time, these foreigners were looked upon as unholy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])


## Potential translation issues:

### Passover


### Pronoun usage
In the long quotation (verses 3-20) that Yahweh tells Moses and Aaron to convey to the Israelites, he speaks of them in the third person (“they must”) in [verses 3](../12/03.md)–4 and [verses 7](../12/07.md)–8 and to them in the second person (“you must”) for all the rest of the instruction. Some languages may need to keep the pronoun person consistent throughout the quotation.


### You plural
In this chapter, almost every occurrence of “you” or “your” is plural. Each one refers to all the Israelites. Those that are not will be marked. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form throughout unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) +EXO 12 intro fd2f 0 # Exodus 12 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The events of this chapter are known as the Passover. They are remembered in the celebration of Passover. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]])
1. Instruction v. 1-28
- v. 1-20: Yahweh gives instructions
- v. 1-11: how to eat this Passover
- v. 12-13: description of the plague
- v. 14-20: directions for future celebration of Passover
- v. 21-28: Moses repeats Yahweh’s instructions to Israelites
2. Narrative v. 29-42: Passover and Exodus
3. Instruction v. 43-49: which foreigners may eat Passover
4. Summary Narrative v. 50-51

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Unleavened bread

The concept of unleavened bread is introduced in this chapter. Its significance stems from its connection to the events in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/unleavenedbread]])

### Ethnic segregation

The Hebrew people were to be separate from the rest of the world. Because of this, they separated themselves from other people groups. At this time, these foreigners were looked upon as unholy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])


## Potential translation issues:

### Passover


### Pronoun usage

In the long quotation (verses 3-20) that Yahweh tells Moses and Aaron to convey to the Israelites, he speaks of them in the third person (“they must”) in [verses 3](../12/03.md)–4 and [verses 7](../12/07.md)–8 and to them in the second person (“you must”) for all the rest of the instruction. Some languages may need to keep the pronoun person consistent throughout the quotation.


### You plural

In this chapter, almost every occurrence of “you” or “your” is plural. Each one refers to all the Israelites. Those that are not will be marked. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form throughout unless otherwise noted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 12 2 z785 figs-quotemarks הַ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֛ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם רֹ֣אשׁ חֳדָשִׁ֑ים 1 For you, this month will be the start of months, the first month of the year to you The start of this verse is the beginning of a direct quote which continues until the end of [verse 20](../12/20.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
EXO 12 2 gtgb figs-parallelism הַ⁠חֹ֧דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּ֛ה לָ⁠כֶ֖ם רֹ֣אשׁ חֳדָשִׁ֑ים רִאשׁ֥וֹן הוּא֙ לָ⁠כֶ֔ם לְ⁠חָדְשֵׁ֖י הַ⁠שָּׁנָֽה 1 These two phrases mean basically the same thing and emphasize that the month in which the events of this chapter take place will be the beginning of their calendar year. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 12 2 uy4w translate-hebrewmonths רִאשׁ֥וֹן הוּא֙ לָ⁠כֶ֔ם לְ⁠חָדְשֵׁ֖י הַ⁠שָּׁנָֽה 1 the first month of the year The first month of the Hebrew calendar includes the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. It marks when Yahweh rescued the Israelites from the Egyptians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) EXO 12 3 lv6s figs-youdual דַּבְּר֗וּ 1 The command here is to both Moses and Aaron. If your language uses a different form if two are people addressed, use a dual form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 12 3 nu6r figs-quotemarks לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר בֶּ⁠עָשֹׂ֖ר 1 After **saying**, a second level direct quotation begins which continues until the end of [verse 20](../12/20.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. **Saying** is used to mark the beginning of a quote. Many times it can be omitted in translation if the target language does not use a similar structure. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 12 3 jjw0 וְ⁠יִקְח֣וּ לָ⁠הֶ֗ם אִ֛ישׁ שֶׂ֥ה לְ⁠בֵית־אָבֹ֖ת שֶׂ֥ה לַ⁠בָּֽיִת 1 This seems to be indicating that if multiple families live in one house, the man who is the leader of the family group that lives there should take one lamb for that whole household. Alternate translation: “the father of each household must take a lamb for his household, one per household” -EXO 12 3 d1f5 שֶׂ֥ה לַ⁠בָּֽיִת 1 “one lamb per house” +EXO 12 3 d1f5 שֶׂ֥ה לַ⁠בָּֽיִת 1 Alternate translation: “one lamb per house” EXO 12 3 qzct שֶׂ֥ה…שֶׂ֥ה 1 This word literally means, “of the flock,” and could also be translated as a sheep or a goat. Here, the ULT uses **lamb** (a young sheep), because [verse 5](../12/05.md) specifies that it must be one year old. “Kid” (a young goat) would be equally valid as verse 5 also says that it could be either a sheep or a goat. You may translate it as whatever would be most familiar of sheep or goat—preferably a word that means a young sheep or goat. EXO 12 4 xzn3 figs-explicit וְ⁠אִם־יִמְעַ֣ט הַ⁠בַּיִת֮ מִ⁠הְיֹ֣ת מִ⁠שֶּׂה֒ 1 If the household is too small for a lamb This means that there are not enough people in the family to eat an entire lamb. Alternate translation: “If there are not enough people in the household to eat an entire lamb” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 12 4 o258 וּ⁠שְׁכֵנ֛⁠וֹ הַ⁠קָּרֹ֥ב אֶל־בֵּית֖⁠וֹ בְּ⁠מִכְסַ֣ת נְפָשֹׁ֑ת 1 This phrase could either mean simply a neighbor that lives nearby or it could refer to a family of similar size, or of the right size to split a lamb with. EXO 12 4 fu2g figs-gendernotations אִ֚ישׁ 1 the man and his next door neighbor This refers to each person, whether man, woman, or child. Alternate translation: “each family member” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 12 6 lz76 בֵּ֥ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּֽיִם 1 twilight This refers to the time of evening after the sun has set but while there is still some light. -EXO 12 7 cjt7 עַל־שְׁתֵּ֥י הַ⁠מְּזוּזֹ֖ת וְ⁠עַל־הַ⁠מַּשְׁק֑וֹף עַ֚ל הַ⁠בָּ֣תִּ֔ים 1 on the two side doorposts and on the tops of the doorframes of the houses “on the sides and top of the way into the house” +EXO 12 7 cjt7 עַל־שְׁתֵּ֥י הַ⁠מְּזוּזֹ֖ת וְ⁠עַל־הַ⁠מַּשְׁק֑וֹף עַ֚ל הַ⁠בָּ֣תִּ֔ים 1 on the two side doorposts and on the tops of the doorframes of the houses Alternate translation: “on the sides and top of the way into the house” EXO 12 8 uxn6 מְרֹרִ֖ים 1 bitter herbs These are small plants that have a strong and usually bad taste. -EXO 12 9 ny3a אַל־תֹּאכְל֤וּ מִמֶּ֨⁠נּוּ֙ נָ֔א 1 Do not eat it raw “Do not eat the lamb or goat uncooked” +EXO 12 9 ny3a אַל־תֹּאכְל֤וּ מִמֶּ֨⁠נּוּ֙ נָ֔א 1 Do not eat it raw Alternate translation: “Do not eat the lamb or goat uncooked” EXO 12 11 ks7d חֲגֻרִ֔ים 1 belt **Belts** are strips of leather or fabric for tying around the waist. -EXO 12 11 nzw2 וַ⁠אֲכַלְתֶּ֤ם אֹת⁠וֹ֙ בְּ⁠חִפָּז֔וֹן 1 eat it hurriedly “And you must eat it quickly” +EXO 12 11 nzw2 וַ⁠אֲכַלְתֶּ֤ם אֹת⁠וֹ֙ בְּ⁠חִפָּז֔וֹן 1 eat it hurriedly Alternate translation: “And you must eat it quickly” EXO 12 11 r789 figs-explicit פֶּ֥סַח ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 It is Yahweh’s Passover Here the word **it** refers to eating the animal on the tenth day of the month. Alternate translation: “This observance is Yahweh’s Passover” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 12 12 sa5n figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־אֱלֹהֵ֥י מִצְרַ֛יִם אֶֽעֱשֶׂ֥ה שְׁפָטִ֖ים 1 I will bring punishment on all the gods of Egypt This can be stated with a verbal form as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 12 13 tywz figs-abstractnouns לְ⁠מַשְׁחִ֔ית 1 This can be stated with a verbal form as in the UST. Alternate translation: “to destroy you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 12 13 bnoe figs-activepassive וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִֽהְיֶ֨ה בָ⁠כֶ֥ם נֶ֨גֶף֙ 1 This can be translated in active form. Alternate translation: “and I will not put the plague on you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 12 13 ox3l figs-metonymy בְּ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 Yahweh is going to strike the people and animals who live in **the land of Egypt**. Alternate translation: “on everything living in the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 12 13 ox3l figs-metonymy בְּ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 Yahweh is going to strike the people and animals who live in **the land of Egypt**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “on everything living in the land of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 12 14 fa9q וְ⁠הָיָה֩ הַ⁠יּ֨וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֤ה 1 Verses 14-[20](../12/20.md) are instructions for the Israelites’ future celebration of the Passover. If your language makes a distinction between near and far future events or between near and general commands, you may need to make clear that these verses primarily have a later application. EXO 12 14 usns translate-hebrewmonths הַ⁠יּ֨וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֤ה 1 **This day** means the tenth day of the first month of every year. On this day every year, they must celebrate the Passover. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) -EXO 12 15 xsb9 אַ֚ךְ 1 “Surely” or “Indeed” +EXO 12 15 xsb9 אַ֚ךְ 1 Alternate translation: “Surely” or “Indeed” EXO 12 15 i9n3 figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֞ה הַ⁠נֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִוא֙ מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 that person must be cut off from Israel The metaphor **cut off** has at least three possible meanings. The following alternate translations express those: (1) “he must be sent away” or (2) “he will no longer be considered to be one of the people of Israel” or (3) “he must be killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 12 15 enw3 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֞ה הַ⁠נֶּ֤פֶשׁ הַ⁠הִוא֙ מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 The metaphor **cut off** has at least three possible meanings. They can be expressed in active form. Who will cut off that person is also not specified, it could be the Israelites or Yahweh. The following alternate translations express those: (1) “the people of Israel must send him away” or (2) “I will no longer consider him to be one of the people of Israel” or (3) “the people of Israel must kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 12 15 eqzu grammar-collectivenouns מִ⁠יִּשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 **Israel** is a collective noun referring to the nation or people group. Alternate translation: “from the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) @@ -1050,10 +1049,10 @@ EXO 12 20 dj1c figs-quotemarks מַצּֽוֹת 1 After this phrase, the direct EXO 12 21 y9qt writing-newevent 0 summoned A new scene begins at this verse, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 12 21 exy0 figs-quotemarks וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר אֲלֵ⁠הֶ֑ם 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [12:27](../12/27.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
EXO 12 22 qwv1 translate-unknown אֲגֻדַּ֣ת אֵז֗וֹב 1 hyssop **Hyssop** is a woody plant with small leaves that can be used for sprinkling liquids. If this plant is unknown, you can use a descriptor phrase. Alternate translation: “part of a plant with small branches and many leaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 12 22 c1cf אֶל־הַ⁠מַּשְׁקוֹף֙ וְ⁠אֶל־שְׁתֵּ֣י הַ⁠מְּזוּזֹ֔ת 1 the top of the doorframe and the two doorposts “on the sides and top of the way into the house.” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:7](../12/07.md). +EXO 12 22 c1cf אֶל־הַ⁠מַּשְׁקוֹף֙ וְ⁠אֶל־שְׁתֵּ֣י הַ⁠מְּזוּזֹ֔ת 1 the top of the doorframe and the two doorposts Alternate translation: “on the sides and top of the way into the house.” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:7](../12/07.md). EXO 12 22 vdlj figs-gendernotations לֹ֥א…אִ֥ישׁ 1 Here, **man** includes women and children. Alternate translation: “no person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) EXO 12 23 uu61 figs-synecdoche וּ⁠פָסַ֤ח יְהוָה֙ עַל־הַ⁠פֶּ֔תַח 1 pass over your door Here the word **door** implies the entire house. This means that God will spare the Israelites in houses with blood on the door frames. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh will pass over the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -EXO 12 23 onpu עַל־הַ⁠מַּשְׁק֔וֹף וְ⁠עַ֖ל שְׁתֵּ֣י הַ⁠מְּזוּזֹ֑ת 1 “on the sides and top of the way into the house” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:7](../12/07.md). +EXO 12 23 onpu עַל־הַ⁠מַּשְׁק֔וֹף וְ⁠עַ֖ל שְׁתֵּ֣י הַ⁠מְּזוּזֹ֑ת 1 Alternate translation: “on the sides and top of the way into the house” See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:7](../12/07.md). EXO 12 24 v7z5 הַ⁠דָּבָ֣ר הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה 1 this event These words refer to the Passover or Festival of Unleavened Bread. Observing the Passover was an act of worshiping Yahweh. EXO 12 24 bzm0 figs-youcrowd לְ⁠ךָ֥ וּ⁠לְ⁠בָנֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 Here, **you** and **your** are singular but they refer to the whole nation. You may need to continue to use a plural form of “you,” if your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) EXO 12 24 ch73 figs-gendernotations וּ⁠לְ⁠בָנֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 Here, **sons** includes everyone. Alternate translation: see UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -1062,25 +1061,25 @@ EXO 12 26 hbh4 figs-gendernotations בְּנֵי⁠כֶ֑ם 1 This refers to al EXO 12 26 odj0 figs-quotesinquotes אֲלֵי⁠כֶ֖ם…מָ֛ה הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֥ה הַ⁠זֹּ֖את לָ⁠כֶֽם 1 After **you**, a second-level quotation begins. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation.
However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “to you what this ritual means to you,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 12 27 qft1 figs-quotemarks זֶֽבַח־פֶּ֨סַח ה֜וּא לַֽ⁠יהוָ֗ה אֲשֶׁ֣ר פָּ֠סַח עַל־בָּתֵּ֤י בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם בְּ⁠נָגְפּ֥⁠וֹ אֶת־מִצְרַ֖יִם וְ⁠אֶת־בָּתֵּ֣י⁠נוּ הִצִּ֑יל 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 12 27 t779 figs-explicit וְ⁠אֶת־בָּתֵּ֣י⁠נוּ הִצִּ֑יל 1 He set our households free This means that Yahweh spared the Israelites’ firstborn sons. Alternate translation: “He did not kill the firstborn sons in our houses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 12 28 r5cj כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֥ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֖ן כֵּ֥ן עָשֽׂוּ 1 as Yahweh had commanded Moses and Aaron “everything that Yahweh told Moses and Aaron to do” +EXO 12 28 r5cj כַּ⁠אֲשֶׁ֨ר צִוָּ֧ה יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מֹשֶׁ֥ה וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֖ן כֵּ֥ן עָשֽׂוּ 1 as Yahweh had commanded Moses and Aaron Alternate translation: “everything that Yahweh told Moses and Aaron to do” EXO 12 29 rvg9 0 The next few verses are the climax of this part of Exodus. A number of literary features mark it out. First, it is specially introduced with **and so it happened,** which is used to mark major breaks in the narrative. Second, it uses repetition: **firstborn** is repeated four times in verse 29 so that the reader cannot possibly miss what is happening. **Night** is repeated in verse 29, 30, and 31. **Got up/get up** is repeated in verse 30 and 31. In verses 31 and 32 “also” occurs five times (it is translated as “both” once in the ULT). Third, the places of both **Pharaoh** and **the captive** are elaborated on to slow the pace and create a vivid mental image for the reader. In verse 30 there is the listing of sorts of people who got up; note the use of the double negative for emphasis. Your translation should attempt to use the same or similar literary features of your own language that slow down the pace, create vivid imagery, and emphasize that this is a climax point. EXO 12 29 zm1l figs-merism מִ⁠בְּכֹ֤ר פַּרְעֹה֙ הַ⁠יֹּשֵׁ֣ב עַל־כִּסְא֔⁠וֹ עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֔י אֲשֶׁ֖ר בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠בּ֑וֹר וְ⁠כֹ֖ל בְּכ֥וֹר בְּהֵמָֽה 1 at midnight This is a merism used to indicate that there was no person or household excluded from Yahweh’s judgment. It both speaks of extreme parts of society and then makes this into a list by including the animals. Alternate translation: “the firstborn of Pharaoh who sits on the throne and the firstborn of the captive who was in the house of the pit and the firstborn of everyone in between was struck; even all the firstborn of the beasts were struck” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 12 29 uj6u בְּכוֹר֮…מִ⁠בְּכֹ֤ר…בְּכ֣וֹר…בְּכ֥וֹר 1 all the firstborn in the land of Egypt…all the firstborn of cattle In theses usages, **firstborn** always refers to the oldest male offspring. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 11:5](../11/05.md). -EXO 12 29 g9z1 עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֔י אֲשֶׁ֖ר בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠בּ֑וֹר 1 the firstborn of the person in prison “to the firstborn of people in the house of the pit” This refers to prisoners in general and not to a specific person in prison. +EXO 12 29 g9z1 עַ֚ד בְּכ֣וֹר הַ⁠שְּׁבִ֔י אֲשֶׁ֖ר בְּ⁠בֵ֣ית הַ⁠בּ֑וֹר 1 the firstborn of the person in prison Alternate translation: “to the firstborn of people in the house of the pit” This refers to prisoners in general and not to a specific person in prison. EXO 12 30 gt4w figs-doublenegatives כִּֽי־אֵ֣ין בַּ֔יִת אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֵֽין־שָׁ֖ם מֵֽת׃ 1 for there was not a house where there was not someone dead This double negative emphasizes the positive. Alternate translation: “because someone was dead in every house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 12 31 j8k5 figs-youdual אַתֶּ֖ם…כְּ⁠דַבֶּרְ⁠כֶֽם 1 Here, Pharaoh speaking is to both Moses and Aaron. If your language uses a different form if two are people addressed, use a dual form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) EXO 12 33 j5u4 figs-explicit כֻּלָּ֥⁠נוּ מֵתִֽים 1 We will all die The Egyptians were afraid that they would die if the Israelites did not leave Egypt. Alternate translation: “We will all die if you do not leave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 12 34 diw8 figs-activepassive מִשְׁאֲרֹתָ֛⁠ם צְרֻרֹ֥ת בְּ⁠שִׂמְלֹתָ֖⁠ם עַל־שִׁכְמָֽ⁠ם 1 Their kneading bowls were already tied up in their clothes and on their shoulders This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “They tied up their bread- making bowls in their clothes and placed them on their shoulders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 12 36 nvmo figs-idiom אֶת־חֵ֥ן הָ⁠עָ֛ם בְּ⁠עֵינֵ֥י מִצְרַ֖יִם 1 Here, **in the eyes of the Egyptians** is an idiom for the Egyptian’s feelings or opinion. **Favor** means that those feelings are positive. Taken together, this means that when the Egyptians saw the Israelites leaving Egypt, they gladly helped them (because they wanted them to leave so badly due to the Egyptians suffering under God’s judgment). If your language has the same or a similar idiom, you can translate or use it. Otherwise, you can translate the meaning. See how you translated this in [3:21](../03/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 12 37 n1ha translate-names מֵ⁠רַעְמְסֵ֖ס 1 Rameses **Rameses** was a major Egyptian city where grain was stored. See how you translated this in [Exodus 1:11](../01/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 12 37 u81l translate-numbers כְּ⁠שֵׁשׁ־מֵא֨וֹת אֶ֧לֶף 1 They numbered about 600,000 men “about six hundred thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 12 37 u81l translate-numbers כְּ⁠שֵׁשׁ־מֵא֨וֹת אֶ֧לֶף 1 They numbered about 600,000 men Alternate translation: “about six hundred thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 12 39 pva6 figs-activepassive כִּֽי־גֹרְשׁ֣וּ מִ⁠מִּצְרַ֗יִם 1 they had been driven out of Egypt This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “because the Egyptians had driven them out of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 12 40 qsi5 translate-numbers שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים…וְ⁠אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת 1 430 years “four hundred thirty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 12 41 d8yh translate-numbers שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים…וְ⁠אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת 1 430 years “four hundred thirty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 12 40 qsi5 translate-numbers שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים…וְ⁠אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת 1 430 years Alternate translation: “four hundred thirty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 12 41 d8yh translate-numbers שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים…וְ⁠אַרְבַּ֥ע מֵא֖וֹת 1 430 years Alternate translation: “four hundred thirty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 12 41 xlf4 translate-unknown צִבְא֥וֹת 1 Yahweh’s armed groups The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people, often organized into groups for war. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “your groups” or “your divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 12 42 w6mj לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה שִׁמֻּרִ֛ים לְ⁠כָל־בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לְ⁠דֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 all the Israelites throughout their people’s generations You could combine **for all the sons of Israel to observe for Yahweh throughout their generations** into one noun phrase as subject. Alternate translation: “for all the sons of Israel throughout their generations to observe for Yahweh” EXO 12 43 zwac figs-quotemarks וְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [12:49](../12/49.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 12 44 n9wn וְ⁠כָל־עֶ֥בֶד אִ֖ישׁ 1 every Israelite’s slave “But any slave of an Israelite” +EXO 12 44 n9wn וְ⁠כָל־עֶ֥בֶד אִ֖ישׁ 1 every Israelite’s slave Alternate translation: “But any slave of an Israelite” EXO 12 44 qabi grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical וּ⁠מַלְתָּ֣ה אֹת֔⁠וֹ אָ֖ז 1 This is a hypothetical situation. You will need to use whatever form your language uses to mark something as potentially true. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) EXO 12 44 jqs8 figs-yousingular וּ⁠מַלְתָּ֣ה 1 Here **you** is singular. It refers to a specific man and his slave. It might make more sense to use the third person here. Alternate translation: “if he circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]]) EXO 12 46 j242 figs-activepassive בְּ⁠בַ֤יִת אֶחָד֙ יֵאָכֵ֔ל 1 The food must be eaten in one house This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “You must eat it in one house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1089,7 +1088,7 @@ EXO 12 48 j7ob grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical וְ⁠כִֽי־יָג֨ EXO 12 48 va2p figs-youcrowd אִתְּ⁠ךָ֜ 1 Here, **you** is singular, however it is used to address a crowd, so you may need to translate it using a plural form if your languages uses one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) EXO 12 48 h7k9 figs-activepassive הִמּ֧וֹל ל֣⁠וֹ כָל־זָכָ֗ר 1 all his male relatives must be circumcised This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “someone must circumcise all males in his household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 12 48 n3fz grammar-connect-logic-goal הִמּ֧וֹל ל֣⁠וֹ כָל־זָכָ֗ר וְ⁠אָז֙ יִקְרַ֣ב לַ⁠עֲשֹׂת֔⁠וֹ 1 The sojourner will be circumcised in order to **draw near to keep** the Passover. Some languages may need to place the purpose clause first. Alternate translation: “in order draw near to keep it all his males must be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) -EXO 12 48 hi4z figs-metonymy כְּ⁠אֶזְרַ֣ח הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ 1 the people who were born in the land Here, **land** refers to Canaan—which is the land that the Israelites will soon live in. The expression **a native of the land** means a person who is a native Israelite. Alternate translation: “those who are Israelites by birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 12 48 hi4z figs-metonymy כְּ⁠אֶזְרַ֣ח הָ⁠אָ֑רֶץ 1 the people who were born in the land Here, **land** refers to Canaan—which is the land that the Israelites will soon live in. The expression **a native of the land** means a person who is a native Israelite. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “those who are Israelites by birth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 12 48 f9ti figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠כָל־עָרֵ֖ל לֹֽא־יֹ֥אכַל בּֽ⁠וֹ 1 no uncircumcised person may eat This can be stated in positive terms. Alternate translation: “And only a circumcised person may eat it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 12 51 e3z3 וַ⁠יְהִ֕י בְּ⁠עֶ֖צֶם הַ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה 1 It came about This phrase is used here to mark an important event in the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here. EXO 12 51 tyj3 translate-unknown צִבְאֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 by their armed groups The term **hosts** refers to a large group of people often organized into groups for war. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:26](../06/26.md). Alternate translation: “your groups” or “your divisions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1104,25 +1103,25 @@ EXO 13 4 atab translate-names הָ⁠אָבִֽיב 1 **Aviv** is the name of t EXO 13 5 x89s וְ⁠הָיָ֣ה כִֽי־יְבִֽיאֲ⁠ךָ֣ יְהוָ֡ה אֶל־אֶ֣רֶץ…וְ⁠עָבַדְתָּ֛ אֶת־הָ⁠עֲבֹדָ֥ה הַ⁠זֹּ֖את בַּ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 you must observe this act of worship When the Israelites live in Canaan, they must celebrate the Passover on this day each year. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:25](../12/25.md). EXO 13 5 u37l figs-metaphor לַ⁠אֲבֹתֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ 1 Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “to your ancestors” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 13 5 ueej אֶ֛רֶץ זָבַ֥ת חָלָ֖ב וּ⁠דְבָ֑שׁ 1 The same description occurs in [Exodus 3:8](../03/08.md). See how you translated it there and in the several notes for it. -EXO 13 6 vwy9 translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֥ת 1 For seven days “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 13 6 mde6 translate-ordinal הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 “7th” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 13 6 vwy9 translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֥ת 1 For seven days Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 13 6 mde6 translate-ordinal הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֔י 1 Alternate translation: “7th” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 13 7 n41m figs-activepassive מַצּוֹת֙ יֵֽאָכֵ֔ל 1 Bread without yeast must be eaten This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “You must eat unleavened bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 13 7 zm8p translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֣ת 1 “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 13 7 zm8p translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֣ת 1 Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 13 7 le33 figs-activepassive וְ⁠לֹֽא־יֵרָאֶ֨ה לְ⁠ךָ֜ חָמֵ֗ץ 1 no bread with yeast may be seen among you This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you may not have any bread with yeast among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 13 7 c9kr figs-activepassive וְ⁠לֹֽא־יֵרָאֶ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֛ שְׂאֹ֖ר 1 No yeast may be seen with you This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “You may not have any yeast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 13 7 dmv1 בְּ⁠כָל־גְּבֻלֶֽ⁠ךָ 1 within any of your borders “inside any of the borders of your land” +EXO 13 7 dmv1 בְּ⁠כָל־גְּבֻלֶֽ⁠ךָ 1 within any of your borders Alternate translation: “inside any of the borders of your land” EXO 13 8 qum9 figs-quotesinquotes בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠ה֖וּא לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר בַּ⁠עֲב֣וּר זֶ֗ה עָשָׂ֤ה יְהוָה֙ לִ֔⁠י בְּ⁠צֵאתִ֖⁠י מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם 1 On that day you are to say to your children, ‘This is because of what Yahweh did for me when I came out of Egypt.’ The quotation can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “on that day that this is because of what Yahweh did for you when you came out of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 13 9 p21h figs-parallelism וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לְ⁠ךָ֨ לְ⁠א֜וֹת עַל־יָדְ⁠ךָ֗ וּ⁠לְ⁠זִכָּרוֹן֙ בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 This will be a reminder for you on your hand, and a reminder on your forehead These are two different types of physical reminders so people will not forget something important. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 13 9 s7zg figs-metaphor לְ⁠ךָ֨ לְ⁠א֜וֹת עַל־יָדְ⁠ךָ֗ 1 a reminder for you on your hand Moses speaks of celebrating the festival as if it were an object one could tie around their hands to remind them of what Yahweh had done. Alternate translation: “like something you tie around your hand as a reminder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 13 9 mru4 figs-metaphor וּ⁠לְ⁠זִכָּרוֹן֙ בֵּ֣ין עֵינֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 a reminder on your forehead Moses speaks of celebrating the festival as if it were an object one could tie on their foreheads to remind them of what Yahweh had done. Alternate translation: “and like something you tie around your head as a reminder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 13 9 b6ny figs-metonymy לְמַ֗עַן תִּהְיֶ֛ה תּוֹרַ֥ת יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠פִ֑י⁠ךָ 1 so the law of Yahweh may be in your mouth Here, **in your mouth** refers to the words that they speak. Alternate translation: “so you may always be speaking of the law of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 13 9 b6ny figs-metonymy לְמַ֗עַן תִּהְיֶ֛ה תּוֹרַ֥ת יְהוָ֖ה בְּ⁠פִ֑י⁠ךָ 1 so the law of Yahweh may be in your mouth Here, **in your mouth** refers to the words that they speak. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “so you may always be speaking of the law of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 13 9 w5rm figs-metonymy בְּ⁠יָ֣ד חֲזָקָ֔ה 1 strong hand Here, **hand** refers to power. See how you translated “strong hand” in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 13 10 rxel figs-merism מִ⁠יָּמִ֖ים יָמִֽימָ⁠ה 1 “for all time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) +EXO 13 10 rxel figs-merism מִ⁠יָּמִ֖ים יָמִֽימָ⁠ה 1 Alternate translation: “for all time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) EXO 13 11 e886 figs-metaphor וְ⁠לַֽ⁠אֲבֹתֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 Here, **fathers** figuratively means “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “to your ancestors” (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 13 11 iqh5 וּ⁠נְתָנָ֖⁠הּ לָֽ⁠ךְ 1 when he gives the land to you “when he gives the land of the Canaanites to you” +EXO 13 11 iqh5 וּ⁠נְתָנָ֖⁠הּ לָֽ⁠ךְ 1 when he gives the land to you Alternate translation: “when he gives the land of the Canaanites to you” EXO 13 12 mqgs וְ⁠הַעֲבַרְתָּ֥ 1 This is a deliberate word-play with [Exodus 12:12](../12/12.md) and [Exodus 12:23](../12/23.md) because these memorial sacrifices are to be reminders of what happened at the first Passover. It would be good to make a similar word-play in your translation, if possible, but following the meaning as in the UST is fine. EXO 13 13 lwv5 figs-explicit בְ⁠שֶׂ֔ה…וַ⁠עֲרַפְתּ֑⁠וֹ 1 Every firstborn of a donkey You may need to make explicit that either the **lamb** or **donkey** must be killed, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 13 13 ew26 לֹ֥א תִפְדֶּ֖ה 1 “you do not ransom the donkey” +EXO 13 13 ew26 לֹ֥א תִפְדֶּ֖ה 1 Alternate translation: “you do not ransom the donkey” EXO 13 14 s8cm figs-quotesinquotes כִּֽי־יִשְׁאָלְ⁠ךָ֥ בִנְ⁠ךָ֛ מָחָ֖ר לֵ⁠אמֹ֣ר מַה־זֹּ֑את וְ⁠אָמַרְתָּ֣ אֵלָ֔י⁠ו 1 When your son asks you later, ‘What does this mean?’ then you are to tell him The first quotation can be stated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “when your son asks you later what this means, then you are to tell him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 13 14 qr7q figs-metonymy בְּ⁠חֹ֣זֶק יָ֗ד 1 strong hand Here, **hand** represents God’s actions or works. See how you translated this in [Exodus 6:1](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “With his powerful works” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 13 14 rcz7 figs-metaphor מִ⁠בֵּ֥ית עֲבָדִֽים 1 the house of slavery Moses speaks of Egypt as if it were a house where people keep slaves. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:3](../13/03.md). Alternate translation: “from the place where you were slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1133,19 +1132,19 @@ EXO 13 16 xfag figs-metonymy בְּ⁠חֹ֣זֶק יָ֔ד 1 Here, **hand** re EXO 13 17 cv8n writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֗י 1 This marks the transition from instruction to narrative. You should mark the resumption of the narrative in a natural way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 13 17 pum6 grammar-connect-condition-contrary וְ⁠לֹא־נָחָ֣⁠ם אֱלֹהִ֗ים דֶּ֚רֶךְ אֶ֣רֶץ פְּלִשְׁתִּ֔ים כִּ֥י קָר֖וֹב ה֑וּא 1 The route on which God took the Israelites was not the expected route. In some languages you may need to put the portion that describes the expectation first. Alternate translation: “although it was nearby, God did not lead them by way of the land of the Philistines.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) EXO 13 17 upop grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical פֶּֽן־יִנָּחֵ֥ם הָ⁠עָ֛ם בִּ⁠רְאֹתָ֥⁠ם מִלְחָמָ֖ה וְ⁠שָׁ֥בוּ מִצְרָֽיְמָ⁠ה 1 In some languages you may need to put the reason before the hypothetical result. Alternate translation: “When they see war, they may repent and return to Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) -EXO 13 17 fjvz יִנָּחֵ֥ם 1 “turn back” +EXO 13 17 fjvz יִנָּחֵ֥ם 1 Alternate translation: “turn back” EXO 13 18 c4tw וַ⁠חֲמֻשִׁ֛ים 1 The meaning of this term (**by fives**) is uncertain. Many English translations opt for something like “prepared for battle” because this seems to be the meaning in Numbers 32:17 and the related verses in Joshua 1:14 and 4:12. Because of what the previous verse said about war, it may mean that they went out in formation—like an army would march—but perhaps not armed. Alternate translation: “And … in formation like an army” EXO 13 19 cxyk וַ⁠יִּקַּ֥ח מֹשֶׁ֛ה אֶת־עַצְמ֥וֹת יוֹסֵ֖ף עִמּ֑⁠וֹ 1 See Joshua 24:32 regarding the burial of Jospeh’s bones. EXO 13 19 dnlp פָּקֹ֨ד יִפְקֹ֤ד אֱלֹהִים֙ אֶתְ⁠כֶ֔ם וְ⁠הַעֲלִיתֶ֧ם אֶת־עַצְמֹתַ֛⁠י מִ⁠זֶּ֖ה אִתְּ⁠כֶֽם 1 This is an almost exact quote of what Joseph said in Genesis 50:25; reference your translation there when translating this. -EXO 13 20 qob9 מִ⁠סֻּכֹּ֑ת וַ⁠יַּחֲנ֣וּ בְ⁠אֵתָ֔ם 1 “from a place named Succoth and they camped at a place named Etham” +EXO 13 20 qob9 מִ⁠סֻּכֹּ֑ת וַ⁠יַּחֲנ֣וּ בְ⁠אֵתָ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “from a place named Succoth and they camped at a place named Etham” EXO 13 20 xq5d translate-names בְ⁠אֵתָ֔ם 1 camped at Etham Etham was possibly located south of the route heading towards the Philistines, at the border of the wilderness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 13 21 yi2p figs-metonymy וַֽ⁠יהוָ֡ה הֹלֵךְ֩ לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֨ם 1 Here, **before their faces** means “in front of the people.” Alternate translation: “And Yahweh led them by going in front of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 13 21 jnv8 בְּ⁠עַמּ֤וּד עָנָן֙…בְּ⁠עַמּ֥וּד אֵ֖שׁ 1 pillar of cloud…pillar of fire “in a cloud in the shape of a column … in a fire in the shape of a column” -EXO 13 21 nr02 לְ⁠הָאִ֣יר לָ⁠הֶ֑ם 1 “to be light for them” +EXO 13 21 jnv8 בְּ⁠עַמּ֤וּד עָנָן֙…בְּ⁠עַמּ֥וּד אֵ֖שׁ 1 pillar of cloud…pillar of fire Alternate translation: “in a cloud in the shape of a column … in a fire in the shape of a column” +EXO 13 21 nr02 לְ⁠הָאִ֣יר לָ⁠הֶ֑ם 1 Alternate translation: “to be light for them” EXO 13 21 i7yl grammar-connect-logic-result אֵ֖שׁ לְ⁠הָאִ֣יר לָ⁠הֶ֑ם לָ⁠לֶ֖כֶת יוֹמָ֥ם וָ⁠לָֽיְלָה 1 They could travel by either day or night because God provided light at night. You could reorder the cause and effect if that is more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “fire. They could go by day or by night because he was light to them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])


-EXO 13 22 iiuj עַמּ֤וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ יוֹמָ֔ם וְ⁠עַמּ֥וּד הָ⁠אֵ֖שׁ לָ֑יְלָה 1 “the pillar of cloud by day or the pillar of fire by night” +EXO 13 22 iiuj עַמּ֤וּד הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ יוֹמָ֔ם וְ⁠עַמּ֥וּד הָ⁠אֵ֖שׁ לָ֑יְלָה 1 Alternate translation: “the pillar of cloud by day or the pillar of fire by night” EXO 13 22 qxks figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י הָ⁠עָֽם 1 Here, **from the face of the people** means “from in front of the people” where they could see it. Alternate translation: “from where they could see it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 14 intro jq4u 0 # Exodus 14 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter contains an important event in the history of Israel known as the “parting of the sea of reeds (Red Sea).”
Throughout this chapter and chapter 15, the word “sea” is used. The context shows that this is the sea of reeds (Red Sea). Since the text does not explicitly say that though, the ULT will only say “sea.” In your translation, it may help people to be more specific than the text, if just using “sea” is confusing.


## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pharaoh’s hard heart

Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.

### Pharaoh’s chariots
These chariots were a fighting force. Pharaoh took an army to kill the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions
The Israelites asked a few rhetorical questions of Moses. These questions were not really directed at Moses, but at Yahweh. This showed their lack of faith in Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) +EXO 14 intro jq4u 0 # Exodus 14 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter contains an important event in the history of Israel known as the “parting of the sea of reeds (Red Sea).”
Throughout this chapter and chapter 15, the word “sea” is used. The context shows that this is the sea of reeds (Red Sea). Since the text does not explicitly say that though, the ULT will only say “sea.” In your translation, it may help people to be more specific than the text, if just using “sea” is confusing.


## Special concepts in this chapter

### Pharaoh’s hard heart

Pharaoh’s heart is often described as hard in this chapter. This means that his heart was not open or willing to understand Yahweh’s instructions. When his heart was hardened, it became less and less receptive to Yahweh.

### Pharaoh’s chariots

These chariots were a fighting force. Pharaoh took an army to kill the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

The Israelites asked a few rhetorical questions of Moses. These questions were not really directed at Moses, but at Yahweh. This showed their lack of faith in Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faith]]) EXO 14 2 b5qq figs-quotemarks דַּבֵּר֮ 1 This verse begins a direct quote which continues into [verse 4](../13/04.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 14 2 mb4e translate-names פִּ֣י הַחִירֹ֔ת…מִגְדֹּ֖ל…בַּ֣עַל צְפֹ֔ן 1 Pi Hahiroth…Migdol…Baal Zephon These are locations on Egypt’s eastern border. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 14 2 ue2o figs-quotations בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵל֒ וְ⁠יָשֻׁ֗בוּ וְ⁠יַחֲנוּ֙ לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ פִּ֣י הַחִירֹ֔ת בֵּ֥ין מִגְדֹּ֖ל וּ⁠בֵ֣ין הַ⁠יָּ֑ם לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ בַּ֣עַל צְפֹ֔ן 1 The portion after **that** could be translated as a direct quotation. That would make a second-level direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “the sons of Israel, ‘Turn and camp before the face of Pi Hahiroth, between Migdol and the sea, before the face of Baal Zephon.’ ”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) @@ -1153,27 +1152,27 @@ EXO 14 2 c9r8 figs-youdual תַחֲנ֖וּ 1 You are to camp Here, **you** is p EXO 14 3 c81b figs-quotations וְ⁠אָמַ֤ר פַּרְעֹה֙ לִ⁠בְנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל נְבֻכִ֥ים הֵ֖ם בָּ⁠אָ֑רֶץ סָגַ֥ר עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם הַ⁠מִּדְבָּֽר 1 Pharaoh will say about the Israelites, ‘They are wandering in the land. The wilderness has closed in on them.’ This can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “Pharaoh will say that the Israelites are confused in the land and the wilderness has closed in on them”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 14 3 tz6j figs-personification סָגַ֥ר עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם הַ⁠מִּדְבָּֽר 1 The wilderness has closed in on them Pharaoh speaks of **the wilderness** as a person who has trapped the Israelites. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “It is as if the wilderness is closing in on them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 14 4 dv62 figs-metaphor וְ⁠חִזַּקְתִּ֣י אֶת־לֵב־פַּרְעֹה֮ 1 I will harden Pharaoh’s heart This means God will make him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “But I will cause Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 14 4 tw2m וְ⁠רָדַ֣ף אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶם֒ 1 he will pursue them “and Pharaoh will pursue the Israelites” +EXO 14 4 tw2m וְ⁠רָדַ֣ף אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶם֒ 1 he will pursue them Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh will pursue the Israelites” EXO 14 4 d5x1 figs-activepassive וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה 1 I will get honor If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “And people will glorify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 14 4 a7m2 figs-ellipsis וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּ⁠פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־חֵיל֔⁠וֹ 1 Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh and to all his army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 14 4 dms1 figs-explicit וַ⁠יַּֽעֲשׂוּ־כֵֽן 1 So the Israelites camped as they were instructed This can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “So the Israelites turned and camped as Yahweh had instructed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 14 5 t4cn figs-activepassive וַ⁠יֻּגַּד֙ לְ⁠מֶ֣לֶךְ מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 When the king of Egypt was told This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Then someone told the king of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 14 5 it5s בָרַ֖ח 1 had fled “had run away” -EXO 14 5 k67b figs-metonymy וַ֠⁠יֵּהָפֵךְ לְבַ֨ב פַּרְעֹ֤ה וַ⁠עֲבָדָי⁠ו֙ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 the minds of Pharaoh and his servants turned against the people Here, **heart** refers to their attitudes towards the Israelites. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh and his servants changed their attitude about the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 14 5 it5s בָרַ֖ח 1 had fled Alternate translation: “had run away” +EXO 14 5 k67b figs-metonymy וַ֠⁠יֵּהָפֵךְ לְבַ֨ב פַּרְעֹ֤ה וַ⁠עֲבָדָי⁠ו֙ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 the minds of Pharaoh and his servants turned against the people Here, **heart** refers to their attitudes towards the Israelites. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh and his servants changed their attitude about the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 14 5 go8u figs-activepassive וַ֠⁠יֵּהָפֵךְ לְבַ֨ב פַּרְעֹ֤ה וַ⁠עֲבָדָי⁠ו֙ אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “and Pharaoh and his servants turned their hearts to the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 14 5 wljw אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 “against the Israelites” +EXO 14 5 wljw אֶל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 Alternate translation: “against the Israelites” EXO 14 5 v236 figs-rquestion מַה־זֹּ֣את עָשִׂ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־שִׁלַּ֥חְנוּ אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠עָבְדֵֽ⁠נוּ 1 What have we done? We have released Israel from serving us. They asked this question to show they thought they had done a foolish thing. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “We should not have let the Israelites go free from working for us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 14 5 kw4x figs-quotemarks מַה־זֹּ֣את עָשִׂ֔ינוּ כִּֽי־שִׁלַּ֥חְנוּ אֶת־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל מֵ⁠עָבְדֵֽ⁠נוּ 1 This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 14 5 dnj3 grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 14 7 ry11 translate-numbers וַ⁠יִּקַּ֗ח שֵׁשׁ־מֵא֥וֹת רֶ֨כֶב֙ בָּח֔וּר 1 He took six hundred chosen chariots “He took 600 of his best chariots” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 14 7 ry11 translate-numbers וַ⁠יִּקַּ֗ח שֵׁשׁ־מֵא֥וֹת רֶ֨כֶב֙ בָּח֔וּר 1 He took six hundred chosen chariots Alternate translation: “He took 600 of his best chariots” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 14 7 g2d9 וְ⁠שָׁלִשִׁ֖ם 1 The precise meaning of this term is not known. Alternate translations: “and officers” or “and shield-bearers” or “and three men” EXO 14 8 a1r1 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְחַזֵּ֣ק יְהֹוָ֗ה אֶת־לֵ֤ב פַּרְעֹה֙ 1 Yahweh hardened the heart of Pharaoh This means God made him stubborn. His stubborn attitude is spoken of as if his heart were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “And Yahweh caused Pharaoh to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 14 8 doa5 בְּ⁠יָ֥ד רָמָֽה 1 “boldly” or “defiantly” +EXO 14 8 doa5 בְּ⁠יָ֥ד רָמָֽה 1 Alternate translation: “boldly” or “defiantly” EXO 14 9 x9x0 כָּל־סוּס֙ רֶ֣כֶב פַּרְעֹ֔ה וּ⁠פָרָשָׁ֖י⁠ו וְ⁠חֵיל֑⁠וֹ 1 It is unclear exactly what the groupings here are. **Horses of the chariots** (probably meaning “horse-drawn chariots”) and **horsemen** could be two groups or two references to the same group. **Army** could mean another group, perhaps on foot (see [15:19](../15/19.md)), or it could be a summary grouping. Furthermore, most translations render **horses of the chariots** as “horses and chariots,” suggesting four total groups (possibly because of [v. 23](../14/23.md)). Alternate translation: “all the horse-drawn chariots of Pharaoh, and his horsemen, and his foot soldiers” -EXO 14 9 q0jo writing-pronouns אוֹתָ⁠ם֙ 1 “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 14 9 q0jo writing-pronouns אוֹתָ⁠ם֙ 1 Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 14 9 sb7x translate-names פִּי֙ הַֽחִירֹ֔ת…בַּ֥עַל צְפֹֽן 1 Pi Hahiroth…Baal Zephon These are places on Egypt’s eastern border. See how you translated them in [Exodus 14:2](../14/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 14 10 s1xa figs-synecdoche וּ⁠פַרְעֹ֖ה הִקְרִ֑יב 1 When Pharaoh came close Here, **Pharaoh** represents the entire Egyptian army. Alternate translation: “Then Pharaoh and his army approached” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -EXO 14 10 vyp9 וַ⁠יִּשְׂאוּ֩ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֨ל אֶת־עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֜ם 1 “and the sons of Israel looked up” or “and the sons of Israel looked back” +EXO 14 10 vyp9 וַ⁠יִּשְׂאוּ֩ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֨ל אֶת־עֵינֵי⁠הֶ֜ם 1 Alternate translation: “and the sons of Israel looked up” or “and the sons of Israel looked back” EXO 14 10 qcy1 וְ⁠הִנֵּ֥ה 1 they were terrified **Behold** is used to draw attention to surprising information that follows. Use a word, phrase, or structure in your language that indicates that the next information is very surprising. EXO 14 11 vzw5 figs-rquestion הַֽ⁠מִ⁠בְּלִ֤י אֵין־קְבָרִים֙ בְּ⁠מִצְרַ֔יִם לְקַחְתָּ֖⁠נוּ לָ⁠מ֣וּת בַּ⁠מִּדְבָּ֑ר 1 Is it because there were no graves in Egypt, that you have taken us away to die in the wilderness? The Israelites ask this question to express their frustration and fear of dying. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “There were plenty of graveyards in Egypt for us to be buried in. You did not have to take us into the wilderness to die!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 14 11 x4n2 figs-rquestion מַה־זֹּאת֙ עָשִׂ֣יתָ לָּ֔⁠נוּ לְ⁠הוֹצִיאָ֖⁠נוּ מִ⁠מִּצְרָֽיִם 1 Why have you treated us like this, bringing us out of Egypt? The Israelites ask this question to rebuke Moses for bringing them to the desert to die. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not have treated us like this by bringing us out of Egypt!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1187,10 +1186,10 @@ EXO 14 14 hx1f תַּחֲרִישֽׁוּ⁠ן 1 Here, **silent** could mean EXO 14 15 zsgk figs-quotemarks אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 Why are you, Moses, continuing to call out to me? After this phrase, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [verse 18](../14/18.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 14 15 a727 figs-rquestion מַה־תִּצְעַ֖ק אֵלָ֑⁠י 1 Why are you, Moses, continuing to call out to me? Moses apparently had been praying to God for help, so God uses this question to compel Moses to act. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “Do not call out to me any longer, Moses.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 14 16 stla הָרֵ֣ם אֶֽת־מַטְּ⁠ךָ֗ וּ⁠נְטֵ֧ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֛ 1 divide it in two See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding **hand** and **staff**. -EXO 14 16 t3e4 וּ⁠בְקָעֵ֑⁠הוּ 1 divide it in two “and divide the sea into two parts” +EXO 14 16 t3e4 וּ⁠בְקָעֵ֑⁠הוּ 1 divide it in two Alternate translation: “and divide the sea into two parts” EXO 14 17 z5ub וַ⁠אֲנִ֗י הִנְ⁠נִ֤י 1 Be aware **Behold** is a term meant to focus the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. In this case Yahweh is drawing attention to his next actions. Alternate translation: “Look at what I will do” EXO 14 17 qd3l figs-metaphor מְחַזֵּק֙ אֶת־לֵ֣ב מִצְרַ֔יִם 1 I will harden the Egyptians’ hearts This means God will make them stubborn. Their stubborn attitude is spoken of as if their hearts were strong. If the heart is not the body part your culture uses to refer to a person’s will, consider using whichever organ your culture would use for this image. See how you translated this in [4:21](../04/21.md). Alternate translation: “I will cause the Egyptians to be stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 14 17 asz9 וְ⁠יָבֹ֖אוּ אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶ֑ם 1 so they will go after them “so that the Egyptians will go into the sea after the Israelites” +EXO 14 17 asz9 וְ⁠יָבֹ֖אוּ אַחֲרֵי⁠הֶ֑ם 1 so they will go after them Alternate translation: “so that the Egyptians will go into the sea after the Israelites” EXO 14 17 hjyh figs-ellipsis וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה בְּ⁠פַרְעֹה֙ וּ⁠בְ⁠כָל־חֵיל֔⁠וֹ בְּ⁠רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠פָרָשָֽׁי⁠ו 1 so they will go after them Yahweh is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages to be complete. If it would be clearer in your language, you could supply these words from the context. See how you translated a similar phrase in [verse 4](../14/04.md) Alternate translation: “And I will be glorified because of what I do to Pharaoh, all his army, his chariots, and his horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 14 17 asfq figs-activepassive וְ⁠אִכָּבְדָ֤ה 1 so they will go after them If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “And people will glorify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 14 18 ytnm figs-activepassive בְּ⁠הִכָּבְדִ֣⁠י 1 so they will go after them If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “when I cause people to glorify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1198,36 +1197,36 @@ EXO 14 18 cji1 figs-ellipsis בְּ⁠הִכָּבְדִ֣⁠י בְּ⁠פַר EXO 14 19 hsih figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵי֙ מַחֲנֵ֣ה…מִ⁠פְּנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם 1 so they will go after them Here, **face** means “front.” Alternate translation: “in front of the camp of … from in front of them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 14 19 ysv9 grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 so they will go after them This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 14 20 jyz2 grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 so one side did not come near the other This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 14 20 c4u5 וַ⁠יְהִ֤י הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠חֹ֔שֶׁךְ וַ⁠יָּ֖אֶר אֶת־הַ⁠לָּ֑יְלָה 1 so one side did not come near the other “and the cloud became dark and light all night” +EXO 14 20 c4u5 וַ⁠יְהִ֤י הֶֽ⁠עָנָן֙ וְ⁠הַ⁠חֹ֔שֶׁךְ וַ⁠יָּ֖אֶר אֶת־הַ⁠לָּ֑יְלָה 1 so one side did not come near the other Alternate translation: “and the cloud became dark and light all night” EXO 14 21 qbzp וַ⁠יֵּ֨ט מֹשֶׁ֣ה אֶת־יָד⁠וֹ֮ עַל־הַ⁠יָּם֒ 1 east wind See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. EXO 14 21 dfx5 בְּ⁠ר֨וּחַ קָדִ֤ים 1 east wind An **east wind** originates in the east and blows towards the west. EXO 14 21 f9zh figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּבָּקְע֖וּ הַ⁠מָּֽיִם 1 the waters were divided This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “And Yahweh divided the waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 14 24 iz9t translate-unknown בְּ⁠אַשְׁמֹ֣רֶת הַ⁠בֹּ֔קֶר 1 He caused panic among the Egyptians This is the last third of the night. It is approximately the three hours before sunrise. Alternate translation: “very early in the morning” or “in the time before the sun rises” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 14 24 zyp4 מַחֲנֵ֣ה מִצְרַ֔יִם…מַחֲנֵ֥ה מִצְרָֽיִם 1 He caused panic among the Egyptians “the army of the Egyptians … the army of the Egyptians” +EXO 14 24 zyp4 מַחֲנֵ֣ה מִצְרַ֔יִם…מַחֲנֵ֥ה מִצְרָֽיִם 1 He caused panic among the Egyptians Alternate translation: “the army of the Egyptians … the army of the Egyptians” EXO 14 25 qdp8 figs-quotemarks אָנ֨וּסָה֙ מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֣י יְהוָ֔ה נִלְחָ֥ם לָ⁠הֶ֖ם בְּ⁠מִצְרָֽיִם 1 Their chariot wheels were clogged This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 14 25 qzkw figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Their chariot wheels were clogged Here, **the face of Israel** means the presence of Israel. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 14 25 qzkw figs-metonymy מִ⁠פְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל 1 Their chariot wheels were clogged Here, **the face of Israel** means the presence of Israel. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 14 26 dfg1 figs-quotemarks נְטֵ֥ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֖ עַל־הַ⁠יָּ֑ם וְ⁠יָשֻׁ֤בוּ הַ⁠מַּ֨יִם֙ עַל־מִצְרַ֔יִם עַל־רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠עַל־פָּרָשָֽׁי⁠ו 1 Yahweh said to Moses, “Reach out with your hand…and their horsemen.” This is a direct quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with first-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 14 26 p5ds figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה נְטֵ֥ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֖ עַל־הַ⁠יָּ֑ם וְ⁠יָשֻׁ֤בוּ הַ⁠מַּ֨יִם֙ עַל־מִצְרַ֔יִם עַל־רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠עַל־פָּרָשָֽׁי⁠ו׃ 1 Yahweh said to Moses, “Reach out with your hand…and their horsemen.” This can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “Yahweh told Moses to reach out with his hand over the sea so that the waters would come back onto the Egyptians, their chariots, and their horsemen.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 14 26 pw8g נְטֵ֥ה אֶת־יָדְ⁠ךָ֖ עַל־הַ⁠יָּ֑ם 1 Yahweh said to Moses, “Reach out with your hand…and their horsemen.” See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. EXO 14 26 d46y writing-pronouns עַל־רִכְבּ֖⁠וֹ וְ⁠עַל־פָּרָשָֽׁי⁠ו 1 Yahweh said to Moses, “Reach out with your hand…and their horsemen.” Here, **his** refers to Pharaoh, king of Egypt. Alternate translation: “on Pharaoh’s chariots, and on Pharaoh’s horsemen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 14 27 wn3q וַ⁠יֵּט֩ מֹשֶׁ֨ה אֶת־יָד֜⁠וֹ עַל־הַ⁠יָּ֗ם 1 The Egyptians fled into the sea See note in the [introduction to chapter 8](../08/intro.md) regarding the hand and staff. -EXO 14 27 cosa figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנ֥וֹת בֹּ֨קֶר֙ 1 The Egyptians fled into the sea Here, **before the face of** means “before the occurrence of.” Alternate translation: “before it was morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 14 27 cosa figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנ֥וֹת בֹּ֨קֶר֙ 1 The Egyptians fled into the sea Here, **before the face of** means “before the occurrence of.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “before it was morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 14 27 h64r figs-metaphor וַ⁠יְנַעֵ֧ר יְהוָ֛ה אֶת־מִצְרַ֖יִם בְּ⁠ת֥וֹךְ הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 Yahweh drove the Egyptians Here, Yahweh is pictured as acting towards the Egyptians as if they were dirt or dust on his clothing that he shakes to be rid of them. Alternate translation: “and Yahweh threw the Egyptians back into the middle of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 14 28 o9qo figs-litotes לֹֽא־נִשְׁאַ֥ר בָּ⁠הֶ֖ם עַד־אֶחָֽד 1 Yahweh drove the Egyptians This negative statement is meant to strongly convey the idea that all the Egyptians were gone. Alternate translation: “Every one of them was gone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]]) EXO 14 30 zvbe grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל 1 out of the hand of the Egyptians This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 14 30 e2lf figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֣ד מִצְרָ֑יִם 1 out of the hand of the Egyptians Here, **hand** refers to power. Alternate translation: “from the Egyptians’ power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 14 30 p5zw עַל־שְׂפַ֥ת הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 on the seashore “on the land along the edge of the sea” +EXO 14 30 p5zw עַל־שְׂפַ֥ת הַ⁠יָּֽם 1 on the seashore Alternate translation: “on the land along the edge of the sea” EXO 14 31 o1oc grammar-collectivenouns יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 on the seashore This is a collective singular noun. If your language would not refer to a group of people in this way, you may need to translate it as plural. Alternate translation: “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 14 31 np6s figs-metonymy אֶת־הַ⁠יָּ֣ד הַ⁠גְּדֹלָ֗ה 1 on the seashore Here, **hand** refers to power. Alternate translation: “the great power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 15 intro ni4b 0 # Exodus 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verses 1b-18 and 21b of chapter 15 verses are poetry. They are a song of praise to Yahweh because he defeated and destroyed the Egyptian army ([Exodus 14:26-28](../14/26.md).). Translating poetry should be done by someone who is a skilled poet in the target language. Because the forms of poetry are so different in different languages, a translation that is good poetry in the target language may seem very different from the original poem. The structure may look quite different. The poet will be well served by looking at the entire poem from multiple perspectives. He will need to know the meaning of the poem, the themes and discourse structure of the poem, and the feelings that the poem is supposed to create in the reader at each point (UST, tNotes). He will need to understand how that was accomplished by the original form and structure (ULT). Then he will need to compose the translated poem using forms and structures that have the same or similar meaning, themes, discourse elements, and feelings.

### Structure

This song follows a basic AB structure which is given to us in verse 1b-c and 21b-c:

* A - praise to Yahweh - he is magnificent (expressed in various words)
* B - because he defeats our enemies

The song can be divided into three major sections, each of which is patterned as: AB(a)b. Each section starts with an AB portion which is characterized by fewer verbs (or participles, how to express) (especially the A portion). The section then elaborates on each. Note that there are other possible analyses of the structure of the poem.

Here is an outline of the structure according to this model:

* Section 1 (see alternate breakdown below):
* 1b: A “Let me sing to Yahweh, for he has triumphantly triumphed;”
* 1c: B “the horse and the one riding it he threw into the sea.”
* 2-3: a
* 4-5: b
* Section 2:
* 6a: A
* 6b: B
* 7a: a “And in the abundance of your majesty”
* 7a-10: b “you overthrow those who rise up against you … ”
* Section 3:
* 11: A
* 12: B
* 13a: a (possibly) “In your covenant loyalty”
* 13a-17: b
* 18: finale

Alternate breakdown of section 1: it is possible to view 1b-c as the introduction and divide verse 2 such that:

* 2a: A “Yah is my strength and my song”
* 2b: B “and he has become my salvation”
* 2c-3: a
* 4-5: b

### Themes:

There are several images and themes that are throughout the song as well as some that are throughout an individual section.

* “High” versus “low”: Yahweh is high, while his enemies are low.
* The following words are all related to the idea of being high or rising up: **triumph** ([v1](../15/01.md)), **exalt** ([v2](../15/02.md)), **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v11](../15/11.md)), **majesty** ([v7](../15/07.md)), and **the mountain of** \[Yahweh’s\] **possession** ([v17](../15/17.md)). In the last case Yahweh’s people are brought to a high place with him.
* In contrast, his enemies are low. Note in [verse 7](../15/07.md), Yahweh overthrows those who **rise up against** \[him\]. Ideas of being low are as follows: **sank** ([v4](../15/04.md), [v10](../15/19.md)), **deeps** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **descended into the depths** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **melted away** ([v15](../15/15.md)), and **fall on them** ([v16](../15/16.md)).
* The strength of Yahweh in [verses 2](../15/02.md), [6](../15/06.md), and [13](../15/13.md).
* The effectiveness of Yahweh’s hand versus the enemy's hand. Yahweh’s hand (and arm) is effective in [verses 6](../15/06.md), [12](../15/12.md), [16](../15/16.md), and [17](../15/17.md) but the enemy’s hand is ineffective despite his boasting in [verse 9](../15/09.md).
* There is parallel imagery near the end of each section. The enemy is compared three times by simile to a heavy, inert object. In [verses 5](../15/05.md) and [16](../15/16.md) that is a **stone**, in [verse 10](../15/10.md) that is **lead**.
* More parallel imagery occurs at the end of sections one ([v5](../15/05.md)) and two ([v10](../15/10.md)): that of the enemy sinking in the water and being covered by it.
* In sections two and three the water ([v8](../15/08.md)) and the other peoples ([v16](../15/16.md)) are made still by Yahweh.
* Section two begins and ends with **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v10](../15/10.md)) and that word is picked up in the beginning of section three ([v11](../15/11.md)).
* In section two ([v9](../15/09.md)), the enemies seek to **dispossess** (or disinherit) the Israelites; in section three ([v16](../15/16.md)), the Israelites come to live in the land of Yahweh’s **possession** (or inheritance).
* In [verse 11](../15/11.md), three themes for the third section are introduced. These are each expanded on in that section.
* **Holiness** occurs again in [verses 13](../15/13.md) and [16](../15/16.md)
* **Fear** is vividly described in [verses 14-16](../15/14.md) (shake, terror, panic, trembling, melted away, dread)
* Yahweh **does miracles** to protect and build a home for his people
* [Verses 14](../15/14.md)-16a are a chiasm, a complex parallel structure where concepts are repeated in reverse order:
* A: 14a: peoples (nations) *become* afraid
* B: 14b: *inhabitants* of Philistia are afraid
* C: 15a: *rulers* of Edom are afraid
* C’: 15b: *rulers* of Moab are afraid
* B’: 15c: *inhabitants* of Canaan are afraid
* A’: 16a: people *become* afraid
* In section three, there is another parallel structure:
* [v13](../15/13.md): you led this people => [v16](../15/16.md): your people pass by
* v13: this people you redeemed => v16: this people you acquired (or purchased or ransomed)
* v13: you led them to the home => [v17](../15/17.md): you will bring them … \[to\] the place … you made
* v13: of your holiness => v17: the holy place

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Israelite’s discontent
In [verse 24](../15/24.md) the word **murmur** is introduced for the first time. This is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers.

### Yahweh’s laws

In verses [24-26](../15/24.md), there is an introductory revelation of the requirement that Israel keep the covenant by obeying the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]]) +EXO 15 intro ni4b 0 # Exodus 15 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

Verses 1b-18 and 21b of chapter 15 verses are poetry. They are a song of praise to Yahweh because he defeated and destroyed the Egyptian army ([Exodus 14:26-28](../14/26.md).). Translating poetry should be done by someone who is a skilled poet in the target language. Because the forms of poetry are so different in different languages, a translation that is good poetry in the target language may seem very different from the original poem. The structure may look quite different. The poet will be well served by looking at the entire poem from multiple perspectives. He will need to know the meaning of the poem, the themes and discourse structure of the poem, and the feelings that the poem is supposed to create in the reader at each point (UST, tNotes). He will need to understand how that was accomplished by the original form and structure (ULT). Then he will need to compose the translated poem using forms and structures that have the same or similar meaning, themes, discourse elements, and feelings.

### Structure

This song follows a basic AB structure which is given to us in verse 1b-c and 21b-c:

* A - praise to Yahweh - he is magnificent (expressed in various words)
* B - because he defeats our enemies

The song can be divided into three major sections, each of which is patterned as: AB(a)b. Each section starts with an AB portion which is characterized by fewer verbs (or participles, how to express) (especially the A portion). The section then elaborates on each. Note that there are other possible analyses of the structure of the poem.

Here is an outline of the structure according to this model:

* Section 1 (see alternate breakdown below):
* 1b: A “Let me sing to Yahweh, for he has triumphantly triumphed;”
* 1c: B “the horse and the one riding it he threw into the sea.”
* 2-3: a
* 4-5: b
* Section 2:
* 6a: A
* 6b: B
* 7a: a “And in the abundance of your majesty”
* 7a-10: b “you overthrow those who rise up against you … ”
* Section 3:
* 11: A
* 12: B
* 13a: a (possibly) “In your covenant loyalty”
* 13a-17: b
* 18: finale

Alternate breakdown of section 1: it is possible to view 1b-c as the introduction and divide verse 2 such that:

* 2a: A “Yah is my strength and my song”
* 2b: B “and he has become my salvation”
* 2c-3: a
* 4-5: b

### Themes:

There are several images and themes that are throughout the song as well as some that are throughout an individual section.

* “High” versus “low”: Yahweh is high, while his enemies are low.
* The following words are all related to the idea of being high or rising up: **triumph** ([v1](../15/01.md)), **exalt** ([v2](../15/02.md)), **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v11](../15/11.md)), **majesty** ([v7](../15/07.md)), and **the mountain of** \[Yahweh’s\] **possession** ([v17](../15/17.md)). In the last case Yahweh’s people are brought to a high place with him.
* In contrast, his enemies are low. Note in [verse 7](../15/07.md), Yahweh overthrows those who **rise up against** \[him\]. Ideas of being low are as follows: **sank** ([v4](../15/04.md), [v10](../15/19.md)), **deeps** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **descended into the depths** ([v5](../15/05.md)), **melted away** ([v15](../15/15.md)), and **fall on them** ([v16](../15/16.md)).
* The strength of Yahweh in [verses 2](../15/02.md), [6](../15/06.md), and [13](../15/13.md).
* The effectiveness of Yahweh’s hand versus the enemy's hand. Yahweh’s hand (and arm) is effective in [verses 6](../15/06.md), [12](../15/12.md), [16](../15/16.md), and [17](../15/17.md) but the enemy’s hand is ineffective despite his boasting in [verse 9](../15/09.md).
* There is parallel imagery near the end of each section. The enemy is compared three times by simile to a heavy, inert object. In [verses 5](../15/05.md) and [16](../15/16.md) that is a **stone**, in [verse 10](../15/10.md) that is **lead**.
* More parallel imagery occurs at the end of sections one ([v5](../15/05.md)) and two ([v10](../15/10.md)): that of the enemy sinking in the water and being covered by it.
* In sections two and three the water ([v8](../15/08.md)) and the other peoples ([v16](../15/16.md)) are made still by Yahweh.
* Section two begins and ends with **majestic** ([v6](../15/06.md), [v10](../15/10.md)) and that word is picked up in the beginning of section three ([v11](../15/11.md)).
* In section two ([v9](../15/09.md)), the enemies seek to **dispossess** (or disinherit) the Israelites; in section three ([v16](../15/16.md)), the Israelites come to live in the land of Yahweh’s **possession** (or inheritance).
* In [verse 11](../15/11.md), three themes for the third section are introduced. These are each expanded on in that section.
* **Holiness** occurs again in [verses 13](../15/13.md) and [16](../15/16.md)
* **Fear** is vividly described in [verses 14-16](../15/14.md) (shake, terror, panic, trembling, melted away, dread)
* Yahweh **does miracles** to protect and build a home for his people
* [Verses 14](../15/14.md)-16a are a chiasm, a complex parallel structure where concepts are repeated in reverse order:
* A: 14a: peoples (nations) *become* afraid
* B: 14b: *inhabitants* of Philistia are afraid
* C: 15a: *rulers* of Edom are afraid
* C’: 15b: *rulers* of Moab are afraid
* B’: 15c: *inhabitants* of Canaan are afraid
* A’: 16a: people *become* afraid
* In section three, there is another parallel structure:
* [v13](../15/13.md): you led this people => [v16](../15/16.md): your people pass by
* v13: this people you redeemed => v16: this people you acquired (or purchased or ransomed)
* v13: you led them to the home => [v17](../15/17.md): you will bring them … \[to\] the place … you made
* v13: of your holiness => v17: the holy place

## Special concepts in this chapter

### The Israelite’s discontent

In [verse 24](../15/24.md) the word **murmur** is introduced for the first time. This is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers.

### Yahweh’s laws

In verses [24-26](../15/24.md), there is an introductory revelation of the requirement that Israel keep the covenant by obeying the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]]) EXO 15 1 kw29 figs-explicit גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה 1 he has triumphed gloriously It can be stated explicitly over whom Yahweh triumphed. Alternate translation: “he has achieved a glorious victory over the army of Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 15 1 bpyj גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה 1 he has triumphed gloriously “he is highly exalted” or “he is extremely high” or “he is exaltedly exalted” +EXO 15 1 bpyj גָאֹ֣ה גָּאָ֔ה 1 he has triumphed gloriously Alternate translation: “he is highly exalted” or “he is extremely high” or “he is exaltedly exalted” EXO 15 1 f6ue figs-metaphor ס֥וּס וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ רָמָ֥ה בַ⁠יָּֽם 1 the horse and its rider he has thrown into the sea Moses sang about God causing the sea to cover and drown the horse and rider as if God had thrown them into the sea. Alternate translation: “he has made the horse and rider drown in the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 1 cr5u figs-genericnoun ס֥וּס וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ 1 the horse and its rider This refers to all or many of the Egyptian horses and riders that were chasing the Israelites. Alternate translation: “the horses and their riders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]]) EXO 15 1 ex3p וְ⁠רֹכְב֖⁠וֹ 1 rider Here, **rider** could either refer to a person who sits on a horse or who travels in a chariot that a horse is pulling. -EXO 15 2 pb23 figs-metonymy עָזִּ֤⁠י…יָ֔הּ 1 Yahweh is my strength Possible meanings are (1) “Yahweh is the one who gives me strength” or (2) “Yahweh is the strong one who protects me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 15 2 vk6l figs-metonymy וְ⁠זִמְרָת֙ יָ֔הּ 1 song Moses calls Yahweh his song because Yahweh is the one he sings about. Alternate translation: “the one I sing about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 15 2 kbv7 figs-metonymy וַֽ⁠יְהִי־לִ֖⁠י לִֽ⁠ישׁוּעָ֑ה 1 he has become my salvation Moses calls Yahweh his salvation because Yahweh saved him. Alternate translation: “he has saved me” or “he is the one who saves me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 15 2 pb23 figs-metaphor עָזִּ֤⁠י…יָ֔הּ 1 Yahweh is my strength Moses is expressing the help that he gets from Yahweh by equating Yahweh with **strength**. Use a form or metaphor from your language that would express Yahweh’s strengthening help. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Yah is the one who gives me strength” or “Yah is the strong one who protects me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EXO 15 2 vk6l figs-metaphor וְ⁠זִמְרָת֙ יָ֔הּ 1 song Moses calls Yahweh his **song** because Yahweh is the one he sings about or because Yahweh causes him to sing. Use a form or metaphor from your language that would express Yahweh being a song of joy. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “Yah is … the one I sing about” or “Yah makes … me sing joyfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EXO 15 2 kbv7 figs-metaphor וַֽ⁠יְהִי־לִ֖⁠י לִֽ⁠ישׁוּעָ֑ה 1 he has become my salvation Moses calls Yahweh his salvation because Yahweh saved him. Use a form or metaphor from your language that would express Yahweh’s saving power. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “he has saved me” or “he is the one who saves me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 2 rgtu figs-parallelism זֶ֤ה אֵלִ⁠י֙ וְ⁠אַנְוֵ֔⁠הוּ אֱלֹהֵ֥י אָבִ֖⁠י וַ⁠אֲרֹמְמֶֽ⁠נְהוּ 1 he has become my salvation These lines are expressing very similar ideas for emphasis. If that is a normal way to make an emphatic (poetic) statement or if it would be understood in your language you can translate in a similar way. If, however, repetition like this would create a different meaning, find a structure in your language that would fit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 15 3 p1d5 figs-metaphor יְהוָ֖ה אִ֣ישׁ מִלְחָמָ֑ה 1 Yahweh is a warrior Moses calls Yahweh a **man of war** because he powerfully fought against the Egyptians and won. Alternate translation: “Yahweh is like a warrior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 4 pc8d figs-parallelism מַרְכְּבֹ֥ת פַּרְעֹ֛ה וְ⁠חֵיל֖⁠וֹ יָרָ֣ה בַ⁠יָּ֑ם וּ⁠מִבְחַ֥ר שָֽׁלִשָׁ֖י⁠ו טֻבְּע֥וּ בְ⁠יַם־סֽוּף 1 He has thrown Pharaoh’s chariots and army into the sea These lines are synonymous parallels where the second strengthens what is said in the first. Alternate translation: “He threw all of Pharaoh’s army into the sea, including the chariots; even his chosen officers sank in the sea of reeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -1235,13 +1234,12 @@ EXO 15 4 p8w6 figs-metaphor מַרְכְּבֹ֥ת פַּרְעֹ֛ה וְ⁠ח EXO 15 5 yefe figs-parallelism תְּהֹמֹ֖ת יְכַסְיֻ֑⁠מוּ יָרְד֥וּ בִ⁠מְצוֹלֹ֖ת כְּמוֹ־אָֽבֶן׃ 1 they went down into the depths like a stone These lines are synonymous parallels where the second clarifies what is said in the first. Alternate translation: “The deeps covered them; because they had descended into the depths like a stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 15 5 nqe4 figs-simile יָרְד֥וּ בִ⁠מְצוֹלֹ֖ת כְּמוֹ־אָֽבֶן 1 they went down into the depths like a stone Just ***like a stone*** does not float but sinks to the bottom of the sea, the enemy soldiers sank to the bottom of the sea. Alternate translation: “they went down into the deep water like a stone sinking to the bottom of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 15 6 jx52 figs-parallelism יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֣ יְהוָ֔ה נֶאְדָּרִ֖י בַּ⁠כֹּ֑חַ יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֥ יְהוָ֖ה תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב׃ 1 Your right hand, Yahweh, is glorious in power These lines are synonymous parallels where the second takes the abstract idea in the first and makes it concrete (though still with poetic imagery). Alternate translation: “Yahweh, you show how majestic in power your right hand is by shattering the enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 15 6 x1fz figs-metonymy יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֣ יְהוָ֔ה נֶאְדָּרִ֖י בַּ⁠כֹּ֑חַ 1 Your right hand, Yahweh, is glorious in power Moses speaks of Yahweh as if Yahweh had hands. The **right hand** refers to Yahweh’s power or the things Yahweh does powerfully. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, your power is glorious” or “Yahweh, what you do is gloriously powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 15 6 p1u6 figs-metonymy יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֥ יְהוָ֖ה תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב 1 your right hand, Yahweh, has shattered the enemy Moses speaks of Yahweh as if Yahweh had hands. The **right hand** refers to Yahweh’s power. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, your power has shattered the enemy” or “Yahweh, by your power you have shattered the enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 15 6 x1fz figs-metonymy יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֣ יְהוָ֔ה נֶאְדָּרִ֖י בַּ⁠כֹּ֑חַ יְמִֽינְ⁠ךָ֥ יְהוָ֖ה תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב 1 Your right hand, Yahweh, is glorious in power Moses speaks of Yahweh as if Yahweh had hands. The **right hand** refers to Yahweh’s power or the things Yahweh does powerfully. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Yahweh, your power is glorious; Yahweh, your power has shattered the enemy” or “Yahweh, what you do is gloriously powerful; Yahweh, by your power you have shattered the enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 15 6 rmd4 figs-metaphor תִּרְעַ֥ץ אוֹיֵֽב 1 has shattered the enemy Moses speaks of the enemy as if it were fragile and could be **shattered** like glass or pottery. Alternate translation: “completely destroys the enemy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 7 i2x4 figs-parallelism תַּהֲרֹ֣ס קָמֶ֑י⁠ךָ תְּשַׁלַּח֙ חֲרֹ֣נְ⁠ךָ֔ יֹאכְלֵ֖⁠מוֹ כַּ⁠קַּֽשׁ 1 those who rose up against you These lines are synonymous parallels where the second takes the abstract idea in the first portion (**you overthrow those who rise up against you**) and makes it concrete (though still with poetic imagery). Alternate translation: “you overthrow those who rise up against you by sending out your heat to devour them like stubble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 15 7 kmv4 figs-abstractnouns וּ⁠בְ⁠רֹ֥ב גְּאוֹנְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 those who rose up against you If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract nouns **abundance** and **majesty** as an adverb and adjective respectively. Alternate translation: “You are abundantly majestic and” or “Because you are abundantly majestic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 15 7 nd3t figs-metaphor קָמֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 those who rose up against you Rebelling against Yahweh is spoken of as rising up against him. Alternate translation: “those who rebel against you” or “your enemies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 15 7 kst4 חֲרֹ֣נְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 You sent out your wrath “your wrath” or “your fury” +EXO 15 7 kst4 חֲרֹ֣נְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 You sent out your wrath Alternate translation: “your wrath” or “your fury” EXO 15 7 glq7 figs-personification תְּשַׁלַּח֙ חֲרֹ֣נְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 You sent out your wrath Moses speaks of Yahweh’s wrath (literally **heat**) as if it were a servant that Yahweh sent out to do something. Alternate translation: “You show your wrath” or “You acted according to your wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 15 7 a5x7 figs-metaphor יֹאכְלֵ֖⁠מוֹ כַּ⁠קַּֽשׁ׃ 1 it consumed them like stubble Moses speaks of God’s wrath as if it were fire that could completely burn up things. His enemies were completely destroyed like stubble in a fire. Alternate translation: “it completely destroys your enemies like a fire that burns up straw” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 7 guap figs-simile יֹאכְלֵ֖⁠מוֹ כַּ⁠קַּֽשׁ 1 By the blast of your nostrils Here the enemies (or **those who rise up against** Yahweh) are pictured as if they were a highly flammable piece of dried grass. Alternate translation: “it devoured the enemy as if they were stubble” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) @@ -1251,7 +1249,7 @@ EXO 15 8 tguh figs-parallelism נֶ֣עֶרְמוּ מַ֔יִם נִצְּב֥ EXO 15 8 uevt figs-metaphor בְּ⁠לֶב־יָֽם 1 By the blast of your nostrils The center or deepest part of the sea is spoken of as if the sea had a **heart**. Alternate translation: “in the center of the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 9 d8nk figs-activepassive תִּמְלָאֵ֣⁠מוֹ נַפְשִׁ֔⁠י 1 my desire will be satisfied on them This can be expressed with an active form. Alternate translation: “I will satisfy my desire on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 15 9 lu0e תּוֹרִישֵׁ֖⁠מוֹ יָדִֽ⁠י 1 my hand will destroy them The meaning of this phrase is unclear. The word translated **dispossess** could also mean ”possess” or ”inherit.” What seems clear is that the Egyptians plan to use their power to prevent the Israelites from possessing good things. Whether this is a reference back to **plunder** earlier in the verse, or to recapturing them as slaves, or to taking over the Israelites’ place in the land of Goshen, or of keeping them from reaching the promised land (of Yahweh’s possession, see [verse 17](../15/17.md) regarding where Yahweh will bring his people), or something else is not so clear. **Dispossess** was chosen rather than another term because the verb is in a causative form here. Alternate translation: “my hand will possess them” or “my hand will inherit them” -EXO 15 9 sm77 figs-metonymy תּוֹרִישֵׁ֖⁠מוֹ יָדִֽ⁠י 1 my hand will destroy them Here **hand** is used figuratively of the Egyptians’ power (that is, their military strength). Alternate translation: “my power will dispossess them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 15 9 sm77 figs-metonymy תּוֹרִישֵׁ֖⁠מוֹ יָדִֽ⁠י 1 my hand will destroy them Here **hand** is used figuratively of the Egyptians’ power (that is, their military strength). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “my power will dispossess them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 15 10 yrj5 figs-metaphor נָשַׁ֥פְתָּ בְ⁠רוּחֲ⁠ךָ֖ 1 But you blew with your wind Moses spoke about God making the wind blow as if God blew the wind through his nose or mouth. Alternate translation: “But you made the wind blow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 10 f7d3 figs-simile צָֽלֲלוּ֙ כַּֽ⁠עוֹפֶ֔רֶת בְּ⁠מַ֖יִם אַדִּירִֽים 1 sank like lead in the mighty waters **Lead** is a heavy metal that is commonly used to make things sink in water. It is used here to show how fast God’s enemies were destroyed. Alternate translation: “sank as fast as a heavy piece of metal in the deep turbulent waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 15 11 wq2s figs-rquestion מִֽי־כָמֹ֤⁠כָה בָּֽ⁠אֵלִם֙ יְהוָ֔ה 1 Who is like you, Yahweh, among the gods? Moses uses this question to show how great God is. Alternate translation: “O Yahweh, no one is like you among the gods!” or “Yahweh, none of the gods is like you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1267,7 +1265,7 @@ EXO 15 15 qyix figs-personification אֵילֵ֣י מוֹאָ֔ב יֹֽאחֲז EXO 15 15 ya48 figs-metaphor נָמֹ֕גוּ 1 will melt away Moses uses the phrase, **melted away,** to speak of people becoming weak because of their fear. Alternate translation: “became weak from fear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 16 nk67 figs-doublet תִּפֹּ֨ל עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֤ם אֵימָ֨תָ⁠ה֙ וָ⁠פַ֔חַד 1 Terror and dread will fall on them **Terror and dread** form a doublet meaning “very afraid.” Alternate translation: “They will become very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 15 16 kbt5 figs-metaphor תִּפֹּ֨ל עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֤ם אֵימָ֨תָ⁠ה֙ וָ⁠פַ֔חַד 1 Terror and dread will fall on them **Terror and dread** are pictured as physical objects that could **fall on** people. The image might be of them crushing people or being a heavy weight that people struggle under (however, the image is not specified). It means that the people will feel the emotions of terror and dread very strongly. Alternate translation: “They will be overwhelmed with feelings of terror and dread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 15 16 t2yp figs-metonymy בִּ⁠גְדֹ֥ל זְרוֹעֲ⁠ךָ֖ 1 Because of your arm’s power God’s arm represents his great strength. Alternate translation: “Because of your great strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 15 16 t2yp figs-metonymy בִּ⁠גְדֹ֥ל זְרוֹעֲ⁠ךָ֖ 1 Because of your arm’s power Yahweh’s **arm** represents his great strength. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Because of your great strength” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 15 16 umm7 figs-simile יִדְּמ֣וּ כָּ⁠אָ֑בֶן 1 they will become as still as a stone Possible meanings are (1) “They will be silent like stone” or (2) “They will be motionless as stone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 15 17 n5i5 figs-explicit תְּבִאֵ֗⁠מוֹ וְ⁠תִטָּעֵ֨⁠מוֹ֙ 1 You will bring them Where God would bring them can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “You will take your people to Canaan and plant them there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 15 17 u26j figs-go תְּבִאֵ֗⁠מוֹ 1 You will bring them Since Moses was not already in Canaan, some languages would use “take” rather than **bring.** Alternate translation: “You will take them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) @@ -1275,7 +1273,7 @@ EXO 15 17 t6wg figs-metaphor וְ⁠תִטָּעֵ֨⁠מוֹ֙ בְּ⁠הַ֣ EXO 15 17 p7kb בְּ⁠הַ֣ר נַחֲלָֽתְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 the mountain of your inheritance This refers to Mount Zion in the land of Canaan. EXO 15 17 ie26 figs-metaphor בְּ⁠הַ֣ר נַחֲלָֽתְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 of your inheritance Moses speaks about God promising to give his people **the mountain** forever as if he were giving it to them as an inheritance. Alternate translation: “on the mountain that you have given them as an inheritance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 17 ytz3 figs-metonymy כּוֹנְנ֥וּ יָדֶֽי⁠ךָ׃ 1 that your hands have built The phrase **your hands** refers to God’s power. Alternate translation: “that you have built by your power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 15 18 ue6p יְהוָ֥ה׀ יִמְלֹ֖ךְ לְ⁠עֹלָ֥ם וָ⁠עֶֽד 1 that your hands have built “Yahweh reigns forever and ever” +EXO 15 18 ue6p יְהוָ֥ה׀ יִמְלֹ֖ךְ לְ⁠עֹלָ֥ם וָ⁠עֶֽד 1 that your hands have built Alternate translation: “Yahweh reigns forever and ever” EXO 15 20 g7s6 translate-names מִרְיָ֨ם 1 Miriam…Aaron Miriam was the older sister of Moses and Aaron. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 15 20 gam2 translate-unknown הַ⁠תֹּ֖ף…בְּ⁠תֻפִּ֖ים 1 tambourine This is a musical instrument like a small drum that also has pieces of metal around the side that make a sound when shaken. Alternate translation: “timbrel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 15 20 hut1 figs-hyperbole וַ⁠תֵּצֶ֤אןָ כָֽל־הַ⁠נָּשִׁים֙ אַחֲרֶ֔י⁠הָ בְּ⁠תֻפִּ֖ים וּ⁠בִ⁠מְחֹלֹֽת 1 tambourine Here, **all** may be a generalization, it may not have been every woman. It could be better to translate as a restrictive clause as in the UST. Alternate translation: “and every woman who went out after her had a tambourine and danced” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -1286,24 +1284,24 @@ EXO 15 22 c7pe translate-names מִדְבַּר־שׁ֑וּר 1 wilderness of Sh EXO 15 23 a9pv translate-names מָרָ֔תָ⁠ה 1 Marah We do not know the exact locations of this place. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 15 24 n64m וַ⁠יִּלֹּ֧נוּ הָ⁠עָ֛ם עַל־מֹשֶׁ֥ה 1 complained to Moses and said **Murmur** is a very strong term for “grumble” or “complain” that is used to describe the Israelites’ attitude throughout their time in the wilderness. It occurs several times in Exodus and Numbers. Alternate translation: “And the people were unhappy and told Moses” or “And the people angrily told Moses” EXO 15 26 l2hx figs-123person לְ⁠ק֣וֹל׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֗י⁠ךָ 1 the voice of Yahweh your God Yahweh is speaking about his own voice. Alternate translation: “to my voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -EXO 15 26 oh8c figs-metonymy לְ⁠ק֣וֹל׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֗י⁠ךָ 1 the voice of Yahweh your God Yahweh’s voice represents what he says. Alternate translation: “to what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 15 26 oh8c figs-metonymy לְ⁠ק֣וֹל׀ יְהוָ֣ה אֱלֹהֶ֗י⁠ךָ 1 the voice of Yahweh your God Yahweh’s voice represents what he says. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language.Alternate translation: “to what I say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 15 26 sq5x figs-metaphor וְ⁠הַ⁠יָּשָׁ֤ר בְּ⁠עֵינָי⁠ו֙ תַּעֲשֶׂ֔ה 1 do what is right in his eyes The eyes represent seeing, and seeing represents thoughts or judgment. Alternate translation: “and do what Yahweh considers to be right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 26 bgcf figs-metaphor וְ⁠הַֽאֲזַנְתָּ֙ לְ⁠מִצְוֺתָ֔י⁠ו 1 do what is right in his eyes The **ear** represents listening and listening represents obeying. Alternate translation: “and you carefully obey his commands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 26 m4cn figs-metaphor כָּֽל־הַ⁠מַּֽחֲלָ֞ה אֲשֶׁר־שַׂ֤מְתִּי בְ⁠מִצְרַ֨יִם֙ לֹא־אָשִׂ֣ים עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 I will put on you none of the diseases God speaks of causing people to have diseases as putting diseases on them. Alternate translation: “I will not cause any of you to have the diseases that I cause the Egyptians to have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 15 27 did8 translate-names אֵילִ֔מָ⁠ה 1 Elim This is an oasis in the desert, a place with water and shade trees. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 15 27 p64y translate-numbers וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֣ים 1 seventy “and seventy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 16 intro nkd7 0 # Exodus 16 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Complaints
After complaining about the water, the Israelites complained that they had less food than in Egypt. This is intended to show their ungratefulness and their sinful view of Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Prohibition against storing food
The people were not allowed to store the food, called manna, that Yahweh provided to them. This is because they were to trust in Yahweh to provide for their needs every day. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])

### Sabbath
This is the first recorded celebration of the Sabbath rest. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Bread as food
Yahweh speaks of the food that he will send as if it were bread. The manna he gave them was perhaps not literally bread. The Israelites would eat this food every day, just as they had eaten bread every day before this. Alternate translations: “food” or “food like bread” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/bread]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Chronology
[Verses 34](../../exo/16/34.md)-36 are written from a much later perspective. Translators will need to find a way to show that this portion gives background information from a much later point (at least 40 years).

### Ark of the covenant
Related to the chronology issue, although the covenant has not yet been made, it is referenced in [Exodus 16:34](../../exo/16/34.md). This is probably an editorial comment made after these events. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### Wilderness of Sin
Sin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with sinning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +EXO 15 27 p64y translate-numbers וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֣ים 1 seventy Alternate translation: “and seventy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 16 intro nkd7 0 # Exodus 16 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Complaints

After complaining about the water, the Israelites complained that they had less food than in Egypt. This is intended to show their ungratefulness and their sinful view of Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

### Prohibition against storing food

The people were not allowed to store the food, called manna, that Yahweh provided to them. This is because they were to trust in Yahweh to provide for their needs every day. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])

### Sabbath

This is the first recorded celebration of the Sabbath rest. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]])

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Bread as food

Yahweh speaks of the food that he will send as if it were bread. The manna he gave them was perhaps not literally bread. The Israelites would eat this food every day, just as they had eaten bread every day before this. Alternate translations: “food” or “food like bread” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/bread]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])

### Chronology

[Verses 34](../../exo/16/34.md)-36 are written from a much later perspective. Translators will need to find a way to show that this portion gives background information from a much later point (at least 40 years).

### Ark of the covenant

Related to the chronology issue, although the covenant has not yet been made, it is referenced in [Exodus 16:34](../../exo/16/34.md). This is probably an editorial comment made after these events. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### Wilderness of Sin

Sin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with sinning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 16 1 gw67 translate-names סִ֔ין 1 wilderness of Sin The word **Sin** here is the Hebrew name of the wilderness. It is not the English word “sin.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 16 1 h44x translate-hebrewmonths בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י 1 on the fifteenth day of the second month This time coincides with the end of April and the beginning of May on Western calendars. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) -EXO 16 1 u2aq translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י 1 on the fifteenth day of the second month “on day 15 of the second month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 16 1 u2aq translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֲמִשָּׁ֨ה עָשָׂ֥ר יוֹם֙ לַ⁠חֹ֣דֶשׁ הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֔י 1 on the fifteenth day of the second month Alternate translation: “on day 15 of the second month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 16 2 h938 figs-hyperbole וַיִּלּ֜וֹנוּ כָּל־עֲדַ֧ת בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֛ל 1 The whole community of Israelites complained Here, **all** is a generalization. Alternate translation: “And many of the community of the sons of Israel murmured” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) -EXO 16 2 nx6f וַיִּלּ֜וֹנוּ 1 complained “And … were angry and spoke” +EXO 16 2 nx6f וַיִּלּ֜וֹנוּ 1 complained Alternate translation: “And … were angry and spoke” EXO 16 3 nwy6 figs-hypo מִֽי־יִתֵּ֨ן מוּתֵ֤⁠נוּ 1 If only we had died This is a way of saying that they wished that they had died. It is a hypothetical past statement. Alternate translation: “We wish that we had died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]]) -EXO 16 3 g1n1 figs-metonymy בְ⁠יַד־יְהוָה֙ 1 by Yahweh’s hand The phrase **the hand of Yahweh** represents Yahweh’s action. Alternate translation: “by Yahweh’s action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 16 3 g1n1 figs-metonymy בְ⁠יַד־יְהוָה֙ 1 by Yahweh’s hand The phrase **the hand of Yahweh** represents Yahweh’s action. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “by Yahweh’s action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 16 4 kls5 figs-metaphor מַמְטִ֥יר לָ⁠כֶ֛ם לֶ֖חֶם מִן־הַ⁠שָּׁמָ֑יִם 1 I will rain down bread from heaven for you God speaks of food coming down from heaven as if it were rain. Alternate translation: “make bread come down from heaven like rain” or “make bread fall to you from the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 16 4 yew5 בְּ⁠תוֹרָתִ֖⁠י 1 my law “in my instruction” -EXO 16 5 p1f6 וְ⁠הָיָה֙ בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֔י וְ⁠הֵכִ֖ינוּ 1 It will come about on the sixth day, that they “It will happen on the sixth day that they will prepare” or “On the sixth day they will prepare” -EXO 16 5 cl74 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֔י 1 on the sixth day “on day 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 16 4 yew5 בְּ⁠תוֹרָתִ֖⁠י 1 my law Alternate translation: “in my instruction” +EXO 16 5 p1f6 וְ⁠הָיָה֙ בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֔י וְ⁠הֵכִ֖ינוּ 1 It will come about on the sixth day, that they Alternate translation: “It will happen on the sixth day that they will prepare” or “On the sixth day they will prepare” +EXO 16 5 cl74 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֔י 1 on the sixth day Alternate translation: “on day 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 16 5 t5il מִשְׁנֶ֔ה 1 twice two times EXO 16 7 zb21 figs-rquestion וְ⁠נַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה כִּ֥י תלונו עָלֵֽי⁠נוּ 1 Who are we for you to complain against us? Moses and Aaron used this question to show the people that it was foolish to complain against them. Alternate translation: “We are not powerful enough for you to complain against us.” or “It is foolish to complain against us, because we cannot do what you want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 16 8 pn4e figs-rquestion וְ⁠נַ֣חְנוּ מָ֔ה 1 Who are Aaron and I? Moses used this question to show the people that he and Aaron did not have the power to give them what they wanted. Alternate translation: “Aaron and I cannot give you what you want.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1315,27 +1313,27 @@ EXO 16 13 aas8 וַ⁠יְהִ֣י 1 It came about…that This phrase is used h EXO 16 13 eu1x translate-unknown הַ⁠שְּׂלָ֔ו 1 quails These are small, plump birds. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 16 14 k5lb translate-unknown כַּ⁠כְּפֹ֖ר 1 like frost Frost is frozen dew that forms on the ground. It is very fine. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 16 14 jern figs-simile כַּ⁠כְּפֹ֖ר 1 like frost The original readers knew what frost is like, so this phrase would help them understand what the flakes were like. Alternate translation: “that looked like frost” or “that was fine like frost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -EXO 16 16 gotf אִ֖ישׁ לְ⁠פִ֣י אָכְל֑⁠וֹ 1 omer “according to how much each will eat” +EXO 16 16 gotf אִ֖ישׁ לְ⁠פִ֣י אָכְל֑⁠וֹ 1 omer Alternate translation: “according to how much each will eat” EXO 16 16 fqp9 translate-bvolume עֹ֣מֶר 1 omer 2 liters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) -EXO 16 16 mnwy עֹ֣מֶר לַ⁠גֻּלְגֹּ֗לֶת מִסְפַּר֙ נַפְשֹׁ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם אִ֛ישׁ לַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בְּ⁠אָהֳל֖⁠וֹ תִּקָּֽחוּ 1 omer “take an omer per person according to how many people are in the gatherer’s tent” -EXO 16 20 itjo וַ⁠יָּ֥רֻם תּוֹלָעִ֖ים 1 omer “and it decayed with worms” -EXO 16 21 jd5t אִ֖ישׁ כְּ⁠פִ֣י אָכְל֑⁠וֹ 1 omer “everyone according to how much they would eat” or “everyone according to how many people they had to feed” +EXO 16 16 mnwy עֹ֣מֶר לַ⁠גֻּלְגֹּ֗לֶת מִסְפַּר֙ נַפְשֹׁ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם אִ֛ישׁ לַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בְּ⁠אָהֳל֖⁠וֹ תִּקָּֽחוּ 1 omer Alternate translation: “take an omer per person according to how many people are in the gatherer’s tent” +EXO 16 20 itjo וַ⁠יָּ֥רֻם תּוֹלָעִ֖ים 1 omer Alternate translation: “and it decayed with worms” +EXO 16 21 jd5t אִ֖ישׁ כְּ⁠פִ֣י אָכְל֑⁠וֹ 1 omer Alternate translation: “everyone according to how much they would eat” or “everyone according to how many people they had to feed” EXO 16 22 nrx8 writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֣י 1 It came about that This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. Verses 16:22-30 tell about what the people did concerning the manna on the sixth and seventh days of the week. If your language has a way for marking this as a new part of the story, you could consider using it here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) -EXO 16 22 xk6x translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֗י 1 on the sixth day “on day 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 16 22 zj1u מִשְׁנֶ֔ה 1 twice “two times as much” +EXO 16 22 xk6x translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֗י 1 on the sixth day Alternate translation: “on day 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 16 22 zj1u מִשְׁנֶ֔ה 1 twice Alternate translation: “two times as much” EXO 16 22 f4j9 לֶ֨חֶם֙ 1 bread This refers to the bread that appeared as thin flakes on the ground each morning. -EXO 16 23 wc4a שַׁבָּת֧וֹן שַׁבַּת־קֹ֛דֶשׁ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֖ה 1 a solemn rest “is a day to stop working completely and dedicate to Yahweh” -EXO 16 24 y4d9 וְ⁠לֹ֣א הִבְאִ֔ישׁ 1 did not become foul “And it did not smell rotten” -EXO 16 25 pr1p כִּֽי־שַׁבָּ֥ת הַ⁠יּ֖וֹם לַ⁠יהוָ֑ה 1 today is a day reserved as a Sabbath to honor Yahweh “today is a Sabbath, a day to honor Yahweh by not working” -EXO 16 26 jv77 translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֧וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֛י 1 but the seventh day “but on day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 16 27 qf14 וְ⁠לֹ֖א מָצָֽאוּ 1 they found none “but they did not find any manna” +EXO 16 23 wc4a שַׁבָּת֧וֹן שַׁבַּת־קֹ֛דֶשׁ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֖ה 1 a solemn rest Alternate translation: “is a day to stop working completely and dedicate to Yahweh” +EXO 16 24 y4d9 וְ⁠לֹ֣א הִבְאִ֔ישׁ 1 did not become foul Alternate translation: “And it did not smell rotten” +EXO 16 25 pr1p כִּֽי־שַׁבָּ֥ת הַ⁠יּ֖וֹם לַ⁠יהוָ֑ה 1 today is a day reserved as a Sabbath to honor Yahweh Alternate translation: “today is a Sabbath, a day to honor Yahweh by not working” +EXO 16 26 jv77 translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֧וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֛י 1 but the seventh day Alternate translation: “but on day seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 16 27 qf14 וְ⁠לֹ֖א מָצָֽאוּ 1 they found none Alternate translation: “but they did not find any manna” EXO 16 28 e1vx figs-rquestion עַד־אָ֨נָה֙ מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם לִ⁠שְׁמֹ֥ר מִצְוֺתַ֖⁠י וְ⁠תוֹרֹתָֽ⁠י 1 How long will you refuse to keep my commandments and my laws? God used this question to scold the people because they did not obey his laws. Alternate translation: “You people still do not keep my commandments and laws!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 16 28 q41d figs-youcrowd מֵֽאַנְתֶּ֔ם 1 General Information: Yahweh speaks to Moses, but the word **you** refers to the people of Israel in general. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) -EXO 16 28 vnq7 לִ⁠שְׁמֹ֥ר מִצְוֺתַ֖⁠י וְ⁠תוֹרֹתָֽ⁠י 1 to keep my commandments and my laws “to obey my commandments and my laws” +EXO 16 28 vnq7 לִ⁠שְׁמֹ֥ר מִצְוֺתַ֖⁠י וְ⁠תוֹרֹתָֽ⁠י 1 to keep my commandments and my laws Alternate translation: “to obey my commandments and my laws” EXO 16 29 p22l figs-metaphor כִּֽי־יְהוָה֮ נָתַ֣ן לָ⁠כֶ֣ם הַ⁠שַּׁבָּת֒ 1 Yahweh has given you the Sabbath Yahweh speaks about teaching people to rest on the Sabbath as if the Sabbath were a gift. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, have taught you to rest on the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 16 29 dt58 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֖י…בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִֽי 1 sixth day…two days…seventh day “on day 6 … on day 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 16 29 dt58 translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שִּׁשִּׁ֖י…בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִֽי 1 sixth day…two days…seventh day Alternate translation: “on day 6 … on day 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 16 29 y8wf לֶ֣חֶם 1 bread This refers to the bread that appeared as thin flakes on the ground each morning. -EXO 16 29 x6gh יוֹמָ֑יִם 1 bread “for 2 days” +EXO 16 29 x6gh יוֹמָ֑יִם 1 bread Alternate translation: “for 2 days” EXO 16 31 r1a5 translate-unknown כְּ⁠זֶ֤רַע גַּד֙ לָבָ֔ן 1 coriander seed **Coriander** is an herb also known as cilantro. People eat both the leaves and seeds. People dry the seeds and grind them into a powder and put it in food to give it flavor. Alternate translation: “like a small white seed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 16 31 vrl4 כְּ⁠צַפִּיחִ֥ת 1 wafers **Wafers** are very thin biscuits or crackers. EXO 16 33 ggba figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה 1 wafers Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in the presence of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1343,10 +1341,10 @@ EXO 16 34 x9vr writing-background 0 wafers Verses 34-36 provide a later comment EXO 16 34 jzcz figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָ⁠עֵדֻ֖ת 1 wafers Here, **face** figuratively represents being near the **Covenant.** Alternate translation: “near the Covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 16 36 g8ns translate-bvolume וְ⁠הָ⁠עֹ֕מֶר עֲשִׂרִ֥ית הָ⁠אֵיפָ֖ה הֽוּא 1 Now an omer is a tenth of an ephah An omer and an ephah are both containers for measuring volume. The original readers would have known how much an ephah was. This sentence would help them know how much an omer was. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) EXO 16 36 a9uh translate-fraction וְ⁠הָ⁠עֹ֕מֶר עֲשִׂרִ֥ית הָ⁠אֵיפָ֖ה הֽוּא 1 Now an omer is a tenth of an ephah For languages that do not use fractions, this can be reworded. Alternate translation: “Now ten omers equal one ephah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) -EXO 17 intro f12q 0 # Exodus 17 General Notes
## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions
Moses uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. The purpose of these questions is to convince people of their sin. Likewise, the people’s rhetorical question showed their ignorance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Wilderness of Sin
Sin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is not the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with sinning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])


### Naming
As in the last couple of chapters, places and things are named for what happens in that location. In this chapter is Massah (which means “test”), Meribah (“arguing”), and an alter named “Yahweh is my Banner” because Yahweh will be at war with the Amalekites forever. +EXO 17 intro f12q 0 # Exodus 17 General Notes

## Important figures of speech in this chapter

### Rhetorical Questions

Moses uses several rhetorical questions in this chapter. The purpose of these questions is to convince people of their sin. Likewise, the people’s rhetorical question showed their ignorance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter

### Wilderness of Sin

Sin is the name of a part of the Sinai Wilderness. It is not the description of a place, and it has nothing to do with sinning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])


### Naming

As in the last couple of chapters, places and things are named for what happens in that location. In this chapter is Massah (which means “test”), Meribah (“arguing”), and an alter named “Yahweh is my Banner” because Yahweh will be at war with the Amalekites forever. EXO 17 1 jzz5 writing-newevent וַ֠⁠יִּסְעוּ כָּל־עֲדַ֨ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל 1 wilderness of Sin A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 17 1 h1li translate-names סִ֛ין 1 wilderness of Sin The word “Sin” here is the Hebrew name of the wilderness. It is not the English word “sin.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 16:1](../16/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 17 1 e7jv figs-metonymy עַל־פִּ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 wilderness of Sin Here, **mouth** is a refers figuratively to Yahweh’s commands (that is, what he says to do). Alternate translation: “at the command of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 17 1 e7jv figs-metonymy עַל־פִּ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 wilderness of Sin Here, **mouth** is a refers figuratively to Yahweh’s commands (that is, what he says to do). If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “at the command of Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 17 1 j1fm translate-names בִּ⁠רְפִידִ֔ים 1 Rephidim **Rephidim** means “the resting place,” a place to rest on long journeys through the wilderness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 17 2 hr9b figs-rquestion מַה־תְּרִיבוּ⁠ן֙ עִמָּדִ֔⁠י מַה־תְּנַסּ֖וּ⁠ן אֶת־יְהוָֽה 1 Why do you quarrel with me? Why do you test Yahweh? Moses uses these questions to scold the people. Alternate translation: “You should not quarrel with me! You should not test Yahweh!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 17 3 cz24 figs-rquestion לָ֤⁠מָּה זֶּה֙ הֶעֱלִיתָ֣⁠נוּ מִ⁠מִּצְרַ֔יִם לְ⁠הָמִ֥ית אֹתִ֛⁠י וְ⁠אֶת־בָּנַ֥⁠י וְ⁠אֶת־מִקְנַ֖⁠י בַּ⁠צָּמָֽא 1 To kill us and our children and our cattle with thirst? The people use this question to accuse Moses of wanting to kill them. Alternate translation: “You only brought us out here to kill us and our children and cattle by not letting us have any water to drink!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) @@ -1364,61 +1362,61 @@ EXO 17 10 ca3g figs-synecdoche וַ⁠יַּ֣עַשׂ יְהוֹשֻׁ֗עַ כ EXO 17 10 wy51 translate-names וְ⁠ח֔וּר 1 Hur Hur was a friend of Moses and Aaron. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 17 10 itcx writing-participants וְ⁠ח֔וּר 1 Hur **Hur** is a new participant in the story which you may need to point out in your translation. However, he is a very minor character. He only appears in this passage and once much later in the book, so you may not need to highlight him at all. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 17 11 x5ex figs-synecdoche וְ⁠גָבַ֣ר יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל…וְ⁠גָבַ֥ר עֲמָלֵֽק 1 Israel was winning…Amalek would begin to win The words “Israel” and “Amalek” represent the fighters from those groups. Alternate translation: “the Israelite fighters were winning … the Amalekite fighters would begin to win” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -EXO 17 12 hxt8 figs-metonymy וִ⁠ידֵ֤י מֹשֶׁה֙ כְּבֵדִ֔ים 1 hands became heavy The author writes of Moses’ arms becoming tired as if his hands became heavy. Alternate translation: “And Moses’ arms became tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 17 12 js2p מִ⁠זֶּ֤ה אֶחָד֙ וּ⁠מִ⁠זֶּ֣ה אֶחָ֔ד 1 hands became heavy “one on one side, and one on the other” -EXO 17 13 plp3 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פִי־חָֽרֶב 1 with the sword The sword represents battle. Alternate translation: “in the battle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 17 12 hxt8 figs-idiom וִ⁠ידֵ֤י מֹשֶׁה֙ כְּבֵדִ֔ים 1 hands became heavy The author writes of Moses’ arms becoming tired as if his hands **became heavy**. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And Moses’ arms became tired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) +EXO 17 12 js2p מִ⁠זֶּ֤ה אֶחָד֙ וּ⁠מִ⁠זֶּ֣ה אֶחָ֔ד 1 hands became heavy Alternate translation: “one on one side, and one on the other” +EXO 17 13 plp3 figs-metonymy לְ⁠פִי־חָֽרֶב 1 with the sword The **sword** represents battle. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “in the battle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 17 14 c5rl figs-metaphor מָחֹ֤ה אֶמְחֶה֙ אֶת־זֵ֣כֶר עֲמָלֵ֔ק 1 I will completely blot out the memory of Amalek God speaks of destroying Amalek as if he were removing people’s memory of Amalek. When a group of people is completely destroyed, there is nothing to remind people about them. Alternate translation: “I will completely destroy Amalek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 17 14 jm77 figs-metonymy עֲמָלֵ֔ק 1 Amalek This refers to the Amalekites. Alternate translation: Amalekites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 17 14 n42j figs-metonymy מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠שָּׁמָֽיִם 1 Amalek This phrase is used to represent all people everywhere. Alternate translation: “from all people every where” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 17 14 jm77 figs-metonymy עֲמָלֵ֔ק 1 Amalek The Amalekites are referred to by naming their ancestor. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: Amalekites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 17 14 n42j figs-hyperbole מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠שָּׁמָֽיִם 1 Amalek This phrase makes an intentionally broad image and represents all people everywhere. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from all people every where” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 17 15 fneg נִסִּֽ⁠י 1 Amalek **Banner** is something lifted up high, perhaps like a flag, that people can see from a distance and follow. Alternate translation: “is my military standard” or “is my guidon” EXO 17 16 lr14 כִּֽי־יָד֙ עַל־כֵּ֣ס יָ֔הּ 1 Amalek The Hebrew here is very difficult and there are a variety of opinions regarding the meaning. Questions include: (1) Whose hand is referred to? Amalek’s, Yahweh’s, or Moses’? (2) What is the hand on (or against)? Yahweh’s throne or banner? (3) What is the meaning of the preposition meaning on, against, or above? What does that signify? Rebellion, or taking an oath, or holding onto a symbol of power? If there is another translation in your region, it may be best to simply follow the interpretation it gives. Alternate translation: “Because a hand was on the throne of Yah” or “Because a hand was on the banner of Yah” EXO 17 16 sw1q מִלְחָמָ֥ה לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה בַּֽ⁠עֲמָלֵ֑ק 1 Amalek This phrase has no verbs in Hebrew. You may need to translate the noun **war** as a verb. Alternate translation: “Yahweh will make war with Amalek” or “Yahweh will war against Amalek” -EXO 18 intro t8g2 0 # Exodus 18 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### Leadership lessons
Jethro taught Moses an important leadership lesson in this chapter. Many scholars look at this chapter for important leadership lessons. Moses delegated some of his responsibilities to other godly men so that he would not become worn out by all the demands made of him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])


## Possible translation difficulties
### Order of events
The timing of the events in [verse 2](../18/02.md) is not clear and whatever their timing, may be difficult to translate. The question is: Is Jethro’s **taking** Zipporah related to the past event of Moses sending her back to him at some otherwise unmentioned point in time, or is Jethro’s **taking** related to his coming to meet Moses in [verse 5](../18/05.md).

### Verse 11
[Verse 11](../18/11.md) is difficult in the original and requires interpretation.

### God and Yahweh
For this chapter God, who is named Yahweh, is mostly referred to as God instead by his name as is usual in much of the rest of the book. Translations should not suggest that they are not different beings.

### Kinship: Father-in-law
Jethro is the father of Moses’ wife. Some languages may make a distinction between that and a woman’s father-in-law. If that is the case, note it in verses: 1-2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])


### Participant reference
Jethro is often referred to simply as the father-in-law of Moses in this chapter. He is also named explicitly an unusually high number of times (it would be more usual to have more pronouns referring to him). This is likely to emphasize his familial ties and authority (or honored status). Some languages may need to use alter the way he is referred to for naturalness or to convey the same sense of familial ties and authority (or honored status). +EXO 18 intro t8g2 0 # Exodus 18 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Leadership lessons

Jethro taught Moses an important leadership lesson in this chapter. Many scholars look at this chapter for important leadership lessons. Moses delegated some of his responsibilities to other godly men so that he would not become worn out by all the demands made of him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/godly]])


## Possible translation difficulties

### Order of events

The timing of the events in [verse 2](../18/02.md) is not clear and whatever their timing, may be difficult to translate. The question is: Is Jethro’s **taking** Zipporah related to the past event of Moses sending her back to him at some otherwise unmentioned point in time, or is Jethro’s **taking** related to his coming to meet Moses in [verse 5](../18/05.md).

### Verse 11

[Verse 11](../18/11.md) is difficult in the original and requires interpretation.

### God and Yahweh

For this chapter God, who is named Yahweh, is mostly referred to as God instead by his name as is usual in much of the rest of the book. Translations should not suggest that they are not different beings.

### Kinship: Father-in-law

Jethro is the father of Moses’ wife. Some languages may make a distinction between that and a woman’s father-in-law. If that is the case, note it in verses: 1-2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])


### Participant reference

Jethro is often referred to simply as the father-in-law of Moses in this chapter. He is also named explicitly an unusually high number of times (it would be more usual to have more pronouns referring to him). This is likely to emphasize his familial ties and authority (or honored status). Some languages may need to use alter the way he is referred to for naturalness or to convey the same sense of familial ties and authority (or honored status). EXO 18 1 nl86 translate-kinship חֹתֵ֣ן מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 Moses’ father-in-law This refers to the father of the wife of Moses. If your language uses a different term for a man’s father-in-law than for a woman’s, choose the appropriate one here. Note also in verses: 2, 5-8, 12, 14-15, 17, 24, and 27. Alternate translation: “the father of the wife of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) EXO 18 2 zw6h וַ⁠יִּקַּ֗ח יִתְרוֹ֙ חֹתֵ֣ן מֹשֶׁ֔ה אֶת־צִפֹּרָ֖ה אֵ֣שֶׁת מֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 took Zipporah, Moses’ wife Possible meanings are (1) Jethro took Zipporah to Moses, or (2) Jethro had earlier welcomed back Zipporah. EXO 18 2 chy6 figs-explicit אַחַ֖ר שִׁלּוּחֶֽי⁠הָ 1 after he had sent her home This is something Moses had done earlier. The full meaning of the can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “after Moses had sent her home to her father” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 18 3 khs1 וְ⁠אֵ֖ת שְׁנֵ֣י בָנֶ֑י⁠הָ 1 and her two sons This is the ending of the sentence that begins with the words **Jethro … took Zipporah** in [verse 2](../18/02.md). Possible meanings are (1) Jethro took Zipporah and her two sons to Moses, or (2) Jethro had earlier welcomed back Zipporah and her two sons. EXO 18 3 k4mb translate-names גֵּֽרְשֹׁ֔ם 1 Gershom This is a son of Moses and Zipporah, whose name means “foreigner.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 18 4 xi35 translate-names אֱלִיעֶ֑זֶר 1 Eliezer This is a son of Moses and Zipporah, whose name means “God is the one who helps me.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) -EXO 18 4 z2km figs-metonymy מֵ⁠חֶ֥רֶב פַּרְעֹֽה 1 Pharaoh’s sword This represents being killed by Pharaoh or Pharaoh’s army. Alternate translation: “from being killed by Pharaoh” or “from being killed by Pharaoh’s army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 18 5 zzab וּ⁠בָנָ֥י⁠ו 1 where he was camped “with his sons” +EXO 18 4 z2km figs-metonymy מֵ⁠חֶ֥רֶב פַּרְעֹֽה 1 Pharaoh’s sword This represents being killed by Pharaoh or Pharaoh’s army. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from being killed by Pharaoh” or “from being killed by Pharaoh’s army” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 18 5 zzab וּ⁠בָנָ֥י⁠ו 1 where he was camped Alternate translation: “with his sons” EXO 18 7 s5p2 translate-symaction וַ⁠יִּשְׁתַּ֨חוּ֙ וַ⁠יִּשַּׁק־ל֔⁠וֹ 1 bowed down, and kissed him These symbolic acts were the normal way that people showed great respect and devotion in that culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 18 8 rkq2 figs-metonymy עַ֖ל אוֹדֹ֣ת יִשְׂרָאֵ֑ל 1 for Israel’s sake The word **Israel** represents the Israelite people. Alternate translation: “in order to help the Israelite people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 18 8 a1ra figs-metaphor כָּל־הַ⁠תְּלָאָה֙ אֲשֶׁ֣ר מְצָאָ֣תַ⁠ם 1 all the hardships that had come to them Moses writes of hardships happening to them as if hardships had come to them. Alternate translation: “all the hardships that had happened to them” or “how they had many hard experiences” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 18 9 wp1p figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרָֽיִם 1 the hand of the Egyptians The hand represents the power of someone to do something. Alternate translation: “the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians were doing to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 18 10 nrv7 figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרַ֖יִם וּ⁠מִ⁠יַּ֣ד פַּרְעֹ֑ה…מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת יַד־מִצְרָֽיִם 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh The hand represents the power of someone to do something. Alternate translation: “from the power of the Egyptians and from the power of Pharaoh … from the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians and Pharaoh were doing to you … from what the Egyptians were doing to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 18 9 wp1p figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרָֽיִם 1 the hand of the Egyptians The hand represents the power of someone to do something. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians were doing to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 18 10 nrv7 figs-metonymy מִ⁠יַּ֥ד מִצְרַ֖יִם וּ⁠מִ⁠יַּ֣ד פַּרְעֹ֑ה…מִ⁠תַּ֖חַת יַד־מִצְרָֽיִם 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh The hand represents the power of someone to do something. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “from the power of the Egyptians and from the power of Pharaoh … from the power of the Egyptians” or “from what the Egyptians and Pharaoh were doing to you … from what the Egyptians were doing to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 18 11 kmk7 כִּ֣י בַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh **Because of the matter** probably refers back to Yahweh’s rescue of Israel. Alternate translation: “because of what he did” EXO 18 11 ljj6 figs-explicit אֲשֶׁ֥ר זָד֖וּ עֲלֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh The most natural referent for **they** is **the gods**, who, perhaps through their agents (Pharaoh and the Egyptians), fought against Yahweh and oppressed the Israelites. This would connect back to [Exodus 12:12](../12/12.md) where Yahweh declares that he is bring judgment on the gods of Egypt. You may need to make some part of this explicit. Alternate translation: “in which they proudly fought Yahweh by oppressing Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 18 12 voi9 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of God. In this case it likely means that this was a worship event. Alternate translation: “in the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 18 13 ni2b writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִי֙ מִֽ⁠מָּחֳרָ֔ת 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 18 13 ano2 translate-symaction וַ⁠יֵּ֥שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֖ה לִ⁠שְׁפֹּ֣ט 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh Sitting was symbolic of having a position of authority. Alternate translation: “Moses sat down as a judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -EXO 18 13 wzea מִן־הַ⁠בֹּ֖קֶר עַד־הָ⁠עָֽרֶב 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh “all day” +EXO 18 13 wzea מִן־הַ⁠בֹּ֖קֶר עַד־הָ⁠עָֽרֶב 1 the hand of the Egyptians…the hand of Pharaoh Alternate translation: “all day” EXO 18 14 bax5 figs-rquestion מָֽה־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠זֶּה֙ אֲשֶׁ֨ר אַתָּ֤ה עֹשֶׂה֙ לָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 What is this that you are doing with the people? Jethro uses this question to show Moses that what he was doing was not good. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not be doing all of this for the people!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 18 14 b5wj figs-rquestion מַדּ֗וּעַ אַתָּ֤ה יוֹשֵׁב֙ לְ⁠בַדֶּ֔⁠ךָ וְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠עָ֛ם נִצָּ֥ב עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ מִן־בֹּ֥קֶר עַד־עָֽרֶב 1 Why is it that you sit alone…from morning until evening? Jethro used this question to show Moses that he was doing too much. This rhetorical question can be translated as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should not sit alone, and all the people position themselves next to you from morning till evening!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 18 14 cfd1 figs-metonymy אַתָּ֤ה יוֹשֵׁב֙ לְ⁠בַדֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 you sit alone The word **sit** here is a metonym for “judge.” Judges would sit while they listened to people’s complaints. Alternate translation: “do you judge alone” or “are you the only one who judges the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 18 14 cfd1 figs-metonymy אַתָּ֤ה יוֹשֵׁב֙ לְ⁠בַדֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 you sit alone The word **sit** here is a metonym for “judge.” Judges would sit while they listened to people’s complaints. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “do you judge alone” or “are you the only one who judges the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 18 14 tiqs figs-explicit נִצָּ֥ב עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 you sit alone The people came to be near Moses so that they could get a chance for him to hear their petitions. You could state that explicitly if it would be more clear. Alternate translation: “petition you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 18 18 jtd2 נָבֹ֣ל תִּבֹּ֔ל 1 You will surely wear yourselves out “You will surely make yourself very tired” +EXO 18 18 jtd2 נָבֹ֣ל תִּבֹּ֔ל 1 You will surely wear yourselves out Alternate translation: “You will surely make yourself very tired” EXO 18 18 h91b figs-metaphor כָבֵ֤ד מִמְּ⁠ךָ֙ 1 This burden is too heavy for you Jethro speaks of the hard work that Moses is doing as if it were a physical burden that Moses was carrying. Alternate translation: “is too hard for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 18 19 pug7 אִיעָ֣צְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 you advice “I will guide you” or “I will instruct you” +EXO 18 19 pug7 אִיעָ֣צְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 you advice Alternate translation: “I will guide you” or “I will instruct you” EXO 18 19 v8i9 figs-metaphor וִ⁠יהִ֥י אֱלֹהִ֖ים עִמָּ֑⁠ךְ 1 God will be with you Jethro speaks of God helping Moses as if God would be with Moses. Alternate translation: “God will help you” or “God will give you wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 18 19 w4r8 figs-metaphor וְ⁠הֵבֵאתָ֥ אַתָּ֛ה אֶת־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים אֶל־הָ⁠אֱלֹהִֽים 1 you bring their disputes to him Jethro speaks of Moses telling God about their disputes as if they were something that Moses was bringing to God. Alternate translation: “and you tell God about their disputes” or and “you tell God what they are arguing about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 18 20 w3vf figs-metaphor וְ⁠הוֹדַעְתָּ֣ לָ⁠הֶ֗ם אֶת־הַ⁠דֶּ֨רֶךְ֙ יֵ֣לְכוּ בָ֔⁠הּ 1 You must show them the way to walk Jethro speaks of living or behaving like walking. Alternate translation: “You must show them how to live” or “You must show them how to behave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 18 21 p5ap וְ⁠אַתָּ֣ה תֶחֱזֶ֣ה 1 Furthermore, you must choose “As for you, search out” or “You must also search out” +EXO 18 21 p5ap וְ⁠אַתָּ֣ה תֶחֱזֶ֣ה 1 Furthermore, you must choose Alternate translation: “As for you, search out” or “You must also search out” EXO 18 21 n936 figs-metaphor וְ⁠שַׂמְתָּ֣ עֲלֵ⁠הֶ֗ם 1 You must put them over people Jethro speaks of giving them authority over people as putting them over people. Alternate translation: “You must give them authority over people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 18 21 xprc writing-pronouns וְ⁠שַׂמְתָּ֣ עֲלֵ⁠הֶ֗ם 1 You must put them over people Here, **them** refers to the Israelites. Moses is placing the good men in charge of groups of Israelites. Alternate translation: “And you must appoint these men over the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 18 21 d2hv translate-numbers שָׂרֵ֤י אֲלָפִים֙ שָׂרֵ֣י מֵא֔וֹת שָׂרֵ֥י חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים וְ⁠שָׂרֵ֥י עֲשָׂרֹֽת 1 leaders in charge of thousands, hundreds, fifties, and of tens Possible meanings are (1) these numbers represent the exact amount of people in each group. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of groups of 1,000 people, groups of 100 people, groups of 50 people, and groups of 10 people” or (2) these numbers are not exact, but represent groups of people of various sizes. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of very small groups, small groups, large groups, and very large groups” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 18 22 y5n2 figs-metaphor כָּל־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠גָּדֹל֙ יָבִ֣יאוּ אֵלֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 the difficult cases they will bring to you Jethro speaks of telling Moses about the difficult cases as bringing him the difficult cases. Alternate translation: “the difficult cases they will tell you about” or “when there are difficult cases, they will tell you about them so you can judge them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 18 22 vnvh וְ⁠הָקֵל֙ מֵֽ⁠עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 the difficult cases they will bring to you This is a command. Alternate translation: “Make your work less” or “Lessen your work” EXO 18 22 u42p figs-metaphor וְ⁠הָקֵל֙ מֵֽ⁠עָלֶ֔י⁠ךָ וְ⁠נָשְׂא֖וּ אִתָּֽ⁠ךְ 1 they will carry the burden with you Jethro speaks of the hard work that they would do as if it were something that they would carry and make lighter for Moses by helping him. Alternate translation: “Lessen your work by having them do the hard work with you” or “Make your work easier by having them help you do the hard work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 18 23 wyq4 וְ⁠יָֽכָלְתָּ֖ עֲמֹ֑ד 1 endure “then you will not wear yourself out” +EXO 18 23 wyq4 וְ⁠יָֽכָלְתָּ֖ עֲמֹ֑ד 1 endure Alternate translation: “then you will not wear yourself out” EXO 18 23 bt5p כָּל־הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה עַל־מְקֹמ֖⁠וֹ יָבֹ֥א בְ⁠שָׁלֽוֹם 1 endure Here, getting **to their place** could mean each person’s home tent or it could mean the whole group gets to the promised land. If you cannot leave it ambiguous it would be best to indicate something like “harmony in the camp.” Alternate translation: “all these people will live in harmony” EXO 18 25 n2ws figs-metaphor רָאשִׁ֖ים עַל־הָ⁠עָ֑ם 1 heads over the people Moses writes of the leaders of people as if they were the head of a body. Alternate translation: “leaders over the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 18 25 tb18 figs-explicit אַנְשֵׁי־חַ֨יִל֙ 1 capable men What sort of ability they had can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “men who were able to lead” or “men who were able to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 18 25 iqn8 translate-numbers שָׂרֵ֤י אֲלָפִים֙ שָׂרֵ֣י מֵא֔וֹת שָׂרֵ֥י חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים וְ⁠שָׂרֵ֥י עֲשָׂרֹֽת 1 leaders in charge of thousands, hundreds, fifties, and tens Possible meanings are (1) these numbers represent the exact amount of people in each group. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of groups of 1,000 people, groups of 100 people, groups of 50 people, and groups of 10 people” or (2) these numbers are not exact, but represent groups of people of various sizes. Alternate translation: “leaders in charge of very small groups, small groups, large groups, and very large groups” See how you translated this in [Exodus 18:21](../18/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 18 26 abx4 וְ⁠שָׁפְט֥וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֖ם בְּ⁠כָל־עֵ֑ת 1 judged the people in normal circumstances “They judged the people most of the time” or “They judged the people in all regular circumstances” +EXO 18 26 abx4 וְ⁠שָׁפְט֥וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עָ֖ם בְּ⁠כָל־עֵ֑ת 1 judged the people in normal circumstances Alternate translation: “They judged the people most of the time” or “They judged the people in all regular circumstances” EXO 18 26 z7j4 figs-metaphor אֶת־הַ⁠דָּבָ֤ר הַ⁠קָּשֶׁה֙ יְבִיא֣וּ⁠ן אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 The difficult cases they brought to Moses The author writes of telling Moses about the difficult cases as bringing him the difficult cases. Alternate translation: “They told Moses about the difficult cases” or “When there were difficult cases, they told Moses about them so that he would judge them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 18 26 ve8h הַ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠קָּטֹ֖ן 1 the small cases “easy case” -EXO 19 intro ck7e 0 # Exodus 19 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter

### “A kingdom of priests”
The function of the priests was to intercede for the people. The Levites were the only priests in Israel; this is a metaphor indicating that the nation was to intercede for the world as a whole. They were also to be holy, or set apart, from the rest of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Revealing the Law
The events of this chapter are concerned with preparing the people to receive the law of Moses. The people go through all of this to prepare themselves for the law, which shows the great importance of this event for Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])


### Boundaries between Yahweh and the people
Moses is told to make the people holy in preparation for meeting Yahweh, then boundaries are set up to keep the people separate from Yahweh, then the priests are told to make themselves holy. The theme of a holy separation is beginning to be developed that will become much of the law code. +EXO 18 26 ve8h הַ⁠דָּבָ֥ר הַ⁠קָּטֹ֖ן 1 the small cases Alternate translation: “easy case” +EXO 19 intro ck7e 0 # Exodus 19 General Notes

## Special concepts in this chapter

### “A kingdom of priests”

The function of the priests was to intercede for the people. The Levites were the only priests in Israel; this is a metaphor indicating that the nation was to intercede for the world as a whole. They were also to be holy, or set apart, from the rest of the world. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

### Revealing the Law

The events of this chapter are concerned with preparing the people to receive the law of Moses. The people go through all of this to prepare themselves for the law, which shows the great importance of this event for Israel. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])


### Boundaries between Yahweh and the people

Moses is told to make the people holy in preparation for meeting Yahweh, then boundaries are set up to keep the people separate from Yahweh, then the priests are told to make themselves holy. The theme of a holy separation is beginning to be developed that will become much of the law code. EXO 19 1 r5tj translate-ordinal בַּ⁠חֹ֨דֶשׁ֙ הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֔י…בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠זֶּ֔ה 1 In the third month…on the same day This means they arrived at the wilderness on the first day of the month just as they left Egypt on the first day of the month. The first day of the third month on the Hebrew calendar is near the middle of May on Western calendars. Alternate translation: “In the third month … on the first day of the month” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 19 2 nk51 translate-names מֵ⁠רְפִידִ֗ים 1 Rephidim **Rephidim** is an area on the edge of the wilderness of Sinai where the people of Israel had been camping. See how you translated this name in [Exodus 17:1](../17/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 19 3 kgev figs-parallelism תֹאמַר֙ לְ⁠בֵ֣ית יַעֲקֹ֔ב וְ⁠תַגֵּ֖יד לִ⁠בְנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 the house of Jacob, the people of Israel These two phrases have exactly the same meaning. This may be for poetic effect as Yahweh’s statement here through [verse 6](../19/06.md) is somewhat artfully crafted. You may need to use a strategy other than parallelism to achieve a similar poetic effect in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) @@ -1426,130 +1424,130 @@ EXO 19 4 z9i6 figs-you אַתֶּ֣ם רְאִיתֶ֔ם 1 You have seen The wor EXO 19 4 l1do figs-quotemarks 0 You have seen A second-level direct quotation begins with this verse and continues until the middle of [verse 6](../19/06.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 19 4 b7ph figs-metaphor וָ⁠אֶשָּׂ֤א אֶתְ⁠כֶם֙ עַל־כַּנְפֵ֣י נְשָׁרִ֔ים 1 I carried you on eagles’ wings God speaks of caring for his people while they traveled as if he were an eagle and carried them on his wings. Alternate translation: “I helped you travel like an eagle that carries her babies on her wings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 19 5 c767 figs-metonymy בְּ⁠קֹלִ֔⁠י 1 my voice God’s voice represents what he says. Alternate translation: “to what I say” or “to my words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 19 5 fh8e וּ⁠שְׁמַרְתֶּ֖ם אֶת־בְּרִיתִ֑⁠י 1 keep my covenant “and do what my covenant requires you to do” -EXO 19 5 ifv6 סְגֻלָּה֙ 1 special possession “treasure” +EXO 19 5 fh8e וּ⁠שְׁמַרְתֶּ֖ם אֶת־בְּרִיתִ֑⁠י 1 keep my covenant Alternate translation: “and do what my covenant requires you to do” +EXO 19 5 ifv6 סְגֻלָּה֙ 1 special possession Alternate translation: “treasure” EXO 19 6 gm9s figs-metaphor לִ֛⁠י מַמְלֶ֥כֶת כֹּהֲנִ֖ים 1 a kingdom of priests God speaks of his people as if they were priests. Alternate translation: “my kingdom of people who are like priests” or “my kingdom of people who do what priests do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 19 7 c5tq figs-metaphor וַ⁠יָּ֣שֶׂם לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֗ם אֵ֚ת כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים 1 set before them all these words The author writes of Moses telling people things as if he were setting the words before them. Alternate translation: “And he told them all these words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 19 7 xjbb figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֗ם 1 set before them all these words **Face** means the person. Alternate translation: “before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 19 7 zqk1 כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה אֲשֶׁ֥ר צִוָּ֖⁠הוּ יְהוָֽה 1 all these words that Yahweh had commanded him “all that Yahweh had commanded him” +EXO 19 7 xjbb figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶ֗ם 1 set before them all these words Here, **face** means the person. Alternate translation: “before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 19 7 zqk1 כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֔לֶּה אֲשֶׁ֥ר צִוָּ֖⁠הוּ יְהוָֽה 1 all these words that Yahweh had commanded him Alternate translation: “all that Yahweh had commanded him” EXO 19 8 ljf5 figs-explicit וַ⁠יָּ֧שֶׁב מֹשֶׁ֛ה אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 Moses came to report Where Moses went can be stated explicitly. Alternate translation: “Moses went back up the mountain to report the words of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 19 8 rwx6 figs-metonymy אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 the people’s words **Words** refers to what the people said. Alternate translation: “what the people said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 19 9 ih2h figs-metonymy אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 the people’s words **Words** refers to what the people said. Alternate translation: “what the people said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 19 8 rwx6 figs-metonymy אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 the people’s words Here, **words** refers to what the people said. Alternate translation: “what the people said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 19 9 ih2h figs-metonymy אֶת־דִּבְרֵ֥י הָ⁠עָ֖ם 1 the people’s words Here, **words** refers to what the people said. Alternate translation: “what the people said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 19 10 ie7y וְ⁠קִדַּשְׁתָּ֥⁠ם 1 you must set them apart to me This may mean instruct the people, or it may mean Moses will have a role as well. Alternate translation: “and tell them to dedicate themselves to me” or “and help them to purify themselves for me” -EXO 19 11 tdg9 figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י 1 Be ready **Before the eyes** means “so they can see.” Alternate translation: see UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 19 11 tdg9 figs-metonymy לְ⁠עֵינֵ֥י 1 Be ready Here, **before the eyes** means “so they can see.” If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 19 12 d48p וְ⁠הִגְבַּלְתָּ֤ 1 set boundaries The **boundary** was either a mark or some kind of barrier. EXO 19 12 hhv5 figs-quotesinquotes לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר הִשָּׁמְר֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֛ם 1 set boundaries A second-level direct quotation begins with **watch**. It is not clear where this command that Moses is to give the Israelites ends. Most English translations end it in [verse 13](../19/13.md) before the last sentence. For that reason, it may be most helpful to translate the instruction as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “telling them to watch themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 19 12 xct0 הִשָּׁמְר֥וּ לָ⁠כֶ֛ם עֲל֥וֹת בָּ⁠הָ֖ר וּ⁠נְגֹ֣עַ בְּ⁠קָצֵ֑⁠הוּ 1 set boundaries Here, the negative command is implied from the **watch yourselves** command. Alternate translation: “Watch yourselves against climbing on the mountain or touching on its edge” EXO 19 12 kis1 figs-activepassive כָּל־הַ⁠נֹּגֵ֥עַ בָּ⁠הָ֖ר מ֥וֹת 1 Whoever touches the mountain will surely be put to death This can be stated with an active form. Alternate translation: “You must surely put to death any person who touches the mountain” or “You must surely kill anyone who touches the mountain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 19 13 l9ak figs-metonymy בּ֜⁠וֹ 1 such a person Here, **hand** is a metonym for any part of a person. Alternate translation: “a person who does that” or “a person who touches the mountain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 19 13 l9ak figs-metonymy לֹא־תִגַּ֨ע בּ֜⁠וֹ יָ֗ד 1 such a person Here, **hand** is a metonym for any part of a person. Alternate translation: “No person shall touch that one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 19 13 k35k figs-activepassive סָק֤וֹל יִסָּקֵל֙ אוֹ־יָרֹ֣ה יִיָּרֶ֔ה 1 he must certainly be stoned or shot This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you must certainly stone or shoot him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 19 13 vw19 יָרֹ֣ה יִיָּרֶ֔ה 1 shot This refers to being killed by someone who shoots arrows from a bow or stones from a slingshot. EXO 19 13 ezpm figs-go יַעֲל֥וּ 1 shot If you translate this with come or go, consider which would be the correct perspective for your language and the text context. Yahweh is speaking, so perhaps it would be best to say “come up,” however the people will be the ones moving so maybe it should be “go up.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 19 15 bw2p figs-euphemism אַֽל־תִּגְּשׁ֖וּ אֶל־אִשָּֽׁה 1 do not go near your wives This is a polite way of talking about sexual relations. Alternate translation: “do not sleep with your wives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) EXO 19 15 z0aq אִשָּֽׁה 1 do not go near your wives This word means both “woman” and “wife.” Context dictates the correct translation. Since wife would make it a narrower command, **woman** was chosen here. -EXO 19 18 m1b5 יָרַ֥ד…יְהוָ֖ה 1 Yahweh descended “Yahweh came down” +EXO 19 18 m1b5 יָרַ֥ד…יְהוָ֖ה 1 Yahweh descended Alternate translation: “Yahweh came down” EXO 19 18 a8p7 figs-simile כְּ⁠עֶ֣שֶׁן הַ⁠כִּבְשָׁ֔ן 1 like the smoke of a furnace This shows that it was a very large amount of smoke. Alternate translation: “like the smoke from a very large fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -EXO 19 19 m8ae הוֹלֵ֖ךְ וְ⁠חָזֵ֣ק מְאֹ֑ד 1 grew louder and louder “continued to become louder and louder” +EXO 19 19 m8ae הוֹלֵ֖ךְ וְ⁠חָזֵ֣ק מְאֹ֑ד 1 grew louder and louder Alternate translation: “continued to become louder and louder” EXO 19 19 f5e6 figs-metonymy בְ⁠קֽוֹל 1 in a voice The word **voice** here refers to a sound that God made. Possible meanings are (1) “by speaking loudly like thunder” or (2) “by speaking” or (3) “by causing thunder to sound” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 19 20 zx5p figs-go וַ⁠יֵּ֧רֶד…וַ⁠יַּ֥עַל 1 in a voice You may need to consider your language’s rules for perspective regarding going or coming up or down in this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]]) EXO 19 21 d2qm figs-metaphor פֶּן־יֶהֶרְס֤וּ 1 not to break through God spoke about walking past the boundary as if they might break down a barrier and walk through it. See how you translated “set bounds” in [Exodus 19:12](../19/12.md). Alternate translation: “not to go beyond the boundary” or “not to go through the barrier” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 19 21 oht2 figs-euphemism וְ⁠נָפַ֥ל 1 not to break through **Fall** is a euphemism for dying. Alternate translation: see UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) EXO 19 22 pq8j figs-metaphor יִפְרֹ֥ץ בָּ⁠הֶ֖ם יְהוָֽה 1 not to break through Yahweh’s anger and judgement are pictured as something that will burst through a boundary. Alternate translation: “Yahweh kills them in anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 19 23 gagp figs-quotesinquotes בָּ֨⁠נוּ֙ לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר הַגְבֵּ֥ל אֶת־הָ⁠הָ֖ר וְ⁠קִדַּשְׁתּֽ⁠וֹ 1 not to break through This quoted command could be translated as an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “us to set boundaries on the mountain to keep it separate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) -EXO 19 24 w8lx לֶךְ־רֵ֔ד 1 get down “go down” +EXO 19 24 w8lx לֶךְ־רֵ֔ד 1 get down Alternate translation: “go down” EXO 19 24 bk6p figs-metaphor אַל־יֶֽהֶרְס֛וּ 1 break through the barrier God spoke about walking past the boundary as if they might break down a barrier and walk through it. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 19:21](../19/21.md). Alternate translation: “must not go beyond the boundary” or “must not go through the barrier” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 19 24 p1yq figs-metaphor יִפְרָץ־בָּֽ⁠ם 1 break through the barrier Yahweh’s anger and judgement are pictured as something that will burst through a boundary. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 19:22](../19/22.md). Alternate translation: “he kill them in anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 20 intro x7vt 0 # Exodus 20 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The instructions recorded in this chapter are commonly known as the “ten commandments.”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Covenant
Yahweh’s covenant faithfulness is now based on the covenant he made with Abraham as well as the covenant he is making with Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenantfaith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])


### Form of you
The singular form of you is used in the commandments, however, the commandments applied to the whole Israelite community. There is both a singular and a corporate aspect to them. You may need to choose between singular and plural if you language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) +EXO 20 intro x7vt 0 # Exodus 20 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The instructions recorded in this chapter are commonly known as the “ten commandments.”

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Covenant

Yahweh’s covenant faithfulness is now based on the covenant he made with Abraham as well as the covenant he is making with Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenantfaith]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])


### Form of you

The singular form of you is used in the commandments, however, the commandments applied to the whole Israelite community. There is both a singular and a corporate aspect to them. You may need to choose between singular and plural if you language makes that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]]) EXO 20 2 qg71 figs-metaphor מִ⁠בֵּ֥ית עֲבָדִֽים 1 house of slavery Moses speaks of Egypt as if it were a house where people keep slaves. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:3](../13/03.md). Alternate translation: “from the place where you were slaves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 20 3 r9h3 לֹֽ֣א יִהְיֶֽה־לְ⁠ךָ֛ אֱלֹהִ֥ים אֲחֵרִ֖ים עַל־פָּנָֽ⁠יַ 1 You must have no other gods before me “You must not worship any other gods besides me” +EXO 20 3 r9h3 לֹֽ֣א יִהְיֶֽה־לְ⁠ךָ֛ אֱלֹהִ֥ים אֲחֵרִ֖ים עַל־פָּנָֽ⁠יַ 1 You must have no other gods before me Alternate translation: “You must not worship any other gods besides me” EXO 20 4 s7n3 figs-merism וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֤ר בַּ⁠שָּׁמַ֨יִם֙ מִ⁠מַּ֔עַל וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בָּ⁠אָ֖רֶץ מִ⁠תָּ֑חַת וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֥ר בַּ⁠מַּ֖יִם מִ⁠תַּ֥חַת לָ⁠אָֽרֶץ 1 nor the likeness This list means, all created things wherever they are. Alternate translation: “nor anything that looks like anything created whether that is in heaven above, or that is in the earth beneath, or that is in the water under the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]]) -EXO 20 4 rkn1 figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה 1 nor the likeness “nor anything looking like something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) +EXO 20 4 rkn1 figs-abstractnouns וְ⁠כָל־תְּמוּנָ֔ה 1 nor the likeness Alternate translation: “nor anything looking like something” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 20 5 ka3i writing-pronouns לָ⁠הֶ֖ם 1 You must not bow down to them or worship them The word **them** refers to carved figures or idols. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 20 5 s2ia translate-ordinal עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation “to generations 3 and 4.” This refers to the grandchildren and great-grandchildren. Alternate translation: “even on the grandchildren and great-grandchildren (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 20 5 hx93 figs-ellipsis בָּנִ֛ים עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation “Generation” is implied by **sons**. Alternate translation: “the sons down to the third and fourth generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 20 5 s2ia translate-ordinal עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation Alternate translation: “to generations 3 and 4.” This refers to the grandchildren and great-grandchildren. Alternate translation: “even on the grandchildren and great-grandchildren (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 20 5 hx93 figs-ellipsis בָּנִ֛ים עַל־שִׁלֵּשִׁ֥ים וְ⁠עַל־רִבֵּעִ֖ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by **sons**. Alternate translation: “the sons down to the third and fourth generations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 20 6 u9nc figs-abstractnouns חֶ֖סֶד 1 I show covenant faithfulness to thousands of those who love me The abstract noun **faithfulness** can be stated as “faithfully” or “faithful.” Alternate translation: “I am faithful to the covenant with thousands of those who love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 20 6 oyh7 figs-ellipsis לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation “Generation” is implied by the previous verse. However, this may not be the case, therefore two notes following deal with either possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -EXO 20 6 k52w לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation “to the thousandth generation” or “for a thousand generations” +EXO 20 6 oyh7 figs-ellipsis לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation Alternate translation: “Generation” is implied by the previous verse. However, this may not be the case, therefore two notes following deal with either possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 20 6 k52w לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation Alternate translation: “to the thousandth generation” or “for a thousand generations” EXO 20 6 xp5k figs-hyperbole לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים 1 to the third and the fourth generation Option 1: This large number is used to mean “forever” or “to all descendants forever.” Alternate translation: “for every generation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) EXO 20 6 yw38 figs-metonymy לַ⁠אֲלָפִ֑ים לְ⁠אֹהֲבַ֖⁠י 1 to thousands of those who love me Option 2: The word **thousands** is a metonym for a number too many to count. Alternate translation: “forever to innumerable people who love me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 20 7 o96b תִשָּׂ֛א…יִשָּׂ֥א 1 take the name of Yahweh your God To **lift up**, take, or use the name of Yahweh (with emptiness, i.e. improperly) covers many sorts of speaking or invoking his name, or making a claim to him, or attempting to manipulate him, or misrepresenting him. A broad word should be used in translation of this term. -EXO 20 7 t3k2 לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֛א אֶת־שֵֽׁם־יְהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 take the name of Yahweh your God “You must not use the name of Yahweh your God” -EXO 20 7 gcz2 לַ⁠שָּׁ֑וְא…לַ⁠שָּֽׁוְא 1 in vain “carelessly” or “without proper respect” +EXO 20 7 t3k2 לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֛א אֶת־שֵֽׁם־יְהוָ֥ה אֱלֹהֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 take the name of Yahweh your God Alternate translation: “You must not use the name of Yahweh your God” +EXO 20 7 gcz2 לַ⁠שָּׁ֑וְא…לַ⁠שָּֽׁוְא 1 in vain Alternate translation: “carelessly” or “without proper respect” EXO 20 7 sl6g figs-doublenegatives לֹ֤א יְנַקֶּה֙ 1 I will not hold guiltless This double-negative can be stated as a positive. Alternate translation: “I will certainly consider guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -EXO 20 8 kwn7 לְ⁠קַדְּשֽׁ⁠וֹ 1 set it apart “to make it holy to me” or “to consecrate it to me” -EXO 20 9 sad1 מְלַאכְתֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 do all your work “your occupation” or “your livelihood” -EXO 20 10 t1ky figs-metonymy בִּ⁠שְׁעָרֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 within your gates Cities often had walls around them to keep out enemies, and gates for people to go in and out. Alternate translation: “within your community” or “inside your city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 20 11 vw1f translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֑י 1 on the seventh day “on day seven.” Here “seventh” is the ordinal number for “7.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 20 14 wyv9 לֹ֖א תִּנְאָֽף 1 You must not commit adultery “You must not have sex with anyone other than your spouse” -EXO 20 16 zix8 לֹֽא־תַעֲנֶ֥ה בְ⁠רֵעֲ⁠ךָ֖ עֵ֥ד שָֽׁקֶר 1 must not give false testimony “You must not speak a false report against your neighbor” -EXO 20 17 vt9t לֹ֥א תַחְמֹ֖ד 1 must not covet “You must not strongly want to have” or “You must not want to take” -EXO 20 18 nm52 הָ⁠הָ֖ר עָשֵׁ֑ן 1 the mountain smoking “the smoky mountain” -EXO 20 18 lmt5 וַ⁠יָּנֻ֔עוּ 1 they trembled “they shook with fear” -EXO 20 18 h53m וַ⁠יַּֽעַמְד֖וּ מֵֽ⁠רָחֹֽק 1 stood far off “stood far away” -EXO 20 20 slb8 וּ⁠בַ⁠עֲב֗וּר תִּהְיֶ֧ה יִרְאָת֛⁠וֹ עַל־פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם לְ⁠בִלְתִּ֥י תֶחֱטָֽאוּ 1 so that the honor of him may be in you, and so that you do not sin “so that you will honor him and not sin” +EXO 20 8 kwn7 לְ⁠קַדְּשֽׁ⁠וֹ 1 set it apart Alternate translation: “to make it holy to me” or “to consecrate it to me” +EXO 20 9 sad1 מְלַאכְתֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 do all your work Alternate translation: “your occupation” or “your livelihood” +EXO 20 10 t1ky figs-metonymy בִּ⁠שְׁעָרֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 within your gates Cities often had walls around them to keep out enemies, and gates for people to go in and out. Anyone who was inside the gates was part of the community. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “within your community” or “inside your city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 20 11 vw1f translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֣וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֑י 1 on the seventh day Alternate translation: “on day seven.” Here “seventh” is the ordinal number for “7.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 20 14 wyv9 לֹ֖א תִּנְאָֽף 1 You must not commit adultery Alternate translation: “You must not have sex with anyone other than your spouse” +EXO 20 16 zix8 לֹֽא־תַעֲנֶ֥ה בְ⁠רֵעֲ⁠ךָ֖ עֵ֥ד שָֽׁקֶר 1 must not give false testimony Alternate translation: “You must not speak a false report against your neighbor” +EXO 20 17 vt9t לֹ֥א תַחְמֹ֖ד 1 must not covet Alternate translation: “You must not strongly want to have” or “You must not want to take” +EXO 20 18 nm52 הָ⁠הָ֖ר עָשֵׁ֑ן 1 the mountain smoking Alternate translation: “the smoky mountain” +EXO 20 18 lmt5 וַ⁠יָּנֻ֔עוּ 1 they trembled Alternate translation: “they shook with fear” +EXO 20 18 h53m וַ⁠יַּֽעַמְד֖וּ מֵֽ⁠רָחֹֽק 1 stood far off Alternate translation: “stood far away” +EXO 20 20 slb8 וּ⁠בַ⁠עֲב֗וּר תִּהְיֶ֧ה יִרְאָת֛⁠וֹ עַל־פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם לְ⁠בִלְתִּ֥י תֶחֱטָֽאוּ 1 so that the honor of him may be in you, and so that you do not sin Alternate translation: “so that you will honor him and not sin” EXO 20 20 hocw figs-metaphor תִּהְיֶ֧ה יִרְאָת֛⁠וֹ עַל־פְּנֵי⁠כֶ֖ם 1 so that the honor of him may be in you, and so that you do not sin Here, **fear** is spoken of as something that could be on their faces. It may mean they would have such a fear that their attitude could be seen on their faces. Alternate translation: “reverence for him will show on your faces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 20 21 lts1 וּ⁠מֹשֶׁה֙ נִגַּ֣שׁ 1 Moses approached “and Moses went closer to” +EXO 20 21 lts1 וּ⁠מֹשֶׁה֙ נִגַּ֣שׁ 1 Moses approached Alternate translation: “and Moses went closer to” EXO 20 22 ayom figs-quotemarks אַתֶּ֣ם רְאִיתֶ֔ם 1 Moses approached A second-level direct quotation begins here that continues until the [end of the chapter](../20/26.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 20 23 qm44 אֱלֹ֤הֵי כֶ֨סֶף֙ וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י זָהָ֔ב 1 gods of silver or gods of gold “gods made out of silver or gold” or “idols made out of silver or gold” +EXO 20 23 qm44 אֱלֹ֤הֵי כֶ֨סֶף֙ וֵ⁠אלֹהֵ֣י זָהָ֔ב 1 gods of silver or gods of gold Alternate translation: “gods made out of silver or gold” or “idols made out of silver or gold” EXO 20 24 pf1i מִזְבַּ֣ח אֲדָמָה֮ 1 earthen altar An altar made of materials from the ground, such as stone, soil, or clay. -EXO 20 24 ge89 figs-metonymy אַזְכִּ֣יר אֶת־שְׁמִ֔⁠י 1 cause my name to be honored Here, **name** is a metonym for God’s being. Alternate translation: “I cause myself to be remembered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 20 24 ge89 figs-metonymy אַזְכִּ֣יר אֶת־שְׁמִ֔⁠י 1 cause my name to be honored Here, **name** is a metonym for God’s being. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “I cause myself to be remembered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 20 24 zmc4 figs-activepassive אַזְכִּ֣יר אֶת־שְׁמִ֔⁠י 1 cause my name to be honored This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “choose for you to remember me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 20 26 qm1b figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹֽא־תַעֲלֶ֥ה בְ⁠מַעֲלֹ֖ת עַֽל־מִזְבְּחִ֑⁠י 1 You must not go up to my altar on steps If you need to connect this statement more explicitly to the previous statements regarding building the alter you could add a phrase about building steps. Alternate translation: “Do not build steps up to the altar and go up to it on those steps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 20 26 e28y figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֛ר לֹֽא־תִגָּלֶ֥ה עֶרְוָתְ⁠ךָ֖ עָלָֽי⁠ו 1 You must not go up to my altar on steps This could be stated in an active manner. Alternate translation: “so that you do not expose your nakedness over it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 20 26 h2qd עֶרְוָתְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 your nakedness “your private parts” -EXO 21 intro dnd3 0 # Exodus 21 General Notes

This chapter begins to give the Israelite civil case law, that is, the explanation of how to apply the principles condensed in the ten commandments.

## Structure:
- 1: Introduction
- 2-6: Laws regarding male slaves
- 7-11: Laws regarding female slaves
- 12-17: Capital crimes
- 18-36: Liability laws
- 18-27: Regarding human violence
- 28-36: Regarding damage done by or to animals

## Translation issues in this chapter

### Hypothetical situations
Throughout the case law a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if,” then there is a description of the situation, then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will have these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).


### Passive construction
Many portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]].


### Daughters sold as servants
The section from [verses 7-11](../21/07.md) may be some what confusing because a daughter that is sold as a servant is seamlessly connected to her becoming someone’s wife.

### Ransom payment
In [verse 30](../21/30.md) a man whose bull killed someone may evade the death penalty by paying a ransom price, but the conditions for that happening are not clear. +EXO 20 26 h2qd עֶרְוָתְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 your nakedness Alternate translation: “your private parts” +EXO 21 intro dnd3 0 # Exodus 21 General Notes

This chapter begins to give the Israelite civil case law, that is, the explanation of how to apply the principles condensed in the ten commandments.

## Structure:

- 1: Introduction
- 2-6: Laws regarding male slaves
- 7-11: Laws regarding female slaves
- 12-17: Capital crimes
- 18-36: Liability laws
- 18-27: Regarding human violence
- 28-36: Regarding damage done by or to animals

## Translation issues in this chapter

### Hypothetical situations

Throughout the case law a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if,” then there is a description of the situation, then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will have these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).


### Passive construction

Many portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]].


### Daughters sold as servants

The section from [verses 7-11](../21/07.md) may be some what confusing because a daughter that is sold as a servant is seamlessly connected to her becoming someone’s wife.

### Ransom payment

In [verse 30](../21/30.md) a man whose bull killed someone may evade the death penalty by paying a ransom price, but the conditions for that happening are not clear. EXO 21 1 xxf4 0 you must set before them Yahweh continues speaking to Moses. There is no quote break between chapters. -EXO 21 1 hhf7 תָּשִׂ֖ים 1 you must set before them “you must give” or “you must tell” +EXO 21 1 hhf7 תָּשִׂ֖ים 1 you must set before them Alternate translation: “you must give” or “you must tell” EXO 21 1 ddql figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵי⁠הֶֽם 1 you must set before them Here, **faces** figuratively represents the presence of the nation. Alternate translation: “before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 21 2 di5z 0 General Information: Yahweh tells Moses his laws for the people of Israel. EXO 21 2 wj0e grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical כִּ֤י תִקְנֶה֙ עֶ֣בֶד עִבְרִ֔י 1 General Information: This is the first of many hypothetical situations, introduced by “when” or **if,** which you will encounter over the next several chapters. See the [introduction to chapter 21](../21/intro.md). You will need to translate these consistently in a manner that expresses that these situations have not happened. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) EXO 21 3 ln3r figs-explicit אִם־בְּ⁠גַפּ֥⁠וֹ יָבֹ֖א בְּ⁠גַפּ֣⁠וֹ יֵצֵ֑א 1 If he came by himself, he must go free by himself What “by himself” means can be stated clearly. Some languages require that the additional condition, that he marries while a slave, be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “If he became a slave while he had no wife, and if he marries while he is a slave, the master need only free the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 21 3 pfn3 בְּ⁠גַפּ֥⁠וֹ…בְּ⁠גַפּ֣⁠וֹ 1 by himself “alone” or “without a wife” -EXO 21 3 e467 אִם־בַּ֤עַל אִשָּׁה֙ ה֔וּא 1 if he is married “if he was married when he became a slave” or “if he came as a married man” -EXO 21 5 yj8x אָמֹ֤ר יֹאמַר֙ 1 plainly says “makes a statement” -EXO 21 5 jqh4 לֹ֥א אֵצֵ֖א חָפְשִֽׁי 1 I will not go out free “I do not want my master to set me free” +EXO 21 3 pfn3 בְּ⁠גַפּ֥⁠וֹ…בְּ⁠גַפּ֣⁠וֹ 1 by himself Alternate translation: “alone” or “without a wife” +EXO 21 3 e467 אִם־בַּ֤עַל אִשָּׁה֙ ה֔וּא 1 if he is married Alternate translation: “if he was married when he became a slave” or “if he came as a married man” +EXO 21 5 yj8x אָמֹ֤ר יֹאמַר֙ 1 plainly says Alternate translation: “makes a statement” +EXO 21 5 jqh4 לֹ֥א אֵצֵ֖א חָפְשִֽׁי 1 I will not go out free Alternate translation: “I do not want my master to set me free” EXO 21 6 vnjk figs-metonymy הָ֣⁠אֱלֹהִ֔ים 1 bore his ear through The word for **God** at its most literal means “great ones.” Here it may have this basic meaning and refer to human judges or other leaders in Israel. It may also be a metonym and refer to the judges because they represent God to the people and have his authority. Texts other than the standard Hebrew text support this reading. See [Exodus 22:8-9](../22/08.md) for another example of this. Alternate translation: “the judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 21 6 z8x1 וְ⁠רָצַ֨ע…אֶת־אָזְנ⁠וֹ֙ 1 bore his ear through “will put a hole in his ear” +EXO 21 6 z8x1 וְ⁠רָצַ֨ע…אֶת־אָזְנ⁠וֹ֙ 1 bore his ear through Alternate translation: “will put a hole in his ear” EXO 21 6 xpd3 בַּ⁠מַּרְצֵ֔עַ 1 awl a pointed tool used to make a hole -EXO 21 6 k6ev לְ⁠עֹלָֽם 1 for life “until the end of his life” or “until he dies” +EXO 21 6 k6ev לְ⁠עֹלָֽם 1 for life Alternate translation: “until the end of his life” or “until he dies” EXO 21 8 lpqh 0 has designated This verse is the first of three possible situations between a master and his female slave. -EXO 21 8 p8se יְעָדָ֖⁠הּ 1 has designated “has chosen” +EXO 21 8 p8se יְעָדָ֖⁠הּ 1 has designated Alternate translation: “has chosen” EXO 21 8 t2zf figs-activepassive וְ⁠הֶפְדָּ֑⁠הּ 1 he must let her be bought back This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “he must allow her father to buy her back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 21 8 h7f7 בְּ⁠בִגְד⁠וֹ־בָֽ⁠הּ 1 he has treated her deceitfully “since he has deceived her” +EXO 21 8 h7f7 בְּ⁠בִגְד⁠וֹ־בָֽ⁠הּ 1 he has treated her deceitfully Alternate translation: “since he has deceived her” EXO 21 9 h9ni 0 he has treated her deceitfully This verse is the second of three possible situations between a master and his female slave. -EXO 21 9 w99z לִ⁠בְנ֖⁠וֹ יִֽיעָדֶ֑⁠נָּה 1 designates her as a wife for his son “he decides that she is the one who will be his son’s wife” -EXO 21 9 suz0 כְּ⁠מִשְׁפַּ֥ט הַ⁠בָּנ֖וֹת יַעֲשֶׂה־לָּֽ⁠הּ 1 designates her as a wife for his son “he must do to her according to the manner that daughters are customarily treated” +EXO 21 9 w99z לִ⁠בְנ֖⁠וֹ יִֽיעָדֶ֑⁠נָּה 1 designates her as a wife for his son Alternate translation: “he decides that she is the one who will be his son’s wife” +EXO 21 9 suz0 כְּ⁠מִשְׁפַּ֥ט הַ⁠בָּנ֖וֹת יַעֲשֶׂה־לָּֽ⁠הּ 1 designates her as a wife for his son Alternate translation: “he must do to her according to the manner that daughters are customarily treated” EXO 21 10 i0xh 0 designates her as a wife for his son This verse and the next are the third of three possible situations between a master and his female slave. EXO 21 10 rxk4 figs-doublenegatives שְׁאֵרָ֛⁠הּ כְּסוּתָ֥⁠הּ וְ⁠עֹנָתָ֖⁠הּ לֹ֥א יִגְרָֽע 1 he must not diminish her food, clothing, or her marital rights This can be stated in a positive form. Alternate translation: “he must give the first wife the same food, clothing, and marital rights she had before” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 21 10 np9b figs-euphemism וְ⁠עֹנָתָ֖⁠הּ 1 or her marital rights This term only occurs here in the Bible. It probably means things that a husband must do for his wife. Most commentators believe it specifically means having sexual relations with her, possibly so that she can bear children. Alternate translation: “or her right to intimacy” or “or her childbearing rights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -EXO 21 12 gks4 מַכֵּ֥ה אִ֛ישׁ 1 strikes a man “Whoever attacks a man” +EXO 21 12 gks4 מַכֵּ֥ה אִ֛ישׁ 1 strikes a man Alternate translation: “Whoever attacks a man” EXO 21 12 su6b figs-activepassive מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 that person must surely be put to death This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you must certainly execute that person” or “you must certainly kill that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 21 13 h4ka וַ⁠אֲשֶׁר֙ לֹ֣א צָדָ֔ה 1 did not do it with premeditation “but if he did not plan to do it” or “but if he did not do it on purpose” +EXO 21 13 h4ka וַ⁠אֲשֶׁר֙ לֹ֣א צָדָ֔ה 1 did not do it with premeditation Alternate translation: “but if he did not plan to do it” or “but if he did not do it on purpose” EXO 21 13 gme9 figs-explicit וְ⁠שַׂמְתִּ֤י לְ⁠ךָ֙ מָק֔וֹם אֲשֶׁ֥ר יָנ֖וּס שָֽׁמָּ⁠ה 1 I will fix a place to where he can flee The purpose of choosing a place can be stately clearly here. Alternate translation: “I will choose a place that he can run away to be safe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 21 14 st5h בְ⁠עָרְמָ֑ה 1 according to a cunning plan “after thinking carefully about it” +EXO 21 14 st5h בְ⁠עָרְמָ֑ה 1 according to a cunning plan Alternate translation: “after thinking carefully about it” EXO 21 14 abx6 תִּקָּחֶ֖⁠נּוּ 1 must take him The word “him” refers to the one who killed his neighbor. -EXO 21 14 mvpx לָ⁠מֽוּת 1 must take him “to execute him” +EXO 21 14 mvpx לָ⁠מֽוּת 1 must take him Alternate translation: “to execute him” EXO 21 15 y3hd figs-activepassive וּ⁠מַכֵּ֥ה אָבִ֛י⁠ו וְ⁠אִמּ֖⁠וֹ מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 Whoever hits his father or mother must surely be put to death This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “If anyone hits his father or mother, you must surely put him to death” or “You must surely kill anyone who hits his father or mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 21 15 qh2j מ֥וֹת 1 must surely “must certainly” +EXO 21 15 qh2j מ֥וֹת 1 must surely Alternate translation: “must certainly” EXO 21 16 iu81 figs-activepassive מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 that kidnapper must be put to death This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you must kill that kidnapper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 21 17 h8qf figs-activepassive וּ⁠מְקַלֵּ֥ל אָבִ֛י⁠ו וְ⁠אִמּ֖⁠וֹ מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 Whoever curses his father or his mother must surely be put to death This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “You must surely kill anyone who curses his father or his mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 21 17 kvbc וּ⁠מְקַלֵּ֥ל 1 Whoever curses his father or his mother must surely be put to death The word translated **acts contemptuously** means the opposite of “honor” (as in the commandment to honor one’s parents). Alternate translation: “Whoever acts dishonorably towards” -EXO 21 19 c7rv יָק֞וּם 1 he recovers “he gets better” -EXO 21 19 tv0z וְ⁠נִקָּ֣ה 1 he recovers “then … is innocent” +EXO 21 19 c7rv יָק֞וּם 1 he recovers Alternate translation: “he gets better” +EXO 21 19 tv0z וְ⁠נִקָּ֣ה 1 he recovers Alternate translation: “then … is innocent” EXO 21 19 xg6c figs-explicit שִׁבְתּ֛⁠וֹ 1 the loss of his time This refers to a situation when someone cannot work to earn money. You can express this clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “for the time he could not work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 21 19 ws14 וְ⁠רַפֹּ֥א יְרַפֵּֽא 1 pay for his complete recovery “and for his medical costs” or “and for his costs for healing” -EXO 21 20 te41 תַּ֣חַת יָד֑⁠וֹ 1 as a result of the blow “because of the injury” or “because his master hit him” +EXO 21 19 ws14 וְ⁠רַפֹּ֥א יְרַפֵּֽא 1 pay for his complete recovery Alternate translation: “and for his medical costs” or “and for his costs for healing” +EXO 21 20 te41 תַּ֣חַת יָד֑⁠וֹ 1 as a result of the blow Alternate translation: “because of the injury” or “because his master hit him” EXO 21 20 h4eg figs-activepassive נָקֹ֖ם יִנָּקֵֽם 1 that man must surely be punished This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you must certainly punish that man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 21 21 r65u figs-explicit כִּ֥י כַסְפּ֖⁠וֹ הֽוּא 1 for he will have suffered the loss of the servant A common view is that the loss of the valuable property, the slave, is itself a punishment. It may be that the master loses the slave for a time and also has to pay for his healing, or it may be that the slave dies after a few days. You can express clearly in the translation that the servant was valuable to his master. Alternate translation: “because he has already lost his servant who was valuable to him” or “because he has already lost his servant’s work for a time and had to pay for his healing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 21 22 a6av וְ⁠יָצְא֣וּ יְלָדֶ֔י⁠הָ וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִהְיֶ֖ה אָס֑וֹן 1 she miscarries It is not clear in the passage what happens to the child. The text is simply as in the ULT. Some have taken it to mean that the child dies because of premature birth and the **serious injury** only relates to the woman. In this case, a fine is imposed for the loss of the child. However, the text could also mean that the child is born at least mostly safely. A fine is still imposed because of the great danger to the two lives. Then the next few verses give consequences for any injury either to mother or child. -EXO 21 22 w4p3 אָס֑וֹן 1 she miscarries “hurt” +EXO 21 22 w4p3 אָס֑וֹן 1 she miscarries Alternate translation: “hurt” EXO 21 22 cn4h figs-activepassive עָנ֣וֹשׁ יֵעָנֵ֗שׁ 1 the guilty man must surely be fined This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you must certainly fine the guilty man” or “the guilty man must pay a fine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 21 22 v5ye בִּ⁠פְלִלִֽים 1 as the judges determine “what the judges decide” +EXO 21 22 v5ye בִּ⁠פְלִלִֽים 1 as the judges determine Alternate translation: “what the judges decide” EXO 21 23 ya82 figs-explicit וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֥ה נֶ֖פֶשׁ תַּ֥חַת נָֽפֶשׁ 1 as the judges determine This means that if someone is hurt, the person who caused the hurt must be hurt in the same way. Alternate translation: “you must take the killer’s life for the murdered person’s life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 21 24 c5bq figs-explicit עַ֚יִן תַּ֣חַת עַ֔יִן 1 an eye for an eye This means that if someone is hurt, the person who caused the hurt must be hurt in the same way. Alternate translation: “the striker’s eye for the injured person’s eye” (and etc throughout this and the next verse) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 21 26 i8cg אִ֜ישׁ 1 If a man Here, **man** refers to the owner of a slave. -EXO 21 26 bmc1 תַּ֥חַת 1 in compensation “as payment for” -EXO 21 28 sp6w יִגַּ֨ח שׁ֥וֹר 1 an ox gores “an ox injures with its horns” +EXO 21 26 bmc1 תַּ֥חַת 1 in compensation Alternate translation: “as payment for” +EXO 21 28 sp6w יִגַּ֨ח שׁ֥וֹר 1 an ox gores Alternate translation: “an ox injures with its horns” EXO 21 28 qk3u figs-activepassive סָק֨וֹל יִסָּקֵ֜ל הַ⁠שּׁ֗וֹר 1 the ox must surely be stoned This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you must surely stone the ox to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 21 28 q2gv figs-activepassive וְ⁠לֹ֤א יֵאָכֵל֙ אֶת־בְּשָׂר֔⁠וֹ 1 its flesh must not be eaten This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “and you must not eat its flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 21 29 zgll figs-activepassive וְ⁠הוּעַ֤ד בִּ⁠בְעָלָי⁠ו֙ 1 its owner also must be put to death This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “and someone warned its owner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) @@ -1557,129 +1555,129 @@ EXO 21 29 x2y0 figs-explicit וְ⁠הוּעַ֤ד בִּ⁠בְעָלָי⁠ו EXO 21 29 nzn1 figs-activepassive וְ⁠גַם־בְּעָלָ֖י⁠ו יוּמָֽת 1 its owner also must be put to death This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you must also kill its owner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 21 30 t5rs figs-explicit אִם־כֹּ֖פֶר יוּשַׁ֣ת עָלָ֑י⁠ו וְ⁠נָתַן֙ פִּדְיֹ֣ן נַפְשׁ֔⁠וֹ כְּ⁠כֹ֥ל אֲשֶׁר־יוּשַׁ֖ת עָלָֽי⁠ו 1 If a payment is required for his life The text does not specify who will impose a ransom on the ox’s owner. Since other texts indicate that justice is retributive and performed by the dead person’s family, that is one option. Another is that the judges will impose it. One of these can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: see UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 21 30 py37 figs-activepassive אִם־כֹּ֖פֶר יוּשַׁ֣ת עָלָ֑י⁠ו…יוּשַׁ֖ת עָלָֽי⁠ו 1 If a payment is required for his life These statements can be made active rather than passive. However, you must make a decision regarding who is imposing the ransom, or use an unspecified pronoun if that is possible in your language (this second option would not make sense in English). Alternate translation: “If the judges impose a ransom on him … they impose on him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 21 31 kg25 יִגָּ֖ח…יִגָּ֑ח 1 has gored “it injures with its horns … it injures with its horns” +EXO 21 31 kg25 יִגָּ֖ח…יִגָּ֑ח 1 has gored Alternate translation: “it injures with its horns … it injures with its horns” EXO 21 31 to8k writing-pronouns לּֽ⁠וֹ 1 has gored Here, **him** probably refers to the ox’s owner. Alternate translation: “to the owner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 21 32 qzv3 translate-bmoney כֶּ֣סֶף׀ שְׁלֹשִׁ֣ים שְׁקָלִ֗ים 1 thirty shekels of silver A **shekel** weighed 11 grams. Alternate translation: “330 grams of silver” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) EXO 21 32 qy0g figs-explicit אִם־עֶ֛בֶד יִגַּ֥ח הַ⁠שּׁ֖וֹר 1 thirty shekels of silver Because they are to kill the ox, the slave must have died. You can make this explicit. Alternate translation: “If an ox kills a male servant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 21 32 wm9a figs-activepassive וְ⁠הַ⁠שּׁ֖וֹר יִסָּקֵֽל 1 the ox must be stoned This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you must kill the ox by stoning it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 21 33 fd4p יִפְתַּ֨ח…בּ֗וֹר 1 opens a pit “uncovers a hole in the ground” or “takes a cover off a hole in the ground” +EXO 21 33 fd4p יִפְתַּ֨ח…בּ֗וֹר 1 opens a pit Alternate translation: “uncovers a hole in the ground” or “takes a cover off a hole in the ground” EXO 21 34 b48a figs-explicit כֶּ֖סֶף יָשִׁ֣יב לִ⁠בְעָלָ֑י⁠ו 1 repay the loss The owner must be paid for the loss of his animal. Alternate translation: “he must pay the owner for the dead animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 21 34 ip1n יְשַׁלֵּ֔ם 1 repay the loss “must make restitution” +EXO 21 34 ip1n יְשַׁלֵּ֔ם 1 repay the loss Alternate translation: “must make restitution” EXO 21 34 j8qz figs-explicit וְ⁠הַ⁠מֵּ֖ת יִֽהְיֶה־לּֽ⁠וֹ 1 will become his The one who paid for the loss of the animal will become the owner of the dead animal and can do what he wants with it. The full meaning of this statement can be made explicit. Alternate translation: “will belong to the owner of the pit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 21 35 z9ug וְ⁠חָצ֣וּ אֶת־כַּסְפּ֔⁠וֹ 1 divide its price “and divide the money” or “and divide the money they receive” +EXO 21 35 z9ug וְ⁠חָצ֣וּ אֶת־כַּסְפּ֔⁠וֹ 1 divide its price Alternate translation: “and divide the money” or “and divide the money they receive” EXO 21 36 fkx2 figs-activepassive א֣וֹ נוֹדַ֗ע 1 if it was known This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: see UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 21 36 v64b נַגָּ֥ח הוּא֙ מִ⁠תְּמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 a habit of goring in time past “had gored other animals before” +EXO 21 36 v64b נַגָּ֥ח הוּא֙ מִ⁠תְּמ֣וֹל שִׁלְשֹׁ֔ם 1 a habit of goring in time past Alternate translation: “had gored other animals before” EXO 21 36 ix8h figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹ֥א יִשְׁמְרֶ֖⁠נּוּ בְּעָלָ֑י⁠ו 1 its owner has not kept it in This means that the owner did not keep his ox safely where it could not wander to hit other animals. This can be clearly stated in the translation. Alternate translation: “and its owner did not keep it inside a fence” or “and its owner did not tie it securely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 21 36 dcv2 figs-explicit שַׁלֵּ֨ם יְשַׁלֵּ֥ם שׁוֹר֙ תַּ֣חַת הַ⁠שּׁ֔וֹר 1 he must surely pay ox for ox The owner of the ox that killed must give an ox to the man who lost his ox. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “the owner of the ox that killed must surely give a living ox to the owner of the ox that died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 22 intro f9vb 0 # Exodus 22 General Notes

## Structure
This chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. Any attempt to outline structure would have almost as many sections as there are verses.

## Translation issues in this chapter

### Hypothetical situations
Throughout the case law a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if,” then there is a description of the situation, then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will have these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).


### Passive construction
Many portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]. +EXO 22 intro f9vb 0 # Exodus 22 General Notes

## Structure

This chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. Any attempt to outline structure would have almost as many sections as there are verses.

## Translation issues in this chapter

### Hypothetical situations

Throughout the case law a hypothetical situation is introduced with “when” or “if,” then there is a description of the situation, then there is the penalty or action to be taken in those situations. A hypothetical person may be introduced with “anyone” or “whoever.” Most verses for the next several chapters will have these hypothetical situations. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]] Translators familiar with Hebrew may want to notice that, generally, major divisions are introduced by כִּי (ki) and minor divisions within a topic are introduced by אִם (’im).


### Passive construction

Many portions of these situations are written in the passive voice. Some languages may have to change all or some of these to active voice. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]. EXO 22 1 syx5 0 General Information: Yahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel. EXO 22 1 onm0 grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical כִּ֤י יִגְנֹֽב־אִישׁ֙ שׁ֣וֹר אוֹ־שֶׂ֔ה וּ⁠טְבָח֖⁠וֹ א֣וֹ מְכָר֑⁠וֹ 1 General Information: This is the first of many hypothetical situations in this chapter, introduced by “when” or **if,** which you will encounter over the next several chapters. See the [introduction](../22/intro.md). You will need to translate these consistently in a manner that expresses that these situations have not happened. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]]) EXO 22 1 bc03 translate-numbers חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה…וְ⁠אַרְבַּע 1 General Information: 5 … 4 (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 22 2 mt43 figs-activepassive אִם־בַּ⁠מַּחְתֶּ֛רֶת יִמָּצֵ֥א הַ⁠גַּנָּ֖ב 1 If a thief is found This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “If anyone finds a thief while he is breaking in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 22 2 e98x בַּ⁠מַּחְתֶּ֛רֶת 1 breaking in “while using force to come into a house” +EXO 22 2 e98x בַּ⁠מַּחְתֶּ֛רֶת 1 breaking in Alternate translation: “while using force to come into a house” EXO 22 2 gt5f figs-activepassive וְ⁠הֻכָּ֣ה וָ⁠מֵ֑ת 1 if he is struck so that he dies This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “if anyone strikes the thief so that he dies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 22 2 fq57 אֵ֥ין ל֖⁠וֹ דָּמִֽים 1 no guilt for murder will attach to anyone on his account “no one will be guilty of murdering him” -EXO 22 3 vym5 אִם־זָרְחָ֥ה הַ⁠שֶּׁ֛מֶשׁ עָלָ֖י⁠ו 1 if the sun has risen before he breaks in “if it is light before he breaks in” or “if he breaks in and it is after sunrise” +EXO 22 2 fq57 אֵ֥ין ל֖⁠וֹ דָּמִֽים 1 no guilt for murder will attach to anyone on his account Alternate translation: “no one will be guilty of murdering him” +EXO 22 3 vym5 אִם־זָרְחָ֥ה הַ⁠שֶּׁ֛מֶשׁ עָלָ֖י⁠ו 1 if the sun has risen before he breaks in Alternate translation: “if it is light before he breaks in” or “if he breaks in and it is after sunrise” EXO 22 3 c5yl figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִמְכַּ֖ר בִּ⁠גְנֵבָתֽ⁠וֹ 1 he must be sold for his theft This can be stated in an active form. Alternate translation: “you must sell him as a slave in order to pay for what he stole” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 4 k926 figs-activepassive אִֽם־הִמָּצֵא֩ תִמָּצֵ֨א בְ⁠יָד֜⁠וֹ הַ⁠גְּנֵבָ֗ה…חַיִּ֑ים 1 If the stolen animal is found alive in his possession This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “If they find that he still has the live animal that he stole” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 4 g5kg שְׁנַ֖יִם יְשַׁלֵּֽם 1 pay back double The meaning of **compensate double** is not entirely clear. Most interpretations follow the UST, that is, two animals total must be given, the stolen one and one more. Some interpret double to mean the thief must pay two animals for every animal that he took, so three total. It would be best to leave double as ambiguous as possible. Alternate translation: “he must compensate twice what he stole” -EXO 22 5 j24t יַבְעֶר…וּ⁠בִעֵ֖ר 1 If a man grazes his livestock “causes to eat plants … and it eats plants” +EXO 22 5 j24t יַבְעֶר…וּ⁠בִעֵ֖ר 1 If a man grazes his livestock Alternate translation: “causes to eat plants … and it eats plants” EXO 22 5 nlxc grammar-collectivenouns בְּעִיר֔וֹ 1 If a man grazes his livestock **Livestock** is a collective singular noun that could refer to cows, goats, sheep, or basically any domesticated animals. In some languages you will need to translate it as a plural. Alternate translation: see UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) -EXO 22 5 jrb3 יְשַׁלֵּֽם 1 he must make restitution “he must pay back the owner of that field” +EXO 22 5 jrb3 יְשַׁלֵּֽם 1 he must make restitution Alternate translation: “he must pay back the owner of that field” EXO 22 6 x6aj figs-activepassive כִּֽי־תֵצֵ֨א אֵ֜שׁ וּ⁠מָצְאָ֤ה קֹצִים֙ וְ⁠נֶאֱכַ֣ל 1 If a fire breaks out and spreads in thorns **Breaks out** and **consumes** can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “If someone starts a fire and it spreads in thorns and it consumes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 22 6 i4ma וּ⁠מָצְאָ֤ה קֹצִים֙ 1 spreads in thorns “and moves along the ground through dry plants” +EXO 22 6 i4ma וּ⁠מָצְאָ֤ה קֹצִים֙ 1 spreads in thorns Alternate translation: “and moves along the ground through dry plants” EXO 22 6 u1pa translate-unknown גָּדִ֔ישׁ 1 stacked grain This is grain that has been cut and tied in bundles. Alternate translation: “bundled grain” or “harvested grain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 22 6 r2cf translate-unknown הַ⁠קָּמָ֖ה 1 standing grain This is grain that has not been cut, but it is ready to be harvested. Alternate translation: “the grain still in the field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 22 7 jw3v לִ⁠שְׁמֹ֔ר 1 for safe keeping “to watch over it” or “to keep it safe” +EXO 22 7 jw3v לִ⁠שְׁמֹ֔ר 1 for safe keeping Alternate translation: “to watch over it” or “to keep it safe” EXO 22 7 na9h figs-activepassive וְ⁠גֻנַּ֖ב 1 if it is stolen This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “if someone steals it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 7 x2sh figs-activepassive אִם־יִמָּצֵ֥א הַ⁠גַּנָּ֖ב 1 if the thief is found This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “if you find the thief” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 8 lwg5 figs-activepassive אִם־לֹ֤א יִמָּצֵא֙ הַ⁠גַּנָּ֔ב וְ⁠נִקְרַ֥ב בַּֽעַל־הַ⁠בַּ֖יִת אֶל־הָֽ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 come before the judges to see whether You may need to translate these in an active voice if your language does not use passive in this way. Alternate translation: “If no one finds the thief, bring the owner of the house to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 8 c812 figs-metonymy הָֽ⁠אֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 come before the judges to see whether The word for **God** at its most literal means “great ones.” Here and in the [next verse](../22/09.md) it may have this basic meaning and refer to human judges or other leaders in Israel. It may also be a metonym and refer to the judges because they represent God to the people and have his authority. See [Exodus 21:6](../21/06.md) for another example of this. Alternate translation: “the judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 22 8 f774 figs-idiom שָׁלַ֛ח יָד֖⁠וֹ בִּ⁠מְלֶ֥אכֶת רֵעֵֽ⁠הוּ 1 has put his own hand on his neighbor’s property This is an idiom for stealing. If you have a way of saying this in your language, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “he has stolen his neighbor’s property” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 22 9 p7ab דְּבַר…דְּבַר 1 “dispute” -EXO 22 9 fgz1 כִּי־ה֣וּא זֶ֔ה 1 the claim of both parties must come before the judges “This is mine” or “This is my missing property” +EXO 22 9 p7ab דְּבַר…דְּבַר 1 Alternate translation: “dispute” +EXO 22 9 fgz1 כִּי־ה֣וּא זֶ֔ה 1 the claim of both parties must come before the judges Alternate translation: “This is mine” or “This is my missing property” EXO 22 9 m31k figs-metonymy הָֽ⁠אֱלֹהִ֔ים…אֱלֹהִ֔ים 1 the claim of both parties must come before the judges The word for **God** at its most literal means “great ones.” Here and in the [previous verse](../22/08.md) it may have this basic meaning and refer to human judges or other leaders in Israel. It may also be a metonym and refer to the judges because they represent God to the people and have his authority. See [Exodus 21:6](../21/06.md) for another example of this. Alternate translation: “the judges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 22 10 h7ms figs-activepassive נִשְׁבַּ֥ר אוֹ־נִשְׁבָּ֖ה 1 the claim of both parties must come before the judges These can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: see UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 10 hzow נִשְׁבָּ֖ה 1 the claim of both parties must come before the judges This means something more like a wild animal takes the ox or sheep away (to eat) than someone stealing it. See [verse 12](../22/12.md) for cases where the animal is stolen while in another’s care. EXO 22 11 gl7t figs-activepassive שְׁבֻעַ֣ת יְהוָ֗ה תִּהְיֶה֙ בֵּ֣ין שְׁנֵי⁠הֶ֔ם…וְ⁠לָקַ֥ח בְּעָלָ֖י⁠ו 1 an oath to Yahweh must be taken by them both Only the man who is accused of stealing the animal must swear the oath. The owner of the lost animal must accept the oath that has been sworn. This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “the man who was caring for the animal must swear an oath before Yahweh … and the owner must accept that oath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 12 yw3w figs-activepassive וְ⁠אִם־גָּנֹ֥ב יִגָּנֵ֖ב מֵ⁠עִמּ֑⁠וֹ 1 But if it was stolen from him This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “But if someone stole the animal from him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 13 b313 figs-activepassive אִם־טָרֹ֥ף יִטָּרֵ֖ף 1 If an animal was torn in pieces This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “But if a wild beast tore the animal in pieces” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 22 14 h8yw שַׁלֵּ֥ם יְשַׁלֵּֽם 1 must surely make restitution “must certainly repay with another animal” or “must certainly pay the owner for the animal” +EXO 22 14 h8yw שַׁלֵּ֥ם יְשַׁלֵּֽם 1 must surely make restitution Alternate translation: “must certainly repay with another animal” or “must certainly pay the owner for the animal” EXO 22 14 wu3u figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִשְׁבַּ֣ר אוֹ־מֵ֑ת 1 must surely make restitution These can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: see UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 15 g3zw figs-activepassive אִם־שָׂכִ֣יר 1 if the animal was hired This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “if someone rented the animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 15 r792 figs-explicit בָּ֖א בִּ⁠שְׂכָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 it will be paid for by its hiring fee The one who borrowed the animal will not have to pay the owner anything more than the hiring or rental fee. This fee will pay for the loss of the animal. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “the money that someone paid to rent the animal will cover the loss of the animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 22 15 f9w9 בִּ⁠שְׂכָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 hiring fee “for its rental fee” or “for the money paid to rent the animal” -EXO 22 16 a8s8 וְ⁠כִֽי־יְפַתֶּ֣ה אִ֗ישׁ בְּתוּלָ֛ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹא־אֹרָ֖שָׂה 1 a man seduces a virgin who is not engaged “a man persuades a virgin who is not engaged that she wants to sleep with him” -EXO 22 16 th2m לֹא־אֹרָ֖שָׂה 1 not engaged “not promised to be married” +EXO 22 15 f9w9 בִּ⁠שְׂכָרֽ⁠וֹ 1 hiring fee Alternate translation: “for its rental fee” or “for the money paid to rent the animal” +EXO 22 16 a8s8 וְ⁠כִֽי־יְפַתֶּ֣ה אִ֗ישׁ בְּתוּלָ֛ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר לֹא־אֹרָ֖שָׂה 1 a man seduces a virgin who is not engaged Alternate translation: “a man persuades a virgin who is not engaged that she wants to sleep with him” +EXO 22 16 th2m לֹא־אֹרָ֖שָׂה 1 not engaged Alternate translation: “not promised to be married” EXO 22 16 g24h figs-euphemism וְ⁠שָׁכַ֣ב 1 if he lies with her Lying with someone is a euphemism for having sex. Alternate translation: “if he has sex with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) EXO 22 16 x33y מָהֹ֛ר יִמְהָרֶ֥⁠נָּה 1 bride wealth The **bride price** was money paid to the family to compensate for the loss of their daughter. EXO 22 17 y2xz writing-pronouns ל֑⁠וֹ…יִשְׁקֹ֔ל 1 him, he These pronouns refer back to the man who seduced the virgin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 22 19 y3qy figs-euphemism כָּל־שֹׁכֵ֥ב עִם־בְּהֵמָ֖ה 1 Whoever lies with an animal This is a euphemism. Alternate translation: “Whoever has sexual relations with an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) EXO 22 19 b807 figs-activepassive כָּל־שֹׁכֵ֥ב עִם־בְּהֵמָ֖ה מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 Whoever lies with an animal **Be put to death** can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “You must surely execute whoever lies with an animal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 22 20 n4nh figs-activepassive יָֽחֳרָ֑ם…לְ⁠בַדּֽ⁠וֹ 1 Yahweh must be completely destroyed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “alone, you must completely destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 22 21 kr35 לֹא־תוֹנֶ֖ה 1 wrong a foreigner “You must not mistreat a foreigner” or “You must not cheat a foreigner” +EXO 22 21 kr35 לֹא־תוֹנֶ֖ה 1 wrong a foreigner Alternate translation: “You must not mistreat a foreigner” or “You must not cheat a foreigner” EXO 22 21 eoa5 figs-explicit כִּֽי־גֵרִ֥ים הֱיִיתֶ֖ם בְּ⁠אֶ֥רֶץ מִצְרָֽיִם 1 wrong a foreigner The Israelites are called to remember their previous condition, that they lived as foreign guests in Egypt. They came first to avoid the famine in Jacob and Joseph’s time and were dependent on the Egyptian hospitality. Later they were wronged and oppressed and they are not to do that to those who sojourn with them. You may need to make this explicit. Alternate translation: “for you were wronged and oppressed as sojourners in the land of Egypt” or “for you also depended on hospitality while you lived as sojourners in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 22 22 djh3 figs-doublenegatives כָּל־אַלְמָנָ֥ה וְ⁠יָת֖וֹם לֹ֥א תְעַנּֽוּ⁠ן׃ 1 You must not mistreat any widow or fatherless child This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “You must treat all widows and fatherless children fairly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) -EXO 22 22 v3i8 אַלְמָנָ֥ה 1 widow “woman whose husband has died” -EXO 22 22 l2ih וְ⁠יָת֖וֹם 1 fatherless child “or child with no parents” +EXO 22 22 v3i8 אַלְמָנָ֥ה 1 widow Alternate translation: “woman whose husband has died” +EXO 22 22 l2ih וְ⁠יָת֖וֹם 1 fatherless child Alternate translation: “or child with no parents” EXO 22 24 zszz figs-idiom וְ⁠חָרָ֣ה אַפִּ֔⁠י 1 fatherless child This is an idiom meaning that Yahweh will be angry. Alternate translation: “and I will became very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 22 24 sx9h figs-metonymy בֶּ⁠חָ֑רֶב 1 I will kill you with the sword To be killed **with the sword** is a metonym that means a person will die violently, or perhaps fighting in a war. Alternate translation: “you will die a violent death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 22 25 v5je כְּ⁠נֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 a moneylender “like one who lends money” -EXO 22 25 g3ry לֹֽא־תְשִׂימ֥וּ⁠ן עָלָ֖י⁠ו נֶֽשֶׁךְ 1 charge him interest “you must not charge him extra money for borrowing” or “you must not charge him extra money for the loan” -EXO 22 27 wi2m כְסוּתוֹ֙ לְ⁠בַדָּ֔⁠הּ 1 only covering “is his only coat” or “is his only garment to keep him warm” +EXO 22 24 sx9h figs-metonymy בֶּ⁠חָ֑רֶב 1 I will kill you with the sword To be killed **with the sword** is a metonym that means a person will die violently, or perhaps fighting in a war. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “you will die a violent death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 22 25 v5je כְּ⁠נֹשֶׁ֑ה 1 a moneylender Alternate translation: “like one who lends money” +EXO 22 25 g3ry לֹֽא־תְשִׂימ֥וּ⁠ן עָלָ֖י⁠ו נֶֽשֶׁךְ 1 charge him interest Alternate translation: “you must not charge him extra money for borrowing” or “you must not charge him extra money for the loan” +EXO 22 27 wi2m כְסוּתוֹ֙ לְ⁠בַדָּ֔⁠הּ 1 only covering Alternate translation: “is his only coat” or “is his only garment to keep him warm” EXO 22 27 x7zb figs-rquestion בַּ⁠מֶּ֣ה יִשְׁכָּ֔ב 1 What else can he sleep in? This question adds emphasis. You can translate it as a strong statement. Alternate translation: “He will have nothing to wear while he sleeps!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) -EXO 22 28 eel2 אֱלֹהִ֖ים לֹ֣א תְקַלֵּ֑ל 1 You must not blaspheme me, God “Do not insult God” or “Do not speak evil about God” -EXO 22 28 tdj6 וְ⁠נָשִׂ֥יא בְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ לֹ֥א תָאֹֽר 1 nor curse a ruler “and do not ask God to do bad things to a ruler” +EXO 22 28 eel2 אֱלֹהִ֖ים לֹ֣א תְקַלֵּ֑ל 1 You must not blaspheme me, God Alternate translation: “Do not insult God” or “Do not speak evil about God” +EXO 22 28 tdj6 וְ⁠נָשִׂ֥יא בְ⁠עַמְּ⁠ךָ֖ לֹ֥א תָאֹֽר 1 nor curse a ruler Alternate translation: “and do not ask God to do bad things to a ruler” EXO 22 29 p8nk figs-doublenegatives לֹ֣א תְאַחֵ֑ר 1 You must not hold back offerings This can be stated in a positive form. Alternate translation: “You must bring all of your offerings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 22 30 j345 translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֤ת 1 For seven days This can be written as a numeral. Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 22 30 m4wq translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁמִינִ֖י 1 the eighth day This can be written as a numeral. Alternate translation: “on day number 8” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 23 intro hk5t 0 # Exodus 23 General Notes

## Structure
This chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. It also touches on the patterns of life regarding the Sabbaths ([verses 10-12](../23/10.md)) and Festivals ([verses 14-19](../23/14.md)). At [verse 20](../23/20.md) Yahweh begins telling them about their future as they go to and live in the promised land.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Celebrations of feasts and festivals
The people of Israel were required to celebrate certain feasts and festivals. These were part of the law of Moses and some are described in this chapter. Their purpose was to worship Yahweh and to remember the great things Yahweh has done for them. +EXO 23 intro hk5t 0 # Exodus 23 General Notes

## Structure

This chapter continues the list of case laws for Israel. It also touches on the patterns of life regarding the Sabbaths ([verses 10-12](../23/10.md)) and Festivals ([verses 14-19](../23/14.md)). At [verse 20](../23/20.md) Yahweh begins telling them about their future as they go to and live in the promised land.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Celebrations of feasts and festivals

The people of Israel were required to celebrate certain feasts and festivals. These were part of the law of Moses and some are described in this chapter. Their purpose was to worship Yahweh and to remember the great things Yahweh has done for them. EXO 23 1 we1y 0 General Information: Yahweh continues telling Moses his laws for the people of Israel. EXO 23 1 eeoc figs-abstractnouns לֹ֥א תִשָּׂ֖א שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא 1 dishonest witness This could be translated differently to avoid the abstract nouns **report** and **emptiness.** Alternate translation: “You must not report emptily” or “You must not report falsely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 23 1 fu5k figs-idiom אַל־תָּ֤שֶׁת יָֽדְ⁠ךָ֙ עִם־רָשָׁ֔ע 1 dishonest witness Here, to **put your hand with the wicked** means to support the lies that he is telling in order to harm someone else. The image is of putting out your hand to help him, to make him stronger than he would be on his own. Alternate translation: “You must not assist the wicked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 23 1 l4xr שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא 1 General Information: “a false testimony” -EXO 23 1 y1a3 figs-metonymy עֵ֥ד חָמָֽס 1 dishonest witness Here, **violence** can also mean “wrong.” Either way, it means to harm another person by committing injustice (violence to justice) by lying. Alternate translation: “a false witness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 23 2 nqz9 וְ⁠לֹא־תַעֲנֶ֣ה 1 nor may you bear witness “and you also must not speak” +EXO 23 1 l4xr שֵׁ֣מַע שָׁ֑וְא 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “a false testimony” +EXO 23 1 y1a3 figs-metonymy עֵ֥ד חָמָֽס 1 dishonest witness Here, **violence** can also mean “wrong.” Either way, it means to harm another person by committing injustice (violence to justice) by lying. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “a false witness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 2 nqz9 וְ⁠לֹא־תַעֲנֶ֣ה 1 nor may you bear witness Alternate translation: “and you also must not speak” EXO 23 2 z6ej figs-metaphor לֹֽא־תִהְיֶ֥ה אַחֲרֵֽי־רַבִּ֖ים לְ⁠רָעֹ֑ת 1 siding with the crowd This is a metaphor that describes one’s agreeing with a group of people as if he actually walked behind that group. Alternate translation: “You must not do the evil that the crowd wants” or “You must not agree with the majority for evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 23 2 nuag figs-ellipsis לִ⁠נְטֹ֛ת…לְ⁠הַטֹּֽת 1 siding with the crowd “From justice” is omitted but should be understood. Alternate translation: “to turn aside from justice … that turns aside from justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) +EXO 23 2 nuag figs-ellipsis לִ⁠נְטֹ֛ת…לְ⁠הַטֹּֽת 1 siding with the crowd Alternate translation: “From justice” is omitted but should be understood. Alternate translation: “to turn aside from justice … that turns aside from justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 23 2 tnv2 לִ⁠נְטֹ֛ת…לְ⁠הַטֹּֽת 1 pervert justice This means to do illegal or immoral actions that result in a unjust ruling. Alternate translation: “to pervert justice … that perverts justice” -EXO 23 6 z2al לֹ֥א תַטֶּ֛ה מִשְׁפַּ֥ט אֶבְיֹנְ⁠ךָ֖ בְּ⁠רִיבֽ⁠וֹ 1 Do not thrust aside justice for your poor in his lawsuit “Do not decide to treat a poor man unjustly in legal matters” +EXO 23 6 z2al לֹ֥א תַטֶּ֛ה מִשְׁפַּ֥ט אֶבְיֹנְ⁠ךָ֖ בְּ⁠רִיבֽ⁠וֹ 1 Do not thrust aside justice for your poor in his lawsuit Alternate translation: “Do not decide to treat a poor man unjustly in legal matters” EXO 23 6 vh76 בְּ⁠רִיבֽ⁠וֹ 1 lawsuit Here, this refers to any matter that a court decides. EXO 23 7 ljdw figs-metaphor מִ⁠דְּבַר־שֶׁ֖קֶר תִּרְחָ֑ק 1 I will not acquit the wicked Here, distance is used figuratively to tell the Israelites to have no part in deception. Alternate translation: “Do not speak deceptively” or “Do not join a false matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 23 7 c6xl figs-doublet וְ⁠נָקִ֤י וְ⁠צַדִּיק֙ 1 I will not acquit the wicked These two terms mean very similar things, both of which contrast with “the wicked” later in the verse. Alternate translation: “person who has not done anything wrong or the person who always does what is right” or “person who does right and not wrong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) -EXO 23 7 mf4w לֹא־אַצְדִּ֖יק רָשָֽׁע 1 I will not acquit the wicked “I will not find the wicked not guilty” or “I will not say that a wicked person is innocent” +EXO 23 7 mf4w לֹא־אַצְדִּ֖יק רָשָֽׁע 1 I will not acquit the wicked Alternate translation: “I will not find the wicked not guilty” or “I will not say that a wicked person is innocent” EXO 23 8 gh3v figs-personification כִּ֤י הַ⁠שֹּׁ֨חַד֙ יְעַוֵּ֣ר פִּקְחִ֔ים וִֽ⁠יסַלֵּ֖ף דִּבְרֵ֥י צַדִּיקִֽים 1 bribe blinds…perverts Here a “bribe” is described as if it could take action itself that negatively affects justice. Alternate translation: “for if you do, an evil person can give money to blind the clear-sighted and to pervert the words of the righteous ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 23 8 ai37 figs-metaphor כִּ֤י הַ⁠שֹּׁ֨חַד֙ יְעַוֵּ֣ר פִּקְחִ֔ים וִֽ⁠יסַלֵּ֖ף דִּבְרֵ֥י צַדִּיקִֽים 1 bribe blinds…perverts To **blind the clear-sighted** is a metaphor that means causing those who know what is right to act like they do not. And **pervert the words of the righteous** could mean causing those who would speak the truth (in court) to lie or causing the judge to give an evil judgement or causing those listening to **the words of the righteous** to choose to act as if they had heard something different. Alternate translation: “for a bribe causes those who understand the right thing to do not to do it and causes good men to speak lies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 23 9 mzu9 אֶת־נֶ֣פֶשׁ הַ⁠גֵּ֔ר 1 the life of a foreigner “the feelings of the foreigner” -EXO 23 10 rt7h תְּבוּאָתָֽ⁠הּ 1 its produce “the food its plants produce” -EXO 23 10 gjya translate-numbers וְ⁠שֵׁ֥שׁ 1 its produce “And 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 23 11 waxp translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֞ת 1 unplowed “And the 7th” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 23 9 mzu9 אֶת־נֶ֣פֶשׁ הַ⁠גֵּ֔ר 1 the life of a foreigner Alternate translation: “the feelings of the foreigner” +EXO 23 10 rt7h תְּבוּאָתָֽ⁠הּ 1 its produce Alternate translation: “the food its plants produce” +EXO 23 10 gjya translate-numbers וְ⁠שֵׁ֥שׁ 1 its produce Alternate translation: “And 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 23 11 waxp translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֞ת 1 unplowed Alternate translation: “And the 7th” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 23 11 b5q6 translate-unknown תִּשְׁמְטֶ֣⁠נָּה וּ⁠נְטַשְׁתָּ֗⁠הּ 1 fallow This means to leave the land fallow, that is, in its natural state, not used for to grow food, unplowed, unplanted. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 23 11 s4wv figs-explicit וְ⁠אָֽכְלוּ֙ אֶבְיֹנֵ֣י עַמֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 so that the poor among your people may eat The poor can eat any food that grows on its own in a field that is not cultivated. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “so the poor among your people may harvest and eat any food that grows on its own in that field” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 23 12 ij92 שֽׁוֹרְ⁠ךָ֙ וַ⁠חֲמֹרֶ֔⁠ךָ 1 your ox and your donkey “your work animals” -EXO 23 12 tajk translate-numbers שֵׁ֤שֶׁת 1 any foreigner may rest and be refreshed “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 23 12 u07q translate-ordinal הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 any foreigner may rest and be refreshed “the 7th” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 23 12 ij92 שֽׁוֹרְ⁠ךָ֙ וַ⁠חֲמֹרֶ֔⁠ךָ 1 your ox and your donkey Alternate translation: “your work animals” +EXO 23 12 tajk translate-numbers שֵׁ֤שֶׁת 1 any foreigner may rest and be refreshed Alternate translation: “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 23 12 u07q translate-ordinal הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 any foreigner may rest and be refreshed Alternate translation: “the 7th” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 23 12 gpu1 figs-activepassive וְ⁠יִנָּפֵ֥שׁ בֶּן־אֲמָתְ⁠ךָ֖ וְ⁠הַ⁠גֵּֽר 1 any foreigner may rest and be refreshed This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “and the son of your female slave and the sojourner may refresh himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 23 13 ldn8 תִּשָּׁמֵ֑רוּ 1 Pay attention to “Do” or “Obey” +EXO 23 13 ldn8 תִּשָּׁמֵ֑רוּ 1 Pay attention to Alternate translation: “Do” or “Obey” EXO 23 13 va2j figs-parallelism וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods These two instructions mean almost the same thing. It may be more clear to combine them in some languages. Alternate translation: “Be sure never to speak the names of other gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) -EXO 23 13 x5tf figs-metonymy וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods This probably means praying to other gods. Alternate translation: “Do not pray to other gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 23 13 apnw figs-metonymy לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods To be **on your mouth** means to speak. Alternate translation: “nor speak them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 13 x5tf figs-metonymy וְ⁠שֵׁ֨ם אֱלֹהִ֤ים אֲחֵרִים֙ לֹ֣א תַזְכִּ֔ירוּ לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods This probably means praying to other gods. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Do not pray to other gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 13 apnw figs-metonymy לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods To be **on your mouth** means to speak. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “nor speak them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 13 s86p figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יִשָּׁמַ֖ע עַל־פִּֽי⁠ךָ 1 mention the names of other gods You could translate this in an active manner. Also see previous note. Alternate translation: “nor speak them so someone could hear them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 23 14 ezgh translate-numbers שָׁלֹ֣שׁ 1 mention the names of other gods “3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 23 14 ezgh translate-numbers שָׁלֹ֣שׁ 1 mention the names of other gods Alternate translation: “3” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 23 15 bu7n translate-hebrewmonths הָֽ⁠אָבִ֔יב 1 Aviv This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. Aviv is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated this in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) -EXO 23 15 i88n translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֣ת 1 Aviv “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 23 15 i88n translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֣ת 1 Aviv Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 23 15 tx1v figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠לֹא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖⁠י רֵיקָֽם 1 not appear before me empty-handed Here understatement is used to emphasize that the Israelites must bring a suitable offering to Yahweh. Alternate translation: “come to me without a proper offering” or “always bring an offering to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 23 16 ybsb וְ⁠חַ֤ג הַ⁠קָּצִיר֙ 1 Festival of Ingathering Elsewhere this is called the “Festival of Weeks.” See [Exodus 34:22](../34/22.md) and Deuteronomy 16:9 and following. EXO 23 16 pnx4 וְ⁠חַ֤ג הָֽ⁠אָסִף֙ 1 Festival of Ingathering This festival celebrated the final harvesting of all the crops for the year. This festival was also known as the Festival of Shelters or the Festival of Booths. The idea came from the practice of the farmers living in temporary booths, or huts, out in the fields to guard the crop as it ripened. See Deuteronomy 16:13. Alternate translation: “And the Festival of the Ingathering” EXO 23 16 wgxm figs-metaphor בְּ⁠צֵ֣את הַ⁠שָּׁנָ֔ה 1 Festival of Ingathering This means the end of the year. It is pictured as something that is leaving. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 23 17 t5xj figs-metonymy יֵרָאֶה֙ 1 All your males must appear before the Lord Yahweh Here to **appear to the face of the Lord Yahweh** means to gather to worship. **To the face** is a metonym for Yahweh’s presence, referring to worship. Alternate translation: “must come to worship the Lord Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 17 t5xj figs-metonymy יֵרָאֶה֙ 1 All your males must appear before the Lord Yahweh Here to **appear to the face of the Lord Yahweh** means to gather to worship. **To the face** is a metonym for Yahweh’s presence, referring to worship. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “must come to worship the Lord Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 20 bssx figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנֶ֔י⁠ךָ 1 This means “in front of you.” Alternate translation: “in front of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 23 21 mpfy figs-metonymy הִשָּׁ֧מֶר מִ⁠פָּנָ֛י⁠ו 1 Be attentive to him This means to respect him. **From his face** refers to his person. Alternate translation: “Show respect to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 21 mpfy figs-metonymy הִשָּׁ֧מֶר מִ⁠פָּנָ֛י⁠ו 1 Be attentive to him This means to respect him; **from his face** refers to his person. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “Show respect to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 21 pm7x figs-activepassive הִשָּׁ֧מֶר מִ⁠פָּנָ֛י⁠ו 1 Be attentive to him You could state this in an active manner. Alternate translation: “Pay attention to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 23 21 p5y3 grammar-connect-logic-result אַל־תַּמֵּ֣ר בּ֑⁠וֹ כִּ֣י לֹ֤א יִשָּׂא֙ לְ⁠פִשְׁעֲ⁠כֶ֔ם כִּ֥י שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠קִרְבּֽ⁠וֹ׃ 1 Do not provoke him, for he will not pardon There are two reasons given for the instruction **do not cause bitterness in him**. They are chained together such that you could say: “Because my name is within him, he will not forgive your transgressions, therefore do not cause bitterness in him.” The relation of the **name** and **forgiveness** is not explicit. Alternate translation: “If you provoke him, he will not pardon your sins for my name is within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 23 21 p4jv figs-metonymy שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠קִרְבּֽ⁠וֹ 1 My name is on him Here **name** refers to God’s authority. Alternate translation: “He has my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 23 21 gt76 figs-metonymy וּ⁠שְׁמַ֥ע בְּ⁠קֹל֖⁠וֹ 1 If you indeed obey his voice Here, **voice** represents what the angel says. Alternate translation: “and obey what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 23 22 z1gn figs-metonymy אִם־שָׁמֹ֤עַ תִּשְׁמַע֙ בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ 1 If you indeed obey his voice Here, **voice** represents what the angel says. Alternate translation: “if you carefully obey what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 21 p4jv figs-metonymy שְׁמִ֖⁠י בְּ⁠קִרְבּֽ⁠וֹ 1 My name is on him Here **name** refers to God’s authority. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “He has my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 21 gt76 figs-metonymy וּ⁠שְׁמַ֥ע בְּ⁠קֹל֖⁠וֹ 1 If you indeed obey his voice Here, **voice** represents what the angel says. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “and obey what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 23 22 z1gn figs-metonymy אִם־שָׁמֹ֤עַ תִּשְׁמַע֙ בְּ⁠קֹל֔⁠וֹ 1 If you indeed obey his voice Here, **voice** represents what the angel says. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “if you carefully obey what he says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 22 y9bm figs-parallelism וְ⁠אָֽיַבְתִּי֙ אֶת־אֹ֣יְבֶ֔י⁠ךָ וְ⁠צַרְתִּ֖י אֶת־צֹרְרֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 an enemy to your enemies and an adversary to your adversaries These two phrases mean the same thing and are used for emphasis. Alternate translation: see UST (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 23 23 x2nh figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנֶי⁠ךָ֒ 1 This means “in front of you.” Alternate translation: “in front of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 24 a1d5 figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹ֥א תַעֲשֶׂ֖ה כְּ⁠מַֽעֲשֵׂי⁠הֶ֑ם 1 You must not…do as they do The Israelites must not live as the people who worship other gods. Alternate translation: “You must not … live as the people who worship those gods” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1698,19 +1696,19 @@ EXO 23 29 i9aq figs-explicit פֶּן־תִּהְיֶ֤ה הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ֙ EXO 23 30 mne7 figs-metonymy מִ⁠פָּנֶ֑י⁠ךָ 1 miscarry This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “from before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 31 my2e figs-metonymy מִ⁠פָּנֶֽי⁠ךָ 1 miscarry This means “ahead of you.” Alternate translation: “from before you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 23 33 d1fp figs-metaphor כִּֽי־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ לְ⁠מוֹקֵֽשׁ 1 this will surely become a trap for you This means worshiping other gods will lead the people of Israel to certain destruction as if they were an animal caught in a hunter’s trap. It could also be saying that leaving the other people around will make it so that the Israelites see the other people’s worship and are lured (like in a trap) into worshipping the other gods, which is a sin against Yahweh. See UST. Alternate translation: “worshipping them will surely destroy you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 24 intro b83l 0 # Exodus 24 General Notes
## Structure
1. Yahweh summons Moses v. 1-2
2. Moses reads the covenant and the people accept it, this is ritually marked by sacrifice and sprinkling of blood v. 3-8
3. Moses and Israelite elders go up the mountain, see God and eat v. 9-11
4. Yahweh summons Moses further up the mountain without the other elders and he goes v. 12-15
5. Description of Yahweh's glory and Moses is at the top of the mountain v. 16-18

## Potential translation issues
- there are a number of similes used to describe people's encounter with God
- “covenant” appears in a variety of ways
- the mountain, the mountain of God, and Mount Sinai are all the same location

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Moses’ covenant
The people of Israel promise to obey the covenant Yahweh made with Moses. Their continued blessings were contingent upon their obedience to this covenant. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### God’s holiness
Because Yahweh is perfectly holy, he can only be approached in a certain way. Because of this, only Moses was allowed near Yahweh. This is also why Yahweh is described as a “devouring fire.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]]) +EXO 24 intro b83l 0 # Exodus 24 General Notes

## Structure

1. Yahweh summons Moses v. 1-2
2. Moses reads the covenant and the people accept it, this is ritually marked by sacrifice and sprinkling of blood v. 3-8
3. Moses and Israelite elders go up the mountain, see God and eat v. 9-11
4. Yahweh summons Moses further up the mountain without the other elders and he goes v. 12-15
5. Description of Yahweh's glory and Moses is at the top of the mountain v. 16-18

## Potential translation issues

- there are a number of similes used to describe people's encounter with God
- “covenant” appears in a variety of ways
- the mountain, the mountain of God, and Mount Sinai are all the same location

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Moses’ covenant

The people of Israel promise to obey the covenant Yahweh made with Moses. Their continued blessings were contingent upon their obedience to this covenant. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/promise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/covenant]])

### God’s holiness

Because Yahweh is perfectly holy, he can only be approached in a certain way. Because of this, only Moses was allowed near Yahweh. This is also why Yahweh is described as a “devouring fire.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]]) EXO 24 1 hji6 writing-newevent 0 Nadab…Abihu A new scene begins here, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 24 1 c97i translate-names נָדָ֣ב וַ⁠אֲבִיה֔וּא 1 Nadab…Abihu These are men’s names. See how you translated these names in [Exodus 6:23](../06/23.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 24 1 zukb figs-123person אֶל־יְהוָ֗ה 1 Nadab…Abihu Yahweh refers to himself in the third person, you may change it to first person if it would be unclear in your language. Alternate translation: “to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) -EXO 24 1 nm3t translate-numbers וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים 1 seventy of Israel’s elders “and 70” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 24 1 nm3t translate-numbers וְ⁠שִׁבְעִ֖ים 1 seventy of Israel’s elders Alternate translation: “and 70” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 24 1 ymip figs-explicit וְ⁠הִשְׁתַּחֲוִיתֶ֖ם 1 seventy of Israel’s elders Here, “to me” is implied, you may make it explicit if it would be unclear in your language. Alternate translation: “and you shall bow down to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 24 2 p06o writing-pronouns וְ⁠הֵ֖ם 1 seventy of Israel’s elders This refers to all the other people mentioned in [verse 1](../24/01.md). Alternate translation: “and Aaron, Nadab, Abihu, and the elders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 24 2 dqnp figs-123person אֶל־יְהוָ֔ה 1 seventy of Israel’s elders Yahweh refers to himself in the third person, you may change it to first person if it would be unclear in your language. Alternate translation: “to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 24 3 sbc3 writing-newevent 0 with one voice Verses 3-8 are a different scene than the rest of the chapter, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. It seems that there were some preparations needed before Moses and the elders could go up to meet Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 24 3 nuqr 0 with one voice See [Exodus 19:8](../19/08.md) for how you translated a very similar event. EXO 24 3 cg32 figs-idiom ק֤וֹל אֶחָד֙ 1 with one voice This is an idiom that means the people were in complete agreement. Alternate translation: “together” or “in agreement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 24 4 h7gg תַּ֣חַת הָ⁠הָ֑ר 1 foot of the mountain “at the base of the mountain” -EXO 24 4 uipf translate-numbers וּ⁠שְׁתֵּ֤ים עֶשְׂרֵה֙…לִ⁠שְׁנֵ֥ים עָשָׂ֖ר 1 foot of the mountain “and 12 … according to the 12” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 24 4 h7gg תַּ֣חַת הָ⁠הָ֑ר 1 foot of the mountain Alternate translation: “at the base of the mountain” +EXO 24 4 uipf translate-numbers וּ⁠שְׁתֵּ֤ים עֶשְׂרֵה֙…לִ⁠שְׁנֵ֥ים עָשָׂ֖ר 1 foot of the mountain Alternate translation: “and 12 … according to the 12” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 24 7 c9tm translate-unknown סֵ֣פֶר הַ⁠בְּרִ֔ית 1 foot of the mountain Here, **book** does not mean something in our modern format. It was likely a piece of papyrus (an early form of paper made from reeds) or animal skin that rolled up. Alternate translation: “the Covenant he had written down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 24 8 h9ff figs-explicit הַ⁠דָּ֔ם 1 Then Moses took the blood This refers to the blood that Moses had put into the bowls. This can be stated clearly. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 24 8 juxf figs-explicit עַ֥ל כָּל־הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֖ים הָ⁠אֵֽלֶּה׃ 1 Then Moses took the blood **These words** refers to what Moses just read aloud, that is, Yahweh’s commands. You can make this more clear. Alternate translation: “which I just read aloud to you and you agreed to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -1721,23 +1719,23 @@ EXO 24 10 ic4s figs-personification וְ⁠תַ֣חַת רַגְלָ֗י⁠ו 1 EXO 24 10 q8sn לִבְנַ֣ת 1 pavement a hard surface for walking or riding EXO 24 10 pm87 translate-unknown הַ⁠סַּפִּ֔יר 1 sapphire stone This is a gemstone that is blue in color. If there is a blue gemstone that your people are familiar with you may use it here as the exact gemstone is not certain. You may also describe it. Alternate translation: “a blue gemstone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 24 10 zd6u figs-simile וּ⁠כְ⁠עֶ֥צֶם הַ⁠שָּׁמַ֖יִם לָ⁠טֹֽהַר 1 as clear as the sky itself This is a simile. Alternate translation: “and it was blue like the sky” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) -EXO 24 11 jds6 figs-metonymy וְ⁠אֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑⁠וֹ 1 God did not lay a hand on the Israelite leaders This means that God did not harm the leaders. Alternate translation: “God did not harm the Israelite leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 24 11 jds6 figs-metonymy וְ⁠אֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑⁠וֹ 1 God did not lay a hand on the Israelite leaders Here, **his hand** refers to his judgement. This means that God did not harm the leaders. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “God did not harm the Israelite leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 24 11 b398 grammar-connect-condition-contrary וְ⁠אֶל־אֲצִילֵי֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל לֹ֥א שָׁלַ֖ח יָד֑⁠וֹ 1 God did not lay a hand on the Israelite leaders What would be expected is if they saw God they would die. The Israelite elders ability to see God and live is unexpected, be sure your translation conveys that. Alternate translation: “However, he did not send out his hand to the leaders of the sons of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]]) EXO 24 12 dx4f figs-explicit לְ⁠הוֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 tablets of stone and the law and commandments This means so that Moses and the other Israelite leaders could teach the laws and commandments to the Israelite people. You may need to make this clear. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 24 13 gv5e וִ⁠יהוֹשֻׁ֖עַ מְשָׁרְת֑⁠וֹ 1 with his assistant Joshua The word translated **servant** here is usually associated with a higher position, like a government minister. Avoid using a word that implies a lower class serving role. Alternate translation: “with Joshua who assisted him” or “with Joshua who helped him” EXO 24 13 flw7 writing-participants וִ⁠יהוֹשֻׁ֖עַ 1 with his assistant Joshua **Joshua** is introduced here again, if your language marks new participants in the narrative in a certain way, use that form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]]) EXO 24 14 mhvj grammar-connect-time-sequential וְ⁠אֶל־הַ⁠זְּקֵנִ֤ים אָמַר֙ 1 wait for us The structure of the Hebrew indicates but does not require that this speech by Moses happened before [verse 13](../24/13.md) (hence **had said**). The ULT takes this view, however, for languages where it is hard to express events out of order, the UST reflects the other grammatical possibility and says in [24:13](../24/13.md) that Moses started up the mountain and in [24:15](../24/15.md) that he went the rest of the way up the mountain. Following this you can view this verse as if Moses paused and gave these final instructions as he was leaving the elders behind, keeping a sequential structure. Either approach is permissible by the text, but the approach of the ULT is preferred if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-sequential]]) -EXO 24 14 qiy4 לָ֣⁠נוּ 1 wait for us “Joshua and me” +EXO 24 14 qiy4 לָ֣⁠נוּ 1 wait for us Alternate translation: “Joshua and me” EXO 24 14 uc7r translate-names וְ⁠חוּר֙ 1 Hur **Hur** was a man who was a friend of Moses and Aaron. See how you translated this name in [Exodus 17:10](../17/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 24 14 jyh8 וְ⁠הִנֵּ֨ה 1 Hur **Behold** is used to draw attention to important information that Moses is about to tell them. It is frequently omitted, if your language uses a statement to draw attention to important information you should consider using it here. Alternate translation: “Remember” EXO 24 14 dqhj figs-idiom מִי־בַ֥עַל דְּבָרִ֖ים 1 Hur This is an idiom that means that someone has a legal dispute or complaint. Alternate translation: “Whoever has a legal claim” or “Anyone with a law case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 24 16 j2s5 figs-metonymy כְּבוֹד־יְהוָה֙ 1 Yahweh’s glory This was the brilliant light of Yahweh’s presence. Alternate translation: “the brilliant light showing Yahweh’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 24 16 sb1o translate-numbers שֵׁ֣שֶׁת 1 Yahweh’s glory “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 24 16 uwdd translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 Yahweh’s glory “on day number 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 24 16 j2s5 figs-metonymy כְּבוֹד־יְהוָה֙ 1 Yahweh’s glory This was the brilliant light of Yahweh’s presence. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “the brilliant light showing Yahweh’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 24 16 sb1o translate-numbers שֵׁ֣שֶׁת 1 Yahweh’s glory Alternate translation: “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 24 16 uwdd translate-ordinal בַּ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 Yahweh’s glory Alternate translation: “on day number 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 24 17 e4n6 figs-simile כְּ⁠אֵ֥שׁ אֹכֶ֖לֶת 1 like a devouring fire This means the glory of Yahweh was very large and seemed to burn brightly like a fire. Alternate translation: “like a big fire burning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 24 17 k5lj figs-metaphor לְ⁠עֵינֵ֖י בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 in the eyes of the Israelites Their eyes represent seeing, and seeing represents their thoughts or judgment about they saw. Alternate translation: “to the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 24 18 h1wy translate-numbers אַרְבָּעִ֣ים י֔וֹם וְ⁠אַרְבָּעִ֖ים לָֽיְלָה 1 forty days and forty nights “40 days and 40 nights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 25 intro t23a 0 # Exodus 25 General Notes

## Structure:
- v. 1-7: Instructions for gifts the Israelites may give to help build the place they will worship God
- v. 8-9: Introductory building instructions
- v. 10-22: Instructions for building the Box of the Testimony
- v. 23-30: Instructions for building the table
- v. 31-39: Instructions for building the lampstand
- v. 40: Summary instruction

## Special concepts in this chapter
- The tent of meeting and Box of the Testimony are introduced in this chapter.
- Translators will need to take care translating the concept of atonement.


## Potential translation issues in this chapter:
- There are many unfamiliar items in this chapter. Fortunately they are mostly all physical items. Translators will have to try to understand what each item is and translate it into the closest equivalent in their culture. It may be helpful for translators to try to find images depicting some of the items the Israelites were to make.
- There are some biblical weights and measurements that translators may not have encountered before.
- From [verse 11](../25/11.md) until the end of chapter 30 almost every instruction regarding the construction of the tent of meeting and all the associated items are given with a singular form of “you” as if Moses himself would make them. However, it is clear and made explicit in [chapter 31](../31/01.md) that certain skilled craftsmen will receive these instructions from Moses and make these items. In some languages you may need to change from second to third person throughout, following the pattern in [25:10](../25/10.md). There are a few exceptions which will have their own note. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]].
+EXO 24 18 h1wy translate-numbers אַרְבָּעִ֣ים י֔וֹם וְ⁠אַרְבָּעִ֖ים לָֽיְלָה 1 forty days and forty nights Alternate translation: “40 days and 40 nights” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 25 intro t23a 0 # Exodus 25 General Notes

## Structure:

- v. 1-7: Instructions for gifts the Israelites may give to help build the place they will worship God
- v. 8-9: Introductory building instructions
- v. 10-22: Instructions for building the Box of the Testimony
- v. 23-30: Instructions for building the table
- v. 31-39: Instructions for building the lampstand
- v. 40: Summary instruction

## Special concepts in this chapter

- The tent of meeting and Box of the Testimony are introduced in this chapter.
- Translators will need to take care translating the concept of atonement.


## Potential translation issues in this chapter:

- There are many unfamiliar items in this chapter. Fortunately they are mostly all physical items. Translators will have to try to understand what each item is and translate it into the closest equivalent in their culture. It may be helpful for translators to try to find images depicting some of the items the Israelites were to make.
- There are some biblical weights and measurements that translators may not have encountered before.
- From [verse 11](../25/11.md) until the end of chapter 30 almost every instruction regarding the construction of the tent of meeting and all the associated items are given with a singular form of “you” as if Moses himself would make them. However, it is clear and made explicit in [chapter 31](../31/01.md) that certain skilled craftsmen will receive these instructions from Moses and make these items. In some languages you may need to change from second to third person throughout, following the pattern in [25:10](../25/10.md). There are a few exceptions which will have their own note. See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]].
EXO 25 2 ygtd figs-quotemarks דַּבֵּר֙ 1 who is motivated by a willing heart At the beginning of this verse, a direct quote begins that continues until the end of [Exo 30:10](../30/10.md). It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with an opening first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the beginning of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 25 2 tktu figs-quotations דַּבֵּר֙ אֶל־בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל וְ⁠יִקְחוּ־לִ֖⁠י תְּרוּמָ֑ה 1 who is motivated by a willing heart In some languages you may have to make **and they shall take a contribution for me** a direct quote. Note that this will make it a second-level quotation and you will need to mark it with second-level quotation marking if your language uses them. Alternate translation: “Say to the sons of Israel, ‘You shall take a contribution for me.’ ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 25 2 r5yr figs-idiom אֲשֶׁ֣ר יִדְּבֶ֣⁠נּוּ לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 who is motivated by a willing heart This is an idiom that indicates a person’s desire to give an offering. Many languages will have a similar idiom though the body part may vary. Alternate translation: “who wants to give one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -1749,7 +1747,7 @@ EXO 25 5 va28 translate-unknown תְּחָשִׁ֖ים 1 scarlet The meaning of EXO 25 5 d4fa translate-unknown שִׁטִּֽים 1 scarlet A small tree with spreading foliage and durable wood. [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 25 6 i6gp translate-unknown בְּשָׂמִים֙ 1 spices Here, **spices** are dried plants that people grind into a powder and put in oil or food to give it a nice smell or flavor (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 25 7 mg4f translate-unknown אַבְנֵי־שֹׁ֕הַם 1 onyx An **onyx stone** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red or brown. If this stone is unknown to your people, consider translating it by using a word for a familiar stone with a similar pattern, if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 25 7 c3hk וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֖י 1 precious stones “and valuable gems for” or “ and treasured gems for” +EXO 25 7 c3hk וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֖י 1 precious stones Alternate translation: “and valuable gems for” or “ and treasured gems for” EXO 25 9 m1np figs-you אוֹתְ⁠ךָ֔ 1 show you in the plans Here, **you** is singular and refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 25 9 w4sc כֵּלָ֑י⁠ו 1 tabernacle Here, **utensils** is a general term that you could translate by a broad term that could encompass all of the things used in the tabernacle as described in this and the several following chapters. Alternate translation: “its implements” EXO 25 9 c9qe figs-youdual תַּעֲשֽׂוּ 1 You must make it Here, **you** is plural and refers to Moses and the people of Israel. If your language uses different forms of “you” depending on the number of people addressed, use a plural form here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]]) @@ -1769,24 +1767,24 @@ EXO 25 23 t312 translate-bdistance שִׁטִּ֑ים אַמָּתַ֤יִם א EXO 25 23 a2o9 translate-fraction וָ⁠חֵ֖צִי 1 two cubits…one cubit…a cubit and a half The word **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) EXO 25 24 f20e 0 two cubits…one cubit…a cubit and a half This verse is almost identical to [25:11](../25/11.md). EXO 25 25 awi7 translate-bdistance טֹ֖פַח 1 one handbreadth wide You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people, if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **handbreath** is a measurement of approximately eight centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) -EXO 25 25 bit8 לּ֥⁠וֹ 1 frame for it “for the table” +EXO 25 25 bit8 לּ֥⁠וֹ 1 frame for it Alternate translation: “for the table” EXO 25 27 jdh4 figs-idiom לְ⁠בָתִּ֣ים 1 The rings must be attached Here, **to house** means that the rings will hold the poles. Since the rings are where the poles belong for use when carrying the table, the rings are figuratively their **house.** If your language has a similar idiom meaning “place of belonging,” you may use it, or you may translate the idea. Alternate translation: “to be a place for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 25 28 l4fk figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִשָּׂא־בָ֖⁠ם אֶת־הַ⁠שֻּׁלְחָֽן 1 so that the table may be carried with them This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “And you shall carry the table with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 25 29 nrmp translate-unknown קְּעָרֹתָ֜י⁠ו וְ⁠כַפֹּתָ֗י⁠ו וּ⁠קְשׂוֹתָי⁠ו֙ וּ⁠מְנַקִּיֹּתָ֔י⁠ו 1 to be used to pour out drink offerings We do not know precisely what these dishes were. It is likely that the **plates** were mostly flat dishes for holding the bread that would be on the table; the **pans** may have been shallow bowls or deep plates for holding incense, or they may have been something more like a ladle or spoon; the **pitchers** probably held wine to be poured into the **bowls** for the drink offerings. You will need to translate using the closest word for each such item in your culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 25 29 v78d figs-activepassive אֲשֶׁ֥ר יֻסַּ֖ךְ בָּ⁠הֵ֑ן 1 to be used to pour out drink offerings This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “that the priests will pour out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 25 30 uth7 figs-metonymy לֶ֥חֶם פָּנִ֖ים 1 bread of the presence Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. This bread represented the presence of God. Alternate translation: “the bread of the Presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 25 30 kh7c figs-metonymy לְ⁠פָנַ֥⁠י 1 bread of the presence Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in front of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 25 31 kc3q מִקְשָׁ֞ה 1 hammered gold “of beaten gold” See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md). +EXO 25 31 kc3q מִקְשָׁ֞ה 1 hammered gold Alternate translation: “of beaten gold” See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md). EXO 25 31 g25l figs-activepassive תֵּעָשֶׂ֤ה 1 The lampstand is to be made This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you shall make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 25 33 i7bh translate-unknown מְֽשֻׁקָּדִ֞ים 1 almond blossoms An almond blossom is a white or pink flower that has five petals. (An almond is a kind of nut.) You may want to include a short description as a footnote or in the text (if that is your translation style) the first time this object is encountered. Alternate translation: “shaped like the five-petaled almond flower” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 25 35 lk10 וְ⁠כַפְתֹּ֡ר תַּחַת֩ שְׁנֵ֨י הַ⁠קָּנִ֜ים מִמֶּ֗⁠נָּה וְ⁠כַפְתֹּר֙ תַּ֣חַת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠קָּנִים֙ מִמֶּ֔⁠נָּה וְ⁠כַפְתֹּ֕ר תַּחַת־שְׁנֵ֥י הַ⁠קָּנִ֖ים מִמֶּ֑⁠נָּה לְ⁠שֵׁ֨שֶׁת֙ הַ⁠קָּנִ֔ים הַ⁠יֹּצְאִ֖ים מִן־הַ⁠מְּנֹרָֽה 1 made as one piece with it “There must be a leafy base under the first pair of branches—made as one piece with it, and a leafy base under the second pair of branches—also made as one piece with it. In the same way there must be a leafy base under the third pair of branches, made as one piece with it. It must be the same for all six branches extending out from the lampstand.” -EXO 25 36 r7yz מִקְשָׁ֥ה 1 made as one piece with it “of beaten gold” See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md). +EXO 25 35 lk10 וְ⁠כַפְתֹּ֡ר תַּחַת֩ שְׁנֵ֨י הַ⁠קָּנִ֜ים מִמֶּ֗⁠נָּה וְ⁠כַפְתֹּר֙ תַּ֣חַת שְׁנֵ֤י הַ⁠קָּנִים֙ מִמֶּ֔⁠נָּה וְ⁠כַפְתֹּ֕ר תַּחַת־שְׁנֵ֥י הַ⁠קָּנִ֖ים מִמֶּ֑⁠נָּה לְ⁠שֵׁ֨שֶׁת֙ הַ⁠קָּנִ֔ים הַ⁠יֹּצְאִ֖ים מִן־הַ⁠מְּנֹרָֽה 1 made as one piece with it Alternate translation: “There must be a leafy base under the first pair of branches—made as one piece with it, and a leafy base under the second pair of branches—also made as one piece with it. In the same way there must be a leafy base under the third pair of branches, made as one piece with it. It must be the same for all six branches extending out from the lampstand.” +EXO 25 36 r7yz מִקְשָׁ֥ה 1 made as one piece with it Alternate translation: “of beaten gold” See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:18](../25/18.md). EXO 25 37 dfn6 figs-metonymy וְ⁠הֵאִ֖יר עַל־עֵ֥בֶר פָּנֶֽי⁠הָ 1 for them to give light from it Here, **face** figuratively represents the location of the lampstand. Alternate translation: “so they shine light near it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 25 39 ff5p translate-bweight כִּכָּ֛ר 1 one talent You can convert this weight to a measurement system familiar to your people, if that is the style of translation that you are using. A talent weighs about 33 kilograms. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) EXO 25 40 y081 figs-explicit וּ⁠רְאֵ֖ה וַ⁠עֲשֵׂ֑ה 1 you are being shown on the mountain All the items described in this chapter are implied as what Moses is told to **see and make**. You could make that explicit in your translation if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “See and make everything I have described” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 25 40 gyte figs-metonymy וּ⁠רְאֵ֖ה וַ⁠עֲשֵׂ֑ה 1 you are being shown on the mountain Here, **see** relates to observing or overseeing. Essentially, Yahweh is telling Moses to be careful as he observes the pattern on the mountain and as he sees the craftsmen of Israel working on these items, so that they are made correctly. Alternate translation: “Watch carefully so you can make these things well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 25 40 l7je figs-activepassive אַתָּ֥ה מָרְאֶ֖ה 1 you are being shown on the mountain This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “I am showing you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 26 intro emw7 0 # Exodus 26 General Notes


- The sacred tent has four layers (from inside to out): linen, goats’ hair, tanned rams’ skins, and fine leather.
- There are multiple different curtains described using three different Hebrew words: one sort of curtains to make the walls of the tent ([verses 1-13](../26/01.md)), another to separate the Holy Place and Most Holy Place ([verses 31-34](../26/31.md)), and another for the entrance of the sacred tent ([verses 36-37](../26/36.md)). If there are words in your language that would make a distinction between these sorts of hanging cloths, it would be appropriate to make a distinction in your translation.

## Structure and formatting

This chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.
- v. 1-30: Instructions for constructing the exterior of the sacred tent
- v. 1-6: Inner covering
- v. 7-14: Outer covering layers
- v. 15-30: Wooden framework
- v. 31-35: Instructions for arranging the interior of the sacred tent
- v. 36-37: Instructions for hanging the entrance curtain

## Special concepts in this chapter


### The tent of meeting
This chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building of a tent where Moses would meet Yahweh and the box would be stored. This would eventually become the tabernacle. Note: “tabernacle” is simply an English word transcribed from the Latin for “tent,” which translates the Hebrew for “dwelling place,” that has taken on religious significance via the King James Version of the Bible. The terms “tabernacle” and “tent” should be considered interchangeable. It was to be considered a very holy place. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]]) +EXO 26 intro emw7 0 # Exodus 26 General Notes


- The sacred tent has four layers (from inside to out): linen, goats’ hair, tanned rams’ skins, and fine leather.
- There are multiple different curtains described using three different Hebrew words: one sort of curtains to make the walls of the tent ([verses 1-13](../26/01.md)), another to separate the Holy Place and Most Holy Place ([verses 31-34](../26/31.md)), and another for the entrance of the sacred tent ([verses 36-37](../26/36.md)). If there are words in your language that would make a distinction between these sorts of hanging cloths, it would be appropriate to make a distinction in your translation.

## Structure and formatting

This chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.
- v. 1-30: Instructions for constructing the exterior of the sacred tent
- v. 1-6: Inner covering
- v. 7-14: Outer covering layers
- v. 15-30: Wooden framework
- v. 31-35: Instructions for arranging the interior of the sacred tent
- v. 36-37: Instructions for hanging the entrance curtain

## Special concepts in this chapter


### The tent of meeting

This chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building of a tent where Moses would meet Yahweh and the box would be stored. This would eventually become the tabernacle. Note: “tabernacle” is simply an English word transcribed from the Latin for “tent,” which translates the Hebrew for “dwelling place,” that has taken on religious significance via the King James Version of the Bible. The terms “tabernacle” and “tent” should be considered interchangeable. It was to be considered a very holy place. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]]) EXO 26 1 ks8r figs-you תַּעֲשֶׂ֖ה 1 You must make Yahweh is speaking to Moses, so the word **you** is singular. Yahweh probably expected Moses to tell someone else to do the actual work, but Moses would be the one responsible for seeing that the work was done correctly. “Tell a craftsman to make” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 26 1 iww4 translate-unknown יְרִיעֹ֑ת 1 curtains The **curtains** were large, heavy sections of woven cloth that were used to form the covering and dividing walls of the tabernacle. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 1 vre7 וּ⁠תְכֵ֤לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָן֙ וְ⁠תֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י 1 curtains Possible meanings are (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md). @@ -1795,17 +1793,17 @@ EXO 26 1 ni5d translate-unknown שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֗ר 1 scarlet wool T EXO 26 1 n2vm חֹשֵׁ֖ב 1 craftsman a person who is skilled in making beautiful objects by hand EXO 26 2 dkr6 translate-bdistance שְׁמֹנֶ֤ה וְ⁠עֶשְׂרִים֙ בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה…אַרְבַּ֣ע בָּ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 twenty-eight cubits…four cubits You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 12.9 meters … 184 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 26 3 ba6w figs-activepassive חֲמֵ֣שׁ הַ⁠יְרִיעֹ֗ת תִּֽהְיֶ֨יןָ֙ חֹֽבְרֹ֔ת אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ֑⁠הּ וְ⁠חָמֵ֤שׁ יְרִיעֹת֙ חֹֽבְרֹ֔ת אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָֽ⁠הּ 1 Five curtains must be joined to each other…must also be joined to each other This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Join five of the curtains each to another, and join five of the curtains each to another.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 26 4 ghz8 תְּכֵ֗לֶת 1 one set “blue yarn” or “blue cloth” +EXO 26 4 ghz8 תְּכֵ֗לֶת 1 one set Alternate translation: “blue yarn” or “blue cloth” EXO 26 4 wdum translate-ordinal הָ⁠אֶחָ֔ת…הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית 1 one set (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 26 4 d0sl בַּ⁠חֹבָ֑רֶת 1 one set “in one set of five curtains” -EXO 26 4 gjt1 בַּ⁠מַּחְבֶּ֖רֶת הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית 1 one set “in the other set of five curtains” +EXO 26 4 d0sl בַּ⁠חֹבָ֑רֶת 1 one set Alternate translation: “in one set of five curtains” +EXO 26 4 gjt1 בַּ⁠מַּחְבֶּ֖רֶת הַ⁠שֵּׁנִֽית 1 one set Alternate translation: “in the other set of five curtains” EXO 26 5 nkr7 figs-idiom אִשָּׁ֖ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָֽ⁠הּ 1 one set This is an idiom meaning “to each other.” Alternate translation: “one to the other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 26 6 sns4 וְ⁠עָשִׂ֕יתָ חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים קַרְסֵ֣י זָהָ֑ב וְ⁠חִבַּרְתָּ֨ אֶת־הַ⁠יְרִיעֹ֜ת אִשָּׁ֤ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ⁠הּ֙ 1 clasps The clasps fit into the loops (verses 4 and 5) to hold the curtains together. EXO 26 6 k12s figs-idiom אִשָּׁ֤ה אֶל־אֲחֹתָ⁠הּ֙ 1 clasps This is the same idiom as in the previous verse meaning together. Alternate translation: “to each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 26 6 b242 אֶחָֽד 1 clasps “as though it were one piece” +EXO 26 6 b242 אֶחָֽד 1 clasps Alternate translation: “as though it were one piece” EXO 26 7 jeaz לְ⁠אֹ֖הֶל 1 eleven This refers to a outer tent over the sacred tent. Alternate translation: “for an outer tent” -EXO 26 7 t7t3 translate-numbers עַשְׁתֵּי־עֶשְׂרֵ֥ה 1 eleven “eleven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 26 8 p423 translate-numbers שְׁלֹשִׁים֙…אַרְבַּ֣ע…לְ⁠עַשְׁתֵּ֥י עֶשְׂרֵ֖ה 1 thirty…four “thirty … 4 … eleven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 26 7 t7t3 translate-numbers עַשְׁתֵּי־עֶשְׂרֵ֥ה 1 eleven Alternate translation: “eleven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 26 8 p423 translate-numbers שְׁלֹשִׁים֙…אַרְבַּ֣ע…לְ⁠עַשְׁתֵּ֥י עֶשְׂרֵ֖ה 1 thirty…four Alternate translation: “thirty … 4 … eleven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 26 8 v7i1 translate-bdistance שְׁלֹשִׁים֙ בָּֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה…אַרְבַּ֣ע בָּ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 cubits You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 13.8 meter … 184 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 26 9 kb9x figs-metonymy אֶל־מ֖וּל פְּנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֹֽהֶל 1 cubits Here, **face** is probably referring to the entrance of the tent. The opening for the protective tent and the sacred tent would have been coordinated so they were in the same place. Alternate translation: “in front of the entrance of the tent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 26 9 q3og הָ⁠אֹֽהֶל 1 cubits As in [verse 7](../26/07.md), **the tent** refers to the outer tent over the sacred tent. Alternate translation: “the outer tent” @@ -1817,7 +1815,7 @@ EXO 26 14 kii8 translate-unknown תְּחָשִׁ֖ים 1 a covering of ram skin EXO 26 14 yz3v translate-unknown מְאָדָּמִ֑ים 1 dyed red When animal skins are tanned (processed into usable leather), they become reddish. It is not clear if these hides are dyed red or simply reddened in the tanning process. See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 25:5](../25/05.md). Alternate translation: “tanned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 15 y85l translate-unknown הַ⁠קְּרָשִׁ֖ים 1 frames This refers to frames or panels that they made by joining together smaller pieces of wood. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 15 tw2h translate-unknown שִׁטִּ֖ים 1 frames The **acacias** are small trees with spreading foliage and durable wood. See how you translated this in [25:5](../25/05.md). [See on Wikipedia](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shittah_tree) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 26 16 k4b7 translate-numbers עֶ֥שֶׂר…וְ⁠אַמָּה֙ וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י הָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 ten cubits…one and a half cubits “10 … 1.5 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 26 16 k4b7 translate-numbers עֶ֥שֶׂר…וְ⁠אַמָּה֙ וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י הָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 ten cubits…one and a half cubits Alternate translation: “10 … 1.5 cubits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 26 16 z2rv translate-bdistance עֶ֥שֶׂר אַמּ֖וֹת…וְ⁠אַמָּה֙ וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י הָֽ⁠אַמָּ֔ה 1 ten cubits…one and a half cubits You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people, if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 4.6 meters … 69 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 26 16 p3av translate-fraction וַ⁠חֲצִ֣י 1 ten cubits…one and a half cubits The word **half** means one part out of two equal parts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) EXO 26 17 zwfj translate-unknown יָד֗וֹת 1 ten cubits…one and a half cubits This means a part of the wood sticking out from the rest of the frame so that it can be put into a hole in another object. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1828,7 +1826,7 @@ EXO 26 21 rlcf figs-explicit שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֗ים תַּ֚חַת ה EXO 26 25 cbpl figs-explicit שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֗ים תַּ֚חַת הַ⁠קֶּ֣רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָ֔ד וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֣י אֲדָנִ֔ים תַּ֖חַת הַ⁠קֶּ֥רֶשׁ הָ⁠אֶחָֽד 1 silver bases The effect of this is to start a list, and the hearer will assume it should be completed. Try to translate this in the way that a speaker of your language would give instructions that are meant to be carried out on a whole group of objects. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md). Alternate translation: “two bases under the first frame, and then two bases under the next frame, and so on for all the frames” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 26 25 p2wu translate-unknown וְ⁠אַדְנֵי⁠הֶ֣ם…אֲדָנִ֑ים…אֲדָנִ֗ים…אֲדָנִ֔ים 1 silver bases These were silver blocks that had a slot in them to keep the frame in place. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:19](../26/19.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 26 fc8p translate-unknown בְרִיחִ֖ם 1 crossbars These are horizontal support beams that give stability to the structure. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 26 29 ji1j בָּתִּ֖ים לַ⁠בְּרִיחִ֑ם 1 for them to serve as holders for the crossbars “which will hold the crossbars” or “because they will hold the crossbars” +EXO 26 29 ji1j בָּתִּ֖ים לַ⁠בְּרִיחִ֑ם 1 for them to serve as holders for the crossbars Alternate translation: “which will hold the crossbars” or “because they will hold the crossbars” EXO 26 29 nq3m לַ⁠בְּרִיחִ֑ם 1 crossbars These are horizontal support beams that give stability to the structure. See how you translated this in [Exodus 26:26](../26/26.md). EXO 26 30 csf9 figs-activepassive הָרְאֵ֖יתָ בָּ⁠הָֽר 1 you were shown on the mountain This can be stated in active form. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 26 31 yqi6 0 General Information: See how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md). @@ -1839,9 +1837,9 @@ EXO 26 35 lv9e הַ⁠שֻּׁלְחָן֙…הַ⁠מְּנֹרָה֙ 1 The ta EXO 26 36 tiz7 0 The table must be on the north side See how you translated very similar text in [Exodus 26:1](../26/01.md). EXO 26 36 rr16 תְּכֵ֧לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָ֛ן וְ⁠תוֹלַ֥עַת שָׁנִ֖י 1 blue, purple, and scarlet material Possible meanings are (1) “yarn that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple, and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:4](../25/04.md). EXO 26 36 f6td translate-unknown וְ⁠שֵׁ֣שׁ מָשְׁזָ֑ר 1 fine twined linen This was cloth made from fine linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 26 36 r2fy translate-unknown רֹקֵֽם 1 an embroiderer “a person who sews designs into cloth” or “a person who embroiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 26 36 r2fy translate-unknown רֹקֵֽם 1 an embroiderer Alternate translation: “a person who sews designs into cloth” or “a person who embroiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 26 37 av60 0 an embroiderer See how you translated very similar instructions in [verse 32](../26/32.md). -EXO 27 intro x4f7 0 # Exodus 27 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.
- v. 1-8: Instructions for constructing the altar
- v. 9-19: Instructions for constructing the outer curtain walls forming the courtyard around the sacred tent
- v. 20-21: Instructions for the lampstand


## Special concepts in this chapter

### The tent of meeting
This chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building (around the tent of meeting) of the courtyard area containing the altar where priests made sacrifices to Yahweh.

## Potential translation issues
- The verb **make** at the beginning of [verse 9](../27/09.md) is the only verb from verses 9-18. Some languages may be able to translate a clause chain this long without additional verbs, others (including English), will need to supply at least a minimum number of verbs (ULT) or quite a few verbs (UST) for naturalness.
- There continues to be a number of possibly unknown terms, still all tangible objects. +EXO 27 intro x4f7 0 # Exodus 27 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter is a continuation of the material in the previous chapter.
- v. 1-8: Instructions for constructing the altar
- v. 9-19: Instructions for constructing the outer curtain walls forming the courtyard around the sacred tent
- v. 20-21: Instructions for the lampstand


## Special concepts in this chapter

### The tent of meeting

This chapter gives specific instructions regarding the building (around the tent of meeting) of the courtyard area containing the altar where priests made sacrifices to Yahweh.

## Potential translation issues

- The verb **make** at the beginning of [verse 9](../27/09.md) is the only verb from verses 9-18. Some languages may be able to translate a clause chain this long without additional verbs, others (including English), will need to supply at least a minimum number of verbs (ULT) or quite a few verbs (UST) for naturalness.
- There continues to be a number of possibly unknown terms, still all tangible objects. EXO 27 1 s8qy translate-bdistance חָמֵשׁ֩ אַמּ֨וֹת…וְ⁠חָמֵ֧שׁ אַמּ֣וֹת…וְ⁠שָׁלֹ֥שׁ אַמּ֖וֹת 1 cubits You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people, if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46 centimeters. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 2.3 meters … 2.3 meters … 138 centimeters (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) EXO 27 4 hsq3 רֶ֣שֶׁת 1 grate a frame of crossed metal bars for holding wood when burning EXO 27 4 vlau 0 grate You may want to refer back to several other passages regarding making rings for carrying poles when translating this verse. See [Exo 25:12](../25/12.md), [Exo 25:26](../25/26.md), & [Exo 25:27](../25/27.md). @@ -1873,7 +1871,7 @@ EXO 27 21 p7ru figs-synecdoche הָ⁠עֵדֻ֗ת 1 ark of testimony This refer EXO 27 21 nlwz אֹת֨⁠וֹ יַעֲרֹךְ֩ אֹת֨⁠וֹ 1 ark of testimony Here, **it** refers to the lamp mentioned in the previous verse and **arrange** means to set it up for burning, and light it. Alternate translation: “shall set up the lampstand and light it” EXO 27 21 j41s figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 ark of testimony Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in front of me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 27 21 vr7m חֻקַּ֤ת עוֹלָם֙ לְ⁠דֹ֣רֹתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠אֵ֖ת בְּנֵ֥י יִשְׂרָאֵֽל 1 This requirement will be a lasting statute See how you translated a similar statement in [12:14](../12/14.md) -EXO 28 intro r3yx 0 # Exodus 28 General Notes
## Structure
- v. 1: Introduction - Aaron and sons will become priests
- v. 2-5: General introduction of sacred clothing
- v. 6-14: Instructions for the ephod
- v. 9-14: Instructions regarding stones on ephod
- v. 15-28: Instructions for the breastpiece
- v. 17-21: Instructions regarding stones on breastpiece
- v. 22-28: Instructions for mounting the breastpiece on the ephod
- v. 29-30: Aaron should wear things over his heart
- v 31-35: Instructions for making the robe with bells and pomegranates
- v. 36-38: Instructions regarding the turban
- v. 39-41: Closing general instructions regarding clothing
- v. 42-43: Instructions on making and wearing undergarments
- v. 43b: Closing statement

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Holy garments
Because Yahweh is holy, only the priests could approach him, and when they did they must be wearing specially made clothing. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])


## Potential translation issues
- Verses 17-20 list 12 kinds of stone. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. The UST gives the probable color of the gemstone. Translators may use names of familiar gem stones.
+EXO 28 intro r3yx 0 # Exodus 28 General Notes

## Structure

- v. 1: Introduction - Aaron and sons will become priests
- v. 2-5: General introduction of sacred clothing
- v. 6-14: Instructions for the ephod
- v. 9-14: Instructions regarding stones on ephod
- v. 15-28: Instructions for the breastpiece
- v. 17-21: Instructions regarding stones on breastpiece
- v. 22-28: Instructions for mounting the breastpiece on the ephod
- v. 29-30: Aaron should wear things over his heart
- v 31-35: Instructions for making the robe with bells and pomegranates
- v. 36-38: Instructions regarding the turban
- v. 39-41: Closing general instructions regarding clothing
- v. 42-43: Instructions on making and wearing undergarments
- v. 43b: Closing statement

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Holy garments

Because Yahweh is holy, only the priests could approach him, and when they did they must be wearing specially made clothing. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])


## Potential translation issues

- Verses 17-20 list 12 kinds of stone. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. The UST gives the probable color of the gemstone. Translators may use names of familiar gem stones.
EXO 28 1 e1xb figs-you וְ⁠אַתָּ֡ה 1 Call to yourself Here **you** refers to Moses, in this case it is something he must do. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 28 1 w9ls translate-kinship אַהֲרֹ֨ן אָחִ֜י⁠ךָ 1 Call to yourself Aaron is older than Moses. If your language uses a different term for the sibling relationship based on gender and age order, choose the appropriate one. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]]) EXO 28 1 ofgr translate-names נָדָ֧ב וַ⁠אֲבִיה֛וּא…וְ⁠אִיתָמָ֖ר 1 Call to yourself These are men’s names. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) @@ -1891,33 +1889,33 @@ EXO 28 7 dpph שְׁתֵּ֧י כְתֵפֹ֣ת חֹֽבְרֹ֗ת יִֽהְי EXO 28 7 wt20 figs-activepassive וְ⁠חֻבָּֽר 1 skillful craftsman This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “join it together that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 28 8 u5av אֲשֶׁ֣ר עָלָ֔י⁠ו כְּ⁠מַעֲשֵׂ֖⁠הוּ מִמֶּ֣⁠נּוּ 1 it must be made of one piece This is saying that the sash should be attached to the ephod, perhaps cut from the same material used to make the rest of the ephod. EXO 28 9 c4ia translate-unknown אַבְנֵי־שֹׁ֑הַם 1 onyx stones These are valuable stones that have layers of white and black, red or brown. See how you translated this in [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 28 9 s2yd translate-numbers שְׁתֵּ֖י 1 onyx stones “2” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 28 10 h5mr translate-numbers שִׁשָּׁה֙…הַ⁠שִּׁשָּׁ֧ה 1 onyx stones “6 … 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 28 10 zlte כְּ⁠תוֹלְדֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 onyx stones “according to their birth order” -EXO 28 11 dv8k פִּתּוּחֵ֣י חֹתָ֗ם 1 With the work of an engraver in stone, like the engraving on a signet “in the same way a person engraves on a seal” +EXO 28 9 s2yd translate-numbers שְׁתֵּ֖י 1 onyx stones Alternate translation: “2” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 28 10 h5mr translate-numbers שִׁשָּׁה֙…הַ⁠שִּׁשָּׁ֧ה 1 onyx stones Alternate translation: “6 … 6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 28 10 zlte כְּ⁠תוֹלְדֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 onyx stones Alternate translation: “according to their birth order” +EXO 28 11 dv8k פִּתּוּחֵ֣י חֹתָ֗ם 1 With the work of an engraver in stone, like the engraving on a signet Alternate translation: “in the same way a person engraves on a seal” EXO 28 11 x1xc translate-unknown חָרַשׁ֮ אֶבֶן֒ 1 engraver This is a person who cuts designs into a hard material such as wood, stone, or metal. Alternate translation: “of a detailed stone cutter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 11 cm3f translate-unknown חֹתָ֗ם 1 signet This is an engraved stone used to stamp a design into a wax seal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 11 gh2r translate-unknown מִשְׁבְּצ֥וֹת 1 settings These are pieces of metal that hold the stones onto the ephod. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 12 ypfd זִכָּרֹ֖ן…לְ⁠זִכָּרֹֽן 1 settings The text does not specify if Yahweh or Aaron or someone else is the one being reminded by the stones. It also does not specify exactly what the reminder is of. Try to maintain this ambiguity if possible in your translation. EXO 28 12 shn5 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֧י 1 settings Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 28 13 pi4x translate-unknown מִשְׁבְּצֹ֖ת 1 settings These are pieces of metal that hold each stone onto the ephod. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 28 14 e746 וּ⁠שְׁתֵּ֤י שַׁרְשְׁרֹת֙ זָהָ֣ב טָה֔וֹר מִגְבָּלֹ֛ת תַּעֲשֶׂ֥ה אֹתָ֖⁠ם מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה עֲבֹ֑ת 1 two braided chains of pure gold like cords “and you shall make two chains of pure gold that are braided like cords” -EXO 28 15 sf8e מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה חֹשֵׁ֔ב כְּ⁠מַעֲשֵׂ֥ה אֵפֹ֖ד תַּעֲשֶׂ֑⁠נּוּ 1 the work of a skillful workman, fashioned like the ephod “a skillful workman will make it like the ephod” +EXO 28 14 e746 וּ⁠שְׁתֵּ֤י שַׁרְשְׁרֹת֙ זָהָ֣ב טָה֔וֹר מִגְבָּלֹ֛ת תַּעֲשֶׂ֥ה אֹתָ֖⁠ם מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה עֲבֹ֑ת 1 two braided chains of pure gold like cords Alternate translation: “and you shall make two chains of pure gold that are braided like cords” +EXO 28 15 sf8e מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה חֹשֵׁ֔ב כְּ⁠מַעֲשֵׂ֥ה אֵפֹ֖ד תַּעֲשֶׂ֑⁠נּוּ 1 the work of a skillful workman, fashioned like the ephod Alternate translation: “a skillful workman will make it like the ephod” EXO 28 16 cny4 translate-bdistance זֶ֥רֶת…וְ⁠זֶ֥רֶת 1 span You can convert this length to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A span is approximately 23 centimeters. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) -EXO 28 16 onj6 רָב֥וּעַ יִֽהְיֶ֖ה כָּפ֑וּל 1 span “fold it in half so it will be square” +EXO 28 16 onj6 רָב֥וּעַ יִֽהְיֶ֖ה כָּפ֑וּל 1 span Alternate translation: “fold it in half so it will be square” EXO 28 17 spd4 translate-unknown 0 General Information: Twelve kinds of stone are listed in the next four verses. Scholars are not sure which kinds of stones the Hebrew words refer to. Some translations list different stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 17 n1ys translate-unknown אֹ֤דֶם פִּטְדָה֙ וּ⁠בָרֶ֔קֶת 1 ruby…topaz…garnet These are precious stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 28 18 qq9g translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠טּ֖וּר הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֑י 1 emerald…diamond “And row 2:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 28 18 qq9g translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠טּ֖וּר הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֑י 1 emerald…diamond Alternate translation: “And row 2:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 28 18 ga1v translate-unknown נֹ֥פֶךְ סַפִּ֖יר וְ⁠יָהֲלֹֽם 1 emerald…diamond These are precious stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 18 a5rr translate-unknown סַפִּ֖יר 1 sapphire This is a gemstone that is blue in color. See how you translated this in [Exodus 24:10](../24/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 28 19 uw42 translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠טּ֖וּר הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֑י 1 sapphire “And row 3:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 28 19 uw42 translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠טּ֖וּר הַ⁠שְּׁלִישִׁ֑י 1 sapphire Alternate translation: “And row 3:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 28 19 z17r translate-unknown לֶ֥שֶׁם שְׁב֖וֹ וְ⁠אַחְלָֽמָה 1 jacinth…agate…amethyst These are precious stones (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 28 20 ekaf translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠טּוּר֙ הָ⁠רְבִיעִ֔י 1 jacinth…agate…amethyst “And row 4:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 28 20 ekaf translate-ordinal וְ⁠הַ⁠טּוּר֙ הָ⁠רְבִיעִ֔י 1 jacinth…agate…amethyst Alternate translation: “And row 4:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 28 20 ul2e translate-unknown תַּרְשִׁ֥ישׁ וְ⁠שֹׁ֖הַם וְ⁠יָשְׁפֵ֑ה 1 beryl…jasper These are precious stones. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 20 rgf6 translate-unknown וְ⁠שֹׁ֖הַם 1 onyx This is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red or brown. See how you translated these in [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 20 pw5h figs-activepassive מְשֻׁבָּצִ֥ים זָהָ֛ב יִהְי֖וּ 1 They must be mounted in gold settings This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “You shall set them in gold” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 28 21 z8mw translate-unknown פִּתּוּחֵ֤י חוֹתָם֙ 1 signet ring A signet is an engraved stone used to stamp a design into a wax seal. Here the stone is mounted on a ring. See how you translated “signet” in [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 28 22 m7yl translate-unknown שַֽׁרְשֹׁ֥ת גַּבְלֻ֖ת מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה עֲבֹ֑ת זָהָ֖ב טָהֽוֹר 1 chains like cords, braided work of pure gold “chains that are made of pure gold and are braided like cords.” See how you translated similar phrases in [Exodus 28:14](../28/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 28 22 m7yl translate-unknown שַֽׁרְשֹׁ֥ת גַּבְלֻ֖ת מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה עֲבֹ֑ת זָהָ֖ב טָהֽוֹר 1 chains like cords, braided work of pure gold Alternate translation: “chains that are made of pure gold and are braided like cords.” See how you translated similar phrases in [Exodus 28:14](../28/14.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 25 d8y3 figs-metonymy אֶל־מ֥וּל פָּנָֽי⁠ו 1 braided chains Here, **face** simply refers to the object (the ephod). Alternate translation: “on its front side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 28 25 a4lc figs-explicit עַל־שְׁתֵּ֣י הַֽ⁠מִּשְׁבְּצ֑וֹת 1 to the two settings These are two settings that enclose the stones. This can be clearly stated in the translation. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 28 27 f2nn figs-metonymy פָּנָ֔י⁠ו 1 braided chains Here, **face** simply refers to the object (the ephod). Alternate translation: “on its front side” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -1925,12 +1923,12 @@ EXO 28 27 vw1w translate-unknown לְ⁠חֵ֖שֶׁב 1 finely-woven waistband EXO 28 28 se56 figs-activepassive וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִזַּ֣ח הַ⁠חֹ֔שֶׁן מֵ⁠עַ֖ל 1 so that it might be attached This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “so that the breastpiece shall stay attached to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 28 28 wf9v figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠לֹֽא־יִזַּ֣ח הַ⁠חֹ֔שֶׁן מֵ⁠עַ֖ל 1 the breastpiece might not become unattached from the ephod This can be stated in positive form. Alternate translation: “so that the breastpiece shall stay attached to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 28 29 z1mz שְׁמ֨וֹת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֜ל 1 he must carry the names of the people of Israel over his heart in the breastpiece This refers to the names of the tribes engraved on the twelve stones the breastplate as described in [Exodus 28:17-21](./17.md). -EXO 28 29 cc97 עַל־לִבּ֖⁠וֹ 1 over his heart “over Aaron’s heart” or “on his chest” +EXO 28 29 cc97 עַל־לִבּ֖⁠וֹ 1 over his heart Alternate translation: “over Aaron’s heart” or “on his chest” EXO 28 30 dgn9 translate-unknown הָ⁠אוּרִים֙ וְ⁠אֶת־הַ⁠תֻּמִּ֔ים 1 the Urim and the Thummim It not clear what these are. They were objects, possibly stones, that the priest used to determine somehow the will of God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 30 f537 translate-unknown וְ⁠נָשָׂ֣א אַ֠הֲרֹן אֶת־מִשְׁפַּ֨ט בְּנֵי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֧ל עַל־לִבּ֛⁠וֹ לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה תָּמִֽיד 1 the Urim and the Thummim…the means for making decisions The second phrase appears to refer to the Urim and Thummim and explain their purpose. Alternate translation: “And Aaron shall bear the decisions for the sons of Israel over his heart before Yahweh continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 30 fep5 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה…לִ⁠פְנֵ֥י יְהוָ֖ה 1 the Urim and the Thummim…the means for making decisions Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh … before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 28 32 x42n מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה אֹרֵ֗ג 1 This must be the work of a weaver This can be stated as a command. Alternate translation: “A weaver must make this robe” -EXO 28 32 rw96 translate-unknown אֹרֵ֗ג 1 a weaver “a person who weaves” or “a person who creates cloth using thread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 28 32 rw96 translate-unknown אֹרֵ֗ג 1 a weaver Alternate translation: “a person who weaves” or “a person who creates cloth using thread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 32 t60l translate-unknown תַחְרָ֛א 1 a weaver We do not know what this term means, but the implication seems to be that the collar should be made strong. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 32 ubhg figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יִקָּרֵֽעַ 1 a weaver You can translate this in another form. Alternate translation: see UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 28 33 qm1f translate-unknown תְּכֵ֤לֶת וְ⁠אַרְגָּמָן֙ וְ⁠תוֹלַ֣עַת שָׁנִ֔י 1 pomegranates Possible meanings are (1) “material that is dyed blue, purple, and scarlet,” probably wool yarn, or (2) “blue, purple and scarlet dye” to dye the linen. The original audience would have known what was meant. This material seems to have been used for embroidery later, so “yarn” or ”thread” may be the best understanding. See how you translated this in [25:4](../25/04.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) @@ -1940,7 +1938,7 @@ EXO 28 35 fmqu figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֧י יְהוָ֛ה 1 so that its so EXO 28 35 ky8s figs-123person יְהוָ֛ה 1 so that its sound can be heard Here, Yahweh refers to himself in the third person, if it would be more natural in your language you may need to change this to first person. Alternate translation: “me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 28 35 qtf9 figs-explicit וְ⁠לֹ֥א יָמֽוּת 1 This is so that he does not die The probable implication is that he would die because he did not obey Yahweh. This can be stated. Alternate translation: “As a result, he will not die because of disobeying my instructions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 28 36 mzej translate-unknown צִּ֖יץ 1 engrave on it, like the engraving on a signet We do not know exactly what this was. It was probably a thin piece of gold smaller than the palm of someone’s hand. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 28 36 nd2q translate-unknown וּ⁠פִתַּחְתָּ֤ עָלָי⁠ו֙ פִּתּוּחֵ֣י חֹתָ֔ם 1 engrave on it, like the engraving on a signet “write on it in the same way a person engraves on a seal.” See how you translated similar words in [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 28 36 nd2q translate-unknown וּ⁠פִתַּחְתָּ֤ עָלָי⁠ו֙ פִּתּוּחֵ֣י חֹתָ֔ם 1 engrave on it, like the engraving on a signet Alternate translation: “write on it in the same way a person engraves on a seal.” See how you translated similar words in [Exodus 28:11](../28/11.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 37 qka6 translate-unknown הַ⁠מִּצְנָ֑פֶת…הַ⁠מִּצְנֶ֖פֶת 1 turban This was a tall head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 37 lxq8 figs-metonymy אֶל־מ֥וּל פְּנֵֽי־הַ⁠מִּצְנֶ֖פֶת 1 turban Here, **face** means the front. Alternate translation: “to the front of the turban” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 28 38 frqm figs-metaphor וְ⁠נָשָׂ֨א אַהֲרֹ֜ן אֶת־עֲוֺ֣ן הַ⁠קֳּדָשִׁ֗ים 1 turban Here, **iniquity** is pictured as something that can be carried or worn like the turban. It also seems to be picturing handing off the iniquity from the people to Aaron. Also, here, **iniquity** actually seems to refer to the punishment for anything that might be wrong regarding the things the Israelites offer Yahweh. You may need to use a different word than **bear** to convey the transfer of responsibility for wrongs from the people to Aaron. Alternate translation: “and Aaron shall be responsible for any wrong related to the holy things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -1955,43 +1953,43 @@ EXO 28 41 xa75 translate-kinship אַהֲרֹ֣ן אָחִ֔י⁠ךָ 1 You must EXO 28 41 agey figs-idiom וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֧ אֶת־יָדָ֛⁠ם 1 You must clothe Aaron your brother This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. Alternate translation: “and you shall ordain them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 28 42 vz62 translate-unknown מִכְנְסֵי 1 undergarments These are clothing worn under the outer clothes, next to the skin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 28 42 m1bi figs-euphemism בְּשַׂ֣ר עֶרְוָ֑ה 1 undergarments This is an euphemism for the male genitalia. You may translate it using an appropriate euphemism in your culture. Alternate translation: “their private parts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]]) -EXO 29 intro xmd9 0 # Exodus 29 General Notes
Large translation teams working on multiple books at the same time should note that this chapter is very similar to Leviticus 8.
## Structure
As you translate, you may perceive a different structure in this chapter than what is below. Feel free to organize in a way that is clear in your language. This chapter is really one united whole, the outline below is one possible way of subdividing it.
The Consecration of the Priests
- v. 1-3 Preparing items
- v. 4-9 Preparing Aaron and his sons
- v. 10-14 Sacrificing the bull to purify the altar
- v. 15-34 Sacrificing the rams
- v. 15-18 The first ram wholly burned
- v. 19-28 The second ram used for consecrating and divided for eating
- v. 29-30 Priestly succession
- v. 31-34 More instructions regarding eating the second ram
- v. 35-37 Instructions to do all this for seven days
- v. 38-41 Instructions for perpetual offerings
- v. 42-46 Yahweh’s affirmation

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Consecrating priests
This chapter records the process of consecrating priests. The priests were to be set apart from the rest of Israel because Yahweh is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/consecrate]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter


### Forms of you
For this chapter, it seems that the singular you that Yahweh has been using to give Moses general instructions for the last several chapters actually refers to Moses himself. If you have been translating the instructions using a plural form of you or by shifting the instructions to the third person, you should switch back to a singular form referring directly to Moses for this chapter.

### “I will live among the Israelites”
As God, Yahweh is everywhere and cannot be limited to a single space. This phrase indicates that he permanently remains within Israel in a special way while they have the ark. +EXO 29 intro xmd9 0 # Exodus 29 General Notes

Large translation teams working on multiple books at the same time should note that this chapter is very similar to Leviticus 8.

## Structure

As you translate, you may perceive a different structure in this chapter than what is below. Feel free to organize in a way that is clear in your language. This chapter is really one united whole, the outline below is one possible way of subdividing it.
The Consecration of the Priests
- v. 1-3 Preparing items
- v. 4-9 Preparing Aaron and his sons
- v. 10-14 Sacrificing the bull to purify the altar
- v. 15-34 Sacrificing the rams
- v. 15-18 The first ram wholly burned
- v. 19-28 The second ram used for consecrating and divided for eating
- v. 29-30 Priestly succession
- v. 31-34 More instructions regarding eating the second ram
- v. 35-37 Instructions to do all this for seven days
- v. 38-41 Instructions for perpetual offerings
- v. 42-46 Yahweh’s affirmation

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Consecrating priests

This chapter records the process of consecrating priests. The priests were to be set apart from the rest of Israel because Yahweh is holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/consecrate]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/priest]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter


### Forms of you

For this chapter, it seems that the singular you that Yahweh has been using to give Moses general instructions for the last several chapters actually refers to Moses himself. If you have been translating the instructions using a plural form of you or by shifting the instructions to the third person, you should switch back to a singular form referring directly to Moses for this chapter.

### “I will live among the Israelites”

As God, Yahweh is everywhere and cannot be limited to a single space. This phrase indicates that he permanently remains within Israel in a special way while they have the ark. EXO 29 1 d6gk writing-newevent וְ⁠זֶ֨ה 1 Now A new scene begins here, there is a change in topic from instructions for making garments for priests to consecrating priests. This may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 29 1 z78h writing-pronouns תַּעֲשֶׂ֥ה 1 you must do Here **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 29 1 ld5s writing-pronouns לָ⁠הֶ֛ם 1 to set them apart “to Aaron and his sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 29 1 ld5s writing-pronouns לָ⁠הֶ֛ם 1 to set them apart Alternate translation: “to Aaron and his sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 29 1 dq2c writing-pronouns לִ֑⁠י 1 serve me Here **me** refers to Yahweh. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 29 1 jhj3 figs-idiom בֶּן־בָּקָ֛ר 1 serve me This is an idiom meaning young. If you do not have a similar idiom you may translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “a young one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 2 ptm7 figs-activepassive בְּלוּלֹ֣ת בַּ⁠שֶּׁ֔מֶן…מְשֻׁחִ֣ים בַּ⁠שָּׁ֑מֶן 1 Also take wafers without yeast rubbed with oil These can be stated in active form. You may need to shorten the sentences and make the alternate translation content separate sentences or mark it off with special punctuation. Alternate translation: “(mix them with oil) … (rub them with oil)” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 29 2 wkyb וּ⁠רְקִיקֵ֥י מַצּ֖וֹת מְשֻׁחִ֣ים בַּ⁠שָּׁ֑מֶן 1 Also take wafers without yeast rubbed with oil These may have been rubbed with oil before or after baking. EXO 29 2 r449 translate-unknown וְ⁠חַלֹּ֤ת…וּ⁠רְקִיקֵ֥י 1 bread…cakes…wafers These are different kinds of food made from flour. While all the breads were somewhat flat because they were unleavened, the **cakes** were a bread enriched with oil and the **wafers** were especially thin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 29 3 gm58 writing-pronouns אוֹתָ⁠ם֙ 1 You must put them “the bread, cake, and wafer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 29 3 gm58 writing-pronouns אוֹתָ⁠ם֙ 1 You must put them Alternate translation: “the bread, cake, and wafer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 29 3 cd6m וְ⁠הִקְרַבְתָּ֥ אֹתָ֖⁠ם בַּ⁠סָּ֑ל וְ⁠אֶ֨ת־הַ⁠פָּ֔ר וְ⁠אֵ֖ת שְׁנֵ֥י הָ⁠אֵילִֽם 1 present them with the bull and the two rams Here, **in the basket** is almost parenthetical. You may need to restructure the sentence or use punctuation to make it clear that **the bull and the two rams** are connected to **bring** not, **in the basket.** Alternate translation: “and you shall bring them near (in the basket) along with the bull and the two rams” EXO 29 4 a6rz אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד 1 tent of meeting This is another name for the tabernacle. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:21](../27/21.md). EXO 29 5 pr4i translate-unknown בְּ⁠חֵ֖שֶׁב 1 finely-woven waistband This was a cloth belt made from narrow linen threads that someone twisted together to make a stronger thread. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:8](../28/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 6 ap2x translate-unknown הַ⁠מִּצְנֶ֖פֶת…הַ⁠מִּצְנָֽפֶת 1 turban This was a tall head covering made from cloth wrapped around the head several times. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 6 y59s translate-unknown נֵ֥זֶר הַ⁠קֹּ֖דֶשׁ 1 holy crown This crown is described in [Exodus 28:36](../28/36.md) as being engraved with the words “Holy to Yahweh” and made of pure gold. There it is referred to by a different Hebrew word, translated “rosette.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 7 rwuj translate-unknown שֶׁ֣מֶן הַ⁠מִּשְׁחָ֔ה 1 holy crown See how you translated this in [25:6](../25/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 29 8 v46k writing-pronouns בָּנָ֖י⁠ו 1 bring his sons “Aaron’s sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) +EXO 29 8 v46k writing-pronouns בָּנָ֖י⁠ו 1 bring his sons Alternate translation: “Aaron’s sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 29 8 jtc7 translate-unknown כֻּתֳּנֹֽת 1 coats These were coats with a design woven into them. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 9 j3a8 translate-unknown אַבְנֵ֜ט 1 sashes A sash is a decorative piece of cloth that people wear around their waist or across their chest. See how you translated this word in [Exodus 28:4](../28/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 9 bh2d translate-unknown מִגְבָּעֹ֔ת 1 headbands A headband is a narrow, decorative strip of cloth that is worn around the head above the eyes. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:40](../28/40.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 9 r1x4 translate-unknown כְּהֻנָּ֖ה 1 The work of the priesthood Here, **priesthood** means the official office of priest. Alternate translation: “the duty of being priests” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 29 9 ze9l figs-explicit וְ⁠הָיְתָ֥ה לָ⁠הֶ֛ם 1 will belong to them The duty of being priests will also belong to the descendants of Aaron’s sons. You can state this clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “And … will belong to them and their descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 29 9 p7m9 לְ⁠חֻקַּ֣ת עוֹלָ֑ם 1 permanent law “a law that will not end.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:43](../28/43.md). +EXO 29 9 p7m9 לְ⁠חֻקַּ֣ת עוֹלָ֑ם 1 permanent law Alternate translation: “a law that will not end.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:43](../28/43.md). EXO 29 9 zbzk figs-idiom וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֥ יַֽד־אַהֲרֹ֖ן וְ⁠יַד־בָּנָֽי⁠ו 1 permanent law This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “And you shall ordain Aaron and his sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 9 jhwb וּ⁠מִלֵּאתָ֥ יַֽד־אַהֲרֹ֖ן וְ⁠יַד־בָּנָֽי⁠ו 1 tent of meeting Interpretations of this phrase vary. Some take it to mean that the actions previous to this statement describe the consecrating of Aaron and his sons as priests. And at this point they are ordained. Others suggest this phrase may introduce the following material as the consecration process. However, because there are several statements regarding this consecration (literally filling the hand) throughout the chapter (see verses 29, 33, and 35), it may also merely be a summary and reminder statement of the purpose of the entire process as the instructions transition from dressing the priests to the sacrificial portion of the ritual. It would probably be best to translate this in the way a mid-text summary reminder phrase would be spoken in your language, avoiding any indication that it refers only to the previous or following text. EXO 29 10 wjko 0 tent of meeting The sacrifice explained here through verse 14 is to purify or cleanse the altar. This is made more clear in [verses 36-37](../29/36.md). -EXO 29 10 sgur figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד 1 tent of meeting Here, **face** refers to the front of the tent. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 29 10 sgur figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֖י אֹ֣הֶל מוֹעֵ֑ד 1 tent of meeting Here, **face** refers to the front of the tent. See the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 29 10 rf0w grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וְ⁠סָמַ֨ךְ אַהֲרֹ֧ן וּ⁠בָנָ֛י⁠ו אֶת־יְדֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־רֹ֥אשׁ הַ⁠פָּֽר 1 tent of meeting The slaughter of the bull in the next verse occurs while they continue to have their hands on the bull’s head. Take care to arrange the phrases and to use words or forms that indicate that the two events happened at the same time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) EXO 29 12 c2ud translate-unknown קַרְנֹ֥ת 1 the horns These were projections that looked like ox horns attached to the four corners of the altar. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 29 12 xdl5 כָּל־הַ⁠דָּ֣ם 1 the rest of the blood “the remaining blood” -EXO 29 13 x2c5 וְ⁠הִקְטַרְתָּ֖ 1 covers the inner parts “and burn them to make smoke” +EXO 29 12 xdl5 כָּל־הַ⁠דָּ֣ם 1 the rest of the blood Alternate translation: “the remaining blood” +EXO 29 13 x2c5 וְ⁠הִקְטַרְתָּ֖ 1 covers the inner parts Alternate translation: “and burn them to make smoke” EXO 29 13 nsg6 translate-unknown הַ⁠כָּבֵ֔ד…הַ⁠כְּלָיֹ֔ת 1 liver…kidneys These are organs in the body. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 29 14 eza8 וְ⁠אֶת־בְּשַׂ֤ר הַ⁠פָּר֙ וְ⁠אֶת־עֹר֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת 1 But as for the bull’s flesh, as well as its skin and dung “But as for the remaining parts of the bull, including the flesh and” -EXO 29 14 o262 מִ⁠ח֖וּץ לַֽ⁠מַּחֲנֶ֑ה 1 But as for the bull’s flesh, as well as its skin and dung “outside the borders of where the Israelites are camped” +EXO 29 14 eza8 וְ⁠אֶת־בְּשַׂ֤ר הַ⁠פָּר֙ וְ⁠אֶת־עֹר֣⁠וֹ וְ⁠אֶת 1 But as for the bull’s flesh, as well as its skin and dung Alternate translation: “But as for the remaining parts of the bull, including the flesh and” +EXO 29 14 o262 מִ⁠ח֖וּץ לַֽ⁠מַּחֲנֶ֑ה 1 But as for the bull’s flesh, as well as its skin and dung Alternate translation: “outside the borders of where the Israelites are camped” EXO 29 15 pd0t grammar-connect-time-simultaneous וְ⁠סָ֨מְכ֜וּ אַהֲרֹ֧ן וּ⁠בָנָ֛י⁠ו אֶת־יְדֵי⁠הֶ֖ם עַל־רֹ֥אשׁ הָ⁠אָֽיִל 1 But as for the bull’s flesh, as well as its skin and dung The slaughter of the ram in the next verse occurs while they continue to have their hands on the ram’s head. Take care to arrange the phrases and to use words or forms that indicate that the two events happened at the same time. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]]) -EXO 29 17 w2nb translate-unknown קִרְבּ⁠וֹ֙ 1 the inner parts “the organs” See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:13](../29/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 29 18 qc2i וְ⁠הִקְטַרְתָּ֤ אֶת־כָּל־הָ⁠אַ֨יִל֙ 1 on the altar “and burn all of the ram to make smoke” +EXO 29 17 w2nb translate-unknown קִרְבּ⁠וֹ֙ 1 the inner parts Alternate translation: “the organs” See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:13](../29/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 29 18 qc2i וְ⁠הִקְטַרְתָּ֤ אֶת־כָּל־הָ⁠אַ֨יִל֙ 1 on the altar Alternate translation: “and burn all of the ram to make smoke” EXO 29 18 pwjk figs-parallelism עֹלָ֥ה ה֖וּא לַֽ⁠יהוָ֑ה רֵ֣יחַ נִיח֔וֹחַ אִשֶּׁ֥ה לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה הֽוּא 1 on the altar These phrases are in parallel with the second expanding and clarifying the first. In some languages, you may need to use a different structure to expand and clarify the **burnt offering.** Alternate translation: “It is a pleasing smelling burnt offering made by fire to Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 29 19 zzsi הַ⁠שֵּׁנִ֑י 1 on the altar Except for **the second,** this verse is identical to [verse 15](../29/15.md). EXO 29 20 j6b1 figs-explicit וְ⁠שָׁחַטְתָּ֣ אֶת־הָ⁠אַ֗יִל 1 Then you must kill the ram They killed the ram by cutting its throat. This can be stated clearly in the translation. Alternate translation: “Then kill the ram by cutting its throat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2009,7 +2007,7 @@ EXO 29 25 e6bj וְ⁠הִקְטַרְתָּ֥ הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֖חָ⁠ EXO 29 26 bf71 מֵ⁠אֵ֤יל הַ⁠מִּלֻּאִים֙ 1 ram of dedication See how you translated this in [verse 22](../29/22.md). Alternate translation: “ram that you dedicated” EXO 29 26 c21f translate-symaction וְ⁠הֵנַפְתָּ֥ אֹת֛⁠וֹ תְּנוּפָ֖ה 1 Aaron’s ram of dedication The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. You may need to make this clear in your language. See how you translated this in [verse 24](../29/24.md). Alternate translation: “and show that you are giving it to me by holding it up to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 29 27 dzkx translate-symaction הַ⁠תְּנוּפָ֗ה וְ⁠אֵת֙ שׁ֣וֹק הַ⁠תְּרוּמָ֔ה אֲשֶׁ֥ר הוּנַ֖ף וַ⁠אֲשֶׁ֣ר הוּרָ֑ם 1 Aaron’s ram of dedication The act of raising the meat symbolized dedicating it to Yahweh. The priests would be acting out handing the offering to him. You may need to make this clear in your language. See how you translated this in [verse 24](../29/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) -EXO 29 28 uc2d וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֨ן וּ⁠לְ⁠בָנָ֜י⁠ו לְ⁠חָק־עוֹלָ֗ם מֵ⁠אֵת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֥י תְרוּמָ֖ה ה֑וּא 1 This will be a perpetual share for Aaron and his sons “This offering is what Aaron and his sons will always receive from the people” +EXO 29 28 uc2d וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לְ⁠אַהֲרֹ֨ן וּ⁠לְ⁠בָנָ֜י⁠ו לְ⁠חָק־עוֹלָ֗ם מֵ⁠אֵת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֥י תְרוּמָ֖ה ה֑וּא 1 This will be a perpetual share for Aaron and his sons Alternate translation: “This offering is what Aaron and his sons will always receive from the people” EXO 29 28 q3ms מֵ⁠אֵת֙ בְּנֵ֣י יִשְׂרָאֵ֔ל כִּ֥י תְרוּמָ֖ה ה֑וּא וּ⁠תְרוּמָ֞ה יִהְיֶ֨ה מֵ⁠אֵ֤ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵל֙ מִ⁠זִּבְחֵ֣י שַׁלְמֵי⁠הֶ֔ם תְּרוּמָתָ֖⁠ם לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 This will be a perpetual share for Aaron and his sons The amount of repetition in this verse may make it difficult to translate smoothly. You may consider combining some of them if that would work better in your language. Alternate translation: “for the Israelites must offer this portion from what they bring to Yahweh as peace offerings to them” EXO 29 29 a59z figs-idiom וּ⁠לְ⁠מַלֵּא־בָ֖⁠ם אֶת־יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 The holy garments of Aaron must also be reserved for his sons after him This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “to ordain them in them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 31 l3xk אֵ֥יל הַ⁠מִּלֻּאִ֖ים 1 the ram for the installation of the priests This refers to the second ram, the one described in [verses 19](../29/19.md) and following. @@ -2017,22 +2015,22 @@ EXO 29 31 u9kl figs-explicit בְּ⁠מָקֹ֥ם קָדֹֽשׁ 1 in a holy pl EXO 29 33 mcdc figs-idiom לְ⁠מַלֵּ֥א אֶת־יָדָ֖⁠ם 1 in a holy place This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “to ordain them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 34 rhp7 figs-activepassive לֹ֥א יֵאָכֵ֖ל 1 It must not be eaten This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “No one may eat it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 29 35 yo59 כָּ֔כָה 1 General Information: **Thus** means, “like this” and, as the next verses make clear, refers to the sacrificial ceremony outlined in this chapter which they must repeat seven times. -EXO 29 35 wrfs translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֥ת 1 General Information: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 29 35 wrfs translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֥ת 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 29 35 c2si figs-idiom תְּמַלֵּ֥א יָדָֽ⁠ם 1 General Information: This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). Alternate translation: “you shall ordain them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 36 r5tx 0 General Information: This verse and the next explain the purpose of the sacrifice detailed in [verses 10-14](../29/10.md). EXO 29 36 s81n grammar-connect-logic-goal וּ⁠פַ֨ר חַטָּ֜את תַּעֲשֶׂ֤ה לַ⁠יּוֹם֙ עַל־הַ⁠כִּפֻּרִ֔ים וְ⁠חִטֵּאתָ֙ עַל־הַ⁠מִּזְבֵּ֔חַ בְּ⁠כַפֶּרְ⁠ךָ֖ עָלָ֑י⁠ו 1 General Information: The phrase **and you shall purify the altar by making atonement for it** describes the purpose of offering the bull. You may want to use a stronger connector, or in languages that need to put purpose first you may need to re-order the clauses. Alternate translation: “And you shall offer a bull of purification for atonement daily, thus you shall purify the altar, by making atonement for it.” or “You shall purify the altar by making atonement for it: you shall offer a bull of purification daily for its atonement.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 29 37 pq5d figs-possession קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֔ים 1 Then the altar will be completely set apart to me Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy things. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extra-ordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 29 37 qk5h יִקְדָּֽשׁ 1 will be set apart to Yahweh “will also become set apart” +EXO 29 37 qk5h יִקְדָּֽשׁ 1 will be set apart to Yahweh Alternate translation: “will also become set apart” EXO 29 38 e4r9 figs-idiom בְּנֵֽי־שָׁנָ֛ה 1 General Information: This is an idiom meaning one year old. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 29 39 qxst figs-idiom בֵּ֥ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּֽיִם 1 General Information: The exact meaning of this phrase is debated. Since the priests ate many of the sacrifices it may have been offered around the time of the evening meal. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 29 40 x6i4 translate-fraction וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֨ן…רֶ֣בַע…רְבִעִ֥ית 1 a tenth…the fourth part “1/10 of … 1/4 of … 1/4 of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) +EXO 29 40 x6i4 translate-fraction וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֨ן…רֶ֣בַע…רְבִעִ֥ית 1 a tenth…the fourth part Alternate translation: “1/10 of … 1/4 of … 1/4 of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) EXO 29 40 nd8q figs-explicit וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֨ן סֹ֜לֶת 1 a tenth…the fourth part Many commentators suggest that this means one tenth of an “ephah” even though “ephah” is not written. If your translation style retains the original measurement words, you may need to insert the word you are using for “ephah” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 29 40 oxsl translate-bvolume וְ⁠עִשָּׂרֹ֨ן סֹ֜לֶת…רֶ֣בַע הַ⁠הִ֔ין…רְבִעִ֥ית הַ⁠הִ֖ין 1 a tenth…the fourth part The values given in the UST are approximations, the exact size of an ephah and hin is not precisely known. An ephah (the implied measurement) may have been around 22 liters, so this is about 2.2 liters of flour. A hin may have been around 3.7 liters, so this is about one liter of both oil and wine. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]]) EXO 29 41 ibch figs-idiom בֵּ֣ין הָ⁠עַרְבָּ֑יִם 1 a tenth…the fourth part The exact meaning of this phrase is debated. Since the priests ate many of the sacrifices it may have been offered around the time of the evening meal. See how you translated it in [verse 39](../29/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 29 42 j8cg לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 throughout your generations “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). +EXO 29 42 j8cg לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 throughout your generations Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). EXO 29 42 h5r7 figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֑ה 1 tent of meeting This means in the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 29 43 ic8i figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִקְדַּ֖שׁ בִּ⁠כְבֹדִֽ⁠י 1 the tent will be set apart for me by my glory This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “My awesome presence will dedicate the tent to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 30 intro z3yc 0 # Exodus 30 General Notes
This chapter is mostly a return to instructions for building worship equipment for the sacred tent.
The forms of you are mostly singular, however, they again refer to the workmen that Moses will instruct so you should return to whatever form you have been following in chapters 25-28.


## Structure:
- v. 1-10: Incense altar
- v. 1-6: Instructions for making the incense altar
- v. 7-10: Use of the incense altar
- v. 11-16: Ransom money for taking a census
- v. 17-21: Instructions for a washbasin
- v. 22-30: Anointing oil
- v. 22-25: Instructions for making the oil
- v. 26-33: Instructions for using the oil
v- 34-38: Making and using sacred incense

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Atonement
Through the offering of blood and money things and people were kept in God’s favor. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/atonement]])


### Holiness
Some items in this chapter became so holy that they could make other things holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])


### Unknown terms
There are a number of ingredient terms that are unknown even to scholars. +EXO 30 intro z3yc 0 # Exodus 30 General Notes

This chapter is mostly a return to instructions for building worship equipment for the sacred tent.
The forms of you are mostly singular, however, they again refer to the workmen that Moses will instruct so you should return to whatever form you have been following in chapters 25-28.


## Structure:

- v. 1-10: Incense altar
- v. 1-6: Instructions for making the incense altar
- v. 7-10: Use of the incense altar
- v. 11-16: Ransom money for taking a census
- v. 17-21: Instructions for a washbasin
- v. 22-30: Anointing oil
- v. 22-25: Instructions for making the oil
- v. 26-33: Instructions for using the oil
v- 34-38: Making and using sacred incense

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Atonement

Through the offering of blood and money things and people were kept in God’s favor. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/atonement]])


### Holiness

Some items in this chapter became so holy that they could make other things holy. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])


### Unknown terms

There are a number of ingredient terms that are unknown even to scholars. EXO 30 1 v8vb figs-you וְ⁠עָשִׂ֥יתָ 1 You must make Here **you** refers to Moses and the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 30 2 w56e translate-unknown קַרְנֹתָֽי⁠ו 1 Its horns must be made See how you translated **horns** in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 30 2 a39m translate-bdistance אַמָּ֨ה…וְ⁠אַמָּ֤ה…וְ⁠אַמָּתַ֖יִם 1 Its horns must be made You can convert these lengths to a measurement system familiar to your people if that is the style of translation that you are using. A **cubit** is approximately 46cm. For your reference, a more precise conversion to metric is: 46cm … 46cm … 94cm (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]]) @@ -2041,15 +2039,15 @@ EXO 30 4 qyg4 0 to be attached to it You may want to refer back to several oth EXO 30 4 bvxi figs-idiom לְ⁠בָתִּ֣ים 1 to be attached to it Here, **housings** means that the rings will hold the poles. Since they are where the poles belong for use, they are figuratively their **house.** If you have a similar idiom meaning “place of belonging” you may use it or you may translate the idea. Alternate translation: “to be a place for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 30 6 ulvn figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י…לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י 1 to be attached to it Here, **before the face of** means in front of. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 30 6 e87s figs-you לְ⁠ךָ֖ 1 to be attached to it Here **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -EXO 30 7 o1zo בַּ⁠בֹּ֣קֶר בַּ⁠בֹּ֗קֶר 1 General Information: “each morning” or “daily, in the morning” +EXO 30 7 o1zo בַּ⁠בֹּ֣קֶר בַּ⁠בֹּ֗קֶר 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “each morning” or “daily, in the morning” EXO 30 7 l2rl בְּ⁠הֵיטִיב֛⁠וֹ אֶת־הַ⁠נֵּרֹ֖ת 1 General Information: The lamps had burned overnight and weren’t needed during the day so he would put them out and do whatever maintenance was required for them to be ready in the evening. Alternate translation: “trims the lamps” EXO 30 8 nrgk וּ⁠בְ⁠הַעֲלֹ֨ת אַהֲרֹ֧ן אֶת־הַ⁠נֵּרֹ֛ת 1 throughout your generations This may indicate that in the morning Aaron had taken the lamps down and he would light them and then put them up on the holders in the evening. EXO 30 8 sq7x figs-idiom בֵּ֥ין הָ⁠עֲרְבַּ֖יִם 1 throughout your generations The exact meaning of this phrase is debated. See how you translated it in [29:39](../29/39.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 30 8 qm7i לְ⁠דֹרֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 throughout your generations “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). +EXO 30 8 qm7i לְ⁠דֹרֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 throughout your generations Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). EXO 30 9 ckf9 לֹא־תַעֲל֥וּ עָלָ֛י⁠ו קְטֹ֥רֶת זָרָ֖ה וְ⁠עֹלָ֣ה וּ⁠מִנְחָ֑ה 1 But you must offer Later, in [verses 34](../30/34.md) and following, God describes how to make the one sort of incense that he wants burnt on this altar. Alternate translation: “You shall only offer up the kind of incense I tell you. You shall not make burnt or grain offerings on it.” EXO 30 10 dgny grammar-connect-logic-goal קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים ה֖וּא לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 horns This last clause defines the purpose of the ritual described in this verse. See [Exo 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “This is to make it holy of holies to Yahweh.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 30 10 k6xk קַרְנֹתָ֔י⁠ו 1 horns These were projections that looked like ox horns attached to the four corners of the altar. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:2](../27/02.md). -EXO 30 10 san2 לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 throughout your generations “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). +EXO 30 10 san2 לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 throughout your generations Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). EXO 30 10 jxn0 figs-possession קֹֽדֶשׁ־קָֽדָשִׁ֥ים 1 throughout your generations Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy things. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extra-ordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 30 10 uxb4 figs-quotemarks לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 throughout your generations After **Yahweh**, the direct quote that began in [Exo 25:2](../25/02.md) ends. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with a closing first-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 30 12 dprx figs-idiom תִשָּׂ֞א אֶת־רֹ֥אשׁ 1 When you take In this context, **lift up the head** means to take a census. Alternate translation: “take a census” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2058,7 +2056,7 @@ EXO 30 12 k5p1 אִ֣ישׁ 1 a census of the Israelites The leaders only count EXO 30 13 y1kn figs-idiom כָּל־הָ⁠עֹבֵר֙ עַל־הַ⁠פְּקֻדִ֔ים 1 half a shekel of silver This is an idiom that suggests that the men were counted by walking past someone who was counting people as they walked by. Alternate translation: “Everyone counted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 30 13 i4wk translate-bweight הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל…בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל…גֵּרָה֙ הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל…הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל 1 half a shekel of silver These are units of weight. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) EXO 30 13 a2py translate-bmoney הַ⁠שֶּׁ֖קֶל…בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל…הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל…הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל 1 half a shekel of silver The **shekel** was used as both a weight and a unit of money. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]]) -EXO 30 13 w3hx translate-fraction מַחֲצִ֥ית…מַחֲצִ֣ית 1 half a shekel of silver “1/2” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) +EXO 30 13 w3hx translate-fraction מַחֲצִ֥ית…מַחֲצִ֣ית 1 half a shekel of silver Alternate translation: “1/2” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]]) EXO 30 13 nfp6 בְּ⁠שֶׁ֣קֶל הַ⁠קֹּ֑דֶשׁ עֶשְׂרִ֤ים גֵּרָה֙ הַ⁠שֶּׁ֔קֶל 1 according to the weight of the shekel of the sanctuary There were evidently shekels of more than one weight at the time. This specified which one was to be used. EXO 30 14 uqt6 figs-idiom כֹּ֗ל הָ⁠עֹבֵר֙ עַל־הַ⁠פְּקֻדִ֔ים 1 from twenty years old and up This is an idiom that suggests that the men were counted by walking past someone who was counting people as they walked by. It is the same phrase as in the [previous verse](../30/13.md). Alternate translation: “Everyone counted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 30 14 vhim figs-idiom מִ⁠בֶּ֛ן עֶשְׂרִ֥ים שָׁנָ֖ה 1 from twenty years old and up This is an idiom that refers to age. See UST and how you translated the same idiom in [Exo 7:7](../07/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2067,10 +2065,10 @@ EXO 30 15 e8xa translate-bmoney מִֽ⁠מַּחֲצִ֖ית הַ⁠שָּׁ֑ EXO 30 15 ew8p figs-123person נַפְשֹׁתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 the half shekel The plural form of you is used here. In many cases, since Yahweh is speaking to Moses about the people that will be counted, it may make more sense to change to the third person. However, Moses would be counted as well and would have to pay the ransom, so a form of you that could include Moses and all the other Israelite men would also be an appropriate translation. Alternate translation: “for their lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 30 16 z6tn וְ⁠הָיָה֩ לִ⁠בְנֵ֨י יִשְׂרָאֵ֤ל לְ⁠זִכָּרוֹן֙ לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה לְ⁠כַפֵּ֖ר עַל־נַפְשֹׁתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 It must be a reminder to the Israelites before me, to make atonement for your lives This sentence is very unclear. It is not clear who is being reminded of what. This could mean: (1) It will remind Yahweh that the Israelites have given money for their lives. Therefore he should welcome them. (2) It will remind the Israelites that they have given Yahweh money for their lives. Therefore he will welcome them. EXO 30 16 mwix figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֣י יְהוָ֔ה 1 It must be a reminder to the Israelites before me, to make atonement for your lives Here, **face** figuratively represents the presence of Yahweh. Alternate translation: “before Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 30 18 v88y translate-unknown כִּיּ֥וֹר נְחֹ֛שֶׁת 1 bronze basin “bronze bowl” or “bronze tub” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) +EXO 30 18 v88y translate-unknown כִּיּ֥וֹר נְחֹ֛שֶׁת 1 bronze basin Alternate translation: “bronze bowl” or “bronze tub” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 30 18 bh82 וְ⁠כַנּ֥⁠וֹ 1 a bronze stand This is what the basin would be put on. EXO 30 18 iq8n לְ⁠רָחְצָ֑ה 1 a basin for washing This phrase explains what the priests were to use the bronze basin for. -EXO 30 19 ivb1 מִמֶּ֑⁠נּוּ 1 water in it “in the water in the basin” +EXO 30 19 ivb1 מִמֶּ֑⁠נּוּ 1 water in it Alternate translation: “in the water in the basin” EXO 30 20 dyku grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠לֹ֣א יָמֻ֑תוּ 1 water in it The priests must wash in order to not die. If the goal of some action needs to be placed elsewhere in the structure of your language move it to the usual location. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 30 20 it0h grammar-connect-logic-goal וְ⁠לֹ֣א יָמֻ֑תוּ 1 water in it The priests must wash in order to not die. If the goal of some action needs to be placed elsewhere in the structure of your language move it to the usual location. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]]) EXO 30 21 hp35 וְ⁠הָיְתָ֨ה לָ⁠הֶ֧ם חָק־עוֹלָ֛ם ל֥⁠וֹ וּ⁠לְ⁠זַרְע֖⁠וֹ לְ⁠דֹרֹתָֽ⁠ם 1 for Aaron and his descendants throughout their people’s generations See how you translated a similar phrase in [Exodus 12:17](../12/17.md). @@ -2086,26 +2084,26 @@ EXO 30 25 yv9l translate-unknown רֹקֵ֑חַ 1 a perfumer This is a person wh EXO 30 26 u241 figs-you וּ⁠מָשַׁחְתָּ֥ 1 You must anoint Here **you** may refer to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 30 29 np7g אֹתָ֔⁠ם 1 set them apart This refers to the items listed in [Exodus 30:26-28](../30/26.md). EXO 30 29 m062 figs-possession קֹ֣דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֑ים 1 set them apart Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy things. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extra-ordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) -EXO 30 31 k4s7 לְ⁠דֹרֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 throughout your people’s generations “all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). +EXO 30 31 k4s7 לְ⁠דֹרֹתֵי⁠כֶֽם 1 throughout your people’s generations Alternate translation: “all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). EXO 30 32 rlk4 figs-activepassive עַל־בְּשַׂ֤ר אָדָם֙ לֹ֣א יִיסָ֔ךְ 1 It must not be applied to people’s skin This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “You shall not pour it on the body of a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 30 32 v3br וּ⁠בְ⁠מַ֨תְכֻּנְתּ֔⁠וֹ 1 with the same formula “and … with the same ingredients” or “and … with the same items” or “and … according to this recipe” +EXO 30 32 v3br וּ⁠בְ⁠מַ֨תְכֻּנְתּ֔⁠וֹ 1 with the same formula Alternate translation: “and … with the same ingredients” or “and … with the same items” or “and … according to this recipe” EXO 30 32 it0x grammar-connect-logic-result קֹ֣דֶשׁ ה֔וּא קֹ֖דֶשׁ יִהְיֶ֥ה לָ⁠כֶֽם 1 with the same formula The second half of this statement (**it shall be holy to you**) explains to the people the result of this oil being holy, which is, they must respect it as a holy thing. It may make more sense in some languages to move this whole statement to the beginning of the verse because the rule about pouring on someone’s body is an application of the result. Alternate translation (placed at the beginning of the verse): “Because it is sacred, you must treat it like it is sacred, therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 30 33 pa53 figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו 1 that person must be cut off from his people The metaphor **cut off** has at least three possible meanings. The following alternate translations express those: (1) “that person must be sent away” or (2) “that person will no longer be considered to be one of the people of Israel” or (3) “that person must be killed” See how you translated **cut off** in Exodus 12:15. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 30 33 yhgi figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו 1 that person must be cut off from his people The metaphor **cut off** has at least three possible meanings. They can be expressed in active form. Who will cut off that person is also not specified, it could be the Israelites or Yahweh. The following alternate translations express those: (1) “the people of Israel must send him away” or (2) “I will no longer consider him to be one of the people of Israel” or (3) “the people of Israel must kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 30 34 uo57 translate-unknown נָטָ֤ף׀ וּ⁠שְׁחֵ֨לֶת֙ וְ⁠חֶלְבְּנָ֔ה…וּ⁠לְבֹנָ֣ה זַכָּ֑ה 1 General Information: Here is a brief description of these materials, though we really do not know exactly what they are. Stacte is a resin from certain gum plants. Onycha is from certain shellfish or mollusks. Galbanum is another kind of gum resin. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 30 35 y8yj וְ⁠עָשִׂ֤יתָ אֹתָ⁠הּ֙ קְטֹ֔רֶת רֹ֖קַח מַעֲשֵׂ֣ה רוֹקֵ֑חַ 1 blended by a perfumer Possible meanings are (1) Moses was to have a perfumer do the work or (2) Moses was to do the work himself the way a perfumer would do it. See how you translated these words in [Exodus 30:25](../30/25.md). -EXO 30 36 nz2a figs-you וְ⁠שָֽׁחַקְתָּ֣…וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֨ה 1 You will grind it “You will crush it.” Here **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) +EXO 30 36 nz2a figs-you וְ⁠שָֽׁחַקְתָּ֣…וְ⁠נָתַתָּ֨ה 1 You will grind it Alternate translation: “You will crush it.” Here **you** refers to Moses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 30 36 oj2r figs-metonymy לִ⁠פְנֵ֤י 1 You will grind it Alternate translation: “in front of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 30 36 mxww figs-metonymy הָ⁠עֵדֻת֙ 1 You will grind it Here, **testimony** probably refers to the sacred chest that contained the tablets of the law. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 30 36 i71b figs-possession קֹ֥דֶשׁ קָֽדָשִׁ֖ים 1 You will grind it Here, **holy of holies** means extremely holy, as in, the holiest of the holy things. If doubling the words like this would not create this strengthening and marking as exclusive meaning in your language, you may need to find another way to express that this item would become uniquely holy. See how you translated this in [Exodus 29:37](../29/37.md). Alternate translation: “a most holy thing” or “extra-ordinarily holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]]) EXO 30 36 t8y9 figs-you לָ⁠כֶֽם 1 You will regard Here **you** is plural and refers to Moses and all the people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) EXO 30 37 dq6c figs-you תַעֲשׂ֖וּ 1 you must not make any The word **you** here refers to the people of Israel. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]]) -EXO 30 37 yv1y בְּ⁠מַ֨תְכֻּנְתָּ֔⁠הּ 1 with the same formula “with the same ingredients” or “with the same items.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 30:32](../30/32.md). -EXO 30 37 wh25 קֹ֛דֶשׁ תִּהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 It must be most holy to you “You must consider it to be most holy” +EXO 30 37 yv1y בְּ⁠מַ֨תְכֻּנְתָּ֔⁠הּ 1 with the same formula Alternate translation: “with the same ingredients” or “with the same items.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 30:32](../30/32.md). +EXO 30 37 wh25 קֹ֛דֶשׁ תִּהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ לַ⁠יהוָֽה 1 It must be most holy to you Alternate translation: “You must consider it to be most holy” EXO 30 38 xn6v לְ⁠הָרִ֣יחַ בָּ֑⁠הּ 1 perfume This could mean: (1) to enjoy the scent for oneself (2) to wear as a perfume. EXO 30 38 sa1m figs-metaphor וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו 1 must be cut off from his people The metaphor **cut off** has at least three possible meanings. The following alternate translations express those: (1) “he must be sent away” or (2) “he will no longer be considered to be one of the people of Israel” or (3) “he must be killed” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 30 38 o6v0 figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִכְרַ֖ת מֵ⁠עַמָּֽי⁠ו 1 must be cut off from his people The metaphor **cut off** has at least three possible meanings. They can be expressed in active form. Who will cut off that person is also not specified, it could be the Israelites or Yahweh. The following alternate translations express those: (1) “the people of Israel must send him away” or (2) “I will no longer consider him to be one of the people of Israel” or (3) “the people of Israel must kill him” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:15](../12/15.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 31 intro wfk7 0 # Exodus 31 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

This chapter is the end of Exodus’ recording of the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sabbath
As described in this chapter, the Sabbath is more than just a day of worship or celebration. Its significance extends beyond a way to help people rest. It is a major part of the identity of the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]]) +EXO 31 intro wfk7 0 # Exodus 31 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

This chapter is the end of Exodus’ recording of the law of Moses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lawofmoses]])

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Sabbath

As described in this chapter, the Sabbath is more than just a day of worship or celebration. Its significance extends beyond a way to help people rest. It is a major part of the identity of the Hebrew people. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sabbath]]) EXO 31 2 m8ju figs-idiom קָרָ֣אתִֽי בְ⁠שֵׁ֑ם 1 I have called by name Yahweh speaks of choosing specific people as calling them by name. Alternate translation: “I have chosen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 31 2 hf5r translate-names בְּצַלְאֵ֛ל…אוּרִ֥י…ח֖וּר 1 Bezalel…Uri…Hur These are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 31 3 f7sk figs-metaphor וָ⁠אֲמַלֵּ֥א אֹת֖⁠וֹ ר֣וּחַ אֱלֹהִ֑ים 1 I have filled Bezalel with my Spirit Yahweh speaks of giving Bezalel his spirit as if Bezalel were a container and God’s spirit were a liquid. Alternate translation: “I have given my spirit to Bezalel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2117,26 +2115,26 @@ EXO 31 6 jh61 translate-names אָהֳלִיאָ֞ב…אֲחִֽיסָמָךְ EXO 31 6 wcq7 figs-idiom וּ⁠בְ⁠לֵ֥ב כָּל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב נָתַ֣תִּי חָכְמָ֑ה 1 I have put skill into the hearts of all who are wise God speaks of making people able to make things as if he were putting the ability into their hearts. Alternate translation: “I have given skill to all who are wise” or “I have made all who are wise able to make things well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 31 11 iusb writing-pronouns יַעֲשֽׂוּ 1 I have put skill into the hearts of all who are wise **They** refers to Bezalel and Oholiab as well as the unnamed other “skilled of heart” (talented craftsmen) referred to in [verse 2](../31/02.md) and [verse 6](../30/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 31 13 bveg figs-quotemarks לֵ⁠אמֹ֔ר 1 You must certainly keep Yahweh’s Sabbath days A second-level direct quotation starts after **saying**. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by marking it with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation. There are multiple possible endings for this quotation, which will be addressed in later verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) -EXO 31 13 i1lw figs-metonymy אַ֥ךְ אֶת־שַׁבְּתֹתַ֖⁠י תִּשְׁמֹ֑רוּ 1 You must certainly keep Yahweh’s Sabbath days God speaks of obeying his instructions about the Sabbath as keeping the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “You must certainly obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 31 13 gw13 לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 throughout your people’s generations “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). +EXO 31 13 i1lw figs-metaphor אַ֥ךְ אֶת־שַׁבְּתֹתַ֖⁠י תִּשְׁמֹ֑רוּ 1 You must certainly keep Yahweh’s Sabbath days God speaks of obeying his instructions about the Sabbath as keeping the Sabbath as if it was a precious thing you guard. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “You must certainly obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EXO 31 13 gw13 לְ⁠דֹרֹ֣תֵי⁠כֶ֔ם 1 throughout your people’s generations Alternate translation: “through all the generations of your descendants.” See how you translated this in [Exodus 12:14](../12/14.md). EXO 31 14 dsya figs-quotemarks לָ⁠כֶ֑ם 1 throughout your people’s generations One possible ending place for the second-level quotation that began in the previous verse is after **to you**. The rest of Yahweh’s instructions to Moses in this section do not use the second person to address Israel directly, so you may close the second-level quotation here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]]) EXO 31 14 plq5 figs-activepassive מ֣וֹת יוּמָ֔ת 1 must surely be put to death Here, **shall surely be put to death**, can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you must surely kill” or “you must surely execute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 31 14 fz1g figs-activepassive וְ⁠נִכְרְתָ֛ה 1 must surely be cut off from his people You can express **shall be cut off** in active form. Alternate translation: “you shall cut him off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 31 15 v4dv translate-numbers שֵׁ֣שֶׁת 1 but the seventh day “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 31 15 fvga translate-ordinal הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 but the seventh day “the 7th” or “day number 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 31 15 lrat שַׁבַּ֧ת שַׁבָּת֛וֹן 1 but the seventh day “a Sabbath of complete rest” +EXO 31 15 v4dv translate-numbers שֵׁ֣שֶׁת 1 but the seventh day Alternate translation: “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 31 15 fvga translate-ordinal הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 but the seventh day Alternate translation: “the 7th” or “day number 7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 31 15 lrat שַׁבַּ֧ת שַׁבָּת֛וֹן 1 but the seventh day Alternate translation: “a Sabbath of complete rest” EXO 31 15 fxuo figs-activepassive מ֥וֹת יוּמָֽת 1 must surely be put to death Here, **shall surely be put to death**, can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “you must surely kill” or “you must surely execute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 31 16 t9hw figs-metonymy וְ⁠שָׁמְר֥וּ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל אֶת־הַ⁠שַּׁבָּ֑ת 1 must keep the Sabbath God speaks of obeying his instructions about the Sabbath as keeping the Sabbath. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel must obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 31 16 n7q2 לְ⁠דֹרֹתָ֖⁠ם 1 They must observe it throughout their people’s generations “They and all the generations of their descendants must observe it.” See how you translated “throughout their people’s generations” in [Exodus 12:42](../12/42.md). -EXO 31 16 yef8 בְּרִ֥ית עוֹלָֽם 1 lasting covenant “a covenant that will always exist” or “a lasting covenant” +EXO 31 16 t9hw figs-metaphor וְ⁠שָׁמְר֥וּ בְנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל אֶת־הַ⁠שַּׁבָּ֑ת 1 must keep the Sabbath God speaks of obeying his instructions about the Sabbath as keeping the Sabbath as if it was a precious thing you guard. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “And the sons of Israel must obey Yahweh’s instructions about the Sabbath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) +EXO 31 16 n7q2 לְ⁠דֹרֹתָ֖⁠ם 1 They must observe it throughout their people’s generations Alternate translation: “They and all the generations of their descendants must observe it.” See how you translated “throughout their people’s generations” in [Exodus 12:42](../12/42.md). +EXO 31 16 yef8 בְּרִ֥ית עוֹלָֽם 1 lasting covenant Alternate translation: “a covenant that will always exist” or “a lasting covenant” EXO 31 17 oc30 figs-activepassive וַ⁠יִּנָּפַֽשׁ 1 lasting covenant You can state this in an active manner. Alternate translation: “and he refreshed himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 31 18 xc6h figs-activepassive 1 written on by his own hand This can be translated with an active verb. Alternate translation: “which Yahweh wrote on with his own hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 32 intro vv2w 0 # Exodus 32 General Notes
## Structure and formatting

The events in verses 1-6 of this chapter occur while Moses spoke with God and therefore happen some time during the events recorded between Exodus 24:15 and Exodus 31. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])


- v. 1-6: The people ask Aaron to make them a god and he makes the golden calf
- v. 7-29 - Yahweh and Moses’ reaction
- v. 11-14 - Moses intercedes for the people
- v. 30-34 - Moses intercedes for the people

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 32:18.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Idolatry
The making of the golden calf was considered a form of idolatry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) +EXO 31 18 xc6h figs-activepassive כְּתֻבִ֖ים בְּ⁠אֶצְבַּ֥ע אֱלֹהִֽים 1 written on by his own hand This can be translated with an active verb. Alternate translation: “which Yahweh wrote on with his own hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) +EXO 32 intro vv2w 0 # Exodus 32 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

The events in verses 1-6 of this chapter occur while Moses spoke with God and therefore happen some time during the events recorded between Exodus 24:15 and Exodus 31. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])


- v. 1-6: The people ask Aaron to make them a god and he makes the golden calf
- v. 7-29 - Yahweh and Moses’ reaction
- v. 11-14 - Moses intercedes for the people
- v. 30-34 - Moses intercedes for the people

Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry in 32:18.

## Special concepts in this chapter

### Idolatry

The making of the golden calf was considered a form of idolatry. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 32 1 oan6 writing-newevent 0 the people saw This chapter begins with a major scene shift, which may need to be marked in a certain way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 32 1 cfk8 figs-metaphor וַ⁠יַּ֣רְא הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 the people saw Here understanding something is spoken of as if it were being seen. Alternate translation: “And the people realized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 32 1 lnau figs-rpronouns וַ⁠יִּקָּהֵ֨ל הָ⁠עָ֜ם 1 the people saw This means the people were not summoned by Aaron, they decided to come **gather themselves.** (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 32 1 k2i1 figs-idiom ק֣וּם 1 Come, make us an idol **Arise** strengthens the force of the command following it. The people were demanding that Aaron make an idol for them. It did not necessarily mean to literally stand up. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 32 1 mrb5 figs-metonymy יֵֽלְכוּ֙ לְ⁠פָנֵ֔י⁠נוּ 1 go before us Here, **gods that shall go before our faces** means that the Israelites want idols to lead them. Alternate translation: “shall lead us” or “shall be our leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 32 1 mrb5 figs-metonymy יֵֽלְכוּ֙ לְ⁠פָנֵ֔י⁠נוּ 1 go before us Here, **before our faces** means ahead of. The Israelites want idols to lead them. Alternate translation: “shall lead us” or “shall be our leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 32 1 wulk כִּי־זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה 1 go before us People showed disrespect by putting the word **this** before his name, as if Moses were someone they did not know and could not trust. They were creating distance between him and themselves socially. When translating, use a form in your language that communicates the same sense of disassociation between people. EXO 32 2 p86s writing-pronouns וְ⁠הָבִ֖יאוּ 1 bring them to me The word **them** refers to the golden rings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 32 3 ckg2 figs-hyperbole כָּל־הָ⁠עָ֔ם 1 All the people This refers to all the people who rejected Moses as their leader and Yahweh as their God. Later parts of the text reveal that there were people still faithful to Moses and Yahweh, and a great deal more gold. Alternate translation: “many people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]]) @@ -2167,11 +2165,11 @@ EXO 32 11 ph43 figs-metonymy וּ⁠בְ⁠יָ֥ד חֲזָקָֽה 1 a mighty EXO 32 12 r8ij figs-rquestion לָ⁠מָּה֩ יֹאמְר֨וּ מִצְרַ֜יִם לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר בְּ⁠רָעָ֤ה הֽוֹצִיאָ⁠ם֙ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֤ג אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בֶּֽ⁠הָרִ֔ים וּ֨⁠לְ⁠כַלֹּתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה 1 Why should the Egyptians say, ‘He led them out…to destroy them from the face of the earth?’ Moses used this question to try to persuade God not to destroy his people. This rhetorical question can be translated with a statement. Alternate translation: If you destroy your people, the Egyptians might say, ‘He brought them out with evil intent, to kill them in the mountains and to destroy them from on the face of the earth.’ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]]) EXO 32 12 yvez figs-quotesinquotes יֹאמְר֨וּ מִצְרַ֜יִם לֵ⁠אמֹ֗ר בְּ⁠רָעָ֤ה הֽוֹצִיאָ⁠ם֙ לַ⁠הֲרֹ֤ג אֹתָ⁠ם֙ בֶּֽ⁠הָרִ֔ים וּ֨⁠לְ⁠כַלֹּתָ֔⁠ם מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה 1 Why should the Egyptians say, ‘He led them out…to destroy them from the face of the earth?’ After **saying,** this is a second-level quote. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation.
However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage. Alternative translation: “the Egyptians say that you brought them out with evil intent, to kill them in the mountains and to destroy them from on the face of the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 32 12 kzh7 figs-metonymy מֵ⁠עַ֖ל פְּנֵ֣י הָֽ⁠אֲדָמָ֑ה 1 face of the earth Here, **face** means “surface.” Alternate translation: “from the surface of the earth” or “from the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 32 12 fns1 שׁ֚וּב מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 Turn from your burning anger “Stop your burning anger” or “Stop being so angry” +EXO 32 12 fns1 שׁ֚וּב מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 Turn from your burning anger Alternate translation: “Stop your burning anger” or “Stop being so angry” EXO 32 12 iz5q figs-idiom שׁ֚וּב מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔⁠ךָ וְ⁠הִנָּחֵ֥ם עַל־הָ⁠רָעָ֖ה לְ⁠עַמֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 Turn from your burning anger Here, Yahweh’s anger (burning nose) and plan to punish the people are spoken of as things that he could turn away from and repent of (repentence also means to turn from). This imagry may not translate into your langauge and you may need to use a different expression. Alternate translation: “Calm down and please do not stay determined to do evil to your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 12 p1df figs-idiom מֵ⁠חֲר֣וֹן אַפֶּ֔⁠ךָ 1 your burning anger This is an idiom that means anger. Alternate translation: “your terrible anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 32 13 t9sa זְכֹ֡ר 1 Call to mind Abraham “Think about” -EXO 32 13 p8jq נִשְׁבַּ֣עְתָּ 1 you swore “you made an oath” +EXO 32 13 t9sa זְכֹ֡ר 1 Call to mind Abraham Alternate translation: “Think about” +EXO 32 13 p8jq נִשְׁבַּ֣עְתָּ 1 you swore Alternate translation: “you made an oath” EXO 32 13 q1g1 וְ⁠כָל־הָ⁠אָ֨רֶץ הַ⁠זֹּ֜את אֲשֶׁ֣ר אָמַ֗רְתִּי אֶתֵּן֙ לְ⁠זַרְעֲ⁠כֶ֔ם 1 They will inherit it forever That is, the land of Canaan. EXO 32 15 cx7z figs-activepassive לֻחֹ֗ת כְּתֻבִים֙ מִ⁠שְּׁנֵ֣י עֶבְרֵי⁠הֶ֔ם מִ⁠זֶּ֥ה וּ⁠מִ⁠זֶּ֖ה הֵ֥ם כְּתֻבִֽים 1 tablets of the covenant decrees If it would be clearer in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “Yahweh had written on both the sides of the tablets, on this side and on that side he had written.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 32 16 w3ua figs-infostructure וְ⁠הַ֨⁠לֻּחֹ֔ת מַעֲשֵׂ֥ה אֱלֹהִ֖ים הֵ֑מָּה וְ⁠הַ⁠מִּכְתָּ֗ב מִכְתַּ֤ב אֱלֹהִים֙ ה֔וּא 1 The tablets were God’s own work, and the writing was God’s own writing These two sentences have an unusual structure that places emphasis on **tablets** and **writing**. If your language would emphasize these topics in a different way than moving them to the front of the sentence follow your language’s natural usage for emphasis. Alternate translation: “And the tablets themselves were the work of God. And the writing itself was the writing of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) @@ -2180,7 +2178,7 @@ EXO 32 18 r0gm writing-poetry אֵ֥ין קוֹל֙ עֲנ֣וֹת גְּבוּ EXO 32 18 m4k0 figs-parallelism אֵ֥ין קוֹל֙ עֲנ֣וֹת גְּבוּרָ֔ה וְ⁠אֵ֥ין ק֖וֹל עֲנ֣וֹת חֲלוּשָׁ֑ה ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ 1 he said to Moses The poetic form here is parallelism in the repetition of **sound of singing**. If it would be unclear to say that Moses heard **the sound of singing** in the third line after saying he didn’t hear the sound of singing twice before, something more like the UST may be followed that is more contrastive. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 32 18 fdg8 figs-explicit ק֣וֹל עַנּ֔וֹת אָנֹכִ֖י שֹׁמֵֽעַ 1 he said to Moses If it is unclear to say that Moses hears **the sound of singing** after twice saying he didn’t hear that, you may want to make the type of singing explicit. Consider referring to your translation of the last word of [verse 6](../32/06.md) (to play in the ULT). Alternate translation: “the sound of playful singing I hear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 32 19 hr2j figs-idiom וַ⁠יִּֽחַר־אַ֣ף 1 the tablets This is an idiom for being angry. Alternate translation: “And Moses was very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 32 19 d8zo תַּ֥חַת 1 the tablets “at the bottom of” +EXO 32 19 d8zo תַּ֥חַת 1 the tablets Alternate translation: “at the bottom of” EXO 32 21 du5l figs-quotesinquotes וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר מֹשֶׁה֙ אֶֽל־אַהֲרֹ֔ן מֶֽה־עָשָׂ֥ה לְ⁠ךָ֖ הָ⁠עָ֣ם הַ⁠זֶּ֑ה כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖י⁠ו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה׃ 1 Then Moses said to Aaron, “What did this people…a great sin on them?” Moses’ question is a second-level quote. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation.
However, you may want to translate this as an indirect quotation in order to reduce the layers of quotations in this passage.. Alternate translation: “Then Moses asked Aaron what the people did to him, that he had brought such a great sin on them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 32 21 np73 figs-metaphor כִּֽי־הֵבֵ֥אתָ עָלָ֖י⁠ו חֲטָאָ֥ה גְדֹלָֽה 1 you have brought such a great sin on them Moses spoke of causing people to sin as if sin were an object and Aaron put it on them. Alternate translation: “that you have caused them to sin greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 32 22 z2ch figs-idiom אַל־יִ֥חַר אַ֖ף 1 Do not let your anger burn hot This is an idiom for anger. Alternate translation: “Do not be angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2191,12 +2189,12 @@ EXO 32 23 zn68 זֶ֣ה׀ מֹשֶׁ֣ה הָ⁠אִ֗ישׁ 1 this Moses Peopl EXO 32 24 yq7s figs-quotesinquotes וָ⁠אֹמַ֤ר לָ⁠הֶם֙ לְ⁠מִ֣י זָהָ֔ב הִתְפָּרָ֖קוּ 1 So I said to them, ‘Whoever has any gold, let him take it off.’ **Whoever has gold, take it off yourself** is a second-level quotation. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this with second-level quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation within a quotation.
However, this can be stated as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “So I told them that whoever had any gold should take it off” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]]) EXO 32 24 yy82 figs-rpronouns הִתְפָּרָ֖קוּ 1 So I said to them, ‘Whoever has any gold, let him take it off.’ He instructs people to take their own gold off. Alternate translation: “you take off your own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]]) EXO 32 24 wvin grammar-connect-logic-result וָ⁠אַשְׁלִכֵ֣⁠הוּ בָ⁠אֵ֔שׁ וַ⁠יֵּצֵ֖א הָ⁠עֵ֥גֶל הַ⁠זֶּֽה 1 So I said to them, ‘Whoever has any gold, let him take it off.’ Aaron claims an unusual sequence of events here. The translation should surprise an audience unfamiliar with the story. He states that the result of simply throwing gold in the fire is the apperance (by its own power or volition it seems) of the calf. This is a lie. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) -EXO 32 25 ck1f פָרֻ֖עַ 1 were running wild “were behaving wildly” or “were not controlling themselves” +EXO 32 25 ck1f פָרֻ֖עַ 1 were running wild Alternate translation: “were behaving wildly” or “were not controlling themselves” EXO 32 25 csg0 grammar-collectivenouns כִּ֥י פָרֻ֖עַ ה֑וּא כִּֽי־פְרָעֹ֣⁠ה אַהֲרֹ֔ן 1 were running wild Here, the pronoun **it** agrees with the grammatical number of **people** (singular). Alternate translation: “that they were let loose, for Aaron had let them loose” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 32 26 jis7 figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֕אמֶר מִ֥י לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה אֵלָ֑⁠י 1 Then Moses stood at the entrance…“Whoever is on Yahweh’s side, come to me.” You can state this as an indirect quote. Alternate translation: “and said that whoever was for Yahweh should come to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 32 26 ryb5 figs-idiom מִ֥י לַ⁠יהוָ֖ה 1 Whoever is on Yahweh’s side Moses speaks of being loyal to Yahweh as being **for Yahweh**. Alternate translation: “Whoever serves Yahweh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 32 27 xsl3 עִבְר֨וּ וָ⁠שׁ֜וּבוּ מִ⁠שַּׁ֤עַר לָ⁠שַׁ֨עַר֙ בַּֽ⁠מַּחֲנֶ֔ה 1 go back and forth from entrance to entrance “Go from side of the camp to the other, starting at one entrance to the camp and going to the entrance on the other side of the camp” -EXO 32 28 at4i translate-numbers כִּ⁠שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת אַלְפֵ֖י 1 three thousand of the people “about three thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 32 27 xsl3 עִבְר֨וּ וָ⁠שׁ֜וּבוּ מִ⁠שַּׁ֤עַר לָ⁠שַׁ֨עַר֙ בַּֽ⁠מַּחֲנֶ֔ה 1 go back and forth from entrance to entrance Alternate translation: “Go from side of the camp to the other, starting at one entrance to the camp and going to the entrance on the other side of the camp” +EXO 32 28 at4i translate-numbers כִּ⁠שְׁלֹ֥שֶׁת אַלְפֵ֖י 1 three thousand of the people Alternate translation: “about three thousand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 32 29 to5d figs-idiom מִלְא֨וּ יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם 1 You have been placed into Yahweh’s service This seems to be an idiom for giving authority to someone. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:41](../28/41.md). However, this usage is different from that text as here it is not specified what authority they are given or what they are consecrated for other than **for Yahweh**. Alternate translation: “Consecrate yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 32 29 rkp6 מִלְא֨וּ יֶדְ⁠כֶ֤ם הַ⁠יּוֹם֙ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה 1 You have been placed into Yahweh’s service Here it is unclear if **fill** should be rightly understood in the past or as a command. You may want to follow the decision of another translation your people are familiar with. Alternate translation: “You have filled your hand for Yahweh today” EXO 32 29 c6fg figs-explicit כִּ֛י אִ֥ישׁ בִּ⁠בְנ֖⁠וֹ וּ⁠בְ⁠אָחִ֑י⁠ו 1 for each of you has taken action against his son and his brother The fact that they did this in obedience to God can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “for you have obeyed Yahweh and killed your sons and your brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2205,11 +2203,11 @@ EXO 32 30 kvj4 figs-doublet חֲטָאתֶ֖ם חֲטָאָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה EXO 32 30 r5fn figs-abstractnouns חֲטָאתֶ֖ם חֲטָאָ֣ה גְדֹלָ֑ה 1 You have committed a very great sin If your language does not use an abstract noun for **sin**, you could express the idea behind it in another way. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 32 31 ccpg figs-doublet חָטָ֞א הָ⁠עָ֤ם הַ⁠זֶּה֙ חֲטָאָ֣ה 1 You have committed a very great sin Here, **sin** is repeated as a verb and then noun for emphasis. Along with **great** it suggests that the people sinned very very badly. If the repetition of words in this way would not create emphasis use another form in your language that does. Alternate translation: “this people has sinned extremally badly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 32 31 y049 figs-abstractnouns חֲטָאָ֣ה 1 You have committed a very great sin If your language does not use an abstract noun for **sin**, you could express the idea behind it in another way. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) -EXO 32 31 yeta אֱלֹהֵ֥י 1 You have committed a very great sin “a god” +EXO 32 31 yeta אֱלֹהֵ֥י 1 You have committed a very great sin Alternate translation: “a god” EXO 32 32 brpu figs-ellipsis וְ⁠עַתָּ֖ה אִם־תִּשָּׂ֣א חַטָּאתָ֑⁠ם 1 blot me out of the book Moses leaves out his conclusion, perhaps as a way of making this conditional phrase into a request, perhaps to avoid suggesting to God what would be good for him to do. However, if leaving out a conclusion would be misunderstood in your language you may need to rephrase it or add the implied conclusion. Alternate translation: “But now, if you forgive their sin, good!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) -EXO 32 32 c72y figs-metonymy מְחֵ֣⁠נִי 1 blot me out of the book The word “me” here refers to the name of Moses. Alternate translation: “erase my name from the book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 32 32 c72y figs-metonymy מְחֵ֣⁠נִי 1 blot me out of the book Here, **me** refers to the name of Moses. Alternate translation: “erase my name from the book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 32 32 ahb3 figs-explicit כָּתָֽבְתָּ 1 the book that you have written What God had written in the book can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “the book in which you have written the names of your people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 32 33 igb4 figs-metonymy אֶמְחֶ֖⁠נּוּ מִ⁠סִּפְרִֽ⁠י 1 that person I will blot out of my book Here, “him” represents that person’s name. Alternate translation: “I will erase that person’s name from my book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 32 33 igb4 figs-metonymy אֶמְחֶ֖⁠נּוּ מִ⁠סִּפְרִֽ⁠י 1 that person I will blot out of my book Here, **him** represents that person’s name. Alternate translation: “I will erase that person’s name from my book” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 32 33 qwk9 מִ⁠סִּפְרִֽ⁠י 1 my book This refers to the book of Yahweh that Moses spoke of in [Exodus 32:32](../32/32.md). EXO 32 34 xn8p grammar-connect-logic-result וּ⁠בְ⁠י֣וֹם פָּקְדִ֔⁠י וּ⁠פָקַדְתִּ֥י עֲלֵי⁠הֶ֖ם חַטָּאתָֽ⁠ם 1 But on the day that I punish them, I will punish them Yahweh makes it clear that he will punish the people because they sinned by making and worshipping the idol. If it would be more clear in your language to place the reason first you may consider reordering the clauses. Alternate translation: “However, because they sinned, one day I will come to punish them.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 32 35 wv1v figs-explicit עָשׂ֣וּ אֶת־הָ⁠עֵ֔גֶל אֲשֶׁ֥ר עָשָׂ֖ה אַהֲרֹֽן 1 they had made the calf, the one that Aaron made The first **made** here could mean (1) “do” which could imply worship (2) the people are being spoken of as having made the calf themselves (as well as Aaron) because they demanded it and gave their gold for it. Alternate translation: “they had worshiped the calf that Aaron made” or “they were guilty along with Aaron of making the calf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) @@ -2275,23 +2273,23 @@ EXO 33 19 gzr5 figs-metonymy עַל־פָּנֶ֔י⁠ךָ…לְ⁠פָנֶ֑י EXO 33 19 d4z9 וְ⁠קָרָ֧אתִֽי בְ⁠שֵׁ֛ם יְהוָ֖ה 1 I will make all my goodness pass before you The meaning of the phrase is unclear. It may mean that Yahweh will disclose something about his character to Moses. Alternate translation: “and I will proclaim my name, ‘Yahweh,’ ” EXO 33 19 vqq6 figs-parallelism וְ⁠חַנֹּתִי֙ אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֣ר אָחֹ֔ן וְ⁠רִחַמְתִּ֖י אֶת־אֲשֶׁ֥ר אֲרַחֵֽם 1 I will make all my goodness pass before you These statements use parallelism internally and between each other. They stress Yahweh’s divine prerogative to do whatever he wants. The structure also parallels Yahweh’s I AM statements in [Exodus 3:14](../03/14.md). If this form of parallelism would be misunderstood in your language, consider another form that emphasizes that Yahweh is graciously kind to exactly and only those whom he chooses without outside influence. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]]) EXO 33 20 c20q writing-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֕אמֶר 1 I will make all my goodness pass before you In some languages it may be better not to stop and restart the quotation by omitting **And he said** at the start of this verse. Yahweh is speaking from
33:19-34:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -EXO 33 20 fyc0 כִּ֛י לֹֽא־יִרְאַ֥⁠נִי הָ⁠אָדָ֖ם וָ⁠חָֽי 1 I will make all my goodness pass before you “because no person can live after he has seen me” +EXO 33 20 fyc0 כִּ֛י לֹֽא־יִרְאַ֥⁠נִי הָ⁠אָדָ֖ם וָ⁠חָֽי 1 I will make all my goodness pass before you Alternate translation: “because no person can live after he has seen me” EXO 33 21 loep writing-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר יְהוָ֔ה 1 I will make all my goodness pass before you In some languages it may be better not to stop and restart the quotation by omitting **And Yahweh said** at the start of this verse. Yahweh is speaking from 33:19-34:3. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) -EXO 33 21 s4iy הִנֵּ֥ה 1 See “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you.” +EXO 33 21 s4iy הִנֵּ֥ה 1 See Alternate translation: “Look” or “Listen” or “Pay attention to what I am about to tell you.” EXO 33 22 qhe6 figs-metaphor בַּ⁠עֲבֹ֣ר כְּבֹדִ֔⁠י 1 See Yahweh speaks of his **glory** like it was an object that he could move over Moses. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you may need to change or remove the figure. Alternate translation: “while I pass over gloriously” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 33 22 o5as figs-abstractnouns כְּבֹדִ֔⁠י 1 See In languages without abstract nouns you may need to change **glory** to another form. See UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 33 22 ivf5 figs-personification וְ⁠שַׂכֹּתִ֥י כַפִּ֛⁠י עָלֶ֖י⁠ךָ 1 See Here, Yahweh speaks as if he had hands like a person that could cover things. If this would be misunderstood in your language you could use a simile to keep the image as this figure is important to keep and extends into the next verse. Alternate translation: “I will cover you like with a hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 33 23 fmu8 figs-personification וַ⁠הֲסִרֹתִי֙ אֶת־כַּפִּ֔⁠י וְ⁠רָאִ֖יתָ אֶת־אֲחֹרָ֑⁠י וּ⁠פָנַ֖⁠י לֹ֥א יֵרָאֽוּ 1 you will see my back The strong personification image of Yahweh continues throughout this verse and should be kept if possible. You may have to use similes if this would be misunderstood in your culture. Alternate translation: “Then it will be like I stop covering you with a hand and you will see a small part of my glory, like a person’s back, but not my full glory, like a person’s face.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]]) EXO 33 23 jq7t grammar-connect-logic-contrast וּ⁠פָנַ֖⁠י 1 you will see my back Here, **but my face** is moved to the front of the clause to emphasize contrast with **my back**. If your language has a certain way of contrasting elements be sure to make a strong contrast between Yahweh’s face and back. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) EXO 33 23 gw1n figs-activepassive וּ⁠פָנַ֖⁠י לֹ֥א יֵרָאֽוּ 1 but my face will not be seen This can be expressed in active form. Alternate translation: “but you will not see my face” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 34 intro smp6 0 # Exodus 34 General Notes
## Outline
- v. 1-4 Yahweh orders Moses to return to the mountain
- v. 5-9 Yahweh reveals himself to Moses and Moses reacts
- v. 10-28 Covenant renewal
- v. 29-34 Moses reports to Israel

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

- In verse 1, Yahweh says he will write on stone tablets, yet later (v. 27-28) he commands Moses to write and the text says Moses writes.
- Yahweh reveals something significant about himself or his character to Moses. There are a number of difficult terms and concepts.
- The biblical metaphor of true worship as sexual fidelity appears in v. 14-16.
- Several verses are repeated either exactly or closely from earlier chapters.
- In v. 12-26 Yahweh appears to give a different 10 commandments from those in Exodus 20 (but also largely repeated from other earlier parts of Exodus) raising the question of what was actually written on the stone tablets in v. 28.
- The concept of Moses’s shining face may be difficult in some cultures.

### “He will bring the punishment for the fathers’ sin on their children”
This phrase does not mean that a child is necessarily punished for the sins of their parents. Many scholars believe that this passage indicates that a parent’s sins will have consequences that will affect their children and grandchildren. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) +EXO 34 intro smp6 0 # Exodus 34 General Notes

## Outline

- v. 1-4 Yahweh orders Moses to return to the mountain
- v. 5-9 Yahweh reveals himself to Moses and Moses reacts
- v. 10-28 Covenant renewal
- v. 29-34 Moses reports to Israel

## Possible translation difficulties in this chapter

- In verse 1, Yahweh says he will write on stone tablets, yet later (v. 27-28) he commands Moses to write and the text says Moses writes.
- Yahweh reveals something significant about himself or his character to Moses. There are a number of difficult terms and concepts.
- The biblical metaphor of true worship as sexual fidelity appears in v. 14-16.
- Several verses are repeated either exactly or closely from earlier chapters.
- In v. 12-26 Yahweh appears to give a different 10 commandments from those in Exodus 20 (but also largely repeated from other earlier parts of Exodus) raising the question of what was actually written on the stone tablets in v. 28.
- The concept of Moses’s shining face may be difficult in some cultures.

### “He will bring the punishment for the fathers’ sin on their children”

This phrase does not mean that a child is necessarily punished for the sins of their parents. Many scholars believe that this passage indicates that a parent’s sins will have consequences that will affect their children and grandchildren. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]]) EXO 34 1 ppyw writing-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֤אמֶר יְהוָה֙ אֶל־מֹשֶׁ֔ה 1 tablets of stone Yahweh continues to speak to Moses, but there is a change of topic here so you may want to retain the speech introduction. However, if it would be misunderstood, you could simply continue the quotation from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “Yahweh continued” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]]) EXO 34 1 zf77 figs-infostructure אֲשֶׁ֥ר שִׁבַּֽרְתָּ 1 tablets of stone This clause reminds the reader of what tablets are being mentioned by reminding you of what had happened to the previous tablets. If it would be more helpful to attach it to the first mention of the tablets in this verse in your language you could rearrange it like the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -EXO 34 1 s1kv לֻחֹ֥ת אֲבָנִ֖ים 1 tablets of stone “flat slabs of stone” See how you translated this in [Exodus 31:18](../31/18.md) +EXO 34 1 s1kv לֻחֹ֥ת אֲבָנִ֖ים 1 tablets of stone Alternate translation: “flat slabs of stone” See how you translated this in [Exodus 31:18](../31/18.md) EXO 34 3 ck6d figs-metonymy וְ⁠גַם־אִ֥ישׁ אַל־יֵרָ֖א בְּ⁠כָל־הָ⁠הָ֑ר 1 Do not let anyone else be seen anywhere on the mountain Being seen doing something represents doing that. Alternate translation: “Do not let anyone else be anywhere on the mountain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 34 3 x3rx גַּם־הַ⁠צֹּ֤אן וְ⁠הַ⁠בָּקָר֙ אַל־יִרְע֔וּ אֶל־מ֖וּל הָ⁠הָ֥ר הַ⁠הֽוּא 1 No flocks or herds are even to graze in front of the mountain “Even flocks or herds are not allowed to come near the mountain to eat.” +EXO 34 3 x3rx גַּם־הַ⁠צֹּ֤אן וְ⁠הַ⁠בָּקָר֙ אַל־יִרְע֔וּ אֶל־מ֖וּל הָ⁠הָ֥ר הַ⁠הֽוּא 1 No flocks or herds are even to graze in front of the mountain Alternate translation: “Even flocks or herds are not allowed to come near the mountain to eat.” EXO 34 5 sp7f writing-pronouns וַ⁠יִּתְיַצֵּ֥ב עִמּ֖⁠וֹ שָׁ֑ם וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֥א 1 stood with Moses there The pronouns are not clear here, but the referents are probably as in the following alternate translation: “and Yahweh stood with Moses there and Yahweh proclaimed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) -EXO 34 5 r9ey figs-metonymy וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֥א בְ⁠שֵׁ֖ם יְהוָֽה 1 he pronounced the name “Yahweh.” Possible meanings are (1) “he spoke the name ‘Yahweh.’” or (2) “he proclaimed who Yahweh is.” For the second meaning, **name** would represent who God is. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 34 5 r9ey figs-metonymy וַ⁠יִּקְרָ֥א בְ⁠שֵׁ֖ם יְהוָֽה 1 he pronounced the name “Yahweh.” Possible meanings include: (1) “he spoke the name ‘Yahweh’” (2) “he proclaimed who Yahweh is” For the second meaning, **name** would represent who God is. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 34 6 fz1q figs-123person יְהוָ֣ה׀ יְהוָ֔ה אֵ֥ל רַח֖וּם וְ⁠חַנּ֑וּן 1 Yahweh, Yahweh, God is merciful and gracious God is speaking about himself. Alternate translation: “I, Yahweh, am God, and I am merciful and gracious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]]) EXO 34 6 t0kd figs-doublet רַח֖וּם וְ⁠חַנּ֑וּן 1 Yahweh, Yahweh, God is merciful and gracious This is a doublet emphasizing that Yahweh cares for people and acts kindly towards them. If a doublet would not strengthen the statement here in your language consider another form that would. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]]) EXO 34 6 f7iq figs-idiom אֶ֥רֶךְ אַפַּ֖יִם 1 Yahweh, Yahweh, God is merciful and gracious This is an idiom that means Yahweh does not get angry easily or quickly. Alternate translation: “slow to anger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) @@ -2331,9 +2329,9 @@ EXO 34 12 b459 figs-metaphor תִּכְרֹ֤ת בְּרִית֙ 1 General Infor EXO 34 12 tnka grammar-collectivenouns לְ⁠יוֹשֵׁ֣ב…יִהְיֶ֥ה 1 General Information: The word **inhabitant** is a singular noun that refers to any individual inhabitant or group of inhabitants from the peoples mentioned in the previous verse. The pronoun **he** is agreeing with that singular noun. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “with the inhabitants of … they become” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 34 12 lxz8 figs-simile פֶּן־יִהְיֶ֥ה לְ⁠מוֹקֵ֖שׁ בְּ⁠קִרְבֶּֽ⁠ךָ 1 they will become a trap among you People who tempt others to sin are spoken of as if they were a **trap.** Alternate translation: “lest those remaining people tempt you to sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]]) EXO 34 13 wkbx grammar-connect-logic-contrast כִּ֤י 1 they will become a trap among you This word marks a strong contrast with the previous verse. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Do the opposite!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]]) -EXO 34 15 r70f grammar-collectivenouns לְ⁠יוֹשֵׁ֣ב…וְ⁠קָרָ֣א…מִ⁠זִּבְחֽ⁠וֹ 1 General Information: The word **inhabitant** is a singular noun that refers to any individual inhabitant or group of inhabitants from the peoples mentioned in the previous verse. The pronouns **he** and **his** are agreeing with that singular noun. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. See how you translated this in [verse 12](../34/12.md). Alternate translation: “with the inhabitants of … and they invite … from their sacrifice” or “with the inhabitants of … and one of them invites … from his sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 34 13 tfd1 figs-infostructure אֶת־מִזְבְּחֹתָ⁠ם֙ תִּתֹּצ֔וּ⁠ן וְ⁠אֶת־מַצֵּבֹתָ֖⁠ם תְּשַׁבֵּר֑וּ⁠ן וְ⁠אֶת־אֲשֵׁרָ֖י⁠ו תִּכְרֹתֽוּ⁠ן 1 they will become a trap among you This unusual word order reflects the original in bringing each item the Israelites must destroy into focus. You should use whatever form in your language would emphasize or focus on each item that they must destroy. Alternate translation: “as for their altars, break them down! As for their stone pillars, smash them to pieces! As for their trees where they worship the goddess Asherah, cut them all down!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) EXO 34 13 gbp0 grammar-collectivenouns תִּכְרֹתֽוּ⁠ן 1 they will become a trap among you For some reason only this pronoun is singular, referring back the singular “inhabitant” in the previous verse. Translate it based on your decision in the previous verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) +EXO 34 15 r70f grammar-collectivenouns לְ⁠יוֹשֵׁ֣ב…וְ⁠קָרָ֣א…מִ⁠זִּבְחֽ⁠וֹ 1 General Information: The word **inhabitant** is a singular noun that refers to any individual inhabitant or group of inhabitants from the peoples mentioned in the previous verse. The pronouns **he** and **his** are agreeing with that singular noun. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. See how you translated this in [verse 12](../34/12.md). Alternate translation: “with the inhabitants of … and they invite … from their sacrifice” or “with the inhabitants of … and one of them invites … from his sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]]) EXO 34 14 fzjz translate-symaction לֹ֥א תִֽשְׁתַּחֲוֶ֖ה 1 Yahweh, whose name is Jealous To **bow to another god** means to worship it. This imagery is throughout scripture and should be retained in translation. Alternate translation: “you shall not bow to worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]]) EXO 34 14 vmx2 figs-metaphor כִּ֤י יְהוָה֙ קַנָּ֣א שְׁמ֔⁠וֹ אֵ֥ל קַנָּ֖א הֽוּא׃ 1 Yahweh, whose name is Jealous The repeated word **jealous** means that God is concerned to keep his honor. If his people worship other gods, he loses honor, because when his people do not honor him, other people also will not honor him. This is pictured in a metaphor of a jealous spouse who is concerned that his spouse be faithful to him. This is an important Biblical metaphor that should be kept in translation if at all possible. The UST makes this image explicit as a simile, which can be done occasionally but would probably be too long for repeated use in a translation. Alternate translation: “Yahweh jealously guards his reputation. He is a God jealous of his honor.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 34 14 s5sd figs-metonymy כִּ֤י יְהוָה֙ קַנָּ֣א שְׁמ֔⁠וֹ 1 whose name is Jealous, Here, the word **name** represents God’s character. Alternate translation: “Yahweh is always jealous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) @@ -2353,17 +2351,17 @@ EXO 34 16 p98a grammar-connect-logic-result וְ⁠הִזְנוּ֙ אֶת־בּ EXO 34 17 lgab 0 you will eat some of his sacrifice The prohibition here is focused on making gods. In your translation make sure that the focus is not on the method, but the god-making. EXO 34 17 rux0 מַסֵּכָ֖ה 1 you will eat some of his sacrifice See how you translated **molten metal** in [Exodus 32:4](../32/04.md). EXO 34 18 s1rr 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to most of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md). -EXO 34 18 u5be translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֨ת 1 seven days “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 34 18 u5be translate-numbers שִׁבְעַ֨ת 1 seven days Alternate translation: “7” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) EXO 34 18 i5ck translate-hebrewmonths הָ⁠אָבִ֑יב…הָֽ⁠אָבִ֔יב 1 in the month of Aviv This is the name of the first month of the Hebrew calendar. **Aviv** is during the last part of March and the first part of April on Western calendars. See how you translated **Aviv** in [Exodus 13:4](../13/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-hebrewmonths]]) EXO 34 19 ly7d 0 General Information: This verse is similar to [Exodus 13:12](../13/12.md). EXO 34 20 sbrs 0 buy back This verse is very similar to [Exodus 13:13](../13/13.md). EXO 34 20 j4tv figs-explicit בְ⁠שֶׂ֔ה…וַ⁠עֲרַפְתּ֑⁠וֹ 1 buy back You may need to make explicit that either the **lamb** or **donkey** must be killed, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) -EXO 34 20 c5ow לֹ֥א תִפְדֶּ֖ה 1 buy back “you do not ransom the donkey” +EXO 34 20 c5ow לֹ֥א תִפְדֶּ֖ה 1 buy back Alternate translation: “you do not ransom the donkey” EXO 34 20 yz8x כֹּ֣ל בְּכ֤וֹר בָּנֶ֨י⁠ךָ֙ תִּפְדֶּ֔ה 1 buy back Firstborn sons and firstborn donkeys belonged to Yahweh, but Yahweh did not want them sacrificed to Him. Instead, the Israelites were to sacrifice a lamb in their place. This allowed the Israelites to buy the donkeys and sons back from Yahweh. EXO 34 20 u2p5 figs-doublenegatives וְ⁠לֹֽא־יֵרָא֥וּ פָנַ֖⁠י רֵיקָֽם 1 No one may appear before me empty-handed Here understatement is used to emphasize that the Israelites must bring a suitable offering to Yahweh. This portion of the verse is identical to the end of [Exodus 23:15](../23/15.md). Alternate translation: “come to me without a proper offering” or “always bring an offering to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]]) EXO 34 21 w9ed 0 General Information: This command is similar to that in [Exodus 20:9](../20/09.md). -EXO 34 21 n2ka translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 General Information: “but on day seven” Here **seventh** is the ordinal number for 7. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) -EXO 34 21 swm8 בֶּ⁠חָרִ֥ישׁ וּ⁠בַ⁠קָּצִ֖יר 1 Even at plowing time and in harvest “Even when you are preparing the soil or gathering the crops” +EXO 34 21 n2ka translate-ordinal וּ⁠בַ⁠יּ֥וֹם הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֖י 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “but on day seven” Here **seventh** is the ordinal number for 7. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 34 21 swm8 בֶּ⁠חָרִ֥ישׁ וּ⁠בַ⁠קָּצִ֖יר 1 Even at plowing time and in harvest Alternate translation: “Even when you are preparing the soil or gathering the crops” EXO 34 22 lhxb 0 Festival of Ingathering This verse is similar to [Exodus 23:16](../23/16.md), however the first festival is named **Festival of Weeks** here and “Festival of the Harvest” in 23:16. EXO 34 22 d13l וְ⁠חַג֙ הָֽ⁠אָסִ֔יף 1 Festival of Ingathering This festival celebrated the final harvesting of all the crops for the year. This festival was also known as the Festival of Shelters or the Festival of Booths. The idea came from the practice of the farmers living in temporary booths, or huts, out in the fields to guard the crop as it ripened. See Deuteronomy 16:13. See how you translated this in [Exodus 23:16](../23/16.md). Alternate translation: “and the Festival of the Ingathering” EXO 34 22 xqy4 figs-metaphor תְּקוּפַ֖ת הַ⁠שָּׁנָֽה 1 Festival of Ingathering Like “the exiting of the year” in [Exodus 23:16](../23/16.md), this refers to the end of the year. Here, the year is pictured as something that can turn. Which, thinking of the planet, is highly astronomically accurate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) @@ -2372,29 +2370,29 @@ EXO 34 23 iagy figs-metonymy יֵרָאֶה֙…אֶת־פְּנֵ֛י הָֽ⁠ EXO 34 25 zx2v 0 General Information: See the very similar [Exodus 23:18](../23/18.md). EXO 34 25 e8v2 figs-explicit דַּם־זִבְחִ֑⁠י 1 the blood of my sacrifice The fact that the blood is from an animal can be stated clearly. Alternate translation: “the blood of an animal that you sacrifice to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]]) EXO 34 26 bv0a 0 the blood of my sacrifice This verse is identical to [Exodus 23:19](../23/19.md). -EXO 34 27 x6j9 כִּ֞י עַל־פִּ֣י׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 the blood of my sacrifice “for in accordance with these words” or “for according to these words” +EXO 34 27 x6j9 כִּ֞י עַל־פִּ֣י׀ הַ⁠דְּבָרִ֣ים הָ⁠אֵ֗לֶּה 1 the blood of my sacrifice Alternate translation: “for in accordance with these words” or “for according to these words” EXO 34 27 ybz6 figs-metaphor כָּרַ֧תִּי אִתְּ⁠ךָ֛ בְּרִ֖ית 1 the blood of my sacrifice To **cut a covenant** means to make a covenant. The terminology refers to ancient rituals around making covenants which is illustrated in Genesis 15. See UST. See how you translated this in [verse 12](../34/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) -EXO 34 28 j9t4 translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֖רֶת 1 forty days “10” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 34 28 wt1c אַרְבָּעִ֥ים יוֹם֙ וְ⁠אַרְבָּעִ֣ים לַ֔יְלָה 1 for forty days and nights “for 40 days, including the nights” +EXO 34 28 j9t4 translate-numbers עֲשֶׂ֖רֶת 1 forty days Alternate translation: “10” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 34 28 wt1c אַרְבָּעִ֥ים יוֹם֙ וְ⁠אַרְבָּעִ֣ים לַ֔יְלָה 1 for forty days and nights Alternate translation: “for 40 days, including the nights” EXO 34 28 yun2 writing-pronouns וַ⁠יִּכְתֹּ֣ב 1 He wrote Here, **he** probably refers to Moses, based on Yahweh’s command in the previous verse. However, [Exodus 34:1](../34/01.md) opens the possibility that Yahweh wrote. It is best to leave it ambiguous, but if you must specify, saying Moses is better. Alternate translation: “Moses wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]]) EXO 34 29 t1s0 writing-newevent וַ⁠יְהִ֗י 1 had become radiant This marks a change of scene which you should mark in a natural way in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 34 29 x70x figs-infostructure וַ⁠יְהִ֗י בְּ⁠רֶ֤דֶת מֹשֶׁה֙ מֵ⁠הַ֣ר סִינַ֔י וּ⁠שְׁנֵ֨י לֻחֹ֤ת הָֽ⁠עֵדֻת֙ בְּ⁠יַד־מֹשֶׁ֔ה בְּ⁠רִדְתּ֖⁠וֹ מִן־הָ⁠הָ֑ר 1 had become radiant The statement about Moses’ descent from the mountain is repeated almost verbatim, but does not refer to two events. If this would be misunderstood you may need to state it only once in translation as in the UST. Alternate translation: “Then Moses came down from Mount Sinai. As he was coming down from the mountain, he was carrying the two tablets of the testimony in his hands.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) EXO 34 29 yagj figs-infostructure וּ⁠מֹשֶׁ֣ה לֹֽא־יָדַ֗ע כִּ֥י קָרַ֛ן ע֥וֹר פָּנָ֖י⁠ו בְּ⁠דַבְּר֥⁠וֹ אִתּֽ⁠וֹ 1 had become radiant In some languages it will make more sense to state that Moses’ **face shone** before saying that he **did not know that** as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]]) -EXO 34 29 d9zk קָרַ֛ן 1 had become radiant “became radiant” +EXO 34 29 d9zk קָרַ֛ן 1 had become radiant Alternate translation: “became radiant” EXO 34 30 yn9s grammar-connect-logic-result וַ⁠יִּֽירְא֖וּ 1 had become radiant They were afraid because of his bright face. Alternate translation: “because of that, they were afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]]) EXO 34 32 kt23 וַ⁠יְצַוֵּ֕⁠ם אֵת֩ כָּל־אֲשֶׁ֨ר דִּבֶּ֧ר יְהוָ֛ה אִתּ֖⁠וֹ 1 all the commands that Yahweh had given him This means that Moses commanded the Israelites to obey everything Yahweh had commanded Moses to command the Israelites to do. EXO 34 34 fzm1 grammar-connect-time-background 0 he would remove This and the next verse give a general statement about Moses’s practice for an unstated amount of time (it was probably from this point until his death as he continued to talk to Yahweh). You should mark this with a form in your language that is used for on-going action like **would** and the UST’s “Whenever.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]]) EXO 34 34 m1sv figs-activepassive יְצֻוֶּֽה 1 what he was commanded This can be stated in active form. Alternate translation: “Yahweh had commanded him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) -EXO 35 intro lew9 0 # Exodus 35 General Notes
## Translation issues in this chapter


- In the last chapter some repetition of Yahweh’s instructions began, mostly around the covenant commands. Starting in this chapter and even more so in chapter 36, the commands regarding the construction of the tabernacle complex are repeated, often word for word, from chapters 25-31. In many verses the only difference will be a change of verb form from instruction to completion. As much as possible, these parallels will be pointed out for the translators with links to the previous verses. Translators should refer back to the previously translated verses for consistency and because notes in this section may not cover everything that was covered in the initial instruction section.
- Many items, materials, and processes for building the tabernacle may be unknown, but should have already been addressed in chapters 25-31.


## Structure
- v. 1-3: reiteration of Sabbath command
- v. 4-9: list of materials for donation (see [Exodus 25:1-7](../25/01.md))
- v. 10-19: things they need to make for the tabernacle complex
- v. 20-29: the people bring all the things listed
- v. 30-36:1: appointing of lead craftsmen to build these things +EXO 35 intro lew9 0 # Exodus 35 General Notes

## Translation issues in this chapter


- In the last chapter some repetition of Yahweh’s instructions began, mostly around the covenant commands. Starting in this chapter and even more so in chapter 36, the commands regarding the construction of the tabernacle complex are repeated, often word for word, from chapters 25-31. In many verses the only difference will be a change of verb form from instruction to completion. As much as possible, these parallels will be pointed out for the translators with links to the previous verses. Translators should refer back to the previously translated verses for consistency and because notes in this section may not cover everything that was covered in the initial instruction section.
- Many items, materials, and processes for building the tabernacle may be unknown, but should have already been addressed in chapters 25-31.


## Structure

- v. 1-3: reiteration of Sabbath command
- v. 4-9: list of materials for donation (see [Exodus 25:1-7](../25/01.md))
- v. 10-19: things they need to make for the tabernacle complex
- v. 20-29: the people bring all the things listed
- v. 30-36:1: appointing of lead craftsmen to build these things EXO 35 2 hfaq 0 This verse is very similar to [Exodus 31:15](../31/15.md).
-EXO 35 2 g6oe translate-numbers שֵׁ֣שֶׁת 1 the seventh day “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) -EXO 35 2 c559 translate-ordinal הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 the seventh day “day number seven” or “Saturday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) +EXO 35 2 g6oe translate-numbers שֵׁ֣שֶׁת 1 the seventh day Alternate translation: “6” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]]) +EXO 35 2 c559 translate-ordinal הַ⁠שְּׁבִיעִ֗י 1 the seventh day Alternate translation: “day number seven” or “Saturday” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 35 2 ax6u figs-activepassive שֵׁ֣שֶׁת יָמִים֮ תֵּעָשֶׂ֣ה מְלָאכָה֒ 1 Whoever does any work on that day must be put to death If your language would not use passive here, you can state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “Six days you shall work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 35 2 zij9 figs-activepassive כָּל־הָ⁠עֹשֶׂ֥ה ב֛⁠וֹ מְלָאכָ֖ה יוּמָֽת 1 Whoever does any work on that day must be put to death If your language would not use passive here, you can state this in an active form. Alternate translation: “You must execute anyone who works on that day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]) EXO 35 4 jdb8 0 General Information: In verses 4-9, Moses tells the Israelites to collect the things Yahweh commanded him in [Exodus 25:2-7](../25/02.md). You should check your translation for consistency between these passages. EXO 35 4 ugn4 figs-quotations וַ⁠יֹּ֣אמֶר מֹשֶׁ֔ה אֶל־כָּל־עֲדַ֥ת בְּנֵֽי־יִשְׂרָאֵ֖ל לֵ⁠אמֹ֑ר זֶ֣ה הַ⁠דָּבָ֔ר אֲשֶׁר־צִוָּ֥ה יְהוָ֖ה לֵ⁠אמֹֽר 1 General Information: Verses 5-19 are a second-level direct quotation. If it would be better to reduce the quotation level in your language, you may want to make this introductory comment (everything after the first **saying**) an indirect quotation. Alternate translation: “And Moses told all of the congregation of the sons of Israel the things that Yahweh commanded, saying,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]]) EXO 35 5 h5c8 0 General Information: This verse is similar to [Exodus 25:2-3](../25/02.md). -EXO 35 5 n2c8 קְח֨וּ מֵֽ⁠אִתְּ⁠כֶ֤ם תְּרוּמָה֙ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה 1 Take an offering for Yahweh “Take up a collection for Yahweh from what you have” +EXO 35 5 n2c8 קְח֨וּ מֵֽ⁠אִתְּ⁠כֶ֤ם תְּרוּמָה֙ לַֽ⁠יהוָ֔ה 1 Take an offering for Yahweh Alternate translation: “Take up a collection for Yahweh from what you have” EXO 35 5 qq0a figs-ellipsis כֹּ֚ל 1 Take an offering for Yahweh Here, “from” is omitted but suggested by the sentence grammar. Also, **every** means “every person.” Alternate translation: “from every person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 35 5 pqa2 figs-idiom כֹּ֚ל נְדִ֣יב לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 General Information: This is an idiom that indicates a person’s desire to give an offering. Many languages will have a similar idiom though the body part often varies. Alternate translation: “who wants to give one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 35 5 gx87 0 General Information: After this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list. @@ -2409,7 +2407,7 @@ EXO 35 8 ikm4 0 General Information: Except for a couple of **and**s, this ver EXO 35 8 y11w translate-unknown וּ⁠בְשָׂמִים֙ 1 General Information: Here, **spices** are dried plants that people grind into a powder and put in oil or food to give it a nice smell or flavor (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) EXO 35 9 f1dd 0 General Information: Except for an initial **and**, this verse is identical to [Exodus 25:7](../25/07.md). EXO 35 9 hcs9 translate-unknown וְ⁠אַ֨בְנֵי־שֹׁ֔הַם 1 General Information: An **onyx stone** is a valuable stone that has layers of white and black, red or brown. If this stone is unknown to your people, consider translating it by using a word for a familiar stone with a similar pattern, if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]]) -EXO 35 9 kk7z וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֖י 1 General Information: “and valuable gems for” or “and treasured gems for” +EXO 35 9 kk7z וְ⁠אַבְנֵ֖י 1 General Information: Alternate translation: “and valuable gems for” or “and treasured gems for” EXO 35 10 dc4b figs-metonymy וְ⁠כָל־חֲכַם־לֵ֖ב 1 Every skilled man Here, **heart** is referring to innate possession by a person, that is, traits of a person. The phrase essentially means “a talented craftsman.” If this is unclear to your readers you may consider making it more explicit. See how you translated this in [Exodus 28:3](../28/03.md). Alternate translation: “And every man with a skill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) EXO 35 10 lkp4 figs-ellipsis צִוָּ֖ה 1 Every skilled man Here, some the words that a sentence would need to be complete in some languages are left out. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could supply these words from the context as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]]) EXO 35 10 ugjb 0 Every skilled man After this verse, a list begins. You may need to mark the end of this verse with punctuation or another way that your language marks the start of a list. @@ -2466,11 +2464,11 @@ EXO 35 31 cf63 figs-abstractnouns מְלָאכָֽה 1 He has filled Bezalel wit EXO 35 32 r7e3 0 to make artistic designs…bronze This verse is identical to [Exodus 31:4](../31/04.md), except for the first **and**. EXO 35 33 fj6f 0 also to cut and set stones…craftsmanship This verse is identical to [Exodus 31:5](../31/05.md) except for the final **of invention**. EXO 35 34 xd67 figs-idiom וּ⁠לְ⁠הוֹרֹ֖ת נָתַ֣ן בְּ⁠לִבּ֑⁠וֹ 1 He has put it in his heart to teach This is an idiom referring to ability and desire. These are spoken of as if they are something that could be placed in a heart. Alternate translation: “and he gave the ability and desire to teach to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) -EXO 35 34 ab2z translate-names וְ⁠אָֽהֳלִיאָ֥ב…אֲחִיסָמָ֖ךְ 1 Oholiab son of Ahisamak, from the tribe of Dan “Oholiab” and “Ahisamak” are names of men. See how you translated these names in [Exodus 31:6](../31/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) +EXO 35 34 ab2z translate-names וְ⁠אָֽהֳלִיאָ֥ב…אֲחִיסָמָ֖ךְ 1 Oholiab son of Ahisamak, from the tribe of Dan Alternate translation: “Oholiab” and “Ahisamak” are names of men. See how you translated these names in [Exodus 31:6](../31/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 35 35 ehu7 0 filled them with skill This verse summarizes and pulls together many previously mentioned things. See [28:3](../28/03.md) (**skill of heart**), [25:4](../25/04.md) (for materials), [26:36](../26/36.md) (**embroiderer**), [28:32](../28/32.md) (**weaver**), [26:31](../26/31.md) (**skillful workman**), [31:3](../31/03.md) (**craftsman**), [28:6](../28/06.md) (**designer of designs**). EXO 35 35 rcv9 figs-metaphor מִלֵּ֨א אֹתָ֜⁠ם חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב 1 filled them with skill Skill to create beautiful objects is spoken of as if it were something that could fill up a person. Alternate translation: “made them very skillful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 35 35 jvtd figs-synecdoche חָכְמַת־לֵ֗ב 1 filled them with skill Here, **heart** refers to possessing something, in this case ability or skill. Some languages will use a different body part for this image. Alternate translation: “with ability” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]]) -EXO 36 intro nz4n 0 # Exodus 36 General Notes
## Translation issues
- The first verse of this chapter goes with the last chapter.
- Most of this chapter exactly quotes chapter 26 with a shift from instruction to past narrative form on the verbs and a few other minor changes, some are Hebrew word order that will be invisible here. Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency.
- Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he** used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

## Structure
- v. 1: finish Moses’ instruction
- v. 2-7: craftsmen collect materials from Moses, inform him the people should stop bringing things because they have too much already
-v. 8-38: construction of the tabernacle, verse-by-verse quotations marked below
- v. 8-18: quote [Exodus 26:1-11](../26/01.md)
- v. 19-34: quote [Exodus 26:14-29](../26/14.md)
- v. 35-36: quote [26:31-32](../26/31.md)
- v. 37-38: quote [26:36-37](../26/36.md)
+EXO 36 intro nz4n 0 # Exodus 36 General Notes

## Translation issues

- The first verse of this chapter goes with the last chapter.
- Most of this chapter exactly quotes chapter 26 with a shift from instruction to past narrative form on the verbs and a few other minor changes, some are Hebrew word order that will be invisible here. Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency.
- Throughout verses 8-38 the word **he** used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

## Structure

- v. 1: finish Moses’ instruction
- v. 2-7: craftsmen collect materials from Moses, inform him the people should stop bringing things because they have too much already
-v. 8-38: construction of the tabernacle, verse-by-verse quotations marked below
- v. 8-18: quote [Exodus 26:1-11](../26/01.md)
- v. 19-34: quote [Exodus 26:14-29](../26/14.md)
- v. 35-36: quote [26:31-32](../26/31.md)
- v. 37-38: quote [26:36-37](../26/36.md)
EXO 36 1 ubk2 0 General Information: This verse is the end of a quotation from Moses that begin in [35:30](../35/30.md). It should be connected as visually as possible to the previous verses as the chapter break here is poorly placed. EXO 36 1 ds99 translate-names בְצַלְאֵ֨ל וְ⁠אָהֳלִיאָ֜ב 1 Bezalel These are the names of men. See how you translated this in [Exodus 31:2](../31/02.md) and [31:6](../31/06.md) as well as in the end of [chapter 35](../35/30.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]]) EXO 36 1 y1h1 figs-gendernotations אִ֣ישׁ 1 Bezalel We know from [35:25](../35/25.md) that women were included in the skilled workers, so **man** here includes women. Alternate translation: “person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -2483,7 +2481,7 @@ EXO 36 2 vvtz figs-abstractnouns חָכְמָ֖ה 1 in whose mind Yahweh had giv EXO 36 2 yuq8 figs-metaphor כֹּ֚ל אֲשֶׁ֣ר נְשָׂא֣⁠וֹ לִבּ֔⁠וֹ 1 whose heart stirred within him See how you translated this in [35:21](../35/21.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) EXO 36 3 est0 וַ⁠יִּקְח֞וּ 1 whose heart stirred within him Alternate translation: “and the craftsmen took” EXO 36 3 xkix figs-metonymy מִ⁠לִּ⁠פְנֵ֣י 1 whose heart stirred within him Here, **before the face** means, with Moses. Moses had received and kept the building materials. Alternate translation: “from the custody of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) -EXO 36 3 mtkr figs-metonymy בַּ⁠בֹּ֥קֶר בַּ⁠בֹּֽקֶר 1 whose heart stirred within him This is an idiom meaning every morning or every day. Use a similar expression or translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “morning by morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]]) +EXO 36 3 mtkr figs-idiom בַּ⁠בֹּ֥קֶר בַּ⁠בֹּֽקֶר 1 whose heart stirred within him This is an idiom meaning every morning or every day. Use a similar expression or translate the meaning. Alternate translation: “morning by morning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 36 4 b772 figs-nominaladj הַ֣⁠חֲכָמִ֔ים 1 whose heart stirred within him Here the adjective **skilled** is used as a noun in order to describe the group of craftsmen. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “the skilled workers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]]) EXO 36 4 pz6u figs-idiom אִֽישׁ־אִ֥ישׁ 1 whose heart stirred within him Here, **every single man** translates an idiom that cannot be rendered literally and sensibly in English. The original is ”a man a man.” If your language would use repetition to emphasize that each and every man came to see Moses you can follow the original, otherwise use a phrase or structure that emphasizes that they all came. Alternate translation: “every man without exception” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]]) EXO 36 4 gjrz figs-gendernotations אִֽישׁ־אִ֥ישׁ 1 whose heart stirred within him As previously, noted, there were some women who contributed (particularly in the cloth crafts) so this use may include women. Alternate translation: “every single worker” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]]) @@ -2528,7 +2526,7 @@ EXO 36 35 pfc5 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodu EXO 36 36 hg2q 0 General Information: Aside from some verbal differences, this verse is very similar to [Exodus 26:32](../26/32.md). EXO 36 37 r5ya 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 26:36](../26/36.md). EXO 36 38 pr67 0 General Information: See how you translated many of these words in [Exodus 26:37](../26/37.md). -EXO 37 intro mt99 0 # Exodus 37 General Notes
- This chapter continues record of the construction of the tabernacle and items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions.
Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency.
- Throughout the chapter the word **he** used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

## Structure
- v. 1-9 Making the ark, see [Exodus 25:10-20](../25/10.md)
- v. 10-16 Making the table, see [Exodus 25:23-29](../25/23.md)
- v. 17-24 Making the lampstand, see [Exodus 25:31-39](../25/31.md)
- v. 25-28 Making the altar for incense, see [Exodus 30:1-5](../30/01.md)
- v. 29 Making the oil and incense, see [Exodus 30:22-38](../30/22.md) +EXO 37 intro mt99 0 # Exodus 37 General Notes

- This chapter continues record of the construction of the tabernacle and items for it in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions.
Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency.
- Throughout the chapter the word **he** used. This is a generic noun referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could also change it to “they” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])

## Structure

- v. 1-9 Making the ark, see [Exodus 25:10-20](../25/10.md)
- v. 10-16 Making the table, see [Exodus 25:23-29](../25/23.md)
- v. 17-24 Making the lampstand, see [Exodus 25:31-39](../25/31.md)
- v. 25-28 Making the altar for incense, see [Exodus 30:1-5](../30/01.md)
- v. 29 Making the oil and incense, see [Exodus 30:22-38](../30/22.md) EXO 37 1 byr3 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:10](../25/10.md). EXO 37 2 kb3s 0 General Information: This verse is very similar to [Exodus 25:11](../25/11.md). EXO 37 3 pb6v 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 25:12](../25/12.md). @@ -2604,7 +2602,7 @@ EXO 38 28 rcda 0 Bezalel See how you translated some of these in [Exodus 27:17 EXO 38 29 p3mr translate-bweight שִׁבְעִ֣ים כִּכָּ֑ר וְ⁠אַלְפַּ֥יִם וְ⁠אַרְבַּע־מֵא֖וֹת שָֽׁקֶל 1 seventy talents and 2,400 shekels A talent is about 34 kilograms and a shekel is about 11 grams. See the UST. (See:[[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]]) EXO 38 30 rck7 מִכְבַּ֥ר 1 grate This is a frame of crossed bars for holding wood when burning. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:4](../27/04.md). EXO 38 31 bvr9 יִתְדֹ֧ת…יִתְדֹ֥ת 1 tent pegs These are sharp bronze stakes that were used to secure the corners of a tent to the ground. See how you translated this in [Exodus 27:19](../27/19.md). -EXO 39 intro mll6 0 # Exodus 39 General Notes
- This chapter continues record of the construction in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions. The special, holy clothing mentioned in previous chapters is produced in this chapter to the correct specifications. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency. Verses 1-31 of this chapter follow [Exodus 28:1-37](../28/01.md) with some differences. Verses 33-41 follow [35:10-19](../35/10.md).
- Throughout the chapter the people making the items are referred to interchangeably as **he** or **they**. Both are generic nouns referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could change all instances to “they” or “he” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+EXO 39 intro mll6 0 # Exodus 39 General Notes

- This chapter continues record of the construction in almost exact repetition of Yahweh’s instructions. The special, holy clothing mentioned in previous chapters is produced in this chapter to the correct specifications. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holy]])
Be sure to consult your previous work for consistency. Verses 1-31 of this chapter follow [Exodus 28:1-37](../28/01.md) with some differences. Verses 33-41 follow [35:10-19](../35/10.md).
- Throughout the chapter the people making the items are referred to interchangeably as **he** or **they**. Both are generic nouns referring to any of the team of skilled craftsmen. You could change all instances to “they” or “he” if that would be understood better in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
EXO 39 1 h8kg 0 as Yahweh had commanded Moses See how you translated similar instructions in [Exodus 28:4-5](../28/04.md). EXO 39 1 e1xh figs-abstractnouns בִּגְדֵ֤י הַ⁠קֹּ֨דֶשׁ֙ 1 as Yahweh had commanded Moses If your language does not use an abstract noun for this idea, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **holiness** in another way. Alternate translation: “the holy clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]]) EXO 39 2 b9mg 0 General Information: This verse is almost identical to [Exodus 28:6](../28/06.md). @@ -2654,7 +2652,7 @@ EXO 39 41 z3ip 0 the tabernacle, the tent of meeting This verse is identical t EXO 39 42 ct6k 0 Thus the people This verse is almost identical to the second half of [verse 32](../39/32.md). EXO 39 43 t26m וְ⁠הִנֵּה֙ 1 behold Here, the word **behold** draws attention to the information that follows. Use a word or marking in your language that draws attention to the next information. EXO 39 43 z79s writing-endofstory 0 As Yahweh had commanded, in that way they did it This (and really verse 42) is the end of the conclusion of the construction of materials portion of the story. The ending began in [verse 32](../39/32.md). If your language has specific features that should be part of the end of a section like this consider using them here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]]) -EXO 40 intro fa6e 0 # Exodus 40 General Notes

## Structure and formatting
- In this chapter, **just as Yahweh commanded Moses,** is repeated seven times as in the previous chapter to show that Moses was obedient to every detail of Yahweh’s command.
- This chapter is repetitive both internally and with other parts of the book. Verses 17-33 parallel in an expanded way verses 2-8.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter


- The **tabernacle** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing but both appear next to each other many times in this chapter. The two interchangeable terms are brought together throughout this chapter in a poetic doubling to bring book to a close. If your readers would find this confusing you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST.
- This chapter says that Moses did all these things. Just like Bezalel in earlier chapters, it would have been impossible for him to do all this personally. The people helped him set up the tabernacle. In many translations this will more more clear if you make this explicit.
- “Yahweh’s glory filled the tabernacle”: This phrase indicates that Yahweh began to dwell within the tabernacle, among Israel, in a special way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]]) +EXO 40 intro fa6e 0 # Exodus 40 General Notes

## Structure and formatting

- In this chapter, **just as Yahweh commanded Moses,** is repeated seven times as in the previous chapter to show that Moses was obedient to every detail of Yahweh’s command.
- This chapter is repetitive both internally and with other parts of the book. Verses 17-33 parallel in an expanded way verses 2-8.

## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter


- The **tabernacle** and **tent of meeting** are the same thing but both appear next to each other many times in this chapter. The two interchangeable terms are brought together throughout this chapter in a poetic doubling to bring book to a close. If your readers would find this confusing you may need to simplify to one or expand in explanation like in the UST.
- This chapter says that Moses did all these things. Just like Bezalel in earlier chapters, it would have been impossible for him to do all this personally. The people helped him set up the tabernacle. In many translations this will more more clear if you make this explicit.
- “Yahweh’s glory filled the tabernacle”: This phrase indicates that Yahweh began to dwell within the tabernacle, among Israel, in a special way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/tabernacle]]) EXO 40 1 ea7j writing-newevent 0 There is a transition to a new event at the beginning of this chapter. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]]) EXO 40 2 bgv1 translate-ordinal בְּ⁠יוֹם־הַ⁠חֹ֥דֶשׁ הָ⁠רִאשׁ֖וֹן בְּ⁠אֶחָ֣ד לַ⁠חֹ֑דֶשׁ 1 Alternate translation: “On day one of the month, in month one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]]) EXO 40 2 gzk3 figs-doublet מִשְׁכַּ֖ן אֹ֥הֶל מוֹעֵֽד 1 the first day of the first month of the new year These refer to the same place. See how you translated the doubling in [39:32](../39/32.md). Alternate translation: “the tabernacle, that is the tent of meeting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])